Journal of the American Oriental Society

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at http : //books . google . com/|

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

J&/$2£4/rt#

H-Y LIB
(W)

PJ

2

.A6

CHINESE-JAPANESE LIBRARY

OF

HARVARD-YENCHING
INSTITUTE

AT

HARVARD UNIVERSITY

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

\

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

JOURNAL

OF THE

+no. I-

yj-
10

AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

TENTH VOLUME.

NEW HAVEN:
FOR THE AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY,

PBIXTOD BY TUTTLB, MOBBBOUBB ABB TlTLOB, PBIBTBBS TO T^l OOLLBGB.

MDOOOLIZX.

SOLD BT THE SOCIBTT's AOBNTP:

NEW YORK: B. WE8TERMANN <fe CO., 888 BROADWAY;

LONDON: TRUBNER A CO.; LEIPZIG: F. A. BROCKHAU8;

PARIS : E. LEROUX.

Digitized by

G&ode

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

CONTENTS

or

TENTH VOLUME.

Art. L— A Vocabulary or the Ponapb Dialect, Ponape-English and
English-Ponape ; with a Grammatical Sketch. By Rev. Luthee H.
Gulick, M.D., lately Missionary of the A.B.C.F.M. in Micronesia, - - 1

Abt. II —Thirteen Inbditbd Letters from Sir William Jokes to Mr.
(afterwards Sir) Charles Wilkin& Communicated by Fitzedward
Hall, D.C.L., 110

Abt. III.— Brief Grammar and Vocabulary of the Kurdish Language
op the Hakari District. By the late Rev. Samuel A. Rhea, Mis-
sionary of the A.B.C.F.M. in Kurdistan, 118

Ait. IV.— Collation of a Second Manuscript of the Atharva-Veda-
PbAticAkhya. By William D. Whitney. Professor of Sanskrit in
Yale College, 156

Art. V.— On a Karen Inscription-Plate. By Rev. Alonzo Bunker,
Missionary of the A.B.M.U. in Farther India (with a Plate), - - - 172

Art. VI. — The Pali Language from a Burmese Point of View. By
Rev. Francis Mason, D.D., Missionary in Farther India, - - - 177

Art. VII. — Traces of Glacial Action on the Flank of Mt. Lebanon.
By Rev. W. M. Thomson, D.D., Missionary of the Presbyterian Board
in Syria, 185

Art. VIII. — On the Comparative Antiquity of the Sinaitic and Vatican
Manuscripts of the Greek Bible. By Ezra Abbot, Professor of
New Testament Criticism and Interpretation in Harvard University, 189

Art. IX. — The Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection in
the Metropolitan Museum of Art, in New York City. By Isaac
H. Hall (with seven plates), 201

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

IV

Art. X.— Contributions to ths History or Verb-Inflection or San-
skrit. By John Ayery, Professor of Languages in Iowa College, - 219

Art. XI. — A Statistical Account of Noun-Inflection or the Veda.
By Charles R. Lanman, Associate-Professor for Sanskrit in the Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.. 325

APPENDIX:

American Oriental Society: I

Proceedings at Boston, May 11 (h, 1871, ------ i I

Additions to the Library and Cabinet, May, 1867— May, 1871. - xvii

Proceedings at New Haven, Oct 12ft and 13ft, 1871, .... xxx

Proceedings at Boston, May 2 2d, 1872, xlv '

Proceedings at New Haven, Oct. 9ft and 10ft, 1872, - - - - liv j

Proceedings at Boston, May 21st, 1873, lxi '

Proceedings at New Haven, Oct. 15ft and 16ft, 1873, .... had

Proceedings at Boston, May 20ft, 1874, lxxiac

Proceedings at New York, Oct 28ft and 29ft, 1874, .... xcii

Proceedings at Boston, May 19ft, 1875, cvii

Proceedings at New Haven, Nov. 4ft and 5ft, 1875. .... cxiv

Proceedings at Boston, May 17ft, 1876, en

Proceedings at New Haven, Nov. 1st and 2d, 1876, .... exxxi

Proceedings at Boston, May 30ft, 1877, exxxiv

Proceedings at New York, Oct. 24ft and 25ft, 1877, .... ciIt!

Proceedings at Boston, May 29ft, 1878, clxi

Additions to the Library and Cabinet, June, 1871— June, 1878, - clxxii

List of Members, July, 1878, exciv

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

ARTICLE IX.

THE

CYPRIOTE INSCRIPTIONS OF THE DI CESNOLA
COLLECTION

IN THE METROPOLITAN MUSEUM OF ART,

In New York City.

By ISAAC H. HALL.

Presented to the Society October 28th, 1874.

[As read before the Society, this article contained, in addition
to the matter indicated in the title, a general account of the
known Cypriote Inscriptions, their discovery and location, with
a detailed history of the progress made in their decipherment
It also contained a statement of the principles of the Cypriote
writing, with the more prominent grammatical and dialectic pecu-
liarities. But as those matters would greatly swell the bulk of
this contribution, besides the fact of their not" being entirely new,
they are omitted here, with a few exceptions, which seem neces-
sary to be stated.

Since the reading of the article, also, the excellent work of
Deecke and Siegismund has appeared, and anticipated me in the
publication of a few new points. Of these, I need only mention
that the reason given at the time of reading my article for the
value of the longer numeral on the Bronze Tablet, was that its
first character was identical with the syllable pe, and was probably
an abbreviation for nevre. In one respect I differ : in the Bronze
Tablet, I prefer the reading Ktjrteres to Kerteres, as there is
manuscript authority for Kjjtiov. Also e^ti (inscriptions) or ejdfiti

S Homeric, <fcc.), to rjpiiy as a transliteration of the e.mi. of the
$i-Lingual of De Vogtt&]

The valuable collection of Cypriote Antiquities discovered
by Qen. Luigi Palma di Cesnola, on the site of ancient Citium,
Idalium, Golgos and elsewhere, and now deposited in the Met-
ropolitan Museum of Art in New York City, contains nearly
thirty inscriptions in the Cypriote character. The following
pages and plates contain all the inscriptions now in the mu-

vol. x. 29

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

202 J. //. Hall

seum,* together with three others from copies communicated
by Gen. Di Cesnola, of which the originals have not come to
this country. Two inscriptions figured by Moriz Schmidt in
" Die htschrijt von Idalion und das Kyprische Syliabar" viz :
No. 7, p. 98, and No. 13, p. 100, I have not found in the collec-
tion. Copies of the inscriptions were taken for the British Mu-
seum before the collection came to this country, from which an
incomplete set of photographs were taken and published by
Mansell in London, in 1872-3 ; but these, to judge from cita-
tions, cannot be entirely reliable. A catalogue of the collec-
tion, with some of the inscriptions inaccurately figured, was
published by the St. Petersburg Academy, in its Memoires of
1873. This was made by Johannes Doefl, and entitled "Die
iSammlung Cesnola.'1 A few more or less perfect copies have
also been given in the various works of those engaged in deci-
phering. It is proper here to express my acknowledgments to
the various officers of the museum for their efficient courtesy ;
especially to John Taylor Johnston, Esq., the president, for
permission to examine and study the inscriptions, kindly ex-
tended to me while he was private owner of the collection, and
to Mr. Thomas Bland, assistant secretary, and Mr. H. G. Hutch-
ins, curator, for their continual assistance, and for making the
objects of study more readily accessible.

The principal works on the Cypriote writing are the follow-
ing: (1) Numismatique et Inscriptions Cypriotes, par B. De
Luynes, Paris, 1872 ; (2) On the Discovery of some Cypriote
Inscriptions, by R Hamilton Lang, Part I., Vol. I., Transactions
of Soc. of Bibl. Archaeology : (3) On the Reading of the Cy-
priote Inscriptions, by George Smith, and a Supplementary
Article by the same, both published in same volume as the
paper of Lang ; (4) Cypriote Inscriptions. On the Reading of
the Bronze Plate oP Dali, by Dr. Samuel Birch, Part II. of last
mentioned volume ; (5) Versuch znr Entzifferung der Kyprisctien
Sehrift) von Johannes Brandis, Monatsbericht of the Berlin Royal
Academy of Sciences, 1873 ; (a posthumous work, edited by
Ernst Curtius ;) (6) Anzeige {der Brandts' schen Schri/l) by Moriz
Schmidt, No. 85, Jenaer Litteratur Zeitung, 1874, and Nachtrag
by same author ; (7) Die Imchrift von Id/dion und das Kyprische
JSyUabar} by Moriz Schmidt, Jena, 1874; (8) Die wichtigsten
kyprischen Inschriflen umschrieben und erlautert, by Wilhelm
Deecke and Justus Siegismund, G. Curtius' Stadien zur griech-
ischen u. lateinischen Qrammatik, Band VII., 1875. For other
minor articles published, see the work of Moriz Schmidt, (No.
7,) above mentioned. Two noted and amusing failures should

* Since writing the above, I learn that a new collection has arrived in New
York. The cases are not jet opened, and I have no means of ascertaining the
number or matter of their new inscriptions.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection. 203

here be mentioned, to wit : (1) Die Proklamation des Amasis,
by Prof. E. M. Roth, Heidelberg and Paris, 1855; (2) Die Phoe-
nizisch-Cyprishe Forschung, by A. Helfferick, Frankfurt A. M.,
1869.

The language of the inscriptions is Greek, but not easy to read.
It contains some new words, and has some striking grammatical
and dialectic peculiarities. In dialect it seems nearest to the
Doric and Arcadian. Only a brief mention of peculiarities is
given here, in order to enable the reader to follow intelligibly
the transliterations.

The characters are syllabic. There is one character for each
vowel, a, e, i, o, u, and perhaps an extra one for o, but no dis-
tinction between long and short The other characters repre-
sent open syllables, i. e., beginning with a consonant and ending
with a vowel. The whole theoretic syllabary appears tolerably
complete, as the number of unknown characters is about enough
to fill out the number of syllables that may be said to be want-
ing.

No distinction is made between smooth, middle and rough
mutes of the same organ. The same character stands for ra in
tots, da in JE6a\iov and Sor in 'ASava. The same character
may stand for xe, xtf, ye, yrj, xs> XV- This fact constitutes the
greatest difficulty in reading Cypriote.

There are three digamma syllables, wa, we, wo; but the
digamma must have been disappearing, as, for instance, the
genitive of fiatfiAevs is written indifferently fia<ri\eFos and
fia&iXeooS. I think there is reason also to suspect a further
use of the digamma syllables than that appearing in words
known to have been originally digammated, analogous to that
of the Hebrew waw both silent and sounded ; but am not pre-
pared to state it fully yet.

Three syllables begin with i as consonant, like the Semitic
jod mobile^ German j or English y. These are ia, ie and /«. In
English we have io, as in union, etc.

Iota subscript (adscript) is regularly written, but is fre-
quently omittea where it can be supplied from one of a number
of words in the same case.

A consonant appears never to be doubled — as is the case in
unpointed Hebrew, etc. E. g., a.po.lo.ni. stands for \4no\-
\covi; though this particular case has a parallel in Greek in
the inscription on the Delphic brazen-serpent column.

Double consonants appear to be resolved into their constitu-
ent syllables; the words being determined by laws presently
to be shown,, e. g., ki.si. stands for gi. The one exception
known is the syllable xe, which is expressed by a single char-
acter.

The vowels y (and t) and i frequently change places, as

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

204 /. H. Hall,

sometimes in Greek inscriptions — showing that the Cypriotes
probably had Iotacists among them. Compare also the contin-
ual Hebrew and Syriac transliteration of rj by jod, and the use
of the Greek ancient uncial H as the vowel sign iorjod.

In certain cases n is systematically omitted. Thus pa. to.
stands for navroov ?- dvSpanos is written a. to.ro. po.se. The
preposition ev is written i.

Final s} and final n when written, are the syllables for se and
ne respectively ; like Hebrew shewa with final consonant, or
silent final e in French and English. I suspect it to be the
universal rule, that where a word ends with a consonant, its
e-syllable is used.

Diphthongs are written in full. Thus a.ne.u. stands "for
arsv.

There is no sign to mark the breathings.

Sometimes a division between two words occurs in the midst
of a character. Thus la . na . ta . na . ne . stands for rav 'ASavav.

Besides the foregoing, it is requisite to know the rules for
joining together two consonants in one syllable. The most
comprehensive rule is that when two compatible consonants
come together, with the same vowel, they may be joined in one
syllable. Thus po.to.li.se. stands for 7tto\iS; ko.lo.ki.a.i.
for roXyia. Yet the facts may be grouped a little more defi-
nitely in the three rules following, which are substantially those
given by Deecke and Siegismund.

1. When a word begins with two consonants, or when a syl-
lable begins with a mate followed by a liquid, the first conso-
nant is represented by a character having the same vowel as
the second. Thus a.ti.ri.a.ta.ne. stands for d(v)dpia(v)rav ;
se.pe.o.se. for onrjoi.

2. In other cases in the body of a word, including cases
where a syllable ends with a consonant, the characters for the
second consonant is that which has the vowel of the 6rst
Thus ta. sa. ke., stands for raaye; a. ra.ku.ro., for apyvpco.
This rule, however, appears to have exceptions, or quasi ex-
ceptions.

3. Perhaps also the rule existed that when three consonants
occur together in a syllable, the character of the first is that
having the vowel of the preceding syllable, and the second,
that of the following. Thus te.re.ki.ni.ia., a new word, may
be read repxynot ,• and yet the reading rpexviia is allowable,
under the preceding rules.

It will thus be seen that after the difficulty of making out

the reading is surmounted — which is considerable, owing to the

- imperfect state of the ancient objects on which they occur, to

the similarity of different characters, and to the carelessness or

ignorance of the scribe or engraver — the real difficulty has only

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection. 205

begun. Every character of an inscription may be known, and
yet the inscription be unintelligible, even when composed of
familiar words. A single pair of syllables may sometimes be
transliterated in nearly thirty different ways; and now and
then the difficulties increase almost in accordance with the
arithmetical rules governing combinations.

For information respecting the grammatical and dialectic
peculiarities, the reader is referred to the works of Schmidt,
and of Deecke and Siegismund, above mentioned.

A discussion of the origin of this style of writing would be
very tempting, but hardly in place here. Just one point not
noticed elsewhere may be mentioned : one form of the character
for digamma-a {wa) appears to be identical with the Lycian w.

We will now proceed to the inscriptions themselves, taking
them in the order in which they occur on the accompanying
plates. They are arranged solely with a view to economy of
space: not to follow any system. It should be noted here that
No. 24 on Plate VL, and No. 30 on Plate VIL, are inverted-
wrong side up. The short time at my disposal, (being soon to
leave the country,) and the fact that otherwise those inscriptions
are very faithfully figured, have induced me to leave them as
they are, without alteration. As no one in the country knows
from what locality each particular object was procured, I am
obliged, for the most part, to leave that point in doubt. The
plates represent the inscriptions of the same size as the originals,
except where otherwise stated.

Plate Im No. 1. (No. 247 in the Cesnola collection.V- On a
soft stone about 9 inches high, and a trifle longer tnan the
inscription. Above the inscription, on the left, is a sitting
figure, facing the right ; an object like a pine-cone in its left
hand ; in the raised right hand a tall stout staff or scepter,
whose lower end rests on the ground. In front is a block
(altar?) with sides slightly curved so that the base is a little
wider than the top. The top is hollowed out a little, and on it
rests a ball. Behind this block is the thick trunk of a tree,
whose three (broken) branches overshadow the sitting figure,
as well as four other figures who approach in procession from
the right, having each his right fore arm raised from the elbow.
The sculpture is too much worn to allow further details to be
given. A deep groove of the carving cuts into some of the
characters under the block ; and at the right there was doubt-
less more of the inscription in the upper (if not in the lower)
line, which is now worn away. One leg of the chair or throne
of the sitting figure descends into the upper line of the inscrip-
tion, separating the last two characters from the rest. The

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

206 L H. Hall,

fainter portion of the inscription was extremely difficult to
make out. The following is my reading; smooth mutes being
used in the romanizing, for the sake of uniformity, and the
numerals denoting the number of the lines :

(1) to.o.[nat] si.sa.to.ie. \ pa. (or to t) na. * o.ne.te.he. |
o. na.me.ke.ka.se. \ tot a (2) te.o.if ko.to.a.po.ko.ri.ia.ra.
| i. te.7ns.no.se. \ i.tu.Jca.i. \ \ |.

In line (1) where I have put [na ?], it is doubtful whether a
character ever existed. If one did, na is the present reading,
but it may have been pa or to. The place marked by a * is
cut away by a deep channeled gouge, as it were. The character
put as to? might be nothing more than a perpendicular mark,
with subsequent scratches, or it may have been originally ta.
I think, however, that to is correct In line (2) the third charac-
ter it ; if i is correct, the horizontal mark beneath must be (as

1 think it is) a scratch ; otherwise the character is not known.
The horizontal mark appearing beneath the character ia is be-
yond doubt a mere scratch. The following is all that I feel
sure of as transliteration :

(1) to *[*?]* * rods **[**?] Svefyxe ********

(2) $€&> ******** z(y) T6JJLEYOZ t(v) TVX<f HL

That is : u This laid up as a votive offering to the

god (dess?) at the sacred enclosure in [good] fortune,

111." The room for conjecture in the other parts is very wide.
The group after Beep I think is an adjective word or phrase
agreeing with Sea) — which last word is of common gender in
Cypriote. It is needless to record other, as yet fruitless con-
jectures.

Plate L, No. 2. (No. 536 in collection.) — On a heavy soft
stone block whose horizontal section is square, its sides taper-
ing inward from the top down. The stone is 11 inches high
and 15 inches square at the top. In front where the inscrip-
tion occurs, and on the two sides, are cut out panels 3£ inches
wide and 1£ inch deep. Below the panel is cut out another
like space that extends quite to the bottom of the stone. Be-
tween the top and the panel is the inscription, on a space about

2 inches wide. The use of the stone, or whence it came, I do
not know. Another stone, uninscribed, has similar spaces cut
in it, in one of which is carved a basin with a little nose or
spout, for holy-water or the like. The reading is the follow-
ing : ti.mo . ta . ti.pa .to.\ ti.ma .o.pa.pi.ia.ta. ti. mo .o.i. se. Or,
in Greek, ripiairaTi 7ca(v)roj(v) ri^aoo TLacpiict ia tijaqooiS.
" Most honored of all, I honor, O Paphia, the things that thou
wouldst honor." If this be correct, the dialectic peculiarities
are remarkable.

Plate I., No. 3. (No. 539 in the collection.) — A bi-lingual,
or quasi bi-lingual of two lines in Cypriote, and three' in the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection. 207

other character, on a very large slab of soft stone, which is
broken by a crack across the middle, as indicated by a line on
the plate. The linear scale of the plate is just one half the
original. Of the Cypriote, line (1) reads fe.re., which may
answer to the API beginning the second line of the Greek.
Line (2) is ta.o? The Cypriote portion breaks off with the
stone. It is of course too fragmentary for further attempt
The three Greek lines present a strange combination of letters,
and they are as easily read from the plate as if inserted here in
type. The fifth character in line (1) is a plain A, the line over
it being a scratch. The ninth letter appears to be a Cypriote se
in place of the Greek 2. Lines (2) and (3) I leaveto others
for the present; with the remark that the first letter in line (2)
is certainly A on the stone. The stone extends much beyond
the inscription, to the right.

Plate L, No. 4. (No. 530 in the collection.) — Another real
or quasi bi-lingual, on a large slab of soft stone. The Cypriote
breaks off with the stone ; the other portion does not extend to
the edge of the stone. The scale of this inscription, like the
last, is one half the original in lineal dimensions. The Greek,
I think, reads QEMIAT. as Brandis has it, p. 663, 35 ; and not
(~)EMIN, as Schmidt thinks possible, Insch. von Idal, p. 85.
The reading of the Cypriote is as follows: Line (l)ne.a.te.
ro.ti.o. (2)ti.o. (3) i. pa. se.ti.i.te. (or a?)la. In Greek (1)
N Bare poo Sigd (2) Siw ?- which I take to be in the genitive,
and most likely meaning the same as the Arcadian genitive
9epiav: (1) "of the younger god "— " of Themias," (2) " of the
God." Line (3) I do not attempt. The horizontal mark in the
character ro, I tnink nothing more than a scratch ; and therefore
disagree with Brandis, p. 663, 35, who makes it a separate char-
acter. The four marks to the right in line (3), that look like
scratches, are pretty certainly nothing but scratches ; but I
dared not omit them.

Plate IL, No. 5. (No. 260 in the collection.) — A fragment
of soft stone, much defaced, and defective, but quite legible.
The reading isipo.lo.ni. \ te.o., or \>A\7Co(\)\gdyi Sea; "To
the god Apollo."

Plate LL, No. 6. (No. 253 in the collection.) — On the lobe
of a terra cotta votive ear. The reading is: to.po.to.e.[i?].
The last (apparent) character may be only cracks in the clay.
If the inscription is not a proper name, it is difficult to translit-
erate it satisfactorily. It may be: too IloBorf.

Plate IL, No. 7. (No. 237 in the collection.)— On the lobe
of another, smaller terra cotta ear. The reading is : i.to.ta ,po .
If this is not a proper name, I cannot satisfactorily transliterate
it. The most evident transliteration would be: i(y) to(v)
ra9?o(K)--"To the tomb ;" which seems hardly appropriate.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

208 I H. Hall,

Plate IL, No. 8. (No. 321 in the collection.) — On the three
sides, (a) right, (b) front, (c) left, of a little marble pedestal,
which is about twice as high as the width of the strip in the
figure. Whatever may have been on the pedestal, it is broken
off and out, so as to leave a hollow in the top. The inscription
is exceedingly obscure. Some of the characters are plain, but
most are doubtful, though subjected to long and repeated scru-
tiny with a strong lens. The following is the best reading I
can give: (a) to. sa.si. (or tif)a.mafaftefta.(b) ka.pa.to.a.
po.rofse.mafte.ka.net (c) ri. to. te f ie.taf (or tof)pif jx>. 1 1 1
III I have not confidence enough in the reading to attempt a
transliteration. The possible reading at the end of (a) and
beginning of (b) well describes my ideas: dSerac xa\z=:Kas)
7ra(v)TGo(v) dnopos. It will be observed that the numeral at
the end is divided into groups of threes, after the style observed
on the Bronze Tablet The three parts are doubtless one in-
scription running around the three sides of the stone.

Plate II. , No. 9. (No. 249 in the collection.") — A very sharp
and clear inscription on soft stone. Above tue inscription is
sculptured a sitting figure, to the right, with its upper part
broken off. To the left is an object said to be common in
sculptures throughout Syria, like a double cylinder surmounted
with an ornamental band and spheroido-conical tops. At the
left of the inscription, below the above-described sculpture, are
two figures engaged in moving some heavy object. Between
them a sledge-hammer, or similar tool, rests with its head on
the ground and handle sticking up. At the right of them is a
large block. The sculpture appears to represent a stone-cutter's
yard. The inscription is rather imperfectly figured by Schmidt ;
and in the last character in the first word, the perpendicular
mark appears to be nothing more than a break in the stone.
The reading is: (1) ti.ia.i.te.mi. I to.iM.o. | (2) to.a.po.lo.
ni. | o.ne.te.ke. \ u.tu.ka. | — (1) diaiSejjii rw Seco (2) ra>
}Ano{k)'Koovi ov&rfxe (3) v rvxa. — "Diaithemi to the god
Apollo laid it up as a votive offering. Good luck."

J?late IL, No. 10. (Not numbered in the collection.) — On
a soft four-sided stone, base ti in. by 5, 84 inches high, roughly
shaped and carved. From the base the sides taper upward with
a curve till they meet a raised, rounded border, above which
they flare suddenly out to the top. The top is 6 inches square.
In front, above the inscription, on the left, is a tall standing
figure with long hair and beard, and long robe, holding a long,
thick, slightly bent staff or rod. On the right another figure is
leading a long-tailed ram by the horns. On the side next the
front to the left is another carving : an adult figure at the top,
sitting or reclining, holding or dancing on its knees a younger
figure. Underneath is a nondescript quadruped, or perhaps a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the IX Cesnola Collection. 209

man ; and still underneath a quadruped — either a horned ani-
mal that has just tossed the former, or an ass with its ears
thrown back. The inscription I think is retrograde. At all
events it makes for me no sense in the ordinary direction.
The reading thus is: to.te.na.i.i.ko.ro.pa.ti.lo. — doSrfvat
i(v) ja>po? na(v)TiKco: "To be given in the place entirely."
Yet this leaves much to be desired, both in the transliteration
and in the rendering. Perhaps the character given as ho is po,
but I think not

Plate III., No. 11. (No. 271 in the collection.)— On a soft
stone 12 inches high by 10 inches wide. This is figured by
Doell. On the stone is sculptured a larged coiled serpent,
some of whose scales are still visible. The serpent has a crest
much like that of a peacock. The inscription is perhaps hope-
lessly defaced. The letters that are decipherable are generally
very distinct The best reading I can give is the following:
(1) ma.ne.mo.o.se.ti.to.te. (2)e.i7 * * * a.se.ti. (3) * *
* * at * to.i. (4) jp.fi. i. (or at) tet net rot ket te.pa. (5)
tet (or nit) ****<».** to.

Plate ILL, No. 12. (No. 263 in the collection ) — A square
tube, or box without bottom or cover, of a single piece of soft
stone, 4£ inches high, broken out a little at the top, as shown
in the plate, though the inscription is intact The inscription
is on the top or end. The first and last characters are unknown
to ma Possibly the first is a syllable ending in i. The last
character on the inscription occurs also on Plate IV., No. 14 ;
but I see no certain ground for the determination of either. I
am not satisfied with any conjecture I can make. The reading
is: * ia.e.Jco.i.a.o.ma.mo.pa.to. *

Plate IV., No. 13. (No. 242 in the collection.)— This, the
most important of the Cesnola inscriptions, and ranking next
to the Bi-linguals and the Bronze Tablet, is on a piece of soft
stone, a trifle longer than the inscription. Above, near the
center, is a sitting figure, 6 inches high, on a throne, with scep-
ter and thunderbolt ; Zeus, to all appearance. Above the back
of the throne is a broken, winged figure, probably the eagle,
but somewhat suggestive of a sphinx. To the left, behind the
throne is a standing figure, 4 inches high; to the right another m
standing figure, 6 inches high, with indications of another,
where the stone is worn and broken. The characters are ail
entirely legible, except two in the second line, which I cannot
yet make out The plate represents the imperfect place ad-
mirably. The reading is as follows: (1) ka.i.re.te. \ ka.ra.si.
ti. | wa.na.xe. \ ha.po.ii . \ we.po.me.ka. \ me.po.te.we.i.
se.se. |

(2)te.o.i.se. \ po.ro.* * na.to.i.se. \ e.re.ra.me.na. \pa.
ta.Ico ra.i. to.se. \

vol. x. 30

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

210 /. H. Hall,

(8)o.wo.ka.re.ti. \ e. pi. si. ta.te.se. \ a.to.ro.po. \ te.o.i. \
a.le.tu.ka.ke.re. \

(4) te.o.i. | ku.me.re.na.i.pa.ta. j ta.a.to.ro.po.i. \ po.ro.
po. | o.i. ka.i.re.te. \

Brandis, p. 655, 8, and p. 660, 22, gives the false reading ;*>.
h.po.o. for po.ro. po. I o. (I refer to his Cypriote type — not
noticing his Roman syllables.) Although even the photographs
lately published by the Metropolitan Museum look as if the
reading were fe, there can be no doubt that it is ro. Brandis
did not notice the division mark, and wrongly attached the o
following to this group. Brandis also gives the false reading
ta.a.na.ro.po.i. for ta.a.to.ro.po.i., p. 664, 36. Schmidt re-
peats this error, p. 89. Schmidt's remark on p. 8, near the
oottom, is also erroneous. The inscription is clearly not in
hexameters (though the first part of the first, line appears to be
an elegiac pentameter), and the inscription ends, as well as be-
gins, with xatP€T6> not XaiP€- Also, pp. 89, 40, 51, Schmidt
gives the false reading e. me. re. na.i.pa. ta. for leu. me. re. na.
i.pa.ta., of line (4). The second character in the second
group of line (2) is partially obliterated, but the remnants of a
red color which formerly ' filled the characters (and perhaps
covered the surface of the stone), give the outline on the broken
part, and show the character to have been ro.

The transliteration and interpretation present several unique
difficulties, though some parts are clear enough. The follow-
ing is by no means satisfactory, but I prefer to give the con-
jectures, as they may help others, even where I may be wrong.

(1) xatP€T€> XPao"ri vavaS, xa nori venop.eya9 ^tcots

(2) Seoi? npo * * varoi? rfptfpa^eva9 na(v)raxoopairo^9

(3) ofo xaP€rt> iniGTarrfS a(v)SpGL>n(*>, Seoi 'A\rf9 Tvxat,

&VP,

(4) Seoi xvpspevai na(v)ra xa a(v)Bpconcp no(p)pco nco

Cp, Jttl/>£T£.

According to this transliteration, xP<*0xi = xprjerre, xa nori
= xas (xai) npos, the latter used adverbially. YBnopeyct
would be an awkward compound of venco, or venos, with
peyas ?* rfprfpafieva from apco (dpapio'xGo) ; but the reading
may be i]p tf pa^ev a ,• navrax&pairos = navxaxcopijros ,-
Xapexizn xaPlTU yA\r}7 Tvxcr, K?jp, is as good a conjecture
as I can make, for d(\)\Tj does not seem to fit ; though I know
of no other deification of JA\?i — Wandering or Distraction.
The three are feminine, as required by the participle or adjec-
tive xvptspsvai (or xvpepvai), which latter appears to me to
be allied to xvpepvaoo. The apposition Seoi is of common
gender in Cypriote. The group po.ro.po. I can do no better
with, though compounds of npos and npo, and ideas of nopos
and the like, naturally suggest themselves, some of which

Digitized by VjOO.QIC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesuola Collection. 211

would not make a bad sense. I cannot help here adding the
conjecture that the groups me .po . fe . we. i. se.se. (divided differ-
ently from the above, as e. g., fx-q no$EveiariS—no= npos> or
npoy perhaps,) and even e.re.ra.me.na., may yet prove to be
epithets of Zeus. The obliteration of two letters in the second
word of line (2) is very unfortunate ; as the sense of the adjec-
tive in which they occur would most likely throw light on the
whole meaning.

The following mixture of conjecture and translation will
show the drift of the inscription : u Hail ye ! Good Lord, and
moreover great in utterance ; mayest thou never behold (know)

(2) to the gods things fitting : O All-container, (3) by

whose grace, ruler of men, [ye] goddesses, Ale, Tucha, Ker,
(Wandering, Fortune, Fate,) (4) goddesses controlling all things
that pertain to man, however afar off (whithersoever onward) to
him, hail T

Plate IV., No. 14. (No. 286 in the collection.)— On a piece
of soft stone nearly square, its side about 13£ inches long;
with a nearly square hole in the middle, whose sides are 7£ to
6 inches long. The back or lower part of the stone is sawed
off. In its present condition the piece looks very much like a
slab cut for the top of a chimney. The characters are above
one side of the square hole, their lower ends reaching auite to
its edga The first character occurs also in Plate III., No. J.2,
and is to me unknown. The second character I am not sure
of, as the strokes at the top are in a different direction from
those of the character read za by Deecke and Siegismund, and
ga by Schmidt The third is ti. It seems best to leave it till
further data are obtained.

Plate IV, No. 15. (No. 279 in the collection.)— On the
convex surface of a fragment of a very large bowl or laver, of
hard bluish-gray stone. The third character is the doubtful one
that replaces the ordinary character for o on the Bronze Tablet;
the fourth is unknown. The reading is then : sa.mo.o? * te.
It is only a fragment of a longer inscription.

Plate IV., No. 16. — Made not from the stone, but from a copy
communicated by Gen. Di Cesnola last year, with the remark :
u A stone bas-reiief, representing two women tearing their hair,
two lions and two Hercules — has the following inscription. 'r

Within the last few days the stone itself has been received,
and a more correct copy will be found on Plate VIII., described
further on.

Plate IV., No. 7. — From a copy communicated by Gen. Di
Cesnola, with the remark : u A terracotta lamp : the handle rep-
resenting Silenus about f of a foot high, of tne earliest period.
Around the lamp there are engraved these Cypriote letters."
The reading is plain : pi.lo.ti.mo., or QiAoti/ago; doubtless a
proper name in the genitive.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

212 L //. Hall,

Plate IV., No. 18. (No. 257 in the collection.)— Ou the
wide of a long round object, with a ram's head carved at the
end; supposed by some to be a fanciful phallus. But other
similar objects, not inscribed, occur in the collection, with the
inner end more complete ; and I think it nothing more than the
handle of a stone basin or pan, somewhat like a frying pan.
The object is about ten inches long. The inscription is almost
worn away, and it seems almost impossible to form a good
reading. It is hard to tell a scratch from a character. The
plate represents the inscription as accurately as possible ; but
the following reading is derived from long study of the stone
itself: e. * se. * * * to.e. * te. Perhaps the inscription was
somewhat longer originally.

Plate IV , No. 19. — This lamp, not numbered in the collec-
tion, is of yellowish pottery. I have lately discovered five
others, almost duplicates, which give additional characters, both
on the top and bottom, and have greatly modified my ideas of
the reading. I prefer to suspend further remark till I can
study the others. It is quite doubtful whether the letters are
Cypriote.

Plate V., No. 20. (No. 268 in the collection.)— Around the
spheroido-conical cap of a broken-olf head of a statuette, of soft
stone. The dotted lines represent the two front folds or seams
of the cap, where the side-pieces lap over the front-piece. The
reading is: a.ra.a.na.o. — 'ApaavaGo'; doubtless the genitive
of a proper name.

Plate V., No. 21. (No. 262 in the collection.) — An irregular
broken piece of soft stone, very much worn and defaced. The
inscription is doubtless a mere fragment of one originally much
longer, and is defective at each end. Immediately under the
inscription are the heads of three figures in procession, each
head about f of an inch high. The stone is about 4J inches
wide by 7J inches high, and bears every indication of being
only a small portion of quite a large stone. The reading is
difficult, but I feel that the following is correct: (1) na.pa.
sa. re. se.i.Jca.e. (or at) (2) to.i.ta. (or pi t)ra . | po . te. we . o . i .
Though the plate hardly justifies the reading e for the last char-
acter in line (1), and is yet as good a copy of the stone as can
be made, I still always get the impression from the stone itself
that the true reading is e and not a. In line (2) the character
to. (or pit) I am in doubt about. The appearance varies with
the light or shade on the stone. I incline a little to the reading
to. It is barely possible that the second character in line (2)
may be e instead of i. I do not attempt a transliteration of the
fragment.

Plate V., No. 22. (No. 238 in the collection.)— The lineal
dimensions are reduced to one-half those of the original. This

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection. 213

is a disk of soft stone, a little thicker in the middle than at the
rounded edges ; the bottom flat In the middle a broken-off
place was probably occupied by a boss or knob. As shown in
the figure, quite a piece of the stone is broken out. The litho-
grapher has given rather unclue prominence to a straight crack
in the stone, extending from near the center of the disk in the
direction of the lower left hand corner of the plate. The read-
ing is a puzzla Beginning at the break, at the top, on the
right, it is uncertain whether there are two characters, or only
one; and, in either case, what can be the reading. The next
character would be a., the next ia, the next doubtful, the next
u?c, and the last, which is a simple oblique cross, might be the
doubtful character for me. I do not think there was any char-
acter in the place where the piece is broken out. The inscrip-
tion appears to be Cypriote.

Plate VI, No. 23. (No. 252 in the collection.)- A frag-
ment of soft stone, I believe from Golgos. At the right the
stone is cracked in two ; the piece that is cracked off, not re-
presented in the plate, has a large head sculptured upon it
The upper edge is rounded. The reading is as follows: (1)
o.na.si.o.ro. \ a. - - - (2) o ne.te.ke.to.te.ti. • - - (3) to. a.

po.lo.ni. - - - That is: (1) 7Ovaatopoo a (2) oveSrjxe

rode Si (3) too 'A7Co(\)\covi . The proper name I

take to be a genitive ; and the next word to have been perhaps
ava5rjj*a ; so that the translation might be : " Of Onasioros a
[votive offering which] he laid up to the god - - - Apollo."

Plate VI., No. 24, not numbered in the collection. This is
inscribed on soft stone, between the feet of a broken off statuette,
in beautifully sharp characters. By a mistake of the litho-
grapher it was put on the stone upside down ; otherwise the
copy is excellent. The reading is as follows : (1) e. ko.to.se. \
ka te.8e.ta.8e. \ to.i. | (2) ti.o.i. \ ta.pi.te.ki.si.o.i. | (3)
i.tu.ka.i. | a.ka.ta.i. | Or, in Greek: (1) 'Eyaoros xaTacf-
ra(T€ rep. (2) Slgo Ta7Cidex0i<v. (3) i(v) tvx? dyaS/r. —
" Egotos set [this] up to the god, the auspicious, in good for-
tune." In line (2) rdniSax<sicp is f°r *<*> Gitidegup, un-
doubtedly. As to the strange contraction, the syllable ta
would only need one slight stroke to have read to ; and that
may have been intended. However, it is clear that the stroke
was never made ; and the reading of Plate I, No. 2, makes me
think that it is correct as it stands — though it may be a mis-
take of the engraver. The character I have giver) as ka in the
last word, appears to me to be the same character with that on
the Bronze Tablet which Schmidt reads ga, and Deecke aud
Siegismund read za. The former only is suitable here ; and I
am unwilling to consider it as a variant of the character for ke,
and read dye$q7 though that would be very pleasant, if cor-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

214 1. II. flail,

rect In Euting's copy of the Bi-Lingual of Dali, {Sechs
Phoenizische Inschriflen,) the corresponding character in the
last word of the inscription seems to me to be the same as here
and on the Bronze Tablet ; and not ke, as figured by Smith,
(Trans. Soc. Bibl. Arch., Vol. L, Part I.,) and Schmidt, (Insch.
von Id., p. 96.) At the same time, the character on the Bi-
Lingual Tablet is by no means as sharp and clear as on this
stone. It seems as if Schmidt were correct in calling this char-
acter ga. The strong arguments of Deecke and Siegismund in
favor of za as the reading of this character, I appreciate ; but
can hardly see that they apply to this case.

Plate VI., No. 25. (No. 267 in the collection.)— A little
terra cotta disk from the temple of Venus at Golgos. Around
the disk is a groove, like that in the wheel of a pulley. The
reading is : pa. to. si. o. for the characters: the numeral: [ | | | :
explains itself. It is doubtless a proper name in the genitive;
either IIaraaiooy or na(v)raGiGo, or $a{v)Ta<rico> probably.

Plate VL, No. 26. (No. 241 in the collection.)— A large
soft stone, which appears to have formerly had two inscrip-
tions; but at present only the two characters o.pa. can be
traced ; and those with difficulty. Upon the stone is carved
in low relief a long procession of people. The idea of the
sculpture it is hard to trace further.

Plate VI., No. 27. (No. 258 in the collection.)— On
soft stone. The beginning of one line of an inscription, which
must have been at least three or four times as long. The
stone is a strip broken off the end of a finely sculptured block,
about four times as high as wide : the width being a trifle more
than the length of the inscription. A raised, rounded orna-
mental border extending around the stone, is broken away just
above the inscription, and probably has carried away with it
an upper line of the inscription. Just below the inscription is
a portion of a figure with beard and a common Cypriote cap,
reclining on a pillowed couch, grasping a second human figure
by the foot — the only part visible. Below the couch, rather in
front than beneath it, is a chained dog, and a small human
figure. The curved outline of the lower edge of the inscrip-
tion shows how the head of the reclining figure projects into it
The reading is: a.ti.pa.mo.o.ta.o.pa. -- It is rather too
fragmentary to transliterate with certainty.

Plate ^L, No. 28, not numbered in the collection. — A soft

sculptured stone, with figure of a woman leading a naked boy.

The woman's head is broken off by the same fracture that mu-

v tilates the inscription. Of the latter, the fragment of the first

character is doubtful ; the others read ie.na.

Plate VIL, No. 29. (No. 240 in the collection.)— On soft
stona Above is a raised edge partly broken away. At the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Oesnola Collection. 215

right the stone is cut away, so that it seems as if the whole
stone were the top left nana corner of a panel or window. The
reading is the following : (1) U> . | U. o . se . to . wo . i. (2)no.a.i.
sa. (S)e.ti. — and the numeral can hardly be represented in
type. Schmidt (p. 100,) figures and reads this inscription
wrongly. The second character in line (2) he figures as i,
while it is a on the stone ; and he ignores a sculptured mark in
the first character in same line, which makes the character no,
instead of ho as he reads it. The natural transliteration would

be (1) too dios too yoi(2)vgo aicfa, (3) art "Of Zeus of

the wine a decree in the year/' The numeral I do not feel
sure of.

Plate VII. , No. 80. — Not in the collection, but communi-
cated by Gen. Di Oesnola with the following remark : "Very fine
alabaster vase with Cypriote letters around the vase above and
at the base. Hollow inside, without bottom/' The reading is:
{l)po.pa.ke.i. (2) u.e.te.i.we.ii. Or, no Ba(x)xei veretFSit;
i. e., " For (or to) Bacchus the soaker." The first word is prob-
ably for 7cpoy as nos (Bronze Tablet) stands for npos. If so,
we have it here with the dative, after the Cypriote analogy of
ano and ig. The word vers iveu (or iWeirfi) appears to be
formed as a quasi patronymic from veroS; as if Bacchus were
imagined as a citizen or inhabitant of moisture. Compare vevs,
the Hesychian form of vrfS j an epithet of Bacchus with same
root and meainng.

Within the last few days the boxes containing the newly-
arrived Cypriote Inscriptions have been opened, and I have
been permitted to examine them, though the Museum is closed
for the summer. The new inscriptions are figured on Plate
VIIL, which has been photo! ithographed from pencil rubbings
and tracings on the stones.

Plate VIIL, No. 31. This is the same as that figured on
Plate IV., No. 16, from Gen. Di Cesnola's copy. The stone is
a magnificent piece of marble, originally the heavy lintel (pedi-
ment) of a tomb, and the inscription is a mortuary one. The
stone was 4 ft. 6 in. in length, but 6 inches are broken off one
end, carrying away a portion of one of the figures which Gen.
Di Cesaola calls " Hercules " though I doubt the correctness of
that designation. The u two women tearing their hair " are 9£
inches high, and stand in the middle of the bas-relief. On
either side of them crouch two lions, their heads towards the
two women, and consequently towards each other ; each lion
measuring 15 inches from muzzle to tail. At the extreme ends

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

216 /. //. Halt,

stand the two "Hercules," or whatever they may be, each 7£
inches high, and having a round water-bottle at the belt, and
they stand lower than the other figures ; their feet being on a
level with the lower portion of the inscription. The stone is 6
inches thick. Its lower edge is straight, just above which, on
a raised entablature border, is cut the inscription. The ends of
the stone incline a little inward from the perj>endicular, and the
two sides of the top slope a little upwards, like a low peaked
roof. The women and the figures at the ends stand as high as
thev can, under the roof. The stone is 13£ inches high in the
middle, and about 9 at the ends. The two sides of the raised
border, on either side of the roof, instead of meeting in a point
at the top, end in two abrupt upward curves. The inscription
is all in one line, but had to be divided to get it on the plate.
It is 3 feet 6 inches long, and the characters, many of them,
considerably more than an inch high, and all quite legible. At
the left, they are perfectly fresh and sharp, but grow obscure as
they approach the right, where the reading becomes difficult
The division marks between the words are short lines; not dots,
as is usually the case. The stone is cracked through in two
places, at one of which places a piece is broken out, carrying
away two characters. Fortunately one of these characters can
be supplied with certainty, and the other probably. The read-
ing of the stone is the following, putting the restored characters
in brackets : 0

e.ko. | e.u.a.ke.re.to. \ ke.re.te.se. \ ka. me. ne.se. ta.sa. I
a. \tet ka .] si.ke.ne.to.i. \ me.ma.na.me.7io.i. \ e.u.we.re.
ke.si.a.se. \ta.sa.pa.i. \e.u.po.le. \e .we .re .no . | In Greek,
'EyGo EvaypetGD KprjrrfSxa MvrjaTa&a d[6e Ka\aiyvtjroi /ue-
uvapievoi evYepyeaiaS ra% net ev 7tot€ 'Etptjvgo. Or, in Eng-
lish, "I [son] of Evagretos, (or, perhaps I, Evagreton,) a Cre-
tan, and she, Mnestasa, relatives, in memory of good deeds,
those indeed [that were] ever well [done to us] of Evreuus."
This inscription appears also to be one quoted a few times by
Schmidt, but from an incorrect copy.

Plate VIIL, No. 32. — A heavy, rough, soft stone, 15 in.
square and 8 in. high, with a square place on the top hollowed
out : evidently a pedestal. The inscription is on one side, but
much worn and broken. Some of the characters are quite pe-
culiar in shape, especially one that looks like a sa with a dot
above the angles and a branch upward to the left, from the top
of the right branch. My present impression (though necessarily
hasty) is that it is a variant of the character for ri The charac-
ter for sa occurs in the second line, without this dot, but with
the little branch. Taking this view, and also the conjecture
that the (nearly obliterated) sixth character in line (1) was ro,
which I think not improbable, the reading is :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola Collection. 2 1 7

(1 ) a.ri.si.to. (or to ?) ko . ro . ?/e f * pa. (or ?i« ?) to f si. ri.

(2) u.e.u.ka.sa.me.no.se.pe.ri.pa.

(3) t.to? (or se? or taf)to.t.pe.re.se.u.ta.i.u.ne.te.

(4) £e * * | (The circle at the end I take to be a punctua-
tion mark.)

I suspect that the two characters at the end were lu.ka., but
it can be only conjecture, the stone is so broken. I am satis-
fied that with more time at my disposal I could be much more
nearly certain about the other defective places ; as several other
places on the Cesnola stones have presented difficulties appar-
ently equally great, that yielded to patient study. The Greek
I make to be the following ; supposing the latter part of line
(1) to be the name of some deity derived from Osiris :

(1) Apiarayopcov[IIa(Y)6T\o(npi{2) v £v£ajA£vos nepi na
(3) idco rep Speeevrq v 'r£$rf(4)x€ [rvx<*?] \ In English:
"Aristagoron to [Pand ?]osiris having prosperously prated
concerning his son Phreseutas, well laid [this] tip as a votive
offering [in (good) fortune.]" If this be correct, it throws some
light on variations in declension. But the time is too short for
me to satisfy myself about it.

Plate VIIL, No. 33. — At the base of a statutte of soft
dtone, representing a male figure, whose head is broken off: the
remaiuder 13$ inches high. A character is gone from each
end; the remnants of that at the beginning look as if it might
have been e. The reading is [ef]te.o.k.na.i.* . The charac-
ter for te is roughly made, suggesting the reading puy and even
ni. The inscription may have been a proper name.

Plate VIII., No. 34. —At the base of a statutte of soft stone,
representing a female, with caped Cypriote cap, and generally
well clad. A character or two is probably wanting at each
end of the inscription. The reading is : we. li.pa .re.wa.tof e?
(or if)

Plate VIIL, Nos. 35, 36 and 37. — Inscriptions on the bot-
tom of lamps like that figured on Plate IV., No. 19, except
that No. 37 is probably a Roman lamp, and has only fanciful
designs on the top. The figure on No. 36 is a man carrying a
jar suspended from each end of a shoulder-yoke. Its inscrip-
tion on the top, as well as those of others referred to in remark
to PL IV., No. 19, on further examination, have showed noth-
ing really different from the one there figured. I leave them
for the present, without additional remark.

I would add here that the naqx&svwEiSei and JA<ppo6iGiovy
and their variations, mentioned by Schmidt, pp. 10, 19, 34, 35,
60, 79, have not been found by me in the collection. Likewise

vou x. 31

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

218 I. H. Hall — Cypriote Inscriptions.

the citations on pp. 38, 39, 51, 59, from certain inscriptions fig-
ured as Cesnola's, I am unable to verify.

It seems proper also to notice here a false reading of De
Luynes by Brandis, followed by Schmidt, which might give
trouble. Brandis, p. 659, 22, and p. 666, 42, reads De Luynes,
PI. L, 7, as e.u we.le.to.to.se, which is followed by Schmidt,
p. 63. Also Brandis, p. 666, 42, reads De L, PL I, 5, as e.u.
we.iat mu ? ro.se. Both these readings are undoubtedly false :
the true reading in each case being e.v i. we. le.to.no.se. , as a
careful inspection of all the plates will show : the character for
no. being a little peculiar in shape. Schmidt appears to follow
the same error in several other places, but may haye some other
legend or inscription in view.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

r'AT

o

fto* f 4

Digitized by VjOOQIC,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

*"w TT

^

A.

>

vW

J

! *
• *

*-

-7*

V

^t 4*3?

*3

>■■ — • : :k-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

fcF«frM:$**

A

*/*

£■£#&¥

•* __:

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

;>Stk

■*7

7\ *

/

,-&■

17

+

18

kiu^.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

:v

+ 4

15

&

\L*

±<f®k§?

k*

A

/

>+*>

18

J7

.•-rK'v/'-i' '*'*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

-TVf -t:; T:"

$*f f $

. . __ „ . {

23V

^ —

xao?

*!H*

««»■■ r -

y

27 28

jst****

**,"*«

\r*Si>

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

.V

*4*f $fy f

w? vFxIpy

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

ARTICLE X.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE HISTORY

or

VERB-INFLECTION IN SANSKRIT.

By JOHN AVERY,
raoraeox or lavcnjaoss nr iowa ooixboz.

Presented to the Society November 5th, 1816.

The design of the following pages is to furnish the data - so
far as they go — for a construction of the history of the changes
which the inflection of the verb in Sanskrit has suffered, during
the course of its development, from the earliest era of which we
have literary remains, aown to the period when it may be said
to have crystallized and become fixed for all time.

While it is true that an examination of the entire body of
Sanskrit literature would alone be a complete preparation for
such a history, yet, in default of the execution of this pro-
digious labor, the critical analysis of a few characteristic texts
of the ohief periods of the language will present a nearly correct
view, and afford a very instructive and satisfactory oasis for
comparison. General impressions of the changes which time
has produced in the word-forms of a language, derived from a
cursory perusal of its literature, are apt to be shadowy and
misleading ; while precise calculations of the frequency of oc-
currence of the various forms of stems, modes, tenses, personal-
endings, eta, though having a dry and mathematical look, alone
make scientific statement possible.

In pursuance of the plan just now hinted at, I have selected
one or more texts to represent each of three clearly-marked
stages of the Sanskrit language : viz. 1. the Vedic, or stage of
unsettled linguistic usage; 2. the B rah manic, or stage of trans-
ition ; and 3. the Epic or classical stage, when further change

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

220 «/. Avert/,

was debarred by inflexible grammatical laws. Each of these
texts — with one exception, soon to be mentioned — was carefully
read, and every form of every verb, together with the times of
occurrence, was noted. These forms were then arranged under
their proper tenses and modes, according to a plan to be de-
scribed hereafter.

To represent the classical period, two familiar texts, the Nala
and the Bhagavad-Gitd, the former in the edition of Bopp (Ber-
lin, 1868), and the latter in that of Schlegel and Lassen (Bonn,
1846), were chosen.

^ For the. Brfihmanie period I selected Haug s edition of the
Aitareya Brdhmaria, one of the most interesting and perhaps the
oldest specimen of this sort of literature extant

For the Vedic period, obviously the Rig-Veda was the mast
complete and authoritative representative of the earliest speech
of the Hindus; but the want of sufficient lexical help for the
study of this Veda at the time the work was undertaken decided
me to take in its place the Sama Yeda, in Benfey's edition.
These four texts were treated as described above, and the results
were presented at different meetings of the Oriental Society.*
But the publication, in 1874, of Delbriick's very valuable work.
Das altindische Verbum, which contains all the forms of the verb
in the Big-Veda, excepting participles, arranged first by persons
and again by tense-stems ; also the appearance of Grassmann's

Worterbiich zum Rig- Veda, of which five out of six parts have
already been published ;f and the near completion of the Peters-
burg lexicon (to say nothing of Monier Williams's excellent
Sanskrit dictionary), have since greatly increased the facilities
for understanding the most important of the four Vedas. I
therefore decided to partly change my plan, and, using Del-
briick's list for the forms and Mailer's index verborum for the
times of occurrence, to attempt the same work for the Rig- Veda
which I had already done for the S&man. In my former papers
I had followed pretty closely the system of classification which
the Sanskrit grammars have retained in deference to the Hindus,
but now I decided to recast my whole work on a different plan,
more useful, as I believed, and more accordant with the teach-
ings of modem linguistic science.

While my mode of classification is not precisely the same as
Delbriick's, I gladly acknowledge my indebtedness to him for
many fruitful suggestions. It should be understood, then, that
he and Miiller are responsible for the completeness of the col-
lection from the Rig- Veda, while I am answerable for the correct
analysis of the other three texts. It had been my design to

* See its Proceedings for May. 1872, for May, 1873, and for October, 1873.
f The sixth part, completing the work, was issued in the autumn of 1875. The
Petersburg lexicon has also been brought to a close.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit. 221

extend the investigation to participles, and I had made a com-
plete collection of them, noting as well when they entered into
compounds (excepting with su, dus and prepositions) as when
they were used predicatively with the copula omitted ; but, as
Delbriick has been satisfied with citing specimens, I am unable
to make the comparison complete.

A word of explanation is required for the B rah manic text
I had not advanced far in my examination of this before I
became convinced that an indiscriminate collection of the verb-
forms found in the Br&hmana would most unfairly represent
the language of the period when it was composed; for, the
design of the author being to regulate the performance of the
ritual, and to explain the meaning and value of its various
parts, he introduces many verses from the Vedas, and other
formulas, of unknown origin. The latter abound in archaic
forms, and had doubtless in part been handed down from a
remote age, perhaps antedating the hymns themselves. In the
enumeration, then, of forms, those cited from the Vedas are en-
closed in parentheses, while those found in formulas of unknown
origin are placed in brackets; and, further, when statements
are made in the following pages regarding verb-forms in the
Brahmana, it should be understood that these two classes of
forms are excluded, unless special mention is made to the con-
trary. So heterogeneous is the collection of materials thrown
together in this text that it is not easy to know precisely where
to draw the line between the ancient and the modern. Many of
the legends related may have been long current in the mouths
of the people, and have been couched in what was then old-
fashioned phraseology.

In sketching the history of verb-inflection, as it will be found
developed in the following pages, it should be noted at the
outset that the texts are unequal in size, lest we be led to
erroneous impressions regarding the relative frequency of forms
from numerical statements. I have collected from the Bic
18,216 citations of verb-forms; from the BrShmana, 7159; from
the other two texts together, 2716 ; so that in this respect the
Veda is about two and a half times larger than the Brahmana,
and more than six and a half times larger than the other two
texts combined. Hereafter, for brevity's sake, the texts of the
three periods will be denoted respectively by A, B, and C.

The order of our comparison will be the following: I. Roots;
IL Tense-Stems ; III. Personal endings ; IV. Connecting vowels ;
V. Modes; VI. Tenses; VII. Derivative conjugations; VIII.
InBnitive and Gerund.

I. Roots, The changes which the verb in Sanskrit has suf-
fered are not confined to variations of form, but go deeper and
involve the life of roots themselves. Though a full discussion

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

222 J. Avery,

of this subject does not properly fall within the scope of a
paper on verb-inflection, one or two facts may be here stated.
At the end of this article will be found a complete list of the
verb-roots occurring in the four texts, and following each root
will be found signs indicating in how many and in which of
the divisions the root occurs. An examination of this list will
give the following results :

Boots found only in A, 316 in A and B, 108 in A and B and 0, 1641.

B, 21 in A and 0, 55

C, 57 in B and C, 13

Thus we observe that, of the whole number of roots, 780, nearly
one half are found in the Veda alone; that the very consid-
erable number of 91 roots are unknown to the Veda ; and that,
the farther we recede from the latter, the fewer are the roots
common to it and the later literature.

Of course it is to be understood that these figures represent
only approximately the true relation between the earlier and
later language in this respect, for the field of our survey is too
limited ; but they at least convince us that many verbs current
in the Vedic period afterwards disappeared, their place being
supplied by new primary or secondary roots, and that this
process of loss and replacement became increasingly active as
the material resources of the people were multiplied, and the
boundaries of their mental powers enlarged.

II. Stems. It will now be in place to describe the plan of
classification which I have adopted. The current arrangement
of the present-system, or '• special tenses," in ten classes, which
was derived from the Hindus, and is still retained in the San-
skrit grammars, is unscientific and misleading. It follows
neither the order of development nor similarity of formation.
Why, for example, the " sixth" class should be separated from
the "first," which it closely resembles, by two so unlike classes
as the u second" and " third," or why the nasal stems should
be scattered over the list, it is hard to see. Ingenious as were
many of the contrivances of the Hindu grammarians, they
were largely mnemonic, and not based upon a connection of
facts. We may well wonder at what the Hindus accomplished,
with their limited survey of languages, and before the dawn of
modern science ; but surely it is unwise to adhere so closely to
their usage, and to introduce so much of their peculiar termin-
ology, as the author of a well-known recent grammar has done,
especially in the treatment of a language studied chiefly for the
general purposes of linguistic science. Clearly, the ideal plan
would be to group the stems according to similarity of forma-
tion, and then to arrange the groups in the order of their
development The first part of this plan I have endeavored to
follow, but the last part not wholly, since the historical order
in which the stems appeared is not yet fully settled.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Inflection in Sanskrit. 223

I have divided the stems of the present-system into five
classes, as follows:

L Simple Root-Class = second Indian class.
IL Reduplicating-Class = third Indian class.

III. Nasal-Classes:

a. Adds nuy u (no, o) = fifth and eighth Indian classes ;

b. " nd (nt) = ninth Indian class ;

c. Inserts n {no) = seventh Indian class.

IV. A-Classes:

a. Adds a, and accents the radical vowel, with strengthening
of the same according to prescribed rules = first Indian class ;

b. Adds a, and accents the added vowel, without strengthen-
ing = sixth Indian class ;

c. Adds ya, and accents the radical vowel, without strength-
ening = fourth Indian class.

Y. Anomalous formations, comparatively rare, and not admit-
ting of classification with the above.

The few verbs which the grammarians place in a " tenth"
class will be found among the causatives, with which they
agree in form and accent, though no longer having a causative
sense — if, indeed, they ever had it In the same place will
also be found the rare Vedic stems in dya.

I have followed Delbriick and Grassmann in admitting a
pluperfect tense, to include certain preterites seemingly formed
from the perfect stem ; but exactly how many forms this tense
can rightly claim it is hard to settle.

The same remarks which I have made in respect to the pres-
ent system will apply also to the aorist The scheme which I
propose is as follows :

Simple-aorist :

1. Forms in which the endings are added directly to the root ;
IL Forms which take a connecting vowel a.

S-aoriflt:

L Forms which add 8 to the root ;

U " " " ish " "

HI. " " " sish "

IV. " " " sa " "

The rules respecting the strengthening of the radical vowel
need not be stated here.

To return to the present-system — the identity of form be-
tween the imperfect of certain verbs of the simple root-class
and the first form of the simple aorist often makes it difficult to
decide with which to classify them. There are many roots in
the Veda which exhibit no forms with primary endings to help
us to a decision. Such cases Delbriick would assign to the aorist,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

224 J. Avei%

and I have followed his example. The same ambiguity may
arise with class IV.6, and the second form of the simple aorist

A noteworthy peculiarity of the simple root-class in the
earlier language is the irregular strengthening of the radical
vowel. Not only does vrddhi occasionally take the place of
guna, which is the case also in classical Sanskrit, hut guna is
many times found in forms from which it is rigorously ex-
cluded by later usage — the only exception being in the case
of one or two verbs like gt, which show the diphthong before
all the endings. Examples are : hetana, aftema, heta, eta, grota.
sota, etc. The fact that the regular forms ita, qruta, sutct, etc.,
are found side by side with these illustrates the unsettled usage.
This irregularity is not confined to the present-system, but
appears in the simple aorist as welL

In the reduplicating class, the classical law is that a shall
represent a in the reduplication, though t is sometimes admitted.
The fact is just the reverse in the Veda. Of the roots having
short or long a as radical vowel 8 have a in the reduplication,
while 20 have i. Two roots, rd and vag, furnish examples of
both forms of reduplication. In this respect the Vedic San-
skrit stands nearer the Greek than the classical language, and
seems to illustrate a tendency in the ancient language, which
was checked in the classical Sanskrit, but became a law of all
present reduplication in Greek. We notice in this class also
the same irregular use of guna as in the root-class. Examples
in A are yuyoUx, jujoshan, yuyodhi, juhotana, and a few others.
I have noted no instances in B or C.

In the nasal-class Delbriick has collected a number of stems
which are usually placed in the a-class. They are inflected in
all respects like other stems of the latter class, but their form
leads us to suspect that they originally belonged to one or an-
other of the subdivisions of the nasal-class. Examples are
pinvy jinv, vind% gumbh, etc. Our surmise is strengthened,
when we discover in the Veda stems in the very act of passing
from the nasal to the a-class. Thus we have rtioti and rnvati,
inoti and invati, hinoti and hinvatu; prndli and prnati, mindti
and minatu

A cursory examination of the present-system of the verb in
the Veda will show the great license which was allowed for
forming the present stem in more than one way, and also the
tendency in verbs of other classes to take the characteristic
vowel of the a-class. It is the same tendency to follow a pre-
vailing fashion, which in English has transformed so many
44 irregular" into " regular" verbs. The roots sthd and pd are
inflected throughout like verbs of the a-class, though their re-
duplication is still unmistakable ; std is probably a less distinct
example of the same sort.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit. 225

la the perfect stem we often find a long vowel in the redu-
plication. In most instances the patfa-text gives the short voweL
Perhaps some of these cases should be regarded as intensives.
I have noted only two examples, dddhdra and vdvdna, in B ;
and none at all in 0.

The Augment. The following examples of a double augment
are found in the sanhitd-text of the Veda : dnat, dvar, dvrni,
dvrnak, dvidhyat, dyunak, dyukta, dgita, drinak, draOc. Of these,
Delbriick would derive dnat from anag, thus removing the
irregularity ; also Aufrecht reads agita for dgita. For the re-
mainder, the jpada-text gives the regular forms, excepting that
it recognizes both avar and dvar. For dyunak, dvidhyat, and
dyukta, the regular forms are also found in the sanhitd.

No examples of double augment are found in B or C.

In the oldest Sanskrit, as in the oldest Greek, the augment is
often omitted. The coincidence of such forms with the sub-
junctive, and the difficulty of deciding to which mode individ-
ual cases belong, will be alluded to in another place. The
augment is wanting in forms apparently having a historical
sense 448 times in A, 13 times in 6, once ouly in C.

II L Personal Endings. S. 1. The ending d for dni, which I
find in A only, occurs 13 times. A contracted ending %m is
found in akramim l, vadhim 2, probably for akramisham and
vadhisham. B gives us vrfijiyam for vrftjiya, pres. opt mid.
S. 2. The imperative act presents some irregularities. The
classical rule requires dhi after consonants, excepting nasals, I,
and r, and in class IIL6, which substitutes dna; hi after
vowels (excepting a, and u of class IILa, after a single conso-
nant), nasals, I, and r ; after a, and u following a single conso-
nant, the ending is dropped. This rule is not observed in the
Veda, but the ending dhi is more frequently found, showing
that it is more primitive than hi. Examples are gadhi with
gahi, gagddhi, mamandhi, grnudhi with grnuhi and crnuy hinuhi
with hinu, yodhi, grudhi. etc.; cm shows the three successive
stages by which the classical form was reached. B present*
few exceptions. We note edhi, probably on account of the s
originally in the root, krdhi, gicddhi ; also grnuhi for grnu. Ex-
ceptions in C are still more rare, though we find cinuhi aud
c&dhij but the latter is for gdsdhi The ending tdt is found 19
times, in A only. S. 3. In A the ending e for te is found 150
times, only twice (duhe) in B, and never in C. The form
duhre (i. 139. 7) Delbriick regards as 3d sing., but Grassmann
as 3d pi. The longer ending Uxi for te occurs once in A, and
twice (in a formula) in B. The suffix s for t occurs in the
forms ves, rdhyds, gamyds, jeyds, mimiyds, yuyds, vrjyds, apds,
adadhds, babfo&yds and aprds — all in A. Tdt is also found in A 5
times as 3d s. Am for tdm imp. mid. is found twice in A ; also
vol. x. 32

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

226 J, Avery,

i for to once. D. 3. The longer ending aite for ete in an indica-
tive sense appears once in A. Other cases are probably pro-
duced by the union of a mode-vowel with ete. P. 1. Of the
two endings masi and mas the former is found 117 times in A,
and 3 times in B, but never in C ; the ending mas appears 21
times in A, 4 times in B, and is the only ending in C. From
this statement it appears that the longer ending was far in ad-
vance in the first period ; that it was overtaken by the shorter
ending in the second period, and driven entirely off the field in
the third. In the subj. middle, make takes the place of the
longer form mahai 15 times in A. P. 2. The longer ending
thana is found in A 19 times, in B once, and never in C ; tana
also occurs 125 times in A, once in B, but not at all in C. On
the other hand, iha is found 121 times in A, and once in B,
and is the only form in C ; to appears 560 times in A, and 29
times in B. A also gives one example of dhva for dhvam, and
two of dhvai for dhve. P. 3. We nere find numerous irregu-
larities in A. Some verbs otherwise inflected in class II. take
the longer ending anti or ante, as dadhanii, mimanti, axidngh-
nanti. This may perhaps be explained as a leaning toward the
u-class, which we find the rule in tishthauti and pibanti, or as the
relic of an older stage of the language, when the longer end-
ings were universal. On the contrary, we have takshati and
saccati where we should have expected takshanti and saccanti,
though the latter probably belonged originally to the redupli-
cating-class. The r-suffixes are peculiar to the oldest forms of
the verb. They belong to the middle voice, and are found in
the indicative and optative modes, and in most of the tenses: ran
is pres. opt 2 times, impf. once, plupf. 5 times, and simple-aor.
86 times ; rire occurs for ire pf. 9 times ; ran is in plupf. twice
and simp.-*aor. 14 times, ranta is plupf. once ; rata is opt 3
times, and rate and re are pres. indie. 2 and 28 times respec-
tively. These endings are unknown to the later texts.

IV. Connecting- Vowels, Classic usaee provides for the inser-
tion of a short, or, less often, a long i between the root and the
endings beginning with a consonant in certain forms outside of
the present-system. In the present-system also this connecting
vowel occurs in a few forms — examples, possibly, of a more
prevailing use at an earlier period. In C we fiud cocimi i,
oravimi 8, bravishi l, abravis l, dbravit 59, dsit 6— in all 76 times.
Of these examples, all but one belong to forms of brQ, and
as. In B the roots an, Hh, cvas, brti, and as furnish 89 cases,
of which all but 3 belong to the two last roots. When we
come to A, we find that a much greater number of roots avail
themselves of this helping vowel. They are brU, am, an, gvas,
tu, sedh, cnaih, stan, id, jan, vas, as, cud, dhvan, vam, varsh,
stambhj ic, and cm; and the whole number of instances is 132.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit. 227

Besides, there are the forms invire l, rnvire l, pinvire l, crnvire 7,
sunvire 8, and hinvire 8, some of wtich may be regarded as
belonging to the perfect As a rule, only stems of the simple
root-class take i; out cru belongs to the nasal-class, and several
others to the a-class in most of their forms.

V. Modes. The subjunctive proper in Sanskrit is formed in
two ways; first, the verb-stem in the several classes takes
short a as a mode-sign and the primary endings : secondly, it
takes the secondary endings with the same mode-sign. Neither
of these forms has all the persons complete. In those classes
which have strong and weak stems, the subjunctive takes the
stronger form. Beside these two forms of the subjunctive,
there are certain other forms having the sense but lacking the
mode-sign of the subjunctive. They might fitly be called
pseudo-subjunctives. Since they are identical with those pre-
teritive forms which want the augment, they are classified with
them by Delbriick. I have, however, classed them as a third
form oi the subjunctive, and, by an examination of all pas-
sages in which such forms occur, have endeavored to draw the
line between these and proper historical forms. But I am not
confident of complete success ; for though, in a majority of in-
stances, the sense of a passage is clear, there are many cases
where a subjunctive or a preteritive form would equally suit
the connection.

In A, the subjunctive, in one or all of its forms, is found in
all the tenses, with their subdivisions, excepting the imperfect
and pluperfect The times of occurrence in each can be
readily ascertained by reference to the tables at the end of this
paper. An examination of these will show that the first form
is relatively less frequent in the aorist than in the present, and
that the second form, though more infrequent than the third in
the present gains upon it slightly in the aorist Taking the
verb as a whole, the three forms stand nearly in the ratio of
1:2:3. In other words, in the Rig- Veda the subjunctive with
mode-sign and primary endings is found half as often as the
same with historical endings, and a third as often as the third
form. These figures may be changed somewhat, as scholars
shall regard doubtful cases as belonging to one or another of
the divisions; but probably the relation would not be essen-
tially altered. We may here refer to certain forms — as ksheshi,
jeshi^joshii etc — which will be found classified with the present
indicative, and which clearly have a subjunctive sense, but do
not agree with either of the forms already described. Benfey,
formerly at least, regarded them as belonging to the aorist sub-
junctive, and Grassmann seems to share in the same view.
But this would be to assume subjunctives with primary endings
and no mode-sign, for which there is scanty warrant in other

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

228 «/. Avery,

persona Delbriick inclines to look upon them as true indica-
tives of the root-class, which have acquired a subjunctive or
imperative sense, by an idiom common in other languages.

In B, the examples of the subjunctive are very greatly re-
duced, and are confined to a more limited range of tenses.
The first form is found only in the present, while the third
form is more frequent in the aorist, particularly the simple
aorist. In C. there are but twelve instances of the subjunctive,
all of which are found in the aorist and present tenses. All of
the aorist forms belong to the third division of the subjunctive,
and the remainder are equally divided between the other two
divisions. If, now, we compare the frequency of this mode in
A, B, and C, we shall find the ratio to be about 287 : 12 : 1.
From another point of view, we arrive at a similar result ; in
A the subjunctive is found in 16 tenses and subdivisions of
tenses, in B in 10 tenses and forms, in C only in 5 tenses and
forms.

The form of the optative mode needs no special remark. In
A it is found in the present, perfect, and aorist tenses. In B it
is confined to the present, and a single instance in the aorist.
The same is true of C. The so-called " precative" mode I have
classified with the aorist optative, where it properly belongs.
It is found 22 times in A, never in B, and but once in C.

The imperative, as we have seen, is deficient in the first per-
son of each number, and borrows them from the subjunctive.
This mode is freely used in all periods of the language, but
with a greater range of tense in the earliest times. In A
examples are found in the present, the perfect, and the six
forms of the aorist of the primitive verb, and in each of the
derivative forms of the verb. In B it is confined to the pres-
ent tense alone. In C it is found in the present and once in
the *-future.

The conditional, which is formed from an augmented s-i uture
stem, occurs once in A, 3 times in B, and never in C.

VI. Tenses. The verb in Sanskrit has five tenses : viz.
present, imperfect, perfect, aorist, and future. We do not here
count the pluperfect, since it is not universally recognized as
having a status in the language. These tenses are found at
every stage of the language, but not in all their formations,
nor with an equal apparatus of modes. In A, the present, the
perfect, the simple aorist, forms L (s), II. (tsA), and III. (sish)
of the s-aorist, and the aorist causative, have the four modes of
the finite verb. Form IV. (sa) of the s-aorist wants the opta-
tive, and the future lacks the optative and imperative In B
the present is the only tense which has all the modes, the other
tenses being deficient in one or more of them. The perfect has
only the indicative. With C the case is still worse, for not

Digitized by VjOOQlC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit. 229

only is the present the only tense provided with a full set of
modes, while the perfect has the indicative only ; but the aorist
also is most scantily furnished, having few cases of the sub-
junctive (form IV.), a single instance of the optative (precative),
and not one occurrence of the imperative.

The periphrastic perfect does not make its appearance in A,
the derivative verbs, even, forming this tense in the ordinary
way. In B it begins to appear, being found once in the primi-
tive verb, and twice each, as the only formation, in the causa-
tive and denominative. In C it is not found in the primitive
verb, but is the only mode of forming the perfect in tne causa-
tive and denominative.

To one who even cursorily examines the following pages, it
will be evident that the aorist tense has suffered increasing dis-
use from the Vedic to the classic period. An exact numerical
statement only serves to confirm the view. The total number
of occurrences of the aorist of every form in A is 3015, in
B 146, in C 27, which is nearly a ratio of 111 :5 : 1. Of the
examples in A, more than half are found in the simple aorist,
and aoout three fourths of these in the 1st form. Here some
difference of opinion might arise, from the difficulty of deciding
whether certain forms belong to the aorist or present-system.
In B the 5-aorist decidedly predominates; but in C it is re-
duced again to 4 instances. Connected with this is a difference
in the range of formations in which an aorist is found. In A,
outside of the primitive verb, the causative and denominative
and passive each have an aorist; in B it is confined to the caus-
ative and passive, while in C it is found in none of the second-
ary formations.

The periphrastic future is unknown to A, the forms in td which
have sometimes been mistaken for it being properly nomina
agentis. In B a very few examples are found, while in C it is
more frequent, though still rare as compared with the s-future.

VII. Secondary Formations. In derived forms of the verb,
also, the language was more prolific in the earlier stages of its
growth. The same general classes are indeed found in the
three periods, but not with the same complement of modes and
tenses. The form of the causative in A exhibits no striking
peculiarities. Boots in a usually lengthen this vowel, and
those in eand u generally suffer strengthening. However, ex-
ceptions to these rules are not infrequent. The same facts are
true of B and C. The form in dya is confined to A, and occurs
53 times. As already remarked, it is classified'with thejcausa-
tive, on account of similarity of formation, and not of agree-
ment in sense. Vasdyate I and vrshdyai, with perhaps one or
two others, are regarded as genuine causatives which nave long
a on metrical grounds.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

280 J. Avery,

The desiderative is formed substantially in the same way in
each period. A exhibits several forms with the reduplication
wanting or incomplete. A noteworthy formation is the desid-
erative from a causative base, which occurs 4 times in B only.

The intensive in the classical period was formed in two ways.
The first, and by far the most frequent, method was to redupli-
cate the root in the usual manner, excepting the strengthening
of the reduplicated vowel, and to add the syllable ya. The
middle endings were always used, and such changes of the
root made as were common in the passive. The second method
was simply to reduplicate the vowel as before, with the addi-
tion of tne active endings, and to strengthen the root- vowel as
in class II. of the primitive verb, which its formation thus re-
sembled, except in the greater weight of the reduplication. In
the Vedic period, on the contrary, the second method was the

Prevailing one, and the first is confined to a few examples.
>elbriick cites cases where the same intensive form does not
take ya in the Veda, but assumes it in the Qatapatha-Br&hmai^a*
Another fact deserving notice is the great freedom in regard to
the form of the reduplication which prevails in the ancient lan-
guage, but which becomes circumscribed as we descend to the
classical period, where it is reduced to a nearly invariable rule.
Three forms of reduplication prevail in the Veda: 1. the initial
consonant and vowel are repeated, with strengthening of the
latter: e. g. doaViauili; 2. The whole root is repeated: e. g.
namnamUi ; 3. The same reduplication takes place, with the
insertion of a short or long t between it and the root : e. g.
vartvarti, bharibhrati. There are numerous examples of each
of these methods. Sometimes the same verb forms its inten-
sive in more than one way. In a few verbs with intensive
sense the reduplication is incomplete: e. g. iradhanta from
rddh, and irajyasi from raj. The forms irajyasi, irajyati, irajya-
thas, irajyata, though adding ya, take the active endings, which
is forbidden by later usage.

In B we observe that the form without ya and with the first
of the three sorts of reduplication just described prevails, and
is found in the middle as well as the active voice. The form
with ya occurs but once. The word adtdedivata l is a curious
example of double reduplication. But few examples of the
intensive are found in B. The classical texts furnish only four
examples, two in the finite verb, and two in the present parti-
cipla Of these, one participle has the form iu ya.

VIIL Infinitive and Gerund, The office of the infinitive as
a verbal noun is most conspicuous in the oldest text, as is indi-
cated by its occurrence in each of the oblique cases, with a
great variety of substantive endings. The regular classical
ending lum is one of the rarest, being found only 5 times.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit 231

According to the list furnished by Delbrtick, the infinitive
appears in A as an accusative 49 times, with two endings ; as
a dative 609 times, with twelve endings : as a genitive or*abla~
tive 18 times, with two endings ; as a locative 23 times, with
three endings — in all 699 times, with nineteen endings. In B
the infinitive is much more infrequent, occurring but 18 times
as an accusative, always with the ending turn; and 3 timeskas a
dative, with the endings tavai and tave — in all 2L times, with
three endings. In C it appears 103 times, always with the
accusative ending turn. The close resemblance of the infinitive
to a noun sometimes renders it difficult to decide under which
category to place a given instance. Hence some scholars would
doubtless add to, and others subtract from the list which I have
given.

The gerund is found 147 times in A, and with the endings
fvd, tvdya, and tvi, when uncom pounded ; and with the endings
yd or yd and tyd or tyd, when compounded. The last ending is
a substitute for ya when the root ends in a short vowel. In B
it is found 321 times, with the endings tvd or ya (lya) In C it
occurs 493 times, with the same endings. It appears from this
statement that the gerund was most infrequent in the Vedic
time, but was increasingly used down to the latest period.

In the first of the three schemes following a few forms will
be found without an attendant numeral. These are cases
which I have not found cited by Mtiller or Grrassmann.

That a form is given in the list with an accent is meant to
indicate, not that it always occurs accented, but onty that ac-
cented examples of it are met with.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

282

J, Avery,

I. THE FORMS OF THE VERB IN THE RIG- VEDA.

Active.

PRESENT SYSTEM.
A. Present Indicative.

MiddU.

1. Sing. I. iye 1, tie si,
t'pe s, uve i, <foA« i, brieve^
yw/£ a, ywve i, *wi>e i, Awt;6
ftT, hnuve i ; II. juhvi 2,
tishthe i, dadhe s, mime
a: III. acnuve i, krnve 2,

vanve i, A*nv6 i-
grbhne i, vrn6 9-

1. Sing. I. arf/m i, <fom* 28, em* i»,
kshnaumfi, pdmi i, yd'mi n, vacmi 6,
vdmi i, hanmi i, harmi i ; II. lyarmi 10,
jdhdmi *y jig harmi i^juhdmi 7, daddmi
2, dddhdmi w,jAbdmi i, Wbharmi 4, vi-
vakmi 6, cicdmi a ; III. rraww i, Armf-

mt », tanomi i, crndmi ft, hindmi ft

^rwdmi i, grbhnami *,jdndmi *,jind'-
mi i, pundmi 2, mindmi 2, stdbhndmi i

bhinadmi i, yvndjmi ft, runadhmi

i ; IV. acdmi i, drcdmi 3, avdmi i, &M-
nd/?u 2, cardmi ft, coddmi a, jdndmi i,
jaydmi i, dahdmi i,patdmi i, bhajdmi i,
bhdrdmi 8, ydcdmi i, rapdmi i, rd'jdmi

i, vdddmi «, vdhdmi 2, cdhsdmi 4, pt%- />fcA3 2, mrj'e 3, vindhe 1
shdmi 1, cumbhdmi 2, sajdmi 1, sapdmi

1, svaddmi 1, hardmi 2 tirdmi 1, prc-

chdmi 10, muficd'mi 8, ryjdmi 1, vindd'-
mi 8, t>rA<fom 1, siHcdmi 1, *uvdm£ 1,

srjd'mi 2, sprcdmi 1 ishydmi 1, na-

hydmi 1, hvdydmie; V. ichd'mi 2, 6rd-
a ton «.

tf/e 1, rfme 1, arc6 i, f&iAe 1,
names, bhdreu, bhikshe*,
mande 1, y4/« 1, ra6Ae 1,
va<fe 1, vande 4, varte 1,

*frft?6 1, Atftte 6 t*A€ 2,

ptuAe 1, Mtfce 2 »«Aye 1,

yd'ye 1, wdny« 28, mrshye
1, hvaye ia.

2. Sing. I. ate* 1, <fot 268, &A* 28, ca&-
«A* 2, chantsi 1, ddrshi i^pdrshi ^pd'si
is, bhd'si 10, yd' sin, veshi 8, p&«t 1, *<£tof
1, Atfofci 11, (ksheshi 8, j&rAt 7, jl«Af 2,
ddrshi 9, dhakshi 4, nakshi 1, n&A* to,
* pdrshi 16, prdsiz, bhakshi 1, ma^' i«,
m<fct ft, ydkshi 83, ydA** 4, y<fc£ 1, yote* 1,
rdtei 1, rd«* 10, vdkshi 2e, u&A* ft, prdshi
1, 8ak8hi 1, ttftot 11, AcwA* 1 — all in im-
perative sense) ; II. vyarshi (iydrshi in
Auf.) i,jigdsi 8, jujoshasi 1, tishthasi 7,
ddddsi 2, dddhdsi 9, plparshi 8, pibasi 2,
Mbharshi 10, mamatsi 1, vavdkshi 1,
vivekshi 1, sisakshi 1, sisarshi (imper.
sense) 1; III. inoshis, krndshi u^jino-
shi 1, tanoshi 1, vandshi 2, strnfohi 2,

hindshi s ishndsi i^jundsi iyprndsi

1, rind' si 1, prnd**' 1 prndkshi 4, £At-

Ttafri 1, yunakshi 1, um^Mis; IV. ala*e
1, arshasi ift, arhasi 3, atxm ft, tnvasi a,
ti/hasi 2, kshayasi », cdrasi 6, jayasi 1,

2. Sing. I. t'A*A« 2, At-
«A« 4, cakshe 1, br&she 1,
vitsez, $'e&he*\ ll.jighnase
ft, tishthase 4, dhatse 1 ; III.
apnushe 1, tlrnushe 1, &r-
nw^A^ 3, cmtcshe 1, dh&nu-

shi 1 grnishi 2, pr^nJ-

*A« 1, hrnUhe 2; IV. ohase
2, garhase 1, gdhase 1, ca&-
sAa#e 2, cay cute 1, jarase 2,
to^ase (1 tap) 2, (2 tap) 1, do-
Ao*i 1, nakshase 1, nayase
1, pavase 11, pinvase 2, &f'-
JAaie 4, bhrdjase 1, raan-
Aa^€ 4, mandase 6, modase
1, yajase 1, yamase 1, rafc-
*Aa#€ 1, rdcase ft, r ohase 1,
vdrdhase 8, vahase 1, ptftH-
6Aa^« 1, pobha&e 1, 8a case 4,

8tdvase 3, harshase 1

rfljdse 2, pr chase 1, mrpdse

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms in the Rig - Veda. 283

Present Indicative — continued.

jinvasi i,jit'rt)asi 1, tarasi i, tti/rvasi 1, i, yuvase », vinddse 2, «7l-

chlpasi 1, dhanvasi 1, dhdvasi a, ndyasi cd*e 1 -jd'yase a, trd'ya-

4,pdta$i 1, pinvasi 2, bhdvasi is, &M'- se 3, ddyase 7, pdtyase 2,
*Ao*t 2, ydjasi 3, rdkshasi 6, rajasi 20, pydyase 1, many axe a, mf-
rohasi 2, vddam 1, vapasi 1, vdhasi 4, yose 1, mucyase 1 ; V. icha-
pansasi 1, piksfiasi 1, sapcasi 1, sidasi t wi, yac/utse 2, i'pishe 22,

ttV<m 1 , tnnpdsi 3, prchasi 1 , mrncui prnv ishe a.

1, vindaei 2, vr$easi 2, sunvdsi 2

asyasi 1, ishyasi 2, ucyasi 1, gdyasi 2,
na$yasi 1, pdpyasi a, pushy asi 9, rdnya-
si 1, rdyasi 1, rishyasi 2, haryasi 2; V.
amlshi 1, bravfshi 1 ydchasi 1.

3. Sing. I. dttt u, dati 12a, &/ ua, 3. Sing. I. d'ate 4, ?'#e
ksheti-21, takti 1, dd'*i (i Jd) 1, (3 did) 2, 12, <>te 1, £'*Ate 1, cd«Ate 2a,
ddshti s, dveshti 3, ^d'fa' n, bhdrti 2. 6rrttf6 2, t?o«ife 10, pdate 2,
bhd'tiz*, ydtiisy rd'shtiz, relhi*, vashti $inkte%,stite*\ II. jighnate
is, vd'<* 10, tj&t n, hdntiz*', II. iyarftsi, 11, /SAfte a, juhute 1, <wA-
jdhdti t,jigdti n, jighartiiyjiijoshctfiv, thate », do#e 1, dadate 1,
juhdti 3, tishthati jo, ddddti 2a, dddati 1, dadhate a, dhatte 1a, pibate
jdddhdti r^piparti (1 par) i,(2par)Q,pi- 1, utimfti a, rarate 2, papfte
baiiiylnbhartiiiybibhdreiijmbndtib^yu- 7; IIL apnute s, tirnutei,
yoti 1, vavarti 1, vivaktit, vi vashti 1, 0/- krnutew, tanute*, tarute 1,
veaAli 1, pipdti (1 pd) 1, (2 pd) 1, sishakti dhiinute 1, prushnute 2, wa-

u, sisarti 1 ; III. apnoti9, indti 2, «/to£i 1, mtte*, prnute 1 fffnttb*,

drnoti s, ruoc*i 1, rdhnoti 1, krndti 38, punite 2, primti 1, riwfte 3,
cin<fri 2, tandti 1, ddpndti 1, dhdnoti 1, vrnite*, $r<UhnUe\, strnUe

vanoti 8, vrrwfat 1, grndti 7, sandti a, *</- 1, hrnite 1 ankte 4, m-

«<fot 10, ft indti 3 apndti 3, krlndti 1, dAe 2 (for inddhe), pr/tkte

kshindfd 1, 0Tnd'*i7, grbhnd'ti &,jdnd'ti 2, yuriktk 3, vrhkte 1 ; IV.
3, jind'ti 2, jundti 1, pund'ti 2, prndti ajate 1, ayate 1, yate (or
3, mind'ti i», rind'ti a, grndti 1, sindti ejate) 2, Zpate 1, I'shate 16,

1, skabhnd'ti 1, hrundti 1 anakti 3, edhate 9, <$Aate 11, krpate 1,

Knd#e 2, krnatti 1, trnatti 1, pindshti 2, kramate 1, gdhate 10, t<7#-
bhandkti 1, bhindtti 1, rindkii 1, runad- hate 1, ghoshate 1, cdyatez,
dhi 2, vrndkti *; IV. q/olt a, ayati 4, cetate 1, codate 1, jdrate 8,
dratfi 4, arshati 47, arhati s, dvat* a, jr'mbhate 2, tandate 2, ^"a-
mtHrfiii, Uhati j, Hhdti 1, ejatiz, oshati te 1, topate a, ddkshate 1,
3, krandcUi 1, krtlatiQ, kshdyatit, ksha- ddhate 4 (donate j), dhdva-
raiis, khddati 1, cdrati 34, c&alt 13, .;"</- te 3, ndkshate 1, n<ipa/e a,
yatf tyjinvati *,jtvati 2, jdrvati j, ,/r«- ndsate*, ndpate 1, pdyate 1,
ye#» 1, tapati 8, idratf 7, dd'pati 5, dd- pavate wy pbivate 12, /^-d-
wrfi », dhdmati 2, dhdvati (1 dhdv) 22, ^//</te 2, pldcate 1,* bd'dhate
(2 c^d^;) 1, ndkshati 4, nayati a, pacati 12, bhdjate 4, bhandate 1,
1, patati a, pinvati 1, pi'yati 1, bddhati 2, bhayate a, bhdrate is, M£&-
bhdjati s, bhdnati 1, bhdrati a, bhdroati shale 1, bhdjate 1, bhrdjate
1, bhdvati 86, bhUshati 11, bhedatl s, 4, bhreshctte 1, mdnhate 7,
mddati 8, mdrdhuti 1, ydjati a, ydtati 1, mdrate 1, modate 4, ydjate
ydmati 2, rdkshati 9, rddati 1, rapati 1, a, y at ate a, yamate a, yo/a-
vol. x. 33

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

234 J. Avery,

Present Indicative — continued.

rd'jati 15, rddhati i, r&jati *, rebhati i, te 1, ranhate 1, rakshate a,
rddhati i, roshati a, rdhati a, vddati 10, rappate a, rdmate a, raw
vdpati 1, variati i, vardhati i, vasati i, 6ate i, re;«te e, rdcate ao,
vahati n, vapati i, venati a, pansati i, rohate a, vadate a, vanate
pd'sati'*, pikshati a, pundhati i, pwm- \b,vdndate*,vapate{lvup)
bhati i, sarjati i, sdrpatl a, sddhati a, i (2 ?;op} i, vdrate a, «//r-
si'dati 17, sedhati 4, skandati i, *fo- tote a, vardhate 8, vasate a,

Mol2 i, sredhatt i, hdrati i iyol* i, vdsate j, vdhatet, vepate a,

rnvati*, khiddti \ypinpati i, prchati i, vyathate s, pay ate a, p££-
prndti a, mishati i, yuvdti i, rujdti i, Mate i, pumbhate*, sacate
ruvdti i, vinddti 8, rrpcatfi i, vrhati i, is, sahate 8, sddhate 8, *£-

suvdtl a, grjdti a dsyatl a, why at i 6, cafe i, sevate i, stdrate i,

gdyatl ^jttryati i, t any at I i, dds-yati a, stdvate 4, smayate i, sy«w-
diyati i, dhayati^ napyati*, pdpyati 10, , dote a, svddate i, hdrshate

ptishyati n, ranyatl a, rishyati 4, vdyati 4, hdvate u, hvdrate i

a, oidhyati a, vyayati i, sldhyati i, £y<zl£ ukshdte i, rtljdte 4, kirate
i, haryati i, hrshyati i, hvayati i ; V. J, farrfte 7, tundate i, jptrc-
ichati 6, iichati a, gdchati i6, ydchati 8, p4te i, prcliate a, prncdte i,

yitchati i 4/ift/ i, pvdsiti i, tavtti i, mt/tfcate a, mrpate i, yw-

brdvtti a. ?.jate 5, vinddte ia, vindhdte

a, mpate s, *r/ate a £«A-

yate 1, rjyate 1, kshiyate 1,
jd'yate as, ji'yate 4, day ate
ii, pdcyate 1, pdtyate 15,
pddyate 4, papyate a, wrm-
yate e, miyate 1, mr shy ate
a, rt'yate 6, haryate s ; V.
gachate 1.

(Suffix c) I. f*Ae as, c?*e
1, awA£ 11, ftrww« 1, mcK ao,
huvi*\ II. dadhe as; III.
rnve 1, prnve 19, sunve 8,

At7»t?6 a yr?1^ • vr*I/e

1 ; IV. JosAe 1, tope 1, maA<?
1, p<fye 10, *&>e 1, #l<£v6 5.
(Suffixre) dwAre 1 (3 pL?) .

1. Du. II. dddvahe 1 ;
IV. sdcdvahe 1.

2. Du. L /^(/« 1, krthds 8, pdthds 4, 2. Du. I. d'sdthei, iptithe

bhdthds 1, ydthds 19, vftA<fo 8, *$A(fo ai, 1, rdhd'the 1, cakshdthe a,

hathds a ; II. jujodhathas i, tishthathas vasdthe 1 ; II. dadhd'the 1 ;

e, dhatthds a, ninithds 1, piprthas 1, M- IIL tanvdthe 1 yurijdthe

bhrth&8*\ IIL Urnuthas 1, krnuthds 3, a; IV. jayethe 1, jarethe 2,

vanuthds a HnUhas a ; IV. aeathas drnhethe 1, rakshethe 8, t>o-

1, drcathas 1, ar hatha* a, a vat has 8, in- retfAe 1, vahethe 6, prayethe

vathas 1, karshathas 1, kshdyathas a, i, sacethe 7—^ — yuvethe 1.
yamathas 1, yhoshathas 1, cetathas a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms in the Rig -Veda.

286

Prbssnt ImxcATivv—continued.

jatuxthas i, jinvathas i,jt'vathas *>jil'r-
rathas i, dhdmathas i, nakshathas i,
nay at has a, pdtathas 5, pinvathas 2,
bhdrathas a, b ha vat has 7, bhtitshathas
(1 bhdsh) i, (2 JAdaA) a, mddcAhas 2,
yajathas 1, ydtathas «, rd'jathas 7, ro-
hathas 1, vanathas a, varathas 1, vaAa-
*Aa* a, tfkshathas 1, sadathas 1, sd'dha-

thas a, sidathas 1, svddathas 1 rnvo-

Mas 2, bhasdthas 1, muficathas a, rr-

hathas 1, srjathas* dfyathass, ran-

yathas 1 ; V. gdchathas 17.

3. Da. I. atta* 1, kshitds 8, jpdla* 1,
bhiXtas 1, y<fta* 1, txftas 1, **a* ai, sndtas
1, Aa&fe 4, hnutas 1 ; II. fuhthdtasf pi-
batas 1, bibhrtds 0, mimitas i, viviktds
a, vivishtas 1 ; III. apmitas 1, iXrnutds 1,

krnutas 1, sunutds 1 grnitds i,prnf-

tas 1 ; IV. invatas a, kshayatas 1,
ghoshatas 1, cdratas is, dhdvatas 1,
nakshatas 1, pinvatas 1, bhdvatas 4,
bhU'shatas a, manthatas 1, mardhatas
1, rakshatas 1, rd'jatas 1, vasatas a, v«-

Aaftu 10 siflcatas 1 napyatas 1,

pdpyatas i, p&shycUas a, vdyatas 1 ; V.
yiichatas*.

1. PL (suffix m<m) I. lm(fo* 4, upmdsi
i« (pmdsi 1), stumdsi a, smdsi ift; II.
juhUmdsi a, dadmasi 1, dadhmdsi a,
bibhrmdsi 1, pi&mdsi 1 ; III. grntrndsi
10, junmidsi 1, minim dsi a ; IV. r/rcd-
wmw 1, drhdmasi 1, cdrdmasi 7, Jcrwd-
mo<2 1, jaydmasi 1, tar di nasi 1, ndyd-
mast 2, bddhdmasi 1, bhardma&i a, ra<7-
Mmasi 1, methdmasi 1, ydjdmasl 2,

vdddmasi a tirdmasi 1, mrpdmasi 1,

ftprpdmasi 1 -pdpydmasi 1, haryd-

masi 1, hvdydmasi s.

(Suffix mo«) I. kurmds 1, dvishmds
a, ydmas 1, */na« a, hanmas 1 ; II. jmAi*-
//*& i9 dadhmas 1, vivishmas 2; IIL

jdnlmas 1 ahjmas 1 ; IV. maddmas

i, ydjdmas 1 (ydjdmaf), vaddmas 1,
$ansdmas 1.

3. Da. I. (frtfli 1, tydfe 1,
duhdte 1, bruvd'te 1, paydte
1, siivdte 1 ; II. jihdte a,
dadhd'te 6 ; III. tofijdfte 1 ;
IV. carete ^javete 1, tar«te
1, namete 1, bhayete 1, Mo-
rete 1, methete 1, yatete 1,
rc/«te 1, vddete 1, vartete a,
vardhete 1, vepete 1, vycr-
lAete 1, «ocefc a, smayete 1,

havete 1 ^'^ 1

hvdyete 1 ; (suffix ai'te) At/j-
t?ai/€ J.

1. PL I. manmahe 8,
yujmahe 1, pdsmahe 1, Atf-
mtfAi a; II. dddmahe a;

III. krnmahe a wrn?-

mdAe 64 ; IV. jardmahe a ;
ndkshdmahe 1, ndvdmahe
2, ndsdmahe 1, bddhdmahe
1, bhdjdmahe 1, bhdydma-
he 1, bhardmahe a, m&nd-
mahe n (mandmahb i),
mdnddmahe i, mardmahe
j, ydjdmahe », ydsdmahe 1,
rabhdmahe a, vdndmahe 4,
vdnddmahe 1, stardmahe 1,
stdvdmahe J, svajdrnahe 1,

hdvdmahe 107 ywvd-

maAe 1, ripd'mahe 1, *?c<l-

w?aA« 1, huvdmahe 2

hvdydmahe ft.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

286

•/. Avery,

Presbnt Indicative — continued.

2. PL (suffix tha) I. itha 1, krtha i,
gathd 1, netArf i, pdthd (l />d) 1, (3 pd)
2, ydthd e, *tfAa so, hatha i ; II. ,/t/;o-
shatha i, dhatthd 4, piprthd i, bibhr-
thd a, bubodhatha i ; III. apmtha i, Axn-

w$A</ a, dhilnuthd s, sunvthd i jdm-

JAa i ; IV. djatha i, dvatha 7, ejatha i,
krflatha i, kshdyatha 2, khddatha 1, cc-
lalAa ijinvatha 8, tdkshatha 2, tU'rvatha
2, ndyatha^ napatha \,patatha 1, bhdra-
tha 1, bhdvatha 8, &Atf shatha i, nidda-
tha 8, moshatha 1, rdkshatha 1, rd'jatha

2, rejatha 1, vahatha 1, sdrpaiha 1

muncdtha 1 dsyatha s, pagyatha 2,

p&shyatha 1, rishyatha 1, Aarya/Aaa;

V. gdchatha s.
( buffi x thana) L pdthdna 1, ydthdna

5, nthdna 10; IV. vddathana 1.

3. PL I. adanti 6, amdnti 1, vpdnti
8, kshiydnti a, ghndnti a, dd'nti 1, pdnti
(1 jpd) j, (8 j»d) 18, bruvdnti 2, bhdnti 1,
ydnti 99, yd'nti a, rihdnti 14, vanl/ i,
vydnti 2, Mfcilftso; II. jahati \yjuhvati

3, tishthanti a, dddati s, dddhati a, </«-
dhanti i,piprati 4, ptbanti 8, bapsati 2,
bibhrati 8, mimanti 1 ; III. apnuvanti
2, rnvdnti 2, krnvdnti 9, tanvdnti 2,
dabhnuvantl 1, jyrushnuvanti 1, prn-

vdnti 4; sunvonti a, hinvdnti 81

kshindrUi 1, grndnti 21, grbhndnti 8,
jdndnti 3, jinanti 1, jundnti i,pundnti

6, prndnti 12, prinanti 1, bhrindnti 1,
mindnti 24, rindnti 1, prinanti 6, «£r-

ndntfi 2 anjdnti 7, unddnti 8, pm-

shdnti 1, prflcdnti 8, bhindanti 1, yw;7-
jVfnft 9, vincanti i, vrnjanti 2; IV.

ajanti 1, drcanti 14, drshanti 22, drhanti
1, dvanti 4, karanti 1, krandanti 1, Ar?'-
Za/ifa' 2, krdganti 1, kshdranti 11, A»Ao-
aVml* i, gdmanti 1, gHhanti 1, cdranti
41, jayanti 1, jdranti 1, fmvanti 3, jT-
vcmlt 2, tdkshati 1, tdpanti % tar ant i 3,
trdsanti 1, tsdranti 1, dabhanti 1, cftt-
hanti 2, dr dvanti 2, dhanvanti 1, <//*<i-
rnanti 8, dhdvanti 2, dhti'rvanti 1, wa&-
shanti 2, nandanti 1, namanti 2, /wy-
anfo* 19, napanti (1 ?«/p) 1, (3 nap) 1, »/»•
c&zuft' i, pdcanti% pdtanti 8, pinvanti *,

2. PL II. dadhidhvei;
III. atigdhve 1 ; IV. cayor-
dhve*, dhavadhve i , bddha-
dhve 1, bhdradhve 1, wanrf-
adhve 1, vdhadhve a, pay-
adhve 1 trd'yadhve 3.

3. PL I. 4'*afe 89, f rote
27, 7'Zo/e 85, fpate 3, oAa/e 4,
grhate 1, cdkshaie 7, aV
/*# tfe «, nin^ate 4, bruvdte 6,
WAa# J, vdsate 8, pdsate 2,
suvate 4 ; II. jighnante 1,
jihate 6, tishthante 3, aV/-
a*Aa^€ -2^ptbante 1, mimate*,
8israte e ; III. agnuvate 1,
Arwvate 4, tanvate 12, twan-
vai« 1, vrnvdte 2, vrnvati

1, sprnvate 1, hinvdte 1

agnate 1, grbhnate 1, ^Viw-
tfte 4, pimate 2, badhndte 1,

rinate 1, vrndte 10 an-

ja'te 12, atljate 1, indhdte 1*,
indhate 4, nljate 6, tufljdte
1, prficdte 1, bhvtljdte 1,
bhufljate 1, ywljdte 10, ©rtf-
^Vite 1 ; IV. dyante 1, foA-
awte 1, edhante i, A^A^-
dante 1, cetante 1, eyavante
^j dyante i,jarante (2 jar)
6, (3 jar) 3, dhavante 1,
nakshante 6, nam ante 2,
navatite 7, pdvante is, W-
dhante 2, bhajante 2, AA(iy-
a/?^6 6, bhdrante 7, flAr J'-
^a-nto 8, ydjante 4, y at ante
6, yd'cante 2, rakshante a,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of the Big- Veda, • 237

Present Indicative— concluded.

ply anti a, bhajanti 1, bhananti 1, bhd- rante i, rabhante 1, r«-

ra«^' 19, bhdvanti u, bhUshanti 4, mo;- mante a, rejante 4, rdeante

janti i, mddatiti w, mdnthanti a, ma- 19, vadante i, vdrante »,

ranti\,rnardha?iti*, mehanti \, ydjanti vdrtante », vardhante i,

3, rdkshanti 4, rdnanti a, rddanti i, r<2- vahante a, vyathante i, po-

Janfa" i, rebhanti i, rdhanti i, vddanti is, ytmte i, pumbhante i, pra-

vananti i, vdpanti s, vdrdhanti 17, vrfr- y<wte 1, sacante**, sdpante

shanti 1, vdpanti 2, vdhanti 32, wenanti 1, sdhante s, stdvante a,

1, pdhsanti 5, pikshanti 2, pdcanti 1, spdrdhante 3, svajante 1,

pcdtanti 8, sapanti 1, ftdpcati 1, si'danti svadante 1, hdrante 1, Ad-

1, sedhanti 1, skandanti 1, stobhanti a, ?*a??te 39 ukshdnte 2,

wdvanti «, svddanti a, svaranti «, Am- tirdnte 7, vipdnte 2

*antf 1 -ukshdnti 1, rnjdnti 1, rshdnti kshf yante ^jdyante 5, tfrtf-

1, crtdnti 1, tiranti*, tunjdnti*, duhanti yante 1, may ante 1, /wr$A-

16, prchdnti 2, mishanti 2, mucdnti 1, yante j, yddhyante a, n-

muitcanti 1, mrjdnti 2», mrpdnti 1, rw- yante i, hvdyante e.

./Vfafo" 9, rudanti 1, vindanti 1, vipanti 4, (Suffix rate) I. duhrate*.

vrpcdnti 1, pumbhdnti 7, sificdnti 2, *w- (Suffix re) I. duhr'e e,

»tf?tft 1, srjdnti 6, sprpdtiti 2, sphurdnti vidre 1; V. invire 1, rnvire

1 d'ryanti 2, gdyanti 1, jUryanti 1, \,pinvire 1, prnvireTy sun-

dasyanti e, dlyanti 2, ndhyanti 1, jp^p- v?Vv s, hinvire s.

ya/tf* 11, pushy anti 2, rdnyanti 2, rw*A-

yan*/ 1, vdyanti *, vdyanti 1, prdmyanti

1, syanti 1, hdryanti 2, hv ay anti 1 ; V.

ichdnti 5, uchdnti 2, rchdnti 1, gdchanti

*, ydchanti e.

B. Pbbsent Subjunctive.

I. With mode-sign a and primary endings.

1. Sing. I. 6r4t?^w* 3 ; II. dadhdni 1. Sing. II. papvami i ;
1; IV. kdrdni 2, gamdni 2, cardni 1, III. Axnauai2, mandvaix,
ndydni i,pacdni i, bhqjdni 1, rd'jdni 2, simdvai 2; IV. mdnai j,
vdhdni 1 srjd'ni 1. marai 1, stdvais — prchai

(Suffix d=dni) L ay <2 1, bravd 1, **rf- 1 yudhyai 1.

wi 2 ; IIL Arnavd 1, hinavd 1 ; IV. arcd
1 mrhshd' 1.

2. Sing. I. <f*<m 4, kdrasi 2, bravasi 2. Sing. I. d*a*6 1, A:^-
1 ; IL ctketasi 1, pibdsi 1, paprcdsi \ ; IV. r<7*e 2 ; II. dddhase a ; III.
a/d« 1, jaydsi 2, bhdjdsi a, bhdvdsi 4, krnavase 1, vanavase 1 ;

ydjdsi ^ vaddsi 2, vahdsi 2 kird'si IV. vardhdse \ yuvdse

1, rujd'si 1 papydsi 1. 1.

3. Sing. L <fooli 8, karati 7, <&&?" 6, 3. Sing. I. tfcale a, idhate
dhdti a, vayati 1, vedati 1, hanati 2 ; II. i,kdrate*9 vdrjate 1 ; II. ffoA-
<iketatisy fis/it/idti*, ddddpati*, dldepati thdte a, dddhate a, mimdte
», pibdti i, piprati 1, biibodhati 1, *w- 1, yuyojate 2, papdmate 1 ;
shtidatis; IV. <%jdti z9 jaydti z, ji'vdti III. krndvate*,mandvatei,

1, £di/?dlt 1, dabhdti 2, dahdti 1, <7Aara- inddhate 2, yundjate

vdti 1, ndydti 1, pdcdti 2, pdtdti a, joa- 1 ; IV. jardte 1, pavdte i,

<&&t i, bddhdti 1, bhdjdti 1, bhdrdti 2, b hay die 2, ydjdte », vdhdte

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

288

J. Avery,

Present Subjunctive — continued.

bhdvdtl u, mardtl a, ydjdti 6, vaddti 3, a, prdydte 1, svajdte 1

pdnsdti 2, «&fcgi; 1, svdddti 1, svardti 1, jushdte 1, ft'rdte 1, mucdte
-tirdti 1, bhrjjd'ti 1, mucdti 1, mr- 1 manydte 1.

rfAdtt i9 mrldti a, vand'ti 1, vidhdti 1,
suvd'ti 5 rishydti 1 ; V. gdchdti 2.

(Suffix toe) IV. yajdtaix.

1. Du. L bravdvahai 1 ;
IIL krnavdvahai 1, tana-
vdvahai 1 ; IV. sacdvahai
1, sahdvahai 1.

2. Da. L (Uatha8\ykara4ha8 2,veda- 2. Da. III. apndvaithe
thas 1 ; IL dketathas 1, tishthdthas 1, 1 ; IV. prnaithe 1.
dddhatha8 1, ptbdthas 0 ; IV. dvdthas i,
vaddtha.8 1, smardtha* 1.

8. Du. I. karatas 2. gamatas t, /kf'- 3. Du.

to* 1, (pdtdsf) ; II. tishthdtasf pibdtas IV. ydtaite 1
1 ; IIL afijcUas 1 ; IV. cdrdtas 2, vdhdtas
2, pdpdtas 1 w*rZdta* 1.

I. brdvaite 1;

1. PI. I. rWmaAat 1,
gdmdmahai 1, brdvdma-
hai 2; III. krndvdmahai

1 andpdmahai 1, Mw-

ndjdmahai 2, runadhdma-
hai 1 ; IV. ndpdmahai 2,
ydjdmahai 1, vdndmahai
1 sincdmahai 1.

(Suffix, maAe) I. tfd-
wiaA« 1, kdrdmahe e; II.
daddmahe 1.

2. PL I. dsaiha 4, stavatha 1; II.
pxbdthaf s&shtidatha 1 ; III. sandva-
tha 1 ; IV. dvdtha 1, jaydtha 1, vrfAiZ-
tfAa 1 ; V. gachdtha 1.

II. With mode-sign a and secondary endings.

1. Sing.
(sttish-a-i).
2. Sing. I. <foa* e, kshdyas 2, ghdsas
2, ddnas 1, parcas 1, jtwfo 1, bravas 5,
uedas a, prf&a* 2, hdna* 3 ; II. juhuras
1, tishthds 2, ddd/ias a, ddddpas 1, /w«-
fmicas 1, vivesha* 1, xhshtida* 1 ; III.
r/i«?;a* 3, AT/«foa* 7, trpndvas 1, pr/?-

avew 3 grbhnd's 1, jund's 1 ftA/-

7irf<fa« 1 ; IV. rfr>(fo 1, ,/dy<fo 1, jCtrvds
1, takshds? bhdrd* 1, vdrdhd8 1, p£A--

$A<& 1 sified'8 1 yHdhyds 1,

rtshyda 1, hdryds 2 ; V. gachds 1.

I. stmhe 20

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 239

Pbssknt Subjunctive — continued.

3. Sing. L dycU 4, dscU aa, i'rat 1,
rdhat 7, kshayat 4, ghasat 1, cayotf 1, pdf
(1 />d) 1, (3 />4) 1, brdvat e, vaftrf s,
stdvcU »; IL jugurat 1, tUhthdt i, dtf-
<&2pa* 5, dddhat u, dadhdnai 1, />&<?£ 1,
babhaxat 1, yuydvat 1, sushUdat 1 ; III.
apnavat a, krndvat ia, cinavat 1, rfArt-
navat 1, prushndvat 1, vandvat 10, pr/i-

'ira* u, swtdvat a rnddhat i, Mm-

<#<&# 1, yundjat a; IV. arclfc 1, drsMt 1,
arA<& i9 tfwft 1, mu^ 1, e;Vfr 1, ghdshdt
», j/t?<& 1, dd'ptit 4, n'vnddt 1, /><fcdl 1,
/>«&** a, bhdrdt 1, bhU'shdt 2, yq;Y& 1,

vdrdhdt*y pdnsdt 1, pUcshdt 1 prchd't

1, jprruf'* 2, mWdl 1, t?rped'tf 1, sincdt 1,

*r;Vf/ 1 pdpydt 2, ptishydt a; V.

/>Ad* a, uchd't a, gdchdt a.

1. Du. I. hand v a * ; II. pibdva 1 ;

IIL apnavdva 1, Armaria 1 rmd-

crfra 1 ; IV. cdrdt?a 1, jdydva 1, «a-
ndea 1, pmisdva 1.

1. PL I. aydma a, dsdma 4, &*/ta-
y<2me* 1, brdvdma 12, stdvdma 9, Arf-
ndma 1 ; II. jahdma 1, juhavdma 2,
dadhdma a; IIL apndvdma a, A^nw-
i<ama 9, minavdma 1, pakndvdma 2,

sutuivdma a, spry a v dm a 1 -jund'ma

:, mind' ma 2; IV. drcdrac/ 4, kdrdma
a, hrdmdma 1, gamdma 2, takshdma 1, ♦
bhajdma 1, bhdrdma 1, bhdvdma 1, w«-
<ft?ma 1, manthdma 1, mardma a, ya-
jdma a, rddhdma 2, vaddma 1, var-
dhdma 1, vdpdma 1, preshdma 1, «j-
(/ama a, hdrdma 1.

3. PL I. aya?* 4, bra van 1 ; II. <fc/- 3. PL I. hdnanta 1 ; II.
dAa» 1, yuyavan 1 ; IIL apnavan 1, Arn- juhuranta a ; IIL apwo-

<it?a/i a, prrwfoan 4 andjan 1, yund- vanta 1, krndvanta 4.

Jtf/i 2, t?rnq/an 1 ; IV. &rf Z<5n i,gfi6shdn
*, ctfrdn i,/>a^n 1, vdddn a, vdrdhdn 4,

t'oAdn 1 prchd'n j, sphurd'n 1

pdpydn 1 ; V. uchd'n «, gdchdn 2.

III. Like the Imperfect without an augment.

1. Sing. I. gamam 1 ; II. tUhtham 1 ;
IIL kshindm 1 ; IV. cydvam i, taksham
1, bhojam i9 ycjam 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

240 J. Avery,

Present Subjunctive — continued.

2. Sing. ILjujoshasA^dddasA^pipra- 2. Sing. 1L juhHrthds i,
yas i ; III. rnos n ; IV. dvas i, ash-as i, yuyothds i, rarithdsi; HI.

gamas 4, £<iro« 6, gHhas a, cwvr* i, tanuthds i hrnithds \\

ddhas i, yamas i, xmnas i, vapas i, IV. bddhathds i ;wa«-

vdrasa, vtiwa« i, «ew«4, $d'sas% pocas i, yathds i.

sac&w 7 guhas i, mucds i, rw/<fo i,

wrAa* i, vrpca* i, */cas i, *r;Vf* i

divyas i ; V. Manas a, sedhis i.

(Without suffix) I. &ar 8, A<m 3 ; II.
pap<^« i ; III. pinak 4, bhindt a, wnwA i.

3. Sing. I. we£ i, *^Mhj II. dketati, 3. Sing. I. vaato i,*«to
^^ \y jx%joshatiy tisht/utt 6, dadat n, i; II. jihita a, niniJcta i,
/nftot a; III. #Wtf j- — ^oVi-a1* i; IV. yuyota j, pipfta i, ptprfta i|;

arcat a, A*ira< 33, karshat a, krandat a, III. ruttfti 1 yvn^a '»

ksharat a, gamat as, caratf 4, rata* a, grbhnita 1, vrnita a; IV.

codati,janatz,jdyat\,j6shat*,tak8/tat ipata is, bharata 1, rocata

1, tandrat (tandat?) 1, £a/>at j, tamat 1, 3, vdrdhata a, sacata 1, $d'-

fairaJ 5, ddbhat 3, rfifcol a, dd'pat 13, dhuta 1 -jushata s, f/-

dd'sat i, dl'yat 1, dehat 1, dohat 1, c?ro- rata 1 -jdyata 1, ma«-

ua£ a, ndkshat 3, nay at 4, napat 13, y«ta 1.

pdcat 1, pdtat 1, pinvat i, prdthat 1,
bddhat 1, bhdrat 12, bhdsat a, minat 8,
ydmat 7, rdkshatf ranat 1, raa*a£ 1,
rdipatf a, rddhat 1, reyVrt 1, reshat 1, ro-
tfAatf 1, vadat a, vrfral 3, vdrtat 1, v^r-
dAotf 4, tjapatf 1, pa&«£ 4, pardhat 1, pi&-
sAa£ 1, pndthat 1, pramat 1, pvdyat?

sadat 4, sdrpat a, sapcat s, svdjat 1

&rnfc& 1, kshipdt 4, kfyidat 1, jushdt 1,
mwccfo 1, ri#7fc a, rudhat 1, rwvrf^ a, u*-
dAa^ 1, tupot a, urAatf 1, sincat 1, sr/«* 6,

srdhat? sphurat 1, huvat 1 gd'yat%

pdpyat 1, vidhyat 1 ; V. uchat a, ^A«-

/iCI^ 1.

! Suffix «) I. vc« i.
No suffix) I. &ar e, r/a/* 1, c^c/n 1,
rdf a, Aa/i 1, Ad'r i ; II. v ivy ok 1 ; III.
pinak 1, prndk 1, bhindt 6, rinak i.

1. Du. I. g an v alii 1.

1. PL I. karma 5, ganma a. 1. PI. III. strnhndhi 1;

IV. grhdmahi 1.

3. PI. I. rfaaw 7, kshan 1, gtnan 1 1, %ya/i 3. PI. I. ?Za£a 1, vasata s;

i,5a^i; l\.jujushan\yj'&jo8han\,ih8h~ II. jihataf tishthanta a;

£/wm 1; III. r^vaw 1, krnvanf minvdn III. krnvata z, manvata*

1, vanvan 1, hinvdn a apnan 1, mt- grbhnata 1, vnwto/

/<em 1, rindn 1, pcamnan 1; IV. arcan ywljatai; W.dman-

3, kdran », gaman 9, car an 1, dabhan 7, ;ai, dyanta 1, caranta 1,

dhdvan i, ndk&han*9 ndpan (1 nap) 1, cyavanta\,ja?iantai,nak-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of Uie Rig- Veda. 241

Pbeseot Subj vmmvB— concluded.

(2 nap) a, yaman 4, rdnan 8, vaman i, shanta 8, nantanta 8, ntf-
vardhan i, pd^an i, sddhan i, «ftfa/i 3, yanfa a, navanta 6, na-
haranf ^dn i, druhanx, dhvasdn panta (1 nap) 2, (3 nap) 8,

I, vidhdn 1, vindan a pdpyan 1. nasanta 5, pacanta? pin-

(Suffix ttf) L duhus a, mandtts 2. vanta 1, pravanta 1, M<£-

janta e, bhananta 1, ftAd-
ranto 6, bhikshanta 1, yaX*-
shanta 1, yavanta 1, ro-
7ucnta 1, ranfcz 9, ramantaf
r'ejanta 1, vanla 1, vdranta
(1 var) «, (2 »ar) i, vrfr-
tantaf var dhanta 1, vrd-
dhanta 1, pumbhata 2,
(class I. ?) $6canta 1, *#fc-
shanta 1 (sakshantef see
Grass.), sdcanta \% sapan-
ta 1, sapcata 2, sdhantaf
sd' dhanta f stdvanta a,
smayanta 1, hdvanta 2

ishanta 1, jushdnta

as, tirdnta 1, nuddnta 1,
bhurdnta 1, mrshanta 1,
yuvanta 1, vidhanta 1, *r-

Janta i ddyanta 1 ; V.

ichdnta 1, ishananta a.

C. PBE8BNT Optative.

1. Sing. L lyd/w 1, rdhydm 1, y<J- 1. Sing. I. S'pfyaa, mur
ydm 1, vidydm 1, pakydm 1, *yd'm 9; nya i ; IV. mceya a

II. jag amy dm \,paprcydm t ; III. *a»- huviya 1.
wydm 1; IV. gameyam 1, piksheyam a

vyayeyam 1.

2. Sing. L rdhyds 1, gamyds 1, ayd'a
i; IL cakriyds (2 &ar) 1, juguryds 1;
IV. due* 1, bhaves 1, modes 1, wane* 1
papyesu

3. Sing. I. ty<ft a, brUydt 1, vidyd't 3. Sing. L <fo#a 1, SZfta
3, *y<fl'J i&; II. jagamydt 9, jagdydt 1, s, C^a a, uAfta 1, duhUa 1,
juguryd't 1, fotaryd'* 4, paprcydt 1, fti- bruvtta i, pdytta 1, ttuvttd
bhtydt 1, bibhrydt 1, mamanydt 1, mi- 1 ; II. dddhita s, dadhitd

miydt 1 ; III. prniyd't 1 ; IV. rfyetf 1, 1 ; III. Arnvfta a 2*rn-

carefa, taret\ypdiet\,sravet* prchet dtd 1; IV. q/Vta 1, foAa-

1 dasyet 1, risky et a ; V. fc^etf 1. tmto 1, jareta 1, bhiksheta

(Suffix *) I. rdhyds 1, gamyds «, ,/€yd* a, yajeta 1, vadeta 1, ftoceta
a; H mimiyds 1, ydyds 1. a, staveta 1 jushka

-papyeta 1.

1. D11. L yujydva 1 ; IV. urAeva 1.
vol. x. 34

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

242 J. Avery,

Present Optative— conduced.

2. Du. I. vidydtam i, sydtam a; II.
jagmydtam 1 ; IV. tiretam i.

3. Du. I. ytfjyd'tdm i, sydtdm i ; II.
yuyuyd'tdm i ; IV. grdsetdm i.

1. PI. I. iydma i, rdhydma 4, Am- 1. PL I. idkimahi 7,
ydmai,turyd'ma*,vidyd'tfiari,syd'ma rdhlmdhi i, bruvimahi a,
lao, hanyd'ma i ; II. juhuyd'ma i, £&A- v as una hi i, stuvlrnahi i ;
thema a, tuturydma i ; III. cinuydma II. dadimahi a, dudhttnahi
iyvanuyd'ma&,prmiydmaiy8anuyd'ma a; IV. gamemahi a, gdhe-
e ; IV. krdmema a, gam&ma 8, cayerna raahi i, bhajemahi a, 6Aa-
ijCarema^jdyemaWyji'vemaijtdrema remahi i, ydtemahi i, ra-
ia, dd'pema it, bhdverna e, bhU'shema a, bhemahi 4, vanemahi i,

mddema n, mahema a, yatema i, ra- sdcemahi a mdhemahi

perna i, vatetna i, vadema as, vanema i jd'yemahi a.

a, pikshema i, sadema a, sapema a

ishema i, rujema i, vidhema aa, vipema

i, huvbmam pdpyema n, pushy ema

i, r My ema i. ^

2. PL I. ayd'ta i ; IV. to'reta i.
(Suffix far/* a) I. syd'tana i; IV. frVe-

£a/ia i.

3. PL I. adyus i, vidyus i, aytfo 9 ; 3. PL (Suffix raw) IL
II. jagamyus a, dadhanyus i ; IV. £rf- dadlran a.

r€yw* i, v a hey us i. (Suffix rata) IV. bhare-

rata i -jusherata a.

;D. Pbbsent Imperative.

2. Sing. (Suffix dA?) I. adtfAt a, 2. Sing. I. *r*Ai?a a,

eo*At is, ArdAS aa, gadhi i, fcfaVa (£o7/u) krshvd*, cakshva a, trdsva

i, pdrdhi a, 6orfA£ a7, viddhi s, pagdhi 2, dukshva 1, yukshvd 10,

15, pddhi 1 ; II. cikiddhi 7, daddhi 8, rd'sva ai ; II. jihishva 1,

dididdhi 2, piprgdhi 1, mamaddhi a, piprdyasva 1, pibasva 1,

mamandhi 1, mumugdht 6, yuyodhii^ vavrt8vav\ III. tfriiushva

vividdhi 2, pagddhi a, pepdSAw; III. 1, ArntMAwf 14, tanushvas,

prnudhi a angdhi 2, vndhi 1, cAm- vanv&hva J, prnw«At>a* 1

a*AV 1, trndhi 4, bhandhi 1, bhindKi a, vrntshvd a yurik-

prndhi 1, vrndhi a. sAva 1 ; IV. kalpasva 1,

(Suffix A/) I. *A£ 62, graA* 88, JaA/ «o, kramawa a, codas 0 a a,

po'Ai (1 joo*) aa, (2 pa*) 69, &r#Aa 4, 6AtfA£ jdrasva (2 jar) a, (3 Jar) a,
10, ydA* 129, rdAI 2, t>aAS 3, wA£ 7, #ft«At tapasvat, nakshasva\yn<Mr

aa; II. dfeAi 10, dAeAS 6a, piprhi a, jot- ya*va 1, namasva 1, joa-

/>rlAi a, mimihl 7, rt>£A» 7, pip^A* ia ; III. vcwva iaa, pirvoasva 1, />ra-

agnuhi a, inuhi 1, drnuhi 4, Ar^wAi aa, thasva 1, bd'dhasvao, bha-
cinuhi 1, tanuhi a, trpnuhi a, dhdnuhi jasva a, bhdrasva % wan-

a, dhrshnuhi 1, prnwAI 7, sanuhi 1, e&wva 10, yajasva 16, ya-
sprnuhi i, hinuhi 3-^ — ^rrmAi a, jdnihi tasva 1, rakshasva 1, ra-

3, punihi s, mrrwAi 1, pr/i $AS s; V. p«a- bhasva a, ramasva 1, va-

^A*Ae 3, stanihii. dasva 1, vdndasva a, t?rfr-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms oftfte Rig- Veda.

243

Present Imperative — continued.

(Suffix tdt) I. vittd't 1, trifrft 1 ; II.
dattdt'i, dhdttdt i ; III. krmUdt i, Ain-

w^ j punitdt i ; IV. avatdt i, o*Aa-

*<& i, dahutdt i, bhavatdt i, ydcatdt i,

rdkshatdt i, vahatdt i vrhatdt 2, «w-

ti<i£<& i ; V. yachatdt i.

(Without personal suffix) II. /4Aa 101,
tishtha 84; IIL mifc i, t2rww i, Aran* a,
Arww 7, tanw. i, prnw s, $///m i, Amw a

apdna 2 ; IV. oca -2, a/a 6, <zra* 25,

<ir*Aa 37, <foa 33, inwa 1, o*Aa 2, &ara 1,
karsfui 1, kranda 2, krdma 1, kshdra 4,
gamaf cdra 11, ctfda 2, jtlya 6, fmva 9,
/foa 1, jtirva 1, jdsha 1, Jrfpa 4, tara 2,
cfciAa 14, d£'ya 2, drdva 11
dhama

dhdva s,

, dhanva 20,
naraa 2, //dya 12,
pata 2, pava 1, pinva 8, protha 1, bddha
5, M4/a 12, bhdra 120, bhdva 102, bhUsha
(1 bhdsh) 1, (2 bhtish) 2, marfa 1, manda
1, myaksha 1, mrada 1, y^/a ,7> y^"° *>
rdksha 21, rdna 4, rdc?a 4, roA« 4, vadta

io, #ajpa 1, vdrdha 9, vtJAa

p<in«a «, pdrdha 1, tfksha 26, pumbha 1,
ptfctf e, #<£</a 4, *4ra 1, «a^pa 1, sd'dha 2,
*f <£a i6, sidha 8, arava 14, svada 1, svapa

1, wara 3, Aara 2, hinva 1 Ara'ra 2,

kshipa 1, crta 1, to'ra 1, £wda 1, trmpd 1,
prcha », jt?rna 8, prvsha i, mwca 4,
mufica 2, mrna 5, mrZd 17, mrpa «, ywva

1, r*&Aa 1, r?g;rf 9, rwva 1, v«pa is, vinda

2, i>rpc4 8, t?rA4 «, «itfca 6, awaa 9, «r;rf

2«, aprpa 5, sphura 1 a#ya s, <7<2',ya 7,

dfhya s, napya 1, papya 7, yudhya a,
oaya 2, vidhya 9, aya 5, harya 7, hvaya
1 ; V. £cA4 5, uoAci i«, gacha 6, yacha 21.

3. Sing. I. aftu 1, tfotfw iee, elu 00,
gantu 7, pdlu 29, y^w is, vashtu 1, vdtfw
7, v&w 7, «a#£u 5, hantu z ; II. jahdtu 1,
figdtu 2, tishthatu 3, ddddtu ie, dddhdtu
16, dideshtu 1, pipartu 3, pibatu 7, /«a-
mtfrft/ 12, mbndtu 1, mwnoktuv, yayastu

1, yuyotu 8, pipdtu 1, w&haktu 6; III.
apnotu 3, krnotu 11, cinotu 1, minotu 1,
prjidJw 24, sanotu 1, sunotu 1 grndtu

2, grhndtu 1, pundtu 1 anaktu 6,

prndkiu 2, wnaAtfw 4 ; IV. q/atf w 2, ar-
eata 1, dvatu 16, invatu 4, e/alu 1, &raw-
aata 1, jay aba 1, jinvatu 4, tapatu 3,
dhdvatu 4, nayatu 6, bddhutu 1, bhavatu

tasva 1, vardhasva 10, vrf-
hasva 2, pocasva 2, pra-
yasva 2, ^vancasva 2, *tf -
catfva 6, sahasva 4, sidasva
1, syandasva 1, svddasva 3,

hdrshasva a krshasva

1, gurasva 1, jushdsva 67,
nwddsva 8, prnasva 2,
mrshdsva 1, yuvdsva 6, v£
pdsva 1, vrshaeva 10, m«-

w/sua 1, 8rjasva 2 -^d-

yasva 1, trd'yasva 4, S«-
yasva 1, drhyasva 1, jt?a</-
yasva 1, pa^yasva 1, />yd-
yasva 3, vyayasva 2, syasva
2; V. icfui&va 1, yachasva?
fllshva 4, jtfni8hva 1, t?d-
sishva 2.

69, vena?

3. Sing. I. <foto2m 1,
vastdm 1; II. jihitdm 1,
dadatdm 1 ; III. krnutd'm

1, manutdm 1 strnUdm

1, Arn&dm 1; W.jaratdm
», pdvatdm 2, pinvatdm 2,
prathatdm 1, bd'dhatdm 4,
bhayatdm 1, yajatdm 1,
rocatdm 1. varuitdm 1, var-
tatdm 4, vdrdhatdm 4, sac-

atftfm 1 prnatdm l, v£-

patdm 1 rdhyatdm 1,

jdyatdm 3, trd'yatdm 8;
V. gachatdm s.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

244 J. Avery,

Present Imperative — continual.

33, bhUshatu 1, mdndatu 3, yajatu 3, (Suffix dm) duhd'm 3.
rakshatu 3, rohatu 3, vdrdhatu 3, vo-
hatu 3, pikshatu i, pocatu i, sadatu i,
sarpatu i, si'datu 3, sedhatu i, hinvatu i

trmpatu \ypinpatu i, mrZafi/ i, «Vl-

ca$« 3, suvatu 3 asyatu i, napyatu i,

pushy atu i, stvyatu i, syatuz; V. ichatu
i, uchatu 3, rchatu 3, gachatu 4, yachatu
is, flravftw 4.
(Suffix ftft) V. gaehatdt «.

2. Du. I. Axtfawi ia, gatam 64, gran- 2. Du. I. irdthdm i ;
«am u, pdtdm (1 />tf) is, (3 pd) to, ydtdm II. mimdthdm 3, rardthdm
108, vittam i, vftam s, paktam 4, «*am i, i ; IV. cddethdm i, ^ar*-
8tutam i, hatdm m ; II. jajastdm 3, /i- fAdwi i, bddhethdm i, ya/e-
gdUim \,jvjoshatam i, tishthatam i, tft/f- £A4m i, vardhethdm i, t?a-

Jdm 4, dhattdm so, piprtdm (1 />ar) 3, hethdm. i, smarethdm i

(2joar) i, pibatam 38, mimttdm 3, ww- ukshethdm iyfushethd?n\i,
muktam a, mumdcatam i, yuyotam 3, nudkhdm i, prnethdm l,

yuyutdm s, pipltdm (Ipd) 3, (2 pd) i, vrshethdm s trdyethdm

sisrtam i ; III. apnutam 3, krnutdm 6, i, manyethdm 3.

trpnutdm i, prntdam 30, hinotam i

apnitdm i, jpr/iftdm i, prnttdm l, *tfra$-

tfdm i yrnta^w a ; IV. ajatam i, 4vo-

iawi 31, invatam 3, oshatam i, karatam
lyjdyatafn^jaratam \ynnvatam^ tak-
shcUam i, tdpatam i, turvatam i, c%o-
te i, dhdvatam 3, nayatam i, patatam
i, pinvatam 9, bddhatam s, bhajatam i,
bhdratam i, bhdvatam 10, bhUshatam 3,
ydtatam i, rdkshatam s, vdnatam s,
vardhatam i, vdhatam 13, venatam i,
pikshatam 6, sddatam 4, sidatam 4, #£-

dhatam 8 ukshatam 6, ubjdtam 3, £i-

ratam 3, trmpatam s, muficdtam 8,
mrlatam i, vrhatam i, sincatam 3, *£^-

te 8 asyatam i, vidhyatam 3, *ya-

tam 3, hdryatam 3 ; V . gd chat am n, ya-

chatam n.

3. Dil I. ^dm 3, dugdhdiu i, pdtd'm 8. Du. IV. prayetdm i,
i, sastd'm i; II. dattdm i, dhattd'm^ sacetdm i — —jushetdm i,
piprtd'm i, bibhrtd'm i, mimttdm i, pi- trdyetdm i.
pftdra 3 ; III. ^rrcftaVw i ; IV. dvctidm 3,
invatdm i, karatdm 3, cetatdm i, a>rf-
vatdm i, bhavatdm 3, madatdm i, ra&-
8hatdm 3, vd hatdm 4, sadatdm 8, *f aV

&2m 3 trmpatdm i vidhyatdm i,

syatdw i ; V. gachatdm 8, yachatdm i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of tfte Rig -Veda.

245

Pbkbnt Imperative — continued.

2. PI. L aUd 1, ifci ie, &a i, fcarto 9,
Arte i, gata 19, grtfntVi e (gantd i), /wfta
(1 />d) s, (3 /x2) 9, 6rfWa i, y^a n, ?;arta
(rar*) i , pasta 9, sfcrta 3, hatd s ; II. tyar-
ta i, jigdta 9, juhuta 9, juhdta n, JtM-
tfata 4, datta 9, ddddta i, dddhdta is,
didishta s, dhattd n, piprkta i, piprtd
*,pibata », mumocata i, yuyota 9, p/pf-
£a 4, sishakta i ; HL tfrnt/fa i, krnutd 9,
krndta *, trpnuta i, dhdnuta i, prntUd
4, prnota 1, sunutd s, sundta «, hindta
io — -^r»fta i, grbhnUa ^jdnita i, />w-

»<fta \,punitd iyprnUd i undtha i,

yunakta 9, vrriAto i ; IV. drcata 94, ar-
*Aa£a i, at>a*a io, gil'hata i, carata i,
codata *,jdyata ^jinvata 1, takshata 7,
tapata i, tarata 9, dakshata 3, dr'nhata i,
dhdvata (1 dAdr) s, (2 rfAtftf) s, ndyata
«, nindata 1, pacata 9, pinvata 1, Mtf-
rata n9 bhdvata 7, bhiishata s, madata
9, mdnthata i, mriljata 9, ydcata i, r4&-
*Aata 9, rohata i, vadata s, vanata i,
vapata i, vardhata i, vahata s, pansata
s, pumbhata i, sacata i, sadata s, #ar-
potfa i, sapcata s, til data io, sedhata s,

tiobhata i, sredhata i ukshata i,

rHjdta i, khuddta i, £*rata 1, nudata i,
pinpata i, prchdta 9, prnota 9, muilcata
4, mrldta io, vrhata 1, pundhata i, */#-

cata 9, srjdta 4, sprpdta i Uhyata i,

gdyata », jasyata i, pdpyata o, /?u#A-

yato i, vayata 1, vidhyata 1, haryata*\

V. ichata 9, uchata i, gachata i, ydcha-

ta u.

(Suffix tana) L attana i, ttea 4, ^ta-
na s, kdrtana «, gantana 9, citana i,

yantana s, ydtdna s, pdstdna i, sotana i,

Aan&zna 9 ; II. jigdtan a i^jujushtana 3,
juhotana e, daddtana i, dddhdtana 1,

didishtana 9, dhattana a, dhetana 3,

pipariana 9, bibhitana 1, mamdttana 1,

yuydtana s, vivaktana i ; III. krndtana

», prnotana 3, sundtana », hinotana ?

punitdna i,prnftana i, prinltana i

anaktana i, pinashtana i; IV.

bhajatana i nahyatana 1 ; V. bravt-

tana s.

3. PL L adantu 9, ghnantu l, ctytfn- 3. PL II. tlshthantdm i ;
*k l, drdntu i, pdntu 4, bnivantu 4, y<m- IV. jayantdm i, namarv-

2. PL I. ddhvam i, Ci^
dhvam i, krdhvam i, frd#-
dhvam s ; II. tishthadhvam
x^pibadhvam i, raridhvam
i, vavrdhvam 1 ; III. Atwm-
dhvdm 3», tanudhvam 3, *u-

nudhvam i vr/*ftfltoam

i in dhvam 1, yurig-

dhvdm 8; IV. qjadhvam
i, k&h&madhvam 3, nay a-
dhvam 3, namadhvam 3,
pavadhvam i, pinva-
dhvam i, bddhadhvani i,
bharadhvam i*, moda-
dhvam i, yajadhvam »,
rabhadhvam 3, rdma-
dhvam i, vadadhvam i,
vartadhvam i, pray a-
dhvam 3, sahadhvam i,

svajadhvam 1 jushd-

dhvam «, tiradhvam i,
prnddhvam*) mucadhvam
i, 8iflcddhvam i, «?Vj-

dhvam i asyadhvam

i, trd'yadhvam i, <?aya-
dhvam i, *budhyadhvam
i, tfvyadhvam i, «ya-
dhvam j ; V. gachadhvam
i, yachadhvam i.

(Suffix dAua) IV. y<i-
jadhva i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

246 J. Avery,

PBismrr Impmuttvi— -concluded.

tu w, ydntu 1, vyantu 7, santu w ; II. tdm 6, pdvantdtn i, />?»-
tishthantu *, dadhantu i, pibantu 4 ; ITL vantdm t yajantdm i, ya-
apnuvantu 2, krnvdntu s, vanvdntu 2, tantdm i, lay ant dm i, wr-
prnoaittu is, sanvantu i, hinvantu 4 tantdm 2, vardhantdm «,

-pundntv 8, prnantu i afijantu prdyantdm e, sacantdm e,

3 ; IV. drcautu 2, drshantu 2, dvantu ao, sddhantdm i, sydndantdm

Jcsharantu i, gdmantu e, carantu 8, Jo- i jushdntdm 8, ripan-

yantu ^jivantu *, tahsKantu i, dahantu tdm i trd'yantdm 2,

i, drdvantu 2, dhanvantu 4, dhdrvantu pydyantdm i.

i, nayantu 8, pacantu i, patantu i, 6(5- (Suffix atdm) I. tratdnt

dhantu i, bhdvaittu w, madantu s, s/irfn- s; U.jihatdmi, dadhatdm

dantu 8, yajantu i, rakshantu i, radan- i ; 111. jdnatdm i indha-

tu i, rohantu 8, vadantu i, vapantu i, tfdm i.
vardhantu i, v dhantu 88, vdnchantu i,
pro&hantu i^sadantu a, sldanta 9ysedhan-
tu i, stobhantu i, sravantu i, svadantu i,

svarantu i ubjantu \,rdantu \ykr8han-

tu i, tirantu 8, bhurantu i, muilcdntu 2,
mrfomtfw 8, vi$antu e, sineantu i, *w-

vantu i, srjnntu 8 pushy antu i, ?//4tA-

yantu l, medyantu i; v. uchantu 2,
rchantu 1, gachantu a, ydchantu e, yw-
chantu 1.

(Suffix atfw) II. dadhatu 1.

E. Imperfect Indicative.

1. Sing. L dkaram 7, dgamam 4, 1. Sing. L akri^ayuji
apdm 18, dbravam 4, avedam 1, ahanam 1 ; III. aurm 1 ; IV. atrt/t
1, d'yam 7, <foam 1, karam a ; IL adaddm 1, dhuve 1.

1, adadhdm 1, ciketam 1 ; III. aprnavam

I, Arwavam 1 ajdndm i, dpndm 1 ;
IV. acaram i, ataksham 8, ataram 1,
adiyam 1, anamam 1, anayam 1, ajom-
vam 1, abharam 1, abhavam 1, aM«-
fo 1, arodham 1, aroham 1, asidam 1,
d'vam 2, yaniam 1 dprcham 1, rfrw-

^ara 1 dpapyam 19, avyayam 1.

2. Sing. I.^»,f/y^i,m(3^)i; 2. Sing. L dkrthds 1,

II. dtishthas 2, ddadds 1, ddadhds 8, dyukthds 1 ; IL adhatthds
apibas is, p/p<2i 1; III. dkrnos 18, dtw- \,amimithd&\\ III. adfttf-
nos 8, dvrnos 6, dprnos 4, dsaghnos 1, 7iwtfA<foi; IV. dpavathd&\,

dsanos 1, amw 1, a#r«o*9 dkshinds 1, dmandathds 1, drocathds 1

agrbhnds 1, aprnds 3, dminCts 1, amush- amuficathds 1 <(/<!-

ndi 1, aramnds 1, arinds a, astabhnds e, yathds^ aharyathds \>jd'-
ubhnd'8 1, raid* 1, prathnds 1 ; IV. dkran- yatJtds 2.

efaw 1, aksharas 1, dcaras 1, djanas 1, tf/a-
ya$ «, dtaras 8, ddahas 4, adhamas 4, rfna-
ya8*,dpinva8*, dbhajusz, dbharasi^ d-
bhavas 80, dmadas 2, dyajas 4, dranhas i,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 247

Ihprbfect Indicative — continued.

dradas a, avadas i, dvapas i, avahas 4,
dpikshas 3, dsadas e, astdas i, asedhas i,
asravas i, <J;a* 8, <2'/kw i, d't?ew 22, aw&-

,/a* 3, kdras i, bhdras 3 dkrtas i, dfo"-

ra* s, anudas i, aprnas i, amuncas s,
amr/ias i, arujas a, avindas 5, avrhas i,
dsrjas u, dsphuras i, vindas i, urpca* i,

«9o* 4 apapya* i, dyudhyas i ; V.

agachas a, aichas i, auchas a d>& i,

eodfo 1.

(Without suffix) I. afoir 4, a^arc 3,
dghas i, adyaut i, aytfc 9, cfodt i, <£Aan
is, A^tr 6, Aa;? 4 ; II. ajagan 3, tw;e* 2 ;
IIL dbhinat a, arinak i, avrnaft 2, w/ia/>
i,pinak 1, bhindt 1. ^

3. Sing. I. dpdtt, dydt 1, astaut 4, 3. Sing. I. akrtae^acash-
aite; II. acikitat 1, aeiket 1, djahdt 4, £a 3, ataktu 1, dyuhta 10,
ajigdt 1, dtishthat is, ddaddtz, ddadhdt dstita a, askrta 1, d'yukta
7, apibat 10, abibhet 1, apipdt 1, dadat 3, 1, atfta 1, gilrta 1, Arta 1,
p/£a£ 1, wvy^catf 1 ; IIL aArrnotf 19, atfa- ^</Aa 1, mrshtai, sUtai; II.
no* 3, ddhUnot 1, at?r/io£ 7, asanot 2, at- djihita*, adatta\, adhatta

not 1, atiraotf 2 agrbhndt 1, apraaY 4, e, dpiprata 1, amimita 10 ;

aprindt 1, abadhndt 1, dmathndt 1, am- III. akrnuta 1, adhttnuta 1,

maY 8, amushndt 2, dramndt s, drindt 4, dmanuta 1, Arnica 8

aprna^ 1, dstabhndt 8, dkrndt 2, auM- awrafta is, aprinita 1 ; IV.
nlft i,jdndt 1 ; IV. dkrandat 1, ajcrdmat akrnvata 1, atakshata 1,
3, dksharcU 6, agamat 1, dgHhat 1, aca- apirivata 2, abddhata 2,
rati^acetati^djanat^djayate, annvat dmanhata 1, dmatd 1,
a, dtakshat 2, atapat 2, atarat s, adaJiat dmanthata 1, dmandata 2,
3, addpat 1, ddravat 3, adhamat 4, ana- dranhata 1, arakshata 1,
wa£ 2, dnayat 7, apacat 1, dpinvat s, drocata^dvartata^avar'
abhajat 4, abharat 19, dbhanat m, a7>Atf- dhata^ dpapata 1, d'jatai>
shat 1, dmadat 2, dmandat 2, amanthat dyata 2, auhata i, caksha-
1, drakshat 1, arapcti 2, aro/wU 2, dvapat ta 2, janata 1, nakshata 2,
3, dvapat 1, dvasat 1, dvahat 8, dvenat 2, ninsata 1, bddhata 1, rejata

apayctii) dpocat iy asajat 1, asadat u, 8 ajushata^amuficata

dsidati, asedhat 1, d'r;a< 9, arca£ 2, d'ua* i, asrjata 1, drnhata 1

i», axihat 1 dkrandat 2, takshat sy tsdrat 2, djdyata 28, apatyata 3,
drnhat 1, naJcshat 1, nayat 1, bhdrai 8, amanyata 1, avyata 8, ^72-

r&AaJ 1, tf^Aa£ 1 dkrntat 2, akhidat yata 1, vyatfa 4.

1, dgrdhat 1, djushat 1, <f«/ra^ 8, dpih$at
1, aprna/ 4, amuccU 1, dmuficat *, wwr-
na< 1, arujat 1, dvidhat 10, dvlndat is,
dvigat 4, avis hat 1, avrdhat 1, dvrpcat s,
asincat 1, asuvat 1, d#r;"a£ 20, aspr$at 1,
asphurat 2, atikshat 1, aubjat 1, trnhdt 1,
iwaVfe 2, rt{/^ 2, vindat 1, vrpccf^ 4, «7&-
cai 2, «r;*{& a agdyat 1, adhayat 4,
dpapyat 11, ayudhyat 1, dvidhyat 4,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

248

*/. A very 1

Impbbfect Indicative — continued.

any ay at 1, avyat 1, asyat 1, dharyat i, <£-
hvayat 3, dsyali, pyat (2 pa1) a ; V. rfgra-

chat*, dy achat 4, aticfiat i adhvanit

i, dbravit u, avainit i, dvarshU i, dstam-
bhtt a, d'nft 3, cfffft 46, stdmbhit i.

(Without suffix) L d/rar 8, eigww n,
aghas i, adhok i, «t>ar£ 3, «Aan 3«, aAar
i, d* », A?ar 10, Aan i ; II. ajagan 5, a£e-
6A«r i, dvivyak a, r /v«* i ; III. aprnak
i, dbhinat n, ayunaki, dyrnak^ aunat
i, bhindt 8, rindk l, vrndk 8.

(Suffix «) I. <//>a* i ; II. adadhds i.

2. Du. I. dydtam 7, ahatam 8, d'stam 2. Du. IV. dbddhetMm

i, atom i ; II. adattam «, adhattam u, i anudethdm i, <fotn-

amumuktam 8, mumnktam a ; III. aAr- dethdm i.

nutam 4, adhxlnxitam i draw*Antom

i, arinitam i, atirw^am i atrntam i ;

IV. qjinvatam 8, dpinvatam o, dpratha-
tarn 8, abhavatam i, dtnanthatam »,
aradatam i, d$ikshatam 3, dsapcatam i,
d&idatam i, d'jatam i, d'vatam 33, a/ra-

tarn l-

• atiratatn 8, amuficatam «,

tarn ?

asincatam 3 ; V. ayacha-

3. Du. I. &rtaVtt 4 ; IL dvlvtktdm i ; 3. Du. IV. akrpetdm i,

IV. avardhatdm i, dvatdm i dmun- aprathetdm a, dbhyaaetdm

catdrn i dpapjatdm i. i, drejetdm 8, aikshetdm i

dhvayetdm «.

1. PL L dkarma 8, dganma n, ataksh-
ma i, dpdma i, dhema 3 ; IV. atakshdr
ma i dpapydma i ; V. aichdma 3.

2. PI. I. dkartas, dchdnta i, atashta
i, atoa; II. djaganta i, dtishthata i,
ddaddta i, ddadhdta i, ddhatta i ; III.

a-kfnitta i, a^raota i drinita s

apin$ata 3 ; IV. dtakshata 8, dnayata i,
dpinvata i, dbhavata*, dsarpata i, d'va-

£rt s aprchatai, dmuncata i, asrjata

i ; V. dgachata 3 abravita i.

(Suffix ^ana) I. dydtana a, dsastana
i, aitana 8; II. djagantana i, djahdta-
na i, ddattana i ; IIL akrnotana 8; V.
dbravitana 8.

3. PL I. akran 18, dkshan 3, a^<m i,
dgman 34, abruvan 8, any an i, (wan
(2 as) i, d'yaw sa, a"*<m *i, gman 3; II.

1. PL L aganmahi i,
dmanmahi ry ayujmahi i,
ahUmahi a ; III. avrnfma-
hi l.

2. PL I. dcidhvam 4,
dmugdhvam i, «yt#-
dhvam e, drddhvam j;
III. dkrnudhvam i ; IV.
ajushadhvam i.

3. PL I. dkrata 17, <^-
raato 9, acakshata 1, q/aw-
a^a 1, atatohata 1, apdsata

. Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of the Rig - Veda. 249

Imperfect Indicative — concluded.

atishtham, abibhrani; III. dkrnvan \ydsataiya%rata^krdrUai^
is, avanvan 1, apaknuvan 1, dsanvan 1, Janata a, takshata i, mrfl-

mvan a, minvan 1 agrbhnan i, a/<0- ^afa a, yajata i, yvjata 1 ;

nan*yapunaii\Jabadhnan\yaprathnan II. ajihata i, djuhvata 1,

i, 4«<rnan 2 dtrndan 1, dbhindan 1, atishthanta 1, adadanta 1,

avrftjanijdfljan^ IV.dksharani5yag1l~ dbibhayanta 1; III. ^Arn-
Aan 1, ajanan a, dtatohan a, dtaran a, t?ola 10, dtanvata 1, aman-

atrasan a, dddpan 1, adravan 1, adhra- vata 1, avmvato 1 a^-

,/a» 1, anakshan 1, dnayan «, andvan 1, rbhnata 4, amiminta 1

dpinvan 1, dbharan a, dbhavan 4, cf&Atf- anjata 1, ayufljata 1 ; IV.
Man a, dmadan a, dmandaa 4, aro&- dkhananta 1, ajananta a,
Man 5, dvadan a, dvardhan 10, avaAan adhavanta 1, dnayanta s,
a, dpansan 1, dsadan 4, dsredhan 1, <fo- dnavanta 1, apacanta a,
varan ie, <fyan 2, d'rcan », <f van 4, aij'an aprathanta i, abhajanta a
1, jinvan 1, tdtohan 7, bkaran 1, Mtf- abhayanta 1, dbharanta

8han\y8adani^#idan\, 8ran\ ajpin- dyajanta 11, aramanta

pan a, avindan u, avrjan 1, asican 1, drejanta 1, avadanta
asincan 1, avrjan 1, ukshan 1, atikshan dvartanta 1, dvardhanta a,

a, rujan 1 ajUryan 1, adhayanf dvradanta 1, asacanta

dpapyan 4. dsapanta 1, a>aA<znta

(Suffix 4n) arcan a, vdrdhdn a. ishanta 1, aUhanta 1, ja-

(Suffix t«) L apu* i, a*u« 1, duhvs nanta a, prathanta 1, wa-

1, cahshus 1 ; II. qjahus 1, djuhavus a, vanta o, okananta 1, rno-

adadus 4, adadhus n, amamadus 1, n«wta 1, vapanta 1

avivyacus \ qjahus a, oaoW 1, vivyacus akrpanta 1, djmhanta ),

1 ; I V. akramvs a aivishua 1. atiranta a, atvUhanta 1,

avindanta 1, avipanta a,
asrjanta*, akuvanta i,foy-
anta 1, grnanta x^jushanta

s djdyanta*, dpapyanta

a, amanyanta 1, dvyata 1,
ahvayanta 1, jdyanta 1;
V. dgachanta 1.

(Suffix ran) L dperan 1.

PERFECT SYSTEM.
A. Pbbfbct Indicative.

1. Sing. <J*a a, cakara 1, ct*£eto a, 1. Singr. ^ 1, ^Ae 1,
jagama a, jagrdbha *,jih%la 1, tatdpa 1, foAe a, t?A<e i, coAre a, caAro
dudrdha a, papana 1, babhUva 1, 6a- i9jigye 1, tatane 1, tortAi 1,
bhdya 1, mimaya 1, rarana 1, riribha 1, titvishe 1, oooV ia, mame 1,
vivepa 1, t>eo*a a, pipraya 1, puprdva a. mdmahe 1, rare 4, pepe 1,

«apce 1.

2. Sing, iyetha 1, (iyatha 1,) cafofr- 2. Sing, ilcuh'e (uc) 1,
thaUjjagdftihaiyjaghdnthai^jabhar- (vac) i, ilpishe 1, Hhiske
tha 1, jigetha 8, tatdntha 10, daddtha 1, (van) 1, cakrshe 10, ct'cyu-
dadhtftha a, dddhdrtha a, ninHha a, *A£ 1, jajfiishi a, Jabhrishe
papdtha 1, paprd'tha a, babhd'tha ai, a, tatnishe a, dadrkshi a,

vou 3o

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

250 J. Avery,

Perfect Indicative — continued.

yayantha 1, yayd'tha 4, vavdntha 2, dadhishe^dhishet^papr-
vavdrtha 1, vivydktha 1, vittha 4, *a- #Ae 1, rarishe 1, ririkMt 1,
sdttha 3. vavakshe a, vavrshe 1, 01-

( With conn, vowel ») d'ritha 1, d't>- ui&£ 3, sasdhishe 1.
e'lAa 1*, d'sitha 3, uvScitha 1, cakartitha

1, tatarditha 1, dudohitha 1, babhU'v-
itha 2, rurdjitha 3, rurodhitha 1, «a-
vdkshitha 10, viveditha 1, vivepitha 3.

3. Sing. ana 1, dnahpa a, dndpa 1, 3. Sing. <fn<//6 5, <£;tc/p€
d'joa 11, ara 1, cfoa 2, dpa (1 ap) 1, (2 ap) 6, ararce 1, dnrdhe 1, a>e 1,

3, d'«a (I cm) n, (2 a*)i, 4'Aa 19, *y^a &^ 3> ^^ 8> #£ '» fcA«a,
d, uva"ca », wwc^'^a a, uvdha 1, uvdca a, tfce 1, tl/>c 1, tfA« s, ca&€ 4,
cakarta 2, cakd'ra 46, cakrdma 1, ca- cakrade 1, cakrame 11,
khd'da 1, cacdksha 1, cachanda 1, ccw- caArS 39, cakshade 1, ciA-*7e
kanda 1, cdskdmbha 1, clkd'ya 9, ciketa 7, cucyuve iyjagm6 i,jajne
30, (ciketa *,)jagd'ma t^jagd'ra (2 ^ar) \s,jabhre 1, /fyye ^jimU 1,
65 jagrd'ha 1, jaghd'na*By jaghd'sa 2, jujushe^juhvb*, tatakshe
jajd'navi^jabhd'ra ift, jahdf 1, jigd'ya 1, tate 1, lalne 1, tatfre a,
8,juj6shai,juhd'va*,tatdksha^tatar<la fast he 4, titvi&he a, l£*tir£

2, tatd'na n, tat d' pa 1, tatdra 1, tatsdra 1, aWe is, dddrpe 20, cfa-
1, tastdmbhae, tdtdna 1, tltyd'ja 1, tutdva dhanve 4, dadhe 39, dadhre
1, tutdda 2, daddrpa 9, dadd'bha 1, 2, dadhvase 1, duduh'e 8,
dadd'ra 1, dadd'pa 9, dadhdrsha a, cW- nanukshe s, nunude 4,
dhd'ra is, nandpa 2, ndndma s, nind'ya neme 4, paprkshe i, />a/>e 1,

4, papdda a, paprd' i,pipepa \ypipesha^ pdprathe is, (paprathe a,)
pipdy a io, pupdsha *,babhd'ja 2, babhtf,'- paprif paspape 2, pipipe
va 35, bibhdya a, bibheda 6, mamanda 4, pipishe \,pipiU 1, />«py«
i, matndrsha 1, mamd'da 4, mamd'ra 1, *ypece 1, babddhet, babhre
mimdya 6, mimetha 1, mimyaksha a, \,bheje^mame\z,mdmahe
mumdda 1, yaydma 1, yuyddha 1, yuyd- ft, mdmrjb 4, mimikshe a,
/>a i, rardksha 2, rar<fl c/a 1, rarddha 1, yuyuje e, yuyuve 3, yc;£ s,
rireca 1, rwraca 1, rurdja 4, vavaksha s, yeme s, rarappb 2, rdrabhe
vavanda 2, vctvcJrta 4, vavdrdha 3, 1, ririci 11, rurucez, vavak-
vavarha 1, vavdca 1, vawdra 1, vavrd'ja she s, vavande 1, vavne s,
1, i>cfo<fna2, vivd'ya 5, vivedaB, vivtya vavrb «, vduapc 1, vdurwe
2», mvesha ft, vivydca 3, vecfa 69, piprdya 1, vdvrje 1, vdvrte 7, t?c2yr-

1, pupoca 4, pwprclflc* 2, sasarja 2, sasd'da dhe aft, wc/e 20, vividk «,
11, 808d'?ta 6, sasd'ra 2, sastiva s, sdsd'ha vivye a, paprathe 1, pipriye

2, sishedha 1, sisdya 1, sushd'va 4. 2, pupruve 1, ptfpicud 1,
(Ending aw) tasthaH 80, dadau 1, aowr/e 4, 6a#ri a, sasvaje 2,

dadhau 2, papati, 1, paprati a, yayau 3. sdsahe sdsdhe 2, «r«ice 1.

2. Du. drathus 1, dvdthus\^dsathus 2. Du. dpdthe a, c?a-

1, iyathus 1, ishdthus 1, Updthus 4, #Ac/- kramdthe 1, cakrd'the 1,
$Aw* 21, cakrdthus is, cakhyathus 1, cikethe 1, dadd'the 1, c/a-
jagrbhdthu8 \,jagmathu&ci,jiyyathus 1, dhd'the a, mamnd'the 1,
jijinvdthus 1, takshathus 1, tasthdthus rardthe 1, riried'the 1, «z-

2, daddthus 12, dadhathus 1, ninyathus wd'the 1.
2, papdthus 1, paprathus 1, pipinvdthtis

1, pipy at hies z,petathus 2, babhUvdthiin

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of i)\e Rig - Veda. 251

Perfect Indicative — continued.

3, mimikshdthus i , yayathus i , yem dthus

3, riricdthu8 i, viddthvs i, vividdthus i,
rivydthus i, seddthus a, akambhdthus i.

3. Du. dpatus i, dvatus i, dpatus i, 3. Du. d'pdteT,cakrd-

dsattts i, iydtus 4, ilhdtus i, cakratus i, te 4, dadhd'te a, pasprdh-

rikyatus x^jagmatus i^jajfidttuf \jaha- dte i, bhejd'te i, mamd'te i,

fttf i, tatakshdtxis i, tasthdtus 7, dadatus mamnd'te i, yuyudhd'te i,

i, paprdtus it petdtus i, babhUvdtus 2, yemd'te i, vdvrdhd'te s,

mamatus i, mimik&hdhts i, yematus 2, sasvajdte i.
yamdtus 1, vavaksh&tus 1, vdvrdhatus
1, sishicaius 1, stsratus 1, seddtus 2.

1. PL dnapraa i, ca£rm<2 29, j<zgan- 1. PL bubhujmdhe 1,
//u* 1, jagrbhmd a, yuyujma 1, rarabhr mumucmdhe 1, t>avrmd/i«
;/*« i9 vavanmd 1, vidmd as, vivishma f ft, dpadmahe 1, sasrjmdhe
sushuma 4. 3.

(With conn, vowel t*) drimd 1, Udmd
1, tidima 1, tasthimd a, daddpimd 1,
dadhimd 1, nindima 1, paptima 1,
yuyopimd 1, yemimd 1, rarimd a, vatwn-
efrtfia if sapcima ^sushUdima 1, sedima s.

2. PL anapa 1, andha 1, dnapd 4, 2. PL dadhidhve a.
tf*Aa 1, coArd e, doiitf 1 (imper. sense a),

babhUvd 1, yay4 is, tnc&f *, papdsd 1,
C€&a 1, *«fc* a.

3. PL dnaptis ai, 4nrctfa4, <^e, 3. PL dncyrei, cdklpre
firfo 2, dpttt i, drtfo a, dAifo si, £y*fc 16, a, cikitre a, jagrbhri ft,
frAw* 1, f&rtfo a, duw* 1, ttoAu* 3, *2M« 1, juhuri a, juhdre a, tatasre
cakramus a, cakrfa as, cikitus a, cikyfa 4, dddrpre ft, dadhre a,

4, jagrbhtis 1, jagmfa 1*, (jajanfax,) duduhri 7, nunudre a,
jajnfa4yj<zbhru8*i jahus ^ jdgrdhUs 1^ pasprdhre 1, pipipre 1,
jigyus a, jugupus 1, jvjush'&s Ayjajuvus mumucri 1, yuyujre a, ri-

1, tatak&hto 10, takshus 1, tastabhtis a, ricr^^rurudnrei^vdvakre
tasthtisM, tdtrshCcs 1, titirus a, tustuvtis 1, vdvapre i, vivijre 1, vivid-
t,d(uidp&8*9dadfa9,d<idhti8 9z,d<ibh'&s re a, vivipre 1, vivipre 1,
9, duduhus 1, debhus a, nanakshus 1, pdpadre 1.
ninid&s i, papus 1, paptiis a, paprus a, (With conn, vowel 1)
pipi<^\,pipyu%\,babhtiv'to*>bibhidu8 arkire 1, f?7re 1, idhir'ei^
s, bibhyus 1, mamus 1, mamrus 1, m>6 (erire?) u, f'pirc 8,
mdmrjus a, n?<2mrf&0 1, mimikshusi, tihire*, cakrire i^jagmire
mimyfo 1, yamu8 1, yayw* n, yilyudhus a, jqjfliri s, jabhrire a,
3, yemti* 4, rdradhus 1, riripus 1, rwrt«j- jihilire 1, tatakshire 1, tafn-
ti* 6, rurvhu* 4, vavakshtis a, vavrjvs 1, t>6 1, tasthire^dadhanvire
vavrti8\9vdvap689,vdvrtit8*,vdvrdhfa a, dadhire**, dadhrire 1,
24, vidHsw, vividu8 9yvivipU8s, (vivepus dhire t,papire 1, bhejirk 1,
1,) vtvf«AtM 1, pa$&8U8 a, papramus j, mamire a, mimikahire a,
pdvadfo 1, ptJpwrw 1, pefak 3, sapcw* 1, y^i>£ ft, yemire 1a, rebhiri
sfisrHs a, sisicus 1, suskupits 1, tecftb 12, 1, lebhire 1, vavakshire 1,
*epu* 1, skambhus 1. vavandire 1, vavdpire 1,

mdre 1, sapcire a, «erft>e ef

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

262 ./. Avery,

Pnrecr Indicative— concluded.

(Suffix rire) cikitrire a,

jagrbhriri if dadrire 1,

bubhujrirk a, t>fot7ft"ire 1,
sasrjrire i.

B. PlBTBOT SUBJUWCTIY*.

1st form.

3. Sing, dadhdrshati *, vavdrtati 4, 3. Sing, vdvrdhate 1.
vdvrdhdti 1.

2d form.

2. Sing, tatanas a, paprdthas 1,
mamddas 3, mdmdhas 1, adsahas 1.

3. Sing, jaghdnat 1, jabhdrat 9,
jitfuvat 1, fctfrfna* 1, txishtdvai 1, <fa-
marshat \y' nepat s, paprdthat a, j>a-
spdrshat 1, mamandat 1, mumwrcti 1,
mumocat 1, pupravat 1, pilpuvat a,
sdsdhal s.

1. PL tofcfndwa 9, p&pdvdma 1.

3. PI. tatdnan 4, paprdthan
mamddan 1.

9, 3. PL tatdnanta 1,
dadabhanta 1, papra-
chanta f mdma/ianta 1,
rurucanta 1, udvapan&i 1,
vdvrdhdnta 4, vivyac-
anta 1.

3d form.

2. Sing, cakradas*.

r

3. Sing, cakradat », dtidhot

sishet 1 dadharshU 9.

(Without suffix) sasvdr 1.

3>

0. Pbkviot Optativi.

1. Sing, dnapydm 1, riricydm 1.

2. Sing, pupushyda 1, rurucyds 1, 2. Sine, cakshamithd*
vivipyds 1, pupruyd's 1. 1, vdvrdMthd's 1.

3. Sing, anqjydt 1, cachadydt 1, 3. Sing, jagrasita 1,
jakshtyd't 1, jagrbhydt 9, tutiyydt 1, dudhuvita 1, mdmrjtta 1,

nintydt 9, papiydt 9, babhUyd't 9, pupucfta a.
riricydt 1, sasrjydt 1, sdsahydt 9.
(Suffix *) babhUyds 1.

2. Du. puprHyd'tam 9.

1. PL pdpuyd'ma 1, Mdsahyd'ma 4.

3. PL tatanyw 1 , mamrdyus 1 , vawr-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 253

D. Perfect Imperative.

2. Sing, pupugdhi. 2. Sing, dadhishvd 7,

mdmahasva 2, mimikshvd
1, vdvrdhasvat, vdvrsha-
sva 1.

3. Sing, babhiUu 1.

2. Du. vaurAtfam 1.

2. PL rardndtd 1. 2. PI. dadhidhvam 8.

3. PI. mdmahantdm 19.

E. Pluperfect Indicative.

1. Sing. acacaksham\^<xtKstavam\. 1. Sing, dpupravi 1.

2. Sing, abubhojis 1, dvivepis 1,
dvivtshU s, aiytt 1.

3. Sing, acakrat 1, adadhdvat 1,
dpipret 1, asasvcyat 1, cakradat 1,

tctstambhat 1, vividcU 1 ajagrabhit 1,

arirectt », dvdvactt 1, dvdvarU 1.

2. Du. dpasprdhe-
thdm 1.

2. PL ajabhartana 1.

3. PL amamandus 1, dpipraytis ft, 3. PL dtitvishanta 1,
apupravus 1. dvdvapanta s, vdvapanta 1.

(Suffix ran) dcakriran 1,
cyagrniran 1, avatfftfrara. s.

(Suffix ram) asasrgram
2.

(Suffix rawtfa) at?avr£-
ra;i£a 1.

AORIST ST8TEMS.

A. Simple-Aorlst.

I. Forms which add the endings directly to the root

A. Indicative.

1. Sing, dkhyam^agdm^agrcibh- 1. Sing. q;7mt 1, ai?W
am 1, adhdm 29 apravam 2, d'dam 1, 1, 4Ave 9.

cfam 1, t>am 1.

2. Sing, akhyas 1, a^a* «, «a*a> 1, 2. Sing, adhithds s,
a/H-a* 1, aMt^ », apre* 2, asthds 1, dsthtthds 1.

Md* a.

(Without suffix) rfAraVi 1, avar 1,
a*par 1, ana* 8, avar 2, 5te$ 1.

3. Sins, akhyat is, rf^a^ 89, ace* 3. Sing, akhyata 2,
(1 ct) 1, (2 ci) i, aoa& (2 ci) 1, aVfcft 12, ddishta 2, adhitas, aprkta

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

254

J. A

very,

Simple-Aorist Indicative— concluded.

ddhdt 7, dbhiU a*, dpret i«, aprpt a, ef- i, abhakta a, amatta r

^Aa< 43, rfAuol 4, ddotf a, &A#J a, <lA<2£ a. ayashta i, drabdha i, arte

(Suffix *) tf/wvfo io. i, tfvritoa, atrrla i, asakto

(Without suffix) akran l, dkrdn a, i, asthita 4, dspashta i,

dkshdr u, achdn a, aton i, otfdn i, ofodr dsrshta i, </pfta i, drta s,

i, a<2ar i, ddymit 15, adhdk i, t/prtfl i, d'shta i.

abhdr i, aMil i, dbhrdt a, dray ah i, (Suffix t) aAt>6 i.

ay<2n 4, apvait 4, cw^ar i, asydn i, <for<2&

a, f/*v<Jr i, dwdtf 34, dra/A ft, du«r 6, ftAetf a.

2. Du. dbhUtam i, dhdtam i, aprtr-
tom i.

3. Du.

tfdtft a.

1. PL dgdma a, dbhtima 7, dhtma
a, dhvdma i, efdma (addma?) i.

2. PL rf&Atfto a.
(Suffix fcma) abhUtana a, dhetana i.

3. PL akhyan a, dbhUvan la, avran
i, apriyan i, apvitan i, ahyan a.

(Suffix i/a) rfjTtt* 8, a<7*/4 i, ddhus ,
dyarnw i, asthus 25, r/A?« 10.

dnashtdm 1, anitdm 1, aAAtf- 3. Du. adhttdm 1.

1. PL adhtmahi 1.

3. PL atnata e, ahrsha-
a 1, ahvanta s, drata 1,
d'pata a4.

(Suffix ran) akrpran 1,
agrbhran i, ajushran 1,
adrpran 7, apadran 1,
abudhran a, dyujran a,
avasran 1, dvipran 1, a»rf-
raw 1, dsrgran s, dsthiran
a, asprdhran a.

(Suffix ram) ddrpram a,
dbudhram 1, dsrgram h.

B. Subjunctive.
1st form.

1. Sing. £rd/it* i.
3. Sing. 8thdti 1.

2. Du. dar pathos 1, pravathas 1,

8thd'thas a.
3. Du.

prdvatas 1.

2d form.

2. Du.

*A« l.

dA«*A€ 1, rfAat-

1. Sing. ^$m 1, sthdm a.

2. Sing, grd's 10, tarda* 1, a*d's aa,
rfAd* 44, ^?rd's 1, yodhat 1, pr^wo* 10,
tfAd'* a.

1. PL dhd'mahe*.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 255

Simple- Aorist Subjunctive — concluded.

3. Sing, gdt it, dd't u, dAd* 21, *ft
a, sthdt 6.

1. PI. gdma i, dhdma a.

3. PI. ddr^an i. 3. PI. budhdnta a,

mrshanta i.
3d form.

1. Sing, khyam i. 1. Sing, nanpi i.

2. Sing. Myefc 6,je* i, 6Aite i*, yaw« i. 2. Sing, nutthd's i, mr-
(Without suffix) Aran i, dAa£ i, thds\ymrnhthds\^rikthds\.

dhat i, 5A<2& 3, 5Ae£ i, y<& i, war s, t?arX-
s, *$ar i, *par i.

3. Sing. &Ayal t, 6Atf'tf 49, pre* i. 3. Sing, arta «, a*Ato
(Without suffix) dhak s, dAd& i, nak s, tu'Arta i, t>rto i.

4, fiat i, 5Ad& i, ohdr i, t>dr s, vark i,
*A*£n i, *fcm i.

1. PI. chedma i, daghma i, bhUma 1. PL dhlmahi m.
7, bhema 2, A<$ma 2.

3. PL khydn 4, bhdvan s, vrrfn 4. 3. PL bhakthata 1.

(Suffix u*) kramu8 1, ywa 9, dabhUs 2,
<7u« 4, dAffo 6, «£Ati* 6.

C. Optative.

1. Sing, a^yd'm 12, deydm 1, dAe- 1. Sing, atfya*.
ydm 2, vrjydm 1 bhUydsam 1.

2. Sing, avyds 1, jfieyds 1, bhtiyd's
1, mrdhyds 1, sahyds 2 dhdyts 1.

3. Sing. ayyd* 1, apy<^ 9, daghyds 3. Sing. ar#a 1, vurita

i, brdydti, bhUyd's b, yamyds *, vrjyds 2 grabhtshta 1, />a<£

39 pr&yds 1, sahyds 1. frAlrf 5, mvctshta 1.

1. PL agydlma 20, bhtiyd'ma 4, 1. PL apfmdhi 6, wap-
sahyd'ma 1, stheydmaz kriydsma 1. imahi a, nasimahi 1, /?rc-

imahi 1, mudtmahi 1, ya/w-
imahi 1, sirnahi 1.

3. PL apyus s, dheyus 1, sahyus 1.

D. Imperative.

2. Sing. 6odAi 9, yandhi 9, yddhl 1, 2. Sing. dhishvd s,
randhi 1, vrdAi 8, prudhi S8, sprdhi a. matsva u, tndsva 2, yd&-

(Suffix Ai) mdAi a, «dAi 1. shvaz, vdfutva*, sdkshva 1.

3. Sing. ddlu 1, dAdft/ », bh&'tu 19,
pro*** 2, *<ft« i.

2. Du. khyatam a, jitam 2, ddtam 1,
dhaktam 1, dhdta/n 2, bhUtdm 19, yan-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

256 «/. Avery,

Simple- Aorist Imperative — concluded.

tdm 6, riktdm 1, varktam 3, vartam a,
volhdm s, prut dm 31, *#<zm 1, sutam 1,
8thdtam 1, sprtam 1.

3. Du. t>oZA<f m 1.

2. PL khydta 1, #(2*/ 4, ctata 3,
dhd'ta ft, Mttta ia, yrfnto ft, prtrta ft,
prvfta 4, *<fca a, sthdta s, Aela 1.

(Suffix tana) gdtana 1, dhdtana 1,
bhUtana 3.

3. PL dfcdnJw a.

II. Forms which take a as a connecting vowel
A. Indicative.

1. Sing, aram 1, dvidam*, asanam
4, dsaram 1, bhuvam ft, vidam 1.

2. Sing, aruhas 1, dvidas 1, dsaras
s, tf'jt>a* i, bhuvas 3, v&ftfe s.

3. Sing, atanat 3, aruhat 16, dvidat 3. Sing. <fra*a 1.
», dsanat 3, dsarat 9, d/>«£ s, dratf 1,

bhdvat 4, inV&fr is, *<7?*atf ft, «frat 4.

1 . PL dviddma. 3, dsandma 3.

2. PL drata s.

3. PL druhan 3, dvidan 3, asanan 3. PL aranta s, a*ar-
1, asaran 3, <$pan 1, dr<m 3, viddn 1. antaf

8. Subjunctive.
1st form.

1. Sing, bhuvdni 1.

2. Sing, vidd'si 1.

2. Du. viddthas 1.

2. PL rishdtha 1, viddtha 1

rishdthana 3.

2d. form.

2. Sing, tucftl'* 3.

3. Sing, tfidtf't 3.

1. Du. ruhd'va 1.

1. PL ardma 3, radhdina 1, rwA- 1. PL pishdmahi 1.
<3ma n.

3d form.

1. Sing, ara/w 1, ddr^am 3, radham
1, rtiham 1, ruhdm 1, vidam 3, sanam 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Farms af the Rig -Veda. 257

Simple- Aorist II. Subjunctive — concluded. ■

2. Sing. hradoA 2, bhtivas 24, vidas
6, pi&has 1.

3. Sing. tanat\, bhujdt 1, &Ath>a£ 49,
bhrapat 1, rishat 5, rkhat *, wefrft 91,
prtivat 1, 8<ighat 1, *<fna£ 1, spdrat 1.

3. PI. ara^i 2, garan 1, dr$an 2, 3. PI. dranta 1, mY£-
bhuvan 7, rishan 1, vidan 1. onto 1.

C. Optative.
1. Sing, drpeyam 2, aaneyam 1.
3. Sing. viTfet 1, *a/i€* 1.

1. PL agema s, pushema 1, bhujema
5, ruhema 5, ^akema 4, mnbma 7, (ad/i-
e/?i a 2,) srasema 1.

D. Imperative.

2. Sing, sdra i.

2. Du. aratarn 1, ruhdtam 1, w<£
alaro 1.

3. Du. aratdm 1.
3. PI. prwtfawtftt 2.

B. S-Aorist.

I. Forms which add * to the root.
A. Indicative.

1. Sing, ajaisham 1, abhdrsham 1, 1. Sing. adikshi 1,
dydhsam 2, ay damn 1, avrksham i, arv&shi 1, dbhakshi 2,
dspdraham 1, ahdrahnm 3. dbhutsi 1, avitsi 2, asdkshi

1, asrkahi a, astoshi 4,
mami 1, sdkshi 1.

3. Sing. q;7ztj 2 (without suffix). 3. Sing. ay arista 6,

dransta 1, astaahta 1.

3. Du. a&vdr&htdm 1. 3. Du. antishdtdm 1,

dyukshdtdfn 2.

1. PL djaishma 1, abhaishma 1. 1. PL agasmahi 2,

abhutsmahi 2, dviksh-
inahi 1.

2. PL (htodhvam 1.

3. PL dchdntsus 1, dbhaishus 1, 3. PL ddrkshata a,

amataus 1, aydsus 2. ddhvJcshata a, ddhtirahata

(Suffix an) aveshan 2. 1, adhdshata 1, dnHshata

vol. x. 36

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

258

J. Aver if,

S-Aorist I. Indicative — concluded.

41, aneshata 1, amansata i,
amatsata a, ayamata 7,
ayttkshata a, drdsata 1,
alipsata a, dvikshata s,
avrtsata 9, asakshaUi 1,
(isrkshata ai, dstoshata 1.
ahdsata a, ahilshata 4,
afueshata 4.

B. SUBJUNCTIVE.

1st form.

1. Sing. Rtoshtlni 1.

2. Sing, darshast 1.

3. Sing. neshatiiypf(r8hatiiyp(l8ati
1, mat&ati 1, yoshati a, vakshati 4.

2. Du. dd'sathas 1, dhdsathas 1,
pdrshathas a, varshathas 1.

3. Du. pdsatas 1, yansatas a, yr/&-
shatas 1, vakshatas 6.

2. PL dhdsatha 1, neshatha a, /?dr-
shatha a, mdtsatha 1.

2d form.

1. Sing. nansai 1,
mansai 1.

2. Sing. drfohase 1,
prkshase 1, mansase 1.

3. Sing. ^ Jcransate 1,
trdsdte a, darshate 1, mari-
nate a, yan8ate\\,\yak*hak
1, rdaote *, variaote 1, *4M-
ate 1, hdsate a.

2. Dm trdsdthe 1.

3. PL

m/Twante 1, ww*-

1. Sing. oA£#Ai 1 (A/-
*/*e .?), &raAe 1, Ai»A€ 1.

(" Double Btems ") arc-
ane 1, r/i/a*e ft, grnUhe n,
gdyishe 1, punishe i, yaj-
a«e 1.

2. Sing, jeshas 1, vdkshcut 1.

3. Sing. k8/i€8hat 1, chantsat^jeshat
1, ddrshat*, ddsat (dd) 1, aVa^atf 1, wayfc-
sAatf 4, ntehat A^pdkshat ^parshat (\par)
1, (2 />ar) \%preshat 1, bhakshat*, bhar-
shot 1, matsat s, yansat n, ydkshat 13,
y<foa* «, ydshat 6, ra*a* a, v<fri«al a, 00^-
aAatfe, v&Aa* 1, pwAa/ 1, sakshatt, sdtsat
1, stoshat 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Vrrb- Forms of (Jie Rig - Veda.

S-A0RI8T I. Subjunctive — concluded.

1. PI. stoshdmas.

3. PI. parshamyyah8anA^yoshanf
rd'&an a, vakshan*, peshan 1, prdshan 1.

259

3d form.
1. Sing, yesham 1, stosham 1.

1. PL jeshmaz.

3. PI. dhdsus 1, yamhus 1, Atfou* 1.

1. Sing. t^<foi a, yansi
1, yakshi 4, van**' 1, vr&-
*A* 1.

2. Sing. cyosfuhds 1.
1. PI. hdsmahi 1.

3. PL dhukshata 1,
nxtshata 1, mansata f
matsata 1, rnukshata 1,
sakshata 1.

C. Optative.

1. Sing. dishiya 1,
bhakshiya s, masiya 1,
mukshtya 1, rdsfcya a.

2. Sing, mansishthd'si.

3. Sing, darshishta 1,
mansishta 1, mrkshfshta 1.

2. Du. trd'stthdm 4.

1. PL bhak&himahi 4,
manstmdhit, vansfmdhi 1,
sakshimdhi s.

3. PL mantfrata 1.

D. Imperative.

2. Du. yaushtayn 9.
2. PL naishta 1.

3. Sing, rdaatftfm 1.
2. Du. rdsdthdm 1.

II. Forms which add isft to the root.
A. Indicative.

1. Sins, akdnishami, akdtrisham\,
akramisharn 1, dpansisham a, a*dw-

isham a akramim 1 (for akram-

i[sha]m /), rdvisham 1, vddhim a.

2. Sing, akramis 1, dvcidhis », 2. Sing. a$ayiskbhds i,
amrshls 1, dvarhis 1, aukshis 1, kraniis apamishthds 1, d$ram-
1, vddhis a. Uhthds 1, jdnuhthds 4.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

2«0

J. Avert/,

S-A0R18T II. INDICAT1VE-

3. Sing. dkdrU\,dkramit\%ydgrabhr
U i, dtdrft a, dmandit i, aydslt a, dyodh-
it 1, ardvtt a, dvadhlt 6, tfpan*ft i, a«<2t;-
& a, dsvantt i, <2uft a, jti'rvU i, *dr# i,
vddhit a.

3. Du. dmanthishtdm ijdnishtdm i.

1. PI. agrabhtshma a, atdrima i,
dtdrishma a.

3. PI. atakshishns a, dtdrishus i,
adhanvishus*, anitrtifihva*, dnindishus
i, apdvishus i, dmandishus «, amad-
ishus i, artijishus i, ardnishns i, </rtfv-
itfAttj? a, avddishus i, asdvishtis i, tfV
i*Au# 9.

-concluded.

3. Sing. ttkrapUhtu i,
qjanishta is, adhdvishtn i,
anavishta i, aprathishtoK
avasishia i, dpamishta i,
dsahishta i, auhishta i,
krdmishta a, jdnishta 9,
prdthishta a, mdndishta i,
yamishta i.

3. Du. dmandisha-
tdm i.

Subjunctive.
lnt form.

1. Sing. davishdni

1. PL ydcishdmahe
sanishdmahe i.

2d form.

2. Sing. avishas i, kd'nis/tas i, ftflr-
iffAa* i, rakshishas l, vddhlshns i,
veshishas i, ^amishas i.

3. Sing, kd'rishat i, jambhishat i,
jdshishat i, tdrishat a, pd'rishat a,
bddhwhat i, ?)idrdhishcU a, ydcishat i,

yodhishat
sdvishat 6.

i, rakshishat a, sanishat i,

3. PL sdnishanta a.

3d form.

1. Sing. pdnsisham 6.

2. Sing, avt* a, *dr& a, &arAfo i, 2. Sing. w
mdthts i, mardhU a, moshis a, yd'vU 9, £A<2* i.

yodhts i, randhis a, vddhts e, adyfo a,
spharis i.

3. Sing, apft i, ^rtfrft i, cdrft i, 3. Sing, panishta
tdrlt 7, c&fo# i, flarAft a, mdthit a, wep# pavishta a, bddhUhta i.
i, 8vdntt i, A»taft a.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- For ins of tJte Rig- Veda.

S-Aorist II. Subjunctive — concluded.
1. PI. pramUhrna 2.
3. PL jdrtshvs s.

261

C. Optative.

3. Sing, janishishta 2,
vanishUnta 2.

1. PL tdrishtmahi 1,
vandishimdhi 1, #<2A-
ishimdhi 1.

D. Imperative.

2. Sing, aviddhi 7.

3. Sing, avishtu *.

2. Du. avishtdm 8, kramishtam i,
gamhhtam 2, caywhtam 1, td'risfUam
2, mar dh is h tarn 1, yodhishtam 1, wa-
dhishtam 1, pnathishtam 1.

3. Du. avishtdm 3.

2. PL a&#<7 (for avishtd?) 1, vo-
dhishUi i, hinsishta 1.

(Suffix fcma) avishtdna i, rdnishtana
1, vadhishtana 1, pnathishtana 1.

III. Forms which add *«A to the root.
A. Indicative.

1. Sing, aydsisham 1.

2. PL aydsishta 1.

3. PL agdsishus 1, aydslshus 1,
d'kshishus 1.

B. Subjunctive.
2d form.

3. Sing, gdsishat 1, cdnishthat? 1,
ydsishat 1.

C. Optative.

D. Imperative.

2. Sing, ydsisishthds 1.

2. Du. ydsishtdm 4.
2. PL ydsishta 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

262 J. Avert/,

S- A orist — amUnued.
IV. Forms which add sa to the root.

A. Indicative.

3. Sing, dkrukshat 1, aghukshat i,
adukshat 1, ddhukshat a, drukzhab i.

1. PL amrkshdma i.

3. PL ddhukshan s, dhukshdn 2. 3. PL amrkshanta a.

B. Subjunctive.
3d form.

2. Sing, dukshas 1, mrkshat 1.

3. Sing, dhuks/cata a.
3. PL dhukshdnta 1.

D. Imperative.

2. Sing, dhukshdsvai.

2. Du. mrkshatam 2.

3. Du. yaks/iatdm •.
2. PL mrkshata 1.

FUTURE SYSTEM.

8-Future.

A. Indicative.

1. Sing. je8hyd'mi 1, vakshyd'mi 1, 1. Sing, manishye 1.
stavishyd'mi 1.

2. Sing, karishydsi 1, sanishyasi 1. 2. Sing, stavishyase 1.

3. Sing, karishyati 1, bhavishydti 3. Sing, janishyate a.
j, sanishyati 1.

1. PL vakshyd'tnas 1.

2. PL karishydtha 1, bhavishyatha 1.

B. Subjunctive.
2d form.

2. Sing, karishyd's 1.

E. Conditional.

3. Sing. abharishycU 1.

DERIVATIVE VERBS.

L Causative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing, iraydmi 1, eodaydmi 1, 1. Sing. kdmdye 1,
chddaydmi ijanaydmi 1, sildaydmi 1. >naye a pamdye 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Fot ms of the Rig - Veda. 263

Causative — continued.

2. Sing, cydvayasi a, marjaya&i 1, 2. Sing, chandayase i,
yavayasi i, vdsdyasi i. prathayase i, mahayase i,

mdddyase a, sthdpayase i.

3. Sing, dmdyati i, ingdyati i, 3. Sing, kdmdyate i,
tray ail i, cetayuti i, cydvdyati a, cdtayate i, cetayate\,pdy-

chadayati i* drdvayati i, dhdrdyati i, ay«te i, vartdyatefi

pdtayati i, marcdyati a, ydtayati i, vasdydtt i, pamdyaie i.

rejayati i, vartayati i, prdvdyati i

grbhdyati i, prushdycUi a, mathdydti i,
mushdyati 4, skabhdydti i.

2. Du. chadayathas i, dhdrayathas 2. T)u. irayethe i, Jaria-
i, pdrayathas i, varshayathas i, w<2«- ayethe i, dhdrdyethe i,
dyathas i napdyathas i. mdddyethe i.

3. Du. patayatas i. 3. Du. jos/iayete a,

dhdpdyete a, mddayete i.

1. PI. (mo») gamaydfnasi i, oaY- 1. PL Iraydmahe i.
aydtnasi i, cydvaydmasi i, ndpaydmasi

i, pdraydmasi i, marjaydmasi i, raaA-
aydmasi i, yopaydmasi i, ranaydmasi
i, vartaydmasi a, vardhaydmasi a, vdtf-
aydmasi i, vdmydma&i 4, vedaydmasi
a, svdpaydmasi a.

(ma*) cydvaydmas i, vardhdydmas i.

2. PL tray at/fa i, kopdyatha i,
cydvdyatha i,jandyatha 2,jivdyatha i,
pdrdyatha i, medayatha i, vartayatha
i, varshayatha i.

3. PL ingayanti i, tnkhdyanti i, 3. PL kdmayante a,
trdyanti a, karpdyanti i, kalpayanti i, citdyante a, cydvayante i,
gldpayanti i, citayanti i, cydvayarUi a, joshayante i, turayunte i,
chadayanti i, jandyanti i, d&shdyanti dhanayante i, dhdpayante
\,patayanti 8, pandyanti 4, pdraymiti i, dhdrdyantez, pdtdyante
\,maryaya?iti i, mddayanti \yydmayanti \>marjayante \,mdddyante
i, rdmayanti i, rejdyanti i, reshdyanti 6, ranhayante i, vdrdyante
i, roh&yanti i, vartdyanti a, war- a, pubhdyante i, prath-
dhdyanti n, vipdyanti i, vepayanti a, ay ante i, sardyante i,
standyanti a, sthdpayantii, mdpdyanti sddayante i, sUddyante i,

i, svaddyanti i, harshdyanti i, /i<fa- prushdydnte i.

ayanti i.

Present Subjunctive.
1st form.
3. Sing, randhaydni i.

2. Sing, coddydsi i, mrldydsi a. 2. Sing, kdmdydse i,

coddydse a, joshdydse a,
mdddydse a, ydtaydse i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

264 •/. Awry,

Causative — continued.

3. Sing kalpdydti s, pdraydti i, 3. Sing, ankhdydte i,
mrldydti a, s&daydti a. codaydte i, ehandaydte i,

dhdraydte i, mdddydte i,
vartaydte i.

I. Du. inkhaydvahai
i, kalpaydvahai t.

3. Du. kUlaydtas i. 3. Du. mdddyaite i.

2. PI. chaddydtha i. 2. PL kdmdyddhve i,

mddayddhve i mdday-

ddhvai a.
2d form.

2. Sing, yodhdyds i.

3. Sing, coddydt i, pdrdydt i, mare-
aytftf i, sddaydt i.

1. Du. irdydva i.

1. PL fraydma i, dhdraydma i.

3d form.

1. Sing, tray am a, manhdyam i,
mahayam i.

2. Sing, kopayas i, ghoshdyas i, 2. Sing, dhdrdyathdsh
coddyas 4, dipayas i, barhdyas a, vdV

«yo* i, pnathayas i.

3. Sing, fkshdyat i, irayat i, kshep- 3. Sing, janayata a.
ay at i, citayat a, cetayat i, codayat a,

chadayat a, dhdrdyat a, patayat*, pan-
ay at i, poshayat i, rejayat a, vartayat

i, pardhdyat i dhvanaytt i

mathdydt i.

3. PL arshayan? dhandyan i, 3. PL ishdyanta a, Ir-
marjayan i, mahayan i, fanayan i, ayanta i, ukshdyanta i,

vartayan w^svanayan? prushdyan*. jandyanta a, tarpayanta

\,dasay anta \,dyntay anta
i, dravayanta i, dhan-
dyanta i, pandyanta a,
marjayanta 6, mahayanta
i , randy anta », pjibhdyan ta
i, pnathayanta i, prat fl-
ay anta a, svadayanta i,
harayanta i, har shay anta
i prushdyanta i.

Present Optative.

2. Sing, dhdrayes i.

3. Sing, sprhayet i.

1. PL citdyema a, niarjayema i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 265

C A U8ATIVE — continued.
Present Imperative.

2. Sing. ardaya*,arpaya\,ingaya 2. Sing, irayasva a,
i, inbhayaz, tray a la, kalpaya i, brand- balpayasva a, cdtdyasva
ay a i, kshaydya i, gamaya i, gdmaya a, janayasva i, prath-
i, cabshaya a, coddya 19, cydvaya 2, ayasva i, mdddyaxva is,

jandya 6,jambhdya a, tarpdya 1, topaya ydvayasva 1, randhayasva
1, dambhaya a, drdvdya 1, dharshayaf 1, vardhayasva 1, sparp-
dhdpaya 1, dhdrdya 18, ndpaya 1, />«r- ayasva 1, spdpdyasva 1.
aya / pdydya 4, pdrdya a, bar hay a 4,
bodhayas, manhaya 1, mardayaf mah-
aya 4, mrldya u, ydtaya 1, ydmaya 1,
ydvdya 8, yodhdya 1, ranaya 1, randh-
ay a 7, ramdya 1, rdmaya 1, rocaya a,
rohaya 1, vartdya 11, vardhdya is,
vdtaya 1, vdpaya 1, vdsaya 4, vepaya
1. vyathaya i, gamaya 7, pocaya 1,
prdvaya a, pvdsaya 1, sdddya a, sddhaya
4, sildaya a, standya 1, svadaya 1, «wfy>-

aya 1, harshaya a grbhdyd is, mush-

dyd 1, vrshdya 1, prathdya a.

3. Sing, balpayatu 1, cydvayatu 1.

2. Du. arpayatam 1, trayatam 1, 2. Du. cetayethdm 1,
coddyatam 1, janayatam 1, jarnbh- tarpayethdm a, dhdrdye-
dyatam 1, dhdrayatam *,pdrayatam 1, M<2m 1, mdddyethdm*.
vartdyatarn 1, vardhdyatam a, varsh-

ayatam 1, pravayatam 1, sddhdyatam 1.

3. Dil dhdrayatdm 1.

2. PI. ildyata 1, coddyata a, ^an- 2. PI. trayadhvam 1,
ayatfa a, bodhayata 1, bhdjayata 1, rarZ- cetdyadhvam 1, dhdraya-

dyata 1, vartdyata 1, sdddyata 1 dhvam\ymarjay«dhvam\,

grbhdydta a, sbabhdyata 1. ntdddyadhvam a, «d</-

ayadhvam 1.

3 PL dhdrayantu i, mddayantu 1, 3. PI. mddayantdm a.
mrlayiintu 4, yavayantu a, randyantu
1, vartayantu a, vardhayantu 1, pundh-
ayuntu 1, siidayantu a.

Imperfect Indicative.

1. Sing, ajanayam a, abhakshayam
i,arandhayam 1, aprdvayam 1, alrayam
1, dhdrayam 5, randhayam a, vaksh-
ayam 1.

2. Sing, dbrandayas 1, dcodayas 1, 2. Sing. ajanayathds\.
djanayas a, atarpayas 1, ddhdrayas 7,

andpayas 1, aprathayas a, dbodhayas a,

dyodhayas a, drandhayas a, dramayas

vol. x. 37

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

208

J. Avery,

8. Sing, atrayata i.

Cacsativb — continued.

i, drocayas a, ar okay as a, arcayas i,
ardayas a, dvartayas 4, dvardhayas «,
avdpayas i, dvdsayas a, avepayas i,
asddayas? asvdpayas? ardayas i,
dvayas i, airayas a, coddyas i, jandyas
i, dambhdyas a, darayas l, dhdrayas a,
dhvasayas i, randhdyas i, rohayas a,

vartayas i, pvancdyas i apdyas i,

a^rathdyas i, axtabhdyas i, mushdyds
a, stabhdyas i.

3. Sing, akalpayat i, dkshodayat i,
acakshayat i, ace fay at a, acodayat i,
acydvayat i, djanayat e, atarpayat i,
ddhdrayat 8, adhvanayat i, dnamayat
i, dpddayat i, apdrayat a, dphdnayat i,
drandhayat a, arocayat e, drodayat a,
dvartayat «, dvardhayat a, dvdsayat
(3 w/*) i, (2 ucw) a, asddayat a, <fo?7tf-
ayatf i, asvadayat i, dsvdpayat a, tf'm-
ayotf i, dWdayat i, dvayat i, air ay at 9,
jandyat 4, dambhdyat i, darayat i,
dyotayat i, dhdrdyat a, patdyat i,
prat hay at i, randhayat i, rdmdyat i,
rocayat a, rohayat i, vdsayat i, $t/e7-

4ya£ i, miehayat i dskabhdyat i,

astabhdyat a, prushdyat i, mnshdydt a,
skabhdyat a, stabhdyat a.

2. Du. ddhdmyatami,airayatam6. 2. Du. avdrayethdmi,

abrayethdm a.

2. PI. asthdpaya-
dhvam i.

3. PI. akalpayan a, akrandayan i, 3. PI. djanayanta 6,
achadayan i, djanayan% ddhdrayan^ ddhdrayanta a, </y*ft-
dprathayan i, dmehayan i, dra nay an ayauta i, aranhayanta i,
i, drandhayan i, dvardhayan 7, </wfa- asddayanta a, asdrayanta
ayan \,janayan i, dhdrayan 8. i, dsddayanta i, asthd]*

ay ant a a, airaya?Ua i, ;an-
dyanta u, dhdrdyanta 6,

naddyanta i, patdyanta i,
marjayanta i.

Aorist Indicative.

1. Sing, actkrsham i, avocam a,
airani i, cakaram i.

2. Sing, acikradas i, djijanas a,
dtishthipas i, ^fo« i, didyutas i,
nandmas a, sishvapas i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of t/te Rig -Veda.

267

Causative — continued.

(Without Huffix) ajtgar i, didhar 1,
siishvap a.

3. Sing, acikitat i, acikradat n,
dcukrudhat i, djijanat 8, dtishthipat i,
ddidyutaJb i, adidharat i, adudrot i,
adiidushat i, aninapat i, dnHnot i,
apaptat i, apipatat i, dpupot i, abtibudh-
at i, driramat a, drtimcat a, avivapat 6,
avivipat*, avivrtat\y dvivrdhatb, dvocat
a, dpipvitat i, asishyadat », dmnmat a,
a«Vo£ 5, jfjanat 5, tftf^otf a, didhar at i,
bibhayat i, vavrfotf i, voVaf s, pipndthat

-acucyavit i.
(Without suffix) (ijtgar u.

2. Du. dtatamatam i.

1. PL atitrshdma i, dvocdma e.

2. PI. acucyavitana a.

3. PI. dcikradan i, djtjanan
apaptan 4, apfparan i, avivatan
avfvapan i, avivipan i, dvivrdhan
dvocan 6, dptipubhan iyjijanan s.

(Suffix w*) dct/cyautt* ».

2. PL dvivrdhadhvami.

a, 3. PL ddadrhanta i,
i, dmimadanta i, dvivap-
6, awto i, dvivrdhanta i,

dvocanta i, dsishyadanta

\,j$jananta i.

Aorist Subjunctive.

1st form.

1. Sing, riradhd i, yocd a.

3. Sing. dOclpdti i, pisprpati i,
v(5cal£ 6, vocdti i, sishadhdti i.

2d form.

1. PI. cukrudhdma a, rlramdma i,
vocdma », tishadhdma i.

3d form.

1. Sing, cukrudham i, jijanam i,
didharam i, vocam ia.

2. Sing, cikitas i, cikradas i, ct'A:-
shipas i, jihvara* \,jihipa8 i, didipas i,
didyutas i, di'dfiaras i, ninamas i,
nfnapas i, paptas \,pisprpas i, piparas
a, mtmrshas i, riradhas 4, ririshas 7,
vivijas i, vooow 10, pipnathasA, piprdthas
4, sishadhas i.

3. Sing. %rat\^<?ufiyavat\,thhthij)at
i, didharat i, dudrdvat a, dudushat i,

Sing, tatdpate i.
Du. vocdvahai i.

1 . Sing, voce 8.

2. Sing. bibhishathds i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

268 «/. Avery,

C a U8ATIVB — concluded.

ntinot \,pipr<'iy<it*, piparat*, mimayat i,
yiiyot i, rtradhttt i, rlrishat i, vavartat
6, vocat », piprathat a, nishvadat i, *u-
*ro£ i.

3. PI. paptan a, rframan 4, vocan a. 3. PI. cakrpdnta i,

cdkramanta *,jtj<tna?ita\,
vdcanta 4, sishapanta i.

Aorist Optative.

1. Sing, vaortyd'm », vocet/am a. 1. Sing. vavrtiya »,

voceya a.

2. Sing, pupuryds i, ririshes i, 2. Sing. 8dsah/Uhthds\.
vavrtyds 5, vocfo a.

3. Sing, navrtydt 4. 3. Sing, vavrttta i

riris/ushta i, ririshUhta i.

2. Du. vocetam i.

1. PI. vavrtydma i, vocema 6, l. PI. cucyavimahi i,
(vdcema i). vavrtimahi i, vocemahi i.

3. PI. vavrtyiw 8, voceyus i. 3. PI. cupyavirata i.

Aoribt Imperative.

2. Sing, vocatdi i.

3. Sing, vocatfw i.

2. Du. jigrtdm a, didhrtam a,
rtradhatam a, vocatam i.

2. PI. jigrtd i, paptata i, ririshata
i, riradhata i, vocata it vavrfcrna i.

3. PI. pUptirantu i, piprathantu i.

S-Future Indicative.

2. Sing. vdsayish-
ydse a.

3. Sing, dhdrayishydti i.

n. Desiderative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing. didhishdmi i. l. Sing, vivdte*.

2. Sing, inakshasi i, lyakshasi s, 2. Sing, figtshase i.
jighdnsasi i, diteasi 5, nmtshasi i,

vivdsasi 5, 8ishdsasi a.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of the Rig - Veda. 269

Dbsidbrative — continued.

3. Sing. figMnsati 6, tH'turshati i, 3. Sing, cikt&hate a,

]>ipdsati i, pipUhati i, ptprUhati i, titikshate i, dhitscUe i,

mimikshati i, riritohati i, vivdsati la, vwdsate a.
stshdsati s.

2. Da. dhitscUhas i, vivdsathas i.

3. Du. juguk8hata8 i, ytiyiXshatas*,
v'ivdsata8 i.

1. PI. eikitsdmas i. 1. PL dulhishdmahe i.

3. PI. iyakshanti i, didhishantx i, 3. PI. tUikshante i,
dipsanti t, vivdeanti t. didrks/umte i, didhi-

shante a.

Present Subjunctive.

2d form.

3. Sing, titrpsdt i, mnitsdt i,
I'wdsdt a.

3. PI. lyakshdn i, titrtsdu i, tutxfo-

3d form.
3. Sing. SrcafoAatf i, cikitsat i.

3. PL apsanta i, <#-
dhishanta i, sl'kshanta i.

Present Optative.
1. Sing, dfoseyam i, vivdseyam l. 1. Sing, didhisheya i.

3. Sing, vivdset a.

1. PL didhishema i, vivdsema a.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing. cikitea a, mimiksha l,
viwfoa s.

2. Du. mimik&hatam 4, sishds-
atom 1.

3. Du. mimikshatdm a.

2. PL vivdtata*.

3. PI. didhisJumtu 1.

Imperfect Indicative.

2. Sing. dsishds<X8 1.

3. Sing. cyighdnsat 1, asishdacU 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

270 «/. Avery,

Desiderattve— concluded.

3. PL dyuyutmn i, dsishdsan i,
bibhitsan 1.

Perfect Indicative.
3. PL mimikshus ».

m. Intensive.
Present Indicative.

1. Sing, carkarmi i, cdkapfmi 3, 1. Sing, joguve i,
jdhavimi n, dardarimi i. di'dhye 3.

2. Sing. alarshi i, ircyydsi », 2. Sing. ^'yowe 16,
ddrdarshi i, ddrdharshi i. cosJtkHydse i.

3. Sing. d&zrfc' i, irqjydti 3, 3. Sing. i'ycrfe a*,
kdnikranti a, ganiganti i, c^iap^i i, coshkHydte i, tetikte i,
janghanti i, jarbhttriti i, jdhaviti 6, dedishte i, ndmnaU i,

tartariti i, dardariti i, dodhaviti i, marmrjydte 3, rerihydte i,

n(i»*nam^t i, ndnaviti i. pdpatiti i, vevijydte i, veviyute i,
bobhaviti i, yamyamtti i, rdraptti l, *ar*rte i.

rdraviti 4, varivarti i, vdrvarti i, (Suffix «) jdngahe i,

vdvaditi i, trevett 2, soshavtti 1. joguve 1, badbadhe 3,

bdbadhe 3, yoyuve 1,

*ar*re 3.

2. Du. irajyathas 1, tartarithas 1. 2. Du. sarsrdte 1.

3. Du. jarbhrtds 1, ddvidhvatas 4.

1. PL nonumas is. 1. PL imahe w.

3. PL ddvidyutati 1, ndnadati 2, 3. PL t'yante 1, farftfcr-
bharibhrati 1, vdrvrtatfi 1. yarate 1, dedicate 1, marmrf-

ydnte ft.

Present Subjunctive.
1st form.

1. Sing, janghdndnii dtdhaydi.

2. Sing. (Mddyasi 1.

2d form.

2. Sing, cdkdnas 1, jcUgulas 4,
didayas i, didhayas 1, rdrdna* i.

3. Sing, canishkadat 1, cdrkrshatz,
cdkdnat s, jdnghanat s, dardirat 1,
davidyutat 1, diddyat 7, di'dayat s,
parpharat 1, bdrbrhat 1, mdrmrjat 1,
rdrdnat 2, sanishvanat 1.

1. Du. janghandva 2.

3. Du. tan&uaife 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Farms of the Rig - Veda, ill

Intensive — continued.

1. PI. carkirdma a, cdkdndma i,
veviddma i.

3. PL didhayan 1.

3d form.

1. Sing, dedipam i.

2. Sing. jDijDK j.

(Without suffix) cdkdn «, dardar 4,
cfar£ a.

3. Sing. didet\indvinot*iptpdyatb,
mdrmrpat 4.

(Without suffix) kdnishkan i, cdkdn
3, dardar i, dartf i, ddvidyot a, rdrdn i.

1. PL dldhima i, marmrjmd i.

3. PL carkiran i, pipdyan a, $6$uc- 3. PL irajydnta 1,
an 1. iradhanta 1, cakdnunta 1,

cdkdnanta a, jdnghananta
a, jarhrfhanta 1 , no?* wv-
arcta 1, pipdyanta t,
marrmrjanta 1, popwcanta
1 marmrjata 1.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing. cdkandhi 1, rdrandhfi
(randh) 1, (ran) », vdvandhi 1

jdgrhi «, dardrhi s, dddrhi 1, did? hi ia,

didihi 17, pipihi a, barbrhi 1

carkrtdt 1 — —didhaya 1, ptpaya 1.

3. Sing, dardartu 1, marmartu 1,
roranto 1.

2. Du. jdgrtam a, didayatam 1,
pipyatam 4.

3. Du. pipyatdm 1.

2. PL irajyata 1, carikramata 1,
pipyata \\pfcpayata 1, rdranta 1.

3. PL cdkantu 1. 3. PL pipydtdm 1.

Imperfect Indicative.

1. Sing, acdkapam a.

2. Sing, ddides s.

(Without suffix) ajdgar 1, adardar 1.

3. Sing, ddtdetz, ddtdhet 1, dpipayat 3. Sing, ddedishta a,
1, apipet 1, dmimet a, dtdhet 1 dnamnata 1.

djohavit 5, dyoyavit 1, droravU n.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

272 J, Avery,

(Without suffix) adardar a, adardhar
i, aoartvas i, cdkdn i.

2. Du. adardrtam i.

3. Du. avdvapttdm i.

1. PI. apipema i.

3. PL apipyan i, carkiran a, 3. PI. dptpayanta i,

pdpatan i djohamm i, adardinu i, pipdyanta *.

adtdhayus a, anonavus s, ardrantis i,
didhiyus i.

Perfect Indicative.

1. Sing, cdkana ^jdgara i.

2. Sing, dtdetha a, pipetha i.

3. Sing, jdgd'ra 7, davidhdva i, 3. Sing, /njpye ».
d&ddya «, ndndva i, ptpdya 10.

3. PI. dldiyus i.

S-Aoribt Subjunctive.

3. Sing, cdrkrshe *
(" double stem ").

IV. Denominative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing, manasye i,
man tr aye i.

2. Sing. adhvartydM s, irasydsi i, 2. Sing. tavi*htyd$e i,
ishanyasi i, ishudhyasi i, dapasydsi it diiehundyase i, durgrbhi-
prtanydsi i, bhuranyasi i, mana&ydsi yase i, nrmanasyaie i,
i, ratharydsi i. makhasydse i, vrshdydse

«, sukratHyase i.

3. Sing, aghdydti i, irasydti i, 3. Sing, ajirdyate »,
ishanyati i, whudhyati i, urushydti 4, ishtiyate i, tavishydte s,
krpanyati i, turanyati i, da$a&yati i, duchundyate i, dhiydyate
duvasydti 4, prtanydti i, bhishdkti i, ^panasydte^makhasyate
bhuranyati% mandyati a, ratharyatl i, i, mahtydte e, vacasyate*,
rishanydti i, vdnanvati s, vanushydti vanushyate i, vdjayate i,
i, valgtiydti i, vithurydtl i, vrsha.nyati vrshdydte «, pubhdyate i,
i , pratharyati i , saparyati 7, huvanyati i. $vapasydte f

2. Du. urwhydthae s, dapasyathas 2. Du. arthayethe i.
i, duvasydthas », bhishajydthas i,

bhuranydthas a.

3. Du. ratharyatas i, saparydtas 5.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of the Rig - Veda. 278

Denojonati ve— continued.

1. PL vdjaydmasi a namas- 1. PL vavrdydmahe i.

yd' ma* i, vdjdydmas i.

2. PL da^asyatha i.

3. PL arthayanti i, ishanyanti i, 3. PL indrayante i,
drjayanti i, kratHydnti a, gdiaydnti i, tdrnshante i, nyHnkh-
gopdydnti i, duvasydnti i, namasydvti ay ante i, mantrdyante i,
•i, sttjHtrydnti a, sprhayanti i. mahtydnte i, mrgdyante i,

vrshdydnte i.

Present Subjunctive.
1st form.

1. Sing, namasyd i.

2. Sing, vildydsl i. 2. Sing, arthdydse i,

nildydse i. *

s. Sing, ankhdydte i.

3. Dn. varivasyd'tas

2d form.

2. Sing, urvshyd's i.

3. Sing, apasyd't i, urushyd't i,
duvasyaft i, prtanyd't a, vanushyd't i,
vareyd't i, vastly dt i, pravaxydt 9,
saparyd't a.

3. PL saparyd'n i, saranyd'n i.

3d form.

2. Sing, irasyas i, UnayU i, rishan-
yas s, ruvcmyas i.

3. Sing, duhiydt s. 3. Sing, pandyata i.

3. PL turanyan i, duvasyun a, 3. PL rghdydnta i,
duhiyan i, namasyan i, saparyan i. rtayanta i, krpdnanta i,

tarushanta i, dhunayanta
i, bhurdjanta i, rucayanta
i, vanushanta i, sushvdy-
anta i.

Present Optatiye.

2. Sing, dapasyts i.

3. Sing, urushyet s, dapasyet i,
duvasyel i, sprhayet i.

1. PL ishayema i, tarushema i,
saparyema i.

vol. x. 38

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

274 ./. Avery,

Denominative — concluded.
Present Imperative.

2. Sing, ishanya 1, urushyd •, 2. Sing, arthayasva «,
gdtuyd i, gUrdhaya i, dapasyd e, vildyasva 4.

duvasya s, namasyd 4, varivatyd a,
pravasya? saparya i.

3. Sing, urushyatu i.

2. Dm uruthydtam », gopdydtam i,
canasydtam i, dapasydtam a.

3. Du. untshydtdm s.

2. PL ishanyata s, uru&hyata », 2. PL tilvildyddhvam i,
dapasyata i, duvasydta «, Jiamasydta vtrayadhvam a.

», rishanyata a, saparyata 7.

3. PL uru8hyantu\yvart'va*yantuA. 3. PL dhunayantdmx.

Imperfect Indicative.

1. Sing, asprhayam 1.

2. Sing, arandhandyas 1.

3. Sing, akrpayat 1, aprtanyat 1, 3. Sing, dpriydyata 1.
urushydt a, damanyat j abhishnak 1.

2. Du. avirayeth&m 1.

3. Du. urushydtdm t.

3. PL anamasyan 1, asaparyan 1, 3. PL ishanayanta 1.
turanyan 1, vapvshyan 1.

V. Pauhre.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing. Aft/6 1.

2. Sing, ajydse (aj) 1, (a/lj) 5, idhydse 11, ucyase% niyate*,
pdyase 1, mrjydse 1, yujydse 1, ricyase 1, rudhyase 1, pasydse 1,
sicydse 4, stUyase 1, hHydse 6.

3. Sing, ajyate (aj) s, (a/l/) 10, idhydte », ucydte is, udyate (nd)
1, (vac?) 1, upydte 1, uhyate 1, rcydte 1, kriyate a, tapyate s, ftfyafe
1, tujydte 1, dabhyate 1, duhyate 1, drpyate 1, dhamyate 1, dhtyate *,
dhriyate 1, niydte 11, pacydte 1, p&yate a, prcydte s, badhyate 1,
mucyate 1, mrjydte 8, yujydte 3, ricyate a, ribhyate 1, vacydte 1,
vidydte a, vrjydte a, pasydte 10, fitryate 1, prdyate 1, sicydte u, tdydte
s, srjydte a, hanydte s, hHydte s.

3. Du. ucyete 1.

1. PL panyd'mahe 1.

3. PL rcyante i, kriydnte *,jfLdyante 1, bhriyante 1, yujyante 1,
vacydnte a, pasydnte 1, hanyante 1, httyantt 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Rig - Veda. 275

Passive — concluded.
Present Subjunctive.
1st form.
3. Sing, uhyd'te 1, bhriydte i.

2. Du. Hhyd'tke i.

3d form.

3. Sing, stiyata i.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing, vacyasva a.

3. Sing, prcyatdm i, hiyatdm a.

2. PI. yujyadhvam i.

3. PL badhyantdm i, vacyantdm i, t>rpcyan$am i.

Imperfect Indicative.
3. Sing, aniyata i, amucycUa i, aricyata a.
3. PI. acyanta i, apucyanta i, aprcyanta i.

Aorist Indicative.

3. Sing. aA?dro# 16, agdmi i, aceto* 9, dchedi i, rfpant 6, djfldyi i,
ddarpi i6, ddhdyi u, dpdyl 4, dbodhi n, dbhrdji i, amoci% dmyakshi
i, aydmi io, «*yo/& 3, drddhi a, aroci a, at>dc/ e, a*roVe i, ai?eaY a,
r/pooi i, dprdyi a, a*ar# ia, d^oVft 5, atfdw & 7, atfoW i, dstdvi ft, ^A<^t?t a,
c«Ji *)jdni i,jdni i, JoW i, cforpi a, o'ay* (1 c?d) a, (4 <?d) i, dhd'yi i»,
/>d'a*j a, uecft i, sd'oV a.

Aorist Subjunctive.
3d form.

ghoshi i, c€te" e, chedi i, jdrayd'yi (denom.) i, JoW 6, dhd'yi a,
5AoW i, yo;7 i, reca i, roc* i, vandi i, t>arA£ i, voca i, pa7^»' a, paW a,
prd'tn i, «ar?i a, «dc?j a, s£<Wu i.

VX Infinitive and Gerund.

Infinitive.

Accusative. (Suffix aw*) idham i, <$Aam i, limro i, ndmam
i, pfcham a, miyam i, ydmam a, rdbham a, rCuham i, vipam i,
pubham io, sddam ia, spijam i, vareydm a. — (to) dd'tum^prdsh-
tum i, bhdrtum i, volhum i.

Dative. (Suffix «) oV« i, £a%6 a, krdme i, yrdbhe i, cdkshe u,
tire i, ftl/g i, tvishe i, ddbhe i, dfcpe 4, aVpe a«, dhfshe a, name s, ndpe
», nUafo i, /itide z,pfce \,pr'che i, Mw/£ n, &Awt>6 i, £Aw£ i, mahei,
mtye i, m£A£ i, mde i, mushb i, mwAe i, mr'she i, ydkshe i, yt/;£ i,
yt*dA6 i, rcf&Ai 4, rwoe a, ni/e i, vd'ce i, vr|/e i, vr'te i. w<fA« aa, ufofe
i, vtafte i, vfeAi i, po*« a, pu6A£ u, *dd!e a, stfofe i, s&ade i, skdbhe a,
stire s, apr'pe i, #yddi i, svei/e i, Ay£ i Mai a, tfa* i, ma* i, ya* 4,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

276 J. Avery,

Infinitive — continued.

sai i. — (ase) dyase 1, arhdse i, rcdse 1, rfijdse i, kshddase i, cdkshau
i, cardse %javdse i^jlvdse 39, ta/Vfoi 1, dohdse 4, dhd'yase 11, dhruv-
dse 1, pushy dse 3, bhdrase 1, bhiydse 1, bhojdse a, rdjdse a, vriljdse 1,
vrdhdse 1, pobhdse a, priydse a, sdhyase 1, spdrase 1, sptirdhdse 1,
hdrase 1. — (se)jishe *,prdkshe 1, stushe 4. — (tave) dttave 7, dshtave
1, etaue », (faf/tra (5 ud) 1, kdrtave a, gdntave 1, gd'tave 1, dhdtave
(1 c?/*d) 1, dhdtave (3 d%d) *,pdttave i,pd'tave 1a, bhdrtavei, mdn~
tave 1, ydntave 1, ydshtave 1, yd'tave i», ydtave 1, vdktave 1, vantave
i, vdrtave 3, vdstave 1, vdlhave 7, paktave 1, sdrtave », sil'tave 1,

stftaue 1, stdtave a, hdntave 10 dvitave 1, cdritave 1, srdvitave a,

hdvttave 1. — (tavai) dnvetava'i 1, etaval 4, <$tayai 1, gdntavai 1,
gantavai 1, dd'tavai \ypd'tavai 1, bhartavai 1, 7/iantatfeil 1, md'farai

1, ydtavai 1, sdrtaoai 4, hdntavai * ydmitavai 1, *r4vftat?ai 1.

— (taye) ishtdye 5, pitdye 34, vttdye n, sdtdye 12. — (tfyat) ftyai a.
— (aye) tttjdye 1, drpdye b, rnahdye 1, yudhdye a, sandy e a. — (#**€)
turvdne a, dhU'rvane 1. — {vane) ddvdne as. — (mane) trd'mane 1,
dd'mane 1, dhdrmane 1, bhdrmam 1, vidmdne*. — (dhyai) iyddhyai
i, irddhyai 1, ishdyadhyai 3, ishddhyai 1, irdy adhyai 1, kshdr-
adhyai j, gdmadhyai 1, carddhyai i,jarddhyai 1, tansayddhyai a,
tarddhyai 1, duhayadhyui 1, dhiyddhyai 1, ndpayddhyai 1, />i£-
adhyai s, prnddhyai 1, bhdr adhyai a, rnanday adhyai 1, tnand-
ddhyai 1, mdday adhyai 4, ydja dhyai ia, rishayd dhyai 1, twW-
ddhyai 3, vartay adhyai 1, vdhadhyai 1, vaj ay adhyai 1, vdvrdh-
ddhyai (peril) 4, vrjddhyai 1, $ayddhyai% pucddhyai 1, sacddhyai
1, sdhadhyai 2, stavddhyai 2, syandayddhyai 1, huvddhyai s.

Genitive or Ablative. (Suffix a*) tfr'aVw 1, pfchas j, pddas 1,
prishas 1, pvdsas 1, skddas 1. — (fo$) &o* 2, kdrtos 2, ksheptosi,
gdntus 2, dd'tos 1, dhdtos 1, y<fte>* 1, pdritos i, hdntos 1.

Locative. (Suffix 3) #*/u* a, cdkshi 1, orpi 1, aV'pi" a, dua%£ 1 m£

i, praddhi 1. — (sani) grnlshdniz, tarishdni a, neshdni 1, parshdni 1,
bhUshdni 1, pUshdni 1, sakshdni 1, strnfshdni 1. — (fczrt*) dhartdri 4.

Gerund.

(Suffix £v#) /ntfuo' 7, bhittvd' 1, bhiltvd' 1, mitvd' 1, yuktvd' s,
wr^<^' 1, prutvd' 1, hatvd! 3, Atto<2' a. — (tvdya) jagdhvd'ya 1,
dattvd'ya 1, drshtvd'ya 1, bhaktvd'ya 1, yuktvd 'ya 1, hatvd'ya*,
hitvd'ya 1. — (ftn) Ar^n' 6, gwtfvZ' a, gildhvt 1, janitvi 1, jmhtv? s,
jpfttu' 4, ptitvt 1, bhtitvi' 3, vishtvV a, vrtof 1, vrktvi' 1, uraAitu' 1,

skabhitvi' 1, Aaltu' 4, A/£w' 4. Compounded (yd) r/cyd 1, ^/^py4

1, tipyd 1, wAyd 1, kr'tya j, krdmya 1, khydya 1, gd'ryd a, gr'bhyd
3, gr'hyd 1, gr'hya 4, gkdshyd 1, cdkshyd 5, cdkshya 1, cd'yyd a,
£a/>ya 1, ttl'ryd 1, rt^'yc* a, dVvyd 1, dr'pya 1, pddya 1, prdthyCt 1,
bhidyd 1, bhU'ya 1, mi'lya 1, mticyd a, mu*hyd a, mr'pyd 1, ytf'ytf s,
rdbhyd 1, rdbht/a i, 1-hdhyd 1, ur'tya i, wr'tyd 1, vldgyd%sddyd and
sddya n, sdhya 1, ^d'yci 1. — (^y^) fryo' and fry a 3, gdtyd », dr'tyd 1,
bhrtyd 1, Atf/yrf 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya-Brdhmana. 277

II. THE VERB IN THE AITAREYA-BRAHMANA.

PRESENT SYSTEM.

Active. Middle.

A. Present Indicative.

1. Sing. L asmi*[<i]9 emi [4] ; II. 1. Sing. I. huve 2(3);
tishthdmi M, daddmi 4 [1], dadhdmi IIL t'f«« (1) ; IV. yaje
[a] ;" IIL fcaromi 1, yunajmi (2) ; IV. [1], raMe 1, Axave 1, ishye
jaydmi* (1), dhdvdmi 1, bhavdmi [2], (3), padye [4], manye 1,
rohdmi [a], vaddmi 1, srjdmi (1), «eV7c- A«</ye (^t1]-

<f//u [A^papydmi [1]; V. ichdmi (1).

2. Sing. I. a*i e (7) [7], nuAt (4) 2. Sing. IV. jdyase (1).
(imper.), y<&* (1), Aa^m (1) ; IV. arjasi

4, vadasi 1, stdasi [3].

3. Sing. I. aft* i,a«tti6, etiii?(i)[i]y 3. Sing. L <frte4, £pes,
foAelt 3 (b), dveshti 1, 9»at/^« 4, jo<f*i s (1), cashte 4, (ft/Ac 2, &rtfte 1,
Mtfft' 1 («), ydf* (<), vashti (2), pd**/ 2, yw/e (1), pcfote so, pete a,
8t'nUi s/ha/tti e; II. iyarti (2), jahdti hate 11 [\~\; II. tishthate s,
l> jiffdti (*)> jighyati [5], jighrati 1, cfafte o, dhatte 7, mimtte 7 ;
tishthatl so, daddti 2, dadhdti mi, III. apnute 48, tirnvte (1),
pi parti 1, pibati 2, bibharti s, bibhaiti kuruteuytanutet^dhunute
(bibheti/) e».«; IIL rdhnoti s, dpnoti 1, prnwe (1), #u/we (1),
17, krnoti (1), karotiw, tanoti^ dhinoti strnute 3, krtnite 3, jdnite
1, radhnoti m [1], vrnoti 3, pr/io£i 3, \,punlte*,indhe \yyunkte
sanoti 1, apndti 3, grndti 1, grhndti 11, s, ru/tdhe 10, rrw&te a; IV.
jdndti 5, jindti 3, prlndti si, pradfo' 1, ai^'atfe '» orhate (1), &a/jp-
strndti 2, unatti 1, chinatti 1, bhunakti ate u, kdnkshate 1, kram-
3, yunakti 2, rinakti *, urnaAtfi 1, ate 1, gdhate 1, cay ate s,
pinashti 1, hinasti 7; IV. ag'atf 1, eyavate w, jayate «, tarate
arhati 7, ayalz 1, a»tfto" 1, Uhati (1), 2, dikshate s, napate (1),
dAatf 4, krdmati 1, carati », cardti iso. nayate 1, pinvate (•),/?««-
is, japati «, jay at i u (1), jinvati 2, ate t< plavate ), bdahate 2,

jfoatf 3, tapati is [1], tarati 7, dahati 4, bhrahpate 1, yajate is, rw-

dravati 1, nakshati (1), nandati 1, ate\,labhate\,vandate(\\

namati 4, nayati 7, bhajati 3, bharati s, vartate 5, vekshate 3,

bhavati 2w [2], mrocata' 2, y</;ato' w,yde- vy at hate 2, pikshate 1,

«f* 2, rakshati 1, rdjati^ rohati i«, uarf- pobhate 1, pray ate 1, skhal-

ati 2s, varshati 1, vasati 8, vahati 25, «te 1, sy an date 1, harate 1,

pansati *&s, sajati 10, sarpati \,8kandati hesitate 1, gterate 1, ftWfte

a, harati 31, dipati 1, prchati i, mrpati 1, nudate 6, wt/cfe (1), mrty-

1, muneati », vindati 3, vipati n, *g?V/£* ate 7, muncate (1), vindate

*, sificati 15, sprpati 2, asi/ati 10, ishyati 1, *r;ate e, asyate 3, jdyate

6, gdyati 1, tdmyati 1, drpyati 1, dhoy- «» (2), dayate 1, dtpyate 1,

aJi 1, dhydyati 3, napyati 1, naiyati 7, padyate-2% liyatei, vdpyate

papyatii [3], pushy at i 1 fi], muhyati 1, 3, siiyate 1, hvayate n ; V.

rishyati 10, lubhyati 1, sivy<tti 1, *iyi// ichute 1.
4, hrshyati 2, hvayati e ; V. ichati 6,
ft-Aati 2, gachati so, yachatii, aniti 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

278 J. Avery,

Present Indicative — concluded.

2. Du. IV. jayethe (i),
jarethe (i).

3. Du. I. it as a, /iotas i ; IV. bhar- 8. Du. I. fp<#<?3; IV.
a^ow i, bhuvatas as, yajatas i, pansatas i. priyete i.

1. PL I. im<w[i], brumas*, upmost I. PL I. syHma/ie i;
(j), vidmasi ), 8masi*\ II. dadmas i; II. tishthdmahe i, dew?-
III. jdnhnas i ; IV. maddmasi (i), dmahe i ; III. kurmahe i,
pansdmas [s], vrnimahe (e) ; IV. ^ac-

dmahe io, huvdmahe (i),
hv ay dmahe (i).

2. PL I. s*Atf i (i), 8tha(na)? ibs.is.

3. PL I. ada)iti s, kshiyanti a, 3. PL I. <fcate 8, iyafr
k8hyanti a, ghnanti i, duhanti i, yanti a, ?/ate i (i), ghnate t [i],
89(e)[i], *<*;*£* io (a), stuvanti*\ II. ,/mAv- cakshate si, plavate i»7.e,
(rft5[«], tishthantii, dadati i, dadhati yuvate i, pere(perate) ieo.io,
t,pibonti a (i), bibhrati (i), bibhyati a; stuvate n; II. tishthante

III. dpnuvanti i*, rirnuvanti t, rdhnuv- a, tishthate i, dadute «,
anti\,kurvanths%tanvanth,minvanti\> dadhate a, bibhyate i; III.
rddhnuvanti a [i], prnvanti i, sunvanti apnuvate i, tanvate a (i),
a, stabhnuvanti i, a$nanti i, krinanti i, jdnate i, mathnate i, /wcM-
jdaanti n, punanti i (»), prficanti i, ate s, bhuftjatez, yunjate*,
pinshauti i; IV. ajanti s, arjanti a, rundhatez;IV. kar*hante
arhanti i, avail ti i, krdmanti i, Arop- i, kalpante &, kdiiksh'/nk
anti i, ksharanti a, khananti i, car- i, kramante i, kshadante
anti ia, jayantiz, tapanti i, taranti a, a, carante i, cyavante i,
dravanti a, dharantl a, nandanti (i), plavante i (i), rtiodatite i,
namanti i, rrindanti a, nay anti i (a), yqjante 4, rabhante n,
patanti i, pinvantl (n), bhajanti a, labhante 4, vadante 4, var-
bharanti jo, bhaoattti oi, manthanti 5, a/^e (i), vartante 3, ua/<-
madanti (i), yajatiti u (i), rohanti i, ante i, sy andante i, nu^
vadaiiti i [i], vapanti 7, vasanti s, awte i, mriyajite a, mi/fio
vahanti ai, venanti i, pansanti is, peof- awte j, vijante i, asyantei,
anti is), pray anti i, sarpanti e, haranti jdyante is, pa dy ante 14,
16, rshanti 1, kiranti 1, krntanti 1, />rc- many ante a, hvayante 4;
anti 1, lumpanti 1, sirlcanti s, gdyanti V. ichante 1, gachante a.
1, trpyanti a, dyanti 1, papyaidi 1,

mddyanti a, mnhyanti 2, vayanti 1,
8rivyanti 1, hvayanti 1 ; V. ichanti
1 (a), rchanti s, gachanti 8, yachanti 1.

B. Present Subjunctive.
1 st form : with mode-sign a and primary endings.

1. Sing. I. aydni a, fAsd/*i' a, ftray- 1. Sing. III. krinai a,
rf/u (1) ; III. karavdni a, chinaddni 1 ; vr^ai a ; IV. yff/<it »,

IV. jaydni [a], pansdni 1 ; V. gachdni padyai 1.
[1], yachdni 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya- Br&fnnana. 279

Present Subjunctive — concluded.

2. Sing. II. tishthdai\\ IV. jaydsi 2. Sing. I. paydsain.*.
i, bhavdsi (i), yajdsi i.

3. Sing. I. karati i [i] ; IV. ro*A- 3. Sing. IV. arjdtai
dti [a], [so.io]; V. gachdtai [ls.iaj.

1. Du. III. vrndvahai
a; IV. vahdvahai (i),
hvaydvahai i.

1. PI. I. aydmahai i ;
IL dadhdmahai [i] ; III.
karavdtnahai a ; IV. Ara^p-
dmahai i, smcdmahal i,
hvaydmahai i ; V. ?>A-
dmahai i.

2. PI. II. juhavdtha 2 ; III. Arrrcav-
aJAa [i],jdnd£Aa 1.

2d form : with mode-sign a and secondary endings.

1. Sing. stmhe (1)
(s£w«A-a-£).

2. Sing. I. Jc8haya& (1); IL £&A-
?A<k (1).

3. Sing. I. cwatf 8 [3] ; III. prnavat
(3); IV. arAd*(i),&rdm<fc[i], Aarifc[i].

1. Du. IV. jaydva s, bhavdva 1,
ponsdva ej.e, 11, 10.

1. PL I. aydma e, gdma (1) ; II.
tishthdma 1; IIL dpnavdma a, tow-
avdma 1, mnavdma 1 (s), jdndma 1,
mindma 1, prnacdma 1 ; IV. arcdma
(1), naydma 1, bhardma 1, ruhdma (1),
rohdma 1, nahydma 1, hvayd?na 1 ; V.
yachdma a.

3. PL V. gachdn 1.

3d form : like the imperfect without an augment.

2. Sing. II. yuyothds 1.

3. Sing. L gram; IV. Arara* (0), 3. Sing. I. affAto (i)[s];
cfttoal (1), rddhat (1), ravorf [1], roAatf 1, IV. jdyata (1).
JtVicat (1).

3. PI. I. arfaft 1 ; IV. arcan (1), 3. PL IV. nakshanta
^ansan [1], *fcftm 1, spardhan 1. (1).

C. Present Optative.

_ hanydm a ; II. 1

pibeyam 1; HE. rdhnuydm 1; IV. 1; III. vrnjiyam ( vrfljiya)

1. Sing. I. aydm a, hanydm a ; II. 1. Sing. II. tishtheya

1 ; m.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

280 «/. Avery,

Present Optative — concluded.

jayeyam a, vindeyam i, druhyeyam i, 204. ie; IV. srjeya 1, jay-

padyeyam 1 ; V. gacheyam 1. eya a.

2. Sing. I. syd* a; IV. &/<?Aet 1, 2. Sing. III. vrnjtthd*
druhyes 1. 1 ; IV. kshamethd* (1).

3. Sing. I. ar/ytftf 1, tyd/ 43, briiydt 8. Sing. I. dstta j,
16> t/dyd* l [9]> vidydt 4, stuydt e, *y<2£ epfta 1, eakshita 1 ; II.
78, svapydt 1, hanydt a ; II. jahydt 1, tishtheta e, dadhtta 1 ; III.
juhuydt 8» [1], tishthet «, dadydt ia, apnuvtta 1, kurvita it,

dadhydt a», /?/£etf 1 ; III. kurydt 4a, tanvfta a, grhnlta 1, rrw-

rddhnuydt a, pakvuydt a, sunuydt 1, fta 1 ; IV. iksheta a, careta

apniydt 18, krtntydt 1, grhniydt 7, i,cyaveta\Jayetaiydiksfi'

prtntydt 1, badhniydt 1, chindydt 1, eta *,plaveta 1, bddheta 1,

pinshydt 1 ; IV. cmetf a, archtt \,japet a, yajeUi a, yateta 1, vadeta 1,

,/ayetf 1, dhdvet 3, namet 1 , nardet 5, nayil 5, vapeta a, varteta a, t>e&*/*-

bhavet 1, manthet 1, ycye* 7 [a], y<2ce£ a, eta a, saheta 1, syandeta a,

roAetf 10, vaefetf 4, vo/>e£ a7, wcwetf 4, panset driyeta 8, mriyeta 4, t>tW-

75, *a;e$ 1, sarpet 4, sedhet 1, Aare? as, e/o 1, *r/eta 8, jdyeta 1,

^rwretf a, rundhet a, vindet a, vt'pet*, sincet padyeta ie, many eta 10,

8, cwy<?£ 11, rfayetf 1, dmhyet 8, druhyet 1, vd^yeta a, hvayeta ty

dhydyet 4, napyet 8, papyet 8, pdmyet a, hvaytta a ; V. gaeheta 1.
hvayet 1 ; V. *cAetf 11, gachet 4, yachet 8.

1. Du. I. sydva «.

3. Du. I. tydtdm 2, hanydtdm 1 ;
IV. padyetdm 1.

]. PL I. sydma 1 (4) ; IV. tarema 1. PI. IV.^dye/waA^i).

Si), madema (1). mahemd (1), ruhema
a), vidhema [1], huvema (a).

2. PI.

I. ^amtdhvafn

8 [81.6].

3. PI.

III. mathniran

3. PI. I. brdyus \,syuss; II. efac?-

yw* 1, dadhyus 4; III. kuryus 10, *?mw- 1, vrwfran 1, indhlran 1;

yw* 1, apntyu8 1, grhntyus 1, pins/tyus a ; IV. cy aver an 1, dlktheran

IV. careyus 8, jayeyus 1, dhdveyus 1, 1, plaveran 8, yajeran 1,

nayeyu8\, roheytte \,vapeytt8 i,vaseyi(8 labheran a, vaperan 1,

1, panseyus 3, hareyuse, srjeyusz, ishye- arjeran 11, lupyeran 1,

yw* a, dushyeyu8 1 ; V. re hey us 1. pdmyeran 1 ; V. icheran 1.

D. Present Imperative.

2. Sing. 1. t'Ai 5 (i»), ec?Ai 1 h], 2. Sing. I. cakshva 1,
ArtfA* a [aJ^'aAi 1, »dA/ a (4) [a], />dAi' (1), brtishva 1, yukshva (1),
ftrdAi 11, ydA* (6)[sl, v«A£ (a), trtAi [«j, r<fot?a (a) ; II. tishthasva
$tuhi 6 (1) ; II. tisnthd (s), deAi a [it a, pibasva 1 ; III. Arnw-
dAeAt a (4), dhattdt (ae.a), jo#a 1 (11), *At>a (1), «rni«Avaa; IV.
mamaddhi (1), mumugdhi (1), v%$ddhi pavasva 1 (1), yqjasva «,
a; III. apnuhi (1), tirnuhi (1), ArnwAi vadasva 1, va?wfcwva (1),

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya-Brdhmana.

281

Present Imperative — concluded.

(i), hum 4 [a], grnuhi a, apdna (a), vartasva i, prayasva (a),

grbhnihi 1, runddki [1]; IV. cam sidasva (i), svadasva (1),

iu (i), tarda i, dahai, drava[\\ dhanva jushasva u), nudasva (ii,

i), dhdva 4, naya (9), Mara (*), bhava vrshasva (i)ypydya3va (i),

•)M, bhUsha (1), raJcsha (1), rama 1 [a], hvayasva a.
caoa 1, vara (1), aaAa a (1), piksha (1),
*taV* (a), Aora a [a], tuda (1), <wya 1, &A-
ya i, papya a, vidhya 1, harya (1),
hvaya 1 ; V. gacha 1 [a], yacha (4).

3. Sing. I. aWw [1], a**«/ 14 (s) [5], 3. Sing. IV. kalpatdm
eta 1 (i9)[ij, /><fttt 1 (1), ya^w (»), hantu [1], vartatdm [j], mriya-
1 ; II. jighyatu [•], pibatu (a), daddtu tdm s, jdyatdm 7, hvaya-
(1) [a], dadhdtu (1); III. dpnotu 1, $a*m [s].
prnotfw (a) ; IV. tnvatfw (1), jinvatu (1),
nayatu (ij,

'(?•

(>)[•]

bhavatu 1, mandatu (sj,
vardhatu (1), pansatu 1,

0),
IIL

2. Du. IIL vrndthdm*.

rohatu
ndatu (i)[i].

2. Du. L gatam (1), pdtam
ydtam (1) ; II. pibatam (e)
kurutam 1 ; IV. bhavatam (1), sldatam
(1) ; V. gachatam 1.

3. Du. I. t'ftbn (1) ; IV. many a-
tdm 1 ; V. yachatdm 1.

2. PI. L tta 1, gantana (2), yd^a
1, yd/a 1, «ta£a »; II. jigdta 1, efafta s,

dhatta 1, oVta/lana (iso.ie), dhattdt [so.s], IV. kalpadhvami, dfksha-

dadhdtana (a), bibhita 1, pta£fta (1) ; dhvam 1, panadhvam 1,

III. krnutdt [30.11,14], prnw^a (1), rabhadhvam [*1, rama-

prnotaua lea.ia, hinota (1), TcrinXta 1, dhvam [i\yjdyaahvam[i],

grbhttita 1, strntta 1 ; IV. areata (s), hvayadhvam 2 ; V. «'cXo-

kalpata [1], khanatdt [so.ia], nayata dhvam 1.

PL
II.

I. studhvain 6
tishthadhvam 1 :

[1], bharata a (i)[i], bhavata 4, vardhata
(1), sidata (1), harata s, khidatdt [so. 10],
srjatdt [so.85i7,i8], sincata (1), sprpata [ij,

gdyata (a), chyatdt [so. 10], nahyatana
0)» pwycOa "[1], uayata (1) ; V.
gachata 1, yachata 2.

3. PI. I. adantu [\\ yantu 1, &rwv- 3. PL L iratdm (1) ;

r««/u (1), «an^^ 1; IV. ayantu (1), IV. jdyantdm a, paa^-

dahantu [1], rohantu [12], vahantu (s), yantdm 1, hvayantdm [s],
vipantu (i), sificantu [e],

E. Present Participle.

L upantd (1), ghnantas 1, dvishan a (Suffix mdna) II. tishth-

-anlam 1 -ate 6 -a^w s, bruvan 4 -atfda amdndnii\ IV. qjamdnas

-ati 1, yau 0, i'yan j. yantam 5 -<x^cw 1 iyik8hamdnas\Uhamdnds
vol. x. 39

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

282 J. Avery,

Present Participle — concluded,

-antau 3 -antas a (1) -atis i -atdm i (*), kalpamdnds i, kram-
•atindm i -atishu*, ydn i, po«a6 (s), «an amdnas i, gdhamdnam 1,
10 (2) [2] -atf a -aJa -antam 13 -atd (1) -aft i earamdnam i -asya 1,
-antau 5 -antas 1 -alfo * (1) -adbhyas 1, tvaramdnds 4, dlksh-
stuvatas 1 ; IL tishthan b -ant am 1 -ate 1 amdnas 1 -aaya 1 -«*/iw 1,
-a^a« a -antas 10 -antis 1, jahat 2, nddhamdnds (1), jtwr-
juhvatas a -alia 2, dadat 1 -atam 1, amdnas isi (a), 6&7A-
dadhat s -afaw 3, bibhrat 1, bibhyat 1 amdnas (i)^bhdsnamd nam
-atam 1 ; III. Arn»a?# (1) -a/? (1) [a], 1 -a* 1, bhrdjamdnds 1,
kurvan » -a£s, tanvans, a/itinvantas 1, yajamdnas 9 -asya t -€ i,
*wnfa/c(a) -a£a»s (1) -antas 1, grhnatd 1 yatamdne(i)^rabhamdna»
-antas 2, bhittdantas 2; IV. ay antam 1, 2 -a* 1, vadamdnayos 1,
arhati 1, kropatas 2, kshayantd (1), vartamdnas 2, vardh-
caran a -atast antis \,jayan i^jivatas amdnas (1), pansamdnam
1, dhamatas 1, dhdvantindm 1, patanti 1, prayamdnas (1), syand-
1 -a/itamfi], bhavnn 1 -antam 1 -atas*, amdnam 1; lajjamdnti 1,
yajatus s, rebhantas 2, vadan 2 -antam 1 vijamdnas 1, jdyamdna*
-antim 1 -a/a* 1 -antas 9, vasan *, pahs- 1 (s) -am 2, tapyamdnm
antas 2, pocatyas 1, *&7a/* 1, sarpatas 1, 1, dipyamdnds 1 -dbhis 1,
sravat 1, fuiran s -a//^ 2, brhan 2, pady amdnam (1) -</«ya
vtpantau [1], *r/Vm [1], sprpan 2, dhayan 4. manyamdnas 1 -a> 3 [1],
[1], pady at 1, papyan 6, srpyat 1, syatas liyamdnd 2.
i ; V. whan (1), rchanti 1 -antas 1. (Suffix dna, ma) I.

dsinas 0 -am 9 -asya 1,
cakshdnas 1 -am 1, viddna*
1(1) -avw (1) -a* 1, pdsdmh
[1] ; II. cikitdna (1), 71A-
rfnas \,juhvdnas (1), </aaV*-
dna« 1 ; III. A^wv^wa* (1),
kurvdnam (1), tanvdndm
2, vanvdnas (i),grndh<t (»)>
grhndnas 1, jdndnds 2 (1),
yunjdnds 1. rundhdnds 1 ;
IV. paydnas 1, jushdnas
(1) -6/*a 1.

F. Imperfect Indicative.

1. Sing. IV. apapyam 1 (2).

2. Sing. I. a£ar 1, a/>aVt(i), arew [1]; 2. Sing. III. avrnttfui*
III. adadhds (2) ; V. at/Afc 1. 1 ; IV. ajdyathds 1.

3. Sing. I. a&ar 4 (1), a/il 1, apa^ 1, 3. Sing. I. abrvlta 1;
ahan^aitio; II. ajagan(\), atishthat II. adhatta ; 6, amimtta*;
4, adaddt 4 (1), adadhdt «, apibat 2 [2], III. akuruta 2, atanvta 1,
abtbhet 1, amunrt 1; III. akarot s, agrhnftai, avrnita 3; IV.
awr/iotf 1, apaknot e, dpnot s, drdhnot akramata 1, acyavata 2,
1, agrbhndt 6, agrhndt 2, ajdndt 1, acydvata 1, ajayata 3,
abadhndt 1, amnthndt (1), astabhndt (1), ataks/tata (1), amanthata

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya-Brdhmana. 283

Impeepkct Indicative - concluded.

abhinat i, atrnat i ; IV. akarat 3, 1, ayajata e, aramata i,
akrandat (i), aksharat 2, acarat i, avadata 2, avartata t
ujftyat 9, atapat e, adravat 2, adhavat (1), aprayata 1, asraiisata
5, anad/tt 2. anayat 2, anedat 1, apatat 1, drjata 4, ikshata 2,
11, abhujat 4, abharat 1, abhavat 49 (1), aikshata 1, anudata 2,
arohat 2, avadat », avarshat 1, apayat asrjata 13, ajdyata 7, atajo-
1, a*idat 5, asarpat 8, asravat 1, aharat yata s, adtpyata 1, «pao?-
14, d/atf 1, dyatf 1, auhat 1, atirat 4, yfltfa 10, arnanyatu 2.
avindat 2, avipat 6, asiftcat s [1],
udhayat 2, adhydyat 2, apapyat 10,
iim&dyat 1, avidhyat 1, aprdiayat 2,
uhvayat 1, (fcya£ 1 ; V. agachat 14,
ay achat 9, abravit 70, apvasit 1, <fo&
16 [10].

2. Du. I. aitam (1) ; II. adhattam
(1) ; IV. dvatam 1, amuficatam (2).

3. Du. L abrdtdm ft, d*£dm 6, aitdm 3. Du. III. dpnuvdtdm
3 ; II. ajahitdm 1 ; III. akurutdm \ ; 5, avrndtdm 2 ; IV. akalp-
IV. ajayatdm e, abhavatdm s, avadat dm etdm 2, ajayetdm 9, avad-
1, aharatdm 1 ; V. agaehatdm 8. etdm 1, avahetdm 1,

anudetdrn s, qjdyetdm 1,
amanyetdm 1, asrjyetdm 1.

1. PI. I. aganma (2), apdma (1). 1. PI. IV. adiksh-

dmahi >.

3. PI. I. akran 1, agman (1), agr/iw- 3. PL I. akrata 2,

'/« 1, abruvcm *s, astuvan 8, dycm «i, aghnata 15, ahata 2, <ifoafa

ffaawio(i); II. ajahus », atishthan 7, 6, airata (2) ; II. atishth-

"bibhayus 10; III. akurvan 10, adhtivan anta 4, adadata 1, adadh-

\,aminvan\)arddhnuvan\\\\a#unvan ata 3; III. akurvata 9,

3, (tstabhmivan 2, asprnvan 1, dpnuvan atanvata 10 [1], dpnuvatn
~^8tabhnuv<mw.*,9,akrina?i2,agrbhna?) 7, agrhnata 2 [1], ajdnata

4, agrhnan 1, ajdnan s, avrfijan 2 ; IV. 4, arninanta (1), ayunjata
akrdman 2. akropan 1, acaran 1, ajayan 4, arundhata s ; IV. akalp-
21, adravan ft, anayan s, apatan 2, anta 1, ajayanta 7, atvar-
nbhajan 2, abharan 7, abhavau 12, #w£a 3, adikshanta 2,
ayajan 1, arohan 2, avadan 1, avapan abhajanta 1, abhavanta %

1, avardhan (1), avasau 2, avahan 1, amodantai,ayajantab(i),
aprayan 1, asidan 1, asvaran 1, aharan ayatanta 9, dlabhanta ft,

2, f1;Vm 1, auhan 4, bharan (1), arshan avartanta 7, dcamanta
1, avindan 5, avipan 3, asrjan 1, 1, aprayanta 9, asacanta
asincan 6 (1), w£;Vm 190.4, adhydyan 8, (2), aspardlianta 8, aA«r-
npapyan 10, avayan 1; V. agachan is, antai,drjantaf>,adriyanta
ayachan 22, aicham. 1, anudanta 11, ajdyanta

5, adipyanta 1, apadyanta
4, abudhyanta 2, am an-
yanta 8, ahvayanta 1 ; V.
aichanta 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

284 J, Ave?%y,

PERFECT SYSTEM.
A. Perfect Indicative.

1. Sing, mroha i, roha [7], veda 1. I. Sing. Uhe 1, da<fe 1.

2. Sing, dvitha (1), W6#Aa a (1).

3. Sing. <foa 1a (1), dAa im, iydya ai, 3. Sing, ye 10, co/re
uvdca 77, uvdpa 1, cak&ra e, rtocdra 6, a (1), ccfisrame a (a), /eyVte

jagdma*, jagau \, jagrdha \, jaghdna a, ^aArc 1, ^ye 1 ,'i),
iyjabhdra (a), jahdra 1 [1], juhavdflca- jujushe (a), dadhe (1),
kdra \)jigdya*,tatdna{\),ta8thau\ (\), nunude 1, paprathe (1),
ttishtdva «, dadarpa a, dadau a, oW- mumuce a, leMi *,
dhdra is (1), ntndya a, niniyojaf ibi.ii, vdvrdhe (a).
papdda 1, papracha i, babandha 1,
babhUva a, bibhdya a, vdvdna ia, w#fc*
aia (1), papansa 1, puprdva 1, sasdda 1 (*),
sasdra 7, 8asdha 1, sisheca a, sushdva 1.

2. Du. jigyathus (1).

3. Du. dsatus 1, dhatus 1, ilccUus s, 3. Da. yuytidhdte 1.
tishatus 1.

3. PI. dnapus (1), <fou# •, dAw$ 189 3. PI. cakrire 1, ^a^/t-

(OWi ^y1** S ^^^ ,0> <5«^*w* 9j jagmv8 nire a, jajfiire a, tasthire 1,

4, jaghnus 1, jabhrus 1 (1), ./i^tm* a, dadrire 1, pedire 1, bhejire

jighyus 1, juhuyus 1, dadvs a, dadrgus 1, menire 1, met hire 1,

a, dadhus 4, paprcits 1, bctbhtivus 1, ty«tf?Ve 6, ruruvire 1.
mamru8 1, ywa i*a.a, m'rft/* e (1), vividus
<x,8edu8 1 (1).

E. Perfect Participle.

cakrusTve a, cikitushe (i), jaghnivdn- fjdnas e, jagmdnas (1),
saw 1, ddpvdmam (1) -ushas (1), pipdnasya (1), t?dt?rdA-
mtdhvas (1), milhushe 1 [1], vohivdn dnam 1, sasrjdnam 1,
1, vidvdn 73 (4) [a] -uiA4 1 -u#Ae 1 -w&ho8 a shicdnasya 1.
-vdn8Ct8 9.

AORIST SYSTEMS.

A. Slmple-Aorist.

I. Forms in which the endings are added directly to the root.

Indicative.

2. Sing, a^da 1 (a), odAtfc (1). 2. Sing, asakthds 1.

3. Sing. a</<& a (e), a<ftft 1, acWtfJ [a], 3. Sing. <z<fr£a 1, asrpta
abhtit a (a), osiAtftf 1 (a)[a]. [a], cwJrta a.

3. PI. ow/tt* 1, a<£tt$ a, a8thu8 1. 3. PI. adrpram (40.a).

Subjunctive.
2d form.

2. Sing. £<& 1, **Ad* (1).

3. Sing. <gr<fc 1 («)[■], efrft [a], rfAtf (f)
[51.19], />d* 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya- BrdhmcCna.

Simple- Aorist Subjunctive — concluded.
3d form.
2. Sing, bhds a [19].

285

3. PI. gUS 1 (l), 8thUH 1.

Optative.

1. Sing. apydm(i) bhilyiUam[v].

2. Sing. bhtiyds (1).

3. Sing, vidhydt 1.
1. PI. a^ydvia [1].

Imperative.

2. Sing, drthds 1.

3. Sing, rftfa a.

1. PI. dhimahi (a).

I. PI. aptmahi (1),
napimahi (1).

2. Sing, pnidhi (a).

3. Sing, pflw&f* [i88.a].
2. Du. prutam (1).

IT. Forms which take a as a connecting vowel.
Indicative.

1. Sing, agamam 1, adar$am s,
avidam 1.

2. Sing. avida8 1.

3. Sing, aehidat 1, avrdhat (1),
avrddhat 1, avidat\^ asadat (a), asanat
[\\ axrpat [a], ahanat 1, dr«J (1).

Subjunctive.
3d form.

1. Sing, bhuvam 1.

2. Sing, bhuvas [is].

3. Sing, grabhat [a], dushat a,
bhuvat (1).

3. PL bhuvan (1).

B. S-Aoriit
I. Forms which add * to the root.
Indicative.
1. Sing, ajftdsarn 1, avdtsam 1.

1. Sing. arautsii,avit-
si (1), astrshi 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

286 ./. Avery,

S-Aorist I. Indicative— concluded.

2. Sing. ajaishis i, adrdk 1, 2. Sing, ajfidsthds i.
ivdrkshts i, a v Otitis i.

3. Sing, ajait [i], aydkshtt i, aA<w- 3. Sing. acyoshta i,
*Aft i. amansta i, aarshta i.

1. PI. ardtsma [2].

3. PI. abhdk&hm i. 3. PI. urdsatu i, «&/;>-

SUBJUNCTIVE.

2d form.

1. Sing. gdyhhe (i)
(" double stem ").

3. Sing, parshat a.

3d form.

2. Du. 0r£«/j/frArim[i].

II. Forms which add wA to the root.
Indicative.

1. Sing, akdrishd'rt (a), agrah-
hham i, apamisham i.

2. Sing, avadhts 2, avddts i.

3. Sing, akrantit i (i), agrahit i, 3. Sing. adikshi*/ita
icdrtt i, tdrt8h(at) [40.15], avddit 2, [2].

ivadhit 2, apttnsit 3.

3. PI. avadhishus 1.

Subjunctive.
2d form.

3. Sing, bhavishdt [18.13], pahsishat
51.22].

3d form.

1. Sing. pftii8i8ham 1.

2. Sing, cdrtfi I, tdrts [1], #<7?Vtf (1), 2. Sing, janishthds \(\).
ht list 8 [1].

3. Sing. dikshis/tia 1,

$(tfl8i8htf( 1.

2. Dn. /tm*/$///Y/'/w[i].

Subjunctive.

1. PI. vddishma 1, vadlshma 1.

2. PI. rdvishta [1].

3. PI. vadhi8hu8 1. " 3. PI. dsishata 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of the Aitareya-Brdhmuna. 287

S-Aoribt — concluded.
III. Forms which add sish to the root.
Indicative.
3. Sing, agdstt i. .

Subjunctive.
3d form.
3. PI. jndslshus a.

IV. Forms which add sa to the root.
Indicative.

2. Sing, adrukshas i.

3. Sing, ad/rukshat (i).

Subjunctive.
3d form.

1. Sing, mrksham [i].

2. Sing. mrkshas [i].

3. Sing, yaks hat a, vakshat (»)[»].

FUTURE SYSTEMS.

A. 8-Future.

Indicative.

1. Sing, eshydmii, yamishydml i, 1. Sing. kartshye i,
jeshydmi a, patsydmi 1, bhaoishydmi a, mankshye 1, srakthye 4.
mokshydmi 1, yokshydmi 1, lapsydmi

1, pasishydmi 1.

2. Sing, jinvishyasl », bhaoishyasi
1, hvayishyasi 1.

3. Sing, arlshyati \,eshyatiz,yami- 3. Sing, cyos/tyate 1,
$Aytf££ 1, jeshyati s, ddsyati 1, dhak- junishyate 3.

shyati \, dhdsyati i9 patsy at i a, pdsyati
iibhavishyati*) marishyati 1, vakshyatl
4, pansishyati [a], hdsyati s, hoshyati 1.

1. Du. eshydvas i,jeshydvas 3.

1. PI. eshishydmas a, eshydmas 3,
karkhydmas 3, carishydmas 1, rtfA-
Mj&mas [1], vakshydntas 1, sraA-
shydmas 5, stoshydmas 1, sthdsydmasz.

2. PI. bhavishyatha 1.

3. PI. yamishyantl 1, jnasyant't 1,
ddayanti 1, pdsyanti 1, bhavishyanti a,
ym&hyanti i, harishyanti 1.

3. Du. klpsytte 1.

2. PI. InpHyad/ice 1,
hanishyadhve 1.

)igitized by VjOOQ IC

188 «/. Aiwy,

S-Futurb — concluded.

Participle.

eshyan i -antas i, karishyan a -at a, (Suffix mdna) eshkh-
Ihdsyantas i, patishyan 1, bhavishyat yamdnasya a, dikshhh-
i] -afaw i, vatsyan i, oakshyan i, yamdnas a, yaksh(y)-
ansishyan 1, satsyan 1, sekshyan a, a mdna 8 an. a, yatish-
\anishyan i -antas a, hoshyan i. yamdnas i, lapsyamdnas

i, vadtshyamdnas i.

Conditional.
1. Sing, akarishyam iw.ia.
8. Sing, abhavishyat 107.10.
3. PI. aishyan 107.10.

B. Periphrastic Future.
Indicative.
1. Sing, gantdsmi 1, vaktdsmi 1,

3. Sing, khydtd [187.15], drashtd
is?. m], bhavitd 20.5, pwttf [i87.u].

1. PL jndtdsmasf 188.10, vaktdsmas?

16.32,34.

DERIVATIVE VERBS.

L Causative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing, bhakshaydmi [a], vardh-
ydmi [1], vepaydmi [1].

3. Sing, ardhayatl 4a, ilayati 1, 3. Sing, kdmayute s,
•ayati 1, kalpayati an, gamayati 10, kdrayate a.
hdrayatl 2. ehadayati 1, janayati 8,
tray at 1 1, tarpayati a, dhdrayati a,
ddayati a, pydy ayati 1, bhakshayati
1, bhdvayati a, marcayati 1, ydtayati
i, ramayati 8, rocayati 1, vdcayati a,
artayati 7, vdhayati 1, vedayati a,
umayati 7, yrdv ayati 1, sddwjati 1,
iy ayati 1, sthdpayati 39, svadayati 1.

3. Du. gamayatas i.

1. PL bhakshaydrnasi [1], 8thd/h
ydmas [1].

3. PL ardhayanti 1, kalpayanti a, 3. PL mddayante 1,
hdrayanti 1, janayanti 1, tarpayanti marjayante 2, vedayantti.

dtkshnyanti 4, nabhayanti a, /><£*£-
yaftl/ a, pdvayanti 1, pydy ant i a,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verh- Forms of the Atiareya lirahmana.

289

Ca usati ve — continued.

bhakshayantiiy ydjayantis, vartayanti
i, rardhayanti 4, vedayanti*, prath-
mjanti 1, gamuyanti 1, sthdpayanti 7.

Present Subjunctive.

1st form.

1. Sing, ardhaydnl 10, jiidpaydni
1, gnmaydnl 1, sthdpaydni 3.

2d form.

1. PI. bhdvaydma 1, sthdpaydma 1.

3d form.
3. Sing, codayat (*).

3. PI. dhdrayan (1), ydtayan 1.

3. PI. janayanta \ (1),
marjayanta (1).

Present Optattve.

3. Sing. adayet*yardhayet\,kamp- 3. Sing, kalpayeta 1,
'/*/** 1, kirtayet 5, kramayet 1, gnmayet kdmayeta «4, kdmayita

1, rydvayet 1, janayet s, bhakshayet 5, 82.13, khydpayeta 1.
mohayet 1, ydjayet a, ydtayet 2, rohayet

2, ropayet 174.7, vartayet s, vedayei 2,
pinsayet 2, pleshayet 1, sddayet 1,
skaiulayet a, sthdpayet 4, liar ay et s.

3. Du. dtkshayetdm 1.

3. PI. kampayeyus 1, vdsayeyvs 1,
redayeym 1, prdvayeym 1, sddayeyus
1, sthdpayeyus 2.

3. PI. khydpayeran 1.

Present Imperative.
2. Sing. £raya (1), kalpaya [2],
gamaya 1 [i],j«My« OH1]* j^paya ■>
y&jayai, vdsaya 1, pa may a 1, sddaya 1.

2. PI. yamayatdt [so.a], w/tfw- 2. PI. vdrayadhvdt
'tyatdt [jo.isJ, ydjayata 1, sthdpayata 1. [30.11].

3. PL mddayantdm(\).

Present Participle.

kirtayantas 1, dhdrayan 1, /?^f?- dhdrayamdnas 1.
ffyantas 3, pdrayantas ( 1 ), prat hay an tan
(i), bhakshayantas 1, ydjayadbhya* 1,
Vdmayatd 1, stanayan 1 (1), sphdrj-
ay an 1.

vol. x. 40

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

1 J. Avery,

Causative — concluded.
Imperfect Indicative.

J. Siug. akdmayat 1, akalpayat i, 3. Sing, akdmayato i.
May at 1, agamayat i, acydvayat a,
may at (i), phdnayat (1), abhdvayat
lydjayat 1, a^ansayat a, ahdpayat i.

2. Du. airayethfitnii).
\. Du. adhdrayatdm a.

J. PI. acydvayan i, adikshayan i, 3. PI. akdmayanta a,
ibhayan a, apddayan i, apdraynn adhdrayantn a, a/xfrf-
lydjayan 6, ayopayan a, arocayan i, ayanta i, avddayaida i,
xrttiyan i, aveduyan a, aprathayan avdrayanta i.
isddayan i, janayan i, sthdpayan 5.

Perfect Indicative.
I. Sing. Hthdpaydiicakdra isa.ie.
*. PI. sthdpaydilcakrus i88.i9.

Aorist Indicative.
.. Sing, avocam i.

!. Sing, ajtjanas (i), avoca* i. 2. Sing, avocathd* i.

I. Sing, ttciklpat a, ajtjanat a (i)[i],
shthipat a, artfrucat (i), auocat e.

2. Du. apa&prdhethum

I. Du. actklpatdm e.

. PI. artricdma [i], avordma i.

i. PI. ajayrabhaishan\to.\,ay<iyup-
i, avtvrdhan i, avoctm i, asttsharus i.

Aorist Subjunctive.
3d form.
. Sing, vocam (a).

!. Sing, didharat [1], riramat (1).

S-Future Indicative.

i. Sing.

janaylshyati 1.

1. PI. dpayishydmas 1, //#»>-
shy dm as 1, ydjayifthydmas 1.

II. Desiderative.

Present Indicative.

. Sing.

ninUhdmi 1.

. Sing.

nintshmi 1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of tlie AiUireyn-Br&lnnami.

291

Desidkrative— concluded.

3. Sing, ipsati i, jigamishuti 3, a. Siug. pipdsate i,
bukhiUhati l. puprushate i.

3. PI. didhishante i,
Mbhatsante i.

Present Optative.

3. Sing, jlgdnset i, dhitset i, bnbhri- 3. Sing, didikshisheta
shet i. i.

Present Participle.
sishdsatyas i. mimdmamdnd* i.

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing, tfjtwctf l.

3. PI. ajighdnson i, epson i.

:*. PI. (ijijndsanta 8,
ahtbhatsattta i, arurut-
Hitnta l.

Perfect Indicative.

2. Sing, diddsitha

Desiderative from Causative base.

Present Indicative.
3. PI. bibhdvaytHfutnti na.ii.

Imperfect Indicative.
3. PI. kalpayishan 73.4,6,7.

in. Intensive.

Present Indicative.

3. Sing, vevls/ioti 1.
1. PI. nonumas (s).
3. PL didyctii *.

Present Subjunctive.

2d form.

3. Sing, jaiighanut (3), dldayat (1).

3d form.
3. Sing, marwrpat 1.

1. Sing, nenije [s],

2. Sing. £yw?£ 300.17.

1. PI. tmahe 11 8.34*.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

292 J. Avery,

Iktrnsi vk — concluded.
Present Optative.
3. Sing, jdgrydt i.

PRESENT Imperative.
2. Sing, didlhi (l).

Present Participle.

jdgratam i, didyat (i), dtdhyatyas i, cekitdmim (i), johuni-
panipnatam (i), marmrpantas i, ^cft* (i).
varvrtatis (i), vdvadatas i.

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing. c^v«4 \,janghanat [ij. 3. Sing, adtdedivatau

3. PI. ajohavus i, anamtiamvs [\\ 3. PI. mionudyaiUa i.

Perfect Indicative.
1. Sing, dldhaya (a).
3. Sing, diddya 6.

Perfect Participle.

didlvdu (i) -dhsam (i), piptvdnsam
(i), pipushim (i).

IV. Denominative.

Present Indicative.

3. Sing, urushyati i, gopdyati a, 3. Sing, tandrayate i,
namasyati i, bhishajyatl s, riytitikhctr mantrayate a.
yatfi 9, valgtZyati (i).

1. PI. vdjaydtnasi (i).

3. PL itydnkhayanti i, bhithaj-
yanti a.

Present Subjunctive.
1st form.

1. Sing, nydnkhaydni a.

Present Optative.

3. Sing, gopdyet a, nydnkhayet n,
bhakshayet a, mokshayet i.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing, gopdya [a], mantraya i. 2. Sing, virayasw '•

3. Sing, gopdyatu [4].

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Fo) ms of the A itareya- Brdh maim. 293

Denominative— concluded.
3. Du. bhishajyatam i.

2. PL grbhdyata i, duvasyata (i). 3. PL rnantrayadhvam

i.

Present Participle.
ardtlyatas i, decay antas i (e).

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing, amantrayata i.
3. PL amantrayanta*.

Perfect Indicative.

3. Sing, mantra ydmdsa a.

V. Passive.

Present Indicative.

2. Sing, idhyase (a).

3. Sing, dpyate 1, idhyate (a), itcyatt 13, rdhyate 5, kriyate is,
kriyate 1, kshiyate a, khydyate 1, gamy ate a, giyates, grhyate a,
chidyate 1, jndyate 3, tdyate 1, duhyate 1, dhiyate ae, dhriyate 1,
my ate (1), pacyate 1, pHryate a, bhriyate 1, inly ate 1, mucyate

3, yitjyate a, r icy ate 1, rCipyate 2, labhyate a, v tdyate a, pasyate is,
$i*hyate 3, sicyate 6, srjyatez, Kiyate 1, hay ate 3.

3. Du. ucyete 1, kriyete 3, ricyete 1, pasyete 4.

3. PL dpyante ft, ucyante 3, upyante 2, krlyantt ft, grhyante

4, d/ilyante 8, niyante 3, mucyante », yujyante 1, rudhyante 2, pe/s-
yante 33, srjyante 3, sicyante 5, htiyante (hu) 1, hdyante (hdjivd) 1.

Present Optative.

3. Sing, krtyeta 1, bhidyeta 1, mrjytta 1, vidyeta a.

3. Du. srjyeydtdm 1.

3. PL krtyeran 1, kriyeran 1, dahyeran 3, ci dyer an 1, uliyeran
1, hiyeran 1.

Present Imperative.
3. Sing, dhiyatdm 6.

Present Participle.

(Suffix mdna) ajyatndndya 1, uhyamdndya 1 -t' 1 -dbhydm 2,
kriyamdnam 10 -ew« 1 -4y« 1 -e 1, kriyamdnam a, dlyamdnasya s,
duhyamdnam 1 -a" 6, dhiyamdnam 1, niyamdnas 1 -am 1 -tfya 1 -€ 3
•dbhydm 8, -ebhyas 3 -<fow 1, pacyamdnds 1, ptiryamdna- :, Ma/-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

294 e/. Avert/,

Passive — concluded.

yamdnd i, mathyamdnas 1 -dya t -e i, miyamdna* (1), miicyaindwi*
3> yujyamdnd i, rudhyamdnas i, pasyamdnam 1 -dm 1 -6 a, prf-
yamdndya i, sttfyamdrtas i, hHyamdndydm i.

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing, akhydyata i, adhtyata i, amucyata i, uhiyata j,
ahUyata a, drdhyata a.

3. PL adiryanta i, udhriyanta s, opyanta i, asrjymUu a.

A.0RI8T Indicative.
3. Sing. acefe (i), q/an/ i*, adhdyi (a), apddi 1, ayo/* (i), aroci

(l), OftllU' 1, VtfC* [61.8,14,19].

Aobist Subjunctive.
3. Sing. Ja/// ai4.i7,i»,ai,as,34, dhdyl (ao. n).

Causative Passive.
Present Participle.
pddyamdne i, sddyamdndya \ -dsu ), sthdpyamdnas i.

VL Infinitive.

Accusative. eft/TM s, kartum 8, jetum i, tatUum i (2), datum 1,
nayitum 1, moktum 1, yantum 2, yoktum 1, vaktum 1, vaditum 1,
volhum 1, sattum 1, sadam (24.10).

Dative, etavdi 2, kartave 1, jivase [1], aVpe (1), pdtave (2),
volhave (1).

VTL Preterite Participle.*

Active. (Suffix tavant) pHtavantas pi.

Passive. (Suffix fa) a&taa 2 -tern (1) 1 -fcfo (2), e/ste 1, a/rfa# 3 pis
-£d 2 [1] ps -tow p2 -tdm 2 -tdndm 1 -teshu 1, e7a C2 -£<x#8(i)ps
-£<///* 1 pi -te 28, Iddhas 2 pi cs -dhasya (1), tshitas a -&2 2 -torn 1
-£a> (»), ishtam is[»], wA:to ci -£c« 1 pa pea 01 -£a"i -taw 5 p7 -tasyit
1 -tdydm 3 -te 2, woVta ci -faw pe -tara p» -tfoV/? 2 -tdydm 1, itidni p
4, tf/Aoa 2, Artfos pi (pi) -£a* pi -tam 7 (a) pio C3 -tfoya 2 ci -£e e
-^n'(i) -tes/iw 1, krshtas pi -torn a, klptas pi -tarn ca -tewa 1 -te pi
-ftfoa pi -£d/u" 1, krdnta 6 -ta/ra 1 -6<2m a, krttarn 1 -tfoya 1 -tasya 1
-te a, krushtas a -form a, khydtam 1, $r«ta ca -Jo* » pi -torn 2 (1) -te s
-tdydm 1 -tuyor a -£<fo a pi, grfttz* pi -£a> pa, grhttas pa ci, grbhttas
pi -£«' 1 ci -Jam 1 pi ci -£d* 1 -Jdwi 1 -Jaw (a), c/faw pi, cyuta* 1a
-£d 16 pi -foY a -tfo* ^jdtas s (5) pi ci -torn 6 (3) -Jdya 4 -tasya 1 -&2s 2
-tdndm 99jitd pi -tam 1 (1) \)\,ju&htdc\9jilta8 ci -tarn (c8),Jn<ftas 1,

♦Ac denotes a use of the participle in composition; a^, its use as predicate,
without copula expressed.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Aitareya-Brdhmana. 295

Preterite Participle — concluded.

tata ci -tas • (i) pa -toa -tarn & (4) pi -tais 5, taptas 1 -tebhyas 4, tUrtas

1 (1), drptas a, drshtdn 1, drnhitdni (pi), dattam 1, ditarn (1), #7*A-
tom 1, dikshitas 3 -tasya a -£<fo 1, diishtam a, dugdha ci -dham s [1],
i/A/tfa ca, dhrtas 1 pa -to* pi -torn pi, nashta ca -to 1, naddhas
pa, ntto* a, neto* a -to* pi -torn pi, nuttds 4, jt>£to* 1 -tasya [i],pdtas
a pa, pdrtam [s], prshtas 1, pritas s -tow 4 -^dya 1 -te 1 -tow 1
-*#* 5, bhaktd 1, bhakshitas 4 -tasya 1, Mf2tom4[i] -tdm \ -tdt
1, bhrtam 3, matam 1, mattas 1 -torn pa, mitas a pa -torn e p3 -tena
4 -tasya a -tdbhis s, mittam 1, muktas a -te 1 -tayos 1 -£<2* 1, mugdhas
1, wrta ci'-to 1, mrshtas 1, yato (ci) -to* a (1) pi toi (1) pi -tfw
1, yattdn 1, y deltas 1, yuktas a pa -tatamas pi -tow 1 -toy a 1 -te i
-tayos 1, rabdhas 1 -dAd 1 pi -dham [1] pi -dhdya 1 -dAe 1,
rdtatamd (1), riktas 1 -torn lp 1 -tayos 1 -torn" 1, rishta ca, ruddhas

2 -cM<2 1 -rfAd* pi, labdhas 1 -^AtfJ 4, lubdham e p7, vdntam * pi
-ton 1, vrArto (ci), vrfo* 1 [1] ps Ic* pci] -to pci, vrtfto ci -to* 1 pi
-frt*v 1, ve7to ci -to pi -tow s, viadhas 1 -dAo* 1, vishtas 1 -tfaya 2 -te
1, vfta* (1), (pastas 4 (ci) -torn 6 pi -tatamam 1 -te 2 [1] -to* 4, cdttia
C4 -to* 1 -to* 1 -torn 3, cishtas pi -torn 8 (i)[pi], enddhas 1, ccutas
(a), crdvtam [1] -to/i* a, -tatarais 4, critam 4 -te 3 pi -tayos 1 -to*
1 pi -ftfru 1, crutas 1 pi, clishtam a, saktas pi -torn pi, siktas a
-tarn 8 -&fya 1 -tasya a -ton 5, */to* 1, *rto ci, srshtd e -torn a -te
1 pa -£a* 1 -tdndm a, *?*to* 1 (1) (pi) -tow* 11 -tasya (j) -tdsas pi
-tone 1, *t2to* a -to* ca, skabhitd [1 pi], stutas 10 (1) -tow 8 pi -te 1,
sthita cie -fa* 8 p7 -torn 8 p« -tewa a -tatamayd 1 -tdydm 1 -tasya
(1) -te 1 -£o* 4 pa -tow 6 -tdndm 8, srastatn 2, Aato C4 -to* 1 -torn 1
-te 1 -*tf* 7, hitas 10 ps pci -to ci -to?n 1 ps (pa) [ci] -tewtf ci
-to* 2, Arto* 6 -torn 4 -Jo* a pi -tow a -to/* 1 -to*?/ 2, Awto* a -tow
s (1) pi [1] -tdydm 1 -£a* 2, Atfto [1] -tow 1 [p2] -to* [ps].

Causative, iritayd 1, vdsitam 1.

Desiderative. jijyushitas ps.

(Suffix wa) girnam ps, chinnas 1 -no" 1 -w/i* s,jirnam \,pamia&
1 -wa/H a -nasya \, pittas pi, ptirna (1), bhinndm 1, lindni 1, cdnas 1,
mnnas 3 -waw 1 -na*w 1, stirnam (1), hinas pi -w7 1.

VTIL Gerundives.

(Suffix tavya) acitavyam pa, ishitavyam p2, eshtavyam 1, &ar-
tavyas 1 pa -yd i -yaw a ps -ye 1 -yew pi -y^* a, caritavyam pa,
ddtavyd 1, drogdhavyam 1, pattavyam pa, vaditavyam p2, cr///*-
tav.yas 2 p4 -tavyd p2 -tavyam ps, hotavyatn pio -tavye pa.

(Suffix ^«a) janitvam 1 (1).

(Suffix aniya) dhdniyd 1 -nlyds 6 -titydbhis 1.

(Suffix ya) dpy<2 1 [1], ikshyatamam pi, idydya (1), wcya* pa
-yaw 1 p» -y(2* pi -ya/i/ ps, krtyam p2, ktrtyam 1, giryam pi,
guhyam z^jneyam 1, drtyam pi2, dhrshyd 2 [a], dheyam a, peyam
pi, bandhyas 1, bhavyam\, medhyd 1 -yaV?pi, rndhyas pi, rddyam

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

2»6 */. Avery,

Gerundives — concluded.

i, vadhyas i, vedyas pi, vyathyam 6, pa-syas pi -ytf pi -y4«/ 1,
.•»r/y^ pi, hrtyam ps.

Causative. (Suffix tavya) kalpayitavyds pa — (ya) ydjyas \n
-yarn pi.

Desiderative. (Suffix tavya) llpsitavyam pi.

DL Gerund.

(Suffix tvd) dptvd is, tehtvd 10, uktvd 8, tidhvd i, Arr*tf<2 16 [i],
yatfutf 6, grhftvd i, caritvd a, japitvd a. /ftwtf 8, jtldtvd i, taptvd s,
dattvd 3, dugdhvd a, drshtvd n, dhUtvd i, patitvds, pftvd i [i],
bhtitvd 3», ydcitvd i, vittvd a, vrshtvd i, pastvd \*, pnttvd i, «/X*/r'/
i, srshtvd s, hatvd 8, A#w2 i, hutvd 5, hrtvd i.

(Suffix ya) «pya a, aaya *, d/>y« a, itfya i», weya 4, wdya a, w/>y« «,
ushya i, tMya a, kalpya i, ArJya 8, kramya 7, khddya i, khydya i,
gatya i, y<2ya a, yfrya i, gUrya a, grhya a, grathya i, crtycr i, chidy*i
*,jndya 8, tacya i, r/dya 8, e?r*ya i, drpy<* U drutya a, dhdya n [i],
dhrtya a, wfya i, budhya e, bhajya i, bhUya i, bhrtya 8, mitya i,
mucya a, mushy a i, mrshya 5, rabhya a, rddhya a, rujya a, rudhya
i, ruhya 8, rdhya i, rupya i, labhya i, lupya a, valhya a, t'/p*y« a,
vrtya i, pisfiya 4, sadya (a), *icya 4, ar/yr/ a, stirya i, sthdya 6, /*<*</</
a, Arty a 4, hrtya 8.

Causative. (Suffix tfutf) kalpayitvd a, gamayitvd a, c/iddayitvd
a, janayitvd i, dikshayitvd i, bhakshayitvd a, gdpayitvd a, pra//-
ayitvd i.

(Suffix ya) cdrya i, vedya i, vepya », sthdpya 3, sparpya i.

Causative from Desiderative base, bhlnhayitvd i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of the Nala and BhagaoadgM. 29?

III. THE VERB IN THE NALA AND BHAGAVADGITA.

PRESENT SYSTEM.

Active. Middle.

A. Present Indicative.

1. Sing. I. asmi nis bso, emim ; II. 1. Sing. III. jdne b*,
dnddmi ltt, dadhdmiBi; III. karomi vrns ni ; IV. £fo*Ae bi,
x i bi, paknomi bi, apnrfmtBi, grhndmi kdnkshe bi, wa/we ni,
bi, jdndmi ns bi, pnshndmi bi ; IV. bhdshe ni, labhe b\, varte
nwdmi ns, tapdmi bi, tardmi ni, joac- ii\,parike$iysahexsyvinde
ami bi, bhajdmi bi, bhavdmi B3, waA- ni,padye bi, manye N3 bi.
dmisi, vrajumi~s\, pocdmi ni, smardmf

N4, svapdmi ni, kshipdmi bi, vinddmi
ni bi, vipdmi ni, srjdnu ni bb, napydmi
bi, papydmi N8 b*, hrshydmi bj; V.
ichdmi N9 bo, prchdmi ni bi, pocimi ni,
bravimi N7 bi.

2. Sing. I. ewt Nai bis, khydsi ni. 2. Sing. IIL^VfoifoAeNi;
M<2« ni ; II. jahdsi ni, juhoshl bi, IV. katt/iase ni, bhdshase
tishthasl bi, daddsi bi, bibharahi ni ; N4 bi, vartose ni, pankase
III. dpnoshi bi, karoshi bi, paknoshi ni, pocase ni, harase ni,
bi, apndsi bi ; IV. arhasi ni7 bio, budhyase ni, mam/ase
eshasisi^ tarasi ni, dhdvasi ni, bhqjasi ns bs, pakyase ni.

ni, vadasi bi, vdnchasi ni, 0?/a*£ ni,
pansasi ni bi, pocasi ni ; V. ichasi
xe bs, bravUhi bi.

3. Sing. L cwfo' ni* Bi7, e£t N2 bo, 3. Sing. I. <fote ns w,
(Ine8htiB6, bhdti-s*, ydti N4 bio, vcWi /te ni, cashte ni, pete N4 ;
N3 bii, p#sfo" ni, Aa?<l£ bs ; II. jahdti b*2, II. tisJithate Bi, efatfte bi ;
tishthati N4 B4, bibharti bi ; III. dpnoti III. apnute bs, kurute
xi bb, karotiw, paknoti bi, praofa" ni bi, nibs, vrnUe ni, bhunkte
grhndti Bi,jdndti^-2 bo, badhndtim bs, bs; IV. ingate b-2, tkshate
hinasti bi; IV. arcati ni, arhati no bi, bs, *Aate bi, kalpate bs,
kar8hati bi, kdnkshati B4, krdmati bi, grasate ni, cesbtate bi,
kropati hi, caratim B4, calati w,jivati tvarate ni, namate ni,
N4 bi, tyajati bi, dahati n*, dhdvati ni, patatex\,bhajatem,yatate
nmtdati n* bi, patatl ni, braoati ni, bi, rabhate bs, ramate B3,
bhajati b«, bhramati ni bi, yatati bi, rdjate N2, labhate bo,
rodati ni, vadati bi, vasati ni, vahati vartates*ii\*,vardhate ni,
ni, vdfichati ns, pansati ni, pocati vepate ni, vyathate ni,
xs bs, awfczto' ni, sarpati ni, smarati bi, pobhate ni, sahate ni,
harati bi, mutlcati bi, vindati ns B4, sevate bs, sransate bi, Aar-
*rj"' /fi bi , gdyatisi, tushyati bi, napyati ate bi, vindate bi, vipate
ixypapyati N2 bis, muhyati bs, plshyati bi, trdyate bi, napyate ni,
hi, hrshyati bs ; V. £cAa£/ N2, rc/tatim, padyate B7, many ate ni bi,
guchati ns bis, yachati bs. rajyate bi, liyate bs, pad-
yate ni.

vol. x. 41

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

298 J. Avery,

Present Indicative — concluded.
1. Du. IV. pandvas x\; V. gach- 1. Du. IV. pandvak

dvas Nl. Nl.

3. Du. HI. jdnitas m ; IV. bhav-
atas bi, va8(Ua8 ni.

1. PI. L vidmas bi, jotio* ni ; IV.
cardmas ni, papydmas ni ; V. gracA-
tfraa* ni.

2. PI. III. jdnitha ni ; IV. arA-
r/tfAa ni, dhdvatha ni.

3. PI. I. ydnti ni bu, stuvantl bi ; 3. PI. I. Ifoafe ni bio,
II. juhvati b«, tishthanti m ; HE. tf/??w- cakshate b* ; III. bhuhjatt
vanti bi, kurvanti im, paknuvanti ni, bi ; IV. tkshante bi, ihunte
apnanti bi, grnanti bi, jdnanti bs, bi, bhajante bs, yajantew.
badhnantiv*,chindantiB\\XV. kdriksh- labhante bs, vartante bii,
a/itfi ni, caranti N2 bi, cyavanti bi, pocante ni, pubhante ni,

jvalanti bi, tapanti bi, taranti bi, c/r«w- padyante^ many ante bi,
awta' ni B9, pacanti bi, patanti ni bs, Kyante bi.
bhajantl B2, bhavanti ni B6, bhramanti
ni, yajanti bi, yatanti bi, ramanU bi,
vadanti bq, vartanti bi, vyathanti hi,
pocanti bi, sldanti N2, haranti ni bi,
hasanti ni, limpanti bi, viyanti B9,
krudhyanti ns, tushyanti bi, dushyanti
bi, na$yanti bi, papyanti ni im, w?/A-
yante' bi, mdhyantl ni ; V. ichtmti ns,
gachanti N4 Be.

B. Present Subjunctive.
1st form.
1. Sing. III. karuv&ni ni.

1. PI. III. Aarartf-
mahai ni.
2d form.
1. Du. IV". divydva N2.

C. Present Optative.

1. Sing. I. vidydm ni bi, «ydm bs, 1. Sing. III. bhunjiya
hanydm bi ; III. dpnuydm bi, kiirydm ni ; IV. varteya ni.

ni bi, jdniydm N2 bi, bhurljiydm ni ;

IV. karteyam ni, tyajeyam ni, bhdsh-
eyam ni, sprpeyam ni, papyeyam ni ;

V. gacheyam N2.

2. Sing. I. brilyds ni. 2. Sing. IV. tyajethds

ni, bhavethds ni, fo«M-
yethds ni ; V. ichethds ni,
prchsthds ni.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of tlie Nala and BhaguvadgUd. 299

PRX8BNT Optative — concluded.

3. Sing. I. nudydt bi, brdydt ns,
vidydt bs, sydt nio B7, hanydt xi ; II.
tishthet ni ; III. dpnuydt bi, kurydt
X4, bi, prnuydt bi, jdntyat ni, yuiijydt
bi ; IV. tyajet bs, dharet bi, naped bi,
bhavet ni* bs, ramet bi, labhet bi, uacfel
xi, wq;e£ ns, prayet bi, smaret bi, mqjjet
xi, rye* bi, papyet bi, sidhyet bi, Ar*A-
y# bi ; V. gachet N4 bi.

1. PL L sydma bi, hanydma ni ;
IV. jayema bi, papyema nj.

3. PL I. vidytis ni, *yw* bi, ha?iyus
bi ; IV. jayeyus bi, bhaveyus ni,
sideyus bi.

3. Sing. I. cfafra bs ;
III. yutijita bi ; IV. bhdsh-
eta bi, varteta bi, vrajeta
bi, panketa ni, prayeta xi,
vindeta ni, padyeta ni,
budhyeta ni, many eta bi.

3. PL IV. nameran bi.

D. Present Imperative.

2. Sing. I. iAi ns, khydhi bi, JaAj
bs, *r<£Ai" xi, &rtfA* N6 bs, ydAi ni, viddhi
ni bm, p&fAt bi ; II. tishtha ns B5, cfeAt
xi ; lit &wrw ns m, cinuhi xi, prviw
X4 Bia, grhdna ns, jdvthi ns bi ; IV.
carer bs, ^Tya ns, dhdva ni, naya Ni,
WA<e N4 bi, bhava ns b», ya^a ni,
mksha ni, vada ns bi, vewa ns, vaAa
xi, vrq/a ns, j^i/wa xi, «£da bs, xmara
bi, J/pa ni, ^/vya ni, papya ni bs,
yitdhya bi ; V. icAa bi, gacha nis bs,
ywAa ni, pvasihi ni.

3. Sing. L a«to X4 bs, yt&w xi ; IV.
jivatu ni, bhavatu ni, sidfUu ni, munc-

atu x-i ; V. yachatu xi.

2. PL III. prnuta ni, jdriita ns ;
IV. dhdvata ni, pansata ni.

2. Sing. I. cakshva
xs ; II. dhatsva xi bi ;
III. knrushva ns bi, yrm-
*Aya ni, jdnishva ni,
bhunkshva ni bi ; IV.
ikshasva ni, nayasva ni,
bhajasva bi, bharasva ni,
modasva xi, labhasva bi,
vadasva xs, vasasva ni,
padyasva ni, yudhyasva

BS.

3. Sing. IV. nayatdm
xi, patatdm xi, vartatdm
xs, prdmyatdm xi.

2. PL III. grnidhvam
ni ; IV. yatadhvam ni,
trdyadhvam ni ; V. gacha-
dhvam ni.

3. PL I. bruvantu ni, ydntu ns ;
III. kurvantu ni ; IV. kshamantu ni,
tyajantu ni, yatantu ni, rakshantu
ni bi, dipantu X4.

E. Present Participle.

I. ghnatas bi, dolshantas bi -#faw bi, (Suffix mdna) IV. a£-
bruvan ns -antam xi -antyds xi -«ta* amdnas ni -am xs, £&*/*-
xi, ydntam xs -antas ni, pdsatam ni, amdvdyds ni, ishamdnd
pvasan ni, «aw bs -a# ns -atf bs -ala# bs ni, eshamdnd ni -am ni,
-«£/ xi bi -antas bi, svapan bi ; II, krandamdndm xs, yrcw-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

300 «/. Avert/,

Present Participle— concluded.

jighran bi, tishthantatn bi -atdm nc amdnassijCeshtamdnasya

-atsu ni ; III. kurvantim ni -atas ni -an ni, tvaramdnas ns, dfldr-

N2 B8, c in o antas ni, prava/i ni -afrw bi amdnds ni, bhajantdndm

-at os ni, apnatas w, grhnan bi, jdnan ni, bhrdjamdnas ns -am

bi -atfd bi -antas bs, mushnanti ni, ni, mdrgamdnd ni, yaj-

yunjan bs -atas bi ; IV. eshati n* -tf^m amdnas s\y yatamdnasB^

ni -antaa n*, kdnkshantos bi, krdrn- lapamdnd ni, variant dnas

antam bi, caran ns bs -Arts xi -antdm ni bs -e ni -dm bi, vepamdna*

•atas bi -atdm bi, jtvantim ni, n* bi -d ni -dm ni, #///£-

jvaladbhis bi, tapantam bi, tyajan bi, amdnd N4, pobhamdnd ni,

dhdvan N3 -antas ni, nadatas ni, sniayamdnam ni — &/#-

nandantani ni, nindantas bi, patan ni amdnd ni — ydyamdnd*

-antim ni -antas ni -ataw ni -a£dm N2, ni, da hy amdnd ni, cfri?y</-

pavatdm bi, bhajatdm bi, bhdjthantas tndnam ni, papy amdnd

ni, bhraman ni, yajaiitas bi, yatatd bi xi,priyamdndya bi, mr*/j-

-t/taw bi -antas B4 -atdm bi, ydcate ni, yamdnds ni.
rdjadbhis ni, lapan bi -antf n« -antim (Suffix d/wi) L fow-

N8, vadatdm bi, vaman ni, vasati ni <2mo* ni -tf ni -<fn ni,

-tffaw ni, vahatas ni, vapatim ni, paydnam nq ; IL cfcfc/A-

vrajanti ni, pansadbhis ni, poca/i ni ^/mw bi -<fc re ; III.

-antim ni -antyd ni, stdantam bs, kurvdnas bi, cinvdtnts

smaran ns B4 -a/itf ni -ant yds ni, ni — bhunjdnant bi ; V.

smayan n*, syandatdm ni, sraiuit ni, dsinaa b-j.
haran ni bi -<m£t ni, hasan ns bi —
kshipantim ni, mishan b*, muncantas
n-2, rudati N4 -atfm ni -antim ni -ant yds
n« -antyauxi, likhadbhis ni, vtpantam
n« -antim ni — dahyantam ni, divyatas
ni, dhydyatas bi, napyantant bi -ate//,
b«, papyan ni B4 -a/i£Z ni -aft/* ni bi
-adbhis bi -atdm ni; V. £c7jcm bi,
gachan bi -antf ni -antam ni -antim ni
-antas ni, prchantyd ni.

F. Impekfect Indicative.

1. Sing. I. <faara ni ; IV. atyajam
ni, avasam ni.

2. Sing. IV. apocas bi ; V. abravtt

NI.

3. Sing. I. ay<ft N4 ; II. atishthat 3. Sing. I. d*/« ni ;
ns, adadhdt ni ; III. akarot ns, avrnot II. atishthata ni ; IV.
N-i, ajdndt Ni ; IV. akarshat ni, akrop- adhdvata ni, a a an data
at ns, acarat ni, adapatxi, adravat ns, ns, abhdshata nji bi,
adhdvat ni, anayat N2, abhavat nio bi, arocata ni, avartata s«,
arohatyi,avasatm,apupat si,apvasat avardhata ni, aikshata
ni, asravat ni, <foa£ ni, avipat ns bi, ni, avindatam, apapyata
asrjat ni, apapyat N8 B2 ; V. ay achat ni, abudhynta Ni, aman-
n«, abravit nm bs, ay achat ns, &*# ng ya£« ns; V. aprchata >'*,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of Ote Nala and Bhayavadgttd. 301

Imperfect Indicative —concluded.

3. Du. IV. avasetdtnni.

3. PI. I. abruvan ns ; III. akurvan 3. PI. III. akurvata
ni ; IV. adravan ni, apatan ni, nibi; IV. adravanta ni,
abhavan ns, avrajan ni, apapyan ni ; abhdshanta ni, dhr&hycm-
V. agachan Na, aprchan ni. ta ni.

PERFECT SYSTEM.

Perfect Indicative.

1. Siug. vetfa Bl.

2. Sing. tfWAa bi, vettha ni bs.

3. Sing. dAa Na bm, dpa Na, iyesha 1 . Sing, t/6 Na, caJcrarne
Na, uvdca N«7 B4S, nvdsa ni, cakrdma ni, caAre ni, cakshame
Na, cacdla ni, jagdda ni, jagdma Nia, ni, cacaksfie ni, Jq/;7e

jagrdha N6, jajvdla ni, jahdra Na, ni, jahrshe ni, tasthe
juhdva ni, tasthau N3, dadarpa ni«, ns, dadrshe Na, bubudhe
dadau xe, dadhmau Ba, dadhyau ni, ni, raen€ Na, rnamrde ni,
didepa ni, papdta Na, papracha N6, mumudeifi, rente xi,lebhe
bobhttva N7 bi, mamarda ni, yayau ni, vavande ni, vavrdhe
NT, raraksha ni, rardja ni, raroda ns, ni, sasvaje ni.
ruroha ni, laldpa Na, vavau ni, wr>cpa
nb, ve^a N4 B4, papdpa ni, papdsa ni,
p«prd»a N8, papvdsa ni, sasdda ns,
siisdra n:, sasarja ni, sitshvdpa ni.

3. Du. iyattis ni, Ushatus ni, fawtfA- 3. Du. vivipdte ni.
ato* ni, dadhmatus ni.

1. PL pupruma bi.

3. PL l2/iu# ni bs, 4cw* N5, cukrupus 3. PL cakrire ni.
ni, jagmus nio, jajnus ni, tasthus Na,
dadm ni, dadrpus N4, dadhus ni,
dadhmus bi, dudruvus ni, nedus Na,
papra^hus n impetus N4, yayus Na, tr/<7?«
Bia, vivipus Na, papansus Na, pupruvus
N3, sasrpus Nl.

Perfect Participle.

iylvdn Npa, vidvdn ni -vdnsas ni.

AORIST SYSTEMS.
A. Simple-Aorist.

I. Forms in which the endings are added directly to the root.
Indicative.

3. Sing, cr^ft Na, arfdtf Na, a#M£ N5.

Subjunctive,

3d form-
2. Sing. &Atte bi.

2f Sina;. krthds ni.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

302 «/. Avery,

Simple- Aovasr— concluded.

Optative.

2. PI. brdydsta ni.

IT. Forms which take a as a connecting vowel.

• Indicative.

1. Sing, ago mam ni.

3. Sing, agamat n«.
3. PL ugaman ni.

Subjunctive.
3d form.

2. Sing, gamas bi, pucas ni bo.

B. S-Aorist

I. Forms which add s to the root.
Indicative.

1. Sing, aprausham in.

Subjunctive.
3d form.

2. Sing, bhais ni.

II. Forms which add uft to the root.

Subjunctive.

2. Sing, vyathixhtha*
bi.

FUTURE SYSTEMS.

A. S-Future.

Indicative.

1. Sing, eshydmi ni, karishydmi 1. Sing. <2/>aye bi,
N4, khydsydmi ni, gamishydmi ns, karishye ni bi, dhdsye ni,
grahUhydmi 's\i)jnd$ydmi?$\, ddsydmi m o dishy e bi, ?/ akshy e bi,
Nfi bi, dekshydmi ni, drakshydmi ni, yatishye ni, yokshye n«,
dhdsydmi Ni, nankshydml N2, praksh- yotsye b«, vakshye bi,
yd/m ni, bhavishydmi ni, ydsydmi ni, sthdsye ni, fianishyem.
yoteydmi bi, vakshydmi B7, vateydmi

N3, vetsydmi ni, vekshydmi ni, prosh-
ydmi no.

2. Sing. dpsyasi ni B6, eshyasi 2. Sing, draJc&hy axesi,
ni bs, karishyasi n* im, khydsyasi ni, patsy ase ni, bhokshyrwe

jndsyasi bi, tariskyasi Na, drakshyasi bi, tnokshyase B4, yoksh-

N4 bi, na/ikshya8t bi, bhaviehyasi ns, yase ni, r artsy ase ni, &//>-

• mokshyasi ni, ydsyasl ni bo, vak&hyasi ay ase ni, pakshycute bi,

ni, vatsyasi ni, vasishyasi bi, vekshyasi papsyase ni.

ni, pros/iyasi bi, harishyasixi, hdsyasi

bi.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verh- Forms of the Nata and Magavadglfd. 303

S-Futube — concluded.

3. Sing, dpsyati ni, eshyati ni bi, 3. Sing. eshyate bi,
karUshyati ni bi, carishyati ni bi, ransyate ni.
tartshyati bi, dhdsyati bi, nayishyati
xi, bhavishyati nji bi, mansyati ni,
rnokshyati ni, ydsyati Na, yokshyati bi,
vatsyati Na, sthdsyati Na bi, hdsyati ni.

3. Du. sthdsyatas ni.

I. PL bhavishydmas ni.

2 PI. dpsyatha ni.

3. PI. gamishyattii ni, dekshyanti 3. PI. ddsyante bi,
bi, dharishyauti ni, bhav Ishyanti bi, marisyaate bi.
rak&hyanti ni, vadishyanti bi.

Imperative.

2. PI. savifihyadhvam

BI.

Participle.
bhavishyatdra bi. yotsyamdndn bi.

B. Periphrastic Future.
Indicative.

1. Sing, kartdmni ni.

2. Sing, gantdsi ni bi, ji&fc* bi,
bhavitdsi ni.

3. Sing. </<zn£d Na, Jg&f ni, <7<ftd ni,
drashtd ni, nc^ ni, bhavitd N7 Ba.

DERIVATIVE VERBS.

L Causative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing, dhdraydmi bi, ndpaydm? 1. Sing, cintaye ni,
bi, yqjaydmi ni, pvdsaydmi ni. sddaye bi.

2. Sing, mdnayasi ni, mohayasi
bi, yojayasi bi, vardhayasi ni, pwfo-
aycud N3.

3. Sing, kdpayati bs, dyotayati ni, 3. Sing, dhdrayate B2,
dhdrayati n i , bhakshayati n i , mohayati bhdsayate Ba, Mddayate n i .
bi, vartayati bi, $o&hayati bi, sanjayati

Ba.

3. PI. kledayanti ni, dhdrayanti
N8, vyathayanti ni.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

304 ,/. A

Very,

Causative— continued.
Present Optative.

2. Sing, vdsayes ni.

3. Sing, kathayet ni, kdmayet N2,
cdlayet bi, cintayet bi, janayet bi,
jo8hayet bi, varayet N4, sddayet bi.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing, kathaya bi, khddayu ni, 2. Sing, varayasvaw.
darpaya N2 b*, dhdraya B2, mocnya
ni, yojat/a ni, varaya ni, vedaya ns,
repay a bi, pvdsaya N2, st/idpay a hi.

2. PI. bhuvayata bi. 2. PI. kathayadhmm

3. PI. bMmiyantu bi.

ni, cmtayadhvam ni.

Present Participle.

kathayan ni -antim ni -atasBi -antau kathaydnas ni, c/wf-
ni -antas bi, kampayan ni, kartayantas aydnasya ni.
bi, kalayatdm bi, kar pay antas bi,
karshayan ni, cintayan m B2 -arttyds
ni -antas bi, janayan bi, damayatdm
bi, dhdrayan B2 -atfZra ni, nddayan
n i bi , pddayan n i , pdlayan n i , purayan
ni -antas ni, bodhayantas bi, ft/kfo-
ayatas bi -antas bi, bhrdmayan bi,
mohayan ni, vnrtayan ni, pvdsayantt
ni.

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing, akathayat ni, acintayat 3. Sing, apvdsayataw.
ns, atarpayut ni, addrayat ni, adfev-
aya£ ni, andmayat ni, aptijayat ni,
arafijayat ni, avdrayat bi, avedayat
N9, apvdsayat ni, asarjayat ns, cwft£-
«yr/£ ni, asthdpayat N3.

3. PI. aptfjayan ni, avedayan ni. 3. PI. apobhayantasi.

Perfect Indicative.

3. Sing, arcaydmdsa ni, eshaydmdsa
ns, kdraydmdsa ni, kathaydmdsa ni,
kshamaydmdsa N2, ghoshaydwdsa ni,
chitaydmdsa ns, janaydmdsa ni, tar£-
aydmdsa N4, toshaydmdsa ni, cfarrp-
aydmdsa B2, dhdraydmdsa ni, ra%-
aydmdsa ni, nodaydmdsa ni, ptft-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Forms of ike Nala and Bhayavadgltd. 305

Causative — concluded.

aydmdsa ni, pUjaydmdsa ni, yqj-
aydmdsa ni, vddaydmdsa ni, var-
aydmdsa N2, vartaydmdsa ni, vep-
aydmasa ni, pdtaydmdsa ni, poc/A-
aydmdsa ni, pvdsaydmdsa bi, st/tdp-
aydmdsa N2.

3. PI. prdvaydncakrire

NI.

S-Future.
Indicative.

1. Sing. kathayishydmi ni bi. 1. Sing. varayishye
nd^ayishydmi ni, bhransayuhydrai ni, N2, pdtayishye ni.
mocayishydmi bi, varayishydmi ni.

3. Sing. nd^ayishyati ni, jt>#/-
ayishyati ni, varayishyati n-2.

3. PL kathayishyantl bi.

Periphrastic Future.
Indicative.

2. Sing, darpayitdsi ni.

II. Desiderative.

Present Indicative.

2. Sing, dMrshasi ni.
1. PL jijivishdmas bi.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing. titikshasvaBi.

Present Participle.

ciMrshanti ni, jigtehatdm bi, ^7- cikirshamdnas'SiyjipldS'
ghdhsanta8 ni. amdnas ni.

HL Intensive.
Present Indicative.

3. Sing, jdgarti bi.
3. PL jdgrati bi.

Present Participle.
jdgratas bi. dedipyarndndm ni.

vol. x. • 42

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

306 «/. Avery,

IV. Denominative.

Present Indicative.

1. Sing, mdrgdmi ni. 1. Sing, lakshaye m.

2. Sing, tapasyasi bi. 2. Sing, mrgayase ni.

3. Sing. asUyati bi, ghdtayati bi.

3. PL gopdyantitf^namasyantiBx. 3. PI. arthayante bi.

Present Optative.
3. Sing, arthayet ni.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing. lakshayasi. 2. Sing, ganayasva N2.

2. PL mrgayadhvam

Nl.

Present Participle.

arthayantas ni, ganayan ns, cAaZ- mrgaydnena ni.
ay at dm bi, namasyantas bi, laksh-
ayanti ni, lokayan bi, sdntvayan N4.

Perfect Indicative.

3. Sing, mantraydmdsa ni, sdntv-
aydmdm N4.

S-Puture Indicative.

3. PL kftrtayishyanti ni, wr^-
ayishyanti ni.

V. Passive.

Present Indicative.

2. Sing, drcyase ns, dhriyase ni.

3. Sing, dpyate bs, ijyafc na, ucyate ni sot, kriyate bi,
klipyate ni, gamy ate bi, grhyate bi, jdy ate tma, jiyate n«, jfidyate
Na, dahyate ni bi, dipyate ni, dry ate bs, d fry ate n«, drpyate n*,
dhiyate B6, dhriyate ni, badhyate B4, mucyate m, mriyate ni bi,
yujyate B2, rahhyate bi, rieyate bi, labhyate bi, lipyate B6, #yate
ni, vidyate n» b», vriyate bi, pishyate B6, pudhyate ni, sajjate bs,
sHyate bi, hanyate sa, hriyate bi.

3. PL kriyante ni, jdyante ns, tap y ante ni, drpyante ns, mt/c-
yemtfe N2, sajjante bi.

Present Imperative.

2. Sing, yujyasva nq.

3. Sing. tUyatdm ni, tyatdm ni, krlyatd?7t Na, dhiyutdm ni.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Farms of the Nala and Bhagavadgitd.

307

Passive — concluded.
Present Participle.

ucyamdnam bi, krshyamdnas ni, kriyamdndni bi, £Ayd-
yamdnena xiygrasyamdnd ni -d#i x\,jfldyarndnd ni, tvaryamdnas
ni, dahyamdnas N4 -d Na -tfra ni -ff«ya Na, dhUyamdnas ni, jptfr-
yamdnam bi , pidyamdnas Na, prchyamdnd ni, mrdyamdndni ni,
rakshyamdnd ni, hanyamdne bi.

Imperfect Indicative.

3. Sing, ajiyata ni, ajildyata ni, adfryata ni, adhlyata Na,
ayujyata ni.

3. PL ahanyanta bi.

Causative Passive.
Present Indicative.

3. Sing, ^kdryate bi, karshyate ni, cdlyate B3, dhdryate B3,
lakshyate N3.

3. PL sddyante bi.

Present Imperative.
3. Sing, namyatdm ni, vedyatdm ni, vepyatdm ni.

Present Participle,
kathyamdne ni, nodyamdnds ni, varnyamdneshu ni.

VL Infinitive.

Accusative. (Suffix ft/m) arcitum bi, dptum Na m, dsitttm ni,
eshtum ni, ikshitum Na, kampitum bi, kartum N8 B6, kroddhum
N4, kshantum ni, khydtum no, grahHtum ni, calitum ni, chettum
bi, jfidtum N* B3, tyaktum ni bi, trdtum Na, drashtum n» bs, (/As-
tern bi, netum N3, bhoktum bi, ydtum n», vaktum ni bi, vartitum
bi, vastum ni, vaditum ni bi, veshtum ni bi, pankitum ni, papitum
nj, ^ocitum B4, protum n§, sodhum ni B3, sthdtum bi, smartum ni,
hantum bs, hartum N4, hdtum ni.

Causative, ishayitum ni, dhdrayitum ni, dharsfiayitum ns,
vdrayitum ni, pvd&ayitum ni.

Denominative, mrgayitum ni.

VIL Preterite Participle.

Active. (Suffix fawantf) dptavati ni pa, uktavdn ni Bpa -tavati
xpi, Artaadn no pa -tavati Npi -tavantas Npi, gatavdn Npa,
tyaktavdn Npa, drshtavdn Na pa b* -tavati ni -tavantas m,labdhavdn
Npi, prutavdn bi, «r*Atavdn Npi. — (navawf) <fofriat?atf Ba.

Passive. (Suffix £a) «A:^a bcs -Jew bi, <7stfa Bca, «ta nci -tfas

N3 pi C3 B4 pi CI -Jtf N3 C3 -£«#* N8 C3 BI CI -£t2m NC3 -fcna NI CI -0&S

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

308 J. Avery,

Preterite Participle — continued.
xi ci B6 4dni B'2 pi -tan xcs m -tain Na, iddhas bi, ishtcis Ba -taNpi

-taW XI B2 -taw N3 -£tW Bl -Uhl BI -taW Nl, w£ta« Nl7 Bl pi 44

xe pi Bpi -tarn N* B3 |>6 -ta/// Ni 4asya N3 -te Na -£g1* Na Bpi ei -tdni
ni bi, wtaw Bpi, tidham bi -dw bi, rddha nci -dham ni, kdntam

NCI, &fta NC8 BC4 ta* NS CI Ba CI -fct Nl pi -taW N5 p* CI Bi Dl -ftfe

nci -te Na tfcw ni pi 4dn nci -tam ni, krshta8 ni -tewa Na, krdnta
nci -tas xa ci bi -td ni pi -te N2, kldfUas ni, klishtam bi, kshatds
Npi, khydtas N3 -taw Bpi -ta* Npi, #rata ncio bcis -ta* xe pe bi pi ci

-£d N-2 p4 CI -tam Nft p6 CS B3 C3 -ta/W N3 -teWtf BC1 -te N5 -taw Npi 4ds

Na p« B4 p; -tdn N2 bci 4dydm ni -tesAw Na, gitam bi, gnptdm xi,
gddhas ni, yra&tdm ni, ghushtdm ni -ta?i ni, carite ni, co/ita
bci, citam bi -taw nci, c/ltoA bcj -ta* bci, cyutas Npi, jdto nci
-ta* bi -ta ni -taw bi 4asya bs -frw Bpi, J/ta nci bc« -ta* N4 ps bi pa,
jusfUam ni, jiidta nci -Jaw xa -ta ni -taw ns -te xa, tat am bi p4
-ta* bi ta/i* Bpi, tapta ni -tarn bi pi, tushtas b«, tfrpta bci -?o* bi ci
-fcw Npi, tyakta xca bc* -ta ns, trnsta xci -ta xa, dagdha bci
-oJ/*o* ni ci, <&£tf<2 Npi -taw Bpi -£<2/* bi, dashtasya ni, dlgdha xct
-dhayd xca -dhdu bi, dUhtas xa -ta xa -taw ns Bpi, <%>ta BC3 -ta ni
-Jaw bs, du&htdsu bi, drdha bci -dham bi, drshta nca cpi bc* -taw
ni p« cpi Bpi ci -ta xps -taw xpa -tena nci -Jew Npi, drutam X* -te
ni, dhUta bci, dhrtam xpi, nashta NC4 -ta* Bpa -taw ni pi -te ni bi
-£d* xpi -tarc bi, ///7c? xpi -taw ni, /?tfta bci, prihtas xpi, jprfta bci
-ta* N3 -te/i« ni -taw ni -tdft xi,/>tata* xca -ta ni -taw ni 4dbhydm
ni, baddhas bi -dhdm ni -c7/id* bi, bhaktas N4 c* -ta Npi ci -taw B4
-taya bi -ta* m ci -tarn Bpi -teshit bi ci, M*ta bci -ta* ns bci
-ta N4 pi 4dm xi -tarn bi, bhuta bci -ta* nci bci -taw xca bci
-te*Aw bi, bhrtas ni, bhrashta xc4 -ta* ni ci bi ci -td xpi -taw xi
-taw nci, bhrdntds ni bci, mattd ni, matas Bpa -id Bpa -taw Bpa
-te Bpi -ta* Bpi, wrtaw bi 4asya bi, w/ta bci, mukta Nca Bca -ta*
Na B6 pi -taw ni bci 4asya bi -frfo ni B3, mtidha Nca Bee -dhas bs
-dhena xa -e?A6t« B6 -6?Ad/i bi, yata ncs bci 4 4tts Na -taw ni bs ci
4asya bi -^ct« bi pi -tais ni, ydta bci -taj» ni pi -taw xi -te ni -^d* w,
yukta bc« -^or* ns bu pi ce -taw X4 -taw xci 4ena bi -tony a bi ct
-te bi -$<is ni BC4 4dn NC2 -ta/« B9 4dndm Ba ci (4ctfama8 bi -wd<
bi), raArta ni -taw ni ^(?w ns, rc^cw bi ci -taw ni -taa bj, rabdhas
ni -dham Na -tlAcfo ni, niddhas bi, rddhns bci -dham bi -dhasya bi
•dhdni bci, labdhas Npi -e£/«# Bpi -dham bi, &/>ta nci, Jwpta bci,
hibdhas bi, y/&ta bci, vishta nci -ta.s ns pi ca Ba pi ci -^d xi cs -^«w
ni bi 4dbhya8 xi, vita bci, vfta (vjyd) bci -taaxi -ta xi -tarn xi -Mm
xci -taw xci, vrtas xi p« bi pi 4d X4 ci bci -taw xi ci bi ps -taw xa
C4 -te xa 4ds xi Bpi ci 4ais xi, vrtftaxci bci 4(hs xi pa ci bs -taw xa pi
ci -te xi bi -tarn Ba, vrddhct xci -tfA«* bi -dham Bpi -dhe&s-dhd* bci,
$akta8 xa bi, ^aptas xi, pishta xci bci -ta xpi -taw xi pi bi -tena xi
-taycr ni -taa Bpi -taw xci, puddhaB<ft) prabdham xi, prdntas xi -&I
xa -taw xi 4a$ya Na Ba -te xi -taw xci, grittis bs -taw ni Ba 4ds w»
-taw ni, prwta xci 4as xa pa 4d xs -taw xpa Bpi 4a»ya bi -ta« Bpi
-tarn xi pi, 8aJcta xci BC4 -ta« bs 4d xi -taw bi pi 4ds Ba 4dndm Bl,
*rta« xpa -ta Bpi -^(W Bpi, srshtd ni -taw Bpi, stktds ni, siddhas Bpi
ca -dhasya nci -dhdndm Ba, suptam xi -taw xi -te xi 4dydm xi,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb-Forms of Que Nala and Bhcujavadgitd. 309

Pbetbbitb Participle — concluded.
staJbdha nci -dhas bi -dhds bi, sthita bcs -to$*N5 pe bio pa ca -£d

Npi BI p4 -torn N9 B7 p3 -tdm N3 -£d£ B3 -tau BI pi -£<fo N2 pi B3 p4

-fdn xi B4, sprshtas ni, «m^« nci -tas ni -*d N4 -tfdm nci -tds X3 bi
-toi* ni, smrtas Bpi -<d bi -tarn bi pa, Aato xca bci -tas ni pi B2 -tarn
xpi bi -Jos Npi 01 Bpi -tdn spi, Atto bci -tits ns pa Bpi -td nb pi -torn
n» pi bi -tdm xi -te ni -tds ni b-4 -tfd/i bi -tats ni, hutam Bpa, Arto
xcio sea -to* bi 4d Npi -torn Npi bi p7 -tdm X4 -te ni, hrshta xcs bci
-few N* -td Na ci -fena ni -tasya ni -te ni -&& ni, hritd ni.

(Suffix /to) ishitas Npi -tow. Npi, ikshitas Npi -£& ni, wc&d ni,
ushitas (vas) ns pi -to Na -tarn ni ci -torn ni, ushitam (ush) bci,
kdnkshitam Bpi, kupitas ni -to ni, kiijitdm nci, kshudhitas ni
-torn xa, grhtta nci -toyd bci -torn bi -6e*Au ni, cintitas ni, ceshti-
tarn Na, jvalitas Npi, trshitas ni, tvaritas ni -to Ni^-to? ni, dayitas
ni -ton Na, partitas Npi, patitd xi pi -te xi -torn ni, piditas nci
-to ni ca pci -tow nci -£d* sc\,ptijitas xi j>\,prathitas bi, bhdshitdm
ni, bhUshitd ni -torn xci, manditdm ni, mathita nci, muditas xi
-tow ni, rakshitam xi Bca, rahitd Na -tow sea -£d* ni, rudite ni,
vidita bci -to Npi -torn ni, vyathita bci -torn ni Bpa -£d« ni Bpi,
vrtditds ni, pankitd ni, sdcitas ni -to Na -torn nci, sevita nci -torn
xca -te NC5, hrshitas bi.

(Suffix na) kirnam Nca, gldnasya ni, channels Na -nam xca -nds
xa, chinna, BC4, dfwia nci -rad Na -warn Na -wdm Na -/id* ni, panna
xci bci -nd n« -was N& -warn bs -w^m ni -ne ni bci -nds Ba -rcd/i xi,
jotfrna xcs bci -ndra ni -/?6 ni, bhinnd bi, mdnam bi, y<fr?,a sea,
ft/jo* bi, vigna nci sea -/id Na, vinna bci, pfmaa ni -ndndm ni,
sanna Bca -wew« bi, stirndm ni, A£/*gw ni -warn ni Bca -now Na ci
-TklW ni.

Causative. (Suffix to) arcitdni ni pi, arjitam ni pi, arditam ni,
arpita sea, ir&aa xpi -torn xi, kathitam xi -£d$ ni, karpitd nci
-torn nci, karshitas xci -to ni ci -to//* xci -tow* ni, kshayita bci,
darpitam Bpi, depitas ni, dharshitds Na, ndditam xa ci, ndpitam bi,
pdtitds xpi, pydyltd Npi, bhdvitas bci -tos bi ci, mdrjitdm ni,
mohitas N4 -torn bi -Jam ni -to#Bi pi, yojitas nci bi, rdjitam ni
-torn ni, vdrtto ni, varjitas Bca -torn xs sa -to* spi, vartitam bi,
pobhitam N3 -torn ni -£d* ni, prdvitas ni, sdditd ni.

Desiderative. ipsiUts ns -torn ni.

Denominative, arthitam Npi, klrtitas bi pa, ganitas Npi -te ni,
pushpitam ni, lakshitas ni pi -£d Npi -torn Npi, sdntvitas ni.

Vm. Gerundives.

(Suffix tavya) dptavyam Npi bi, kartavyam Npi bi -tavydm bi,
gantavyam Npi Bpi, jtldtavyam bi, ddtavyas ni -ya//* spi,
prashtavyas Npi, buddhavyam Bpa, bhartavyd Npi, bhavitavyam
ni, mantavyas bi, mdrgitavyam Bpi, yashtavyain Bpi, yattavyam
xi, yoktavyam Bpi, yoddhavyam bi, labdhavyds Npi, vaktavyam
ni, veditavyam bi, pantavyam ni, protavyasya bi, smartavyas
Npi, hantavyas ni.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

310 J. Avery,

Gbbundivbs— concluded.

(Suffix yd) tkshyam bi, idyam bi, kdmydndm bi, kdrya bci -yas
bi -yam Na pa B4 pa -yd ni pi -ye bi -ydni Npi, kledyas bi, gamy am
bci, grahyam bi, cintya bci -yew Ba -yr/we bi, jfieyas Npi bi pi -yam
ni B6 pi -ya?* xi, tidy as ni, tydjyam Bps, dandy as ni, drpyas »i,
ddhyas bi, cfeyas ni -ya^n ni, depyam bi, piijyas bi, badhyas bi,
7/?eya nci -yam bi, yamya bci, labhyas bi, vadhya* ni, vdcyam bi,
vedyas ni Bpi -yam ni bi, pakyd Npi, pocydn bi, poshyas bi,
hdrye bi.

Denominative, arthitavyam ni.

EL Gerund.

(Suffix tfuo*) ishtvd (ish) bi, ishtvd (yaj) ni, w&tao* nis B6, Arfotf
n« B9, gatvd Ni3 Ba, grhitvd N3 bo, chittvd ns Ba, Jitoo* N4 Ba, jri/Uvd
bii, tyaktvd no Bia, drshtvd N45 bii, dattvd Na, dhydtvd niyprshtvd
ni, buddhvd ni Ba, buddhitvd bi, bhuktvd bi, bhiltvd N4 b», matvd
Na bo, muktvd bi, ydtvd ni, yvktvd bi, ruditvd ni, ruddhvd^
labdhvd ns bi, viditvd Ba, prutfvd nm bs, sr£u<f ni, srshtvd bi, Aatod
B7, A&vd Bl.

(Suffix yo) arcya bi, apya ni, asya ni m, ajpya ns bib, &ya
ns B6, ikshya Nia bs, ushya ns, krtya ns, krshya Na, kramya ns,
kshdlya Na, kshipya N4, khydya ni, gamy a nii, gatya ni, yfAyo
Na, carya Na, c#ya N4, chidya ni, jfidya ni bi, tfrya N4, tyajya bi,
df<iya nio, dipya Na bi, dratya ni, dhdya B6, nadya bi, nandya ni,
namya ni bs, nZya ni, pttrya bi, prpya ni, bhdshya ni,
bhUya ni, mrpya ni bi, mucya Na bi, yamya ni b», yujya ni,
rabhya ni, rudhya ni bi, ruhya Na, lapya Na, labhya Na, lingya
ni, vadya ni, vrtfya bs, vasya ni, vipya N4 bi, pamya ns, pasya ni,
pritya ni B6, prntya N4, pvasya Na, *r/ya nm bs, sryya ni, stabhya
bs, sthdya ni Ba, sprpya ni, stnrtya Na B4, sva)ya ' ns, hatya b\,
hrtya Na bi, hasya ni, Aoya Na bs.

Causative. (Suffix tad) arcayitvd Na, cintayitvd ni, tarkayitvd
ni, darpayitvd ni, piljayitvd ni, mocayitvd ni, yojayitvd ni,
vdrayitvd ni, pdtayitvd ni, sthdpayitvd bi.

(Suffix ya) carya ns, cintya ni, ndyya ns, ropy a N4, vddya ni,
vdrya ni, vepya bi, pvdsya Na, sddya N7 bi, sthdpya ni bi.

Denominative, ganayitvd ni, mokshayitvd ni, lakshayitvd ni>
sdntvayitvd ni mantrya Na, lokya ni.

On the following pages is given a numerical summary of the
forms reported in the above lists, the numbers in the three
classes of text being set side by side, for more ready com-
parison with one another.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- In flection in Sanskrit.

311

3

! «« «

IOOV

5g oo s* ^-

FN *° <« r-»

fHOJ

mSnh

CO **3 CV| ,— i

• CO n "

k ^ 00

i 3£2

00 i-l

3 «

K

nl

1 S »o

»- c

«*-*-

< j ©!

© I

Pi

pq I

2^

.?'

o

OS *— _*j

{Q H ~

■ 2g3

»0 ^ t—

W««S

tocoA^obo
: c* a e» 3 <£ oo

!2£*5-2

& i 3

PQ

S«

H(ON

i— i i-i a

«co<ooo-S^

t- M «* F-i <C

t- "* *« r- « *- .^ -. C

OS

"5

>~fs~
is -a

W r-| ^ ,_ ,*• , "^ _, O

S

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

312

J. Avery,

3

o

«

CO 0

OO ^h ,-iOi-< OCO OOO00O "MOO CM

rnjOO Oi "* O CO OOO USOi-tOO CC O W CO

. I « COQ0i-l"^iO CO i-H

<jjcot- cm iocoo oico»o m >o-cs<e ,— ^-t^ c

|

© 1 : : : : : : :::::::: • : : :

3

CO

«|:: ~ : :- - : : " ; : : : * :- :

^i 1 • CM *- CO CO • ** CO • CO iiiO'i iii
-<|i _ , CM 1 iii i ill

o*

o 1 : : : : : : ;;:::::: - : : :

«

: : : : : : :::::::: ~ : : :

IV

1 o
*J PQ

1 <

: : : : : : : ; : : : : : : ~ \ \

, , , 111 CM • 1 1 1 1 1 1 OJ • • CC
>i 1 iii • iiiii 1— > • 1

00 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1

(Mi « meo it- cm • • . 1 ^ 1 1 ^ | 1

-<

CO

o

' • : : : : : : : 1 : : : : ■"* i i :

_m

: : : : : : 1 : : : 1 : : : : : : :

1— fHO 1 iW CM ■ ■ iiiiCO 111 1

1 r— 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 III 1

1 °

i i : : : : : : : : : : : i : : s : |

CM

pp

: : : : ; : : : : ; : : : : : : : :

«<

iCO "CO i CM « 1QO1 i^iid 111 1

1 °

rH

PQ

.1 1 III 1 1 I IIIII <* 1 . |

<

: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : i :

CO

«

11 1 i 1 <~ iii 1 1 1 00 1 CO • • >o
11 1 it 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 CO 1 > —

«

I. 1 1 0 111 iiiii t- 1

1. c* <* • • — ' ' \ ::::: °* : ^ ^

<1

1 o« ' '- ^« • ' • • • _' ■

CM i CM ^ O i ■ T* NHM i« 1 if • ' CO11-H '

o»

o i ; : : ~ \ \ : : : : : : : : 5 : : «

«

11 t* iiCO ^Hii ii,-ti> iO • 1 '

!'«

1 . CO _iii.ii , 1
, ,-, ,-1 ~* CM 1 1 r-i *- CO f ' 1 I I CM • CM »-• • 1

i-H

0 1 : ; -" : : : : : i : : ; : : 5 : :

mi:: « : :* -::::::: s :^

^ 1 « . © -h « . = - * ■ - ; ; ; ; ; « ; : ;

p

c

<

optative
imperative

S- Aorist :

I. (s) indicative

subjunc. ■{ 2.

(3.

imperative

II. (ish) indie.

subjunc. -{ 2.

(3.

imperative

III. (sish) indie.

subjunc. -J '

imperative

IV. (sa) indie,
subjunctive 3.
imperative

S-Futurb:

indicative

subjunctive 2.
Conditional

Periph.-Fdt. :
indicative

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit

313

©

o o o

1— 1
1— 1

f-t

CM

© © © ©

©

CO

cm

o © o

-«*

©
©

CO

© CO © CO

-

©

^< *- ~

CO CO CO

1— 1

CO

© CO

~* «- r- CO

CO

O i ■ M 94

■

•

r i i
■ •I i

^"

i

III 1
• 1 1

* • CM

* ! I

;

• i CM l

c t- • *a so

» • — CO

CM

00 "* CM

00

•*

• «-• CO

CO

! I I ~ I

-- ;-

1

I ! ;

1

III 1

• i i ?M I

1

1 I !

1

■ I 1 1

C • » CO •

00

CM

: :©

• i CM

1

i CM • •

! ; : : :

~~~

! !-r—

(H

• N . i • •

CO

:

a m i co • •

N ill

©

© • r- •

-

CO • I !

! III!

|

i

—

~Vcm i

-* i i-i . «

CO

- ;-

- — i-

;

— ^ t f— i ■

I

^

; ! ! ! :

:

-— !-! i —

|

III 1

; Ill !

i

■

II! 1

» »•-**-

"■*

• •-• t—

CM

• O i

1 I ! 1 1

•

-;-

— i-

1

—

-!--vi-

7

I i . i •

i

1

l

• !lll

i

l

— • CM 1 t-

__ ~ l ~* i CM

co

■

;

» Ir- ,^

2 i "* : ~*

-

CM

i— i

T*»

CO 1 F^ 1

V*<0 M- CM — 1 CM ©

© ©

co n» w*

-

CM

CO

m^ es

W ! CM

v . — • oo «

1 t— ( 1

i

i i
• i i

•— »

-

ill i

• • i r- •

r-*

i i •

-

i i I i

fH

^^ — • oo ©

»0 rs rH -H w-4 _i CO
CM

■<*

CO © -

©

i © i-l

* i • i i

i

1 1 1

©

•

■ ill

j

•*3 III!

' H 1 1 1 |

i— i

1 1 1
1 I 1

;

~*

«-« ^ 1 l<*

© co

CM ^ •

;

~

• CM • • •

^ cj co

CM CO

•

HNff1

>

YOU X.

43

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

J. Avert/,

© *-< *-< ©

i

^ CO CO HHON \G —i NHflJO CM c

1

OO 00 00 O «© -^ CO 00 MH©H O O

iii f^ i • • ■ i co •

• •

N

, 1 •-< CO CM il,,—. i jo i

; :

if ■ • »0 rl -t » ■— ' CO f-l CO CM <©

to •**

» 1 : • :

• Si I I ' I

\ J

1 ! ! J

• i i • i i

• • • i i

-1 ;

1

• \a ■ i — •

<* i

CM i

1 : : :

I ! ! •' ! !

• • i '

■ ii r i i

• • ,h ^ e* • • *-« 1 ^h icoi!

i i i i i

■ it i i •
iii i i i

i

! I !

; ; : ; ; ;

i i lO

1 —1 ~l • ?© r-1

co co

..•

'I'! •

! ! ! ! J I

1 1

— ;

i

!

! ! !

• •( i i i
iii i • i

""" !

"

i 1 CM

• t-— i © i

a>

J

iii i i i

- ■!- -!

— -;

S

I 1 ! S S

! ! ! ! !

*

!

I 1 IN

■ •I i • •
• i i ■ . i ■

1 •£

n

I ^

iii i cm • — • i i m

i

i • I <£» • Oi • i i

!

ii •*< 00 — • <M ^ Oi CM

• i CO NN '«N CM CO — > CO «D — «©

!

>

i i • till i •-* i
il i i i i i i •

r- « i

!

i

ii . i i ■ i • i i
ii • i i i ■ i i i

1

• I CM • - — *-

ii CO«00>h iOiO CO — ,-> ,— i SO ~ c* <-4

ii no

• 1 : : : : : : : : - :

; ;

J

: : : : : : : ; :« :

S I

• i »N H i IN CO IH i
1 i i—i ii ii

I"1

\

\
>

ii
•

indicative
Imperfect

Intensive.
Present:
indicative

subjunc. < 2.
/ 3.

optative
imperative
Imperfect

Perfect :
indicative

Benominat.

Present :
indicative

subjunc. < 2.
(3.
ontative

imperative
Imperfect

Perfect :
indicative

s
.. ►»

Li w
H —

D S

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit

215

3

<

CM o o o o

r-« O O O O

CO OS 00 0»
C* CO T* *-

CI I

00 ~ CO — i

fSTg*

~* • to

tO 00 C©
00 CO US CO o

K

P
Q

I ^

pa

CN IQ —

00 P0 — CO »0 CO

00 t* <* CO <* ~*

i ^- i— —• ac cm

"o IS

t

if

8 .

• CO

J!

&

II
II

HI ft*

§1 ~ II.

|.s g 8-Jf §.a

3

11

S-S

Wh

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

316

e/1 Avery,

—I © O O © ©

© © -f d

61
a. a

tflrl

.« £ "~ s •- «s ^ a

III f l*Sf

fc.a

ggl 1 §•-§!

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sunsktit.

817

c

< © © © co © © c

f* © © © © c
© »b co © © es

> e

o

> C* © © © T © —

c

©

© CO • — • «o «©

© © CM — CI NM^OO r-^r-if CT

eo

• i i

• • i

ii • iii
• i • • »

i iii

i

<* CO

-

• \c

1 I I _

*- Oi *-*

• 00 HH^

•

1

-

p-l

*--

-

-

csi

-

-

CO

I-*

!_;

r

,-

-

1 rH I-*

-

^

-

- - ; —

— !

-; '

--'

-

- —

— ;

:^ :

-

Oi

~*

us

*"•

rH t—

eo

«C

-

« CO CO

;

!

I

■~

1

;

\

~

1 ^ ,-, CM —

i

t-

I

i CO ■

1 1 1
• 1 1

-'—

~"

-

—

- -;

1

I GO kO ■ ©

!

CO

>

hi

Aobist:
indicative

subjunc -J o*

optative

S-Futube:
indicative

*3 2

06 .. .£

Si*

?

1

g

3

I

g

t

!

E

Intensive.

Present:
indicative

subjunc -J '

1
t

8

I

1

§

si

u SI

ft-

d

d

If

o6«

VOL. X.

44

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

818

•A Avery \

*

I

-

^ OMO

8

©©*-*-

o ©

«s rt

48i 3

13 0
10' 2
3 ' 4

191210

4 0

0 14
10 5
7 15

00 ©*

© o

© ©

co

oiH : : :
«|: : :n

©

1 •

*- ;

00 i r-

•"co'co

—

-

2

<

o l :
«l":

CO •

; —

! ! !

gl«

! ! !

-

•*!_:_.

, J '-, I

!

; ; ;

-

j

• i i

<j

t^

I ! *"

1

o

!

! ! !

P

co

« 1 :

i i Ci

p-i § i

-- --

« 1 :

; ; ^

^

|_? U. _

N;a| !

N i-

1

1 i-H

— __

r-'

t-| !-

—

—

— -

$

~! « 1 :

P

Q

1— 1
2

-hr

i M i :

1 °°

-1 S

■ i csi

iq ©

OO CO

pq | co

i-

CO
CO

lOkOOO

r-t IG

cq 1—

! CO "*

00

*-

j=Lir_

" « 1 :

(M i

CO

i <M >

'

; ; ;

\ CO i

-

"« 1':

; ;

;

! J

~

1
1*

^ CO*

o

:J-f
|.a s

4

t %
S.'B

*~ a

Fassive.

Present:
indicative

*J CO

1

optative
imperative
Imperfect

1*
11

00 Hi

CO

I

I
S

1

• §1

PL

s|

It

ll

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- In flection in Sanskrit

819

GENERAL SUMMARY (op personal forms).

Present-Sts.
indicative
subjunctive
optative
imperative

Imperfect

total

Perfbct-Sys.
indicative
subjunctive
optative
imperative

Pluperfect

total

Simple- Aorist
indicative
subjunctive
optative
imperative

total

S-Aorist
indicative
subjunctive
optative
imperative

total

S-Fcture
indicative
subjunctive
imperative

Conditional

total

Periph.-Fut.
indicative

total

Total

15,048 5,057 1,507

Simple Verb.

I

6,271
1,419
593
4,772
1,993

B C

2,945 916

84, 4

841 124

181' 246

1,006' 217

2406
76
40
41
44

899

355

2,607

840
610
141
262

899' 355

43
18

1,853

327

337

36

56

756

62

34
29

24

63 13

89 156

3
92

157

6 20

20,281 6,179 2,076

20

Grand Totals: A. 22,461; B. 6,736; C. 2,272.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

820

J. Avery,

INFINITI

VE.

VE.

GERUND.

ACCUSATIVE. |

DAT!

IJG.-AR

LOCAT.

A

Bio'

a|b| |a

|a

ABC

Suffix am

44

""I-!

e

183

--

as 6

i 9

Suffix tod

20166

241

turn

5

18

103i

tavf

108

1

to* 12

tari

4

tvdya

8

tavai

26

2

1

sani

11

tot

35

taye

68

1

ya

71H27

216

tyai

2

tya

13

33

44

096

86

__

!

96

7

i

aye

17

I

one

6

1

vane

28

__

i

mane

7

._

|

dhyai

72

--

I

PARTICIPLES and GERUNDIVES (B and C only).

Act

1VE.

Middle

Passive.

mdna

dna

mdna | ta

na |

tavya

tva
BjC

T

aniyav y>

B

C

B

C

BjC

B

C

1 B

C

B

CJ

B

C

B

C B C

Present

237

235

176

49

25!16

67

28'i

1

Perfect

90

51

9

i

1

Future

21

1

8

1

Preterit

1»

30*

784«

12085

26*

74

i,

Gerundive

1

52'

30*

l

--

8

__*9" M'

' Predicatively. * Predicatively, 3. »do. 17. 4 do. 169. 5 do. 224.
8 do. 15. "do. 47. ,0do. 14.

•do. 5. 'da 40.

VERB-FORMS OF MANU AND QAKUNTALA.

By way of appendix to the above, the following brief and summary classification
of the verb-forms found in Manu and in QakuntalA (Bohtlingk's edition) is fur-
nished by Mr. A. H. Edgren, an instructor in Yale College :

Simp. V.

Caus.

Desid.

Denom.

M.

1263

1474

58

39

77

5

Q.

532
25

227
12

11

5

M.

45
351

1
8

1

1

118
42

M.

8
9

<?■

M.

<?•

indicative

optative

imperative

5
....

4

1

----

Imperfect

Perfect-System :
indicative

AOBI8T-ST8TEM :

indicative

opt. (precative)

11 1

1

1
28 77

Future-System :
future

1

19

Conditional

1

2

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Verb- Inflection in Sanskrit

321

These were noted by Mr. Edgren by the way, when he was engaged in looking
carefully through the texts in illustration of another subject, so that he cannot
vouch for the accuracy at every point of his collection and enumeration ; but the
statements are at any rate correct enough to help cast light on the proportion of
the forms of the verb as they appear in actual use. The preponderance of optative
forms over all others in Manu will be noticed as a striking peculiarity. Mr. Edgren
notes further that finite or personal verbs occur nearly three times as often in
Bohtlingk's translation of the Qakuntala as in the original, notwithstanding the
literalness of the version.

List of the Verb-Roots pound in A, B, and C.

ahc A.
akshA.
aghdy A.
ankhay A.
ac A.
aj A, B.
ajirdy A.
anj A, B.
atC.
at A.
ad A,B.
adhvariy A.
adhvary A.

an A, B.
anniy A.

apagy A.

am A.

amitray A.

ar A, B, C.

ardtty A, B.

1 arc A, B.

3 arc A.

arch B, C.

arj A, B, C.

arthay A, C.

ard A, C.

ardh A, B, C.

1 arsh A.

2 arsh A, B.
arh A. B, C.
av A, B.

1 ac A, B.

2 ac A, B, C.
acvdy A.

1 as A, B, a

2 a* A, B.
as&y C.

ah A, B, C.

4pA,B, a

or A

as A, B, C.

I A, B, C.

i (in, inv) A, B.

ihg C.

idh A, B, C.

indray A.

irasy A.

i<B.

1 wA A, B.

torp A, C.

2 isAA.

1 harsh A, C.

3 wA A, B, C.

2 toraA A.

4 t*AC.

to/C.

ishanay A.

kalp A, B, C.

ishany A.

MnM B, C.

wAay A.

kdc A, C.

ishudhy A.

ktrtay C.

faMy A.

top A, C.

*A.

kuldyay A.

ffoA A, B, C.

fc#C.

WA.

fcAJ A, B.

«ii?A.

krpany A.

VA.

krpay A.

id A, B, C.

krakshA.

tr A, B, C.

krattly A.

icA, B.

krand A, C.

fefcA.

Arap A.

to a

ftrom A, B, C.

t*A.

kri A, B.

ufeA A.

krid A.

tic A, C.

krudhA, C.

ud A, B.

Arttp A, Bf C.

t*# A, B.

i&im C.

ubhA.

klid C.

urushy A, B.

Wt<;C.

uah A, a

fotod A, B.

dnay A.

toton C.

tirjay A.

A»A«m A, 0.

ttrnt* A, B.

totor A, B.

liAA,B.C.

totoJ C.

2 MA.

1 kshi A, B.

r^y A.

2 feAt A.

ftoy A.

3 tofci A, B, C.

Q A.

kship A C.

ecfoA.

kshud A.

cM A, C.

kshudh C.

kandkay A.

kshnu A.

toflfcC.

khadB.

kaihC.

khan A, B.

ton A, B.

khdd A.

torn A, B, C.

^A.

kamp B, C.

Mud A.

1 iter A, B. C.

toyd A. B, C.

2 tor A.

panay C.

3 tor A, B.

0a*e2y A.

1 kart A, B, C.

?adC.

2 tor* A, B.

?am A, B, C.

1 gar A, B.

2 #ar A.

3 gar A, B, 0.
^araT* A.
garh A.

1 pa* A, B.

2 yet A, B, C.
toy A.

?<ft A. B.
gup A.
pttr A, B.
guhC.

gopdy A, B, C.
grabh A, B.
grah B, C.
yra* A, C.
gld A, C.

ar A, B.
gjuu A.
ghdtay C.
ghush A, C.
^Ar4 A, B, C.
cakah Ay B, C.
ca< A.
cad A.
canasy A.
car A. B, 0.
caraniy A.
cart A.
ca/ C.
c4y A.

1 ci A, C.

2 ci A.

3 ci A, B.

4 cit A, C.
tint C.
CMC A.
ctrtB.
cud A.
ceshtC.
cyu A, B. C.

1 chad A, B, C.

2 chad A.
chalay C.
chid A, B. C.
janh A.
jan A, B, C.
;anCy A.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

322

J. Avery,

jap B.
jambh A.

1 jar A.

2 jar A.

3 jar A.
jas A.
j[<! A.
jdray A.
ji A. B, C.
jinv A, B.
jCv A, B, C.
ju A.

jt*r A.
jush A, B.
jft A, B.
jurv A.
jeA A.
jU A, B, C.
>m4y A.
jyd A, B.
jrambh A.
/r* A.
>va/ C.
tans A.
to* A.
taksh K.
tad A.
tan A, B, C.
fond A.
tandray B.
top A, B, C.
tapasy C.
torn A, B.
tor A, B, C.
tarushy A.
tar* C.
torrf A. B.
torp A, B, C.
tarsh, A, C.
tor/j A.
tavishiy A.
tavishy A.
<y A, C.
tilvildy A.
to A.
ty' A.
tod A.
tor A.
turany A.

1 to?' A.

2 toe A.
to*fcC.
t&rv A.
tyq; A. C.
tras A, C.
*rd A. C.
(var B, 0.
^vtsn A.
par A.
rfa»p A, C.
daksh A.

rfagr^ A.
dantf C.
dan A.
rfa&A A.
dam C.
damany A.
rfay A, B. C.

1 dar A, B, C.

2 dar B.
darp A, B.
darf A, B, C.
darfc A, C.
darasy A.
<ftw A.

dah A, B, C.
1 dd A, B, C.

3 da* A.
<#<; A.
<*fo A.

div A, B, C.
dfc A, B, C.
dih A, C.

1 dt A, C.

2 rfi A, B.
ditonB.
dip A, B, C.
<to A.

duchundy A.
MA.
drugrbiy A.
duvasy A.
dt«n A, B, C.
rfiiA A, B.
duhiy A.
devay A, B.
dyut A, C.
drd A.

rfrw A, B, C.
druh A, B.
drU A.

dvM A. B, C.
dfam A.
dhanv A.
(Mam A, B.
dfo*r A, B, C.
dharsh C.
\ dhd A,B, C.
2(tt4A,8.

1 dtoto A, B, C.

2 dAdv A.
dhUdhinv) B.
dhiydy A.
dnl A, B.
dhunay A.

dM A, B,
d/m*d C.
dhydC.
dhraj A.
dArttv A.
dhvahs A.
dhvan A.

C.

nafon A, B.
nod A, C.
nand A, B, C
nabh A. B.
nam A, B, C.
namasy A, B, C.
nart A.
nard B.

1 rwf A, B, C.
3 fMI£ A.

ww A.
nah A, B.
nddA A.
ny A, B.
ntd A.
nC A, B, C.

2 nn A, B.

3 nu A.
wad A, B. C.
nedB.

nrmanasy A.
nyuhkhay A, B.
/>ac A, B, C.
pan B, C.

1 pat A, B, C.
3 pa/ A.
Ipad A. B, C.
\pan A.
panasy A.

1 1 par A, B, C.

2 par A, B.
pare A, B.
parf C.
pap A. B. C.
;lpd A,B.
,'Spd A, B.
pint; A, B.
ipibd A.

pw/i A.

\\pik.

2 pf A, B, C.
pid A, C.
pfy A.
putriy A.
pusft A, B. C.
pushpy C.
pfl A. B, C.
;P*j C.
prtandy A.
prtany A.
praksh A.
jwacfc A, B, C.
pra& A, B.
pro* A.
priydy A.
prt A, B, C.
pru A.
tprtrtft A.
\prush A.
pto A, B, C.

iphan A.
ipnar A.
bandh A, B, C.
2 barh A, B.
MdA A, B.
budh A, B, C.
bru A, B, C.
6Aa*sA A, B, C.
bhaj A, B. C.
bha*j A, B, C.
bhan A.
6Aand A.
bhandandy A.
6/»ar A, B, C.
bharv A.
6Aa« A.
M4 A, B, C.
IfekfeC.
bhdsh B, C.
6/ufc* A.
bhid A, B.
bhishajy A, B.
Ml A. B.
6AM A.
bhvj A, B, C.
bhur A.
bhuraj A.
bhurany A.
Md A', B, C.

1 &A«*A A.

2 6M*/i A.
Mtyas A.
6/i raj; A.
bhram C.
6Arac A. B, C.
bhraj A, B, C.
bhri A.
bhresh A.
maw A A.
makhasy A.
ma; 0.

majy A, B, C.
mand C.
mad A, B, C.
man A, B, C.
manasy A.
mandy A.
mantray A, B, C.
rna^n A, B, C.
mand A.

1 mar A, B, C.

2 mar A.
marg C.
marc A, B.
marj A, B, C.
mard A.
mard A, C.
mardh A.
marc A, B. C.
marsh A, C.
maA A.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Vert-Inflection in Sanskrit

323

2 md A, B.

rAA.

3 md A, C.

HA.

mdnavasy A.

1 rt* A, B.

wwlry C.

3ruA.

1 mi A, B.

rue A.

2 mi A, B.

ruj A.

mtfcoA A.

riM* A, C.

migh A.

InKftA.

mito A.

2 riktt A. B, C

tnilrf A.

ruvany A.

rnish A, C.

ru*A A.

miA A.

ruh A, B, C.

mi/A.

rflp B.

muc A, B, C.

rg A.

mud A, B, C.

lakshay C.

mter A.

&W B. 0.

mittft A, 0.

top B, C.

muh B, C.

toM A, B, C.

tnr^ay A, C.

likhC.

moksh B, C.

ling 0.

myaksh A.

«p A, C.

mraksk A.

lih B.

mrad A.

K A, B, 0.

mruc B.

lup B, C.

ya> A, B, 0.

lubh A, B, C.

yat A, B, C.

fo&C.

yam A, B, C.

vaksh A.

yas A.

vac A, C.

yd A, B. C.

vacasy A.

y<fc A, B, 0.

raiic A.

ydd*A.

vat A.

2 yu A, B, C.

vad A, B, C.

3 yu A.

vctdh A.

yw; A. B, C.

vadhary A.

yudh A. C.

van A, B.

yttp A, B.

vananv A.

ro»A A.

vanush A.

ratefc A. B, C.

vanushy A.

ray A, C.

vand A, B, C.

raihary A.

1 vap A.

rod A

2 vap A, B.

radfc A.

vapuahy A.

ran(ran) A.

vow A, B, C.

randhandy A.

1 var A, B.

raP A.

2 var A, B, C.

ropf A.

varivasy A.

raAA A, B, 0.

varey A.

ram A, B, C.

2 var; A, B.

rahC.

vara C.

1 rd A, B.

var* A, B, C.

3rd A.

vardh A, C.

r#A, B, C.

VOTSh A, B.

rddfc A, B.

varfc A.

n'A.

valguy A.

rifcfcA.

vaway A.

rfc A, B.

vac A, B.

rip A.

2 va* A.

ribh A, B.

3 vas A.

ricA.

6 va* A, B, C.

risk A, B.

IwwA.

rufta»yA.

8 ikuB.

vaaily A.
vasnay A.
vaA A, B, C.
1 vd A.
2vdA.
6 vd A, B, C.
vdc A.
vdjay A.
vdtfcA A, C.
vdc A, B, C.
vie A, C.
vv A,B, C.
vithury A.
1 vid A, B, 0.
3 vid A, B, C.
vidh A, B.
v»p A.
vip A, B, C.
vish A, B.
1 v* A, C.
3 v«A.
5 vi A.
vtoy A, B.
vtiay A.
vrshany A.
vrshdy A.
ven A, B.
vep C.
vyaft B, C.

1 vyd A, C.

2 vyd A.
vyac A.
vya& A, B, 0.
vyadh A, B.
way C.

vrad A.
way A.
wacc A.
wddA A.
widC.
v/ajr A.
vftB.

cans A, B, C.
ca* A, B, C.
fxink C.
cadA, C.
«p A, B, 0.

1 jxntt A.

2 cam B.
car A, B, C.
cardh A.
ca* A, B.
led A.

2 cd A, B.
cd* A, B, C.

1 fife* A, B.

2 cite;* A.
ciill§ A.

cw/i A, B, C.
tf A, B, C.
Pmc A, B, C.

pa; A.
cundh A, C.
1 puM A.
3 p«5A A, B, C.
cubhdy A.
pttfA A, 0.
p& A.
pcand A.
pca?^i A.
pcul A.
pnath A.
(rath A, B.
crathary A.
prawi A, C.
cravasy A.
prdB.
prt A, B, C.
crish A.
prtA.

1 prt* A, B, 0.

2 prw A.
prttfA A.
$ish A, B.
pvanc A.
cvas A, B, C.
cvd A.

pvi* A.
*aA»A A.
sac A, B.
*a; A, B, C.
sad A, B, C.
son A, B.
«ap A.
sapary A.
j?ar A, B, C.
sarany A.
*ary A, B, 0.
sarp A, B, C.

80CC A.

«w A.
sah A, B, C.
sd A, B.
stfctfi A.
sdntvay C.
« A, B.
sic A, B, C.

1 sidh A, B.

2 stdft A, B, C.
s!vB.

su A, B, C.
sushvay A.
sukrat&y A.
*d A, B.
steC.
904 A.
sev A, C.
skand A, B.
aJfcadA A.
*AaiB.
stan A, B.
sfaM A, B, 0.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

324

J. A

very.

star A, B.
stir A.
stu A, B, C.
stubh A.
*<u*A A.
*<Ad A, B, C.
and A.
snih A.
jjw A, B.
spardh A, B.
aparp A, B, C.
aparh A.
tpac A.

*p# A.

«van A.

AW A.

sprhay A.

svap A, B, C.

A« A, B, C.

*p/mr A.

8vapa8y A.

huvany A.

sphurj A, B.

svar A.

AaA.

*mor A, C.

wid A.

AeaAA, B.

*ro» A, C.

han A, B, C.

hnu A, B.

syand A, B, C.

har A, B, C.

Art C.

sras A, B, C.

Aar*A A, B, C.

Arfl A.

ariv B.

has C.

IdddC.

*rtdA A.

1 hd A, B.

hvar A.

*ru A, B, C.

2 A« A, B, C.

hvd A, B.

svaj A, C.

At A, B.

svad A, B.

Atii* A, B, C.

ERRATA.
A few errata which have been discovered in the article are here noted.

The accent has been omitted from moist, p. 232, col. a; bruve, hnuve, hrnUhi
rakshasc, 232 b; vashti, sind'ti, andkti, 233 a; fikshate, 234b; s&vate, 236 b;' par-
cas, 238 a; r'dhat, 239 a; haran, 241 a; rdhyd'ma, 242 a; gatam, gantam, 244 a;
vdrdhethdm, 244 b ; bhur&ntu, dcaram, 246 a ; dmimUhds, 246 b ; dvahas, drujas,
dgachas, 247 a ; acrintta, vydta, 247 b ; dhuvanta, 249 b ; dAe, 250 b ; dbhutdm,
254 a; voce, 267 b; didd'ya, ferpanydti, 272 a; vacydmtdm, 275.

Corrected numbers of occurrences are daddmi \,j6shi n^prndsit^ 232 a; A«t* ;»,
r/J;e t, 232 b; jusheta 4, 241 b; dddhdiana i i, 245 a; pibadhvam a, 245 b; tridmd
33, 251 a; cucugdhi i, 253 a; apoct *, 275; ydshtave *, vr*A/vf •«, 276; abhdshata
Nil, 300b; dAoNa, 301 a.

Other emendations (omitting a few obvious ones) : p. 226, 1. 30, read ram (for
ran) ; 233 a, 8, suvdsi; 235 b, 25, ydcdmahe (for ydsd . . .) ; 242 b, 16. trd'sva; 245 a,
13, undtta ; 245 b, last line, insert nabhantdm * <• ; 247 a, 37, d'jat (for d'rjat) ; 254 a,
end. transfer yodhat i, crdvat io, to 3. Sing.; 260 a, 11-12, amddishus; 272 a,
2, avarivar ; 279 b, 2, insert tishthdtdi 199.1*; 280 a 5, from below, insert bodhi (1) ;
280 b, 14-15, dele veksheta ; 284 a, 5 from below, insert avet 1 ; 297 a, 10 from
below, dele bravati Ni ; next line, insert bhavati bi 7 ; 299 a, 3 from below, insert
\bruv\-ati N 1 .

Owing to corrections and changes made in the body of the article while going
through the press, the numbers given in the preliminary explanations do not
always agree precisely with those of the summaries, and should be amended to
accordance with the latter.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

ARTICLE XI.
A STATISTICAL ACCOUNT OF

NOUN-INFLECTION IN THE YEDA.

By CHARLES R. LANMAN,

▲BSOCLtTB-PBQFEMOB FOB 8ANBKBIT IN THB JOHNS HOPKINB VNITBB8XTT. BALTIMOBX, MD.

Presented to the Society October 25th, 1877.

The treatment of the inflective forms of any Indo-European
tongue requires a division of the subject into two : the verb,
and the noun. Each of these, again, is bipartite : the one part
deals with the formation of word-stems; the other, with the
suffixes of inflection.

For the language of the Veda, three of these four chapters
have been made the object of special systematic investigation :
the first, or mode and tense-stems, by Delbriick, in his book
Das AUindische Verbum (Halle, 1874), p.83 ff.; the second, or
verb-inflection in a narrower sense, by the same scholar, ibidem,
pp.23-78 ; the third, by Lindner in his AUindische Nominalbildung
(Jena, 1878); a careful working out of the fourth, or noun-
inflection in the Veda, has become a desideratum. This I now
attempt to supply.

In so doing, certain limitations of the plan of the work and
of the ground covered by it seemed advisable. I have accord-
ingly restricted myself to the texts of the Eigveda-sanhita and
the'Atharvaveda-sanhita: for the former I have aimed to be
complete and exhaustive ; from the latter I have excerpted, I
believe, all the noteworthy forms, generally excluding those
which conform entirely to the norms of the later language, but
including all belonging to the double sets, like those in -d and
dni, -dsas and -<fo, etc. The terms " noun " and " verb " cover
the great bulk of the Vedic vocabulary. Under " noun " I
have included all that is subject to distinctively nominal inflec-
tion— that is, substantives, adjectives, and participles, and even
the nominal forms from pronominal stems. Thus, of the three
vol. x. 45

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

326 C. R. Lawman^

equivalent forms, upare, upards, and upardsas, I have taken
account of the second and third, but not of the first These
true pronominal forms, along with a few numerals, make a small
residue of so varied character that it is best treated by itself.
The infinitives and absolutives, too, given by Del brack (p.
221 ff.), I have not repeated, although, on their inflectional side,
they are nouns.

With the history and genesis of the forms of declension I
have concerned myself only where circumstances demanded.
These matters lie beyond the scope of my work ; but, I may
add, such collections of facts as the following seem to me to be a
sine qua non for fruitful speculation upon this subject — if,
indeed, it ever can be very fruitful.

An extension of this work over the texts of the Brdhmanas
and later literature would doubtless be useful. This has been
done for the verb by Professor Avery in the preceding article;
but the inflective system of the Veda, when contrasted with
that of the later language, is comparatively less multiform on
the field of the noun than on that of the verb : for although,
upon both, the Veda shows a rank growth of forms which die
out later, yet the process and result have been different for each.
Originally there may have been some slight modal or other
distinction between griiavas, grnu, crnudhi, qrnuhi, and crudhi;
but the instrumental singular feminine of an t'-stem had
absolutely no implicit difference of function or meaning,
whether ending in -itf, -yd, 4, -V, or ind. In the later Sanskrit,
the conception of modal relations and the ability to utilize the
ample means of nice expression offered by its system of verb-
inflection, instead of developing to wonderful perfection (as they
did with the Greeks), became lost; and with them also a host
of forms ; until, for example, the style of the Hitopadega hobbles
along with the aid of bungling absolutives and participles. The
conception of the case-relations, on the other hand, naturally
survived, and, for each, at least one form, and generally only
one, for its expression. The inflective system of the nouns has
become contracted, rigid, and uniform ; but not, like that of the
verb, essentially mutilated.

From considerations of practical importance, the work of
collection was based upon Grassmann's excellent Index-vocabu-
lary to the Eig-Veda ; by it alone was almost entire complete-
ness attainable, and the necessity of separating by exegesis
multitudes of homonymous forms (for the most part) avoidable.
That a careful revision of the exegesis of all these ambiguous
forms, with constant reference to the views of Roth in the St.
Petersburg Lexicon, would have been a proper preliminary to
my collection of materials, I cannot deny ; but I hope that the
progress of Vedic study may be better furthered by my offering

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

. Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 327

what I have at once, than by waiting to carry out such a plan.
It is, at any rate, a real step in advance to have all that is
doubtful and questionable conveniently grouped together.
This done, the cases of the docket are at least prepared for the
decision of scholars of riper judgment

The material from the Atharva-Veda was collected by the
aid of Professor Whitney's complete manuscript Index to that
text To him I desire to make acknowledgments for his
kindness in lending me the volume, and for the advice and
encouragement he has given me in my work.

The order in which I have treated the different stems aims
chiefly at convenience of practical reference, and is in general
as follows :

L Stems whose suffixes end in vowels ;

II. Suffixless stems ;

IIL Stems whose suffixes end in t, n, and 8.

I. The a-stems (m. and n.), as most numerous and important,
come first ; then the d-stems (f .^ ; the z-stems (m., n., and f .) and
the u-stems (m., n., and f.) follow, along with the few mascu-
lines and feminines in i and fl, not radical ; next, the ar-stems
(m., i, and n.), and finally those in o, ai, and au.

IL Under this head I have arranged the stems of nouns,
simple and compound, substantive and adjective, whose only
element, or whose final element, is a root; first come the
vocalic, and then the consonantal stems, in alphabetical order.
Some words, however, as agreeing in declension with class IL,
and therefore better excluded from IIL, are treated here,
although formed with suffixes (as -aj\ -ij, -it, -ut, -vat). They
are neither numerous nor important enough to warrant our
setting up special classes for them.

III. First come the stems ending in vocalic root + t, belong-
ing declensionally to II. ; then, the participles : namely, present
participles in -ant (or -at of reduplicating verbs) and perfect
participles in -vans; and, as analogous to these, the compara-
tives in -iyans; and finally, the stems formed by the suffixes
-vant and mant, -van and -man, -an and -in, -as, -is, and -us.

Lindner has treated the form and accentuation of noun-stems
only in relation to their derivation from roots. There are also
certain changes of stem and of accent which are common to
whole classes of words, arid are purely declensional : as, the
shifting of the accent to the ending in the genitive plural of
oxytone stems in t, «, r, and the distinctions of "strong,"
u middle," and " weak " forms of the same stem. These facts
will be noticed in their proper places. (For a general discussion
of the Stammabstvfende Declination, see Brugman, in Curtius?s
Studien, ix.Stfl ff., and Kuhn's Zeitschrifi, xxiv.l ff.) Besides

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

828 C. R. Lanman,

these, there are many and varied minor peculiarities, occurring
sporadically ; as, the nasalization of a final vowel (e. g..
camas&'fi., I.s.m., which thus becomes identical with the samhiia-
form of an accusative plural masculine before a vowel), or of a
stem (e. g., yuj-, yufij-), the " strengthening " of a stem (e. g., pad-,
pd'd), or the contraction of a case-form (e. g., vedh&'m for vedhd-
sam). The comparison of such of these as are similar will be
facilitated by an Index. A concluding section will take account
of words which resist convenient classification : and will give
comparative statistics concerning the use of double-forms, and
so much of a general summation of results as may be necessary.

The full set of declensional forms of many words is a piece of
patch-work made by putting together fragments of the sets of
several stems : so for akshtin dkshi, asQi&n dsthi, dadh&n dddhi,
sakthdn sdkthi; yakdn yakr't, qakdn cdkrt ; ndkta naJctan, cirM
(firshdn; c&kshas cdkshan (AV. x.2.6). This "change of theme"
is especially common between the i and t-stems (cf. oshaiUri,
bhil'mi, rd'tri, and their forms), so that it is often doubtful to
which of these a form is to be referred. This subject deserves
a special investigation. (See Asboth, Die Umwandhing der
Themen im Lateinischev, Gottingen, 1875.)

I have enumerated in full all the forms that occur, whenever
it seemed that any valuable practical purpose would be served
by such an enumeration. Grassmann's and Muller's Indexes
being in the hands of every student of the Veda, it is believed
that a detail of case-forms found in the text on every page, and
counting by scores and hundreds, would be a useless expendi-
ture of space.

The names of the cases are abbreviated by their initials in
capitals (N. A. L D. Ab. G. L. V.) ; designations of number
(s. d. p.) and of gender (m. f. n.), by their initials in small letters.
Gr. stands for Grassmann ; his Wbrierbuch zum Rig -Veda is
designated by Wb., his Uebersetzung, by Ueb. The Lexicon of
Bohtliugk and Eoth is cited by the initials BR The pada-
text is denoted by p.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 329

STEMS IK A.

The following is a synopsis of the terminations of the
inflectional forms :

Singular: N.m., -as, -a'/ A.m., -aw, -dm?, -a?; N.A.n., -am,
-a'; I.m.n., -ad, -dy end, -ena (-enan, -dn) ; D.m.n., dya (-dyan) ;
Ab.m.n., -dt, -aat?; G.m.n., -asya (-asyari), asiaf, asyd; L.m.n.,
-e, -a'/ V.m.n., -a (-an), -a".

Dual : N.A.V.m., -d (-dn), -an, -a/ N.A.n., -e; I.D. Ab.ra.n.,
-dbhydm, -dbhidm; G.L.m.n., -ayos, -os.

Plural: N.V.m., -dsas, -ds,-aas; A.m., -dn, -dn, -dns; N.A.V.n.,
-d, -dni, -ad f, -a ? ; I.m.n., -ebhis, -ais; D. Ab.m.n., -ebhyas, -ebhias;
G.m.n., -dndm, -dnaam, -dm; L.m.n., -eshu.

There are no irregularities of accent

Nominative Singular Masculine.

The regular ending of this case is s. It is the most frequent
form in the RV., and occurs 10,071 times (cf. Benfey, Vedica, p.
115). The number of stems in connection with which it is found
is 1845: their frequency forbids their enumeration. The form
indras, for example, occurs 523 times; 'ekas, 104 ; eshds, 106 ; kds,
111; devds, 203; mitrds, 132; yds, 1010; ads, 891; sdmos, 220;
vdrunos is found 94 times ; sutas, 93 ; pundnds, 84 ; vrshabhds,
80; pdvamdnas, 65 ; bhdgas, 65 ; vipras, 59 ; phtds, 56 ; sU'rias,
56 ; jdtds, 55 ; mdrtias, 54.

The only alleged deviation from rule in the form of the N.s.m.
is Jcrdnd1 (Scholiasts, after Pan. vii.1.39). It is not hard to believe,
with Bollensen (Z.D.M.G. xxii.574), that -d may represent -as
sporadically ; and perhaps the relation of -a(s) to -o is like that of -d
to -an in the dual. In two instances the supposed krdnds is not
followed by a sonant, and the exegesis by no means requires a
nominative. I have therefore referred them to the I.s.m., q.v.

Even after the elision of the s of the ending, crasis of the
preceding a with a following vowel sometimes takes place. Cf.
Kuhn, Beitr&ge, iv.199. Numerous examples of this may be seen
among those cited Rik Pr. ii.33,34. Thus sdh asi ukthydh, ii.13.2,
is to be read sd'si vkthiah. So sdh end' dnlkena, ii.9.6, must read
saind'nike/ia; and sd utd bdndhuh, AV. iLl.3, sdtd bdndhuh. In
vii.86.4, the crasis (tureydm) is indeed metrically unavoidable,
but does not necessitate our reading it as a vocative (Gr., Wb.),
nor yet as a verb (root tar, tur, Gr., Ueb.). In view of the anal-
ogous cases just cited, I prefer to follow the pada, and read turds
iydm : * With sins forgiven, humbly I would straightway betake
myself to thee.' In vi.46.4, we need not resort to an emendation
(vrshabhd va), nor yet follow the pada, vrshabhd* -iva ; but may
regard the aamA&oVreading as another instance of crasis after
elision, vrshabhd iva. The usage of the Atharvan is instructive.
It is given by Whitney (note to Ath. Pr. ii.56). The contraction

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

830 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

of -as iva to -eva is here the rule (in 46 out of 59 instances).
Compare also Benfey, Abh. d. k&n. Ges. d. Wis*, zu Gottingen^ xix.
250 ff.

The -as of the N.s.m. appears in the samhitd with exceeding
frequency as -o (see A.Weber, Iteitrdge, iu.385 ff). In this final o
other case-forms are sometimes concealed. Thus x. 155.2, cattd is to
be resolved into cattd' u, N.s.f. AV. xvi.4.2, am?' to stands for
amr'td u. But even a final -am suffers elision and crasis before uy
and is misunderstood by the pa da (as nominative): thus (as Roth
suggests) in x. 119.13, grhd ydmi dramhrto dev'ebhyo havyavd'-
hanah; 'And home (grhdm u) I go, satisfied, and take along for
the gods something from the sacrifice.' In like manner, after the
resolution of pdrdho (anarvd'nam, masculine) into pdrdham w,
i.37.1, the particle u with abhiprd gdyata is by no means inappro-
priate, for it is often used in a summons of that kind. C£ Kuhn,
Beitrdge, iv.l 97,208.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

The regular ending is -m. Next to the N.s.m. it is the most
frequent form in the RV., and occurs 6861 times, in connection
with 1357 stems. For example : imam occurs 130 times; mdratn^
335; ^/m, 509; yd?ny 259; yajndm, 183; vd'jam, 123; sdmarn,
212; adhvardm is found 48 times; dpvam, 48; enam, 68;
gdrbham, 56 ; tydm and tidmy 46 ; devdm, 65 ; mitrdm, 53 ;
vrtrdm, 82 ; samudrdm, 52 ; sutdm, 62 ; stt'riam and sU'ryam, 90 ;
stdmam, 77; hdvam (sometimes neuter), 88.

In some instances the gender is doubtful : thus dbhogdyam may
be neuter. Nouns elsewhere neuter are sometimes used as mascu-
lines, and have been included here: thus drtham (etdm), x.18.4 ;
51.4,6; cakrdm (dpiim), iv.l. 3; rdtnam (brhdntam), vi.19.10.
Asmd'kam may be set down as G.p. of the personal pronoun, or as
A.s.m. of the possessive. Yipvam occurs 139 times; but I have
not separated the masculines from the neuters, and have enumer-
ated them among the latter. The total 6861 would require a slight
correction accordingly. Vd'ram, vi.13.4 (p. vd dram), has been
counted as one word.

The only probable irregularity in the ending of the A.s.m. is in
x.40.8, yuvdm vidhdntam vldhdvdm urushyathah, 'Ye protect
the widower (root 2 vldh) and the widow ;' but vidh has no active
forms, and this difficulty led Roth to the conjecture that vldh-
dvdm stood for vidhdvam with metrical lengthening, and he
translates the two words by viduum cultorem. Herein he is
followed by Grassmann, who adds that " the metrical lengthening
frequently occurs where the written text has «m" ( Wb. 1281;
but Ueb., ctdtorem etviduam /). In i.bO.Qjdndn is not singular (Roth,
X.w. G.d. W. Jt>.82) ; bhuranydntam is to be made the direct object
ofpdpyasi, and not joined to the stock-phrase jdndn dnu. In viii.
33.8, ddnd' mrgd na vdrandh purutrd cardtham dadhe, 'To the
feast, as a wild animal, hither and thither he takes his course,'
ddnd! mrgd is for ddndm mrgd, unless we assume that ddnd (m.)
is used once as a neuter plural.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.s.m.] Noun-Inflection in t/ie Veda. 331

Elision and crasis : dcurh nd cakrdrh rdthieva, l like the swift
wheel of a chariot (rdthiam), as it were (iva) ;' p. rdthyd-iva,
iv.1.3. Both texts have -am iva in iv.18.5, where the metre
demands eva. Compare the usage of the Atharvan (Whitney,
Praticakhya, ii.56) ; -am iva is contracted to -eva 25 times out
of 40.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

The regular ending is -m, without distinction of form for the
two cases. Nominatives and accusatives s.n. (taken together)
occur 4275 times, in connection with 949 stems. For example :
antdriksham occurs 45 times ; amr'tam, 31 ; iddm* 165 ; rtdm, 70 ;
kdm, 48 ; kshatrdmy 31 ; ghrtdm, 47 ; cakrdm, 35 ; citrdm^ 34 ;
drdvinam, 41 ; ndktam, 32 ; paddm, 46 ; pavUram% 37 ; pratham-
dm, 38 ; priydm, 44 ; bhadrdm, 39 ; rdtnamy 44 ; vicvam (m. and
n.), 139; sakhydm and sakhidm, 43; satydm, 40; suvi'riam, 57;
havydm, 33.

The gender is not always to be determined: as ajakdvdm,
odandm, kshirapdkdm, nakhdm, muk&rtdm, rdmdm, Id'yam,
sometimes 2vdramy vd'ram, ci'pdlam, pd'lam. In v. 8 7. 9, hdvam
is used as n., although generally m. A few of the occurrences of
vicvam are m. Ca rdtham, i.70 7; 72.6, has been counted as one
word. Some of the words included above are accusatives s.n. in
form and adverbs in function : as kdm (?), nisvardm, pratardmy
vitardm, pt'bharn, sapitvdm, sdmantam, sardtham.

In viii.29.8, prd pravdseva vasatah, we have an example of
crasis after elision of final m (so Roth). The pada reads pravdsd'-
-iva. So too we may resolve sdmaneva in iv.58.8 (Nir. vii.17)
and vi75.4 (Nir. ix.40) ; c£ x.168.2: and I would even add
sdmandvagdtya (-am avar), vi.75.5. Cf. N.A.p.n. and Ath. Pr.
ii.56. Similarly, x. 103. 11, amid'kam indrah is to be pronounced
asmd'kendrah.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Neuter.

The general case-ending is -d; but the Ls.m.n. of a- stems ends
regularly in -ena. If this is historically developed out of -a-in~d^
we might expect to find a good many instances in which the final
is not shortened; and in fact, out of a total of 1071 instrumentals
s.m. and n., there are 85 in -end. Moreover, the still more organic
form -a-d or -d ought to have left traces. These, again, number
114. The stem viria exhibits three forms; arranged in historical
order, they would stand as follows : *vfna-d (cf. mahitvdd), virid,
viriend, viriena.

1. Of the regular ending there are 872 examples; 374 are m.
(from 150 stems) and 344 are n. (from 157 stems), besides which
tma occurs 57, and yena 97 times. In two cases the final vowel
is nasalized in the samhitd at the end of a pdda, before an initial
vowel in the next: i.33.4, ghaninan kkas, and i.110.5, t'ejanenan
ekam. Examples are: mdrena, 34; vdjrena, 33; yajfttna, 13;
sti'riena, 37; ghrtena,%\.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

882

C. R. Lanman, -

[a-stems.

2. The following is, I believe, a complete enumeration of all the
forms with long final (86).

ix.70.2. itbM dyd'vd kd'viend vi fuerathe

ix.80.1. br'haspdte ravdthend vi didyute

ix.84.5. viprah kavih kd'viend svarcandh

x.48.4. purishina/u sd'yakend hiranydyam

The substantive forms in -end are so few, that m. and n. have
been given above together. In four instances nd is the eighth
syllable of a jagati-pdda; in 26, the eighth of a trlshtubh; in
three, the sixth of an anushtubh. In all cases the pada reads na.
See Rik Prat, viii.21, and cf! Ath. Prat, iii.16.

Tend, yend, svend appear invariably in the pada as tena, yena,
svena. This long final occurs without exception in the second
place of the verses concerned, of which 13 are anushtubh, Sjagati,
and 7 trishtubh, and is in every case followed by a single consonant
and that by a short vowel. Tend is first word of an anushtubh
pddaGtimes: i.49.2: vii.55.7: viii.20.26; 67,6: ix. 6 1.1 9. A V. iv.5.1;
yend,7 times: i.50.6: vi.16.48: viii.l2.2a; 17.10; 19.20; 24.25:
x. 126.2. Yend stands at the beginning of a jagatl-pdda 8 times:
v.54.15; 87,5 : viii.3.9; 3,i0; 12,1; 12,2c; 12,4: ix.108.4 ; and
as first word of a trishtubh-pdda 6 times: i.62.2c (=ix.97.39r);
i.72.8 ; 80.2: ii.17.6: iv.51.4 (18 of the 21 occurrences of yend are
given by Mtlller, Prat, vii.28). Svend occurs as first word of a
trishtubh-pdda, vii.21.6. For other occurrences in the Atharvan,
see Whitney, Praticakhya, iii.16 note, and Benfey, Abh. etc.
xxi.18,32.

End, end'. In four instances, where the unaccented Ls. of the
demonstrative stem a is used as a substantive pronoun, the pada
reads ena: v. 2. 11, siiarvatir apd end jayema, 'Let us win by it
(stdmena) the heavenly waters;' x. 108.3, d! ca gdchdn mitrdm
end dadhdma, i If he come hither, we will make friends with him
(indrena)? These two cases are precisely analogous to those of
the nouns above. For ix.96.2 the Prat, viii.19 prescribes the
lengthening; vidvd'v end sumatfoh ydti dcha, 'By it (by ascending
the wagon) the wise one gets into favor.' In i. 173.9, the final, as

i.32.5.

kdiipcnd vivrknd

vi32.2.

siL'rienA kavind'm

i.33.13.

vrshabhend puro 'bhet

vii.18.17.

petuend jaghdna

i 116.24.

dfivend ndva dy&'n

viii.85.2.

vithurend cid dstrd

i.117.21.

bdkurend dh&mantd

ix.96.17.

kd'viend kavih sdn

U64.30d.

mdrtiend sdyonih

x.42.10.

vrjdnend jayema

1.164.38ft.

m&riiend sdyonih

x.56.3.

vd'jinend suvent'k

iii.31.12.

8kdmbhanend jdnitri

x.68.8.

vvravtnd vikr'tya

iii.32.2.

md'rutend ganena

x.88.4.

d'jiend vrn&nd'h

iv.18.5.

virtend nirshtam

x.111.2.

tavishbid rdvena

iv.34.8.

daiviend savitrd'

x 139.4.

tad rtend vi dyan

iv.39.3.

vdrunend sajoshdh

x.180.1.

ddkshinend vds&ni
mdrtiend sdyonih

AV. iii.12.8. amr'tend sdmahdhi

ix.10.8.

v.1.5

kd'viend krnomi

ix.10.16.

mdrtiend sdyonih

RV. vii.55.7, AV. iv.5.1.

tend sahasyend vaydm

AV. vii.60.7, aishydmi bhadrend sahd

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

I.s.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 333

syllaba anceps, remains short in the samhitd; dsdma ydthd
sushakhd'ya ena, * In order that we may be good friends with
him.'

With the accented form end' the case is different. The pada
invariably reads end'.

It occurs as an adverb or crystallized case-form 17 times, with -&' in both texts,
and that in one instance even where the samhitd requires a short, vi.20.10 (Kuhn,
Beitr. iii.123). It stands as follows: anusJdubh, i.30.3 and ix.61.11, second place;
v.73.4, sixth place; trishtubh, x.14.2; i48.3. second place; i. 164. 17, 18,43 :
ix.97.52: x.82.5 ; 125.8, eighth place; i.164.5: ix.97.53: x.27.21; 31.8, fifth place;
finally x. 112.6, where the text looks suspicious.

As an adjective pronoun it occurs 17 times with its substantive in the same
pada; and four times it is used substantively : vii.T 1. 4c, d' na endf ndasatyopa
ydtam (sc. rdthena): vi.44.17. endf manddnojahi f&ra p&tr&n (sc. pa' tar ena, v. 16);
x.l44.5c,d, end' vayo vi tdri d'yur jtvase, end' jdgdra bandhutd (sc. sdmena). Of
these 21 occurrences, (a) 12 are such as show the syllable, nd' in the second place
of the verse: jagati x. 144.5c ; trishtubh iii.34.4 : vL4.417: x.14.4; 85.27; and with
crasis i. 105.19 andii.9.6; anushtubh ii.6 2: v. 19.3; 53.12: vii.16.1 : x.l44.5d. (b)
A long is perhaps favored in the fourth place of a jagati, trishtubh, and anushtubh
respectively iv.36.7 : vii.71.4, and viiL5.39. (c) The remaining six occurrences are
in the fifth place: of a jagati ii.34.14 and viii.21.6 before ndmasd; of a
trishtubh i.171.1 and vii.93.7, before ndmasd ; viii. 85. 8, before tiavishd; x.23.7,
before sakhid'.

Aside then from the word end', where analogy led the pada-kdra
to treat the pronoun in the same way as the crystallized adverb,
the samhitd shows no forms in -end which cannot be explained on
the ground of metrical lengthening ; while, on the other hand,
they may just as well be regarded as relics of the original form of
the instrumental, whose preservation was favored by their place
in the verse.

It is only because there is an d priori probability that the long
d is organic, that these forms can be taken in evidence at all, as
explaining the genesis of the ordinary -ena (see Bopp, Vgl. Gr.z
i.3269 § 158; and Schleicher, Cornp.* p.561, § 258). Regarded as
relics, the uniformity of their preservation in the cadence of the
verse is remarkable. I have searched diligently every passage
containing an Ls.ni. or n. of an a-stem (1071 in number), and
have found only one genuine instance where the final is not long
if required by the cadence. A short is extremely rare, where a
long is merely favored by the verse: as ix.109.14, yena vicvdni,
hetter yend: pankti. bo viii.41.10, skambhend. The solitary
instance referred to is ii.11.19, vicvd spr'dha d'riena ddsitin;
I read vipvd [it] spr'dha d'riena ddsytin (?) as L 179.3 : v. 5 5. 6.

If this requirement is satisfied by a double consonant forming
position, the long final does not appear in the written text. These
would seem to be crucial test-cases for this question; for an
original long ought at least to hold its own in the eighth place of a
trishtubh. Thus we have iii.31.12, vishkabhndnta skdmbhanend
jdnitri; but x. 11 1.5, cdskdmbha cit kdmbhanena skdbhiydn. So
i. 163.3, dsi tritd guhiena vratena; vii.63.4, nUndmjdndh sU'riena,
prdsiXtdh. Again viii.3.9, yend ydtibhyo bhr'gave dhdne hite, but
yena prdskanvam d'vitha. In viii.55.9, kdd ti, nu asya d'hrtam
vol. x. 46

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

884 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

indrasya asti patinsiam: keno nu kam prdmatena nd pupruvt
janushah pdri vrtrahd' — the -a of prdmatena may perhaps be
regarded as a syllaba anceps (cf. Prat, viii.29). In ii.6.2, ayd' te
ague vidhema H'rjo napdd dpvamishte: end' siXktbia sujdta — the
trochaic movement would require sUktindf but the true metrical
character of the verse may have been lost sight of. In x. 148.2,
pronounce ddasir vipah sdriena sahydh.

As uniformly and invariably as a long vowel appears when
required in the cadence, just so arbitrary does it seem to be at the
beginning of the pdda. I can discover no principle determining
the quantity of the final of yena or tena in the second place, In
general yena and tena are of course much more frequent than
yend and tend. The third syllable is generally short also when
yina is used ; so that that seems to make no difference. And
either form, -na or -nd, seems to occur without distinction as
regards place in the stanza, at the head oipdda a, 6, c, or d\

Schleicher's I.s.m. with inserted y has no existence. His only
example is svdpnayd; but this is a stereotyped adverbial case, of
feminine form. See ^-sterns, I.s.f.

3. The existence of instrumental forms like yajfld' (= yqjnena)
is unquestionable. I have noted 114 instances. Some will find
more, and others less, according to their exegesis of certain
passages.

The Ls. in -d is found with m. stems as follows (37 cases):
i.168.1, yaj fid' -yajfid, 'with every sacrifice;' and vL48.1, parallel
with gird'-gird. Krdnd' (cf. a-stems, N.s.m.), 'with longing,
eagerly:' i.58.3; 139.1 :" v.7.8; 10.2: ix.86.19 (SV. i.5 59 , prdnd')\
102.1 (SV. i.570, prdnd') : x.61.1. In all seven places the pada
has krdnd'. See B.R. v.1339. Tud\ Ls. of the stem tud (in
compounds only): tud'-tita, ' holpen by thee ;' ii. 11.16, tud'-Htd td
indra vd'jam agman, 'by thee, O Indra, holpen, came to riches;'
so vi. 16.27 ; tvdti, ' enjoying furtherance (Utt) by thee (tud')f thrice
with crasis; tud'datta, ii.33.2, tud'dattebht rudra pdmtamebhih
patdih himd apiya bheshqjebhih, ' with balms most wholesome
given by thee, O Rudra, may I attain unto a hundred winters:'
so viii.81.18; tvd'ddta, 'given by thee,' i.10.7 : Hi. 40.6 : v.7.10;
39.1; tvd'hata, ' slain by thee,' vii.32.7 ; tvd'ishita, 'impelled
by thee,' viii.66.10, with crasis.

In i.36.16, ghaneva vUhvag vi jahi drdvnas, Gr. proposes
ghanena; but Agni does not slay ' with a cliib.' The ghand is
Indra's weapon (i.33.4). I therefore prefer not to change the
text, but to follow the pada, ghand' ivay 'As with a mace (as
though thou didst use a mace), all apart, smite the evil-doers.' In
i.63.5, ghaneva vajrin chnathihi amitrdn, p. ghand'iva, the
collocation of words is such that the sense is nearly equivalent to
tvdm vdjrena pnathihi, so that iva is by no means superfluous;
' as with a mace, do thou with the thunderbolt destroy the foes.'
And in fact Say. says : vajrivann indra ghaneva ghanena
kathinena parvateneva vqjrena pnathihi. In ix.97.16, the exceed-
ingly figurative language ghaniva vtshvag duritd'ni vighndn, p.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ls.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 335

ghand'-iva, addressed to Soma, makes the iva all the more
necessary; 'as with a club, all asunder, the dangers driving away
(flow thou).' Say. takes it as instrumental. Finally in i.8.3,
where Grassmann ( Ueb. ii.504), reading ghandm, gets the same
sense as Say. {pa&rupraharandya atyantam drdham), I consider a
change again unnecessary (Gr., Wb. 421, ghand's), and interpret
the ghana here as I. denoting accompaniment ; ' O Indra, through
thy favor may we receive (have to usej thy thunderbolt along with
thy mace (and so) conquer in the fight our foes.' Ddnd\ ' with a
gift,' v.52.14 (Say. havirddnena), 15; 87.2. viii.20.14; it may
also be referred to the stem ddmdn (see man-stems, Ls.m.) ; for
ddnd\ viii.33.8, see a-s terns, A.s.m. In x.25.4, krdtum nan soma
jivdse dhdrdya camasd'n iva, the pada has camasd'n-iva, misled,
as it would seem, by the correct avatd'n~iva of pdda
b. The tertium comparationis is indeed doubtful, but camasd'n
is probably a nasalized I.s.m. ' Our spirit, O Soma, keep
thou alive, as by the beaker (thine is kept),' with a slight
play on krdtum. Grassmann ( Wb.) has assumed for the Vedic
language a stem ghrnd' upon the basis of four passages:
iv.43.6, ghrnd! vdyo arushd'sah pd/ri gman; v. 73. 5, pdri vdm
arushd' vdyo ghrnd' varanta dtdpah; i.52.6, pdrim ghrnd' carcUiy
titvishe pdvah. In the first two he takes ghrnd' as A.p.f., contrary
to the pada, and, as it seems to me, to the sense ; in the third, as
N.s.f. It will be observed that in each case the verb
is accompanied by pdri and is naturally construed with an
instrumental. This is surely less forced in the fourth passage,
1141.4,. d'd id ydvishtho abhavad ghrnd' pticih, than a N.s.f. in
apposition to ydvishtho. If they are all instrumental, it is
unnecessary to set up a feminine stem, and these four along with
ix. 107.20 can be referred to the stem ghrnd (as is done by B.R.).
Cf. M-stems, I.s.m. and suhdvdn TS. iii.3.il6.

The neuters of this form are more frequent (77). In viii.25.18,
the third pdda, ubhe d' paprau rddast mahitvd', cannot be
catalectic, as the metrical structure of the other stanzas shows.
The requirements of the metre are satisfied with the least violence
to the text, if we pronounce mahitvdd (as also perhaps x.96.11).
And this exemplifies the organic form which all the instrumental
cases under this head presuppose, and from which they, with the
following, arise by contraction of -o>d to -d. iv.33.10, ye (rbhdvas)
hdrt medhdyd ukthd1 mddania indrdya cahrdh suyujd yi dpvd,
I translate, * Ye who so wisely, in his word rejoicing, for Indra
made the pair of bays, the docile;' ukthd' mddantas means 'glad
of the promise' made them — 4 of the word ' fetched them by Agni
from the gods (i. 161.2), namely promotion to divine honors. The
L is the regular construction with mad in this sense. Medhdyd
is used and xoivov; they made it skillfully ; but they were also
shrewd fellows to take up with the proposition (i. 16 1.2); for, as
the context shows, they were glad to do even more than was asked
of them : Say., ukthaih stutibhir madanto harshayantah. Kavitvd'
x.124.7; kavitvand' viii.40.3 ; taranitvd' il 10.6 ; mahitvd' i. 5 2.13 ;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

336 C. R. Ijaninan1 fa-stems.

67.9; 68.2; 91.2; 109.6; 164.25: ii.15.6: iii.1.4; 54.15: iv.16.5;
42.3: v.2.9; 58.2: vi.29.5 ; 67.3, 10; 68.4: vii.13.2; 20.4; 23.3;
58.1; 61.4; 97.8; 100.3: x.54.1 ; 55.5 (devdsya papya kd'viam
mahitvd'dyd' [p. mahitvd' adyd] : Roth, mahitvdm adyd, with
elision and crasis ; but this is suspicious at the end of&pdda, and I
take it as an I. of accompaniment : * Behold [herein] the god's
wisdom coupled with might: to-day etc.'); 56.7; 75.7; 88.9;
89.1 ; 96.11 ; 121.3, 4. In all these 33 cases (except i.67.9), it is at
the end of a trishtubh-pdday which the resolution of the final
contract-vowel would convert into a jagatt Mahitvand' L85.7:
iv.53.5 : v.81.3 : viii.24.13, all at the end of *jagati~pdda; i.86.9:
vi.16.20: viii.57.2: ix. 100. 9, at the end of an anvshtubhrpd<la ;
rdthid (cakrena), 'with wagon-wheel,' i.53.9; viAd i.80.15;
vrshatvd' L54.2; vrshatvand' viii.15.2; sakhid' x.23.7a/ md'kir
na end' sakhid' vi yaushus tdva ca indra vimaddsya cdrsheh^
'May no one cut us off from that friendship, made (of old)
between thee, O Indra, and thy singer, Vimada.' ii.32.2, md' no
vi yauh sakhid' viddhi tdsya nah, 'Cut us not off from thy
friendship ; be mindful of it, we pray.' B.R. interpret sakhid' as
Ls.n., because tdsya is singular ; so also Say., Hdsya ' tat sakhitvam
.... ' viddhV jdnihi. But this is not conclusive; the tdsya may
refer to the whole request md' .... sakhid'. viii.75.1, md' no vi
yaushtam sakhid'. iv. 16.20, brdhma akarma .... nti,' cid ydthd
nah sakhid' viydshat, ' So we have made supplication, to the end
that he may not cut us off now from his friendship.' In x.10.1, 6
cit sdkhdyam sakhid' vavrtydm, sakhid' is to be taken as Ls.n. ;
sakhyd'ni does not occur in the AV., nor sakhyd' as plural. It is
superfluous ' to turn a friend to friendship ;' and ' guilty friendship'
(Gr.) is rather more than the word means. Better ' I would fain
bring him hither by my overtures of love,' or adverbially,
' vertravlich? The Sfima variant, i.340, d' tvd sdkhdyah sakhid'
vavrtyuh, admits either construction, iv.34.1, ratnadheyd (imam
yajndm ratnadheydpa ydta) is not A.p.n. in apposition to
yajfidm, but rather an I.s.n. ; because it refers not to what
mortals give the gods, but to what the gods give to mortals (cf.
vii.53.3), and corresponds in usage to ratna-dhd' (i.1.1, and always,
of the gods) and rdtnam dhd (iv.15.3 : L47.1, and often) : 'Unto
this sacrifice come ye with bestowal of blessing.' v. 35.5, sarva-
rathd' ni ydhi, ' Drive over the foe with all thy host of chariots.'
x. 160. 1, sarvarathd' vi hdri ihd muiica, 'With all thy chariots,
here thy bays unharness.' x. 141.4, indravdyH' br'haspdtirh
suhdvehd havdmahe; mhdvd^ ' with goodly invocation ;' so A.
Weber. The interposition of br'haspdtim makes it less natural to
call it A.d.m. In AV. iii.20.6 (where ed. has misprint, susdvd for
suhdvd), the interpretation as dual is favored by the parallelism.
And although suhdvd hH> is an established idiom, it is better to
take it as dual in RV. vii.44.2; 82.4 ; 93.1.

From the Atharvan I have the following forms : mahitvd' iv.2.2
(Rik x.121.3), 5 (Rik 4), 4: v.11.3: vii.79.1 ; 80.1: viii.3.24 (Rik
v.2.9) ; 9.2 : ix.10.3 (Rik i. 164.25), 9 (Rik x.55.5) : xii.3.5 : xiv.2.32:

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

I.s.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 337

xix.49.1 ; in all 13 cases at the end of the pdda. tfuhdvd vii.47.1,
kuhti'rh devi'm .... mhdvd johavtmi; and xi.1.26, r'shin ....
mhdvd johavimi; here a dual is impossible. In vii.48. 1, rdkd'm
ahdrh suhdvd mshtuti' huve, the I. is natural, as parallel to
sushtutf. But Rik ii.32.4 has the variant suhdvdm, and TS.
iii.3.115, suhdvdn (cf. camasd'n above).

There remain finally certain adverbs, which are crystallized case-
forms: cf. Ktlhner, Griech. Gram.2 i.728: na, etc. Thus and'
iv.30.;* : viii.2 1.13 ; 47.6 : x.94.3, 4 : Latin furnishes the Ace. of the
same stem, enim. Sdnd iii.54.9: v. 75.2: Abl. with adv. accent,
sand't i.55.2, etc. Of this the stem is used as a real adj. ii.29.3, etc.
£7cc# i.24.10; 28.7; 33.7; 116.22; 123.2: ii.2.10; 30.5; 40.4:ix.61.10:
x.106.5; 107.2; 183.2: — that is, 12 times; also AV. xiii.2.36.
It may be regarded as I.s.n. from a stem uccd, on account of
uccats, v.32.6. So nicd' ii.13.12; 14.4: iv.4.4 ; 38.5: vi.8.5:
x.34.9; 152.4, on account of nicd't i.116.22, and nfcais AV. ii.3.3:
iii.19.3 : ix.2.1, 15: v.11.6. It is however more probable that
nicd' and need' are instrumental of niac and 'ddac; but, since to
the apprehension of the speaker the stems were vocalic, uccd and
nicd, they became the points of departure for the new formations
uccais, ntcd't, and nicaU. The same method of explanation would
require for paped' (ii.27.11, and 7 times) a stem pas-dftc or pas-dc,
from which Ls.n. *pa8-ded, paced'. By the side of this, as if it
were from a stem paced, arose the form paccd't (iL41.11, and 16
times).

Dativb Singular Masculine and Neuter.

The D.s. of the a-stems ends in -dya. There is nothing in the
Veda, to ray knowledge, that casts any light on the genesis of this
difficult form. It occurs 1502 times; 1107 forms are masculine
(from 310 stems), and 395 are neuter (from 144 stems). In the
samhitd two of these forms are nasalized: tadvacd'yan eshd,
ii.14.2, and savd'yan evd', i.113.1. Cf. Rik Prat, xiv.20.

Among the forms most frequently occurring are the following :
indrdya, 188; devd'ya, 26; mdddya, 76; mdrtidya, 25; mitrd'ya,
23 ? ydjamdndya, 20 ; vdrundya, 23 ; sfX'rydya, 11; — tdnaydya,
18; tokd'ya, 21 ; sakhyd'ya and sakhid'ya, 29; suvitd'ya, 34.

Ablative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

The Ab.s. of the a-stems ends in -dt. There are 389 such
forms; 183 are m. (from 116 stems) 'and 206 are n. (from 98
stems). The latter include some adverbs. In only 389 instances,
therefore, is the Ab.s. of substantives distinguished formally from
the G.8. (for didydt or vidydt, see v-stems, Ab.s.f.). According
to theory, the organic form is -a~at (e. g., deva-at). Justi (Hand-
buck, p. 359, §13) gives 14 such Zend forms (as da&vdatca) ; but
Geldner (Metrik des jilngeren Avesta, § 30) says that the Ab.
ending -dt counts regularly for one syllable. For the Veda the
existence of forms in -aat is extremely doubtful (cf. Kuhn,
BeiPr&ge, iv.181) : they have been proposed for i.30.21 : viii.5.31 :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

338 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

x. 2 2. 6 , pardkdat; x. 1 5 8. 1 , antdrikshaat; v iiL 1 1 . 7, sadhdsthaat :—
but in every case the pdda is one of seven syllables with
catalectic close, and it is far from certain that the fuller cadence
is necessary. The like is true of carttrdt, viii.48.5.

Examples of ablatives in -tit are: indrdt, 8; updsthdty 9;
samudrdt, 15 ; — antdrikshdt, 12 ; dUrd't, 19; papcd't (adv.), 26.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Neuter.

The G.s. of a-stems ends in -asya. There are 3340 such forms;
1890 are m. (from 503 stems), and 695 are n. (from 175 stems).
Moreover asya occurs 402 times ; tdsya, 83 ; ydsya, 203 ; and
vipvasya, 67. In x.60.2, bhajerathasya has been counted as two
words (rdthasya). In one instance the final vowel is nasalized at
the end oi&pdda: viii.89.5, rtdsyan ikam, cf. Prat, ii.31.

Vocalization of the y of the ending is a thing of at best
doubtful existence. In x.23.6, vidmd' hi asya bhdjanam indsya,
and Val. 11.4, saptd svdsdrah sddana rtdsya, a catalectic
jagati-pdda with the penultimate long by position, is certainly
better than the cadence with resolution, indsia, rtdsia. In
i.61.13, turdsia kdrmdni ndvya ukthaih (so Gr.), the metre
is quite out of order; if we read turdsya .... ndvlya (cf.
i. 105.15), the caesura is wrong. In x. 1 14. 10#(Gr. wrongly rdthasia),
the sixth syllable is svncopated. The vocalization is possible in the
case of asia and asia: vA5.Q,yddasia urviyd! dirghaydthe; x.61.
24c, saranitir asia sUnur dpvo; x. 142.5, prdti asia prenayo dadrgre
(better, perhaps, asya prdyinayo) ; in i. 23.24, if an extra syllable is
needed at all, it should be devaas, not asia (see a-stems, V.p.m.);
i. 13 1.6, d' me asia vedhdso ndviyaso; and ix.98.8, asia vo hi
dvasd. The final a suffers protraction (purely metrical, Benfey,
SV. lx.) as follows: i. 162. 19, ikas tvdshtur dpvasid vigastd1 (c£
VS. xxv.42; TS. iv.6.93 :— TPr. iil8, ' p. 91); vii.79.4, yd'm
tvd jajntir vrshabhdsyd rdvena; AV. i.12.2, yd dgrabhtt pdrva
asyd grdbhitd; see Ath. Pr. iii.16.

Examples of this case are: asyd, 119; indrasya, 123; devdsya,
60 ; yajfidsya, 55 ; sutdsya, 53 ; sU'riasya and sti'ryasya, 93 ;
sdmasya, 88 ; — amr'tasya, 35 ; asyd, 55 ; rtdsya, 1 87 ; bh&vanasya,
39.

Locative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

The case-suffix is -t, as with consonant stems. This, united
with the thematic a, forms -e. There are 2491 such locatives in
-e; 1235 are m. (from 373 stems), and 1256 are n. (from 309 stems).
In some instances, where the ending appears in the samhitd
(Prat. iL 10) as -a, before vowels, the padakdra mistakes them for
nominatives, and writes them with visarga : thus in iv.17.14, d'
krshnd irh juhurdnd jigharti tvacd budhn'e rdjaso asyd ydnau, p.
krshndh; we must interpret, '(Misleading) craftily he darts it
{cakrdrh sti'ryasya) to the black abyss of night, to the depth
of this sky,' i. e., to the place where the sun remains from its
setting until its rising. The reading krshne tvacds budhni is

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L.s.m.n*] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 339

confirmed by the following gloss, dsiknidm ydjamdno nd hdtd
(Say., ptirvarcd saha drshtdfitcUvena sambadhyate). In vii.76.3,
jdrd ivdcdranty toho, p. jdrdh-iva dcdrantt, we read jdri-iva:
' Ushas, as if hastening to her iover.' In Ll 12.17, agnir nd'didec
citd iddhd djmann a, p. citdhy we interpret, ' Was glorious, as
the fire kindled on the altar {cite iddho), upon its path.' In
v.52.10, d'pathayo .... yajftdm vishtdrd ohate (3 pi.), the pada-
text reads vishtdrdh; I understand it thus : Let their customs
carry them where they may, yet when I sacrifice 'they wait'
quietly * on the straw (vishtdrH) ' for it. Finally, it seems
necessary to read ibhe suvratb, ix.57.3 (where the text has ibho
rd'jeva suvratdh) ; 'As a king amid his trusty following.'

Examples of this case are: adhvare, 68; abhike^ 22 ; iiidre, 33 ;
upd&the, 49 ; grh'e, 23 ; jdne, 26 ; ddme, 40 ; mddey 48 ; yajfiey 28 ;
vute% 53; — dgre, 43; antdrikshe, 23; durone, 31; pad'e, 33;
mddhye, 29 ; viddthe, 49 ; sddane, 35.

Vocative Singula* Masculine and Neuteb.

This case is like the stem in form. The accent, if there be any,
is always on the first syllable. The vocatives s.m. number 2498
(from 259 stems).

There is hardly a single indubitable example of a vocative s.
neuter in the Kig-Veda. In 144.5, stavishyd'mi tud'm ahdm
vipvasydmrta bhqjana^ 'Immortal delight of every one,' there
may be two, amrta and bhqjana; but it is possible to take bhojana
as V.s.m. of an active verbal adjective (see Gr., Ueb.) ; or (as B.R.
suggest, v.388) we may write amrtabhojana, and take it as V.s.m.
of the stem amrtabhdjana (see Lindner, AUindische NominalbU-
dxtng, p. 42). In v.46.2ft, pdrdhah prd yanta mXi'rutotd vishno,
the sense seems to require us to take md'ruta as vocative with
cdrdhah. For the accent, cf. x.86.136. The AV. has several voca-
tives s.n. They are antariksha vl 1 30.4 ; traikakuda and dbodnmna
xix.44.6; talpa xii.2.49; and visha iv. 6. 3, where the MSS. have
vlshah.

In vii.25.4, the samhitd shows a nasalized vowel before 6ka»:
vicveddhdni tavishiva ugran. Cf. Prat, xiv.20. So in viii.15.3,
11, purushtutan eko.

Protraction occurs in some instances: i.61.16, evd' te hdriyojand
tuvrkti; viiL4.1, simd purd' nr'shtito asi d'nave (cf. Prat, vh.17);
viii.45.22, abhi tvd vrshabhd sute, and 38, evd're vrshabhd Bute.
The pada-text has hdriyojana, sima, and vrshabha. B.R. take
simd as adv., ' allenthalben.' The stem is simd, and for adverbial
retraction of the accent I can give no example. The pada-texts
of RV. and SV. (i.279, ii.581), and the accent make against the
view of B.R. Grassmann, in his note to i.6.3— pepo maryd
apepdse, p. marydh — takes maryd as V.s.m. The sense requires
it, and the above examples seem to justify it. Kuhn (Pdli-gram.
P. 1l) refers to this lengthening. I think it is purely metrical.
If the requirements of metre are satisfied by a double consonant,
the -a remains short: thus, mahina prdyishthdh vi.26.8ft/ so
vii24.l5.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

340 C. R. Lanman, [a-s terns.

In the phrase vd'yav mdra$ca, i.2.5, 6, mdras is taken by
Grassmann as a V. ; similarly i.18.5; 135.4: ih.25.4 : iv.47.2, 3*:
vi.69.8: vii.97.10; 104.25: ix.95.5; the peculiarity is, however,
doubtless a syntactical rather than a formal one, and the case a
nominative.

The stem indra is one of the few, complete sets of whose forms occur in the a.
It occurs as follows : N. 523; A. 335 ; 1.34; D. 188; Ab. 8 ; G. 123; L. 33;
V. 1007 ; N.A.V.d. 11 ; in all, 2262 times.

Examples of vocatives are: amrta, 12; ugra, 23; devay 132;
puruhtita, 49 ; pavamdna, 63 ; yavishtha, 29 ; mitra, 35 ; varuna,
45 ; vrshabha, 27 ; pdra, 94 ; soma and soma, 240.

Nominative Accusative and Vocative Dual Masculine.

The Vedic ending of the N.A.V.d.m. of a-stems is d. In the
Rik the ending au is exceptional (and by no means organic ; ct
Benfey, Gram. p. 303). The comparative statistics wilt be given
elsewhere. As regards the circumstances of occurrence of these
endings a few interesting observations may be made.

A. d occurs in the Rik 1129 times. It is the ending used

1. at the end of a pdda;

2. before consonants;

3. before an initial vowel with which it is fused ;

4. It is never used before vowels with hiatus.

B. au occurs 171 times. It is the ending used chiefly before
vowels, where it forms a separate syllable <2u, without hiatus.

The determinant of the form is therefore to a certain extent the
metre. The regular form is d, and it is used before consonants,
and before an initial vowel where the words could not be pressed
into the metrically limited verse save by its fusion witn that
vowel ; otherwise, hiatus not being tolerated (exceptions below),
dv was used before such an initial. These differences are
illustrated by i. 184.1, td' vdm adyd td'v apardm huvema, and
i.14.3, mitrd gnim ptishdnam bhdgam; so too most strikingly by
i.93, passim: e. g. dgnishomdv imdm, but dgnishomd yd.

Of the 1129 d-forms:

1. 230 are at the end of a pdda : 62 at the end of pdda b, and 45
at the end of d or of the verse ; 81 at the end of a, and 42 at the
end of c. In 26 of the 81 cases, pdda b begins with a vowel, and
then the two are always written as fused in the sarhhitd; but
(unlike the epic cloka) they never coalesce in reality: thus, i.28.2
a, b. vii.66.17 a, b. So in 8 of the 42 cases, as i. 11 6. 10 c, d, dasrd
d't: sarhhitd-text, dasrd' d; 118.3 c,d: vi.62.2c, d: See Bohtlingk,
Chrestomathie2 , p. 342. There are only two instances, on the
other hand, of au in the pause b, d: ii.30.6 #, codau, and v.47.3 d,
dntau.

2. 799 stand before consonants (in the interior of a pdda). 137
are before v, and 141 before other labials ; 126 before sibilants, and
395 before other consonants: i. e., 278 labials against 521 conso-
nants of the other classes. The frequency of v is significant as

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.d.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 341

regards the development of au from d. Cf. td' vdm and td'v
apardm; and see below.

The ending au occurs in the Rik exceptionally before consonants 48 times :
i.179.6: ii.27.15; 40.1, 2 quater : iii.33.13; 53.17: iv.41.2: v.34.8 bis; 36.6;
40.7 ; 66.1 ; 68.4: vi.69.5; 60.14; 74.4 bis: vii.50.2; 84.2: viii.33.19 bis; 35.4, 5, 6:
ix.112.4: x.l4.10fer, 11 bis, 12 bis; 27.20 bis; 85.11, 18,42; 113.7; 117.9 bis;
136.5; 137.2 bis; 178.2 bis. That is, in only 27 different hymns; before labials
17 times, sibilants 15; 5 times at the end of pdda a, vi.74.4: x.14.12; 27.20;
85.11, 18, and once at the end of c, ix.112.4. An examination of these passages
yields striking results, as proving how the criteria of dry grammatical investigation
confirm the results of criticism based on other methods. The dual-form in au
is found either in the last verse of a hymn (i. 17 9. 6: iii.33.13: v.36.6: vi.74.4
bis: viii.33.19 bis: ix.112.4: x. 1 17.9 bis), or the last but one (v.34.8 bis; 68.4:
vi.60.14: x. 178.2 bis), or some verse near the last, which has been patched on
(x. 27.20) or interpolated (vi.59.5) by later hands; or the whole character of the
hymn betrays its later origin (as vii. 50 : x.85; 117; 136; 137; 178). And it is
something more than a mere coincidence that J 5 of all the instances of -au before
a consonant, about one-third, occur in verses found in Grassmann's Anhang:
Ueberseteung spdier angefugter Verse und Lieder.

3. 93 coalesce with a following vowel (in the interior of a pdda) :
53 to e, as v. 7 6. 2 b, apvindpcwtutehd; viii.34.9^ and often with
iva; 24 to d, as i.161.7 td'krnotana; 182.4 d: v.46.3 a; and 16 to
o, namely i.34.9; 36.17; iie.10; 117.1; 183.5: ii.39.8: iv.14.1;
21.9, b/wtdrd' te hdstd atikrtotd pdnt ; 44.4: vL48.4 : vii.63.5 ;
64.2; 71.4: Val. 9.4 : x.87.3'; 125.1. '

4. The exceptions to A. 4 are as follows :

a. The cases in which d is followed by u- or u- in the interior of a pdda form
a class by themselves. In the 16 passages just cited, the concurrent vowels are
run into one syllable. The Atharvan and later sandhi would write -dv u-: thus
AV. iv.32.7, ubhafv updhfu', so x.4.8, td'v ubhd'v arasd'; xi.2.14, samviddnd'v ubhd'v
ngrau; TA. iii.12.5, kd'v &ru'; but once, xx.136.?, mushktf upd'vadhU, like the
Rik. If the metre requires them to be kept apart as two syllables, the Rik-
samhitd writes them with hiatus, and the padapdtha reads always -au u~. (Auf-
recht*, podia-extracts to x.83.7, a mere omission ?) The cases number 15 and are :
i.2.9 = SV. ii.199, tuvijdtd' urukshdyd; 13.8, sujihvd' upa; 36.6, dvd' updsthd;
iv.41.10, cakrdnd' iUibhis; v.65.3, pdfrvd upa; viii.22.13, td' u; 14, td'ushasi;
40.3, td' u; 76.4, vdvrdhdnd' upa; 90.2, varshishtTiakshatrd urucdkshasd; x.83.7
(=AV. iv.32.7, ubhd'v), ubhd' updnfu ; 90.11, kdf tirtif; 93.6, mitrdfvdrund
urushyatdm ; 106.1, ubhd' u; and once in vii.70.4, devd dshadhtshu, p. devau.
(x.90.11 = AV. xix.6.5, kim art'; VS. xxxi.10, kim <LrV; TA. iii.12.5, kd'v fob'.)
This fact is significant, when taken in connection with what was said above about
the labials. At the end of the pdda, the two vowels are fused to o in the
samhitd, but are of course always to be read with hiatus: i.22.2, yd' surdthd
rathftamobhd' devd' divispr'cd, read -d u-; i.93.6: v. 64.4: viii.9.9; 61.17:
x.106.4.

,1. Of the 1 1 29 forms there remain seven. Six. seem to precede a vowel with
hiatus. As in the case of the Rik ow-forms before consonants, the exceptions
here only confirm the rule, v.41.3, d' vdm ydisfuhd apvind huvddhyai; the hymn
is not homogeneous, and abounds in false readings, x. 132.2, sushumnd' ishitatvdtd
yajdmasi; the metre is in the utmost confusion, alike in no two consecutive verses,
and the sense is obscure, v. 65. 6 (last verse), yuvdm mit{a)remdm jdnam, perhaps,
as in v.40.7, tudm mitard. vii. 7 0.1, d' vi^vavdrdfvind gatat'n nah; perhaps it once
began ehd vxq- or d' vifvavdrdv afvind gatam nah. In x.22.5, perhaps we have to
read a' agd rjrd* (a)tmdnd vdhadhyai ; atmdnd is the link between dtmdnd and
tmdnd (accent!); but the metre is really hopeless. In vi.63.1, hda tydf valgb'
ywrvhtoa! adyd, the hiatus is not the only trouble ; we need a short, puruhutd (see
below).

vol. x. 47

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

842 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

y. In vi.67.1, finally, dud' j&ndft daamd bdhubhih svaih, the hiatus is prevented by
nasalization (but p. j&ndn). So too i.35.6, updsthdfi \ kkd.

*5. Some apparent cases of hiatus our canon teaches us to avoid, as follows :
pronounce, i.36.17, agnih prd tivan mitrdtd medhydtUhim ; ii.10.2, utd arushu'ha
cakre vibhrtrak (not utd'rushd' dha); vii.50.1, d' mdam mitrdvarunehd rakshatam
(not -nd ihd); vii.67.5, prdacim u devdcvind dhiyam me.

B. 1. In the Rik -au occurs 171 times. In the older portions
thereof, it is used only before vowels, and is written -dv. This is
the case in 121 instances, 70 per cent, of the whole number. Its
occurrence before a consonant may even warrant a suspicion of
the lateness of the verse concerned (the 48 cases are above, A. 2).

2. Of the 388 cases in which -au occurs in the Atharvan, in only
102 does -au stand before a vowel (as -dv) ; ie., about 26 per
cent., against 70 in the Rik.

3. The Atharvan has -au as varia lectio in some passages where
the Rik has -d: iv.32.7, ubhati = x.83.7, -d'; vii.58.1, dhrtavrcOau
= vL68.10, -d; viii.3.3, ddnshtrau = x.87.3, -&; in xviii.3.12,
mitrd'vdrund, the Ath. pada has -nau.

There are 47 forms in -d in passages peculiar to the Atharvan
(not found in the Rik). They are distributed as follows: at the
end of a pdda, 7 ; before consonants, 33 (of which 7 before v) ;
coalescing, xiv.2.64, to e; iii.4.4 and x.4.16, to o; making hiatus,
vi.3.3: xix.13.1: xx.129.15, 16.

The N. A. V.d.m. appears with shortened final as follows :

1. Cases where the pada reads -d; the samhitd has -a :

a. For the sake of the metre, in the seventh place of ajagati: i.151.4, prd sd'
tohitbr asura yd' mdhi priyd' ; of a trishtubh : vi.68.5, indrd yd vdm varuna da' rati
tman ; vii.61.1, itd vdm cdkshur varuna suprdttkam ; in the fifth place of a gdyatri:
i.16.6, mitrdvaruna d&ldbham (p. -nd); 17.3, indrdvaruna rdyd df (p. -nd); 17.7,
indrdvaruna vdm ahdm (p. -nd); 17.8, indrdvaruna nil' nu vdm (p. -nd); 17.9,
indrdvaruna yd'rh huve (p. -nd) ; v.67. 1, bd{ itthd' deva nishkrtdm (p. devd) ; /?. at the
end of a gdyatrt-pdda (metre indifferent), i.15.6, yuvdm ddksharh dhrtavrata (p.
•vratd); v. 64. 6. yuvdm no yeshu varuna (p. varuna); y. against the metre v. 66. 6,
miira vaydm ca surdyah (p. mitrd); vii.60.12, iydrii deva purdhitir yuvdbhydm
(p. devd) ; 85.4, yd dditya pdvaad vdm ndmosvdn (p. ddityd) ; viii.9.6, ydd vd deva
bhiafoajydihah (p. devd). These are all given in the Pr&t. iv.39,40.

2. Cases where both texts read, a: v. 74.4, pa-hra paurd'ya
fmvathah (p. paura)\ vi.63.10, bharddvdjdya vtra nti' gire dot

(p. viraj; ashtd, x.27.15, seems to be a shortened dual-form (cf.
i.85.8, ashtaH), like the later dud, ambd, dvo. Compare also
indr&vdyd i.2.4, and mitrdrdjdnd v. 62.3.

3. A merely graphic peculiarity is the short final a at the end
of an odd pdda, where the next begins with r-: ii.3.7, vidushtara \
rju<, p. vidtih-tard; vi.68.2, tuviptiwima \ rtena, p. -md; viii.66.11,
susamskrta \ rdtfp6y p. td; x.66.13, purdhita \ rtdsya, p. -ta\

4. The metre demands a short in vi.63.1, k&a tyd' valgd'
puruhdtd' adyd : see above ; and vi.67.8, tdd vdm mahitvdm
ghrta-anndv astu. Cf. Kuhn, Beitrdge, iiL 120-1 21.

i. 11 2. 18, yd'bhir an giro mdnasd nlranydthah. For angiro as
a genuine dual-form there is no support. See Gr., Wb. 14,
and Kuhn, Beitr. iii.121. Because the Prat, allows -o for -au in
the Loc, we rnajf not put -o for the proper dual-ending -d. We

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.d.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 343

might explain it as an instance of crasis, for angird w, 'And with
what helps, ye two Angiras ;' but there is no support for giving
the Acvins that name. See therefore as-stems, A.p.m.

It must be rememberechthat the above statistics refer to forms
from a-stems only. The forms from non-a-stems will be found to
yield substantially corresponding results. The complete enumera-
tion of the Rig- Veda forms in au follows :

Nominatives: dnsau, aghniaii, ajdrau, dnlau, fodhau, -itau 2, imau 3.
indrdv&runau, udwnbalau, ubhad 4, urfauuati, rjra^ fshvaA, etau 2, fohthau,
karnau, kafaplakak ktdphau, kahdyau, gavrati 3, caturakshafk 2, codab, jd'yamdnan,
jatah 3, jdn'iu, jushdnati, jrayasdnau, tad 13, UgmdfyudhaUy ddhsishtau, d&ta&,
deva& 12, -hitau, n&vyau, pddakau, puriarmanyau, purdhitau, pxckdmdnau,
prdyishtfiau, bh&'rtpdpiu bhedau, m&hikshatrau, mitrd'vdrunau 4, miihunad, 2,
modamdnau, yah 8, ydtamdnau, yamait, yuktau, rdksTtamdnau, rdhitau, ratidrau,
vdrnau, vd'tav^ vdvxdhdnati, faphab, pibdlau, pukraii,, pycnau, pvetab, s&camdnau,
sajoshaUy samau, samudrau, sdmanai, sdrameyau, sudh&nau, suvt'rau, suftvau,
sldnau, stutau, sthirab, hahsati, 4, harinak, hdstau 2.

Vocatives: dgnlparjanyau, dgntshomau 4, indrdvarunau, indrdvarunau 3,
wdrdsomau, ghrtaannau, dasrau 7, devaiu 9, dhishniau, ndsatyau 4, bhuranau,
mitrdvarunau 9, rudrau, viprau, pundstrau, aomdrudrau.

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neutbe.

This case ends in -e> which appears to be the result of fusion of
the thematic vowel with the general ending -1 The form occurs
57 times, in connection with 32 stems. There is no instance of a
vocative. Ndkta, although neuter, is declined as a masculine, and
used with a feminine adjective, in the combination ttshd 'sd-ndktd.
In ii.39.4, yugbva ndbhyeva must be resolved as yug'e va ndbhye
va, although the pada has in both instances -d-iva.

Enumeration : acakri, apdrS 2, tW, ubhe 1 5, kr&mane, cahri 3, tf, t&naye 2, tigmt,
toke 2, dvake, kite, n&ve. padS, pavd&te, pdtalyi priydtame, m&'fifeatve, yt, rgamdne,
wdhatrt, viddthe, vishurdpe 2, (irshe, cfoJii, fr'nge 5, satydnrtt, admante,
sdpandnafani, sudine, sumtkc 2, taetabfidrU.

INSTRUMENTAL, DATIVE, AND ABLATIVE DUAL.

The ending is -bhydm, before which the thematic a is lengthened.
There are only 24 of these forms, all told; 19 are m. (from 14
stemB), and 5 are n. (from 4 stems). The obb'que cases of the dual
being so rarely used, the consciousness of their several meanings
was not definite and clear ; at any rate, a certain relation was not
always expressed by the properly corresponding form. Thus
td'bhydm, ix.66.2, seems to be an I. with the meaning of a L. A
like uncertainty existed as regards the form of some of the
nominatives and accusatives p.n. See manl-stems.

There is no evidence that these cases were ever formally
separated. The exegesis groups them as follows :

Instrumental* masculine : td'bhydm, vi.57.3 : x.137.7 ; ddpa^dJchdbhydm, x.137.7 ;
mitrd'vdrundbhydm, v.51.9; yukid'bhydm, vi.23.1; gubhrd'bhydm, i.35.3 ; hds-
MWydm, x.137.7 ; haryatd'bhidm, viii.6.36: — neuter: rksd'mdbhydm, x.85.11;
U4.6; ubhd'bhydm, ix.67.25, is joined with two nouns, one m. and one n.

Datives masculine : dbhyd'm, ii.40.2; tveshd'Miydm, VAL 9.6; nd'satydbhydm,
1.116.1: v.77.4; nicird'bhydm, i.163.1 ; yd'bhydm, viii.38.10; ndasatydbhidm, i.20.3.

Ablatives masculine: dnsdbhydm, x.163.2; dbhydm, iv.32.22; kdrndbhydm,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

844 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

x.163.1; td'bhydm, x. 14.11: — neuter: mdtasndbhydm, x.163.3; prdpaddbkidm,
x.163.4.

I add a few forms from the Atharvan: m. kdrndbhydm, ix.4.17 ; 8.2 ; ddnshtrd-
bhydm, z.5.43 ; dakshinasavyd'bhydm, xii.1.28; vrihiyavd'bhydm, z.6.24; sur-
ydcandramdsdbhydm, vi. 128.3: xi.3.34; n. pdrp>d'bhydm, ii.33.3.

Genitive and Locattyb Dual.

The general ending of this case is -os; but between this and
the thematic vowel of the a-stems there is an inserted y. There
are 57 of these forms in -ay oh; 27 are G.d.m. (from 12 stems),
and 27 are L.cLm. (from 15 stems); besides, t&yos, n., occurs
thrice.

Here, too, there seems to be some confusion of form aud
function. Thus dhvasrdyos, ix.58.3, does the duty of an Ab. Cf.
the preceding section, and i-stems, G.L.d.m.

Roth explains av6s, vii.67.4, as equal to aydsy 'of these twain;'
so vi.67.11, and x. 132.6 (avdr vd[m\).

The Zend usually has the inserted y; as, zaptayd, Y. lvii.31 ;
pddhaydo, Yt. x.23 ; but not always; a/^frcUirdo, ba&hcUaptirdo,
Yt. xiii.125. The Veda also shows a few such peculiar forms, in
which the ending -os is added directly to the stem after this has
dropped its final a. In i.136.1, 5 : vi.69.8 : vii.103.4, we have enos
(for enayos) ; x. 105.3, yds (for ydyos) ; so in x.96.10, pasftos (for
past\ayos\ and ix.102.2, pdshios (for pdshiayos), unless we assume
a genuine feminine formation for each of these two passages. In
iii.55.2, purdnidh sddmanoh, we have an anomaly, the reverse of
that in 1.160 1, sujdnmanf dhishdne.

Genitives d.m. : ayds, vi.25.6 (pronounce dyos) ; indrdvdrunayos, i. 17.1 ; ipindyos,
vii.90.5; ubhdyos, i.120.1: vi.25.6; tdyos, i.17.6; 21.1; 22.14; 136.3; 164.20:
v.86.3; devdyos, vii.61.1; mitrdyos, vi.5l.l; mUrd'vdrunayos, x. 130.6; ydyos,
iii.60.2: vi.60.4: vii.65.1: viii.10.3, 4; 40.4: x.22.5 ; 66.6 bis: Val. 11.2;
yamdyos, x.117.9; vdrunayos, vi.51.1; vaikarndyos, vii.18.11.

Locatives d.m.: diwayos, v.57.6; d^vayos, vi.47.9; ayds (p. wrongly dyos),
iii.54.2: x.105.4, 9 ; updkdyos, i.81.4; tdyos, x.114.1 ; tuvijdtdyos, vii.66.1 ; naddyos.
x. 105.4 ; mitrdyos, vii.66.1 ; mushkdyos, x.38.5 ; ydyos, ix.58.4; vdrunayos, vii.66.1 ■
vdhishthayos, vi.47.9; vivrntayos, x.105.4; stit&rdyos, vi.29.2 ; hdstayos, i.24.4; 38.1 ;
56.8; 81.4; 135.9; 162.9; 176.3: vi.31.1; 45.8: ix.18.4; 90.1.

Genitives d.n. : tdyos, iii.55.11, 16: vii. 104.12.

From the Atharvan: kdrnayos, vi.141.2: xix.60.1; ddhshtrayos, iv.36.2:
xvi.7.3, etc.

NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE PLUBAL MASCULINE.

There are two endings, -dsas and -ds. The forms in -dsas (X.
936 +V. 101 = 1037, from 403 stems) are about one-half as
numerous as those in -ds (N. 1954 + V. 226 = 2180, from 808
stems) in the Rik. The Atharvan has in all only 91 forms in
-dsas (from 54 stems), against 1545 forms in -ds (from 576 stems).
Deducting those that occur in Rik-passages, the Atharvan has in
verses peculiar to itself only 57 forms in -dsas against 1366 in -ds.
That is, the ratio has changed from 1 : 2 to 1 : 24. The details of
comparison will be given hereafter. In general, accordingly, the
ending -dsas is the older, and goes gradually out of use in the Vedic
period. On the other hand, we may not stretch the interpretation

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.p.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 345

of these figures. Both forms stand often side by side, as in iv.25.8,
and I believe that the choice of the poet between the longer and
the shorter form was often decided simply by the requirements of
the metre. This is illustrated by the comparison of some similar
verses : v.59.6, t'e ajyeshthd' dkanishthdsa udbhidah, but v.60.5,
ajyeshthd so dkanishthdsa ete; so ii.1.16, brhddt vadema viddthe
suvi'rdh, but ii.12.15, suvi'rdso viddtham d' vadema; and by the
Atharvan variants of Rik passages: AV. iv.31.1, hdrshamdnd
hrshitd'so marutvan, RV. x.84.1, hdrshamdndso dhrshitdt
marutvah; AV. v.2.4, md' tvd dabhan durevdsah ka$6kdh, RV.
x.120^1, md' tvd dabhan ydtudhd'nd durevdh; AV. v.3.4, vipve devd'
abhi rakshantu mend, RV. x. 128.4, vipve devdso ddhi vocatd
nah; AV. xix. 13.11, asmd'n devdso avatd hdveshu, RV. x. 103. 11,
asmd'n u devd avatd hdveshu. The difference between RV. iii.29.9,
yena devd' so dsahanta ddsyHn, and AV. xi.1.2, y'ena devd! dsahanta
ddsybn, rests perhaps upon a mere haplographia.

These comparisons suggest a most plausible remedy for some
defective pddas: I have found no cases of redundant pddas
needing the substitution of -ds for -dsas. On the other hand,
pddas deficient by one syllable are not uncommon, and the
emendation {-dsas for -ds) seems certain in several cases :
iv.37.4, dyahpiprd[so] vdjinah sunishkd'h; v. 4 1.9, tuj&nastdne
pdrvatds[a/t] santu; x. 94.11, trdild'[so] dtrdildso ddrayah; also
AV. xi.1.2 ; RV. vii.35.14d = x.53.56, gojdtd[sa] utdyeyajkiydsah
(Gr. suggests -tads, but d is frequent in the third place, as
in i.89.1 o: ii.27.3&: iv.4.12&); x.78.6, pipd'ld[so] nd krlddyah
sumdtdrah (Gr., -aas). In v.41.4, dfi/h nd jagmur dpvdpvata-
mds[ah], dpuapvatdmdh is possible. In vii.56.3c, vd'tasvandsas is
formally justified by iv.6.10, where the stem tuvishvands occurs;
the pentasyllable metre, however, requires the form from the
vocalic stem, vd'tasvandsas (cf. x.46.7 a, c).

On the contrary, in vii.97.6, tdm [u] ^agmd'so antshd'so dpvdh,
the insertion of u (cf. verse 3) seems to me better than either the
resolution arushdaso (Kuhn, Beitr. iv.183), or the emendation
&$vdsah. So in i.163.10 and iii.8.9, prayinieds is better than the
quite possible hansd'sas. Roth suggests stdmatashtdras for -tdsas,
x.15.9.

Grassmann ( Wb.) suggested the resolution of d to aa or ad in
x.77.2, divas putrd'sa, etd nd yetire; 78.2, suydrmdno nd, sdmd
rtdrn yate, and 78.3, pltrndam nd, pdnsdh surdtdyah. These
pddas are peculiar in structure and movement. Their rhythmic
accent is as follows : ~ - ~ -' ~, ^ -' ~ -' ~ -. In each, the syllable
ds is the first accented one after the caesura, and requires no
resolution (Grassmann, Ueb. ii.479). The final pdda of ii.l ; 2;
11 ; 13 ; 23 ; 27 ; 33 ; 39 ; 40 ; 42 ; 43 : ix.86, brhdd vadema viddthe
suvfrdh, can be read with catalectic cadence, since it is a stereo-
typed refrain, and need not be made to correspond with the other
pddas of its verse by the resolution suvi'raah.

The resolution aa in devaas, i.23.24: vii.66.2: x.137.5; 159.4 ;
174.4, and in dd'naas v.27.5, is in each instance at the end of an

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

846 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

octosyllabic pdda, and of doubtful necessity ; but in devaas, i. 105.5,
it occupies the fifth and sixth places. See p. 838, top.

In i. 127.7 and vi.67.10, ktstd'sas ought to be read as a dactyl.
Perhaps it is an erroneous way of writing the original kittd's,
which was pronounced kistdas. If so, darpatd'sas ix. 101.12 is ao
analogous instance.

Examples of tne forms in -dsas are: amrftd&as, 11; ddityd'sas,
24; jdndsas, 41; devd'sae, 86; yaiiiiydsas, 21; nttd'sos, 29;
sdmdsas, 41 : — of those in -da : amftds, 22 ; ddityd's, 39 ; jdnds,
24; devds and devds, 311 ; yajfiiyds, 10; sutd's, 27 ; sdmds, 42.

Accusative Plural Masculine. •

This case ends in -dn. The Rik has 908 such forms, from 256
stems. In the samhitd, however, they appear as ~dn before a
vowel, except at the end of a pdda (Kit Pr. iv.26). Thus, i.92.7,
Usho gdagrdn tipa mdsi vd'jdn. I have noted the samhitd-form
for 200 instances. In 73 it was -dn : before a-, in 42 ; before <f-,
in x.53.2; before t-, in six (as iii.32.6) ; before £-, in ix.97.56;
before w-, in eighteen (as iv.22.10); before r-, in v.32.2 and
vi.15.18; before e-, in i.1.2 and iv.54.5 ; before o-, in iv.4.4.
It stood at the end of a pdda, in 68 instances unchanged;
but as -dn in iv.1.17; 19.7: viii64.1 (there are six otber
exceptions given Rik Pr. iv.26,27) ; it stood before consonants
unchanged in 47 cases; before p- the sandhi was -/I chr in
i.35.5; 126.2: ii. 12.10; and -n c- before c- in four cases.
Only twice did -dnp appear, x.51.8 before ca, and v.31.2 before
cML See the Pr. iv.32 for the other instances. According to the
Pr. iv.33, there are only five examples of « inserted between -dn
and tr. Professor Whitney (note to Ath. Pr. ii.27) regards dn
before a vowel as, equally with dns, dn$, inr^ Unry coming from
the original ending in ns; in all these cases alike, s is treated after
a nasal vowel as it would be after a pure vowel : e. g. jdnd dnu
zndjdndn dnu are parallel results, the one from jdnds and the other
from jdndns. With regard to the inserted £, between -dn and «-, see
the Ath. Pr. ii. 9. Aufrecht has left them out in the second edition
(see Preface, p. vi.) ; but they seem to be justified phonetically ; and
their development is aided by the false analogy of many instances in
which the "inserted tn is organic: thus, i.80.10, \ndro nlr ahanl
sdhasd sdhah; x.40.12, d' vdm agant sumatir; x.20.5, minvdnt
sddmapurd eti; so vii.104.21 d.

The only instances of resolution of the d of -dn are : pukrdan in
iv.2.2; devdan in viii.64.2; and in x. 12.2, unless dev6['si~\devd'n
paribhil'r rtena be better; in x.93.2, finally, the metre is in a
hopeless state.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural Neuter.

There are two endings, -d and -dm. The forms in -d number
1682 (from 394 stems) ; those in -dni9 1060 (from 280 stems). The
older form, therefore, which is entirely unknown in the later
language, here greatly outnumbers the younger. The Atharvan

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.p.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 347

has in* all 302 forms in -d (from 102 stems) against 407 in -dni
(from 158 stems). Deducting those that occur' in Rik-passages,
the AV. has in verses peculiar to itself 228 forms in -d against 334
in -dni. For the Rik the percentages are 62 : 38 ; for the Atharvan
41 : 59. In the Rik the older form predominates largely ; in the
Atharvan, the younger has already gained the advantage of its
rival. Nevertheless, it seems from this, that in the AV. the
-tf-forms have held their own, as against the -dm-forms, better
than any other old form, as against its more modern equivalent.

I have not found a single example of the V.p.n. in the Rik. The
Atharvan has one, cittdni, iii.2.4 ; but even here the MSS. read
citt&'ni, according to Professor Whitney's MS. Index.

The genesis of the younger form calls for a word. On the one
hand, it is not a double formation (like the oft-quoted prtsHshu),
made by adding the general ending, *', to the existing form in -d,
with mediating n; nor is it a good explanation to say that it was
formed by adding the general ending, t, to the stem, with
mediating n — which would give only -a-n-i (as, yugdni). We
have here a plain case of transfer to the an-declension. In this,
the distinction between " strong " and " weak " stem exists, and
the N.A.p.n. ends in -dn-i. The coexistence of such forms as
krtrimd krtrimdni, pU'rvd pti'rvdni, yugd1 yugd'ni, vdmd'
vdmd'ni, talpd' talpani (AV. xiii.1.17: xiv.2.41), shows how
easy was the transition from krtrtma to krtriman, pU'rva to
pii'rvan, yugd to yugdn, vdmd to vdmdn, talpd to talpdn. This
theory is strengthened by the abundant converse facts in regard to
the aw-stems. Moreover the form dhdndm, viii.22.13, proves
beyond a doubt the transition from the an- to the o-declension, for
a case other than those in question.

The older and the younger form stand side by side so often that
this is almost the rule. Common stock-phrases illustrate it, as
vicvdni kd'vid. It is worth noticing that generally, if two
nominatives or accusatives p.n. stand in the same pdda, and the
one ends in -dni (from a- or aw-stem, without distinction), -mt,
-tint, or even -drm, -imhi, -finshi, the other ends in -d. From
very many examples I cite a few : ix.61.30, yd' te bhtmd'ni
d'yudhd, and vii.67,9, dpvid maghd'ni; so viii.41.5, veda nd'rndni
gtihid; i.166.10, bhil'rini bhadrd': cf. vii.19.4 b; iii.36.8, sdvand
purH'ni; viii.67.8, vd&dni sdmgatd; iii.4.4, ilrdhvd' cod'nshi
prdsthitd rdjdnsi; iii.1.8, rabhasd' vdpdnshi. It is plain that this
common collocation is favored by the metre. A comparison of
the similar metrical structure of iii.39.2c/ 55.106: vi. 62.2c, and
x.56.56, is instructive.

The difference in the metrical value of the two forms often
decided the poet's choice. Compare x. 82.36, with d (bhtivandni,
bkHvand) ; v. 7 9. 7, ye no rd'dhdrm dpvld gavyd' bhdjanta
sHrdyah^ with vi.44.12, indro rd'dhdnsi dpvidni gdvyd, and
vhl34.14, d' no gdvydni dpvid; iv.8.3, dd'ti priyd'ni cid vdsu,
with vii.32.15, yi dddati priyd' vdsu; x.120.7, dta inoshi kdrvard
punHnij with AV. v.2.6, dta invata kdrvardni bhOtri; x.165.5,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

348 C. R. Lanman, [a-stems.

samyopdyanto duritd'ni vlpvd, and AV. vi.28.1, samlobkdyanto
durita padd'ni. The difference between x.85.18, vipvdny any 6
bMbvandbhicdshte, and vi$vdny6 bhdvand vicdshte (AV. vii.81.1,
et alibi), furnishes a most striking example of haplographia.

In several cases, the change of -d to -dni gives a plausible
emendation: i.173.4, &2'[nt] karma dshatard\n%\ asmai; v.41.10,
pocishkepo ni rndti vdnd[ni] ; vi.22.6, dcyutd[ni] cid vtdita
suojah (these are suggested by Grassmann) ; vii.4.2, sdrh yd
vdnd[ni] yuvdte pucidan (cadence? see Kuhn, JBeitrdge, iiL476).
For AV. iv.4.4, see below. For viii.12.28 30, Grassmann proposes
bhtivund ni yemire (as x.56.5), for bhtivandni yemire. If he is
right, ix.86.30 needs the same change.

In the trochaic pdda, viii.2.30 b, the resolution, uJcthdd
ca tiibhya\i'ri] td'ni, seems to be the best way out of the metrical
difficulty; if correct, it gives an example of the organic form of
the case.

The rule of hiatus does not hold for the final -d; it sometimes
coalesces with a following vowel : e. g., x.60.5 a; iv.25.6,
Jcbvalendrah; so in hdvemd', vii.29.3. This is probably the case
in i.85.9 and viii.85.19, where the text has ndri dpdnsi, and we
must read with Grassmann ndrid'pdmi, i. e., ndrid dpdnsi (cf
verse 21).

In several passages the pada has -d, where the assumption of
the usage so common in the Atharvan (Pr. ii.56) is,, perhaps,
preferable: i.57.2, nimneva for nimndm iva; x.40.9, nivaneva for
nivandm iva: v.60.2, vrateva for vratdm iva ( Ueb. i.577) ; v.73.8,
ydt sanmdrd ti pdrshathah, for samudrdm dti. AV. iv.4.4 ft, sara
rshabhd'ndm, p. sd'rd, BK. interpret as sd'ram rshabhd'ndm. If
sd'rd may be considered a voucher for the use of the word in the
plural at all, I should prefer to read sd'rdni rshabhd'naam. The
metre is thus entirely rectified. For yugeva and ndbhyeva,
ii.39.4, see N.A.d.m.

The pada sometimes has a visarga, where the exegesis demands
a plural neuter: thus vi.29.2, ndrids (cf. vii.45.1); i.174.8 and
v.29.15, ndvyds; v. 61.16, purupcandrd1 s. Vice versa, the visarga
is wrongly omitted, before s-, in iii.32.5, apd drnd[s] sisarshi
(cf. i.l 74.2).

The final long -d has disappeared in Greek and Latin, leaving
only scanty traces: II. xiii.22, acpSira aiai; so avxa (avxoa) ;
certd,falsd, C.I.L. i.1440, 1441 (Btlcheler, Lat Declination, p. 19).
On the other hand, in the Veda, there is hardly a trace of this
shortening (save in forms from rm-stems), although, as syllaba
anceps, it might often be read as short. There is reason, however,
for assuming this shortening in some cases: vdna, ix.88.2 :
sHarshdtd vdna Urdhvd' navanta, p. vdne (cf. i.88.3, and 171.3,
and Grassmann's note); dha, i.92.3: vipved dha ydjamdndya
sunvate (cf. i.130.2, dhd vipvd) ; possibly vipva[m] in vii.7.2,
jdmbhebhir vipvam upddhag vdndtii (but see Grassmann's note),
with -m as in i.60.3, jd'yamdnd (text, -nam as-), which is certainly
a N.s.f. Cf. patdmtiti, satydmugra, sahdsratnUti; and eJcamanta\
Indische Studien, v.437.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.p.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 349

The difficult verse, ix.10.9, abhi priyd' divas paddm adhvar-
yubhir guhd hitdm (sc. kaver dpatyam) sit' rah papyati cdkshasd,
offers perhaps the least uncertain example of this phenomenon. I
translate : c To its [own places of the sky] home in the sky, the
Soma, set away [m the vat] by the priests, looks with the eye of
the sun ;' i. e., with the image of the sun reflected in its surface, it
seems to look aloft to the regions whence it was brought by the
falcon (iv.26.6). How priydm could become priyd' (see Grass-
mann) in our text, I cannot conceive ; but that paddm can here
stand for padd' is even probable; cf. ix.12.8. Of course, the
Sama variant smooths everything over and has priydm (ii.477);
but its reading ought not to have any weight here.

Gr. says that vdpa is used once as neuter, in ii.24.13 (p. vdcd).
By BR. it is described, «.v., as standing for vdydn. It is a simple
case of elision (before r-, for vd$am), and crasis; pronounce
vdganidm. So Roth would now correct the dictionary. Veshdnd,
iv.33.2 (Gr., A.p.n.), is probably an I.s.n.

Some of the most frequent forms are: in -d, imd\ 57; ukthd\
25; td\ 71; duritd', 31; bhuvand, 36; yd', 50; vipvd, 249;
sdvand, 30 ; havyd\ 44 : — in -dm, hrtd'ni, 20 ; td'ni, 34 ;
bhUvandnij 57 ; yd'ni, 25; vipvdni, 110; vrtrd'ni^ 36; vratd'ni,
34 ; havyd'ni, 25."

Instrumental Plural Masculine and Neuter.

There are two endings, -ebhis and -ais. In the Rik, instru-
mental in -ebhis are almost as frequent as those in -ais, and in
certain parts more so (details will be given hereafter). The forms
in -ebhis number 571 (414 from 146 m. stems, and 129 from 65 n.
stems, besides 28 occurrences of the pronoun ttbhis) ; the forms in
-a/*, 666 (457 from 142 m. stems, and 209 from 79 n. stems). The
Atharvan has in all 53 forms in -ebhis against 263 in -ais; and of
these, in passages peculiar to itself, it has only 43 against 226.
The ratio for the Rik is nearly 1:1; for the Atharvan, about 1:5;
that is, the ending -ebhis is plainly going out of use in the Vedic
period. The later Sanskrit uses the old ending only in one word,
the pronoun ebhis; and it has been retained here doubtless because
the word would otherwise have lost its individuality almost
entirely. The two forms often stand side by side, as in i.33.2,
upamebhir arkaVi; A V. vii.98. 1. Once, in place of the Rik-reading
•ebhis (x.14.5, dngirobhir d' gahi yajfiiyebhih), the Atharvan has
-ais (xviii. 1.59, dngirobhir yajntyair d' gahihd). The choice was
often determined by the needs of the metre. Compare ddityebhir
vdsubhir dngirobhih (vii.44.4), and ddityai rudrair vdsubhih
sacdbhuvd (viii.35.i); ydtdm dcvebhir apvind (viii.5.7), and
adUyair ydtam apvind (viii.35.13).

Bopp (VgL (rr.3 §219) considers both -ebhis and -ais as two
independent developments from -dbhis. But besides the two
forms cited by him, asmd'bhis and yiwhmd'bhis, I know of no other
to support this view. Neither of the two seems derivable from
the other. The equality of their numbers, at least does not run
vol. x. 48

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

350 0. R. Lannian, [a-stems.

counter to Bopp's view. The resolution of -at* into two syllable*
would speak for this theory ; but I cannot bring forward a single
certain example of such resolution. It has been proposed in the
following passages: at the end of octosyllabic pddas, viii.92.13ft
and x.24.2 a; but in view of the facts relating to the resolution of
devds (N.V.p.m.) etc., it may be asked whether even such pddat
were not sometimes catalectic. In L 129.8 and v.50.2, the metre
can be helped by better means than the resolutions atrau,
sacathya'ls (Kuhn, Beitrdge, iv.192): read upa-tihe (tr forms weak
position) and sacathlais. In the trishtubh line ii.11.2, read dva
abhinad, not ukthats. In v. 4. 7, the syllable before vkthaU is
syncopated. In viii.90.10, rdjishthals is not needed, since pddm
of eleven syllables are sometimes combined with those of eight.
Cf. also Kuhn, Beitrdge, iv.189.

Specimen forms are : in -ebhis, ukthebhis, 14 ; ebhis and ebhis,
20; tebhis, 28; devebhis, 52; yebhis (yais not found in RV.), 2*;
vd'jebhis, 21; vipvebhis, 29; stdmebhis, 26: — in -m«, arkais, 43 ;
dpvais, 30 ; ukthats, 35 ; devais, 3 1 ; yajndis, 34 ; stdmais, 25.

Dative Plural Masculine and Neuter.

The dative plural ends in -ebhyas (or -ebhias) and this form does
duty also for the ablative. The datives number t31 ; that is, 79
masculines in -ebhyas (from 28 stems), and 51 masculines in -ebhia*
(from 26 stems), and one neuter.

1. The masculines are as follows: arbhakebhyas, dditebhya*,
dpinebhyas, ebhyas 8, ebhyds 2, ubhdyebhyas, ekebhyas, etebhyas,
grhebhyas, jtvebhyas, tebhyas 4, tdvakebhyas, ddpayoktrebhyas,
dev ebhyas 36, pipuiiel>hy as, putr ebhyas, p&rushebhyas, pil'rvebhyas
4, mdrtiebhyas, md'nebhyas, yebhya* 3, rdthebhyas, vtprebhyas,
mpoebhyas, vlapvebhyas, suvidatriyebhyas, steuebhyas, pasprdhdn-
ebhyas.

Of the neuters my collections show only one single example
in the whole Rigveda, and that is bk&vanebhyaA, viii.85.16.
It might be supposed from the grammars that the forms of the
paradigms were of about equal use and frequency. But when we
compare the occurrences of the N.s.m. (10,071) with those of the
D.p.n. (1), the contrast is striking. See Delbrtlck, Verbum, pp. 14,
15 ; and Curtius, Verbum, vol. i., preface, p. v., and p. 5.

2. The ending of the D.p.m.n. is frequently to be pronounced
as a dissyllable. The instances number 51. 18 are at the end of
njagati-pdda whose cadence would be catalectic without the
resolution: ajdrebhias, x.94.7 ; dmav attar ebhias and dptiapastar-
ebhias, x.76.5 ; ebhias, i. 146.5 : iii.53.16; jdnebhias, i.55.5 ; 58.6;
tebhias^ iii.2.6; ddpakakshiebhias and ddpayojanebhias, x.94.7;
pdrvatebhias, iv.54.5 ; pitnkr'ttarebhias, x.76.5 ; mdrtiebhias,
x.17.2; mdnavebhias, iv.54.1 ; md'nushebhias, iv.54.2 ; yojfdy-
ebhias, i. 139.7: iv.54.2; sdmarabhastarebhias, x.76.5. Further, in
pddas of 11 or 12 syllables, -bhias occupies the third and fourth
places seven times: gdrbhebhias, i. 146.5; devebhias, L139.7:
iii.34.7 : x.70.2; 110.4, 5; putrebhia*, x.15.7; — the sixth and

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.p.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 351

seventh in x.32.5, ti'mebhias, and i. 122.8, pajrebhias; — the ninth
and tenth in v. 11.1, bharatebhias, and iv.4 1. 8. papamdnbbhias.
At the end of octosyllabic pddas, -bhias occurs 1 1 times : ebhias,
i. 13 1.5; jdnebhias, x. 156.4; devebhias, x.85.17 ; bddhitibhia*,
iv.30.4; tndrtiebhias, i.90.3: viii.9.16; yajatebhia8,ii.5.8; yajiuy-
ebhias, i. 139.7: v.52.5; vid'As/Uareb/iias, viii.41.1 ; somiebhias,
viii.32.5; — and occupies the fifth and sixth places of such pddas
in 1 0 instances : devebhias, i.13.11 ; 142.6; 188.10: v.5.11: ix.3.9;
28.2; 62.20; 99.7; 103.6; putrebhias, vii.32.26 ; finally, in the
doipadd virdj, ix.109.21, we read devbbhias tvd.

Ablative Plural Masculine and Neuter.

My collections show a total of only 36 ablatives plural
(masculines 25 and neuters 1 1). In view of this fact, it is easy to
understand how a relation of so infrequent occurrence should have
no special form of its own, but depend upon some other case-form
for its expression, as here upon the dative.

1 . The masculines in -ebhyas are : ugrebhyas, ix.66. 1 7 ; grhebhyas,
i.120.8; devebhyas, i.74.9': iii.9.5: vi.44.7 : viii.90.16 : x.97.1 ;
pdrvatebhyas, x.68.3 ; makhebhyas, vi.66.9; cU'rebhyas, ix.66. 17.
(10). The neuters are: dntr'ebhyas, x,. 168.3; padebhyas, viii.2.39 ;
vdnebhyas, ii.l.l; vipvebhyas, ii.23.17; harniiebhyas, vii.76.2.

2. Vocalization of the written y takes place in 21 instances, as
follows : at the end of octosyllabic pddas, in dsurebhias, viii.86. 1 ;
ebhias, vi.46.9; jdnebhias, i.7.10; pdrvatebhias, i.191.9 : viii.34.13
(all m.) ; and in the following neuters : (dveshobhyo) *nydkrtebhiahy
viii.68.3 ft, which we must read with elision and vocalization ;
duritebhias, viii.44.30; nakhebhias, x. 163.5; pd'rthivebhias,
x. 1 58.1 ; — -bhias occupies the fifth and sixth places of octosyllabic
pddas in dntebhias, i.49.3 : viii.77.5 ; jivebhias, viii.8.23 ; devebhias,
ix.42.2 ; 65.2, 3; viprebhias, x. 1 35.4 (all masculine); — and in one
neuter, mrdhrebhias, viii.44.3. At the end of a jagati-pdda stand
the masculines ebhias, x.64.2, and pdrvatebhias, viL 104.4 ; in
bhuvanebhias (n.), ii.23.17, ia fills the ninth and tenth places: —
Vyenebhiaa (m.), finally, is in the middle of a trishtubh-pdda,
iv.26.4.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Neuter.

This case ends in -dndm. The oxytone stems in d never shift
the accent to the endings as do those in % t£, r' (except in the
numerals). The series of development, so far as illustrated by
actual Vedic forms, would be as follows: a. devd'm (for devddm),
b. devdndm, c. devd'ndm, d. devd'naam.

a. The forms like devd'm, as the organic ones, are d priori
probable, and are supported by the aualogy of the Zend. So
actdm^ Vd. vi.29; xv.3, with ahmarstandm ; geredham Vd.
iii.10, 22 ; ctaordm Vd. viii.12, etc. See Justi, Handbuch, § 528.4.
Geldner (Metrik des jilngeren Avesta, § 70) reads — as I think,
rightly — daivdm, Yc. x.6. But I can discover no such form in the
Gathas. Were it not for this probability, however, these forms,
of which the comparative philologists make so much, would not
seem very well vouched by the Veda. They are given under 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

352 C. It Isdnman, (a-stems.

b. Forms in -andm with short penultima are written nowhere.
A careful search of all the -<f?>/7m-forms, with scansion of the pddas
in which they occur, revealed only five instances in which there
was even metrical evidence of a short thematic -a: i.44.2
(= viii. 11.2), dgne rathir adhvard'ndm; i.l 88.11 , purogd' agn'w
devd'ndm; x. 1 36.6, apmrd&dm gandharvd'ndm; x. 1 74.5, ydthdhdm
eshdm bhiitd'ndm. viii. 70. 7 6 is trochaic. A short is merely
favored in the seventh place of i.l 24.11#: vii.5.1c: x.2.6a, and
elsewhere. These five instances do not weigh much, and evidently
belong to later parts of the Rigveda. But this short a is well
authenticated in Zend, as Yt. x.65, yd aredrandm aredrd (Skt. yd
radhrd'tidm radhrdh) ; so takhmanam, vydkhnanam, ibid. ;
Yt. v.21, appanam arshnam (Skt. dpvdndm vr'shndm), etc.

c. The G.p. in -dndm occurs 370 times. The masculines number
333 (from 59 stems) ; the neuters, 37 (from 17 stems). That the
long d before n is a lengthening, the forms in 4ndm, -llndm, -rndm
seem to indicate. It is explained by Joh. Schmidt ( Vbcalismus,
i.39) as due to the following nasal. Osthoff (JFbrschungen, ill 7,
and in Paul and Braune's Beitrdge, iii.3 and 39) explains the n as
due to a transfer from the a- to the an- declension.

d. Kuhn (Beitrdge, iv.180) notices the resolution of the d of the
G.p., as in devtilnaam. This seems to me to be a purely metrical
phenomenon, and to shed no light on the genesis of the form.
Bezzenberger takes an entirely different view of it (in his
Beitrdge, 1877, ii. 130 ff.)^ Forms of this kind occur 157 times.
Of these 144 are m. (from 49 stems); and 13 are n. (from 7 stems).
They are distributed as follows : mandala i. has 32 ; iii., 3 ; iv., 8 ;
v., 15; vi., 9; vii., 5; viii., 59; ix.j 9; x., 14; VaL, 3. The
resolutions at the end of vi.48.12 c: vii.32.11 c: viii.19.33 c; 23.2b;
90.6 c: x.23.1ft; 103.4 d, are such as convert the cadence from
trishtiibh to jagati. A very large majority of the resolutions (106,
or two thirds) are at the end of an octosyllabic pdda (and 40 of
the 106 are in the eighth mandala). This fact suggests again the
question whether such pddas may not often be regarded as
catalectic. There are examples enough of the resolution within
the pdda, however, to put the validity of this metrical process
beyond question.

1. Examples of this case are : adhvard'ndm, 1 0 ; ddUyd'ndm, 1 1 ;
jdndndm, 34; devd'ndm, 148; yajrtiy dndm, 12: — dhdndndm, 13.

2. The cases which suffer resolution are :

Masculines: adhvard'naam i. 1.8; 44.9; 45.4: iii.10.4: iv.7.3 : viii. 8.18. amr'td-
naam x.33.8 ; 74.3. ard'naam viii.20.14. d^vdnaam v.18.5: vi.63.10. dpvidnaam
viii.25.23. asutdnaam viii.53.3. dditid'naam viii.18.2. -ukshUdnaam v 56.5.
uWkhxiUumtdnaaTn i.28.1, 2, 3, 4. ushtrdnaam viii. 5.37. kaldfdnaam iv.32.19.
kr'tvidnaam viii.25.23. gardabhd'naam VAL 8.3. jdndnaani with V., vL 45.9. janfi-
nartrra i.25.14; 75.3,4; 81.9; 191.4: iv.9.5 : v.16.2 ; 66.4: vii.16.2, 7; 56.24;
74.6: viii.1.4; 5.13; 15.10; 19.33; 24.4; 45.28; 53.3; 92.6: ix.62.4; 64.27;
112.1: VAL 6.7. turd'naam vi.48.12. devd'naam i.43.5 ; 50.5; 133.7; 187.6: vL15.
13: viii.31.15; 39.6; 58.3; 64.8; 83.8: x.93.3. ndvdnaam viii.5.37. nem&mam
vi.16.18. pa rvaMnaam i.39 .3; 187.7: v.84.1: viii.18.16; 31.10. pdshidnaam iv.48.5.
priydrnaamviii.92A0. blmrdnaam viii.40.3. ma4dnaamv\\\.82.3l: ix. 104.5. mddd-
naam iv. 31.2 : viii.81.6: ix.23.7. martdnaami.63.5: iv.2.18: viii.39.6. mdrUdnaam

I

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G.p.m.n.] Xoun- Inflection in the Veda. 353

i.26.9: v.9.6; 74.7: viii.67.6 : 90.6: x.33.8. mahd'naam i.187.6: viii.52.l ; 81.3 ;
83.8: ix.1.4. md'nu* hdnaam i. 84.2 ; 127.8; 128.7: iv.8.8; 9.5 : v.7.3 : viii.23.25 ;
41.1 : ix.6l.ll. yajM'naam vi 16.1 : x.26.5. yd'dudnaam viii.6.46. rdthdnaam
i.48.3 : v.52.9 ; 53.10; 66.3; 74.8; 86.4: vii 32.11 : viii.23.2 ; 57.4; 83.1; 92.10:
x.26.5; 78.4; 103.4. rdsdnaam i.187.5. rudriydnaam viii.20.3. vatsd'naam
vi.24.4. vd'jdnaam viii.24.18; 81.3 : ix.31.2 : x.26.7, 9. vdjdnnam i.29.2 : vi. 45.10 :
viii.3l.30. viprdnaam x.26.4. vivratdnaam x.23.1. vr'kdnaam vii i. 5 6. 14. vrtra-
kdthdnaam iii.16.1. vrshabhd'naam VA1. 5.1. fdhsidnaam i.17.5. fakund'naam
ix.112.2. faphd'naam v. 6.7. " (H'rdnaam vi68.2. atUd'naam viii.32.19; 34.5;
53.3. Mmdnaam i. 134.6: viii.82.33. aomid'naam viii.17.14. avddhainavdnaam
viiL32.20. havdnaam viii.26.16. hvdri&'naam v.9.4: — neuters, aghd'naam viii.
47.2. dhdnaam viii. 2 2. 13. dxydnaam viii. 19.37. bhuvandnaam viii.4 1.5. rddhd-
naam L30.5: iii.51.10. v^'rtdrwam i.5.2 ; 24.3: viii.60.11, 13: x.9.5 ; 24.3.
mjdtidnaam viii.72.7.

3. The instances of a G.p. in -dm are not all entirely beyond
question. They are as follows: ytithtdm in Val. 8.4, yHthidm
dcvdndm, ' of horses belonging to the herd :' here there is no
doubt about the form ; but the hymn in which it occurs is very
poor stuff Cardthdm in L70.3, gdrbhap ca sthdtd'm gdrbhap
cardthdm, ' and child of the things that move not (wood, flint) —
child of them that move (clouds, lightning) :' Say. caranavatdm
jangamdndm garbhah. Hlnsdndm in x. 142.1, dre hlnsdndm dpa
didytcm d' krdhi; BR. take it as G.p.m. of hlnsa, but I can find
no occurrence of this word elsewhere in the Veda. Grassmann
( Wb. 1665) makes it a participle (cf. v.64.3, dhihsdnasya, and for
the accent, viii.43.10, ninsdnam), 'das verwundende Geschoss;'
but as didyb is not feminine, it is quite as easy to consider
hlnsdndm as standing for hinsdndndm : ' Of those that would
harm us, turn far away the dart.' Here the metre supports the
shorter form ; but a real instance of haplographia is girvdhas,
vi.24.6, if Gr. reads aright, with SV. i.68, girvavd'has. So too,
perhaps the easiest way to dispose of the inferior reading of SV.
UH0, tirdhpurd' cid arnavd'mjagamyd'h (RV. x.10.1, arnavdm),
is to make it a G.p.m. : ' E'en if o'er many a billowy sea thou
fleddest.' In x.46.5, ndyanto gdrbham vand'm dhlyam dhuh,
'Solemnly they led the offspring of the sticks of attrition,' vand'm
may stand for vand'ndm (accented as in iii.9.2). The stem van is
supported only by vdnsu, found twice, with irregular accent.
SV . 174 has a wretched variant, vand'. I regard pdsd'm as G.p.m.
of pdsd, 'ruler,' in ii. 23.12, pdsd'm ugrd manyamdnah, 'deeming
himself the mighty one [of the] among the rulers.' See BR.
vill68, and Gr.,Ueb. i.570.

In the six cases above, the text has a final in; in the following
six it has n or n, for which we must read m or m. In vi.47.16,
coshkHydte vlpa Indro manushy<T?i, ' The tribes of men Indra takes
to his protection,' I consider manushyfin (read -d*m) as equivalent
to mamishydsndm. The only alternative, to regard it as in
explanatory apposition to vlpas, is a bad one. In iv.2.3, antdr
iyase arushd' yvjdnd yushmd'np ca devd'n vlpa d! ca indrtdn, we
must read mdrtdm, and interpret it as G.p.m. : ' Thou goest as a
messenger — .... to you the gods, and hitner to the dwellings of
(us) mortals.' Say ana felt the difficulty, and says shashthyarthe

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

354 (?. R Lanman% [a-stems.

dvitiyd. In iv.2. 1 1 , c'Utim dcittim cinavad vi vidvd'n mdridn%

4 The wisdom and folly of mortals let the wise oue distinguish,'
read mdrtdm as before. TS. v.5.4* is without variant. In i.71.3
and vLll.3 we have devd'tl jdnma (p. devd'n); and in x.64.14,
devd'ii jdnmand (p. devd'n). Here we must read in the Samhita
devd'th, and in the Pada devd'm, and interpret, with Grassmann,
as G.p. The metre requires a change from devd'ndm to devd'th
in vi.51.2. Finally, Bollensen's simple transposition oi dev6 and
devd'ndm sets the metre right in i.68.2.

Locative Plural Masculine and Neuter.

This case ends in -eshu, and its final vowel is regularly ud com-
bined. Of such forms there are 548 masculines (from 123 stems),
and 249 neuters (from 92 stems), or 797 in all. In some cases the
gender is doubtful, as vd'reshu. In ail these 797 instances, the final
-m, as shown by actual scansion, 1. is never changed to ~v before s
dissimilar vowel (one exception); and 2. it never coalesces with a
following similar vowel. (Cf. Benfey, Gram, p. 51, §86, end.)
When standing, as often (so adhvareshu, mdrtieshu), at the end
of &pdday it is written -v if the next begins with a vowel. Here,
as is well known, it is always pronounced with hiatus (so i.27.5 :
vi.49.2; 64.4: viii.86.19: x.30.8; 95.16; 112.4: i.154.2: iii.23.1 ;
34.3: viii.9.10; 16.5: x.103.11 ; before w-, vi.4.2). Aside from
these, there are 179 cases (m. 125; n. 54) where -u is followed by
a vowel in the same pdda, and it is invariably to be read with
hiatus: thus, before m-, i.134.5: iii.57.5: iv.18.4; before the
postposition d\ 44 times, as ix.8.6 ; before o-, i.59.3 ; 91.4 ; 108. 11;
before <?-, i.64.4 ; 166.10: ix.102.3: x.28.2; before r-, iii.10.2 :
v.44.5: vi.59.4: x.21.7; before ?-, iv.7.1 : v.14.2; 22.1: viii.11.1 ;
49.3: x.21.6; before *-, 16 times, ii.ll.3£, 17: iv.32.11: v.28.4 :
viii.81.26; 88.2: x.63.9: ii.ll.3a: iii.41.4: iv.21.4; 22.5; 30.16:
\L46.1: vii.99.6: ix.97.56 : x.42.4; before d-, 24 times, as v. 25.4^/
and before a-, (51+24 =)75 times. In i.l62.16c?, I propose the
reading abh-i for iX ; in i.51.5^, we must of course pronounce
prdrjipvdnam. The solitary exception to the rule of hiatus is
x. 12 1.8, yd deve&hv ddhi devd eka d'stt This hymn is confessedly
a late one, and the sandhi an additional proof of its lateness. It
is quite possible to read vi. 26. 2c metrically as it stands: tvd'm
vrtreshv indra sdtpatim tdrutram; but our canon shows that we
must pronounce (tud'm) vrtre&hu, and the word indra mast
accordingly be thrown out as a gloss. Herein I find that
Grassmann agrees with me.

The Veda, then, does not support the view that -sva was the
original ending of the locative. Its combination with the post-
position d\ which, if any thing, ought to serve as the point of
departure for this theory, is found only 44 times in 797, and never
as svd. Cf. Bopp, Vgl Gr? § 279 note.

Examples of the forms are : masculines, adhvarishu^ 27 ; deve-
*Aw, 99; mdrtieshu, 25 ; ya/fi&Au, 35 ; vd'jeshu, 41 ; *?rf£*Au, 16: —
neuters, uktheshu, 10; bhuvaneshu9 12; vdneshu, 20; viddtheshu^
33; sdvaneshu, 14.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.f ] Noun-Infiection in the Veda. 355

STEMS IN A.

The following is a synopsis of the terminations of the
inflectional forms:

Singular: N., -d, -oaf, -a? ; A., -dm, -aam, -dy; I.,-d,-ayd;
D., -dyai, -ai; Ab., -dyds, -dydsf; G., -dyds, -dyda?y -dyaif; L.,
-Ciydm; V., -e.

Dual: N.A.V., -e (iti); LD.Ab., -dbhydm; G.L., -ayos.

Plural: N.V., -dsas, -ds, -d?; A., -(25, -aas^dsas?; 1.,-dbhis;
D.Ab., -dbhyas, -dbhias; G., -dndrn, -dnaam, -dm?; L., -<fow.

There are no truly declensional peculiarities of accent

Nominative Singular Feminine.

The case-form is regularly like the stem, and occurs 1053 times
(from 424 stems). Examples are: idd, 17; eshd', 27; citrd',9;
jdyd\ 17 ; ddkshind, 21 ; yd\ 74 ; ydshd, 24 ; 8d\ 80 ; subhdgd, 13 ;
sdnr'cd, 10.

Bopp {VgL Gr.* §137) and Schleicher (Comp.* §246) assume
for all these stems a N. -en ding s, which has become lost. This
view is controverted by Max Mtlller, Chips, iv. p. 46 ; and
Aufrecht finally (Rigveda* preface, p. v, note) calls it a " dream
of the comparative philologists." The Veda does not support it.
The 8 of gnd' 8, iv.9.4, proves nothing. Whether it be ivomjan or
jnd, it was originally dissyllabic, but is treated as a root-word.
So 8trtf has come to be treated declension ally as a root- word,
preserving a trace of its true character {sUtrf) only in the N.s.,
where the * is lacking.

The final d often stands before an initial vowel in the text. Its
treatment by the samhitdrpdtha is varied. In about 30 instances
it stands at the end of pdda a or c, and is always written with
sandhi; but it is of course always to be pronounced with hiatus :
as, asati ca yd' na urvdrd : d'd . . . , viii.80.6. The fusion results
oftenest in d, as i.l 14.9c; 123.11a: ii.27.7a: iii.39.la/ 58.1a;
sometimes in e, as i.32.9a: iii.39.lc/ or o, as iii.58.lc: v.80.2c (cf.
3a), 5a: vi.61.13c/ 64.2c, 5a: vii.95.4a: viii.20.4a. The result is
d at the end of a pentasyllable pdda, i. 66.7a and iv. 10.5a. Fusion
resulting in ai or au is not found (Rik Pr. ii.31). Accordingly we
have, i.123.10, pd'paddndn : ishi. In v.30.14, we have yd'n : rnam-
caye, because the individuality of the word (if written yd) would
be obscured. Of the 74 occurrences oi yd' as N.s.f., only two are
before vowels: this is the only one to which Rik Pr. ii.31 (end)
applies; the other is vi.64.5. A merely graphic peculiarity is
the short a in priyd:r'-y i.151.4, and rjuhdsta : r-, v.41.15. The
pada of course has d.

In 160 instances the final d stands before a vowel in the interior
of a pdda. It is always written with fusion, but the scansion
shows that the real treatment is determined by the metre. Thus,
i.95.1, anyd'nyd vatedm Upa dhdpayete; but L62.8, vdpurbhir d'

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

356 C. R. Lanman, [<$-stems.

carato any d' -any d; cf. iv.52.2, dpveva citrdl drushi. In the great
majority of these instances (137), the concurrent vowels are to be
read as they are written : thus, vi.59.6, pU'rvd'gdt; iii.39.2, seydm;
vii.3.9, pilteva, and so with iva 59 times out of 61 (exceptions are
v.45.2 and viii.90.13) ; iY.2.\0,prited hdt(a)rd ; i.56.4, tvd'vrtlhotdyt
(so esh6 i.46.1, and sd L 191.11: x.11.3; 23.4; 63.16) ; " x. 62. 11,
ydtarndnaitu.

The final d of the dual, it will be remembered (p. 340), always
coalesces with a following vowel. Here, however, the metre
shows hiatus in 23 instances, as vi.64.5, *d' d' vaha yd' ukshdbhir
dvdtd: ti-. The list is: i.48.7c (12 syll.) ; 62.80*; 77.1a, lb; 104.
5a: iv.52.2a: v.45.2, sthU'nd iva; 53.9a; 61.5a; vi.25.1,
madhyamd' ind(a)ra; 64.5a, bis; 66.3a': vii.34.1, prd pukrd' eht
(ateharapankti) : viii.89.llo/ 90.13,c/frd' iva: ix.86.446.* x.61.18c;
93.13ft; 95.16a; 121. 2c; 145.3a; also i.62.8e, where a syllable is
syncopated between aktd' and ushd'h. In i. 120. la the metre is
hopeless.

besides the above, there are a number of cases given by the Rik
Pr. ii.29, in which hiatus occurs, not only in the spoken, but also
in the written text. It is hard to see why the diaskeuasts and
Qaunaka have taken account of these and not of the others. Those
that concern us are: Uhd\ viii.5.29 ; rnanUhd' (as N.s.), i.101.7 :
v.11.5: vii.70.7: vii.34.1 b (at the end of an ahsharapanhti). At
the end of common pddas the fusion is written, even with mantshd',
iii.33.5c: vi.67.2a.

This comparatively frequent toleration of hiatus suggests to me a remedy for
several lame verses: i.173.8, vipvd ie dnu j6ehid \a\bhdd yaiih (cf. iv.43.4a, where
I read \a\bhOd) ; vii.58.6, prd sd' [d]vdci sushtutir maghondm (cf. vii.10.1). On the
other hand, since fusion is common, sawiA&J-manuscripts would show no difference
between mrdmd vidad gd'h and -md avid-, v.45.8; cf. vi.61.10, st&mid bhtif; 12.
hdvidbhfd; v.44.8c and x.99.6d. And so 1 think that such combinations may
have been a point of departure for the loss of the augment. See Delbruck,
Verbum, p. 80 ; and Curtiua, Verbum, i.132, and especially 133.

In jd'yamdnam (asmdt suktrtih), i.60.3, there seems to be a clear
case of' a N.s.f. with shortened final and paragogic m before a
vowel (cf. a-stems, p. 349, top). For maht\ v.41.15: x.77.4,
Gr. (Kuhn's Zeitschrift, xvi.170) reads the more organic form
mahid. I believe he is right, and would add vi.66.3, vide hi
mdtd' mahd (sc. gdrbhasya) mated sd'. The metre seems to
require resolution (?) in vii.75.4, yujdndd, and x.162.1, 2, dmivaa.

The pada reads d in several cases wrongly : for asurid, vii.96.l,
and gatatamd\ vii.19.5, see A.s.1 ; for kantnakfoa, iv.32.23, see
N.d.f. ; for ydshd, ix.96.24, see N.p.f. ; for sumedhd' (Gr.), iii.57.5,
see aa-stems, N.s.f.

In xA9A,priyd' may be A.p.n. ; and in i. 122.1, ishxtdhid', Ls.f.
For krdnd\ i.139.1 and v.7.8, see p. 334.

Accusative Singular Feminine.

This case terminates in -am, and occurs 522 times (from 226
stems). Examples are : dmivdm, 9 ; manishd'my 21 ; jdyd'm, 11 ;
ydshdm, 7; ydshandm, 6 ; td'm, 29; imd'm, 52.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.b.1] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 367

Resolution seems unavoidable in three trishtubh-pddaB : vii.93.3,
kdfshthaam, and i 173.2, mcmdam (aa occupies the sixth and
seventh places in both) ; and 1165.15, vayd'am (end) ; but see as-
stems, A.s.m.. Gr. proposes 'ekatimy vih.61.7a, and mahiydmd-
naarn, iv.30.96, thus making them full anushtubh-pddas. They
may be catalectic. In x.50.5, Gr. reads maMdm (cf. N.s.f.) for
mahPtn. I prefer dvamdtrdm : text, <5m-. In ix.12.7, he follows
the S&man (ii.552), and reads sabardughdm for-oA. Bollensen
(Orient und Occ, ii.460) supposes a copyist's error in vii.96.1, the
loss of anu&vdra before a nasal, and amends, with good reason,
thus: <Mur%d\m\ nadl'naam. For eumedhd'm, viii.5.6, ushd'm
and us/id's, see a*-stems, A.s. and p.f. The A.s.f. of stems in id
often coincides with the L a.f. of those in i. Thus pdrvid'm may
be referred to pHrvid or to jmrd; satyd'm, to satyd or sdt. The^
accent would distinguish pamid'm (stem pamid'; but cf. pdmids
iii.33.13) from pdmidm (stem pdmi). Since stems in ia form their
feminines in id or $, it is well to keep this double possibility in
view (c£ d'ria, daivia, wand).

A striking example of elision and crasis is nivepane patatamd'-
viveehih, vii.19.5, for -md'm av- (p. -md'). Cf. Sayana: gatatamtm
puram vydpnoh.

Instrumental Singula* Feminine.

This case is formed in two ways : either the general ending -d
is affixed directly to the stem, and the concurrent vowels
contracted (as jihvd'-d, jihvd') ; or, a y is interposed, and the
thematic vowel shortened (^sjihvdyd).

The older form occurs 300 times in the RV. (from 95 stems) ; the
younger, in ~ayd, 3 56 times (from 113 stems). The older form appears
only sporadically or in stereotyped words in the later language.

It happens comparatively seldom that the stem displays ooth
endings (e. g.^gavyd', dhdrd, manUh&) ; the reverse was true of
•dsas and ~ds. The older formation prevails especially with stems
(generally abstracts) in td (20 out of 95), and in id or yd (44 out
of 95). With the latter, the younger formation would sound
badly: thus, hiranyaydyd (not found); cf. hiranyayd\ vii.66.8.
Here, as elsewhere, the choice between the longer and the shorter
form was often decided by the exigencies of the metre, or by
euphony, or both; cf. ix.98.3, dhd'rd yd drdhvd adhvar^ with
101.2, yd dhd'rayd pdvakdyd; and i.91.1a, with 94.1ft. The
longer form fits often in the anushtubh or jagati cadence ; the
shorter in the trishfubh. In viii.6.33, the measure requires,
perhaps, utd brahmanydyd vaydm: text, brahmanyd'. We find
the final d coalescing with an initial, e. g., in ix. 97.46a, and
making hiatus in i.53.86.

There are no purely declensional irregularities of accent. In
the case of ayd' (from a), it is something peculiar to that pronoun,
and not adverbial (see below, and cf. Myd, as pronoun 1 1 times, as
adv. 3; tdyd9 10; ydyd, 23; svdyd, 3). In aryayd\ v. 75. 7, BR.
i.447, see an error for aryd[s] d'7 stem ari.
vol. x. 49

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

358 C. R. La?iman} [<£-stems.

The adverbial character of adatrayd' (from adatrd), v.49.3,
explains the displacement of the accent ; so naktayd', iv.11.1, and
8vapnayd\ AV. v. 7. 8; and perhaps rtayd\ RV. ii. 11.12; c£
sarvahrdd'. The adverbial shifting of accent is natural in the
homophonous instrumentals, since it differentiates them from the
nominatives of the same form ; thus ubhayd' (sternubhdya), madhyd
(mddhya), samand' (sdmana): for dakshind' (ddkshiria), cf.
i.100.9, dakshine, oxytone, and see Indische Stndim, iv.ldO.

I cannot account for the accent of pavayd' in ix.97.63, uta na
end* pavayd' pavasva, and therefore I read pavd'yd', i. e., pavd'
ay 6! (cf. 52, ayd1 pavd' pavaavaind' vdsHni).

For ddkshinayd rdthena^ 1123.5, see G.s.£

1. The homophonous instrumentals are as follows: (agriyd' iv.34.3?) abdayd'.
abrahmdtd, arhand 3, avi'r atd\ apvayd' 2, trasyd\ ishitatvdtd. ishudhid'f, irmd' 5,
upamd' 2, ubhaytf, urushyd', updnd 6, rjdyd\ ftayd', etd' (x.95.2 ; Roth would like
to take it as A.p.n., adverbially, 'here ;' I think it is used with slightly contemp-
tuous tone ; so Say., scholion to (Jat. Br. xi.5.1', etd etayd Ivadiyayd arthapQnyayd
vdcd), aidhd', kavydtd. gavydf viii.46.10: ix.64.4 (vii.18.7?), guhd 53, [ghrnd', see
p. 335) jar and 2, jigishd' 2, jihvd' 3, tanyatd' 3, tdtyd', Hrafcdtd 2, Ugishthd, tyd',
tvdyd' 3, tudyd' 8, dahsdnd 7, dakshind1 2, dapasyd', dinatd, duvoyd', devoid 1.22.5;
65.3; 100.15: vi.4.7. devayajyd' 2, doshd' 13, dvitd' (? Roth, ' so fort, fortan, ron
nun an1) 29, dhdnyd and dhishdnd, v.41.8, dhd'rd, dhishd' (see Gr.) 2. pavd',
pdkid 3, purushdtd 3, purushatvdtd 2, bandhutd\ barhdnd 13, brahmanyd' (see
above), bhanddnd 2, mahhdnd 11, madhyd' 4, manand', l.mand', 2.mand/, manUhd'
13 (in iii.57.1, Aufrecht* has -d'm; Muller, -d'; the scholiast seems to have read
-d'm), mamdtd, mr'shd, mehdnd 4, yavid' 2, rathayd', (vakshdnd, v.52.15, Say..
vahanena nimitiena ; better N. ?) vacasyd' 3, vapushyd', varasyd', varivasyd'*
vasutd, vas&yd' 2, vipanyd', viprd (matt' viii.25.24), virayd' 2, veddtd, vtdid\
vedhasyd', (dsd (Say., stutyd, v.41.18), fraddhdmanasyd'f pravasyd'1, scmdtd 2,
samand' 13, savyd', sasvdrtd, sukrtyd' 2, sukratxiyd' sukshetriyd', sug&t*y&',
sujdtdtd, sumnayd', supravasyd', susaniid, svadhd' (see below) 2, suapasyd\ himid',
Mr any ay d\ To these we may add namasyd', ii.33.8 (so A. Weber); dhend,
x.104.10; pvetof', x.75.6.

The Atharvan has some of these instrumentals in Rik-passages :
three in iv.33.2 ; one in xviiLl.52, and one in xix.12.1; and some
in passages peculiar to itself : the stereotyped g4ihdy 1 3 times (and
twice in Rik-passages) ; dakshind', ix.7.20 and xii.2.34 (hut
ddkshind in the Rik-passages, xviii 1.42 and xix.13.9!); devdtd,
iv.1.5 ; doshd', vi.1.1 and xvi.7.9 ; sumnayd\ vii55.1; and
vittakdmyd' (not a Rik-word), xii.3.52. So kimkdmyd\ £at. Br.
i.2.5" and yatkdmyd\ iii.ft.3*.

2. Examples of the common form are: jihvdyd, 24 ; dhd'rayd, 53 ; mdydyd\ 20;
samdydy 9; hrdayydyd, x. 15 1.4.

There are several forms bearing more or less resemblance to an I.s.1 of the
pronoun d: dyd, x. 116.9, p. ayds, is N.p. of stem dya, 'wanderers;' possibly dyd
(so Aufrecht* and Codex Chambers 60), vi.66.4a, p. dyd, is from the same stem,
lor ayds — 'as long as the ones now wanderers quit not their birth-place;' in
vi.66.5a, text ayd's, the cadence requires dyd's, i. e., asyd's (Gr.), Ab.&f. of a;
ayd' occurs as substantive pronoun in ii.6.2 (sc. samidhd), as adjective pronoun
with substantive expressed, 18 times (6 with dhiyd'), and as adverb iii.12.2:
vi.17.15: ix.53.2; 106.14, and, I must add, i.87.46 (cf. Prat ii.29: Muller,
Translation, p. 148). For anayd, ix.65.12, 27, Gr. reads ayd'.; but anSna, i.93.10:
iii.17.2 : vhi.44.2, warrants us in holding fast to the text

Dative Singular Feminine.

This case terminates in -dyai. It occurs only 20 times (from 15
stems). The full list is: agdtdyai^ avi'ratdyai, ghdshdyai,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.&f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 359

card'yai (Delbruck, in Kuhn's Zeitschrift, xviii.85), jard'yai,
tvdyatdyai, duchtindyaiy pHtdkratdyai, mand'yai, ii.33.5 (in
iv.33.2, Roth takes it as G.s.f., q. v.), vippdldyai i.116.15 only,
pivd'yai, pvetand'yai, sUnr'tdyai 2, silrid'yai 3, sudtyai 2. For
prajd'yai see below.

In L54.il, we have suapatyai (stem suapatyd'; scholion to
T. Br. ii.6.9l, pobhandpatyatvdya), and in i 113.6, mahiyai (stem
mahiyd'; see BR. vii 1 789). They are not for suapatyd' yai and
mahiyd'yai; bat rather relics of the simpler formation, the general
ending (here e) being added directly to the stem, as with the
instrumental, p. 357, and the infinitives khyai, dai, mai, yai, sai
(Delbrttck, Verbum, p. 221).

In viL 1.19a, we read md' no dyne avUrate pdrd ddh; perhaps
this form was preferred to md'vtratdyai no ague pdrd ddh, which
would be metrically correct, because in the latter the sandhi
would obscure the a- privative of avtratdyai. In in. 16.5, md* no
ague dmataye : md'vi ratdyai riradhah, this obscurity is remedied
by the parallel dmataye preceding it. The genuine Vedic hymns
are as averse to ambiguity as some writers of the later literature
are fond of it. We have here a simple transition to the consonant
declension; cf. devdtdtaye and devdtdt-e, sarvdtdtaye and Zend
haurvatdt-em.

In i.118.8, prdti jdnghdm vippdldyd adhattam, p. -ds> 'Ye put
on again Vi9pala's leg (that was cut off),' sense and form (Prat.
ii.9) admit of a dative ; * Ye put on a (new iron) leg for V.,' as in
116.15.

Ablative Singular Feminine.

The ablative and genitive s.f. are coincident in form, and
terminate in -dyds. The separation here is based on the exegesis.
The clause, x.87.16, yd aghnyd'yd bhdrati kshirdm agne, is a good
example for showing how indistinct the logical border-line
between these two cases is. The ablatives are as follows (8) :
kand'yds, jihvd'yds, ddkshindyds, durivdyds, durhdndyds,
daimdyds, niddyds, sud'yds; and in AV. iv.40.2, ddkshindyds;
5, dhruvd'yds; 6, vyadhvd'yds; 7, tirdhvd'yds. In aydfs, RV.
vi. 66.5a, Gr. sees an Ab. See p. 358, and cf. ddkshindyd[s\ G.s.f.

Genitive Singular Feminine.

The genitives number 54 (from 27 stems) and are as follows :
dghnidyds 3, aghnyd'yds, iddyds 5, ukhd'yds, usrtydyds 5, H'rmid-
yds 2, kand'yds 3, kd'shthdyds, jihvdfyds 2, ddkshindyds 4,
darpatd'yds, dil'rvdyds, dhishdndyds 2, dht'shamdndyds, pajrdyds
(with voc), pdritakmidyds, mdkhindyds, rasd'yds 2, vayd'yds,
vippdldyds (i.118.8), pacvattamd'yds, plphdyds, pucd'yds, sabardu-
ghdyds 2, sehdnd'yds, stirdyds, sdrid'yds and sHryd'yds 8.

In i. 123.5, jdyema tdrh ddkshinayd (p. -d) rdthena, one is
tempted read ddkshindyds in view of la, and to interpret, with
Gr., as Gen., the d being due to the metre; but cf. x.26.6a
and 107.1* BR. take mand'yai (s.v.) as G. in iv.33.2,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

860 C. R. Lanman, [<£-stems.

dhfrdsah pushtim avahan mand'yai. I find no form in the Veda
to support it, although the case is so extremely common in the
Brahmanas : Say., tnandyd rtena; Gr. ' zum Lohne.' Cf., on the
other hand, vippdldydfa) as D.s.f. before a-.

Locative Singular JFkmininb.

This case terminates in -dydm. It occurs 80 times (from 18
stems). Scherer, Ges. d. Deutschen Spr. 283, and Bollensen, Z. D.
M.G. xxii.618, speak of locative forms in ~d from <2-stems. I do
not think that any such can be proved. Some of the supposed
ones are instrumentals/Kuhn, Zeits. xviii.365, and note to 367).
Benfey (SV. ii.830 ; Ueb. p. 278) sees a L in rasd' dadhUa
vrshaoham, RV. viii.61.13 ; but dadhita is 3 s. opt., and rasdt its
subject : Gr., 6 let the flood receive the steer.'

The forms follow : dpayd'ydm radical ?, dmd'ydm, uttdnd'ydm
2 and 1164. 14, ustiydydm 3, -gatdydm 2, grivd'ydm, jUrnd'y&m,
ndvdydm^pdritakmidydmb and with djd' m., i.116.15, bhadraydm
2, yamtindydm, varatrd'ydm, pinpdpdydm, tfrindydm, stirdydm,
susMmdydm, svd'ydm 2, hariyHpi'ydydm.

Vocative Singular Fbmbun*,

The V.s.f. ends in -e. It occurs 95 times (from 51 stems). If e
represents an <J, the change is purely phonetic. The Rik shows
no trace of a form in d. The "still weaker form in dn (Kuhn,
Zeits. xviii.369 and Schleicher, Cornp.* p. 574, § 263) is supported
by amba only, ii.41.16 and x.86.1 bis; and it is doubtful whether
in the Veda amba means * mother9 at all. In x.97.2 it is surely a
particle. Like akka and aHay given in the scholion to Pan.
vii.3.107, amba is probably a natural cry fitted into a grammatical
category; so BR. By the side of this form, as if it were from a
real stem ambd, arose the word ambe, VS. xxiii.18 — scholion:
patnyah paraspararh vadanti lhe ambe?

The forms follow: aghniey apue, amartie, aiubitame, apve,
apvasHnrte 10, dijikiye, ide, ugraputre, uttare, tUtdnapartu,
uruvraje, Urmie 2, rshve, kadhapriye^ kdne, garige, ghore^ citre,
citrdmaghe, jdye, devajUte, devitame, dhishane, nadttame, pathie,
pastie, putrakdme, purupriye, prthujdghane, prthusfituke,
brahmasarhpite, marudvrdhe, yamune, rdke, vikate, vipvavdre 3,
paravye, pitike, pubhre 3, saddnue, sarame 4, site, sujdte 13,
suputre, subhage 12, suldbhike, susnushe, sUnrte 4, sUrie and s&rye,
hlddike (Gr., Ueb.; in Wb. as L.).

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Feminine.

These cases are coincident in form, and end in -€. They occur,
taken together, 321 times (from 136 stems). The termination is
of obscure origin. It is pragrhya (Prat. L28), and the pada
distinguishes these dual forms from the vocatives singular by an
Hi. Cf. ubhk (iti) ydt te mahind' pubhre dndhasi, vh.96.2, with
pubhre (iti), iii.33.2 ; i.30.21c with iii.33.1&; and x. 14.1 bd (yaroe,
L.B.HL) with 13.2a.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.d.l] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 861

In ii.3.6, ushd'sdndktd vayteva (p. -driva) ranvitb, and iv.32.23,
kaninakeva (p. -d'~iva) vidradhb, the feminine adjectives require
us to read vay%e va and -ke va. So we may read, with Bollensen,
ii.39.6, nd'se va (p. -d-iva), in view of these two instances, although
nd'sd might be taken as N.d.f. from stem nds, " strong " nd's.

In i.29.3, 808td'm dbudhyamdne, Gr. reads -mdnai. This is
hardly to be allowed. The pdda is catalectic (see p. 338, top).

Examples are: ubhe, 66; devdputre, 7; yami; virdpe9 7; tfpre,
5 ; sumeke, 8.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Feminine.

In x. 105.5, piprdbhydm seems to be an instrumental. Nd'sih-
dbhydm, x.163.1, is an Ab. In x.88.15, td'bhydm is I. with
distinct locative meaning. Cf. p. 343.

Genitive and Locative Dual Feminine.

The genitives are: ayds i.185.1 ; ydyos ii.32.1 and Hi. 54. 2;
yamdyos x.8.4. For janghdyos, AV. xix.60.2, see below.

The locatives are: ayds (sdcdydh, p. dydh) iii.54.2; uttdndyos
i. 164.33 ; ydyos iii.44.3. For svadhdyos, ix.86.10, see below.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Feminine.

The N.p.f. has two forms. The almost universal termination,
-<£«, occurs 586 times (from 262 stems), thus coinciding with that
of the A.p.f. ; and, in general, these two cases are not formally
separated in the Yeda. But the ending -dsas is also found as
N.p.f. some twenty times, more or less.

The comparative grammars make much of the feminine forms
in -dsas, and set up entirely different organic forms for the N.p.f.,
e. g., *dpod'8a*i and A.p.f., e. g., *d$vd-ms. But the evidence
upon which this assumption is based, so far as it comes from the
Veda, is slight. I would quite as lief consider the feminine forms
in -dsas an irregular extension of the use of the masculine form to
a field where it did not belong. Some of the verses in which
these forms occur seem to be of late date, although this can hardly
be affirmed of them in general; such are iv.58.7, 8 : vi.63.9:
x.95.9: and perhaps v.46. 7 : viii.44.25; 82.23.

The evidence of the kindred tongues, on the other hand, seems,
as far as I can judge, to speak for the originality of -dsas in the
feminine. I can find no N.p.f. in -donhd in the A vesta; but see
below, A.p.f., p. 363, and Bopp, Vgl. Gr.9 i.460, §229. The
Prakrit N.p.f. ending in -do represents, I believe, an original -dsas,
although, to be sure, it is seen also in the A.p.f! (JPrdkrtOrprakdpa,
v.19, 20); thus, pamaddo, £!ak. 4> stands for pramaddso. The
Pali Njp.f., kafiridyo, stands probably for kafifido, with euphonic
y (see Kuhn, Pdli-Gr. p. 64), and this for kanydso. The materials
for verifying these statements, however, are not at my command.

1. Examples of the common form are: imd's, 32; etd's, 7; td's,
47; dhd'rds, 16; bhadr&'s, 19; manlshd's, 10; yd's, 71 ; vayd's^
8. Besides the 586 forms mentioned above, vipvds, N. and A.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

862 C. R. Lanman, [^-stem&

together, occurs 104 times. Vayd's, x.92.3, has been counted
under vayd', i twig.'

Among the 586 forms there may be some vocatives. I have
noted only two separately, vipvaminvds and suhavds.

The pada has -ds in vi.29.2, where we must read ndrid: see
p. 348.

In vii.61.5, on the other hand, we have to read dmdrd(8) t*ipvd(s)9
p. -d. Say. seems to have had MSS. that read imd' (imdni).

Elision and crasis is seen in iz.96.24. 61 te rUcah pdvamdnasya
soma ydsheva yanti sudtighdh sudhdrd A, i. e., ydshds-iva, p. -d-iva.

The resolutions, usrdas viii.64.3, br'haspdtipras&taas x.97.15, 19,
samviddndas 14, ptinyagandhaas vii.55.8, are all at the end of
catalectic pddas of seven syllables, and unnecessary. See p. 338t
top. In x.26.1, pronounce spdrhdl idnti niyitiah, not spdrhdas
(Gr.). For vayd as, vii.40.5, see the end of this page.

2. The following is an enumeration of the N.p.£ forms in -dsas,
including at the end some doubtful ones. To show that the native
authorities recognized them as feminines, I have added a few
excerpts from the scholia.

A'tandrdsas, durmitrd'sas, pd'rthivdsas, pdvakd'sas, bhejdnd'sas, vanvdnd'sas,
vof&'sas 'cows,' vdprd'sas, viddnd'sas, vrdhd'sas, cdghand'sas, smdyamdndsas,
dfushdnd'sas, pasprdhdnd'sas, havamdndsas, &cvdsast% jdnydsas t; AY. sammUdsas,
amr'tdsas, vacd'sos, mdrtdsast. #

i.95.2 (T Br. ii.8.1*\ dtandrdso yuvat&yas. vii.28.4, durmitrd'so hi hsMdyak
pavante, ' denn die bosen Leute mussen bussen,' Both. v. 46. 7, yd'h pd'rthivdsas
. . . id' no devih pinna yachata; S&y., prihivtsambandkinyak. i. 142.6, pdvakd'so
dvd'ro devt'h; Say., fodhayitryah. x. 153.1, thkh&yantfr indram updsate bhqdn-
d'sak, sc. indramdiarah, Anukramanf. The SV., i.l?5, has vanvdnd'sak.
vi.63.9, fdndo \a\ddd dhiraninah smdddisfittn, d&fa vapd'so abhishd'ca rshvd'n, * (J.
gave horses with golden trappings and well-trained: ten cows (mares?) follow the
mighty (steeds).1 So Roth ; but S&y., * vagd'so ' 'nugundn ' abhisM'cah » fotrtodm
abhibhdmtkdn ! viii.44.25, giro vdprd'sa irate; S&y., vdfanapUdh. i. 169.2,
dyvjran . . vt^vdkrshlir viddnd'so nishshidhah. viii.82.23, hdtrd asrkshata indram
vrdhd'sah; SV. i.151, vrdhdntah. iv.58.7 (VS. rvii.95), ftyhand'sah patayanU
ghrtdsya dhd'rdh ; S&y., dpugantryah. iv.58.8, yoshdh smdyamdndsah : SchoL to
VS. xvii.96, WiaddhasarUyah. iv.24.4, kshitdyo . '. dpusMnd'sah. vii.18.3,

imd' u tvd pasprdhdnd'so dtra mandrd' giro devaydn&r upa sthiik, ' And unto
thee pressed onward then our emulous, gladsome, godly songs.1 v.32.11, tarn
mejagrbhra dpdso doshd' v&stor hdvamdndsa indram, ' On him my hopes laid hold,
which unto Indra morn and eve do cry.'

The following two are possibly masculine : x.95.9, apvdso nd krtddyah: Roth,
JSrl zum Nirukta, p. 154, note, (wie lustige Stuten.1 ix.49.2, gd'vo j&nydsah ; so
SV. u.786.

The Atharvan has several : two in xii.3.27, uteva prabhvfr utd sdmmitdsa uta
pukrd'h tficayac cdmftdsah, sc. dfpah; and one in i v. 24.4, ydsya vapd'sa rshabhd'sa
uteh&nah, 'to whom belong cows, steers, and oxen,' as in Rik vi. 16.47. In
xviii.3.23, martdsac cid urMvaffr akrpran, unless we read martydsap cia\ the
preference is doubtless to oe given to the Rik reading, m&rtdndih dd, iv.2.18,
since mdrta is never an adjective. Pd'rthivdsas, vii.49.1, TBr. iii.5.121, is merely
quoted from the Rik, v.46.7.

In the Rik, x.91.14, avasrshtd! sas agrees with nouns m. and f.
In vii.40.5, vayd'h has to count as an amphibrach, vayd'sas; but
Gr., Ueb.9 proposes vaydma. C£ a*-stems, As.m.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.p.t] N<mn-Inflectian in the Veda. 863

Accusative Plural Feminine.

This case ends in -ds. It occurs 393 times (from 163 stems).
Vi^vds, moreover, N. and A. together, occurs 104 times. Vdmd-
jdtds, z. 140.3 (Gr., N.p.m.), is included here; see t-stems, A.p.f.

1. Examples are: dmtvds, 7; imd's, 25; fisrd's, 12; usrtyds,
10 ; ends, never nominative, 9; if an accented accusative-form is
required, etd's is used, 5; td's, 17; dhd'rds, 11; pr'tands, 13;
mdyd's, 22 ; yd's, 15 ; sUnr'tds, 6.

The |?arfa has -<2 in a number of instances where the reading -ds
is more or less certain : drndys) sisarshi, iii.32.5 (see p. 348) ;
dhd'rd(8) ?, ix.7.2 : pathid(s), vii.79.1 ; pdrvi'r mantshd'(s), i.70.1 ;
vipvdh should be added to the />ado-excerpts for x. 153.5c,
Aufrecht, Kigveda*. For pratishthd' (s) hr'did(s), x.73.6, see
stems in d radical, I.s.f. For pdsd'(s), vii.48.3, see stems in s
radical, Ls.1 For ushd's, see ttt-stems, A.p.f. For grid's and
maryd'dds, see stems in d radical, below.

As regards resolution — it is not necessary to read mantshdas,
x.26.1a, nor usrdds, viii.46.26a, since both pddas may be catalectic.
On the other hand, three seem hardly avoidable: kdas, vii.80.9#y
kd'shthaas, i.63.5 ; mUrdds, iv.26.7.

2. If -d&as is to be allowed at all as ending of the A.p.£, it is
merely as a solecism. In x.30.14, n% barhishi dhattana somidso,
apd'm ndptrd samviddnd'sa endh, * Set upon the barhis, ye soma-
offerers, the (waters) in concord with Apam Napat,' we cannot
make endh subject of a separate clause, since etd's is the N.p.f. to
which ends serves as A.p.f., as in x.19.2, 3; nor can we, taking
samviddnd'so as N.p.m., make endh the object of ni dhattana,
since it is improbable that an unaccented word would stand alone
and separated from its verb by a long parenthesis. It only
remains to take samviddnd'sas as A.p.f. with endh, sc. apds, and
this is favored by verse 13, samviddnd' d'pah. (So S&y. takes
vapd'sas, vi.63.9, as accusative.) But this hymn is so good that I
am half tempted to get rid of this unconscionable solecism by
reading etd's for ends, or else samviddnd' apamds, i. e., -nd's apds
ends.

If, however, we let it pass, it is paralleled by AV. xiii.2.33,
where the sun is spoken of as * furnishing ready paths ' by its
light — aramgamd'sah pravdto rdrdnah. Here there seems to be
no question about form or sense.

Ghendo hufedhfis huraodhdonhd dye* $2, Vispered ii.7, 1 trans-
late thus: ' gndh supitfh surddhdsa dydce,' and take huraodh-
donhd as A.p.f from the stem huraodha, rather than set up
another stem for this one form, as does Justi.

Bopp's two accusatives p.m. in -donhd, Vd. xviii.65, rest upon
misinterpretation; they are N.p.m.; so mashydonhd, Yy. xxx.ll,
is V.p.m. See Vgl. Gr.% § 229.

Instrumental Plural Feminine.

The general ending -bhis is affixed directly to the stem : as,
(Xbkis. The form occurs 295 times (from 89 stems). Examples

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

864 C. R. Lanman, [tf-stems.

are : iddbhis, 6 ; cUrd'bhts, 8 ; td'bhis, 50 ; damdndbhis, 5 ; dhd'-
rdbhiSy 7 ; mdyd'bhis, 13 ; yd'bhis, 50; vipvdbhis, 23 ; vedidbhis,
5 ; pivd'bhis, 5 ; 8dnrftdbhi8y 5 ; hdtrdbhis, 7.

In iii.62. 1 7, drd' ghishthdbhis is used adverbially ; c£ apart' bhy as.
Monosyllabic stems suffer no change of accent : thus, td'bkis,
yd'bhis, svd'bhis; but from d we have dbhis (4), dbhis (10),
<S'6Aw (3).

Dative and Ablative Plural Feminine.

The general ending, -bhyas, is affixed directly to the stem : as,
td'bhyas. It sometimes counts as two syllables. The two cases
are of course coincident in form, but I have grouped tbem here
according to the exegesis.

Datives : aghnid'bhyas, v. 8 8. 8 ; dbhyds, ii.32.2 ; usriydbhyas,
vi.17.6; td'bhyas, x.169.2; yd'bhyas, vii.47.4; vrtd'bhyas,
x.30.7: — dbhias, vi.30.3; dxichdndbhias, ii.32.2.

Abl ativ es : dbhyas, x . 1 7. 1 0 ; ushnthdbhyas, ki'kasdbhyas, and
grfvd'bhyas, x.163.2 ; td'bhyas, x.19.8; sdrvdbhyas, ii.41.12:—
ddhardbhias and iUtardbhias, x. 145.3; d'pdbhias, ii.41.12;
giiddbhias, x.163.3; dansdndbhias, iii.3.11 ; dhishdndbhias,ivM.$:
ix.59.2; yd'bhias, vi.47.3 ; vakshdndbhias, i 134.4 bis; viiil.17;
pydvidbhias, vi.15.17.

GSNTTIVE PLURAL FEMININE.

This case is not distinguished in form from the masculine. It
occurs 39 times (from 22 stems). The metre requires a short
thematic a in one instance, i.3.11, sUnrtdndm (cf. p. 352). The
G.p. of kanid, *kantdndm, always appears in a contracted form,
kanfndm (five times).

1. Enumeration: dkshardndm, dghnidndm, anivegand'ndm, Abhaydndm, dpna-
vrty'dndm, urv&rdndm, usrd'ndm, usriydndm 7, kd'shthdndm, jikmd'ndm 2, itivy-
d'ndm, dttghdndm, dcvasend'ndm, dkisMndntim, n&vdndm, ndvidndm 2, pastidndm
3, mcmUhd'ndm, rd'midndm 2, sdmdndm, n&nt'tdndm (see above) 6, stiydndm 2.

2. Gr. proposes resolution in eight instances: in viii.59.12,
dhdnd'naam, at the beginning of zpdda; in viii.59. 1, pr'tandnaam,
thus converting the cadence from tri&htubh to jagati: — in the
other six it is of questionable necessity, at the end of pddas of
seven or eight syllables: dghnidnaam, viii.58.2 ; dntamdnaasn,
i.4.3; tddnaam, ix.108.13; pastidnaam, ix.65.23; vedid'naam,
x.22.14; sUnrtdnaam, viii.32.15.

3. There is no certain case of the simple ending -dm, without ».
We find ndirikam, Yt. xxiii.l, and gadhwam, Vd. xv.16, 17. If
Gr. (Ueb., note to ix.12.7) is right in following the Sama variant,
dhend'm dntar sabardtighdm, ii.552, then the two words must be
taken as accusative, and not, with Benfey, Glossar, s.v. dntair^ as
genitive.

Locative Plural Feminine.

The general ending -su is affixed directly to the stem : thus,
td'su. Forms of this kind occur 182 times (from 61 stems).
The final u is never combined with a following initial vowel. It

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ii.p.£] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 365

occurs at the end of a pdda before a vowel in iii.30.14; 55.9:
vi.65.1 : x.27.16. It occurs in the interior of a pdda: before a-,
14 times, as ii.40.2; before d-, iv.2.12 ; *-, i.127.6 bis: x.147.2; £-,
iv.51.7 ; w-, x.50.3, he apsti svd'm urvdrdm patinsie; it-, vii.49.45/
r-, i.166.4; before the word d\ i. 2 5. 10; 141.5: vi.48.6 : viii.39.7 :
x.49.10. In all these 31 instances the ending is written as if
combined, but is to be pronounced with hiatus. The result of this
examination corresponds entirely with that above, p. 354.

Enumeration : aghd'su, anyd'su, amr'tdm, dvardsu, dmd'su 6, d'wrlandsu, id dsu
2, dsu 1 6, dsu 9, upardsu 2, urvardsu 5, usriydsu 2, h'rmi&m, kd'su 4, katamd'su,
kanidsu 3, kd'shtdsu 2, krshnd'su 3, jagmdnd'su, citt&garbhdsu, citrd'su, jdtd'su,
Ui'su 2, tugridsu, duridsu 4, dhishnidmi, dhruvd'su 2, n&vdsu, paihidsu, p&dydsu,
pastidsu 3, pd'Hcajanydsu, purupefdsu, pA'rvdsu 2. pr'tandsu 35, pradJianidsu,
priyiVsu 2, madi&su, meulhyamd'su, manushid&u, mdrtidttu, mahind&u, yd'su 12,
yajhiydsu 3, -yatdsu, yoshandsu, rd'midsu, ropand'kdsu, vakshdndsu 6, vipvdsu 16,
irrdhasdnd'su, vrddhd'sUj Qayd'su, pushkdsu, pydvd'su, prutd'su, sdnaydsu, saptdpivdsu,
sird'su, stAvrj&ndsu, svd'su, sud'su, hdvidsu. *

STEMS IN / AND I

The Vedic noun-inftections differ more from those of the later
language, and are historically more clearly separated from them,
upon the field of the * and C-declensions than any where else. The
stems ending in i and % exhibit also in the Veda itself a greater
variety of declensional forms than any others, although the u and
^/-declensions have had a closely parallel development. The
reason of this variety is to be sought in the physiological
character of the stem-final ; this lies on the border-land between
vowels and consonants, and is the one or the other according to
circumstances. (See Professor Whitney's lucid exposition of this
subject in the Journal of the Am. Or. Soc. viii.36 1,362.) Thus
the instrumental ending -d can be affixed directly to a thematic i
with hiatus, giving the termination -id; or this i may take on a
consonantal character, so as to result in -yd; a very common
phonetic change reduces either of these groups to 4; and this may
even be shortened to -i; or, finally, a n may be "inserted"
between stem and ending, so as to produce a fifth form -ind. In
no case, however, except -* of the dual, does thematic i (t) coalesce
with an initial vowel of the ending (as would a thematic a) ; but it
sometimes absorbs it. About one half of the case-affixes begin
with vowels; and in these cases, according to the rules of Sanskrit
writing, the preceding thematic i becomes y; but the evidence of
the metre shows that in the Vedic language this mutation was by
no means accomplished. The simplest and most organic form of
the I.s.f., for instance, would seem d priori to be -i-d, and this it is
also in fact. As in the later language -yd is the exclusive form,
so in the Veda -id predominates. The same is true, for the most
part, of the other case forms with vocalic endings. But we see a
historical movement in progress in the Vedic texts ; and the forms
in which the thematic vowel has become y belong in general to
vol. x. 50

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

366 C. R. Lanman, {% and

later hymns. Thus, in the G.L.d.m. of S-stems we have 30 forms
in 4os and none in -yos, and in the I.s.f. we have 37 forms in -i\i
to 1 3 in -yd/ but in the secondary forms of the D.s.f. we have 3
in -iai to 6 in -yai.

A careful study of the mass of forms seems to point to three
sets or series of endings :

Series A.

Series B.

Series G.

t s

id

i

i' 8

i m

id am

t am

tm

t' am

i d'

id d'

C d'

r d

e e

id S

i ai

r e

e 8

id as

I d's

V as

e i

id d'm

i d'm

e

id

i

i

i i

id i

i i

i

V d

i bhydm

id bhydm

i bhydm

V bhydm

i 6s

id 6s0

i 6s

r os

e as

id as

i as

is

f as

i ns

id as

i as

is

tr as

i bhis

id bhis

i bhis

V bhis

i bhyos

id bhyos

i bhyos

C bhyos

in d'm

idn d'm

in d'm

i'n dm

i shu

id 8U

i shu

V shu

It will be seen that series A and C differ most from each other.
Series A is a true vowel-declension ; series C, rather a consonant-
declension. This is as it should be. A is used with stems ending
in a short vowel, which is more readily susceptible to guna than
a long one ; C is used invariably with stems ending in long f, and
that i is always accented and never gunated. For the very
reason that it is accented, the individuality of the vowel is more
perfectly preserved. It never passes into y in the Rigveda, while
the thematic i of series A very often does so. Series C never
shifts the accent to the ending, while A does this regularly, if the
stem is oxytone (exceptions will be noted).

Series B, genetically considered, lies between A and C. Com-
parative grammar teaches that the % of feminines with which B is
chiefly used was developed out of a fuller derivative ending id.
Cf. $ard, pdrya, pdryd, pd'ri; *dd~taryd, ddtrl, *doT€pya,
doreipa; avit(a)rf'; and see Schleicher, Comp.* p. 382 §217, p.
390 §218, etc. Even with the feminine d-stems we saw some
relics of simpler modes of declension : as, in the instrumental (pp.
357, 358) ; in suapatyai, mahtyai (359) ; but here the whole series
may be developed phonetically from the combination of id with
the endings of C, except N. A.d. Before -d, -e, -as, and -dm of
the singular, the thematic d united with the vowel of the ending;
elsewhere with the preceding i to t. In the A.s., N. and A.d.
and p., the resultants suffered further contraction : 4am became
4m; 4i, 4; and 4as, -is. The resulting series of terminations was
established as follows : 4, 4m, 4d, 4ai, 4ds, 4dm; 4, 4bhydm, 4os;
4s, 4s, 4hhis, 4bhyas, 4ndm, 4shu; and of these terminations, the
case-suffixes were apparently — , m, d, ai, -ds, dm; — , bhydmy os;
s, s, bhis, bhyas, ndm, su.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A-stems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 367

It is evident that in the case of oxytones the Lb., G.L.d., and
G.p. of series B and C would be coincident, were it not for the
fact that B shifts the accent regularly to the ending, while C
never does so.

A mutual relation exists between the place of the accent in the
weak cases singular of oxytone Osteins and the strengthening of
the stem, either by vowel-change or by " addition " of a nasal.
It is quite analogous to a like one in verb-inflection. Thus, in the
I.s., if the stem remains weak, the accent is shifted to the ending:
as, pavy-d' (cf. i-mds) ; so indrdgnids; but if the i is gunated, it
retains the accent: as, agndy-e (cf. ^mi); in like manner, Unni-d',
iirmin-d; ari-ds, agnb-s.

Series A was applied to the stems in short t, including many
masculines and feminines. and very few neuters (only 322 n. forms
occur). It was applied originally to these stems without distinc-
tion of gender — except, of course, that the neuters had in the N.
and A. no ending in the singular, 4 in the dual, and -i in the plural
At any rate, the distinctions of the grammarians have no existence
in the Rigveda. (Cf. Bohtlingk, Die Declination im Sanskrit,
Mimoires de VAcademie Imperiale des Sciences de St.-Peters-
bourg, vime Serie, T. vii. p. 164.) • Here belong further a few
stems which appear to end in a root ; they are the compounds of
-dhi (BR. iii.959) and others: as, d'dhi, sddhi, pradhi; pratishthi;
yay\ from yd; tuvigri. Lindner, p. 36, supposes that the root
has dropped its final and taken the suffix i; but has not the final
& been weakened to i ? Declensionally, they are treated entirely
as stems ending in snffixal i (cf. the accent, nidhtnd'm) and are
placed here accordingly.

Series B was applied to a large class of stems, almost all
feminine, ending originally in id and contracted to t. These
stems form feminines to words requiring inflection in more than
one gender, and correspond for the most part to masculines of the
following groups : many words in a (e. g., devi) ; adjectives in
u (dnvi, dpipvt, vdsvf, and urvt\ trshvi, pHrut\ prthvi, prabhvt',
bahvf, yahvt' ?, raghvi\ vibhvf, sddhvi\ and svddvtf) ; participles
in ant (mddanti), -dnt (adatf), or -at (pipratt) ; and -vans
(jagm&shi) ; comparatives in 4yans (ndmyast) ; words in -tar
(dvit[a]rt')y in -vant (dmauati) and -mant (dhenwndti), -van
(rtd'vari), -an (compounds of H'dh[a]n, p£r«A[d]?i), and -in
iarkini) ; many compounds of ac (arvd'ci) ; some of han
(dpatighnt), dr$ (sudr'pt), and pdd (apddi). Some of these
have double feminines (apdd; pdpd' and pdpf; etc.). Besides
the above, there are about 120 Rik- words belonging to this
declension, which are of very heterogeneous character, as
regards their formation. They are the stems in I given by
Grassmann, columns 1722 and 1723, excepting those that I give
below as belonging to C. To these must be added finally seven
Btems, designations of males, but declined like the feminines of
series B : Tira$ci', Ndmi, Pr'thi, Md'tali, and Sdbkari (all proper
names); rd'shfrf, 'ruler,' and sir?, 4 weaver.'

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G. R, Lawman, [i and

Feminines formed with change of accent are declined according
to C, if the resulting stem is oxytone. I therefore suspect that
the accent of a&iknid', x.75.5 (elsewhere dsikni, dsita), is erroneous.
It may be that the peculiar accent here differentiates the word as
a proper name, for it denotes a river of the Paiijab (cf. Cdyamdmh
vi.27.8; Ctira> viii.21.18; Didyitt, AV. ii.2.4, an Apsaras; *o
hastini 4 having a hand ;' but hastin? ' female elephant/ AV.
vi.70.2) : even then we ought to write asiknid; so for sddharauyd'
(sd'dharana), i.l 67.4, read -y<f . £7acva#', viii.49.17, and gonvKi,
twice, are also incorrect.

Barytone feminines, on the other hand, corresponding to
oxytone masculines, are declined according to B; they are:
driisht, d'yast, gd'ndharvf, tdvishi^ pdrushnf, pdlikni, mdhUhi%
vdrdtri, pamgdyi, pyd'vt, pyent; and rdhirii, hdrini ?

Oxy tones of series A and B will be enumerated in full, in
cases where the accent is thrown forward to the ending.

Series C belongs to a comparatively small number of words :
(1) properly to stems whose final element is a root ending in f
(grdmanf, m., f.) and (2) to monosyllabic substantives (£) and
their adjective compounds (m„ f.) in ?. In like manner are
declined (3) about fifty oxytone feminine Rik-words in ?', of which
all but half a dozen are substantives. Of these (a) 22 correspond
to barytones (mostly masculines in a), or are derived from them
with shift of accent, and • all but five designate female animate
beings: atharvi' (dtharvan) 'priestess;' ardyt' (drdya) 'demon;'
ashtakarn? (ashtakarnal) 'cow with an 8 on her ear/ en? (eta)
' doe ;' kalydn? (kalyd'na) ' fair woman / kilds? (kild'sa) ' spotted
deer/ naptf (ndptar) 'daughter/ purush? (jyuru&ha) 'woman;'
mandUki I (mandti'ka) * female frog/ maytiri' (mayti'ra) ' pea-hen ;'
ydtudhdn? (ydiudhd'na) ' sorceress / rath? (from rdtha) ' female
charioteer/ laldm? (laid' ma) 'speckled mare/ vipvarup?
(vipvdrdpa) ' brindled cow / vrk? (vr'ka) ' she-wolf/ sumangalt
(mmangdla) ' lucky woman / d-durmafigali ' not unlucky / [add
from TS. : pabal? (pabdla) 'die Wunderkuh/ mahish? (Kik
mdhuhi, mahishd) ' buffalo cow /] further, apart1 (dpara), pi.,
' future days / tapan? (tdpana) ' heat / $akat? (pdkata) ' cart ;'
saktht' (sdkthi) ' thigh / srn? (sr'rri) ' sickle.' (b) Twelve others
denote female animate beings, but do not correspond to barytone
masculines : amb? ' mother / arum' ' Dawn / krshn? ' Night ;'
gandharv? 'female Gandharva/ gaur? ' cow of the Bos Gaums;'
dUt? ' messenger / nishtigr? ' Indra's mother / prapharvi
' voluptuous girl / mesh? ' ewe / yam? ' Yami ;' sinh? ' lioness ;'
star? ' farrow cow.' (c) Nineteen others, finally, show no shift of
accent, nor do they designate animate beings : athar? ' flame ;'
on? ' breast / kshon? ' flood / khdr? ' measure / cakri' ' wheel ;'
deh? 'dam/ nad? 'stream/ mahi-iiadt 'great-stream/ nddt
' pipe / ndnd? 'joy / lakshm? ' mark / vaksh? ' flame / Yibdli\
a river; vep? 'needle/ sasarpar? 'trumpet;' s&rmV 'pipe;'
rdrm? ' flame / sphig?, ' hip / yay?, ' quick/ is perhaps a root-
word. Suhdsta might make its feminine suhast? ; but since

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

s
/-stems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 869

stthastias, ix.46.4, is m., it is better to read suhastids with BR. It
is a rule for the Rik that oxytone feminines from barytone
masculines do not throw the accent forward to the case-ending ;
and so, in view of sHrmid, I think it is wrong to set up a stem
siirml'. From AV. ii.8.3, paldlid' (pdldla), tilapiftjid' (tilapiflja),
however, it would appear that the Hik-rule does not hold for the
Atharvan (so viliptid'8, xii.4.44; hastinid's, vi.70.2; hiranyakepiai,
v.7.9) ; and that Professor Whitney's suspicion, Ath. Pr. iii.61,
kalydnyal (vi. 107.3), is well grounded.

From the Atharvan 1 add a few words not found in the Rik,
which belong to C. To 3a belong: kadi' (kti'ta?) 'fetter;'
tandrt' (tdndra) 'weariness;' tikshnaprngi' (tikshrvdpHiga)
* sharp-horned ;' pippaW (pippala) ' berry ;' sahasraparni'
(sahasraparna\ a plant; hastini', vi.70.2, 'female elephant'
(htts&ni, ix.3.17, 'having a hand'), cf. p. 368; hiranyakepi (hir-)
4 gold-haired.' To Sb belong apvatart' ' she-mule ;' kumdrt'
4 maid ;' viastakepi' and vikept' ' shaggy hag ;' vUiptf ? ' cow ;'
vilidhi' 'female monster;' vrkshasarpf 'tree-serpent.' To 3c
belong perhaps karkari' ' lute,' and jdtrt' ? ' genitrix.'

Several words in ia have f. stems in 2, whose declensional forms
belong to C : dpia, dpi; samudriya, sarnudri' (otherwise Gr.) ;
svaria^ svari'.

About a dozen masculines also belong here : aht\ of the same
meaning as the barytone dhi; dpathi'; nadi' ' caller;' dakshit;
prdvfj dushprdvi\ suprdvi ; yayi' ? ; rath$\ drathi; start 9
8(thdsrastari; hiranyavdpt.

The final radical i is sometimes " split " into iy before the
vocalic endings of C. This occurs regularly (1) in monosyllabic
feminine substantives always ; (2) in their adjective compounds
and (3) those in which the last member is a verbal root, provided
the I is preceded by a double consonant ; and (4) even after a
single consonant, if the stem-final is unaccented: thus, (1) priyam,
dhiye, but ddhie; dhiyd'm, but dhind'm, prind'm; (2) suprtyam,
but suddhiam; (3) brahmapriyam, but gdthdniam; (4) itthd'-
dfriye, dirghd'dhiyas, nd'nddhiyas, vd'tapramiyas. Several stems
other than those included above show the inserted ?/ : yayiyas,
samudriyas, and striyas; cf. cakriyau of the Kathaka. This
seems to me to be a purely graphic peculiarity. As is well
known, it has had a noteworthy extension in the TS. See A.
Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.104.

These three series were presumably once quite distinct — and
they are so for the most part in the Rigveda; but even here we
see the process of confusion begun. Now it is plain that either a
long or a short thematic vowel when standing in the verse before
another vowel, the initial of the ending, would generally have the
effect of a short : as, Htid\ devid'; and furthermore, that when it
did really become entirely consonantized, the distinction of
quantity (as, for instance, between the thematic vowels of matyd'
and rnahyd') would become lost altogether. The line of separation
between A and B once becoming thus indistinct, the way was

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

370 0. R. Lanman, \j and

open for the transition of the e-stems to the f-declension. Inasmuch
as the words belonging to series B are almost exclusively
feminine, this transition was confined for the most part to the
femi nines in i. Moreover the entire coincidence of certain forms
of A and B in the Rik would increase this confusion. Thus the
N. A. and G.L.d. are alike for A and B ; such also is the case with
the A.p.f. ; and since in B the N.p. is like A.p., the analogy was
extended to A, and we have a dozen or more nominatives p.f
from fc-stems in -ts. So, too, the G.p.f, is alike in each. The later
language has differentiated some of these cases, or rather utilized
certain differences by extending them to fields where they did not
originally belong, and says devyati (like C) for devt\ and devyds
for devt's, N. — forms utterly unknown to the Rik.

On the other hand, there are a few transitions from the C to the
^declension. Thus from ndr is formed the m. and n. adjective
ndria; but the feminine is from a stem nd'rid, nd'ri. The Rik,
however, shows forms from a stem nd'rl which cannot be justified
by the rules of word-formation : they are plain cases of transition
from B to A.

This process of transition had already begun in the older Vedie
time. It would be an interesting and useful task to trace its
development through the Vedic period. Such a study ought to
be an eminently historical one, and would, I believe, if carried
into detail, furnish some valuable clues for the criticism of Vedic
texts. An example will illustrate this roughly. The Ab.s.f. of
S-stems ends properly in ~esy as ddites. Of these forms there are
20 in the RV. (from 11 stems); while only three fc-s terns have
usurped the endings of series B, namely ?id'bhyds, x.90.14, and
hetyd's, 87.19 — both hymns of very late date — and bhti'mids, i.80.4.
In the AV., on the other hand, there are five ablatives s.£ in -es
(from 5 stems ; but I may have overlooked some) ; while those in -ids
or -yds number 21 (from 12 stems). That is to say, the process of
transition of the fc-stems from their own to the ^declension is
much farther advanced in the Atharvan than in the Rik. So, on
the other hand, the transition from B to A had not begun with
rd'tri in the Rik ; but the AV. shows a number of A-forms (from
rd'trl). In the Rik, nadV belongs entirely to C (save one dual
form, nadi', in a certainly late hymn) ; in this category therefore I
have had to place it — and that in the face of the grammarians, who
have used it as a paradigm for B, to which in the later language it
belongs. In like manner dilti belongs in the Veda to C, but later
to B (see BR. s.v.).

In the case of devdhitti, the transitions in the Rik are confined
to vocalic cases ; in the Purana we have devahfltim. To follow
these changes in the post- Vedic writings would lead too far. And
because in the Vedic period itself everything is so in flux, I have
thought it best to confine myself to the Rik, in order to get clean
results. But for convenience of reference I have added some
material from other texts. Ben fey, Yedica, p. 112 et alibi^ has
considered, to be sure en passant, the subject of these transitions.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

i-stema] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 371

His general induction is that the direction of the movement in
Skt. is from the % to the I declension, and opposite to that in the
Prakrit, where the 2-stems are getting the upper hand. (Cf. Kuhn,
Pdli-Gr. pp. 79, 81.) For the later Sanhitas and the Brahmanas
his statement may be right ; but in the Kik the transitions from
the I to the f declension entirely outweigh the others in importance.
In the following lists I have intended to give with completeness
for the Rik every stem which has forms other than those belong-
ing properly to its own declension.

L Transitions from A.
A to B. Twenty-seven I'-stems have forms belonging to the
?-decleusion. Only four, however, have i-forms in non-vocalic
eases : akshi, -i'bhydm (dkshi n. !) ; jdni, N.s. 4; bhti'mi (has 15
B-forms), N.s. 4; svahdkrti, 4shu. The rest are: dnumati;
drdtiy 19; avdni; djd'ni; Uti; turt; devdhUti; ndkti; nd'bhi;
nirrti9 3 ; nishkrti; p&rarhdhi, 3 ; pushti; pr'pni, 4 ; bhuji;
bhrfi, 2; yuvatt, 2 (see p. 372); vigvdkrshti; pr&ti, 2; [pre/w, see
N.p.f.] sdmgati; sdyoni; hett. The transition-forms number 69 ;
that is, the phenomenon is confined to exceedingly narrow limits
in the Rik, considering that it is a rule of the later language that
every feminine in i may take the longer B-forms " optionally " in
the singular. On account of this rule, we need not give from other
texts instances of transition for non-vocalic cases.

For consonantal cases, comment and note to TPr. ih.7 give the following from
the TS., where, however, the pada has X (cf . Vedica, p. 113): from d'hult, -ibhis,
ii.6.94; similarly vyd'hrttohis, i.6.10*: v.5.58; svd'hdkrttbhyaa, vi.3.95; hrdduni-
bhyas, vii.4.13: VS. xxii.26 ; tfcibhis* iv.2.54-5, p. tfci-bhis; if the Rik Pr. made
a similar statement, we might take all the Rik-forms of this word from a stem
p&c\\ ctitbhydm, v.1.51; yrfafbhydm and prshthi'bhyas, vii.3. 16 ,_*; prshthi'bhis,
AV. xii.1.34, and so also the pada-MS.

A to C. The instances are few. We have the stem ambi, but
also from ambi\ ambiam; so yayi, but yayiam, 4yas; sakthi
(n. !), bat sakthti (f.), -id; sr'ni (I. sr'nid), but also from srn%\ -id,
-ta&. Karkari of the Rik appears as karkari' in the AV. The
entirely exceptional art shows the N.s. art's VS. vi.36 ; so BR.
£at. fir. 8dm ari'r viddm .... 8dm prajd' jdnatdm. See
Z.D.M. G. xxii.576.

In iv.48.2a, it is unnecessary to pronounce niryuvdnd dfastias (text -tis); it is a
pdda of seven syllables; so is viii.39.2d, vipvd ary6 drdtts; so, too, in both cases
where Gr. proposes pHurarhdhiam^ i. 134.3d and x.64.1a, the pddas are catalectic,
and we need not change the text (-dhim).

II. Transitions from B.
B to A. About six stems show secondary forms from stems in
i They are : Sdbhari m., -e 3, 4m, -ay as, 4ndm?; Pr'thl m., 4m;
ardni f., -ibhis 2 ; aranydni', -is 3, Am; nd'ri, -ibhyas 2, -ishu;
dshadhl, -e 2, 4sy 4m 2, -ayas 3.

It is hard to say in which category fchadht properly belongs. In verses
peculiar to the AV. it has the following forms: (A) -c, 42 ; -is, 4; -im; -ayas, 23
and vi.96.1 (a false variant of Rik x.97.18; we must restore the shorter

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

872 C. R. Lanman, [t and

grammatical form -to, as the metre shows) ; (B) -fm, 2 ; -id ; -to, N.V. 13 ; -£*, A.
24; 4bkis, 6; -tbhyas, 4; -indm, 23 and vi.15.1, variant of Rik x.97.23; -fefet. "t.

The same is true of yuvatV. The root yu, yuvdti, would form its participle
yuv&nt, feminine yuvatV. Prom this stem one half of the Rik-forms may be
regarded as coming : to wit, yuvatyd's, -yd'm, •!', -yos, -t's A.p. ; but the word
has lost its participial character so entirely that I have referred it to A.

The Atharvan has 50 forms from the stem r&'tri (like the Rik); further (A>
rd'tris, xiiL4.30; rd'trim^ 16 times, as i.16.1 ; rd'traye, viii.2.20. The AV. has *>
forms from stem arundhalV ; but amndhate, xix.38.1, which Benfey takes as a
transition-vocative s.f. (A), may stand for ~ta (3 pi.).

The TS. (Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.105) has: p&tnayas, 5 times, as v.2.11 *, q v. :
v&r&trayas, iv.1.64: v.1.7*; -Mm, iv.2.103; garbhinayas, ii.1.26; rcvataytu.
v.2. 1 1 ' ; c&kvaraycB, v.4 . 1 2 *.

The S&man, i.323, has the variant sni'hitim for snehitis, Rik viii.85.13 ; cf. stem
snt'hiH, i.74.2. Benfey, quoting Siegfried Goldschmidt, adds from the Naigeya-
QakhA, vii.2.1, rMnlshu (probably a false variant of Rik viii.82.13, -isku) ami
parushnUhu.

B to C. The only undoubted case of transition from B to C is
seen in the stem stri' (*8titarid') ; it forms striyam, 3 ; -iyas N. ;
-iyas Ace, 2; -tbhis. If we knew that the masculine verbal
t adjective from sparp (sprpdti) were accented prpdna (?), we
should refer prpanf to C ; as it is, I have referred it to B on
account of the N.s.f. -£', and regarded -ias (G.s.f.) as a transition-
form (C). The other transition-forms are prpanias N., yahvuis
Ace, suparnias N., -ias Ace. But it is possible that these may
be relics of the un contracted B-forms (p. 366), although in the Rik-
sanhita these are contracted with almost entire uniformity. I may
accordingly have erred in assigning Jchdri', vahshi\ and several
others to C simply on the evidence of a form that may be merely
an uncontracted A.s., N. or A.p. It is quite unnecessary to
pronounce dpipvias in i.120.8. The pdda is catalectic.

III. Transitions from C.

C to A. 1. Root-words: dhrayas, ix.54.1 (cf. Qat. Br. xi.3.3\
dhris, N.s.m.) ; ganaprtbhis, V.60.8&, is certainly a purely metrical
shortening, and so probably is rtanibhyas, ii.27.12. Benfey,
Vedica, p. 107 ff., gives send-n'ibhyas, VS. xvi.26, and pva-nibhyas,
27 ; and veshapris, TS. iii.5.2 6 (see BR.).

2. The other cases are only sporadic. The accent of onto*
refers oni' to C; but in 161.14 we have onlm (A), where,
however, the -tin is syUaba anceps. The stem artnii shows a
form arundyas in the Pururavas hymn. [Although with some
hesitation, I have referred arum1 to C on account of the forms
arunl's N.s., 2 ; -ww, text -i's, G.s. ; -ias Kp. ; -i'ndm, not -tndfm;
-t'stiu, indifferent. But we have A. p. -i's (B) twice.] Unless now
we assume that kshont', like arum' [and possibly pakvari (B),
which has -ayas (A) as N.p.f., and -is (C) as N.s.f.], has forms
that belong in all three categories, I would arrange the article
kshont' (cf. Gr., Wb. 371) as follows:

C-forms: N.s.f. ksfionVs. viii.3.10; so 13.17, viprd indram kshoni'r avardhayan
vayd' iva, 'The priests made Indra grow mighty, as the flood (N.s.f.) the twigs,'
(A.p.f.) — L e. as the stream makes the twigs grow ; L57.4, kshonfr wa prati no
harya tdd vdeah, ' Do thou, as doth a flood, (take in) accept our song;7 L54.1, as

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

v-stems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 373

collective and subject of sdm drata; i. 173.1, sajoshasa tndram mdde \n& ?]
Jcskoni'h, * (In order to get thee into the battle to help us. — thee) Indra, — we are
united [as] is the crowd (collective) at a feast;' and, finally, as N.s.f., fcshoni'[s~\
sarate, 1. 180.5 (cf. «dmt[>] nam, x. 120.2); kshont'bhydm ; -Tikis, 2.

A-forms: kshonf, dual, viii.7.22; 88.6: Val. 4.10 (the C-form
would be -n'td); kshondi/as, in x.22.9, a verse which is a late
interpolation in the midst of an old and beautiful hymn. From
the A V., moreover, we have naptU, Rik napti's.

C to B. 1. Instead of bhiye yre have bhiyd1 *-, p. bhiyaiy
viii.64.13. The Rik shows only this one instance of a transition
which later is so very common with these monosyllabic feminines.
In i.151.5, takvavt's (Gr., N.p.m.) may be a transition-form (cf.
sirfs)9 or a N.s.m. as in x.91.2.

2. The rest are rather doubtful In i.112.19 and iv.2.16,
aruni's is Ajp.f. In ii.23.14, tapanf, Ls.f , also shows a contraction
peculiar to B. The L.s. of dtiti' ought to be dtitidm. In vi.58.3,
we have dUtid'm (B). Delbrtlek, Uhrestomathie, p. 79, proposes
the stem dtitidf= dtftia, taking it as accusative. The B-form,
nad?, dual, occurs in a late hymn, i. 135.9. The un-Vedic form
nadyb (we need not, with Gr., pronounce 4's) is entirely in
keeping with Che contents of the very late addition, vii.50.4.

. In ix.9.4, pronounce nadio 'jinvad adrdhak, and not, with Gr., -f# ay. Gaurt',
ix.12.3, if it were a dual (Gr., Wb.)y would belong here as a B-form; but it is a
locative; see Ueb. ii.510. In iii.30.11, rathi's is better taken as N.s.m. with
xndras (Gr., Wb., A.p.f.) ; in viiL84.1, also, it is just as well to make it a N.s.m.

IV. Transitions to the N-Declbnsion.

It seems certain that the forms which here come in question are
made after the analogy of the m-stems. Thus we could not know,
without other evidence, whether to divide arcbn-d or arcv-nd,
Urmin-d or Urmirnd {iirmid), ktrin-d or Mri-nd, khddin-d or
khddi-nd, pvaninram or ^vani-nam, surabhtn-d or surabhi-nd
(c£ atrm-d, dtri~ndy atithin-d, dtithi-nd). But why is the principle
of analogy so utterly inert in the G.p. ? Here the t'-stems lengthen
the vowel invariably ; the fc'/i-stems, never (kdrin-dmy mdyin-dm).
Cf. Kuhn, rdli-Gram. p. 80.

These transitions, if such they should be called, are confined to
series A, except in the G.p., where the " transition " is universal in
A, B. and C. In only one single instance, v.44.13, do we have
dhiyd'm (dhind'm occurs seven times); but v.44.1-13 is an
unintelligible mess of stuff of the latest date. It is not denied
that dhiyd'm is the more organic form (Schleicher, Cornp.* p. 545
§ 253) ; but for the assertion that the forms with n are an "indische
neubildung," the forms nard'm (16; with «, 26), svdsrdm (once;
svdtrndm, 3), gdvdm (55 ; gdndm, 20), and jdguvdm are hardly
sufficient proof That the n is lacking here is surely due to the
half-consonantal character of the stem-final.

The n is also seen in series A in the I.s.m. (51 forms, 25 stems),
and f. (! 2 forms, 2 stems), and in the d.n. (hdrint) and p. (-wit, 14
forms, 4 stems) ; but for all these cases there are examples of the
more organic form without «.

vol. x. 51

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

874 C. R. Lanman, [i and

The later language excludes this n from the f., confines it to the
instrumental in the m.s., anil prescribes it for the neuter through-
out the oblique cases of the s., as also for the vocalic cases of the
d. and p. The state of things in the Rik is as contrary to this as
it can be. This is especially clear in the ?*-stems, where examples
are more numerous. As stated above, the declension of m., i\, and
n. singular of series A was doubtless once the same, the
differences being of secondary origin.

Besides the cases just mentioned, transitions to the w-declension
are only sporadic or doubtful. Here belong perhaps tirnunam,
kirine ?, khddinam, -mas ?, [dbhirnnam] and ^oanmam.

The following Synopses exhibit the terminations of the
inflectional forms of the several series :
Sebibs A. Masculine.

Singular : N., -t», -f , -es; A., 4m, -€; I., -id, -yd, 4?, -ind; D., -ye,
-aye; Ab., -es; G., -ias, -yas, -es, c'y L., [-ayi, -ay ?] -d, -au; V., -e.

Dual : N.A.V., 4 (iti) ; I.D.Ab., -ibhydm; G.L., -ios.

Plural : N. V., -ayas (-y~as) ; A., -in, -inr (-y-as, ayas) ; L,
-ibhis; D.Ab., -ibhyas; G., -indm, -inaam; -ishu.

Feminine.

Singular : N., -is, -i>; A., -im; I., -id, -yd, 4i 4, -hid; D., -aye,
4, 4; Ab.G., -es; L., [-ayi, -dy?] -d, -au, 4; V., -e.

Dual: N.A.V., 4; I.D.Ab., ibhydm; G.L., -ios, -yos.

Plural: N.V., -ayas; A., -Is (-ayas); L, -ibhis, 4; D.Ab.,
-ibhyas; G., -indm, -inaam; L., -ishu.

Neuteb.
Singular: N.A., 4; I.,-*?; D., -aye; G.,-es; L., -d.
Dual : N.A., 4, -int.
Plural : N. A., 4, 4, -ini; L., -ishu.

Series B. Masculine.
Singular : N., 4; A., im; I., -id; G., 4ds, -yds.
Plural: N., 4s.

Feminine.

Singular: N., 4; A., -tm, (4am); I., -id, -yd, 4, 4; D.,-iai,
-yai; Ab.G., -ids, -yds; L„ 4dm, -ydm, 4; V., 4.

Dual : N. A.V., 4 (iti) ; I.D.Ab., -ibhydm; G.L., -ios, -yos.

Plural: N.V., -is, 4as; A., 4s; I., -ibhis; D.Ab., -ibhyas; G.,
-indm, -inaam; L., -ishu.

Series C. Mabculinr.
Singular: N.,4s,-f; A., 4am; I., -id; D., -ie; G., -ios; V.,4.
Dual: N.A.V., -id; G., -ios.
Plural: N.A., -ios; I., -ibhis; G., 4ndm, -inaam.

• Feminine.

Singular : N., -is; A., -tan?/ I., -id; D., -te; G., -ios; V., 4.
Dual: N.A.V., id; I., -ibhydm; G.L., -ios.
Plural: N.A., -ios; I., -ibhis; D., -ibhyas; G., -indm; L., -frAw.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

2-stema] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 375

The following peculiarities are seen in the accent of the
forms from oxytone stems. It is shifted to the ending, in series
A, in the I.s., sometimes in the G.s,, in the G.L.O., and as a rule
in the G.p. ; in series B, in the same cases, and also in the D.,
Ab.G., and L.s. In C, on the contrary, the accent never leaves
the thematic vowel, although it appears in the written text as
kshaipra svarita (Prat, iii.10). Sporadic exceptions will be
noticed as they come up.

Several words have such peculiar irregularities that it has seemed best to treat
of them at the end of this section. They are ari} j&ni, pdti, sdkhi, and some of
their compounds.

Nominative Singular Masculine.

A. The ending 8 is added directly to the stem: as, dm*.
This form occurs 1353 times (from 247 stems). Besides these,
pat is occurs 72 times; am, 10; ndkis, 50, and md'kis, 13 ; the last
two are indeclinables. Some may be f. : krtis, mushtis^ samtams.
Frequently occurring forms are : agnis, 389 ; dtithis, 20 ; dhis, 18 ;
fshis, 32; hams, 90; dadis, 15; br'haspdtis, 52 ; brdhmanaspdtis,
23; rayfo, 26 ; vdhnis, 28 ; viearshanis, 19; pticis, 38 ; sdtpatis,
15; stlris, 19; hdris, 58.

Transitions from C: veshapris, TS. iii.5.2 * : iv.4.18: v.3.6 * ;
but £at. Br. viii.5.3 8 (sic), veshaprts; jitatandris, MBh. ; nistan-
dris, K. Cf. p. 372.

Besides the regular form vis (6), the stem vi has a form with guna, ves, i. 17 3.1 :
iii.54.6: vi.3.5: ix.72 5: z.33.2. As parallel to this, in Yacna li.12, Roth takes
khshnaoe of the Copenhagen Codex 4, as N.s.m. of khshnu, with guna and case-
ending: ndit id tm khshnaos, ' Therefore (is no favorer) favors not . . . f To this I
would add yaos, N.s.m. of stem yu, ' an ally,' from root yu, l unite.1 Yagna xlvi.18,
ye maibyd yaos, ahmdi (i. e. yo mahyam *yos, asmai), ' Whoso is an ally to me,
him etc.' Whoever loves anomalies may translate bodhi dpehy x.83.6, thus: 'Be
a friend/

B. See p. 367. Enumeration: ndmt; pr'tht; md'tall; rd'shtri;
sdbhari, 1 and AV. xviii.3.15. Perhaps we ought to put pvagtini\
AV. i v. 16.5, here; BR. put it under stem -in.

C. 1. Root-words, ^numeration : (darts, £Jat. Br. xi.3.3 *)
itthd'-ddhis; kshatraprt's; grdmant's, 2 ; ghrtapft's, 2 ; takvavi's,
x.91.2; darpatapri's; dtirdyddhis; devam's, 2; devdvt's, 6;
patsiUah-pt's; padavt's, 6 ; parnavt's; pranerit's; madhyamapt's;
manyumts, 2 ; mdryaprts; yajnani's; vapant's; vipvdtodhts; vfs;
sendni's, 4 ; sionapt's, 2 ; suddht's, 5 ; (from AV.) prdhrVs and
sadyahkrt's, xi.7.10; padant's, xi.2.13. Forty-five Rik-forms
(from 22 stems).

2. Enumeration: prdvt's; suprdvi's, 4; rathi's, 13, and iii.30.11
and viii.84.1 (see p. 373) ; drathts; start's; sahdsrastarts;
hiranyavdpts.

Transition from A: art's, VS. vi.36. See p. 371.

Elision and crasis is actually written in v. 7. 8, prd svddhittva
rVyate, p. -tihriva, fem. fRik Pr. iv.13); it is probable in x.51.6,
rathi'vd dhvdnam dnu d vartvvh, p. ratht'-iva, better ratht'r-iva; it

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

376 C. R. Ijanman, \i and t-stems.

is certain in x.84.2 agnf'vay text agn\r-iva; so in the Atharvan, 7
times out of 10 (Prat, ii.56). In v.83.3, on the other hand, where
the text has rathi'va and the padakdra takes it from rathin^
we must read without elision and crasis rathi'r iva kdpayd'pvdrt
abhikshipdn, else the caesura is faulty.

Nominative Singular Feminine.

A. The form is like the m. It occurs 470 times (from l.'U>
stems). Examples are: dditis, 78; nd'bhis, 19; prdmatis, 11;
bhU'mis^ 12; matis, 18; yuvatfa, 18; rayfo, i.66.1 : x.19.3 ; rdfis,
22 ; mimatU, 22 ; jdnis, AV. xx.48.2.

Transitions from B : aranydnis, 3 ; dshadhis.

Transition from C: naptis, AV. ix.1.3, 10. I know not how to
explain turyd'ma yds ta ddipdm drdtis, vi4.5, except as a fault
of the tradition, for drdtis.

B. There is no case-ending. The case-form occurs 731 times
(from 294 stems). Examples are: yati, 14; ghrtd'ci, 9; jdnitri,
10; dev(y 48; prthivi\ 57 ; brhati , 10; maghdni,9; mahi\S5;
uchdnti, 16; sdrasvati, 43; str?, v.61.6: viiL33.19: x.86.6.

Transitions from A: jdni, iv.52.1 ; bhti'mi, ix.61.10; bhti'mt/ d'
dade, p. bhiX'mih; but cf. Prat iv.13 and Orient und Occ. ii460.

Transitions from C. I regard kshonf as standing for kshonis
before *-, i. 180.5 (see p. 373 top). I am inclined to think that the
distinction between B and C is already much effaced in the
Atharvan, in words whose final is not a root ; accordingly we
have ddurmafigali, sumangalt ; nadf, i.8.l: ix.7.14: xii.2.27 ;
vilipti\ xiL4.46, 47.

Twice Gr. restores ma/iid, the uncontracted form of maht {cL p.
356). In i. 16 7.4, he reads nd rodast\m] dpa nudanta ghordh ?.

C. 1. Root-words: abhiprHs, 3 ; aht8> 10; bhi's^ 2; vratatti's;
pri's; AV. prakrt's, iv.7.6; Vop. Hi. 80, avis.

2. Stems in T, not radical (p. 368). We have here 56 forms in
-Vs (from 31 stems) ; and of these 33 occur in the Rik (from 19
stems). The examples seem accordingly to he numerous enough to
establish the rule (p. 368 top) that the declension depends on the
accent. Schleicher, Comp.* p. 510 §246, argues from these forms
the existence of an ending s in the N.s.f. of d-stems ; but is it not
the distinguishing characteristic of most of these ^-sterns that
their final * is not derived from id ? In those whose final certainly
comes from id (sinhid"), I should rather consider the 8 as due to
false analogy (from root-words) than as organic. See p. 355.

Enumeration : d-durmangalVs (pdtnt\ x.85.43 (AV. xiv.2.40,
4i9 see below); aruni's, i v. 1.16; 14.3; kalydm's [jdyd'), iii.
53.6; krshru's, vii.71.1 ; kshoni's (see p. 372-3), i.54.1; 57.4;
173.7: viii.3.10; 13.17: ksho ni [*]*-, i. 180.5, cf. sinhi' rilpdm, p.
-t'h r&-, TS. vi.2.7 l ; gfrndharvi% x.11.2 ; gauri's, i. 164.41 ; diktts,
x.108.2,3,4: TS. ii.5.11*; naptVs, ix.69.3 ; nddi% x.135.7 ; yam*\
x.10.9 (AV. xviii.1.10); rathi's, v.61.17: x.102.2; lakshmfs,
x.71.2; AV. vii.115.2: xi.7.17: xii.5.6 ; laldmi's, L100.16; vrki's,
i.117.18; 183.4; pakatts {iva saayati), x. 146.3, * squeaks like a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.p.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 377

cart' (Gr., Wb., A.p.f.); sasarpart's, iii.53. 15,16; sumangcUi's,
i.113.12: x.85.33; [AV., 4i', iii.10.2: xiv.1.60; 2.25,26 ; but not
u der Regel geniass " ( Vedica, p. 1 1 6), since the change of accent
requires inflection according to C. These " regularities " of the
later Vedic texts are rather an effacement of distinctions which
prevail in the Rik almost without exception. In the Rik-passage,
xiv.2.28, accordingly, we have -It's.] starts, i.122.2: vii.101.3:
x.31.10 : VS. iii.34 : *TS.i.5.6 * : Kath. viil ;— from the Atharvan :
jdtrVs, xx.48.2 (MSS. ; ed. jdnisj; tandri's, viii.8.9 : xi.8.19;
[MBh., atandrts, gatatandris, jitatandris; R., vyapanitatandrt;]
ydtudhdnl's, i.28.4; — from the TS. (given by A. Weber, Ind.
Stud, xiii.101) : mahishi's !, i.2.12 * (mdhishi, Rik, from mahishd) ;
vicvarHpfs, i.5.6 a,8 * ; pabalt's, iv.3.11 * ; sinhi's, i.2. 1 2 a.

Transitions from A: drdtis, see p. 376; in dnu cyeni sacate
variant V aha, i. 140. ft, p. -nth, we have a purely metrical lengthen-
ing ; Prat. iv.13 : 'A black path follows along after him.' Vedica,
p. 116. Gr. as A.p.f.

Transitions from B : cdkvaris, TS. iii.4.4 ', looks to me
suspicious (or may it not be N.p.f. ?) ; still more so is sahd devi'r
arundhati, AV. vi.59.2.

Elision and crasis: see p. 375.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR NeUTBR.

A. The neuter has no case-ending. Kim^ which is gradually
supplanting the more antique kdd even in the Veda, is perhaps
a phonetic variation of *kd-m. It occurs 49 times ; and as adv.,
31 ; cf. ndkim and md'kim. The case-form occurs 256 times in
the Rik (from 37 stems) ; all but 87 of these belong to bhil'ri,
mdhi, and svastL The list is : dkshi; dkshiti, 3 ; agavydti;
djdmi, 3 ; afiji, 5 ; aprati, 2 ; abhibhtiti, 3 ; abhimdti; dsdmi, 9 ;
UdsUti, 3; ghdshi; codaydnmcUi; jd'grvi; jdmt, 4; tardni:
tuvishvdni; trind'bhi; dharnasi; nidhruvi; pdpuri; parogavyhti,
as adv. ; bhurvdni; bhti'ri, 47 ; mdhi, 84; vii.30.1 (Gr., mah-e) ;
iv.56.5 and x.93.1 (Gr., mdhi, V.d.f.); vicvdcarshani; vr'shni, 3;
cdmtdti; cdrni, viii.45.27, BR.; otherwise Gr. ; cuci, 11 ; sdkthi,
2 ; sdnemi, 2, and as adv., 6 ; [sdsni : sdm, x.120.2 ( AV. v. 2. 2) ;
Gr. reads sdsnis : sdm; cf. kshonU s-, p. 373] sdnasi, 2; surabhi;
sthU'ri; \svdni, vi.46.14, BR. and Gr., Ueo., take as a verb;]
suabhishU; suasti, 33, and svasti, 2 ; hd'rdi, 9. From the
Atharvan : dkshi, 3 ; dsthi, 8; ekanemi, 2 ; dddhi; pr'cni, i.11.4;
bhil'ri, 4 and v.2.3 (Rik, vicve) ; mdhi, 6 ; vddhri, iii.9.2 ; surabhi;
sdkthi, xx. 136.5 (MSS. saktum).

C. The only place in the whole Rik, to my knowledge, where a
X.A.8.U. of a stem in i radical is needed is Val. 2.10, ydthd
gdcarye dsishdso adrivo : mdyi gotrdm haricriyam (sc. sishdsa) :
'As thou wast ready to give to G., so (give) to me a fair tawny
herd.' That is, of the form prescribed by the grammarians (as
jalapb), there is not a single example. We should expect haricri;
but rather than use so unfamiliar a form, the poet puts a masculine
adjective with the neuter gotrdm. Cf. p. 343 and V.s.m.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

378 C. R. Lanman, [t and /-stems.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

A. The ending -ra is added directly to the stem. The form
occurs 1208 times (from 205 stems). Besides these, arim occurs
twice; pitt'un, 49 times. Examples are : agnim, 269 ; atithim^ 25;
ddrim, 30; dhimy 40 ; Urmim, 23; kavlm^ 28 ; puramdhim, 6 and
L 134.3 : x.64.7 ; br'kaspdtim, 25 ; yay'tm, 2 ; ydnim, 61 ; rety'im,
180; hdrim, 24.

Transitions from B : pr'thim; sdbharim.

Transition from C : on*/w, or f.

Transition to n-declension: khddtnatn?, vil6.40; d' ydrh hart*
nd Jehdctinam pipum jdtdm nd bibhrati, ' whom they carry as a
ring on the hand, as a new-born child ' (on the arm) ; so BR.
Here I would put ilrmtrnam (Urminatn : Urnntn :: ilrniind : iXrmid')^
ix.98.6, and p&lapdni-nam, MBh. ; but not abhimdt'm-am, i.85.3,
as does Benfey, Vedica, p. 124; for the accent would be wrong,
and Lindner, p. 124, gives six similar formations. See stems in »/<.

B. Here belongs ndmim, vi.20.6.

C 1. Root-words, (a) gdthdnmni, viii.81.2 ; durddhtam;
devdviam, 3; pratJviam,3; yajnaniam; mddhiam. (b) Cf. p. 369.
abhipAyam; brahmaprlyam, 2; ghrtapriyam, AV. xh.1.20;
-prlyam at the end of compounds: adhvara-,2\ Jcshatra-; ghrta-;
jana-; yajna-; su-y 2; hari-, viii.15.4.

2. Stems in *, not radical : rathiam, 8 ; suprdviam.

Transitions from A: yayiam, ii.37.5 ; it is needless to read, as
Gr. proposes twice, p&ramdh iam, text-im. See p. 371.

Transition to n-declension. Benfey, Vedica^ p. 122, sees an
instance of this in pvanirnam, VS. xxx.7 ; this he refers to pva-n? ;
BR., to pvanin; Mahidhara: puno netdram. Cf. Kubn, Pdli-
Gram. p. 81.

Elision and crasis : AV. agni'va, text agnim-iva, viii.2.4 (so 3
times out of 5, Priit. ii.56).

Accusative Singular Feminine.

A. The form is like that of the masculine. It occurs 607 times
(from 156 stems). Examples are: dditim, 32; ptiramdhim^ 5;
bhU'mim^ 19; matim^ 22; raytm, iv.34.2: v.33.6: vi.8.5: x.167.1;
rdtim, 20 ; vrsht'im, 26 ; sumatim, 41 ; sushtul'tm, 35 ; s&mrtitn,
or m.

Transitions from B: aranydn'tm; on'tm, or m. ; dshadhitn;
sm'hitim, SV. i.323.

B. The form occurs 303 times (from 116 stems). Examples
are: vrvi'm, 9; tdvishim, 13; devi'm, 18; pipytohtin, 9; prthivi'm^
62; in i.67.5 : vii.99.3, pronounce prthvi'm; mahi'm, 35; for -?£//*,
x.50.5, see p. 357. In ii. 1 1.8, is an example of the uncontracted
form: d&repdre vd'niam vardhdycmta, text 4m.

Transition from C: nadim only, from AV. iv.37.3.

C. 1. Root-words. (a) devdv'tam (tvdcam), ix.74.5. (b)
abhipriyam, 2; dhiyam, 45; dluyamdhiyam, 2; bh'tyanx;
priyam, 14.

Transition from B: striyam, 3; so AV. viii.6.9, 16,25.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.s.t] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 379

2. We have here 18 Rik-forms (from 16 stems). Enumera-
tion: atharvlam; ardytam; gauriam, 2; nad'iam; napt'iam;
ndndiam; prapharv'iam; yanuam; vibdl'iam; vipvardp'tam;
vrk'tam; sihh'iam; sHrmiam; stariam, 2; sphigiam; svar'iam,
x. 177.3 (cf. accent of svari'ndm). Even in the Atharvan the
thematic final is rarely, if ever, consonantized : thus, kumdriam,
xiv.1.63; kdd'iam, v.19.12; lakshm'iam, i.18.1 ; laldm'tam, i.18.1,
4; viliptiam, xii.4.41 ; vilidh'tam, i.18.4; so napttam, i.28.4 ;
prapharvt am, iii. 17. 3: v.22.7.

Transition from A : amb'iam.

The only place in the whole Rik— except vii.50.4 (p. 373) — where the final V of
a word belonging to series G is consonantized is vii.68.8rf, starydm. We cannot
read stariaih cic chaktyd$vind f&cibhih ; see p. 380. The preceding seven stanzas
are each of three verses, and the metre shows plainly that the fourth verse here is
a later addition ; while in verse 9, d is the usual refrain. Gr. ( Ueb.) brackets
them both.

Instrumental Singular Masculine.

A. The general ending is added directly to the stem: 1.
ilrmid' (accent), i. 184.2; pdtid, x.85.22 ; sdkhid, vi.56.2 : viii.48.10:
x.6.2 ; 71.10.

2. pavyd\ i.88.2: v.52.9: vi.8.5; rayyd', x.19.7; pdtyd,
x.85.24,27,36; sdkhyd, i.53.7 : vi.21.7 : viii.43.14: x.50.2. So in
theAV.: pdtyd, ii.36.1,4: vi.22.3 : x.1.3 : xi.1.14: xiv.l. 40,52;
2.32; rayyd', iii. 14.1: vi.78.2.

3. The termination -id is often contracted to 4 in the feminine.
The only example of this in the masculine is ghr'ni, ii.33.6,
ghr'riiva chdyd'm arapd' apiya, p. -ni-iva, cAs by the heat
unharmed, to shelter bring me ;' but it may be Ab. with elision
and crasis (cf. vi. 16.38). Otherwise Weber, Ind. /Stud, xiii.58.

Transition to the w-declension. This occurs in 51 forms (from
25 stems) : agnind, 7 ; ddrind, 2 ; asind; dhind, 6 ; Urmmd, 7 ;
kavtndy 2 ; kdp'ind, 2 ; kikidivmd; jamddagnind, 4 ; devdfpind;
dhdsind; panind, 2 ; pdtind, iv.57.1 ; pdprind; br 'haspdtind, 2 ;
manlnd; yay'ind; rayind; rapmind; vddhrind; vavrind;
vr'shandbhind; vrshn'ina; piicind, ii.5.4 ; 35.8 (or n.) ; sdsnind.
AY. has -pdtind, xvi.6.6 bis.

B. Here belongs only ndmid, i.53.7.

C. 1. Root-words: (a) dtidhid,ix.53.3 ; (b) vdmanena kavipriyd,
Vamana, Introduction. 2. rathid, iii.36.6: vii.95. 1.

Instrumental Singular Feminine.
A. i. Here belong 37 forms (from 19 stems): (a) with shift of
accent, i. e. oxytone stems : Htid\ 4, and viii.18.7, coalescing with
d' ; paid '; vrshtid', 2 ; sukirtid1; sumcUid ; sushtutid' [and from
the AV., piisJtiid', xix.3 1.2,9,1 3; in x.6.27, ktrtid is a palpable
error for -tid'; cf. C] : — (b) barytone stems : dvartid; d'bhUtid;
jdlpid; tvtshid; dhrd'jid; pd'rshnid ra. ? ; pura?hdhid, 9 ; bhU'mid,
i.161.14; rdnhid, 5 ; rdjid; vi'cid; sr'nid; hdrshid, 2 [and
from the AV., abhipastid, xii.5.58; urdtid, iii.31.1 ; tr'ptid,
ix.5.9; tvtshid, x.6.27 ; dhrd'jid, iii. 1.5 ; 2.3; pd'rshnid, vi.42.3 :
viii.6.17; bkC'tid, x.6.24 ; subhutid, iii. 14.1 ; rucid, xrii.2.30].

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

880 C. R. Lanman, [i and J-atems.

2. Here belong 13 forms (from 11 stems) : (a) oxytones:
apityd' ; matyd' ; mithatyd'; vasatyd'; sumatyd\ 3 ; 8ushtutyd\
making hiatus with d': — (b) apdnyd; d'Mtyd; Uhtyd; devdhti-
tyd; prdmatyd. AV. xii.3.33, svddhityd.

In the Rik the forms in -id are to those in -yd about as 3 : 1 ; in
the Atharvan (according to my notes; I fear they are not' com-
plete), about as 1 : 5 ; that is, the relations are most strikingly
reversed. The Atharva variant, dcittyd cbd, vL51.3, compared
with dcitti ydd of the Rik, vii. 89.5, betrays its later character as
well by the case-form as by the word ckd.

3. The termination -id is contracted to 4. Forms of this kind,
where both texts have -2, occur in the Rik 105 times (from 35
stems), and are therefore more than twice as frequent as those in
4d and -yd put together (50). They stand frequently at the end
of a pdda (cf. Hti\ matt'). They were recognized by the native
authorities: Schol. to Pan. vii.1.39, sushtutf, sicshtutyd iti loke.

(a) The pada has always 4. In i.20.4c; 164.86: iv.4.14fl:
viii.23.14a/ 76.6a* ; ix.9.2c: Val. 3.3c end, the 4 stands before a-
or d-, is written \fi and is to be pronounced with hiatus; in
vii.68.8o*, accordingly, we must also pronounce pake? ap- (see p.
379). Only twice is the hiatus written, in vi.5.7 (end of pdda !),
and x.64.1. It is written as coalescing with a following i- or *-,
and is so to be pronounced in iL5.6o*y 13.2a ; x.20.66 (trochaic) ;
but with hiatus in vii.28.3o. Enumeration : dcitti, 2 ; dprabhUti;
avyathi'; d'hutl; dttf, 26 and x.64.1; rjuntti'; ctUi; jUshti;
dt'dhiti; dwhtidi' ; dushtuti; dhiti\ i. 164.8 : v. 25. 3 with mmatid';
ntpiti; pdrivishti; purdjitf; prdniti, 4 and iii.51.7 (L. ?) ; prdbhutt;
prdyatt; prdyuti; mat?, 15; variant; vishtt'; viti' 3, and ix.61.1
(aydr viti1): vi. 16.46; vrshti\ 2 ; paktt ';' pdJcti; prusfvtf r, 13;
sadhri', ii.13.2, I take as I.s.f. of a stem sadhri; or from sddhri
(Lindner, p. 102) with adverbial shift of accent ; ' with an aim,9 L e.
intently ; sdhtlti, 2 ; sudUf; suniti, 2 ; 8umati\ 2 ; 8umttii
8u$htuti\ 5; hdstacyutl In the AV. we have dhittf, vii.1.1 ; and
several forms in Rik-passagee, vii. 48.1 : ix.9.8: xviii.1.23. In Rik
vi. 16.46, we may, with Gr., restore the longer grammatical form
vttid\ text viti ; but the caesura is better if we read vitt . .
mdrtio (text -to).

(b) The pada has 4: i. 182.5, supaptani'. Pr&t. vii. 1 5.

(c) The samhitd has 4 before r-, and the pada reads -ih:
vi.18.10, . . . . indra hetV: rdksho ni dhakshi, Gr., Ueb. i.578,
'Bum up (destroy) the evil one with thy bolt;' BR. suggest
indrahetth; i. 180.4, tdd vdm . . pdpva-ishti : rdthyeva calcrd'
prdti yanti mddhvah, ' Therefore (because ye blest Atri, according
to his wish, eshk) to you, with desire for line, (swift) as chariot-
wheels, our oblations go ' (and ye ought to do the same by us).
Contrariwise, vi.13.1, prumti' r-, p. 4\ Gr. reads -ih (Ueb.)—
wrongly, I think.

4. The final 4 becomes 4. Cf. uta tt dfrindni dfriti (Copen-
hagen 10 -tf), c uta tvdm dprindni *dpriti (dpribhis)? V d. xxii.5 ; so
dy2c2 yesti, Ye. ii.l. This happens in all but three instances at

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ls.t] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 881

the end of the pdda. It occurs 25 tiroes : viz., (a) at the end of
pdda h or of the verse: ishdni; prdyukti, 2; vdshatkrti; sadhdstuti;
sunrkt't, 4; supastl; suash, 4; /utv'tshkrti : — (b) at the end of a
pdda before vowels : upapruti,2; upd'bhrti; suvrktl: tw-, i.61.4^,
16c*/ supasti: upa, vi.67.3; here Gr., Ueb. i.524, would place rfti,
ii.39.5, text ritir a- : — (c) in the interior of a pdda: trivishtt
(eti), iv.6.4; (adh-) 15.2; nitikti (y<$), vl4.5; here I would place
dsmrti, ' (with, u e.) out of forge t ml ness,' AV. vii. 106.1. Gr. puts
here abhishti (pdasi), ii.20.2, p. abhishti-pd' asi jdndn. Weber
sees here crasis after elision (as in i v. 46.1c), -pd'h. See Ind. Stud.
xiii.58,104, and Whitney to TPr. x.13.

Transitions to the w-declension : dhdsind, vi.67.6; nd'bhind,
vi.39.4. In AV. vi.141.2, svddhitind is m., although svddhityd
occurs xii.3.38.

B. 1. Here belong 49 forms (from 27 stems), (a) Oxytones:
asiknid' (? p. 368) ; devid\ 5 ; purdnid' ; samdnid\ 5 ; sticid': —
(b) dnvid, 3 ; dpvdvatid; kundrnd'cid; ghrtd'cid; citdntid;
citdyantid; trndnid; devd'cid; ddvidyutatid; ndvyasid; pdtnid,
2; rShinid; vdsvid; vipvd'cid; vipvid, adv. ; pdcid, 11 ; pdmid,
2; parmaydntid; pimid: satrd'cid; stdbhantid; hdrinid. Add
from AV. : apvdbhidhd'nidy iv.36.10: v.14.6 ; dsiknid, v.13.8;
vd'sid, x.6.8 ; sautrdmanid' 9 iii.3.2.

2. There are 22 forms (from 12 stems). (a) Oxytones:
prthivyd\ 8 ; mahyd'; sddhdranyd' (? p. 368) : — (b) dpvdvatyd;
(jdtiun&lyd; tmdnyd; ndvyasyd; mddhumatyd; vd'javatyd;
pdcyd, iv.35.5 ter (once with hiatus and once with fusion before a-) ;
tsdmamUyd; hiranydyd (for hiranydyy~d), viii.1.32 ; 67.2. From
AV. : annddyd\ xv. 14.4,5; dawyd, viii.1.3; vipvdbheshajid,
vi. 136.3; sdrasvatyd, 2. TS. and VS. have urvyd'; but Kik,
urviyd', 23. See BR

3.* (?dmt, i.110.4: iv.22.8: ix.74.7: and probably x. 92. 12, text
paminahmhi; 8tipdmiy vii.16.2 : x.28.12.

4. (a) At the end of a pdda : pdmi, ii.31.6 : viii.45.27: x.40.1;
sttpdmi, v. 87.90/ Gr. would convert the cadence from trishtubh to
jagati by restoring the longer grammatical form supdmid. (c) In
the interior of a pdda: pami r'-, i.b7.5; pami d-, iii.55.3. Here
We may put urvl- of the compound urv't-Htih, vi.24.2. We have
supdmi, VS. i.15 : TS. i.1.5': TBr. iii.6.64.

C. 1. Root-words: (a) ddhid\ AV. vi.132.l-ft, accent! (b)
dhiyd\ 75; priyd'y 15; bhiyd\ 14; avadyabhiyd', x.107.3,
' through fear of blame :' it is accented as though the first member
of the tatpuru&ha were an independent word. The hymn is very
late.

2. (a) mandHkid; vepid; stirmidy vii.1.3 ; sphig'td. Srmdy
x. 106.6, is dual.' (b) cakriyd, ii.34.14 (cf. N.A.d.f., C). For the
accent of tilapinjid' and paldlid', AV. ii.8.3, and of 8ahasraparnid\
vil39.1, see p. 369. In x.6.27, MSS. and ed. have ktrtid, which
must be an error for ktrtld'.

Tapani', ii.23.14, if it stands for tapan'td, belongs here; other-
wise, under B.

vol. x. 52

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

382 CI /?. iMmnan, [i and f-stems.

Instrumental Sinoulab Neuter.

A. B. C. There is no certain example. In ii.35.8, puchtd may
be masculine ; for in iv.2.16, puei is rather adverb (Gr.% Ueh.) than
substantive. In v.42.18, Gr. takes suprdmtt as adj. with arn&i;
BR., as fern, substantive.

Dative Singular Masculine.

A. 1. The direct combination of simple stem and ending is seen
only in pdtye (8) and sdkhye (10). In no case does the metre
show -ie.

2. The usual form is made by gunating the stem-final and adding
the general ending -e: thus, agne-e, agndye. This form occur*
148 times (from 44 stems). In kshetrasya pdtaye, AV. ii.8.5, and
bhiltdsya pdtaye, iii.l 0.9,10, the second word is declined as if it
were part of a compound. This it is virtually; cf. bh&tapdti*,
ii.14.4. In brhddrdye, Rik i.57.1, we have, I think, a clear case of
metrical shortening of the penultimate of SLJogattydda. It standi
for brhddrdye. It is precisely so with rdhddrdya*, viii.46.23 ; the
d is penultimate of a gdyatri-pdda. In each case we should set
up the stem -rai, not -ri or -rt.

Datives s.m. in -aye are found from the following stems: agni, 48 ; atri, 12 : orfft:
arati; art; dfvamishti ; dhi, 3; dpi, 3; r 'shi, 3; kavi, 8 ; kiri, 2; htkshi:
krandadishti ; gdvisfUi,^; ghr'shvi, 6; c&kri; j&gmi,2; jdsuri, 2 ; jVfmf; fi;i;
tuvigri; turvt'ti,3; t$L'rvi ; dabhi'ti,5; ddfoni; dudhi; pr&bhuti; br'ha^iti .
bhandddxshti ; bhu'rni, 2; ydti; rdhni; tftci; sani, 12: saptdvadkri, 2; sd'ruthi.
2; 8ukhddi; sudtti; sumdjjdni; sushvi,*; *dri,2; sy&'marapni ; hari; havyadoti

C. 1. Root-words: (a) jihmap'te; durddfiu; diid/ue: — (A)
itthd'dhiye, 2 ; yajnapriye; and VS. xxii.30, ganapriye. Cf. X-iy«-
in kiyedhd's with md'-ki-m.

2. Here belong rath'te, viii.44.27, and suprdiue, x. 125.2. In the
Atharvan variant of the latter verse, we read *t/jt>rd«/d, iv.30.6 !
See note to Ath. Prat, iv.ll.

Dative Singular Feminine.

A. 1. In no instance is the ending combined with the simple
stem.

2. The usual form is like the m. It occurs 507 times (from 5o
stems). The average number of occurrences of each stem is here
very unusually large. It is used with especial frequency as an
infinitive : thus, ishtdye, pUdye.

Enumeration. Datives s.f. in -ay«are found from the Btems: djiti; dditi; &1iti.
5; abhimdti; abhifasti, 3; abhishti, 16; dmati, 2; ari&htdtdti, 4, ahati; dbhoyi:
ishi; ishti, 20; utu 88; gdvishti: g&rti; grbhUatdti; tuji; durbhrti; devdtdti. 10;
devdvtti, 22; dliiti ; nrti; nr'piti; pakti; ptti, 67; puramdhi; p&rvdcittu $:
p&rvapUiy 4 ; prattti; prdtdrti; prd fasti, 9 ; bhakti: bharahtiLti, 2 ; maghuVt. «J:
mitradhiti; medhdsdti, 5; r<Wt; vdsutti, 2; vdsymshti. 4; vd'jasdti, 34; rtti.31:
frushti; sdrvatdti, 4; «dJi, 34; n'ftfa; stikshiti; sumali, 2; somapiti, 49; Jtwwfi.
45; svasti; havydddti, 6.

3. Several stems appear to have a dative in -/. It is of unclear
origin. They are: <fotW£, vi.29.6 ; tftf', i. 100. 1-15 ; 178.1 : iv.23.2;
25 2; 34.9: vL24.9 ; 29.6: vii.25.1 ; 59.9 (AV. vii.77.1), 10;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.s.f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 383

viii.21.7; 57.4; 86.7; 88.7: ix.97.38 : x.15.4 (AV. xviii.1.51);
35.13; 104.4; viti\ ix.91.2 ; 97.49; vrshti\ v.53.5, may be Ls.f.
(p. 380) ; and so prdniti, vii.28.3 (Orient und Occ. ii.466).

4. In v. 5 1.1 2, we have suastdye thrice and sua&t'i, evidently in
the same construction, once ; the same is true in verse 13. In
viiL31.ll, suast't occurs within pdda b before «-, and in c we have
suastdye. In v.42.15 it occurs at the end of c before ti-, and at
the end of din Ll74.9 = vi.20.12 : iv.11.6: v.4.11.

B. The general ending -e was added to the stem : thus, deviate,
denial, devyai. To the apprehension of the speaker eventually,
the parts were doubtless devy-a't. There are 21 forms (from 13
stems): 1. vippdtniai: — 2. (a) devyai; prthivya'ty 6; brhat-
j/ai; mahyai, 4 ; sintvdlya'i; (b) dviatyai; iyatyai; jti'ryantyai;

Jf/d'yasyai; dhemimdtyai; papumdtyai; vd'javatyai. From the
AV. I have noted 21 forms (from 14 stems), not counting two in
vii.46.2. Under 1. fall hiranyakepiai, v. 7.9, and striya'i, v.30.3 ;

parjdnyapatniai, xiLl.42, and sahdpatniai, xiv.1.58; the rest,
under 2. In vi.I07.3, kalydnyal is doubtless an error; read -yal
(p. 369).

Transitions from A: 1. devdhdtiai. viii.39.4; prktiai, ii.2.7 :
x. 11 1.3: — 2. in the tenth mandala, pu&htyai, 105.5; turyai,

pnshtya'i, and bhujyai, 106.4; n'trrtyai, 164.1; bhrtyai, 29 A.
From the Atharvan I have noted at least 13 transition-forms in
-t/ai (from 11 stems). In vi.41.1&, the metre requires us to restore
the secondary and shorter grammatical form, d' kilty ai (utd
cUtaye) ; text d'kHtaye.

Transition from C: bhiya't, viii.64.13.

C. 1. Root-words: (a) ddhie, x.95.13:— (b) dhiy'e, 6; priyb, 34.
2. Here belong ndndie (with mude), i. 145.4; tneshie (with

meshd'ya), i.43.6; vrkie, i.116.16 ; 117.17 : vL51.6.

Dative Singular Neuter.

A. B.C. The only example known to me is pticai/e (padd'ya)y
vii.41.6 (AV. hi. 16.6).

Ablative Singular Masculine.

A. 1. Of a form in i-as there is no example.

2. Of the usual form there are 14 occurrences (from 8 stems):
ddresy 2; dhes; udadhes; gives, 5; ghr'nes, vi. 16.38 (cf. p. 379) ;
ydnes, 2 ; patdmHtes; sdmrtes. From the AV. : tirapeirdjes,
vii.56.1 ; parnadhes, iv.6.5 ; pltipes, ii.33.4. For girdyas (Ab. ?),
*ee N. p. m. There are no examples for B and C.

Ablative Singular Feminine.

A. 1. At the end of the cataleetic pddas Ll28.7/and g, of 11
and 7 syllables respectively, Gr. proposes to read dhUrt'uis; but
the metre is good as it stands (dhurtes).

2. Here belong 20 forms (from 11 stems). They are: ddites;
dpites; <rbh<pastes, 8; abh'ibrutcs; dmates; drdtes; dhdses;
dhtirtes, 2 ; pdrishHtes; vasates, 2 ; srutes. From A V. abhipastes,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

384 C. R. Lanman, \i and t-stems.

vii.53.1; d'hutes, iii.22.4; nrtis ?, vi.18.3; bhd'mes, xiii4.35;
vasatesy vi.83.1.

B. 1. Here belong prthivid's, ix.8.8 ; 31.2; 57.4, and jl'vantids,
v.78.9. In every instance the word occupies places 3-6 in a pddu
of 8, and is followed by ddhi.

2. Prthivyd'Sy 18; mahyd's; urodpyds; pdtantyds. The AV.
has prthivyd'Sy 19; brhatyd's, viii.9.4 ; avadydvatyds^ vii. 103.1.

Transitions from A: bhil'mids, i.80.4; hetyd's, x. 8 7.1 9; nd'bhyds,
90.14.

From the Atharvan we have: hetid's, iv.10.6; dbhMds, vii. 100.1 ; drdtids, x.3.7:
xiii.4.41; d^astids, xii.2.12; d'hutids, xii.1.13; nd'bhids. ii.33.4: ix.8.12; MG'tnak
ii.30.1 : — krshyd's, ii.4.6; cfcvatefyd'*, viii.1.12 ; ctrshaktyd's, i.12.3; fcAfi'royd*,
iv.19.6: x.1.13: xii.3.26: xix.16.2 ; 28.4; rd'tryds, xiii.4.30. In vi. 1 2 1.4, we
have elision and craais : ydnyeva prdcyuto gdrbhah, text, -yd iva.

C. There is no example of an Ab.s.

Ablative Singular Neuter.
A. B.C. For the neuter there is no example.

Genitive Singular Masculine.

A. 1. Here belongs ari-ds, in vii.8.1 ; but not necessarily in
iv.48.1# and vi.14.35; furthermore, aryds^ ii.23.15 and 34 times
(in x.27.8 bis, it is N.p.f.); dvyas, 17 times and ix.108.5. The
resolution 8ddhriasy at the end of v.44.105, makes the pdda one of
12 (text, -e«, 11) syllables.

2. The form in -es occurs 162 times (from 42 stems).
Enumeration: agnis, 55; dirts, 4; ddites, vii.82.10; ddres, 10; dsushves; ahes,
3; #&, 2; dpts, 3; ishudhes; Urmes; r'shes, 2; halts; kavts, 4; kirts, i.31.13:
ii.12.6: x.41.2 ; girts, i.56.3 ; gaurivttes ; gkx'shves, 3; jivres; dadr^dmpam;
dabhftes ; dudhes ; dr'tes ; dhdses, 4 ; ndmuces, 4 ; pants, 8 ; pates, ix.35.6 ;
platts; br'hasp&Uis, 6; brahmanaspdtes, 2; bhk'res, 4; mitrdtithes ; medhidtithes :
yayd'Us ; vavris, 2 ; vdhncs ; v&, 14 ; vrshd'kdpes, 2 ; *ipfef >' *tf 'vor«Mi» ; s&shves ;
s&res, 5 ; hdres.

B. Here belong Tirapcid's, Pr'thyds, and Sdbharyd*.

C. 1. Root-words: (a) gdthdntaSy i.190.1; dildh\as%2\ manyu-
m'tas; mdh'tas : — (b) ganapriyas.

2. Here belong ahlaSy x. 144.4, and suprdv'ias.

Transition from B : The stem of ahighnyds (drvatas), AV. x.4.7,
must be ahighnf (properly a feminine formation like dpatighni) ;
but I know of no better place than this in which to put it The
accent is peculiar to the Atharvan (p. 369 top).

As mentioned on p. 382, the d of rdhddriiyas. viii.46.$3, is purely metrical.
Otherwise wo must assume that the fuller ending -as has been added to the
gunated form, -re, of stem -ri (BR.). If any similar instances — other than
citrdtayas, x. 140.3 (A.p.f., Roth), vdyas, i. 104.1 (A. p.m.), and p&cayas, AV. v. 1.3
(A.p.f.) — can be found, they are merely sporadic. See stems in -at, G.s.m.

Genitive Singulab Feminine.
A. 2. Of the usual form there are 44 occurrences (from 11
stems). Enumeration : ddites, 23 ; abht pastes; dmates^ 2 ; ishtes;
krshtes; deodvites; nirrtes, 6 ; pushtes, iv.41.10 : v.41.20 (m. ?);
pr'pies, 4; vrshtes, ix.41.3; 74.3; vratdtes. I have noted 16
forms (from 8 stems) in verses peculiar to the AV.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G.&i] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 385

B. Of the 99 Rik-forms (from 19 stems) only 15 end in -ids; the
rest, 84, in -yds. Enumeration: 1. yatid's; urvid's; devid's;
prthivid'Sy 7; ydtid's; stri-y-d's; — upindrdnids; rd'trids;
sH'shyantids: — 2. prthivyd's, 68; mahatyd's; vadhrimatyd'Sy
5 ; — anpumdtyds, 2 ; Hrjayantyds; tdvishyds; dd'?iumatyds;
mdnspdcanyds; rd'tryds; vivdsvatyds; pdmyds; $6pucatyds.

From the Atharvan I have noted: punyd'c ca caturakskid's, iv.20.1 - devidfs,
xiv.1.63: pipdcid's, i.16.3; prtkivid's, vi.86.1,2: xviii.2.20; vepantid's, i.3.T ;
rcrtharvid's, x.4.5; stri-y-d's, v.lT.8: xii.2.39; hastinid's, vi.70.2; — dmucyds,
xvi.6.10; grMpatnids, iii.24.6; p&tnids, ix.3.5: — and, besides, 64 forms (some Ab.)
in -yds (from 1 8 stems).

Transitions from A : 1. drdtids, ix.79.3 bis; bhti'mids, p. -a",
x.75.3, with elision and erasis, bhU'miopdri : — 2. yuvatyd's;
dnumatyds; nirrtyds, x. 165.1, a late hymn — 'The Death-dove;'
pfpnydSy 4; bhll'myds, 8. Total 17. From the AV. my notes
show 53 forms (from 16 stems) : as, jdmid's, ii.7.2 ; cf. xvi.5.3-5 ;
8.3—5. Some of the forms are ablatives: as, krshyas, x.5.34.

Transitions from C: the Rik shows none; but the AV. has
viliptid's, xii.4.44.

C. 1. The only example is dhiyds (7 times).

2. Here belong: atharias, iv.6.8; nadias, 2; nishtigrtas;
prpan'tasy i.7l. 5; meshias92; srnias, x. 101.3 ; dpias (masc. stem,
dpia), vi.67.9. In i. 121.3, ndkshad dhdvam aruni'h pdrvidrh rd't,
we seem to have a contracted form, arunl's, for -las.

Genitive Singular Neuter.
A. The only example is bh&'res (16 times).
C. There is one example: (vdyasas) suddhia%, viii.48.1.

Thk Locative Singular.
The principal terminations of the L.s.m.f.n. of series A are -d
and -au: -d occurs 126 times ; -aw, 272.
I. The ending -d is used :

1. before consonants (109 times) ;

2. before an initial vowel with which it is fused (3 times).

3. It is never used before vowels (except w-, &-) with hiatus.
IL The ending -au is used :

1. before vowels without hiatus, in the form ~dv (50 times) ;

2. at the end of a pdda (150 times).

The existence of these forms in -d has often been noticed ; but
it is rather surprising to find that they are almost half as frequent
as those in <iu. The first general distinction in their use is like
that in the dual (p. 340), and is illustrated by ix.62.15, vir ydnd
vasatd'v iva.

I. Of the 126 forms in d:

1. 109 stand before consonants, in the interior of a pdda. 18
stand before t>-, and 30 before other labials ; 12 before y-, and 49
before other consonants.

2. 3 coalesce with a following vowel, in the interior of a pdda ;
vhL80.1, sdmam dpi srutd'vidat; vi.12.26/ x.lOl.llJ.

3. In 9 cases the samhitd^ following doubtless the oral tradition,

Digitized by GbOgle

C. R. lAinman, [i and /-stems.

has -d w- (Hr). The padakdra treats these as he does apparently
similar cases (Prat, ii.9), and writes -an u- (tf-). The reference
are: L27.U&; M.lld; V24.1ab; iv.tf.W>; 39.3A; v.1.66.* vi.26.W;
x.41.1<Z,a 117.3*1

4. We find -d five times exceptionally at the end of a pdda, but — be it observed-
only in the case of two words, devdtdid (vi.4.1a, before y-: vii.2.5/*) and sarr<it'it*i
(i.94.156; iii.54.196; coalescing graphically with J'-, v. 69.3c). JJevdtdt-d, as io^tr.,
makes perfectly good sense in the first two passages ; in the last three, a dative is
so appropriate, that Gr. has already on this account suggested the readme
sarvaUU-e, Wb. 1490. In i.65.4c, yond (g-) is, to be sure, at the end of a, pdda; but
it is aksharapahkti : so kukshd' (n-\ Lx. 109. 186.

II. Of the 272 forms in -an:

1. 50 appear as -dv (35 in the interior of a pdda, and 15 at
the end of a or c). An a- follows in 30 instances; an /-,
i.104.7; 176.5: vi.27.1,2; 47.20: vii.18.3; 48.2; an *w«, in ii.16.1:
viii.92.3 : ix.62.15 : x.64.6; 97.6 ; an £-, in vi.15.2 ; an r-, in iii.55.3 ;
62.18: vii.38.2: ix.13.9; 39.6: VaL 4.2 ; an e-, in ii.28.7.

2. 156 are at the end of a pdda (mostly pddas b and d; or a
and c before consonants). If we add the 15 at the end of a or c
before vowels, we have a total of 1 71 at the end of a pdda. E. g.,
see iv.16.9 ; the occurrences of djau, 14 out of 18 ; gdbhastau, 6;
abhishtau, 10; gdvishtau, 6 out of 7; vd'jasdtau, 12 out of 16,
vtus/UaUy 12 out of 16 ; pil'rasdtau, 7 ; sdtati, 12 out of 17.

3. There remain 66 cases in which -au is used before a consonant in the
interior of a pdda (before v-} 6 times; other labials, 14; y-, 7 ; other consonants
39). This happens oftenest with certain frequent words: pr&sitau, 4; yonau, 10:
sumatab, 12. It is safe to say in general that many of these occurrences belong
to younger parts of the Rik-text: thus, 21 (nearly one-third) are in the tenth
mandala. The passages are as follows : i.3 1.15c; 48. 6d; 70.4a (Aufrecht calls it
4i Piunder," in the German sense) : 98.1a; 144.26,7d; 162.96 (the horse-sacrifice;
late — see Gr., Ueb. ii.452): ii. 13,96 (unclear and mystical); 30.5c: iiL 1.76.21c;
59.3d,5d; iv.16.10r; 25.1d; v.30.13d (12-15 are a later addition); 32.7c; 34.6a;
42.16d; 43.15d (these two are refrains); 87.6c (evayd'marut hymn): vil.lOrf;
16.41c; 24.9d; 26.16; 40.3a; 46.8a; 47.13a (the contents of these two and their
place in the mandala betoken later date) ; 64. 5 d; 73.26: vii. 1.20c (19-20 area
separate fragment); 20.8c; 36.8d; 41.4d; 46.46; 60.116; 60.3a; 104.13d (these
two are real Atharvan hymns): viii.3.2a; 48.12d; 52.126 (later addition) ; YA1. 3.1.
nt'pdtithau: ix.72.76; 84.1d; 97.19d: x.8.3d; 10.76; 14.6c; 25.9d; 29.26; 34.14W
(gambler's song, end): 38.1a; 44.9d (a late verse, according to its contents and
bad grammar); 46.66; 6411a; 85.24c (Suryti's wedding) ; 88.7c; 101.36: 102.1c
(does not belong to the hymn); 131.7a (late); 160.4c,5c; 123.6d; 165.46;
178. 2d, bis; the contents of the last three hymns (Gandharva, Death-dove,
TArkshya) show that they are late.

The termination -au of the L.s. of S-stems has been ncrux to the
comparative grammarians. They say that it is a simple transition
to the w-decleusion — a formation after the aualogy of the w-stems;
but since the locatives s. of l-stems are eight times as frequent as
those from ?*-stems, this theory will hardly pass muster. A
complete examination of the forms of the L. in the Rik is so
suggestive that I cannot forbear saying something about the
historical relations of the different forms to each other, and the
genesis of the same. But since this lies beyond the scope of this

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L.s.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 887

article, I would expressly disclaim any tone of categorical assertion
in the matter.

The L.3. of the word sd'nu Btands in the text in five different forms. The stem
is -strengthened " by n and the ending is added : as, sd'nu-n-i, i. 155.1 ; or, it is
strengthened by vowel-increment and the ending is added : as, vdrshishthe ddhi
sd'nav-i, ix.31.5 (17 forms from 8 stems support this); [or, from this form the
ending is simply dropped before a vowel, to avoid a cacophonous combination (cf.
p. 357 and Prat, ii.35 ) : as, vr'shd pavitre ddhi 8d'nav-y avydye, text ed'no, ix.86.3 ;]
or. the ending is dropped and the preceding diphthong receives in compensation a
second increment (cf. Kuhn, in his Zeiisch. xviii.361) : as, sd'ndv ddhi, x. 123. 2,3 ;
with this, finally, th*» usual form is identical : as, ddhi sd'nau ni jighnate, i 80.6.
For the dropping of the ending there are abundant analogies. There are 133
L.s.n. forms in -man, to 67 in -man-i. Of. eamu-i, cam A'; fo/iu-t, tend'.

The facts from the Veda seem to point to a closer parallelism of development
between the i- and the u-stems in regard to the forms of the L.s. than has yet been
claimed for them. The analogy of the u-stems, as well as of the dative-locative in
Latin (ore*, from *avay-i, avey-i) and Greek (ir6?*t, from no?ey~t)% makes it probable
that the original form of the L. of t-stems was made in the same way, with guna
and ending: thus, agndyi. With the dropping of the ending took place
compensatory lengthening: as, agnd'y. Here the lines of development diverge
slightly. In sd'nav-i the palatal vowel of the case-ending, i is clearly distinguished
from the preceding labial v. In agndy-i, on the other hand, case-ending and
thematic final are homogeneous, and (as the word becomes to the apprehension of
the speaker agm'i-yi) both are' lost together, so that we have agruV.

Now as touching the relation of agnd' to agnak — there are three possibilities.
Each may be a development independent of the other ; this in view of the facts
few will wish to maintain. Secondly, agnd' may come from agnau ; so Benfey,
Gram. p. 41 end, and Kuhn in Zeitsch. xviii.3GG. Thirdly, agnau may come from
o'jiuV. When we consider the -au of the dual and perfect (devati, jxiprau), which,
beyond all peradventure, is a mere phonetic outcome of -a, it is hard to assume
here a phonetic change exactly the reverse, without reason. But not only the
analogy of the dual and perfect aided in this change ; the frequently following
labial initials would impart their own coloring to the preceding -d (cf. Rik vi.46.1,
sdUi' rd'jasya, with the SV. and VS. variants, sdtau v-, p. 388); and the analogy
of the locatives of u-stems (though rare in the Rik — about 50), when standing
beside those from t-stems, as in i. 162.9, svdrau svddhitau, would help to fix the
form in -au. Although the results were the same, the processes were quite
different. I would therefore set up the series thus :

agndy-i sd'nav-i

agnd'{y) sd'ndv

agnau sd'nau

Our last form and last but one (agnau and agnd') are abundantly exemplified.
Perhaps there is some evidence of forms like agnd'y and agndyi. Why may we
not recognize an instance of elision and crasis in yoneva, for yondy iva, x. 101. 11,
as well as in agneva for agner iva, AV. vi.20.1o? Again, at the end of i.l04.7d,
m&' no dkrte puruhdta yondv \ indra . . , it is far from unlikely that the oral
tradition was yomvy indra or ydnd indra. The sandhi is merely graphic here, as
it is invariably at the end of a pdda. The diaskeuasts almost always wrote the
sandhi just where it ought not to be (end of a and c) — with perverse uniformity.
Cf. vi.27.lo6.2a6. It is likely enough that the syncopated pdda, vi.44.9d, once
sounded thus : dhdnasya sdtd'y © asmd'fi avid d hi. Before the pause, the y-sound
was lost, as regularly in the later language in hiatus (Benfey, Gram. p. 53, Bern.
1). Now it is confessedly a piece of arbitrariness on the part of the padakdra to
write -au in the dual before u- (p. 341) ; for the oral tradition unquestionably had -d.
Was it not equally arbitrary on the part of the diaskeuasts that they filled out
the hiatus with a v (yondv, sdtd'v) rather than ay? And so, one may ask, is it
due to anything more than the following of mechanical rules (such as are properly
applied in yd urdfv antdriksha d', v.52.7) that drmau has been put in the pada-
text of i.27.6, rather that xirmai ? for it may once have been spoken sindhor urrnd'y
updkdy &'. Cf. Delbruck, Verbum § 204. These are mere suggestions.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

888 0. R. Lawman* [i and t-stems.

Forms like agndyi seem less doubtful. Gr. proposed ekeing out dja& to a
dactyl (fy'&vi, in x.75.96 and i. 112. 10. In x.75.9, ft may be catalectic — and a, c and
d, full jagatts ; so in X.63.14& (vd'jasdtayil). In i.l 12.10, a dactyl is certainly
needed ; but I would read it thus : eah&sramidha djdyi djinvatam. In like manner,
x.46.6, pdrivUo ydnayi sidad antah, text -at*. In vi.33.-k-, syncopation is not in
place (as it is in vi.26.la, owing to the pause in the sense). I am therefore
inclined to pronounce &uarskdtayi ydd dhtaydmasi tvd (text -td). In x. 150.4, we
have agnim maho dhdnasdUiv dfunh huve \ mrdtkdrh dhdntudtaye. In every other
verse of the hymn, pdda d repeats part of c (as so often happens in pdda c of
atycuhti, i.l 34, etc.). We should, then, expect a locative in d; and besides.it
would be unnatural to find the same relation ('to favor,' ' to the getting of good')
differently expressed — now by the ace, and now by the dat — in two consecutive
words. Does not -taye stand in place of an original dhdnasdtayi ? Cf . viii.3.S<z
and 14. 9c.

Locative Singular Masculine.

A. 1. Here belong possibly djdyi, i.l 12. 10; ydnayi, x.46.6.
See above.

2. There are 40 m. forms (from 7 stems) : agnd', 11 ; djd\ 6;
Hrmd',5; kukshd', 2 ; ghr'nd^ vi.3.7; ydnd, 13, and ix.86.6 (Saraan
variant, ni.237, -an), and once in AV. (a Rik-passage), ix.10.10;
surabhd', v.1.6. Cf. gara, Yc. x.4, ' gira'Cb?

3. There are 101 forms in -au (from 27 stems): agnail, 20;
ddrau, 3; arataH; aratnaii; djati, 18; diiati; drtnati, 3;
gdbhastau, 6 ; gira-d; gdpatau; jirau, or f. ; trkshaii; dhvasdnau;
ndmucau; ni'pdtithau; panait; prtstUaH; medhidtithau; yajfta-
patau; ydnau, 29 ; rdthavttau; vdnaspdtau, 2 ; palmalau;
sdrdtau; sd'rhvaranau; syd'marapman; svddhitau. From the
Atharvan I have 42 forms (from 18 stems). In v. 3 1.5, we see the
later style of sandhi, ptirodgnd'v utd, for which the Rik would
have -na utd. In iii.18.3, the uneompounded pdtau is merely a
false variant of the Rik jane, x. 145.4.

B. C. There are no examples.

Locative Singular Feminine.

A. 1. Here belong possibly siiarshdtayi, vi.33.4, and dhdna-
sdtayi, x. 150.4. See above.

2. There are 85 f. forms in -d (from 22 stems) : avdnd; djit,
L116.15; tiditd, 10; kshetrasdtd; gdshdtd,2; tokdsdtd, vi.18.6;
devdtdtd, 10; dyumndsdtd; nd'bhd, 20; nr'shdtd; nemddhitd,*;
pitd'; prdbhrtd; medhdsdtd, 3 ; yd'mahiltd, x. 11 7.3 ; viushtd,
x.4 1.1; pd'rasdtd, 5; sdmrtd, 2; sarvdtdtd, 6; sdld', 5 and
vi.46.1 (SV. i.234 and VS. xxvii.37, -aw); srtUd' ; sHarshdtd, 6.
AY. has nd'bhd, vii.62.l ; and the Saman variant of Rik viii.18.7
has pdmtdtd, i.l 02. In Yc. xxxi.18, we find dusitd, 'dtishtau.'

3. There are 171 forms in -au (from 49 stems) : dcha-uktau, 2 ;
djushtau; ddhitau; abhtshtau, 10 ; arkdsdtau, 3 ; drnasdtau, 3;
d'gatau; ixhtati, 6 ; tipastutau; upetau; urukshiiati,; etau;
eshtau; gdvishtati,7; tokd*d4au,x.25.9; durmatati,2; devdvttau,
6 ; devdhtitau, 2 ; dyumndhiUau, 2 ; dhdnasdtau; ndvishtau;
nd'bhau, 2 ; nrtati; nr'pttau; pdrishtau; pdretau; p%ta<t, %2 ;
pushtati, 2; pHrvdhiitau, 5; prdnitau, 3; prdbhdtau; prdbhr-
tau, 2; prdsitav, 4; bhdrahiUau; medhdsdtau, 3; rdtau, 5;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ijl8.£] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 389

vasatau, 2; vd'jasdtau, 16; viushtau, 16; phptau; pd'ru&dtau,
7 ; prushtaii; sdmdrshtau, 3 ; sdmitau; sdmrtau, or m., 3 ; adtau,
17 ; sumataUj 14; supishtav; sumtau. My notes show 19 true
AV. forms (from 7 stems). For tiditd of the Rik, vii.41.4, the
AV. (but not the VS., xxxiv.37) has the later form iiditau, iii.16.4.
4. I am not sure but that the following are transition-forms
from A to B, especially as vedl becomes vedl in the post-Vedic
literature. In tnis case they should be added on p. 371. They
are: v&di, vi.1.10; v'edy asyd'm, p. vedi iti, ii.3.4 ; cf. Prat, i.28:
ii.35. In iii.51.7, prdniti might be a locative.

B. 1. Here belong 13 forms (from 7 stems): (a) devid'm;
prthivid'm, 5 [and from the AV., nardcid'm, v. 3 1.4; striyd'm,
vi.11.2; 70.1-3J: — (b) dsiknidm, 2 (and AV. xii.2.20) ; jahnd'-
vidm; pdrushnidm; uchdntidm, 2 ; $dcidm [and varand'vatidm,
AV. iv.7.1].

2. Here belong 34 forms (from 9 stems) : (a) aranydnyd'm;
dshtryd'm; catvdrinpyd'm; prthivyd'my 26 [AV., dsandyd'm,
xiv.2.65 ; gdyatryd'm, xiii.3.20 ; jyaishthaghnyd'm, vLll0.2 ;
devyd'm, vi. 136.1 ; prthivyd'm, 40] : — (b) drshddvatydm;
yavyd'vatydm; rd'trydm; va&d'vydm (stem -vi; cf. jahnd'vi-m) ;
sarasvatydm [and from AV., 14 forms, from 5 stems].

Transitions from A : 1. p&ramdhidm; bh&'midm, 2 [and from
the AV.tprshtid'm, vi.102.2; bhti'tidm, xii.1.63; 4.44,46; bhd'mi-
dm9 15 times: as, ii.9.4; ydnidm, v.25.8; vedidm, xii.3.23] : —
2. bhrtyd'm; yuvatyd'm; sdrhgatydm [and from the AV.,
d'ktitydm, cittydm, and devdhHtydm, each 17 times, v. 24. 1-1 7; dv-
ydmy 3; bhil'mydm, 4; v'edy dm, xi.1.24: xix.33.3 ; sdmitydm, 2].

Transitions from C: d&tid'm, see p. 373; priyd'm, AV. xii.1.63.

3. The ending is dropped : gaurl\ ix.12.3 ; sarasi', vii. 103.2. See
Prat i.28 : sdptamikau ca ptirvau (i. e. ikdrokdrau, pragrhyau).
Cf. vediy prdniti, A 4. The commentator to Ath. Prat, i.74, q.v.,
cites ds/itrf, vi.27.3 (Rik x.165.3, dshtryd'm)-, vrvV, xviii.1.32;
maht, xviii.1.39 (a queer variant of Rik x.31.9). To these the
editor adds dbhihniti, vi.3.3.

C. There is no example.

Locative Singular Neutbr.

A The only example is apratd', viii.32.16. The AV. has sap-
tdrapmau, ix.5.15; Brh. ar. up. iv.2.3, akshini.
B. C. There is no example.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

A. The stem-final always shows an increment. Schleicher's
Vedic vocatives without increment are transition-forms to B.
Thus, the voc. darvi is from stem darvt, Rik ddrvl. The form
occurs 1105 times (from 72 stems). Examples are: ague, 524;
dgne, 275; sum, 799; dghrne, 13; kav>e, 26; pate, 35; with
brhas-, 32; brahmanas-, 17; vanas-, 14; sat-, 13; vicarshane,
11; sakhe, 11. In ix.80.1, we have br'haspdte. With mahe-
maie cf. mahe-nadi.

VOL X. 53

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

390 C. li. Lanman, [i and *-stems.

Transition from B: sobhare, 3.

Transition from the w- declension is seen in the vocative s. of
the compounds of poets : pdvakapoces 2 ; bhadrapoce, 4 ; pikra-
poce; cf. saJiasracak&ho, w-stems, V.s.m. This is doubtless done
by the poet in order to avoid an unfamiliar, or otherwise never
occurring form. Cf. p. 377 end. The prescribed form is sujyoiis,

B. There is no example.

C. In i.141.8, we have dakshi^ p. dhakshi (Prat, iv.41). Other-
wise BR.

Vocative Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong 27 forms (from 11 stems). They are: adiU%
15 ; anumate; asunite, 2 ; i&hte, 2 ; ttpamdte; rjtte; bhilme; mate;
yuvate ; satyatdte ; sua figure. The AV. has darve, iii.10.7
(cf. x.4.13) ; VS., darvi.

Transition from B: oshadhe, 2.

B. There are 117 forms (from 38 stems). They are: aranydni;
aruxhi; arjuni, 2 ; apvdjani; apvdvati; indrdni; uriici; rtdvari;
gomati; devi, 23; navyasi; ndri; parushni, 2; prthivi^ 11: see
V.d.f. ; pravatvati; bhdrati; maghoni, 9 ; tnahi, 6 ; mahini;
mdnvxhi; rdtri; revati,2\ vananvati; vdjhii, 2; vdjinivati, 8;
vicdrini; vibhdvari, 8; vrshdkapdyi; pitikdvati; putudri;
p-drapatni; sarasvati, 16 ; sahasvati; 8inivdliy 2 ; sUnari; svnr-
tdvati; siinrtdvari; hid 'dikdvati.

C. 1. No example. 2. ardyi; maheruidi; yami. AV. vii. 115.1,
lak&hmi.

Vocative Singular Neuter.

A. B. C. There is no example.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Masculine.

A. The analysis of these forms is doubtful. Schleicher sets A
and -H = -yd and -vd; but there are no traces of this origin. For
lack of something better I have put 4 = -t-«, p. 366. Friedrich
Mtlller, Sitzungsberichte d. kate. Ak. d. Wiss. (Vienna, 1860)
xxxv.55, compares the duals devd, kavi, bhd?iU with the singulars
devd, kavX, bhd?tH, and recognizes therein a reduplication of the
end of the word, symbolical of its dual meaning. The same
explanation applies unfortunately to the plurals neuter bhuvand,
pud and trt, and />wr#, as compared with the singulars in -d, 4, -tf.

There are 340 forms (from 72 stems). Disregarding accent,
examples are: indrdgni, 78; patt, 33 ; pubhaspati, 21 ; hari, 78.
For pdpva-ishtt, see p. 380.

The final is short in sakshdni, x.32.l (cf. viii.22.15). So we
have asurd, etc., pivhrd, vird, p. 342; and jigatnu-\ vii. 65.1; and
others below, p. 391, B, and 392 top.

B. The formation of the stem of rnddhvt — it occurs 7 times, as
epithet of the Ae/vins — is uncertain; but md 'dhvtbhydm, VS.
vii. 11, leads us to class it with Ndmty rd'shtri, etc. (p. 367 end),
as a B-form.

C. 1. Root-words: manantd; sadhanid. 2. rathid, 3; rath'td^S*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.V.d.f.] Noun Inflection in the Veda. 391

NoxnfA-nvB, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Feminine.

A. The form occurs 23 times (from 15 stems). They are :
it'i»dti; iiti' ; r'jtti; jdna\2\ ddrvi; dyd'vdbh&'mi, 2; voc, 3 ;
dhdraydtkavi; p&ramdhi; bhuji'/ yuvati\ 3; vdmdhiti, 2; $&ei;
sdyoni; sttprdtdrti; sruti'.

B. Series B and C are here distinctly separated from each other
in the Rik. The Sanskrit form -yati, or even its Vedic equivalent,
-*<f or -Stf, is utterly unknown to the Rik (p. 370). It is really no
B-form, but a transition to C, which at last became universal, and
whose beginnings we see in the Atharvan (cf. C 2).

There are 368 forms (from 76 stems). Examples are (vocatives
included): urui\ 20; devt\ 13; dyd'udprthivi', 65; voc, 15;
prthivi', 20; prthvi', 5; brhatt\ 10; mahi'y 27; yahvtf, 6 and
x.93.1 ; rddasty 87 ; samtcl\ 11. In i. 1 62.21, hdri te yunjd pr' shati
abhdtdm, we cannot interpret pr1 shati — with Gr., Ueb. — as ' the
two spotted gazelles ' of the Maruts, for their team consists of
many. We must assume non-agreement in form between hdri
(masc. — vr'shand, iii.35.5 etc.) and pr1 shati (fern.), and take them
together: 'The two spotted bays (of Indra) are become thy
companions.' But pr'shat-t may be N.d.n. See stems in ant, and
cf. sujdnman-i dhish&ne, i. 160.1. The form aksht\ furthermore,
occurs six times. It is perhaps best referred to B on account of
akshi'bhydm (x. 163.1), akshids (AV. vi.127.3), and -yds (24.2).
Line 13, p. 371, should be corrected accordingly.

Transitions from C : kshoni\ viii.7.22 ; 88.6 : VaL 4.10 ; nadi\
i 135.9 ; for gaun\ cf. p. 373*, 389.

The final appears to oe metrically shortened in the seventh place
of ii.31.5c (stushe ydd vdm prthivl), and of xvLbiAd. In x.93.1,
rndhl dydvdprthivi, and in iv.56.5, prd vdm mdhl dydvi abhl,
perhaps the double consonant made a written 4 needless. In view
of the numerous analogies (p. 390, A), it is better to take them
as real duals in -I, rather than to assume a false reading (p. 377)
or the like.

C. 1. Root-words: abhipriyd, 2; ghrta$r'iyd; AV. viii.2.14,
abhipriyau.

2. Here belong : nad'td; napt'id; yamid, 2 ; sakthid, 2 ; 8rnidy
x.106.6; from cakri\ cakriydy i. 185.1 : ii.34.9: v.30.8: x.89.4 (the
Saman variant, cakrtyauy i.339, shows that this is dual and not I.s. ;
cf. Wb. 429, 1761). The Kathaka has cakrlyau, xxix.7 ; the AV.,
sakthtau, vi.9.1 ; and nddyau, vi. 138.4.

Transitions from B. These are the rule in Sanskrit. The Rik
has not a single instance of it. The Atharvan has the following :
dndiau, vi. 138.2 ; phdlgunyauy xix.7.3 ; and, finally, ak&hyail,
i.27.1: iv.3.3: v.23.3; 29.4: vi.9.1^, lc(ed. -atil): vii.36.1: xix.50.1.
The AV. has no example of Ad.

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neuter.

A. 1. (a) Here belongs $uei (cakre), x.85.12; possibly, p&ciy
iv.56.5 ; and from the AV., tigmdhett (pr'?ige), viii.3.25. (b) In

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

392 C. R. Lanman, [i and t-stems,

KV. ix. 97.54, mdhi (vddhatre) appears with shortened final ; and
so, perhaps, in iv.56.5.

2. BR. and Gr. put hdrini (pr'nge), ix.70.7, under hdrita. I
would rather refer it to hdri. The AV. has dkshinl, x.9.14 and
xi.3.2.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Masculine.

A. Instrumental : indrdgiubhydm, x.128.9 ; hdribhydm, 22
times, and iv. 15. 7, and AV. ii.5.1 ; ddmpatibhydm, AV '. xii.3.27.
Datives: indrdgn'tbhydm, 4, and v. 86. 6a, evd indrdagtubhydm ;
hdribhydm^ 2. Ablatives: kukshibhydm^ AV. ii.33.4, &ndp<in'<b
hydm, verse 6. In no case is -bhidm needed.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Feminine.

A. Instrumental : vartan'tbhydm. Ablatives : pd'rshnibhydtn
and prdnibhydm, x. 163.4 ; prdnibhydm, AV. ix.8.21.

B. Rddakbhydm, D.d.f., i. 136.6; aJcshtbhydm, Ab.d.f., x. 163.1;
I.d.f., AV. xi.3.34 bis.

C. In ii.16.3, kshom'bhydm is I.d.f.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Neuter.
A.B.C. In AV. x.10.21, sdkthibhydm is I.d.n.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masculine.

A. Genitives : indrdgnids, 2 ; hdrio8y 2. Locatives : kiikshios,
2; gdbhasti<>8, or f., 21 ; hdrios, 2. In ix.58.3, purushdtUios does
the duty of an ablative ; cf. p. 344.

C. In x.88.17, yajilanios is genitive.

Genitive and Locative Dual Feminine.

A. Genitive: yuvatyds, 2. Locatives: jdmids, v. 19.4; gari-
ni68y AV. i.3.6 : v.25. 10-13 ; pd'rshnios, vi.24.2.

B. Genitives: 1. akshids, AV. v.4.10 (MSS. and ed., akshdt);
parinr'tya7itio8, AV. x.7.43 ; rddastos, RV., 13 times ; and in the
sense of an ablative (p. 344), vi.24.3 ; from nini — m. nitiid,
oxytone — we have ninios, x.5.1 (cf. p. 369): or, it may stand for
ninidyos, like pastlosy etc., p. 344 : — 2. divasprthivyds, 4 ;
rddasyos, 2. Locatives: 1. ardnios, iii. 29.2 ; pdtantio8y x.24.5;
rddasios, 3; akshids, AV. vi. 127.3: — 2. 8atntcydsy x.24.5;
ardnyos, viLl.l ; drjunyos, x.85.13 ; akshyds, AV. vi.24.2.

C. Genitives: onios, ix.65.11 (cf. Ath. Pr. iii.61) ; cakrios, 2.
Locatives: onios, ix. 16.1 ; 101.14; naptios.

Genitive and Locative Dual Neuter.

A.B.C. There is no example.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine.

A. The exceptional ary-ds (16) is the sole example of its kind.
The stem-final is regularly gunated and the ending added. This
form occurs 523 times (from 109 stems). Examples are : agndyas,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N. V.p.rn.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 393

27; ddrayas, 26; arcdyas, 14; iXrmdyas, 15; fshayas, 26;
kavdyas, 45; pdtayas, 16; racmdyas, 16; vdhnayas, 15 ; vdyas,
38; ptoayas, 18; s&rdyas, 36; hdrayasy 31. In vi.66.1 1, girdyas
is possibly an Ab.s.m. ; cf. p. 383, 384 end. Gr. proposes giribhyas.

Transition from B : Sdbharayas.

Transition from C : dhrayas (p. 372).

Transition to the n-declension (?). In ii.34.2#, * rings' {Jchddirnras
=khdddyas) would be more appropriate than 'wearing rings'
(khdd'tn-as) ; bat this equation is hardly to be allowed.

B. Sole example : siri's.

Transition from C: takvavi's, i. 15 1.5 (p. 373).

C. 1. Root-words : (a) durddh'tas, 2 ; dddhias; devdvias, 2 ;
padavlas; sadhanias; sudhias, 4 ; suddhias, 15 ; grdmamas, AV.
iii. 5. 7. (b) agnicriyas; adhvaracriyas, 3 ; abhipriyas; for
dtrghd 'dhiyas and nd'nddhiyas, cf. p. 369 ; pariprtyas; supriyas,

2 ; kadhapriyas, 2 ; ganacriyas, i.64.9.

2. Here belong : ahias; dpathi'a* (cf. d'pathayas) ; rathias, 3 ;
rathtas, 13 ; for suhastias, ix.46.4, see pp. 368-9.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Feminine.

A. We have aryds, f., i.71.3; 122.14: x.2l.8bis; and of the
usual form, 290 occurrences (from 66 stems). Examples are :
drdtayasy 18 ; ittdyas, 42 ;. hrshtdyas, 17 ; kshitdyas, 13 ; jdnayas,
12 ; dhitdyas, 21 ; matdyas, 20; rdtdyas, 18 ; vrshtdyas, 12.

Transitions from B : dshadhayas, 3 ; see others on p. 372.
Transitions from C : ambdyas; arundyas, x.95.6 ; kshondyas.

B. 1. The uncontracted form is perhaps seen in vd'nias, Val.
11.3d, text, 4s; but the verse may consist of 12, 11, 12, i2.

2. The regular form of the later language (devyds) is almost
entirely unknown in the Rik. Instead of that, we have devt's.
Forms of this kind occur 423 times (from 166 stems). Examples
are: d'rls (vicas), 1.77.3; 96.3 (Gr., A.p.f.) : cf. d'rids; rtd'varts,

3 ; dshadhis, 27 ; devaydntis, 6 ; devt's, 43 ; pdtnis, 11 ; p&rvtfs,
36; bhdti's, 8; mahi's, 11; yahvi's, 7; vdsvis, 6; vd'nts, 12;
sincatfs and sincdntts; for dpicvis, i. 120.8, see p. 372 med.

Transitions from A: avdnis; Qjd'nis; Utis; ndhtts; nirrtis;
nishkrtis ; p&ramdhts, L 123.6 : v.41.6 ; bhti'mis, 2; vicvd-
krsfUis; for crenis, v.59.7, Gr. proposed ^rdyinis — better crenayas;
sdyonts; from the Atharvan : angiitis, x.2.1; rshtl's, i v. 3 7. 8,9;
dhamdms, vii.35.2 ; nd'bhis, xix.53.2 ; pd'rshnts, viii.6.15 ; prshtl's,
x.9.20: xi.8.14; bhil'mis (read -mayasf), xi.7.14. See p. 370 top.

Transitions from C. There appear to be none in the Rik : for
rathi's, viii.84.1, see p. 373 med.; for kshoni's, i.54.1, see p. 372
end. In the Atharvan we have nadt's (but also nadias), iii.24.3,
and laJcshml's (but also -mias), vii. 115.4.

C. 1. Root-words: (a) ddhias, i. 105.7; 105.8=x.33.3; pranias;
from AV., viddhias, vii.114.2 ; in the Rik it would be written
viddhiyas(p. 369): — (b) abhicrtyas, 3 ; dh'tyas, 19; vd'tapramiyas
(p. 369); priyas, 6; dpriyas, AV. xi.7.19.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

394 C. R. /Amman, [i and f -stems.

2. Here belong: (a) amnios, i. 1 40.13; enias, 2; kalydmas;
gaurtas ; nad'ias, 15 ; maydrlas; rathias, vii.21.3 ; vakshvit;
starias; from the AV., ardyiaSy i.28.4 : ii.14.3; tikshmiprng'tm,
viii.7.9; nadtasy vi.24.3 : xix.1.1 ; n&d'ias, x.7.15; maydr'ias, vii.
56.7; ydtudhdnia&y L28 .4 : ii.14.3: xix.47.7; lakshmiaSy vii. 115.3;
vikeptaSj L28.4: xi.2.11; 9.14; viastakepiaSy viii.1.19; sahasra-
parnias, viii.7.13 : — (b) samudriyaSy Rik x.65.13.

3. The stem-final is consonantized in the Rik only in starydm,
vii.68.8^, and nadydy vii.50.4. See p. 379 top, and p. 373 me*l
The Atharvan has: apvatarydsy viii.8.22 ; nadydSy iii.13.1: xl
6.10: xiv.2.7; naptydsy vii.82.6 ; nddyds, x.7.16 ; pippaly&s,
vi. 109.2; vrkshasarpydSy ix.2.22.

Transitions from A: yayiyas, x.78.7; piibhriyaSy AV. xx.48.2;
karkaryds (ed. -yds), iv.37.4.

Transition from B. This has become universal in the later
language. There is only one certain instance of it in the Rik
(strty-aSy vii.55.8). Even in the Atharvan we see only the begin-
nings of the movement, and the N.p.£ of series B ends almost
alwavs in -Is; thus, devf's occurs 19 times as N., and 5 times as A.
We have as N.p.f. urvias, xi.7.18, and elsewhere urvt's (9 times).
The longer form is preferred on account of the metre ; and perhaps
this gave the first impulse to the movement. Here belong : (from
RV.) prpamaSy x.61.8, and suparnias, 88.19: — (from AV.) striyas,
iv.5.2: vLl38.5; urvias, xL7.18; rudatydSy 9.14. Cf. p. 372.

Nominative Aim Accusative Plural Neuter.

A. There is no example of a vocative. The N. and A. have a
series of forms entirely parallel with those of the stems in a, in «,
and in man.

1. Here belong : kriidhmi (mdndnst), vii.56.8 ; p&ci (havyd'),
56.12; and the numeral tri'y 21 times. In vi. 44. 14 and vii.23.3,
(vrtrd'ni) aprati'y the pada has -i.

2. Both texts have -l: (vrtrd'ni) apratty i.53.6: ix.23.7; asthtlri
(gd'rhapatydni)y vi.15.19; jdmi (brdhmdni), vii. 72.3; (d'yudhdtri)
x.8.7 ; bhd'ri (dnndy tdnaydniy nd'ma, etc.), 15 times, ami
x. 120.5,6 ; pdrni (pdrvid'ni, BR.), iii.55.3 ; surabht (mukhd),
iv.39.6 ; and from the AV., apratiy vii.50.l5wy 93.1; 110.1;
bhxl'riy v.2.6 (Rik, v. 1.); 11.7: vi.1.3; mdhi (vdrcdnsi), iv.22.3.

3. The Rik has: aprati'niy 5; bhd'riniy 5 times, and L 165.7c
(bhU'ri in a) ; pucini; surabht '/ii, (havyd\ -yd'ni), 2. The AV.
has: dkshlniy iv.5.5 (Rik, akshd'ni)\ dsthiniy ix.5.23 : xi.8.12:
xii.5.70. In Rik i. 149.4, the metre demands the longer gram-
matical form, tri'ni — text, tri'.

B.C. There is no example. Paradigm : jalapi'ni.

Accusative Plubal Masculine.

A. We find ary-ds 7 times (in 602.7, it is N.am.). The usual
pada-f orm -in occurs 84 times (from 31 stems). It appears in the
samhitd as -tap in i.173.8, and as -mr, 41 times. That is, in one-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A. p.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 395

half of all the instances, we have the direct representative of the
organic form -ins (p. 346). 1. The form -inr appears only in the
interior of a pdda. It occurs (a) before a vowel : viz., before a-,
26 times: as, ix,107.19<2; before iva, in i.52.5; 141.11: iii.45.3 :
iv .30.15: viii.35.21 ; before t-, i.109.3 : iii.38.1; before w-, viii.
26.10: x.69.12; before o-, v. 41.8 ; 42.16; furthermore, (b) before
y-, iv.35.7; before v-, i.127.7 and vi.39.2 ; before /*-, i.184.2. For
the last four cases the Prat., iv.29, makes special provision. 2. In
28 of the other 42 cases, the form appears as -hi at the end of a
pdda: as, giri'n \ tfcZ, x. 138.2 ; and in the interior of a pdday as
-£/#, 10 times — before p- (5 times), £-, £-, «-, y-, tv; as -in or -tni
before «-, i 144.3: iii.4.1 : vii.57.7; and once as -in before j-,
vii.3.8.

Accusatives p.m. are found from the stems: agni; ajdmi, 2; afSfi; dtithi;
ddabdhadhUi; apidki; asushvi, 2; <%'%; dpi; ishudhi; xtdadhi; urmx; r'shi; kavi,
2 ; giri, 4 ; jdmi ; nidhi, 3 ; pani, 9 ; paridhi, 4 ; pradhi ; rapmi, 6 ; vddhri ;
vdriaspdti, 11; vijdmi; vidti* 2; sdkhi, 5; sdtpati; saptarshi; s&ri, 14; sti, 2;
smdddishti.

In vimticyd vtiyo avasd'ya dpvdn, i. 104.1, the stem vi is irregu-
larly gunated before the ending is added. See p. 384, and girdyas,
p. 383.

C. 1. (a) durddhias; dildh'tas, 6; sadhanias. (b) supriyas,
viii.8.17. 2. ahtas; dushprdvias; rathtasy 2. As a transition-
form — from A — cf. avdniyas, AV. Paric., quoted by BR.

Accusative Plural Feminine.

A. We find ary-ds 4 times. The usual form in -** occurs 122
times (from 42 stems). In i.140.9, I take variant r as N.s.f. — p.
377. For drdtis, N.s.f., vi.4.5, see p. 376. For supposed forms in
-ias — text -is — see p. 371 adfln.

The stems are: dndnubhdti; abhbndti, 5; abhipasti; abhi'ti; drdti, 16; av&ni,
6; avyathi; dputL 5; ishti; %U%\ 3; ruTai; krshti, 16; krshn&yoni; tehiti, 8;
(jaryuti; carshani, 7; j&ni, 3; tvishi; ditrmati, 2 ; pakti, 3; pankti ; pwramdhi, 7 ;
pu*hti; prtouti, 2; prshti; liMtmi, 3; mati 4; mdrici ; yuvatx; vdhkri; variant,
iv.19.2 ; vasati; pakti, 2; sdmiti; sdyoni; sdtx; suhshili, 3; sumaii, 2; sushtuti^
2; stuti; srakti; hetL

The A. p.m., vdyas% would seem to support ciir6tayasy x. 140.3,
as A.p.f To this we may add p&cayas (dnu svd'h), AV. v. 1.3.
C£ p. 384.

B. The form coincides with that of the nom., and with that of
the ace. of A. It occurs 310 times (from 106 stems). Examples
are : ddevts, 10 ; dshadhts, 24 ; dd'st8y 9 ; pdi?its, 7 ; pHrvVs^ 40 ;
pr'shatiSy 7; brhatts, 12; maht's, 18. In viii.50.16, d is cata-
lectic; we need not assume the uncontracted form ddevias — text,-?*.

Transitions from C : arunf's, i. 1 1 2. 1 9 : i v. 2. 1 6 ; ydtudhdn tsy A V.
iv.18.7c (the metre would allow the reading -ias). For nad'io,
ix.9.4 — Gr., nadts — see p. 373. I take kshom's, i.57.4, as N.s.f. ; so
also cakatts^ x.146.3; and as N.s.m., rathts% iii.30.11.

0. 1. (a) ddhias, AV. vi.131.1. (b) dh'iyas, RV. 46 (and AV. ix.
2.25); cr'tyas, 12; bhiyas, AV. iv.31.7 (Rik bhiyam)..

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

896 0. R. Lanman, [t and Osteins.

2. (a) ashtakarnias; kildsias; khdrias; dehias, 2 ; nadias, 9 ;
naptias; meshias; yam'tas; ydtudhdnias, 2 ; starias. From the
A V., ardy'im, iv.17.5; 18.7,8; nadias, vll2.3: vii.38.5; naptias,
ii.14.1; ydtudhdnias, L28.2 : iv.9.9 ; 20.6: jrix.36.2 ; 39.1,5,8;
sambddhaiandrias, x.2.9. (b) samtidAyas, RV. i.25.7 ; 55.2.

Transitions from B : yahvias and suparnias (but see p. 372) ;
stiriry-as.

INSTRUMENTAL PLURAL MASCULINE.

A. The ending is added directly to the stem : as, agni-bhis. The
form occurs 258 times (from 40 stems).

The stems are: agni, 10; dj&mi; afy'i, 10: ddri, 43; arct, 2 ; aw, 4: avyathi;
dghdti, or f.; upabdi, 2 ; flrmt, 5; rtddhiii; r'*W, 10; Aavi, 7 ; jttmf, 3: rfro«i^xi«i;
nidhi; pani; pa£hi12$; pavi, 2; J>«nt; prdshti; bh&'ri, 3; rayi; ra^jroi 36;
vdnaspdU; vdhni, 5; w, 9; vidupavi, 2; vfrfupdm; ptict, 2; tdfcfct, 16 ; wipth ;
*4ptf; s&'dhadishti ; sudUi, 5; sfirt, 14; svdyukti; svSddnji; hart, 23; Atronya-

C. Here belong only three words : mddhi'bhis, 2 ; ganapi'bhis
(p. 372); and hiranyavdptbhis.

Instrumental Plural Feminine.

A. The form is like that of the m. : HB,jdni-bhis. It occurs 365
times (from 48 stems).

The stems are : dciUi; acha-ukti, 3 ; abhishti, 7; arishtatdti; avyathi; apani;
asdmi; ishti, 2; drt, 100: r'jft*; rafat, 6; fa*A/t; ?4rti; ct/tf, 5; cittt; /Ait,
5; /dmt, 4; dtfdhiH; devavtti; devdhiUi, 4; dyumndhCUi; dhUi, 27; n<i»MX-t4A*rt;
p&ribh&ti; prdniti; prdcasti, 8; wiatf, 37; ytwatf, 2; ratf, 3; wiO'twdtf ; vishti:
vrsMi, 4 ; pdAtf, 2 ; (utdbhuji ; c&mtdti ; fasti ; ereni ; sdhiUi, 2 ; sunUi, 2 ; sumatu
6; ntvr^i 18; sttfasti, 6; sushtxUi, 2; svdyukti; svdvrkti; suasti, 7, and in the
refrain of the Vasishtha-hjmns, 75 times; sudpi; havydddti, 4.

Transition from B : ardnibhis, 2.

In nine instances, the word Mi' is shown not only by the sense,
but also by the forms of the adjectives in concord with it, to be
Lp.f. : as, tvd'bhir Hti\ ii.20.2; and in iv.29.1, it is parallel with
vd'jebhis.

B. The form is distinguished from that of A only by the stem-
final: as, dnvt-bhis. It occurs 113 times (from 32 stems).

The stems are: dnvi; drushi; drvati; apmanm&yi; ashtd'padt; dtmanM;
d'yasty 2; dshadhi, 6; jdratt; javini; tavishi, 13; dvayf; dhautari; ndvyasi,l;
pdtni ; p&rvt', 4 ; pr' shaft, 5 ; pravdtvati ; brhatt' ; bhd'ratt ; mahtf, 4 ; yahvV ;
rd'trt; vamrt' ; vdr&trt; vdsvi; vd'nl; vd'fi, 3; c&ct, 36; palint, 4; (dmi, 8;
sahasrtnt, 4.

C. 1. dhibhis, 37 (and AV. v.20.8); pribhls. 2. kalydnt'bhis;
Jcshoni'bhiSy 2 ; nadi'bhis; napti'bhU.

Transition from B. The word strf-bhls I would put here rather
than directly under B, on account of the accent. Herein it fol-
lows the general rule for monosyllables of series C.

Instrumental Plural Neuter.
A.B.C. There is no example.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.Ab.p.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 397

Dative and Ablative Plural Masculine.

The general ending, -bhyas, is affixed directly to the stem : as,
vi-bhyas. The two cases are coincident in form, but are grouped
here according to the exegesis.'

A. Datives. There are 44 forms (from 9 stems). The stems
are: r'sAt, x.14.15; rsh'tbhyas, Val. 11.6 (the accent is perhaps a
mere blunder of the tradition) ; ddpdvani; pdti, 3 ; yati; vi;
c\i-ci; sdkki, 21, and in. 3 1.1 5 ; sani, 4 ; sdri, 9.

Ablatives. There are 17 forms (from 12 stems). The stems are:
agni; dtri; Jcavdrt; gir%, 3 (Gr. proposes giribhyas, vi.66.11 ; see
N.p.m.); pant; pavi ; pldpi ; vdnavpdti ; vi; sdkhi,4; sant;
sthivi.

C. The only example in the Rik is the dative, rta-rii'-bhyas,
ii.27.1 2, with shortened f . Cf. sendn'ibhyas and pvanibhyas, p. 372.

Dative and Ablative Plubal Feminine.

A. Datives : kshitibhyas; carshanibhyas, 6.
Transition from B : nd'Abhyas, viii.46.8 ; -bhias, i.43.6.
Ablatives : anhatibhyas; kthit'ibhyas, 2 ; carshanibhyas; jdni-

bhyas, x.1 83.3 ; angulibhyas and dhamdnibhya8y AV. ii.33.6.

B. Datives : (a) tdvishtbhyas ; from A v., gandharvdpattri-
bhyas, iL2.5 ; papvati'bhyas (sic), v.8.8 : vi. 75.2,3 : — (b) at the end
of catalectic pddas (Gr., -bhias) : dshadhtbhya*, ix.11.3 ; vrshan-
ydntibhya8y 19.5; gnoshtnibhyas, AV. xi.2.31a/ kep'tntbhyas, b.

Ablatives : (a) dshadhtbhyas, vii.50.3 : — (b) SshadhibhyaSy
ii. 1.1 ; brhati'bhyas, viii.3.19; add padvdtlbhyas, vi.59.6.

C. Dative: apart' bhy as, i.32.13.

Dative and Ablative Plural Neuter.

A.B.C. The Rik has no example. In AV. ii.33.6, BR. suggest
asthtibhyas for asthibhyas (dsthi), Abl.

Genitive Plubal Masculine.

The oxytone stems of series A and B accent the case-ending in
the m. and f. (and n.) of the genitive plural. This seems anoma-
lous, since it happens although the stem and ending are separated
by the consonant n. Cf. ilrmi-d\ tfrmi^n-d (p. 367).

A. L Oxy tones. There are 80 forms (from 11 stems). 1.
kavmd'm, 12 ; girind'm, 3 ; carshanindhn, vi.22.1 ; panind'm, 3 ;
pathind'm, v. 1.11 ; mathind'm?, Val. 5.8; raytndm, 31 times,
and in vil.8; sanind'm. Besides these the AV. has: kavind'm,
vi.47.3: vii.22.1: xiv.1.53; girlnd'rn, x.4.14; devajdmfnd'm, \\.
46.2 : xvi.5.6 ; 8.6 ; pathmd'm^ ix.5.19 ; mantnd'm, xix.31.11 ;
raymd'm, , iii.10.5: vi.62.2 : vii.40.2 ; 79.4; 80.3 (cf. Rik) ; 109.6:
x.9.27: xi.1.34: xvi.3.1 ; 4.1; vapind'm, MSS. xix.24.6. Compare
the numerals, trind'm, tisrnd'm, catitrnd'm, saptdnd'm, navdnd'ni,
dapdnd'm, taptattnd' m, and navatind}m.

2. The word stands at the end of a catalectic pdda of 7 syllables,
where Gr. reads -aam: kavTnd'm, ix.67.13 ; giriud'm, 2 ; carsham-
nd'rn, 8, and see feminines; nidhind'm; patund'm,3; raymd'm,7.
vol. x. 54

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

898 0. R. Lanman, \i and i-stems.

3. Resolution seems necessary in agntndam, x.78.3 ; kavmdam,
ix.64.10; rayindam, vi.45. 19; vindam, i.25.7.

II. Barytones. There are 48 forms (from IV stems). 1. dtrindm,
2; dvindm ; dhindm, 2; r'shindm, 10 times, and i.84.2; gan-
dhd'rindm; puclndm; sdkhlndm; havirmdthlndm.

2. The word stands at the end of a catalectic pdda of seven
syllables, where Gr. reads -aam: dvindm, 2; r'shindm, v.66.5 ;
tuvishvdntndm (prd adhvarb is a refrain-like pdda) ; dhunindm,
2 ; mahishvdiitiidm ; vdnaspdtindm ; vimahtndm; vidtindm;
p&cindm ; sdkhindm, i.30.11: iv.31.3: vii.32.25 ; hdrindm^ iv.
48.5; and viii.24.17; 33.12; 46.1. In viii.24.23, cardritndm is at
the end of a catalectic jagatt (i. e. trishtubh) pdda.

3. Resolution seems necessary in r'shtnaam, v.65.6 : x.22.1 ;
mtimnaam, viii.17.14 ; sdkhbiaam, v.64.5 ; hdrtnaam, v.33.2:
viii.24.14; 25.23: x.23.1 ; and ix. 105.5.

B. In viii.20.8,'we may pronounce sdbharinaara^ or -dm.

C. Here belong aht'ndm, x. 139.6 ; rathVndm (Gr., -aam)% Ll 1. 1 :
viii.45.7; nadi'naam, v.74.2. The accent of atasi'ndm, viii.3.13,
would seem to refer it to a C-stem, atasi'f.

Genitive Plural Feminike.

A. I. Oxytones. There are 91 forms {from 13 stems). 1.
krshtind'm, 9 times, and vii.26.5 ; kshittndm, 8 ; carsharund'vt^
12 (m. in 463, 1); jdmind'm; ditrmattnd'm, i.l29.8#, Mb; dhau-
ttnam; matt7id'my 14 times, and iii.49.3; rayhid'm, i.68.7 (usually
m.) ; sumattnd'm. I add from AV., grshtind'm, ii. 13.3 : xix.24.5;
carshanind' m, xiii.1.38: matind'm, xiii.1.33; 3.19: xviii.3.63.

2. The word stands at the end of a catalectic pdda of 7 sylla-
bles, where Gr. reads -aam: Jcavhid'm, x.22.10; kshithid'm, 5;
carshanind'm7 14, and see masculines: in x. 126.6, dti dvtshah is a
refrain; durmatind'm, i. 129. 8c, lie: viii.46.19; matind'm^i; *w-
hshitind'm; sumattnd'm, 3 ; smhtutind'm, 2.

3. Resolution seems necessary in krshtlndam, vi. 45.16 : (not
in 542,5:) viii.57.7 ; pxishtindam, x.26.7 ; matlndam, x.26.4 (ami
not in 283, 3).

II. Barytones. There arc 7 forms (from 5 stems). 1. jdnmdm.
3 ; mdrtchidm. 2. At the end of a catalectic pdda of seven sylla-
bles, where Gr. reads aam : upastutindm; nirrtindm; p&ehuhn.

B. It seems to be the rule for the Rik that even the oxy-
tone stems ending in long i shift the accent to the case-suffix in
the G.p.

I. Oxytones. There are 11 forms (from 6 stems). 1. yatind'm,
Ll 1 3.8 bis; 124.2; bahvmd'm, i.95.4 : vi.75.5 ; bfiaiijatind'm,
x. 103.8 ; bhdttnd'm, i.113.15 : iv.13.1 ; bhutijatind'm, x.89.17;
mahind'm, viii. 19.31 (SV. ii.l 173, maht'ndm — but not "ric/Uiger"
as Gr. says). We need not refer strotd'm, AV. vii.13.1 : viii.6.13,
to C, as a transition-form, since its accent is regular for B.

Exceptions. There is no genuine exception for whicli the Rik does not show a
counter-example with accented case-ending. (1 .) In iii.l .12, mahi'ndm occurs with
unconformable accent; the first part of the hymn, 1-14. is of mystical character.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G.p.f.] " Noun- Inflection in Hie Veda. 399

The AY. has ndrdfans?ndm, xv.6.4, and rdthajiteyVndm, vi. 130.1. (2.) The word
stands at the end of a catalectic pdda, where Gr. reads -aam. Yatt'ndm occurs
in i. 158.6; but verse 6, the last, belongs to the preceding five neither in sense nor
metre. Gr. thinks it may owe its origin to a gloss. Mahi'ndm occurs in x. 134.1
— a hymn whose style marks it as late— and in ix.102.1. Pdda b of i.36.1 reads
virtl'm derayati'ndm. I suspect that this is a mere metrical substitute for deva-
ydnHndm. The law with regard to the place of the accent, p. 367 top, holds good
in the formation of feminine participles, so that the stem must be either devayatV
or devayantt. It should, like all other feminine participles of denominatives, be
the latter (devaydntindm : cf. i.77.3); but since the metre requires a short syllable
in the fifth place, the n is dropped and the accent shifted accordingly. For
kani'ndmy see p. 364. (3.) Resolution seems necessary in mahi'naam, v.45.3.

II. Barytones. There are 62 forms (from 28 stems). 1. dtish-
thantindm; drushtndm; iyHshtndmy 3 ; dshadhindm, 6 ; gdmat-
indm ; jdyantindm ; trtarushtndm ; daiv?ndmy 2 ; ?idvya8i?idm
(mar&tdm!); padvdtindm; md'nu8hindmy 6 ; revdti?idm; vattin-
huhn; pdctndm; cdpvat$ndmy 7 ; sr'tvartndm.

2. The word stands at the end of a catalectic pdda of 7 sylla-
bles, where Gr. reads -aam: apmanmdyindm; 6datindmy viii.58.2;
d'rndvatindm; dshadhitidm^ 8 ; ndvyasindm (m.) ; pr'shatindm,
2 ; md'nieshitidm, 2 ; ydtumdtindmy 2 ; y6yuvatindmy viii.58.2 ;
rdpushindm; vihtit 'matin dm; vavarj'dshindm; cdcindmy3; cdpvat-
indmy 3 : and viii.17.14, at end of trishtubk; ciprtrtindm ; sani-
shyd?itindm.

3. Resolution seems necessary in cyd'vinaam, viii.46.22.

C. I. Root-words: (b) dhiyd'm, v.44.13: — (c) dhind'm, 7;
grind' m; hiranyavi'ndmy y'm.bA.10. 2. (c) arum'fidm; nadi'ndm,
14: -dm, Gr. -aam, 5; purushi'ndm, Gr. -aam; svari'ndmy x.68.7,
see p. 369. Krimi'ridm — AV. v. 23. 13, sdrveshdth ca krimindm,
sdrvdsdm ca krimi'ndm — should be added on p. 369.

Genitive Plural Neuter.
A. B.C. There is no example.

Locative Plural Masculine.

A. There are 37 forms (from 16 stems). These are: dkavi;
vgn'i, 3 ; anjly 2 ; dsamdti; djiy 8 ; dpi; r'shi; hhdd't; gir\; nidhi;
patht; pavt; yoniy 5; rapm't ; cubhrt; stiri, 8. Example:
ngn'tshu. For B and C there is no example.

Locative Plural Feminine.

A. There are 60 forms (from 21 stems — all but 3 in -ti) : as, Ht\-
shu. The stems are : abhimdti; ishti; ut't; rshti; krshtiy 6 ; kshitiy
3; gdvishtiy 6; d'ivishtiy 11 ; devdhUti; pdrishti; pushti; prdnitiy
2; prdtHrti ; prdyukti; yd'mahtiti, 2; rdtty 3; viitshti, 13 times,
and i.171.5 ; sdti; further, avyathi; jdrni; pubhr't, v. 34. 8.

Transition from B: nd'rishuy x.86.11a. The \ is metrically
favored as penultimate in a pdda of 8 syllables.

B. There are 64 forms (from 30 stems) : as, yati'shu. The stems
are: dpnasvati; dmdnusht; d'runi; yatV ; 6shadhiy 19, and x.1.2;
garbhmi; gdmat i; citrint; jdgati, 2 ; tdruni; tdvishiy 2 ; ndvyasi;

Digitized by VjOOQIC

400 C. R. Jjanman, * [wand

nd'hushi, 3; pdrushni; ptirvi' ; pr'shcUi; prajd'vati; 7nd'muhi,%\
mrkshini; y<thvi\ 2 ; rdhini, 2 ; vd'ni; vd'pt; vrjafit'; pdkoari,
2; pripvatt: -tt\ p. 368; s'tshdsanti; snthitl; hdrini; jdhati

Transition from A : svd'hdkrthhu, i. 188.11 (t metrical ?).

C. 1. dhlshu^i. 2. apart 'aAu, 3; arunV&hu; nadi'shuy9.

Transition from B : strishti, AV. vi.11.1 : vii.90.3 : xii.1.25.

Locative Plural Nkuter.
A. B.C. The only example is bhtt'rishu (d'gah&u), viii.45.34.

Declension op art', jdm, pati, sakhi, etc.

The stem art is declined thus : N.B., arts, 10 ; in i.4.6, Bollensen suggests ar?s
=ary-ds (tripos); A., arim, 2; an/dm, viii.33.14 (G.p. -yd'ml); D., ardye; G.,
arias, 3 ; aryd*, 3ft — p. 384; N.p.m., aryds, 16; A., 7 ; N.p.f., 2, and x.27.8 6w;
A., 4. All the forms (except the N, A., and D s.) are irregular, especially in the
accent, and coincide with the N. or A.s.m. of the stem aryd. See Wb. 115.

The stem jdni, f., has the following forms : N.s., jdni (transition to B) ; G.,
jdnyus; N.p., janayas, 12; A., jdnts, 2, and viii.17.7 : -ibhis, 5; -ibhyas, x. 183.3;
-indm, 3.

PdH is declined regularly in the sense of 'lord,' and in composition; when
unoom pounded and meaning ' husband,' it has the forms pdtye, 8 ; pdtyus; patyau,
2 (cf. p. 388). The regular forms are : pate, 35 ; pdtis, 72 ; -twi, 49 ; pdtid; -yd, 2;
(for patind, pdtaye, pates, cf . p. 382 ;) patt, 33 ; -aya>, 16 ; -ibhyas} 3.

From the stem sdkhdy come the forms: sdkhd, 76 ; -dyam, 27 ; -dyd% 6; ~*tyau;
-dyas, 65. The others come from sdkhi: sakhe, 11; sdkhia\ 5; -yd, 3; -ye, 10;
-yt«, Ab.; -yus, 7; -ttu, 2; -In, 5; -ibhis, 15; -ibhyas, D., 22; -ftAyoj, 4; «wm,
4; -imam, v. 64.5.

In like manner are declined most of the compounds of sdkhC The following
are found in the N.s.m. : asmdt- ; indra- ; kdnva- ; gd-shakhd ; nrvdt- ; mat- ;
marut-% 4 (and as fern., vii.96.2: x.86.9); sushakhd', 2. Besides these, are found:
gdsakfidyam ; svshakhd'yas, 2. Four compounds show transition to the o-declen-
sion: drdvaydt-sakha-m, x. 39.10c; ydvayat-sakJi&s, x.26.6d; pataydt (sc. -sakham)
mandaydtsakJia-m, i.4.7c. For the omission, cf. the German Ein- und Ausgang.
I suspect the metro has something to do with these transitions; and perhaps the
tradition once had prdyavdtsakhas at the end of viii.46.12a, where our text has
-khd.

The peculiar form in -yus is common to jdni, pdti, and sdkhi. Bopp, YgL Gr*
§198, considers pdty-au and sdkhy-au as organic forms. I should regard them
rather as due to false analogy, -au being apprehended as a case-ending.

In the AY., x.8.39, we have the N.s.m., ekapatni-s. This form, like hiranyavdfte,
RV. vii.97.7, belongs to a category that I have not distinctly set up, namely, the
masculine compounds of feminine stems in t.

STEMS IN U AND 6.

The declensional system of the u and ^-sterns is closely analo-
gous to that of the stems in i and t (p. 365). There is, however,
one important difference. The forms of the i and /-stems show
that there were three distinct methods of declension, by means
of three series of endings, A, B, and C. The forms of the
stems in u and H show that in the Vedic period their declensional
resources were confined entirely to the series A and C. The
few sporadic instances of B-forms from w-stems only confirm this
statement. The forms which are even preferred by the later

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

fi-stems.] Noun- Inflection in Oie Veda. 401

grammar — as, dhenvai, dhenod's, dhenn&'m — are in reality transi-
tions to the ^-declension, and do not belong to the w-deelension at
alL As stated at the end of p. 366, the apparent case-suffixes of
the 2-stems were -d, -ai, -ds, -dm, etc. ; and after this analogy the
forms dhenvai, etc., were made. The originality of such a form
as hdnv-ds (Schleicher, Conip.* p. 538 §252) must be denied.
The two series, mutatis mutandis, are as follows :

Series A. Series C.

V s

o as

a' 8

Of as

um

6 ns

Of am

Of as

u&'

u bhis

Of d

Of bhis

o e

u bhyas

Of e

Of bhyas

0 8

dn d'm

&' as

Ofn dm

o i

u shu

Ofi

Of shu

o

u u

u

Of

d

u bhyd

m

(f

bhyd

m

U 08

of

OS

Series A was applied to the stems in short u, including many
masculines, but few neuters, aud very few ferainines. It was
applied without distinction of gender, save that the neuters of
course had in the N. and A., no ending in the s., 4 in the d., and -*
in the p. The later grammar has rules confining the " inserted /i"
to the neuter in certain cases; but in the Veda we have neuters
without n (as, vfdtiu, mddhau) and masculines with n (as,
cd'ninas). Here belong, moreover, a number of stems in #, the
character of whose final is not always entirely clear, but which are
treated declensionally as if the u were suffixal.

In some, etymological evidence shows that the u is not radical. Such are :
abhi-jnu, mitd-jhu, dru, sti-dru, p&tu-dru, snu} ghrtii-mu (cf. jd'nu, dti'ru, sd'nu) ;
khara~jru (root 2jar) ; d-gru (gir) ; puru-ksM, kshu (ghas); d-psu (bhiis); -psu
(bhds), with aruryi-, ahruta-, rta-, prushitd-, vigvd-, vicva'-, vr'sha- ; sishnu (san) ;
piprn (par). Guf in the compounds of -gu with d-, puslUi-, pr'pni-, bhOfri-, sapta-,
and in su-gu, is a peculiar modification of go, ' cow.' We might see its parallel in
rdhad-ri, p. 384, if the metre did not make the assumption of a stem -ri doubtful.
In other cases, the final d (or a + nasal) of a root is dropped and replaced by the
suffix u: thus, yu (genitive, yds), sva-yk, pubham-yu (cf. rub?iam-yd'); anushthu,
su-shihu {sthd; but cf. sthb-rd, sthdv-vra); ddhri-gu, vanar-gu, cdci-gu {gam); d-kliu
(khan, khd-td).

Some words whose final element is a root ending in a short vowel are declined
entirely as if the u were a suffix. Such are : dyit, ddyu, dbhidyu, ddfadyu; didyu;
aprdyu (yu, yuyoti) ; dsmrta-dhru (cf. varuna-dhru-t) ; prthu-shtu (siu, * conglobari) ;
wshtu (6tauti). In mitd-dru, the root is used substantively as part of a bahuvrVii;
and so possibly in sa-dru, AY. xv.7.1. In hari-dru, Rik x.94.12, the accent is
probably wrong ; read haridravas.

The compounds of bhd ought to be declined according to G ; but even in the
Veda there are many forms from stems in short u. In the enumerations, I have
entered them as transition-forms (0 to A) ; but perhaps the general statement, p.
403, would have sufficed.

Series C was applied to oxytone stems in long ??', and their
sometimes barytone compounds. Here belong

1. Stems whose final element is a root: as, nabho-ju\ vtra-su';
monosyllabic substantives and their adjective compounds: as,^',

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

402 C. R. Lanman, [u and

sd', m. ; dd\ bhU', bhrd\ srd\ f. ; svblvd', m.f. Two words whose
final element is a root ending (according to the dictionaries) in fi
are declined as if the final were il. For such forms we ought
probably to set up stems in long d as follows : raghu-dru!
\drdndnd, iv.4. 1 ) ; ghrtn-snti,' (of. ghrtasnd\ prd-snautu, nans),
find: mil::dd:dd. Sec Gr. 623, and cf. gd and jdgd. To
these we may perhaps add mitrarkrd' ; cf. krtfrrd. The snu of
vrdhasnti is a suffix — Lindner, p. 112.

2. A few oxytone f. substantives (a) corresponding to barytone
masculines: agrd' (dgru), 'maid;' kadrd! (kadru), ' soma- vessel ;'
guggulti' {gtiggnlu), an Apsaras ; jatU' (jdtu, n.), 'bat;' dhanil'
(dhdnu), 'sand-bank;' prddkti' (pr'ddku), 'serpent;' pvapru'
(pvdpura), ' mother-in-law ;' likewise the adjective madha' (mddhu),
' sweet.' (b) To several others there is no corresponding in. :
kuhd', ' new-moon ;' camil', ' bowl ;' juhti', ' tongue ;' juhd', ' sacri-
ficial ladle;' ta//tf', 'body;' prajand'; vadhd\ 'bride;' vipu' ?,
' nest'

3. The feminine of a large number of stems of very varied
character (p. 367) is formed by long t, and the largest part of the
stems in % are feminines of this description. Long U is not used
in forming the feminine, except that of tfc-steins. And of these,
many remain unchanged in the f. (cf subdhds, m., viii.17.8; £,
ii.32.7), while others take long t The stem tanu forms its f. in
all three ways : tanH\ tanti,^ and tanvt. (Cf. the double feminines
prabhti! , prabhm' ; madhil ', mddhvi; vibhti', vibhvt; bibhatsti,
-$iV.) For the Veda, it Beems necessary to set up the following
feminine stems in it' (from the Rik and Atharvan), corresponding
to oxytone masculines in &' : ahhoyd1 ; asitajnti! ; tanH\ adj. ;
durhandyd* ; pataydlti! ; pdrayishnd! ; prpandytf,'; maudrayH' ;
mahiyft' / mumukshii'; sandy d! ; sddayitnd' (of these them, does
not actually occur in the Rik) ; aghdyd'; apasyti'; abhidipsu- ';
avasyil'; dyti! ; udanyd' ; caranyd! ; carishnd' ; jlghatsU1 ; didht-
shd' ; duvasyd' ; dravitnd' ; panasyil' ; prtandyd! ; babhru';
bibhatsd1 ; makhasyd! ; vacasytt' ; vipanyti,' ; pnnd/iyti'; sudru- ' ;
further, nabhand! ; nrtd* ; GuiigiU ; Saranyu; Kama-dyd*. The
last five are substantives. The *d of kama-dyd' is rather char-
acteristic of the f. than radical ; but a m. kama-dyd does not
occur. In like manner mitra~krdr might be taken as £ of mitra-krii.
The AV. has kid'mbti, corresponding to kiyd'mbti, n., of the Rik.

Finally, several masculiues (other than those included under
1.) belong to C: prdpd' ; makshd' ; krkaddpd'; dtaptatand;
sdrvatand.

The final thematic D, is sometimes " split" into uv before the
vocalic endings of C. This occurs regularly (l) in monosyllabic
substantives always : as, jtivas, bhuva; (2) in compounds whose
last member is a verbal root : as, nabhojdvax, inayo-bhdvas; (3) in
feminine adjectives in u' preceded by y, to avoid the combination
yv ; as, apasyuvas; and so with agrdJ, kadrd', bibhatsd'. The
forms of compounds of verbal roots in t are written with iy only
when a double consonant precedes (brahma-prtyam, gdthd-nium,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

?l-stems.] Noun* Inflection in the Veda. 403

p. 369). This restriction does not hold for the stems in radical &'.
The Rik has uv very often after a single consonant : as, vasti-
juvam. This happens in the great majority of instances at the
end of a pdda, and possibly the syllable uv was written in order
to fill out the metre for the eye. Of course, vibkvdm has just as
many syllables as dbhuvam. The stems whose forms are written
as we should expect — with u rather than uv — are in fact the
exceptions, and are: ghrtapH\ vishnd-pu" ; vi-bhH\ su-bhii1 ;
surd-$ti! ; d-stiy nava-8ti\ pra-sfi\ vipvasu'. The T8. appears to
have no fixed rule with regard to the use of uv. Of. tanuvam,
i.5.54 ; indravdyuvds, iii.l.6a; bdhuvds. i.7.139; ilruvds, v.5.9a ;
suvar, always; but svasti. See Ind. Stitd. xiii.105,106.

In the Rik, the distinctions between the u and ^-declensions
(A and C) are for the most part strictly maintained, except in the
compounds of bhU. The transitions to B are merely sporadic.

. I. Transitions prom A.

A to B. The Rik has only three forms that fall under this
category: 'tshvai, vi.75.15; ishvds, x.18.14; suod'stvds, viii.19.37.
All these are plainly verses of late date. The AV. has urvdrud's.

A to C. In viii.46.6, we have (indram) dbkiruam. In x.28.8,
perhaps sudr&am is to be taken as f. Although a root- word,
dprdyu is properly declined according to A (p. 401) ; but in i.89.1,
we have dprdyuvas. The masculines madhydyuvas, mitrdyuva*,
cramaytivas (N.p.), and madhHyuvd (V.d.) are hardly to be
accounted for, except as transition-forms. We need not try to
explain the grammatical monstrosity papvd' (N.d.m., accent !),
x. 106.3. The character of the hymn is such that none of its
anomalies can surprise us. The TS. has hdnHbhydm.

n. Transitions from C.

C to A. This is the most important category, even in the
Veda. It becomes still more so in the later language, where
stems ending originally in long H are replaced by others in short
n. Cf. BR., s.v. praohu-. In the Rik, about ten stems ending
originally in ti, show secondary forms (about 35) from stems in
u. In ix.86.1, we have dhi-jdvas (dhi-jdr). Gr. derives sabar-dhu-m
(dhenum), x.61.17, from dhU ; cf. dhti-noti and dhii-noti. The
compounds of bhU pass into the ^-declension with especial fre-
quency. Thus we have: dprabhu, -us; dbh& (from d-bhil' .?),
-um 2; purubhti, ~ti, V.d.m. ; prabhti (AV. xiii.4.47, prabhtV-s),
-us 4, -#m, -6s; rnayobhti, -us 4, und, -u (N.p.n.), -tt'n; vibhu, -its
8, -urn, -dvas (for Vibhubhis, see N.p.m.) ; pambhu, -tis 2, -i\
(V.d.m.), -H' (A.d.m.). Perhaps the short 0, of (vikshu) dyil'shu,
i.58.3, is due to the metre, since it is the penultimate of a jar/atf-
pdda. For bibhatsu's (mdtd')y see p. 402 med.

The Atharvan has: abhibhu'm, x.6.29; purubM\ iv.25.1, where there is good
reason for restoring the true C-form, -bhuvd (see N.d.m.); sujiu'nd, xii.2.11 (cf.
pavitrena su-ptf-d, from 8u-p&', VS.i.3) ; for dushtano, see V.s.m. The VS. has
from udbku'. (firman) udbhau, xv.l.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

404 C. R. Lanman, [u and

C to B. The only instances in the Rik are pvaprud'my x. 85.46
(a late verse), sud'm (? see L.s.f.), and dramtnu-d! (dhiyd'). The
last I regard as a transition-form on account of its accent : the
C-form would be -n<i-d. On the other hand, it is better to refer
mehatnu-d' to a stem -nH! (not -nit'). TanH' as a dual (x. 183.2)
would be unparalleled ; see L.s.f.

The Atharvan shows a good beginning in this direction, and contains the fol-
lowing B-form8: kuhd'm^ tan&'m, vadh&'m; vadhvai, cvacrvai; pu7iarbhur.it;
prddkud's, svaprud's; tanudml; *igruvai and rujjvdm. The VS. has ars&'m. for
asu'-am.

III. Transitions to the N-Declension.

In explaining the case-forms with internal n from /-stems (p.
873) it was natural to point to the analogy of the frequent in-
stems ; but since there is no class of stems ending in ww, grave
exception may be taken against the term " n-declension." I have
used it, however, for the sake of convenience and brevity.

As with the i and ^-sterns, this " transition" is universal in the
G.p. of A and C, the only exception being jdguvdm. The n is
also seen in series A in the Ls.m. (108 forms, 31 stems), in the
G.s.m. (cd'runas and drunas), in the Ls.n. (39 forms, 15 stems),
D. (mddhune), Ab. (mddhunas, sd'nunas), G. (27 forms, 4 stems),
L. (d'yuni, sd'nuni), and in the N.A.p. (127 forms, 14 stems).

Here Benfey puts abhiru-nam, despite the accent ( Vedica, p.
123— but see" 131), VS. vi.17 (= AV. vii.89.3, abhi'runam). In
ix.65.30, d! rayim df sucetnnam (vrnimahe), one must see a stem
8ueeti'ma = mcetand, or change the reading to sucetund (adv.),
or take the form as A.s.m. of sucetu.

The following synopses exhibit the terminations of the
inflectional forms :

Series A. Masculine.

Singular : N., -us, -?*'; A., -um ; L, -ud, -vd, -und; D., -ue, -re,
-ave; Ab., -vas, -os; G.,-uasf,-vas,-u?ict8,-os,-av-asf; L., -av-i,
-au, -df; V., -o.

Dual: N.A.V., -il (iti), -iX; I.D.Ab., -ubhydm; G.L., -uos.

Plural : N.V., -avas, -uas, -vas, -dvasf; A., -tin, -tmp, -unr,
-vets; I., -ubhis; D.Ab., -ubhyas ; G., -ilndm, -ilnaam ; L., -ushu.

Feminine.

Singular: N., -us; A.,-wm; L, -ud, {-u-jy-ti! , adv.,) -vd; D.,-ave;
Ab.G., -os; L., -au; V., -o.

Dual: N.A.V., -/* (Hi); L., -uos.

Plural: N.V., -avas, -vas; A., -Us, -vas; I., -ubhis; Ab., -ubhyas;
G., -ilndm, -ilnaam; L., -ushu.

Neuter.

Singular: N.A., -u, -rt; I., -vd, -ilf, -und; D., -ve, -une,-ave;
Ab.G., -uas, -vas, -una*, -os; L., -un-i, -av-i, -o, -au; V., -?/.
Dual: N.A., -vi (iti).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

^-sterns.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 405

Plural: N. A., -42, -d, -tin*/ I., -ubhis; G., -dndm, -ilnaam; L.,

Series 0. Masculine.

Singular: N., -its; A., -nam; I., -wd/ D., -ue; G., -wo*.
Dual: N.A.V., -ad.

Plural : N. V., -uas; A., -uasy -lis; L, -ilbhis; G., -wdra, -findnt;
L., -dshu.

Femininb.

Singular: N., -#*; A., -uam9 -vam?; L, -w^, -ri£y D., -w«y
Ab.G., -wow/ L., -wi, -w£, -# (*7t) ; V., -t/.

Dual: N.A., -ud; G.L., -wos, -vo8?.

Plural: N., -wo«, -ifo, -&a«y A., -?/a«, -wow, -tf*?/ I., -ilbhis; D.,
-ftbhyas; G., -tfwdm, -Unaam; L., -fishu.

Neutbb.

Singular: N.A., -w/ I., -w<l

Oxytone stems, when not strengthened by vowel-change or
nasal, shift the accent to the ending in series A, in the Ls., in
the Ab.G.s., in the G.L.d., and always in the G.p. In C, on
the contrary, the accent never leaves the thematic vowel,
except in monosyllabic stems. Sporadic exceptions will be
noticed as they come up.

Several A -stems have forms analogous to those of ctri ; i. e., the vocalic endings
are affixed directly to the " unstrengthened" stem: as, papv-ds (=pacfi'n). These
stems are: pap&; pitu; kr'tu; krdtu. patdJcratu; madhu; vasu; Vibhu' ; cipu;
mhasrabdhu.

By way of illustrating the wealth of declensional resources in the Veda, a few
equivalent forms may be cited: hratud, -vd, -und; hrdlve, -ave; Jcrdtvas, -os ;
m'runas, ctfros; dr&nas, dros; drvhydvi, druhyaUt; pacvd', papund (accent, p. 367
top); parvus, pap&'n ; ffyve, &ave; favas,faos; tan&am, tan&'m; vadhuam, vadh-
u'm ; camui, cam&t, cam&' ; urk, urO.' ; purk, purtiJ ; mddhuas, -vas, -unas, -os ;
>dsvas, -unas, -os : sd'nunas, -os; sd'navi, sd'no, sd'nuni, sd'nau; abhibMvam,
-bha'm; mayobh&'s, -bhii's; -bhuvd, -bhu'na; -bhuvas, -bhu'n; vibhtiwm, -bhfom ;
vibhuas, vibhavas ; vibh&as, vibhvi's ; pambhU's, cwribhu's ; etc., etc.

Nominative Singular Masculine.

A. The ending s is affixed directly to the stem. The form
occurs 886 times (from 250 stems). Examples are: anpfo, 13;
arniayu8, 16; indus, 64; rbhii*9 21; ketus, 23; krdtus, 14; cd'rus,
16; devayitSy 15; mdnu8y 15; vdsus, 25; vdyus, 20; vipvd'yu89
18; v'tshnus, 34; 8indhus9 17; suhrdtu89 32; silnus, 18; so ddhri-
f/w*, 3; khardjrtw; puruk#hv8, 5; mitddrus, 2; yi(89 viii.18.13 —
BR., dvayfo; svayus, 2. In viii.66.7, tshus is m.

Transitions from C : dprabhus ; prabhu8, 4 ; mayobhvs, 4 ;
»ibhu8y 8 ; panibhiU, 2.

In vii. 86.3, prche tdd eno varuna didr'/cshrt'po, p. -shu \ upo9 we

have elision and crasis. Say., ehdndasah sulopah : dras/ifum

ichann aham ; hut since desiderative adjectives are oxytone

(Lindner, p. 62), perhaps didr'kahn is an adverb with recessive

vol. x. 55

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

406 C. R. Lanman, [u and 6-stems.

accent. So in ix.96.15, urv Iva gdttih suydmo nd vddhd: Say.,
8updrh suing iti 8or Ink. Gr., urur va.

In vii.60.3, visarga seems wrongly added before * in dhd'mdni
mitrdvarund yuvdkuh \ sdm. BR. suggest yuvd'ku, a6 p.n. with
dhd'mdni. Cf. sdsni \ sdm, p. 377 ad tin.

C. 1. Here belong 24 forms (from 9 stems): -bhrtfn with abht\
6 ; pari-, 9 ; puro- ; mayo, 3 ; sacd- ; svayam- ; ekadyii's (root
Xdiv, dyri-td) ; sil's, i. 146.5 ; vipvdpambhris; and from the Athar-
van, udapii's, madhupxYs, vdtapu's, xviii.3.37; prabhi\'s, xiii.4.47;
vibhil's, vii.21.1: xiii.4.47: xv.15.6; pambhii's, xix.46.6 ; subfai'*,
xiii.4.52.

2. Prdpil's, i.40.1 (BR.,/>rtfptt*) ; dtaptatanils; sdrvatamls.AY.
v.6.11-14: xi.3.32-49 £w: £at. Br. iv.6.11 : xi.l.8e.

Nominative Singular Feminine.

A. There are 73 forms (from 31 stems).

Enumeration: arundjmia, 2 : ahamyds; dbharadvasus ; ishus,2; krumus ; gAlut,
2; caranyiis; cd'rus, 2: jdsus; jlvd'tus, 2; tridhd'tus; \dd'nus; 2dd'nus; dhim'-
vastus ; dlienus, 22 ; parous ; bibhatsus, see p. 402 med. ; bhujyus ; rajjiu ; rkoit-
papus; vastlyus, 3 ; vastus; fdrus^; pravasyi'ts; saptadhdtus; sardyus. 2 ; sindhu*.
11; subdlius; sumadahpus; suprotus; sudbhipus.

In i. 186.4 and vii.2.6, visarga seems wrongly written; forw-
dugheva dhenvh, Gr. proposes -e va dhenil'.

C. Here belong: 1. bhtl's, 2; punarbkft's; mayobhrt's; sfi's,
132.9; yaniasiVs ; rahasiVs; vtrasrt's; sushrt's; from the AV.,
abhibhil's, ii.27.1 ; prabM's, ix.4.2 ; pambhil's, xiv.2.26 ; prwri's,
iii.23.4.

2. Tanil's, 8 (AV., 7 : as, ii.13.4) ; vadhil's, 4 (AV., 5: as,
i.14.2); pvapnVs ; from the AV., kukri's, vii.47.2 ; gugguh'*'*,
iv.37.3 ; juhil's, xviii.4.5 ; dhamUs, i.17.4; prddkrt's, v.i8.3,l5;
madhii's, vii.56.2 ; from the VS.,jatus, xxiv.25,36.

3. Gut'tgrt's ; nrtxVs; pundhyil's; saranyiVs; from the AV.,
kid'mbUs, xviii.3.6 (cf. Rik x.16.13) ; asita-jfiii' s, xii.1.21 ; pata-
y 'din' 8, vii.115.2.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter,

A. 1. The form has no case-ending. It occurs 413 times (from
68 stems). Examples are : urn, 51 : and iv.43.5, as adv. ; cd'rtt,
27 ; tridkd'tu, 13 ; pdpu, iii.53.23 ; VS. xxiii.30; purt't, 13; prthu,
15; mddhu, 76; vdsu, 77; sd'nu, 18; further, abhijiiu, 5; kshu ;
vipvdpsti; sushthu; dprdyu.

For didr'kshu, vii. 86.3, and urv, ix.96.15, see m. In iii.49.2,
the metre requires d'yu, text d'yus. In AV. viii.2.28, the sense
requires pdrayishnii — text -fis (-??' r-); in iii.19.1, jishnu — MSS.
-us; in xx.135.12, ' bahu— MSS., -fth; and in xix.30.1, jard'mrtyu
— MSS. and ed. -uh c-.

2. The final -u suffers metrical protraction in several words:
urrt', vi.47.14 ; punY, 12 times, given by Gr. : as, x.94.5 ; m'tthti, 2.
The pada has in every instance -ft. Cf. Prat, vii.31 : vii. 9,1 9: ix.3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.s.n.] Noun- Inflection in die Veda. 407

C. Since the forms for A and C are coincident, it is sometimes
doubtful whether a word is to be referred to a stem in -tf, or to a
transition-stem in -ik. Here may be put : Cibhu; prabhd^ 2, see
Bit. ; mayobhu, 4 ; vibhfi, 4 ; pambht't, 2 (the foregoing have other
ft-forms) ; subhu (dnnam), ii.35.7; from the AV., (pdrma) udbhu,
ix.2.16; vibhuiprabhu, xx. 135.9; fambhiij x.1.9 ; and also raghu-
dru (cakrdm), Rik x.61.16, since the only other forms of this word
require a stem -dril' (p. 402 top).

Accusative Singular Masculine.

A. The form terminates in -urn and occurs 736 times (from 179
stems). Examples are : anpfim, 17 ; <2ptfm, 20 ; indum, 27; urum,
18; kethm, 34; krdtum, 55; Igdtum, 33 ; cd'rum, 14 ; tdntum,
15 ; ddsyum, 15 ; papum, 15 ; bhdnfim, 15 ; bhujytim, 15 ; man-
ytrm, 18; vdyum, 18; p<fcrw7>i, 15; pipw/t, 26; sindhum, 22;
srira'tm, 17 ; further, ddyum; ddhri-gumy 4 ; abhidyum; d-khum;
ddpadyum, 2 ; didyum^ 6 ; piprum, 7 ; purukshum, 7 ; pr'piigum;
pnishitdpsum; vipvdpmm; saptdgum.

Transitions from C : dbhnm, 2 ; prabkdm; vibhum; abhibhum,
AV. x.6.29.

C. Here belong : 1. (a) mbhuam, 4 ; vishnd-puam, 3 ; mbhuam.
(b) dbhuvam, 2 ; kapojiivam ; manojuvam, 2 ; mayobhuvarn, 5 ;
vaaujuvam; vipvdpambhuvam; pambhtivatn, 2 ; sacdbhuvam, 2 ;
sudbhuvam, 2 (these nine words are in every case at the end of
a prfcfa of 8 or of 12 syllables, except manojUvam, x.81.7) ; abhi-
bhuvam, AV. ix.5.36; pambhuvam, x.6. 15,17.

2. Krkaddpuam may be taken as m. with sdrvam, i.29.7.

Transitions from A : dbhfruam, viii.46.6 ; and perhaps mdruam,
x.28.8 (or f.).

Transition to the w-declension : sucetunam (?). See p. 408 med.

Accusative Singular Feminine.

A. The form occurs 50 times (from 15 stems).

Enumeration : adhenum ; arundpsum ; ishwn, 2 ; krumum ; cd'rwn, 2 ; jasum ;
jujatnwn; jirdddnwn; jivd'tum,3; dhdnum; dhenum, 27 ; bhvjyum; vastly^m ;
jwruw, 3 ; aindhuni, 4.

Transition from C : sabar-dhti-m, x.6 1.1 7 ; cf. p. 403 ad fin.

C. Here belong : 1. (a) a-suam, 2 ; sakrt-stiarn ; for su-dm,
v.58.7, see L.s.f. ; from the AV., asHam, vii.35.3 ; vipvcur&am,
xii.1.17. (b) vipvajtivam; sacdbhuvam; from Qat. Br., bhrdv am ,
iii.2.1M.

2. Prddk&am, AV. x.4.17 (MSS. and ed. -vdml) ; RV.,juhtiam,
2; taniiam, 45; vadhuam; in true Atharvan verses, tanuam, 16
times; tanvdm, xix.37.2.

3. \a) Carishnuam (piiram), viii. 1.28 ; sudruam, vii. 32.20 (SV.
i.238, -f/ram) : possibly, x.28.8; jighatsuam, AV. ii. 14. 1. (£)
avasy&vam ; durhandydvain ; makhasy'&vam ; vacasyuvam ;
pundhyuvam, 2 ; kamadyuvam. (c) tanvdm /, as an adjective,
viii.65.12c.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

408 C. R. Lanman, [u and £-stem&

In only about four passage of the Rik does long thematic tt become v. They
are: x.51.26, \c: ix. 96.21c; i. 162.205. The fourth passage is a late one. Il
ix 96.21c, possibly the shorter grammatical form has been ousted by the lonper:
read hrt'daft camiurr d' vi^a pundnd (text eamvor . . p&yamdna)1. Perhaf*.
too, we ought to accept Grassmann's suggestion and read indrdya tanuam marne,
viii.65.12, text indrdtpdri. Cf. p. 379 top.

Transitions to B. The case-ending of devi'-m was apparently »(
(p. 366 end). After this analogy were formed : kuhd m, AV. viL
47.1; vadhti'm, ix.3.24 : x.1.1 ; tan&'m, xviii.l. 13,14 (the Rik,
x.10.12, has the older form, tanuam) ; a&d'm, VS. xxx.14. The
Rik has no such forms in -(I'm,

Instrumental Singular Masculine.

A. The general ending is added directly to the stem : 1.
krdtud, iv.28.3 : vii.21.6.

2. The stem-final becomes v: in the oxy tones parapvd', i.130.4,
and jxxpvd', twice ; in krdtvd, 57 ; and in plpvd.

Transition to the ^declension. This occurs in 108 forms (from
31 stems): as, krdtund.

The stems are : ahgu; aktu, 2; andgu; abandhu; indu; writ; rju; rik, 8; btti.
9; kr&tu, 12; cetu; jishnu; tridM'tu; dru, 6; dh&maketu; dhrshnu ; patft, ; bltdnk
24 ; m&nu ; manyh, 4 ; ripti, ; vagnu, 2 ; vahctiu ; vdyu, 7 ; vibhindu ; vishnu^ 4 :
vr'shapsu; s&dhu, 2; suceA, 7; stanayitnb ; mu, or n., 4.

Since snU and drh are apparently monosyllables, we might
expect the accentuation snund\ snubhts, s?ius/iu, dmnd' (cf. dhi-
nd'm)\ but in reality these words are accented as if from the
dissyllabic stems sd'nu, dd'ru, of which they are the shorteued
forms. Compare tmdn~d (p. 341 end), tmdtie, tmdni (for dtmdnd,
or dt-y etc.); yd'ne, yti'nas (for ytivane, -as) ; pun-as (for pudn-as);
sU'r-as (for siiar-as) ; but stri-bhis.

If sucetunam d\ ix.65.30, stands for sucetund d' (the m being
introduced to avoid hiatus, Gr. 1531), the case is parallel to that
in vii.7.2 (p. 348 end). But cf. p. 404 med.

Transition from C: mayobhund, Hi. 16.6.

C. Here belong : vibhud; manqjuvd; sendjuvd; sudbhtivd.

Instrumental Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong: 1. mehatnud' (stem -wa\ on account of accent);
ddhenud; pdrud, 5 ; susdrtud; hdnud; Uhud, AV. v.5.4 ; hdnud,
vi.56.3. 2. panvd' (stem -?iiZ,') ; cikitvd', A V. vii.52.2 ; tnddhvd,
RV., 2 ; ishvd, AV. x.1.27.

Transition to B : (from C) dravitnud\ viii.81.15 (stem -ntl\
x.49.9). See p. 404 top.

Six oxytone stems in it have instrumental in -u~y-d\ with
adverbial displacement of accent : anushthuyd' ; amityd\ 1 ;
dpuyd'i 2 "> dhrshnuyd'y 15; raghuyd' ; sddhuyd\ 6; similarly
mithuyd' from miihu. Cf. p. 358 top.

C. Here belong : 1. bhuvd\ 2 ; punarbhtivd, AV. ix.5.28. 2.
ljuhud, 6 ; 2juhud, 4 ; tanud, adj. ; tam'td, subst., 27 ; vadhud;
in true Atharvan verses, tanud, 4; tanvS, 5; rdjjud (iii.11.8).
3. duvasytivd.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

I.Sbf.] Noun- Inflection in ike Veda. 409

In x.24.1, sdmam piba catnd' sutdm, camti' may be I.s., tor-U'd:
4 Drink with the cup the soma pressed' (cf. tapani\ p. 381 end) ;
or L.s. : * Drink the pressed soma in the cup.'

Instrumental Singula* Neuter.

A. Here belongs: 2. mddhvd, 17; AV. v.27.2,3: vi.12.3.

Possibly the crystallized case-form jdt&'- (with -bharman,
-shthira) is an instrumental, for jdtud, like mat%\ p. 380; but jd'tH
may be an adv. accusative. Suhdntft (2) might mean ' with easy
blow ;' but see A.d.m. and A.p.n.

Transition to the w-declension. This occurs with 39 forms (from
15 stems): as, urnnd. The stems are: uru; krdhu; ghrtdsnu;
jard'yu; titaU; trihti; tridhd'tu; dd'nu; dhrahnfi, 3 ; purtirii;
[yrthii; mddhu, 16 ; vdsu, 7 ; sd'nu, 2 ; svddu.

Transition from C : supund, AV. xii.2.11.

C. Here belong : mayobhuvd; (pavttrend) mpti!dy VS. i.3.

Dative Singular Masculine.

A. Here belongs : I. sahdsra-bdhu-e, viii.45.26. 2. krdtve,
11 ; pdpve (n. ?), 3 ; pipve; krdtve, AV. vi.19.2 : xviii.2.23.

3. The stem-final is usually gunated and -e added : thus, dyd-e^
dydve. This form occurs 231 times (from 66 stems). In i.61.1,
the metre seems to demand ddhrigdve, text -dve.

The stems are : ahgb ; aketu ; aktu ; ddhrigu ; abhidyu ; avasyu\ 2 ; avishyb ;
dyu,\0; dfd; xndu, 4; iyakshu; udcmyu; rj(i,2] r'shibandhu; kakdrdu; kavainh;
kdru, 6; krtnu; ketit>,2; krdtu; kshiprd-ishu ; grhti; ceru; jantu; jtrdddnu; tdku;
tr'tsu; dcuryUy9; dushtaritu; dhrshnu\3; paruisyu; parimanyti; patf*; pdyu;
piyatnu; pQru\ 5; pedu, 6; prdyajyu; babhru, 2; bahu; bh4n&, 2; bhirti; bhr'gu,
2; manaiyb; mam*, 36; manyk, 12 ; mddayitnu ; rarfyu, 6; ydjyu,5; yddu;
ripWfl] vacasyu\ 3; vdsu, 3; vdyu, 23; vishnu, 13; v%du, 2; veta*&; fdtru;
(dtiitanu, 3 ; fayu\ 7 ; pipit, 2 ; sudd'nu, 6 ; subdndhu ; silnu, 1 0 ; svdbhdnu, 2 ;
hatnu.

C. Here belong: vibhue; vishndpue; Bvbhhe; and, abhibhuve;
vip)dbhuve; sacdbhuve.

Dative Singular Feminine.

A Here belong : jtvd'tave, 7 ; dhendve; pdrave, 5.

C. Here belongs tanfie, RV., 18 ; AV., 6 ; -y£, AV., 7.

Transitions to B. The Rik has only Uhvai (from A), vi.75.15.
The Atharvan has 5 cases, all from C : vadhuai, xiv.2.9 ; pvapmal,
26; vadhvaty 73. In agruvai, vi.60.1,3, the il is "split" after gr
(but not in pvapruai after pr), and so the accent is not shifted to
the ending. Cf. pimar-bhuvda, G.s.f.

Dative Singular Neuter.

A. Here belong : pd^ve ?, 3 ; urdve; vipvd'yave.
Transitions to the ra-declension : mddhune ; katfpune, AV.
vi.138.5.
C. For the remaining cases of the n. there are no examples.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

410 C. R. /Amman, [u and u-stems.

Ablative Singular Masculine.

A. 1. Here belongs only pitvfo, vi.20.4.

2. The usual form in -o* occurs 33 times (from 22 stems). It is
a question whether cdkshoh (sri'ryo ajdyata), x.90.13, is not a
mere ungrammatical (or contracted ?) form like vidydt. The sens*
of AV.ii.35.4 suggests the reading cdkshos, text cdkshus. See
V.s.m., and stems in t radical, Ab.s.f.

The stems are: ahhu, 7; adhvaryu; rt&; krcd'nu, ix.77.2 ; kshipanu; gdntu;
cdksu t ; tanayitnti ; tanyatu ; devayu ; dyu, 2 ; niniisu ; pfaru ; manyu, 2 : mrtyu :
ririkshu; vanitrhthu; vdyu, 2; vishnu, 3; cdtru^atru; nndhu; snu.

C. There is no example.

Ablative Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong only : dhdnos, 3 ; vdstos, 3.
C. Here belong: 1. bhuvds ; cwdsitas, AV. x.10.23. 2.
kadr&vas; tanihts, 3 : AV., 2.

Transition to B : (from A) ishvds, x. 18.14 : AV. v.14.12.

Ablative Singular Neuter.

A. 2. Mddhvas occurs twice as Ab. 3. The usual form

occurs 1 times : ur6%, 4 ; sd'nos; 8vdd6s, 2.

Transitions to the n-declension : mddhunas; sd'nutias.

Genitive Singular Masculine.

A. Here belong : 1. perhaps dhrshnvrds, x.22.3 ; ripu-ds, iv.3.13;
plpru-as (piparos?), vi.20.7 ; and vUhnu-as^ viii.31.10. In all
these instances the text has -os. 2. papvds, 11 (and AV.

vii.14.3) ; pitvds, 8 ; krdtvas, 2 ; mddhvas, 12 ; vdsvas, 5 ; p*ptm

3. The usual form in -08 occurs 199 times (from 71 stems). For
dt/6s, iii.54.2 (m.f.), and x.105.4,9 (m.), see p. 344, 361. For
pikshdh, iii.19.3, BR. read pik&ho.

The stems are: ahcu, 8; aktii, 11, and see f. ; aghdyu, 6; ddevayu; adhvaryu ;
andcu; dnrju; dyajyu; dyu, 22; dcu ; indu, 2; uru; rtdyu, 2; kdruy 7; krcd'nu,
i. 155.2; krdtu; cd'ru, 2; jantu. 4; jishnii, 4; tanyatu; tdpu; trasddasyu; dakshu;
ddsyu, 8 ; didhishu ; devdbandhu; dyu, 4; dru (dros and drunas); dhakshu;
dhrshnu ; dhenu, 2 ; ninitsu, 2 ; patdru ; paracu ; pdyu ; ptpru, 3 ; jAyu, 2 ;
purukshu, 4; prabhu'vasu ; prdyajyu ; prayiyu; bahu; mddhu ; mandyu, 2;
mdnu, 8 ; manyu, 3 ; mdhccatu ; mrtyu, 2 ; ydjyu ; yu, 2 ; yuvdku ; ripu ; vadh-
uyu ; vayiyu; vdsu; vdyu, 10; vi^vd'yu;' vishnu, 14; vidu ; camyu; fdtru,b;
payw, i. 119.6; tfcu; sdhyu; sddhu, 2; sindhu, 13; subdndhu; sushtu; sfau,2:
suarbhdnu, 2 ; Jietu.

Transition from C : prabhds, ix.86.5.

Transitions to the w-declension : cd'runas (mddasya), viii.5.14;
drfinas, or n., L 161.1.

In x.46.7, (agndyo) vanarshddo vdydvo nd sdmdh, Gr. ( Wb.) sees an old genitive
of Vdyu, assuming that the form in -av-as existed along with -o-s and -u-as. This
is unlikely. When we have the stronger stem, we have as a rule the weaker
ending, and vice versa ; but cf. girdyas, Ab., p. 383, and rdhddrayas, p. 384 end.
His conjecture srsfitd'h, 'hastening as the winds,' Ueb. ii.516, does not satisfy.
BR., ' inviting ;7 see N.p.m.

C. Here belong: pambhtivas (rdsasya?), i.105.3 ; saedbk&vas.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G.s.f.] Noun- Inflection in the Yeda. 411

Genitive Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong: aktds, v. 30. 13 ; dhends, 3 ; vdstos, 19 ; vdstos-
vasto8, 2 ; nar&yos; 8tndho8y 2.

C. Here belong : 1. bhuvds; bhuvas-pate, AV. x.5.45fo*. 2.
agruva8, 2 ; tanuas, 14 ; vadhiias, 3; AV., tanfias, 10 ; -vds, 4 ;
vadhtias, 2. 3. pundhydva8.

Transitions to B: (from A) mvd'stods; urvdrud'8 (BR, -tf'),
AV. \*Ll4.2 : — (from C) punarbhtiv-ds, AV. i.27.2 (for accent, cf.
agrHv-ai); prddkud'8, x.4.5; pvapriid's, xiv.1.44.

Genitive Singular Neutbr.

A. Here belong : 1. mddhuas, 2. 2. mddhvas, 65 (and AV.
vii.3.1) ; vdsvas, 38.

3. The forms without n (36, from 8 stems) are more numerous
than those with n (27, from 4 stems). They are: urds ; kshds ;
c<Vro8, 2 ; mddhos, 13 ; vdsos, 8 ; vd'xtos, 7 ; 8ddh6»; svddds, 3 ;
from the AV., gtiggidos (xix.38.1) ; tnddhos, 6; v«808, 3; vdsor-

V(l808i 2 ; Vd'8t08.

Transitions to the n-declension : cd'runm, 4 ; dd'nunas, 3 ;
mddhunas, 9; vdsunas, 11.

Locative Singular Masculine.

For the genetic relations of the several forms, see p. 387.

A. I. The stem-final is gunated and the ending is added. There
are 8 such forms (from 7 stems) : dnavi, viii,10.5 ; trasddasyavi,
Val. i.10; ddsyavi, viii.6.14; druhydvi, viii.10.5 ; pdviravi, Val.
3.9; vUhnavi, viii.3.8 ; 12.16; trdndvi, viii.57.15.

2. The ending is dropped and the preceding diphthong receives
a second increment. There are 30 such forms (from 19 stems) :
akta'd; dyati,2; uraii, 5; krdtau; earaA; druhyaH; pdr^ati;
pnpa&; pfahtigau ; pHtdkratau; pfXrwd; mdnau, 2; mana&yS;
mitddrau; yddau, 3 ; prbshtigau; sindhau, 2 ; 8etati / svdrau.

The form with n is hardly authenticated in the m. In AV.
xx. 133.3, rdjjuni seems a probable reading, MSS. rajani.

If there is any certain instance of a L. in -d, it must be regarded
as due to false analogy. Gr., UeK ii.512, sees such a form in
ix.97.37, rtd! (for rtad) mattnd'm, 'at the time of prayer.' In
AV. xx. 13 1.1 2, the MSS. have vanUhthd', ed. -ait.

C. There is no example.

Locative Singular Feminine.

A. The Rik has only s'mdhau, viii.20.25 ; the AV., edrau,
v.25.1 ; *ti!taU) i.11.1.

C. 1. The VS. has bhruvi, xix.91. 2. Of the organic form
there are 4 examples : camui; tawtii, 3 ; and with metrical length-
ening, 3 : ta?iuiy p. 4, ii.16.2 : x.65.7 ; 66.9. The metre makes
against the lengthening in iv.6.6, taniii (Prat, viii.7), p. 4. Cf.
stems in r (ar), L.s.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

412 C. R. Lanman, [u and w-stenis.

The ending is sometimes dropped (or absorbed by the thematic
vowel?). As a L., camU' occurs 6 times; but in x.24.1, it may
be instr. In x. 183.2, svd'ydm tanti' r'tvie (L.s.n.) nd'dhamdndm,
tanu" is L.s. : 'praying (for a son) in thy body at the time of the
rM.' The -d of the L. is pragrhya, Prat. i.28. Cf. p. 389, Bd. .Sec
note to Ath. Prat, i.74: tanH' ?, iv.25.5; mdyti\ xviii.4.4.

Transitions to B. The Kik has only pvaprud'm. The AV. has
rdfivdm, vi.121.2. We ought probably to read tanvd'm : in
i.18.3, ed. -va"m ; in xix.61.1, tantt'8 tanvd'm me bhaved ant<il>,
MSS. -vd\ ed. -v(tm; and in 37.2, text -vdm; and, possibly, tanud'm
in 55.3, text -vdm. C£ note to Ath. Prat, iii.60. Similarly Roth
has proposed for Rik v.58.7, sud'm^ text rndrn.

Locative Singular Neuter.

A. 1. Here belongs sd'nav-L It occurs 9 times.

1. (a) Furthermore, the combination sd'no dvye occurs 7 times,
and sd'no avydye once. In the last instance tho -o occupies the
ninth place of a jagait; in the other 7, the ninth of a trishtubh.
The pada has -au in all 8 instances, and the Prat., ii.35, implies
that the natural samhitdriorm would be -dv. The metre show?
this view to be wrong, since the -o has the value of a short syllable
(dv). I think that the 4 or -y of the ending has been simply
dropped before a vowel, in order to avoid a cacophony (e. g.,
sd'ndv-y avydye) ; and that this has happened without the usual
compensatory lengthening, in order to give the requisite cadence

2. Here belong 28 forms (from 8 stems) : arajjau ; urati, 0 ;
ghrshau; prtha'h; mddhau, 4 ; vdsau, 3 ; vtdaH, 2 ; sd'nauy 10 :
AV. xi.5.12; mddhau, AV. ix.l. 16,17.

Transition from C : (pdrman) udbhau, VS. xv. 1 .

Transitions to the w-declension : d'yuni, 3 ; sd'nuni, i. 155.1
(Gr., -iXni)\ dd'runi, AV. vi.121.2. Jacobi, Ind. Stud, xiv.144,
cites amuni=zamushmin; cf. vipve=vipva8min, iv.16.19, and Gr.
1299.

Bollensen, Orient und Oce. ii.481, proposes for vii.39.3 itrd'n-
tdrikshe, i. e. urdr aih-, text uraii. C£ masc.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

A. The stem-final is gunated : thus, adhvaryo. 'The form
occurs 508 times (from 58 stems). Examples are : indo, 144 ;
dhrshno, 19; vaso, 62; vdyo, 43; vishno, 17; patakrato, 47;
sukrato, 22 ; silno, 36 ; further, adhrigo, 3 ; sishno. Bli. read
piksho, iii.19.3 ; see G.s.m.

In AV. iv.7.3, dushtano is possibly a transition-form (for
dushtanti), since the Vedic stem is properly dushtanti.

The form sahasracaksho (V.s.m.f., for shu*), AV. iv.20.5:
xix.35.3, may be regarded as analogous to bhadra-poce, etc., p. 390
top. We might assume a shorter stem in -u equivalent to that
in -its; but it is hardly necessary or warrantable here.

C. There is no example.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

V.s.f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 413

Vocative Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong: adrisdno; durhano ; prthushto ; sindho, 3;
subdho ; svabhdno. For sahsracaksho (oshadhe), AV. iv.20.5,
see m.

C. Here belong: jiihu^ AV. xviii.4.6 ; vadhu, xiv.1.58; 2.7;
bdbhru, vi.139.3.

Vocative Singular Neuter.

A. The Atharvan has guggiduy xix.38.2.

NOMINATIVE, AOOUSATIVB, AND VOCATIVE DUAL MASCULINE.

A. The genesis of the form is uncertain (p. 390). It ends in -il:
as, adhvarytf'. It occurs 1 96 times (from 69 stems). Examples are :
indr&vdyti'\ 22; indrdvishnil, 13; bdhil', 20; vdfinlvasil^ 21;
vr'shanvasH, 18 ; further, dsmrta-dhril ; rta-pstf, ; ghrtd-mti
(sdnu), 2 ; vanar-gd'; vrdhamti'.

Transitions from C : puru-bhti! ; pambhii' ; pambhti,; paribhiV,
AV. iv.25.1. In this passage, the restoration of the older and
longer grammatical form (the true C-form) is strongly favored
by the metre : thus, yav vtcvasya paribhxivd babhiivdthah.

The form appears in both texts with shortened final : jigatnft'
(mitrd'vdrund), vii.65.1 ; suhdntiX (cfimiirim dhunirh ca)9 19.4.
Of. p. 390 ad fin., 391, B.

C. Here belong : manqjuvd; mayobhiivd, 7 ; pambh&vd, 2, and
vi.60.14; sacdbh?ivd, 6. Almost all are at the end of a pdda.
Here I would put ghrta-8ntivdy iii.6.6. See p. 402 top.

Transitions trom A: madhrtyuvd, 2 ; papvd , x. 106.3 (p. 403 med.).

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND VOCATIVE DUAL FEMININE.

A Here belong: jigatnif; dhentf, 4, and see p. 406 ; sdbandhil,
2 ; samdndbandhil ; hdnil, 4.

C. Here belong : 1. sntvd; apfjfivd; punarbhuvd; pambhvvd;
saedbhtivd; vipvdpambhuvd, i.160.4 : vi.70.6 : i. 1 60.1 (-uvd r-, a
graphic peculiarity; cf. p. 342 and Prat, ii.ll): — bhruvau, £at.
Br. xiv.9.4*. 2. earned; tanlid, 6. Form as well as sense
forbid our taking tanti' (ftvie) as dual, x. 183.2. See L.s.£

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neuter.

A. The Rik has only wrvl\ 3. As these cases are " weak" in
the neuter, the accent of an oxytone stem (uru) is shifted to the
vocalic ending (urv4\ not tirv-t) ; cf. papv-ds, pitv-ds, etc. The
VS. ha&jd'nu-n4, xx.8.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Masculine.

A. Instrumental: andmayitnubhydm^ nrbdhubhydm ; bdhft-
bhydm, 6. Dative : bdhtibhydm. Ablatives : iirdbhydm ; bdhti-
bhydm.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Feminine.

A. C. The Rik has no example. VS. xxv.l, bhrti-bhyd'm.
Transition from A to C : hdndbhydm, p. #, TS. vii.3.161.
vol. x. 56

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

414 C. R. Lanman, [u and fi-stems.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative Dual Neuter.

A. C. The Rik has no example. The AV. has jd'nubhydm,
ix.8.21: x.2.3.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masculine.

A. Genitives: ilruds; bdhtids, v.16.2. Locatives: bdhuSs, 21
times; tfrwfe, AV. xix.60.2; bdhvds, vii.56.6 : xix.60.1 (ed. -vtef).

Genitive and Locative Dual Feminine.
A. Locatives: hcinuos, i.52.6 : AV. x.2.8; -vos, x.2.7.
C. Locatives: 1. bhruvds, iv.38.7 : £at. Kr- xii.9.1*. 2.
camtios, 13 times, and ix.69.6 ; 108.10; camvds, ix.96.21 (but see
p. 408 top).

Genitive and Locative Dual Neuter.
A. C. The Rik has no example. AV. x.2.2,^W-w-otf.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine.

A. 1. Here belongs only mddhu-as, ix.89.3. 2. As a dis-

syllable, niddhv-as occurs thrice. I would add Vibhv-as — taking
it as vocative of the stem Vtbhtf — , at the beginning of iv.34.9r/
(Gr., N.p. of stem v'ibhit) and vii.48.ltf, and Yibhv-dS, iv.36.3.
Cf. VibhU'-bhiSy vii.48.2. The stem VibhU' is perhaps differen-
tiated as a proper name from vibkti! ; cf. p. 368 top.

3. The stem-final is gunated : as, aktdv-as. The form occurs 737
times (from 161 stems). Examples are (N. and V.) : adhnarydvas,
27; dydvas, 27; dpdvas, 30; indavas, 67; rbhdvas, 57; kdrdvas,
18 ; vdsavcw, 46 ; sindhavas, 34 ; mdd'navas, 42 ; further, d-psavas,
and compounds of 2-psu, -dyu; dgravas ; mitdjiiavas, 2; mitd-
dravctS) 2; harirdravas (p. 401). Here belong probably : vdydvas
(sdrnds), x.46.7 (cf. p. 410 end); and vdydva ind~, p. -ve, vii.92.4.
See BR., 3vdyfi.

Transitions from C : dhi-jdvas; vibhdvas.

In i.64.3 and viii.22.11, we have from the stem ddhri-gu (-</«=
gam), ddhri-gdvm. The d is perhaps due to the false analogy of
gd'vas, ccows.' Cf. D.s.m., p. 409.

C. Here belong : vibhuas; 8ubhuasy 8 ; surdpiias; and, d-diwas;
dbhuvas, i.64.6: ix.65.27; u-htivas ; favos^ 2; nabhcjtivas; pari-
bhO/oas; manojtivas, 3 ; mayobhuvas, 6 ; ragku-drtivas, 3 (see p.
402); vayojiivas; pambhtivas; sadyojiivas; sudbhi'ivas, 4 ; mayo-
bkkvaS) AV. vii.60.2 ; subhtivas, iv.8.7.

Transitions from A : dprdyuvas; madhydyuvas; mitrdyuva*:
pramaytivas.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Feminine.

A. 2. Here belong: mddhv-as, Val. 2.4 ; patakratv-as. 3. Here
belong 89 forms (from 15 stems). They are: ancrprdvas ; abhl-
ravas; arendvas; ishavas, 3 ; tridhA'tavaa ; dhendvas, 49 ; p<ir$-
avo8) 2; vasHydvas, 3 ; pdravas ; sanishydvas, 2; sdmanyavas;
sindhavas, 21*; suketdvas; svdsetavas; hdnavas.

Digitized by VjOO<5 IC

N.V.p.f.] Noun- Inflection in itie Veda. 415

C. Here belong : 1. ghrta-pCtras; navastias, iv.34.5 ; prasfuas^ 3 ;
ribhuas; subhuas: — dhvas ; dhijuvas / punarbhuvas / bhuvas /
tnai/obht'ivas^ 3 ; mitra-krtivas (p. 402, 1.3.). 2. (a) jatvas,

AV. ix.2.22 ; prddkuas, AV. i.27.1 ; agruvas, RV., 6 ; (b) camuas;
ljuhii08,4; 2jnhuas ; tam\as, 2, and x. 108.6 ; tanvds, x.51.4 (p.
408 top) ; tanuas, AV., 4, and xiii.3.10 (-<f *, Ath. Prat, iii.65, note,
end). 3. didhishaas / pdrayishnims; mumukskdas; stidayit-
tin as; prajanuas^ AV. ix.4.6 : — anhoyuvas; apasytivas, 4 times,
and ix.2.7 ; avasyuvas / dyuvas / udanyuvas / panasydvas /
prtandytivas; j>r candy uv as; blbhatsiivas; makhasytivas; man-
draytivas; mahiyuvas, 2; sandyuvas ; caranytivas (giras)y AV.
xx.48.1.

In iv.41.8, yuvayti's is certainly to be taken with dhiyo, N., and
must therefore stand for -yd' -as — an instance of vowel-absorption
common with the Osteins (p. 366). Cf. A. p.m., jit's. In x.70.6,
we have rathaydr (dvd'ras) ; and in vii.2.5, rathaydr (dtiras). Gr.
reads in both places -yti's (-yd' as) ; but BR., vi.257, consider it a
syntactical peculiarity.

NOMIKATTVB AND ACCUSATIVE PLUBAL NEUTER.

A. 1. The sarhhitd has -ti; the pada, -&. Here belong 28 forms
(from 4 stems): urti'; purd ',24: as, ii\.51.&,'purdr vdstini prthivf
bibharti; vdsd, 2 ; vidti' (ntd, Prftt. ii.37), i.39.2.

2. Both texts have -ft. Here belong 48 forms (from 12 stems) :
writ, 2; rjfi, iv.1.17 : vii.60.2 ; cd'ru (dnnd), i.61.7 ; fridhd'tu ;
purity 11 times (at end of pdda), and vi.44.14; bahti; mddhu^ 2,
and iv.43.5; vdsu, 19 times (12 at end of pdda); vtdu, 3; sd'nit,
vi.61.2; viii.85.2 (trih saptd); svdd'tu; suhdntu, vii.30.2 (but see
I. s.n.). In vii.60.3, (dhd mdni) yuvd'Jcuh «-, the visarga seems out
of place. See p. 406 top. I believe the AV. has only one such
form, jownfc', xix.49.4.

Transition from C : {bheshajd') mayobhti, ii.33.136 end.

Transitions to the w-declension. Here belong 127 forms (from
14 stems): cd'rtini; trid/id'ttini,2; dd'nUni; dardni; devayti'ni;
purti'ni, 39; prthtf'ni, 2; bahti'ni ; mddhtini, 9; yuvayti'ni;
vdsilni, 66 ; vd'sttini; cmdcrtini; sd'ntini; from the A V., anti'ni,
xi.7.10; ald'btini, xx.134.1 ; dcrdni, v.19.13.

Accusative Plural Masculine.

A. 1. Here belong: pacv-ds, 4; kr'tv-as, 2 (BR, s.v.).

2. The usual pada-i brm in -tin occurs 189 times (from 43 stems).
(a) If it is followed by a vowel in the interior of a pdda, the sam-
hitd shows the phonetic representative, -ilnr, of the original case-
form -tins. See p. 346, 394, and Prat, iv.29. This occurs before a-
31 times : as, rtunr dnu, i.49.3 (but kdril'n \ dhnd, iv.16.3) ; before
dr, viii.57.16 ; before iva, vi.46.14 ; 57.6 : x.68.2 ; before i-, i.45.1 :
ix.97.17; before w-, v. 3 1.1 3; 42.15: x.83.6; before r-, x. 2.1 ; before
o-, vii.5.6 ; before e- (at the end of the pdda, Prat, iv.30), vi. 18.3a/
and even before y- (both cases are covered by the Prat., iv.29),
i.63.4: v.42.15. Total, 46. (b) It occurs in the interior of a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

416 C. R. fximnan, [u and Osteins.

pdda: in 36 instances, before consonants, unchanged; further-
more, once as -tf/ic, before ca, in i. 100.1 8 ; as -dfly before ca, i.72.6 ;
as -Hfl, before,;-, v.14.4; as -lift (ch-), before p-, L100.18: VaL 7.3.
(c) It occurs at the end of a pdda: as -tW, before <?-, L174.6; as
-tf/1, before j-y vi.44.17 : x. 180.1 ; and unchanged in the remaining
1 00 instances. For the Atharvan usage and statistics, see note to
Prat, ii.29.

The stems are : a&ftt, 9 ; akratu; dddfu; ddevayu, 2 ; abht'pu; ayqjyv, 2 ; df*<
3; dsdnnishu; indu; ftd, 8; rbhu; kdru, 2; krdtu; tdntu; ddsyu, 27 ; eid'nu;
diu, 25; durhfndyu; nabtianti; para^u; pagk, 5; prtandyti, 3; prtanyt, 4; pro-
yojyu; bdndfiu; babhrk; bdh{t} 2; mitreru; ydjyu; yuvanyu; vugnu; van*:
vard'ku; vasu, 3; vdyti; veqtu; vetasu; tfUru, 43; gimyu; sikdhu, 23; svdd'nu;
sCenu; suabhipiL

Transition from C: muyobhti'n, i.84.16=AV. xviill.6.

C. Here belong : dndbhuvas; mayobhuvas.

In ii.14.3, indram sdmair drnuta jd'r nd vdstraih, we have
probably an A. p.m., for ju-as. C£ yuvayiL's, p. 415, and see BR.
iii.128.

Accusative Plural Feminine.

A. 1. Here belongs: mddhv-as, i.181.6: iii.31.16.

2. Here belong: t&ktis; ghrtdrmds, ii.27.1, c£ C; dhe?itirsy 4;
vdreniakratdsy in a khila to x.9 ; is/ids, AV. xi.6.9.

In x.35.2, (mdtfn) sindhiln, we have a masculine form with the
signification of a feminine. In x. 11 1.9, etd's, £, refers to sindhun
jagra&dnd'n.

C. Here belong: 1. prasuas, 3; vibhiias ; dbhuvas ; dhvvas ;
ghrta-muvas, i. 16.2 ; duvas, 2 (see also dtivas, Gr. 617) ; bhuvm;
mayobhuvas; sandjuvas. 2. tanuas, 19 times, and v. 15.3 (S&y.,
svd8 lands); nabha?iHas; vadhuas; (from the AV., tam'(a$,i\
-vds, 1; badhuaz, viii.6.14;) agrdvas. 3. abhidipsuas; dravit-
ivdas; vipanyuvas; pu?idhydvas.

It seems necessary to pronounce tanvds as a dissyllable in
i.162.20 and x.51.2 ; see p. 408. Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.58, con-
jectures with some doubt vi$vd (as A.p.f. of a stem vipti\ 'nest')
for vipvOj ii.38.8. Although I do not know of any other occur-
rence of such a stem, it seems to me a perfectly warrantable
formation from the root vip.

For rathayd's (ddras\ vii.2.5, text -us, see p. 415.

Instrumental Plural Masculine.

A. The ending is added directly to the stem: as, anptirbhi*.
The form occurs 210 times (from 50 stems). Moreover, Vibhti'-bhi*
occurs vii.48.2. It might be regarded as a transition-form; but
see p. 414 med. The long & (Prat, vii.2) of jnakshU'-bhis, p. ft, viil
26.6, is due to the metre. BR. take the word as an adv. instr.
Say. says : pighragamanair apvaih. For the accent of mu-bhk,
cf. 8\d'\nu-bhi8, vii.88.3, and see p. 408 med. The AV. has vanar-
gubhis, iv.36.7.

The stems are: anfa 3; Mh, 17; adkvaryu, 8; apasyu; dprdyu; dbhidyu,3:
dbhi'pu; arajju; arenu; avcsyu; dyu,*: drujatnd; <2p6,12; indu, 11 ; un»/fW^T

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Lp.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 417

3; rtu> 15; rbhu, 6; kratu, 11; gdtb; jantu, 2; jigyu; tdntu; tdru; tr'tm; tvdyu;
dyu^ 19; devayit; namasyh; pdyu, 12; prushitapsu, 2; bahu, 4; bhdnu, 7; bktru;
bkr'gu ; maksh&yu ; manyu ; miUfyfiu, 2 ; vacasyu, ; vasu, 24 ; vdyu, 4 ; vipan'ya,
2 ; sanishya ; saranyu, 2 ; scfcM, 2 ; sindhu, 5 ; sudd'nu ; suydntu ; sdnu ; mu, 5.

C. Here belongs dbhd'bhis, 2. For makshU'bhis^ see above.
Instrumental Plural Feminine.

A. Here belong : 'ekadhenubhis; tridhd'tubhis; dhewibhis, 5.
C. Here belong: svorpti'-bhis / ljuhil'bhis ; 2juhtl,bhis, 2; tan-
tVbhis, 9 ; AV., 4.

Instrumental Plural Neuter.

A. Here belong : arenHbhis, vi.62.6 ; bahubhis ; vdsubhis, 3 ;
sumdntubhis (stotrais, Say.), i.129.7 ; jard'yubhisy AV. i.27.1 ;
bahubhis , vii.26.8.

Dative Plural Masculine.

A. Here belong 18 forms (from 11 stems) : apatriibhyas; rbhti-
bhyas; gu/igubhyas; tr'tsubhyas, 2 ; dd$dbht$ubhyas; ddsyvbhyas,
iv.38.1 ; paptibhyas; pilrubhyas, 2 ; bahubhyas, 3 ; vdsubhyas, 2 ;
s'mdhubhyas, 3 ; from the AV., papubhyas, 2 ; bahtibhyas, 2.

Dative Plural Feminine.

A. The Rik has no example. The AV. has ishubhyas, iii.27.1-6 ;
dhenubhyas, vi59.1.

C. Here belongs tanti'bhyas, x.158.4 (Gr., -bhias) ; AV., i.13.2 ;
26.4.

Dative Plural Neuter,

A.C. There is no example.

Ablative Plural Masculine.

A. Here belong: aktubhyas; jatrtibhyas, viii.1.12 (see Gr. 548);
ddsyubhyas, x.48.2 ; bahiibhyas ; bhr'gubhyas ; from the AV.,
jighatsubhyas, viii.2.20 ; ddsyubhyas, ii. 14.5 ; bhr'gubhyas f^xix..
39.5 ; mrtyubhyas, xiii.4.46 ; sdbandhubhyas, viii.2.26.

Ablative Plural Feminine.
A Here belong : dhdnxibhyas; smdhubhyas, 3.

Ablative Plural Neuter.
A.C. There is no example.

Genitive Plural Masculine.

A. So far as I know, the Veda shows no certain exception to
the rule that oxytone stems belonging to A shift the accent to the
ending in the G.p. : thus, babhrilnd'm, m. On the other hand,
the thematic final of words belonging to C retains the accent :
thus, babhrd'ndm, f. The accent of the i and £-stems is quite
analogous. From the A-stem kav'i, m., we have kavind'm; but
from the C-stem krimt\ f. (m., hrvni)^ we have krimi'ndm, AV.
v.23.13. See pp. 397-9.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

418 C. R. Lanman. [u and il-stems.

Oxytones. The Rik has 24 forms (from 12 stems). 1. rtthtd'm;
rbhdnd'm, 2 ; rshihid'tn ; cardnd'm ; devaydnd'rn ; pit find' m;
prdfrtnd'm ; babhriind'm ; bahdnd'm, 3 ; ydttind'm. The AY.
has: rtdnd'm, xv.6.6 : xvi.8.17; rbhtind'm, ix.1.13; carihid'rn,
xviii.4.53 ; devaydnd'm, viii.9.13 ; paprtnd'm, 24 times: as, ii.28.3;
ydtdnd'm, v.29.8,9. The VS. has stdydnd'm, xvi.21. For aghd-
yd'ndm, AV. i.20.2, a possible exception to the rule, see G.p.f., (\

2. The following words occur at the end of a catalectic pdda of
7 syllables, where Gr. reads -dam: rbhdnd'm ; rshihid'm, 3;
pitihid'm ; purdnd'm, i.5.2 ; 36.1 :. v.74.7 : vi.45.29 ; ripHrutm;
further, rshihid'm, at the end of the trishtubh-pdda, i. 127. 10/.
3. In no case is resolution certainly necessary.

Barytones. There are 23 forms (from 11 stems). 1. abhikra-
tdndm; abht'ptindm; ahydrshilndm; tr'tsdndm, 2 ; bhr'gdndm;
mdntindm; vds(indm,5; $dtr&ndm,2; 8indhiindm,6; svdrHndm.
The AV. has: ddsytindm, iii.10.12: viii.8.5,7: x.6.20; piydrttudm,
xi.2.21 ; vdstindm, ix.1.4; pdtrdndm, iii. 19.2 : v.20.4 : vi.65.2 ;
sdbandhtindm, xv.8.3.

2. At the end of a pdda of 7 syllables occurs krdttindm, Gr.,
-aam. 3. Resolution seems necessary in sindhdnaam, ix.15.5.

C. Here belong: ydtujil'ndm, iv.4.5 : x. 116.5 ; jdguvdm.

Genitive Plural Feminine.

A. Oxytones. 1. The Rik has no example. The AV. has
dhentind'm, iv.27.3. 2. No example. 3. Resolution is neces-
sary in dhentindam, RV., 3.

Barytones. 1. Here belongs s'indhtindm, 5. 3. Resolution
is necessary in sindhUnaam, i.46.8.9.

C. Here belong : 1. ptirvasfi! ndm. 2. tanti'ndm, 12 ; tanu'-
ndm (Gr., -aam), v.67.5 : vi.48.2 ; vadhU'ndm (Gr., -aam), viil
19.36 ; tanti'naam, ii.23.8. 3. babhrd'ndm, x.97.1 ; bibhat-

sil'ndm, x. 124.9. If we judge aghdyd'ndm, AV. i.20.2, by its
accent, it is a feminine from the stem aghdyti! (m., aghdyH'), and
mav mean malicious beings of that sex. If it be taken as a mas-
culine (for aghdytind'm), it is an exception, and the only one, to
the rule in regard to the shift of accent.

Genitive Plural Neuter,

A. Oxytone. For purtind'm, i.5.2, see masc.

Barytones. 1. Here belong : mddhtindm, 6 ; yd'pdndm; vdrti-
ndm, 25, and AV. iv.26.1,2 : vii.79.3. 2. At the end of a cata-
lectic pdda of 7 syllables, where Gr. reads -aam, stand : mddhn-
ndm; vdsdndm, i.127. 7 : viii.31.14: ix.58.2 : VaL 3.5 ; and at the
end of a pdda of 1 1 syllables (where Gr. reads -aam, 12), vdsdndm,
vii.16.2 ; 32.5. 3. Resolution is necessary in vdsdnaam, i.7.9;
128.5: ix.108.13: x.50.7; 74.1.

Locative Plural Masculine.

A. Here belong 17 forms (from 10 stems) : ahtushu ; dnmhu;
dpfishu; druhydshu; pdrushu, 2 ; bdhushu, 3 ; yddushu; vifvd-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L.p.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. * 419

bhdnushu, 2 ; pdtrushu ; smdhushu, 4. The AV. has : papt'tshu,
6 ; vtbandhushu; the VS., snfishu, xvii.14.
C. Here belong : dbhU'shu; purvbhti'shv.

Looativb Plural Feminine.

A. Here belong: v&stushu; smdhushu, viii.24.27.

Transition from C : (viksMi) dyitfshu, i.58.3. We should expect
dyiVshu; cf. dyuvas, ii.5.5. The it, is perhaps metrically shortened,
as eleventh syllable in a pdda of 12.

C. Here belong : 1. prasd'shu, twice. 2. camft'shu, 13 ;

tanti'&hu, 20, and AV. xix.20.3. 3. babhrd'shu.

Locative Plural Nkuter,

A. Here belong : urft&hu ; pmdprwhu ; sd'nushu, 2, and A V.
x.4.14; vd'&tushu, xii.5.49.

STEMS IN R OR AR.

In the words of which this section treats, the distinctions
between "strong" and "weak" stems come for the first time
prominently and unequivocally into notice. The stem ddtd'r,
'giver,' makes its A.s., ddtd'r-am, from a fuller ("strong") stem,
ddtd'r; but its L.s., ddt&'r-iy is formed by adding the ending -i to
the simple (" weak") stem, ddtd'r. The cases which exhibit this
fuller form of the stem are called, in general, " strong," and are,
for the masculine and feminine, the N. and A.s., the N.A.V.d.,
and the N. V.p. ; the others are called " weak." This strengthen-
ing of the stem does not extend to all w.ords included here, and
they may therefore be divided into two classes (A and B), accord-
ing as they have dr or d/r in the strong cases : thus, md'tar,
1 measurer' (A.s., md'tdram), may be called an A-stem ; and mdtdr,
1 mother' (A.s*, rndt&'ram), a B-stem.

A. This category embraces 150 or more stems, formed by the
derivative suffix tar, which are used as nomina agentis, or as
participles. In general, the former are oxytone, and the latter
accent the radical syllable. Lindner, p. 72, is of the opinion that
the difference was originally a purely formal one, and that this
formal distinction was afterwards extended and utilized as the
expression of a functional difference. Here also we may put the
stem star or tdr, ' a star,' although it is properly a radical. It
occurs in the N., td'ras, and I., str'bhis.

B. This class is a small, but important one. It includes a
number of words of relationship — substantives and their adjective
compounds. The masculine stems are : the compounds of -mdtar,
1 mother,' with ddri-, ihiha^ g6-, pr'pni-, saptd-, sind/w-; trimdtdr,
dvimdtdr, mmmdtdr, sumdtdr ; jd'mdtar, mjdmdtar ; deodr ;
(ndptar, ' descendant,' supplies its strong cases from a different
stem, ndpdt; but cf. naptdrem, Yacna lxxi.23 ;) pitdr, ddkshapitar,
mdtdrdrpitdr ; bhrdtdr [saptdsvasar]. The feminine stems are:

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

420 C. R. Lanman, [Stems in

duhitdr ; ndndndar ; abhrdtdr; mdtdr, wptdmdtar, sammdt<ir,
sindhumdtar [svdsar, saptdsvasar]. For ndr, see N.p.m.

C. There are only seven stems included in this section which
are not formed by the derivative suffix tar. They are : ttshdr;
devdr; ndndndar; ndr, tfiarnar; svdsar, saptdsvasar. Of these,
ushdr, ndr, stiarnar, and svdsar have peculiar declensional forms :
usr~ds (G., A.), -d'm (L.) ; ndr-e, -as (G.s.), nar-d'm ; s&arnar-* ;
svdsr-dm (G.p.).

Among the weak cases, moreover, there are certain changes of stem which
require a descriptive notice. The stems treated in this section — like those in i
and (, and u and 4— have a final that lies on the border-land between vowel and
consonant. If we consider them chiefly in the light of the related languages, we
must entitle the section "stems in tar and ar;" but this declension exhibits
peculiarities so specifically Indian, that I have followed the usual method, and
given it a place with the declension of stems whose suffixes end in vowels (p. 3271

From a comparative point of view, we say that the stem of ddtdr-i is ddiar, and
that in ddtr'-bhis we have a peculiar weakening thereof; but if we compare

agntbhydm -ibkis -ibhyas -ishu,

with ddtr'bhydm -tr'bhis -tr'bhyaa -tr'shu,

and dgne agnSs *agndy-i agndy-e

sd'no sd'no* sd'nav-i sd'nav-e,

with dd'tar *ddtdr* ddtdr-i *ddtdr-e,

we see that, as far as the Sanskrit is concerned, agni and sd'nu stand on the same
phonetic level — not with ddtdr, but with ddtr/; and that, taking ddtr' as stem, we
have in ddtdr-i a peculiar strengthening (guna) thereof. Likewise the lengthen-
ings in the A. and G.p. are quite analogous (agni'n, -ind'm — ddtr'n, ~trm'm\
Further, the analogy of &rmi~d' and -agni-ds would lead us to assume, for the
'period of separate Indian development, the forms ddtr-d' and ddtr-os (not ddlar-d,
ddt&r-os). In the Rik, the G. and L.d. forms are trisyllabic in every instance but
one, and may be pronounced pi-tr-ds (Gr., pitarfc), eta

In Sanskrit it is tho rule that the & of thematic t&r falls out in the D.s. (e. g.r
ddtre, for ddtdrt), and remains in the L.s. In the Rik, the metre does not give
evidence of a single form like ddtdre; but in x. 86.46, the text has ndndndori
where the metre demands -dri (AY., -dus\ and, on the other hand, usri, v. 53. 14,
where the metre demands ushari.

In the weak cases, accordingly, the stem appears in four forms : Jr, tf, (or, and
[{(#)r, i. e.] tr. The fourth form, ddt{<X')re, becomes by syncopation ddtri, and the
resultant is thus similar to that of the first form ddtrd' (from ddtr-df).

There are a few instances in which the distinctions between A
and B are ignored ; but they are too few to be classed as transi-
tion-forms. The most important irregularities are those of the
stem svdsar, ' sister,' and its compounds. Although a word of
relationship, it has no B-forms whatever, but makes svdsdram,
svdsdrd, svdsdras. Some recognize in the peculiar declension of svd-
sar traces of its original character as nomm agent is (*sva*ilrtar).

The instances in which A-stems have B-forms are only sporadic.
We have in a pdda of 7 syllables, manotd'rd rayind'm, viii.8.l2#
=i.46.26. In iv.35.5, $dcyd hdrl dhdnutdrdv atashta, it is likely
that the d is due to the metre. The word vasudhdrtdras9 AV. v.27.6,
is discussed in the note to the Ath. Pr. iv.45. Some authorities
regarded it as a plural. This interpretation, which is favored by
the sense, is not so very objectionable on account of the accent ;
for we may take the word as a compound of the participle dhd'tar.
This occurs in Rik viii.7.35 ; and the compound sdrhdhdtar, viii.1.12,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

r or ar.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 42 1

implies the barytone dhd'tar. Otherwise, it must pass for a
N.8.m. of the comparative of vasu-dhd'.

Except in the G.p., no forms of this declension show a n be-
tween stem and ending. For str-n-as, see N.p.

The following synopses exhibit the terminations of the in-
flectional forms :

Nbutbb.

Singular: N.A., -tar?, -tr?, -tur7 -tart; G., -tur; L., -tart.
Plural: G., -trdm?.

Masoulinb and Fkmininb.

Singular: N., -d, -dn, -dr?; A., -dram, -dram; L, -rd ; D., -re
(-are) ; Ab., -ur; G., -wr (-ras, -aras) ; L., -art, -art (-W, -rdm) ; V.,
-ar.

Dual : N.A.V., -drdy -tird, -drau, -drau; D., -rbhydm; G.L., -ros,
-r-os.

Plural : N.V., -dras, -tiros; A.m., -ft%, -rnp, -fnr, -?nh (-aras?);
A.£, -rs (-ras); I, -rbhis ; D.Ab., -rbhyas; G., -fridm, -fnaam,
-rndm, -rnaam (-ardm, -araam, -rdm), -fn ?; L., -rshu.

The forms in parentheses pertain only to the stems ushdr, ndr,
suarnar, and svdsar.

The following peculiarities are seen in the accent of the forms
of oxytone stems. It is shifted to the ending in the Ls. and
G.L.d. (pilrd', mdtrds — for pitr-d\ md(r-6s — p. 420), and in the
G.p. (pitfiid'm). It is also shifted to the ending when the final
syllable of the stem lQses its character as a distinct syllable by
syncopation ; as, ddtre, usri (for ushdr-iy Compare the accent
of the stems in i and u, pp. 375 and 405.

Contrary to the general rule that monosyllabic stems shift the accent to the
ending in the oblique cases (e. gM bh%', bhtf\ we have : ndr-e, -as, -i ; nf-bhis,
-bhyas, -shu (but nar-d'm)] str'bhis; and in like manner, gav-d, -e, -i, -dm; go-bkis,
-bhyas, shu. The stem nau follows the rule (ndv-ds, -i ; nau-bhis).

This declension pertains almost exclusively to masculines and
feminines ; and this is to be expected, since the words in tar are
the names or epithets of persons or personified objects (Lindner,
p. 72). The explicit paradigms of the grammarians (cf. bahusva-
srni) have little or no application to the Veda. Least of all
should elaborate arguments be based upon facts with regard to
the forms of the neuter.

NEUTER STEMS IN TAR.

The Rigveda, however, appears to have a few forms (perhaps
17, at most), from neuter stems in tar. Since they are so few and
sporadic, it seems advisable to give them all together here. The
stems are: dhartdr, ' prop, support ;' dhmdtdr, ' smeltery, smithy;'
sthdtdr, the opposite oijagat; and vidhartdr, used as an infinitive,
'to hold (out),' 'to mete out.'

vol. x. 57

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

422 C. R. Ixiiiman, [Stems in r.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

Iu the first place we should notice the fact alluded to on p. 343
(cf. p. 377 end, 412 end, and 390, and Gr., Wb. 1603), that in cases of
extremely infrequent occurrence there appears to be a correspond-
ing uncertainty as regards the form. It would seem that linguistic
usage was to that extent still unsettled and indeterminate. For
the N.A.s., the Veda shows at least two, and perhaps four attempts
to make case-forms.

1. The termination that we should expect d priori is -fdr. The nearest
approach to this is in vi.49.6, sdtyc^rutah kavnyo ydsya gtrbhir jagata (p. -t?ii
sthdtar jdgad &' krnudhram, * At whose call ye, 0 truth-hearing wise ones, ([are]
coming, i. e.) come, (to him) grant ye that which remaineth steadfast and that
which moveth,' i. e., make him master of all things. The word sthdtar. however,
has no accent. Gr. reads -wr, and BR. pronounce the passage corrupt.

2. The form of the paradigms ends in -tr' ; as, kartr'. BR. suggest the
reading sthdtx' for the passage pac&'ft ca sihdtf'ii cardtham capdhi, i.72.6, and a5
I think, with good reason ; since all masculine forms (except this) come from the
barytone stem sthd'tar. Cf. Miiiler's note to Rik Pr. iv.32.

3. As a phonetic representative of sthdtar or sthdtr\ we have
sthdtur, p. -uh, in the phrase sthdtup cardtham, a loosely formulized
expression for 'all beings.' It occurs as N. in i.58.5, sthdt/ic
cardtham bhayate patatrinah, where construction and meaning
are clear. In i.68.1, it is A.s. In i.70.7, vdrdhdn yam ptirvfh
kshapd virdpd sthdtu$ ca rdtham, the plural vdrdhdn may be
construed ad sensum with the subject sthdtu$ cardtham (cfl sdm
drata, p. 373 top): 'Whom through many nights and morninsr*
(kshapd virtipds, as A.p.f.) all beings worship.' BR. refer the
word sthdtur of these three passages to a stem sthdtur, n.

4. As for the form -tdri, it certainly stands in the text, and in
such syntactical relations as do not well admit of a locative, but
render its interpretation as nominative or accusative pretty certain.
To this may be added the probability that it is a phonetic repre-
sentative of the organic form in -tar or -tr. According to the
Praticakhyas, namely, the vowel r has a r in it, and the r is in the
middle. Thus the Kik Pr. says : repho 'sty rkdre . . . madhye
sah, xiii.14. Weber interprets the corresponding rule of the Yaj.
Pr., iv.145, so that r=i^a-\-br-\-{a, and he compares the r with
the Zend ere. The sound that precedes the r, as well as that
which follows it, is probably the obscure (samvrta) a, the neutral
vowel of the English words org&n (#), biU (#). See the notes to
Ath. Pr. i. 36,3 7. Now I think that the diaskeuasts have taken
account of this dissyllabic pronunciation of r in four instances (all
at the end of a pdda), and have written it art.

In the first, sd rnacid rnayd! brdhmanas pdtir druhd hantd'
mahd rtdsya dhartdri, ii.-J3.l7, the construction demands a
nominative in apposition with hantd' — 'the support of mighty
truth' (or * right'). In ix.86.42, an accusative is certain syntac-
tically, whatever the exegetical difficulties may be ; Gr. translates
antdr tyate \ ndrd ca cdnsam daiviam ca dhartdri thus : ' Goeth
between (both, the praise of men and the support of the gods,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Neuters.] Noun- Inflection in tfie Veda. 423

i. e.) earth and heaven.' In ix.47.4, svaydm kav'tr vidhartdri
tuprdya rtttnatn ichati, the sense demands an infinitive, and that
rather in an accusative than a locative relation. I translate :
* The Wise One himself desires to mete out treasures to the singer.'
Likewise in viii.59.2, vidhartdri hdstdya vdjrah prdti dhdyi
darpatuh: 'The wondrous thunderbolt was put in (Iudra's) hand,
to wield it.'

Dative Singular Neuter.

No example. In 1164 15, sthdtre, which Say. takes as dative of
sthdtdr, is L.s.n. of sthdtrd.

Genitive Singular Neuter.

The only example is the word sthdtur, which occurs i. 159.3 :
ii.31.5 : i\\53.6 : vi.50.7 : x.63.8 : and vii.60.2 (v'tpvatya sthdttir
jdgaUtp ca gopd'h).

Locative Singular Neuter.

The only example is found in v.9.5, with lengthened final as
antepenultimate of a pdda of 8 syllables, piptte dhmdtdri yathd,
p. -rl.

Genitive Plural Neuter.

In i.70.3, the text has gdrbhap ca sthdtd'm gdrbhap cardthdm.
BR. suggest sthdtrd' m. Sthdtrd' m is to sthdtrnd'm as svdsrdm
is to svdsrndm. See p. 430, G.p.f. Gr. refers the form to the stem
sthd'nt, present participle of sthd; cf. pd'nt-am, bhdt-f.

THE MASCULINES AND FEMININES.

The neuters being thus enumerated, we may proceed to the
masculines and feminines ; and since these are declined precisely
alike, except in the A. p., they may be treated together.

Nominative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

The form ends in -d. It occurs 973 times. Of these occur-
rences, 870 are masculines (from 140 stems), and 103 are feminines
(from 6 stems).

Examples of the masculines are : avitd\ 38 ; janitd', 26 ; jaritd',
17; trdtd', 13; tvdshtd, 45; ddtd', 13; dhartd', 13; netd', 13;
sdnitd, 22; savitd', 107; stotd \ 12; hdtd, 158; further, pitd\ 85;
bhrd'td, 10 ; trimdtd' ; dvimdtd\ 4 ; mptdsvasd ; hatdbhrdtd,
hatdmdtd, hatdsvasd, AV. ii.32.4.

The feminines are : abhrdtd' ; duhitd\ 29 ; ?ndtd\ 63 ; saptd-
svasd; sindhumdtd; aodsd, 8.

The analogy of the related languages indicates that this final -d stands for -dr.
This in turn must have been developed out of an original form -ar-s (cf. dtar-s,
Yacna, lxii.7t etc.). The steps of this development are traced by Ourtius, Studien,
ii. 169.

Grassmann, in the preface to his Wb., p. vii., observes that crasis, as shown by the
metre, always takes place between final -a or -d and an initial r-, when concurrent
in the interior of a pdda, except as stated below, and that it results in ar : thus.
xhdraacmam piba rtund, i.15.1; ydc cid dhi vdm pura r'shayo, viii.8.6, p. purd'
(Prat, ii- 11). Crasis does not take place, i.e., hiatus ensues, (1) when the con-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

424 0. R. Lanman, [Stems in r.

current vowels are separated by the caesura: as in iv.23.7c; (2) when the r- is
followed by a double consonant : as in iii.41.2a ; and (3) when -a or -d stands (or
-as, ~ds, -«, -a», -<Jn, or -dV: thus, indro brahmd' indra x'shik, viii.16.7: kdnrd
rtasya dhd'rayd, viii.6.8. Accordingly, when the metre shows hiatus between -a
{=-o8) or -d (=-o«) and r-, we may assume that at the time when the hymns were
reduced to written form, the endings -as and -da had not yet lost their final i In
like manner, hiatus between -d (aa ending of N.s. of -tar) and r- would indicate
that the historical predecessor of -a\ namely, -dr. had not entirely gone out of use,
or had at least left its graphical reflex in the text.

To put this matter to a thorough test, I examined every one of these 973 forms
as it stands in the samhitd, and obtained the results here given. In the interior
of a pdda, if the final -d of the N.s.m. and f. is followed by a vowel, the two are
almost invariably combined. Thus -d unites with d- : as in x.4.6c ; with e- to ot.
in ix.73.3 ; with a-, very often ; with i- (especially the i of iva) to e ; and with «-
to o: thus, janitd'gn&r janitd' sOfriaeya janitSndrasya janitotd vishnok, ix.96.5. The
form appears before a vowel with hiatus in only 16 instances: i. 60.46; 61.46;
18^. 6a: iii.54.126: (in iv.6.2c, read bhaanuml) v.46.4d (tvdshtd utd): vi.23.4a;
24.5a"; 25.76: vii.40.3d: viii.19.26*: x.6.16; 49.106: 60.7a {dydrn mdtd',ayfon
pitd'); 61.9c; 99.3a; 132.6a.

The form in -d was followed by r- in only five passages. These,
along with a sixth one from the Atharvan, follow :

ii.28.4a. prd stm ddityS asrjad vidhartd'fi (r-), p. -td'

v.45.6. dpa yd' mdtd'fi rmtd vrajdm g6k, p. mdtdf

i.127.10. fflrnir h6t& rsh&iidam, p. h6td

iv.33.5. tvdshid rbhavas idtpanayad vaco »aA, p. -td

v.46.1. vidvd'n pathdh ptvra-etd' rj& neshaii, p. -id'

vi. 133.4. 8va8& x'shindm bk&takr'idm babk&'va, p. svdsd.

The metre shows that in the first three verses the concurrent
vowels are to be pronounced with hiatus (-d r-) ; and that in the
last three they are to be fused to ar and pronounced as one sylla-
ble. According to the Kik Pr., iLll, -d becomes -<J before r-; and
the metre — as well as the actual prescriptions of the TPr. (x.8)
and Ath. Pr. (iii.46) — requires also the conversion of the r- to r-.
That this shortening does not take place in ii.28.4 and v.46.6 is
plain evidence that the diaskeuasts took due account of the
metrical value of the -td r- as two syllables ; and their way of
writing them is expressly mentioned by the Prat., ii.3 1 . why
have not the diaskeuasts, and after them Qaunaka, treated the
third passage, which is precisely parallel, in the same way, and
written hdtdn rsh&nd'm t Kuhn, Jieitr&ge, iv.212,213, q. v., is of
the opinion that these hymns of Paruchepa, especially i.127 and
129, are comparatively recent productions and belong to a later
redaction. This singular discrepancy (hdtd r-) is, as I think, satis-
factorily accounted for by this assumption, and is also a beautiful
confirmation of Professor Kuhn's criticism.

Paruchepa is indeed mentioned by Qaunaka, ii 32, in connection with words
occurring in i.129 and 133.

The second and third passages are the ones cited by Gr. : in
them he would restore the old forms mdtd'r and hdtdr; and if we
allow these, we may add vidhartd'r. Cf. Delbruck, Verbtim, p. 50,
and Leskien, Die Declination im Slaviach-litauischen und Ger-
manwchen, p. 24.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s*m.£] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 425

As for the last three passages, on the other hand, it seems not
unlikely that in the time of the oral tradition combinations like
ddgdkasi (for *ddgdhdr dsi, v. 9. 4) and tvdshtarbhavas (for *tvdsh-
tdr rbhavas) stood quite on a level with svadhitiva (for svddhitir
iva, p. 375 end) in respect to elision and crasis, and with avitd'
rdthdndm (for -t&'r r-) in respect to elision.

Id ix.97.38, we have sd pundnd upa au're nd dhd'tdbTii aprd rddasi vi sh& dvah,
p. dhd'td d' ubhe. The combination is interesting as showing how entirely pre-
posterous and artificial is the sandhi between two pddas. The d/ belongs of
course to pdda 6, and we must pronounce obhe aprd, etc. The graphical combina-'
tion of dhd'td with obhe would give dhd'taubhe; but instead of this, we have dhd'td
first combined with d' and afterwards with ubhe. Compare, however, Prat, ii.31,
r. 61, clxvi.

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. A. The form ends in -tdram : as, ydtd'ram. It
occurs 168 times (from 41 stems).

Enumeration : adhivaktd'i
td'ram; ishkartd'ram, 2;

B. Here belong 5V forms (from 7 stems) : ddrimdtaram; jd'md-
taram; devdram; ndramy 16 ; pitdram, 33 ; bhrd'taram, 4 ; sin-
dhumdtaram.

Feminine. A. Sole example : svdsdrarn, 5 ; AV. i.28.4 : iii.30.3.

B. Here belong 31 forms (from 3 steins): duhitdram, 3; md-
tdram, 27; saptdmdtaram.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. Here belong : dstrd ; d/ultrd' ; ndptrd, 2 ; pitrd',
2; savitrd', 2; from the AV., dstrd, xi.2.7 ; tvdshtrd, xii.3.33;
bhrd'trd, v.22.12.

Feminiue. Here belong : duhitrd' ; from the AV., mdtrd', iii.
30.2; svdsrd, v.22.12. N

Dative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. Here belong 52 forms (from 7 6tems) : jaritri, 23 ;
ddtre; ndptre, 3 ; pitre, 9; savitre, 2 ; stotre, 13 ( Wb.} col. 1 774) ;
hotre; from the AV., autre, vi.93.2 ; kartre, x. 1.30; kroshtre, xi.
2.2; jaritre, xviiLl.40; ddtre, ix.3.12 ; 4.1: x. 9.1 3-24 ; 10.27;
dhdtre and vidhdtre, iii.10.10 ; pitre, i.31.4 : v. 11.1 : vii.14.3 ;
rakshitre, xii.3.55-60.

Feminine. Here belong: duhitre ; mdtr'e ; svdsre ; from the
AV., duhitr'e, vi.137.1 ; mdtre, i.31.4.

C-stems. Here belong : ndre, 5 ; suarnare. In iii. 18.1, pitdreva,
p. pitdrd-iva, Bollensen sees a dative, and divides thus : pi tare va.
There is nothing improbable in the form as dative ; but the sense
favors decidedly the view of the padakdra.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

426 ft R. Lanman, [Steins in r.

Ablative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. Here belong: dntur; dhdtfir,Z\ pitfir,o\ b/tratur;
vydmdtur ; srtvitfir, 3; hdtur, 2; from the AV., tvdshtur and
dhdtfirs xi. 8.9 ; pitfir, iii.25.5 : vi.116.3; bhrd'tur, vi. 116.3*.

Feminine. Here belong : duhitfir; mdtur, 6 ; svdsur, 3 ; from
the AV.y *i<ft''/r} iii.25.5 : vi.116.2,3: viii.9.5.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. Here belong 129 forms (from 24 stems) : abhi-
kshatt'&r; avitfir; dstur, 3; janitfir, 3; jtiritur, 19; trdtur, 2 ;
tvd&htur, 8 ; ddtfir; ndptvr, 2 ; nidhdtfir; net fir; nfohtur; pitfir^
36 ; bhrd'tur, 3 ; mandhdtfir; vandltur; vdvd'ttir, 2 ; vddhnr;
^amit'fir; sanitur; savitfir, 29 ; sottir; stotfir, 4 ; hdtur, 6 ; from
the AV., utthdtfir, ix.4.14; cefttfr, vi.73.1 ; dhdtfir, ii.36.2; trdtur,
etc.

Feminine. Here belong : duhittir, 1 ; m<ftf/r, 22 ; svdsur, 2 ;
from AV., ndndndur, xiv. 1.44 ; mdtfir, 6 times ; svdsur, xviii.1.14.

C-stems. The full ending -a,* with the correspondingly weak
theme is seen only in usr~ds (for ushr'-cw, stem ushdr), iii.58.4 :
vi.12.4; but the monosyllabic theme ndr makes ?idr-as, i. 12 1.2 :
v.9.7 : vii.31.2.

I am unable to find any support for such a form as pitr-ds, cited by Benfey,
Gram. p. 300, note 8. It is hard to say whether the form is to be set up as end-
ing in -ur or -us. Schleicher, Comp.4 p. 538, §252, traces the genesis of the form
thus : *pitar-&8, (*?)pitrd8, *pitr's1 pitus. The analogy of ve-s as compared with
avy-as, and of madho-8 as compared with mddhu-as, however, favors our starting
with *pitdr-8 (or pitr'-as ; but not with pitdr-as) ; cf. nar-s, Yc. iii. 17. The series
*pitar-s, *pitar-r, *pUr'-r, pitur seems to me perfectly licit and simple ; but to
some, in view of the analogy of the Pali usabha, vusa {z=rshabha. vrsAo-— Kuhn,
Pdli-Or. p. 14), the following may appear more probable: */nfcir-s, ^pitr'-s, pitus.

The Vedic v-dr-as — we should expect nur, for *ridr-s — is perhaps to be put on
a level with girdy-as, p. 383, as having the fuller ending along with the stronger
form of the stem. See p. 420 med.

Locative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. 1. Here belong: netdri; pitdrl; sotdri,2; vaktdri,
AV. ii. 1.4. For ndri, i.85.9 : viii.85.19, see p. 348 med.

2. The samhitd has -*, and the pada reads -J. The protraction
is in every instance metrical. Here belong; kartdri, i. 139.7 (/ is
tenth syllable in a pdda of 12); vaktdri, x.61.12 (eighth of 11);
dhmdtdri (n., see p. 423).

In v.41.10 and vi.12.4, etdri nd ftehaih, p. etar\ the i is eighth in a pdda of 11.
Gr. takes etdri as fem. of etdr (' wie die Wallerin mit Liedern') ; cf. avitdri, vii.96.2,
text -trV. The padakdra's interpretation as L. rests, perhaps, on the analogy of
the cases just given. I find no mention of them in the Prat., although they are
co/cred by the general prescriptions of viii.21,22.

Feminine. Here belong: duhitdri, i.71.5 (*, being followed by
a double consouant, is not lengthened, although the eighth in a
pdda of 11 syllables) ; cf. p. 333 ; mdtdri, twice, and AV. xi.7.6.

C-stems. In x. 85.46, ndndndari samrd'jni bhava, we must pro-
nounce ndndndri. The Atharvan gets over the difficulty by
reading ndndnduh.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L.s.m.f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 427

Con trari wise, in v.53.14, vrshtvV pdm y&r d'pa usn bhe&hajdm,
we must restore the syncopated vowel and read ushdri.

In x.6.5, usrd'm seems to be an isolated ease of transition to the
/-declension (series B, p. 366 end). Pronounce ushar-d'm.

Vocative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

The form is identical with the simple stem. There are 110 m.
forms (from 26 stems), and 20 f. forms (from 3 stems).

Masculine. Here belong: avaspartar; avitar; janitar; jaritar,
1 1 ; jd?ndtar ; trdtar, 3 ; tvashtar, 4 ; dartar y doshdvastar, 3 ;
dhartar; dhdtar, 2 ; netar, 2 ; neshtar; pranetar, 5 ; prayantar;
yujnahotar; vidhartar; vidhdtar; sanitar; savitar, 23 ; susanitat,
2 ; sotar; st/idtar, 5 ; hotary 27 ; further, pitar, 4 ; bhrdtar, 6 ;
from AV., vipastar, ix.5.4.

Feminine. Here belong: duhitar, 17 ; mdtar, 2; from AV.,
duhitar, xix.47.5 ; mdtar, 48.2 ; xii.1.63.

C-stem. In i.49.4, ushar (Prat, iv.13) is V.s. of ushdr.

Nom., Ace, and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

The ending -d is used 176 times; the ending -aw, only 10 times.
The circumstances of occurrence coincide entirely with those given
on p. 340, q. v.

I. The ending -d is used :

1. at the end of &pdda (51 times);

2. before consonants (112 times) ;

3. before an initial vowel with which it is fused (11 times).

4. It is never used before vowels with hiatus.
II. The ending -cm is used :

1 . before vowels without hiatus, in the form ~dv (8 times).

I. 1. In vii.94.3 : viii.8.17 : x.40.4, the following pdda begins with t- ; and in
vi.60.9: viii.26.11: x. 143.6, with u-. The concurrent vowels are written as
fused ; but are of course to be pronounced with hiatus.

3. The final -d coalesces with a- in i. 110.8 : x.39.3 ; with d-, in v.73.7 ; with
iva, in iii.18.1 ; 58.2: iv.41.7 : ix.18.5: x.59.1; 106.2,4; with i-, i.117.18. '

4. In i. 161.10 and x.65.10, the samhitd has -a u- in the interior of a pdda, and
the pada has -au u-. Cf. p. 341, 4a, and Rik Pr. ii.9, and Ath. Pr. iii.40.

II. 1. There are only two instances of -au before a consonant: viz., at the end
of iii. 55. lie (before m-). and of x.l4.11a (before o). iii.55 is one of the later,
mystical hymns ; and verse 11 of x.14 contains notions about the hounds of Yama
which are entirely different from those of verse 10, and probably later. The
enumerations follow :

I. Masculine. A. Here belong 31 forms (from 15 stems). They
are: avitd'rd, 2; asndtd'rd ; ushtd'rd ; gdntdrd, 4; coditd'rd ;
janitd'rd; dhartd'rd, 3 ; nwetdrd; pretd'rd; yantd'rd; -yantd'rd;
rakshitd'rd; pamitd'rd ; 8thdtd'rd,,2 ; hdtdrd, 10; from AV.
dhartdrdy vii.73.4. "'

B. C. Here belong 109 forms (from 9 stems). They are : mdtdrd-
pitdrd; ihehamdtard ; ddkshapitard ; pitdrd, 23 ; bhrd'tard ;
shtdhumdtard ; {ubhd! !) mdtdrd, i. 140.3; nard, 69; ndrd, 9^;
finally, manot&'rd, 2 : see p. 420 sub fin.

Feminine. A. Here belongs svdsdrd^ 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

428 G R. Lan?nan, [Stems in r.

B. Here belong 33 forms (from 3 stems). They are duhitmft,
2 ; mdtdrd, 30; mmmdtdrd; from AV., mdtdrd, v. 1.4.

II. Masculine. A. Here belong: ddtd'rau; rakshitd'rau. The
AV. has: anushthdtd'rau, xv.4.1-6; kskattd'rau, iii.24.7; gojh
td'rau, v.30.10: xv.4.1-6.

B. C. Here belong : pitdrau, 3 ; narau, 2 ; dhdnutdrau: seep.
420. The AV. has^ pitdrau, vil20.3: xiv.2.37 ; sammcUdrau,
xiii.2.13.

Feminine. A. Here belongs svdsdrau, iil55.11 : AV. v.2.9.

B. Here belong: mdtdrau; from AV., duhitdrau, vii.12.1.

Inst., Dat., and Abl. Dual Masculine and Feminine.
The only example is pitr'bhydm, thrice, as dative.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masculine and Feminine.

The form occurs 25 times (from 3 stems). It is always written
-tros (sros) ; but the metre shows that the word is to be pro-
nounced as a trisyllable (pi-tr-ds, etc.) in every instance (except
vii.3.9c), and so also in the single form from the AV. See p. 420
nied.

Genitives: pitrds, 14; mdtrds, iii.2.2 ; pitrds, AV. xx.34.16.

Locatives : pitrds, 6 ; nidtrds, 3 ; svdaros.-

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. A. Here belong 69 forms (from 40 stems).

Enumeration: agnihotdras ; abhikshattd'ras ; ahhisvartd'ras ; dsldras; xtpaksht-
td'rcut; gantdras ; cetd'ras (ptcp.); cetd'ras ; ;artto'ra.«, 10; joshtd'ras; td'ra*;
trdtd'ras, 2; diitd'ras ; dhartd'ras, 2; dhd'tdras ; nicetti'ras, 2; ninditd'ras;
n&draa; nel&'ras, 2; nrpdta'ra* ; panitd'ras, 2; pavitd'ras ; projndtd'ras ; prant-
t&'ras; prdvitd'ras ; preUVras; yantd'ras; rdkshitd'ras ; van td'ras, 2; vidhdUi'ras;
viyotd'ras ; famitd'ras; frdtdras ; sanibi'ras ; sotd'ras.A; stotd'ras,! ; sthd td'ras;
svdritdras ; hetdras ; hotdras, 6.

In i. 62.3 : ii.19.1 : v. 33.5, the first a of ndi'as appears to have
the value of a long syllable, as penultimate of a trishtubh-pdda :
thus, yid'ras.

B. C. Here belong 223 forms (from 9 stems). They are: gSmd-
taras; ddkshapitaras ; ndras, 156; pitdras, 48; pr' pnimdtara*,
10 ; bhrd'taras, 4 ; sfindhurndtaras ; sumdtdras; »uarnaras. The
AV. has : devdras, xiv. 1.39 ; vasudhd'tdra*, v.27.6 (see p. 420 end.)

Feminine. A. Here belongs 8vdsdrasy 21.

B. Here belong : abhrdtdras; duhitdras, 3 ; mdtdras, 23 ; from
AV., abhrd'taras, i.17.1 ; duhitaras, ii.14.2 ; mdtdrds, vi.9.3 : xix.
40.3 ; sammdtdras, viii.7.27.

If the form str-n-as — cited as N.p. from Jyotisham, pp. 4, 52— is
authentic, it must be regarded as a form of transition to the
w-declension ; cf. khdd<-?ia8, p. 393.

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. The usual pada-form -rn occurs 65 times (from 12
stems). 1. In the interior of a pdda, it appears in the samhitd :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.p.m.1] Noun-Injketion in ike Veda. 429

(a) as -fnp before ey-, x.50.4 (Pr&t. iv.32) ; as -ffir before a-, y.54.15
(Pr. iv.30) ; as -f«A before />-, i.121.1 : viii.73.3 (Pr. iv.S4) ; (b) as
^,16 times before consonants: e.g., x.64.8; 154.4; as -fn, before
a-, 142.5: iil5.5; 84.14: v.50.3 ; before i-, vii.55.3j before r-,
vi.39.5 ; (c) as -frt, before J- , vii.8.8 ; and before c-, 1.72.6 (Pr&t.
iv.32; but see p. 422, 2). 2. At the end of a pdda it appears as
•fn in 36 instances: e. g., v.33.t, and as -frt before j- in v.15.2.

The forms are : dstfn; asndtfn; jaritfn% 2 ; trdtfn; ddksha-
pitfn; ddtf'n; nfn^ 42ipUfny 7 ; pravodhfn; ttotfn, 8 ; sthd-
tfn; Mt*n,3. The AV. has: kartf'n, x.1.14,17; Qoptfn, xix.
27.4; pdtfn (a-), iii.12.8; mtf'n, 13 "times; pitf'nr (u-), xviii.2.4,
23 ; 4.40 ; pr'pnimdtfns (£■), iv.27.2.

In the A.p. the stem would have its weak form : as, pitf; this, with the usual
case ending of vocalic stems, -w, and the lengthening, gives pitfna. Of this
organic form, the Prit, iy.30,32,34, gives four examples from the Rik, and two
others taken from Praiahaa (nfilh patibhyak and nftlh pranetram). The treatment
of the form before Towels ought d priori to be the' same as that of the forms in
-dn, -in, -fln (p. 346, 395, 415) ; but in fact it is quite arbitrary, as may be seen
above. See also note to Ath. Pr. ii.29.

Schleicher thought that the original form consisted of a consonantal stem with
corresponding ending : as, pitar-at; but this seems to me unlikely for the period
of separate Indian development The metre, however, suggests the reading n&r-as
in viL28.3, text nf% and x.50.4, text nffip. In x.35.105, Gr. reads frfowaa, text
hMfn; but the verse may consist of 12,11,12,12.

Feminine. Here belong: mdtfs^ 4 ; svdsfs, 2. In x.35.2, mdtfn
is declined as a masculine! Cfc i.140.3. We see the ending
which belongs to consonantal stems in only one word, utrds,
occurring thrice.

Ihbthuicbhtal Plural MASouLm ahd Fncnrm.

For the remaining cases, the ending is added to the weaker
form of the stem.

Masculine. Here belong 112 forms (from 14 stems). They are :
istrbhis; kartr'bhis, 3 ; dAdtr'bhis* 3 ; ndptrbhis; parifbhis, 2 ;
piifbhtSy 9; saptdmdtrbhis ; setrbhis ; 8<tfr'bhis9 7; s6trbhis ;
hetfbhis, 2; Mtrbhis, 2; further, nr'bhis, 71; str'bhis, 8." The
AV. has : nr*bhi8> 2 ; pitr'bhiSj 5 ; bhrd'trbhis, vi.4.1.

Feminine. Here belong : mdtr'bhis, 6 ; svdsrbhvt, 2.

Dativb Plural HASOumm ahd Fumora.

Masculine. Here belong 70 forms (from 4 stems). They are :
jaritrJbhyasy 11; nfbhyaSy 18; pitr'bhya8y 9; ttotr'ohyas, 80. In
i.110.6 and x.148.4, Or. reads nr^bhias; but this is not certainly
necessary. The AY. has : pitr'bhya*, 17 ; rak*h%trfbhyasy iii.27.1-6.

Feminine. Here belongs mdtr'bhyas, L95.7.

Ablauts Plural MASOULnra and Fmnxira.

Masculine. Here belong: nfbhycu, L173.6: vii.20.5; pitr'bhyas,
twice.
Feminine. Here belongs mdtfbhyas, x.1.2.
vol. x. 58

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

480 (X R Lanman, [Stems in

Gbnitiye Plubal Masoulhib and Fmmnira.

Oxytone stems in r\ like those in i and u (p. 397, 417), shift
the accent to the ending in the 6. p. In accordance with the
analogy of the i and w-stems also, the r should always be length-
ened. It is always written as long in the Rik, except in the case
of nfnd'm.

Masculine, L The thematic f is long. 1. Here belong: dhdtfi-
nd'm; ptifnd'm, 6 ; Btotfndlm, 3 ; hdtrndm (the only barytone),
llie AV. has: ddtfnd'm (MSS., ddirend'm ; ed., d&Lrdnd'm),
v.24.3; pitfnd'm, 11 times: as, ii.12.4; so TBr. il6.16t.

2. Gr. reads -aam where the text has -dm at the end of a pdda
of 7 syllables: jaritrnd'm, 130.15: iv.31.3 : vii66.3 ; pitfnd'm,
vi.46.12.

3. Resolution is necessary in 5 instances: pitfndam, viii.41.2 :
x.57.3; stotfndam, v.64.4: vL45.29; Mtfnaam, viii. 9 1.10.

I. a. Benfey, Vedica, p. 1-38, has shown clearly that in the
Veda r designates not only the short, but also the long voweL In
iii.62.8: iv.25.4: v.30.12 : vii.1.11; 19.10; 62.4: x.29.2 ; 99.9;
111.1, nrnd'm stands at the end of a trishtubh-pdda, and the
syllable nr as penultimate has of course the value of a long
(nfnd'm). In i.48.4: iii.16.4: v.18.5: vii.32.11: viii.55.5, nrnd'm
Stands at the end of a pdda of 7 syllables (Gr., reading -aam,
makes 8), and must be pronounced nfnd'm; so also at the end of
x.93.12ft (11 syllables-— Gr., -aam, 12).'

IX The thematic r is short. 1. Here belongs nrnd'm, i.43.7 :
ii.1.1: iii.51.4: yi.65.5: vii.83.1

8. Resolution is necessary (nrndam) in i.77.4 : vi.33.3 : viii. 40.2 :
X 29 1 * 93 4 * 148 4.

The'AV. has nrnd'm, ii.9.2 : xix.47.7. The TS. has: udgdtr-
nd'm, iii.2.9* ; dhdtrnd'm, iv.7.14* (Rik x.128.7, -f-) ; netrnd'm,
1.8.61 ; pitrnd'm, i.3.61 ; 8.5* (Rik x.57.3 : VS. iii.58, -r-) : iii.3.51
(so Bh&g. P. iv.15.8) ; bhrd'trndm, ii.6.69 ; so strndm, Jyotisham,
p. 89. See Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.101.

G. The only stem which is treated as consonantal in the G.p.nx
is ndr. This makes nar-d'm, 6 ; nar-dam, 10.

Ludwig, Der Infinitiv im Veda, p. 6, takes nf'n as a genitive in i.121.1: v.7.10:
L181.8: iii.14.4: iv.2.15: v.33.1 : vi.2.11; 3.6: x.29.4: i.146.4. In the first two
passages, the text is corrupt ; in the last, Or. also takes it as genitive (see Deb.
ii.508), and Both thinks this interpretation possible. If genitive, it stands for
nf'm (?); of. yiUhidm, eta, p. 353.

Feminine. Here belongs svdsfndm, i.l 24.9: iiil.3,11.

C. The only stem, not monosyllabic, to which the ending is
added directly, is svdsar — svdsr-dm, i.65.7. I consider this a
wrong formation, to which, perhaps, Paraoara was forced by the
exigencies of his favorite metre. Schleicher would regard it as a
relic of the older mode of formation. C£ usrd'm, L.s.f., and see
p. 423, G.p.n.

Locative Plubal Masouunb and Frmtninb.

Masculine. Here belong : devr'shu; nr'shu, 2 ; Mtrshu. The
AY. has pitr'shu 13 times: as, i. 14. 1,8.

Feminine. Here belongs mdtir'shu, 4.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

aw.] N<mn-Inflectian in tke Veda. 431

STEMS IN AI, 0, AU.

Under this head belong only five simple stems and their com-
pounds: rai9 rdhddrai, orhddrai ; g6, dgo, pr'pnjgo9 rtipadgo;
ayS, prthivtfdyd, pradyS, vrshtidyo; nati; gfati. They are used
only in the masculine and feminine, and between these two gen-
ders there are no declensional differences. Although the thematic
vowels are not suffixal, I have nevertheless followed the tradi-
tional order, and treated these stems after those in r.

I. The stems rat (m.f.) and rayi (ul£) supplement each other
as follows :

N. rayis, 28 rtfyas, 20

A. rayim, 180 rdyds, 22

L rdyd', 39 raytbhu, i.64.20

D. rdyS, 62

Ab. rdyds, 3

G. rdyds, 103 rayind'm, 41.

The stem rat/% intrudes twice on the domain of rai in the I.B.,
forming rayyay x.19.7, and rayind, x.122.3.

The stem rai intrudes twice on the domain of rayi, forming
r&'m as A.s. at x. 11 1.7, and— perhaps for the sake of the metre —
rdyd'm as G.p. at ix.108.13 (Gr. unnecessarily, -ddm).

In i. 129.9 ,10, rdyd' seems to be trisyllabic (rdid? or rayindf).
In 168.10 : iv.41.10 : vi.19.5, the G.s. appears with irregular
accent, rd'yas. So in vi47.9: viL34.22 ; x.140.4: V&L 4.10, the
A.p. appears with irregular accent, unless indeed we assume that
in the matter of accent the A.p. is treated as a strong case (c£
vr'faiSy bhld-asy etc.).

In the Atharvan, rdyd' occurs at xiv.2.36 ; rdyiy xviii.2.37 ;
rdyds (sing.), 22 times.

The Kik has three forms which seem to be compounds of rai :
brh&dr&ye, rdhddrayas, and patd-rd. The first two are referred
by BR. to stems in -W, -rk This is possible (see p. 884, G.s.m.) ;
but it seems to me more likely that the forms stand for -rdye,
*rdyas, the d being due to the metre. See p. 382, D.s.m. The
word patdrd, x. 106.5, we may regard as coming from the more
original form of the stem (-rd) ; or, possibly, as standing for
patard'f.

The noon-stem would seem to have been once identical in form with the verbal
root rd ; and we have the forms rd-m, rdrbhydm, rd-bhis. The y is perhaps of
phonetic character (as in devd-y-os). The grammarians abstract the stem rd'y or
rai from the form rd'-y-as, by dividing it as rd'y-as.

EL The stem g6 is thus declined : gatis, 22 ; A., gd'vam, text
gd'trij 6: gd'm, 34; gdvd; gdve, 13; Ab., gds; G., g&vas, text
g6sy 3 : gds, 34 ; gdvi, 7 ; gd'vd, 2 : gd'vau, 4 ; gd'vas, 97 : gdvas,
3; A., gdvasf, text gd's, i.61.10: gd's, 100 times, and 458,6;
gdbhis, 76 ; D., gdbhyas, 2 ; G., gdvd/n, 55 : gdndm, 15 : gdndm
(at end of pdda of 7 syllables — Gr., -aam), 5 ; gdshu, 43.

The dissyllabic character of gd'm (z=.gd'vam) is clear in v.52.16,
where gd'm is metrically parallel to pr'gnim: gd'm vdcanta sUrd-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

482 C. JR. Lanman, [Stems in

yah | pr'pnim vocanta mdtdram. So viii.4.21. BR cite gdoai
(d!) as A. p., from TBr., etc. Gdndm is never used except
at the end of a pdda. See P&il vii.1.57 ; gdndm — cited by Boht-
lingk, ad loc, as an exception — is at the end of an aJcsharapatikti,
L69.3& Gdndm is regularly used in the interior of a pdda (52
times : in v.30.4, pronounce ibru&m — not gdvadm). It is used
twice at the end of pdda* with an even number of syllables:
x.166.1 (8 syll): ix.81.1 (12 syll.). For iv.l.l9c (10 sylL), 6r.
suggests gdndm; but the metre is still short (read $6ci 4'dho [tf]
atrnan na gdndm ?).

In the AV., the metre gives no evidence of the forms gtfvam
(A.s.), gdvas (G.s.), gdvas (A.p.) ; gdvd, gdve> and gd'vd are not
found ; the other forms are like those in the Rik. Gdndm occurs
xx.127.3 (end of pdda); gdvdmy 11 times (interior of pdda).

The Rik has the compounds: d-gos, G.s.m. (may come from
dhgv, p. 401); pfpnigdvas (c£ ddhrigdvas, p. 414), N.p.m.;
rticadgavi, L.s.f.

in. The stems div (m.), diti or dyti (m.), and did or dyd (m.1)
supplement each other as follows :

A. did, dyd. B. div. 0. dit, dy{L

N.

diaix, 26

dyafo, 46

A.

did'm, 12

dyd'm, 67

I.

Mvd', 9

D.

c*H*15

Ab.

dwds, 60 +

O.

divtis, 180 +

L.

dwi, US

V.

diau*,Z

<*yofa,4

N.A.V.

dyd'vd, 26

N.V.

dyd'vaa, 22

A.

dyfl'n.24; dWn

L

dyibhie, 19.

A. The form dyd'm is read by Gr. as did'm in 12 passages;
but this is justified only in 8 or 9. We must read il27.2c? as a
oatalectic pdda (pdrijmdnam iva dyd'm) so as to keep the a of
iva Ions by position. The requirements of the metre are better
satisfied by tipa dyd'vam skambhdthu skdmbhanena, vL72.2<j,
than by tipd did'm: so in L67.5c (tastdmbha dyd'vam), and per-
haps in iill.l5<£ The form dyd'm is related to the form dyd'vam
thus rendered probable, as gd'm to gd'vam, and perhaps as rd'm
to rdlyam.

The vocative dyads occurs at viii.89.12 : x.59. 8,9,10— of course,
as a monosyllable. In vi.51.5 — the only passage in the Rik where
it occurs as a dissyllable — the diaskeuasts have taken due notice
of the metrical value of the word, and accented it, in accordance
with the general rule, on the first syllable, diaus; this, of course,
appears in the written text as dyatis, with jdtya svarita. In
A V. vi.4.3, also, we have dfraush pUar ydvdya duchtind yd' (ed.
wrongly, dyateh). Compare the voo. jytfke (i. e. jidke, from
jydkfl), Av. i.2.2, and vydxyhra (i e. vidghra, from vydgkrd),
iv.3.3. The MSS. have the impossible reading vydghra, and the
edition wrongly vyd'ghra. These have been pointed out by

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

at, 0, at*.] Noun-Inflection in ike Veda. 488

Whitney. The circumflex is in each case perfectly itgalar.
Quite anomalous is the dual dydv-ty iv.66.5, formed with the
ending of a neuter.

The stem dy6 intrudes on the domain of dfo twice. The Ab.s.
dyaus, dependent on abhi'ke, i.71.8=TS. 13.14'= VS. xxxiii.ll,
is quite isolated. Mahidhara, prathamd shashthyarthe, divah
samtpe 'ntqrikshe. The L.8. dydvi occurs only 12 times in the
Bik, against 118 occurrences of divi, and only once in the AY.,
where divi is frequent Dydvi-dyavi occurs twice in the Rik,
Both dyatis and dydvi are improper formations,

B. In mandates i.-vii, divds occurs as Ab. 50 times and as G.
180 times; in mandalas viii.-x., Ab. and G. together, 167 times;
besides, divas occurs with a voo. 21 times, and divo napdtd twice.
In the G.d. of dyd'vdprthivi', the first element appears as a singu-
lar, divdsprthivyds, 4.

The stem div intrudes on the domain of dy6 in the A.a», dlvam.
This occurs 21 times (against 79 occurrences of the written
dyd'm). In a decided majority of these 21 passages may be seen
other marks betraying a later origin, and 1 regard dwam as an
improper formation. It is the regular form in the later grammar.
As a N\p., divas (for dyd'vas), ix.108.11, is hardly admissible.
Gr. takes it as N.p. in his Wb. ; but as G.s. (accent I) in his Ueb.

The stem div intrudes on the domain of dyti in the Ap., divas,
ii.3.2 : iv.53.5. In iv.3.8 and v.47.1, it is doubtful whether divds
(accent !) is an A, p. The only form of div that is certainly plural
(divas at ii.3.2 ana iv.53.5) is feminine.

C. The stem dyti intrudes on the domain of div and makes
dy6s, occurring as Ab.s. twice, and as G.s. 4 times. The form,
however, may come from dyd as well as from dyb, just as dgos
from dgo or dgu\

In versed peculiar to the Atharvan are found the forms divd!
and dive ; the forms dyaiis, dyd'm (e. g. i.2.4), diyam, divds,
divds, and divi occur frequently ; dydvi occurs in xii.2.18 and in
two Rik passages; dyH'n and ayubnis, only in Rik verses (xviiL
1.24 and vi.31.3); divas, as N.p.f., xi.7.14 and xiii.3.21 ; divas, as
Ap.f., iv.20.2 ; 34.4 : xix.27.3 ; 32.4 (MSS. div6).

The following compounds occur: prthivfdyd'vd; pradyaHs,
AV. xviii.2.48 ; in the Rik, pradivd; pradivas, Ab., 21 ; pradivi,
8 ; vrshtidydvd, -dvas; sud^ivas, N.p. ; dhardivi, once, and AY.
v.21.6. 'We find dyOlvdr in the Rik with -kshd'md (8), -pfthivf
(79), and -bhU'mt (5).

Transitions to the o-declension. Here belong the forms divd-m
(15), dive-dive (46), and tridivi, made after the analogy of the
weak cases div-ds, etc. The AY. has tridivdm, svdivd-, divi-dive
(n.135.10).

Adverbially recessive accent is seen in div-d, which occurs 25
times in the KV. and 13 times in the AY.

IY. The stem naU, t, is thus declined: nods; nd'vam, 17;
ndvtf, 13; G., ndvds; ndvi, 2; N.p., nd'vas, 4; naubhis, 2.
The AY. has the forms : nails, 4 ; nd'vam, 6 ; N.p., nd'vas, v.4.5.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

434 C. R Lanman, [Bad. d and

Transition to the ^-declension. From ndv-d' as a stem comes
the Ls. ndvdyd, 197. 8, sd nah s'vndhv* iva ndvdyd. So T.ar.
vi.11.2. Observe the accent.

V. The stem gla<i has the following Vedic forms : glaus, AV.
vL83.3 ; N.p., gld'vas, Ait: Br. i.25 ; glaubhU, VS. xxv.8.

SUFFTXLBSS STEMS.

The following section treats of suffixless stems — those whose
only element, or whose final element, is a root First come
the vocalic, and then the consonantal stems, in alphabetical
order. It will be seen, however, that the root-words ending
in other vowels than a or d have been already discussed along
with the stems whose suffixes end in the corresponding vowek
This course has been pursued, in order that similar forms
might be brought together (as, ahias and gdthdnias, p. 384),
which would otherwise have been widely separated. We
shall treat of the stems in d and a radical also together, case by
case. This course has here the same practical advantage as in
the treatment of the stems in % and % u and 4L

STEMS IN RADICAL A AND X

If we study the mass of forms, we shall see that there are two
series of declensional endings. The first — which, for convenience,
we shall call series A — is that which the grammars assign to the
stems in radical long 4, and of which -pd1 may serve as a para-
digm :

Series A. : m. and i

-pd'8

-pa&

-pd'**

•pd'm*

"P&'8

-pd'*

•pd'bhydm*

•pd^bhig*

•pi

-pd'bhyas*

•pd'*

-p6s

•pd'm

-pi

?d'8U*

-pd*

-pd».*

Series B : m., f., and n.

The other forms coincide entirely with those of the stems end-
ing in suffixal d or d — ga-td-8, ga-td\ (ja-td-m^ etc. The declen-
sional series of these stems we shall designate as series B ra., B f.,
and B n.

The Indian grammarians, as is well known, do not admit the
existence of roots in short d. To this view they were perhaps led
by the facts that the great majority of the verbal forms actually
have long dy and that short d at the end of compound nouns often
supplants a long d of the Veda. In fact, from the Vedic texts
themselves, it appears that the forms like go-p&'m are, in general,
younger than those like go^>d'm.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

o-stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 485

The great bulk of all the forms from 4-stems are either nominatives or accusa-
tives. Of the other cases the examples are few, or even only sporadic. In the
N.s.m., the Rik-forms with long d are more than ten times as numerous as the
Rik-forms with short a, and five times as numerous as the Atharvan forms with
long d: on the other hand, the Atharvan stems with short & are almost as
numerous as the Atharvan stems with long d, and considerably more numerous
than the Rik-stems with short d. Moreover, the Atharvan has no masculine
forms from stems in long d in the oblique cases. It would seem, too, that the
verses in which the forms with short & occur, belong, in general, to the younger
parts of the Rigveda. •

The later aamhitds, as compared with the earlier, show a decided tendency to
give up the old A -forms and use the new B-forms. Thus in place of the Rik
itilma-dhd's (x.82.3), the Atharvan variant has ndma-dhd's (ii.1.3). In the Rik,
we find prathamorjd's and canhani-prd's (N.s.m.), and aoma-pds (Y.s.m.) ; in the
Atharvan, praOiama-j&'s and carahcapi-pr&'s (N.s.m.), and soma-pd (cf. Manu
xi.149). In the Rik, we have carma-mnd'8 (N.p.m.— can also be referred to B);
in the VS., carmarmntfm : in the Rik, rcUhdhd's vrshdbh&s; in the VS., gcvrbha-
dhd'm.

Moreover, if we look at the later literature, we see that stems in radical d
generally take the place of those in radical d. In the Veda we have the mascu-
line stem suprajd'; but in Sanskrit, supraji. In contrast with the Vedic mascu-
line A-stems sdma-gd', agra-jd', alhjd', giri-jd', rtarjfidf^ vdso-dd^ papvpdf, aniaru
ksharprd', pathtskthd', we find in the later language the B-forms : sdma-garya,
Ait. Br. ii.22 ; agraj&m, R. ; ab-jeshu, Manu ; giri-jdya, Ait. Br. vii.l end; dhorma-
/?J4m, Manu; vdao-dus (see Manu i 7.229-232 for 16 compounds of -d&); pafu-
pdndm, Brhat Samhita, xvi.14; antariksha-prd (V.s.m.), T.&r. iv.7.5 ; pathi-8hthds
and -shthdndm, MBh. Everywhere, the B-stems gain the upper hand. Similarly
stems in u supplant those in 6> p. 403, II. Compare Delbruck, Verbwn, p. 87.

By the aid of the lists of A and B-stems and of the enumerations of A and
B-forms in the following pages, a more detailed comparison of the relative age of
the A and B-forms might be made.

On the other hand, we cannot doubt the existence of roots in
short <t The facts of the related languages speak in favor of this
view, and so do d priori considerations. Schleicher has asserted
the originality of roots in short & (Beitrdgey il 92-99) ; and Del-
bruck has given a most interesting discussion of the subject in
his Verbum, pp. 87, 88, and 94, which see. Compare also
Kuhn, JBeitrdge, iv.202.

Gr. puts stems like ddnu-dd' ("ddnud-&") in the same category with v6d-a, cdcLa,
Wb. 1698. I am uncertain whether this fact is to be interpreted as a tacit denial
of Delbruck's view or not

Now since the stems in radical short d are declined in all
respects like stems in suffixal short A, there arises a difficult ques-
tion : Are we to assume that stems ending in radical short d were
originally declined like those ending in suffixal short <*, or not ?
Is such a form as go-p&'m to be regarded as a direct relic which
the Vedic language has inherited from the time of Indo-European
unity, or are this and similar B-forms to be regarded as instances
of a wide-spread transition from the declension of the stems in
radical long d to that of stems in suffixal short d — that is, as tran-
sitions from A to B ?

In regard to some verbal forms with short d (dkhydt, dhvdt),
Delbruck (p. 89) takes the view that they are direct relics of the
pre-Vedic time (" dass die Kurze uralt Hberliefert sei").

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

486 C. R. Lanmar^ [Bad. & and

In regard to the numerous forms of nominal compounds with
short & (go-p&'m, etc.), the fact that they are, in general, demon-
strably younger than those of stems in radical long d seems to me
to point to a different theory. The existeuoe of roots in short d
is to be asserted for the primitive Indo-European language ; but
the existence of roots in snort d is not to be admitted — except,
perhaps, to a very small extent — for the oldest period of the Vedic
language.

When I say that roots "existed" at such a period in such a form, I mean, of
course, simply that they were used for, or entered into verb and noun-formations
at that time Ln the one form or the other — for example, as -pd or as -pd.

At the beginning of the time of separate Indian development,
such roots were already for the most part out of use. Upon
specifically Indian ground, however, the roots which in the oldest
Vedic period ended in long d were gradually replaced by roots
in short d. That is, I consider the Vedic root-forms with short d
not as direct relics coming down from the time of Indo-European
unity, but rather as new formations specifically Indian, wnich
indeed coincide with the proethnic forms, but are not historically
identical with them. They may therefore be properly designated
as forms of transition from A to B, dating from the period of
separate Indian development.

The entire identity of form in certain cases of both series did
muoh to increase the confusion of the two series (compare p. 370
top), and thus to give eventually the upper hand to one or the
otner mode of declension, A or B, — here, naturally, to B, since
its forms are vastly more frequent than those of A. This process
of transition was the more easy, since it is in some of the most
frequently occurring cases — the N.p.m., As.f., N.p.f. — that the
forms of A and B are coincident.

For the oldest Yedic period I would therefore assume that mod of the radical
stems were A-stems like soma-pd'. Doubtless all the declensional forms of each
radical stems belonged to series A. The N.p.m. was aomapd's; and the N.s.m.,
without difference, aomapd'a. In the great majority of instances, however, a
N.p.m. In -de (devdfa) corresponds to a N.s.m. in -da (deva'a) ; and after this
analogy, the N. singular m. of the infrequent radical stems was also formed with
short vowel {somapd's), to correspond to the N. plural m. {aomapd'a), and the forms
of the two cases, N.p.m. and N.s.m., before alike, were thus differentiated. To
the apprehension of the language-users, the stem became aomapd', and upon this
a system of B-forms was developed accordingly.

So in the feminine, the A.s. vrad-dhd'm answers properly to a N.s. prad-dh&'a
(a form of which the written text shows traces at vii.32.14 — see below, N.sX);
out since the vast majority of accusatives in -dm (ctird'm) answer to nominatives
in -4 (cUrd'\ the N.s. prad-dhd' was formed after this analogy. In like manner
we have the A.s.l «w?4'm, and correspondingly the N.s.f. dSrirjd'a; but also the
N.s.1 aana-jd'. So in the plural we have the NX vQja-dd's; but, after the analogy
of series B, the A.f. afva-dd'*— not -dd'a.

To assume the existence of roots in short d simply on the basis of these com-
pound noun-forms, when they can just as well be explained as instances of purely
declensional transition to the d-declension, would be a petiHo principii. We must
therefore seek for evidence of the existence of roots in & for the Vedic period on
the field of the verbal flexion and elsewhere.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

o-stema] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 487

The forms gatd, hath&a, etc. were supposed to give evidence of root-forms g&
and hit; but Delbruok (p. 93) has deprived this evidence of its force by explaining
the forms as a purely phonetic outgrowth of *gan-ta\ *han-thds, etc. (See also
Brugman, ELuhn's Zeitsch. xxiv.257.) In like manner, forms like dh&yati and
d&yate have been used to support the roots dh&y 'suck,' and d&, ' mete out' Even
here, Delbruck (p. 165) comes to a different conclusion respecting the first, but
admits the root d&. Similarly the d of the reduplicating presents, pib&si, tishth&ri,
etc., which Fick adduces as evidence of the original short fl, is shown by Del-
bruck (p. 105) to be due to analogy (tuddmi: tuddei : : pibdmi : pibtisi). Again,
although p&'tia unquestionably implies a root pa, yet it is an entirely pre-Vedic
formation and proves nothing for the Vedic period.

After leaving out all the indecisive forms, there will probably remain some
which forbid the complete exclusion of roots in & from the field of truly Yedic
formations. Thus in viii.81.la, we have pdaniam df vo dndhasas: why should
we regard the aa as a mere phonetic resolution of & t is not the word perhaps to
be divided pd-ant-am t

It will require a careful, critical, and detailed investigation to determine how
many of the forms apparently involving a root in & really imply a root in &. As
a result of this determination we might be able to separate the roots for which we
may assume a short & in the Yedic period (as d&, pti) from tho.se for which we may
not (as jd\ and to call the compound noun-forms from the latter (as, a-j&'s),
" transition B-forms," and those from the former (as, madhu-p&'s), »■ radical
B-forms." This separation, however, is not a part of my task, and I have there-
fore spoken of all the B-forms indiscriminately as coming from stems in " radical
short 0," and have enumerated them together in each case under " B."

Series A is applied to masculines and feminines without distinc-
tion, and in two or three sporadic instances to neuters. The
grammars, however, state that the neuters of stems in radical d
go according to series B n., and this is almost invariably the fact.

The Masculzns Stems.

In the masculine, the forms of A and B are distinguishable for
every case except the N.V.p., and the N.A.V. and LD.Ab. d. In
these cases the forms might be referred either to A-stems or to
B-stems: thus ratnthdhd's (N.p.) may be assigned to the A-stem
ratnadhd\ or to the B-stem ratnadhd! (iv.34.8). Such doubtful
forms I have referred to A-stems, unless the other unambiguous
forms were referable only to B. Compare the articles pravdtejd,
madhudhd, raghujd, rayidd, vayodhd\ vdyiigopa, svajd, in Grass-
mann's Wb. Gr. says that stems in d may form the Lp.m. in
-dbhU or -at*. I think he is wrong ; see Lp.m.

The general enumeration follows, and includes also the stems
of many of the ambiguous feminine forms which may be referred
to either A or B. Stems in brackets are from the Atharvan.

A. Stems of the A-forms.

I. (a) The stem is identical with the root: gd' (gd, 'sing*); 3d1; trd'; cW;
[dhT;] sffid'.

(c) The stem is a compound of a radical substantive : parama-jyd'.

II. (a) The stem is identical with a prepositional compound of the verbal root :
adhi-p&'; parae-pd'; ni-ehthd'; pari-ahthd'.

(c) The stem is a compound of a feminine substantive under II. (a) : aprajd';
bahvprajd'; suprajd'; karmanishthd'; pwrunishthd' (also -d7) ; [dndvayd],

IIL (a) The stem is a compound of a verbal root with a noun or adverb. The
noun is most often a substantive in an accusative or locative relation (go-pd\
abjd% ap9ujdf) ; but it may be an adjective or adverb in some other adverbial
relation (navajd', m+hd*).

VOL. x. 59

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

488 0. R Lanman, [Bad & and

(b) The stem is a compound of a word under lU. (a) need substantively (dm-
gopd).

The ensuing list embraces the compounds falling under HI. (a) and (ft) ; in it,
an affixed B signifies that the stem occurs also with d, and the hyphen is used to
avoid repetition of the verba]. We have the following compounds : — with the
verbal

-*rd'(Awr, 'do'): d-hrd— Or., d-hrd.

-krd': dadhi- ; rvdhi-.

-JtoAd'(cf. B): rMtt-f-

-*ftd' (cf. B): Mm-; cf. khd\ n.

-?d' (?d, 'go' — cf. B): adhva-, B?; afkt-; tamo*; tavd-; pvro-; somas*;
avasti-; ogre* (Ac*. Qr., see A.s.m.), B.

Vw<*(cf. B): Aa-pvdf.

-?d' (?4, 'sing* — cf. B): idma-, B.

•jd' (cf. B): ap-a-; adr*-; qpra-; aft-; udanya-, B?; rto-; rfe-; ptri-; ^-;
tapo-t, B; dm-; dtw-; deva-; dt*-f B; nabho-; nava-; purd-; p&rva-,B; pna%
ama-,B; prar<««-, BT; bhareeha-; manushya-; raghu-, B?; vane-; «wa-, B;
sano-; saha-; $aho-; wa-, B?; svayam-; [agni-; abhra- ; oahadhi-; khala-;
nakshatra-; vara*; vdta-; fakadhdma-; hiranya-].

•jM,': ria-\ pada-.

-frYT*: an-agnUrd ; jwrt*-frvJ ; cf. p. 441 top.

•ddf (dd\ 'give' — cf. B): dn^^vadd; dndtfrdd; abhikaha-; afva-; dtma- ; qjo-;
go- ; jam- ; dravino-, B : dhana- ; bala- ; bhfari- ; rabho- ; rayi-, B ? ; van*- ;
vasira-; vdja-; vdso-; sahasra-; saho-; sva&ti-; havir-; hiranya-; [fata-;] from
VS., prdna-, B; apdna- ; vydna-; vareo-; varivo-.

-dhd/ (d^id, * put'— cf. B) : kiye- ; jam- ; dhdma- ; dhiyarh- ; ndma~, B ; madhh t;
rat/no-, B ; reto- ; vayo- ; varivo- ; vipo- ; sarva- ; [adoma-, B ? ; yakahmo- ; varco~].

-dhdf (dfcd, 'suck'): .payo-.

-p<? (pd, * oversee '—cf. B): abhipuU-; fto-; fob-; ^o-, B; (dgopd, dhigopd,
bdragopd, dcv&gopd, vdytgopd, somagopd, sugopd';) chardish-; jagat-; tank;
wUhikta-; papa-; vraia-; fevadhi-; sti-; [nidhi-; sva-\

-pd' {pd, "drink'— ctB): a^re-; afljas-; fte-; (a»rfopd;) rdd- ; kildla-; tapvah-;
payas-; ptirva-; madhu- (cf. madhupd'iama), B; fu&rap&a-; puci-; prto-, B;
rate- ; soma-, B ; fcari- ; havish-.

-prd'(cL B): antariksha-, B; kakshia- ; krshti-; kratu- ; carshani-, B; jarany;
raVia-; rodasi-.

•mid??: carmaruind', B.

-yd': r?a- ; eva- ; jma- ; fura- ; deva- ; pui^am- ; [andva-\

-rdf: pata-rd't (text paWrd).

•sd/(8ant 'win'— cf.B): op-; a^ta-; urvard-; kshetrd-; dhana-, B; prtya-P, B;
vd>'a- ; ^ato- ; sadd- ; sdhaara- ; «rw-*W; yo-, B ; »r- ; itc^u-, B ; su- ; tuar-.

->s1M'(c&.'B): rocana-; to*-;] adhvar&^hihdf; giri-; gharmye-; nare-; pafhe-;
parvaie-; pfihivi-; barton.; mankam-; rathe-, B; vaksfuup-; vandarw-; van-
dhwe-; Jiari-; harmye-; [ange-; paihi-; bhuvam-; madhyame-; rayi-; savya-].

-md*: ghfta-.

B. Stems of the B-foraw. Compare the neuter stems, p. 441. We
have the following compounds : — with the verbal (or substantive)

-*ri*'; dywluh*'.

4th*': su-khA'.

-gd' (gd, ' go') : ogre- ; adhva- 1 ; paiarh- ; aarh- ; (ratha-9athgd ;) «*-; suar- ;
[asva-; dcurh-; rju-; dur- ; vala-; pUirh-].

-gvd': oHihi-; tia-t ; ddpi-, nava- (aooent!); pwro-gavd\

-g&': {gd, ' sing1) : sdma-gd, AV.

•grd' (gar, * swallow') : tuvi-grd\

•jd' : a- ; udanya- f ; eka- ; tapo- ; p&rva- ; pravdte- 1 ; raghu- 1 ; sdkam- ;
\jardyu-; tand-; tapo-; dvi-; tti-; prathama-; samudra-; starnba-; wo-]. For
adhri-ja, see Gr.

-til; d'-t*t.

-da' {dd, 'give'): andnu-; ddnu-; dravijo-; rayi-?; [ddyd-; prdna-].

-d&'(dd\ •bind'): xgya-.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

o-stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 489

-dhSf: retina- ; [adoma- 1 ; ndma-;] garbha-y TS.

~p&' (pd, 'oversee'): go-; mithS-avadyapa.

1>&'(pd, 'drink'): madhu-; prto-; [soma-].

•pr*': [dkOti- ; kdma- ; carsharU- ; pfthwU ;] antarihsha-, T.Ar.

-mid'? : carma-mnd', V& xxz.15.

•+&': dhana- ; priya-; papi-8h&; gosh&'-tama.

-sthH': apnah-; sarh- ; go-shthA; tri- ; rathe-.

-h&' (han, ' slay') : ardti-, pafc-tf-, and sahasra-, in the A V. 01 neuters, p. 441 top.

According to the grammars, adjective compounds of feminine
substantives in d form the masculine stems in d: thus, an-avasd'
(-ds yd' mas), from dvasd; a-praddhd' fafnpani'n) ; puru-nishthd'
(-ds kavis, v.1.6); cf. dshthd. In the Veda, however, this rule is
by no means general : thus, we have the nominatives s.m. bahu*
prajd's, su-prajd's, puru-nisftihd's (viii.2.9) ; and the A.s.m. karma-
nishth&'m. This wavering between A and B corresponds to that
of the feminines between the A and the B-forms. In both m. and
£ the B-forms prevail in the later language (labdha-nidr&s,
Kath&s. iv.9).

Thb Fbmininx Stems.

In the feminine, the forms of A and B are not distinguished
from each other in the A. and Ls., in the I.D. Ab.d., and in the
N.,I., D.Ab., L., and V.p. — that is, in some of the cases of most
frequent occurrence (they are marked with an asterisk in the table
on p. 434). The N.s. and A. p. are distinguishable ; and in the
N.s. we have mostly A-forms (with -«), and in the A.p., exclusively
B-forms (with -ds — not -ds). In point of fact, therefore, there are
no feminine forms belonging distinctively to A, except in the N.s.
In this case, the A-forms are about equal to the B-forms in the
Rik, but the B-forms belong to late hymns ; in the Atharvan, the
B-forms decidedly outnumber the A-forms in the N.s., as well
as throughout the rest of the declension*

The declension of masculine radical Osteins like ddnu-dti! is the
same as that of B m. (ga-td') ; but since the feminine of such a
stem would be ddnudd\ it is plain that this may be declined
according either to A, or to Bf. And so we have the same
wavering as in the masculine : thus, gopd's (N.s.m.) is to gopd's
(N.s.m.) as devdgopds (N.s.f.) is to devdgopd (N.aX). It seems
that the radical (A-) declension went out of use for feminines at
an early period.

Theoretically, all the compounds enumerated under division III
of the masculines ought to be declined in the same manner in the
feminine. According to the grammars, the N.d.f. should be like
the N.d.m. (purdjd') ; but in reality we have here B-forms (rdfl-pi,
ptirva-je). In discussing the masculines, we found it probable that
most of the forms like gopd's were to be regarded as instances of
transition toBm. Here, also, it seems easier to assume a general
and wide-spread system of transitions to B £ Otherwise, we must
assume that every fern, stem (e. g. devdgopd-; rdtipd'-; pHrvajd'-)
to which we refer the B-forms (e. g. devdgopd, N.af. ; rddpi,
pHrvcye, N.A.d.1) is feminine to a masculine stem with short &

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

440 0. R. Lanman, [Bad. & and

(e. g. devdgopd-y rdfipd', pdrvajd') ; this is possible (compare the
articles sanajd, jd'; dnagnitrd; devdgopa, -pd; ndvagva; tahd-
gopa; sugd; svdgopd; svajd; svdsaslhd) ; but does not seem
generally warrantable. The masculine stems are themselves tran-
sition-stems, and the feminine forms can just as well be considered
as direct forms of transition from A to B.

A. The A-forms. Using the same categories as above, the only
feminine forms belonging distinctively and unequivocally to A
are as follows :

I kshd's, grid's, and vrd's (N.s.1) ; tehS t (D.s.1 ) ; gm&'s and jm&'s (Ab.G.afA
HE. ftopd's; ftejd's; godhd's; goshd's; dwijd% divojd's; vanqd's ; potato's:
sahasrasd's; aamemogd's; [kuiapd's, gopd'e; vayodhd's; vasudd's], — all N. ai.

B. Stems of the B-forms and of some of the forms that may be
referred either to A-stems or to B-stems.

I. (a) Jfeato'; tehmd'; khd'; gnd'; jd'; jyd', l bowstring;' rd'; vrdT; dkyd'.

(b) The stem shows a reduplicated form of the root : gdhgd ; j&nghd.

IL (a) Almost all the stems of this category are substantives and none shows i
form belonging distinctively to A. Gr. derives prajd% s. v., from jan with prd by
the " formative suffix 4." It is declined indeed as if the d were suffixal ; but this
mode of declension may be secondary, and I assume an original root-stem in -jd.
He says, Wb. 675, " In ni-dhd', go-dhd', frad-dhd', ava-dhd', the suffix d has been
added, as the declension shows." But we shall see that with some of these words
there are even yet traces of the A -declension. Enumeration: abhikhyd'; [apagd*,
dwgd';] prqjdf, [upajd'y paryd']; [prtyfld' ;] d'-td (t tan — accent!); mdrd' ;
apadhdr, durdhd', nidhd\ praddhdK ava-dhd'— root dhd, 'put1— , [godhd*, Undhd',
purodhd']; pratidhd', wadhd'—ior *8Vrdhd\ dhd\ 'suck;' prapd' ; dbhibhd\
Hbhdt, vibhd', sabhd'; pratimd', pramd'; dpayd'; [vpavd', provd?;] dvasd; ac*
sthd', parishthd', pratishthd', vishthd'; prahd'. Several are used as adjectives:
amuhthdf, nishthd', parishthd'.

(e) Compound : dsamjfid, AV.

The Neuteb Stous.

Aside from a few sporadic words (p. 445), the stems of the
neuter forms always end in short d ana the forms coincide with
those of series B n.9 page 434.

Declensionally, then, they might have been treated with the
neuter d-stems (pp. 331-354) ; and a few have been there included:
thus, antdriksham has been counted on p. 831; and similarly
trishadhasthd-s, N.s.m., on p. 329 ; and trishadhdathd, N.s.1, on
p. 355.

This inconsistency is the less reprehensible inasmuch as the final
root-element of a compound often loses its distinct character as a
root : thus, in prshthd' we have as final element the root sthd or
sthd; but in the compounds vitdprshthds, -prshthd, ghrtdprshtham
(bar his), the final syllable can hardly have been felt as a radical
Quite analogously the recessive accent of the English compound
fore-hsad (pronounced fd'r-&d) has, to the apprehension of the
vulgar, entirely obscured the fact that the word has anything to
do with head. In some words, as updstha, the character of the
final element is uncertain.

A complete list of the neuter stems whose final element is a simple radical
belongs rather to the chapter on the formation of stems (p. 325 — see Lindner, pi
26). These remarks apply also to the radical masculines in d and their feminines

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

o-stems.] Noun-Injlection in the Veda. 441

in & (of. articles sanqjd', w-dtasihd'), so far as they have the forms of series B m.,
or of B 1 Thus vdyugopds has been counted among the 1 954 forms mentioned on
p. 344 end ; although it ought not to be separated from popup d's, etc , N.p.m. I
do not think that many words properly to be classed here have been left out

The enumeration follows :

Dyu-kshd (antdri-kaha) ; tuvi-kshd; khd; dttr-gd, au-gd ; \o8tM~jd, tanH-jd, pro-
thama-jd ;] ftd-jya ; dnau-tra (cf. tanu-tra, and see Garbe, Kuhn's ZeiUch. xxiii.
476,480); [adoma-dd ;] arann-da (dd, 'bind'); [drdf, utkvra-drL krshna-drd ;]
sva-dhd (anuehvadhdm) ; [vdtdgopa, pards-pa (VS. xxxviii.19) ;] madhu-pd; kdma-
prd; su*md; pr-shthd, bhaya-etha, mahd'-vaitostha, sadkd-stha ; kara/fta-hd,
vrtra-hd, Batrd-hL

Stems whose formation is exceptional or doubtful. A few
such remain. We have from the adverb tdthd the stem drtathd —
N.s.nx, dtathds^ i.82.1. The Veda has the forms: d'tds, N.p. ;
d'tdsu; and d'tais. Gr. refers them all to a m. stem d'td. Against
the view of Gr. speaks the fact that all nouns substantive like
prajd' are feminine. His dictum that series A admits both end-
ings, -dbhis and -aw, is supported only by dhanasais. Perhaps,
then, we ought, with BR., to refer d'tais to d'td, m., and the other
forms to d'td, £ The f. stem maryd'dd is unclear.

It does not help us in the least to refer the N.s.m. updnd, with
Gr., to a stem updndy since a form without s is no more admissible
here than in the N.s.m. of the stems in -asy which see.

The strong forms of the word for * path' are as follows :

in RY., pdnthds, 11 in AY., pdnthds, 3 pdnthd, 1

pdnthdm, 31 pdnthdm, 19 pdnthdnam, 1

pdnthds, 6 pdnthdnas, 7.

The N.S.UL dtHrthapanthds occurs twice, and purupdnthds
(N.s.m.), once. In like manner we have mdnthdm, never mdnthr
di\am. Once, in a hymn of by no means antique stamp, i. 100.3,
we have the form pdrdhdsas. The Zend forms correspond in the
main to those of the Rik :

\*pa4Udo\ poMd, 1

pafttam \ ,. paiUdnem,

pattern ) patltdnd, 2.

In i.127.6 g and h: v. 10.1 and viii.57.13, Kuhn and Or. propose to read pan-
thaam, and in viii.31.13, pdrUhads. In each case, the word is at the end of a
catalectic pdda of 7 syllables and the resolution is unnecessary. If, however, any
one insists upon having 8 syllables, he must read, e. g., wrum rdthdya pdnth&nam
(pdnth&nas\ and in no case pdnthdnam (pdnthdnas). See Kuhn, Beitrage, iv.203.

In like manner the two resolutions in the A vesta (Qeldner, Metrtic, p. 17) are
unnecessary, since they are at the end of catalectic pddas of 7 syllables (Yt
viii.7: x.86,).

The Rik, then, does not have a single form that gives direct evidence of a stem
p&nthan. Not until we get to the Atharvan do we see any forms involving this
Btera unquestionably : N.p., pdnthdnas, to the exclusion of pdnthds ; A.s., pdn-
tkdnam, once, against pdnihdm, 19 times ; and N.8., p&nthd, iv.2.3 (where pada
reads pdnthd\ against pdnthds, thrice. Similarly in the A vesta, pafitdnem occurs
only once, and that in the V d. ; pafUdnd, twice ; and pafUd (i. a pafUd, from a stem
pafUan ; stem pafttd would form pafttdo), Yd. xvi.2. The evidence, both from the
Veda and the A vesta, pronounces the forms from the stem pdnthan the younger.

Brugman, however, explains pdnthdm as arising by contraction from panthan-u
(Studien, ix.307). From pdnthdm, the language-users got by "false abstraction"

jbyVaC

442 C. E. Lawman, [Bad d and

the stem p&nthd-, and so the N.s, pfirUhd* was formed, and the N.p., pfathds, L e.
*pdnthd-as. The only analogies for such contractions with n-etems are mdtUkdm
and the somewhat doubtful mahd'm (*mahan-u). If this is the correct explana-
tion, it would seem as if the stem pdnthan ought to have left some direct traces in
the Rik. The a of pafUam does not necessarily imply a form jxmUqa-m (we
Schleicher, Gomp.4 §27.7). If the N.s.m. p&nthds is an Aasociations-hildung bawd
entirely on the A.s.m., we must suppose that no nominative could have been
formed until after the form of the accusative was settled.

On the other hand, if we assume out and out a stem pdnih-d {m6n&-<fy v*
cannot regard the A as a derivative suffix, for that is unparalleled.

Possibly the peculiar treatment of the two stems pdnthan and
mdnthan is to be referred to the analogy of the root-words ending
in -an below, which exhibit parallel forms in -& I have therefore
put the strong declensional forms of these stems in this chapter,
assuming transition-stems pdnthd, mdnthd, and making pdnthd
related to pdnthan as -jd' to Jan. Somewhat similar transitions
are seen in an-asthd'-s (cf. an-asthdn — N.s.m., -d') and an-akshtfsas
(cf. akshdn) ; see an-stems, N.A.s.n.

Without interpreting the facts, I would observe that four
verbals correspond to roots with nasals : -khd\ khan; -gd\ gam;
jd\jan; +d'y Ban. See Delbrttck, pp. 92, 93. The relation is
perhaps similar in -gvd and gvam, d'-td and ton, and the words
for ' earth,' kshd' and kshdm. Ci further, gmd\ gdm; jmd\jdm;
kshmd\ kshdm; dhmd, dham; mnd Uu-mnd'), man; vrd \vrd%
var; krd (d-krd), kar; gra (tuvirgra), gar; trd, tar; and see
Curtius's Studtenyy.l91.

Several roots appear even in a triple form. We have : go+han-a*
(napdt), go-shd'-m (sdmam), go-sh&'-tamds; rbhu-kshdn-amy rbhu~
kshd's, dyu-kshd'-s (cf. kshdrtrd, kshi) ; ton (tdnd gird'), #4&,
d'-td. To these we may add the root han. In the Veda occurs
vrtra-hdn-am; the Zend vtorUhra-jdo, Yaona lvii.14 etc., corre-
sponding to Skt. *vrtra^hdr-sy supports the second form hd; while
the Atharvan words $atru-hi£-sy ardti-hd'my etc., supply the third.
(The form -ha is again brought back to the consonant declension
by an added t in samhdt.) The Zend -jdo may, however, repre-
sent *-jans (= -hdns, -hd) ; of zdoy *zams — G.s., z(e)m-o — , and
zydo, *zyam~8. Important, finally, from an exegetical point of
view is Grassmann's suggestion, tleb. i.576 : he assumes a stem
dd'=zddm, and of this he takes de (v.41.1) as L.s.n., which see.

The following synopses exhibit the terminations of the
inflectional forms :

Sbbies A. Mabctjlinb.

Singular: K, -dsy -aas; A., -dm, -aam; D., -e; G., -as; V., -ds.
Dual : N. A.V., -dy -au.

Plural: N.V., -ds, -aasy -dsast ; A., -dsf, -dsff; L, -dbhis,
-aisff; Ab., -dbhyas; L., -dsu.

Feminine.

Singular : N., -ds, -tf; A., -dm, -d\- I., -d; D., -e f; Ab.f -as;
G., -a*.

Plural: N.V., -ds; L,-dbhis; T>., -dbhyas; L., -dsu.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

a-stems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 448

Nbutbr.
Singular: N.A., -ds; D., -e9 -at (in£).

The terminations of series B ra. and n., and of series B f.,
coincide — so far as they occur at all — with those given on page
829 and on page 855 respectively.

Dissyllabic forms of monosyllabic stems do not shift the
accent to the ending. Only a few occur: kshd'-su; jd'-su;
gnd'-bhts, gnd'-su? ; jydyd, jyd'yds; dhydyd; kshmayd' (I an
isolated exception). Compare p. 421.

NouHATrrz Swgulae Masoulini.

A. The ending «* is added to the stem: as, adrijd'-s. The
form occurs in the Rik 273 times (from 102 stems) ; and in the
Atharvan, 55 times (from 26 stems). In this and the following
lists, Atharvan forms found only in verses quoted from the Ril
have not been included. Enumeration :

I. gdfs, 'ginger,1 x.l27.8(?cf. AY. xii.1.39); jd% ix.M.l (at. jd'8-pAtU, vii.38.6);
d&': VL16.26; sthd% x.35.9; dhd% T8. a6.4«;— parama-jyd's, viii.79.1.

IL adhirpd's, 2(AV., 8); paras-pd's, S ; ni-shth&'s;— baka-prajd's; suyrajd's;

— puru-nishthd's; — dtirt-bhds (7 see rad. 0-stems, N.s.m.); — dn-dvayds, AY.
▼ii.903.

HI. (arrangemeDt by roots) dadki-hrd% 4 ; — fbhthfesM's, 14 ; — bisa-
hhd's ; — and-gd's ; puro-, 3 ; 9amana- ; — sdma-gd'a ; — odri-jd's (see
hr.40.5); opsth; db- ; rta-, 2; rfo-, 2; go-; divi-; devo-; dvi-; ndbho-; purd-;
pdrvo-; prothoma-, 4; manuahya-; vane-; $ana-; aano-; aaJia- (x. 84.6) ; saho-,
2; — Tta-jfid's* 3; — dtma-dd'a; ojo-; go-, 4; dravino-, 9; dhana-, 3; bala-,
2; bhUri- (iv.32. 19,21); aahasra-; aaho-, 3; sttasti-, 3; hiranya-; — Hye-dhd'8,
2; dhdma-; dhtyam-,2; ndma-: retina-, 8; refo-, 3; vayo-}\2\ aarva-; — abhi-
fattirpd's, 2; rto-, 2; go-, 33; b~gopds ; dtod-gopda; a&ma-gopda, 2; tugopd'9, 2;
fcm6-p<?*, 5; papu-, 4; vraia-, 5; fevadki-; ati- ; — rtu-pd's, 3; dn-rtupda ;
pfarva-pd% 2; «ufo-, 5; soma-, 5; hari- ; — antarikaha-prd'9, 2; hratu-, 2;
carshani-, 7 ; rodaai- ; — rna-yd's, 5 ; eva- ; twra- ; devo-, 4 ; — ap-sd's, 3 ;
ofttt-, 2; dhana-; vdja-, 2; goto-, 3; aahaara-, 6; go-ehd'a, 2; nr- ; «*-; suar-,
6;— rocanasthd's ; adhvare-ahthd'a ; giri-} 2, and ix. 18.1; mahhane-; rathe-, 2;
vandane- ; vandhure- ; hart-, 5.

Gr. proposes: gtri-ahthdae, ix.62.4 ; 98.9; 0fcrto*n4<M, ▼iii.46.28 ; dravtno-d&M,
viil6.ll : viii.39.6. These resolutions are all at the end of pddas of 7 syllables
and needless ; read -<&.

We hare from the Atharvan 46 forms (from 24 stems): abhra-jd's, i.12.3;
deva-, x.6.31 ; nafoAafro-, vi. 110.3 ; prathama-, iy.35.1 : vi,122,l : xii.1.61 ; vdta~,
L12.3; hiranya-, iv. 10.1,4; — dravino-dd'9, xix.3.2: xx.2 4; dhana-, iii.16.1;
havir-, t.1.7;— rcfo-dki'*, v.25.1 ; vayo-, ▼.11.11 : Yii.41.2: ix.4.22: xii.3.14:
xiiL2.33: xviii.4.38: xix.46.6; t?ara>-, ii. 1 1.4;— abhifoatupd'a, iil3.3: iv.39.9:
▼.18.6: ▼iii.7.14: xix.24.5,6; ^o-, 4 times: as, iii.8.4; tond-, vi.53.2; nuttt-,
xiL3.34,41,42 ; ava-t, iii.3.1 ;— jomo-pd'ft, ▼iii.6.22 ;— dhanasd's, xix.31.8 ;

— rta-aihd%iv.lA; ahge-ahthd'a, vi.14.1 ; bhuvane-, ii. 1.4: iv.1.2 ; madhyam*-,
ii.6.4 : iii.8.2 ; «»vya-, viii.8.23. The VS., xviilS, has prdna-dd's, apdna-, vydna-,
varco-, varivo-. For others, see iii.16.

Resolution is necessary in RV. x.64.10, rbhu-kshdas; so AV.
xix.55.3,4, vasu-ddas; likewise in RY. iv.6.3c, 4c, navarjdas and
pagu-pdas (Gr., -d! as).

In no wise is a N.m. form in -d admissible. In ii.20.2, the
metre shows that we must pronounce abhishtipd'ari jdndn. If

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

444 C. R. Lanman, [Bad. A aod

j
we take abhishtipd' as a compound, we shall have to regard the ■
saThhitd-reskding as an instance of elision and crasis. Perhaps it
is better to read abhishti pdasi, i thou protectest with thy favor.' 'l
See p. 381 top, and Gr.', s.v. In v.87.1-9, evayd'marut, "Gr. sug-
gests that evayd* may be a N.s.m. ; but here we must enter a non
liquet For dtathds and pdnthds, see p. 441.

B. The Rik has 24 forms (from 14 stems) ; the Atharvan, 29+
forms (from 24 stems). Enumeration :

Dyu-k8hds,±\ — 8Vrkhd8; — agre-gds; patam-; *t/-, 4; — d&$a-
gvasf; ndva-, 2; purogavds; — <*jd%\ 2; adhri-; — andnu-dd*y
3 ; ddntt*; — apnansthds; purunishth&'s. Here belongs, prob-
ably,/>api/-*A<fo, v.41.1 ; see G.s.m.

From the Atharvan, dpum-gds, vi.14.3 ; rju-9 i.12.1; patam-,
vi8 1.8: xiii.2.31 ; 3.1 ; ptYufe-, xi.5.12; vala-gds, xii.5.39 (? Ind.
Stud, iv.804) ; — eka-jds, x.8.5 bis; jairdyu-, i.12.1 ; m-, iii.5.2;
prathama-, iv.4.5 ; samndra-, i v. 10.4 ; stamba-, viii.6.5 ; — ddyd-
ddSj v.18.6,14 ; jprdna-, iv.35.5 ; — drds, vrds> nyds, f xi. 7.3,4 ;—
ndmordh&'s, ii. 1.3 (Rik x.82.3 has ndma-dhd's) ;— dkdti-prds,
iii.29.2; kdma-, xi.7.8 ; carshani-, iv.24.3 ; prthivfr, xiii.2.44;—
go^hthds9 iii.14.6, etc. ; — patru-hdsy i.29.5 : vi.98.3 ; sahasra-,
viil8.17.

NOMINATIVE SlNGULAB FllCINnfE.

A. The form is like that of the masculine. It occurs in the Rik
18 times (from 13 stems) ; and in the Atharvan, 5 times (from 4
stems). Enumeration :

I. kshd's, 5 ; vrd's, i. 124.8 (Roth and S&y. as pL) ; gnd's (see p.
855). Cf. bhd's, BR. v.234.

III. rta-pd's; rtejd's; god/id's, x.28.11 ; g<hsh4,8Jx.95.S; divijd's;
divojd's; vanejd's; pata-ad's, x.95.3 ; 178.8; samana-gd's; saha*
rorsd's^ x.178.3.

From the Atharvan, hukhpd's, i.14.3 ; go-pd's, xiil.57; vayo-
dhd'Sy ix.1.8 : xviii.4.50 ; vasu-dd'sy xii.1.44.

(a) Although no other forms than the above show a -8 in the
pada-pdtha, we do yet find the following words standing before
a vowel with hiatus in the written text, and are warranted in
assuming that these words originally formed their nominative
with -8. They are: jyd\ vi.75.3 ; ni-drd\ viii.48.14; pra-pd\
x.4.1 ; $radrdhd\ vii.32.14 ; 8x>a~dhd\ x.129.5. To these add
prati-md'y vi-md\ un-md'y TS. i v. 4. II'; and see TPr. x. 18, and Ind.
Stud, xiii.104, note 2.

It was doubtless the case-ending ■* that kept these words from combining with
a following vowel ; but since the transition of the radical feminines to the B-
declension became general at an early period, the full form was felt to be, e. g.,
pra-pa' rather than pra-pd's, and was so entered in the pada-text In order to
establish the apparently anomalous relation of the two pdthas in regard to these
words, it became necessary for the Prat, to mention them expressly (ii.29). If
we compare the two pdthas in regard to these nominatives, we find that the Pr&t
is complete and exhaustive.

If, however, we compare the written samhiid with the oral tradition or
metrically spoken text, we find that the former is not consistent with itself. It
has svadhd'sid at i. 165.6, and svadhd'mitd at v. 34.1, where we must pronounce
svadhd' dsid and svadhdf dmitd (cf. x.l29.5d). In like manner we saw at p. 356

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

a-stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 445

that the metre requires hiatus between the -d of the N.s.1 and a following vowel
in 28 instances ; but that the diaskeuasts and after them Qaunaka have taken
cognizance of this fact only in the case of Uhd' and manishd' (five instances).

Since the Prat, cannot be convicted of incompleteness in enumerating anomalies
Ukeprapdf, and since it does not mention godhd'. x.28.11 (Muller's editions 1 and
2), tSbhyo godhd' ay Mam karshad Hat, we must conclude with Aufrecht {Rigveda*,
preface, p. v) that the true jNufo-reading is godhd' h. This is the A-form, and in
the preceding verse we find with glaring inconsistency the B-form godhd'; this
also occurs at viii.58.9 and AY. iv.3.6 (nimrtik te godhd' bhavatu, p. godhd',
without avagraha and without viaarga— cf. Ind. Stud, iv.305-6).

B. The form is without -*, like the N. of stems in suffixal -d
It occurs 16 times (from 14 stems).

Enumeration: abhirbhd* ; kubhdt; godhd\ viii58.9 : x.28.10 ;
devdgopdy vii.35.13 (Muller, -pdh ; why is this form any less
grammatical than the N.s.m. suprcyd's?) : x.63.16 ; diu-kshd';
pra-jd' ; pratimd! ; prcwnd1 r; madhu-dhd' ; maryd'dd t; sanajd' ;
svdgopd; sva-dhd\ ix.l 13.10; sva-dhd\ i.176.2.

We have from the Atharvan 27 forms (from 9 stems) : dpa-gd
(BR. apagd'), i.34.5 : ii.30.1 : vi.8.1-3 ; dwr-gd\ xii.4.23 ; jd',
v.11.10 bis; upajd\ xi.1.19; dsamjnd, xii.5.34 ; godhd\ , iv.3.6 ;
prad-dhd'y 13 times: as, v. 7.5 ; devdgopd, vii.20.5 : xix.11.3;
pra-pd\ iii.30.6 ; from TS., md\ iv.8.7l.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR NSUTEH.

According to the grammars, stems in radical long d shorten
that vowel in the neuter : thus, pankha-dhmd'-m.

A. About eight forms occur with long dy which are used as
neuters, and end in -«. Since a true neuter form with masculine
case-ending is quite unexampled, we are perhaps forced to the
conclusion that masculine forms have here been used in default of
any others save those with short d. See p. 377 end. They are :
pata-sd's (vdccu), viL8.6 ; mprayd's (barhis — cf. vi.63.3, suprdya-
ndtamam), vii. 39.2 ; sthd's, ii.27.4 : x.88.4 : (jdgac ca) i.80.14;
indrajd'h soma-jd' dtharvandm asi vydghrajdmbhanam, AV.
iv.3.7; p-eshthchsthd's, Tandya Br. vii.8.2 (BR.).

Delbrfick, Verbum, p. 228, mentions pr&tidhdm (sic) as an infinitive in -am from
vocalic root. If he means pratidhd'm, AV. viii.8.20: xi.10.16, would it not be
better to take it aa ace of a nomen cwtumis. on account of the form ?

B. See page 440, and compare p. 407 top. Here belong 78 or
more forms (from 9 or more stems) : khdmy 2 ; tuvi-kshdm: dur-
gdm; dyu-kshdm, 4 ; (prshthdm, 10;) vrtra-hdm (pdvas), vi.48.21
bis; satrd-hdm (patinsiam), v. 85. 4 ; sadhdstham, ? 14 times;
stirgdmy 14 ; sw-mndm, 39.

From the Atharvan : adoma-d&m, vi.63.1 ; krshnardrdm^ ix.7.4 ;
prathama-jdm (6jas)y i.35.2 (and VS. xxxiv.51) ; vd'tagopam,
ii.12.1 ; 8u-gdmy xiv.2.6.

AOCUSATTVTB SINGULAR MaSOULIHB.

A. Here belong 115 forms (from 59 stems). The AV. shows 9
forms (from 7 stems). Enumeration :
vol. x. 60

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

446 C. B. Lanman, [Had. <2, o-stems.

I. jd'm, ix.89.2; fr-<fm, 2 times; rifcd'ro.

II. ntihthd'm; karma-nishtM'm, x.80.1 ; pari^hthd'm.

HE. dadhi-brd'm, 8 ; rurfft*- ; — tamo-^4'm ; fovd- ; suasti-, 2 ; — sdma-
gd'm; — agrajd'm; nabho-\ purd-y 2; pr<Uhama-t 2; bhareshu* ; — dn-arva-
ddm ; dn-dtfr-ddm ; a-bhiksha-dd'm ; jam- ; dravino-, 7 ; dhana-, 2 ; rabho- ;
vasu-; saho-, 4; — vceyo-dhd'm, 8; varivo-; vipo-; — dbhiQaati-pd'm ; yo-,11;
niahikio- ; wato~, 2; — ofy'os-pd'm; grta-; soma-, 3; — <mtariksha-prd'm;
carshamir ; ratha- ; rodasi- ; — ap-8d'm} 2 ; wrvard-, 2 ; dhana-, 2 ; sadd- ;
aahasra-, 6; gosh&'m; suar-, 4; — rocana-sthd'm ; gin-8hthdfm, 4; nare-;
jxrite- ; pa/rvaU- ; barhisJdJid'm ; raihe-shthdfm, 3 ; Aart-.

The form in -d'm stands at the end of a catalectic pdda, which Gr. — by the
unnecessary resolution, -dam — makes acatalectic. At the end of pddas of 7
syllables, we have : hakshia^prd'm, yiii.3.22 ; tcmtirpd'm, viii.60.13 ; path**hthd'm,
y.50.3 ; raiha-prd'm, viii.63.10 ; rathcshtM'm, viii.33.14 :— at the end of a pdda
of 11 : giri-daKd'm, ix.85.10.

We have from the A thai-van: prathatmajd'm, iil.4; — havir-dd'm, vii.78.2;—
ratna-dhdfm, vii.14.1 ;— g<y-pd'm} ziii.2.2 : ix.10.11 (Rik i.164.31); — aparvtfmt,
xix.60.4;—- pcdhi-shthd'm, xiv.2.6; rayi+hihd'm, vii.39.1; 40.2; from lev. Qr.
v.5, agre-gdm (Rik only agre-gds).

Resolution is necessary in kshetrdrsdam, iv.38.1 ; and in abjd'am,
vii.S4.16a (aksharapankti).

For pdnthdm, mdnthdm, see p. 441 ; for mahd'm, see stems in
an.

B. The Rik has 26 forms (from 10 stems) ; the Atharvan, 8 forms
(from 5 stems). Enumeration : atithi-gvdm, 6 ; andnu-ddm;
ekajdm; go-pdm; trishthdm; ddpa-gvam; dyu-ksh&m, 5 ; patam-
gdm, 2 ; madhu-pdm; su-khdm, 7 ; from the Atharvan : su-gdm,
iii.3.5 : xiv.1.58 ; 2.8 ; dr8va-gamy xii.5.45 ; eka-jdmy vL99.1 ; vala-
gdm9v.81A: x.1.18; ardti-hdm, xix.35.2 ; so garbha-dhd'm, VS.
xxiii.19 : TS. vii.4.191; camnarmn&'m, VS. xxx.15.

Accusative Singular Feminine.

The forms of series A and B are here coincident. The Rik has
81 forms (from 27 stems). Enumeration :

I. ksham, 18; khd'm, 2; gnd'm ; jd'm, x.3.2; Jyd'm; rd'm
(? p. 431) ; vrd'm, i. 121.2 ;— jdnghdm, 2 ;

lL dvasdm; pra-jd'my 22; prcUi-ehfhd'm, 2; pra-hd'm; sa-
bhd'm, 2 ; — surprqjd'm;

I1L antarikeha-prd'm; a^vasd'm; uru-sh&'m; rtajMtm; dttr-
dhd'm; dhanarsd'm; vdjasd'm; prad-dhd'm, 6 ; svajd'm; Uva-
dhd'm, 11 ; 2svardhd'm^ 3 ; suar^ihd'm; — d-gopdm.

We have from the Atharvan 12 forms (from 8 stems) : kshd'm,
v.i.5 ; tiro-dhd'm, viii.l0.28flis/ prati-dham (see p. 445), viii.8.20:
xi.10.16; yak&hmo-dhd'm^ ix.8.9 ; prad-dhd'm, x.2.19; 614: xix.
64.1 ; upa-vd'm, prarvd'm, xii.1.51 ; prarhd'm, iv.38.3. Cf. bh&'m,
gat. Br. ix.4.19.

The word kshd'm occurs furthermore in Rik i.67.5 ; 174.7 :
vi.6.4 : x.31.9, and has the value of two syllables. Gr. proposes
kshd'mram; see stems in radical m, A.s.f.

Elision and crasis. In viii.32.6, drd*d tipa svadhd' gaMy Roth
makes *vad/id'=8vadhd'm d'; Gr. sees an l.s.£

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ls.hl] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 447

InBTBUMBHTAL SINGULAR MaSOULDU.

A. There is no example.

B. Only example : rathe-shthena/nAI.S.

Instrumental Singular FKxnnm.

A. Here belong 10 forms (from 7 stems). They might also be
referred to B as homophonous instrumental (p. 358).

They are: apa-dhd, ill2.8 (where the Abl. apa-dhds, written
apadhd before valdsya, is needed— Gr.) ; abhi-khyd', thrice ;
asthd', as adv., x.48.10; jmd'; prati-dhd\ viii.66.4 ; wa-dhd',
vi.2.8: viii.32.6 (see A.s.f.); prati*hthd\ x.73.6. The VS. has
dptr-dd' at viii.5 ; and the TS., at iii.2.8% the form d&r-ddyd'.
Unless we assume a stem -ddyd' (?), and take this as a homo-
phonous Is., both the quantity of the penultimate d and the
accent are anomalous. See BR., s.v.

In sdkdm pratishthd' hi? did jaghantha, x.73.6, I take pra- as
instr. of accompaniment : ' Along with that on which she rested
(sc. dnasd ushasas), thou smotest her in the heart9 (hrdl d\ BR.).

The adv. suffix -dhd is taken by BR. as an instrumental.

B. Here belong 52 forms (from*9 stems) : Jctibhaydf; ni-dh&yd,
2 ; kshmayd* (accent !), 5 ; Jydyd; dhydyd; prarjdyd, 11 ; $radr
dhdydj 4 ; sva-dhdyd, 26 ; svchdhdyd.

Instrumental Singular Neuter.

A. There is no example.

B. Here belong : ftd-jyena; kdma-pr&na; su-mnena; from
AY., kdm<*jMr&na, x.9.4; su-gena, xiv.2.11 (Rik x.85.32, sugebhis).

Dative Singular Masculine.

A Here belong 9 forms (from 7 stems) : kildla-pe, x.91.14 ; di,
v.41.1 (but see L.s.m.) ; dhiyam-dh'e,, viilS.l ; papushb, 1127.10 ;
fwd-pby x.100.2 ; gubham^y^ iv.3.6 ; havir-de, L153.3 : iv.3.7 :
vil68.6. For updney see stems in an, D.s.m.

The infinitive prad-dhe, i.102.2, is to be regarded as dative in
form as well as in meaning. Since the meaning of ix.70.4ft admits
of a dative, it is better to regard pra-m& as a dative also in form.
BR. take it as a locative form, and this is certainly possible ; for
if we explain prati-mcA as arising from the regular phonetic com-
bination of prati-md and the case-ending «, we may also explain
pra-mk as arising from jtwo-md+i.

The infinitives prakhyai, vikhyaiy parddai, pratimai, prayai
(2), dyai, avayai, upayai, avasa% (Delbrtick, Verbum, p. 221), to
which must be added vayodhat, x.55.1 ; 67.11, cannot be regarded
otherwise than as datives, although we should expect prakhyb,
etc. The case-ending e is added to the full root-stem : and if we
take frame as a loc, and pratidhd'm as an infinitive, these two
words, along with suapatyai and mahiyai (p. 359 top), are the
only formations which are in this respect analogous to them.

6. Here belong : atithi-gvd'yay 4 ; dyu-kshaya; patam-gd'ya;
rathe*hthd'ya; tvajd'ya (fromwq;?), AV. vi.56.2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

448 G. R Lanman, [Had. d, d-stems.

Dative Singular Femibtnb.

A. For kshiy iv.3.6, Bollensen reads ukshni.

B. Here belongs pra-jd'yai, 9.

Datiye Singular Neuter.

A. No example. For the infinitives, see D.s.masc.

B. Here belong: surmnd'ya, 10; pards-pdya, VS. xxxviii.19.

Ablative Singular Masculine.
A. No example. B. Here belongs rpya-dd% x.39.8.

Ablative Singular Feminine.

A. Here belong: gmds, x.22.6 ; jmds, i.157.1 : viiil.18. So
6r., s.v. gmd'; he calls the stem gdm an " unberechtigte Fiction."
To be consistent, he ought to refer Icshmds, i. 100. 15, to kshmd\
not kshdm. Gr. reads apadhds, ii.12.3 ; see I.s.£

B. No example.

Ablative Singular Neuter.

A. For this and the remaining cases of the neater there is no
example.

B. Here belong : dur-gd't, 6 ; sadhd^thdt, 4. With equal
reason belongs here antdriJc&hdt; but it has been included above,
p. 337. For the resolved forms in -aat, see p. 338 top.

Genitive Singular Masouijnb.

A. Here belongs certainly krshti-prds (dadhikrd'vnas), iv.88.9.
Gr., Wb., takes pa^u-shds^ v.41.1, as G.s.m. ; but in the Ueb., as
N.s.m. Some recognize in jd'spati, i.185.8, a genitive jd's (from

J*)-

B. Here belong: a-jdsyay 2; atithi-gvdsya, 8; svajdsya?, AV.

x. 4.10,15 ; sdmargdsya, Ait. Br. ii.22.

GENinvB SnrauLAB Feminine.

A. Here belong : gmds, 4 ; jmds, 4. The supposed genitive
g(a)nd's of gnd's-pdtis^ ii.38.10, has the same anomaly as jd's,
above.

B. Here belong : jyd'yds, 2 ; prajd'yds, 3.

Genitive Singula* Neuter.

A. No example. B. Here belong : twnndsya, 3 ; asthi-jAsya
(kild'sasya), tamX-jdsya^ AV. 123.4.

Locative Singular Masouijnb.
A. There is no example.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L.s.hl] N<mn-Inflecticn in the Veda. 449

B. Here belong 12 forms (from 7 stems) : ddpa~gve; ndva-gve;
rathasamge (already counted, p. 338) ; samsthe, 5 ; sam-ye, 2 ;
su-khi; suar-gL The patronymic dtithigvi (2) should have been
counted, p. 338 ; but it was omitted.

If we refer tq&ndm to a stem updnd, we shall at least have to assume another
stem, ufdn&j for the locative in i.51.11, utfvne kdvyt. This is a poor make-shift
See oa-stems, L.s.m.

Locative Singular Feminine.

A. There is no example.

B. Here belong: dpa-yd'ydm; puro-dhd'ydm, AV. v. 24. 1-17.

Locative Singular Neuter.

A. No example. B. Here belong 40 forms (from 7 stems) :
karaftjarhb; khe^ 2 ; dur-giy 5 ; bhayd-sthe; sadhdsthe, 23 ; %u-
mney 7 ; mahd'-vailasthe (wrongly counted, p. 338).

In the ill-preserved hymn v.41, verse 1, we read, k6 n& vdm mitrdvarwndv
rtdydn I <Uv6 vd mahdk, pd'rthwasya vd, dS I ftfoya vd sddari. Gr., Deb. 1.5*16,
takes dS as L.s.n. of da=d&m, l room, region.' * Who now, 0 M. and V., is
devoted to yon either in the room of the mighty heaven, or of the earth, or in the
place of the sacrifice ?' Of. p. 442.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

A. Here belong 21 forms (from 6 stems) : rtttpd*; bhti'rirdds
(iv.32.20); pukrapiUarpds; puci-pds, 2; mta-pds; soma-pds, 15;
rtarpde, TS. iii.2.81.

For vayo-dhas, dravino-das, see oft-stems, V.s.m.

B. Here belong: ekaja; dyu-kshay 2 ; from the AV.,^am^a,
vi.50.2 : xiii.2.80; somorpa, i.8.3 : ii.12.3 ; from the T.&r., antarir
ksha-pra, iv.7.5.

Vocative Singular Feminine.

A. There is no example.

B. Here belong : gatige; prad-dTie, 2 ; tir<Hlhe, AV. viii.10.28.

Vocative Singular Neuter.
A. B. There is no example.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Masculine.

The ending -d occurs 27 times ; the ending -aw, only 7 times.
Since both of these endings occur also with the most of the con-
sonant stems, it will be best to give the circumstances of occur-
rence together at the end of this article.

L A. Here belong 27 forms (from 19 stems) : go-pd> 4 ;
gharmiershthd! ; ehardishrpd' : jagat-pd'; tanH-pdf; tajnith-pd' ;
dravino-dd' (utd, p. -ati utd), v.43.9 ; para*pd\ 2 ; purd-jd';
puruJrd, viii.8.22; vdja-dd; patdrrdf; puci-pd; su-gopd'; soma-
pd\ 2 ; sti-pd'; further, at end of catalectic pddas of 7 syllables,
where Gr. reads -ad, katohiaprd', i.10.8 ; g<hpd\ viii.25.1 ; tanti-
pd!9 vii.66.3 ; from AV., g<hpd\ v.9.8.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

450 G. R. Lanmcm, [Bad. a\ o-stems.

B. Gr. refers vdanya-jd' to a B-stem Wtf') ; so Hargvd (2).
Of the first stem no other form occurs, and of the second, none
that cannot be referred to a stem eta-gvd. I have therefore
counted all three forms with the A-forms.

II. A. Here belong 7 forms (from 6 stems) : go-pan; gopati;
snta-pau; from AV., adoma-dhau, viii.2.18.

B. Gr. refers the following forms to B-stems ; but they may all
be referred with equal right to A-stems, and I have counted them
with the A-forms. They are : d-krau (stem d-krd; cf. p. 442) ;
adhvargati; madhu-pau; rayi-dati.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Feminine.

A. There is no example.

B. Here belong : rdtt-pk; pdrvajb; su-dsasthi.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Neuter.
A. No example. B. Sole example: sadhdsthe, x.17.6.

Inst., Dat., and Abl. Dual Masc., Fem., and Neuter.

A. B. The Rik has no example. The TS. has several instru-
mentals at iii.2.101 : vdk-pd'bnydm, kratur, cakshushr, protrar
pd'bhydm.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masc, Fem., and Neuter.

A. The Rik has no example.

B. Locatives f. : wa-dhdyos, RV. ; janghdyos^ AV. xix.60.2.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine.

A. The ending -a* is added to the stem : as, go-pd'-as, gopd't.
The form occurs in the Rik 84 times (from 50 stems) ; and in the
Atharvan, 12 times (from 10 stems). Enumeration :

I. (r'shayo) gd's, 'singing,' AV. xii.1.39; — parama-jyd's, Rik
viii.1.30.

IX d'-tds, iii.43.6 (see p. 441) ; drprajds; su-prajd's.

I1X rbhu-kskds, 2 ; — eia-gvds (Gr., faa-gvd) ; — devajd's;
purdrs 4 ; prathama-, 2 ; sva-; — rtarjfld'sy 4 ; rta-jflds, 2 ; pada-
jfld'Sy 3 ; — apva-dd's, 2 ; go-; dravino-; dhana-; vastra-; vdso-;
hiranya-; — jani-dhd's; dhiyam-, 8 ; payo-; ratna-; reto-^ 2 ;
vayo-; — kulorpd's; go-pd's, 9 ; devd-gopds, 3 ; su-gopd'sy 2 ;
twvQrpd'%; papu-; vratar; — agre-pd's; anjas-; pay as-; soma-;
havishr; — carma-mnd's; — jma-yd's; — dhana-sd's% 2;
sadd-, 2 ; sahasra-; — prthivirshthd's; — rathe-; harmie-;—
ghrtasnd's. To these add : pravdiejd's, raghtirjd's, vdyti-gopd*y
— forms which Gr. refers to B-stems.

Gr. proposes: indrorgopaas, devd-gopaas, viii.46.32 ; go-pda*,
viii.31.13 ; su-gopdas, v.88.5c and d. These resolutions are all at
the end of catalectic pddas of 1 syllables and needless ; read -ds:
so in x.65.14fl, rta-jfid's (11 syllables — Gr., -acw, 12).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.p.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 461

From the Atharvan : agni-jd's, apsu-y oehadhi-, x.4.23 ; khcUa-,
viii.6.15; prathamch, x.7.14; c<xJcadhiXmary viii.6.15 ; — vara-
dd'Sy xix.71.1 ; — go-pd'e, vii.81.6 : x.8.9 ; tantl-, vi.41.3 ; —
soma-pd'8, v.25.9 ; sdma-pds, xviii.3.64.

Resolution is necessary in RV. x.23.6, go-p&as.

B. Here belong : ddpa-gvds ; ndva-gvds, 7 ; patarhrgd'*, 2 ;
su-gd's ; and from the AV., ndva-gvds, xviii.3.20 ; tanrt-jd's,
vi.41.3 ; tapo-jd's, vL61.1 ; vafa-gd'e?, xix.9.9.

There are four forms in -dsas. I am uncertain whether A-stems
may form their plural thus ; whether, for instance, priya-sd'sas
may be referred to a 6tem -sd'. The forms are : ddpa-gvdsas;
dyu-kshd'sas; ndva-gvdsas; priya-sd'sas.

NOMINATTVB AND VOCATIVE PLURAL FEMININE.

The forms of series A and B are here coincident. The Rik has
28 forms (from 18 stems).

Enumeration: grid's, 6 ; vrd'8, 4 ; d-gopds; avasthd's; dhi-
gopds; giri-jd's; jaranirtyrd's; dev d-gopds; deva-yd's: ndva-gvds;
pra-jd's, 3 ; prathama-jds; praryd's; vakshane-ehthds; vdjardd's;
su-gopd'e; somci-pd's; svayarhyd's.

From the Atharvan : manitshya-jd's, xi.4.16 ; rtajfid's, iv.2.6 ;
padarjfid$8} vii.75.2 ; cuehma-dd' 8, xix.40.2.

In four instances gnd'e is dissyllabic; if gan-d's is the correct
resolution (c£ Zend ghendo\ the d may be regarded as suffixal
(c£ p. 355).

NoMnfAHVB and Accusative Plural Neuter.

A. I have no evidence that the following forms are to be
referred to A-stems.

B. 1. Here belong 15 forms (from 5 stems) : dnsa-trd (wrongly
included on p. 346) ; dur-gd\Z; sadhdsthd, 3 ; 8u-gd\ 5 ; sumna,
4 ; from AV., su-gd', vii.97.4 ; prathama-jd' r-, p. -jd', viii.9.16,21.

2. Here belong 16 forms (from 6 stems) : ararin-ddni; khd'ni,
4 ; dvr-gd'ni, 5 ; sadhd-ethdni, 2 ; su-gd'ni, 2 ; eu-mnd'fii, 2 ; from
AV., dur-gd'niy vii.63.1 : ix.5.9 : xix.50.2.

Accusative Plural Masculine.

A. There is no certain example. Paradigm : pankha-dhmd's.

1. Ludwig takes pacvrshd'e with vd'jdn, * viehgewinnende
krafte,' v.41.1 ; it is rather a N.s.m. of series B, p. 444. Among
the forms there given as nominatives, there may be some accusa-
tives p.m. in -#'*.

2. There is no certain example of an A.p.m. of series A ending
in -d'8. Possiblv there is one in x.79.7, van&jd's (dpvdn) ; see
BR. vii.1800. Otherwise, we must take it as N.s.m. — sc. agnU.
Gr. takes eva-yd's (mardtas) as A. p.m., v.41.16 ; but it is to be
pronounced as 4 syllables — eva-yd'as or -yd'vncu (cf. iL34.11). In
1.143.8,-;<I/* is A.pX in form, but of common gender in meaning.

3. Gr. refers tapojd'% (dpi, p. -jd'n)> x.154.5, and y^tarpan
(ar> p. -pd'n), x.27.6, to stems -jd1 and -pd'. This is scarcely
admissible ; we must assume transition-stems -jd! and -pit.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

462 C. M. Lanman, [Rad. d, o-stems.

B. Here belong: go-p&'n (vi.51.3); patam-gd'n; su-gtfn, 3;
tapojd'n and prta-pd'n (above); and from the AV., dur-gd'n,
xiii.2.5 ; tapo-jd'n, xviii.2.15, 18 (= Rik x. 154.5) ; soma-pd'n,
ii.35.3 ; from the TS., pHrvajd'n^ saha-jd'n, iii.5.3.

Accusative Plural Feminine.

A. There is no example.

B. Here belong 27 forms (from 15 stems) : kshd's, 2 ; gn&'t, 2;
jd's, 3; dnragnitrds; anu-shthd's; apva-dd'8 ; devayds; pari-
shthd's (x.97. 10); prajd's,1; marud'dd*?; vi-shthd's; sahd-aopds;
*u-gd'8; \sv<*-dhd\ 3; 28vardhdrs; from the AV., parijdY8, xix.
56.6 ; manu8hya-fd'8, xii.4.43. The SV., i.323, reads rd*8y a bad
variant of Rik viii.85.13.

For pr€tii~8hthd'[s\ (Gr.), see Ls.f. ; for gnd*8 as dissyllable,
v.43.13, cf. N.p.£ ; for Jc8hd,s as dissyllable, iv.28.5, see stems in
m, A.p.f. The resolution at the end of x.97. 10a, parishth&as, is
needless.

INSTRUMENTAL PLURAL MASCULINE.

A. Here belong : agrepd'bhis and rturpd'bhis (or f.), iv.34.7 ;
gopd'bhi8.

Gr. — Wb. 175, s.v. d'td — assumes the ending -a%8 for series A.
This view I cannot accept. The only forms which occur to sup-
port it are d'tais, ix.5.5 : VS. xxix.5, and dhana-eais, x.67.7.
These I refer to the stems d'-td and dhanasd'. The form vayo-
dha'w, x.55.1 ; 67.11, rests on a mistake ; the text has vayo-dhai

B. 1. Here belong : tuvi-grebhis; mithdsavadya-pebhis; ratna-
dh'ebhis, 2 ; &u-gebhisy 3; sdma-gebhis, AV. ii.12.4.

2. Here belong : ddpchgvais, 2 ; ndva-gvaisy 2 (and AV. xiv.
1.56) ; patam-gau; su-khaU; d'-tais and dhanarsais (above).

INSTRUMENTAL PLURAL FEMININE.

A. B. The forms are coincident. The Rik has 29 forms (from
6 stems) : ratnardhd'bhis ; gnd'bhis, 5 ; prajd'bhis, 6 ; prod-
dhd'bhis; lavordhd'bhia, 15 ; 28VOrdhd'bhU.

Instrumental Plural Neuter,

A. No example. B. 1. Here belong: ma dhu-pibhis (134.10:
iv.45.3) ; su-gtbhis, 5 ; m-mn'ebhi*, 4.
2. Here belongs su-mnaU, 7.

Dative Plural Masculine.
A. No example. B. Sole example : pHrvarjSbhyas (Gr., -bhias).

Dative Plural Feminine.

A. B. Sole example : prajd'bhyas, 3 ; prajd'bhycut (Gr. -bhias),
at end of iv.53.4o.

Datiyb Plural Neuter.

A. B. There is no example. Cf. pp. 350, 397, 417.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ab.p.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 458

Ablative Plural Masculine.
A. Sole example : bhtirirdd'bhyas. B. No example.

Ablative Plural Feminine.
A. B. There is no example.

Ablative Plubal Neuter.
A. B. There is no example.

Genitive Plural Masculine.

A No example. B. Here belong : sdkam-jd'ndm; dm-jd'ndm,
AV. xix.71.1.

Genitive Plural Feminine.

A. No example. B. Here belong : virbhd'ndm; prarjfld'ndm,
AV. xiii.2.2.

Genitive Plural Neuter.

A. B. There is no example.

Locative Plural Masculine.

A Here belongs d'-tdsu (or f.), 2.

B. Here belong : dravino-dfohu; su-kheshu.

Locative Plural Feminine.
A B. Here belong: kshd'eu, 2; gnd'eu; jd'su; pra-jd'eu, 2;
sa-bhd'su.

Locative Plural Neuter.

A. No example. B. Here belong: dur-g&shu; eadhd-etheehu;
eurgtihu; stHnn&shu, 3.

8TBM8 IN RADICAL /, i, U, U, B.

It is doubtful whether there are any stems ending in a really
radical 5 or u; cf. pradhi, p. 367, and abhidyu} p. 401. Most
roots ending in these vowels, as well as those which, according
to the Hindu authorities, end in r, take an added t when used
as the final member of a noun-stem : thus, agva-ji-t, soma-sut,
loka-hr'-L The stems of this sort are given by Gr., Wb. 1727-8.
I have treated them under the head u stems in £" 01 also p.
419 (si&r, t&r).

The stems in radical long i, as deva-vi', pada-ni\ manyu-mt',
are treated with the other 2-stems (see pp. 368, 869, 375-400),
and the forms are enumerated in each case under " C." In like
manner, the forms of the stems in radical long 6, as uda-ptif,
nabho-jti,', tfira-sflf, surd-$ti,', are given under " 0,Zf pages 405-419.
vol. x. 61

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

454 ' C. R. Lanman, [Radical

The following sections treat of suffixless or radical stems
ending in consonants. The arrangement is based on the alpha-
betical order of the final consonanta

STEMS IN RADICAL GEL

There is, to my knowledge, only one stem in gh in the Veda :
sardgh, f., * bee.' This occurs in the N.p., sardgho madhu-kr'tak,
£!at. Br. iii.4.8u. From sardgh are formed : N.8., sardty TS.
v.3.12a: gat. Br. xiii.3.14; D.p., sardd-hhias, RV. i.l 12.21." The
d (t) is here the regular representative of Indo-European gh*\
compare Hubschmann, in Kuhn's Zeitsch. xxiii.386. It is theo
unnecessary to set up a stem sardt or sardh; and the stem sardgh
is supported by iydm . . sardghd . . . sdraghdm mddhu, TBr.
iii.10.101. See A. Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.110.

STEMS IN RADICAL AC OR A'Sta

The root ac appears in a number of compounds which show
such peculiarities of declension that it is necessary to treat of
them by themselves. After them will be treated all other radical
stems in c.

The stems exhibit the distinction of strong and weak forms, and
the strong forms are characterized by nasalization : thus, prd'c
(prdrac) makes prd'ncas in the N.p.m., but prd'cas in the A.pm.

These stems are declined only in the masculine and neuter.
The feminine is formed by adding % to the weak stem of the mas-
culine, and is declined according to series B, p. 366.

The following lists include, I believe, all the Vedic stems whose
final member is the root ac. First is given the element with
which ac is compounded ; then, the stem of the masculine and
neuter forms ; and last, the stem of the feminine forms. A stem
is enclosed in parentheses if it has no forms occurring in the Rik
or Atharvan.

1. Most often the element with which ac is compounded ends
in a or & The two vowels are then fused.

Enumeration: dpa, apdc, dpdci; &va, dvdc, dvdci; pard, p&rdc, pdrdd; prd,
prd'c, prd'ci; su and pra, swprd'c, (suprdd, VS. iv.19); arv&, arvd'c, arvd'ci;
ghrtd, ghrtd'c&; devd, devd'ct; aematrd', awnatord'c; satrd', satr&'c^ satrd'd;
ddhcvra (accent), adhard'c, (adhard'd) ; so vipva (accent), vifvd'ct From nara,
instead of nard'd, we have with irregular accent nardctf, as shown by AV. v. 31.4,
nardcid'm, ' a certain plant.' If nard'ct also occurred, we might see in nordetf
differentiation by means of accent, as on p. 368 top. The stem viskvd'c, of the
isolated G.s.m. vishvd'cas. Gr. refers to viskva=vishu ; cf. viahvchdri-ik. For
vishuy&k, vflhak, and «♦*&, see A.s.n.

If the root ac is preceded by an element ending (2) in *, or (3)
in w, this i or u either remains intact or is changed to y or « in
the strong cases in the samhitd, while in the weak cases it unites
with the a of ac to i7 or to H respectively.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

ac-stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 465

2. Enumeration: (a) prdM, prati-dc, prattd' (cf. stiprattci, VS. iv.19); dddhi,
dadhi>&c; Uri, Hri-dc (the weakest cases are supplied bv a different compound,
•tfnk-oc, tirdpc); pvU-i, gvity-dc, pvitlcV ; sdmi-i, wuny-dc. samtcf; (b) tid-i, (the
strong cases are formed regularly from hdac,) fattct; m, nfaic, ni'rf; devadri,
devadri-ac, devadrfd; sadhri, 8adhH-ac, sadkri'd; kadri, kadri'ct; cf. asmadriroc,
madri-ac, vuhvadri-ac ; and tvadri-ac, Tnadriadri-ae, yuvadri-ae (see A.s.n.) ;
akudhri-ac ; nini-ac (see A.s.n.).

3. Enumeration: (a) dnu, anu-dc, anted' ; rjti, rju-dc; $6, su-dc; (b) vishu,
viakthac, visktict The two feminines pwrOJd? and urtW are formed as if from
puru-dc and vmirdc Such m. stems do not occur. The place of the latter is
filled by a compound of the root vyac, uru-vydc, whose feminine, if formed after
analogy of samy-dc sarnie?, would be uru-vid'; and of this, as BR. suggest, ur&ct'
may be a shortened form. But since uru-vydc has a regular feminine (see rad.
osteins, D.s.f.), it is perhaps better to refer wdcV to uru-dc.

4. Sometimes ac is compounded with elements ending in a
consonant. These are : cv'tt, sdm, udy tirds, pcuty r'dh?, pr'thf.

In the first two instances, an % is inserted between the parts of the compound,
and this % (y\ or its resultant with a, goes through the whole declension : thus,
pvity-dflcas, pvitice, cviiid'; samy-dficam^ samtcV. The stem tid-ac is the only one
whose strong forms show aflc preceded by a consonant {&d-afcam). Even this
stem forms its weakest cases as though the strong were from (tdy-aftc, and makes
udicaB. Traces of the older formation remain in uccdf, an I.s.n. with adverbial
accent for ud~{a)od; cf. pafcd', for pfa-(a)c-& (p. 337 above). In like manner
tira^cd' stands, with adverbial accent, for tira8-{a)c-d ; so tirafci for Hrdcd. The
feminine stem is Hrdfd ; but the nomen proprium, TiraccV, is differentiated by its
accent (p. 368 top). Gr. places here, finally, fdh-ah and pfth-dk.

In the Rik, if the stem is accented on the root syllable, the
accent remains there in the strong cases {prd 'Ocam, pratydficam) ;
and also in the weak {prd'ciy arvd'cd, satrd'cd), except when the
vowel of ac unites with a preceding i or u to % or H. This
happens with the oxytone stems of 2(a) and 3(a), and the ending is
then accented (prattcds; prattci\ N.A.d.n. — weak; dadMcey -ds;
cvitfce; anilcds).

In nicd1 and prdcd' we have only apparent exceptions ; they
stand for ni'cd and prd'cd with adverbial shift of accent.

If the weak case-forms of the masculine are oxytone, the
feminine stem is also oxytone, and this in turn throws the accent
forward to the case-ending as stated on p. 375 top : thus, anilcds
(A.p.m.), anHcV ; prattcds (Ab.s.m), praticf ; so samtcyds,
nardcyd'm.

These rules do not hold for the later texts. Thus the Atharvan has cdtr&n \ jahi
pra&'co anu'cah, iii.1.4, against the Rik-reading jahi prattcd an&cdh, iii.30.6. See
also A.p.m. In like manner we have samVcas , . pap&'n, TS. v.2.94; cf. dadht'cd
and BR. iii.506.

In the feminine we have: anu'c% AY. x.10.10 ; sami'd, TS. iv.1.3'; samfcyd,
TBr. U.8«; praWd, AV. often; pratVc&m, AV. xii.1.34: TBr. i.4.4*; pratTds,
TS. v.2.10*. Like the Atharvan, the TBr.. in quoting from the Rik, modernizes
the accent: thus TBr. ii.8.75 writes pra&'d for pratld' of its original, Rik i.95.5.

The VS., TS., and TBr., however, in quoting from RV. i.96.5 and iii.29.13, do
not alter the accent of aomief , -d'h.

The verse RV. x. 18.14 is shown to be a later addition (1) by its contents, (2)
by its metre, and (3) by the form of transition from A to B (exceedingly rare with
u-gtems— see pp. 401 top, 403 med.), ishv-ds. This evidence is beautifully con-
finned by so minute a detail as the accent of pratfdm. The examples show that
thia is a modern form ; a genuine Rik -verse would have prattd'm.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

466 C. R. Lanman, [Bad. ac-stema.

Nounr atiyb SnrcniLAB Maboumbs.

The case-ending/* does not appear after the double consonant
of the strong stem -aftc(-a), -ank{+). Progressive assimilation
reduces the form -atik to -atin; this is preserved in the text
before a vowel, if the thematic a is not long (as is the case with
the stems of class 1, p. 454).

1. The following non-assimilated form appears: pratydnk, before
%6moy TS. i.8.21 ; before sddo, vi.8.16; Wore madah6y vii4.2\
See Whitney's note to TPr. v.32.

2. The samhitd has the following assimilated forms : dadhidnn,
before a-, RV. ix.108.4; before f-, vi.16.14; nianny before u-,
iv.18.5: x.27.13; 142.5; pratidnn, before a-, i.144.7: x.79.6;
before u-, i.50.5(; V.2S.1. For other examples, see Ath. Pr. iii.27
and TPr. ix.18. C£ also yMn for ytink, stem y1!y; kidr'nn and
wdr'nfi (rad. p-stems, N.s.m.).

8. Including the words just given nnder 2, the pada has 47
forms in -n (from 8 stems) : dpdn; arvd'n, 23 ; dadhidri, 3 ; -y&n,
2 ; niany 8 ; pratydn, 12 ; prd'A; vishvaA; suprd'n. From Ath-
arvan verses, I have noted 80 forms (from 10 stems) : adhartin,
v.22.2 : xii.2.1 : arvd'A, 12 times, as iii.2.8 ; tidan, v. 4.8 : ix.7.21;
Hrydd, thrice, as x.2.28 ; itydn, v.22.2 ; gdrdn, thrice, as vi.29.3;
pratydny 9 times; prd'n, 5 times, as iii.4.1 ; vishva?iy xi.8.83;
sadhrydn, vi.89.2.

NOMDCATIVB A1TD AOOUBATIVB SINGULAR NSUTER.

The N.A.8.U., as a "middle case" (mittlerer casus), is not nasal-
ized, nor does it show the fusion of ia to i. All the forms here
given are used as adverbs, unless the contrary is stated. Here
belong 159 Rik-forms (from 22 stems) :

1. (a) dpdk, 5 ; drvdk, as adj., i.9.5: vii.27.3 : x.29.8 ; as adv.,
89 times, and viii.50.1 ; prd'k, 6 ; from the AY., adhard'k,
xx.128.2; 184.1-6; dpdk9 xx.128.4; 134.1-6; arvd'k, 7 times,
as iv.25.6 ; pdrdk, x.1.16 \prd'k, 7 times, as xx.128.1.

(b) The vowel of the nnal syllable -dk is shortened to -&k:
vishun&'k; vr'thdk, 2 ; *ninidk (ninia-ak — but see rad. /stems,
introductory paragraph).

2. (a) pratydk; samydk, 5 ; ntakyl; sadhriak, as adj., 1108.3:
iii.31.6 ; as adv., 6 times; asmadriak, 8 (N.p.m. -<Marlcas)\
madriak, 2 (A.s.m. -driaflcam) ; vishvadriak, as adj., vii25.1 ;
akudhrtok; from the AV., tirydk, x.2.24; pratydk, 16 times;
$amydk, xviii.4.11. For samydty see rad. ./-stems, L.p.f.

(ft) The final syllable Aak is shortened to AJc : tvadrik, as adj.,
x.43.2 ; as adv., v.3.12 (in both instances the metre allows the
pronunciation tvadriak) ; madrik, 3 times (madriak actually
occurs) ; madriadrik; yuvadrik: ninik, for *ninidky — see 1(6).
An analogous shortening is pernaps seen in jidk (16 times), for
dit-ak.

3. vUhvak, as adj., vil 34.13 : x.36.9; as adv., 12 times; AY.,
thrice.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A,s.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 457

4. tf*x*, 4 (and AV., 1) ; r'dhak, 13 ; rdhdk, once ; pr'thak, 13 ;
praprthdk, AV., thrice, as xi.1.27. Ct, however, Ind. Stud.
iv.412,248.

In vii.25.1, md' te mdno vishvadriag vi cdrtt, vish- may be taken
as adj. with mdno, or as adv. with vi cdrtt. The example shows
clearly how the two constructions blend logically.

Accusative Singulab Masculine.

Here belong 33 forms (from 9 stems); arvd' fleam, 11 ; Hbdafir
cam; niaricam; pratidncam, 5 ; pratydficam, 2 ; prd'ficam, 7 ;
madriaficarn; vUhuaftcam; samyaficam; sudficam, 3 ; and from
the Atharvan, adhard 'fleam, 32 times, as v.22.3 ; anvdfieam,
vt 134.3; dpdficam, iii. 3.7 ; arvd'flcamy\.Z.l\ : xi.3.32-49; pdrdfir
cam, 21 times, as vi65.1 ; pratydflcam, 23 times, as vii.40.2 ;
vishvaflcam, ii.33.7; samydftcam, xiiL3.20; from TS., tirydflcam,
iL5.ll4.

For uru-vydficam, see rad. c-stems, As.m.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULAR MASCULINE AND NEUTER.

Masculine : arvd'cd (rdthena), vii.78.1.

Neuters: devadrifcdtmdnasd),ldS.e; 163.12; satrd 'cd {mdnasd),
thrice. The weakest tonus of prd'c should be paroxytone ; as,
prd'ed.

If, with BR and Gr., we take prded' aa adjective with mdnaad in iii.31.6,
prded'hinvan mdnasd sapid vieprdh, the false accent adda one more item to the
long indictment against the hymn (Ueb. i.528). It is perhaps better to take it as
an adverb (with adverbial accent) with ahinvan.

Five forms, which as adjectives would be paroxytone, occur as
adverbs with the accent shifted to the ultima : tira$cdt, 3 times ;
nicd\ 1 (and AV. iv.3.6); uced\ 12; paped', 8; prded', ii.26.4 :
vii.83.1. We may presuppose an adv. *pardcd', differentiated by
the accent from the adj. I.s.n. pdrded.

To the apprehension of the speakers, the stems of these adverbial instrumentals
were tirafca, ntcd, ucca\ pafca\ prded, parted. These served as the bases of new
formations: ttraped-td, 2; nted't, only once; ntcais, not until Atharvan; uccais,
only once ; paccd't, 17 ; prdcaia, only once ; pardcais, 10. Of. p. 337.

These are undoubtedly late formations. The use of the plural instrumental as
adverb belongs to the later period of the Vedic language, and none of the plural
instrumentals thus used has the older ending -ebhis. The adv. f&naia, so frequent
in Sanskrit, occurs only once in the RV., viii.80.3 (with (anakais).

Dative Singulab Masculine and Neuter.

Masculines : dadhici, 2 ; pvitteb. For accent, see p. 455.
Neuter : no example.

Ablative Singulab Masculine abb Nbutbb.

Masculine: pratieds, i. 173.5.

Neuter: prd'eas, ii.15.3, 'von vorne.' In Ueb. i.570, for exe-
getical reasons, Or. takes it as A.p.m, This view is favored also
by the accent, which we should expect to see shifted to the
ultima, if the word were an adverb.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

468 , C. 22. Lanman, [Bad. ac-stems.

Ginitivb( SiveuLAB Masculine and Nbxjteb.

Masculines : dadhicds, 2 ; vishvd'cas.
Neater : no example.

Looatiyx SnreuLAB Masculine and Nbutxb.

Masculine : prd'ci (adhvare), viii.13.30.
Neuter : no example.

As adverb, with adverbial accent, occurs tirapci, £at. Br.
ii.3.211 ; e£ tirapci-rdji, BR.

Vocative Singular Masculine and Neuter.
There is no example.

Nom., AocM and Voo. Dual Masouunb and Neuter.

Masculines : arvd'flcd, 5 ; sadhriaflcd; samydrlcd, 2 ; from the
AV., dpdficau, vii.70.4 ; arvd'ftcau, v. 26. 12 ; vUhvdncauy xx.
136.2 ; samydflcau, v. 1.5.

Neuter : praticti (dhd'mani), ix.66.2. Observe the accent.

Inst., Dat., and Abl. Dual Masculine and Neuter.
There is no example.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masculine and Neuter.
Masculine: vlshilcoa^ L., vii.18.6. Neuter: no example.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masouunb.

Here belong 22 forms (from 13 stems) : (a) rjudflcas ; praty-
dficas; potty ancas, 2; samydflcas; mdflcas, 3; and from the
AV., tirydncaSy xv.8.6 ; prcUydficas, xi.7.1 3 ; samyd fleas y iii.30.3,6 ;
further (ft), from the K.V., arvd'tlcas, 3 ; asmatrd'ficas; asmadri-
aficas; udaricas; pdrdiicas; prd'tlca*, 4 ; vishuancas; sadhr'tan-
ca&, 2 ; and from the AV., adhard'neas, iii.6.7 : ix.2.12 ; dpdficas,
v.3.2 ; pdrdficas, iv.40.1-8 : xi.0.22 ; prd'iicas, thrice, as xi.6.18;
vishvaticas, i.19.2 : xix.38.2. There is no instance of a vocative.

In vii.48.1, &' vo arvd'eah krdtavo nd ydtd'm \ vibhvo rdiham ndriam vorioyaafc,
SAy. takes arvd'ecu as equivalent to arvd'fcas. This is possible ; but, rather than
admit so harsh a grammatical anomaly, I would even change the text out and
out to cvrvd'ficas, especially since the hymn bears traces of corruption (read
v4jd8[o] — p. 346) and late origin. ' Hither may the hither-turned powers as it
were of you as ye journey, 0 ye Vibhii', roll tine mighty wagon.' We may con-
sider hratom nd as a " suggested comparison," the tertium comparaiionis (dpfa)
not being expressed ; see G-r., Wb., s.v. nd 11.2). In v.33.8d, krdtubhis can
hardly refer to anything else than * steeds.1

Transition to the t-declension. A very interesting case of a new
formation based on false analogy is seen in the late hymn x.46,
verse 7, pviticdyas (sdmds). The proper nominatives plural are :
m., pvitydflcas ; f., pvitfws. From the feminine stem ct?#fc*r,
however, is inferred a masculine stem pvittcVy and from this the
N.p. is formed, gvittcdyas. Cf. pp. 337, 371-2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.p.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 469

Nominative Ain> Accusative Plural Neuter.

There is no example in the Rik. We find : pratyarici lomdni,
^at. Br. x.2.1*; samyaflci bhiltdni, xiv.8.14'; pratyafld dtrgkd-
ranydni, Ait. Br. iii.44.

Accusative Plubal Masouune.

Here belong 22 forms (from 11 stems) : (a) anUcds; prattcd*,
2 ; from the AV., anti'cas and pratfcas, iii.1.4 (Rik- iii.30.6t -cds);
pratfcas, v.8.7 : vi32.3 ; vii.108.2 ; from the TS., sami'cas, v.2.9*;
further (6), from the RV., adhard'cas, 2 ; dpdcas; arvd'cas, 3 (for
vii.48.1, see N.p.m.) ; dvdcas ; lidtcas, x. 131.1 ; pdrdooBy 5;
prices, 2 ; vis/ideas, 3 ; satrd'cas; from the AV., nf'ccu, xi.1.6 ;
pdrdcas, ii.25.5 ; vwhUccu, iii.1.5 ; 2.3 : TS. v.2.94.

For the accent, see p. 455. Only once does the AV. have pret-
tied* (viii.3.6), and that in a quotation from Rik x.87.4.

Inbt., Dai., Abl., Gen., and Loo. Plural.

Of the remaining cases of the plnral m. and n. there is no
example in the RVT

The forms are enumerated in full in all the sections on
radical or suffixless stems. The entire omission of a case
signifies that no example of that case occurs. Thus no men-
tion is made of the oblique dual cases of stems in radical dh}
because no examples of such stems in such cases are found.

Accent Monosyllabic stems accent the ending in the weak
cases. The A.p.m.l is treated in respect to accent as a strong
case (e, g. ruc-as) ; but numerous exceptions occur, where the
Ap.m.£ is oxytone (e. g. vdc-ds). These will be grouped
together at the end of the article.

STEMS IN RADICAL C.

The forms are alike for the masculine and feminine. All mono-
syllabic stems used as substantives are feminine ; but tvac-l occurs
twice as m., and arc-d' once as an adjective in the Lfl.m. The
only neuter form is dpr'k, an As.n. used adverbially.

These stems show the distinction of strong and weak forms to a
limited extent : 1. by nasalization (only in the stem uru-vydc) ; 2.
by lengthening an interior radical vowel. This occurs in the
compounds of -v&'c with droghar, ranya-, satya-; and of s&'c with
apatya-, abhi-y drona-, dhdma-, nr-, yajfha- (in d-yajfla-8ac)y rayir%
rdti- (and in sniddrirdti-shae), harir.

Nominative Singula* Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : vpapr'k; yctfdsruJc, 2 ; hiranyatvak; from AV.,
sd'ryatvak, ii.2.2 ; anrtarvd'ky iv.16.7. See also V.s.m.

Feminines : tvdk; vd'k, 9 ; #Hik, 2 ; from AV., r'&, xi.7.5 : xiv.
2.71 ; nimrtik, iv.3.6 ; vd'k, 14 times, as ii.12.8 ; p£&, xii.5.34 (and
VS. xxxviii.18) ; sr&k, ix.6.17 ; from TS., anhomuk> ii.4.21.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

460 C. B. Lanman, [Bad. c-stems.

Accusative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neutbb.

Masculine. Here belong 24 forms (from 17 stems). Enumera-
tion : (a — with strengthened stem) uru-vydflc-am; — satya-vtfcam,
2 ; apatya-sd'cam, 3 ; abhirshd'cam ; drona-sd'cam ; dkama-
sd' cam; rdtirshd'cam; (b) anhomticam; ddWoghavdcam, 2 (and
AV. vi.1.2) ; Myavdcam; tanHrticam; dhdnarcam; purorticam;
madhttpffcam; mrdhrdvdcam, 2 ; surticam, 8 (and AV. iv.1.2);
mvd'cam.

Feminines (91 forms, from 7 stems) : dsicam, 2 ; fcam; tvdoam,
12; vd'cam,ll; vd'cam-vdcam; vimucam; steam; sU'riatvacam;
from AV., r'cam, vii.54.1,2; pticam, iv.38.4 ; srticam, xi.1.24;
tvdeam, 9 times ; vd'eam, 27.

Neuter : dpr'k, as adverb, x.89.14 — see above.

INSTRUMENTAL 8INGULAB MASCULINE AMD FEMININE.

Masculines : arcd' (mdsd') ; uru-vydod; sU'riatvacd, 2.

Feminines (44 forms, from 9 stems) : red', 12 ; tvacd'; mrod;
rued', 6 ; ruca-rtscd; vded", 12 ; pucd'-^ucd; *icd'; swrucd; anted!,
6 ; from AV., red', 2 ; tvacd', 3 ; vded' , 21 ; pucd!, 2 ; srucd', 2.

Dative BnreuLAB Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines: tidyatasruce; yatdsruct: viyva^tdce.

Feminines : tuce, 3 ; ruck: toad, A V . xi.2.5 ; rci, VS. xhl39 ;
uru-vydoe (sdrasvatyai), Av. vi.41.2. In view of the last form,
it is better to refer urdci', the supplementary feminine stem of
ururvydc, to uru-dc — see p. 455.

Ablative Singular Feminine.

Here belong : tvacd* ; nimr&ca*, 2 ; from AV., tvacd*, v.14.3 :
vi21.1 : xii.3.53 ; srueds, xii.4.34.

Genitive Singula* Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : pururticas; *uruca*.

Feminines: reds: tvacd* ; vded*, 21; vdcas (pate); vimucas
(napdt), 2 ; from AV., red*, ix.10.19 ; vded*, 10 times, as Ll.l ;
vdcas (pate), 4 times.

Locative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine: tvacif, ix.69.3 (dvye) ; 101.16 (gdvye).
Feminines : dtuci; udtfci, 2 ; tvacl, 7 ; nimr&ci, 2 ; vdd, 8 ;
vivdei, 4 ; sruci; from AV., udr'ci, vi.48.1-3 ; tvacl, 123.4.

Vocative Bdxgulab Masculine.

Here belongs : dkrttaruk, x.84.4.

Nom., Ago., and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

I. Masculines : tandr&cd; yatd*rucd, 2 ; suvd'ed.
Feminines : (a— with strengthened stem) satya-vd'ed (-»£'<>),
x.12.1 and AV. v. 1.9 ; (b) ghrtapr'cd, RV., once ; tanilrucd, once,
H Feminines : vd'eau; sicau, 2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.p.m.f.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 461

NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE PLURAL MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

Masculine. Here belong 41 forms (from 18 stems). Enumera-
tion : (a — with strengthened stem) abhishd'cas, 8 ; a-ycyfiasdcae;
drogha-vd'ccu; nrshdcas, voc. ; nrshd'cas, 2 ; ranya-vd'cas; rayi-
shd'cas; rdti-shd'cas, 8; satya-vd'cas ; smddrdttehdcas j hari-
ahd'ccu; from AV^abhirshd'cas, xvin. 4.44; rdti -shd'cas, xviii.3.20 ;
(b) dudhrd-vdcas; yatdsrucas, 8 ; vamriica*; vwdcasy 2 ; intrficas,
3 ; suvd'ccu, 3 ; shktdvdcas; stfriatvacas, voc. ; from AV., mrucas,
xviii.8.22 ;.8uvd'ca8, ii.5.2 ; 8am8icasy xi.8.13.

Feminines (21 forms, from 8 stems) : dpr'ccbs; r'cas, 5 ; divo-
ricctzs; pT'cas; bhadravdcas, voc. ; ri'tcas, 2 ; vd'cas, 6 ; sr&cas^ 4 ;
from A V., ifca» (N. and A.), 14; vimficas, vi.112.3 ; nimr&cas,
xiiL3.21 ; vd'co8y twice; sicca, xiv.2.51 ; sriicas, v. 27.5 : xix.42.2
(text srucdsl).

Aoousativb Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : (infects; ari'tcas; mrdhrdvdcas, 3 ; vddhrivdeas;
vivdcas, 2.

Feminines : mrdhrdvdea*; r&cas, 2 ; vd'cas, 4 ; sur&cas; *r&c-
as; from AV., durvd'cas, iv.17.5 ; pt'tcas, vii.100.1 ; slcas, xi.9.18;
10.20; suruccu, iv.1.1.

Irregular accent. In i. 11 3. 17, vdcds (tid iyarti vdhnih) must be
an ace. (c£ ii.42.1) ; so srueds, AV. xviii.4.2.

Instrumental Plural Feminine.
Here belongs {yMtt, ii.35.12 : AV. x.1.12 : xii.1.38; 4.49.

Ablatiye Plural Femindtb.
Here belongs rgbhyds, AV. x.5.30 : xiii.4.38.

Genitive Plural Feminine.

Here belong : rcd'm, x.71.11 ; from AV, rcd'my x.8.10 : xv.6.3 ;
tvacd'm, xii.3.51 ; madhuprfedm (sc. apd'm)> Hi. 13.5.

STEMS IN RADICAL GH.

Here belongs bandhurpfch-d, N.d.m., iii54.16. The forms
vipr'cham, samp/cham, sampfche, and prcM occur as infinitives.

STEMS IN RADICAL J.

Several stems are treated here whose final j is not radical, but
belongs to the derivative suffix aj or ij (p. 327). They are :
trshnqf (from tr*shnd)y dhrehdj^ sandL wpf;, vanijy bhury. Of less
clear formation are the stems bhishaj and dsty (from asar-tj f — cf.
Cretic eirp, * blood'). The adverb ninth (which BR. refer directlv
to stem ninvj) is best explained as standing for ninidh% ninidk
(p. 456). The ok may be referred to root ac or to the suffix
qj (ninid+aj; cf. trehn&'j).

vol. x. 62

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

462 C. R. Lanman, [Bad /-stems.

The stem dtrj is supplemented by asdn thus : fork, dsrky asnd\
asnds, asnds.

The forms are alike for the m. and f. Most monosyllabic stems
used as substantives are f. ; but 4/> V&'j?, y*& and rdj are m., and
bhrd'j occurs as a m. adj. Neuter forms are found from the stems
d*rL pvdtrabhd'jy suytij, evard'j, and svd'vrj.

The distinction of strong and weak cases.

1. Nasalization. This is seen only in two words, yufijam{yujmn
occurs 15 times) and yftfljd (ydjd occurs once) ; but the VS. has
also ytinfi, N.s.m.

2. Of the lengthening of an interior radical d there is no certain
example.

The compounds of -rd'j appear with long d in the weak oases (vtirtffc •amrd'je)
as well as in the strong. In like manner we have bkrdjd' as LsX Here, there-
fore, we must consider the long vowel as inherent in the root or stem. (Different
is the root in giri-bkr&'j.)

The same is true of -bhd'j. The Rik has the forms : pitobhd'jas; p&rva-Hid'jam,
•bhdfjas; pratiiamabhd'jam; gobhd'jaa; vdmabhd'jas; ratnabJid'jas, G.s.L ; fvdtra-
bhd'jd, I.s.n. All these, save the last two, occur in strong cases, and no form has d.

Or. sets up the first three stems with short & ; but if the long d were not
inherent in the stem (cf. the later forms cited by BR. v. 240), we should hare to
assume strong forms (ratnabM'jas, cvdtorabh&'jd) in weak cases (G.s.f . and I.s.n.) !
Cf. dmpd'de, rad. d-stems, D.s.n.

The verbal -y&'j, on the other hand, appears generally with A (diviyaja*, miiya-
ydjvm, suy&jam, pfkshdpraycyas — all strong forms). For ydt as a voc, see v\a.m.
For ava-yd's, eee N.s.m.

I am inclined to think that a comprehensive examination of the
exceptions to the law respecting the reconversion of palatals to
gutturals before the suffix a [Lindner, p. 13, 3,] would show that
in many cases the words with c or j belong to later texts (rued,
VS. ; rta'd, MBh.) and are by origin new forms of transition rather
than old and normal formations (cf. -r&cy r6ka).

Thus we have in viii.45.13, indra dfdhdf cid dngdm; and so in UL45.2, vrtrar
Jehdd6 valarhny&h purd'ih darm6 apd'm cy'&h .... indro dfdhd' cid drvjdk.
Despite the accent, I can not but think that these o-fonns, drtyd-m etc, are
transition-forms made after analogy of radical stems in ; (capkd-rfy'-am, rig-as,
rctfha-yfy-am), and in part under the influence of the metre and the similar verse-
ending.

A real stem a-yuja is ill-authenticated in Vedic texts. In P&r.
Grhy. i.17.3, Codex Wilson 451 reads ayugmdksharam; and in
A9V. Grhy. iv.2.2 ; 5.3, the edition reads a-yuj-o (N.p.). In i.15.7,
however, we find — just where we should expect it — a form of
transition to the a-declension, ayujdni (ndm4ni), used to avoid
the unfamiliar a-yuiij-i. Accordingly in RV. viii.51.2, ayujS
(dsamo nr'bhih) may be due to a merely formal parallelism ; cf.
p. 468. The metre would be good with aytig utd'samo nr'bhih,
or the like.

The late forms bhrdjds and bhrdjd'ya have bhrdj-d\ perhaps,
for their point of departure.

Transition to the t-declension. The form tujdye (accent — cl
toy-4, iv.1.3 : v.41.9), v.46.7, is a transition-dative to titf, equivalent
to tuft in meaning. There is no oxytone stem tujL

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.a.m.£] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 468

Nominative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

The final radical j appears as k or as t in general according as it
represents an original gl or g*. See Ascoli, Corel di glottologia,
i. 106,1 17; and UUbsohmann, in Kahn's Zeitsch. xxiii.3S4-90.
C£ stems in rad. A, N.s.m.f.

L Masculines : abhuk; upik, 4 ; rtaytik; rtv4k; ghrtdnirnik,
3; candrdnirnik ; pardfor'ky 2; bhishdk, 3; vanik ; eamvtfk ;
saytik; from AV., ardharbhd'k, vi86.3 ; bhishdk^ V.29.1 : x.4.15 ;
patd-bhishak, xix.7.5 ; htranyasrak, x.6.4. See also V.s.m.f.

Feminines : nirnik, 2 ; hiranyanirnik, 2.

(a) Here also belongs the form ytikn (cm), VS. x.25 ; it stands
for yank. Cf. p. 456 and V&j. Pr. iv.104.

II. Masculines : ekard't; bnrd't; rd't, 2 ; vanerd't; vibhrd't, 2 ;
virdff, 2 ; vipvabhrd't; samrdft, 12 ; evard't, 5 ; from AV., ekard't,
Hi 4.1 ; vird't, or £, 20 times, as be. 10. 24; samrd't, thrice. Cf.
y<fc, V.s.m.

Feminines : rd't, v. 46.8 ; vird't, twice.

IIL The form avayd's occurs "in i. 173. 12 as f. (p. ava-yd'h) ; so
AV. ii.35.1 (p. avaryd'f) ; further, d'vayds, m., i.162.5 (p. d'-
vaydhf). Cf. Ind. Stud. xiii.96. These forms are referred by
BR. and Gr. to stems avayd'j and d'vaydj. It is doubtful
whether the long vowel is inherent in the stem. The forms of the
grammarians, avaydjam etc., do not occur ; and the d of the nom.
may be explained as a vicarious lengthening. The genetic series
would be : ava-yag*-s, -yai-8, -yaps, -yd' 8. See Johannes Schmidt,
Verwantschaft8verhdltni8se} p. 11 ; and S. Goldschmidt, Z.D.M. &.
xxvii.709. Cf. pveta-vd's, from -flag-*, -vagh9-*. Sadhormd1* and
puro-dd's are not entirely parallel.

Transition to a-declension : bhrdjdre, x. 170.3 ; see also p. 462.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

Here belong: dsrk, i. 164.4 : AV. iv.12.4,5 : Ait. Br. ii.9 ; svd'vrk
(amr'tam), RV. x.12.3; suyuky as adv., iii.58.2 ; and perhaps
ninik (see pp. 461, 456). For dsrt, see p. 466 top.

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines (61 forms, from 22 stems) : (a) y&fljam; (b) upijam,
3; rtvyam, 11; jyeshfhard'jam, 2; trshndjam; pardvr'jam, 2;
pdrvabhd'jam, 2 ; prtand'jam; prathamabhd'jam; prdtary&jam;
ydjam, 15 ; yuvdyujam; rathaytijam, 2 ; vird'jam; paphdrtiiam;
satyaydyam, 2; samrd'jam, 4; eayiijam; eutydjam; suydjam;
suyujam; svard'jam, 5 ; soaorjam; from AV., 4fam, xix.50.5 ;
tribhtijam, viii.9.2 ; vird'jam, or f, 6 times, as viii.9.7,9; vartijam,
iii.15.1 ; euerdjam, xx.128.15.

Feminines (61 forms, from 10 stems) ; upaspyam; ti'rjamy 36 ;
ttyam; nirnyam, 13 ; parivfjam; bhOjam, 3 ; manoyujam, 2 ;
vird'jam; sahdercmirnijam ; srdjam, 2 ; from AV., bhvjam ;
svardfjam; ti'rjam, 27; srdjam, 2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

464 (?. R. Lanman, [RaA y-stems.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULAR MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

Masculines: manoytijd; yujd\ 30 times, and 139.4: viii.85.15;
vaeoytijd; sah&sranirnijd, 2 ; suytijd, 3 ; from AV., bhuhtyd,
ii.9.5; yifjd\ iv.23.5 : v.21.11 : xiii.1.3 ; saytijd, v.14.7 : vii.108.2.

Feminines: Hrjd\ 6; tujd', 4; nirnijd; bhrdjd! ; from AV.,
manoyujd, v. 7.5 ; 10.8 ; vird'jd, xv.14.5.

Neuter : $vdtra-bhd')-d (vayasd), viii.4.9.

Dativb Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : trshndje, 2 ; rakshoydje ; van'ye ; mmrd'jt, 2 ;
svard'je, 3; from AV., mrtd-bhr&j-e, iv.4.1 ; yw/6, vi.54.1,2; virtfje,
samrd'je, and svard'je, xvii.22,23. Transition-form : bhrtftfya,
VS. viii.40.

Feminines : f2W6, 2 ; tufa 2 ; nirnfye, 4 ; MwjJ, 5 ; from AV.,
ftp'6, vi.33.1; tfrfo twice. Transition-form: tujdye,\A6.1 (p. 462).

Ablative Singular Masculine and Feminine.
Masculines : yujds; vird'jas. Feminine : nirnijas.

Genitive Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : utfijas; samrd'jas; svard'jas, 2.

Feminines: Hrjds, 11 ; itojas, with voc., 10; prayujas; yujds;
ratnarbhtilj-as (p. 462) ; from AV., drjds, 4 ; vird'jas, 6 ; bhraj-as}
vii.90.2.

Neuter: svard'jas {gotirdsya), x. 120.8.

Locative Singular Masculine and Feminine.
Masculine: dgvanirnijL Feminine: sarhsr'ji.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

Here belong: ghr'tanimik ; samrdt, 3; perhaps dkrUaruk,
AV. iv.31.4 (cf. RV. x.84.4,' c-stem).

BR., vi.8, take ydt, x.61.21, as a verb ; so Say., aydt \ yaja. Roth proposed
to take it as a vocative, * 0 offerer.1 Since the j of yaj represents original f, the
normal nom. s. would be yd't ; and corresponding to this, according to the gram-
marians, the voc s. would be ydt (of. prdt).

Nom., Acc, and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

L Masculines (44 forms, from 13 stems) : (a) yufijd; (b) rtvyd,
2 ; tantttydjd; purubhujd, 10 ; ptishkarasrajd; prdtary&jd; brali-
mctytijd, 3 ; bhishdjd, 5 ; yujd; vacoyujd, 4 ; samrd'jd, 10 ; sayujd;
sdkamytijd; mytijd, 3 ; from AV, ptishkarasrajd ; bhishdjd;
saytijdy 2 ; manoyiijd, vi.65.1.

Feminine : sandjd, i.62.7.

IX Masculines : apnard'jau; bhishqjau; samrd'jau; from AV.,
sayfyau, vii.53.2 ; euytijau, vLl40.3 ; awdvifjau, ix.4.12.

Feminine : apvayujau, AV. xix.7.5.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.d.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 485

Datiye Dual Masculine.
Here belongs bhishdgbhydm, AV. x.6.12.

Genitive amd Locative Dual Masculine and Feminine.

Gen. masc. : samrd'jo*. Gen. fern.: bhurtyos, iv.2.14: viii.
4.16 : AV. xx. 127.4. Loc. fern. : bhwjjoe, ix.26.4 ; 71.5.

Nominative and Vocative Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines (63 forms, from 28 stems) : dtrshnajas; dsvapnajas,
2; uptjae, 14; rtvijas,*; krtddhvcyas; giribhrdjas; ahrtdnirnijax;
tttntZtydjae; trihndjas; diviydja*; duryujas; dhrshdjas; nihirjas;
pttubhd'jas, 2 ; piirvabhd'jas; prtand'jasy brahmayi'ijas, 2 ; bhi-
s/idjas, 2 ; manoytijas, 4 ; mitraytijas; yujas, 2 ; rathayfijas, 2 ;
uftrshdnirnijas, 2; vdmabhd'jas, 2; samrdAaa ; samrd'jas, 8;
suyujas, 4*; svaytijas; ward'jcu, 3 ; from AV., svard'jas; ytijas,
2 ; bhtshdjas, 3 ; rtvyas, 7 ; rtvyas, vL2.1 ; dytijas and pray&jas,
xi.8.25 ; vi^vasr'jaSj xi.7.4 ; hdritasrcyas, x.8.31.

Feminines : abhiytijas ; ufijas ; ti'rja* ; gobhd'jas ; tujas ;
nirnyas; prkshdprayajas ; prayfyae, 3 ; bhujas ; standbhujaa;
m&yujaa; from AV., Hrja8y xii.1.12.

Nominative and Accusative Plubal Neuter.

No example. Paradigm : apva-yiinji. In place of this, a form
of transition is used : e. g., ayvydni (p. 462).

Accusative Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : ddhinirnijas; apoay&jas; 'wpfyas, 2 ; catttryuias;
vijas, 2 ; ^aphdn'tjas (and AV. viii.3.21) ; saytijas; myiijas, 3 (and
AV., 6).

Feminines : abhiytijas, 5 ; tujas; praytijas; bhfyae^ 2 ; srdjas
(and AV. xx. 127.3).

Instrumental Plural Masculine.

Here belong : arunayngbhis ; upigbhis, 2 ; rtaytigbhis, 3 ;
zuyugbhis; svayiigbhis, 2 (and AV. ii.5.4). In AV. vii.4.1rf, read
niyudbhis (BR.).

Dative and Ablative Plubal Masculine.

Dative : u&gbhias. Ablative : bhishdgbhias, AV. xix.2.3 ;
56.2 ?.

Genitive Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : upgdm, 3 ; rtv'ijdm; bhishdjdm (and AV. vi.24.2).
Feminines : drjd'm, 2 ; riirmcydm; bJwjd'm. In 5 instances
Gr. resolves : tirjadm, -ddm.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

466 G JR. LanTfoan, [tladical

Locattvb Plural Fbminine.

Here belong : srakshti; pray&kshu, AV. v.27.5,6. For prayak-
shu the TS. fjv.1.81) and VS. (xxvii.14) read praydtsu! C£ <Urd
(d-), p. dtrt, TS. vii.4.9; samydt te (for samydk), i.2.71; and the
etymology: yrftf ddhriyata tdd ghrtdm dbhavat, ii.3.101,
cited by Weber, Ind. Stud. xiii. 106,107.

STEMS IN RADICAL T AND />.

No stem ends in t. For raghdt-as, AV. viii.7.24, BR. suggest
raghdvas (i. e., py^nd'a).

Two stems end in rf, *'(£ and 'vd (=z't&h). The former occurs only
in the I.s.f., idd\ viii.39.1. The latter occurs as follows: idd\ s";
M&fo, as G.s.j 10. In vii.47.1, Gr. takes idds as A.p. ; but the
accent would then be exceptional. I join it as G.s. with Urmim.
See «A-stems.

STEMS IN RADICAL T

A very considerable number of stems are treated here whose
final t is not radical, but belongs to one of the derivative suffixes
tV, ut, vat, tdt, at (p. 327). They are : tadit, divti, yoshit, rohU,
sarity hard; marHU; arvdvdt, dvdt, udvdt, nivdt, pardvdt, pravdt,
samvdt; upardtdt> devdtdt, vrkdtdt, satydtdt, sarvdtdt; veh-dt,
va/t-dt, *rav-dt, 9a$c-dt. Isolated stand ndpdt> tdnundpdt, and
prdnapdt.

It will be observed that some stems admit of a double analysis:
either as radical stems from roots ending in t; or as stems formed
by root + consonant t. We may divide : miUa-Jer'4, or -kr't (hart,
'cut') ; vr't, or vr'-t (BR.) ; uhurfcr'-t (Mahtdh. to VS. xvi.46, iaAtfw
vdndn kxtrvanti te ishufartah), or -kr't (Gr.). In div-it Gr. sees
the suffix it; BR., the root i + t. Cf. didytit and didyii; dyvt
and dyti.

Three stems of exceptional formation are supplemented by
others : ndpdt, by ndptar; ydkrt, by yahdn; pdkrt, by pakdn.

The forms are alike for the m. and f. There are but four mono-
syllabic stems, dyut, nrty pr't, vr't — all fern. Six neuter stems
are found : akshipdt and dnapdvrt; $dkrt and ydkrt; samydt (in
Ls.) ; and trivr't, in the sense of 'amulet.' For pnfr, see rad.
ftA-stems.

No stems exhibit the distinction of strong and weak cases ; but
the accusatives pi. vr'tas and nr'tas are accented regularly as
strong cases.

The stems in tdt perhaps owe their origin to forms of transition
on the part of the tdti-atema to the consonant or ^declension. For
these transitions the L.s. might serve as a point of departure, the
forms devdtdtd, satydtdtd, sarvdtdtd being easily referable to
Osteins (as adverbial instrumental), or to i-stems (as locatives) : so
in x. 11 1.4 — see I.s.f. A like transition is seen in the td-stem
avi'ratd, which makes a D.s. from a $-stem avfrat-e; see p. 359
med.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

/•stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 467

From jape, * stick, stop, cease,' — i. e. «o-*(a)e, a reduplicated form of 8ac? — are
derived two peculiar formations. We have: 1. the substantive sa^c-dt (like
vah-&t\ 1, 4 a stopping,1 and concrete, ' a hinderer ;' and 2. the participle adfc-at
(ii.16.4, vfshabhd'ya tdfeate). 1. From the noun 8ap>&t we have the bahuvrihi
adj. cb-sapcdt, with regular accent (cf. Garbe, in Kuho's Zeitseh. xxiii.512). This
appears in the masc. form: asapc&td, N.d., vii.67.9; and in the fern, forms:
asapcAtam, As., ii32.3; -hid, I.s., x.69.8; -dtd, N.d., i.160.2; -dtas} N.p., 10
times. 2. From the participle a&fc-oU we have the negative compound d-eafcat,
with regular accent (cf. Garbe, La, p. 494). This appears in the masculine
dsofcatam, i. 11 2.9 (formed without nasal like participles of reduplicating class,
dadat etc.); and in the fern, forms: dsafcanti, N.s., iii.67.6: viii.31.4; feaccantt,
vi.70.2 (formed with nasal, the character of seqc as reduplicated root being
obscured by the syncopation of ft).

Nominative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : andvr't; cikit, 4 ; tadit; tdn&ndpdt, 2 ; ndpdt, 14
prdnapdt; manapcit; vipaccUy2\ vishtivr't ; suvr'ty 3; from
the Atharvan, ekavr*ty xiii.4.12 ; dbandhuhrt (iv.19.1) and millakr't
t'iv.28.6), from kart, 'cut;' vipa$c'Uy 4 times; napdt, 5; tdntl-
ndpdt. For sHyavasd't, RV. x. 106. 10, the padakdra writes
8tfyavasa*dtf

Feminines : didyut, 8 ; pardvdt; pravat, 2 ; rolut; vidytti, 8 ;
from A V., apac'tty vi.83.3 ; vehdt, iii.23.1 ; vidyhty 6 times.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

Here belong: trivr't (dnnam) ; pdkrt ; akshipdt (2) and dn-
apdvrt (2), as adverbs ; from AV., ekavr't, viii.9.25,26 ; trivr't,
v.28.4,6,11 ; ydkrt. ix.7.11 : x.9.16 ; pdkrt,' xiiA.9.

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines (51 forms, from 10 stems) : acitam; ghrta-cw'itam,
2"; tdnHndpdtam; trivr'tam, 4 ; ndpdtam, 20 ; madhu-ccutam,
10 ; vipapcttam, 6 ; vishUvftam; suvr'tam, 5 ; kuracc'ttam; from
AV., ducc'itam, 2 ; vipapcttam, 3 ; ndpdtam; trivr'tam, 3 ; ekavr't-
aw, xiii.4.15.

Feminines: arvdvdtam ; asapedtam (ii.82.3) ; dvr'tam, 2;
ghrta-pctitam, 3 ; dyiitam; pardvdtam, 3 • pravdtam; yoshitam;
vicr'tam; vidyutam, 2 ; vipapc'Uam; vr tamy 2 ; samydtam, 5 ;
tamer'tam; from AV., vipaccitam, 2 ; vidy<damy 8 ; pardvdtamy

2 ; pravdtam; yoshitam; roMtamy iv.4.7 ; dvr'tamy x.6.S1bis;
*amvr'tamy viii.6.4 ; vehdtam, xii.4.37,38 ; 8amvdtamy vi.29.3 ;
105.2*

Instrumental Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter

Masculines : trivr'td, 4 ; div'Ud; svvr'td, 6.

Feminines (36 forms, from 15 stems) : asapcdtd (x.69.8); dcttd;
udvdtd; ghrta-pctitd; trivr'td; devdtdtd, 3 ; dyutd'y 2 ; nivdtd;
praedtd; pravdtd, 12 ; vidyi'itd, 5 ; vrtd\ 2 ; eatydtdtd; Barvdtdtd,

3 ; haritd; from AV., vidy&td, 4 ; nivdtdy v.3.2.

The forms from Idt-stems may also be taken as locatives s. of
tdt i-stems ; see p. 466. See also p. 386 top, and Wb. 1490.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

488 C. R. Lanman, [Bad. (-stems.

Neuters: sarhydtd, i.151.8: vLl6.21 ; trivr'td, AV. v.28.2,8:
xix.27.3 and 9 (m. ?).

Dative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : aate; vipapcite, 2 ; sudyiite.
Feminines: devdtdte,Z\ vidybte, AV, L13.1 : xi.4.2. Here Gr.,
after Bollensen, puts ishu-kr't-e va, p. -driva, i.184.3 ; see N.d.m.
Transition from the ^-declension : avtratre (pp. 466. 359).

Ablative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine: vidyiitas (haskdrd't), i.23.12.

Feminines: arvdvdtas, 4; udvdta*, 8; didyCUas; nivdtas, 2;
pardvdtas, 35 ; pravdtas, 3 ; samvdtas; from A V., vidyiitas, 2 ;
pardvdta8y 3; pravdtas, iv.25.6. In RV. x. 142.4, udvdUis and
nivdtas may be accusatives pi.

The TS., i.8.141, has didy&n md pdhi (p. didyot); the VS.t xx.2, vidyti pdhi
(Mahidh., vidyutah mdm pdhi). Weber would explain didydt as standing for
didySe (stem didyu), with irregular phonetic transition of * to t; see Kuhn's
Beitrage, Hi. 388-9. He would accordingly read didydt in the VS. ; see Ind. Stud.
xiii.101, note. Both, on the other hand, explains vidydt as an ungrammatical
formation from the stem vidyJU, and as due to the parallelism of the formula,
mfiySh pdhi vidydi pdhi (BR. vi.1066). That Buch outward parallelism in the
sound of a formula could call forth such irregular formations is clear from AY.
xvi.4.6, uahdto doshdsof ca. The stem doshd' passes into the (u-declension simply
on account of the juxtaposition of ushds ; see os-stemB, G.s.d. A similar ungram-
matical form is probably cdkslios, stem eakshus (p. 410 top). We need not assume
a stem cdkahu; see p., 412 end. Of. pathe-s?Uhd' (for pathi-), an imgrammatical
imitation of raXhe-shthdf.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : trivx'tas; vipapdtas, 2 ; sacitas; sudyi'itas, 2.
Feminines: pravdtas, 2; vidytitae ; pravdtas, AV. xii.1.2;
pravatas, with voc., thrice.

Locative Singular Feminine and Neuter,
Feminines : arvdvdtiy 7 ; upardtdti, 2 ; devdtdii, 2 ; pardvdti,
17; vrkdUUi.
Neuter : trivrti, AV. v.28.3.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

Here belong : tanHnapdty 5 ; napdt, 1 7 ; perhaps marttt in
evayd'marut, v.87.1-9.

Nom., Aoo., and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

I. Masculines: asapcdtd, vii.67.9; napdtd, 3 times; ttdpdtd,
4; vipapcitd, v.63.7 (and AV. vi.97.2) ; ishtt-kr'td, i.184.3 (? see
D.s.f.).

Feminines: asapcdtd, i. 160.2 ; dvr'td; madh&pc&td; hartid.

II. Feminines: vr'tau, 2; mciftau, AV. ii.8.1 : iii.7.4: vi.121.3.

Genitive and Locative Dual Feminine.
Genitive: harito8. Locative: vicr'to*, AV. vLll0.2.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

N.V.p.m.f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 469

NOMINATIVE AMD VOCATIVE PLURAL MASCULINE AMD FEMININE.

Masculines: dvr'tas; rshtividyutas; ghrtorpcutas, 3; ndpdtas,
3 ; vidyutas; vipapeitas, 9 ;" samydtas, 2 ; sHriapvitas; svdvidyut-
as; haritas; hrddunivr'tas; from AV., dupdtas, v.31.5; ekavftas,
xiii. 4.13,21 ; vipapeitas. In the Rik, marutas occurs 133 times as
N. or A., most often as N. As vocatives occur in the Rik:
indrdmarutas; rshtividyutas; napdtas,b\ marutas,\76\ vidyutas.

Feminines : asapcdtas, 10 ; udvdtas; ghrta-pcutas, 3 ; taditas;
pravdtas; madhu-pc&tas; vahdtas; vidyutas, 10 ; samydtas, 3 ;
saritas; sravdtas, 5 ; harUas, 12 ; from AV., apadtas, vu.16.2bis;
dpacitas, vi.83.1 ; dvdtas, 3 times ; vidyutas, 4 ; pardvdtas;
yoshUas, 3 ; dvr'tas, 2 ; updviftas; haritas, 1 ; saritas, xii.2.41.

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : a/Atas, 3 ; adyutas; ghrta-pcutas; marutas, see
N. ; vipapdtas; hurapcitas.

Feminines : udvdtas, 2 ; dakshindvr'tas; didyutas, 2 ; nivdtas,
2 ; pardvdtas, 6 ; pravdtas, 1 ; madhu-pcutas; rohitas, 8 ; vidyutas;
vrftas, 3; samvatas, 2; samvdtas, 2; sarttas; sapcdtas (142.7 :
iii.9.4: vii.97.4X.; sravdtas, 2; harUas, 11; from AV., nivdtas;
pardvdtas, 6 ; pravdtas, 5 ; yoshitas, 2 ; trivr'tas; samvr'tas, 6 ;
purUvftas and vishUvr^tas, x.2.11 ; nftas, x.2.17.

Instrumental Plural Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter,

Masculine : mar&dbhis, 35 (and AV., 7). Feminine : pravdd-
bhis. Neuter: trivr'dbhis (gender?), AV. xix.27.3,9&&.

Dative and Ablattvb Plural Masculine.

Dative : marudbhyas, 3 ; -bhias, 10. Ablative : marudbhias,
i.85.8. Gr. proposes the resolution -bhias in 11 instances; in only
one (x.77.7) is it necessary — the others being at the end of cata-
lectic pddas. In v.54.9, read prayddbhyas — root i.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : vipapdtdm; marutdm, 2 ; mardtdm, 30 (and AV.,
6) ; marutadm, 7 (resolution necessary in all instances but i.3S.10
and viii.83.1).

Feminines : pravdtdm, 2 ; from AV., apacitdm, vi.25.1-8 :
vii.74.1 ; vidyutdm, xix.44.5 ; sravdtdm, vi.86.2.

Locative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine : marutsu, 8.

Feminines : udvdtsu; nivdtsu; pravdtsu; prtsti,, 31.

Doable ending. Little importance ought to be attached to the
oft-mentioned curiosity prt~su-shtt. The fact that it occurs in
hymn i.129 (verse 4) detracts considerably from its value.

vol. x. 63

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

470 G. R. Lanman, [Radical

STEMS IN RADICAL TK

There are five stems in th : pdth and supdth, m. ; abhipndth,
s,dj. m. ; kdprth; prdth, n. The final of the last stem re uncertain.
BK. set up prat or prdd; Gr. connects prdth with the verbal root
prath. BR. and Gr. regard kdprth as masculine ; but it seems
necessary (with A. Ludwig) to consider it as neuter on account of
the A.B. kdprt, x. 101. 12. In this verse, the stem shows also a
form of transition to the o-declension, with shift of accent,
kaprthd-m. The stem pdth supplements pdnthd (p. 441) and
pathi. Gr. explains the d of pdth-ds at the beginning of iL2.4<J
as a metrical lengthening ; this is hard to believe for the first
syllable of the pdda. The A.p. of pdth is accented irregularly as
a weak case, path-ds. The forms follow.

Singular: N., kdprt, x.86.16,17; A., kdprt, x.101.12; prdt, 8
times ; L,pathd', 28 (and AV., 6) ; pathd'fl a-, i. 129.9 (c£ p. 335);
supdthd, 3 times ; D., path'e, VS. xviii.54 ; Ab., pathds, 5 times
(and AV., 2) ; abhipndthas (vdjrdt), x.138.5 ; G., pathds, 4 times
(and AV. v.30.7) ; pathos (pate); pdthds, ii.2.4 ; L., pathi, 8
times (and AV. xiv.1.68).

Plural : A., pathds, 28 (and AV, 5) ; pathd'm, 3 (and AV, 2);
pathddm, vii.73.3.

• STEMS IN RADICAL D.

Here belong about a hundred stems, from the roots ad, kshad,
chad, chid, trd, nid, nud, pad, bhid, mad, mud, rod, Ivid, 2vid,
sad, sud, shd, syad. The most frequent are those with -vld and
-sdd. I have not distinguished lvid from 2vid in the enumera-
tions. In dyur-ddd-am, AV. vi.52.3, we have a new formation in
which the reduplicated root dad (from dd) is treated as a primitive
verbal.

The stems in which the d is suffixal are comparatively few, and
are: drshdd, dhrshdd, bhasdd, subhasdd, vandd, pardd. For
kdkdd, k&kud, see p. 471.

The forms are alike for m., f., and n., except of course in the
N.An. There are 5 monosyllabic fern, stems: Hid, hid, WW,
miid, vid; one masc, pdd; and one neut, hr'd. The other
neuters ire compounds of pdd, and several with chid, vid, and
syad. Htfrd also appears in composition with dus and su. The
compounds of pdd generally form the fern, stem with £

The distinction of strong and weak cases is seen only in pdd
and its compounds. The a is lengthened in the strong cases.
There is, however, a curious wavering between the strong and
weak stem in the N. A.s.n. ; as, dvipat or dvip&'t. Once in the
N.p.m. we have dvipd'das, AV. In the D.s. dvipdfde, the d is
metrical (cf. abhimdtishd'has, 191.18, and satrdsd'he) ; but not in
-pdtsu. Of sadhamd'd and somamd'd only strong forms are
found ; but the d is hardly inherent in the stem.

Irregularly accented are : sddrd, Ls. ; pad-ds and nid-ds, Ap.

Irregular phonetic treatment of the final stem consonant appears
only in padohis; see Lp.m.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

rf-8tema] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 471

Transitions to the vowel-declension. Several stems exhibit
most interesting forms of transition. Pdd is the Vedic stem for
'foot.' Undoubtedly its strong A.s. pd'd-am was the point of
departure for the transition to the a-declension. As if the A.s.
were pd'darm, the N.s. pd'das was formed, and the N.p. pd'dds.
These are the only transition-forms which the Rik shows, and —
what is more important — they occur in the latest parts of the
whole samhitd.

Pdldas occurs in the Purusha-hymn (x.90.3,4) — confessedly one
of the very latest interpolations in the Rigreda ; it is not N.p. of
pdd, but a transition N.s., and signifies ' one quarter9 (a late and
derived meaning of the word — S&y., caturtho 9npah, le$ah\ thus
answering to tripd'd, 'three quarters.9 Pd'dds, tf.p., occurs in
iv.58.3, and means the ' feet9 of a melting-pot. Hymn 58 is the
last of the book in our text, and certainly did not belong to the
original collection. Pd'ddsy N.p., occurs also in verse 9 of the
mystical hymn to the Sun-horse, i.163. In the well-known modern
medley, i.164, verse 12, occurs pdflcarpddam, A.s.m. ; this might
be referred to -pad; but cf. yadd . . . catushpddam (nom. s. n.)
paflcapddam . . bhavati, Adbh. Br. xii. Finally nipdddrs9
N.jp.nL, occurs v.83.7.

The stem nid shows a solitary form of transition to the
d-declension in vi.12.6, sd tvdrh no fpdhi] aravan niddydh (BR),
or sd tvdrh no arvan [vi mueo] niadydh (Gr.). If nid-d\ the Ls.
of nid, were the point of departure, the accent ought to be
nidd'yds; c£ ndv-a and ndvdyd, p. 434.

From eadha-md'd-am, felt as sadha-md da-m, may be derived
the forms aadha-md'de, -md'de&hu.

The stem hr'd is supplemented by hr*daya. Instead of hr'd

(N.A.S.), we find hr'dayam; instead of hr'ndi, hr'dayd. The
orms hrfdaydt, -e> -dm, and -eshu occur almost exclusively in late
passages.

Transition from the vowel-declension. The stem kdkuda does
not occur until the AV. and later texts — Ab., hdhuddt^ AV.
x 10.19 ; and unless we assume two independent formations in the
case of kaku(b)hd and kakdJbh, I am strongly tempted to believe,
in view of the accent, that the oxytone vowel-stem is the older,
and that here the transition has been in the opposite direction,
i. e. from the d-stem to the consonant-stem. The majority of
forms in the older texts can be referred to vowel-stems.

The d of kdkdd and Jc&ktid is of problematic nature. Is it radical or sufflxal ?
and if not suffixa), does it represent a radical bh t

Pick, indeed, separates kak-itd from ha-kbbh, and refers the former to root leak —
the latter to kubh ( Vgl. Wb* i.36 and 51). It is, however, by no means certain
that kaHd and kakibh are not identical. Weber thinks that the dental of hakbd
is possibly a phonetic alteration of the labiaL For this and other instances of
equally anomalous changes, with suggestions respecting their significance, see
hd. &«<2. xiii.108-110.

We have the following forms with the dental : N.s., kdkut, vi.41.2 ; k&kut, viii.
44.16: AV., 4 times: TS. i.5.51: vii.2.6*-* q.v.: VS. iii.12; kdk&dam, viii.58.12;
kdkbdas, Ab., i.8.7 ; Mkudi, AV. iii.4.2 : vii.76.3 ; pti-kakudas, TS. v.6.171. It is
not entirely clear whether these forms justify our setting up a stem kak&d. One
does not set up dental stems for fort and pray&tm^ p. 466.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

472 C. R. Lanman, [Rad. d-stems.

Nominative Singula* Masculine and Feminine.
Masculine. There are 07 forms (from 51 stems).

(a) The stem- vowel is lengthened. Forms : apd't, 2 ; Skapdt, 7 ; c&tushpdt, 2 ;
trip&'t (x.90.4); dvipd't; vifvdtaspdt; aahdsrapdt; sadhamd't; from AY., ptft,
xiz.6.2; apd't; cdtushpdt twioe; tfrfptt, ziii.2.276w; 3.25 (accent ! cf. RY.);
pUypdTt, iii29.l,2,6; sdrvapdt, x.10.27 ; iahdarapdi, vii.41.2.

(6) The stem-vowel is unchanged. Forms (arranged by roots): karambka-6t;
kravya-, 2 ; vipva-; havya-; — prathama-ch&l; — vkha-ckxt (see N.p.n.) ; — adri-bkti;
ltd-; gotra-; pfo-, 5; — dkshetravit, 2; apva-vti, 2; fcrato-, 4; kshetra-; gdhh, 6;
po-, 3; dravino-; nabko-; rayi~, 2; tua>-; vayund-; varivo-, 6; wwu-,6; vipa-,
7 ; pruta- ; mar-, 5 ; hiranya- ; — admasdt, 2 ; antaHkaha- ; vpasfha- ; rta- ;
turanya-; durona-; duvanya-; prdgharma- ; vara-; vioma-; maam-\ eamA-ikat;
dru-; nr-; vedi-; mci-; — from A V., gdtu-vU, ndtiia-, pap*-, prajd-, vfra-. xi.1.15;
purdna-; vam-; aarva-; war-; — trikdkiU, iv.9.8 ; udbhO, v.20.11; «*-M'f<, iLT.5.

Transition to a-declension : pd'da-s, p. 471.
Feminine. There are 10 forms (from 0 stems).

Forms: (a) apd't, 2; (6) kdkut; dhrah&t; bhasdt; fardt; sarhvU; aamaat;
rtyavasd't; from AV., JkaJWU, vi.86.3 : ix.4.8; 7.5: x.9.19; draha\ ii.31.1 ; 6*a*U
3 times ; parttt, 3 ; nutatt, xvi.4.2 ; nwAA, xx.132.6,7 (ed. van*-).

Quite isolated stands the form sadha-md's, N.s.m., vii.18.7 ; cf.
p. 463. The regular form sadhfrmd'd, p. -mat, occurs iv.21.1.

NOMIN ATITI AND ACCUSATIVE SlNGULAB NSUTEB.

(a) We have the compounds of -pad with lengthened vowel :
dvipd't and cdtushpdt (the forms with d occur together, and those
with d together also), iv.51.5 : x.27.10; tripd't% x.90.3 ; fromAV.,
dvipd't and cdtushpdt, vi 107.1-4 : viii.8.14 : xix.31.4 ; 34.1;
tripd% ix.10.19.

(b) On the other hand we have : dvipd't and cdtushpdt, i.49.3 ;
94.5; 124.1: x.97.20; raghurshydt (dntkam), iv.5.9; prakala-vit
(? as adv.), vii.18.15.

AOOUSATIVB SlNGULAB MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

Masculine. There are 58 forms (from 30 stems).

(a) Forms: apd'dam, 2; tripd'dam; pd'dam; aah&arapddam ; aadha-md'dam ;
from AV., pd'dam, 3 ; pitipd'dam, iii.29.3,5.

(b) Forms (arranged by roots): kravya-ddam, 2; vipoa-; — ud-bhidam; gotra-,
2; pfar-,2; — ahar-vidam; kratu- ; kshetra-; adtu- ; go-, 3; varivo-; turn-, 6:
vifva-, 3; sad-; auar-, 12; hotrd-;— garta-aidam; vanar-; nMm-,2; apt*-
aft&Jcwn; dru-; dhur-, 3; barhi- ; — raghu-shy&dam, 3; Aatrana-«y<kfam ; from
A V., gdtu-vidam; go-; mar-; trikaHdam, v.23.9; durhd'rdam, viiL3.26.

Transition to a-declension : pdfleapdda-m, p. 471.
Feminine. There are 15 forms (from 14 steins).

Forms: upasddam; kdkudam; drahddam; nidarh-nidam ; n*vidam,2; pari-
padam; pitfsfiddam; barhish&dam; vacovidam; vipvavidam ; far&dam; sam-
vidam; aamaddam; aamddam; from AV., dyw-ddd-am, vL52.3; bhaa&dam;
govidam ; samvidam; pariahddam ; samddam.

Instrumental Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter

Masculines: dpadushpadd; kshetravidd; cdtushpadd; dvipddd;
paddf9 12 ; varivovidd; suarv'idd; from AV., padd', 3 ; susMdd,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

I.s.nLf.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 478

iii.14.1 : ii.36.4 (read -dm?). Here BR. (vii.603) put sdd-4'ivA.I.
The accent is irregular.

Feminines : udd\ 2 ; upavidd: drshddd (and AV., 2) ; nividd,
2 ; ni&h&dd, 2 ; pravldd; mudd; vidd'; samsddd; suarvidd.

Neuters : hrdd\ 21 (and AV., 3) ; dushpddd ; dvipddd and
cdtushpadd, AV. xix.16.2.

Adverbial shift of accent is seen in sarvahrdd', for -hr'dd,
x, 160.3. See p. 858 top.

Dative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines: apdde; kuhacidvide; Jcravyd'de: cdtushpade;
vedishdde; sadandsdde} suarvide; from AV., tadvtde; sarvavide;
warvide.

Feminines: nidi, 8 ; mudey 2 ; pitrshdde; parade, AV. viii.2.22.

Neuters: hrdi, 14; dvipdde, 11; cdtushpade, 11 ; from AV.,
hrdky 3 ; cdtushpade, vi.59.1.

In cdtushpdde ndridya dvipd'de, i. 12 1.3c?, the d of the penulti-
mate is purely metrical ; see A.s.n. (a).

Ablative 8djgular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter,

Masculines : dvipddas; pad&s, AV. ix.5.3.
Feminines : uttdndpadas, 2 ; kdkHdas; nidds, 1 1 ; sarhvidas,
AV. iii.5.5. For mddyds, see p. 471.

Neuters : hrdds, 6 ; from AV., hrdds, 3 ; shdtpadas, xiii.2.27.

Genitive Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : nrshddas; yavd'das; suarvidas; from AV., eka-
padas; suarvidas, 5 ; raghushyddas; durhd'rdas, 6.

Feminine : sarnsddas, AV. viLl2.3 ; pramudas, RV. x.10.12, is
A.p.f.

Neuters: dvipddas and cdtushpadas, 2 (and AV. iv.28.1,6) ;
hrdds, vii.101.5 : viiLl8.19 (Gr.— text htdds) ; hrdds, AV., 9.

Locative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuteb.

Masculines : padi, 2 ; suarvidi, x.88.1 : AV. xvii.13.

Feminines: nishddi, 2; parddi ; samsddi, 2; kakudi, AV.
iii.4.2: vii.76.3.

Neuter: hrdi, 13 ; AV., 12. In vi.53.6, hrdi may be an A.s.n.
of stem hrdi (see BR.) ; and perhaps we have the same stem in
x.91.13 and ii.23.16.

Vocative Singular Masculine.
Here belong: vipvavit, ix.64.7 ; sdrvavit, AV. vi.107.4.

Nom., Aoc, and Voo. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

L Masculines: (a) pd'dd, 6; (b) aharvidd, 2; kavichddd;
kratotvidd; vasuvidd; vipvavidd; suarvidd.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

474 C. R. Lanman, [Bad d-stema.

In AY. xviii.2.12, we have pathi-shdd-t, an ungrammatical
imitation of pathi-rdksht, RV. x.14.11.

Feminines: udbhidd; barhishddd; raps&ddf.

IX Masculines : (a) pd'dau ; from A V., pd'dau, 5 ; pddau,
L27.4 ; (b) dtmas&dau, v.9.8. Feminine : prdntasddau, A V. vii.95.2.

Instrumental and Ablative Dual Masculine.

Instr. : padbhyd'm, AV. v.30.13 : xiLl.28. AbL : padbhyjfm,
RV., 2.

Genitive and Locative Dual Masculine and Feminine.

*en. masc. : padds, AV. xii.4.5. Loc. masc. : padds, RV.
3. fern. : prdpados, AV. vi.24.2. In AV. L18.2, padds, as well
hdstayos, does duty for an AbL See pp. 844 med., 392 med.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine. There are 64 forms (from 33 stems).

i) Forms: apd'das ; cdtushpddas ; dvipd'das; pitip&'das; sadhanuFdas, 8;
amd'das; from AY., dvipd'das, xii.l.5l; catuahpddo dvipa'do y&nti ydfnum,
6 (a metrical?).

>) Forms (arranged by roots): toja-adas ; pikrusha-ddas ; madhu- ; yavan-,
soma- ; havir- ; — tfdas ; pra- ; — dcva-nidas ; — ud-btUdas, 4 ; — ahar-vidtu ;
d- ; vaco-y 2 ; varivo-, 2 ; vasu- ; mar-. 7 ; hofrd- ; — adma-sadas ; purak-, 2 ;
no-, 2 ; svddusarh- ; camC-shddas^ 5 ; dhtir- ; barhi; 2 ; vanar-, 2 ; barhi-
fas ; — raghushy&das, 4 ; vanddas (suffix ad) ; from AV., abhtmodamAdas, 2 ;
Uuammudas, vii.60.4; as voc., xiii.13; — anna-vidas; gdtvh (voc) ; ni-; nt-;
hma-j 12 ; yajw- ; vipva- ; suar-, 2 ; — afUariksha-aada*, 2 ; t*po-, 2 ; (ftp*-, 2 ;
fcd-, 3;~ ragku-shy&daa;— suhd'rdas, iii.28.5 : vi.120.3.

[Yansition to a-declension. For pd'da-s &nd pd'dds, see p. 471.
Feminine. There are 14 forms (from 10 stems).

'orms: dmd'das; nidas; nishpddas; pramudas; m&das; vifvaswoidas; faradas,
sarhsddas ; mihutd'das ; suarvidas ; from AV., pramtidas, 2 ; upas&daB, 2 ;
aHkfcw, 2 ; dwrkd'rdas, xiv.2.29.

Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter.

[loth suggested as a Vedic canon that compound stems in
lical d or root -\- t make no plural in -ndi or -nti, but keep the
m of the singular. Thus ukha-chU might be taken with parva,
. pdrvdni, in iv.19.9; so Say. Compare dirgha-prCU (vrafcf),
l.25.17 ; d dhar (divid'ni), i.64.6. The parallelism of ii.15.7c,
^ever, favors our taking it as N.s.m. (cf. viii.68.2c). 'The
•oken) decrepit one walked ; his members united together.1
3 BR. vii.1714. The form hf'ndi is avoided by the use of
dayd, -dni.

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

M asculines : kravyd'das, 2 ; tudn'tdas; devanidas, 2 ; parUhdd-
; pastiasddas ; bdhukshddas; from AV., cdtushpadas and
ipadas, 4 ; apsushddas, 2 ; sattrasddas; durhd'rdas, 17 (xix.28
d 29) ; suhd'rdas, xix.32.6 ; padds, iv.15.14 : ix.4.14 : and RV.
46.2 (never pddas).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.p.m.l] N<mn-Inflection in the Veda. 475

Feminities: bhidas ; nividas, 8; pramudas (x.10.12); vasu-
vidas; vinudas; parddasy 19; samddas; sasyddas; havyas&'das,
2 ; nidds, 4 (never ntdas) ; from AY., parddas, 20.

Instrumental Plubal Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : gharmasddbhis, 2 ; patdpadbhis; padbh'ts, ' feet,'
AV. iii.7.2: iv.11.10; 14.9: xix.6.2. /

By no phonetic process»can padrbhU become pad-bh'is; but this
is the regular resultant of papbhu (c£ vidrbhi8y spdt> vipdt).
From pdp> i glance' ( pdp : spd? : : tdr : stdr), we have padbhis,
iv.2.12, dr'pydn padbhih papyer ddbhutdn: 'With thy glances
beholdest thou the visible and the invisible.'

Iniv.2.14; 38.3: v.64.7: x.79.2 ; 99.12: VS. xxiii 13, however,
we have padbhxs evidently meaning 'feet.' The AY. has the
regular forms with d; cf. also padbhy&'m. Perhaps those with
d are false forms due to false analogy or to confusion with padbhis,
'glances;' but c£ pddgrbhi, x.49.5, and pddbipa, i.162.14,16:
x.97.16.

Feminine : parddbhis, 2. Neuter : hrdbhU, 2 ; and AV. ix.1.1.

Dative Plural Masculine.

Here belong : prthivi-shddbhyas, AV. xviiL4.78 ; divir, 80 ;
antariksTiOrsddbhyas, 79.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : admasdddm; dvipdddm; from AY, cdtushpaddm
and dvipdddm, 4; pvdpaddm, viii.5.11 : xix.39.4 ; sushdddm,
iii.22.6 ; suhd'rddm, iii.28.6.

Feminines : paripdddm; samdddm; from AV., pardddm, xviiL
4.70 (MSS. -dam) ; prdntasdddm, i.32.2.

Locative Plural Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculine: patsti, v.54.11 : AV. vi.92.1 ; -pdb*u!^ Ait.Br. vi.2.
Feminines : samdtsu, 32 times ; pardteu, AV. xii.8.34,41 : xviii.
2.38-45. Neuter: hrteti, 9 times, and AV. viii.8.2 : xii.2.33.

STEMS IN RADICAL DR.

Here belong about fifty stems, from the roots idh, kshudh, nadh,
bddhy budh, yudhy lrudhy 2rudh, vidh (i e. vyadh), sddh, sidh,
sridh, ardh, mardh, vardh, spardh. The last four appear of
course with the r-vowel. The verbal •vr'dh is the most common
of all

There are no stems in which final dh is not radical. Gr. derives
purtidh from $ardhy with svarabhakti. The stem iehidh seems to
be shortened from nish-shidh: cf. (n) ishkrti. Agnl'dh is plainly
shortened from agnfdh. The word prkshtidhcu is unclear.
Budh suffers transfer of aspiration in ushar-bhtit.

The forms are alike for m. and f. There are 7 monosyllabic
fem. stems: kshtidh, nddh9 mr'dh, yiidh, vfdh, spr'dh, sridh.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

476 C. R. Lanman, [Rad. dA-stems.

Masc. are vr'dham and vfdhd'm (adj.), and bd'dhas (subst).

Neater forms (4 only) are found in the Lb. and G.s.

No stem shows the distinction of strong and weak forma
Transition to the i-declension. The in£ yudhdye (accent— c£

yudh-i) is a transition-dative to yiidh, entirely equivalent to

yudhre in meaning, but not in metrical value. There is no stem

yudhi.

Tw^««io*.w •**An*A;| are: sridhds, A.p., once (but sridhas, 15);
'dho8y see G.s.m.

B SINGULAR MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

2 ; andrtit; ushar-bhtit, 2 ; yaviyHU; pvd-rfo,
i.56 : xxiv.83. Here BR. place samti-samU,
lit see I.s.f.
\; 8<zmit, 8 ; from AV., samit, 3 times, as

; vfrtit, 8 times, as ii.8.2-4.

: Sinoulab Masculine and Feminine.

m, 2; anna-vr'dham; dhufa; gird-; tugrid-^
parvcUd-; madhu-; vayo-; sadyo-; saAo-,
lham; asridham; usharbudham, 3 ; goshu-
tarn, 3 ; from AV., yajiiaw? dkam, iv.23.3
26 ; hrdaydvidham, viii.6.18.
am; usharbtidham ; kshudham^ 3; nuh-
vtr&dham; samidham, 6; aridham; from
k&hudham, 2 ; yudham, 2 ; vtrudham, 2 ;

NOULAB MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER.

4, ii.23.9.

i', 19 and L174.4; vrdhd' : samidhd, 23;

A V., 8amidhdy 5 ; kstiudhd, iv.7.3; yudhtf,

hd, xiv.2.31,75 (BR. as N.s.t of stem-tfAa);

, -#[*], as N.p.m. of stem -dha).

iit sumdnd bodhi asme^ pucd'-pucd sumatfah

\ the first word as N.s.m. So Say., atyar-

m. The parallelism of pucd'-pucd suggest*

>eing an Ls.f. without ending. Cf. vi.48.1a£,

hi; yavtytidhd; sdkamvr'dhd.

Singular Masculine AND FEMININE.

bfidhe; rtdvr'dhe; purunishsTitdhe : mahi-
rsonified— « Bonus Eventus'?), AV. ni.10.10.
udhdye (inf., 7) ; see above. In i61.13c, we
id this longer grammatical form in place of

\i; vrdhi, 34 ; samidhe; yudhe, AV. iv.24.7.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ab.al] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 477

Ablative Singular Feminine.
Here belong : kshudhds; yudhds; sridhds.

Genitive Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines: goshuyudha*; vi-*nrdh-dsf,x.l52.2: AV.viii.5.4,22.

Anomalous accent. BR. see a G.s. in x. 152.26, vrtrahd'
vimrdhd vapt. The only parallels that I can now adduce are
parihvrtd', viii.47.6, and dahid', AV. vi.132. For avadyabhiyd ',
see p. 381 end; the accent of sarvahrdd1, p. 473, is adverbial.
S&y. takes vimrdhd as N.s.m. — samgrdmakdrt — and the vowel-
stem occurs TS. ii.4.21, iydm vimrdhd' (tanu's). But is it not
possible that the original form of the verse was veretrahd' mrdhd
vapf, and that the vi was slipped in from the other verses (vi
mr'dhojahi, 3a, 4a) ? The forms of the other texts would then
rest upon this error in the Rik. See Aufrecht, Migveda*, preface,
p. xliiandBR. vi.1143.

Feminine: kshudhds. Neuter: hrdaydvidhas.

Locative Singular Feminine.
Here belong : prabudhi; mrdhi; yudhi, 4 ; sprdhi.

Nom., Aoc., and Voo. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

L Masculines : asridhd, 2 ; rtdvrdhd, 7 ; rtdvr'dhd, 4 ; namo-
vr'dhd; puroytidhd.
Feminines : rdH-vr'dhd; ghrtd-; payo-; vayo-; sdkam-.
II. Masculine: rtdvr'dhmi, i.23.5 ; as voc., i.2.8 : AV. iv.29.1.
Feminine : saniidhau, AY. xi.5.9.

Nominative and Vocative Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines: rtdrvrdhas; rtdrvr1 dhas, 12; tugrid-j payo-; par-
vatdr; vayo-; suae-; su-, 2 ; — asridhas, 4 ; whourMahas, 2 ; goshu-
yudhas ; jflu-b&dhas ; prayudhas ; vrshdytidhas; purudhas ;
somaparibd'dhas.

Feminines: amitrdyudhas ; asridhas ; ishidhas ; rtdvr'dhas
(dvd'ras), 2 ; nishshidhas, 3 ; paribd'dhas, 2 ; parispr'dhas ;
mr'dhas; virudhas; virudhas, 4; purudhas, 2; samidhas, 2;
spr'dhas, 2; from AV., kshudhas, xi.8.21 ; vir&dhas, 10 times;
samidhas (N. and A.), 7.

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : rtd-vr'dhas, 4 (and AV., 2) ; tamo-; rayi-;—
usharbtidhas, 5 ; pur&dhas, 2 ; bd'dhas, vLll.l,

Feminines : mr'dhas, 25 ; yudfcxs, 2 ; virudhas, 3 ; purudhas,
5 ; samidhas, 3 ; sam-r'dhas; savfdhas; spr'dhas, 21 ; sridhas,
15; sridhds (! ix.71.8) ; paribd'dhas (text pdri bd'dhas), viii.
45.40: ix.105.6; from A V., yudhas, x. 10.24; sridhas (MSS. and
ed. sr'dhas), ii.6.5 ; mr'dhas, 6 times ; virudhas, 7.

vol. x. 64

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

478 C. R. Lanman, [Radical

Instrumental Plural Feminine.
Here belong: samidbhis, 3; vir&dbhis, AV. v.28.5 : viii.7.15.
Dative and Ablative Plural Feminine.

Dative : nddbhyas, at end of catalectic pdda x.60.6a — Gr.,
Mia*. BR. refer this to ndh (cf. akshdndhas, A.p.f.) ; Weber,
Ind. Stud, xiii.109, to nap. Ablative: vfrfidbhycu, AV.

ux.35.4.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : rtdvr'dhdm; prabudhdm; vrdhd'm.

Feminines : ninhshidhdrn ; vir&dhdm, 2 ; *prdhd'my 2 ; from
W., yudhdm (pate), vii.81.8 ; virtdhdm, 13 times; vtrudhdm,
v.19.8.

Locative Plural Feminine.

Here belong : yutsa, 6 ; virutsu.

STEMS IN RADICAL N.

Under this category fall : go-shdh, tuvishvdn, 8vdny tdn* chin,
dn, vdn, and 35 compounds of -hdn. The last are the only ones
>f importance. Almost all the forms are masculine. The stem
dn (tdndy tand' tdne) is feminine. There is but one neuter form,
lasyu-ghn-d' (mdnasd). The compounds of -gh(a)n form the fern.
>y adding i; thus, -ghnt. The fern, vtrahani (gadd) occurs MBh.
x.3238. BR. refer this to vtrahdn, s.v. ; but in vol. vii. col. 1513,
perhaps better, to virahana.

The distinction of strong and weak cases appears only in the
ompounds of han, and is here effected negatively by dropping
he d in the weakest cases ; thus, pdd : pdd : : (g)hdn : ghn. The
yncopated vowel is never to be restored for the sake of the
aetre, as is the case, e. g., with somapd'v(a)ne.

The strong form seems to be used for the weak in Manu xLlOl,
travd*d dvijo 'ranye cared brahmahano vratam / so in 128.
Is the anomaly due to the metre? -ghno occurs viiL89.). So
aksho-hdn-o, valaga-hdn-o, A. p., p. 481.

In general, as we saw above, p. 442, the stems from roots end-
dg in n go over to the vowel-declensions in d and d; thus from
zw, prathamajd's and -jd's. Most of the forms of son and -tan
>elong to the vowel-declension (p. 438, 442). One might expect,
priori, forms like ~jd\ jdnamy -jdn-d (-jfld'), -jfli, etc. ; but there
j no evidence for such forms save in the stems mentioned at the
eginning of the section.

The Zend vhrUhrajdo seems to be the reflex of a Sanskrit
vrtra-hd's; but no such form occurs, nor do the three instances
f metrical hiatus warrant our inferring it (see N.s.m.).

Transition to the o-declension. The N.A.8. neuter of stems in
\dn would properly be -hd'. This form seems to have been
voided and its place supplied by a form of transition to the
-declension. In the Rik we have : vrtrahdm (pdva*) ; *atrdhdm

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

n-stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 479

(paunsiam) ; and the L.S., karafljahe {vrtra-hdtye). In the AV.
these transition-forms extend even to the masculine and we have :
ardtihdm (paripd'nam — or n.), xix.35.2 ; patru-hd-s, L20.5 : vi.
98.3 ; sahasra-hd-s, viii.8.17. Further, we find the stems pdni-gha
and tdda-gha, P&n. iii.2.55.

The" stem -ghna is, as I think, not an independent formation

Sgh(a)n-a], but rather a transition-stem starting from the weak
orms of -Aan, which are sometimes ambiguous. Thus S&y. sees
in Ait. Br. viii.23, gangdydm vrtraghne 'badhndt pafica paficd-
patarh haydn, the Loc.s. of 'Vrtraghna, a district on the Ganges ;'
but it is doubtless the D.s.m. of vrtrahan (BR.). In the Rik we
have: dpdrushaghnas indras, i. 133.6; dhighne, vi.18.14; dpva-
ghndsya, x.61.21 ; go- and pdrusha-ghndm, i.l 14.10; parnaya-
ghne, x.48.8 ; sughnd'ya, viii50.ll ; haetaghnds, vi.75.14. Each
form occurs only once. Cf. pdnigfmdm, VS. xxx.20.

The -ghna-foTmB, in general, belong to a younger linguistic stratum. Thus we
have raksho-h&n in the sarhhitd ; but rafohoghnaif ca diktaih, Kauc. 126. Indra
and Qiva are called respectively valavftrahan and bhaganebrahan in the old Vana-
parvan of the MBh. ; but vctfavrtraghna and bhaganetraghna in the Anucdscma-
parvan. The -ghna-forms are common in post-Vedic texts (so artha., pact*-,
bhrikna-, yaco-, visha-, in Manu), although, of course, the -ton-forms do not die
out Both stems stand side by side in Manu viii.89 ; cf. viii.317 with iv.208.

Transitions also from the strong forms of ~han are seeu in the
later texts. Thus, analogous to the A.s.m. vrtra-hdn-am are
formed : the neuters ripurhana-m (cakram) and paratejo-hana-m
(tejas) ; and the masc. stem mahdndga-hana (epithet of Qiva) ;
see BR. viil513.

The root may therefore appear in six forms at the end of a
compound : namely, as ghan, han; gha, ha; ghna, and hana;
thus, (with gh preserved after j) abhog-ghan, patru-han, pdni~ghay
catru-ha, pdni-ghnay ripu-hana.

It is not unlikely that the otherwise unauthenticated stem tanas
is due to a merely formal parallelism in v. 70.4c, md' peshasd md'
tdnasd. Cf. ushdso doshdsap ca and a#-stems, G.s.n. The metre
would be good with md! tdnd mdtd p&shasd.

The accent of the oblique cases of monosyllabic stems is regular
in only two instances : tand\ x.03.12 ; vand'm, x.46.5 (see p. 353).
Elsewhere we have: tdnd, 10; tdne9 7; rdne, rdnsu; vdnsu;
svdnif. Since tdnd is often used as an adverb, we may say that
its accent has suffered an adverbial shift — here recessive ; cf. divdy
adv. from the Lb. div~d'.

Nominative Singular Masculine.

Here belong 105 forms (from 23 stems) : d-vlrahd; -hd\ with
aghacan&Or, 3 ; adrshta-, 2 ; abhi?ndti-; amitra-, 4 ; amiva-, 3 ;
arupa-; apaeti-, 5 ; asura-; ahU; krshti-; go-; dasyu-y 5 ; nr~;
puro-; muehti'y 3 ; rakeho-, 8 ; vasar-; vrtrar, 55 ; paryar, 2 ;
satrd-; aapatna-, 3 ; eapta-; from AV., anrndma-; prpni-; mano-;
mushfi-; ydfatr; rakeho-, 4 ; vrtra-, 9 ; sapatna-, 21 ; dvtrahd, 2.
See also TS. i.3.2. Scansion of the pddas in which these forms

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

C. R. Lanman, [Rad. n-stems.

shows that -hd stands before a vowel with metrical hiatus
in i. 186.6 : ii.20.7 : x.74.6.
r ghrdns, AV. vii.18.2, see rad. j-stenis, N.s.m.

Nominative ahd Accusative Singular Neuter.

) example. Paradigm : vrtra-hd'. In place of this a form of
ition to the o-declension is used (p. 478) : satrd-hdm, v.35.4;
-hdm, vi.48.21tos.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

re belong : dprahanam; abhimdti-hdnam; ahi-y 2 ; tamo-;
ir; raksho-, 3 ; vrfra~, 7 ; satrd-; from AV., raksho; mono-;
nary ix.2.1.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULA E MASCULINE, FEMININE, AMD NEUTER.

isculine: vrtraghnd\ i. 175.5: AV. iii.6.2. Neuter: (Uayn-

minine: tand\ x.93.12; tdnd, 19 tiroes.

i is used as an adverb with recessive accent (p. 479) 10 times. With the
iccent it is used: as adj., i.38.13 : ii.2.1 ; as subst., vi.49.13: vii.104.10,11
i : i.39.4. In i.26.6 : ix.1.6, 1 would take t&nd and f&fvatd both as adverbs
tely. As a substantive tdnd is fern. ; but if we join gdgvaid (for -tydt) with
anomaly has parallels: i. 122. lid, pr&putaye mahintf r&thav&te (the metre
the grammatically more correct -vatyai); ii. 16.26, brhaU devdtdtaye; so

Dative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

isculines : asuraghne ; ahighne ; nxghni ; vrtraghnt, 3 ;
\aghne, TS. iii.2.41-*; bhrHnaghni, TBr. iii.9.i5'; further,
RV. ix.66.13.
minine : tdne (accent !), 7.

Genitive Singular Masculine.

ire belong: asuraghnds; vrtraghnd*, 2, and AV. iv.24.1 :
1 ; further, go-shanas, RV. iv.32.22.

Locative Singular Neuter.

Here belong : tuvi+hvani^ 2 ; svdni, ix.66.9 (BR as verb) ;
naghni, AV. vi.112.3 ; 113.2.
The ending is dropped in : rdn; dd?i, 5.

Vocative Singular Masculine.
ire belong : amitrahany 3 ; ahihan; vrtrahan, 32, and A V., 5.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Masculine.

Here belong : tamohdnd; rakshohdnd; vrtrcrftdnd, 2 (and
2) ; vrtrahandy 4.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.pum.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 481

Nominative and Yooatxyi Plubal Masculine.

Here belong : tuvishvanas; abhogghdnas; punarhdnae; patiru-
hdnas; matsyahdnasy Qat.Br. xiii.4.3"; yajnahdnas, TS. nib A.

Ace, Inst., Gbn., and Loo. Plubal Masculine.

Accusative : sdtaghnds, AV. iii.15.5 ; raksho-hdn-o vaXagar
hdn-o vaishnavd'n (! p. 478), TS. 13.2 quinquies. Instrumental :
vrtrahdbhis, RV. vL60.3. Genitive: vand'm (dhiyarh dhus,

aksharapatikti ; Gr., vanddm)y neut. ?, x.46.5/. Locatives :
rdnsu; vdnsu, 2 ; cf. ddnsu.

STEMS IN RADICAL P.

Here belong the stems : (masc.) agnitdpy abhildpaldp, asutr'p,
ketasdp, parirdp, paputr'p, pras&p, ritiap; (fern.) dp, dtdp, krp,
kshdp, kshipy patinp, r%p, r&p, vishtdp; rtasap and vip (m.f.).

The forms are alike for m. and £ There are no neuters.

The distinction of strong and weak forms is seen in the stems :
dp, ritiap; rtasdp, ketasdp.

The weak form is used for the strong in apds (N.p.f.) ; but the
texts show no small confusion in the forms of this word.

The strong form is used for the weak in d'pas (A.p.f.) ; the d of
parird'pas is metrical (see A.p.m.).

Irregular accent. The character of hymn x.61 is a sufficient
comment on the accent of vipas, verse 3, if it is G.s.m. Gr. takes
kshdpas as G.s.f. twice ; but see G.s.f. The frequent A.p.f of dp
is almost always accented as a weak case, apds, perhaps for the
sake of differentiation from dpas, i wort' In like manner we have
kshapds thrice, and vipds once (see A.p.f.). Twice, in the AV.,
even the N.p. is oxytone, apds I

Transitions to the o-declension. The jp-stems do not show a
single N.s. in the RV., nor a N.A. p.n. In the only places where
these are necessary we find forms of transition : namely, ydtra
bradhndsya vishtdpa-m (N.s.n.), ix.113.10 ; and imd'ni tri'ni
vishtdpd (A.p.n.), viii.80.5. These are the only two forms in the
RV. requiring the assumption of a vowel-stem visJudpa, and they
are plainly used to avoid the unfamiliar vishtdp (N.s.n.) and
vishtdmpi, which general analogies would require.

Almost all the "later Vedic texts cited by BR. under vishtdpa
contain the very form of the Rik-phrase bradhndsya vishfdpam;
but £at. Br. xii.3.1' has bradhnasya dste vishtape (L.8.).

For the transition-forms kshapd'bhis and Jcs/updbhis, see I.p.f.

In the jagatUpdda i.55.1c, perhaps dtapds is a transition-form, the extended
stem being used rather than the N.s.m. dtap, to fill out the otherwise short metre :
so in iv.5.146, pratVbyena kfdhund atrpd'sah.

Nominative Singular Neuter.

No example. Paradigm : sv-ap. In place of this a form of tran-
sition to the a-declension is used : vishtdpa-m, by origin plainly
the A.s.f. vishtdp-am used as a neuter nominative. See above.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

C. R. Lanman, [Bad. p-stemsi

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

sculine : papu-tr'pam. Feminine : vishtdpam, viii.32.3 :
5 ; 41.6 : and viii.58.7 (Gr., as o-form) : AV. xi.1.7 ; 3.50.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Feminine.

sculine: vipd\ Feminines: kshapdt '; vipd',4; krp&',%\
RV. viii4.3.

Ablative Singular Feminine.
re belong : dtdpas, 2 ; vishtdpas; apds, x.95.10.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Feminine.

sculine: vipast, x.61.3. Feminines: apds, 5; kshapd*,
pds, 2; rtipds, 3. If kshdpas, i.44.8 : ii.2.2, be G.s., 4by
,' we may consider the accent as adverbially recessive ; but
L.8, it is better taken as A.p.f., * through the nights :' and in
as object of d' bhdsi.

Locative Singular Feminine.
i only example is vishtdpi — RV., 5 times and AV., 4 times.

Nominative Dual Masculine.

re belong: ritidpd; asutrfpd u-, p. -au u-, x. 14.12. The
xviii.2.13, has the more modern form and consequent sandhi,
pdv u-. Cf. p. 341,4.a.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

sculines : (a) rta-sd'pas, 6 ; keta-sd'pas; rtti-dpas, voc. ; (b)

dpas; asutrpas; pras&pas; vipas, 2 ; abhildporldpas, AV.

5.

ninines: (a) (Spas, 135; dpas, 17; rtasd'pas; from AV.,

, 94 ; d'pas, voc., 1 ; dpas, 21 ; (b) patiripas; ripas, 2 ; vipas;

18, 13.

L70.7, 1 regard kshapds as A.p.f. ; see p. 422 med. The N.p.
is oxytone and weak, dpds /, in two Atharvan passages :
(ed. dpds), and vi.23.3.

Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter.

example. Paradigm: sv-dmpi or sv-dmpi. In place of
tempi, a transition-form is used : vishtdpd; see p. 481.

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

sculines : asutr'pas; parird'pas, p. -rd'pah, ii.23.3,14. The
letrically justified in verse 14, but not in verse 3. See Prat.

ninines. I. The accent is that* of a strong case (regular):
hzs, 6 times, and probably in i.44.8 and ii.2.2 (see G.af.);
twice ; vtpas, thrice.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.p.m,f.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 483

The strong form 6! pas is used for the weak : in books i. and x.
of the RV. (1.23.23 ; 63.8; 190.7: x.4.5 ; 9.0; 121.8); intheAV.,
16 times, as i.25.1 : xiv.1.39; in the Ait. Br., vial? (dtapavarshyd
dpo 'bkydniya).

II. The accent is that of a weak case (irregular) : apdsy 152
times (and AV., 26) ; vipds (also vipas), viii.52.7 ; kshapds,
iv.16.10 : viii.26.3 : and i.70.7 (p. 422 med.).

Instrumental Plural Feminine.

The forms falling under this category are particularly instructive
as showing the working of linguistic tendencies, which, although
unconscious, are none the less real.

There is occasion in the Vedic texts for using the I.p. 6f the stems dp, samsr'p,
ksh&p, and Jcship. The organic forms would be abbhxs, samsr'bbhis, fohabbhis, and
kshitohis.

I doubt whether the combination bbh, although given by Benfey (Oram. p. 23,
L 2 — I have not access to Bdhtiingk's Bemerkungen), ever really occurs in Sanskrit
Abbhra rests on a false etymology of abkrd ; cf . dbhri, abbhri. The group does
not occur once in the AY.; see Whitney's additional note 3 to Ath.Pr. p. 588
(256). If it occurs at all, it is, at any rate, of the extremest rarity.

This unfamiliar combination, accordingly, is avoided outright by the Vedic
language, and that in two ways : either (I.) by phonetic dissimilation of the two
labials ; or (EL.) by using a form of transition to the 4-declension.

L Here belong: adbhis, 15 (and AV., 5); sam&r'dbhis, TBr.
i.8. I1 (tdt saThsr'abhir dnu edm asarpat \ tdt saihsr'pdm saiwrp-
tvdm); cf. nddbhyas (Weber, stem ndp) ; kak&d, p. 471 end.

Disregarding the Hindu systems of duplication in consonant groups, we see
that the labial of the stem dp would become lost or obscured when pronounced
with the labial of the ending (abbhis, abhis). The individuality of the word would
thereby suffer greatly. To me it seems certain that the unconscious recognition
of this fact motivated the phonetic differentiation of bbh to dbh. A similar motive
has caused the retention in Sanskrit of the old Vedic ending in the I.p. of the
pronoun 4 ebhis ; if modernized to afo, it would scarcely be felt as an independent
word. See p. 349 ad fin. ; and Weber, Ind. Stud, xiii.109.

II. Forms of transition to the ^-declension — kshapd'bhU, kship-
dbhis — are found in the only passages where a consonantal ("mid-
dle") case of the stems kshap and kshlp is required.

These are: iv.53.7c, sd noh kahapd'bhir dhabhip ca jinvatu; and ix.97.67c,
hirwdnti dWrd dafdbhih ksMpdbhih. These forms were undoubtedly made for the
occasion. It is no explanation of them to set up the stems tehapd' and kshfpd.

The point of departure for the transition-form kshap&'bhis was probably some
oxytone weak ease of tehdp : as, kshap-d'; and hence the accent (cf . ndv-d', Lb.,
with ndvdyd; vrt-4', I.S., with vrtdyd ; ish-i, L.8., with ishdye). From kship, the
paroxytone N.p. Jcshipas was the commonest form, and this may account for the
accent hshipdbhis. Cf. iddbhis, aVstems.

Ablative Plural Fbxininb.

Here belong: adbhyds, 5 ; adbhids, ii. 1.1 : vi.62.6 : x.30.4;
63.2 ; adbhyds, Gr. -bhids, i.34.6 and 112.5 (at end of pdda of 11
or 12 syllables), i.80.2 (at end of pdda of 7 or 8). The AY. has
the form adbhyds 5 times.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

484 C. R. Lanman, [Rad. M-atems.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine : vipd'my 3.

Feminines: kshapd'm; t?ip<2'm, ix.09.1 ; «arn«r'^4m,TBr. i.8.1':

d'my RV., 85 times (and AV., 48) ; dpdm (napdt), RV., 2 (and

7. vi.3.1,3) ; further, apd'm has the value of a spondee 8 times

'. Kuhn, Beitrdge, iii.476).

Sr. reads apddmy with resolution, in 16 passages; but in

^6.1,2, we have, perhaps, aksharapankti. For 493.14, see Ueb.

BO. Bollensen, Z.D.M.G. xxh.586, reads apd'dm, i.67.10.

dally, the cadence requires dpddvn or dpd'm at the end of

3.4a and viii.25.14a (7 or 8 syllables), and at the end of

108.10c (11 or 12 syllables).

Locative Plural Feminine.

Here belongs apsti — RV., 81 times, and AV., 43 times. BR,
92, take apasu, viii.4.14, for apsti, with inserted a, as in dp-a-
rt, AV. xviii.4.24. Cf. sairunrp-a-ishti. See, however, aj-stems,

).m.n.

STEMS IN RADICAL BH.

Here belong the stems: (m2L8C.) jiva-gr'bh, 8ute-, st/Hma-; rathe-
bh; ghamiasttibh, chandahr, vrshtx-; mshttibh; trikakubh ;
m.)kakfibh; kshtibh; gr'bh; ddbhf; nabh; pubh; anushtuhh,
•; rta-stubh; stubh and parishttibh (m.f.).
rhe forms are alike for m. and t There are no neuters,
rhe distinction of strong and weak forms appears in ndbh. 1
i no reason why nd'bhas (N.p) and nd'bhas (A.p.) should not
bh be referred to ndbh. Perhaps kak&bh is a transition-stem
m kakubhd; see p. 471.

Nominativb Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : trikahtip; sttip. Feminines : trishtup, 2 ; from
7., kakfip, xiii. 1.15 ; onushtup and trishtup, viii.9.20: xix.21.1.

Accusative Singulab Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines: rathepubhamy i.37.1 (see p. 330 ad init.) : v.56.9;

egr'bham.

Feminines : kaktibham; gr'bham; pMham, 6 (and AV. xiv.

2) ; rtasttibham; anu-shtubhant; tri-, 2 ; the last two, AV.

i.9.14".

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Feminine,

Masculines : m&htubhd, 2 ; stitbhd'. Feminines : anushtubhd:
\ubhd'; grbhd'; gubhd\ 2, and AV. xiii. 1.21.

Dattve Singula* Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : gharmastHbhe; syHmagr'bhe. Feminine : pubhe
\ in£), 17 ; AV. vii.106.1.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ab.am.t] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 486

Ablatiyb SnrauLAR MASOUuro ahd Fnmmn.

Masculine : jivagr'bhas. Feminine : trishttibhas, AY. xx.
2.1-4.

Gmhititb SnrauuLB Masoulb™ ajto Fumnm.

Masculine : sushtubhas. Feminine : pubhdspdtf, 5 (and AY.
vi.3.3) ; gubhas pott, 16 (and AV. vi.69.2 : ix.1.19). Were it not
for the accent, we might take ddbhas as G.s.f. in v. 19. 4, ddabdhah
pdpvato ddbhah : ' undeceived by the deceit of every one,9
' deceived by no man's deceit.9

NoMDTAnvs Plubal Masouldu ahd Fncnran.

Masculines: chandahrettibhas, vrsha-; paru&htfibhas, eu~.
Feminines : (a) nd'bhas; (b) ptibhas, 2 ; sttibhas, 8.

Accusative ahd Gsnitivb Plubal Fncnmrm.

Accusatives: kaMbhas, 4; nd'bhas; sttibhaa; trirsht&bhas,
pari-. Genitive: kaktibhdm.

8TBMS IN RADICAL M.

Here belong the stems : pdm9 n. ; him, m. ; ddm, n. ; sam^ndm,
£ ; kshdm (gam andjdm), f.

The first is indeclinable ; it occurs 84 times as N. or A.s.

The stem him is posited for the sake of the Ls. himd\ x.37.10;
68.10 (cf. zim-d> G.s., Vend, \l22bis) ; but this form can just as well
be referred to the stem himd and might be added on p. 334.3.

From ddm we have the form damd'm (Gr. -ddm)> x.46.7 : YS.
xxxiii.1 (Mahidh., grhdndm). With this compare ddmpati, pdtir
ddn, ddnsufy rad. osteins, L.s. and p. For a% v.41.1, a possible
form of transition to the o-declension (Ls.n. — as though the A.8.
were dd-m), see p. 449.

From sam-ndm we have the N.p. samndmas, AY. iv. 39. 1,3,5,7.

The stem kshd'm has d in the strong cases. The forms are :
k$hamd'9 Ls., 5 (and AY. vi57.3) ; kshmds, Ab.s. ; kshdm-i
(accent !), L.&, 9 ; kshd'md, dual ; dyd'vdrkshd'md, 7 (and as voc.
once) ; kshd'mas, N.p. Gr. proposes kshd'marn, text kshd'm,
As., L67.5; 174.7: vi.6.4 : x.31.9 ; ksh&'mas, text kshd's, A.p.,
iv.28.5 ; but see a**tems, A.s., A.p.

Gr. refers gmds and jmds, Ab.s., to gmd' and jmd'; so kshmds
might be referred to kshmd' (p. 448).

STEMS IN RADICAL A

Here belong the stems: (masc.) gir, ttir, m&r, vdrf; gdv-dpir,
triry dddhi-, dur-, ydv-, sdm-; muhurgir; ajur, rta-, dhiyd-, sand-;
ap44r, djir, rajas-, ratha-, radhrar, vrira-, vipva-, supra-; sahdsra-
dvdr; dur-dh6ry su-; dm&r; apasphur; ni-shf&r; (fern.) g'vr, dvd'r,
dMur, pur, pstir; dpir; amtftir, nyfo; nipur, pardp&r; abhipra-

vou x. 65

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

488 G R. Lanman, [Radical

m€tr; upasftr, vishfir, samstlr; dnapcuphur; abhisvdr; (neuter)
t>dV, stiar; prtsuttiry vipvaMr, rdsdpir; mithastur and samffir (m.
andf.).

The ar of &har, H'dkar, and vddhar appears to be snffixaL For
vandh&r and yanttir, see below.

Only in vd'r, dvd'r, abhi*vdry and ttiar is the radical r preceded
by any other vowel than i or u. The use of roots in ar as stems
seems to be avoided in several ways : the root appears with r+t
(-flf'*, -bhft) ; or else with suffixai a (vdra, bhdra, cdrcara) ; or a
thematic % is added and the root-vowel often dropped (c&kri,
jdghri, pdpri, pdpuri, bdbhri, sdsri) ; or, again, the stem goes into
the a-declension by dropping the r (pra-hvds from hvar; ct upa-
hvar-d). Bat if the radical vowel takes some other coloring, the
r remains as stem-final (c£ rathamrtard and rathchtUr).

The stem dhar is supplemented by dhan, and this again by
forms of transition to the a-declension. The Rtein iidhar is like-
wise supplemented by il'dhan, and some forms again must be
referred to H'dhas.

The forms are alike for all genders, except N.A. d. and p. n.

The distinction of strong and weak forms is seen in the stem
dvdr — strong dvd'r, weak d&r.

The weak form duras, N.p.t, is used in place of the strong
dvd'ras, i 188.5 ; and the strong form dvd'ras, A.p.f., is used in
place of the weak dtiras, i.130.3.

Transitions to the a-declension. Starting from the strong cases
dvd'r-am etc., come the forms dvd'ra-m dvd'rena (QslU St. iv.
& ?*"")» dual dvd're, dvd'rdni. See also N.A.s.n. The transition-
forms pd'dars etc. begin to appear in the sathhitd; but those oi
dvd'ra- occur first in texts of the Brahmana sort. Starting from
the weak cases dtir-cut etc., come the forms patd-durasya, x.99.3;
-tshu, i.51.8. In the later language the stem dvdr a replaces the
Vedic dvd'r; and in like manner pura, the Vedic pftr. The mas-
culine stem pd'd- remains masculine (pd'dar) ; but the feminine*
dvd'r- and piir- produce neuters (dvdrarm, pura-m). Sti-dhurat
(N.s.m.) is a transition-form corresponding to su-dhtir-am; so
apratidhura-s, 5at* Br. xiii.4.21"*. Here belongs, perhaps, dn-apa-
sphurdm, A.s.f., vL48.11. As is known, vd'r in the later language
goes over to the t-declension, v&'ri.

On the other hand, vandhfir-cu (N.p.m.) and bdndhur-4 (Ls.)
are probably forms of transition to the consonant-declension, the
vowel-stem being here the older; cl kaktibh, p. 471.

There is no real justification for a stem yanlfo. It is supported only by
yantQram, occurring twice. The origin of the form is as curious as certain. In
iii.27.llo, agnirh yanturam aptfiram, we have, I think, a brilliant example of the
working of the tendency to formal parallelism, yan-td'r*am (nomen agentis of
yam) being thus blindly accommodated to ap4&r-am (in which tor = tar ia a
radical). In viii.l9.2o, agnkn idishva yant&'ram^ the cadence has asserted its
right to a short in the penultimate at the expense of the proper form (yantfr*m)m

Irregular accent : durds, A.p.£, ii.2.7. For the accent of*4'r-dy
$4'r-a*y and *4r49 see G.t.n.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

r-atems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 487

The vowel preceding r is lengthened when r is or was followed
by a consonant : thns, gt'r (for g/%r*\ gtrbhU.

NOMINATITB SlHGULAB MASCULINE AND, FHMDONB.

Masculines: gfr, x. 99.11 ; muhurgt'r; 'd&rdfitr; rc&aa-M'r, 2;
ra&ha-, vipvfr, sitpra-tU'r. Here Gr. puts vd'r (i.132.3) and vdar
(x.93.3). The passages are corrupt.

Transition-forms. For 8U'dhtir&8> iii.38.1, see p. 486. For
prchkva* (ttihthari), Ait.Br. iii.9, see p. 486.

Feminines: amdjitir; gfr, 19; dhH'rf 8; pH'r, 5; from AV.,
dvd'r, ix.8.22; ptl'r, x.2.31 ; drfr, ii.29.3 : TS. iii.2.81.

Nominativb abd Aoousativb Singula* Nbutbb.

Here belong: dhar, 6 and L71.2 ; dhar-ahar, 6 times ; til dhar,
26 (for L64.5, see A.p.n. ; and for x.61.9, L.s.n.) ; vddhar, 11 ; vd'ry
vdar, 11 (and AV. hi. 13.3: iv.7.1 : x. 4.3,4: xx.135.12); stiar, 90.
In the AV., stiar has no other declensional forms. Cf. Rik Pr.
i.31,32 : iv.13 ; and Weber, Beitr&ge, iii.385.

Transition to the {^declension. The language avoids the use of
a r-stem at the end of a compound in the N.A.s. neuter. Thus
we have in AY. x.8.43, punddrtJcarh ndva-dvdra-m, not ndvadvdr;
and in QaX. Br. iii.3.31*, sdrdgircHn (etad).

Accusativb Singular Masculinb and Fbjoninb.

Masculines : tHram, v. 82.1 ; ap-ttiram, 5 times ; djir; rajas-, 3 ;
ratha-; vrtra-, 4 ; — ajtiram; apasphuram; rtqfaram; gdvdpir-
am, 4 ; ydvdgiram, 2 ; satidsra-dvdram; sudh&rarn. BR. take
tHram, iv.38.7, as an absolutive of tur, used adverbially. For
yantivram, 2, see p. 486.

Feminines: dpiram, 13; upastiram ; giram, 1 -, dh&ram, 5;
ptiram, 1 1 ; samgvram; from AV., dvd'ram (d), xiv.1.68 ; dMuram,
v. 17.18 ; pHram, 26 times.

Instbumbntal Singular Maaoulinb, Frmininb, and Nbutbb.

Masculine : bdndhvr-d (see p. 486), AV. iii.9.4.

Feminines: abhipramtird ; abhisvdrd, 2; dp'ird ; gird!, 67;
gird'-gird; dhurd'; purd'.

Neuter : vipva&Ard. In vi.49.3, str'bhir any 61 pipipi sU'ro
anyd', p. sil'rah, the demands of the parallelism and sense are
well met by Grassmann's emendation, s&'r-d, I.s.n. ; but in the
ninth place we need a short d. Possibly this was the very reason
why the padakdra wrote sil'rah. Cf. Beitfrdge, iv.204.

Dattvb Singula* Masculine, Feminine, and Nbutbb.

Masculines : girb; nishttire. Feminine : upasAre, 3.
Neuter: sHr-e, iv.3.8 (for accent, see G.s.n.). For siX're, viii.
61.17, see G.a.n.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

188 G B. Lanman, [Bad. r-etems.

Ablative Singular Feminine and Neuter.

Feminines: dhurds, x. 102. 10; niJUras.

Neuter. Gr., Uieb., takes H'dhar, L04.5, as Ab.s. See A.p.n.

Qbnitivb SnreuRAR Masculine, FnmriKi, and Nmm.

Masculines : gdvdpiras: ydvdpiras: radhrat&ras. Feminine :
vradrCuras. Neuters: rasdpiras: sur-a$,\1. For sd'r-ah, vi.49.3,
ee ts n. In viii.61.17, <tditd sura d'dade, p. sd're, the padakdra
s doubtless at fault ; read sU'rah.

In 166.10 ; 69.10, *6ar appears as an aptote in a genitive relation.

Since the stem of stilr-as is really a dissyllable (stiar), the par-
ixytone accent is perfectly regular ; but once we have s&r-i, as if
rom a monosyllabic stem. See p. 408 med.

Locative Singular Feminine and Neuter.

Feminines: purl, 2; dhuri, 18, and AV. v. 17. 15.

Neuters. Suar is used as a L.8. in i.52.9 ; 70.8 : v.44.2 : x.20.2 ;
11.14. In x.61.9, H'dhar is perhaps a L.8., 'nubile' If we regard
he first part of dhar-divi as representing a case, it might be
tailed a L.s.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE DUAL MASCULINE AVD FEMININE.

I. Masculines : vrtrat&rd; sanajtird; sudh&rd, 3. Feminines :
Ivd'rd, 7 ; mithast&rd.

II. Feminines : dvd'rau, 2 ; dhurau, 2.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : apturas, 4 ; dmuras, 2 ; gdvdpiras, 8 ; giras; giro*,
\ tridpiras; dddhidpiras, 7 ; durdhuras; dhiydjuras; nishturas;
n6ras; vandhHras; bandh&ras, AV. iii.9.3.

Feminines: dvdras, 3; dvd'ras, 5 (and AV. v.27.7) ; dnapa-
phuras; amdjuras; puras, 2 ; mithasturas; giras, 64 (and AV.,
) ; giras, AV. i.15.2. In i. 188.5, we have the weak form dtiras;
ee p. 486.

Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter.

In i.64.5, duhdnti il'dhar divid'ni dhit'tayah, H'dhar appears to
>e an A.p.n. See p. 474, and c£ Ab.s.n. (r-stems).

Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines: dm&ras, 2; gdvdpiras; glras, 2; mtihasttiras:
'dvdpiras; sarhglras; sudhtiras.

Feminines : giro*, 80 ; duras, 24 ; dhuras, 2 ; puras, 44 ;
ssuras; vishtiras, 2 ; samsdras; from AV., giras, 2 ; pHtras, 8 ;
iptiras, pardpHras, xviii.2.28.

The strong form dvd'ras is used as an A. p., i.130.3.

Irregular accent is seen in durds, ii.2.7. In L41.3, purds is an
dverb; in vii.21.4, Aufrecht reads ptiras; cf. BR., s.v. vi han.

In x.99.11, Roth proposes sut\£\vd ydd yajatd dtddyad gfh,
,nd takes gi'h as A.p.£ : * Als der sehr starke (su-tdvds) Gott die
joblieder vernahm.'

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Lp.rn.li).] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 489

Inbtrujcrhtal Plural Masoulinb, Frmuui, akd Nrutrr.

Masculine: rathartd'rbhU. Feminines: IpHrbhU; 2pdrbhisy
5 ; girbhU, 85 (and AV., 4). Neuter : dhobhis, 2.

Datiyr Plural Nrutrr.
Here belongs vdrbhyds, VS. xxii.25.

Gwrnyi Plural Masculine akd FummfR.

Masculine : edmdpirdm. Feminines : gird'm, 2 ; pur dm;
pitrd'm, 7 ; girddm, vi.24.1 ; purddm, viii.17.14 ; purddm, x.46.5
(or -dfm, akaharapafikti).

Looatiyr Plural Masouldir, Pbmihirr, ajtd Nrutrr.

Masculine: tdrshti. Feminines: gtrehti ; dhUrehti, 11;

pdreha. Neuter : prtsutU'rshu.

STEMS IN RADICAL V.

The stem dlv supplements dirt and did. The forms are : div-d\
-e, -de, 4; dhardivt; pradiv-d, -ae, -i; eudivae: see p. 482.

From the stem dfv, f., * play,' we have atvi and dtvi. The
stem dytii! furnishes supplementary forms : dytivam, AV. viL50.9 ;
dyuvi (=c^ve), viLl09.5. Cf. EkadyH's and Kamadytivam (pp.
406-7).

STEMS IN RADICAL {7.

Here belong the stems: (masc.) t-dr'fr etd-y tdr, ydr, kl-y ahar-,
dflre-j ydkeha-, suar-, «a~, su-; etieadrp; tveehd-eamdrp, bhfmd-,
h'iranyar; xueamdr'p; upari-eprfp, divi-y ni-y mandini-, ratha^
hrdC; vipvapip; eup'ip; upapr'p; dUrdddip; dnarvip; prdtiprdp;
dUdd'p; purodd'p; fp; spdp; viehpdp; (fern.) dip; dd'p; dr*p;
ndp; pdp; prdfp: vipdp; vip; vrtp; ddip; pradip; pukraplp;
upadr'p; eamdrp; eudr ptkaeamdrp ; dnapaeprp; (m. and £.)
mithildrp; pipdngar and ranvd-eamdrp ; upa~ and rtarepr'p;
(neuters) mandndp; diviepr'p; eddanaipfp; dUredr'p; etddr'p;
eueamdfp.

The forms are alike for all genders, except in the N.A. d. and
p. n., of which there is no example.

The distinction of strong and weak cases is seen only in the
nasalized forms of the N.s.m., q.v. I can cite no occurrence of
forms like purodobhydrn from a weak stem purodde.

Transition to* the a-declension. The declension of puro-dd'p is
commonly supplemented by transition-forms in the later texts.
The only Rik-iorms, puro-dd'e and puro-dd'pam, belong to the
p-stem. But later we have: puro-adpare. Ait. Br. ii.9; -ddpena,
VS. xix.85; -ddpdn, $at.Br. iv.2.5"; -dd' pchvated, AV. xii.4.36.
The Atharvan forms -dd'pau, ix.6.12 : x.9.25, may be referred to
either stem.

As forms of transition are probably to be regarded : idrpam
{yad)y Manu i.45 ; tddrpam (enae) yddrpam, v.34; etddrpdni, etc.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

490 C. R Lanman, [RaA 9-stems.

The references given by BR for idrpa, etddrpa, tddrpa, yddrpa,
sadrpa, are chiefly post-Vedic ; those for tdr'p etc., chiefly Vedic.
Both vowel and consonant-stems occur side by side : thus, yd-
drpdya .... fcMrrf,Cat.B^.i.3.5I,; y&drpdt . . . tddrnii, vii.4.11.
Some forms are referable to either stem : thus, sadr'pau.

Transition to the t-declension. The inf. drpdye (accent— c£
drpi) is a transition-dative to dr'py equivalent to drpi in meaning,
but not in metrical value. There is no real stem drpi.

There is no irregularity of aceent. The L.s.f. prd'pi is paroxy-
tone because equal to pra+dpi.

The forms show inconsistency in the treatment of final p (=**)
similar to that seen in the verb (e. g. prdnak, abhi not) : thus, spdt,
dSk; vidbhyds9 vikshti.

NomyATOT Singular Masculine and Fnamm.

L Masculine. 1. From the nasalized form of the root drp
come: (a) sadr'Ak *-, TS. ii.2.86; (ft) ktdr'nti i-, RV. 1. 108.3;
sadrnA <£,L94.7: viiLll.8; 43.21; (c) tdr'H, anyddr^n^ sadr'n,
prdtisadrn, VS. xvii.81 (cl TS. iv.6.51). See pp. 456 and 463, and
Ind. Stud, iv.305 note.

2. The form commonly ends in A. Here belong: ttpap^h;
etddr'k(x.21.24); tddfk; divispr'k; nispr'k; yddr'lc: ranvasamr
drk; suardr'k; h'yranya&ariidrk; hrdispr'k; idr% Av. iv.27.6.

Feminines : upadrk, 2 ; ndk ; ranvdsamdfk ; samdr'ky 4 ;
Mudfpikcuamdrk; from AV., dlfc, iii.27.1-6 ; dnapaaprk, xiiLl.27.

it Masculines : vishpdt; tpdf, 3.

Feminines : vipdt; vif, 3.

IIL The form pur odd' 8 occurs twice. Cf. p. 463.

Nominative and Aoousatiyb Singular Nbutbb,

Here belong: mand-ndJcf: etddr'k; susarhdr'k; sadr'k, TBr.
i.2.6\ In RV. v.44.6, yddr'k and tddfk may be neuters (adv.).

Aoousatiyb Singular Masculine and Fmrnim.

Masculines : uparispr'pam; divir, 7 ; hrdu; — tveshdscahdrp-
am; pipdngo; ranvd-; — susamdf fpam> 3* ; — dUre-dfpam; «*-,
2 ; suar-, 4 ; — dUrd-ddipam; purodd'pam, 19 ; epdpam.

Feminines : ddipam, 2 ; rtaepr'pam; dipam; pradipam, 2, and
i.95.3: iv.29.3 (text prd dipam) ; vipdpam; vipam: viparrwipam,
4 ; pukrapipam; mnidifpam, 2 ; from AY., pradipam; pipd&ga-
saihdrpam; dipam, 19 ; prd'pam, 7 times, as ii.27.1.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULAR UaSOULINB, FBMININR, AND NBUTBB.

Masculines : vipvatApd; 8u$arhdr'pd; tpd', VS. xLl. Femin-
ines : dipd'9 2 ; pipa ; pradipd, 4 ; vipd', 7 ; ddpd\ L127.7. This
last BR. take as homophonous Lam. of ddpdl ; but see Beitr&ge,
.463. Neuters: divispr'pd; ddredfpd.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.am.1] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 491

Datiyb Swgulab Masoulinb and Fnmmm.

Masculines : dnarvipe; idr'pe, 4 ; dwisprfpe; dUredr'pe; from
AV., idr'pe, 8 ; dadd'pe, LlS.l.

Feminines : vipi, 8 ; vipe-vipe, 5 ; from AV., sarhdr'pe; dipt, 6 ;
vipi.

Transition-form : drpdye (inf., 8) is dat. to stem dfp; see p. 490.

Ablauts Sin sulab Mabouldts and FBMnmfB.

Masculine: mmrdifpas. Feminines: vipds, 2; samdr'pas;
from AV., sarhdr'pas, 2 ; dipds, 55 ; dip6-dipa8, 5.

Gbnuxyb Singular Masoulinb, Fbmininb, and Nbutbr.

Masculines: divispr'pas; eudr'pae, 2; suardr'pas, 2; hiranya-
samdrpae; hrdispr'pas; from AV., prdtiprdpae, ii.27.1-6; t*po-
epr'pas, xx. 1 'J 7.2.

Feminines : wp&> 4 ; vipds-vipas, 2 ; vipae (pale) ; <ftc<f*, AV.
vi.98.3: xv.5.1-6Wa. Neuter: sddanaspr' pas.

Looatiyb SnreuLAR ICasoulinb and Fbmininb.

Masculine: divispr'pi. Feminines: dr&; pradxpi, 2 ; vipdpi;
vipiy 3 ; sarhdr'piy 5 ; from AV., jprd'pi (ed. jrwdp*), ii.27.7 ; <#pi,
25 times ; prcidipi, 4 ; tripi, 2 ; eamdr'pi.

Vooativb SnreuLAB Masoulinb.
Here belongs tveshasamdrk.

Nom., Ago., and Voo. Dual Masculine and Fbjoninb.

I. Masculines: rtasprpd; divisprpd; divisprfpdy2; mithildr'pd;
sitardr'pd. Feminine: mithildr'pd.
IL Feminine : vipau, ix.70.4.

Nominative Plural Masoulinb and Fbmininb.

Masculines : rta-spr'paa, 2 ; divi~; mandinu; ratha-; hrdi-; —
dUre-dfpas, 2 ; yakshar; eu-; susaikr, 2 ; mar-, 3 ; — tveshdsam-
drpa*, 2 ; vipvaplpas; suplpas; eusadrpas; 8pdpa89 7 (and AV.
iv.16.4) ; uparispr'pas, Av. v.3.10.

Feminines: dcRpas; upaspr'pas ; dipae, 3; pradipa*, 8; vipae,
35; sarhdrfpaa ; from AV., dipos, 15; prodipoe, 28; vipas (N.
and A), 18.

NOmNAHYB AND ACCUSATIVE PLURAL NSUTBB.

No examples. Paradigm : grhavinpi. Instead of this a tran-
sition-form is used : etddrpdni [duhkhdni), MBh. iii.579.

Accusative Plubal Masculine and Fbmininb.

Masculines: ahardrfpae; bhtmdsa?hdrpas; spdpae, 3; suar-
dr'pas ; hiranyasamdrpas. Feminines : ddtpas; dtpas, 7 ; pra-
<Kpcuy 3; vipas, 32; vripas: samdr'pas, 2; from AV., dipclsy 18;
pradipas, 13; vipas (N. ana A.), 18.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

492 C R Lawman, [Badical

IVBTRUIOMTAL PLUBAL JUSCULm AND FMUJUME.

Masculine: sitsarhdr'gbhti. Feminines: vidbhis; padbhU,
4 with glances/ iv.2.12 (see page 475).

ABLATIVB, GSHITCV*, AND LOCATOT PLURAL ftQUHDnL

Ablatives: from AY., vidbhyds, iii.3.3; digbhyds, iv.40.8:
x.5.28: xiii.4.34. Genitives: ddipdm; dipdm (pate) ; triptfm,
39; vipddm, viL9.2 : x.46.6?; from AV., dipd'm, 5 times;
vipd'my 1 ; vipdm, iii.20.2. Locatives : vikshti, 48 ; from AV.,
dikskh, 9; vitehii, ii.2.1 : iz.5.19.

STEMS IN RADICAL S# AND S.

The character of the final sibilant of tbe radical stems in $h
and « is in most cases essentially the same. It has therefore
seemed advisable not to separate them, Usually the difference
is merely one of phonetic surroundings. All the stems ending in
* preceded by a or d are put down as s-stems (category B) ; but
those in which any other vowel or k precedes are entered with
the sA-stems (category A).

The derivatives of pd*. with weakened vowel i (dpi*, sud$b}
pro*, vi~> samrpw)y and Mrs, and dprdyu$ are put down as «-stems
by BR. and Gr.

A. The «A-stems are : (maso.) md'sh and mdksh (or £) ; dksh,
in anrdkih; aram-Uhf, gavUh, papuUh; brhad-uksh, sdkamtiksh;
vdtartvish; anrU*-dvfohy asacar, f*At-, edhamdna-, jara-, brahmar,
dvidvUh: vipv&pfoh, vipvd-; ghrtorprush^ pari- : yqfna-miuh;
prfigorvrsh ; (fern.) i*A, i2*A, tvish, doUh, pr^ksh^ rUh; nemann-uh,
9am-; sdkam-tiksh ; vy-fah; samcdksh; patidviah; dnddhrsh,
mdhr'sh; supifkth ; abhrorprtoh, ghrtar, vi-; nimish, dnimiih;
camrUh ; prdvr'sh; abhi-prish, doshani-, hrdaya-.

B. The s-stems are: (masc.) hrtsu-da; an-d's, su-d's; jM's;
su-dd's ; anU'rdhva-bhd*, dtiri-bhds, au-bhd's ; md's, sU'rydfntfs ;
vds ; a-pds, uktha-pds (root pans) ; stisafhpds, su-dffo (root pd$) ;
dprdyus ; (fern.) d-jfid8y kdd's, nds; -pds, abhu, ava-, nihr, pard-
(root pa™) \ 9&% d-fa pror^ «*-, sam- (root pds) ; vi-srds, *m-,
svayarhr ; upds (unclear). Add candrdmds, m.

The neuters are few: prfoh, ghrta-pr\Uh, dadhr'shf ; and tfa,
bhd'8, ddsy yds, pamy6$.

The sibilant is sometimes a mere root-determinative : oompare uk-sh with sp-fd,
#-«, aug-mentum; pfk-sh withjjf'c; prush withpru; prdytu andpra+yw.

BR., 8.v. cUfavant, hesitate to set up a noun d&'s, and do not venture to assume
that * is a formative element. In the case of bhd's and bhd'avant, it is true, we
may identify the s with that of the secondary root bhda ; and so with bhts: but
how shall we dispose of jfld's, d's (for an-* according to Fick, VgL Wb* L268),
and au-d&'a t Mas, from ma\ is still more peculiar and is perhaps the relic of
some old participial formation (mddbhis). Whatever be the character of the fine!
s in these words, there is no question that this is the best place to enumerate

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

sh, j-stems.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 498

us and

pans, ptimdns ; n&'s, nas ; uktha-p&'s (cf. o-p4'*), -pd's. The
pada has in all cases uktha~$4'a-. The d may indeed be metrical
in x.107.6 : ii.39.1 : iv.2.16 (penultimate of a trtihtubh), and
viLl9.9 (in the eighth place) ; but the metre actually makes
against the d in x.82.7 (seventh place). The long vowel is
inherent in d'«, jftd'«, md% cn/d's, etc. ; and so in Jed's, ttisampds,
and mH'sh (but cf. ycyna-mti's/i-cMy N.p.m.).

Examples of consonantal cases are very rare in the sanhitas.
We have andk, dadhr'k, edhamdnadv'U, vipr&t, viprudbhisypunsuy
and a few nominatives s. in -8 ; and from later texts, mprudbhyas,
prdvrty dor4>hydm, dor-bhis, doh-&huy mds-sii.

Supplementary themes. In mddrbhU, -bhydsy we have a supple-
mentary stem mdnt; but cf Schleicher, Comp* p. 665, §260.
Some think the two stems md's (md'nsn cf ptrfv — stem ntfvs)
and md(n)t phonetically reducible to the same original, like the
forms of toe suffix vdns, va(n)t; but see Zeitsch, xxiv.70.

The stem d6s is supplemented by doshdn as follows : sing., d6s
(RV. v.61.5); doshnd (R&ja-tar. iv.481) ;' doshnds ($at. Br. iii.
8.3"); doshani- (AV. vi.9.2); dual, dosht (Eauo. 45) or doshdnt
(AV. ix.7.7:' Ait. Br. iL6) ; dorbhydm (MBh. i.153); plural,
dorbhis (MMav. 77) ; dohshu (Bh&g. P. i.15.16).
The defective stem iah (id) is supplemented by idd (ird).
idd, 17 ishr<u, 9

ish-am, 76 id&n, 9 bth-as, 63

ishrd', 23 uf-d', 3 iiayd, 6 iddbhis, 6

iah-i, 15

ish-6s} 11 id-fa, 11 iddydi , 5 ijA-d'm, 8 fcfctafm, 1

tie Wd*t*,2.

The stem foA is never used for a consonantal case. The occur-
rence of sh at the end of a form or before * or bh is avoided by
using the d-stem ; thus, ide (voc), idd, iddsu, iddbhis. I hardly
venture to call these transition-forms; although the fact that
the great majority of the forms of ish (147) accent the theme
would account for the accent of the stem idd (cf. p. 488). The
relation between kshapds kshapd'bhis, kshipas k&Mpdbhis, and
ishas iddbhis is one of close analogy. Perhaps the forms iddm,
'tdaydyiddyds, and iddndm are improper extensions of the d-stem
to cases where it does not rightfully belong.

Transitions to the o-declension. These occur from the stems
rod's, dpds, nds, kd's, nimish, ish9 and d's.

The language-users formed by false analogy a N.s.m. pd'da-s to
correspond to pd'd-am. In like manner they made for md's-am, as
though it were md'sa-m, a N.s. md'sas, x. 85.5c? (S&ry&'s wedding
—see N.s.m.) ; so also a N.p.m. md'sds, iii.32.9cJ and vi.24.7oft
(the passages look like modern reminiscences of old songs — of
Aufrecht, Riavedcf, preface, p. xii) : vi.38.4: vii.61.4: x.89.13;
and also tndsdn in two very late passages — iii. 3 1.9 (an unclear
and tumid hymn) and v.78.9 (verses 7-9 are a late fragment as
the contents and the use of sarvdtah show).

vol. x. 66

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

494 G R. Lanman, [Had sh, s-stems.

The stem dpds, f., ' hope,' makes in the later language a com-
plete transition to the d-declension. In the Rik, all the forms
come from dpds. In the Atharvan we have dpd'm, vLll9.3:
xix.4.2 (and bo Ait. Br. iii.46). This is by origin perhaps a con-
tract accusative for dpd(s)am ; it is, at any rate, the starting-
point of the transition. As though the ace. were <fprf'-»«, a
N.s.f. dpd' is formed (£at. Br. ii.1.3*), and so all the later forn*
from an d-stem. C£ cw-stems, A.s.

From nds the sanhitas have nas-d\ -J, -ds ; and to this same
stem I refer rtd's-d, RV. ii.39.6, as a regular strong form (set
p. 301 ; Bollensen, Orient und Occ. ii.474, reads n&se). I rec-
ognize nd'se of the AV., v. 23.3, as the first transition-form, an
A.d.f. of stem nd'sd. Just such a strong form as nd's-d mediate?
the transition from stem nd's to stem nasd.

From stem fed' 8, f., we have kd's-am, kds-d\ -ds. A transition-
vocative kdse (stem kd'sd) is seen AV. vi.105.1,2,3.

As a transition-stem, from nimuh, we must assume nimUha
(distinguished from the organic formation nimeshd by its accent
and lack of guna). This nimUha we have, with regular
bahuvrihi accent, in a-nimishd-* (x. 103.1), -dm (L24.6), -ena
(x.103.2), -d's, (ii.27.9). Cf. Garbe, Kuhn*s Zeitsch., xxiiL492.
In d-nimish-am and -d we have regular #A-forms.

From ish-ds comes ishd-m (21) ; from da~d\ *dsdydy adv. d*ay6

(2)-
Transition to the {-declension. The form ishdye (accent — cf

i$h~%) is a transition-dative to Uh. See BR L826-7, and d Del-

bruok, Verbum, § 207. On the other hand, the stem tvi&hi is

probably an organic formation independent of toUh.

The stems mdnsd and md'ns, n., are supplementary; but io
this case the vowel-stem is probably the older (cf. vandhurd,
vandhtir, p. 486) ; otherwise, its oxytone accent is problematic.

Irregular accent. The following accusatives p. are oxytone:
(mascj jfidsds, punsds, mdsdt; (fern.) ishds, ushas^ dvishd*. The
A.s.f. kd8'4m rests on an error of the MSS. Gr. is wrong in
taking md'ta* as G.s.; it is a N.s. transition-form, md'sa*.
Adverbial displacement is seen in d- and uporvyushdm and
dprdvrshdm.

The diaskeuasts take account of the metrical value of y as a
syllable in the accent of the vocatives dyatis, jySJcey etc. (see
p. 432) ; and so also in vytish-iy pronounced viiisA-i. If the stem
were a true monosyllable, it should be written vytish-i. C£ prtfpi
(zszpra+dp-i). In pre»hrd\ on the other hand, the dissyllabic char-
acter of the stem \pra-\-Uh-d) is disregarded ; and so, naturally
enough, in bhaas-d'.

Nominative Singula* Masouijot and FramrafB.

A. Masculines : edhamdna-dvit (indras) ; an-dk (stem anrdksh).
Cf dadhrk (stem dadhrsfyzsidhrahtas, BR. v. 1485.

Feminines: vipr&t, AV. xx.134.4; prdvrt, Kath&s. ii.56. The
form \dd serves as itf.s. to Uh.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.m.t] Noun- Inflection in ike Veda. 496

8. Masculines: sudd's; dtir'e-bhds, i.65.10. Gr. refers this to a
stem dUre-bhds. Of course, it cannot be a compound of a verbal
~bhdy because it is barytone ; but if taken as bahuvrthi compound
of a substantive bhdy the accent would be correct, and dUre-bhds
a correct N.s.m. of dUr&ihd. See BR v.234. Here Gr. puts
ayd'[s\ i.87.4*, ayd' ipdndh, p. ayd' ; see p. 858 end. JPtimdn1,
for ptimdns, occurs with elided * (cf. p. 346 med.), before itiy v.61.8;
before a-, x.130.2; before a-, iv.3.10; pumdnp ca, AV. x.4.8;
pumdn, RV. x.130.2 and vi.75.14 ; piimdn, AV., 6 times before
vowels (as, i.8.1 : iii.23.3) and 5 times before consonants. The
nom. (sa drksho) mds is found ; see Weber, Naxatra ii.281.
For ghrdns (BR. stem ghrdns), see an stems, N.s.m.

Feminines: djfids, x.39.6; dtf'e, x. 128.3: AV. ii. 29.3.

Transitions to the o-deciension. Masc. : md'sas, x.85.5<7, 'Of
years the month is the constituent part ;' animishds. Fern. :
dpd'. See p. 494.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neutbr.

Here belong: bhd's, 6 (and AV. vii.14.2); bhdcts or bhddsy 2;
dds; yds, 20; pawyrf*, i.34.6; md's, 'flesh,' iv.33.4: v.29.8 ;
dadhfk, as adv., 3 (see BR. v. 1485).

Accusative Sinoulab Masculine and Feminine.

A. Masculines : ghrtaprusham, 2 ; jaradvUham ; brahma-
dvisham; vipvdpfaham. Feminines: dnimisham>2; isham^ld;
dvfoham; jyfksham; from AV., isham, 9 ; doshani- and hrdaya-
prisham, vi.9.2.

Adverbial shift of accent is seen in : dvyushdm, AV. iv.5.7 ;
dprdvrshdmy Q&t. Br. v.5.2* ; upavyu8hdmy TBr. i.1.9*; 5.2\

B. Masculines : pt'tmdnsam, 3 (and AV., 8) ; ayd'sam, 2 ; vlctha-
pd'sam (p. d); md'sam; sudd'sam, 7; subhd'sam; sudpisham;
sud'sam.

Feminines: d&sham, 2; pratfsham, 2 (and AV. xiiL4.27) ;
fofWn, AV. v.22.11 (MSS. and ed. kdsdm).
Transition-forms : animishdm; dpd'm; see p. 494.

Instrumental Sinoulab Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

A. Masculine: vipvdpiUhd. Feminines: drnimishd, 2; ishd'9
23; tvUhd\ 2; from AV., ishd\ 4; prdvr'ehd, xix.6.11. Neu-
ters: ghrtaprfohd; presh-d', ix.97.1 (should bepreshd; see p. 494).

Transition-form : a-nimishena; see page 494.

B. Masculine: mdsd\ 2. Feminines: abhipdsd; dpdsd, 4;
dpjshd; nihpdsd; pds-d', x.20.2 : vii.48.3; from AV., avapdsd,
nihpdsd, pardpdsd, vi.45.2 ; dpdsd, vii.57.1 ; dpishd, xiv.2.9 ;
praplshd, Y1.1S3A : xiv.1.53; ?iasd\ ii.27.2 : v.14.1; kdsd\ v.22.10.
Grassmann's article pdsd\ f., Wb. 1393, may be struck out :
p&d'm, ii.23.12, may be taken as G.p.m. of pdsd (see p. 368) ; and
pdflf', vii.48.3 (Gr. cd*f [«]— see p. 363), is an Ls.f., as in x.20.2.

Neuters : did' , 22 ; bhdsd\ 6 ; bhaa*d\ 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

J
496 C. It Lanman, [Bad. sh, *-stem&

Dative Singula* Masculine and Feminine.

A. Masculines : rshidvtshe; brahmadvishe, 5; gavishe; papi-
Uhe; sdkam-ukthe; dvidvishe, AV. i.34.5. Here belongs perhaps
aramAshe, RV. viii.46.17, text dram ishe.

Feminines: tvishe; prtohi, 2; rishe, 2; ishe, 15 (and AV. ■
viL78.1).
Transition to the t-declension : ishdye, vi.52.15.

B. Masculines: sudd'se, 16; dprdyushe, L 127.5; punsi, AV.
v.80.8.

Ablative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Nbuteb.

A. Feminines: abhiprUhas; tvishds, 2; dvishds, 3; nim'uho*;
rishdi, 12; ishds, ix.79.1.

B. Masculine: punsds, v.61.6 : AV. iii.6.1: xii.3.1.
Feminine: kdsas, AV. i.12.8. Neuter: <2*<fe.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Feminine.

A. Masculine: prAgavrshas (napdt). Feminines: abhra-
prtUhas; ishds, 10; ishas (pate); ushds, i.69.1,9: viLlO.l (and
AV. xvi.6.66**); ushds-ushas ; dvishds, 3 times; prksh&s, 4;
nimithcu, ii.28.6.

B. Masculines : apdsas; sudd'sas, 5 ; sud'sas; punsds, 2 (and
AV. vi.70.1-3). The accent forbids our taking md'tas as 6.8.;
see p. 403, and N.s.m.

I/00ATIVE 8INGULAB MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

A. Feminines : nimishi, 2 ; viiUhi, 5 ; prdvfshi, 2 (and AV.
xii.1.46).

B. Masculines : mdstrmdsi; mdsi, 2 ; from A V., mds'i, 7 ; puns'i,
vill.2. Feminines: up<fot, 2 ; from AV., dptshi, v.24.1-17;
prafiahi, v. 12. 11 ; na&, VS. xix. 90: xxi.40.

Vocative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

B. Masculine: pumas. Feminine: kdse, transition-form

(p. 494) ; similarly, ide (p. 493).

NOMINATITB AND ACCUSATIVE DUAL MA8CULINE AND FEMININE.

B. Masculines : ukthapd'sd (p. d) ; trd'rydmd'sdy 5 (can also be
referred to stem -md'sa). Feminine : nd's-d, ii.39.6 (p. 494).
Transition-form : nd'se, AV. v.23.3 ; see p. 494.

Genitive and Locative Dual Feminine.
B. Genitive: nasds. Locative: nasds, AV. xix. 6 0.1 : TS. v.5.9\

Nominative and Vooattve Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

A. Masculines : maca-dvishas; anrta-dv'tshas, brahma-; ghrtu-
prushas, 2; pari-; gavishas, 2; brhadtikshas ; mdtohas, 2;
md'shaa, 2 ; vd'tatvithas; ycyncHn&'sha*, TS. nlBAquater.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N. V.p.m.f.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 497

Feminines: ishas, 9; ghrtapr&shae ; tvishcu; neniann-fohas;
patidvU/ias; pr'kshas, 7 ; sanmhas; sdkam&kshas; supr'kshas;
from A V., dnddhrshas, vi.21.8 ; nimUhas, iv.16.5 ; vytehas,
xiii.3.21.

B. Masculines : aydsas; ayd'sae, 8 ; uJcthapd' sas, p. d (see p.
493), 3 ; 8iisampdsa8y AV. xviii.3.16.

Transition-forms : md'sds; animishd's; see p. 493-4.

Feminines : dpdsaa, 5 ; praffohas; dpishas, 3 (aud AV., 4) ;
from AV., pra-pUhas, i>*-, «aw-, xi.8.27 ; vi-srdsas, xix.34.3 ; su-
vii.76.lW5/ svayarn-, 2.

Accusative Plural Masoulinb and Feminine.

A. Masculine : brahmadvishas, 6. Feminines : Ishas, 63 ;
ramriehas; pr'tehas, 9 ; dvishas, 39 (and AV. ii.6.5) ; vipnUhas,
AV. ix.5.19. "

Irregularly accented : isM*, 7 ; us/ids, 2 ; dvishds, 4.

B. Masculines: and' bob; dnHrdhvabhdsas; ayd'eae; apd&as;
hrtsud&as. Feminines : dpdsas; dpishas, 2 (and AV., 2) ;
prapis/ias.

Irregularly accented: jfidsde; mdsds, 5 (and AV. viii9.l7) ;
punsds, 3.

Transition-form : md'tdn, 2 ; see p. 493.

Instrumental Plural Masculine and Feminine.

A. Feminine: viprMbhis, VS. xxv.9. The form iddbhis (6),
serves as an I.p. to %sh: see pp. 493 and 483.

B. Masculine: mddbhis.

Dative and Ablative Plural Masculine and Feminine.

A. Feminine: viprUdbhuas (abl.), Cat. Br. ix.1.1".

B. Masculine: mddbhy&s (dat.), AV. iii.10.10; (abl.) xix.27.2.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Feminine.

A. Feminines : iehdms 2 ; iehddm, 6 (resolution unnecessary in
viii.46.2*) ; dviehd'm; vipruehdm, $at. Br. iv.2.51.

B. Masculines: ay df 8dm, 2; vasd'm (or f.) ; mdsd'm, x. 138.6
(and AV. i.35.4) ; punsd'm, AV. iv.4.4 : vii.13.1 : xx.l 29.14 ?.

Locative Plural Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Here belong: puntu, AV. xii.1.25; rade-su, Paficav. Br. iv.4.1 ;
mdsu (! sic — cf. o*-stems, L.p.), TS. vii5.2\ The neuter dohshu
occurs Bhag. P. i.15.16. The form tddsn serves as a L.p, to Uh;
see p. 493.

STBMS IN RADICAL H.

Here belong : the compounds of -drtihy -vdh, and -edh; the mas-
culines, *rfA, go- and prati-dtih, and puruspr'h; the feminines;
(inht, g6hy dr&h, ndht, wSA, n&h; ruh, drrttti, updry pardr^ pra-;
sam-dih; ghrta- and sabar-duh; akehd- and updndhx parindh;
manomuh; gartdtrbh; dnapcuprh, puruepr'h; vier&h; uehnih.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

498 0. R Lanman, [Radical

Compounds oi -druh : a-, aksknayd-, anabki-, (mtaka-, abhi-, asma-, pur*-, ptsto-.

Compounds of -v6h: anad-, indra-, girva-, dakshind-, prshti-, madhyama-,vcyru:
vira-, saha~, mshttt-} svasti-, havir-, havya-, hotra-.

Compounds of -sdh: carsJwmt-, dyumnd-, dhanvd-, pra-, prd-% ycgfid-, ralhd-,
vibhvd-, vtfvd-j satrd-, sadd-. Compounds of -sh&h, p. -sdh ; abhimdti-, abht-, rfc.
f*At-, jand-, turd-, nih-, til-, nr-, purd-, prtand-, prdpk-, bhitri-, rayi-, vane-, irtfo-,
vifvd-, vrthd-, (xUrfr-, aabrd-.

Neuter forms occur from the stems purwpr'h and mdh. For
stem dadfhf, see BR. iii.505 : v. 1485.

For sardh, see ^A-stems, p. 454 ; for ndh^ o%-stems, p. 478, and
p. 483 ; for dnh, see Ab.s.f. The derivation of updahak (stem
upd-dahf) is uncertain.

The peculiar compound of anas and -vdh makes its strong forms
from the stem anadvd'h; the weak, from anaduh; the middle,
from anadtit; but see N.s.m.

The distinction of strong and weak forms is seen further as
follows: in the compounds of -vdh, strong -vd'h (pada always
-tfd'A); and in the compounds of -sdh, strong -sd'h (pada always
-9&'h). This lengthening occurs in the N. and A.s.m. and N.p.m. ;
and, besides, in the following forms: indravd'hd, anadvahau,
indravd'haUy dakshindvd't (N.s.£), and havyavd'ham (A.s.f.).

One cannot help asking whether we have in -sd'h a metrical or a declensional
lengthening. The long d seems sometimes to be due to the metre (e. g. in ii.4.9 :
vi.7.3 ; 69.4, where d is penultimate of a pdda of 11 syllables), and its suppression
in strong cases is certainly brought about by the demands of the cadence ; but >i
also occurs when not favored by the metre (e. g. i. 7 9.8b), or even when forbidden
by it (e. g. viii.81.7a/). Indeed, there seems to be a good deal of arbitrariness
about the entire matter (cf. v. 10.7c with vi.44.4c); but we must, on the whole,
call it a declensional phenomenon. Compare Rik Pr. ix. 15,26.

The lengthening of the a of sah is suppressed 18 times in strong
cases. We can hardly call these " weak forms in place of strong,"
because the shortening may be referred to the metre in even-
instance. The d occurs: as penultimate of an anwhtubh-pddu
(i.8.1: v.28.2; 35.1: vi.14.4 : vii.94.7 : viii.1.2 ; 26.20; 57.1;
77.1 ; 87.10: ix.98.1) ; as penultimate of a jagati-pdda (1119.10:
vi.46.6: viii.19.35 ; 21.10); as fifth of an anushtubh (i.l29.4c:
v.10.7) ; as ninth of a jagali (L129.4&). In all but the last three
pddas the short is absolutely required by the cadence.

On the other hand, the long d appears in weak cases twice :
viz., in i.91.186, where the demands of the penultimate excuse tbe
long d (so vd'h-ey vii. 24.5a) ; and in ii.21.2rf, where there is no
justification whatever for it. Cf. dvipd'de, p. 470.

Transitions to the a-declension. I am inclined to regard mahd-s,
-dsya, -6, -d'ni, -d\ and -d'ndm as forms of transition from the weak
cases of mdh. They belong exclusively to the Veda, and arc
used, especially ma/id-8 and mahd'ni, to supplement the defective
mdh. From the weak stem anadrfih comes the transition form
dhenv-anaduhayoS) Katy. Qr. vii.2.23.

Transition to the /-declension. The solitary inf. mahdye, x.65.3,
is a transition-dative to mdh, equivalent to mah-k (as in viii.56.8).
For accent, cf. mah-i.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A -stems.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 499

Irregularly accented are mahds, N.p.m. ; druhds and mah&s,
Ajp.m. For g<chdy see I.s.f. ; and for dnh-as, aa-stems, Ab.s.n.
Jfah-f, du.n., is regularly accented, as a weak case.

Transfer of aspiration occurs in a-dhr&k, akshnayd-, antaka-,
abhi-, asma-; go-duHk, prati-y sabar-; u$d-dhak(?). These, with
uahar-bh&t (p. 475), are all the instances of the kind in the declen-
sional forms of the Rik. Somewhat akin to this is the nati of the
s of -sdh even after an d when the aspiration disappears at the
end of the word. Thus we have satrd-shd't and vipvdrshd't; but
satrd-sd' ham, -sd'he, and vipva^sd'ham. Irregular is prtand-
shd'ham, vi.72.6.

Nominative Singula* Masculine and Feminine.

L Masculines : -shd't, with abht-; rshir; jand-; turd-, 4 ; nish-,
2 ; purd-; prtand-, 5 ; prdpu-; bhuri-; rayi-, 2 ; vane-; vbrd-;
vrtM-; satrd-; from A v., abht-, 2 ; turd-; nt- and patrOr, v.20.11 ;
vipvd-, xii.1.54 : xiiLl.28 ; vrthd-'f, xx.128.13. Here belong
further : shd't, RV. i.63.3 ; madhyama-vd't; havir-vd't; havya-
vd't, 9 times; tvrya-vd't, TS. iv.8.3*; turya-vd't and ditya-vd't,
iv.3.51; 7.101. Cf. rad. jf-stems, N.s.

Feminines : d<ikshind-vd't; for sardt, see p. 454.

Pashthorvd't occurs TS." iv.8.3*, 51; 7.101. In explanation of
the dental t, Weber (Ind. Stud, xiii.107) suggests that the second
part of the word was confounded with the suffix -vant.

To precisely the same confusion he refers the N.s.m. anad-vd'n,
AV. lv.ll.lquater, 2,4,10: v.17.18: viii5.11 : ix.1.22: xi.4.13 ;
5.18: xii.3.49: xix.39.4 : TS. iv.3.51; -vd'n? ca, VS. xviii.27.
Bohtlingk, however, suggests with much plausibility, the analogy
of the per£ part, in -vdns, whose stems also have a triple form ;
see Die Declination im Sanskrit, § 70.

IL Masculines: -dhrtik, with a-, 3 ; akshnayd-; antaka-; abht-;
asma-, 3; upd-dhakf, 3; go-dhuk ; pirati-dkuk, AV. ix.4.4.

Feminines: gartdrruk; sabar-dhuk; ushnik, AV. xix.21.1.

Transition to o-declension. Mahd-8 (18) supplies a N.s.m. for
mdh.

Nominative and Accusative Singulab Neuter.

Here belongs puruspr'k. For dadhr'k, see «A-stems, A.s.n.

Aoousative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

L Masculines : -shdlham, with abhimdti-, 2 ; rtf-y nt-; prtand-;
-sd'hatn, with pro-; yajfid-; vipvdr, 3 ; satrd-, 4 ; -vd'ham, with
vira-; suasti-; havya-, 20 (and AV., 3) ; hotra-; anadr, x.59.10
and AV. ix.5.29 i xii.2.48. Feminine : havya-vd'ham, x.8.6.

The lengthening is suppressed : rti-shd'ham, 3 (of. rtUhd'ham) ;
prtand-, 2 ; carshant-sd'ham, 5 ; prd-, 2 ; vibhvd-, 2 ; sadd-. Cf.
carshanS-sdhd, -sdhas, rathdsd'hd, and p. 498.

II. Masculines : adrliham, 2 ; puruspr'ham, 14.*

Feminines : guham; druham; parindham; miham, 6.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

500 C. R. Lanman, [Rad. A-stems.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULAR MASCULINE, FEMININE, AMD NEUTER

Masculines : dhanvdsdhd; pwruspr'hd; vi&hudrithd.

Feminines : druhd\ 2 ; prdsdhd, 2 ; mahd\ 2 (cf. mahyd') ; vi-
sruhd; guh~d\ 167.6. Gtihd, occurring 53 times, may De an
adverb with recessive accent, from guh-§, like divd from dithd';
or a homophonous I.s.f. (see p. 358). Neuter : mahd', 4.

Dative Singula* Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines: adruhe; abhidrtihe; carshantsdhe; druhe (orf.);
mate, 42 (and AV. ii.5.4 : v.11.1); satrdsdfhe!, p. d, ii. 2 1.2 (see
p. 498).

Feminines : goduhe; rnahe, viii.26.2 ; 46.25 : ix.44.1.

Neuter: maheySS; AV.x.6.8: xix.24.2,3 ; RV. vii.30.1<f, text
mdhi. For vd'he, see Delbrtick, Verbum, p. 222.

Transition-form : mahdye (inf.), x.65.3.

Ablative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : rttshdhas ; druhdsy 3 ; mahds, 5. Femiuine :
druhds, 5, and AV. vii.103.1. For dnhr<uy vi.3.1, see aa-gtems,
Ab.s.n. Neuter: mahds, 11, and AV. vii.26.8.

Genitive Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : adr&has; druhds, 3 ; prtandshdhas; mahds, 61 ;
abhimdtishd'has /, p. <*, i.91.18 (see p. 498) ; from AV., anadtihas,
iv.ll. 8,9,11; maha&i iv.1.6: x.7.2.

The transition-form mahdsya occurs i.150.1, q.v.

Feminines: prdsdhas; mihds, 2 ; druh&s, 8 (and AV., 11).

Neuters : puraspr'has; mahds, 39 ; mahas (with voc), vii.64.2.

Locative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine: anadHhi, AV. i v. 11.7. Feminines: updndhi,

xx. 133.4 ; partndhi, xix.48.1. The transition-form mahk occurs
as m., ix.66.13 ; and as n., 5 times and in ix. 110.2.

Vocative Singular Masculine and Feminine,

Masculines: havyavdt; from AV., prtandshdt, v. 14.8; godhuh,
vii.73.6 (ed. nom.). Feminine : ddhruk.

Nom., Aoc., and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

I. Masculines: indrctrvd'hd (d), 2; carshanU&hd ! ; rathd-
sd'hd I j adrtihd, 2 ; dnabhidruhd; puruspr'hd. '

Feminines : adruJtd; adrdhd^ 2.

IX Masculines: indravd'hauj anadvd'hau, x.86.10* AV. iii.
11.5 : vii.53.5.

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neuter.
Here belongs mah4\ i 121.1 1 : ix.68.3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.p.m.t] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 601

NOKDTATIYB AND VOCATIVE PLX7SAL MaBODUNB AED FEEMnHE.

L Masculines : abhimdtishd 'has, 3 ; patrdshd'hasj -vd'has, with
indra-; vctfra-s virch; sahar; sushfhur; havya-; anad-, Av. xix.
50.2; pfshfir, xviii.4.10. Gr. reads girva-vd' has, vi. 24.6 (see p.
353 med.).

IL Masculines : carshanisdhas; adtuhas, 3 ; purusprhas; puru-
spfhas, 2 ; god&has; drdhas; adr&has, 9, and AV. vi.7.1.

Irregularly accented is mahds, iii.7.6 : x.61.27 ; 77.8.

Feminines: adrfihas, 2; ghrtaddhas; purudr&has; purusprhas,
3; mihas, 2; rbhas; visruhas; from AV., manomfihas, ii.2.5;
rtihas, d-r&has, prar, xiiLl.0.

NOMIE ATIVB AITD ACCUSATIVE PLURAL NBUTBR.

There are no forms like -dunhi, -vdnhi. Their place is supplied
by transition-forms. Thus instead of manhi, we have mahd'ni
(11), mahdl.

Accusative Plubal If asouluts and Feminine.

Masculines: adrhhas; puruspr'has; anaduhas, AV. iv.11.3.

Irregular accent is seen in druhds (vii. 104.7) and mahds (20
times). Perhaps mahds is so accented to differentiate it from
mdhasy 'might' C£ apds ('aquas') and dpas ('opus').

Feminines: akshdndhas ; adr&has; updrtihas; drfihas, 6;
tnihas; samdihas; from AV.,drtihas, xix. 15.2; r&has,x\iL 1.4,8,26;
3.26; praruhas, xiii.1.8; nihas, ii.6.5 and VS. xxvii.6.

Dative Plubal Masculine and Feminine.

Masculine : anadtidbhyas, AV. vi.59.1. Feminine : for

sarddbhias, see p. 454 ; for nadbhids, pp. 478 and 483.

Genitive and Locative Plubal Masculine.

Genitive: mahd'm, iv.5.9 : ix.109.7. Roth suggests that
mahdl m in ii.24.11 may be G.p. of a noun mdh (root manh),
'gift.9 'Und der du dich fr5hlich an den Gaben kraftig gest&rket
hast.' So iv.23.1. In X.46.5&, the resolution mahddm is needless.
In vi.66.3, Gr. reads mahddm, text maM. The transition-form
mahdfnaam occurs five times.

Locative: anadtitsu.

STEMS WHOSE SUFFIXES END IN T, Kt A.ND &

According to the plan proposed on p. 327, we now come to
the stems formed by derivative suffixes ending in *, n, and s.

STEMS IN VOCALIC BOOT +T.

The stems ending in the quasi-suffix t are declined just like
those in radical f. It may fairly be questioned whether the
added t ought not rather to be called a root-determinative.

vol. x. 67

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

502 G R. Lanman, [Stems in

This t is added to the roots kr (properly kar, etc), kshi, gu, «,
yyu, ji9 dhry dhru, dhvr, pi, pru, bhr, mi, yw, rt, vr, pr*, pru, «*,
*r, *£u, «pr, «rw, Aw, Ar, An/, Avr/ that is, to roots in I, ft, and r
[ar), so that almost all compounds of roots in these short vowels are
thus thrown into the consonant declension (pp. 453, 367, 401).
[t is properly added only to roots in these vowels ; but we have
the tertiary formation (adhva-gd\ ~gd!) adhva-gd'-t, and similarly
iyu-gdt, navargdt, and (sarh-hdn, -Art') samh&'t. Of. Benfey,
warn. p. 131, 1. 26. Neuters are very rare (stems upa&ktut, tanu-
kr't, dUrghaprut, dyugdt, navag&t, vi^vaJU).

For the accent of parihvrta, see Ls.f. ; for hrut-ds, A«p.m.

I do Dot think that there are any instances of transition to the (^-declension on
he part of the stems here treated. Their last element is almost invariably an
ictive verbal, and if they went into the a-declension, they would coincide in form
pith passive participles and their compounds, but would conflict with them in
oeaning.

Nominative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Here belong 79 masc. forms (from 50 stems) ; and 4 fern, forms
(from 8 stems).

Masculines : -left, with anukdma-; abhishti-, 3 ; aji-; tfdna-, 6 ; rshi-. 2 ; khaya-,
8; jyotish-; tanti-; pathi-, 4; punt-; bhadra-; uloka-, 2 ; vayas-, 2 ; varwas-:
rijeiha-; *u-, 2 ; ateya-; sumo-; — -jit, with ap*v-, 3 ; ah-; agva-; go-, 2 ; dhama-;
•anya-; raiha-; vicva-, 2 ; sarhsrshta-; satrd-, 2 ; samarya-; sahasra-, 2 ; suar-, 2 ;
wranya--, — acyutacyut; dJcshit; rnacit; {tacit, 3; kilbishaspr't ; carskanSdhr'L.
I; dtrghacrut; dhanaspr't; parihrfa; bhdrabhr't; madaeyid; madhsuh&L 3;
/akshabhft; vajrabhr't, 2; vdjaxft-, aoma&ut; svasr't; havanacHU ; from AV.,
iddrasxt (i.20.1), etc.

Feminines: upamit, 2; {tacit (iv.16.10); pracastikft

NOMINATIVE AND AdOUSATTVE SINGULAR NEUTER.

Here belong: vi^vajit; cftrghaprat (pdrma), vii. 16.8 ; navagdt,
rS. iv.8.111: AV. iiil0.4; — and, used as adverbs, vpastitfU;
iyugdt; tabr't, 7 ; dtrghaprut, vii.61.2 (so BR. ; see A.p.n.).

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Here belong 46 masc. forms (from 25 stems) ; and 5 fern, forms
[from 5 stems).

Masculines: adhikshitam; arnovr'tam; ukthdbhf'tam ; udapritfam, 2; r+acyut-
im; carshanidJiftam, 2; Hvrasiitam; t^shucyiUam; dirgfiacrutam ; dushkr'tam;
iveshoyiUam ; dhanaspftam, 8 ; nadivx'tam^ 2 ; parisrutam; prdtarjUam ; mada-
yutam, 8 ; mUMkr'tam ; cravqjitam ; aamjitam ; saiyadhvr'tam ; sdmabhr'tam ;
wkr'tam, 3 ; suarjUam ; Tiavanacrfaam, 2 ; havishkr'tam^ 2.

Feminines : aramkr'tam ; upaprittam ; devacr&tam ; niyfaam ; parisrutam.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Masculines : carshemtdhr'td; brahmaJcr'td, 2 ; sornasutd
Feminine : niytUd, 2. The accent of parihvrt-d\ viii.47.6, is
luite anomalous; cf. vimrdhd, p. 477. It may be L.s. of pari-
\vr-tfi : i For in the very act of deceiving you, a man loses the
blessing ye already have given.' Stems of this form regularly
tccent the preposition (pdrihvrti) ; but cf. d-sakti and dsuti.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

voc. root+L] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 503

Dativb Sdtoulab Masoulinb.

Here belong: -kr 'te, with aram-, 2 ; dush-> 2 ; dharma-; brahma-;
9u-j 13 ; — -fitey with ab-; apvo-/ urvard-; go-; dhana-; nr-;
vipva-; satrd-; auar-; — girikshUe; parvatacyute.

Ablativb Sinoulah Masoulinb and Fbmininb.

Masculines : brahmakr'tas; sarvahtitas, 2. Feminine : abhi-
hriitaSy 2.

Gbhttiye Sinoulab Masoulinb and Fbmininb.

Masculines : carshantdtir'tas, 2 ; samfitas; sukr'tas, 3 ; havish-
kr'tas, 2. Feminines : ishastutas; devastates; parisrtitas, AV.
iii.12.7.

Looatite Singular Masoulinb.

Here belong : madacyUti ; go, vasu-y sathdhandjtii (AV.
xiii.1.37).

Vocative Sinoulab Masoulins and Fbmininb.

Masculines: acyutacyut; vrukrt; rtacit; khay alert; purukrt,
5; ranakrt; vandanaprut; sahasrajit, 4. Feminines: from

AV., upabhrt, xviii.4.6 ; rd'shfrabhrt, vi.118.2.

Nom., Aoo., and Voo. Dual Masoulinb and Fbmininb.

I. Masculines : gojitd; divikshUd; parikshitd, 2 ; madacytitd,
3 ; as voc, 2 ; myrtitd; havanaprtitd; as voc, 3 ; pdthikrtd, AV.
xviii.2.53. For ishukr'td, see pp. 466, 468.

II. Masculines: ddushkrtau; krshnaprutau; sakshitau; from
AV., sarkr'tau, xLl.10 ; 4U-, xiL3.44; bhadrar and 8u-pHUauy
xvi.2.4.

Feminine: ugrctfitau, AV. vi.118.1.

GBNrnvB Dual Fbmininb.
Here belong : sukr'tos; parikshitos.

NOMnfATIVB AND VOGAHVB PLURAL MASOULUfB AND FBMDmfB.

Here belong 49 masc forms (from 32 stems) ; and 24 fern, forms
(from 7 stems).

Masculines : -fer'feu, with aram-, 2 ; ipdna-; dudhra-; duth-; dhdnid-; brahma-,
3 ; yajncwuh-; vayas-, 2 ; «*-, 8 ; havish-; — -cyfoas, with dkanuar; dhruva-;
parvata-; mada-, 2; — -hshUaSy with apsu-; upa-; so-; — udaprtttas, 3 ;
krchrefriUu ; grdmajticu ; carshantdhxtas ; dv&hoytou ; nigttos ; pitubhr'toa ;
manodkr'tas ; satyapntfas, 2 ; satrdjitas ; aufHUaa ; sorrumUcu ; svosfios ; havano-
?riUas, 2 ; as voc., 1 ; hrutcu ; from AV., adhva-g&t-as, xiiil. 36,43 ; divifrUaa (xi.
7.23-27), etc. For devastfoas, see G.s.f.

Feminines: udapr&taa; niy&tas, 14; parisr&tcu ; pitubhftoa; mitaa; muHtioa,
2; stutos, 4.

NOMINATrVB AND ACCUSATIVE PLUBAL NbUTBB.

See page 474. Here we may pnt dirgha^tdt, viii.25.17 (vratd*) ;
vii.61.2 (mdnmdni).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

504 C. R. Lanman, [Participles

Aoousativb Plubal Uabcuusm amd FEicnraB.

Masculines: apitas; gcfttas; jyotishkr'tas ; duahk^Uu, 3;
nigutas : madacyutOB ; sukr'tas, 3; hr&tas ; with irregular
accent, hrutd*, AV. vi.51.1.

Feminines: Upastutas; dirghapr&tas; niytita8,9; ftatfftr'tas, 2;
ritas; varunadhrCUa$; visfta$; samhdtas (c£ p. 602) ; saaHkku.

IVSTBUMBNTAL Plubal Uabcuusm akd Fnmran.

Masculine : somaritdbhis, 2.

Feminines : antariksfiaprudbhti; niytidbhis, 10.

Dativb and Ablatiyi Plubal Masoulikb and Nbdtbb.

Datives masc.: pathikr'dbhya* (Or. -bhias); bandhu-kshidbhya*.
Ablative neut. : tantikf? dbnyas.

Gbhittvb and Looatiyb Plubal Masouunb and Fnmram.

Genitives masc.: mantrakr'tdm ; suhr^tdm^ 2; from AV.,
ishubhr'tdm, iv.28.2 ; agnihotrah&tdm, iii.28.6.

Genitives fern. : abhihrtitdm; niytitdm; from AV., rathcyitdm,
vi.130.1 j upary pari, prati-mitdm, ix.3.1.

Locatives: m., sukrtsu; f., paripriteu, Q&L Br. ix.1.1*.

PARTICIPIAL STEMS IN NT AKD T.

A. The suffix ant or nt forms participles of the present, future,
desiderative, causative, and denominative. The nasal appears
only in the strong cases. In the weak it is regularly dropped,
and if the last syllable of the stem had the accent, this is shifted
to the case-ending. The category under which these participles
fall I call for convenience " A." Many forms which, if simple,
would be oxytone become barytone when compounded with a-,
an-. Sfhd, although a reduplicating root, has gone over to the
o-conjugation, and we have the stem tishthant, with nasal.

B. There is, however, a very considerable number of participial
stems, which do not show the nasal even in the strong casea
These are the participles from reduplicated verb-stems, excluding
the desideratives. They are regularly accented on the syllable
of reduplication ; e. g. mb-mi-at, bd-ps-at. Accordingly, they can
not shin; the accent to the ending in the weak cases. These I
regard as making up category " B.

Besides these there are a few stems embraced in this section
which are not properly participles. Brhdnt, rhdrU, pr'thant,
r&ganty and jdgat have exchanged their participial function for
one almost purely adjectival or substantival ; but they retain the
participial inflection. Mahdnt (su-mahant) has lost its participial
meaning, and deviates markedly from the declension of participles
in the strong cases, where it shows a long vowel. For ddnt and
its compounds, see below. The four stems iyant and kiyant,
t'vant and ki'vant, although in no wise participles, are yet de-
clined like them, and so are treated here.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

in ntj *.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 606

There are several participles which I have included in category
B, because they appear in the strong cases without a nasal. They
are : dd'^atas, N.p.m., 2; pd'sat, N.s.m., 4; -o$d, N.d.m., 2; -afcw,
G.8.HL ; vdghdt, N.s.m. ; -ite, 3 ; -dtas, G.s.m., 5 ; -dtas, N.p.m., 5 ;
-atas, V.p.m. ; -ddbhis, 4 ; -dtdm, 3. Here also is to be placed
dd'scU: it occurs only in G.s.m., dd'satas; but the N.p.m. ought
to be dd'satas. Finally, the aorist participle of dak, dhdkshat,
omits the nasal: dhdkshat, N.g.m., 3; -atas, G.s.m.; and similarly
ubhayd'-dat, N.s. ; -data*, N.p.

Vdghdt is doubly peculiar : the nasal is lacking in the strong
cases; and the accent, although resting upon the final syllable of
the stem, is not shifted to the ending in the weak cases. Grass-
mann regards ddpy dds, and $ds as reduplicated forms of d&p
(vii.3.7, d&'pema), dds, and pd* (cuns)% and interprets the absence
of the nasal in the strong cases as evidence in support of his view.
Possibly vdgh of vdgh-dt is to be referred in like manner to
vd(g)h; but see Roth in Kuhn's Zeitsch. xix.220.

On the other hand, one unquestionably reduplicated form,
vavrdhdntaSy admits the nasal contrary to rule. Even this is per-
haps due to the metre and the formal parallelism of the verse
(iv.2.17, q. v.). There are two other forms, cdhr&n and edkdn,
in regard to which there is much uncertainty.

The N.8.m. ca-kr-&n (x.95. 12, 13— referred by BR. v. 1253, to cahr&nt) is in both
verses followed by w-, and, if we allow a mistake on the part of the padakdra,
may stand for oahrdt The ozytone accent is still anomalous : might not cabrdt
(d for accent rdr&n, i.122.12) be a conditional subjunctive, 'if he remember1?

In x.29.1 occurs cdJcdn. Delbruck, Verbwn § 226, takes it as N.sjn. of the
participle of fam, and regards its » as radical. In this case it is a shortened form
for cdkanat, and is comparable only with k&nilcrat (for k&nihradat, from hrand) ;
but the accent is wrong. Gr. takes it as N.s.m. of the participle of kd, with
stfmas, in which case both accent and nasal are anomalous. Both anomalies are
avoided by taking it with Both as 2 or 3 p. sing. aor. of Jean : ' Wie (der) welcher
in der Kufe (iflt), so ist er niedergesetzt;' L e. So wie der Soma, so ist der Lobge-
sang hier aufgetragen; 'er moge Oefallen erregen' (cdkdn). See BrU. num
Nindda, p. 94. The passage seems to have been a crux since the time of QAkalya.

These participial stems are declined only in the masculine and
neuter, both genders being alike, save, of course, the N. A.n. The
feminines are formed by adding i to the weak stem; see p. 367.
In category A, the masculines are very numerous, the neuters
very few ; in B, the masculines are considerable, the neuters only
about half a dozen.

The etymology of ddnt, ' tooth,9 is uncertain (from ad, da=
day, da&p?). It seems to have been declined originally as a
participle. Like participles and unlike nouns, it shifts the accent
to the ending in the A.p. datrds; but it is unlike participles and
like nouns, in shifting the accent to the ending in dadbnie, dad-
bhyds. CI a.ddtre, like nouns. The forms are given under the
different cases ; ddn (r.115.2), ddnt-am (iv.6.8), etc.

In the later texts this stem shows forms of transition to the
o-declension ; for this the A.s. ddnt-am serves as point of depart-
ure. The Rik has only one transition-form, ddnta-e (vi.75.11 — a
late hymn). The AV. has : ddntds, ddntais.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

506 C. R Lanman, [Ptcp. in nt, t

Besides vdohdt, there are only two instances — quite sporadic—
in which an oxytone stem does not shift the accent to the ending;
they are acoddte (in the miserable hymn v.44), and rathirdydtdm,
ix.93.4. For trav-dt-a* and sapc-dt-as, see pp. 466, 467 ; does not
vdgh-dt-as perhaps belong in the same category with them ?

Nominative Singular Masculine.

A. Here belong 753 forms (from 228 stems). Examples are:
drcan, 19; sdn, 38: ydn, 32; ichdn, 15; krnvdn, 24; jandyan,
27; jdndn, 24; si dan, 17; pdpyati, 19; ghndny 17. Further-
more occur: mahd'n, 77 ; si-mahdn; a-ddn; ddny x. 11 5.2 ; pafci-
dan, AV. xiv.2.68 ; hiranyadan, Ait. Br. iii.6 ; from RV. again,
p&cidan, v. 7. 7: vii.4.2 ; prenidan, x. 20. 3.

When the form in -an occurs before o or /- in the Rik, the usual method of
sandhi is -off c- (e. g. iii.54.2 : vii.87.1), -aft >- (e. g. i.173.11 : x.45.6). In regard
to the " inserted t " before 9- (e. g. minv&nt sddma purd eti, x.20.5), see Rik Pr.
iv.6 ; Aufrecht, Rigveda*, preface, p. vi ; and Whitney, to Ath. Pr. ii.9. Tnrtannefl
of the collision of -an with initial t are comparatively rare : the method of sandhi
in the Rik is -an I (e. g. i.ll 7.22 : ii.3.2) ; in the Atharvan, there are six instances
of -ana t> (vii.13.1 ; 18.2: xiii.1.32,39 : xvii.10: xviii.2.20) to three of -a* t-
(xiii.2.33: xiv.1.5: xix.28.4); in the TS., there are but two cases of -ana t-(rr.
7.135: v.4.121); the sandhi is generally -an *-. See Whitney, note to Ath. Pr.
ii.26: and note to TPr. vi.14. If the 8 is here the historical relic of the case-
ending, we ought to find it oftenest in the Rik ; but the Rik has but one example
of it, dvddaha tvdm (Prat, iv.33), and that in the last verse of the second book, a
very late passage. Is it not rather (unlike the s of td'ha) the product of phonetic
dissimilation {-ant t- to -ans *-) ? so Bohtlingk, Die Decimation, § 22, Anm. 2, and
note 38, q.v. For the forms in -ann, cf . Curtius, Studies ii. 1 65.

In 46 instances mahd'n appears as makd'ti,: 31 times before a- (e. g. viii. 90. 11,12:
so atonahdn\ vii.8.2); 6 before ir (e. g. i.8.5); 6 before «- (e. g. iii.36.5); in iii.59.5
and iv.8.2 before d-; in iii.53.9 before r-. We find mahd'nc before c- in iii.55.9:
vi.38.3: viii.33.8: x.4.2 (Pr&t iv.32). The resolution mahdan is inadmissible:
in vi.25.ld, vii.52.3c, and x.46.1a, the sixth syllable is syncopated.

Transition-form : ddnta-8y as N.s. to ddnt, vi75.11.

In vii.4.2 and x.20.8, the metre is out of order. It is rectified,
if we substitute the longer transition-form in -dantas for the
equivalent shorter grammatical form in -dan; thus, sdm y6 vdnd
yuvdte p&cidantah (but cf. p. 348 top) ; and ydm [id] dsd' krpd-
ntdam j bhdsd'ketum vardhdyanti \ bhrd'jate [sd] p&nidantah
(trochaic — cf. Ueb. ii.514).

Quite irregular are : ubhayd'-dat, TS. ih2.Q*bie; -dam, AV.
v.19.2. Benfey takes mahd'm as N.s.m. in ii.24.11 : iv.28.1 : ix.
109.7 ; see Oditinger Nachrichten, 1878, p. 190.

B. Here belong 178 forms (from 48 stems).

Enumeration: dbibhyal; cdrkrahat, 2; cd'kacat, 9; kdrikrat, 2 (cf. dedrikrat,
AY.xi.5.6); kdnikradat, 32 ; cikyat; ctkitat; tdvUvat; d&rdrat; ddda^b; fflifat;
dfdiat,Q\ dfdiat; ddvidyutat, 3 ; dddhat, 18; d6dhuvai,3; ddvidhvai, 2; nd'nadr
at, 4 ; ndnnamat ; pdniphdnat ; bd-ps-at {bhas), 3 ; bibhyat, 2 ; jdrbhurat, 2 ;
bfbhrat, 17; bMribhrat; memiat; mdrmfjat; mdrmfcat, 2; r&'rajat; rerihat,*;
rdruvai, 11; rdruvat, 2; vd'vadat; vevidat, 2; vtviahat, 4; vdrivrjat, 2; pocucai,
10; cdnifcadat; shhidhat; sdniehyadai; jdhghanai, 2; ghdnighnat; jdhai ; jitoat,
2; from AY., jd'grat (vi.115.2: xvi.7.10), etc.: from the Rik, further, kdnikrai,
ix.63.20; dhdkshat, vL3.4; d&kshan nd\ p. dhakshat no, 1 130.8; ddkshat, p. dhr,
ii.4.7 ; vdghdt, ix.103.5 ; cd'sat, 4 times.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.&m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda, 507

Gr. considers kdnikrat as a shortened form of the usual kdnir
kradat; ef. kdnikranrt% 3 p. sing.

Here belong, according to Gr., cdkdn and cakrdn, which,
although reduplicated, yet have the nasal See p. 505.

NOMNATIVB AND ACCUSATIVE SlNGULAB NEUTER.

A. Here belong 272 forms (from 31 stems).

Enumeration: andt; viandt; dminat; dvianat ; .adt, 30: foot,!; d'wU, p. *'-,
2; ydi, 2; iehndt; Vshat (x.89. 14) ; got, 5; Mo*f; kiddy by at; cdrat,3; ciidyat;
trpat, 5; dhfshdt, 10; pdtot; patdyat; bfh&t, 148; mafofo, 26; mindt; raghuydt;
r&faL 14; vdrdhat; fanscti; tfkshat; pvdyat; s&kshat; sunvdt; from AY., bhav-
ishydt (6 times, as r.7.9), etc. ; from the Rik, further, tya*; Vvat, 2 ; fctyo*, 2.
For dyuqdt, see p. 602.

. As adverbs, with adverbial shift of accent, occur : dravdt (drdv-
ant) j 5 ; drahydt (! dfhyant), once.

B. Here belong: ddvidyutat, x.43.4 ; pepipat, x. 127.7; jdgcrt,
16 times; ydyuvat, AV. xix.47.2.

ACCUSATIVB SdTGULAB MASCULINE.

A. Here belong 315 forms (from 121 stems). Examples are:
sdntam, 28 ; ydntam, 1 1 ; cdrantam, 24 ; brhdntamy 35 ; updntam,
8. Furthermore occur : mahd'ntam, 8 ; ddnt-am (Gr. ddntarm),
iv.6.8 ; hvranyadant-am, v.2.8. For mahd'm, see arc-stems, A. a.m.

B. Here belong: d-sapcatam (i.112.9 — seep. 467); gdnigmatam;
dddatam; dt'diatam; nd'nadatam; pdnipnatam, 4 ; btbhratam,
5 ; from AV., kdrikratam, x.4.13 ; bibhratam, xiv.2.30: xix.32.9 ;
rdruvatam, xi. 10.26.

Instrumental Singulab Masculine and Neuter.

A Masculine. Oxytones : satd'; jdnatd'; tujatd', 2 ; brhatd',
11; bhindatd'; mahatd\ 5; vanushyatd'; datd\ x.115.2: AV.
vi.56.8. Barytones : dghnatd; dvatd; dsunvatd, 3 ; cdratd;
ptishyatd; r&$atd, 2 ; from AV., pydvddatd (vii.65.3), etc.

Neuter. Oxytones : gavyatd', 3 ; tudyatd! ; dhrshatd', as adv.,
18 (and perhaps V&l. 4.3) ; brhatd\ 7 ; mahatd', 3 ; upatd', 2 ;
fucatd'; pravasyatd', 2 ; eamaryatd' ; mmndyatdl. Barytones :
ddrpyatd; d'satd^ p. &'-; dsredhatd; dhedatd, 3 ; rupatd.

B. Masculines: dddatd; pdpucatd. Neuter: jdgatd,\. 164. 25:
AV. iii.12.7.

Dative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculine. There are 187 oxytone forms (from 38 stems),
and 30 barytone forms (from 26 stems).

Oxytones: amuyaU; avishyatS; apvdyaU; saU, 5; yatt, 9; iehayatS; ishudh-
yatS; ishtyati; vj&yatt, 3; rtdyati, 5; f&otf; krnvati, 2; gavyati; grnatt, 29;
jwali; jdnaU; tudyatS; devayaU, 5; dvishati, 2; dhiydyaU; dhUnvati; prnatf,
3; jnrchati; bfTiati, 16; brahmanyati; mahayati; mahati, 4; mdnavasyati;
yafa&yatt: vanvatt: upUS, 6 ; vidhati, 15 ; gravaayatt, 3 ; crnvatt, 3 ; sakhiyati,
3; rtncati; mwvati, 33; stuvaU, 21.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

608 0. R ianman, [Ptcp. in nt, L

Barytones: dgknats; acoddte (sic, 7.44.2); dminaie: areata 3; arkate; tydak-
ate; carate; estate; iarate; tr' shy ate, 2; ddpate; pacata; pipUkato; pitkyte;
yQat6i yhihyaU; rd'jote; rfshati, 2; vddak, 2; pdjuafc, 3; tfirdhaie, 4; «<aM-
sate; karyate, 4; and, Cvafe; HyaU; addtc, L189.5.

The utterly incorrect and impossible accent acoddte is particu-
larly appropriate for hymn v. 44 ; d-codate would be correct. If
we grant a stem acoddnt, the D.s. would be -ol£, never -<foe.

Neuter. Oxy tones: brhati; mahatey 10; pucate; sandyate.
Barytone: fvate.

B. Masculines : ftyoshate; dddhate; bibhrate; educate; ghdni*
ghnate; juhvate; vdghdte (accent! see p. 506), 8. Neuter:
jdgate, AV. i.31.4.

Ablative Singulab Masculine abd Nbutbb.

A. Masculines: krnvcUds; prnatds; brhatd$> 13 ; vanushyaUk,
4 ; and, dbhufljatas; dvadatas; rfshatas, 8 ; jighdhsatas. Neu-
ters : drAottfa, 3 ; mahatds; and, dscUas; kfvatas.

B. Masculine: kdnikradatas (vdjrdt)^ ii.11.9.

Gbnitovb Singular Masoulibb abd Nbutbb.

A. Masculine. There are 127 oxytone forms (from 33 stems),
and 63 barytone forms (from 34 stems).

Oxytonea: ardttyatfa; satds, 10; yatds; undat&s ; rghdyatfo, 3; ftdyatfaZ]
hr^vat&B, 2; karishyat&s, 3; Jakiyat&s ; grnat&8,5\ ty'at&s: tor aids; turcupyatfo;
todyaide; dwhandyatfo; dvishatds, 2; dhrshatfo, 2; pfnatis; pUOyatds; brhatfo,
26; brahmanyatd*, 2; mahatd*, 11; mishatda; minatds; rudhatfo; vapughyat&t;
upatda; vidhatds, 9; pucatds; *aparyatda; awivot&s, 21: atuoatds, 9; fttivatii.

Barytones: dgfmatos; fyQryatae, 2; dbhufijataa; areata*, 2; 4*w*twta*, 3;
faofoAata* ; edrataa; cMatae; jfoatcu, 2 ; jdyatas, 2 ; jVvatcu, 2 ; jijydaatou; tVrv-
atom; tf'ahyatas; diddaatas; dr&vatcu, 2; dhdmatas; dhrdjataa, 2; ptyaUu;
bh&'shatas, 2; y&dhyoios, 4; rSbhoios, 2; rirtfoAaJa*; rbfcUas; v&yatas; v6rdh-
atas; venaUu; f&rdhatas, 3; tfcatas; sVdatas; sishdaatat; jighdnmias,*; hdnh*
atcu; an&VvakUj 3.

In ii.27.8, ddabdhdso dipsanto, Roth conjectures cftpsato: 'Un-
deceived of him that would fain deceive.9

Neuters : f>r4na&fc, 2 ; *atcfo, 4 ; krpayatds; brhatds, 5 ; mahat-
ds; mishatds; ydtds; and, d'satae, p. £'-, - ; errata*, 2 ; bhdvatas;

r&patas; venatas; stshdsatas.
B. Masculines: jig

figatas; tdritrcUas; dhdkshcUcu; dddatas, 2;
dd'satas; dddhctias, 4; dddluxtas ; bdpwUcu, 2; txfyA&o*, 5;
vivishatae; pd'scrtas; jdnghnatas.

Neuters : vd'vadatas; jdgata*, 29 ; dvdrvrtatas, AY. v. 1.8.

Locative Singular Masoulinb asd Nbutbb.

A. Masculines: yati, 10; mahati; sunvctii; and, irdyati; from
AV., ubhayd'dati, v.31.3. Neuters : mahal'i, 2 ; and, <f*ati.
At the beginning of LllS.lOa and ii.80.ldf, we have with metrical
lengthening, Kydti <*', p. UAi; see Rik Pr. ix.29.

neuter: jdgati, i.164.23.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

V.s.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Vedcu 509

Vocative Singular Masculine.

A. Grassmann takes patdvan, vi.47.9, as a compound of dvant;
but see stems in vant, V.s.m. The word bhos is explained as a
contracted form of bhavas. If this be vocative of ohav-ant9 we
must regard it as formed after the analogy of the stems in vant,
as though the stem were bhcwant. See stems in vanty V.s.m.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Masculine.

A. There are 79 <$-forms (from 52 stems), and 18 ou-forms (from
11 stems).

I. The d-forms: afn&ntd; sdntd, 4; ydttid, 4: gm&rtid, 2 (and see below); gem*
y&rtid; dofasydntd, 3; dty&ntd; duhdntd; pundntd; pfiicdntd; bfJidntd, 4; likuj-
antd; mishdntd; mindntd; irajydntd; vanv&ntd; ttfantd, 2; vcunaydntd; vdjay-
antd; vidntd; vrdhdntd; prnv&ntd: saparydntd; swnnay&ntd; — dmardhantd
dyatantd; drhantd; ishdyantd; kshdyantd; cdrantd, 2; cod&yantd, 2; jandyantd
jdranid; drdvantd; dhdmantd; pdrdyantd, 2; pfoantd; mddantd\ 4; rddantd
vdjdyantd; vddantd; vdpantd; vdhantd, 6; vSnantd; addantd; sdpantd; sahantd
stfdhantd; hdyantd;— pd'ntd; yd'nid.; mahd'ntd, 3; brhantd, voa

II. The au-forms: apndntau; sdntau, 2; y&ntau: ieh&yatUau; Jerfdantau, 2,
kshdyantau; Urdntau; ydjantau; rd'jantau; vrdhantou; and mahd'ntau. The
A V. has mddantau, iviii. 1.54c, a alight modernization of BY. X.14.7&

In i. 122. 11, gmdntdy the pada has gmdntd; d Pr&t. viii.15.
The pada sometimes has a dual in -d against •& of the samhitd
342) ; but not vice versa. The sense requires a plural ; see
,p.m, and Benfey, Abh. xix.260.

B. Here belong: L tdrtiratd; bdpeatd; bibhratd, 3; pd'satd;
anupd'satd; — II. dddhatau; Mbhratau, 2.

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neuter.

A. Here belong : ya&\ 2 ; brhatt'; and perhaps pr'shalt,
i.162.21 — see p. 391.

Dative and Genitive Dual Masoulinb.

A* Datives: mahddbhydm; mrdayddbhydm, i 136.1 bis (Or.
-bhidm). Genitive: jdratos. Samyatds (accent), AV. xvi.8.22,
is G.d.n.

B. Genitive: pipratoe.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masoulinb.

A. There are 428 forms (from 166 stems). Examples are:
$dnias, 9; ydntas, 16; krdntas; tcrnvdntas, 8; grn&ntas, 21;
devaydntas, 26; bhiddntae ; bhinddntas, 2; mddantasy 10;
vdjaydntas, 13 ; ghndntas, 9 ; upantae, voa, x.30.2. Not
included above are : satdmahdntas; mahd'ntae, 2 ; mahdntas^
voa, 2.

Gr. proposes gmdnto, text gmdntd, i.122.11 ; see N.d.m. For
dipsantas, see G.s.m.

We find ubhayd'd&tae, x.90.10; and ubhayatod&tas, Manu i.43.
In each case, the absence of the nasal may be due to the metre,
since the syllable dt is penultimate in an anushtubh-pdda. The
vol. x. 68

t

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

510 C. R. Lanman, [Ptcp. in nL t

AV. has the transition-form ddntds, iv.3.6 : v. 18.8, etc. ; similarly
the £at. Br., -dantda (instead of -datts), i.6.3".
B. Here belong 53 forms (from 20 stems).

Enumeration: kdrikratas; jd'gratas; jagataa, voc. ; titrates; dddotos, 9; d^fa-
tas, 2; dddkattu; dddhatas, 6; dfdhiatcu; d&vidhvaUu, 3; ndnuvatas; pipratai,
2 ; bdpsatas, 2 ; Mbhraias, 12 ; mdrmrjatas; vdghdtas, 6 ; vdghatas, voc. ; ptfjwco-
few; jwrata*; jQivatas; jdhuvatas.

For the irregular nasal ofvavrdhdntas, iv.2.17 (= AV. xviii.3.22,
t>dt>-), see p. 505.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE PLURAL NEUTER.

A. We have the forms mahd'nti, p. mahd'nti, 3 times, and
AV. ix.5.1: x.4.23; lydnti, p. tydnti, RV. vi.23.4 (Prat ix.30) ;
irMWi, AV. viiL9.3.

The only real participle in the N.A.p.n. is sd'ntiy ii.28.1 :
viii.8.28. The pacta reads s&'nti; Prat, ix.25.

In i.l40.13cd, gdvyarh ydvyarh y&nto dtorghd' dhd[nt] | toham vdram artmio tar-
artfa, Both takes dhdni and artmio as coordinate subjects of varanta. ' Mdgen die
lange rich dahinziehenden Tage und die Morgenr6then una Vieh, Kora, and
Lebensfrische schenken.' We might (1) read y&'nti; or (2) we might consider
the masculine ydntaa as the general gender before two different ones following
(n. and f.) ; or (3), in view of the extreme unfamiliarity of the neuter form, we
may make the maao. do duty outright for the neuter, as in the case of Aartjprtyom,
p. 377.

Accusative Plubal Masculine.

A. There are 65 oxytone forms (from 24 stems), and 24 bary-
tone forms (from 15 stems).

Oxytones : 'saids, 3 ; yatds, 4 ; rghdyatds, 2 ; grnaids, 7 ; tarushyatds ; tadyatis,
2; prnatds; prtanyatds, 9; brTutide, 3; bhandandyatda ; mandyaids ; mahaida,^]
rudaias; vanushyatds,^; ufatds, 11: vdjayatds; vidhatds; pravasyaids; prnvatds,
2; frudhtyatajf ; sakMyatds; 0<uato«, 2 ; stuvatds; datds, vii.55.2: AV. v.29.4:
vi.56.3.

Barytones: (Sprnofcw, 2; dprayuchaias ; drcatas; ksMyatas; dhd'vatas; dhrfy-
aku; pdtatas, 2 ; rd'yaias; riahatas; r&rukshataa (ruh); vddatas; vrd'dhatat, 5;
C&rdhatas, 4; sisrpsatcu; i'vcUas; cydvddatas, AY. xi.9.17.

B. Here belong : jdkshatas (ghas) ; dd'satas ; pd'pvasatas;
from A V., jd' grata*, vii. 108.2 ; dddhatas, xill.58 : and so iii.6.2 ;
pdpucatas, viii.3.13. For sapcdtas, see pp. 469, 467.

INSTRUMENTAL PLUBAL MASCULINE AED NEUTER.

A. The oxytone stems (except ddnt) do not shift the accent to
the ending. There are 33 masculine forms (from 21 stems), and
7 neater forms (from 5 stems).

Masculines: dnimishadbhis ; dprayuchadbhis; dsredhadbhis ; didyadbhis; tufa-
yadbMs; devayddbhis, 2; dhd'vadbhi* ; patdyadbhie ; brMdbhis, 3; mahddbkis,
5: rSbhadbhis; ritfadbhis,3; vddadbhis ; upddbhia; vdjayddbhis ; vrdjadbhis, 2 ;
pocadbhis; pucddbhis; pucdyadbhia, 2; pubhdyadbhia ; dadbhia, 2.

Neuters: brhddbhia; mahddbhia, 2; ripadbhia; pucdyadbhia, 2; atandyadbhU.

Transition to the a-declension : ddntais, AV. xi.3.37. The
£at. Br. has dadbhis by the side of ddntds, iii.5.4".

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Lp.m.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 611

B. Here belong: nd'nadadbhis, 2; pdpruthadbhis; vd'vadhd-
bhis; vdghddbhis, 4 ; pd' pvasadbhis.

Dative and Ablatitb Plubal Masculine.

A. Datives: k&htidkyadbhycu ; tudyddbhyas ; brhddbhyas;
mahddbhyas; vddadbkyas; upddbhya*; vdhadbhyas; pdpyad-
bhyas: prayddbhyas (Gr. -bhias), v.54.9 ; grnddbhyas (Gr.
-bhias); sunvddbhias, i. 132.4 ; dadbhyds, AV. xi.2.6.

Ablative : pardyddbhyas, x.34.6.

Gxnitivs Plubal Masoulinb and Neuteb.

A. Masculine. There are 50 oxytone forms (from 22 stems),
and 10 barytone forms (from 7 stems). Here Gr. puts sthdtd'm,
i.70.3 ; but see p. 423 med.

Orytonee: adhvariyatd'm, 3; scti&'m, 3; yatd'm; rj&yatd'm; gxnatd'm, 3;
juratd'm; devaycUd'm, 4; dviahat&'m; brhetid'm; mahatd'm, 5; y&t&'m, 13;
vanushyatd'm ; upatd'm; paJbHLyaWm^ 3; pravaeyatd'm ; prnvatd'm; sakhtycUdfm;
sasai&'m; trunwztd'm; stuvctid'm; ghnatdfm; vdjayatd'm (Gr. -aam)} vi.45.29;
satddm, vi.67.1. The AV. has datd'm, v.23.3.

Barytones: dstmvaidm; cdraidm; j&yatdm^^; nx'tyatfan; p&tatdm; vivdsatdm;
fdrdhaidm.

Neuter: rathirdydtdm (accent! !), ix.98.4 ; see p. 506.

B. Masculines: jdgatdm, 2; vdghdtdm, 3; bibhyatdm, AV.
viii.8.20.

Locative Plubal Masoulinb and Nbutbb.

A. Masculines: grndtsu, 2; devaydtsu; patdyatm; mahdtsu, 2.
Neuter: JH'ryatsu.

PARTICIPLES IN VAJtS.

For Brugman's view touching the original form of the vans
and yan*-stems, see Zeitsch. xxiv.54.

About 75 stems, simple and compound, end in vans. They
have a three-fold form. In the strong cases the stem ends in
vdns; in the weak, in u*h; and in the middle, in vad (only three
such forms in the Rik). They are declined only in the masculine
and neuter; the feminine is formed by adding i to the weak
stem (p. 367). The accent is always on the final syllable of the
stem, save in negative compounds.

Even in the Veda there are several instances in which the weak
form of the stem seems to be used in strong cases : cahr&sham,
emushdm, proshusham, dbibhyushas (see A. a.m. and N.p.m.). It
is possible to consider these as simple forms of transition to the
a-declension (cakrteha-m, etc.). Indeed, we have one plain case
of such transition in 9at- Br. xiv.1.211: td'm emtisha (Hi) iti
vardhd ujjaghdna. Cf. Devamidhusha and Mxdhusha.

In the Epos, similar anomalies are by no means rare. We
have: divydstrorvidushau, N.d., MBh. iv.1847; vidushas, N.p.,
iii.15850 ; vedavidushas, Brhat Samhita, xvi.24. For other cita-
tions, see BR. vi.1068; and c£ Kern, Translation of Brh. S., p. 100.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

612 0. R Lanman, [Ptcp. in vans.

NOMINATIVB SINGULAR MASOULINB.

The N.s.m. in -vdn occurs 240 times (from 44 stems). It appears
in the samhitd as -vdnp once (iii.44.2, vidvd'np c-, Pr&t. iv.32) ; d,
moreover, dcikitvdnp c-, AV. ix.9.7, with dcikitvdfi c-, RV. i.164.6,
and see Whitney to Ath. Pr. ii.27 end. It appears as -vdn, the
regular elided form of -vdns (see p. 346), before a vowel, but only
in the interior of &pdda (Pr&t. iv.26).

The form -vM occurs 70 times : before a-, 42 times, as v.2.8 ; before d-, in
L94.6: ii.6.8: iii.14.2: iv.8.4; 19.10; before *-, i.37. 8 ; 174.6: v.29.3,14; 30.11;
32.2: ix.105.6: x.112.6; 160.2; before t, i.145.1 ; before *-, i.52.8; 190.7: iil
29.16; 35.4: x.11.5; before r-i L146.5: iii.31.1 ; 50.3: viii.81.9: x.2.1 ; 28.5;
138.3 ; before «-, ix.96.2.

Furthermore, -vdfl occurs before y- (iL4.6: ix.107.1), and v- (i. 132.3). The
Prat enumerates all the cases at iv.28. The VS. reads -vd y- (Pr&t iii.135) ! In
ii.12.4, jtgvd'fi (*=nasalized I) occurs before J- ; PrAt. iv.4.

At the end of a pdda we have -vdn before a vowel (23 times) : so before a-,
e. g. vii.7.5 ; before d-} e. g. i.169.3 ; before »-, e. g. z.8.8 ; before «-, e. g. iv.7.8;
before r-, x. 148.3. In three exceptional cases we have -vdft, even at the end of •
pdda : in i.59.6e and iii.32.6a (see Prat, iv.26), and in i.69.1a (akaharapankU).

Enumeration : dcikUvdn ; dprothivdn ; drarivdn ; dvidvdn, 3 ; cakrv&'n, 2 ;
jagcvnvd'n, 6 ; cikitvd'n, 32 ; jigtvd'n, 2 ; jtyurvd'n, 3 ; jujushvd'n, 2 ; jfyuvd'n;
jafiUvd'n; tatanvd'n, 2; dadaqvd'n; dadasvd'n; dadvd'n; ddfvd'n, 6; dfcftwfn;
dadrpvd'n; dadhanvd'n, 3; dadhxshvd\ 3 ; papivd'n, 8; pvpushvd'n; paprivtfn,
2; btiMod'n; bdbh&vd'n, Z \ midhvd'n,b] Tnamrvd'n; yayivd'n; rarivd'n ; rurvk-
vd'n ; vavanud'n ; vivikvd'n ; vividvd'n, 2 ; vidvd'n, 98 ; vividhvd'n ; cupukvd'*, 3 ;
fupruvd'n; sasavd'n, 6; sdsahvd'n, 2; sdhvd'n, 9; tasthivd'n; jaghanvdfti, 17.
Here Gr. puts pvdsivdn^-BR. stem fv&kvant.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Nbutbr.

Here belong tatanvdt (vi.21.3) and samvavrtvdt (v.31.3) — both
accusative.

Aoousativb Singular Masoulinb.

Here belong 66 forms (from 27 stems).

Enumeration: tyivd'nsam, 2; cakfvd'nsam ; jdgrvd'nsam ; eakhvdfnsam; cikitr
vd'nscm; jty'uvd'nsam; ddfvd^hsam, 9; dtdivd'nsam, 11; dfovidvdnsam ; papti-
vd'naam ; papivd'nsam, 3 ; plpivd'nsam, 2 ; paprivd'nsam ; mamrvd'tisam ;
ririhvd'nsam ; wdvd'nsam; vavrivd'nsam, 5 ; vdvrdhvd'nsam, 2 ; ^puvdfnsam;
sasavd'nsam ; sdsahvd'nsam, 2 ; sushuvd'nsam ; advidvdnsam ; sasfvd'nsom ;
tastabhvd'ntwn ; tarikivd'naam, 7 ; sudtupvd'nsam.

There are several remarkable instances in which the weak form
seems to be used for the strong. They are: cakrusham (for
cakrvd'nsam — S&y., krtavantam), x.137.1 (=AV. iv.13.1) ; vard-
hdm emicshdm (for emivd'nsam), viii.66.10 ; pitdram proshusham
(for proshivd'naam}, Qat.Br. xii.5.2*. The accent of emusM is
perhaps due to a misconception of the form (BR.).

Instrumental Singular Masoulinb and Nbutbr.

Masculines: dbibhyushd (i.6.7); cikitushd; vidushd,8. Neu-
ters: dbxbhyushd; bibhyushd.

Dative Singular Masoulinb.

Here belong: drarushe; HeCtshe%2\ cahrtishe; jagmfahe; cikit-
fake, 6 ; jigyr&she, 2 ; daddtfiuhe, 4 ; ddpushe, 111 ; bibhyushe;
mfdhushe, 11 ; vidfahe, 5 ; sedushe.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ab.G.s.m.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 518

Ablative and Genitive Singular Masculine and Nbuteh.

Ablatives : (masc.) drarushas; jujurtishas, 2 ; (neat.) tasthushas
(1.6.1?).

Genitives: (masc. — 63 forms, from 19 stems) dddpushas, 2
drarushasy 6; tyushas; jagmushas ; cikittUhas; jigyibshas, 4
fdnushas; tatar&shas; dadushas, 2 ; ddptishas, 21 ; didiytishas;
papHshas: bibhytish&s; rntdhtishas, 9 ; vividtishas; sedushas, 2
six&huvushas; tasthfahas, 6 ; jaghnushas; mamrtishas, AV. vi
18.2 ; (neat.) vavavrushas.

Delbruck, Verbum, p. 235, says that dadhanvdtas, vi.48.18, may
be G.s.m. of dardfyan-vdns, for da-dhanv-v.sh-as; c£ p. 516.

VOCATIVE SINGULAR MASCULINE.

Here belong: cikitvas^ 11 ; titirvas; didivas, 6; mtdhvcts, 10.
The AV., at vii.97.1 (=RV. iii.29.16), has cikitvan, a moderniza-
tion of the Rik-form cikitvas; cf. van^stems, V.s.Yn.

NOMINATIVE AND AOOUSATIVB DUAL MASCULINE.

I. The <l- forms: okivd'nsd; jaganvd'nsd; jdgrvd'nsd; <Mdi-
vd'nsd; papivd'nsd; vavanvd'nsd: vidvd'nsd, 3; p&puvd'nsd;
pupruvd'nsd; tasthivd'nsd, 2. II. There is but one aw-form,
vidvd'nsau.

Nominative Plural Masculine.

Here belong 43 forms (from 22 stems).

Enumeration: dvidvdnms; cakrvd'nsa8} 2; jaganvd'nsas ; jdgrvd'nsas, 3; cikit-
vd'nsas ; jigtvd'ntas, 4; titvrv&'iisas ; dadrvd'nsas ; ddfvd'nsas, 2; paptivd'nsas ;
mtdhvd'nsas; ririkvd'nsas, 2; vidvd'nsas, 3; cucukv&'nsas ; p&pwd'ntas; sasa-
vd'nsaSyb; sdsahvd'nsas ; sdhvd'nsaa; sasrvd'nsas, 2; tusTUuvd'nsas, 3; iasihi-
vd'hsas, 5 ; sushupvd'nsas. For Wiaktivd'nsas, AV. vi.79.3 (cf. vii.97.3), see BR.
v.168.

Weak form for strong. In i.11.5 (=SV. ii.601), dbibhyusha*
can hardly be construed otherwise than as N.p.m. (for dbibhivdn-
8as) with devd's. Mtlller, Translation, p. 3, takes pdri tasthfahas,
i.6.1, as equivalent to paritasthivd'nsas ; cf. Mahidhara to VS.
xxiii5 : tasthushah vibhakter vyatyayah tasthivdnsah karmdrtham
sthitd rtvijah; but the antithesis seems to be between pdri car
and athd. See A.p.m. Under this category Boilensen, Z.D.M. G.
xxii.604, puts cikittishas (i.73.1) and dadushas (i.54.8 — Say.,
havirdattavantas .... yad vd . . .). Both forms are genitives
s.m.

Nominative and Accusative Plubal Nbutbb.

There seems to be no example of a form in -vdnsi.

Accusative Plubal Masculine.

Here belong : jagmushas; cikittishas, 2 ; jigyushas, 2 ; d&p-
fishos; mtdhushasy 3 ; vidushas; sedushas; tasthushas, v.53.2 :
ix.19.6 : and i.6.1 (A. p.m. rather than Ab.s.n., on account of
pdri).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

514 0. R. Lanman, [ya/w-stems.

INSTRUMENTAL AND GENITIVE PLURAL MASCULINE.

Instrumental : jdgrvddbhis, 3.

Genitives : dddpushdm; jigyfahdm; dadtishdm; mfdhtishdm;
vidHshdm; pupruvfohdm, yat. Br. ii.2.2*.

OOMPAEATITBS IN YA&S.

These stems have the form -ydris in the strong cases, and -y<u
in the weak. No middle form occurs. They are declined only in
the masculine and neuter ; the feminine is formed by adding f to
the weak stem (p. 367). We find tdmyans and tdvyans, ndvtyans
and ndvyans, paniyans and pdnyans, sdhiyans and sdhyans, side
by side.

Benfey, Gram. p. 810, note 5, mentions kaniyas-am as a strong
case-form from a weak stem (for kaniydns-am). It occurs thrice
in the MBh. Like it is kaniyasau. BR. refer both forms to an
o-stem (kaniyasa-m). Both are at all events by origin transition-
forms. Compare the stems preydnsa, preyasay and compounds.

Nominative Singula* Masculine.

The N.s.m. in -dn occurs 56 times (from 20 stems). It appears
in the samhitd as ~dnp once (x.90.3, jyd'ydnp ta) ; cf. the sandhi
of the AV. at xiii.4.46,47. For the rest, it is treated just as the
N.s.nx of -vans, and appears as -tin before vowels in the interior
of zpdda four times (before a-, iv.30.1: vii.98.1; before i-, v.41.12:
viii.1.6) ; but as -dn before vowels at the end of zpdda nine times
(e. g., before r-, ill 0.7 : vi.12.5).

Enumeration: dtavydn, 2 ; 6jiydn, 2 ; k&ntydn; j&vtydn, 5 ; jyd'ydn, 1 ; tfrtydn;
t&vtydn, 3; tdvydnjB; dh&viydn; naviydn, 3; rndnhtydn; y&jtydn, 15; ySdhiydn;
vdniydn, 2 ; v&rtydn ; v&sydn, 2 ; vkdiydn \ priydn, 2 ; a&hfydn, 2 ; ah&bhtydn.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

Here belong 82 forms (from 16 stems) : r'jiyas; Sjiyas; kdniyas,
2; jyd'yas, 2; tdvtyas; ddviyas; drd'ghiyas, 5; ndviyas^ 12 ;
ndvyas, 7 ; nbdiyas, 3 ; preyas; bh&'yas, 7 ; bhil'yas-bhilyas;
vdrtyas, 14 ; vdrshtyas; vdsyas, 20 ; svd'diyas, 3.

In i. 105.15c?, the metre calls for the longer grammatical form
ndviyas instead of the shorter equivalent ndvyas; similarly, in
vi.30.la, for bhdviyas (not bh-d'tas — cf. i.83.1), instead of bhuyas.
For ndv[f]ya8 in i.61.13&, see p. 338 med.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

Here belong: jyd'ydnsam; tdvydnsam; drd'ghtydnsam; n4v-
ydnsam; pdnydmam ; pdpiydnsam ; preydnsam; from AV.,
vdrshtydnsarn, ix.6.19 : xv.11.5 ; sdhiydnsam, xviLl-5. For
kaniyas-am^ see above.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ls.m.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 515

Instrumental Singula* Masculine and Neuter

Masculines : jdviyasd, 2; ndvyasd, vi.6.1 ; bhd'yasd.

Neuters: titty cud; tvdkshtyasd; ndvfyasd, 3; ndvyasd, 4;
pdnyasd, 2 ; bhdvtyasd; bhti'yasd (iv.24.9Jw) ; vdsyasd; vdsyasdr
vasyasd; sdhiyasd, 2.

Dative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

Masculines : tdvyase; ndvtyase; pdniyase; pdnyase: sdnyase;
sdhtyase (read sdhyase, i. 71.4c) ; sdhyase; bdltyase, AV. iii.29.3.
Neuters : ndvtyase; ndvyase, 10 ; sdnyase, 2.

Ablative and Genitive Singular Masoulinb and Nbuter.

Ablatives : . (masc.) tdvfyasas; rdbhyasas; sdhiyasas, 2 ; sdh-
yasas, 2 ; (neut.) bhti'yasas.

Genitives : (masc.) kdniyasasy 2 ; jydfyasas; tdvyasas; ndvfr
yasas; ndvyasas; bhU'yasas; (neut.) ndvyasas, 2.

Locative and Vocative Singular Masculine. '
Locative : sdhfyasi, 2. Vocatives : djiyas; jyd'yas.

Nominative Plural Masculine.

?re belong : pj
bM\

Here belong: pr'eydn&as; from AV., ti'kshniydnsas, i\iA9Abis;
hti'ydnsas, vri.60.7.

Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter
Here belongs ndvydnsi, nom., i.38.3a (catalectio ?).

Accusativb Plural Masculine.

Here belong: kdnlyasas; nedtyasas, 2; bhH'yasasy^\ vdsyasasy
14; vdhtyasas; vdrshiyasas, AV. vil36.2.

Genitive Plural Masculine.

Instead of the masc. ndvyasdm, we find the fem. form ndvyas-
indm (marittdm) at the end of v.53.10fl (7 syll., catalectic — Gr.
-aam)y and of v.58.1fl (11 syll.). The metre is chargeable with
the irregularity.

STEMS IN VANT AND MANT.

The stems formed by the suffixes vant and mant are declined
entirely alike, and it has therefore seemed best not to treat them
in separate sections. The forms from stems in vant are given
case r>y case under category A ; and those from stems in manty
under category B.

These stems are declined only in the masculine and neuter.
The feminine is formed by adding % to the weak stem (p. 867).
The stem in vant, mant seems, however, to be used sometimes as
a feminine ; thus, according to Gr., we have : pdpvatdtdnd, i.26.6 :
ix.1.6 (I have taken the two words adverbially — see p. 480);

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

516 C. R. Lanman, [yant, mant-stems.

havishmatd devdtdtd> Ll28.2c; rdthavate prdpastoye, i. 122.11c?
(the metre demands -vatyai). It may be questioned whether these
are syntactical or formal peculiarities ; or due to a simple disre-
gard of grammatical gender (cf. brhate, ix.15.2; 96.4: AY.
xiv.2.72; ndmabibhratf dtithis, xv.13.6).

These stems show the distinction of strong and weak in the
retention of the nasal in the strong cases and its rejection in the
weak. Several instances of the confusion of this distinction are
probable.

Weak form for strong. The most probable instance seems to
me to be tohumdti ytithd' (for h&humdnti^ A.p.n.), iv.2.18. Not
improbable is x.59.1, sthd'tdreva krdtumaid rdthasya {for krdtu-
mantd, N.d.m.) : * Discerning are the two guides as it were of
the wagon;' figuratively for the eyes of the body. Gr. makes
indrdvato a N.p. in iv.27.4, rjipyd tm bidrdvato nd bhujyfan |
$yen6 jabhdra; see Ueb. i.134.

Strong for weak. There is no certain instance. The possible
or supposed ones— : prdyasvantas, havUhmanto8y vadhti 'manias^
dyumantd* — are discussed below; see Ap.m. Kuhn, Beitr&ge,
ih.475, proposes vd'java[?i]tas in vl 5 0.1 la, taking it, I suppose,
as G.s.m. This form is certainly demanded by the cadence, and
perhaps it once stood in the text as N.p.m. with t&9 being dis-
placed by the formal parallelism of the genitives. Rather than
rdthava[n]te> Ll22.ll, read -vatyai.

Unlike participles, these stems do not shift the accent to the
ending when oxy tone ; e. g. nrvdtd, revdtas — cf. jdnate, tujatds.

Transition to the a-declension. I have met with no instance of
this from vant or manl-stems; but c£ the P&H, himavanto va
pabbato (parvato), Dhammapada 304, and Kuhn, Pdli-gram. p. 76.

Transitions (?) from the an-declension. The stem maghdvan has
several supplementary middle forms from maghdvant in the Rik:
maghdvdn, once; -vadbhtSy once; -vadbhya*> 19; -vatsu, 8. So
sahd'van makes sahd'vdn, 2.

Similarly the stem yfivan has the supplementary form yHvat
(A.s.n., i.111.1: x.39.8), both times in places where the regular
form yiivd would be excluded by the metre: e. g. tdkshafi
pitfbhydm rbhdvo yuvad vdyah. Cf. an-stems, N.A.s.n. So in
Sutmrn&dhy&ya, vii.4 (Ind. Stud, xiv.6), occurs yuvdtas, A.p.m.

The I.s. m. varimdtd, i.108.2, is rightly referred by BR., vii.
1800, to varimdn. The Sanskrit form varimnd' would not fill
out the verse. Cf. da-dhan-vdt-as, p. 513.

Some of these supplementary forms are probably forms of tran-
sition to the vantf-declension. For some, the N.s.m. may have
served as the point of departure. Cf. maghdvd with maghdvdn
r-y wdvdn y- (1.36.10) and dadhanvd'n y- (ix.107.1) with -vd y- of
the VS. (xxxiv.26 : xix.2) — Pr. iii.135. See also Zeitsch, xxiv.53.

Conversely, the stem drvant has two forms from drvan: drvd>
21 : drvdnam.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 617

NOMDTATTVB SlNOULAB MaSOTJUNB.

A. The N.8.m. in -vdn occurs 102 times (from 89 stems).

B. The N.s.m. in -mdn occurs 100 times (from 29 stems).
These forms are treated in the samhitd quite like those from

stems in -vdm; see p. 512.

The form -vdi/l occurs in the interior of *pdda 50 times : before a-, 22 times, as
▼.28.4 (and at the end of i/70.5a, aksharapankti) ; before t-, 7 times, as iv.4.1 ;
before o-, 11 times, as riAlA ; before r-, i.189.6: ii.25.3: iv.16.1; 26.1: x.64.16;
before d-, i.84.9 : viii.86.4 ; before e-, iv.2.5 : z.3.7 ; before o-, i.173.6. At the
end of a pdda we have -vdn before vowels, 8 times, as iii.39.4: vi.37.l ; and
exceptionally in the interior of a pdda (Pr&t. iv.3l) at i.23.23: iv.16.9: z.9.9;
90.3. The sandhi is -vd4i before c-, >-, p- (ch-) ; e. g. vii.20.1 : ix.90.3 : L96.1 : and
•vdn before U; as i.30.14.

In like manner, -mdfl occurs in the interior of a pdda 47 times : before a-, 22
times, as iv.2.5 ; 41.1 ; before *-, 12 times, as ix.2.9 ; before «-, 4 times, as
vii.71.4; before r-, vi.18.2 : ix.96.13 ; 97.48; 110.11: x.89.5 ; before dr, i.12.9:
ix.44.4 : x.98.3 ; before <l-, ix.68.8. At the end of a pdda, we have -mdn before
vowels in iL12.12 : vii.85.4 : x.8.2. We find -mM before c-, i.55.1.

The fact that drvdn stands in the sarhhUd as drvM (i. 163. 13, before a-;
ix.97.25, before *-) does not seem to me to justify the assumption that arvd is the
nominative to arvant (Mailer, Translation, p. 56). The sandhi is perfectly regular.
We have, to be sure, the supplementary nom. arvd ; so maghdvdn and maghavd ;
sahd'vdn and sahd'vd. %

A. The forms are: atohanvd'n; agnivd'n; dngirasvdn, 2; dnnavdn; dpavfra-
vdn ; dmavdn, 4 ; drvdn, 2 ; dtffrvdn ; iddvdn ; ishdvdn ; fghdvdn, 2 ; etdfvdn ;
katehi'vdn, 4 ; fohapd'vdn, 2 ; ksh&pdvdn, 3 ; ghfntvdn ; jdnivdn ; tdpasvdn ;
tarshidfvdn; tdvasvdn; t&vishtvdn; td^vdn; tuvtrdvdn, 2; tvd'vdn, 9; dahsdnd-
vdn, 2 ; ddJcshindvdn, 2 ; ddtehindvdn, 2 ; ddtravdn ; dd'navdn ; dd'svdn, 3 ; dur-
hdndvdn, 2; devdvdn; devdfvdn ; dyumndvdn ; ndmasvdn, 6; niyiUvdn, 12;
nVlavdn ; pdyaavdn, 2 ; pavUravdn ; pdviravdn ; pastidvdn ; pfoarhdhivdn ;
pfohanvd'n ; praj<Pvdn, 4 ; prdyasvdn, 6 ; pravatodn ; prahtfvdn ; bh&gavdn, 2 ;
maghivdn; matavdn; rnatsardvdn; mdnasvdn; mariitvdn, 12 ; mdhasvdn; mdyd'-
vdn; md'JUndvdn, 2; mehdndvdn; ydfasvdn; ydtumd'vdn; rdbhasvdn; rdsavdn;
reod'n, 10: v&'javdn; vdjintvdn, 3; vivakvd'n; vivdsvdn; vr'shanvdn, 3 ; vr'sh-
nidvdn; f&ctvdn, 2: parddvdn; fdfvdn; fipravdn; fiprintvdn; fimtvdn, 5; sdkhi-
vdn ; aabhd'vdn ; s&rasvdn ; s&hasvdn, 3 ; sdhdfvdn, 2 ; sdhdvdn, 2 ; autd'vdn, 2 ;
iOtortd'vdn ; stavd'n, 3 ; avadhd'vdn, 9 ; svddhttivdn ; stiarvdn, 3 ; h&rwdn, 4 ;
hitd'vdn; hemid'vdn.

B. The forms are: abdimdfn; dvimdn; apdnimdn; UTwmdn; udanimd'n;
rbhwndfn, 2 ; kak&dmdn, 2 ; krdtumdn, 4 ; garfamdn, 2 ; gdmdn, 3 ; t&vishmdn,
12; tvdsktrmdn; toUhton&n; dyumd'n, 11; dhrdjlmdn, 2; nadanumd'n; parafu-
mdfn; papumdfn; pitumd'n, 4; barhishmdn; mddhumdn, 20; vdsumdn; virbk-
mdn; vrshtimd'n, 2; fdrwndn; poctohmdn; sushwndfn; havishmdn, 19 ; MrCmdn.

It seems necessary to read 1110.9^ with elision and orasis:
rbhumindra citrdm d' darehi rd'dhah, text -md'n indra.

The resolution hatfishmaan, i. 12 7. 10c?, is inadmissible; the
pdda is catalectic (Y sylL).

If we refer tuvtrdvdn, with BR, to tuvtrdvant, for tuvUrava-
vant, the shortened form would be paralleled by kdnikrat etc.
(p. 505) ; but see a#-stems, N.s.m.

NOXUfATIVB AND AOOUBATTVE SlNGULAB NETJTBB.

There are 204 forms in -vat (from 51 stems), and 81 forms in
-mat (from 21 stems).

. vol. x. 69

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

518 C. R. Lanman, [vant, mani-stema

A. The forme are: apdthihavat; dmavat, 6; arrival, 2; apvavat, 2; opedfat
14: dtmanvdt; dvr'tvat; irdvat, 2; r'ghdvai; etd'vat, 5; luhatiavat; gopd'wi;
grAbhanavat ; ghrtdvat, 9; candrdvat; td'vat, 4; tokdvat; tvdfvat; daJahinmi:
dyumndvat, 2; dkdnd'vat; dhvasmanvdt; ndmaavat; ni'lavat; nrvdt, 12; padvdL
2; pdyasvat, 2; pastidvat; pfshadvat; prcyd'vcti, 10; barhdndvcU ; yd'vall \
yuvat, 2 (p. 516); rafAavat 3; rdsavat; rev&t, 23; vay&uuul; vayimdvat; vd'j*
vat, 4; iripf'toaf ; tt'vawai; vishdvat; virdvat. 18 j fxU&vat. 4; fapfcfart; 2:
pdpveU. 22; fdfvat-fofvai ; sah&aravat, 3 : aiAawaf; Jifuwai; aiarvat, 6; Ainaaya-
vat, li.

B. The forms are : abhisktimdi ; rbhumdt ; ketumdt ; krdtumat ; lakwmdi ;
gdmat, 23; jydtiehmat; tvishimat; dasmdt; dd'nwnat; dyvmndt, 16; nttffcun&,
paptwna*, 2 ; j»tama/ ; pushtimdt, 2 ; fnddhumat, 18 ; manyumdt ; ydmmat, 3 ;
rayim<i*; rtbumat, 2; awutimaU 2.

BR. take gnd'vas as N.s.n. with sajdtiam, ii. 1.5, for gnrfvat;
Weber would read gndvas^ as voc.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

There are 86 forms in -vantam (from 43 stems), and 93 in
-mantam (from 19 stems).

A. The forms are : apidhd'navantam ; aptipdvantam, 2 ; rfrvontom, 7 ; afra-
i/crotom, 4 ; asthanvdntam ; dtmanvdntam ; indrasvantam ; Ofrjasvantam ; tfrnd-
vantam ; ctd'vantam ; Snasvantam ; djasvantam ; dmanvantam ; omidfvamtam ;
kakskfvantam, 4 ; ghrtdvantam, 8 ; dd'svantam ; devdvantam, 2 ; dhdrufvantam,

2 ; dht'vantam ; nrvdntam ; padvdntam ; pdrasvantam ; prajd' 'vantam, 3 ; Ma'«-
vantam ; mar&tvantam, 1 ; mahishvantam ; rdtnavantam ; revaniam, 2 ; raptf-
vantam, 2 ; vayd'vantam ; vd'javantam, 2 ; vd'ravantam ; vivanantam ; vird-
vantam, 1 ; vr'ahanvantam ; patdvantam, 2 ; fdpvantam, 2 ; aacand'tvaUam ;
sdrasvantam, 2 ; hdrivantam, 2 ; hastavcmtam ; hiranyavantam.

B. The forms are: rbhurndntam; kdnvamantam; hetumdniam; hshumantam,
5; gdmantam, 23 ; jydtishmantam, 2; tdvishtmantam ; dyumdniam, 16; ituftt-
m&ntam ; pitumdntam ; bdndhumantam ; bhdnumdntam ; mddhwnaniam, 25 :
vdsumantam, 7 ; vd'pCmantom ; vrshtimdniam ; prushtim&ntam, 2 ; fat&fanonAim,
2; hdtrmantam.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Neuteb.

A. There are 25 masculines (from 14 stems), and 10 neuters
(from 8 stems).

B. There are 14 masculines (from 9 stems), and 5 neuters (from

3 stems).

A. Masculines: drvatd, 10; dpvdvatd; udanvdtd; f'kvatd; kakshfvatd; niyut-
vatd,2; nrvdtd; mar&toatd, 2 ; y&pasvatd; revdtd; vtpvddevidvatd ; vish&edtd;
Cubhrd'vatd; sdhasvaid.

Neuters: etd'vatd; candrdvatd; prcy'd'vatd, 2; barhdndvaid; vivdsvatd; sfrtfid'-
void ; hdritvatd ; fdfvatd, 2.

B. Masculines : gdmaid ; jyStishmatd ; divitmatd ; dyumatd ; -bhfaJUimdtd ;
varimdtd (see p. 516); vdatmuUd, 4; virtiJcmatd, 2; havishmatd, 2.

Neuters : divitmatd ; virdkmatd ; havishmatd, 3.

In i.26.6 and ix.1.6, 1 take pdpvatd as neuter, adverbially — not
with tdndj which as a noun would be fem. In i. 12 8. 2c, however,
havUhmatd seems to go with the fem. devdtdtd; see p. 516 top.

Dative Singular Masculine and Neuteb.

A. There are 51 masculines (from 21 stems), and 4 neuters
(from 3 stems).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

D.s.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda, 519

B. There are 13 masculines (from 1 stems), and no neuters.

A. Masculines: drvate, 10; dpvdvate; kaksMvate, 3; ddk-
shindvate; ddkshindvate; datvdte; dd'svate, 2 ; niyutvate (i. 135.1);
ptehanvdte, 2 ; marutvatey 8 ; md'vate, 6 ; yuvdfvate; rathavate;
vivdsvate, 2; vtvasvate; pddvate; pdpvate, 3; sdhasvate, 3;
s&nrtd'vate; sHarvate; hdrivate.

Neuters : padvdte, 2 ; revdte; pdpvate.

B. Masculines : gdmate ; cdkshushmate ; tvishimate ; divit-
rnate; dyumdte; barhwhmate, 3 ; havish?aatey 5.

In i. 122.11c?, both grammar and metre favor the reading
rdthavatyai; and this I would suggest in place of rdthavate
( prdpastaye). In vi.17.14, Gr. reads dyumdte i-, p. -tah %-.

Ablative Singular Masculine.

A. Here belong : tud'vatas (viii.45.35) ; vivdsvatas; vr'shnid-
vatas.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. There are 88 masculines (from 30 stems), and 6 neuters
(from 4 stems).

B. There are 24 masculines (from 4 stems), and one neuter.

A. Masculines: drvaias, 9: apvdvatas, 2; kakaktfvaku; jd'vatas ; tvd'vatas, 8;
dacOuawdUu ; ddfsvatas ; devdvatas, 2 ; dWvatas ; dhVwtas-dhivatas ; niy&faatas ;
nrvdtas, 2 ; prcyd'vatas, 4 ; marittvaias^ 2 ; md'vatas, 3 ; mehdndvatas ; yafasvaUu,
2 : revdtas, 7 ; vdyasvatas, 2 ; vd'javatas ; vivasvatas, 19 ; vivasvatas, 2 ; vtrdvatas ;
Qcicivatas ; pdpvaku, 3; sdrasvatas ; sahasvatas, 2; sutd'vatas, 4; stirdvatas;
svadhd'vatas ; h^sht vatas.

Neuters : etd'vaku, 3 ; y&'vatos ; vish&vdias ; gd^vatas.

B. Masculines: kdwmatas, 2; gdmatas, 19; dyumdtas; havishmatas, 2. Neu-
ter: gdmatas.

For dadhanvdtasy cf. p. 518.

Locative Singular Masculine and Neuter,

A. There are 18 masculines (from 9 stems): drvatiy 2; ddk-
shindvati; nrvdti; pastidvati; ydpasvati; vdnanvati, 2; vivds-
vati, 3 ; vivasvati; paryand'vati, 6.

Neuters: dpvdvati; p&mivati; siiarvati.

B. There is but one example, g6mat% masa, 8.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

L In the Rik, the vocative of stems in -vant and -mant ends in
-vas and -mas — and not, as in Sanskrit; in -van and -man. The
like ending in -as is seen elsewhere only in the vocatives cikitvas,
titirvas, didivas, mtdhvas (p. 513), ojtyas, jydyas (p. 515), rtdvas,
evaydvas, prdtaritvas> mdtaripvas, khidvas, and pumas.

A. Here belong 107 forms (from 14 stems): rshtvas; gndvas;
tavishivas, 2 ; niyutvas,2; marutvas,3; rayivas,3; vajrivas, 15;
viravas; pakttvas; pactvas, 13; sarasvas; sahasvas, 7; svadhdvas,
19; harivas, 38. Here Gr. puts vibhdvas, L58.9; it ought to be
referred to vibhd'van. For gad' vas, ii.1.5, see A.s.n. In x.74.5,
BR read p<jc? vas for pddvas.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

\ C. R. Lanman, [vant, man* stems.

a the following repetitions of Rik-passages, we find the form
i: VS. xxvi.21 (RV. i.15.3): vil35 (iii.51.7): xviii.74 (vi.5.7).
b interesting to see how the S&maveda, at L 851, in its rendering
RV. vi.44.1, avoids the antique and no longer understood form
) rayivo — namely, by the Dad variant, {yd) rayirh vo. In
mine Atharvan verses, there is not a single vocative in -va$ or
is: svadhdvas occurs in a Rik-passage (xviii.l.26=RV. x.11.8):
1 for bhagavas, xix.34.8 (??), the ed. reads samdbhavas. The
n bhagavas occurs VS. xvi.52-3: TS. iv.1.10*: Ait. Br. iii.20:
I: vhL24; bhagos, <>t.Br. xiv.5.4*: 7.3\ C£ bhos9 p. 509;
i aghos (aghavas).

6. Here belong 8 forms (from 6 stems) : tuvishmas; cfyumas;
numas; pucishma*; havUhmas; mantumas, L42.5 : vi.56.4:
34.6=SV. ii.441.

L A. The modern form in -van occurs also sporadically in the
: as follows: arvan, i. 163. 1,3,4,8, 11 (a well-known late hymn):
2.6; pavasdvan, i.62.11; patdvan, vi.47.9. Since tbe pada
is path-van (cf. Prat, ix.10), it is better to take this word from
%-vant, and not, with Gr., from pata-\-avant.
Excepting x.11.8 (above), the only Rik-verses containing ft
ative in -vas which are repeated in the Atharvan are RV. v.42.4
1 x.84.1; and in both, the later text modernizes the form to
n (c£ p. 513), and reads harivan (AV. vii.97.2) and marvtvan

7. iv.31.1). Besides these the AV. has: vdjinivan, iv.88.6,7;
hnydvan, v.25.8; avadhdvan, v.l 1.4,5,11.

I. There is no example of a voc. in -man.

NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND VOCATIVE DUAL MASCULINE.

. A. Here belong 20 forms (from 18 stems): dngirasvantd:

isvantd; drvantd, 2; tndravantd; kdpdvarUd; kipavantd;

irmavantd; ndmasvantd; niyHtvantd; pavitravantd; mariit-

\td; mitrd'-vdrunavantd; vd'iavantd; vishnuvantd; vydeat

tid, 2; pdpvantd; pd'tavantdr; sdptivantd. '

\. Here belong: arcimdntd; rbhumdntd; krdtumantd; va-

I'rnantd.

L A. Here belong: ashthtvdntau; rdmanvaniau; and from

., ashthtvdntau, 5 ; yd'vantau, xiLS.l ; sdtiasvantau, xix.32.5;

ihdvantaitj voc, v. 9. 8.

Teak form for strong: krdtumatd, x.59.1 ; see p. 516.

Ablative and Genitive Dual Masculine.

i. Ablative : ashthtvddbhydm. Genitives : vdjinivatos ;

fvatos; 8drasvativato8.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine.

l. There are 91 forms (from 46 stems).
I. There are 53 forms (from 17 stems).

The forms are: aksJianvdnUu ; dnasvanku; dmavanias, 3; drvanta*, 11;
mrUas; (fyt'rvantas; iddvantas ; indravantas, 1 ; tfrjasvantou ; Snasvamku;
it'vantat; kdrnavanlas; ghftdvanta*, 2; caeWlavantas ; <fc£JWW$4wjnto#, 2 ;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.V.jxm.] Noun- Inflection vn (he Veda. 521

dd'numwnku, 2; dr&vina$vanta$ ; dhtfvamku; n&masvanUu; niybtoantas; n^vdn-
tas ; patnfoantas, 3 ; padudntas ; pavitravantaa, 2 ; pd'jawantae ; pushtd'vantas ;
ptehanv&ntas ; prqjd'rcmtas, 2; pr&yasvantas, 10; pravdtvantaa ; bhdgavcmku, 3;
mar&tvantaa; yctf&dvanku; vacand'vantas; varmanvanias; viravanta*; vrct'vanias ;
CaJctivafUas ; pfyvantas, 4 ; pimivantas ; sdptivantas ; mUd'vanUu^ 1 ; wadhdvantas,
voc. ; suarvantaa; Mmdvantas; hfshivantas.

B. The forms are : aftjimdntas ; ishumanias ; fthtimdnku, 3 ; kshumdntas, 2 ;
jyotishmantas, 2 ; tvishtmantas ; dyumdntcu^; rnddhximantas, 12 ; mtdhfohmantaa ;
ydvamanUu; rayimantas; vadh&'mantaa (L 126.3); vd'fimantas, 2; mumantas ;
sflauim&ntaa; hamhum&nttu ; havishmantas, 18.

Weak form for strong : indrdvatas, iv.27.4 ; see p. 516.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE PLUBAL NeUTEB.

The paradigms end in -v&nti, -mdnti. We find ghrtdvdnti,
ix.96.13c/ papumd'nti, dl.l.d; 92.6a. In every case, the d is
eighth in a pdda of eleven syllables, and the pada reads -dnti
(Fratw ix.27,30). The SV. variants (L532,526) of the first two
passages also read -dtUi. Cf. p. 510.

Weak form for strong: kshumdti (yHthd'), iv.2.18; see p. 516.
The AV. reads d* ydtheva ksMm dti (!) papvt akhyat, xviii.3.23.

Accusative Plubal Masculine.

A. There are 54 forms (from 28 stems).

B. There are 16 forms (from 8 stems).

A. The forms are : drraias, 13 ; indrdvataa (i.lOi.l) ; r tviy&vaku ; hreand'-
vatas; j&nivatas; tapasvatas, 2 ; tfehyd'vataa ; tvd/vataa12; nrvafewf2; p&tntvaku,
2 ; pasiidvaiaa, 2 ; poshid'vatas ; prajd'vatas, 2 ; bhangurd'vafas, 3 ; yfyasvaku ;
ydtumd'wtas ; rdbha&iatas; rayivdias; revdtae; v&nanvaku ; vrd'vatas, 2; far-
yand'vatas ; fa^vaUu^ 6 ; fimtvaku ; sutd'vcrtas ; sfoirte'vatas ; htra^yavatas ;
hhhasvatas.

B. The forms are: gdmaias, 8; jydtishmatas ; pr&shtimaku ; mddhumatou ;
radh&'matas (vi.27.8: viil.57.17); rtr6*77iafew ; afoiwn&tcu; suastimatas. For
dywndta i-, p. -taA, read -te, vi.17.14.

Strong form for weak. Possibly prdyasvanto (nd satrd'ca d'
gataY x.77.4e7, is an A.p. : ' Come hither to (us), who are united,
(and) who have, as it were, your favorite morsels ready for you.'
Still less probable is it that havUhmanto in verse 1 is an A.p.
Has not an effort at formal parallelism (cf. lb, 3c, 4c?, 5b) dis-
turbed the text in 4<f, and displaced an original prdyasvatof
At vi.27.8, Muller's first and second editions and Aufrecht's first
have indeed vadhtl'mantas; but Aufrecht's second reads vadko!-
matas, and so BR. The Atharvan, at xviii.l.57c, reads dyumd'n
dyumantd (I so MSS. and ed.) d' vaha — a curious imitation of
verse 56c and RV. x.16.12. The impossible accent seems to be a
blind imitation of upatds; we must read dyumdntas or dyumdtas.

Instrumental Plubal Masculine and Nbuteb.

A. Masculines: drvadbhis, 10; ddkshindvadbhis; pdtntvadbhis;
maghdvadbhis; rdbhasvadbhis; revddbhis; vd'javadbhis; pdp
v'adbhis; pimivadbhu; mtdsomavadbhis. Neuter: ghftdvad-
bhis, 2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

522 C. R. Lanman, [Stems in

B. Masculines: rshtimddbhis ; krtdumddbhis ; gdmadbhit;
barhishmadbhis ; bhdnumddbhis ; vidytinmadbhis ; haviahmad-
bhis. Neater: mddhumadbhis.

Dative Plubal Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculines: maghdvadbhyas, 19; from AV., bhdgavad-
bhyas, v.31.11; mil'javadbhyas, v.22. 14; sdmavadbhyas, xviiL 4. 73.

B. Masculines: ydtumddbhyas (Gr., -flAiaa), vii. 104.20,25; from
A V., mdtrmddbhyas, xii. 1.60. Neuter: vibhumddbhyas.

Genitive Plubal Masculine.

A. Here belong: drvatdm, 4; ddkshindvatdm ; bhangurd-
vatdrn; ydtumd'vatdm, 2 ; pdpvcrtdm, 4 ; pimtvatdm; sutd'vatdm;
from A v., datvdtdm, iv.3.4 ; himdvatdm, vi.95.3.

B. The Rik has no example. The AV. has gdmatdm, iv.36.6.

Locative Plural Masculine.

A. Here belong: dmavatsu; drvatsu; ywhmd'vatsu; magha-
vatsu, 7, and x.93.14 (Gr., maghdshu).

B. Here belongs dyumdteu.

STEMS IN VAN, MAN, AN

The stems formed by the suffixes van, man, and an are declined
alike, and it has therefore seemed best to treat them in a single
section. The maw-stems, however, show peculiarities not shared
at all, or only to a slight extent, by those in van and an : viz.,
the ecthlipsis of m in the Ls., the dropping of the ending in the
L.B., and the long -d of the samhitd in the N.A.p.n.

These stems are declined for the most part only in the masculine
and feminine. For the few feminine forms from n-stems and for
the regular ways of forming the feminine, see below. The
masculine and neuter forms from stems in van are given case by
case under category A ; those from stems in man, under category
B ; and those from stems in an, under category C.

The A-stems. The stems in van are chiefly verbal adjectives
and the forms are almost exclusively masculine. Only about a
dozen stems show neuter forms: two adjectives, patvan and
vivdsvan; and the substantives tugvan, 1 and 2 dhdnvan, pdrvan,
arparndn, snd'van, turvdn, ddvdn, an-arvdn, and somapdrvan.

The B-stems. The stems in man may be pretty equally divided
between masculines and neuters. The latter are verbal abstracts;
the former, nomina agentis and compounds of the neuters.

The C-stems. The stems in an are masculines and neuters.
They are not numerous.

The formation of several stems is not wholly clear: e. g.,
rjtpvan (A ?) ; ptrshdn (C), whose sh is perhaps a part of the
suffix. Since the v of yuvan (A) is of merely phonetic origin
(yu-v-an) the stem ought to be put under C. Under C belongs
pu-dn; so virbhv-dn, pdrijm~an.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

van, man, an.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 528

Supplementary themes. The forms of the n-stems are supple-
mented oftener than any others by forms from auxiliary themes.
This fact is remarkably illustrated in the N.A.s.n. of Osteins.
CI Pftn. vil.63. The aw-stems are generally oxytone ; the others,
barytone.

One stem appears in quadruple form : dsia, dsdn, d's, and dsd'
(a transition-stem, seen in the adverbially accented dsayd'). Two
stems appear in triple form: dhan, dhas, dhar; il'dhan, li'dhas,
il'dhar. With dsia, dsdn, d's, cf. yiUhd, ydshdn, yiX's (TS.
vi.3.111'4); udakd,uddn,tid; ucdn, up (Orient und Occ. ii.242) ;
doahdn, dds. Analogous, moreover, are the groups: okshdn,
dkshi; asthdn, dsthi; dadhdn, dddhi; sakthdn, adktni; and like-
wise cakdny cdkrt; yakdn, ydkrt; asdu and dsrt (cf. p. 463, and
TS. vii.4.91 ; the irregular t may be due to the false analogy of
$dhrt and ydkrt). Further, we may add : dr~van, -vcuit; r'k-van,
-vant; maghd-van, -want; sahd'-van, -vant; dadhi-krd'-van, -krd1.
The feminine ydshan is supplemented by ydshand and ydshd.

The stems in van, man, and an distinguish the weak cases from
the strong by lengthening the a of the suffix in the strong.

Weak form for strong. Several stems, however, are constant
exceptions to this rule and always keep the short vowel in the
strong cases. They are : aryamd'n, piUhd'n, indrdptishd' n, somd-
pteh&'n, rbhukshd'n, and the fem. ydshdn. Moreover, a few other
stems show now the short vowel and now the long.

A. The N.d.m. yHrndy ix.68.5, points to an exceptional weak
form yuvdn-d, rather than to ytivdnd. Similar is the N.p.m.
maghdnaa, vi.44.12, which stands for maghdvdn-as. In x.92.14,
Roth takes anarvd'n-am as A.s.1 with dditim. The d may be
justified on metrical grounds, as penultimate of Skjagatt In AV.
xix.35.5, we have ye kr'tvdno devdkrtds; but krtndvo has been
suggested.

B. The stem tmd'n makes tmd'n-am, -dy -<?, tmd'ni and tmd'n
(but c£ tmd'nam and dtmd'nam) ; so jemdnd.

C. The stems ukshdn and vr'shan waver between d and d. See
A.8., N.dM and N.p.m. From the stem tdkshdn I can cite no
strong form with d.

Besides the strong forms with d in the written text, the metre
points to forms with d where the text has d. This fact was
touched upon by Kuhn, Beitrdge, iii.121. I have looked through
all the 642 passages in which the forms of the A.s.m., N.A.V.d.
m., N.p.m., and N.A.p.n. occur with written d in the penult, and
found some 19 pddas whose cadence demands a short d. These
are given under the proper cases : e. g. purutmd'nam, text d,
viil2.385.

Strong for weak. There is no certain instance. Possibly
jarimd'nas stands for jarimnds; see Ab.s.m. Cf. mahdtmdnas,
A.p.m. ; and whd'sas, o*-stems, A.p.l

These stems show another important peculiarity, namely, the
syncopation of thematic d in the following vocalic weak cases :
the L, D., and Ab.G.s., G.L.d., A.p.m. and G.p. In the L.s. and

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

524 C. R Lanman, [Stems in

in the N.A.d.n. this syncopation is optional in Sanskrit, and never
occurs (with one exception — see L.8.) in the Rik, so that we may
leave these cases out of view.

In Sanskrit, the d of the suffix dn is syncopated in the above-
named cases. This rule holds good also for the Rik. There are
but two exceptions in the written text (ukshdnas and vr'shanas)y
and several disclosed by the metre (see below). The v (d) of
vi-bhv-dn is, indeed, radical rather than suffixal ; nevertheless, the
word is treated as a van-stem so far as syncopation is concerned ;
similarly pdri-j(a)m-an, etc. The combinations of consonants
resulting from syncopation of C-forms are : kn, jfl, dn, dhn, vn,
pn, *hn, sn, hn, kthn, sthn, rdhn, kshn, rshn,jgil.

In Sanskrit, the d of the suffixes vdn and mdn, when these are
preceded by a vowel, is syncopated. This rule holds good neither
for the written text of the Rik, nor for the text as the metre
shows it to have been pronounced. The diaskeuasts have some-
times written the word without syncopation, as it was also
spoken, e. g. mahimdnas, x.54.3 ; they have sometimes written it
with syncopation, conformably to the later orthography, but not
to the spoken text, e. g. sdmah kald$e pcttdydmnd patka, ix.86.16J
(for which the AV., xviii.4.60, has the orthography conformable
to the spoken text, patdydmand) ; or they have written it with
syncopation, conformably also to the spoken text. There are,
then, three cases :

Case I. The text has van, man, an, and the metre confirms it.

Case II. The text has vn, mn, n, and the metre requires or
admits the restoration of the syncopated vowel — v(a)n, m(a)n, (a)n.

Case III. The text has vn, mn, n, and the metre confirms it

The fourth possible case, — that the text should have more than
enough syllables, L e. van, man, an, and the metre require vn, mn,
n, — does not occur.

There are, in the Rik, 65 A-forms (excluding maghSnas, -as,
-dm), 69 B-forms, and 238 C-forms in which the thematic d would
be syncopated according to the rules of the later language. The
sum is 362.

Case L In 48 instances the d appears in the written text
These are: (A) ddvdne, 28; — (B) omdnd; pravddydmand ;
bhUmdnd; bhd'mand; syti'mand; hemdnd; trdmane; dtitmant;
bhU'manas; mahimdnas, 2 ; dd'manas; bhU'manas, 3 ; ytfmanas;
viomanas; — (C) ukshdnas; vr'shanas (RV. iv.2.2 and AV. xi.
2.22) ; updne ?.

Case IL In (362 — 48=) 314 instances, the a is syncopated in
the written text. In 46 of these 314 instances, Gr. proposes to
restore the syncopated a.

II. a. In only 12 instances is this restoration imperative. These
are: (A) rtd'v(a)ne, viii.92.8 ; (B) patdydm(a)nd, ix.86.16; nd'm-
(a)nd, x.77.8 ; aryam{d\ne, text -mn£, iv.3.5 ; dhd,m(a)ne, v.48.1 ;
ad'm(a)nas, vii.86.5 ; dhdfm(a)nas, vii.58.1 ; sd'm(a)nas, ii.23.16 ;
sd,m(a)nassdm(a)nas, ii.23.17; (C) mah(d)nd, text mahnd', iv.
2.1 : x.6.7 ; vrfsh(a)nas, viii.7.88.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

van, man, anJ] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 525

II. b. The remaining 34 of the 46 restorations proposed by Gr.
are at the end of catalectic pddas of 7 or of 11 syllables, which
are thus converted into acatalectic pd das of 8 or of 12. Like the
resolutions of -dm etc. in similar situations, they are not impera-
tively necessary ; but they are admissible. Thus in vii.31.lc, the
text has sdkhdyah somapd'vne; a and b are pddas of 8 syllables,
and all. three may be made uniform by reading sdkhdyah soma-
pdfv(a)ne. CL Kuhn, Beitrdge, iv.195. There are 27 restorar
tions at the end of pddas of 7 syllables : (A) drdv(a)ne, vii.
31.5; vfshapraydv(a)ne, viii.20.9; somapdrv(a)ney vii.3 1.1 ; 32.8;
drdv(a)nas, i.36.15 ; somapdrv(a)nas, vhi.67.7 ; drdv(a)nas, A.p.,
ix.13.9; 61.25; 63.5; rdrdv(a)ndm, viii.39.2 ; vtfaddfv(a)ndm,
i.17.4 ; sahasradd'v(a)ndfn, i.17.5 ; somapd,v(a)ndm, L30.ll ; (B)
dhd'm(a)nd,ix.S9.1: x.166.4; sd'm(a)nd, viii.84.7; usrdydm(a)ne,
iv.32.24a/ dnusra-, 24b; sdfm(a)ne, viii.4.17; 6.47; sushd'm(a)ne,
viii.23.28; 24.28; 26.2; dhd'm(a)ne, viii. 52.11 ; 81.25: ix.24.5 ;
(C) rd'jWnH, text rd'jfid, x.97.22;— further, from the AV.,
dhd'm{a)nd, x.6.7-14 ; sthirddhdm(a)nas, x.4.11 ; nd'm(a)nt9
N.d.n., iv.9.10.

II. c. There are 7 restorations at the end of pddas of 11 sylla-
bles: (A) svadhd'v(a)ne, viL46.1 ; drdv(a)nas, viii.49.10; drd-
v(a)nas, A.p., i.36.16 ; evayd'v(a)nas, ii.34.il; (B) suhdvltund-
m(a)ne, ix.85.6fl (cf. a) ; dhd'm(a)ne, x.76.8 ; dhd'm(a)nas, L87.6.

Case III. In 268 instances the d is syncopated. The forms
are : (A) grd'vnd, 2 ; -a*, 2 ; -dm, 2 ; dadhikrd'vnas, 6 ; prdtar-
yd'vnas; bhilridd'vnas ; yuktdgrdvnas ; sutapd'vne: -as; su-
dd'vne; svadhd'vne; — (B) aryamne, 2 ; -ds, 6 ; jarimne; nd'mnd;
dhindmndm ; mdhimnd', 3 ; -&; -as, 2 ; Mmnas-lomnas; — (O)
akshnds; dpnd, 3 ; -as; dhnd, 3 ; -e, 3 ; -as, 17 ; -dm, 28 ; dsnd' ;
-h; -ds, 3 ; indrdpdshnds; ukshnds, 3 ; udnd', 5 ; -ds, 6 ; ti'dhnas;
janard'jjlas; dadhtid', 3 ; -ds ; pUshnd'; -e, 4 ; -ds, 6 ; prati-
di'vne; mahnd', 32 ; mtirdhnds, 2 ; yaknds; yamdrdjfias; yHshr
nds; rd'jfle, 3 ; -as, 9 ; vr'shnd, 2 ; -e, 34 ; -as, 43 ; -dm, 2 ;
pirshnd', 3 ; -6; -ds, 3.

In 60 instances out of 362, the d is written, or required by the
metre. If we consider only the A and the B-forms (124), we find
that in nearly half of them (54 — from I. and II. a), the d is written
or required, and that in the rest (70) it is syncopated. That is,
in tabular form :

I.

II. a

11. b

n. c

m.

Sua

A

28

1

13

4

19

65

B

17

8

13

3

18

59

C

3

3

1

231

238

48 12 27 7 268 362

Transition to the a-declension. This is common in P&li; cf
Kuhn, PdH-Gr. pp. 73-5. Thus from the form addhdn-am (adh-
vdn-am) comes the stem addhdna — I.s. addhdnena, Dhammapada,
page 263.

vol, x. 70

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

526 C. R. Lanman, [Stems in

A. In L37.1, we read pdrdho (neat.) md'rutam anarvd' nam:
we may regard the last word as a form of transition to the
^declension {anarvd! na-m, A.s.n. ) ; but another explanation has
been offered on p. 330 top. Cf. also Mailer, Translation, p. 56.

If Roth is right in taking cmarv&'Q-am, x.92.14, with dditim ('the inviolable
Aditi' — see p. 523), we may regard this form as the point of departure for the
nominative onantf'na-*, v.61.11 : viii31.12. Here, however, Anan*ana~e seems
to be personified as a deity, * The Inviolable,* so that the mythology as well as
the transition-form would indicate that these two passages belong to the upper
strata of the Yedic deposits. The stem satvana occurs but twice (-dm, x. 11 5.4:
•afo, v.37.4), and as entirely equivalent to the common satvan ; its accent, how-
ever, makes its relation to edtvan doubtful. If these are not regarded as
transition-forms, we must assume the stems anarvdn-a^ satvan-d, as secondary
derivatives from van-stems ; but these are very rare (nivand, vagvana, furvkmna).

In ii.40.6. and vii.40.4, occurs (dditir) anarvd'; this may be
regarded, without undue violence to Veaic grammar, as a femi-
nine nom. sing, to the stem anarvdn; and if so, it may be the
point of departure for the neuter form anarvdrm (L 164.2, cakrdm;
185.3, ddtram), anarvd' being felt as N.s.f. to a stem anarvd' y and
a N.A.8.D. being formed after the analogies of the o-declension.
BR. and Gr., however, refer these forms directly to a stem anarvd.

Six or more stems in van have subsidiary a-forms. Thus
beside r'kvan, fbhvan, tdkvan, tfJcvan, vdkvan, vibhd'van, we
find: rkvd* (x.36.6), r'bhvarm (vi49.9: x.120.6), takvds (viiL
58.13), pikvd-8 (AV. x.6.3), vdkvds (N.p.f., RV. x. 148.5; A.p.£,
iv.19.7), vibhd'va-m (i.148.1). The a-forms are infrequent. Their
relation to the van-stems is somewhat problematic, and perhaps
they are, after all, independent formations. Nevertheless, the
relation of the nominatives r'bhvd and vibhd'vd to the accusatives
r'bhvam and vibhd'vam is strikingly like that of the Pdli nomin-
atives yuvd and muddhd to the accusatives yuvatn and muddham
(Dhammapada, verse 72).

B. There exist beside the man-stems a number of equivalent
ma-stems, which are of sporadic occurrence or of later date.
Compare darmdn with darmdrS (iii.45.2); dhdrman (RV.) with
dhdrma (not till after RV.); fynan with ema-e (VS. xviii.15);
hdman with hdmdya (VS. viiL58) ; djman with djma; vipvdkar-
man-d etc. with vipvdkarmena (only RV. x. 166.4) and Vtssa-
kammena (Dhammapada, p. il7 end); vrsha-karman with vird-
karma-m; priydrdMman (AV. xvii.10) with priyd-dhdmdya.
The stem yd' man is Vedic only ; yd'ma, Vedic and post-Vedic

C. Transition to the o-declension is most frequent with the an-
stems, particularly in the N.A.s.n. (q.v.), where a-forms are exclu-
sively used. In the masc, corresponding to the A.s. plteh&n-am, we
find the transition-nominative sing. pwhdnors (x.93.4), and the G.a.
pHehandsya (with possibly false accent in the unclear hymn x.5,
verse 5). For the incorrect a-ptrshdnds, N.p.m., Ehila to x.103,
the AV. has -nds, vi.67.2. In other instances, the N.A.p.n. may
serve as the point of departure ; see p. 347. Thus pirshdn makes
its N.A.p.n. ptrshd'ni or ptrshd' ; and correspondingly, its L.s.
tfrsMni (RV.) or ptrshi (AV. vii.66.6: xiv.1.55); its dual (due)

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

van, man, an.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 527

pirshe (RV.), and its N.A.s. tftrshdrtn (cf. stsam). Just so dhan
makes dhdni and dhd; and correspondingly, dhn-dm and dhdndm
(viii.22.13). Similarly yHshdn makes yUshd'ni (TBr. Oomm.
11.668 — BR. stem yHsha) ; but in the I.s. we find yHshnd' (VS.
xxv.9) and yHshena (TS. v. 7.20). Starting from the weak forms
dpn-asy ahn-ds9 -£, etc, come the transition-stems dpnay ahnd
(accent), and the forms pHrvdhn^ L.s., x.34.11 ; dpnats, viii.2.2.
Just as the Skt. dharma usurps the place of the Vedic dhdrman,
so vrsha (cf. vusa) supplants vr'shan.

With especial frequency do o-stems take the place of an-stems at
the end of compounds: thus, akshdn, -akshd; ukshdn, mahokshd-m
(£at.Br. iii.4.r); vr'shan, -vxshd-s (AV. v.16). Compare, further,
an-asthdn with an-asthd-s (RV. viii.1.34) and drv-asthd't (9at.Br.
viiL7.2n); brhdcMcshd (N.s.m., RV.) with brhdd-ukshdya (VS.
viii8); rdljan with adhirdjd-m (x.128.9); saptdbhis with tri-
saptais; etc.

Transitions from the o-declension. See nikdmabhis, I. p.m., and
above p. 347.

Accent. In the weak cases of oxytone stems, if the d! is synco-
pated, the accent is thrown forward upon the case-ending. A.
Nearly all the van-stems are barytone, and no instance of an
accented case-ending occurs. B. Of the man-stems, the neuters
are barytone; but the masculine verbal abstracts and nomina
agentis are oxytone, and accented case-endings are not infre-
quent: e. g. mahimn-d'y aryamn-i, klomn-ds. C. Of the an-
stems, some 15, masculine and neuter, are oxytone, and accented
case-endings often occur: e. g. majj}fi-d\ piXshn-'e, mtirdhn-ds,
indrdpiXshnrds, uhshn-ds (A.p.m.); udn-d\ dsn-i, yakn-ds, etc.

Since y&n-e, yd'n-as, pun-as stand for yuvan-e, -as, pudn-as,
their accent is perfectly regular ; so tmdn-d, for ti&mdn-d (p. 341
end). Compare p. 408 med.

THE FEMININE FORMS.

A. The forms that serve as feminines to the stems in van are
regularly made from other stems in varl

The RV. has 26 such stems: abhibhtfvart ; ftd'vart; eoayd'vari; talpcvi'vcvrt ;
nishshidhvart ; pi'vart; p&rvcy'd'vari ; pras&'vari; bdhutCfvari ; bhtiridd'vari ;
mdtaribhvaH ; y&jvart ; v&kvanri ; vibM'vari ; fdkvari ; c&rvari ; cnuJatrari ;
cvdayd'vari ; sarh^vari; eajitvari; sayd'vart; aumndvdrt; gCmridvart (also
-vati); ar'tvart; svadhd'vatri. Further occur: agr&tvari, A V. xii. 1.67 ; abhikr't-
vart, ii.8.2; abht'toart, TS. iv.1.109; t*ttdnaci'vwri> AV. iii.21.10 ; kf'tvart, iv.l&l ;
mdtaricvari, v.2.9 (cf. RV.) ; vahyacfvart, iv.6.3 ; vimfgvari, xii.l. 29,35,37. For
prefrari and Ooddvari, see BR. Of. Bollensen, Z.D.M.O. xxii.604. I know of no
Vedic stem in vani. Exceptional is atharvi' (dtharvan).

Only a few sporadic feminine forms are made from stems in
van, and these I regard as irregular extensions of the van-stems
beyond their proper field (p. 615-6), due perhaps to the false
analogy of the man-stems. These forms are : sayugvd {gdyaPrt'),
x. 13 0.4; anarvd' (f dditis), iL40.6 : vii.40.4; anarv&'nram (f ddi-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

528 G. R. Lanman, [van, man, an-stems.

tim), x.92.14; 8a(rh)sthdfvdnd (rddarf), viii37.4; indhanvabhU
(dhentibhis), ii.34.5; 8ahasradd'v(a)ndm (sumattnd'm), or m.,
111.5.

B. So far as the evidence goes, it seems to show, on the other
hand, that stems in man originally served for all three genders.
Forms like mtdrmdnam (nd'vam), therefore, I regard as regular.
The stems in man seldom offer occasion for the formation of fem-
inines, save at the end of compounds.

There is not a single certain example in the Rik of a feminine formed by adding
! to the stem in man; but the AY. has several: durnd'mni, iv.17.5: xix.36.6;
pdflcandmnty viiL9.15: mahd\ xi.7.6; vipvd-, vii.75,2; 8dkasra-y viii.7.8. 6r.
refers tm&nid to tmani, fern, of tmdn; ct BR. Doubtful is duradmanV (cl
Adman), VS. ii20. The entirely exceptional fern, to br&kman, namely brdhmi, is
found only in a play upon words with yahv? (BR.), ix.33.5.

The feminine forms from man-stems are: sdlakshmd, x.10.2;
12.6; dyut&dydmdnam (ushdsam), v.80.1; sutdrmdnam (nd'vam),
viii.42.3 ; eutrd'mdnam (prthivt'm), supdrmdnam (dditim), x.63.10

S=AV. vii.6.3); drishtabharman (adite), viii.18.4; prthuydman
duhitar), vi.64.4; aujdnmant (dhishdne), with neuter ending!—
cf. p. 433 top, L 160.1; pucijanmanas (ushdsas), vi39.3; vd'ja-
bharmabhis (dtibhis), viiL 19.30; sukdrmabhis (Say. angxdibhii),
ix.70.4 ; pukrdsadmandm (ushdsdm), vi.47.6 ; from AV., *u-
8hti!mdy vii.46.2 (Gr. and BR., stem -ma).

C. The word ydshanas, 'women,' occurs 8 times; aside from
this there are 6 feminine forms from an-stems. These are : vr'*h4,
(Jcdpd) viii.33.11: (vd'k) x. 115.8; vr'shdnam (tvdcam), L 129.3;
vr'shand (dyd'vdprthivf),x.6Q.Gi pdrijmdnas (vidyiita8)9 v.10.5;
rappddUdhabhis (dhenubhis), ii.34.5.

The an-stems appear at the end of feminine compounds with the suffix C as
follows: in the Rik, dchidra-Mhni ; samrd'jfli; sfrmardjM; hat&vfthxt; rfrv
tfrdint; saptdtfrshni ; in the AV., tkamibrdJvni, viii.9.15; sindhurdjiil, vi.24.3.

THE MASCULINES AND NEUTER&

The feminines being thus enumerated, we may proceed to the
masculine and neuter forms.

Nominative Sdtgulab Masculine.

A. There are 308 forms in -vd (from IS stems). B. There
are 207 forms in -md (from 49 stems). C. There are 376 forms
in -d (from 18 stems). Sum, 891.

According to Curtius, Studten, ii.163, dpnd and pUd' presuppose the forms
dpmdn and pit&'r. Continuing, then, the search begun on p. 424 top, I examined
every one of these 891 forms as it stands in the samhitd and obtained the results
here given. Collision of final -d with a vowel occurs 99 times in the interior of
a pdda, and about 25 times at the end of a pdda (e. g. iii.1.23 : iii.5.9 : vi.22.7 :
vil2.4).

In the interior of &pdda, the vowels are written as coalescing in 74 instances,
and the metre also shows that they must be combined. Thus -d unites with a-
28 times: as in i.32.3; with *- (especially the i of iva) to e 42 times: as in ii.26.1 ;
with ii- to o in i.1618 : iii.27.14 : v.46.5 ; with c- to ai in x.61.26.

s

N.s.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 529

The vowels are written as coalescing, where the metre demands hiatus, in 18
instances: L69.9&; 87.4c; 91.56; 17 4. la; 178.2a; ii.20.3a?: iy.40.2d; 57.76;
v.31.12e; 44.3d: vi.20.3& : vii.40.4ft; 93.7a*; vili.16.7a; ix.86.45a; 88.3d:
X.6.2&; 117.7c.

In only four passages have the diaskenasts taken due account
of the metrical value of -d a- as two syllables and written them
with hiatus: namely, in the combination ptlshdr a-, v.51.11:
vi50.5: x.26.1,9, covered by the Prat., ii28. There are only
three instances in which r- follows. They are

iv.33.3. U vd'jo vtbhvdft fbhtir bidravantah, p. -vd
iv.36.6. y&m vd'jo vxbhvdfi fbMvo ydm d'vishuh, p. -vd
vii.48.3. tndro vfbhodfL fbhutehd' vd'jo arydhy p. vd.

The precept of Qaunaka (ii.31) excepts vibhvd from the influence
of ii.ll, whereby we should have vibhvd r-. According to the
metrical canon (p. 423-4 J, the combination -d r- results regularly
in ar9 except . ..." (3) when . . . -d stands for . . -ds9 -e, -a»,
-4n, or -dr." Since the metre here demands hiatus or at least
forbids the fusion vibhvarbhtir etc., Grassmann {Wb.y p. vii)
would " restore the original form vibhvdn" To these may
perhaps be added r'bhvdn, vi.34.2, text r'bhvdn at the end of
a pdaa (before ekah) ; see Prat, ii.31, r. 61, clxvi

A. The forms are: agrayd'vd; diharvd, 5; admaa&dvd; ddhvd, 8; cmarvd',
7; abhifastipdfvd, 2 ; abhisatvd; dbhwrdhayajvd ; amativd' ; ardttvd',4; drdvd,
5; drv&y 20 times, and vii.58.4; dpup&tvd; ugrddhanvd; r'kvd, 2; fghdvd;
rjifvd, 2; fnayd'vd; rndvd' ; r&f'wi,31i f'bhvd,'!; kfshndadhvd, 2; krafaprdfvd;
kshiprddhanvd ; grd'vd\ 16; t&kvd ; dadhihrd'vd^ 3; devayd'vd ; drushddvd;
nrshddvd; patharvd; pdtod: pwrvkftvd; pforvagdtvd ; pHurvayd'vd ; prarikvd;
prdtaritvd ; bddhasftvd ; bh&ridd'vd ; maghdvd, 68 ; m&dvd ; mrafahakr'tvd ;
ydjvd, 3; yd'vd; yuktdgrdvd, 2; yitdhvd, 3; y&vd, 30; raghupatvd; r&rdvd;
vakvd, 2; vaauddfvd; vdjadd'vd; vijd'vd: viblid'vd^ 19; vibhf'tvd; vx'shaparvd ;

• tvbharhyd'vd ; fubhvd; cyen&patod; prutar[a]vd t; fnuhtivdf ; satfndsatvd; satyd-
madvd; sdtod, 10 times, and v.33.5; samadvd, 2 ; sahd'vd, 4; rittod; sudh&nvd;
sr'tod; eomapd'vd; wmasfavd; st&bhvd; htivdt.

B. The forms are: akarmd' ; abrahmd, 2; aryamd% 77 ; dpmd, 4; curemd' ;
<ttmd', 15; dpihemd, 4; iataiyawkJ; usraydmd; kftdbrahmd, 3; jarimA'y 6;
jdtOfbhairmd ; trpdiaprabharmd ; darmd' ; ddmd' ; durnd'md, 2; durmdnmd;
dyutddydmd; dvjijanma\3; dhevrmd' ; dhvasmd' ; pd'hasfhdmd\ 2; prthtipragdmd ;
brahmd', 24; bhitjmd' ; bhii'rijanmd ; mahvmd', 16; yojflawianmd ; raghuyd'md;
mdmd', 2 ; varimd'; vigvbkannd, 3 ; vr'shaprdbharmd ; fatd'tmd, 2 ; saty&dharmd,
3; «afyamantfia\ 2; «ap£dfidm4; sahdaraydmd; sddMikarmd; aukdrmd; svj&nimd,
3 ; ntfrd'md, 4 ; sudydtmd ; subr&hmd ; *umantona>m<2 ; suminrad ; suv&hmd ;
awhthdfmd; svddukaJiddmd.

0. Theform8are: onosthd' ; dyahtfirahd; aftrshdf ; vkshd', 9; iakahd: ttipwr-
mfordha\ 2; triMhd' ; dvibdrhajrrid ; pdrijmd, 13; jpfbAd*', 56; brhddukshd;
mdtaripva\ 19 ; milrdM', 8 ; rttyVf, 99 ; vft)Avd, 10 ; vr^foJ, 150 : fvd', 2 ; aahdara-
firshd; from AV., fikiji;^, iv. 12.3,4; from VS-^M^', xix.86.

Besides the regular nominatives t£rtx2, maghdvd, and sahd'vd,
there are subsidiary forms in -vdn/ see p. 516. In some cases
drdvd is only a metrically suitable way of writing drvd (cf. Adn-
pna$dru, x.96.8, with pmdpru) ; so in vii.68.7 ; and perhaps in
x.40.7, yuvdr drdvd, text yuvd rdrdvd. In ix.21.5, c is catalectic
(not drddvd). In viii.63.4, read $rutrdr\a\vd f In AV. iv.35.5,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

530 C. R. Lanman, [van, man, an-stems.

the reading prdnadd'vdn seems to require a correction to -rtf.
For bMtfmd, RV. i.65.5, BR propose bhujmdt. For krdnd', see
pp. 334, 329.

The word ghrdns occurs AV. vii.18.2, nd ghrdns tatdpa. BR.
set up a stem ghrdns. Whitney, second marginal note to AtL
Pr. ii.26, regards the s as inserted. Is not the stem formed with
suffix an (ghdr-an, ghr-dri) ? Its monosyllabism after syncopation
might then account for the anomalous case-form.

Transitions to the a-declension. For anarvdna-s, pd&hdna-s,
etc., see p. 526.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

The pada-iorm of the case always ends in -<!/ but the final is
sometimes lengthened in the samhitd, chiefly for the sake of the
metre. See Whitney's note to Ath. Pr. iii.16. I shall give under
L the forms having -d in both texts ; and under II., such as are
lengthened in the samhitd.

I. A. Here belong : dhdnva; dhdnva, 6 ; vivdsva; from AV.,
pdrva, i.12.2 ; snd'va, xi.8.11,12.

B. There are 420 forms (from 35 stems).

The forms are : djma, 4 ; ddma ; tma, 3 ; k&rma, 5 ; kd'rshma ; kshddma, 2
c&rma, 6 ; jdnima, 4 ; jdnma, 9 ; t6kma ; dd'ma, 2 ; dhdrma, 3 ; dhd'ma, 31
nd'ma, 78; pdtma; brdhma, 78; br&hma-brahma ; ftM'mo, 17; mdnma, 33,
m&rmoi 3 ; yd' ma, 2 ; vdrma, 11 ; vdsma ; vepna, 2 ; vioma, 2 ; fdkma; farma,
84: sddma, 14; ad' ma, 10; sd'ma, 3; sthd'ma; sy&'ma; svd'dma, 2 ; hdmtL For
bhtymA, see N.s.m. ; for vfahand'ma^ see below.

C. My collections yield the interesting negative result that not
a single neuter stem made by the derivative suffix an forms a

N.A.s.

If we derive kshd'man from teham (kshd'm~an), we shall have to admit one
exception, for fahd'ma occurs five times; but it may come from ksM=ksM
(fahd'-man), and at any rate'the word was felt as a mow-stem — not ae an an-stem.

It is no mere accident that these forms do not occur, since the occasion for
them is not infrequent It may be that a form like tf/r*W was to the apprehen-
sion of the language-users too much like a naked stem and waa accordingly
avoided. But whether we can motivate this avoidance or not, there is no
question about the fact that they were avoided. The forms from stems in man,
on the other hand, are frequent and familiar.

The N. A.s.n. in -a* fronfVm-stems 'is avoidedjby recourse to
other stems. The stems dhan and H'dhan have as a N.A&n.
dhar and d'dharj akshdn, asthdn, dadhdn, and sakthdn have
dkshi, dsthi (AV. iv.l0.7),*AWA^(TS/:iL5.34), and sdkthi (TS.
v.3.12*) ; dsdn, uddn> $r%hdny and yHshdn have dsia-m, udakd-m,
f&ras (and ftrshd-7ny AV. iv.34.1), and ydsha-s (Schol. to VS.
xxv. 9) ; yakdn, pakdn, and asdn have ydhrt (AV. x.9.16), pd&rt,
and dsrt (TS. vii.4.91). The last form (for dsrk) has been regarded
as a purely phonetic anomaly (p. 466) ; but see p. 523. Instead
of ytivd from ytiv-an we find yiUvat as if from yti~vant; see p. 516.
Furthermore, the form vr'shd as a neuter adjective is avoided in
several ways : either by putting the masculine form with a neuter

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.an/J Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 531

noun (vr'ehd vdnam, ix.64.2-ct gotrdm haripriyam, p. 377) ; or
by using the derivative vr'ehniam (with pdvas, viiL3.8 : ix.64.2 :
VaL 3.10) ; or by using the otherwise unheard-of vr'shni (paroxy-
tone — with pdvas, v.35.4 : viii.3.10; with paunsiamy viii.7.23).
For vr'shand'ma (ix. 97.54 — corrupt), Gr. suggests vr'shano nd;
see Ueb.

These surrogate-forms are to be regarded, for the most part, as
supplementary rather than transitional. But see p. 526.

it The samhitd has -d; pada, -&. Here belong : (A) dhdnud;
(B) kdrmd; jdnimd; bhti'md, 3 ; viomd; svd'dmd; dhd'md,
AV. vi.31.3 ; (C ?) kshd'md, 3, and AV. xviilS.21 (RV. iv.2.16).

This protraction occurs in the second place of a trishtubh-pdda in iv.2.16:
x.45.4; of an anushtubh-pdda, x.176.1 ; of an ateharapahkti, L 69.3d; in the
eighth place of a trightubh-pdda, i.62.8: x.129.1 ; of a jagati-pdda, ii.24.14:
x. 142.2 ; and as penultimate of a trishtubh-pdda, vi.12.5. In all these oases it is
metrical. It occurs also in the fifth place of a trisMubh-pdda, i.61.14 (Prat.
viii.8) ; and at the end of a triahtubh-pdda, i.173.6 (viii.30). The AV., at vi.31.3,
has -(S in the fourth place, while the RV. (x.189.3) has -d.

Transitions to the a-declension. For anarvd'na-m (?), anar-
vd*ny pirshd-m, etc., see above and p. 526.

Accusative Sutgulab Masculikb.

L The A.s.m. generally has the penult long. A. There are
68 forms in -vdnam (from 23 stemsjt B. There are 85 forms in
-mdnam (from 32 stems). C. There are 51 forms in -dnam
(from 12 stems). Sum, 204.

A. The forms are : ddhvdnam, 3 ; ancurvd'narr^ *l ; dycyvdnam ; drvdnam ;
rfifvdnam ; rndvd'nam ; rtd'vdnam,, 5 ; grd'vdnam, 2 ; dadhikrd'vdnam ; dhitd'-
vdnam, 2 : pif vdnam ; pttntnietehidhvdnam ; puroyd'vdnam% 3 ; prdtaryd'vdnain,
3; magh&vdnam, 11 ; mtuhtvd'nam ; yfadnam, 16; cruihtivd'nam,2] sajUvdnam;
satodnam, 2 ; sayd'vdnam ; sak&'vdncm ; sfhvdnam.

B. The forms are : dfntdnam, 8 ; aaremd'nam ; dtm&'nam, 4 ; qjmd'ncum ;
omd'nam, 4 ; jarimd'nam ; tuvibrahmdnam ; darmd'nam, 2 ; ddmd'nam, 3 ; dur-
mdnmdnam; dyutddydmdnam ; dvy&nmdnam ; dharmd'nam, 2 ; pd'kasthdmdnam ;
purutmdfnam ; brahmd'nam, 5 ; bh&md'nam ; mahimd'nam, 27 ; varimd'nam, 2 ;
varskmd'nam, 3 ; vi$vdkarmdnam ; visarmd'nam ; tctid'tmdncun ; saty&dhar-
mdnam ; sadmd'nam, 2 ; aahdsdmanam ; sudydfondnam ; avbrahmdnam ; sufdr-
mdnam] somdfnam; svddmd'nam; harimd'nam, 3 ; from AV., pvr{mdmdnam1
vL99.1 ; stdmd'nam, v.13.6.

G. The forms are : xtkshd'nam ; trim&rdkd'nam ; triftr8hd'namy 2 ; pdrtjmanam,
4; prikugmd'nam ; majjd'nam; mdtaricvdnam, 2 ; mtirdhd'nam, 10; rd'jdnam,
22 ; vr'aMnam, 2 ; $vd'nam, 3 ; saptdftrsMnam, 2 ; from AV., plfhd'nam, iii.25.3 ;
pdnihdnam't xiil.47, see p. 441.

The scansion of the passages in which these 204 forms occur
shows that the metre demands or favors a short d as penultimate
in the cadence of ten octosyllabic pddas: in ii.6.56 and viii.81.8a
(anarvd'nam ?) ; Hi. 2 7. 2c and 40.3a (dhitd' vdnam ?) ; viiL54.4a
(mahimd'nam ?) ; i.50.12a (harimd'nam?); viii.61.10ft (pdrij-
m&nam?); ix.114.2c (rd'j&nam?); and possibly in viii.2.38^
(purutondfnam?) and 46.3a (mahimd'nam?). In no other cases
does the metre give evidence of a short vowel.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

532 C. R. Lanman, [van, man, an-stems.

L a. From the stems that waver between d and d in the strong
cases occur: ukshd'namy i. 164.43 ; vr'shdnam, ix.34.3 : x.89.9:
VS. xx.40 (in all these passages, the d being in the second or
fourth place may be ascribed to the metre) ; ukshd'nam, VS.
xxviii.32 : Ait. fer. L15 ; vr'shdnam, Qat.Br. i.2.51*; tond'nam,
Acv. 9r. vi.9; tdkshdnam (of. Schol. to P&n. vi.4.9), Kath. xillO,
in Ind. Stud. iiL 464.

II. The text has d in the penult. There are 98 forms (from 6
stems). In no case does the metre require d; but it favors d in
the second place of the verse in vi.55.4a; L16.16; ii.16.5ti; iiL
27.15a; vih.15.4ft; ix.63.21a; 106.16.

The forms are : aryam&'nam, 15, and AV. xiv.1.17 ; pllsh&'nam,
21, and AV. xi.6.3 : xviii.2.53 ; rbhukshd' namy 4; further (cf.
I. a), vr'shdnam, 63 ; uksh&'nam, 4, and AV. iiL 1 1.8 ; tmd'nam.
In Dhammapada, 355<£, we have d as penultimate, hanti anfie va
attdnam (dtmd'nam). For pdnth&nam (? \.121.Qgk ; v.10.1 :
viii.57.13), see p. 441. For anarvd'nam, see p. 531 end, and p.
527 end. C£ vrtrahd'nam.

The form mahd'm is explained by Brugman, as standing for
mahdn-u ; see Studien, ix.308.

Transition to the o-declension. For adhi-rd'jcMn etc., see p. 527.

Instrumental Singular Masculine and Neuter (see pp. 524-6).

A. Masculines : dtharvand; abhiydgvand; rfipvandy 3 ; cikU-
vdnd; patdparvand, 4 ; — (IIL) grd'vnd, 2.

Neuters : dhdnvandy 3 ; dhdnvand; pdrvand^parvand; — (III)
md'vnd, AV. vii.50.9.

B. Masculines: demand, 2; tmdnd, 61; bhdsmandy 2; mcy-
mdndy 22 ; varshmdnd; vipvdkarmand: — (L) omdnd; pravdd-
ydmand; bhUmdnd; — (II. a) patdydm(a)nd; the AV, xviii.4.60,
and the SV., i.557 : ii.502, actually have pcUdydmand; — (III.)
mahimnd'tS; from AV., aryamnd', iL36.2 : xiv.1.34 ; pdmnd\
v.22.12; varimnd\ iv.6.2 : 'ix.2.20 ; mahimnd', iv.35.3 : vL7l.3 :
xi.1.19: xiii.1.8*: iv.30.8 (=RV. x.125.8, muhind').

Once varimdn makes varimdtd; see p. 516.

Neuters : kdrmand, 8 ; jdnmand, 5 ; dhdrmandy 15 ; pdtmand;
br&hmand, 3 1 ; mdnmand, 8 ; vdrmand; vidmdnd, 4 ; vidhar-
mand ; pdkmand, 3; pdrmandy 5; pd'kmand; svfyanmand ;
hdnmandy 5 ; — (I.) bhtiJmarid; $yHrmand; hemdnd; — (IL a)
nd'm(a)nd ; (II. b) dhd'm(a)ndy 2 ; 8d'm(a)nd ; from AV.,
dhd'm(a)nd, x.5.i7-14 ;— (IIL) nd'mnd; from AV., d&'mnd, vi.
103.2,3; dhd'mnd, v.27.8; I6mndy iv.12.5; sd'mnd, thrice.

C. Masculines: mdtaripvand, ix.67.31 ; AV. v.10.8; vibhvdnd
(-dnas, Ab., needed), RV. x.76.5 ;— (II. b) rd'j{a)nd;—(Oi.) d?n&,
3; pfahnd'; vr'shnd, 2; majjfid\ AV. iv.12.3,4; pHhnd\ VS.
xxv.8; tdkshnd, K&ty. £r. vi.1.5; — finally, p&?id, for pudnd, AV.
vii.5.5.

Neuters: (II. a) mah(d)ndy 2; — (ITL) dhnd, 2; dhnd-ahnd;
dmdl ; udnd!y 5 ; dadhnd', 3 ; mahnd'y 32 ; ptrshnd', 3 ; from VS.,
paknd'y xxxvii.9; sakthnd'y xxiii.29.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

L&zn.n.] Noun-Infiection in the Veda. 638

Shortened forms of the instrumental singular. These occur
only with stems in mdn. After syncopation of the vowel d, (1)
the m is dropped ; (2) but sometimes the n is dropped.

1. The m is dropped. The complete history of the form is illus-
trated by the stem ohUmdn; this makes : bhti-mdn-d, RV. i. 11 0.2 ;
bhU^nn-d! , 9at.Br. ii.8.49 ; bhti-n-d', RV. In most cases the ecthlip-
sis of m may be ascribed to the metre: thus in iii.59.7a (abhi yd
mahind' divam) : viii.12.23 ; 67.3; 81.23: x.119.8, the dropping
of m gives the needed diiambic cadence; similarly iii.30.18c, etc.
See Benfey, Abh. d. kon. Ges. d. Wiss. zu GOttingen, xix.233 ff.

The forms are : mahind' (cf. mahimnd', thrice), 35 times, and
Hi. 7. 10: viii.59.6 (=SV. ii.213); 81.23; cf. VS. xxvii.26=TS.
iv.1.8*: VS. xvii.l8=TS. iv.6.2^: VS. vii.19: TS. iv.3.13B: SV.
ii. 101 1,1 123;— bhdnd', x.149.3 ; 82.4=TS. iv.6.2a=VS. xviL28
(Mahldh., bhUmnd) ;—pralhind\ i.8.6=SV. i.166; VAL 8.1;—
prend' (c£ premnd, MBh.), x.71.1 : TS. v.5.2l; varind', TS. i.6.31
(cf VS. iii.5): iv.l.31(=VS. xi.29). It is interesting to observe
that the VS. in the last two passages has the more grammatical
varimnd'. In like manner the Atharvan (at iv.30.8) corrects the
antiquated mahind' of the Rik (x.125.8) into mahimnd', to the
detriment of the metre. Benfey would restore mahind', AV.
iv.30.8 and RV. i.59.7. Perhaps mahnd! (84) is a shortened form
for mahind'. Here belongs, according to Gr., ddrn-d' for dd-
mn-d\ v.52.14,15; 87.2; viii.20.14 (but see p. 335 ad ink.) :
viii.33.8 (see p. 330 end). Cf. G.p.m. (mahfndm).

2. The n is dropped. I have but two examples : drdgh-m-d'
for drdgh-mdn-d, x.70.4 (Say., drdghimnd); rapm-d\ for rap-
mdn-dy vi67.1 (S&y., rapmind).

Transition-forms. For yti&h'ena, etc., see p. 527.

Dative Singular Masctjlimb and Nbutbb (see pp. 624-6).

A Masculines : ddhvane ; dpapcdddaghvane ; rfipvane, 2 ;
kr'tvane, 2 ; jdsvane; drtihvane, 2 ; prshfhaydjvane; mddvane;
ydjvane: prutdrvane; sdtvane, 2; mkr'ivane; sthirddhanvane;
— (II. a) rtd'v(a)ne; (IX b) drdv(a)ne; vrr8hapraydv(a)ne; soma-
pd'v(a)nef 2 ; (it c) svadhd'v (a)ne;— (HI.) sutapd'vne; mdd'vne;
svadhd'vne; — finally, yti'ne. 6.

Neuters : turvdne, 5 ; — (I.) ddvdne, 28.

B. Masculines : tmdne, 6 ; brahmdne, 2 ; bhiX'rikarmane; from
AV., takmdne, 7 ; pdpmdne; — (II. a) aryam(d)ne; (II. b) usrdyd-
m(a)ne; dnusra-; sdm(a)ne, 2; 8U8hd'm(a)ne,S; (II. c) suhdvt-
tundm{a)ne; — (III.) aryamne, 2 ; jarimne; mahimni.

Neuters : kdrmane; jdnmane, 7 ; dhdrmane, 3 ; brdhmane, 9 ;
bhdrmane; vidmdne, 2 ; vidharmane; pdrmane; — (L) trd'mane:
dd'mane;—(U. a) dhd'm(a)ne; (II. b) dhd'm(a)ne> 3; (EL" c)
dhd'm(a)ne.

C. Masculines: pdHjmane; vibhvdne; mdtaripvane, 3; — (I.)
up-dn-e9 vi.20.11, according to Benfey, Orient und Occ. iL242; —

vol. x. 71

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

534 G R. Lanman, [van, man, an-stems.

(III.) pUshnh, 4 ; pratidi'vne; rd'jile, 3 ; vr'shne, 34 ; — finally,
pune, A V. i.' 11.4: vi.37.3 : xi.2.2. In RV. iv.3.6,Bollensen reads
ukshne, text kshb.

Neuters : dhd'rv-ane; — (III.) dhne, 3 ; dsni; pirshne-pirshne.

Transition-forms. For brhddukshdya, etc., see p. 527.

Ablative Sdtgulab Masculine and Nkuteb (see pp. 524-5).

A. Masculines : pdkasfitvanas; — (II. c) drdv{a)nas.
Neuters : pdrvanas; dhdnvanas, A V., 4 times.

B. Masculines : dpmanas, 4 ; dtmdnas, 2 ; satyddharmanas,
AV. L10.3 ; — (III.) from AV., klomnds, ii33.3 : ix.8.12 ; jarimnas,
xviii.3.62 ; varimnds, xii.5.72.

Neuters : cdrmanas, 4; jdnmanas; dhdrmanas, 3; mdntnanas;
vdsmanas; sddmanas; — (I.) bhU'manas; — (tl. a) dd'm(a)na*;
— (III.) Idmnas-lomtias; from AV., dd! mnas-ddmnas, vii.83.2.

C. Masculines : Benfey regards vibhvdnd c-, X.70.&, ** an Ab.
(-d=-aA) : see G&tt. Abb xix.261 ; — (IH) mUrdhnds; vr'shnas;
pllhnds, AV. ii.83.3.

Neuters: (III.) akshnds; dhnas; dsnds, 3; udnds; yaknds;
pfrshnds, 2 ; vr'shnas H'dhnas, iv.22.6.

In x.27.21, it is hard to make jarimd'nas the subject of taranM. Roth suggests
that this may be a metrical way of writing jarimnds ; cf . drdvd (=Arvd) ; harir
fmafdru (= -cmapru) ; sthd'tdrd (I.s.m. ? x.59.1). ' There, beyond (the sun), is
another path ; over it (t&d), with steady tread, away from old age, men pass;'
i. e., there they lay aside decay and infirmity. The construction is hardly Vedic;
but cf. the Sanskrit vayarh ttrnd mahdbhaydt, Hariv. 4066. See also p. 523.

Supplementary forms : dsidt, ds-ds; udakd't; etc.

GBNtnviB Singula* Masouunb amd Neuteb (see pp. 624-6).

A. Masculines : dtharvanas, 2 ; ddhvanas, 6 ; dyajvanas;
dstrtayajvanas ; durgfbhipvanas; ydjvanas, 3 ; viadhvanas;
maghdnas, 8; in v.27.1, Delbrttck reads -dm; — (I.) magMnas,
pronounce maghdrvan-as, v. 16.3 : ix.32.1 ; for vi.44.12, see N.p.m. ;
— (IL b) drdv(a)nas; somapdfv(a)nas; — (III.) dadhikrd'vnas,&;
bhUridd'vnas; yuktdgrdvnas ; sutapd'vnas, viii.2.7, trocL ;—
yU'nas, 2.

Neuter: dhdnvanas,

B. Masculines: amdrmanas, 3; brahmdnas; vipatmanas;
vipramanmanas; pticijanmanas; supdrmanas; — (I.) mahimdrm,
2 ; — (II. b) from AV., sthirddhdm(a)nas, x.4.11; — (III.) aryamnds,
6 ; mahimnds, 2 ; jarimnds, AV. vii.53 6.

Neuters: kdrmanas, 2; jdnmanas, 3; dhdrmanas; brahmanas,
with voc, 18; brdhmanas, 4; with -pdti, 32;' mdnmanas, 2;
vdrmanas; — (I.) dd'manas; bhti'manas,%\ yd'manas; viomancu;
— (IL a) dhd'm(a)nas; 8d'm(a)nas; sd'm(a)nas-sdm(a)nas; (lie)
dAtfm(a)na«/— (IIL) sd'mnas, AV. xi.7.5.

C. Masculines: pdrijmanas; — (L) vr'shano nd, ix.97.54, text
vr'shand'ma — see Ueb. iL518; from AV., vr'shano*, xi.2.22;—
(III.) dpnas; uksknds; pdshnds, 6; yilshnds, or "n. ; rd'jfias, 8;
vr'shnas, 37 ; tdkshnas, 9at.Br. iii.6.4* ; — finally, punas, 2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

G.s.m.n.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 585

Neuters : (III.) dhnas, 16 ; udnds, 5 ; dadhnds; vr*shnasy 2 ;
$irshnds; from AV., asnds, v.19.3; asthnds, iv.12.1; paknds,
xii.4.4.

Transition-form: pHshandsyafy see p. 526.

Locative Sinchtlab Masculine and Neuter.

In the Rik there is but a single instance of syncopation of the
short thematic a in the L.s. : this is indrdgni pataddvni, v.27.6a/
and even here we may restore the a, ppta-dd'-v(a)n-i; so in AV.
i v. 7.5c, tishthd vrkshfrva sthd'm(a)ni.

From the Atharvan, I have noted a few instances : vijd'mni,
viL76.2; l6mni-lomniy ii.33.7; sthd'mni, vi.77.1 : vii.96.1; dhni,
vi. 110.3: xix.56.2.

All the locatives singular from the Rik may be put under two
categories: (1) those with the case-ending i; (2) those which
have dropped the case-ending. The former number 127 (from 48
stems) ; the latter, 203 (from 45 stems) : that is, the forms without
the ending are to those with the ending* in the ratio of 8 : 5.

This dropping of the ending is peculiarly Vedic. For a similar
thing in the G&th&s, see Yac. xxxi.13, cashmkhg, 'in (thine) eye.'
I examined the passages in which the above 330 forms occur, and
found that the choice between the two forms was often decided
simply by the metre (cf. pp. 340,345,347). Thus in i. 143.2 and
vi.8.2, pddas b, ey and d are each of 12 syllables, and accordingly
we have in a, sd jd'yamdnah parami viomani; but in vii.5.7,
since by c, and d are each of li syllables, we have in a the shorter
form, sd jd'yamdnah parami vioman. Compare also ii. 28.3a
with i.4.6c. A comparison of RV. x.87.17 with AV. viii.3.17 is
instructive. The Rik has tdm pratydflcam ardshd vidhya m&r-
man; this the Atharvan converts into an acatalectic pdda by
putting mdrmani in place of the antiquated mdrman.

At the end of a pdda, the ant-form is used if the number of
syllables in the other pddas is even ; and the an-form, if it is odd.
In the latter case, the ending can always be restored without
detriment to the cadence, the only difference being that the verse
thus becomes acatalectic instead of catalectic. The form in -ani
is never found with the postposition d'; but the form in ~anny p.
-an, occurs with it 17 times. See Kuhn's remarks upon the forms
in -a»n, Beitr&ge, iii.125.

Of the 127 forms in -one, the great majority, 92, stand at the
end of pddas of 12 or 8 syllables, and the other 35 in the interior
of the pdda. Of these 02, I found 46 in jagratf-stanzas; one
(1164.366), in a stanza of 11,12,12,12; and the rest in stanzas
consisting of octosyllabic, or of dodecasyllabic pddas, or of both, —
variously combined (e. g. i.130.3; cf. the occurrences of pdrmani).

Of the 203 forms in -a», nearly one-third, 62, stand at the end
of a pdda of 11 syllables, and two (viii2.8: x.105.9) at the end
of a pdda of 7. In 60 instances of the 62, the other pddas of
the re are also trishtubh.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

586 C. R. Lawman, [van, man, cm-stems.

In L 164.41a" (12,12,12,11), w« might restore the longer gram-
matical form vioman{%), and bo perhaps in i. 164.39a (11,11,12,12).
In like manner, x. 105. 9b admits the longer form, yajfl&sya dkdrthu
sddman(i); and in viii,2.8, Gr. would read samdne ddhi MoV
man(i). Unless we regard x.6.1a as a syncopated verse, we may
read : ay dm sd ydsya pdrman(i) dvobhis.

1. The locatives in ~ani (127, from 48 stems).

A. Masculines: dtharvani ; ddhvani, 2; cf^ont; ftd'vani ; prvtdrvtm;
tukr'tvani.

Neuters: thgvani; pdrvanuparvani.

fi. Masculines: apmani, 3; dtmani; tmdni, 2; brahmdni; iusM'mani; from
AV., mahmani, x.2.6.

Neuters: karmani-karmani ; janmani; dd'mani; dtrgh&pratadmani, 2; dhari-
mani, 2; dh&rmani, 4; dM'mani; pdrtmani; prabharmani, 2; prdydmani;
brdhmani; m&nmatni ; mdrmani; y&'mam, 12; yd'mani-ydmam ; vdkmani;
vidharmani, 8 ; vfomani, 8; p&rmani, 11 ; edrimani ; sdHmani7&; tuMmam;
stdrimani; hdvimani, 3; hSrnani; hdmani; from AV., ajmani, xi.10.22; ear-
rooni, vipnani, eta

G. Masculines : mdtaripvani ; mtirdJubni, 6 ; rdQani, 4.

Neuters: dhani, 4; dsani, 1; ud&rti, 2; 4'dhani, 9; Jkifat'nuqp; r^'dsi;
pCr*toim, 2.

2. The locatives in -an (208, from 45 stems).

A. Masculine: ddhvan, 6. Neuters: anarvdn; aparvdn; dhdnvan12; dhdn-
van, 5; from AY., dh&nvan, v.13.1 ; parvan, xii.3.31.

B. Masculines: dfman; tman, 5; dfowifi, AY. ix.6.21 : xii.3.54: xr.1.2: TS.
T.1.9«: QatBr. i.8.1«: ii.5.34: iii.1.3"; 4«: iv.6.4»: v.2.1«; demon, TS. iv.6.1».

Neuters : djman, 5 ; dydman, 2 ; ftarmon, 3 ; kdWman-katman, 2 ; kdfrsknm,
2 ; cdrmon ; jdniman, 4 ; jdnman, 3 ; jdnman-janman, 2 ; rfdrtwion ; cftdrmas, 5 ;
dAd'mati, 4 ; pdtman, 6 ; brdhman, 2 ; bhd'rman (see above) ; t7uinman, 2 ; mdr-
man, 2; yd'man, 32; vdriman, 5; t'drfman; vdrsAman, 5; vijdfman; vidharma*,
3* vioman, 12; carman, 17 : pastnan; sdkman: jrfdman, 4; 8d'man,Z\ svdfdmm;
h&vtmati, 2; from AV., fcarman, xii.3.47; foirtnan-feirTnan, and yd'fnan-ytfmai,
iv.23.3; dhd'man, iv.25.7: xx.49.3; vdrshman, iii.4. 2 : v.2.7?: tWion, 23 times;
from TS., ^mon, <5dman, ftfafoman, iv.3.11 ; brdhman, kdrman, 3*; y<fmafi, 6.11; cL
V8. xiii.63 : xvii.1,6.

0. Masculines: jmdn, 2; pdryman, 6; mdrdfafoi, 6; mdtarifvan, AY. xi.5.13;
i«kiti,TS. iv.6.1*: vii.4.15!.

Neuters: dhan, 15; 4*4n, 8; uddn; 4'dhan, 6; kshd'man; tfrsHdn, 2; dwn,
AY. xviii.3.11: xix.60.1 : TS. v.5.9*-8; kshd'man, TS. iv.6.1*; yisMn, vi.3.111 ;
oAon, Ait. Br. iv.l; ote/wn, Brh.sx.up. ii.3.5: iv.2.2. In composition we find:
d«iftn-t«Att ; nemann-ish; cf. also jj&ir cftfo, and rad. r-stems, L.s.n., p. 488.

Transition-forms. For ptrsh&, pilrvdhne, etc., see pp. 526-7.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

There is no neater. For vidharman (v.17.2 — Gr. neat.), ct
the masc. nom. vidharmd, AV. zvi.3.2.

The Vedic voc. of the vant and mant-stems ends regularly in
-as; that of the van, man, and arc-stems, regularly in -an (c£ p.
519). Otherwise Benfey, Gram. p. 312, 1. 7. Nevertheless, five
stems in van (all having feminines in -vart — p. 527) make voca-
tives in ~vas: rtdvas,4\ evaydoasy2; prdtaritvas; mdtaripwis;
vibhdvas (Gr., stem in vant) ; we may add khidvas, vi.22.4 (BR,
stem khidvan).

A. There are 169 forms (from 12 stems) : apvaddvan; maghr
avan, 145; yuvan; vasuddvan ; satyasatvan; satrdddvan;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

V.&m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 537

sahtudvan, 13 ; sictapdvan; somapdvan; svaddvan; svadhdvan,
2; svaydvan; from AV., atharvan, v.11.2; vipvaddvan, iv. 32. 6.

B. There are 24 forms (from 11 stems): aryaman, 11 ; purund-
man; puruhanman; brahman; vidharman; vipvakarman, 2;
vipvasdman; vrshakarman, 2 ; $atyakarman; mddman, 2 ; *t>a-
dharman; from AV., tfraidman, vi 74.3 ; 8ahasradhdman,iv.\8A;
pdpman, vi.26.1,2; 113.2; tuydman, xvL7.7 ; takman, 11 times
(i.25 : v.22) ; apman, TS. iv.6.11.

C. There are 105 forms (from 4 stems) : partfman; ptishan, 32;
rdjan, 46 ; vrshan, 26 ; from AV., tirujman, vi.4.3 ; prthvjman^
v.1.5.

NOXBTATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND VOCATIVE DUAL MASCULINE.

I. There are 121 forms in -d.

1. The penult is long. A. There are 32 forms in -vdnd (from
1 1 stems). B. There are 4 forms in -mdnd (from 4 stems).
C. There are 19 forms in -find (from 4 stems).

A. The forms are (including vocatives): agrddvdnd; adruh-
vdnd; rCd'vdnd, 7 ; grd'vdnd; prdtaryd'vdnd, 2 ; maghdv&nd, 5 ;
yuvdttd, 10; yU'nd (see below); rathayd'vdnd; pubhraydvdnd;
prushtivd,?id; saftivdnd.

B. The forms are: brahmd'nd; satyadharmdnd; sdndmdnd;
supdrmdnd.

C. The forms are : pdrijmdnd; mitrdrdjdnd (v.62.3) ; rd'jdnd,
16; pvd'nd.

The scansion of the passages in which these 121 forms occur
shows that the metre demands or favors a short d as penultimate
in the cadence of three octosyllabic pddas: v. 70. 2a: viii.26.19c/
38.2a.

2. The penult is short. There are 66 forms (from 6 stems).
The metre favors d in the second place of L 10.3ft: ii. 16.6c, 6b:
x.66.60.

The forms are : aryamd'nd; jimdnd; tndrdpilshd'nd (and AV.
vi.3.1) ; ptishd'nd; vrsh&nd, 60 ; somdpilthdnd, 2; vr'shdnd, AV.
vii.73.1,2; 110.2.

IL There are 22 forms in -au.

1. The penult is long. Forms: (A) rtd'vdnau, 2; from AV.,
grd'vdnau, xi.1.9,10; (C) rd'jdnau, RV.,4; pud'nau, 2 (and AV.
viii.1.9) ; vfshdnau, AV. xix.13.1. The AV., at xviii.1.54,
modernizes rd'jdnd of the Rik (x.14.7) to rd'jdnau.

2. The penult is short. Forms: (C) vrsh&nau, 13; somd-
pfoh&nau.

Weak form for strong. For y&'nd (rzytfoawd), see p. 528.

Nominative and Accusative Dual Neuter (see pp. 524-5).

There is no case of syncopation in the Rik; cf. p. 524 top.
B. The forms are: cdrmani; jdnmani, 2; sddmani;— (I.)
dhd'mant;—(TI. b) from AV.,'/i4'm(a)/tf, iv.9.10.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

588 C. R. Lanman, [van, man, an-stems.

C. The forms are: (I.) dhant, 7; from AV., dhant, xiii.2.3;
cdkshant, x.2.6; dothdni, ix.7.7 : x.9.19.
Transition-form : p£r«A6, see p. 627.

Instrumental and Dative Dual Kasoulins.

Instrumentals : vrshabhydm, 2 ; grd'vabhydm, AV. vi.188.2.
Dative: somdp'fohdbhydm.

Gbn. and Loo. Dual Masculine and Nbuteb (see pp. 524-6).

Genitives masc. : (I.) pdrijmanos; — (11LJ indrdpHshnds. Gr.
proposes (EL b) maghd'V(a)nrOsi at the ena of V.86.3&/ but the
catalectic cadence of the text, magMnos, is better. Genitives
neut. : sddmanos; — (HL) dhnos, AV. xvi8.22.

Locative masc. : dpmanos.

NOMINATIVB AND VOOATIVB PLUBAL MaSOUUNB.

I. The penult is long. A. There are 77 forms in -vdnat
(from 22 stems). B. There are 34 forms in -mdnas (from 20
stems). C. There are 18 forms in -dnas (from 4 stems).

A. The forms are: dkshnayd'vdnas ; dtharvdnas, 2 ; anarvd'ya&1 2; dycyvdms,
2; upahdsvdnas ; fkvdnas, 2; ftd'vdnas, 10; grd'vdnas, 19; drdkvdnae; mkr'U
vdnas; parisfiddvdnas ; pr&slhdvdnas ; prdtaryd'vdipas ; maghdvdnas] 14; yitd-
nas, 11; raghup&tvdnas ; vdntvdnas; $ubhamy d' vdnas ; pro* httvd'nas, 2 ; satodnas;
sudhdnvdnas ; sv^Okvdnas.

B. The forms are: addwurwo*, 2; adhvasmd'nas ; dbrahmdnas ; arapnd'wu ;
Shabrahmdnas ; cfctmd'raa* ; (frtydnmdna* ; d%orm<i'«KW ; dhvasmd'nas ; brah-
md'nasf9; bhrd'jajjanmdnas ; fna&wnd'no*, 5 ; fwyyanmdnas; satyadharmdnas ;
svkdrmdnaa ; stydnimdnas ; suf&rmdnas, 2; sth&'rapn&naa ; svddm&'nas. For
jarimd'nas, z.27.21, see p. 534.

G. The forms are: tirdhv&grdvdnas ; Ugmamtordhdms ; m&rdhd'nas, 2; rd'jdnai,
14; from AV., pdnihdnas (p. 441) ; evd'nas, iv.36.6 : xi.2.11 ; 10.23.

The scansion of the passages in which the above 129 forms
occur shows that the metre favors short d in the cadence of
vUe.lltf (and viii.20.1a ?). Cf. Kuhn, Beitrdge, iii.121.

I. a. From the stems that show both & and d in the strong
cases occur: utohdnas, K&ty. £r. xxiii.4.7,8,11 ; vfshdnas, QsL
Br. xiiL3.3T; taJcshdnas, SchoL to VS. xvi.27.

H. The penult is short. There are 64 forms (from 4 stems).
The metre favors d in the second place of iii.27.156; viii.33.11a;
X.66.6&.

The forms are: aryamd'nas; uksh&'nas, 12; rbhukshdnas, 12;
vfshdnas, 39 ; xdcshd nas, AV. iv.24.4. Forpdnthdnas, see p. 441.

Weak form for strong. For kftvano ( AV. xix.35.5) and magh-
dnas (RV. vi.44.12), see p. 523.

NOMINATIVE AND AOOUSATIVB PLUBAL NBUTBB.

The vowel-stems have -d, -dni; -$, 4ni; -d9 -tini; see pp. 347,
894, 416. The forms in 4 and -# would appear to be simply
shortened from 4 and -H; but in fact, for the great majority of
the latter forms, the pada has 4 or -ft. Both texts agree in having
long 4 only in the words krtidhmi, ptid, and trir; in no case do

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.A.p.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 539

both texts have long -H. The pada and Pr&t regard the long 4
and -0 of the samhitd as a lengthening of 4 and -#. Perhaps,
however, it is better to set aside their authority, in view of the
analogy of the forms in -d from a- stems (whose long -d is sorely
organic), and to consider the i and informs as original, and the
i and tf-forms as secondary. *

For the consonant stems, we should at first thought set up the
inverted series -dni, -d; and regard -d as a shortened form of -d
(cf. Benfey, Oram. p. 306, 1. 21). But in fact, the intermediate
long ~d is here equally uncertain. The only words that have -d
in both texts are akd and ftrshd', and for both of these the transi-
tion-stems in -d are established (dhdndm, $irshd~m) ! Of the 27
forms that have -d in the samhitd (p. -6), 18 might be explained
metrically ; but the other 0 can not : the Pr&t., however, accounts
for the other 9 as lengthenings of a short -&. But here, as before,
the samhitd-forms are perhaps, after all, the original ones, relics
of the organic form in long -a; and the forms in -d, the secondary
ones. It is hard to see why they should all be short in the pada-
text, and the question is at least an open one.

A

B

0

Sum

L The regular form is -dni:

9

139

18

166

n. Both texts have •& :

6

57

63

m. The pada has •& ; samhitd, -d :

27

27

I. The scansion of the passages in which the 166 forms occur
shows that the metre demands a short in the penultimate of 4
octosyllabic pddas : V.5.10&: vii.55.6c: viii.87.8fl (trochaic?):
x.97.2a (dhdTmdni). Cf. Euhn, BeUrOge, iii.121.

A. The forms are: dhdnvdniy 3; dhdnvdni, 4; pdrvdni, 2;
from AV., dhdnvdni, vii.41.1 ; pdrvdni, i.11.1 : xi.8.12 : xii'.5.7l :
snd'vdni, xii.5.69.

B. The forms are : kdrmdni, 8 ; cdrmdni; jdnimdni, 9 ; jdn-
mdnij 3 ; dhdrrndni, 8 ; dhd'mdni, 25 ; nd'mdni, 14 ; br&hmdni,
53 ; mdnmdnij 5 ; mdrmdni; rdmdni, 3 ; vdrtmdni; pdrmdni;
sddmdni, 3 ; sd'mdni, 4 ; from AV., dd'mdni, Idmdni, vdrmdni,
etc.

C. The forms are : akshd'ni; dhdni, 14 ; #trshd'niy 2 ; sakth-
d'ni; from AV., dhdni, vii.69.1 ; 82.4,5 : xix.7.1 ; pirshd'ni, 11.1 :
x.4.19. In RV. i. 140. 13c, the metre demands the longer gram-
matical form dhdniy text dhd.

II. Both texts have -& In i. 1 73.3a, we have sddnid (certainly
plural), with short final d as eighth syllable in a pdda of 11,
where it ought surely to be long.

A. The forms are : dhdnva; dhdnua; pdrva, 4.

B. The forms are : kdrma, 5 ; jdnima, 2 ; jdnma, 3 ; dhdrma;
dhdma, 1 ; nd'ma, 13 ; brdhma, 8 ; bhti'ma, 3 ; mdnma, 3 ; rdma
(or ring/) ; pdrma, 1 ; sddtna, 4.

ELL The samhitd has ~d; the pada, -d Here belong 27 forms,
from man-stems only.

B. The forms are : jdnimd, 9 : dhdrmd, 2 ; nd'md; brdhmd,
6 ; bhU'md, 6 and in vi.62.8 (? Wb. 1765) ; rdmd; sddmd.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

540 G. R. Lanmarty [van, man, em-stems.

In 8 instances (j&nimdL, 6 ; dh&rmd; nd'md), the -d is eighth syllable in a jtitfs
of 11 or 12 (PrAt. viii.21): in 10 instances (brdhmd, 6 ; bh&'md, 3; r6md%1h*
second in 6, 8, or 1] (Pr&t. vii.25: viii.14): in these, the -d might be metrical
On the other hand, in 6 instances (dh&rmd ; bh&'md, 4 ; sddmd), the -d \b at the
end of *pdda (Prat, yiii.30: vii.14); and in 3 instances (jdnimdy 3), the seventh
in 11 (Pr&t viii.5). Here the -d is not simply metrical.

The AV. has: j&nimd, p. -a, ii.28.2: iv.1.3: v.11.5; nd'md, p. -a, ?.1.3;
vdrimd, p.?, iv.25.2. In vi.31.3: ix.9.3: arix.58.4 (=BV. x.189.3 : i.164.3:
x. 101.8), the AY. has dhd'md, nd'md, varmd, where the RV. has -d.

IV. Both texts have -d. The Rik has bat two such forms:
tfirah&'y 4 ; dhd, 21. Both may be referred to vowel stems. .The
A V. has : pdrvd, p. ?, xii.5.42 ; dhd, v.1.1 : xx.135.7.

Accusative Plural Masculine (see pp. 524-6).

A. The forms are: ddhvanas, 11; dyqjvanas, 2; from AV.,
dr&kvanas (iv.29.1), etc.;— (L) maghdnoB, RV., 10;— (IL ft)
drdv(a)na*, 3; (II. c) drdv(a)na8; evayd,v{a)nas; — (HI.) grd!*
nos, 2; prdtaryd'vnas; evayd'vnasf% text -yd'*, p. 451 end;—
yiZ'nas, 2. For yuvdtas, see p. 516.

B. The forms are : dpmanas; brahmdnas; takmdnas, AV.
v.30.16 ; — (IIL) from AV., durnd'mnas, xvi.6.7 : xix.36.4,5.

C. The forms are : mdtaripvanas, AV. xix.27.4 ; — (I.) uk$h>
dnas, RV. x.86.13 : so even in Bhag. P. x.83.13, BR. ; vr'shanas;
— (IL a) vr'sh(a)na9, viii7.33 ; — (IIL) ukshnds, 2 : so K&tyl $r.
xriii. 4.9,10 ; Jandrdjflas ; mdrdhnds ; yamdrdjflas ; rd'jflas;
vr'shnat, 2 ; from AV., mqpflda, ii.12.7 : ix.6.23 ; 8.18 ;— finally
ptfnai, RV., 2, and AV. iv.5.2.

Strong form for weak. Benfey, Gram. p. 311, note 3, cites
mahdtmdnas as an Epic A.p.m.

Instrumental Plural Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculines (48 forms, from 15 stems) : ddhvabhis, 2 ;
dprayutvabhis ; r'kvabhis, 15 ; evayd'vabhis ; grd'vabhis, 4 ;
prdtaryd'vabhis, 2 ; ytyvabhis, 2 ; yuvabhis; rdnvabhis; ffiboa-
bhis, 2; sfyvabhis, 11; sanUvabhis; sayd'vabhis, 3; suprayd'-
vabhis; svayugvabhis.

Neuters : pdtvabhis; pdrvabhis; vivdsvabhis; somapdrvabhu.

B. Masculines : dkhidraydmabhis ; adhvasmdbhis, 3 ; dprna-
bhis; dpmahanmabhis ; dguhimabhis ; dmabhis ; brahmdbhu;
mayd'raromabhis; vtdupdtmabhis; sukdrrnabhisy 2 ; sumdnma-
bhUy 2 ; supdrmabhis.

Neuters (67 forms, from 17 stems) : djmabhis; emabhis; kdr-
mabhUy 2 ; trd'mabhis; dhdrmabhu, 7 ; dhd'mabhis, 13 ; nd'ma-

pdkmabhis;

C. Masculines: ukshdbhis, 4 ; rd'jabhUjS; vr'shabhis, 11.

There is no stem rw-£dm-an. To me it admits of no doubt that
the form nikdmabhis at the end of x. 92. 9 rf is used (instead of the
proper ni&<2ma&) simply on account of a formal and metrical

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Lp.ni.Ti.] Noun-Inflection in ike Veda. 541

parallelism with evayd'vabhis at the end of c. Cf. rdnvabhis, at
end of v.44.10c, and article ranvd.

Neuters : akshdbhis, 8 ; asthdbhis ; dhabhis, 0 ; dsdbhis, 6 ;
tcddbhis, 5 ; d'dhabhis, 3 ; mahdbhis; vr'shabhis; pdkabhis, TS.
v.7.231.

Similarly, naktdbhis is used instead of ndktam at the end of
vii.104.18c to eke out the pdda to 12 syllables, and so make it
metrically parallel with a, b, and d.

Transition-form. For d^nais^ see p. 527.

Dative Plural Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculines : gr&'vabhyas; yuvabhyas; dtharvabhyas, Gr.,
-bhiasy vi.47.24.

B. Masculine: brahmdbhycbs, 3. Neuter: dhd'mabhya*, 2.

C. Masculines : rd'jabhyas, 4 ; pvdbhyas, AV. xi.2.30 ; tdksha-
bhyas, VS. xvl27. Neuter: dhabhyas.

Ablative Plural Masculine and Neuter.

A. Neuter: md'vabhycut, AV. ii.33.6.

B. Neuter: Idmabhyas.

C. Masculine: majj'dbhyas, AV. ii.33.6. Neuter: dhabhya*y

Genitive Plural Masculine and Neuter (see pp. 524-5).

A. Masculines : anarvdndm, 2 ; dyajvandm; sdtvandm, 2 ; —
(I.) maghdndm, 4 ; maghdndm, Gr. -aam, 12 times at the end of
catalectic pddas of 7 syllables, and in vii.32.7 {pdda of 11);
maghdnaam, with resolution, vi.68.2 : viii.1.16 ; 2.34 ? ; 19.34 ; —
(II. b) rdrdv(a)ndm ; vdjadd'v{a)ndm ; 8omapd'v(a)ndm ; for
8aha#radd'v(a)ndm, see p. 528 top ; — (III.) grd'vndm, 2.

Neuter: dhdnvandm, AV. xi.9.1.

B. Masculines: brahmdndm;— (III.) durnd'mndm, AV. ii.25.2.
Neuters: dJidrmandm, 2 ; brdhmandm, 2 {mdnmandm;— (III.)

dhindmndm; from AV., sd'mndm, xv.6.3.

C. Masculines: (III.) \vr,8hndm} viil 72.1: viii.46.29 (Gr. -adm);
from AV., rd'jfidm, thrice; — p&ndm, AV. iii.9.4.

Neuter: dhndm, 28 times.

It has been suggested that mahVndm, x.134.1, might be G.p.m. of mahiman,
the m being dropped as in the instrumental. If that were so, we should have
maKlnd'm (with I, and oxytone). But cf. pp. 398-9.

Transition-form. For dhdndm, see p. 527.

Locative Plural Masculine asd Neuter.

A. Masculines: ddhvam; kr'tvasu; ydjvasu, 2. Gr. reads
maghd8huy x.93.14, text maghdvatsu.

Neuters : dhdnvasu, 7 ; dhdnvasu; pdrvasu.

B. Masculine: dpmam, AV. iii.21.1 : xii.1.19.

Neuters : kdrmasu, 2 ; jdnmasu; dhd'mam, 3 : vdrmasu: $dd-
moww, 2.

tol. x. 72

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

C. R. Lanman, [tn-stems

Masculines: rd'jasu ; from AV., majjdm, i.11.4; yama-
rw, xviii.2.25.
enters : dhasu; ptrshdsu, 2.

STEMS IN IN.

ie stems in in are regularly oxytone. They neither syncopate
thematic vowel, nor lengthen it in the G.p., nor throw the
nt forward to the ending. Their declensional forms present
>st no irregularities whatever. Anomalously accented are
8drin and pd'kin (i.51.8 — a mere mistake for p<2£f ?). The
pounds with negative a- are barytone; and so kdrildatin,
d'vatHriny and indramedin.

?sides the stems formed bv the suffix tn, are here included
ral in vin (cf. mdydvm with mdyin) and one in min (rgrmn\
iese stems are declined only in the masculine and neuter. The
is formed with %: as, arJdn4, p. 367.

-ansitions to the a-declension. The A.s.ra. parame-shthin-am
ie point of departure for the N.s.n. param&shthincH*
ead of -shthi). The form is especially interesting, because, as
erfectlv evident, it owes its origin solely to the metre (so
I : idam ydt parameshthmam \ mdno vd brdhma&ampitam,
xix.9.4. Corresponding to vanin-am, as if it were vamna-m,
rmed (instead of vanin-as) the false plural van'tndni, also doe
ie metre : x.66.96, dlpa dshadhtr van'tndni yajfayd. In viil
I would venture to suggest the reading pdkinas, as transi-
nom.s.m. to pdk&n-am. The text has pdkinds (gate, as in
.22) ; but c£ for the accent am-ind. Possibly mahina (indra,
.8) and mahinasya (indrasya, vi.33.5 ; 68.8) are transition-
s; cf. mahin~e (indrdya, vii. 31.11).

ansition to the e-declension. Perhaps the an. X. mandi-tn
\) is an A.8. falsely formed after the analogy of the Is.
din-d, as if it were mandirtid (cf. p. 373). BK. explain it
rwise ; see A.s.m.

i the other hand, nuyayirnam may belong in the same cate-
with ilrmi-nam, khdd'trtiam, p. 378.

THE NEUTER FORM&

ie neuter forms are veryrare. They are : dndmi, 2 ; ubhayd-
; patatri, 4; from AY., pakatyeshi, L25.2 ; tsdri, x.1.19;
-d, RV. v.4.10; 40.8; sugandhin-d, viii.19.24 (but cf p.
; jyrahosh'tnas, G.s.n., viii.81.4; parameshthmam and van-
i9 above.

THE MASCULINE FORMS.
Nominative Singular Masculine.

»re belong 213 forms (from 55 stems). In vii.60.10, Gr. takes
X as N.s.m. with sdmrtis; but since this is fern., it is better
ike tveshf as N.s.f. from tveshia (cf. p. 360 med.). BR read
yd? eshdm fa misprint — see vii.1751). In x.51.6, rathfva
ably stands lor ratht'r-iva; see p. 375 end.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.B.m.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 543

Enumeration: ddvaydvt; dyudfwi; irt; JcdrHdaH; fd'kif; s&rt;— ankt'
dbhydvartt; arthf ; aptf, 4; adardv? ; udrf, 2; rgmV ; rjipt' ; rjUhi', 10
leopard?; hdmV ; kevalddV ; heft, 4; kdrt' ; dyumnf, 10; mshshapV ; pakM'
paripanth? ; prsJitidmay? ; prapath? ; prabhangt' ; pravepan? ; bdhufardhi'
brahmacdrf; bhadravddf, 2; manfshV, 5; mand?, 6; mardyf ; maMhasW
mdy?, 3; medV ; rathf, 3; rarnbhV ; rukmf ; vajrV, 21; vartnf, 2; vatf', 9
t?d/P, 70; virapfV, 3; potawf ; ftfrwC, 4; pushm^, 10; ptoAC; pvofl&ni', 6
sahasrf, 2 ; addf ; som?, 2 ; gvabdtf ; hast?.

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR MASCULINE.

There are 192 forms (from 58 stems). For Urmt-nam (ix.98.6),
and khddi-nam (vi.16.40), see i-stems, p. 378. The latter word
yields a tolerable sense even if referred to an tn-stem (khddin~am) ;
but in that case, I would suggest the reading hdstena for hdste
nd : ' whom they carry (with) on the hand as a new-born child,
decked with spangles. Like Urmi-nam is perhaps ni-yayi-namy
x.60.2 ; c£ yaxfornd. Kuhn, Beitr&ge, iii.467, has observed that
the cadence of i.85.3c requires a long ultima in abhimdtfwrdm,
text -dm; cf. vidhdvdm, p. 330.

8R. regard mandim (i.9.2) as an inaccurate rendering of the
pronunciation of mandmam (in-), after elision and crasis; but it
may be a transition-form (p. 542). The an. A. rjUhdm (i.32.6)
may be explained without setting up a separate stem rjtshd ;
namely, it may have been used instead of rfishinam, in order to
satisfy better the metrical parallelism of the different pddas and
the formal parallelism of pdda b (c£ viii.65.5).

Enumeration : advaydvinam, 2 ; dvdjinam ; — at/nycm, 1 1 ; abhimdtinam ,
arkmam; avakrakshiaam ; apvtoam, 12; dddrinam; isliminam; uktha^ahsinam ;
uJdhinam, 2 ; udrinam, 5 ; ubtoydvinam ; rjishinam, 4 ; kapar dbnam, 2 ; karasm-
Ihknam^ 2 ; keUmaliHTiaan ; kdminam ; kdrinam, 2 ; kuldyinam ; kCtcidarthinam ;
catbiam ; tarasvinam ; dyumnmam ; dhaninam, 2 ; nanuuvvnam ; niyayinam ;
pakshmam ; paripanthinam ; putrinam ; pttrishmam, 2 ; manishinam, 2 ; manth-
wam; mandinam, 3; manyuahdvinam ; mdydvinam; mdyinam, 10; rakshas-
vmam; rtUhviam; vajrinam, 6; van&nam, 2; vanfaam; vaydkinam; varc&nam ;
vajinam, 49 ; virap&wm, 2 ; pakujvinani, 4 ; fotinam, 6 ; fdkbnam, 2 ; pushmi-
nom, 3; prnginam; sahasraposhtnam ; sahanrtnan^ 27.

INSTRUMENTAL SINGULAR MASCULINE.

Here belong : mahd'vatdrind; — arc&nd; apvind; kimidind, 2 ;
ma?idi/id, 2; rakshawind ; vakhind; vdjind, 3. For ktrmd,
i.100.9, Gr. proposes -ne.

Dative Singular Masculine.

Here belong : abhydvart'me; amitrlne; kapardine, 2 ; kdrine;
Jcimtdiiie ; prasakshine ; bhdmine ; mantshtne ; mandine, 2 ;
mahine; rakskasvine, 2; rathine; vcyrine, 12; virapf&ne; pdJAne,
2 ; pprine, 2 ; pushmine, 2. *

Ablative and Genitive Singular Masculine.

Ablatives: abhiprabhanghias; pcUatrinas, 2; sominas (x.57.1).

Genitives (71 forms, from 27 stems) : ddvaydvinas; — arth-mas,

2 ; rjUhmas; dvaydvinas; dhaninas; namasvinas, 2 ; parn'inas;

Digitized by VjOOQlC

44 C. R. Lanman, [tn-stems.

ragardhinaa; bhUriposhinas; mandinas; mdylnas, 7 ; ratmna*;
xsinas, 3 ; retinas; vajrinas, 3 ; vaninas; vanmas, 2 ; varcvia*,
; vdjinas, 17; virappinas, 2; mduharslnnas ; vrandiiuu ;
afmas ; pushminas, 6 ; prtiginas; 8ahasr%\iasy 2 ; jomvia*. 7.

Locative Singular Masculine.

Here belong: mdy'mi; vdjhii; somhii; from AV., dvip'xhi,
astini, vi.38.2; paranieshthlni, x.3.24; brahmacdrini, xl5.22.

Vocative Singular Masculine.

Here belong 76 forms (from 1 5 stems) : dndbhayin; amaJrin;
bhaydvin; rjtpin; rjt&hin, 9; tuvikiirmin; prapathin; yakshin;
ojrin, 41 ; vdjin, 5 ; virappin, 2 ; pavasin; piprin, 6 ; pushmin,
; sahasin.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Dual Masculine.

I. There are 369 <2-forms (from 15 stems) : according to Midler's
ndex, apvind, 68; apvind, 246; -^, p. -aw, 4; dpvind, 27;—
umdrind; kepind, 7 ; pajrahoshind; parnind; putrtnd; purv
kind; prasakshbid; manth'ind; mdydvmd; mdyind; vajrmd;
dfmd, 4; vdjind; vighanind; pushmind. The AV. has: apv'md,
4; apvind, 17; dpvindy 4.

II. There are 32 aw-forms : apvuiau, 1 1 ; apvinau, 17 ; dpvitiau,
; vdjlnaUy 2.

In the very late verse x.184.2, the Rik reads, g&rbliam te a^iinau devd'v d' dkat-
im ptehkarasrajd ; and the incorrect AV. variant (v.25.3), . . a^inobhd' dkattdm
. The Rik-verse, if conformed to the canons of the old parts of the Riksanhfta,
ould read : a^cind devd' dhattum, p. devd' &' ; or apvind vbhd', p. -nau ubhd' a'.
he Atharvan requires emendation. We may read : . acvindv ubhd'v d* ; or, -*»
svd'v d\

Inst., Dat., Gen., and Loc. Dual Masculine.

Instmmentals : apvibhydm, i. 44.2,14; 182.6: v.51.8; indra-
ledibhydm, AV. xi.9.4. Dative: apv\bhydm,i. 164.27 : v.73.10.
Genitive: apvinos, 17. Locative: apvlnos, i.120.10.

Nominative and Vocative Plural Masculine.

Here belong 153 forms (from 64 stems). Some may be singular.

Enumeration : ahkutfnas ; atrinas, 2 ; arkinas. 2 ; arcinas, 2 ; arthmas, 3 ;
hminas, 3 ; ukthuias, 6 ; upamantrinas ; rgminas ; rjishinaSj 2 ; kapardvuu ;
ibandhinas ; Mminas, 2 ; Jcd/rinas, 2 ; kirinas ; kr<;anmas ; kefinas, 2 ; khddkuts ;
ithinas ; g&yatrinas ; gharminas ; tarasvinas, or G. ; dapigvinas ; drapsinas ;
vaydvinas, 2 ; dhhminas; dhrshadrinas ; namasvinas, 5; niiodinas ; nirdmmas;
xshahginas^ 2 ; patehinas, 2 ; patatrinas, 2 ; paripanthinas ; parmnas, 2 ; prffino*,
; purishinas; prakridinas ; prasaksttinas ; baiirias ; inanishintu, 16; voc., 5;
\andinas, 5 ; mahlnas; mdydvinas ; mdyinas, 4; medinas; rctfhiruu; vaninas, 2;
mlnas, 4; varminas ; vdjinaa, 16; voc., 2 ; viraptfnas, 2; voc, 1 ; virokinas, 2;
Ishdninas ; vratacdrinas ; ratagvinas ; patinas, 3 ; fdkinaa ; puhrninas ; sahas-
mas, 4 ; sominas, 5, see Ab. ; voc, 1 ; svdninas ; hastinas, 3 ; htranincu.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A. p.m.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 545

Accusative Plural Masculine.
Here belong 44 forms (from 23 stems).

Enumeration : ctfrinas, 3 ; artfinas ; arthinas ; aminos ; ttkthapahstnas ;
kdmiruu ; kdrinas: grathinas ; dyumninas ; pakshinas ; bhdminas ; mandinas ;
mdijiruu, 3j mitrtnas, 2; rakshasoinas, 3; ratkinas, 3; vaninas; vanitiat, 7;
vdjinaSi 5 ; vrandinas ; sakaarinas, 3 ; somiruu ; hir aminos.

INSTRUMENTAL PLUBAL MASCULINE.

Here belong : apvibhis; rgmibhis; keptibhis, 2 ; nishangibhis;
patatribhis, 3 ; manfohibhis, 1 ; mandibhis; rukmibhis; vdjibhis,
4 ; pushmibhis; hastibhis.

Dative Plural Masculine.
Sole example : pikhibhyas, AV. xix.22.15 (? MSS. pishir).

Genitive Plural Masculine.

Here belong : kdri'ndm; mdyl'ndm, 3 ; vdjindm; prngindm;
stukdvindm; vapindm, AV. xv.11.9. Cf. p. 373, IV.

Locative Plural Masculine.
Here belong: Jchddishu; dvarishu; hastishu, AV. xii.1.25.

STEMS IN AS.

The words whose stems end in as are primarily and principally
neuter nouns, accented on the radical syllable : as, mdn-as.

They often occur, however, at the end of compound adjectives,
and are then inflected in all three genders: thus, N.s., sumdndsy
m. ; 8u-md?ids, f. ; su-mdnds, n. There are also a few oxytone
masculines in as : as, rdkshds.

Of a few stems, the formation is not clear : upds (? p. 406) ;
ripd'das. For khid-vas, see p. 536. The stem rbhvan is sup-
plemented by r'bhvas and rbhva; and p'ikvas, by pikvan and
pikvd — see p. 526. Gr. sets up a stem tish^zushds; but see Ab.s.
Cf., however, d's, iid, up, yH's (p. 523), and dksh (? see G. dual).

For the accent of bhish-d', see l.s.m.

Stems in as distinguish strong and weak cases only in the
N.Ap. neuter, where the thematic a is lengthened and nasalized.

Benfey (Gram. p. 316, xvii.) admits the existence of strength-
ened forms in the masculine and feminine. The contract forms,
however, can be accounted for without the assumption of a long
vowel (-dm—'&sam, not -dsam)\ and as for the other apparent
instances of strengthening, they are all more or less doubtful.

The least doubtful case is that of the an. A. topd'sd {rathayd!-
vd?id), viii.38.2, p. topd'sd. This is the only instance in which
both texts have d. Brugman, Zeitsch. xxiv.24, has suggested
topd1 sdrathayd'vdnd.

The most numerous are the much-discussed forms of ushds.
The strong forms with short d number IS : A.s. (ushd'sam), 33 ;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

546 C. R. Lanman, [as-stems.

da., 4 ; N.V.p., 41. Over against these are to be set 28 strong
forms with long d in the samhitd, and in the samhitd only : Aa
(ushd'sam), 11; du., 3; N.V.p., 14. It is most important to
observe that in not a single instance does the padapdtha have 6;
and further that the d is imperatively demanded by the metre in
20 instances, and decidedly favored by it in all the rest.

In 18 instances the d is penultimate of a pdda of 11 syllables: i.32.4; 123.12;
124.9,13: u.28.9: iii.31.4: iv.3.11 ; 5.13; 12.2: v.1.1: vi.30.5 ; 65.4; 712:
vii 41.7 ; 42.5 ; 72.4 ; 76.4 ; 88.4. The d occurs as eighth syllable, in a pdda of
11, at vii.99.4; of 12, at x.35.2. The d occurs as second syllable in a pdda of
8, at i.188.6: iv.30.9 : viii.27.26. It occurs as fourth syllable, in a pdda of 8. a
v.5.6; of 11, at viii.85.1 : x.88.18; of 12, at i.92.2 ; 134.4a. The compouDd
ushd'sd-naktd occurs ten times, always at the beginning of a pdda of 1 1 or 12, so
that the d is in the second place. Ndktoshd'sd (5 times) also occurs only at the
beginning of a pdda of 8 or 1 1 ; so that we find d in the third place, despite the
metre.

Brugman, I.e. 21, actually divides the masculines and feminines into two
classes, of which one distinguished the strong cases from the weak, and the other
did not His first category contains only one stem, ushds (p. 28). But the
evidence of the Vedic forms upon which his argument is based seems to me too
equivocal to have much weight. It is far from certain that the whole phenomenon
is not a purely metrical one; cf. vii.41.6a with 7a: 78.46 with 76. 4a*.- i.l23.11rf
with 12d. I examined the 78 passages in which the strong cases with & occur
and found not one where the metre demanded d, and only three where it even
favored d: viz., iii.55.1a, a late hymn, & second in pdda of 11 ; vii.75.36, & fourth
in 11; x.127.36, & second in 8.

The long d of a-yd's is inherent in the stem ; cf. also ayd'sya, dydsd. Nd'$-&
is a strong form of nds ; but this is a radical stem (p. 493).

It is by no means certain that the an. X. in i. 168.9c, ie sapsard'so yjanayaata
abhvam, is to be referred to an tw-stem ; but if so, the metre is almost enough
to justify the long d. BR. and Gr. refer it to sapsara-.

For vd'tasvantis-as, vii. 5 6. 3c, we ought to read vd'Uisvandsas (p. 345) since an
aksharapahkti demands a long in the fourth place. But this form we refer of
course to the o-stem (cf. vd'tasvana-m, viii.91.5).

We also find one weak case with d : viz., in X.39.1&, doshd'm
ushd'so hdvio hamshmatdy p. ushd'sah Gr., Wb. 1757, takes it
as G.s. ; it may be A. p. As for ushdts-dm (cited by Benfey, SV.
Gl. 32,150, and Gram. p. 316), it is indeed favored by the metre,
RV. viii.43.5c, iishd'sdm iva ketdvah, but the text has &'.

The Zend has apparently strengthened forms. The A.s. u&hd-
onhem occurs 5 times. In Vend. xiii.l, all the MSS. have vi$pen\
(! masc.) paiti ushdonhem, so that one is tempted to ask whether
the word has not here gone over to the o-declension — ushdsa+n;
see below, III. The N.p.m. ha-zaoshdorih-6^ i. e. sa-j6shds~as,
occurs Yac. li.20. But we also find a weak case with strength-
ening, viz., the A. p. masc. (yazamaide* vairiscd) awezh-ddndonh~6,
i. e. *ab-ddnd8-as, Yac. xlii.2. It is certainly no easier to take
vairts as fern., and make -ddndonhd an A.p.f. of -ddna (cf. p. 363
end).

THE RELATION OF EQUIVALENT STEMS IN AS AND A (J).

In looking through the Vedic vocabulary, one cannot fail to
notice a large number of stems in asy by the side of which are
found stems almost or entirely like them, barring the final &

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions.] Noun-Inflection in tJie Veda, 547

Some of these pairs consist of words of like meaning, but of
independent origin or formation ; as, mr'gaya and mrgayds (see
Gr.). Others are similar in formation, bat the meanings are
different ; as, chdnda and chdndas. There are yet other couples
of true synonyms, of which both are very common (cf. drdvina
with drdvinas) or equally rare (cf. durdsha with durdsnas; Ivdra,
c circuit, Umkreis,' with vdras, evpos) : and of such it is hard to
say that the one is less original or normal than the other.

After leaving all these out of view, there still remain many
stems in as identical in meaning with stems in a (cf. Benfey,
Gram. p. 316, note 4).

If we examine the usage of the language respecting these
doublets, we find that in many instances the one stem is decidedly
regular and common, and the other only of sporadic occurrence
or often even a a7taS Xeyopierov, L e. comparatively irregular.
In such cases, the right to set up two independent stems, one in
as and one in a, may fairly be questioned. Upon this subject
Professor Benfey, Abh. xvii.22, remarks : " These are irregularities
which are not to be disposed of by inventing a new stem for
every irregular form. On the contrary, we must endeavor to
discern how the original declension of certain themes was so
transformed by heteroklisis and metaplasm, that not only single
cases assumed two or more forms, but also their whole declen-
sional system became doubled and manifold."

In the following pages, therefore, I have attempted to discover
the relations between the a and the cu-stems, in cases where the
one seemed primitive and normal, and the other secondary or
derivative, and to trace the processes by which the latter came
into use beside the former. I find that where any significant
relation exists it is generally one of transition ; L e., the secondary
form is based upon the primary, and is made in accordance with
the ordinary norms and analogies of the language, but these are
false.

Thus the N.s. of the very old word for c moon, month' is mdrs;
the A.s., md's-am; Ls., mds-d'; etc. This remained in vogue as
a name for * month ;' but went out of use at an early date as a
name for ' moon.' In the latter signification it was replaced by a
comparatively modern word, candrd-mds (d). The recession of

the accent helped on the oblivion of its etymology ; and at last it
was no longer felt as a compound of rnd's. Its N.s. was regular
— candrdmds. Its A.s. should be candrdmdsam. But in the
vast majority of instances, the As. which corresponds to a N.s.
in -ds ends in -ds-am. Here, then, in accordance with the false
analogies of the language, an A.s. candrdmds-am was formed to
correspond to the common N.s. candrdmds, as if this were from
a stem candrdmds. The other cases were made in like manner,
and so the whole declension was transformed. Cf. below, IV. 1.
The N.s. is the point of contact of the two declensional series.

It is not unworthy of notice that these processes of change
were often occasioned or aided by the exigency of the metre, or

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

548 0. R. Lanman, [<u-stem&

of the formal parallelism of the verse, or by some other circum-
stance. Of these circumstances I now give a few typical exam-
ples, and shall notice others here and there in the progress of the
discussion.

It is fair to assume that the Vedic poet would not depart from the ordinary
usages of the language without some reason. And if, upon examination, we find
these grounds such as give us a less exalted opinion of the general character of
much of the Vedic poetry, we ought not on that account to doubt their validity.

The choice between two equivalent case-ending 8 is often determined by the
metre ; cf. p. 535 med. After what Aufrecht has said (Bigveda9. preface, pp.
xii-xxxvii), it is clear that even the words of stock-phrases were altered on the
same account. A comparison of ii.34.6 with x.42.7 illustrates this. In the
former, pddas a, 6, and c are of 12 syllables each: in the latter, of 11 : and the
fourth pddas read accordingly

kdrid dhiyarii jaritre vd'japeeasamj and
krdhi' dliiyam jaritri vd'jaratndm.

Since words of different metrical value, but of equivalent meaning, could be
gained by using an os-stem instead of an a-stem, a word whose theme is almost
invariably vocalic (e. g. pdsha) is sometimes used as if it were consonantal, and
vice versa. Thus it admits of no doubt to my mind that the form {raytit)
viw&'ywposhas-am was UBed in i. 79.96 and vi.59.9d rather than -posha-m, for no
deeper reason than to eke out the pdda to 8 syllables. Since the raison tT&re of
these isolated forms is so clear, we are not justified in setting up a stem -poshas,
except for lexical convenience.

The stock-pddas ix.68.10c and x.45.12o read: advesht dyd'vdprthiv? hxvema;
and a, 6, and d are each of 11 syllables. Had they been of 12, c would almost
infallibly have read huv&na dyd'vdprthivtf adveshdsd.

Forms from a stem dftgira were never current and in vogue. And yet we find
the isolated L.s. dngire at i v. 5 1.4. I believe it is simply due to the formal
parallelism of the verse : yend ndvagve dngire ddgagve saptd'sie, etc.

In ii.10.3, bhkvad agnih purupepdsu g&rbhah, the form purupefassu would have
satisfied the metre {ss would make the eighth syllable long by position— see
L.p.n.), but would have been of ambiguous gender (m.f.n.). I believe the <2-fbrm
pwrupe\dsu is used in order to distinguish the word as a feminine (sc. wkMr'sft*-
SAy., oshadM8hu).

For the more systematic treatment of the subject in hand,!
shall dispose it under five or six several heads.

I. Transitions from the declension in as to that in d (fern.),
and a (masc.), by contract forms.

II. Other transitions from the oi-declension yielding forms
from shorter vocalic themes.

III. Transitions from the a#-declension resulting in forms from
longer vocalic themes.

B.

IV. Transitions of radical stems to the a*-declension.

V. Transitions of suffixal o-stems to the o^-declension.

VI. Miscellaneous cases.

The following table shows some of the principal points of con-
tact of the two declensional systems.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 549

The
stem

I. &c&s
ndvedas

II. tedaa
11 r. -tejas

makes
its

A.8.1

N.p.m.
N.s.n.

A.8.TD.

dc&'m.
navedds.
Mdas.
-tejas-am.

This last form
is regarded as
A.8.1 &$&'-m
N.p.m. ndvedds
N.B.m. likdar*
A.8.n. -tq'aaa-m

of a
stem

w.

ndveda.

htda.

-tefaaa.

IV. -dhd'

V. ?tpa

N.8.IB.

N.s.m.

-dhd'-B.
tfpa-a.

N.s.m.
N.8.n.

-dhd's

tfp08

•dk&'a.
tfpoa.

I. Transitions from the <4S-Deolension

Contract

FORMS.

The subject of contract forms is so inseparably connected with
that of transition to the vowel declension that both must be dis-

cussed together.

The existence of contract forms from as-stems is mentioned by
Benfey, Oram. p. 316, 1. 14. Gr., Ueb. ii.518, remarks that they
are indeed infrequent, but not unheard-of. Benfey derives the
contract forms in -dm and -ds from strengthened forms in -foam
and -dsas. This seems unnecessary. Forms in -d(s)am9 -d(s)a8
would yield the same result. Su^mdnds-am becomes su-mdndm;
and 8ii-mdnd8-asy su-mdnds. Just so in Greek €v-ptevi<r-a(pi)
becomes ev-psvri ; and ev-nevia-es, Bv-fABveH.

The masc. stem vedhds is well authenticated ; cf. vedhds-am,
v.43.12; vedhd's (s&fnds)^ ix. 101.15. But in ix.102.4, we have
vedhd'm (jajiidnd'm, sc. sdmam), and in ix.26.3, vedhd'm (td'm).
There can be no reasonable doubt that this is a true contract
form. The assumption of a masc. stem in d is out of the question.

These contract forms are not unknown to the A vesta. So on
p. 330, 1. 8, ed. Westergaard, we find ushdm priram. In Yaona
lxii.5, occurs frazaiithn hvdpam^ equivalent to prajd'm sv-dpdm9
i. e. su-dpasam; the nom. is hvdpdo, i. e. su-dpds. In Yc. li.18,
qarendo is probably an ablative singular of the stem qarenanh,
for qarenan/id, like the Vedic G.s. nrmdnds for nrmdixas-as. Cf.
also Justi, JIandbuchy § 406. Mazddo as N.s. (cf. medhd's) is
dissyllabic; but as G.s. (cf. medhda-aa), trisyllabic. The A.s.
mazdam still retains traces of its trisyllabic origin (cf. medhds-
am) in the Gath&s, e. g. in the octosyllabic pdda,Yg. xxviii.4.2a,
tnazdamcd ahurem; but not in the Yashts, e. g. yd mazdam tard
manyUZ, x.139. See Mayr, Sitzungsberichte d. kais. Ak. (Vienna,
1871) lxviii.774, and Geldner, Metrik, p. 17.

It is plain, however, that as far as the form of itself is con-
cerned, an A.s.£ in -dm may be derived directly from a stem in
tf, and a N.p.m. or f. in -ds from a stem in d or d. Nearly every
supposed contract form may thus be disposed of, if we are willing
to assume expressly for that form a stem in d or d.

The stem ndvedas is well authenticated. In i. 165. 13 tf, eshd'm
bhiUa ndvedd ma rtdfndm (cf. x. 3 1.3c?, ndvedaso amr'tdndm
abhHma9 and iv.23.4c), ndvedds is N.p.m., and can not be derived
from ndveda*, except as a contract form. Gr. accordingly sets up
bstemndveda for this one single form; but BR — as I think,
rightly — ref er it to ndvedas.

vol. x. 73

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

550 C. R. Lanman, [as-stems.

It becomes necessary, then, to examine the usage of the Vedic
language in order to determine whether we are justified in setting
up subsidiary stems in A and d, or not. If not, the forms may
fairly be called contract forms. If the assumption of stems in a
and d is warrantable, the forms in -ds and -dm may be considered
as regular derivatives from them. But in some instances, it is
impossible to decide with certainty.

I shall now discuss the stems which certainly or probably show
contract forms, and with them the forms of transition. I shall
first take up dpd's and jards as typical, and then the rest in
alphabetical order.

1. The stem of the Vedic word for 'hope' is dpds, f., from the
root pas (pans, pds-mari\ with d'. From it are found in the Rik
the forms : dpdsd, 4 ; -asas, N.p., 5 ; -dsas, A.p., I. There is not
a trace of the stem dpd'. In the classical language, on the other
hand, there is not a trace of the Vedic stem dpds; all forms come
from dpd'. The two stems are undeniably of identical origin ;
but drpd' can not be derived directly or phonetically from the
root pas by any method known to me. How then are the two
stems dpds and dpd' to be connected ? unquestionably by the
form dpd'm. This occurs: AV. vi.119.8: xix.4.2 : Ait. Br. iu\46:
vii.26,80: ^atBr. iii.3.1": vi.7.4T: xi.l.6M: xii.4.3*; it maybe
considered in older passages as a contract form for dpdsam.
Corresponding to this A.s. dpd'm, as if the stem were dpd1- (so
£!at.Br. xiv.9.4n), was formed the transition-nom. s. dpd\ ii.1.34,
49; 3.1"": xi.7.11: xiv.4.1M; 5.41 ; 7.3\ In like manner are
made the forms of the later declensional system : e. jr. dpayd,
Ram. ii.65.35 ; dpe, voc., Bhartr. iii.6 ; dpds, N.p., 9at.Br. j.2.1";
dpdbhyas, ib. This stem belongs on p. 494, q.v. ; but is given
here for completeness.

2. Somewhat similar is the history of jards, m. In the Rik we
find : jards-am, 2 ; -dsd; -dsas, Ab., 2 ; and the contract aocus. 8.
jard'm, i.140.8: v. 41.17; not a single form necessarily implying
a vowel-stem. In like manner the AV. has; jards-am, 1.30.3:
ii.13.1; -dsd, iii.31.1 : viii.2.8 ; -dse, i.30.2 : vi.5.2 ; -dsas, v.30.17:
vi.122.1,4; -dsi, ii. 10.5 : xii.3.6 ; and the Cat.Br., -dsd, xiii.8.3'-4;
-dsas, x.4.31. The ace. jard'm occurs AV. viiL2.11: xix.24.5:
TS. iv.3.11' : £>at.Br. xiv.6.41. Corresponding to jard'm, as if the
stem were jard!, is formed the transition-nom. jard', AV. xi.8.19:
xviii.4.50: VS. xviilS : ^at.Br. v.4.11; the Ls. jardyd, ^atBr.
xii.4.11 : xiv.7.141 ; the D.s.jard'yai, AV. iii.ll. 7 : $at.Br. xi.8.3*.

3. The stem dngiras is of frequent occurrence. In i.88.4, d'd
dngirdh prathamam dadhire vdyah, the N.p.m. dngirds is best
explained as a contract form. Gr. sets up a stem dngira; but
the only other Vedic form that occurs to support it is found at
iv.fH.4, where dngire is used instead of dngirasi to preserve the
formal parallelism (p. 548). I therefore prefer to call dngire a
transition-form, and not to assume that a stem dngira ever had
any real existence. For angiro, see A.p.m.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. L] Noun- Inflection in the Veda.- 551

4. Equally doubtful is the stem dn-dga; dn-dgas is Vedic and
post-Vedic. BR take dndgds as A.p.m, in vii.60(576).l (so Gr.
in Ueb.) and 66(582).4 (sc. nah), i. e. as a contract form for
dndgaxas. If this be admitted, why not also dndgds (as N.p.m.
in vii87.7 ; 07.2: x.36.12), and dndgdm (gd'm, viii.00.15) ?
There then remains but one form, dndgdn (iii.54.19: iv.12.4:
x. 12.8) to be explained by false analogy. In x.35.3 (where b, e,
and d are of 12 syllables), a reads, dyd'vd no adyd* prthivi'
dttdgasas; but in 12.8 ( where a, b, and d are of 11), c reads,
mitrd nodtra dditir andgdn; so iv.12.4c. Cf. iii.54.19£ with
i. 123.3d.

5. If the text had anehd'[s] in x.61.12, we might take it as
N.p.m. for anehdsas with kdrdvas; but see N.s.m.

6. Stem apsards. The stem psdras is supported by 5 occur-
rences in the Rik, and by the compounds aevd-psaras (3), su-
psdrastama, and mddhu-psaras ; the stem psara, if at all (p.
546), only by sapsard'sas, i.168.9, of uncertain meaning. From
a-p&ards occur in the Rik : -d's, N.s. ; -dsas, N.p. ; -dsas, A.p., 2 ;
-dsdm; and in the AV., -dsau, vLll8.1,3; -dsas, iv.37.12: vi.
111.4: vii.109.8: viiL5.13: ix.7.10: xii.l. 23,50: xiv.2.9,84; -asas,
iv.37.3,4; -dsas, iv.37.2 : xi.9.15 : xiv.2.35 ; -dsdm, vi 130.1 ; cf.
gandharvdpsardsas, viii.l0.27&&: x.9.9: xi.7.27; 9.16: xix.54.4;
-dsas, viii.8.15; 10.27: xi.6.4 ; 9.24; -dsdm, xix.36.6. The A.s.
apsard'm (AV. iv.38.1&w, 2bis, 4) I regard as a contract form,
and as the point of departure for the transition-forms apsard'-
bhyas, ii.2.5 : vii.109.2 ; -rd'su, ii.2.3 ; -rdndm, Ram. i. 45.84 {-rasas
in preceding verse) ; cf. apsardpates, AV. iv.37.7.

7. The A.s.m. updndm, x.40.7 : AV. iv.29.6, is perhaps best
explained as standing for u$dnas-am; c£ u^anas-e kdvydya,
Kauc,. 139, and BR. s.v. To assume contraction in the L.s.
(updne, i.51.11, for updnas-i) seems too venturesome. For updnd,
see N.s.m.

8. Forms from the stem ushds occur in the Rik by hundreds ;
but not a single one necessitating a stem ushd'. The A.p. ttshd's
(ix.41.5) and the A.s. ushd'm (i. 18 1.9: x.68.9) are contract forms;
likewise ushd'm-ushdm, AV. xii.2.45. Upon such as these are
based the transition-forms ushi (du., VS. xxi. 17,35: xxviii.6),
ushd'bhydm (xxi.50 : TBr. ii.6.14a), and navoshayd ($ak. 175=
202 Pischel).

9. Possibly tavd is a contract form for tavds-d (cf. no. 12) ; it
occurs iv.18.10, tavd-gd'-m vrshabhdm.

10. Stem ndvedas: see p. 549. For i.79.1, see N.p.f.

11. In x.92.14, Roth takes nrmdnds as a contract G.s.m. with
aktds. i We praise the inviolable Aditi with all her queans and
the youthful lord of the kindly Night.' Gr., Ueb. ii.518, reads
nrmdndm, A.s.m.

12. BR. refer puruddnsd, du., vii.73.1, to puruddnsas (q. v. ;
cf. ddnsas, su-). Whether it is an admissible contraction for
puruddnsasd is not perfectly certain (cf, tavd, no. 9) ; but if we
allow it, then puruddnsam, hi. 1.23, is a transition-form.

Digitized by VJOOQ IC

552 0. R. Lanman, [os-stems.

13. If mah&8 be considered as an established adjective stem (so
with drnasy i.3.12, etc.), then the vexed mahd'm may be explained
as contracted from mahds-am; but c£ p. 532.

14. The forms given by Gr. s.v. medhd' seem to indicate that
this was originally a vocalic stem. The compounds, however,
point to a different conclusion. In x.65.10 (where pddas a,fl,
and d urejagatt), c reads br'haspdtim vrtrakhdddm sumedhdsam;
on the contrary, in 47.6 (where b, c, and d are trislitubh), a reads
prd saptdgum rtddhttim sumedhd'm | br'haspdtim matir dchd
jigdti; and so x.l25.5tf=AV. iv.30.3^, tdm brahmd'nam turn
r'shirh tdm sumedhd'm. This is certainly a contract form, and
interesting as called forth by the metre. In vii.91.3a, sumedhd'n
is perhaps A. p.m.

The stem sumedhda is well accredited. Besides its occurrences as given by Gr.,
we find: -&% N.s., AV. v.11.11: vii.60.1: ix.1.6: VS. iii41 ; ^V.i, <£tBr.
xiv.9.1'; -asd, La., Kathas. 27.149 and 103.144; -dsas, N.p., AY. vii.61.1.2. Bil,
v.900, cite the compounds a-medkas, alpa- (-medhaa-dm, Bhag. 7.23), dur- (-mtdhti,
18.35), puru-, manda-, (dele so-,) satya-, hart-. Durmedha occurs as well aa d%r-
medhas, but the latter is considered by the grammarians to be the only comes
form; cf. Pan. v.4.122. Purwn4dh&-a occurs RV\ iz.97.52; but SV., i.541:
ii.454, has -da. Sum&dho-a occurs at z. 132.7, but, as BR. admit, only in a play
of words with Nr-m6dhas; so Nr-mtdha-m, 80.3. Gr. takes mitd-medha from
rnSdhH.

In view of these forms, it is fair to regard medhd' m as a con-
tract form for medhds-am. It occurs in RV. 8 times, in AV. at
x.2.17, and in SV. LlOl fRV. vedhd'm). Medhd' 8, N.p., may
also be a contract form. The remaining three, -d\ -dyd (3), anii
-d'bhisy may then be explained as forms of transition. CI Benley,
SV. OL s.v. medhds.

15. In VS. viii.10, we need uot, with Benfey, consider reto-dhd'm
as a contract form for -dhdsam. See IV. 3.

> 16. Stem vayds, ' strength-giving.' I do not think Grassmann's
article Ivayd' ought to stand. Both BR. and A. Ludwig take
vayd's in x.92(918).3 as 'Aestc;' for vayd's, vii.40{556).5, Gr.
reads in Ueb. i.583, vaydma; there remains only vay<2 m, L165.15;
166.15; 167.11; 168.10= VS. xxxiv.48. Mahldhara makes it
stand for vaydsdm. BR. refer it to a stem vayd', * St&rkung,'=
vdyas (accent !).

I would assume an oxytone adjective stem vayds. As dpas,
i work,' is to apds, * working, busy,' so is vdyas, l strength,' t°
vayds, ' strengthening, strength-giving ;' cf. Lindner, p. 50. We
may then take vayd'm as a contract A. a.m. adj. with ishd-m (for
vayds-am), and read :

Md' ydsishta tanfo; vayd'm [id]

vidyd'mesham, vrjdnarh jtrdddnum.
4 Hither come ye with refreshment for our bodies ; right strength-
giving refreshment may we receive, (and) well-watered meads.'
For irf, cf. i. 132.5c?, end.

17. Stem vedhds; see p. 549.

18. The stem sajdshas is amply supported ; cf. also vijoshas-am.
I doubt whether the assumption of a stem sqjdsha is justifiable.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. L] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 553

In iii.4(238).8 and vii.34(550).23, the text has (not -d, but) -<!k,
N.s.f. of stem -as. The N.p.m. in -ds (19) may be regarded as a
contract form ; so -ds in AV. iii.22.1 (or N.s.f.) ; and djoshds
(g'ira&, N.p.f.), RV. i.9.4. There then remains only the form
sajdshnu (iii.62.2), which may be explained as a transition-form
based on the N.p. sajdshds. In VS. xii.74, the text has sajd-
shasau (cf. BR.) ; but in TS. v.6.41, the transition-form sajdshan.
As for sajdshds, with agvind in i. 11 8. 11, and rddast in iv.56.4, the
difficulty is not lessened by referring it to sajdsha.

19. For su-medhds, see no. 14.

20. A certain instance of a contract N.p.£ is seen in iii.33.12,
sxtrd'dhds (nadias)9 for surd'dhas-as; cf. BR.

Ben fey, Abh. xvii.22, would allow contract forms in the classical
language. He cites: atfa/acdm, A.s. fern., for ati-yaca%-am,
Nala viii.4; gushka-srotdm (nadtm), for -asam, xvi.14. As tran-
sition-forms might then be regarded: kdrta-yaca-m, Arsb. Br.
i. 36,265,545 ; prati-srota-m, Bhag. P. x.78.18; cf. sahasra-srota-,
ib. v.20.26.

n. Further Transitions from the A S-Declension.

Besides the regular cw-forms, there occur a number of shorter
equivalent a-forms, but without any contract forms to mediate
between them. Some of them look like forms of transition whose
point of departure was the N.s.

1. The ambiguity of the N.s. is illustrated by rdkas, vi.66.6.
It is impossible to tell whether it is N.s.n. of a stem rdkas, or
N.s.m. of a stem rdha.

2. Hidas is generally neuter. In vi.62.8, it is marked as neuter
by ydd; and so in A V . xix.3.4 by the construction (A.s.n.) ; but
in VS. xiii.45, it can be regarded as N.s.n., or as N.s.m. (heda-s).
In RV. i.94.12, on the other hand, it is marked as masculine by
ddbhutas. This is the point of contact for the two declensions.
Based upon such a form as masc. hkda-s we find : hbdorm, AV.
xii.4.20,21 ; hide, L.s., RV. vii.62.4.

3. An excellent illustration of the coincidence of certain forms
of the as and o-declensions is seen in the stems pdrdhas and
cdrdha. Gr. assigns 33 Rik-forms to the stem pdrdhas, and 26
to cdrdha; but it is impossible to decide in some cases. Thus
Mttller, Translation p. 57, takes pdrdhas as N.s. neuter in ii. 1.5,
tudth nard'm cdrdho asi purdvdsuh; but Gr., as N.s. masculine.
The same uncertainty exists in iii32(266).4. So in v.33.5, ndroh
cdrdho jajfldnd'h, BR. take cdrdho as N.s.m. ; but Gr., as N.s.n.
So in v.54.6, dbhrdji cdrdho , maruto, ydd arnasdm \ mdshatha :
Gr. refers cdrdho to cdrdhas in Wb. ; but in Ueb. he makes
arnasdm object of mdshatha, so that cdrdho can be referred to
cdrdha. Cf. also i.37.1 with v. 56. 9. These collocations seem to
me to account for the series of a-forms, cdrdhartn^ cdrdhenay -dya,
•asya, ~dn. See also Muller, Translation pp. 56-8. Cf. below,
no. 8.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

654 C. R Lanmany [<u-stems.

4. The isolated a-form tivena (i 128.6) may be based upon the
common nom. dvasy since this might sometimes be felt as a masc
(dva-s, v.70.1). Cf. nir-avdsya, l122.11.

5. In the Rik we find the neater stem krdndas. In the AV.,
the N.s. krdndas may be taken as a masc. in zL2.22 {krdnda-i).
Based thereupon is the D.s. krdnddyay xi.2.3. So p&ci-kranda-m,
RV. viL97.6. In AV. xi.4.2, the metre favors the restoration of
the old ew-f orm : ndmas te prdna krdndds-e, text krdnddya.

6. Forms from the stem saprdthas are common. Now in TBr.
i.1.10*"*, we find a series of 5 formulae : dtharvapitum me gopdya;
ndrya prqjd'm m. g.; pdneya papd'n m. g.: sdpratha sabhd'm m,
g.; dhe budhniya mdntram me gopdya. One needs no argument
to be convinced that the sporadic a-form is due simply to formal
parallelism (cf. BR.) ; and I may here add that the instructively
mutilated form dtharva is due solely to the same cause. The VS.,
iii.37, has dtharya ; for this, the Brah. stupidly intends to sub-
stitute the more intelligible dtharvan, whose correct vocative
could only be dtharvan.

7. Forms of the stems pepas and su-pepas are common. Pica*
is N.s.n, of picas in iv.36.7 (preshtham), and A.s.n. in L6.3 (ct
a~pepd*e) ; but in vil84.ll and 42.1, it may be N.s.masc. (p&pa-t).
In Ait. Br. iiLlO, we find : pepas (A.s.n., 3) and pepasd; but also
pepde once as N.p.m. For pururpepd*uy see p. 548. Cf, also
padcd yd (N.s.m.) and ptehr-padpe-m (nmdnerin, N.s.n.), and Justi,
Handbuchy. 1816.

8. The influence of the requirements of the cadence and of
formal parallelism is plain in the use of pdrdhd- and vdrpd-,
rather than pdrdho- and vdrpo-, in iii.34.3 :

indro vrtram avrnoe chdrdhanUih
prd mdyindm amindd varpanUih.

9. The singular form card'yai is called out by the requirements
of the cadence. Cf.

v.47.4, dfya gdrbham cardse dhdpayante,
i.92.9, vicvam jtvdrh cardse bodhdyantt, and
vii.7 7. 1 , vicvam jivdm prasuvdtUt card'yai.
The short d of prds- excludes it from the eighth place and makes
the order cardse prdsuvdnti metrically impossible.

10. Compare tdrae-e, iii.18.3, with tdrdya, ii.13.12.

11. The neuter dveshas is very common; for a-dveshd, see p.
548. 12. Besides forms from jrdyas and prthurjrdyas, we find
once prthu-jrdya-m rdthamy iv.44.1. 13. So besides Skas, ntr
okas, edm-okaSy we find dur-6ka-m, vii.4.3. 14. With drddhcu-i,
TS. iii.2.2*, cf. vi-dradhe, du. f., RV. iv.32.23. 15. With 4'rm-
mradas-amy VS. ii.2, cf. tirna-mrada~my Kauc. 137. 16. With
dvibdrhaSy cf. dvibdrha-jman.

The locatives pi. in -asu for -as-su are perhaps made after the
analogy of the an-stems.

m. Further Transitions from the 4&-Deolension.

The transition-stem (in asa) is longer than the original stem (in
as)* The transition in P&li results sometimes in a shorter, but

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. III.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 555

sometimes also in a longer form ; thus from mahd-{-ana$ we have
mahdnorm and mahdnasa-m. The same is true in Sanskrit.

1. In Katy. Qr. xiv.2.31, we find mahdnasdndm . . . mahd-
nasa-s mahdrathah. 2. Corresponding to the N.p. tigmd-

tejas-as (AV. xix.9.10), occurs the A.s. neuter tigma-tejasa-m
(astram dtishtham, Arj. vii.20). 3. A like transition-form is
s-u-varcasa-m (patam sutdndm) ; see BR. 4. Upon the adverbial
compound d-jaras-dm, with adv. accent, rests the form djarasd'ya
(Rv. x.85.43, accent). 5. BR., iv.921end, cite prd-cetasdndm
as occurring in the Brahma P. for prd-cetas-dm; but LA. (Bonn,
1865, p. 58, 1. 8) reads prdcetasdndm. The accent of arnasd>
avasdy and partnasd seems to mark them as secondary derivatives
of drnas, dvas, and pdrinas.

In Yasht x.143, we find the normal form (vdshem, masc.) ctehr-
2>a2panh-em, L e. stf-pecusam. This comes to be used as a
neuter also ; and we have, e. g., vanhanem ctehr-paicanhe-m,
i. e. vdsanam str'-pe casa-my xiiL3 ; and likewise aiwydonhanem
(i. e. avyangam) ctehr-pa$panhe-m, Yac. ix.26. For vicpem paiti
ushdonhe-m (?), masc. !, see p. 546.

. rv. Transitions of Radical Stems to the 4&Dbolension.

The N.s.m. in ~ds has been the point of departure for the tran-
sition of radical stems to the cw-declension. See p. 549. Here
belong :

a. the stem candrd-mds (no. 1) ;

b. compounds of the verbals -dhd' and -dd' (2-6) ;

c. compounds of radical substantives (7-11).

1. For good practical reasons, the dictionaries set up a stem
candrdmds. The true stem is candrd-mds. Of this only the
N.s. is regular — candrdmds (RV., 6 times, and AV., 19). The
other cases ought also to have the long d throughout, candrdr
mdsi9 etc., just as well as sU'rydmd'sd. In fact we find : candrd-
mds-am, Qa%.Bt. vi.7.4T ; -m&sd, AV. xiii.4.28 ; -masas, RV.
i.84.15; -mdsi, AV. x.3.18: xi.5.13; candramds, AV. vii.81.2 ;
candrd-mdsd, RV. x.64.3 ; s-drydcandramd' sdy i.102.2; -ai/, v.
51.15: x.190.3. Seep. 547.

2. It seems to be adverse to all Vedic analogies to assume a
stem like vayo-dhd's; but Benfey assumes such, and even refers
vayodhd'm to a stem vayodhd's (for vayo-dhd's-arn, SV. &l. — cf.
Gram. p. 316, 1. 16). There are nigh 200 stems like vayo-dhd';
see p. 438. Of this, the Ks.m. is vayo-dhd'-s (cf. p. 443). To
this now as a point of departure I refer the following forms of
transition : vayo-dhd'sam (mdram), VS. xxviii.24 ; -dhdsd, I.s.,
VS. xv.7; -dhase (indrdya), Vaitana Sutra xxx.25: Katy. £r.
xix.5.22 ; ~dhdsasy N.p.m., AV. viii.1.19 ; -dhas (soma), RV.
ix.81.3. Vdyodhds can not be a direct voc. of -dhd' (cf. BR.), for
this would be vayodhds (p. 449).

3. I think no Vedic form necessitates the assumption of a stem
reto-dh&'s. The Rik has 5 forms from reto-dhd1. So in TBr. ii.7.41,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

556 C. R. Lanman, [as-stems.

we have retodhd-8 somas and retodhd* eshd. The only form that
seems to require an cw-stem is reto-dhd' s-asy G.s.m., VS. viii.10;
but this is best ascribed to false analogy.

4. The A.s.f varco-dhd'-rn occurs VS. iv.ll ; the N.Swin. varco-
dhd'-s, AV. ii.11.4. The D.s.m, varco-dhd's-e, AV. iii.21.5, is a
transition-form.

6. Forms from puro-dhds occur : -dhasdm, Bhag. x.24 ; -dhasa\
£lak. 71.18 (B5htl.); but they are only post-Vedic.

6. The Rik has 30 forms from dravino-dd'. The N.sim. is
-dd'-s, and corresponding to this, as if the stem were -ddls, are
made the transition-forms -dase (devdya), Schol. to Katy. 9r-
ix.13.19 ; -dds, V.s., RV., 6. For "drdvinodasds" see Ab.s.m.

7-9. It must be admitted, I think, that the masculine compound
of a fem. substantive in d may make its N.s. in -ds (see p. 439 ad
init.) ; otherwise, we should have to assume a stem puru^nishthd's
for the N.s.m. -nishthd's. On p. 439 I referred the forms bahu-
prajd'-s and suprajd'-s (N.s.m.) to stems in d. BR. refer them to
-prajd's; cf. also Pan. v.4.1 22,123. I would further refer to d-stems
the following forms, which the reader is requested to add on pages
439, 443, 444: N.s.m., dprajds (apaptis), Q*t.Br. i.6.1,T; suprajd's,
AV. iv.11.3: VS. iii.37: vii.18; divdkshds, RV. iii.30.21 ; N.sX,
suprajd's, AV. xiv.2.22,23,74.

As forms of transition I regard: (7) dprajasam, A.8., AV.
viL35.3: xii.5.45 ; aprajasi, L.s.£, YajfiL ii.144; (8) ida-prajasas,
A.p.f., TS. i.5.61; (9) suprajdsam, A.s.f., AV. xiv.1.49; (teas,
N.p.m., AV. iii.10.5 : xviii.4.63: TS. Ll.101 : iii.2.45.

For stem dushprajas I find no example ; stem dushprajd occurs
Bhag. P. x.49.4. The compound suprajdstvd does not prove the
existence of a true stem suprajd's any more than suprajdstvd
proves a stem suprajd's. Cf. also aprajdstd and aprajasyd with
aprajdstvd and andgdstvd.

10. The forms cited by BR. and Gr. in the article divd-kshas I
treat otherwise. On account of the accent, I set up a bahuvrihi
stem divd-kshd, * having a dwelling (kshd') in heaven ;' cf. divi-
yoni. Of this, divdrkshdrS, iii.30.21, is the N.s.m. (cf . pp. 439, 443) ;
and the N.p. divd-kshasas (m., x.65.7 ; f.,iii.7.2) may oe regarded
as due to false analogy.

11. The A.s.f. kshd'm (p. 446), in i.67.5 ; 174.7: vL6.4: x.31.9,
and the A.p.f. kshd's (p. 452), in iv.28.5, have the value of two
syllables. Gr. reads kshd'mamy kshdmas. Perhaps the true
resolution is kshds-am and kshds-as (transition-forms based on the
N.s.f. kshd'-s), for which the diaskeuasts have written the contract
forms kshd'm and kshd's, coinciding with the regular forms of
kshd'.

V. Transitions of 4-Stems to the J.S-Declension.

Under section II. we saw neuters like h&das passing into the
o-declension (hida-m). We have now to discuss the opposite
movement and to group together a number of well authenticated
a-stems, by the side of which occur infrequently or sporadically
as-forms.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. V.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 557

1. Thus besides pepa (RV. — see BR), the AV. has also ptpas.
Perhaps the N.s.m. pkpa-8 was regarded as a neuter form, and the
A.b. made accordingly. The Rik, for example, reads y day dm
updntah prahdrdma pepam, x.85.3ld; while tne AV. has prahdr
rema pepas, xiv.2.88c?.

In some of the following cases, however, I am not sure that the
relation is strictly one of transition ; and perhaps the metre has
had more to do with calling forth the secondary forms here than
elsewhere.

2. Forms from vepd are common. The only support for vepds
is in AV. v.23.12, hatd'so aeya vep&'s-as | hatd'sah pdrivep&8-a89
where vepd'sas would not fit the cadence.

3. Instead of the regular -poshchm, we have -poshae-am^ for no
other reason than to fill out the verse ; see page 548.

4. A like instance is sva&t'i adyd ushaso doshdsap cay AV.
xvi.4.6 ; c£ p. 468.

5. The stem ddkeha is abundantly authenticated ; so samdnd-
dak&ha and ptitd-dakeha. On the other hand, ddkehas-e occurs
thrice ; ptttd-dakshas-d and -cw, 7 times ; and ddkshas-as at viii
13.1, for which the SV., at i.381 and ii.96, has ddkshasya.

6. Forms from bhdra are common ; but twice we find stem
sd-bharas, and once vipvd-bharas-am.

7. For svand and compounds, see BR. Twice we find tuvir
shvands, and once vd'ta-svanas (? see p. 546).

8. So besides the stem svard and its compounds (see BR.), we
find gharmdsvaras-asy A.p.f., iv.55.6.

9. The stem pdka and its compounds (see Gr.) are well authen-
ticated ; but once we have sahdsra-pokds, N.s.m.

10. For pkva and its compounds, see Gr. RV. x. 85.246 reads
yena tvd'badhndt savitd1 supkcdfo; but the Atharvan variant
(xiv.l 19,58), . . . supivdh; so ii.2.2.

11. The form dhruvde-e in vii.70.1, d' ydt seddthur dhruvdse nd
ydnim, is best explained as a simple transition-form from dhruvd
(cf. BR. iii.1002, 1004), preferred to dhruvd'ya on account of the
metre, and also because a form in -dse is common for datives with
infinitival function. Cf. Hariv. 8959, tarn giripreshtharh eve
sthdne nivepaydmdea dhruvdya.

12. With devd vrdhd'ya htlmahe, viii. 72.6, cf. (stotfndam ca
spdrdhd8e, v.64.4tf, and) sdkhinaam ca vrdhdse, v.64.5c£

13. With ddha (common as post-Vedic), cf. the an. A. ddhas-d
in the same signification, x.11.1.

14-16. With rdva, vrshdrravd, cf. tuvPrdvas, purtfrrdvas. With
topdy cf. topds (? p. 545). With sahd, cf. sdhas, as adj., BR.
vii.866 end.

VI. Miscellaneous Oases of Transition.

1. In L 141.8*?, pil'rasyeva tveshdthdd tshdte vdyah, the ninth
place requires a short syllable and so ishante is excluded- The
lack of concord between the singular verb and its plural subject
vdycu, * fowls' (from vi), was the less noticeable inasmuch as

vol. x. 74

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

558 C. R. Lanman, , [as-

vdyas itself was felt as a collective noun, ' fowl, GefittgeL' In
this case vdyas would easily come to be regarded as a singular
form (N.S.D.) of a new transition-stem vdyas. So in i 104.1, vdyas
may be taken as A.p.m. (p. 395 med.), or as collective A.b.il, 'the
flying team9 of Indra. Such passages seem to explain the origin
of the stem vdyas; but it is not absolutely necessary to posit this
stem, except for texts later than the Rik.

2. If, in Y.SlAb (tftihvdno ghrtdpfshthah sudficdh), we had
sudflcdrh, this might easily be referred as transition-form to
sudflo-am (cLgnim, vi.15.10), L e. su-dfleartn. As the text stands,
perhaps we have a an. A. of independent formation ; but cf. the
variants mpevdh and supfo&h, above, V.10.

3. Besides the usual stem rddasi, we find rddas once, ix.22.5o,
et'e prshthd'nl rdddfhos (w - w -) ; it is used simply and solely
because rddasyos would not fit the cadence. With good reason
Gr. reads rddasos (for syos) in the cadence of i.l61.3a and 168.1a

4. So instead oi the usual sdrasa9 we find stem sdras once,
MBh. xiiL786, krkaldsakdsdrdsdm, — used probably for the sake
of the cadence. Otherwise, it may be taken as a shortened
G.p.m. of sdrasa, for sdrasdndm (see p. 353).

5. The relation of akshi-6* to aksh-os is like that of rdda&ot to
rddas-os; but in AV. v. 4. 10, where akshrds occurs, the metre
demands aksh1r6a — see p. 392.

Compare md'ns and vandhtir, p. 404. It is hard to see what
relation, if any, exists between sarast' and sdras.

Nouinahvb Singular Masoulins akd Feminikb.

L Here belong 341 masculines (from 110 stems), and 86 femin-
ines (from 24 stems).

Masculines: ahgirds, 5; acetd's; ddribarhds; ddvayds; dndpd* (437, 2; 60S
7); an&dhd's; dninavarcds : cmmd'e, 3; dpracetds, 3; dbhibh&ijjds, 5; camta*-
jds; arapd'8, 3; dvaydtdhedds ; dsamdticjds ; dhand's; urucdkahds, 2 ; uruvyacfo,
3 ; r'shvmands ; rshvafy'ds ; kdHidMyds, 4 ; Hiavedds ; khd'dae-arnds ; gdbhkh-
vepde; g&rtdmanda; g&rtdpravds ; gdnioghds; ghrtdprayds; jdidvedds\ 23; t&dapdt,
2; tadokda; iddojds; tardddveahds ; trivayds; dabhrdcetds, 2; ddmfads, 18;
dasmdvarcda, 3; dfrgh&kmde, 2; d&rgh&'psds; durdshds; devdpsarda; devofravds;
n&vedds (319, 4; 366, 3); nfcdkeMs, 18; npn&nds, 4; nodhd's, 3; niokds: pdw-
kdvarcda; pxtiwyr&y&a ; prthupd'jds, 3 ; prdcetds, 10; prdvayds; bdhuoj&s; irhao
chravda ; bodhinmcmds ; bh&'ricjds; mddhuvocds, 2; mdnojavds, 6; mitr&mahds;
yapt's, 2; rakshd's ; raghup&tmajanhds ; ricd'ddsy 2; vdsufravda; vd'taroMs,
2 ; vteetds, 7; vttmanda, 2 ; vicvdrcatefids, 2 ; -dhdyds, 2; -bfwjds; -mand8\ -veda*
9; vifvafyds; vihdyds, 7; vidudv&hds; vidMiardst; vfddhd-mahds, 2 ; -vayfo;
-frauds; vedhd's, 14; cvkrdvarcds; craddhdfmands ; sdcands; saceids; soj&hds,
26; saiy&rddhds, 5; taprdthds, 4; sdmokds, 2; sahdsra-cakshds ; -cetds; -pdtitto;
-retdSj 3 ; -^okde; saMsrdpsds; sud&hsds, 3 ; sumands, 25 ; sumedhd's, 11 ; surf-
dhrfs,4; swtknds; surHds ; suvdrcds, 3; suvd'sds; sUbnavdhds; apdrh&rddhd* ;
sudficda; sudpds, 8; sv&bMttiqjds ; sv&yagds, 3; stourcakshd*; s&arcands; sttojds, 1

Feminines: ddvayde; apscvrd's; arcpd's, 3; dhandfe; uruvydcds; vshd% 50;
i^r^amradds; nic&'vayds; nrmdnds, 2; prdcetds; madhuvacds; ydvaydddveshds;
vihdyds; vfshamwnds ; cuhrdvdade; sacetds; 8aj6ahd$, 4 (i.e. 490, 7; 395, 8;
238, 8; 550, 23); soprdthds ; edbfiarda; sud&nsds; suptrds^ 2; 8umdnd8t 2;
auvd'sds, 6; swnedhd's, iii.57.5 (withjftrif, ' voice, ' BR.),

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

N.s.m.f.] Noun- Inflection in ike Veda. 669

Thrice Gr. proposes to resolve -da into two syllables. In no
case is it necessary. Prdcetda (Gr. -oas) is at the end of a cata-
lectic pdda of 7 syllables in vi.14.2a, and of 11 in vii. 16.5c. In
iv. 21.6c, read d' dvrdshdh paastidsya Mtd.

Candrd-mda (RV., 5 ; *AV., 19) belongs properly on p. 495 ; see
p. 547; divd-kshds and suprajd's (m., AV. iv.11.3), on p. 448;
suprajd's (£, xiv.2.22,23,74), on p. 444. For H'rnamradds, gtirtd-
vacds, dvtbdrhdSy and vfrdpepds, see N.A.s.n. For dndgds (576,
1 and 582, 4) see p. 551. In L79.1, ndvedds is N.p.t For
prdcetds, vi.5.5, see V.s.m.

Transition-forms (see pp. 550-557) : L dpd'; jard'; updndf;
medhd'; V. sdbhards; sahdsrapokds; mpevds.

II. The instances in which the s of the N.s. is lost are doubtful.
See Pan. vii.1.94. The least doubtful is Updnd (RV., 8; TS.
ii.5.8*) ; but is not this a transition-form, after tne analogy of
femimnes (cf. Ndmi, IVthf, etc., p. 375 med.), based on the con-
tract ace. updndm (for -asam) ? Of like sort, possibly, is (kdrdvo)
anehd', x.61.12. Of purudanpd I find no occurrence. The form
r'bhvd need not be referred to the same stem with r'bhvas-am.
For ayd\ i.87.4, see p. 358 end.

IIL Several peculiar forms claim our attention. The samhitd
has: tuvirdvdn &-, x.64.4 ; -dfi r-, 16; — svdtavdn f-, iv.20.6 ;
svdtavdnh p- (Prat, iv.34), iv.2.6 ; svdtavdHip ca, VS. xvii.85 ; —
svdvdn, before a-, vi.47.12: x.131.6 (AV. vii.91.1) ; t-, vi.47.13 :
x. 131.7 (AV. vii.92.1) ; r-, iii.54.12 : vi.68.5 ; 6-, x.92.9 ; y- (Prat
iv.28), -i.118.1; 35.10. The VS. variant (xxxiv.26) of the last
passage has svdvd ydtu (Pr. iii.135). Similarly Roth would read
*Mj[4jt?4 ydd, x.99.11 ; see p. 488 end.

The treatment of the forms in sandhi is precisely like that of
the forms on pages 512, 514, and 517. The pada has in every
instance tuvVravdn, svdrtavdn, svd-vdn.

The stem of the second word is svd-tav-as, as is abundantly
shown by the other forms ; that of the third, sH-av-as, as shown
by the metre and the other forms. BR. refer the first to tuvt-
rdvant (see p. 517) ; but I think Aufrecht is right in setting up
the stem tuvirdvas, like purd-rdvas9 brhddrava*, Z. D. M. O.
xxv.233.

Aufrecht, ib. xiii.501, considered all themes in as as ultimately
derived from themes in ant, and explained these nominatives as
relics of the more ancient themes in ant. (For svdtavadbhyas,
etc., see Lp.) I think that they are formed after the analogy of
the stems in vans (yas) and vant, the radical v of the stems
su-dv-as etc. being felt as part of the derivative ending (svd-vas).

The same misconception has worked elsewhere. As a result of
the misdivision of bhdv-ant into bhd-vant is perhaps to be ex-
plained the voc. bha-vas (p. 509). In like manner I account for
the peculiar fem. to mdtari-bhv-an, viz., mdtari-bhrvarf, N.p. -is,
x.120.9 ; Say., mdtari bhavantyah. Cf. mdtafi-p-varis (root ptf),
AV. xx.107.12; and mdtari-p-vas f, voc. Upon a confusion of
the final element of anad-vdh with that of the vant-stems rest the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

560 G. R. Lanman, [os-stemsi

peculiar forms cited on p. 499 (anad-vdfnp etc.). Ct yiivat and
kshd'm-an, p. 530. The explanations of Weber (Beitrdge iiL388)
and Brugman (Zeitsch. xxiv.71) are essentially like the above.

NOMINATIVE AMD ACCUSATIVE SlNGULAB NEUTER.

I. Here belong 1409 forms (from 101 stems).

Enumeration : dnhas, 33 ; dfyas, 2 ; adveshdsy 4 ; &na&, 8 ; anefata, 5 ; dndhas,
3; dndhas, 19; dpas, 16; apds; dpruu,4; dps<u% 3; dmbhas; dyas,4; arakah&s;
arapds, 2; drnas, 15; dvas, 73; d'gas, 17; d'pas, 2; faro*) 2; d'dha8y 4; 6mu,
19; 6kas, 16;' #<w, 53; tohddas, 10; alna«t 12; chdndas, 3; jdhhas; jwxu;
jrdycu, 8 ; tddapas ; tdpas, 4 ; tdmas, 43 ; fczrew, 4 ; tf#a», 2 ; tydja*, 3 ; ddnsas,
4; ^ro», 13; dr<£mk»; drift*!*, 25; ndbfias, 11; ndmas, 41; pdkshas; p&yas,
52; pd'jcu, 11; pd'thas. 14; pf'i'a*. 5; purubhdjas ; pSpu, 6; prdihas; prapas,
21; psaras, 3; bhdrgas, 3; bhd'sas, 2: mdncu, 76; mdyas, 19; mahds, 14;
fm£to», 8; mfdhcu, 2; medas; y&fas, 24; rdkahcu, 20; f*4a*t 38; r^cw, 12;
r&bhat; rd'dhas, 61 ; r&ww, 10; r^ta*, 21 ; r^pa*; rddhas, 2; wifotoM, 4; mk»,
47 ; twiya*, 2 ; tviyo*, 70 ; tdyotf-rayas, 2 ; vartva*, 26 ; t?4rai#, 6 ; 1*2*7x2*, 7 ;
^ku, 8 ; vd'tow, 3 ; vaftu, 14 ; vepew ; vydcas, 3 ; w<fyas ; pdrdJias, 28 ; prfraj,
34: ptraff, 25; fishas, 6; frdvas, 87; aajdshtu ; adieu, 13; ft&Zaff'tada*, 2; sa-
prdthas, 17; tfaM'dfaw, 14; #4ra*,4; *<4Aa*,48; sttrStas; ardtas; tvdtawu; hdras;
hdiraa ; Mdos, 6 ; Avdra*, 2.

Transition-forms (see pp. 554-558) : II. durdkam; IIL tigmar
tefasam; suvarcasam; V. pepas, A.s. ; VL vdyas.

II. In 20 or more instances, the form in & is used rather
anomalously as a neuter. Gr. admits only one such, devdvyac&s,
iii.4.4. Here Benfey (Abh. xix.260 ; c£ 255 £C) considers that
the original form was the regular one in ~ds ; that the final
visarga disappeared tracelessly; that d was then lengthened
metrically in the samhitd; and that to the misapprehension of
the forms in -d on the part of the padakdra are due the pada-
readings in ~dh. But this explanation does not fit the other
cases well.

Here belong : devdvyaeds (barhis, cf. i.142.5), til 4.4; dvibdrhds,
(vdyas) i.71.6 ; (pdrma) i.114.10 ; (sd'ma) iv.5.3 ; (vdcas) vii8.6 ;
as adv. (see BR. v.28), v.80.4 : vi.19.1 : vii.24.2 : x.116.4; vfrd-
pepds (drdvinam), iv.11.3 : x.80.4 ; gUrtdvacds (brdhma), x.61.1 ;
viduhards (J tdpas), x. 109.1 ; H'rnamradds (barh'is), v.5.4 : bo
VS. xxi.83,57: TBr. ii.6.11%14* ; vipvdvyatds (cdrma), AV. ix.
7.15. In AV. i.26.3, the MSS. have pdrma saprdthdh; ed., -<*£.
Compare also: AV. xviii2.19, ydehdsmai pdrma saprdthdh ;
T.ar. x.1.10, ydchd nah pdrma saprdthdh; and UV. i.22.15, -&h;
and finally, pdrma saprdthdh, VS. xviii.54 : TS. iv.7.13\ The
neuters fiatasd's9 svprayd's, sthd's, indra-, soma-jd's, and presh~
thasthd's, p. 445, should be considered in connection with the
above forms.

Accusative Singular Masculine and Feminine.

Here belong 217 masculines (from 97 stems) and 58 feminines
(from 22 stems).

Masculines: acefcbam, 2 ; dnashtavedasam ; dndgasam; dmtgdyasam; aneh&aam,
8; apdsam; dpratidhfshtacavaaam ; dbhibhOMdjaaam ; ardmanasctm; arddhdsam,
2; artpdsatm; arcand'nasam ; dhandsam; updkacakshasam ; imt-cotohaem*, 2;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

A.s.m.£] Noun-Inflectipn in the Veda. 661

-jrdyasam^2\ -vyaca$am12; kahetraad'dhaaam ; gdthdfravaaam ; gdyatrdvepaaam ;
ffirvanasam, 4 ; girvdhaaam, 2 ; gfot&pravasarn ; gdvarnaaam ; gddhdyaaam ;
ciJciivinmanasam ; citrdmdhaacm ; cUrdrddhaaam ; jardaam, 2 ; jdtdvsdasam, 24 ;
tavasam, 13 ; tuvird'dhasam; tuvishvandsam ; iuvidjasam; tyajdaam; ddmfauiaam,
5; ddnd-okaawn; dyukahdvacaaam; dvib&rhoaam, 3 ; dvipavaaam; dhrshM&ojaaam ;
naridpaaam ; nrcdksJiasam, 4 ; .panktlrddhasam ; pdrinasam ; purt^pe^asam ;
-bhdj'asam, 2: -vdrpasam; -vepaaam; prdcetasam, 8; prdtvakahaaam ; brdhma-
vdhasam; bhiydaam, 3; bhti'ri-cakahasam ; -dMyasam; yajfta-vanasam ; -vdh-
asain ; ycqasam, 15; rakshdsam; ricd'dasam, 3; vd'jagravaaa/m, ; vicetasam, 2;
v^oihasam; vidveahaaam; vigvd-dhdyasam, 4; -bharaaam; -vedasam, 6; -vyac-
aeam ; vipjd'yu-poahaaam, 2; -vepasam; vihdyaaam; viHrddhasam; vedhdaam;
sacetaaam; 8aj6ahasam; aatyd-girvdhctaam ; -favcuam; addmamakhaaam ; aamu-
drd-vdsasam, 2 ; -vyacaaam ; sahdsra-caksliaaam, 2 ; -bharnasam, 2 ; -varcasam,
2 ; aucttasam, 2 ; sudahsa&am, 2 ; avpfyaaam, 1 ; suprayasam, 3 ; eubhdjasam ;
aumedhdaam ; surd'dhasam, 4 ; swttasam ; «*prdt*a*(M», 3 ; Sfprdbhqjaaam ;
sv<iyacasamy 3 ; «iavaMwn, 3 ; Aarwfo4ya«Mn ; taftrafyaaim.

Feminines: dndgasam; anehdaam; orakahdsam, 2 ; arepdaam.2; dpvapepaaam;
udojasam; urwydcasam; cikitvinmanaaam ; dhvardaam; pwubhojaaam ; ydvayad-
dveahaaam; vd'japefaaam ; vifvaddhaaam ; vifvd-dhdyaacvm, 2; -pepaaam; -bhoj-
aaam; fotdrcaaam; ghripecaaam; sahdarobhwrncisam, 2; *tdyaf<waw* ; hdrivar-
pasam ; w A<bam, 33 ; u*A<J'*aro, p. uah&'sam (page 646), 11.

Adverbial shift of accent is seen in djarasdm, 9at.Br. i.6.341 :
cf. Ait. Br. L28. See p. 495.

Contract-forms: vedhd'm, ix.26.8 ; 102.4; updndm, x.40.7 :
AV. iv.29.6; mahd'mf, 23 times; sumedh&'m, x.47.6 ; 125.5;
vayd'm, L165.15; 166.15; 167.11; 168.10: VS. xxxiv.48; dpd'm,
AV. vi.119.3 ; jard'm, i.140.8 : v.41.17 ; dndgdm, viii.90.15 ;
apsard'm, AV. iv.38.1&i*, 2ftw, 4 ; ushd'm, i.181.9: x.68.9: AV.
xii.2.45; medhd'm, 8 times, and AV. x.2.17. For vayd'h, vii.
40.5, see p. 552, no. 16.

Transition-forms (see pp. 551-557) : I. puruddnsam; II. h'edam;
pdrdham; phcikrandam ; prlhujrdyam / IV. candrdmdsam ;
vayodhdsam; dprajasam; suprajdeam; kshdsamf; V. vipvd'yu-
poshasam; vipvdbharasam; tuvishvandsam.

INSTRUMENTAL SlNOTJLAB MASCULINE, FkMININI, AND NbUTBB.

L There are 86 masculines (from 15 stems) ; 30 feminines (from
3 stems) ; and 704 neuters (from 66 stems).

Masculines: anehdad; orakahdad; gdportnoad; jardad; tdrtishoad; tavdad;
pdrtnoad) 6; prihupd'josd, 2; bhiydad, 11; mdnojavosd; yafdsd ; vipvdpefaad;
sdhdsd, 2 ; avpepaad; aucrdfJoad.

Feminines : arepdad, 2 : ushdsd, 27 ; ycy'dad.

Neuters: dfy'asd, 4; dnasd, 3; dndhaad, 13; dpoad, 2; apdad; orakahdad;
drnaad, 2; dvasd, 62; Snasd; djaad, 104 (but cf. G.s.n.); Shasd; kahddaad, 3;
gdvarnoad; cdkshosd, 16; ctiasd, 6; j&va&d, 5; javdad; idnoad (p. 479); tdpasd,
10; fttauud, 13; tdrasd; ttjaad, 3; tydjosd, 4; tvakahaad, 3; tveahdad; ddnsasd,
2 ; dShaad ; dhdfyoad ; dhrdjoad ; ndbhosd, 2 ; fkifw<wd, 84 ; pdyoad, 32 ; pd'jasd,
5 ; pfvaad ; prdyaad, 5 ; bdhivojoad ; bhrd'jaad ; mdnoad1 115 ; mdhosd, 3 ;
m&lasd; yo^dJad^Z\ rdkahoad; rfyoad, 4; r&poad, 4; rdfdhaad, 16; r&cnoad;
ritaad, 3; vdcoad, 10; rtbuud; vdyo«J, 6; v^rco^i, 6; vdrposd, 4; vd'aoad, 2;
vdTuud, 2 ; i^dcuti ; t^pcwd, 2 ; f4vtw4, 80 ; fiakaad, 2 ; prdvoad, 9 ; adhoad, 29 ;
auddnaoad; awrtioad; ardtoad; hdroad, 6; Aawfat, 2; Mahoad.

The masc. bhiyds-d is contracted to bhi'shrd; and this appears
with adverbial shift of accent in i.l33.6M* (-d'fl a-) : vii.21.3 :
viii86.14. Cf. p. 494.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

662 C. B. Lanman, [as-stems.

Contract form : tavd in tavd-gd'm?; see p. 661.

Transition-forms (see p. 660-557) : I. jardyd ; navoshayd ;
medhdyd; IX dvena; pdrdhena; IV. candrdmdsd; vayodhdtd;
purodhasd; V. -dakshasd; ddhasd.

IL In some 1 8 instances, a form identical with the stem appears
with the value of an instrumental. They may be taken outright
as case-forms without ending (cf. pp. 476, 480, 535), or as text-
corruptions arising from misconception of the irregular forms (cf
Bollensen, Orient und Occ. ii.481-2). The first six are pretty
certain (cf. BR.) : vdcas, with divUmatd, i.26.2 ; with ndvyasd,
ii.31.5 : vi48.11 : viii.39.2 (cf. vi.62.5) : vdca87 parallel with
mdnmabhi8, viii.63.1 ; yqjfiavacds, parallel with odanena, AY.
xi.3.19; pdvas, parallel with krdtvd, RV. i.81.4. Lud wig trans-
lates pdvas, x.23.5, by 'durch krafttat.'

The rest are more or less doubtful : i.93.2, yd adyd vdm iddm
vdcah mpary&ti, ' whoso to-day honors you here (iddm) with a
song;' i.32.8, mdno rdhdnd dti yanti d'pah^ with a will*
i e.) 'lustily rising, the waters overwhelm him;' x.109.1?,
tdpa ugrdy Say., tapasd tdpanenogra vdgtlrno 'gnih; i.92.5,
8vdrum nd p&po viddtheshu anjdn^ ' adorning the svdru as it were
with beauty at the feasts.'

Bollensen, I.e. p. 484, would explain mahd\8) or mahd for mahd', I e. mahdsd
ini.22.11 (parmand): i.121.11 (vdjrena): ii.34.12 (jySiiskd): vii.25.1 (tot). In
viii3.6, fdva t- might be taken similarly; so Ludwig, Ueb. ii.175, *mit kraft;' but
see G.8.n. In 1.76.6, on account of divitmatd (m. or a.), Both suggests that vded'
(fern. 1) may be a corruption for vaco(=v&ca8&)\ but cf. pp. 515-6.

Dative Singula* Masculine, Feminine, and Neuteb.

There are 74 masculines (from 88 stems) ; 4 feminines (from 4
stems) ; and 225 neuters (from 27 stems).

Masculines : abhishtipavase ; ukthdvdhase ; uruvydcase ; ftdpefase ; gdyatra-
vepcue ; girvanase, 2 ; girvdhast, 2 ; ghordcakshase ; jdtdvedase, 7 ; tadapase ;
tddokase; tavdse, 11 j dtrghd-yapue ; -pravase ; dtwdse; dyumndcravase ; n?cdk-
shast, 2; niokase; ptthlnaae; pwtiravase; pf thu-jr&yase ; -pd'jase; pracctase, 4;
prdiavase; brdhma-vdhcue, 3; mrktd-; yajftd-, 2; yapfoe; rakskdse; vtfvdcak-
shase; vihdyase; vedhdse, 11; pUeotue; satydrddhase ; sahase; aahdsraoakshate ;
svdtavcm, 2 ; wdyapaae.

Feminines : ushdse ; durvd'sase ; parj&nyaretase ; vrdhdse.

Neuters: apdse; appose; arose, 108; djasc, 5; cdfahase, 2; javdse; tdptue;
idmase; tdrase; ddkshase, 3; dhd'yase, 15; dhruvdse; n&mase; pd'jase, 2;
prdycute, 2 ; psdrase, 2 ; mdnase, 4 ; rdkshase, 3 ; rd'dhaae, 26 ; r&ase ; vdcaae, 3 ;
varcaee, 2; pdmue, 14; prdvase, 17; sdhase, 7; svayapase; harase.

Transition-forms (see pp. 550-567) : I. jard'yai; II. pdrdhdya;
krdnddya; tdrdya; card'yai; III. djarasd'ya; IV. vayodhdse;
varcodhdse; dravinoddse; V. ddkahase; dhruvdse; vrdhdse.

Ablative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neuteb.

I. There are 13 masculines (from 6 stems) ; 5 feminines (from
one stem) ; and 107 neuters (from 24 stems).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ab.s.m.f.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 668

Masculines : arddhdsas ; jardsas, 2 ; tav&sas, 3 ; pdrtnasas, 2 ; rdksh&sas, 4 ;
s&hasas. Feminine : ttshdsas, 5.

Neuters : dnhaaas, 44 ; dnasas ; dndhasas, 4 ; dpasas ; arnasas ; tnasas, 7 ;
dkasas; $a«a*, 3; kshddasas; jrdyasas ; tdpasas, 3; tdmasas, 10; drdvinasas ;
pdyasas ; pd'jasas ; prdtihasas ; bhdnsasas ; m&nasas, 9 ; rdjasas ; rd'dhasas, 2 ;
vteasas; sddasas, 9 ; sdrasas ; s&hasas, 2. In vii.56.19, s&hasas is N.p.m.

Grassmann's ablative dr&vinodas-ds (accent impossible), ii.37.4,
is based on a misprint ; read drdvinodasd-s, N.s.m.

II. In vi.3.1, diva pd 'si tydjasd mdrtam dnhah, if we take dnhas
from dnh, the accent is anomalous. I think it is an Ab. of dnhas
without case-ending, for dnhasas; cf. BR vii.1685. A similar
haplographia is seen in irddhiaiy i. 134.2, for irddhadhiai. Since
the accent of ush-ds as an accusative p.f. (iii.6.7 : viii.41.3) is at
best a rare anomaly, I would strike out the stem iish and regard
ushds as an Ap.£ without ending, and put ushds (i.69.1,9: vil
10.1 : x.8.4) in the same category, as a G.s.f. without ending. In
like manner is perhaps to be explained the form sddas-pdti, 1.21.5 ;
cf. sddasas pdtim, i.18.6.

Genitive Sihouli-R Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

L There are 58 masculines ffrom 30 stems) ; 45 feminines (from
one stem) ; and 304 neuters (from 35 stems).

Masculines : dhgirasas ; dndgasas ; apdsas, 2 ; dpdkacaksJiasas ; dpnasas ;
abhivayasas ; arakshdsas ; upam&pravaaaa ; krshndjanhasas ; jdt&vedasas, 6 ;
favosa*, 6 ; ddndapnasas ; dtrghdfravasas ; dvibdrhasas, 2 ; nrcdkshasas, 5 ; p&ri-
dveshasas; pdrinasas, 2; purubhqjasas ; prthuprdvasas, 2; prdcetasas ; pr&mah-
asas; bhd'tvakshasas ; rakshdsas, 6; vicetasas; vidmand'pasas ; vifvdmanasas ;
vrTeadvarasas (or A. p.) ; vedh&eas, 7 ; sabd'dhasas; sv&yapasas.

Feminines: usTidsas, 44; ushd'sas, z.39.1 (see p. 546).

Neuters: dnhasas; dnasas ; dndhasas, 56; apasas ; ayasas, 2; drnasas, 4;
dvasaSfB; dkasas, 2 \ djasas,3; gdvarnasas ; tdmasas, 10; ty&jasas,2; d&kshasas;
drdvinasas, 3; nabhasas; ndmasas, 3; pdyasas, 2; prdyasas; mdnasas, 12;
manasas; midasas, 3; rdjasas, 41; r dpasas, 2; rd'dhasas, 19; rd'dhasas-rddh-
a8as; rHasas, 4; vdcasas, 10; vdpsaaas ; vdyasas ; vdrpasas, 4; vd'sasas;
cdvasas, 19; favasas, 16; prdvasas, 4; sddasas; sar apasas; sdhasas, 13; sahasas,
47 ; harasas.

In i.102.6 we read pratimd'nam djasd'thd, p. ~asd dtha, and
Benfey, Abh, xix.258, sees an instance of elision and crasis for
djasas, as in verse 8. In i.62.9, stinur dddhdra pdvasd suddnsdh,
p. -d, he sees loss of visarga and a metrical lengthening in the
eighth place; Say., pavasah . . putrah. So in i.27.2, sdnuh
pdvasd; Say., balasya putrah.

Contract form : nrmdnds, x.92.14.

Transition-forms (see pp. 553-557) : II. pdrd7uzsya; niravdsya;
IV. candrdmdsas; retodhdsas; V. ddkshasas; doshdsas.

II. In viii.3.6, indro mahnd1 rddasi paprathac chdva S-, pdvas
may pass for a G.s.n. without ending ; * Indra hath stretched out
the heaven and the earth by the greatness of his might.' Say.,
^avasak . . . mahattvena. For sddaspdtt, see Ab.s.n. Cf, the
instrumentals, vdcas, etc.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

564 C. R. Lanman, [as-stems.

Locative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Neutbb,

There are 8 masculines (from 6 stems) ; 5 feminines (from one
stem) ; and 45 neuters (from 18 stems).

Masculines: fjtinaai; gdvarnasi; jdt&vedaai; ddmtinan; pfthufrdvasi ; saiyd-
pravasi, 3.

Feminine : uahdsi, 6.

Neuters: dhhoai; dfywsi, 2; apdai, 2; dvasi, 2; d'gaai; dkaai, 2; krandati;
cdkshasi; tdmaai, 11; ndmari; p&yasi; mdnaai; rfyasi, 6; r&'dhasi; r&ut,2;
pr&vari; sddaai, 8; sdrasi.

Contract form : updne W, L51.ll.

Transition-forms (see pp. 550-566) : L dngire; II. hide; IV.
candrdmdsi; aprajasi.

Vocative Singular Masculine, Feminine, and Nkutejl

There are 183 masculines (from 27 stems) ; 61 feminines (from
2 stems) ; and 2 neuters (from 2 stems).

Masculines: angiraa, 17; ukthavdhas ; vpamofravaa ; kdrudhdyaa; girvamas.
35; gvrvdhas, 4; jdtavedaa, 66; devapravas; dhfshanmanas, 2; nfcakshas, 2;
nrmanas, 4; nodhaa; purfiravas, 5; pracetas, 5; brahnuwdhas, 3 ; mtiramahas,
13; vdjapramahoB ; vi^va-cakshas ; -dhdyas ; -manas ; vfahamanaa, 2; eofta*,
7 ; $cUyarddha8y 2 ; «t«iravtikis, 2 ; aumahas, 3 ; *i>atat/<w ; suqjas. For pirrrffcu,
vi.24.6, Gr. reads girvavd'haa ; see p. 353 med.

Feminines : dhanaa, 2 ; cutoff, 69 ; tigmcUqas, AY. vi.63.2.

Neuters: dravinas (ague), iii.7.10 ; c&rdhas (m&'ruta), v.46.2— cl p. 339.

Transition-forms {see pp. 550-556) : L tfpe/ IL sdpratha; IV.
candramds; vayodhfc; dravinodtis, 6.

The TS. at i5.ll1 reads praceto rd'jan : the original passage in
the Rik, i.24.14, reads pracetd rd'jan, p. prarcetah (Prat, iv.13).
In view of this irregular sandhi, we may take prdcetd as voc. in
vi5.5, sd mdrtieshu amrta prdcetd rdyd\ although the pada has
prd-cetdh. The accent may he due to a misconception of the
form. Cf. Benfey, Abh. xix.260.

Nov., Aoo.t and Voc. Dual Masculine and Feminine.

L There are 114 masculines in -d (from 54 stems) ; and 2V fem-
inines in -& (from 11 stems). The vocatives are included with
the nominatives.

Masculines: apdsd; arepdad; dpuhiahaad; tyacakahaad; ukOiavdhasd ; wucdk-
ahaad; kfshtioja&d; garribhiracetasd ; gdparinasd; jdtdvedaad (vii.2.7) ; tddokasd;
tavdad; navedaad; nfcdkahaad; nrvd'hasd, 2; ptvruddnsaad, 4; purubhojasd;
ptttddakshasd, 4; pylhvpdkahaad ; prdcetaad, 6; prdmdhasd1 2; bodhinmanasd ;
maiavacaad; mcmqjavasd; yajfiavdhasd, 2; yapdsd, 3; riyi'dasd, 4; vataapracet-
aad; vicetaad, 2; vipakshosd; vipravdhaad; vigvd-bhojaad ; -vedasd, 4; vedhaad;
vienaad ; {r&TUhavarcaad ; aaj6ahaad, 27 ; admanasd, 6 ; samdndvarcasd ; samok-
asd, 5; sdvayasd, 2; advedaad; sindhuvdhasd ; auddnaaad; supraydsd; sttrddhaad;
avr&aad; suvdfaud; sudvasd; hitdprayasd ; hiranyapefaad, 2; further, ca&drd-
maad ; atirydcandramdad ; tof&'ad (see p. 545).

Feminines: anehdad; tvruvydaud; bh&'ri-retosd, 3 (and AV. viii.9.12); -varpasd;
vifvdpefasd; adcetaad; admonoad; auddnaaad, 2; avtpfyaad, 5; uahdsd,!; whdfad,
p. «', 2 ; ndktoahd'ad, p. *', 5 ; see page 546.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

NJLV.d.m.i] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 565

The late verse, RV. x.14.11, has very properly the modern form
nrcdkehaeau at the end of b. For this, the Atharvan, perhaps
with affected archaism, reads nrcdkshasd, xviii.2.12.

EL There are 7 forms in -au : (masc.) arepdeau: nrcdkshasau;
vipvdpardhascni; and, eHrydcandramdeau, 2 ; — (fern.) yapdsau;
ushd'8auy p. <K', see p. 546.

The Atharvan, at xiv.2.16, modernizes vtenasd of the Rik (iii.
33.13) to vienasau.

Contract form : puruddn&df, vii.73.1.

Transition-forms: L saj6shau ; uehi ; IL adveshe; vidradhe;
IV. candrdmdsd; edrydcandram&'sd; -oh.

NOKIHATIVB A5D AOOUSATIYS DUAL NBtJTn.

Here belong: dndhasi; hr&ndasi, 3 ; jdnaet; nd'dhaef; pd'jarf;
rdjast, 9; vdcast; from AV., ndbhasf, v.18.6 ; 20.7: xi.5.8,11 :
xii.3.5,6 : xvii.16 ; pdkshaet, viii8.22 ; from TS., drddhatf, iii.2.2*.

IHBTRTTXXNTAIi AND GlNITIYB DUAL FmiXm

Transition-form: L uehd'bhydm, p. 551.
Transition-forms : VI. rddae-os; akshrds f; p. 658.

Nouhatitj axb Yooatiyi Plubal Masculot ahd Fmcnrara.

There are 287 masculines (from 92 stems) ; and 94 feminines
(from 17 stems). Vocatives are counted with nominatives.

Masculines: dgirattkasas ; dAgirataa, 19; ocetdsos; ocoddsoa; ddbhutafaaBas ;
anavabhrdrddhcuas, 4 ; dndgaaas, 7 ; anehdgaa, 3 ; ap&sas, 6 ; arepdsaa, 7 ; dvicct-
asas ; afbhamu ; Afvarddhaaas, 2 ; dsdmi^avasas ; dhandsas ; ukth&vdhaaaa ;
faJojasas; ksheiraad'dhasaa ; gambhtrdvepasa* ; ghfshvirddfuuaa ; glwrdvarpasas,
2; cUrdrddhatas ; tddotouas ; tavdsas, 2; tuvishvandsas ; ddmdnasas ; duvdsas ;
dvibfarha&a* ; dhfshntiqjasas ; ndvedcuas, 2; nfcdJcshasas, 6; ptUddaksJiasaa, 2;
prthupd'jasas ; prdeetasas, 14 ; pratyiUivarpcuae ; prdiavaaas ; prdtvakshaecu, 2 ;
prdfravaaaa ; bdhtojosas, 2 ; bhaidndsas ; (bhti'rivarpascu, better A.p.t) ; mddhu-
pearcuaa ; mrgaydtiu ; yafiavdhasas ; yacdsae, 5 ; yutddveahasaa ; rakshdaos ; rip
d'dasas, 14 ; rvkmdvakshatcu, 6 ; vdrunaceahasas : vd'ta-rahhasas, 2 ; -tvanasas ;
vicetasas, 4 ; vidmand'paaas ; vidytinmahascu ; tnpravacaeaa ; vimahasas ; vigvd-
dhdyamu; -moJioaos; -vedosos, 17; viahpardJiosoa ; vihdyoeae; Vfddh&caMuas, 2;
vedh&Baty 18; ftieoaaas, 3; prishthavcvrcaaas ; sdcetasas, 4; sajfohasas, 28; ttatya*
$yiiu«m, 2; sabharasas: sdmanascu, 8; sdmokasai; sdvayasas ; sahdchandasas ;
sahdarapOJasoB, 2 ; sucakahaaaa ; lucftascu ; suddnsasas, 2 ; svpivdsas ; supSpuaa,
2; suprdceteuaa ; sumdnasas, 5; aumdhasas ; tumedhasaa, 4; surd'dhastu, 2;
stfracakshascts, 4; stdmavdhcuas, 3; svdtavasas, 6; sudpaaas, 6; suapnasat;
svdyaftuaBj 3 ; eudvasas, 2 ; hUdprayaaas, 4. For aapeard'sae, see p. 546.

Femininea: agnibhrdjaaaa ; anehdsas} IS: apdsas,*; apeardsaa; tfshucydvasos;
dhdnwurnasas ; nrpipuaa ; prdcetcuaa ; pr&svddasas ; madhuwrnasas ; yacdaas, 2 ;
viceiataa ; mipSfasaa, 2 ; ati'dadohasas ; sudpascu ; svdyofaaaa ; vsh&eas, 41 ;
vsJtifsas, p. &', 15? see p. 546.

In i.79.1, I would read g{tcxbhrdjds\a\ ushdso ndvedds (cf. p.
345 med.), and take all three words as N.p./^m. (c£ p. 362).
c Bright gleaming are the dawns, his companions.'

Contract forms: (masc.) ndvedds, 1165.13; dngirds, i.83.4;
dndgds, viL87.7 ; 97.2: x.36.12; aneMsfy x.61.12; scydshds, 19
times; (fem.) medhd's, V&l. 4.9; djo&hds, i.9.4 ; surd'dhds, iiL
33.12 ; ndvedds, i79.1.

VOL. x. 75

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

566 C. R. Lanman, [as-stems.

Transition-forms (see p. 550-557) : I. dpd's; IL pepds; IV.
vayodhdsas; suprajdsas; divdkshasas; V. vepdsas; pdrivepasas;
sabharasas; tuvishvandsas; vd'tasvanasas.

Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter.

Here belong 284 forms (from 49 stems).

Enumeration : dnhdnsi, 2 ; dnkdhsi ; dndhdnsi, 6 ; dpdnsi, 13 ; drndAsi. 9 ;
dvdnrijA; d'g&hsi; 6ndruri,2; 6kdnsi,2; djdnsi; kdrdnsi; chanddhsi, 4; javdnsi;
jrdydnsi,*; tdmdhsi, 25; tvdkskdhsi; d&mdnsi^ 3; duvdnsi, 2; dveshdnsi, 15;
pdydhsi, 6 ; p&'jdhsi, 2 ; pfydnsi ; pfdydhsi, 14 ; bhd'sdnsi ; mdndnsi, 6 ;
mahdii&i, 3 ; rahshdhsi, 20 , rdjdhsi, 39 ; rdpdnsi, 4 ; rd'dhdnsi, 12 ; retdnsi, 2 ;
r6dhdhsi,2; rdhdnsi; vdkahdhsi; vacdrisi, 12; vdydnsi, 4 ; vdrdii^5; rdn><!n»;
v&rpdhsi, 3; vd'sdhsi; t&rdhdhsi, 3; pavdnai, 1; prdvdnsi, 18; «&24*st. 3;
sdrdhsi, 6; s&hdhsi, 4; skdndhdhai; hiddnsi; hvdrdnsi, 4; from AY., rafoAdiut,
vocative, xi.10.1.

AocusATivB Plural Masculine and Feminine.

I. There are 51 masculines (from 21 stems) ; and 41 feminines
(from 16 stems).

Masculines: dngirasas; dndgasas. 5: aneh/isas ; dpracetasas, 2; ard<2A4*a*, 3;
wruc&kshasas ; tuvird'dhasas, 2; dhvarasas; piUddakshasas ; prdcetasas, 2; fcf/tdc-
chravasas; yajiidvanasas ; yafdsas; rakshdsas, 20; ripd'dasas; vimahasas; ri-
shpardhasas, 2; (vr'fawtoaraMW, G-.sm. ;) vedhdsas ; svpfyasas; surd'dhasas, 2:
sti&pnasas.

Feminines : ajavdsas ; anapndsas ; aneh/isas ; apdsas ; apsardsas, 2 ; aridh&y-
asas ; gharmdsvarasas ; tddapasas1*Khj\&\ bh&'rivarpasas* yafdsas; vd'ja-drarin-
asas; -vravasas; vipvdrdohasas ; -dhdyasas; supfyasas ; ushdsas, 25; for tufefoas,
x.39.1, see p. 546.

Contract forms: (masc.) dndgdu, vii.60.1 ; 66.4; sumedhd'sf,
vii.91.3 ; (fern.) ushd's, ix.41.5.

Transition-forms (see pp. 551-557) : I. dndgdn; IX pdrdhdn;
IV. idaprqjasas; kshdsasf: V. gharmdsvarasas.

II. In iii.6.7: viii.41.3, I take u#A<fo as A.p.f. without ending
(p. 563). Perhaps also the best solution of the vexed passage,
i. 11 2. 18, aAgiro m-, p. angirahy is to read dngiras, taking this as
an A.p.m. without ending, for dngirasas. The strange form was
probably mistaken by the copyist for a voc, and so left un-
accented. See p. 342-3.

Instrumental Plural Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : aanitdpobhis; dfigirobhis, 10 ; svdyapobhis.

Feminine : svdyapobhis (Htf).

Neuters (127, from 22 stems) : drnobhis; dvobhis, 17 ; ojobhis;
tdpobhis ; tdmobhis ; tdrobhis, 2 ; ddnsobhis, 2 ; dveshobhis ;
dhd'yobhis; ndbhobhis; ndmobhis, 45 ; pdyobhis, 5 ; prdyobhis,
2 ; mdhobhis, 13 ; r djobhis, 3 ; rd'dhobhis; vdcobhis, 13 ; vdyo-
bhis; vdrobhis; pdvobhis, 2 ; prdvobhis, 6 ; sdhobhis, 7.

Transition-form : medhd'bhis, p. 552.

Forms after the analogy of the dental stems. Here belongs
ushddrbhiS) i.6.3. For convenience of reference, the other similar
forms are collected here: svdtavad-bhyasy VS. xxiv.16: K&ty.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

I.p.m.£n.] Noun- Inflection in the Ve$a. 567

Qr. v.1.16 : Kath. xxxvi.l (regular, svdtavobhyas, £!at.Br. ii.5.114) ;
mdd-bhis, -bhyds (p. 497) ; ad-bhis, -bhyds (p. 483) ; at-sti /, cited
by Prof. Ludwig, Bigveda, iii p. ? . Cf. Pan. vii.4.48 ; Weber,
Heitr&ge, iii.387 ; Brugman, Zeitsch. xxiv.70.

DATTVB AND ABLATIVE PLUBAL MASCULINE AND NEUTER.

Datives masc. : dfigirobhyas, 4 ; -bhyas, Gr. -bhias, i.189.7 :
viii.52.3 : ix.62.9.

Datives neut. : rdkshobhyas; vdyobhyas, AV. vi.10.2.

Ablative neuter : dvishobhyas.

Transition-forms : I. dpdbhyas; apsar&'bhyas; pp. 550, 551.

Genitive Plural Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter.

Masculines : dngirasdm, 8 ^ ddbhutainasdm ; apdsdm, 3 ; d-
stheyaadm ; tavdsdm; dasmdvarcasdm ; mahd'manasdm ; yap-
dsdmy 2 ; vedhdsdm; sldmavdhasdm.

Feminines : apdsdm, 3 ; apsardsdm; ndkshatrapavtzsdm; ush-
dsdm> 22 ; for ushd'sdm, see p. 546.

Neuters: chdndasdm ; rddhasdm ; v&dasdm ; tdrasdm, AV.
x.10.24.

Contract form : vayd'm .*, see p. 552.

Transition-forms (see pp. 551-558) : I. apsardndm; ILL mahd-
nasdndm; pracetasdndm; IV. purodhasdm; VI. sdrasdm.

Locative Plural Masculine and Neuter,

L Neuters: d'dhassu, x.49.10 ; rdjassu, vii.34.16: viii.66.5 :
x.43.8; vdkshassu, i.64.4 ; 166.10: v.54.11 : vii.56.18; prdvassu,
iii.37.7 ; sddassu, vii.85.3 ; from AV., vdyahsu, iii. 2 1.2. See
Whitney to Ath. Pr. ii.40. The Rik-forms are all written with
-hsu in Mailer's first and second editions and in Aufrecht's first ;
and with -ssu in Aufrecht's second; cf. p. 573 end. The ss makes
the syllable long by position ; as in viL85.3a.

Transition-forms : I. apsard'm, p. 551 ; IX puruptydsu, p. 554.

IL In AV. vi.35.2, agnir (na d'gamad) uhth'eshu tinhorn,
Agni's presence is invoked not only at their * festal songs,' but
also ' in adversity.* At any rate, I can make nothing of anha-su
but a L.p. of dnhas- (cf. Ath. Pr. iv.32). If this is admissible,
we may also take apd-suy viii.4.14, for apds-su, 'bei den emsigen.'
Say., asmacttyeshu karmasu . . . sahdro lupyate. Bradhndm
refers to the soma ; and if we took apd-su for ap-sti (o£ p. 484),
the result would be an uninvitingly thin drink for Indra. Cf.
md*6 for mdssti, p. 497. See p. 554, IL end.

The same peculiarity is seen in several Zend forms : usha-hvay
Vend, xxi.3; areza-hva, ibidem, bis; ?iazanr6-tema-hva-ca9 Yt.
xv.53; dza-hu,Y&q. x.17; aza-hti,, Yt xxiv.51. The last two
forms agree remarkably with dnha-su, above. Examples of the
regular form are : temd-hoa, Yt. xxii.83 ; uzird-hva, Vend, xxi.8.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

568 0. R. Lanman, [is and westerns.

STEMS IN IS AND US.

The stems in is and us show almost no feminine forms. The
stems in is include about twelve neuters (10 oxy tones) ; the mas-
culines, excepting d'mis, are exclusively compounds of these
neuters. The forms are enumerated under category A.

The stems in us include neuters and masculine compounds
thereof; and also a number of primary masculines: as, tidkus.
The forms are enumerated under category B.

Stems in is and us distinguish strong and weak cases only in
the N.A.p.n., where the thematic i or u is lengthened and nasal-
ized, precisely as with the aj-stems.

The relations of stems in is and us to equivalent vocalic themes
demand a treatment, which, as far as it goes, iB parallel with that
of the preceding chapter (p. 548). I shall therefore discuss :

L Transitions of the stems in is and us to the declensions in i
and u (cf. II. p. 553).

II. Transitions to the o-declension (c£ HI. p. 554).

III. Transitions of stems in i and u to the ^-declension (c£ V.
p. 556).

L Transitions to thb Declensions in I and U,

Just as a neuter like hidas (p. 553) passes into the o-declension
(h&da-m), so here a neuter like arcis passes into the i-declenaion
(arcdyas).

A. 1. The stem pods and its compounds occur frequently ; see
BR. The form pods is sometimes marked as a neuter by an
adjective, if nom. (e. g. viil23.4) ; and by the construction, if ace.
In vii.3.5^, however, didd'ya poeir d'hutasya vr'shnah, it may
easily be felt as a N.s.masc. ; so also in vi.64.26 and viL 16.3a;
in x.16.46, tdm te poc\rs tapatu, tdm te arck-h; and in AV. i.25.2.

As transition-forms may be regarded : (yd's te) pocdyas, AV.
xviii.2.9 ; pdvaka-poce, 2 ; bhadra-poce, 4 ; puhra-poce; see p.
390 top. In vi.64.2ft, tit te poeir bhdndvo dyd'm apaptan, Gr.
proposed the transition-form poces ( Ueb. i.581) ; but this is un-
necessary. Translate : * Up sped thy light — thy beams unto
heaven/

2. In x.l6(842).4 : AV. i.25.2 : xii.1.51, arcis may be N.s.
neuter of arcis, or N.s.m. of arci (arcirs). Such a form is the
point of departure for the two transition-forms : arcdyas, RV.,
14; arcl-bhis, vi.48.7: v. 79.8. In the latter passage it is called
out by the formal parallelism of the verse: sdkdrh sU'ryasya
rapmtbhih \ pukraih pdcadbhir arcVbhVu In ii.3.2, suarcts (ndrd-
pdnsas) may just as well be referred to suarcts as to suarcl (BR,
Gr.).

3. The stem krav4s is a correct formation ; with it cf. d-kravi-
hasta, v.62.6.

4. With jydtis c£ jyoti, Kern, Translation of Brh. S., p. 135,
note 2.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. L] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 569

B. 6. The stem cdkshus is well authenticated; bat its nom.
cdkshus might be felt as a N.s.masc., cdkshus, in z.8.5 and 16.3.
Such ambiguities account for the transition-forms : cdkshos (see
p. 410 top^ and sahasra-calcsho (p. 412 end).

6. In lite manner the stem idpus is amply supported. The
ambiguous N.s. tdpus, vii 104.2, is referred by Gr. to stem tdpus;
but by BR. to tdpu. So tdpus (agnU)y it 4.6, may just as well be
referred to tdpus, although both lexica agree in assigning it to
tdpu. There remains only one form, tdpos, ix.83.2, to oe ascribed
to false analogy.

7. The form dhdnus, ' a bow,9 is generally neuter — stem dhdnus.
In the late hymn vi.75, verse 2, it may be masc (dhdnus) ; while
in Hit. ProcBm. 22, dhanus nirgunas, it must be masc., Le. a
form of transition to the u-declension.

8. The Rik has 17 forms from vanus, and but two from vanu:
viz., -6m and -d'n. The latter are probably transition-forms ; but
a nom. vanus does not occur.

9. At iii.699, BR. refer the an. \. duhpd'sus, N.8.UL, z.33.1, to
duly$d!su; but at vii. 170, correctly, to duh-cd'sus. C£ Gr.

io. The N.s.m. vidus, i.71.10 : vill8.2, is referred to vidus. It
might be referred to vidu; c£ rip^u, vidhrHL

11. Probably tdru has nothing to do with tdrus. The an. A.
tdrubhis in the late and corrupt hymn v.44, verse 5, seems to me
to be a vague reminiscence of tdroohis, ii.39.3, q.v.

12. The stems dyu, * active, lively,' and d'yus, 'life,' are of
course independent formations. The latter is of frequent occur-
rence in the Rik (92 forms), and is supported by the compound
stems kshitd'yus, eitrd'yus, dSrghd'yus, pdrvdyus t, patd'yus (all
posited by Gr.), sarvd'yus, gatdyus, and, as I think, by vipvd'yus.

I do not believe that there was another stem d'yu, ' life,' of
independent formation. BR. refer d'yus, i.66.1, to d'yus; Gr., to
d'yu. In x.17.4, also, Grassmann's d'yus can just as well be taken
as a neuter. The Rik has but one form not referable to d'yus,
viz., d'yuni (3) ; and I therefore regard this as a transition-form,
and d'yu as a secondary stem.

But in support of d'yu, * life,' BR. (i.678) quote the compounds
adabdhdyu, kshitd'yu, dUrghd'yu, vipvd'yu, vrddhd'yu, and sarv-
d'yu. Even these, I suspect, fail to establish a stem d'yu.

a. The a*. A. kshitd'yus, N.s.m.} is referred by Gr., and even by BR. s.v., to an
ns-stem.

b. The N.sjn. aa/rvdfyw, VS. mviii.20: gat.Br. xiv.3.118: Ait Br. ii.t, is
referred by BR. to "sarvdyu or -tu;" better, I think, to -ttf.

c DtrgM'yush-am occurs iv. 16.10; in verse 9, dtrghA'yus is a N.s.m. of
ambiguous stem; so in x.85.39 and YS. xhMOOa; and in Y& xii.lOOc, N.s.f.
Such forms pave the way to the true transition-vocative, dtrghdyo, viii.59.7.

d. Entirely similar is the Y.s.m. (dgne) adabdhdyo, YS. ii.20.

e. In i. 10.12, vrddhd'yu-m is merely a air. X.

f. The N.s. vicvd'yus occurs in the Rik 18 times, and in YS. xxxviii.20 parallel
with aarvd'yus. Since the support for a real stem d'yu is so weak, I am tempted
to refer this N.s. to stem vifvd'yvs, and to regard -t* (5), -wn (3), -ape, and -os as
forms of transition.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

570 C. R Lanman, [is and its-stems.

In L31.54, Skdyur dgre vtya dvivdsasi (BR. -#), the air. X. Qcdyur may be taken
as voc. or as nom. of Skdyus (&a + d'yus), l having unique vigor,1 i. e. 'of incom-
parable might.' BR. (i. 108*7, q.v.) refer it to Skdyu, i. e. Ska + dyu. In no case is
it to be taken, with Gr., as a compound of d'yu.

II. Transitions to the ^-Declension.

The transition results in forms from a longer vocalic theme ;
cf. pp. 554-5.

B. 1. The stem ndhus is a primary formation. From some of
its ambiguous forms has arisen by way of transition the secondary
stem ndhusha. Thus in x.99.7c, sd nrtamo ndhusho Jsmdt sujdtah,
ndr may be G.s.m. of the collective ndhus : ' He, the manliest of
the neighborhood,' i. e. 'of our allies;9 or N.s.m,, ndhushars:
'He, the manliest ally.' The same ambiguity prevails in i.122.10
(Gr., A.p.m. ; Ludwig, N.s.m,). Corresponding to ndhusha* is
made the G.s. ndhushasya, L 3 1.11 : v. 12.6 ; and the L.s. ndhushe,
viii.46.27. The stem ndhusha survives the Vedic period.

2. The stem mdnusha never had any real existence. In i.26.4,
mdnush-as is N.p.m. ; but it may easily be felt as a N.s.m.,
mdnusha-s. Mdnushas in x.11.5 is taken as G.s.m. by Ludwig
and Gr. Ueb. ; and as N\s.m. by BR. and Gr. Wo. In x.
49(875).7, it is by no means an o-form. In the Rik there are but
two real transition-fonns : mdnushdya, i. 117.21 : x.65.4 ; -asya,
131.11 (cf. ndhushasya).

3. The an. X. vdpushdya {pzvdpush-e), iii.2.15, is perhaps a false
form called forth by the metre.

m. Transitions to tpe S-Deolenbion.

A. 1. BR. derive the an. A. surabhish-tamay i. 186.7, from
"surabhis, nom. of surabhi." Cf. indras-vantam, iv.37.5.

2. The compounds with tuvi- are numerous. With tuvis- we
find only tuvish-mant (13) and tuvishrtama (3). One occurrence
of the latter, curiously enough, is in the verse next before surar
bhish-tama. The AV. pada reads tuvi-tama, Pr&t iii.96. Since
the suffix is is regularly accompanied by guna (cf. krav-is, hav-is,
roc-is, vart*is)y I am the more inclined here to regard tuv-i (c£
yu'-yuv-i) as the original formation. Otherwise, we should expect
two-is.

B. 3. Since a suffix su is at best very doubtful, I regard
dhdhshu as an adj. from a desiderative without reduplication,
dhdksh-u, for di-dhaksh-u, like tr'ts-u for ti-trts-&. This occurs
in x.115.4, dhdkshos; and in ii.4.4, dhdkshos — sanhita ddkshos
(Pnit. iv.41). And since a suffix sus, or us added to a desidera-
tive stem (cdkshusz=icarkas-us)y is unheard-of, I would consider
the form dhaksMsh-as, i.141.7, sanhita da- (Pr. iv.41), as due to
false analogy.

4. Perhaps the stems mdnu and mdnus are independent forma-
tions ; cf. mdnavd and md'nusha, manuvdt and manushvdt. It
is to be noted, however, that while mdnu has a tolerably complete
inflection (-ws, 15 ; -wm, 3; -und; -ave, 86; -os> 8; -auy -at£, 5; -avas,
4; -undm; sum, 73), only 3 forms of mdnus are used (-tisM,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Transitions. III.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 571

2 ; -nthe, 8 ; -ushasy 47) ; and that while mdnu remains in use in
the later language, mdnus becomes obsolete. Perhaps, then, the
Vedic forms of mdnus are due to false analogy, mdnu-8 being felt
as N.s.m. of a stem mdnus. Cf. also vipvd-manushrdm.
5. With dprdyu (root yw), cf. dprdyush-e, an. A., i.127.5.

THE FEMININE FORMS.

A. Sole example : svd-pocis (rodast), N.s., vi.66.6.

B. Here belong : N.s., dghoracakshus (dpatighnf), x. 85.44 ;
cdkshus (devl')y i.92.9 ; citrddyus (kanid), vi.49.7 ; hradkcaJcshus
($r&nis), x.95.6 ; A.d., tdpushd (cakriyd), ii34.9 — see p. 391,
C.2 ; A.p., gdvapushas, x.68.9.

THE MASCULINES .AND NEUTERS.

NOMINATIVE SINGULAR MASCULINE.

A. Here belong: dhavis; krshndvyathis; citrd-pocis; durdka-:
pukrdr; stlrndbarhis; svdrocis; suarcis (p. 568) ; from AV.9jtva-
bar his, xi.7.7.

B. Here belong : kshitd'yus; cdkshus (x.8.5) ; dirghd'yus, 2 ;
duhpd'sus ; vdpus, 2 ; vidua ?, 2 ; vipvdtapcakshus; from A V.,
kshitd'yus, iii.11.2; sahdsrdyus, xvii.27; ddabdhacakshus, xiii.
2.44 ; vtparus, vii.56.4 ; sdrvaparus, xi3.32-49ftw.

Transition-forms (see pp. 568-571): L pods; ar<£*; cdkshus;
tdpu-s ; dhdnu-s ; vidu-s f ; dirghd'yu* f ; IX ndhushars f ;
mdnushorsf: III. mdnus?.

If, with BR. and Gr., we refer the form janH's, vii.58.2, to
jamis, then the long ft is entirely anomalous. Does it not belong
in the same category as prajanH\ dhanH' (p. 402, 2) ? if so, we
should add it on p. 406, N.s.f., C.2 , jan&'-s.

Nominative and Accusative Singular Neuter.

A. Here belong 320 forms (from 10 stems) : ards, 6 ; chadis;
chardis, I9;h/6tisy 96; barhis, 86; vartis, 25; vydthisyb\ pocfo, 15;
sarpis; havis, 65 ; havis-havis; from AV., kravis (viii.6.2tt) ; etc.

B. Here belong 143 forms (from 8 stems) : d'yus, 76 ; cdkshus, 33 ;
tdpus, 2 ; dhdnus, 6 ; pdrus ; pdrus-parus, 2 ; ydjus, 5 ; vdpus, 13 ;
pd'sus, 5 ; from AV., drus (v.5.4) ; indradhanfa (xv.1.6) ; etc.

Transition-forms (p. 569) : I. vipvd'yut. In i.89.9 and iii.49.2,
Gr. would read d'yu, text d'yur (cf. p. 406); but see Muller,
Translation, p. cxxxiii.

Accusative Singular Masculine.

A Here belong : -pocisham, with dgrbhtta-, 2 ; anrd-; drdhvd-;
citrd-y 2 ; dtrghayu-; pdvakd-, 6 ; p£r<£-, 2 ; pukra-9 2 ; preshtha-;
— citirdrbarhisham, 2 ; vrktd- ; subarhisham ; from AV., ddk-
shin&jyotisham, ix.5.22, 24-26, 28, 31-36 ; Kiranya-, x.9.6.

B. Here belong : janHsham, 3 ; dtrghd'yusham ; pHrvdr
yushamf; patd'yusham.

Transition-forms (p. 569): L vantim; vrddhd'yum, vipvd'yum?.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

572 C. R Lawman, [is and tw^stems.

Instrumental Singular Masculine AMD Neuter,

A. Neuters (141, from 7 stems) : arcfohd, 14 ; kravishd; jySt-
ishd, 34 ; rocfohd; po&shd, 34 ; sarpUhd; hav'ishd, 56.

B. Masculines: tdpushd; ndhushd; vanushd.

Neuters: d'yushd, 4; cdkshushd, 2; janushd, 20; tdpushd;
pdrushd; ydjushd; patd'yushd, 2.

Transition-form (p. 571) : lit mdnush-df, 2.

Dative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculines: tigmd-pocishe ; pdvakd-; pukrd-, 3; vrktd-
barhishe, 3 ; stfrnd*; rd&dhavishe; suhdvishe.

Neuters: poc'ishe; havishe; jydtishe, AV. vi.61.1.

B. Masculines: cdkshushe-cakshushe; vanushe.

Neuters : cdkshushe, 2 ; jcwfahe ; vdpushe, 8 ; from AV.,
tdpushe, i.13.3 ; d'yushe, 20 times, as i.35.1.

Transition-forms (see pp. 569-571J : L vipvd'yave?; II. tndnu-
shdya; vdpushdya; 1TL mdnush-er, 8; dprdyushe.

Ablative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Neuters: barhishas; havishas; jydtishas, AV. iv.1.5; 10.1.

B. Masculines : ndhushas, 2 ; vdpushas.
Neuters : janushas, 4 ; vdpushas.

Transition-forms (see pp. 569-571): I. c&kshosf; I1X tndnush-a*?.

Genitive Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculines : pdvakdrQOci&has; vrddhdr; vdsurocishas; vrk-
tdbarhishaSj 5.

Neuters: kravishas, 2; chardishas; jydtishas, 4; barhishat,
6 ; poc&shas; pocishas pate; sarpishas, 2 ; havishas, 1 1.

B. Masculines : cdkshushas; ndhushas, 2 ; vanushas, 3.
Neuters: d'yushas; cdkshushas; tdpushas; tdrushas, 2; pdr-

ushas; vdpushas.

Transition-forms (see pp. 668-571): L pocist; tdpos; tripvtf-
yosf; IX ndhushasya; mdnushasya; IIX dfiakshush-as; mdnush-
as?, 37.

Genitive without ending (? c£ pp. 662-3) : d'yur nd prdnS,
166. 1.

Locative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Masculine : d'mishi, 2. Neuters : arcishi; jydtishi; tri-
barhishi; barhishi, 44 ; havlshi, 3.

B. Neuters : d'yushi, 2 ; tdrushi; pdnishi; vdpushi.
Transition-forms (see pp. 569-670) : I. d'yuniy 8 ; it ndhushe.

Vocative Singular Masculine and Neuter.

A. Neuter : (deva) barhis, ii.3.4 : x.70.4.

B. Masculine : ekdyus t, i.31.5 ; see p. 570 top.
Transition-forms (see pp. 568-569): I. pdvakapoce, 2; bhadra-

poce, 4 ; pukrapoce; sahasracaksho, AV. iv.20.5 : xix.35:3 ; dtr-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

V.s.m.n.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 573

ghdyoj RV. viii.59.7; adabdhdyo, VS. ii.20. These vocatives are
especially interesting and instructive as illustrating the manner
of avoiding unfamiliar forms; c£ pages 390 top and 412 end.
One need only study the dictionary articles pdvakdpocis etc., in
order to be convinced that they are true transition-forms.

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE DUAL MASCULINE AND NEUTER.

B. Masculine : jayiishd, 3. Here also belongs cdkshushd, ii.
39.5ft; 'Ye (who are) discerning as two eyes, come hither.' I
take akshi' as fern., p. 391 med.

Neuters : jantoht; cdkshushi, AV. ix.5.21.

Nominative and Vocative Plubal Masculine.

A. Here belong: dgrbhfta-pocishas ; ajird-; vrktd-barhishas,
14; vrkta^ 3; su~; sddma-; sujydtishas; sujyotUhas (x.89.15) ;
svdrocisha.8.

B. Here belong : ndhwhas; vanuahas, 6 ; vdpushas.
Transition-forms (see pp. 568-571) : I. pocdyas; arcdyas; I1X

mdnush-as f, 5 ; manush-as.

Nominative and Accusative Plubal Neuter.

A. Here belong: ardi'nshi; jydtinshi, 8; $ocinaM, 2; hav-
I'nshi, 15; of. AV. xi.5.18 : x.7.40: v.27.1 : iv.26.4.

B. Here belong : d'ytlnshi, 9 ; cdkshtlnshi; jantt'nshiy 3 ; tdp-
Unshi, 2 ; vdptinshi, 8 ; from AV., ydj&nshi (e. g. v. 2 6.1) ; pdr-
Unshi (e. g. ix.6.1 : VS. xviii.3) ; etc.

Accusative Plural Masculine.

A. Here belongs sujydtishas.

B. Here belong : ndhushas, 3 ; vanfahas.
Transition-forms: I. vanH'n^ p. 569; mdnush-as ?y 2, p. 571.

Instrumental Plural Neuter.

A. Sole example: hav'irbhis, 12, and AV. xviii.3.63 ; 4.54.

B. Here belong: vdpurbhis; dhdnurbhis, AV. v. 18. 8.
Transition-form : I. arcirbhis, p. 568.

Genitive Plural Masculine and Neuter.

A. Neuters : jyStuhdm, 2 ; havishdm, AV. vi.15.3.

B. Masculines : vanHshdm, 5. Neuters : jantishdm, 2 ; vdp~
ushdm, 2 ; from AV., cdkshushdm, v.24.9 ; ydjushdm, xv.6.3.

Transition-form: vipvdrmanush-dm ?, p. 571.

Locative Plural Neuter.

A. Sole example : havUhsku, ix.7.2 ; so Mailer's first and
second editions and Aufrecht's second. Aufrecht's first edition
writes hao'thshu. Cf. p. 567.

vol. x. 76

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

574 C. R Lanman, [Add. note 1.

ADDITIONAL NOTES.

1 • Dual Forms in -& and -au from Stems not ending in a.

§1. The N.A.V.d.m. of a-stems ends generally in -d (1129 forma,
from 358 stems); sometimes in -au (171 forms, from 87 stems).
The first two sums require several corrections. Tne 15 forms in
-<3, p. -au (p. 341), should be added, of which 7 are from uncounted
stems ; and purdhitd r-, p. -d (p. 342 end), should be added, since
the other cases like it are included. The correct sums are then :
1145 forms, from 366 stems.

§2. The circumstances of occurrence are given above, pages
340-342, which see; cf. also p. 427.

§3. Either of these two endings may also appear in the N. A.Y.d.
masc. and fern, of all non-a stems, excepting those in short I and ti
of series A (pp. 366, 401), and those in long % of series B. There
occur in the Rik 1246 dual forms in -d (from 354 non-a-stems) ;
and 122 in -au (from 58 non-a- stems).

On page 390 are given from stems in f, m., 13 forms in -4 and 0 in -au; p. 391,
<, 1, 14 and 0; p. 400, sdkhdy, 6 and 1 ; p. 413, u\ m., 21 and 0; 1, 15 and 0; p.
427, f, 176 and 10 ; pp. 431-3, g6, dy6% vrshtidyo, 30 and 4; p. 449, rad. a, 4 27
and 7 ; p. 458, oc, 8 and 0 ; p. 460, c, 7 and 3 ; p. 461, cfc, 1 and 0 ; p. 464, >, 45
and 3; p. 468, t, 14 and 2 ; p. 473-4, d, 16 and 1 ; p. 477, dh, 20 and 2; p. 480,
n, 8 and 0; p. 482, p, 2 and 0; p. 485, m, 9 and 0; p. 488, r, 13 and 4; p. 491,
p, 7 and 1 ; p. 496, *, 7 and 0; p. 500, K 11 and 2; p. 603, voc. root + 4 14 and 3;
p. 509, nt, t, 86 and 16; p. 513, vans, 13 and I ; p. 620, vant, mant, 25 and 2; p.
528, 1 1, sasthd'vdnd ; p. 537, van, man, an, 121 and 22; p. 544, m, 369 and 32;
p. 564-5, as, 141 and 7 ; p. 571. 1. 11, tdpushd; p. 573, us, 4 and 0. The sums are
1245 forms in -d and 123 in -au. Bat sakshuau, i. 140.3, ought to be counted as
an d-form, p. 503. In i.120.3, vidvd'nsd, occurring twice, was counted but once;
while cakriyd, x.89.4, was counted already under the a-stems. The correct sums,
then, are 1246 and 122.

§4. The circumstances of occurrence coincide entirely with
those of the duals from a-stems. C£ also the locatives of t-stems,
p. 385.

A. The ending -d is used

1. at the end of a pdda (433 times) ;

2. before consonants (670 times) ;

3. before an initial vowel with which it is fused (99 times).

4. It is never used before non-w-vowels with hiatus.

B. The ending -aw is used before vowels without hiatus in the
form -dv (90 times).

A. 1. Of the 433 forms, 130 are at the end of pdda b and 85 at
the end of d or of the verse; 148 are at the end of a and 70 at
the end of e,

a. When an d-form at the end of a or e is followed by a-, *-, or a- at the begin-
ning of b or d, the concurrent vowels are regularly written as coalescing io the
samhitd; but are of course invariably to be pronounced with hiatus. For

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Add. note 1.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 575

example, in v. 13.1: vi.62.1 : vii.73.1, the following pdda begins with a-; in
i.117.21; 159.1: v. 68.4, with t-; in 146.15; 111.21: ii.31.5: iii.35.3: vii.42.5;
99.6, with «-.

/?. A merely graphic peculiarity is the short -# at the end of an odd pdda where
the next begins with r-. See Rik Pr. ii.ll: Ath. Pr. iii.46. This is not a real
shortening ; cf. Benfey, Oram. p. 294, note 6. The instances are : vi$v&cambhuv&
r-T p. -d, L160.1 ; rtdvr'dhd, v. 65. 2 ; prdceiasd, z.36.2 ; for others, see p. 342 ad fin.,
p. 355 ad fin.

y. Irregular is the sandhi of acvind, viii.9.9c, with eva\ 9d: aprinevd; see PrAt
ii.38.

<5. In L140.3a&, we have kxshnaprktau vevijt asya sakskitd ubhdf tarete abhi
mdidrd cipwn, p. -an u-. Since two pddas never coalesce metrically, we might
suppose, if this were an old hymn, that the oral tradition had sokshtid ubhd'.
This would be written regularly sokshitobhd', p. -d «-. This instance is entirely
unparalleled in the Rigveda, and is interesting for the criticism of i.140.

e. There are but six instances in the Rik in which a dual -dv ends an odd pdda
and the next begins with a voweL They are: 123. 5, rtdvr'dhdv r-; v.34.8,
-fardhasdv a-; 15.3, bibhratdv a-; x. 132.1, acvindv a-; from a-stems, x.184.2,
devd'v <f; L2.8, -varundv r-. The first and last, if conformed to the canons of
the old parts of the Rik, would read -ft r- ; the rest -4-. Gf. p. 544. These facts
are of importance for the history of the text Hymn x. 132 is unclear and metri-
cally corrupt In i.2.8, the unaccented ftdvfdhau is a text-error.

2. In 670 instances -d stands before consonants in the interior
of a pdda. The exceptional instances of -au before a consonant
are given under B.2.

3. In 99 instances -d coalesces with a following vowel in the
interior of a pdda. In 51 instances the result is d: as, cdk&hushd\
ii.39.5 ; in 38, it is e: as, acvineddm, v.76.4; in 10, it is o: namely,
i.116.3,19: iv.2.4: v.76.2: vii.44.1: viii.5.2; 22.12: x.125.1; 128.7;
131.5.

4. Limitations to rule A. 4.

a. The cases in which -4 is followed by «- or 4- in the interior of a pdda form
a class by themselves. In the 10 passages just cited, the concurrent vowels are
run into one syllable, as the metre demands. If the metre requires them to be
kept apart as two syllables, then the Kiksanhita writes them with hiatus (-d «-),
and the pada reads always -at* «-. See Rik Pr. ii.9. The cases number 40 and
are: L108.3; 116.5; lfililO; 180.1; 182.7: iii.4.6: v.43.9; 63.3: vii.60.9; 72.4;
73.2 : viii.36.13a,14a; 35.1-21: x.14.12; 65.10; 66.76; 90.11: viii.9.UW»,
ydtdrh chardishpd' utd nah paraspdf bh(Udm jagatpd' utd nas tandpd'. For sakshitd,
see l.d. The omission of acvinau in the pada-extncts to vii.72.4 and 73.2 of
Aufrecht* is due to a mere inadvertence.

(3. Of the 1246 d-forms there remain four. These occur before a vowel with
hiatus, but in such parts of the text as to confirm our rule rather than break it
down. The first is vidnid pd'ntd aw$6 huvddhyat, sanhita pd'ntau$-, p. -d au-,
i.122.4. This hymn is referred by KuhD, Beitrage^ iv.212, to a later redaction.
The second is in the late and wretched bombast, x.61., verse 4, div6 ndpdtd acvind
huve vdm. The third is in 1.22.6, ddha gmdntd ttfdnd prchute vdm. The hymn
(noticed before at p. 341 end) has an antique look, but abounds in metrical corrup-
tions: cf. the false accent vtdid'ndm, for vtd-, 14. In vii.69.3, if we read 9ua?vd
yardsd &' ydlam arvd'gy the hiatus is forbidden by our canon, and the caesura is
intolerable. A good solution is : eudfvd [no] yacdsd' ydiam arvd'g.

The hiatus is only apparent in viii.18.16c; the pdda is a syncopated jagatt:
thus, dyd'vdkshdmdri © asmdd rdpae krtam, — ' — ' - © - -' ~ -' ~ — .

B. The ending -au is found 122 times. It occurs as -dv in the
interior of a pdda 86 times, L e. 70 per cent of the whole number;
cfc p. 342. This is its normal use.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

576 C. R. Lanman, [Add. note 1.

1. Four times it occurs at the end of an odd pdda as -do before
a vowel; see A. I.e.

Four times it occurs as -au at the end of an even pdda or of
the verse: x.14.116 (late) : 1.120.2c (corrupt) : ix.70.4.o\- x.65.5<£
These are exceptions to A.l.

2. The ending -au occurs 23 times in the interior of pdda before
a consonant, and 5 times at the end of an odd pdda before a
consonant.

If any one will take the trouble to examine these passages, he will find in most
of them other signs showing that they belong to decidedly late parts of the Rik-
tezt: thus, 13 (about one-half) are in the tenth mandala; 10 (more than one-third i
are found in Grassmann's Anhang ; and 15 (the first 12 and the last 3 as arranged
below) coincide with those discussed on p. 341 top, which see.

The passages are as follows: iii.33.13c (verse 13 is a patched-on fragment);
53.17a (versos 8-24 are a separate late fragment as shown by contents): v.36.6a:
vi.60.l4c (13-15 are isolated fragments of different metre from the rest): vii.50.26
(of real Atharvan character) : ix.l 1 2.4c (a late obscene addition) : x.14.1 la (hounds
of Yaraa — see p. 427); 27.20a (does not belong to the hymn proper); 85.116, \U.
42c (Sury&'s wedding); 117.9a* (backsheesh song); " L95.7&; 140.3a (later
redaction?): ii.43.lc (late, as shown by sarv&tas, p&nya, etc.): iii.54.16c; v.37.56;
vii.70.4c; 93.2c; x.lOl.lOo*, 11a; 184.2c (a real Atharvan hymn— d p. 544);
1 90.3a (a late cosmogonical hymn): — at the end of an odd pdda, iii.55. lie
(dark and mystical): x. 7 5. 4c (to the Rivera; Ganges mentioned) ; ii.40.lc:

x.l4.10a, 11a (late).

C. Duals from a-stems are sometimes found with short -d in
both texts or in the sanhita only ; see p. 342. This never happens
with non-a-stems. For prdcetas-d etc., see A.1./7. For gmantd,
p. -fcl, see p. 609.

§5. The Atharvan has in passages peculiar to itself

A. 55 forms in -d from non-a-stems. The stereotyped acvind
counts for 35 of these forms. The AV. has -d in two Rik-verses,
where the Rik has -au: v.25.3, acvind (see p. 544); xviii.2.12,
nrcdkshasd (see p. 565).

B. 105 forms in -aw from non-a-stems. The AV. modernizes -d
of the Rik to -au in the following Rik-verses : xviii. 1.54, mddantau
rd'jdnau (pp. 509, 537): xiv.2.16, vienasau (p. 565). For asutr'pd v
w-, see p. 482.

2, The relative Frequency of ancient and modem equivalent
grammatical Forms as a Criterion of the Age of different

Vedic Texts.

§1. We have here to deal only with the four most important of
the many pairs of grammatically equivalent terminations. In
each pair, the archaic ending is put first; the modern ending,
second. They are :

I. -d and -av; see N.A/V.d.m.f., pp. 340, 574.
II. -dsas and -ds; see N.V.p.m., p. 344.

III. -d and -dni; see N.A.V.p.n., p. 346.

IV. -ebhis and -ais; see I.p.m.n., p. 349.

Only the first pair is used with non-a-stems. The feminine
forms in -dsas, p. 362, the 27 forms in -d and those in -dni from
stems in an, p. 539, are very properly left out of account ; so too

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Add. note 2.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 577

a few forms belonging to each of the four pairs, and enumerated
pp. 449-52, radical d and d-stems.

The archaic Vedic endings -d, -d*o$, -<2, and -ebhis become
entirely obsolete in classical Sanskrit. We may therefore expect
d priori that those parts of the Veda itself which are character-
ized by the greatest frequency of these endings belong to the
oldest periods of Vedic poetry ; and that those in which they are
least frequent approach the later Sanskrit most nearly in time.

In order to see whether this theory is borne out by facts, let
us apply our criterion in comparing

the Riksanhita with the Atharvasanhita — §2 ; and
different parts of the Riksanhita — §§4-7.

§2. The Atharvasanhita, as is perfectly well known, is of much
later date than the bulk of the Kiksanhita. This is proved by
the internal evidence of its contents, and by many other criteria
of recognized authority in literary history.

The truth of this fact is confirmed in the most unequivocal and
striking way by comparative statistics. The differences between
the two sanhitas are large and are all in the same direction.

The following table shows, first, the actual number of occur-
rences of each ending in the Rik, and then in the Atharvan.
Next it gives the ratio of the number of occurrences of each
archaic form to that of its modern equivalent for the Rik, and
then for the Atharvan. Finally, it compares the ratio of each
pair in the Rik with the ratio of the same pair in the Atharvan.

RV.
AV.

2391
102

-at*
293
4*74

-dS08

1037
67

-ds

2180

1366

-d

1682

228

-dni
1060
334

-ebhis

671

43

-ait

666
226

RV.
AV.

816 :
22 :

: 100
: 100

48 :
4 :

: 100
: 100

160 :
68 :

: 100
; 100

86 ;
19 :

: 100
: 100

37 : 1 12 : 1 2* : 1 4* : 1

For example, the Rik has 2801 duals in -d against 293 in -aw,
while the Atharvan has but 102 in -d against 474 in -au; or, the
RV. has 816 archaic forms to 100 modern forms, while the AV.
has but 22 archaic forms to 100 modern. That is, the <2-forms
when compared with the au-forms are 87 times more frequent in
the old text than in the young. In other words, the archaic
forms are rapidly going out of use in the later Vedic period.
The evidence of the other pairs all points in the same direction.
While the RV. has 48 forms in -dsas to 100 in -a*, the AV. has
but 4 ; or, the old form is 1 2 times more frequent in the old text.
In like manner, the old form of the instr. is 4£ times more frequent
in the old text than in the young; and that of the pi. n., 2£ times.
C£ also pp. 342-9.

§3. The period of the composition of the hymns belonging to
the original Rik collection was a long one: this is a fact well
established by internal evidence, e. g., by the change in the
relative positions of Varuna and Indra. Moreover, it is no longer
disputed that there was also a wide interval of time between the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

578 C. R. Lanman, [Add. notel

poets of the Veda and the diaskeuasts. Bat there are hymns (as,
iii.29: v.87: vi46; 47: vil33) which were added even after the
close of the original collection, and the date of some of which is
subsequent to that of the diaskeuasts.

If, now, the difference in time between the Rik and the Athar-
van is so plainly shown by comparative statistics, why may not
the different parts of the Rik be chronologically arranged, or at
least separated, by the same method ?

The answer to this question depends upon the way in which
the Rik text is divided into " different parts." a. The most
natural division is that into mandalas ; see §§4-6. b. The one
most fruitful in striking results would be the division into groups
whose temporal relations are well known by other criteria — con-
tents, vocabulary, etc. ; see §7.

§4. Comparison of the different mandalas. For the purpose of
this comparison, I have made tables, the most significant of which
follow.

The different mandalas are of very unequal extent The evenly-printed pad*
text of Muller's second edition fills about 842$ pages. Line 1 of Table a gives
the number of pages actually covered by each book in Muller's text; and line 3,
the number of pages which each book would occupy, if the whole were evenly
printed or written on 1000 pages. Line 4 gives the rounded percentage of text
for each book.

Table a.

39

51

48*

60

62*

73*

110

76

153

169

842*

ii.

iii

iv.

v.

vL

vil

viii.

ix.

X.

i.

Sum

46

60

58

71

74

87

131

90

182

201

1000

.05

.06

.06

.ot

.07

.09

.13

.09

.18

.20

1.00

From this it appears that the family books ii.-viiL are arranged according to size
in ascending series. The books ix., x., and i. form again another ascending series:
but if book i. were divided into its 14 family collections, these would all come
before book ii

Table 1 gives the actual number of occurrences of each old
form and of each new form in each mandala of the Rigveda.
Thus in the first mandala, the ending -dsas 'occurs 187 times; and
the ending -ds, 412 times. The forms of the V&lakhilya are
counted with those of book viii A form or two may have been
counted twice (so jqjildnd's, x.14.2, under jan and jM)y and some
duplicates in the same verse (not given by Gr.) omitted.

Table 2 gives the percentage of the old form of each pair as
compared with the sum of the old and new of that pair in each
mandala. By implication, it gives the percentage of each new
form also. Thus in book ii. there is occasion for using the dual
in -d or -au in (92+21=) 113 instances. In 81* per cent of the
whole number (113: 92=1.00: .81), •& is used; and in the rest,
(100—81*=) 18* per cent, -au is used. In this way the absolute
size of any mandala may be disregarded. The last column give*
the percentage for all ten mandalas. Thus 2391+293=2684 ; and
2684: 2391=1.00 :.89\

Table 3 gives the mandalas arranged according to the relative
frequency of each of the four archaic ending*, or (what is the
same thing) according to the relative infrequency of each of the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Add. note 2.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

679

four modern endings. It is based on the percentages of Table 2.
Thus book viil has the maximum percentage, 41, of the archaic
-dsas; and, of course, the minimum, (100—41=) 59, of the modern
-ds. The last column shows the difference between the maximum
and the minimum for each set. This difference is largest for the
fourth set ; but there the aggregates of Table 1 are small.

Tablk 4 gives the most numerous mid important agreements
between the four series of Table 3. Wherever the sequences of
any two series are contradictory, the spaces for the books con-
cerned are left blank. What results, now, may be deduced from
these arrangements ?

Table l.

-at*

it
92
21

lit.

110
10

iv.

122

7

v.

214

40

vi.

196

20

vii.

246

25

viii.

449

32

ix.

35

3

X.

315
62

i.

612

73

Sum

2391

293

-dsas
-ds

47
95

66
143

61
134

83
170

70
143

113
219

142
204

103
198

165
462

187
412

1037
2180

-dn&

105
56

101
71

118
63

104
49

150
96

145

99

207
115

166
112

272
176

314
213

1682
1060

-ebhis

25
32

52
53

25
47

31

48

61
69

63
63

76
69

33
23

92
121

123
141

671
666

Table 2.

-dsas
-cbhis

ii
.81*
.331
.65«
.43*

iii
.91'
.31*
.68'
.49"

iv.
.94*
.31*
.65"
.34'

v.

.84*
.32*
.68°
.39*

vi.
.90'
.32*
.61*
.46*

vii.
.90*
.34°
.69*
.45'

viii.
.93s
.41°
.64*
.52*

ix.

.921

.34*

.69'

.58*

X.

.83*
.26*
.60'
43*

i.
.89*
.31*
.59*
.46*

.891
.32*
.61*
.46*

Table 3.

L

iv.
.95

vi ii.
.93

ix.
.92

iii.
.92

vii.
.91

vi.
.91

i.
.89

v.

.84

X.

.84

ii.

.81

DifL
.13*

II.
-dsas

▼Hi.
.41

ix.
.34

vii.
.34

ii.
.33

vi.
.33

v.
.33

iii.
.32

iv.
.31

i.
.31

X.

.26

.14'

III.
-4 p.

▼.
.68

ii.
.65

iv.
.65

viii.
.64

vi.
.61

X.

.61

ix.
.60

L
.60

vii.
.59

iii.
.59

.09*

IV.

-fbhtS

ix.
.59

viii.
.52

iii.
.50

vi.
.47

L
.47

vii.
.46

ii.
.44

X.

.43

v.
.39

iv.
.35

.24*

Table 4.

4*.
-dsas
-d, p.
-ebhis

IV.

.94*
.65'

viii.
.93*
.41°
.64*
.52*

ix.
.921
.34*
.59'

iii.
.91'

.49*

vii.
.90*
.34°
.59*
.46'

ii.
.33»
.43*

vi.
.90'
.32*

i.
.89*

v.
.84"
.32*

x.
.83*
.26*

.43*

§5. In the first place, negatively, as between the family books
ii.-viL, the statistics fail to show any clear difference in time. This
appears (a) from Table 2, in which the differences between most
of the books ii.-viL for any one ending are generally too small to
admit of any conclusion respecting a corresponding difference in
time. Thus in books ii.— vii., the percentages for -dsas range only
from 31" to 34* ; and for -as, of course, from 68T to 66*. Further-
more, (b) there is too little special agreement between the four

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

680 C. R. Lanman, [Add. note 2.

series of Table 3. Thus in the series based on the frequency of
the first archaic ending -d> book iv. has the maximum, and book
ii has the minimum ; while for the fourth archaic ending -ebhis,
book iv. has the minimum ; and for the third, book ii. stands next
to the maximum.

Table 4, by leaving those spaces blank in which the four series
are at variance, makes this lack of agreement evident at a glance.
Thus according to the first and fourth series, book iii. stands
between books viii. and vii ; while according to the second and
third series (Table 3), it stands after them both.

On the contrary, as between the R V. and AY., the percentages for -d range
from .89 (RV.) to .18 (AV.); and for -att, from .11 (RV.) to .82 (AV.);— for -d*wf
from .32 to .04 ; and for -<to, from .68 to .96. That is, the differences are large
and in the Bame direction.

Positively stated, then, the result is that the family books
ii.— viL are in general of about the same age, so far as the evi-
dence of forms goes. And this result is quite in consonance with
what we should infer from the other criteria.

§6. In the second place, positively, as between books viii., ix.,
vii., and x., a rude chronological arrangement may be made.

Tin.

IX.

VII.

X.

I.

.93

.92

.91

.84

II.

.41

.34

.34

.26

III.

.64

.60

.69

[.61]

IV.

.62

[.59]

.46

.43

Here we see a complete agreement of all four series in every
case but two. Taking the seventh as a fair representative of the
family books ii.— vii., our result indicates that the eighth is older
than the other family books ; and that the tenth is youngest of alL

Now the tenth is, on the average, confessedly the latest of all,
and so far our result is correct.

The eighth, or book of the family of Kanva, is distinguished
from the other family books by very essential characteristics.
Its redaction is by the hand of an entirely different diaskeuast ;
its metres are in general quite different ; the responsive or dra-
matic structure within the strophe (e. g. viii.50), and the concate-
nation of the strophes themselves (e. g. viii. 18), striking and
peculiar. Table 3 also distinguishes it quite sharply from the
other family books : in series II. and IV. it precedes all of them ;
in series I., all but book iv. ; and in series III., all but v., ii., and
iv. While, then, these figures indicate that book viii. is older
than the other family books, I will not lay stress on this result
until the relations of book viii. to the rest have been more care-
fully determined by other criteria.

The Soma-book fells between viii. and vii. according to our table.
This result is acceptable enough, especially as it places book ix.
decidedly before x. ; for we can hardly say that the book is not
antique, despite its wearisome character. But its tabulated dis-
tances from viii. and vii. are too small to have much weight

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Add. note 2.] Noun Inflection in the Veda, 581

The Atharvan is much younger than the Rik. But the Atharvan has some
passages of decidedly antique cast; and the Rik has passages of as modern
stamp as the average Atharvan hymn. In just the same way, the tenth mandala
is, on the average, the youngest hook of the Rik; and the seventh, on the average,
one of the oldest. But the tenth has unquestionably some parts as old as any-
thing in the whole collection ; while in the seventh occur passages which date
from the latest epoch of Vedic poetry.

After all, then, we could hardly expect that a comparison of different mandalaB,
whose periods of origin overlap and interlace, would yield figures susceptible of a
rigorous interpretation. Besides, single hymns, like i.116; 117: ii.39: x.106,
sometimes disturb the numerical relations inordinately.

§7. Far more striking, I am convinced, would be the results if
we tried this same criterion upon groups of hymns marked as
especially old or especially young by their contents, vocabulary,
phraseology, metre, place in the collection, etc. It would not be
difficult to pick out a mass of text (made up of such late hymns
asi.133; 162; 164; 191: iii.29: v.44: vii.33;50: x.85; 90; 109,
and perhaps the last thirty of the book, and of the frequent addi-
tions at the end of hymns like viii.4.19-21) in which the compar-
ative absence of the archaic forms -d, -dsa$y -d, and -ebhis would
reflect a striking light on the chronology of the parts selected.
This evidence of their youth might then be confirmed by noting
the absence of other antique forms (such as homophonous instru-
mentals, locatives in -<2, case-forms without ending, etc.), and the
presence of modern forms (such as the forms of transition from
the I to the i-declension). The like method might also be applied
with good results to some of the groups of the first mandala. But
since my collections do not include the material necessary for this
investigation, I Will leave the subject here.

3. Numerical Summary of the Noun-forms in the Riksanhita.

§1. The forms in the Rigveda which exhibit distinctively nom-
inal inflection are more than 96,000 in number. Table 1 accounts
for 93,277 forms, and the following paragraph for 2727 ; these two
sums amount to 96,004.

Forms from the stem aSJchdy (192), from stems in at (259), o (750), au (40), / and
d (14), th (90), m (112), v (647), sarddbhias and bandkupfcM (2) were not included
in Table 1 because it did not seem worth while to increase its size by so many
new columns; vtyvwn (139), ykna (57), Una (97), and forms in -end (85) were
excluded because it was not worth the trouble to separate them into masculines
and neuters; likewise vi^vds (104) and mar&ta8 (133), which were not separated
into nominatives and accusatives. A few doubtful forms were excluded here
and there— so half a dozen genitives plural in -dm, p. 353.

The number of excluded forms here noted is 2727. All other uncounted noun-
forms are, I think, quite insignificant in number. The exclusion of these forms
(most of them nom. or ace.) from Table 1 does not materially affect the truth of
ihe statements based upon it. Forms showing distinctively pronominal inflection
are, of course, not included : cf . p. 325.

§2. Table 1 shows at a glance the general distribution of all
the forms. It gives for each class of stems the actual number of
occurrences of each case : first the masculines — singular, dual, and
plural; then the feminines — s., d., and p. ; and last the neuters —
a., d., and p.

vol. x. 77

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

582 C. R Lanman, [Add. note 3.

The order of the stems coincides with the order of their treatment in the
body of this article. Grouping them as on page 327, we see that columns 1-8 of
Table 1 contain the stems whose suffixes end in vowels — group I. ; columns 9-24.
the suffixless stems— group II. ; columns 25-38. the stems whose suffixes end in
*, «, and » — group in.

For example, the number of vocatives singular masculine from stems in I will
be found in the second column, eighth line; it is 1115, i. e. 1105 regular forms
(see p. 389) and 10 transition-forms (p. 390 top).

The fourth line from below gives the sum of forms in each stem-class for all
cases together. The last three lines give the sums for each gender. Thus there
are in all 9526 occurrences of forms from stems in I: aud of these, 6012 are
masc; 3171 are fern.; and 343 are neuter.

The thirty-ninth or right-hand column gives the sum of forms fob each case
from all stems together. Thus there are in all 2442 datives singular masculine.

§3. Noitn-forms. The noun-forms of the Rik are more than
96,000. The personal verb-forms number only 22,461, according
to Prof. Avery's count in the Journ. Am. Or. Soc'y, x.319. The
former are therefore between four and n>e times as numerous as
the latter.

§4. Stem-finals. The fourth line from the bottom of Table 1
shows that the forms from stems in & and d are vastly more
frequent than those of any other stems. They number 46,836 or
about one half of the sum total : i. e., they are nearly as numerous
as those of all the other stems put together.

Then follow in order the stems ending in I, with 9526 forms ;
then those in tf, with 5670; in as, with 5221 ; t (B), with 2895;
ant, with 2750; r, with 2553; man, with 1778; in, with 1271;
an, with 1240; vant, with 1089. For all other stem-classes, the
totals fall below 1000.

By adding the numbers of the last line in columns 1-8, we
obtain the number of neuter forms (12,050) from stems of group L
whose suffixes end in vowels. Performing a similar addition for
each group and each gender, we get the following figures.

Table 2

I. Core 1-8. n. Col's 9-24. HI. Col's 25-38. Sum

Masculines 44,779 2939 10,232 57,950

Feminines 11,980 3327 602 15,909

Neuters 12,050 849 6519 19,418

68,809 7116 17,353 93,277

From this it appears that 68,809 forms, or about three-quarters
of all, come from stems of group L; 7115 from (II.) suffixless
stems ; and 17,353 from (III.) stems whose suffixes end in t, n, or s.

Radical themes in i and 6, though belonging to group II., are included in L In
certain cases the fern, and neuter forms of stems in radical d and a are not dis-
tinguishable from those in suffixal d and <5 (pp. 439 med., 440), so that groups L
and II. cannot be entirely separated. And so the figures just given are not
strictly accurate.

§5. Genders. Table 2 shows further that the masculine forms,
57,950 in number, are more frequent than the feminines and neuters
together. These are not so widely different in frequency: the
neuters come second, with 19,418 forms; and the feminines last,
with 15,909.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Add. note 3.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda. 583

About half of all the feminines come from stems in d (4318)
and i (3171) — see Table 1, last line but one. In group II., the
feminines (3327, root- words) almost equal the sum of masculines
and neuters — see Table 2. Stems in t (p. 367) serve as feminines
to most of the stems of group III. Tho feminine forms from
adjective cw-stems and ushds number 489. The feminines from
stems in vocalic root+tf number 72; but these have a certain
right (p. 327) to be in group II. Aside from these 561 forms, the
feminines in group IIL are so very few — only 41 — as to be fairly
called sporadic. Nevertheless, it is instructive to observe that of
all the feminines, barely one-fifth (2875) are from stems in deriv-
ative i.

The paucity of the neuters (849) in group IL is also worthy of
notice. The neuters of this group consist chiefly of adverbial
accusatives in -ak, -&, forms from " radical d-stems," from hr'd,
-pad, d's, bhd'Sy and mdh, dhar, ti'dhar, and stiar.

The fewness of datives in the neuter gender (s., 823 ; d., 0 ; p., 6)
when compared with the datives masculine and feminine (3651)
is worthy of remark, as showing that the dative relation most
often implies a personal subject : l. e. one gifted with sex.

§6. Numbers. Table 3 shows that the singular forms amount
to 65,608, or more than two-thirds of the grand total. The

irfurals number 23,321; the duals, 4348. I doubt whether any
ndo-European language that had a dual number would show in
any recorded text so large a proportion of duals as does the
Rigveda.

Table 3.

Singular Dual Plural Sum

Masculines 42,233 3281 12,436 57,950

Feminines 8780 956 6173 15,909

Neuters 14,595 111 4712 19,418

65,608 4348 23,321 93,277

§7. Cases. With the nominative coincide : the vocative (apart
from the accent), in the dual and plural of all genders ; the accu-
sative in the dual of all genders, in the singular and plural of the
neuter, and often in the plural of the feminine. For these cases,
therefore, the forms have not been separated when coincident.
For the remaining five cases, however, the forms, even when
coincident, have always been separated — usually by Grassmann's
exegesis of the passages in which they occur.

Table 4.

N.A.V.

Inst.

Gen.

Loc.

Dat.

Abl.

Sg. m. + f. + n.

47,296

4234

5274

3789

4092

923

Du. m. +f. +n.

4016

53

116

123

25

15

PLm.+f. + n.

16.333

3360
7647

1595
6985

1546
5458

363
4480

124

Sum total

67,645

1062

To the first group of cases belong about three-quarters of all
the forms: i. e., the nominatives, accusatives, and vocatives
together number 67,645. Of these the nominatives are of course

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

584 C. B. Lanman, [Add, note &

much the most frequent, and the vocatives least frequent. Thus,
in the masculine and feminine singular, where these cases differ
in form, the nominatives number 20,066; the accusatives, 13,331;
and the vocatives, 5451.

The remaining five cases in the order of frequency as shown by
the sums total of Table 4 are: instrumental, with 7647 occur-
rences; genitive, with 6986; locative, with 5458; dative, with
4480; and last of all, the ablative, with 1062.

The most frequent case of all is the N.s.m. with 17,315 occur-
rences ; cf. Benfey's remark about the prototypical influence of the
form of the nom.s., Vedica, p. 1 1 5. For the pstems alone, Table 1
shows not a single nominative. Of the D. and L.d.n. there is not
a single example in the Rigveda — see Table 1 , right-hand column.
Of the D.d.f. there is but one example, rddasibhydm, i. 136.6.

The blank spaces of Table 1 show how often it happens that,
even for whole stern-classes, we cannot make up a complete para-
digm of forms in actual use. As for single stems, I do not believe
that there is one in the whole Vedic vocabulary of which a com-
plete set of declensional forms occurs in the Kik. Devd, rdtha,
gd, vr'shan, and others are nearly complete. All the singular
forms of indra occur (see p. 340 top), and of vr'ka except the
loc. Cf. also the remarks on p. 350, D.p.n.

In Indo-European the ablative appears to have been formally
distinguished from the other cases only in the singular. Here
the ablative ended perhaps in -at; the genitive, in -as. In the
dual, the ablative was made to share the same form with the
instrumental and dative ; and in the plural, the same form with
the dative. Why now did the ablative dual and plural have no
case-form of its own ?

Upon this question the statistics of Table 4 cast a most inter-
esting light. Undoubtedly the ablative dual and plural has no
case-form of its own because these relations were of extremely
infrequent occurrence.

Thus in the whole Rik text, there are only about 124 instances in which, there
is occasion for expressing the ablative plural relation. It is therefore in perfect
accordance with the principle of linguistic economy that there should be no
separate form devoted exclusively as it were to the expression of this relation.
And in fact it is made to depend for its expression upon the case-form of the
dative, which — be it observed — is, next to the ablative, itself the most infrequent
of all cases.

Similarly in the dual, one case-form is made to serve as the means of expression
for the three relations — instrumental, dative, and ablative. Here again, the three
least frequent relations (I., 53 ; D., 25 ; Ab., 1 5) are united under one form ; and
the two more frequent relations (L., 123; GL, 116), also under one form.

In the singular, there is occasion to express the ablative relation 923 times.
In 534 of these instances the word has a non-a-stem, and here the old distinction
of form between genitive and ablative has become effaced and the -as or s of the
genitive is made to suffice also as an expression for the ablative. But in the
remaining 389, or nearly half of these instances, the stem ends in a and the ablative
is clearly distinguished in form from the genitive by the ending -dt — see p. 33?.
The original state of things, therefore, is very fairly reflected in the language of
the Veda, although the A vesta has retained the ablative ending in the mryrniw of
non-a-stems.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Corrections etc.] Noun- Inflection in the Veda. 585

CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.

p. 327, II 19, 20. Read the few masculines and the feminine* in t and u\

p. 328, L 15. Read ydkrt.

pp. 334-6. As instrumentals may be taken further: ddcd', 112*7.7 (cf. p.
490d) ; virvd, 'allenthalben,' x.20.8 ; sunirmdihd, iii.29.12 ; h&vd, x.27.8 ; himd',
x.37.10; md'nushd. i.51.1.

p. 337, 1. 17 from below. Add vtridyafi, vi.30.1.

p. 339, 1. 9 from below. Adverbial retraction of accent is seen in divd, and
perhaps in kshdpas. didr'kshu, giiM, tdnd.

p. 341, 1. 4 from below. For dtmand, cf. p. 408c, and A. Weber, Jenaer
Literaturzeitung, 1878, p. 82.

p. 346, 1. 21. Add: devd's\as\ v.51.13a; vdjds[as\ vii.48.la; cubhrd's[as],
LI 67.4a; cteibhrdjds[as']1 fem., i.79.1c.

p. 348, L 6. Add: vtrid[n%% v.29.136.

p. 348, 1. 8 from below. In ix.82.4. cev& may be neater pL

p. 360, 1. 1. In AV. iv.5.6, asyai is G.s.

p. 362, L 14 from below. Here belong perhaps gn&' huld'sas, vi50.15, and
r(bcibhrdijds\as]. i.79.1.

p. 363, 1. 7 from below. Of. awezhddndonhd, p. 546d.

p. 366, column 2 of Series B. Read «, (am, l&', lot, Id's, Xd'm.

p. 367, L 12. Read tormin-d.

p. 371, L 13. Dele akshi. The stem belongs to B ; p. 391, 1. 21.

p. 376, L 6. Insert except in monosyllabic stems after vowel

p. 376, L 7. Read jdtya for kshaipra.

p. 377, head-line. Read N.s.f. [viL97.26.

p. 381, top. For suasti, RV. v.42.45, the AY. has the modem form svastyd',

p. 383, L 27. So criyai, TS. ii.2.8e; meshyai, VS. iii.59.

p. 388, 1. 13 from below. Here Delbruck puts bM'md, vi.62.8 ; it must be
neuter pi., pada -#, page 539 end.

p. 389, L 15 from below. Add dsandf, TS. v.6.91.

p. 392, L 12 from below. Read divas-.

p. 400, 1. 20. Read p&tid; -yd, 3.

p. 409, D.s.f. CI tanue, AV. i.12.4, with tanuai, VS. xxui.44. TBr. iii.7.14
has tanuvai.

p. 411, 1. 3. In i.143.3, sindhavas is G.s.f. ; cf. p. 410 end.

p. 420. Transitions from r to o-declension : ndr, nora; devar, devcwa ; etc.

p. 429, 1. 25. As to mdtf '*, see "Whitney, Gr., 376.

p. 449, V.s.m. Cf. ashdddo, Yc. xxviii.7, with rtadds.

p. 456, 1. 7. TBr. ii.6.19 has prd'nk.

p. 467, L 10 from below. Read occurs twice. Add viii.45.11.

p. 462, 1. 12 from below. Read Acv.

p. 480, 1. 9 from below. Read Locative Singular Masculine.

p. 486. In the Br. occur kokubbhydm, anushtubbhis (Whitney, Gr., 151c).

p. 489, L 24, and 490, 1. 20. Opaprk is from the root pre.

p. 489, end. Transition-nom. s. m.f spacors.

p. 490, last line. Read iii.463.

p. 492, iL 24, 23 from below. Read vdta-tvish, dvidvish.

p. 492, 1. 15 from below. Read kd's, nds; d-cas.

p. 601, 1. 16 from below. Read nddbhias.

p. 604, last three lines. The four stems ought, of course, to be classed with
the t-an^stems. The N.s. would end in -dn.

p. 505, 1. 19. The form vavrdhdntas is from a verb-stem in a : Whitney, Gr., 444.

p. 512, L 15. Read jigtvd'll.

p. 512, 1. 16 from below. Read cticuvd'nsam, 6.

p. 513. I should rather take tasth&shas as Ab.s.n. : cf. Whitney, Oriental and
Linguistic Studies, i.138.

p. 519, L 6 from below. Read 154 forms (15 stems). Add adrivaSy 47.

p. 536, 1. 24 from below. Read carman, 18.

p. 642, L 13. Read several in min.

p. 568, 1. 22 from below. An-tidh&s is of course feminine.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

586

C. R Lanman,

[Index of

INDEX OP CITATIONS

Made in the foregoing Artiolb, prom the
RIGVEDA AND OTHER TEXTS.

This Index is designed to include passages whose exegesis, metre, text or
word-forms have been discussed on the preceding pages. The nature of th?
remarks upon any particular verse is shown approximately by an Italic lerr-r
prefixed to the page-number. An e siguifies that the remark concerns tf«
exegesis of the passage; an m, the metre; a i, the text, its criticism, or sooe
interesting variant ; a w, some word, note- worthy, modern, or irregular in fora
or otherwise.

To facilitate reference, the distance from the head-line to the last line of eaeL
page ih divided into four equal parts, designated by Roman a, b, c, and d after
the page-number.

RV.

L

RV.

i.

RV.

i.

6.

1

ew 513a,c,d, 585.

70.

4

<386c

128.

2

w 516a, 518<L

3

et 339d.

7

e 422bc, 482c,3a.

7

mt 383d.

8.

3

6 335a.

71.

3

e 354a,

129.

*469<L

11.

5

w 513c.

4

m 5 1 6a.

8

m 350a.

23.

24

m 338c.

5

m426d.

9,

10

mi 431b.

24.

14

e 564c

8

e 433a.

130.

3

w486b.

26.

2

e562a.

72.

6

et 422b.

134.

3

mt 37 Id.

6

e 518d, 480bc,

79.

1

emt 565cL

135.

9

i 373b.

515d.

80.

4

to 370c.

140.

9

e 377b. 395c.

27.

2

6 563d.

81.

4

e 562b.

13

etoolOb; mi539d

29.

3

i361a.

85.

3

mi 543b; cf.378b.

141.

4

e335c

31.

5

ew 570a.

9

et 348b.

8

emu? 55 7 d.

32.

8

e 562b.

87.

4

et 358d,

495a,

143.

2

m 535bc

36.

1

mi 399a.

559b.

146.

4

e 430od.

16

e334d.

91.

18

mw 498d, 500c.

149.

4

mt 394d.

17

m 342a.

92.

3

ew 348d, cf.539d.

150.

1

w 500c

37.

1

ew 526a, 330b.

5

e 562b.

151.

3

m/ 558b.

44.

5

ew 339bc.

93.

2

e 562b.

158.

6

i399a.

8

e 482b,<L

94.

15

4 386a.

160.

1

344c (n. for f. 1

46.

2

mw 420d.

97.

8

mw 434a.

162.

9

i386c

50.

6

e 330d.

102.

6

e 563c.

16

i354c

52.

6

e 335 be.

104.

1

6 384d,

395b,

20

i408a, 416c.

54.

1

e 372d-3a.

558a.

21

ew 391b, 509c.

57.

1

mw 382b.

7

mi 387d.

163.

i47lb. 520b.

2

et 348c.

105.

15

m 6l4d.

10

mt 345c

4

c 37 2d.

110.

9

m 517d.

164.

i471b.

58.

3

mu; 403d,419a.

111.

1

mic 516c.

15

e 423a.

5

e 422b.

112.

10

mt 388a.

39

mt 536a.

60.

3

e H56c, 348d.

17

<!l 339a.

41

mi 536a.

61.

1

mi 409b, cf. 414c

18

el 342d-3a, 650d,

165.

15

e 552cd.

13

mi 338b, 514d,

666c.

168.

1

mi 558b.

47 6d.

113.

17

c 461b.

173.

3

mw 539d.

62.

8

m 356b.

118.

8

et 359bc

4

mi 348a.

9

e 563d.

120.

8

mi 372c.

7

« 373a.

63.

5

«334d.

121.

1

ei 430cd.

8

mi 356c

64.

5

ew 474d, 488a,cd.

3

mw 473b.

9

cm 332d-3a.

65.

5

t 530a.

122.

11

mi 480bc,

516a,

174.

7

m 556d, 485d

66.

1

e572c<L

b, 519ab ; et

446dL

67.

6

m 432c, 556d\ 485

609b,d.

8

i348c

d\446d.

123.

5

et 359d.

179.

6

t 341ab.

6

w 500a.

127.

2

m 432c

180.

4

et 380d.

68.

1

e 422b.

6

m 441cd.

5

ei 373a, 376d

70.

1

i 363ab.

7

m 346a ; to

490d.

186.

4

1 406b.

3

et 353b, 423b.

10

mt 424bcd.

188.

5

w 486b.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Citations.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

587

RV.

ii.

RV.

iii.

RV.

T.

1.

5

et 518b, 519d.

55.

2

344c (f. for n.).

37.

1

*558a.

2.

2
4

e 482b,d.
mw 470ab.

11

*427cd.

41.

1

e 449b, 42cd. 47c;
444ab,48c,51d,

3.

6

*361a.

RV.

iv.

485c.

6.

2

to 334a.

1.

3

4 331a,

3

to* 341d.

10.

2

to 342a.

19

mt 432a.

4

t 345c.

3

to 548c.

2.

1

TO524&

9

t 345b.

11.

2

to 350a.

3

«353<L

10

to* 348a; e426d.

8

TO378d.

11

e 354a.

16

to* 45 Id.

19

* 333d.

12

tw 475b, 492a.

42.

4

* 520b.

12.

3

et 447a.

17

w 505b.

43.

15

* 386c.

13.

9

*386c.

18

10 516b, 52 lb.

44.

* 373d, 506a,8a.

14.

3

e 416b.

3.

5

to 524d.

2

w 508a.

15.

3

e 457d-4a.

6

t 534a, 448a.

5

* 569b.

20.

2

«/381«,443d-4a.

16.

20

e 336bc.

10

to* 384b.

21.

2

mw 498d, 500a.

17.

14

et 338d.

45.

6

mt 424bc.

23.

12

et0 495<L

19.

9

eiv 474cd.

46.

1

to* 424b-5a.

16

ti>473d; TO524d.

21.

6

mt 559a.

2

ew 339c.

17

*422d; TO524d.

23.

1

e 501c, 506d.

48.

1

to 524d.

24.

11

e 501c, 506d.

27.

4

w 516b, 52)a.

50.

2

to 350a.

13

em 349b.

28.

5

to 55Gd, 485d,

51.

11

to 526ab.

27.

3

et 508c.

452b.

52.

10

et 339a.

28.

4

mt 424bc.

32.

23

*361a, 356d.

16

TO*431d.

31.

5

mw 391c; e 562

33.

2

ew 349b, 359d,a.

53.

10

mw 515c.

ab.

3

mt 529ab.

14

to* 420c, 427a.

32.

2

e 336b.

5

rut 424b-5a.

54.

6

e 553d.

33.

2

«334c.

10

e 335d.

58.

1

mw 515c.

6

e 379c.

34.

1

«336c.

7

e*412ab,407d.

8

e 358c.

9

ew414b.

59.

7

to 393d.

34.

2

e 393a.

35.

5

mw 420d.

61.

16

* 348c.

6

m* 648ab.

36.

3

ew 414b.

65.

6

m*34 Id.

37.

4

to 563a.

6

mt 529ab.

66.

2

et 348c.

38.

8

e* 416c.

37.

4

t 345b.

68.

4

* 341ab.

39.

4

rt 343c.

38.

9

«448c.

69.

3

et 386a.

5

g*381a, 573a,

41.

8

e 415b.

70.

4

mw 479c.

6

* 36 la, 494ab.

43.

4

mt 356c.

73.

5

e 335bc.

40.

6

«* 526b, 527d.

6

c 335bc.

8

et 348c

43.

3

to 506b.

48.

2

to* 37 Id.

74.

4

w 342c.

51.

4

to 548c, 550d.

78.

9

to 493d.

RV.

ill.

53.

7

w 483cd.

83.

3

em 376a.

1.

12

*398d.

56.

5

tou? 39 1 c, 392a,

7

w471b.

4.

1

e 476b,cd.

58.

*47ib.

86.

3

to 638ab.

8.

9

to* 345c.

8

4 331c.

87.

6

*386c.

16.

5

mw 359b.

9

to* 381c.

18.

1

**425<L

RV.

v.

27.

11

w 486<L

2.

11

e 332d.

RV.

vi.

29.

16

* 513b.

4.

7

m 350ab.

3.

1

et# 563a.

30.

11

«373ba

7.

8

to 375d.

4.

1

e 386a.

31.

5

e* 457c.

10

e* 430cd.

5

* 376b.

9

to 493d.

9.

5

to 423b, 426d.

5.

5

e 564c.

32.

5

* 363a, 348c.

19.

4

e 485a.

6.

4

to 556d, 485d,

9

to 493d.

27.

6

to* 535a.

446d.

33.

13

to 341ab, 565a.

29.

15

t 348c.

8.

2

to 535bc.

34.

3

to* 554c.

30.

4

to 432a.

11.

3

e 354a.

45.

2

tr462a

13

t 386c.

12.

4

6 426d.

49.

2

TO*406d,57ld.

14

w 355d.

6

mw 47 1 be.

51.

7

e 389a.

32.

11

c 362c.

13.

I

«*380d.

64.

4

mw 391c.

34.

8

t 341ab.

16.

40

e378b; e*543ab.

19

4 386a.

35.

5

«336d.

46

* 380c.

55.

1

* 646b.

36.

6

* 341ab.

18.

10

e*380d.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

688

C. it Lawman^

[Index of

RV.

▼i.

RV.

▼ii.

RV.

yiii

22.

6

mt 348a.

28.

3

mt 429b.

32.

6

em 4464

24.

6

t 353c, 501a.

4

e362bc

33.

6

*542c

7

to 493d.

35.

13

t445b.

8

e 330d. 335ab.

26.

2

mi 354<L

14

i345bc

19

*341ab.

27.

8

to 521d.

39.

3

i412c

38.

2

i545d

29.

2

t 348c, 362a.

40.

4

ew 526b, 527d.

39.

2

mt 371d; e 56.

30.

1

f»514d.

5

t 552c, 362b,d.

ab.

33.

4

mt 388a.

41.

4

*389a.

41.

10

m 333d.

44.

1

(520a.

47.

1

e 466b.

45.

13

to 462c

9

mt 387d.

48.

1

eto414b; ei458cd.

46.

12

i400c

12

ew 523c, 53 8d

2

etc? 41 6d, 414b.

23

mw 382b. 384<L

46.

1

i388<L

3

*363b; «to495d;

47.

6

ew 502d.

4

4 329d.

mt 529ab.

50.

16

mt 395<L

8

i386c

50.

t 341ab.

51.

2

mt 462d

47.

9

w 509a.

1

m 342a.

52.

12

t386a

13

t 386a

4

mt 373b, 379b,

55.

9

m333c

16

«353d.

394a.

59.

2

e423a.

48.

11

e 562ab.

56.

3

mt 646c, 345c.

61.

13

e 360b.

18

to 513ab.

58.

1

m524d.

63.

1

e 562b.

49.

3

4 487d.

2

w 671c

4

i529c

6

4 422ab.

6

mi 356c

65.

12

mi 408a.

50.

11

emt 516b.

60.

3

* 406a, 415c

66.

10

w 512d.

51.

2

mi 354a.

10

w 542d.

68.

3

m 351c.

53.

6

to 473d.

61.

2

eto 502c, 503d.

75.

1

e 336b

59.

5

t 341ab.

5

< 362a.

80.

5

to 481a

60.

14

i 341ab.

67.

5

f»342a.

85.

19

et 348b.

62.

8

eto539d;cf.388d.

68.

7

ew 529d.

90.

10

m 350b.

63.

1
9

mi 341d,342d.
6 562c.

8

mt 379b/ 380b,
394a.

92.

8

m524d

10

to 342c

70.

1

mi 341d.

RV.

ix.

64.

2

e568c

76.

3

4 339a.

1.

6

,e 518d, 480bc

66.

3

mi 356cd.

77.

1

fiU 554c

515d

4

4 358d.

79.

1

t 363ab.

9.

4

w< 373b.

5

et 358(1, 359c

86.

3

ew 405d.

10.

9

e349a.

11

4 393a.

4

em329d.

12.

3

e 373b, 389c

67.

1

m 342a.

5

m624d.

7

4 364c

8

m< H42d.

89.

5

i380a.

22.

5

mt 558b.

10

m346a.

92.

4

4 414c

46.

4

/369a.

68.

10

i 342b.

96.

1

i 357a, 356d.

47.

4

e423a.

72.

2

m432c.

97.

6

mi 346c

57.

3

4 339ab.

74.

4

i 341ab.

103.

2

e 389c

58.

3

e344b.

75.

4

4 331c

104.

13

/386c

61.

10

4 376b.

11

to506d.

18

mw 541a.

62.

15

to385d.

15

i403b.

RV.

viii

65.

12
27

i 358d.
t 358d.

RV.

vil

2.

8

m< 536a.

30

to 404c, 408c.

1.

19

mw 359b.

30

mto 348b.

68.

10

mi 548ii.

20

t 386c.

3.

6

e563d.

70.

4

ew 447c.

2.

5

e386a; 4 415b.

4.

14

ew 484b, 567<L

71.

8

to 477C

6

*406b.

6.

33

mt 357<L

86.

6

t 388b.

3.

9

m428b.

7.

33

m524d

16

m 524b,d\ 532c

4.

2

m emended 506c,

8.

12

mto 420d.

30

mt 348ab.

348a.

13.

17

e 372d.

42

e 422d.

5.

7

m 535bc

19.

2

to 486d.

88.

2

et 348C

7.

2

eto348d;cf.408a

37

t 403b.

93.

4

to 506u.

16.

8

ew 502c.

25.

17

ew 474d, 503d.

96.

2

em 332d

18.

3

e 362c.

18

mto 335c

15

eto 406a.

7

to 472b.

26.

6

em416d.

21

mt 408a.

19.

5

4 357b, 356d.

29.

8

4 331c

24

4 362a, 3564

25.

1

ei0 457a.

31.

12

to 526ab.

97.

1

to495d.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Citations.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

589

RV.

ix.

RV.

X.

RV.

X.

97.

16

6 334d-5a.

47.

6

mi 552ab.

94.

12

t401d.

37

ew 41 led.

50.

4

mi 429b.

95.

2

e 358b.

38

t 425a.

5

mt 357a.

9

< 362(1

53

t 358a.

51.

2

mw 408a,416c

12,13

ew 505bc

54

ctt? 392a; t 531a,

4

mto 408a.

99.

7

ew 570ab.

534d.

6

m 375<L

IX

etw 488d.

67

w483cd.

53.

5

t345bc

101.

11

mt 387od.

98.

6

e 378b.

55.

5

e 336a.

102.

1

t386cd.

101.

12

m 346a.

57.

3

1 430c.

104.

10

0 358c

107.

20

e 335c

59.

1

ew 516b,

620d,

105.

9

mt 536a.

108.

11

e 433b.

534bc.

106.

3

t403c

109.

7

ew 506d, 501c.

61.

t481bc

107.

3

1 381d.

14

m 333d.

9

e 488b.

108.

3

e332d.

112.

4

t 341ab.

12

et 551b. 559b.

109.

1

0 562b.

113.

10

to 481c.

21

t*464cd.

111.

4

0 466d.

64.

7

mt 37ld.

114.

10

m 338b.

RV.

X.

14

«354a.

117.

t341b.

5.

5

tw526d.

65.

10

mt 552ab.

9

t 341ab.

6.

1

mi 536a.

66.

9

m542bc

119.

13

et 330ab.

5

mt 427a.

68.

10

to 485c

120.

2

t 373a, 377c

7

m524d.

70.

5

e*415b.

121.

8

mt 354od.

10.

1

6 336a

73.

6

et 363b, 447b.

123.

6

t386d.

12

t408a.

75.

3

em 385b.

125.

8

t 533b.

12.

2

t346d.

6

6 358c

128.

7

t430c

14.

7

t 509b, 537d.

9

mt 388a.

131.

7

t386<L

11

t 427cd, 565a.

76.

5

e 534b.

132.

2

mt 341d.

12

t482bc

6

et562c

134.

1

t399a; cu; 541(1

18.

14

tw 403b, 455d.

77.

1

to 521c

136.

t 341ab.

20.

3

m emended 506c.

2

m 345d.

137.

t 341ab.

22.

5

mt 341d.

4

etw 521c.

1

w5l2d.

9

t 373a.

8

m524<L

140.

3

0 384d, 395od,

23.

6

e 562b.

78.

2

m345d.

363a.

6

m 338b.

3

m 345<L

141.

4

0 336d.

7

0 336b.

6

t345c

142.

1

0 353b.

24.

1

e 409a, 412a.

79.

7

e451<L

5

m338c

25.

4

« 335b.

82.

3

t444b.

146.

3

0 376d.

26.

1

m 362b.

83.

6

6 375c

148.

2

m334a.

27.

20

f 341ab.

7

t342b.

150.

4

mt 388a.

21

e 534bc.

84.

1

t 520b.

152.

2

tw 477ab.

28.

10,1 1* 445a.

2

m 376a.

153.

1

0t362c

29.

1

«(7 505bc.

85.

< 34 lab.

160.

1

0 336d.

30.

14

0t363bc

5

t493d; ew

495b.

3

w 473a.

31.

9

m 556df 485d,

24

t 386cd, 567c

165.

1

t 385b.

446d.

37

t557a.

3

t 389c.

34.

14

t386a

43

t376d.

4

t 386d.

35.

10

mi 429b.

46

mt 404a,

420c,

178.

t 341b.

37.

10

w 485c.

426d.

2

t 341ab, 386d.

39.

1

0W 546c.

87.

3

t 342b.

183.

2

0412a,4O4a,413c

8

mto 516c

16

e359c

184.

2

t544c.

40.

7

etw 529d.

17

mt535c

8

em 33 Od.

19

tur370c

VAX

9

0t348a

90.

t 47 lab.

2.

10

0ir377d.

42.

7

mt 548ab.

10

mw 509d.

8.

4

a 353b.

44.

9

t386c

14

tw 370c

11.

3

mw 393c

45.

12

mt 548b.

91.

13

to 473d.

4

m 338b.

46.

6

6 353c ; m 481a,

92.

9

mw 640d.

6

t397a.

501c

14

ew 623c, 6a, 8a,

AV.

i.

6

mi 388a.

55 Id.

18.

2

w474b

7

e/ 410d, 414c;

93.

1

mw 391c

3

t412a.

tw458d.

94.

11

<346b.

20.

2

ew 418c

VOL. X.

78

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

690

C. R. Lanman, [Index of Citations.

AV.

iL

AV. xi.

VS.

3.

6

w 482c.

1. 2

(345b.

viiL 5

to447ab.

6.

6

to477d.

26

e 337a.

10

w 552c

21.

7

w 491b.

3. 19

e 562b.

xL 29

t 533b.

35.

4

t 410a.

4. 2

mt 554a.

xviii. 54

ew 560d.

AV.

iii.

AV. xiii

xix. 2

to516d,512b.

19.

1

*406d.

2. 33

ew 363cd.

xx. 2

(468b.

20.

6

et 336d.

3. 16

ew 415a.

xxi. 33,57

./ew 560c.

AV.

iv.

AV. xiv

xxiii 5

" ew 513c.

3.

3

*432<L

2. 38

* 557a.

xxvii. 14

w466a.

4.

4

mt 348c.

AV. xvi.

xxx. 14

w408a.

24.

4

ew 362d.

4. 6

tw 557b, 468b.

xxxiii. 11

e433a.

25.

1

mt 403d, 413b.

AV. xviii.

xxxiv. 26

to516d,512b.

AV.

V.

1. 57

to 521d.

559a

1.

3

e 384d, 395cd.

2. 12

w 474a ; < 565a.

48

«<552ccL

4.

10

mt 558b.

3. 23

t 362d.

TS* i.

19.

2

to506d.

4. 60

m* 524b, 532c.

3. 2

«io481a.

22.

11

t 495c.

AV. xix

14«

«433a.

23.

12

mt 657ab.

9. 4

mw 542b.

5. 11»

*564a

24.

3

*430a.

35. 5

to 523c, 538d.

8. 141

(468b.

25.

3

<544c.

37. 2

T*412a.

TS. ii.

27.

6

eu? 420d.

38. 1

w372a.

2. 6*

ew 506&

AV.

vi.

55. 3

<412a.

3. 10l

w 466a.

4.

3

f 432d.

60. 1

*414a.

TS. iii.

23.

3

w 482c.

61. l\

;*412a.

2. 8*

w 447ab.

35.

2

6U7 567cd.

AV. xx.

3. 11*

e 337a.

41.

]

mt 383bc.

136. 2

f 341c.

4. 41

t 377b.

62.

3

to 470a

TS. iv.

59.

2

< 377b.

SV. i.

1. 8l

w 466a.

96.

1

m*371d.

175

«0 362c.

7. 13«

ew 560d.

133.

4

m< 424b-6a.

340

«< 353c.

TS. v.

AV.
48.
81.
97.

557

i 532c.

6. 41

to 553a.

viL

1
1
1

e 337a.
f 348a.
t 513b.

SV. ii.
477

* 349ab.

TS. vii
4. 9

«7 466a, 623b.

502
1173

<632a
t 398d.

5. 2*

w497<L

AV.

yiii

Cat.Br. xtt.

2.

28

' * 406d.

VS.

5. 2«

ew512d.

3.

17

mt 535c.

ii. 20 w 569d, 573a.

AV.

X.

iii.

5 < 633b.

TBr. i.

6.

27

<381<L

vi. 17 to404bc.

1. 10«-« tw 654ab.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Sanskrit Index.] Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

591

SANSKRIT INDEX.

The order in which the different classes of stems are treated in the several
sections of the foregoing article may be seen from the Synopsis after the General
Index. In every section the cases and numbers follow each other in regular
sequence. It will therefore be easy to find at once those words about whose
stem and ending there is no doubt.

This Index gives the words whose analysis is uncertain, whose form or con-
struction is ambiguous, whose accent is peculiar (and of these alone the accent is
marked), or which are in any way noteworthy enough to call for special mention
in the body of the article. In case of failure to find a compound by its first
member, look for the last

dnh-as (vL3.1), 663a.
ahhasu, 567cd.
akrttcuruk, 460d, 464c.
ctfcka, 360c.
akravihasta, 568d.
aJcrd, 438a, 442b.
aksh, 558b, 392a
akshan, -aksha, 527ab.
aJcshcm, -t, 523ab, 530d.
aksht, 391b, 371b, 558b.
agru* 401c.
agrhvai, 404a 409d.
aghdy&'ndm, 418c.
aghoracakshus, 571a.
aghos, 520a.
ahgira, -as, -ds, -e, 550d,

548c
ahgiro, A.p.m., 566c, 342 d-

3a,
acod&te, 506a, 508a.
ajosh&s, contract N. p., 553a.
ajmo, -on, 526a
eUathd, 441b.
atandrdsaa, 362b.
ataptatanti, 402d.
atasi'ndm, 398b.
atiyapdm, contr't A.s.,553b.

Mmand, 408c, 341d, Addi-
tions.

atrais, 350a.

cUharva (voc. to -v<m\ 654b.

atharvV, 627d\ 368bc.

adatrayd', 358a.

adabdhdyo. 569d, 573a.

adbhis, -bhyas, 483ba 667a.

adrivas, 5 19d, Additions.

advesha, -<w, 548b, 654d.

adhard'c, 454<L

adhrigdvas, 414c; ct 432b.

adhvagat, 502a.

anak, 494d.

anadut, -vh% 498b.

anadvah, 498b; -v<2n,499c,
559d-60a.

anarv&n-amj 523c, 526a,
527d ; cf. 631d, 532b.

anarv&na-s, 526ab.

•narva-m, 526b.

anorvd, 1, 526b, 527d.
anarvdnam^ 330b, 526a.
anavi, 411c.
and', 337a.
an4?a, -a*, -<&, 551a.
andgdstva, 556a
d-nimish, 494b.
a~nimishd, 494b.
anumati, 371b.
anushthu, 401a
anu8hthuyd', 408d.
and'ca*, -afo, 45 5<L
an&C, D.8., 382d.
aneM, 551b, 659b.
anyddfh, 490b.
apadAd, 447a.
apavdn, 484b.
ap(W, ap-(fo, 50 lb.
apa*, 481ba
apami, 484b, 567d.
apf, 369b, 385b.
aprajastd, -ya, -drfva, 556a
aprajds, 556b, ct 439b.
apratf, -«, 394a
aprabhu, 403d.
aprdyu, 40 Id, 403b ; -tttte,

571a.
apsaras, -4, 551b.
abibhyushas, N.p., 51 Id,

5 1 3c.
abhikhyd, 440b, 447a.
aMtttom, 403d.
aMtrndtfTiam, 378b, 543b.
abhimdtishdhas, 500c,498<L
abhishti-pd, 381a, 443d.
a&fo'Artttt, L.S., 389a
abhtrvnam, 374a, 404b.
a^Craim, 403b, 407c.
anztfni, 412a
amuyd', 408d.
amxtdsas, 362b,cL
am&a, 360c.
amW, 371a

dyd, 4yd*, ayd', 357d, 358d.
ayd' (i.87.4), 559b, 358d,

495a.
ay<fr, 493a, 5a, 546ba
ayttf'a, -dnt, 462d,5a

ayt*fy'i, 462d.
ararhgamdsas, 363od.
arapi, 37 Id.
aranydnt, 37 Id.
ardti, 371b.

4r4vd=drt;<l, 529d, 534ba
ari, 400b, 37 la
(ww^aiAarwkin, i, 528b.
artmC, 372d, 385b.
arundhate, 372a.
orc^i, masd, 459c.
arcis. 568cd.
ar»at/dm, 353a
arycman, 523b, 532b, 537c,

538d.
an/a«, V.8., 620b.
arvanty -van, 516d,23b,29d.
arvdfl, -dn, ~d, 517b.
arvdccuj 458<L
alio, 360a

avadydbhiyd', 381d, 477a.
awww, 37 lb.
avaniyaSy 395b.
awy<fr, 463b.
avasxshtdsas, 362d.
avirate, '359b, 466d, 468a.
otteno, 554a.
owfe, 344b.
opan, a^na, 527a.
acipk, 372c.
opfrMdnda, 626d.
apvdsas, 362b,d.
ashta, 342cd.
cwan, see <wr*.
afopcaj, 467a.
daapcat, 467a.
dso^cotom, 507c.
daopcowtf, 467a.
asiknid', 368a.
<w(lm, 404a, 408a.
(wri, 461d.

atrrt, 463c, 466a, 623b,530d.
artfoan, -tuffaz, 527b.
a*fton, -». 523b, 530d.
aefkd, 447a.
adAlri 394a
cumftadhru, 40 Id.
aemfti, 381a.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

502

G. it Lanman,

[Sanskrit

asya (a8ia\ 338bc

aha, ahan, ahar, ahas, ahna,

523a, 527a, 486b; N.S.,

530<L
dhardivi, 488b.
ahd, N.p., 639ab, 540a.
ahighnyds, 384od.
ahrayas, 372c, cf. 375c
<ttfa*,401c
^ay*' f,388a,b.
4Jfara#, -*£, 555a.
4f<fetf, 371b.

4*4, 442b,c, 438d, 441b.
dtais, 452b.
Aftttf', 477a
d'pas, 481b, 483a.
dpr*, 459c.
dpes, N.B., 375c.
<JMt«, 403d.
dydf, 358<L
ay6, d'yw, 569cd.
d'yuy transition-stem, 569

cd, 571d.
d'yw% as Gks.n., 572cd.
dyurdad, 470&
dyikfcw, 403d, 419a.
dy<w, 344c, 361b.
drttf'a-*, 462c.
dvay&s, 463b.
4k*, dpa\ 550bo, 494a.
dfirdd, -dya\ 447b.
dpwyd', 408cL
dcushdndaas, 362bc.
<fcft(ri, 389c.
d>, dsan, dsd, dsya, 492d,

523a; N.8., 530<L
dwwmisftt*, 536c.
djayd', 494b, 523a.
dhuti, 371c
irf, 466b, 493bc
idd* 466b.
•cfd\ 493bc
iddbhis, 483d.
indrajdi, s.n., 445c, 560ccL
indr&vdyi^ 342<L
tnorofca, 340a.
tnorowairf, 570c
indrdpdehan. 523b, 537c.
t'ndrdvafiv, N.p.,516b,521a.
mdhanvabhis, f., 528a.
tyon*, 504d, Corrections,
tydntf, 510b; cf. 521b.
iradhyai, 563ab.
«ra\ 493bc
inn, 542a.
&fc,493bc
tsfai, transition-stem, 494b,

552d.
ishaqi, 381a.
ttfeiytf, 483d, 494c.
ishidh, 475d.

ttftttfcrftl, 468a,d, 466c

iahvds, 403b, 455d, 410b.

ishvai, 403b, 409d.

W, 466b.

Mf*, 490b.

tvant, 504d, Corrections.

fcd\490d.

fe*4 356b, 445a.

ukthac&s, -pds, 493a.

tiftft*, 335d.

ukthais, 350a.

ufoAon-o*, 524d.

irfEtfcm, -uksha, 527ab.

ufoftan, vtehdn, ukshn, 523

c, 524a, 532ab, 538od,

540bc
ukhachit, 472a, 474cd.
ttcai', -at*, 337b, 455b,457c
tid, vdato, ttdan, 523a;

N.sM 530d.
tufac, 455b.
udbhu, 403d, 412c
upoprw^ 381a.
upas, 496c, 545c
tipdMrtf, 381a.
ubhayd', 358a.
ubhayddat, 506a, 506d ;

-(flttw, N.p., 509d; -dam,

N.S., 506d.
t*rd\ as L.8., 412c, 41 led.
ttrfi, p.n., 415c.
uruvyoc, 455a, 460b.
wruvyaftcam, 460a.
urtl, s.n., 406d ; p.n.} 415b.
urdcty 455a.
wv4ru(^, 403b, 41 la.
urviyd', vrvyd\ 381c
t*rv*', L.S., 389c; <Ln., 413d.
urvyiUi, 381cd.
up, upon, 523a.
Ufadhak, 499a,c
iijKmd, 441b, 559b; -dm,

551c
tVOM0.51.il), 449a, 661c.
ttpane(vi.20.11), 624d, 633d.
foh (stem ?), 545c
usliadbhis, 566d.
tutor, 420a, c 427a.
usharbhut, 499a.
tufczj, t»M (trans.-stem),

551c
tw/iAs, ushds, 545d-546b.
ushds, as G.s.f., 563ab ;

A.p.f., 563ab, 566c
ushds-cu, G.s. or A.p., 523d,

546c ; -dm, ib.
tuTidednaJUd, 546b.
vara*. 426b, 429c; -n,427a.
Uti, 371b.
4#, I.s., 380c; D.s., 382d;

I.p., 396c

Cdhan, -ar, -as, 486b, 523s;

N.s., 530d.
tdkar, as Ab.s., 488a; L.&,

488b; A.p.,474dy488cd.
tirnamradas, -a, 554d; -df,

neuter, 560c
^nntnam, 374a,8ab, 542c;

3ab.
fkvo, -an, 526b.
rkvan, -vani, 523b.
rjUham, 543b.
tffi, p.n., 415c
rtanibkyas, 372c, 397b.
ftay<*', 368a.
r^t, L.8., 41 led.
rtdvas, 619d, 536d.
rdhadr&yas, 382b,4d, 431c;

of. 401c, 410d.
rbhttkshan, 523b,532b,538i
rbhm, -an, -as, 526bc 545c
Xbhvdil e-, 529b.
r^ACvcu, 519d.
fftoni, 504d.
eifcapa/nfa, 400c
ckamanta, 348d.
^wfyar, 570a.
ctari, 426<L
eM'tf, 363a,c
etwt, end\ 332-3.
en4», 363a,c
«mw, 344b.
ebhus, 483c 349cd.
07DO, -an, 526c
emusham, A.6., Slid, 512<L
em<UAa«, 51 Id.
«va^marti<, 444a.
evaydvas, 519d, 536cL
evayds, 45 Id.
e*Ao, 356a.
ofte», -oifco, 654d.
<9<u4, G.8., 563c
ojtya«, voc, 519d, 515b.
<m( 372cd.
0J7kin4, 524od.
oshadht, 371d-2a.
kakud\ 47lcd.
fertuto, A^fcu^a, 471c.
toniArai, 505c, 507a, 517d.
kantndm, 364c
Aan<yo»ai?i, 514b.
Awpftt, 470a,
Aawwaya, 402c
Awra^'aAe, 479a ; cf. 441a.
karkari, 371c.
AortorC, 426d.
-Awrmo, -karman, 526d.
kalydnyat, 369a, 383b.
kamitvana\ -tvd, 336d.
AtfAwd. 47 led.
fete, fetal, 494b; ifcd^om,

494c

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Index.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

593

fern, 377ba

kiyant, 504d, Corrections.
kiydti, 508<L
kiyedhds, 382c.
kldfnn. 490b.
JHfW 374a, 543cd.
fttrtM, 379d\ 38ld.
Wran*, 604d, Corrections.
kuhton, 404a, 408a.
AT*aA^ 402d\ 407c.
-*r<, 466c
Affte, 405c.
krtvanas, 523c, 538d.
Araft/tpra*, 448a
Jb-otv, 405c.
ftrofematf, N.d.m.t 516b,

620d.
krandas, 554a.
kravia, 5684.
Ard, cpds., 438a.
ifcrtfiiA 329b, 334a
krimtndm, 399a 4L7d.
kshU, -ofy -d, cpds., see

Aa%a>w, 482b.
itofcapd'oAtt, 483bca\ 493a
kshd, -d, -an, cpds., 438a,d,

40a,b,la,2b,a
Mdm, 5566!, 485d\ 446d.
kthdma, -on, 530c, 560a.
k8hdsy 656d, 485d, 452b.
hshitdyw, 669cd.
kshipdbhis, 483bcd\ 493a
AaAu, 401a

A»Aumati,A.p.n.,516b,521b.
tone, 448a, 534a, 440a.
itafomi, 372d-3a.
fotand*, -4, 448b, 440b,2b,

485od.
And, -an, cpds., see khd.
kharajru, 401c.
khd, -d, -an, cpds., 438a,d,

41a,2b.
khddinam, 374a, 378ab, 543

ab, 542c.
khddinaa, 374a, 393a.
khdri, 372c.
khidvasy 619d, 536d.
?£, cpds., see yd.
gangdy 440b.
ganapribhia, 372c, 396b.
parontnoya*, 372a.
gavdm, 432a, 373d.
yd, yd. cpds., 437d,8a,b,d,

40b.la,2b,3b.
ydm, 431 d; gdvam, 432d.
girayas, Ab.s., 393a ; cf.

384d, 41 Od, 426c.
giribhraj, 462b.
tfA, as A.p., 488cL
•yw> 401a

ytod, guhd', 358b, 500a.
ydrfotoate, neater, 560a
go and cpds., 431-2.
godhd, 440ab, 444c, Sab.
yondm, 432a.
gfohis, accent. 421c.
govapushas, 57 lb.
gawrt, 373b, 389a
ynd, 440a, b ; -d>, N s., 355

b; p.. 451b,2b.
gn&vaa, 518b, 519d.
gndspaiis, 448d.
ymanftf) 509b,d.
prod*, 448b, 440a,2b, 485d.
pfott, 434a.

pt'#, -a, cpds., 438a,d, 442b.
ghandy 334d-5a.
ghfnd, 335b.
pnrnf, 379a

ghrtavdnti, 521b; cf. 510b.
ghrtamd, 438a
ghrtamU 402a, 413c.
yAffclnnatt, 342<L
-ynna, 479ab.
ghrans, 530a, 480a, 495b.
eoAran, 505bc, 507a.
cakriyd, 39 led.
cakrvshaniy A.s.,511d,5l2d.
coJtantw(i.92.9),57la; -u»Ad

(ii.39.6), 573a.
catofow, 410a, 569a; cf.

412d\ 468c.
catMrnd'm, 397<L
catushp&t-pdd,*! 2bc41±b.
candram&s, -*nds, 547od,

555c.
camasdft, Is., 335b, 328a.
camti. Lb., 409a; L.8., 412a.
coranyii, 402c.
carattdm, 353b.
cardyai, 554a
cari&hnti', 402c.
carmaTnnd, -A, 438c, 9a.
edAon, 505bc, 507a.
cdyamdnd, 368a.
edrii, p.n., 415c.
cikituihas, as N.p., 513d.
ctfotoww. 519d, 513b.
citi, 371c.
cfcro, 368a.
citrdyus, 571a.
ctfrotay<M,384d,395cd,363a.
jd, cpds., see/i
jagat, 504d.
ya«yH 440b.
/ant, 400b, 371b.
janti's, 571a
janydsas, 362b,d.
jaras,jara\ 550od.
jarimdnas, Ab.s., 534bc,

523d.

;d, Jfc cpds., 437d,8b,d,40b,

la,2b,3b,6a.
jdgrvadbhis, 514a; cf. 511a

jdrm.jdur~, 409a.

/dna, 401a

jdmdtar, 419d.

;dww, 394a

jdyamdnam, N.s.1, 356c,

348d.
jdspati, 448a
jigatnU, 413b, 390<L
jighaisti', 402a
/dr, 416b.

jem&n-d, 623c, 537c.
joguvdm, 373d. 404b.
;«d, cpds., 438b, 440b,a
;«d», 492<L
^u, 401a
/maf, 448b, 440a, 2b, 485d;

-d, 447a.
/yd, cpds., 440b, la, 4d.
/yd^e, 432d; cf. 494d.
jydyas, voa, 519d, 515b.
/yofc. /tafc, 456d.
jyoto, JV°#i 568d.
jrayas, 554d.
ta*va, -an, 526bc.
foftwwfe, 373b, 393ab.
takshan, 523c, 532a, 538c.
foftmvat, 512c; cf. 511a
tanas, 479a
(and, 479cd, 480bc, 515d,

518d
fcmu, 402b. .
tend, 404a, 413c, 412a.
^mdr^ 404a, 408a.
tanvdsm, 404a, 412a.
tonvC, 411d.

tapant, 373b, 381d, 409a.
(ajXM, I.8.n., 562b.
tapuahd (iL34.9), 57 lab.
topitf, -of, 569a.
tapojdn, 45 Id, 2a.
torantfi'd. 335<L
toras, 554d.
tcvrubhis, 569b.
tavdrgdm, 55 Id.
/avw^t, 368b.
tovt»Mva«, 51 9d.
tasthushas, Corrections, 513

a,c,d.
idras, 419d, cf. 428c,d.
tigmatqasa-m. 555a.
(Otn;a«, 519d, 513b.
tirafc, 455a ; tiraccatd, 457

c; tfropcd'. 455b. 7c; (f-

ropci, 455b, 8a; TirafeV,

455b: 367d.
HlapiUjid', 38 Id, 369a.
Mifnd'm, 397d.
^'4yc, 462d

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

594

C. JR. Lanman,

[Sanskrit

ton, 371b.

tovigr*, 438d,42b.

hwishmarU, -tama, 570a

tuvi&hmas, 520b.

fcwtfrot/dn, 559bcd, 517<L

(ftott, 570d.

fond, 332-4.

topdtfd, 545<L

frndn, foidn, 523c, 532ab.

tmdndy 408c.

Jroantd, f., 528b.

tr&, cpds., see <r<2.

trasadasyavi, 411a

<r(J, ird, cpdfl., 437d,8b,41a,

2b,6a.
trdmane, 524d.
tridhdtiu, p.n., 415c.
frwwtei, 381a.
fvoc-i, masc, 459c.
<v<wiriA:, 456d.
tvasktdr, N.8., 424b-5a.
tvd-datta, -ddta, -hata, 334c;

toeaAito, foota, ib.
<2S, cpds., 866 (id.
daJcshas, 557b.
dofaftt, 390a.
dakshind, 358a.
dofeAt^ 570d.
dadushas, as N.p., 513d.
dadhan, -i, 523b, 530d.
dadhanvaias. 516d, 513ab.
dadhikrd, -hrdvan, 523b.
dodM'cd, 455<L
dad*!*, 496b, 494d, 498a,

499d.
dfon, L.8., 480<L
dan*, 506d; dan*-am, 507b.
dadAatf, 485a.
darma, -an, 526c.
dofdnd'm, 397d.
dasyavi, 411c.
dd, dd, cpds., 437d,8b,d,

41a,3b.
dd«d, 533b, 335ab, 330A
ddmanti -a*, 524d.
d&ru, 40lo, 408c.
ddvane, 524cd.
daVa^, 505ab.
ddpd, 490d.
dd*, 492d.
ddsa*, 506ab.
didrkshu, 405d.
didt/tt, didyut, 466c: didyut,

368a.
didyo*, 468b.
d^a[n]&>, 508c.
dw, 432b, 489b.
divaksh&s, 556b,c; oi 439b.
dwtf, 466c.
dtditKW, 519d, 513b.
dfrvAoprcrt, 474d,502c,503d.

dtrghdyus, 569od ; -dyo,

572-3.
dto, stem, 489b.
-dura, stem, 486c.
duraa, as N.p.f., 486b.
durmitrdsas, 362bc.
dttApdtttt, 569b.
dushtano, 4] 2d.
duhiiar, 420a.
dfltf, 370d.
dMdm, 389c, 373b.
d&rebhds, 495a.
-df»*, -dr»A, -dfw, 490b.
-dfp. -dfpo, 489d-90a.
drgdye, 490a.
de, 449b, 442cd,7c, 485c.
devagopd, 439c, d, 445b.
dwoidJd, 386a, 466d.
devayaft'ndm, 399a.
aetor,419d-20; Additions.
devavyacds, neater, 560c.
devahM, 371b, 370d.
devdn, G.p., 354a
deirts, N.s., 377b.
doshasas, 557b, 468b.
das, doshan, 493b, 523a.
dofatt, 557d.

dydm, dydvam, etc., 432c.
dyu, 432b, 466c, 401d

(cpds.).
dyugat, 502a.
dytd, 466c.

dyutadydmdnam, 1, 528b.
dyttwianftk, A.p., 52 Id,

516b.
dyumas, 520b.
dyil, 489b.

dyo and cpds., 432-3.
dyatb, 432d; ct 494d.
dra, cpds., 441 a, 4b.
dradhas, -a, 554d.
drav&t, 507b.
dravinodas, -d, 556ab, 564c,

449a
drdwnodoa-d*, 563a.
dravrinttd', 408d, 404a.
drahyat, 507b.
drdghmd, 533a
drdvinodas&s, 563a.
drt*, 401c, 408bc.
-druA, 498a.
druhyavi, 411a
dvdra, stem, 486a
dvdra*, as A.p.f., 486b.
dt^d, 358b.
dt-tpdd, -pdd, 470d,2bc,3b,

4b.
dwbwhcu, -a, 554d.
dvibarhd8y neuter, 560a
dAd, cpds., see dAd.
dhakshat, 505a.

dAatoAi. 390a.
dhakshu, 570d.
dhanasdtayit, 388a,c.
dhanaaaia, 452b.
dhanut&rau, 420d.
dAamu, 569b.
dAartar, 421dj -ri, 422a.
dharma, -an, 526c, 527a.
dAd, dAd, cpds., 437d,8h,

9a,40b,la,3b,4a\5a.
-dhdma, -dh&man, 626<L
dhdsind, 381b.
-dA*, 367ba
dAfod, 403cd.
-dfctt*, 499a.
dhi^rtias. Ab., 383d.
dhrshnuas, 410a
dhrahnuyd', 408<L
dAend,' 358a
dhmdtar, 421d; -ri, 423b,

426d.
dAyd. 440b.
-dArw*, 499a.
dhruvas. 557a
naktabhis, 541a.
naktayd\ 358a.
wo*tf, 371b.
naktoahdsd, 546b.
wad«, 370cd, 373b, 376bc
nadbhyas, 478a, 483c, 501c.
nadyas, 394a, 373b.
nandndar, 420a.c, 4261
napd^, napidr. 41 9d.
nap«, 373a.
n&bhas, 484a
namasyd, 358a
nami 367d.
nar, 420a, 421c. 428a
nor-o«, G.s., 426b,c ; N.p.,

as trochee, 428a
nardci', 454d.
ncvrdm, 373d, 430a
navagat, 502a
navdnd'wi, 39 7d.
navedds, contract N.p„ 549d.
naucdd* (i.79.1), 565a.
nat^asfndm, 515a
»da, see nd>.
nahus, sha, 670ab.
ndiAotf, 484c.
?wfWi, 37 lb.
ndbhind, 381b.
ndbhyds, 370a
fidras, 428a
ndrd^ahsVndm, 399a
ndr*, -{, 370b, 371a, 39M.
ndvdyd, 434a, 483d.
no>, «d»-d, 494ab, 493a,

546bc.
?jA5^ -c, 361a, 494ab.
nikdmabhis, 540d, 527b.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Index.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

695

ninlak, mm'fc, 461d\ 463c,

'456cd.
ninios, 392a
niitidi, 381a.
niddyds, 4*7 lbc.
nidrd, 440b, 444d.
nidhd, 440b.
nimi&ka, 494b.
niyayinam, 542c, 543b ; cf.

378ab.
niytUwu, 519<L
»trr&', 371b.
wwA*r* 371b.
nicd', -dt, -qui, 337b, 455c,

457c.
rxrndm, 430.

nrmands, G.8., 55 Id, 549c.
nfw, G.p., 430cd.
nemannisft, 536c.
nau, 433d; -bhis, 421c.
pa, cpds., sec pd.
padbhis, 475ab, 492a.
patf, 400b.
patnayas, 372a.
jkb/A, paftt, 470a.
pathishadt, 474a.
patheshthd, 468c.
pcui, 47 lab.

j7oda[m], as A.p.n., 349a.
pcuios, as abl., 474b.
panthtinam, -a*, 441cd, 532

b, 538d.
ponlhd, 441o-2b, 470a.
patwd', 408d.
paratneshthina-m, 642b.
pardcais, 457c.
paripnan, 52 2d, 524a.
parijm&nas, f., 528c
parir&paa, -rdpas, 482cL
parifcwfci', 502d, 477a.
pdrt«toii,368b; -fefa*, 372b.
paldlid', 369a, 381d.
ptoAni, 368b.
/KU'oyd', 358a.
pavfrawi, 411c.
jxzftt, 405c.

pafumdnii, 521b; cf. 510b.
pacushifo, 444ab,8c,51d.
pa^tf', -d* 337b,455b,457c.
pafvarUihti, 380d.
pap;^', du., 403c.
pasTtfhavdt, 499b.
pasUos, 344b.
jHZflprcifclfuteztf, 362bo.
pd, pd, cpds., 438bc.9a,40b,

la,4dL
pdih-as, 470ab.
p&to, 47 lab.
pdrthivdsas, 362bc.
pdvakapxt, 568c, 57 2d,

390a.

pdbakdsas, 362bc.

p&shios, 344b.

pttor and cpds., 419d-20.

ptta, 405c.

ptYr-w, 420c, 428b.

pifow, G.s., 426ba

piprtij 401c; -uo«, 410a

pwiw, 493a.

ptmarftfaivdf, 404a, 409d,

411a.
pt*77kM, 519d, 496c.
pwndns, 493a, 495a.
puro, stem, 486c.
purctetdr, N.s.. 424b-5a.
puramdhi, 371b,d.
puras, 488<L
purfi, p.n., 415c.
pwiKiaftptZ, 559b.
purttdansas, -a, -4 (contract

du.), 551d.
purunishthds, 556b, 439b,

43b.
purtfpepdtftt, 548c, 554b.
pwrubhu, 403d.
ptffttAAM, 342d.
purfl, s.n., 406d; p.n., 41 5b.
pttrflci, 455a

pwroddfr -ddca, -das, 489d.
pwod&Sy 490c, 463c.
purodhas, 556a.
puMtf, 371b.
piirvitfm, 357b.
ptehan, 523b, 632b, 537c.
ptehan, ptehana, 526d.
pfo&d a-, 529a.
prtandsfidham, 499a.
prtmshu, 469d.
prthivl, du., 391c.
PT^t, 37 Id, 367d.
pftkyjraya, 554d.
prthuydman, f., 528b.
prttttfAte, 40 Id.
prtfd^wi?, 404a, 411a.
prpa?if, 372b, 394b.
prpTM, 371b.
ITpnigdvos, 432b.
prshatt, 391b, 609c.
prshant, 504d.
pxshtha, 440d,la.
prffAiAt; 371a
pepa*, -4*. 554b, 555b.
p«i^w, I.s.n., 562b.
paurti, dual, 342a
pnJ, cpds., seeprd.
pr&cttasdndm, 555a.
pracetd, as voc., 564c.
■prcy'&s, transition-stem,556

be.
pr^Vl, 440b.

pronjW, 380c, 383a, 389a,a
pratidhd, 447a.

pratidhdm, 446c, 7<L
pratishXJid, 447b, 363b.
pratisadrn, 490b.
pratffcas, -im, -ofo, 455d.
pratyank, 456a, cf. 490b;

-aflci, 459a.
prathind, 533b.
pra&fcw, 403d.
praww, 447cd.
prayatsu, 466a.
prayasvcmUis, A.p., 6 2 led,

616b.
prayukti, 381a.
pravadydmand, 524cd. '
prahd, 440a
pra-hva-8, 486b.
prd,pr&, cpds., 438c, 9a,41a.
prdik, Additions to 456a ;

cf . 490b.
prdcd',-as, -aw,455c,457c,d.
prdtontocw, 519d, 536a\
prd^', 490a, 491b.
prtipft, 402d.
prend, 533b.
prater, 494b.
proehusham, A.s., 6 lid,

612d.
psoras, 551b.
-p«*, 401a
bandhur, 486<L
ftaAtt, p.n., 415c.
bahuprajds, 556b,439b,43b.
&afarf»d'm, 398<L
WMiatov, 402c, 403d.
brhadr&ye, 382b, 431c, 384

d ; cf. 401c, 410d.
brhanty 504d.
brahmt, f., 628b.
bfiaktivdhscu, 513a
bfiagavas, -gos, 520a.
fttei^a^lnd'm, 398d.
6/uwirop<?c«,568c,572d,390a.
bhcvrcu, 657b.
bhavas, 509a, 569d.
6Ad, cpds., 440bc,4c,6d.
-6*4;, 462b.
bhdttnd'm, 398d.
6Adnt*»MM, 520b.
5teto, bhd&vant, 492d.
6/itVat, 373a,
ft^/uJ^, 561d.
Mfe, 492d.
6%i, 371b.
bhtymd, 530a.
bhufljatlnd'in, 398d.
-&^ cpds., 401d, 403d,

405d, fl.
6Mnd. 533ab.
6^<Jmon4, -<w, 524d>
WAmd (vi.62.8), 539d; of.

388c, Additions.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

596

0. R Lanman,

[Sanskrit

bhttni, 371b.
bh&mids, 370c.
bh&ri, 394a
bhrti, 371b.
bhQdndoas, 362bc
bhos, 509a, 559d, 520a.
bhrty, bhrdj, 462b. 464b,c.
bhrdtar &nd cod., 419d-20a.
wiofoAA, 402d.
mafeMMw, 416<L
maghavan, -vant, 516c, 523

b, 629d.
ma^Aofta*, as N.p., 523c,

538d.
madrik, madriadrik, 456d.
madhu, 405c ; p.n., 415c.
roodW, mddhvt, 402ba
madMytjwt 403bc.
madhyd', 358b.
madhydyuvas, 403ba
manas, I.s.n„ 562b.
tTiandyai, 359d,a.
mantel, 356b, 445a.
mofitt, -t«, -tufa, 570d,b.
mantttfeydn* G.p., 353d.
manoidrd, 420d.
niantomaf, 520b.
mani/id, 441o-2b.
matkim, 542c, 543b.
mayobhu, 403d ; p.n., 415a
marutvn*, 519dl
marWn, G.p., 363d-4a.
martdaae, 362b,cL
marydh, 339<L
maryddd, 445b, 5 2a.
fnoAo, 498d.
moAofi^ 504<L
mo/kiy<j, 498d.
m4^M, maA-d*, 501b.
maA^u, Ls.il, 562bc.
mahdtmdnae, A.p., 523d,

540a
maMfiy -dfi, -aan, 506c.
mdhdnasas, 555a.
mafcdntf, 510b.
wiaft-dm, as G.p., 501a
matidm, as N.s.m., 506d;

as A.8., 552a, 442a, 632b.
maM, du., 391c, 392a; p.n.,

394d.
mahttvand, 336ab.
mahitvd, 335c-6a.
making 533ab.
maAimofkw, 524<L
roaW, 600d, 499a.
moAi (-id), 356od; L.s.,389a
maMnd'm, -t'ndm, 398d-

9a,541d; cf. 533ab.
moAlyat, 369a, 447d.
aAai 533b.
V*, cpds., 440c, 444d.5b.

md**, -*a, 494a 558ba
mdtar and cpds., 419d-20.
rndtariMvarf, -pvori, 559cL
mdtaricvas, 519d, 536d,

569d
mdtafl, 367<L
rodttr, N.s., 424b,cL
mdtr-os, 420c, 428b.
-wkW, 470<L
mddbhis, -bhyas, 567a,493b,

497a
mddhvt, 390i
mdyfl, 412a.
trnto, 492d, 493b.
md», tndffo, 493d, 547cd,

496ba
nidfftt, mdwu, 667d, 497d.
mitadru, 401d.
mtfraArA, 402a,d.
mitrdrdjdnd, 342d.
rortrdytwo*, 403bc.
mtttuyd', 408d.
mtftO, s.n., 406d.
mldfaw, 619d, 513b.
medhas, -d, 562abc ; cf.

549c. {

meAafoiid, 404a.
yakan, yo*r<, 523b, 630d.
-yd}', 462b. I

yajnamudi, 493a. I

ycyfiavacaa, Ls.il, 562b. i
yajrld, 334a |

yalfnd'm, 398d ; -Vndm,

399a.
yantas, 5 1 0b.
yoitftir, 486d.
yayi, 371a
yaAtrf, 372b, 396a.
yd, cpds., 438c,40c.
yd«, 355d.
yt», 464od\ 462b.
ydmo, ydman, 626cL
ydmaruu, 524d.
-yu, 401a

yu»», 456b, 462a, 3b.
yitfty, 462a,3d,4d,5a
yuwtf, 530(1, 560a; -ata9,

516cd, 640b.
yuvatf, 371b, 372a.
yuvadrik, 456d.
yuvan, -wwtf, 516cd, 530d,

522<L
ywvayil*, 415b.
yuud&u, 406a, 415a
ytohidm, 353b.
yflwd, as du., 523c, 537d.
y&'ne, -o«, 408c, 527a
yH«, ytoAa, -an^ 523a, 527a;

N.8., 630d.
yend, 332-4.
yonayit, 388a,b.

y<»A*i»-a#, (A) 523b; !».

528b.
yothan, -d. -and, 523b.
yw (for yayoe), 344b.
rakahohanas, 478c, 481a
raghatas, 466a.
ragkudrtl, 402a, 407a.
raghuyd', 408d
roiwA/Aaw, 350b.
rai;'tti»^ 411a
raajvdm, 404a, 412a.
ratoadheyd, 336a
nattaytir, 415b.
miAtrdytifctm, 506a.
ra^fo, 373ba
raiAyd, 336b.
ran, L.S., 480<L
rapi»4/l(iAaiAt», t, 628c.
rayi, 431.
rayivatf, 619a,
-ravcw, 557d.
rafmd, 533a
ra»d, 360b.
rd, 440b.
-r4f , 462b.
r^an, -rtfy'a, 527b.
rdM, -I, 370a 372a.
rdttaytfeyCndm^ 399a.
rdm, rdyd, eta, 431; cf

432d.
rdshtri, 367d.
ripuas, 410c.
rupant 504<L
retodhas, -d, 652c, 656d.
revatayas, 372a.
rofew, 553a
rodeuf, roda*, 658b.
r^*«C,368b; -UAa,372b
rat, 431.

lakshmt, 368d, 376d.
vaArfarf, 426a.
uaAva, -an, 526ba
twte^l, 372a
vaau, I.8.n., 562ab.
vajrivcu, 519d.
vod%A7», 404a, 408a; -wi,

409d.
vodAdmafito*, A.p., 621d,

516b.
vand, as N.p.n.f 348d.
vandm, 353a
varnndni^ 642ba
varmhthd. 41 Id.
vanttf, 569b.
vanqds, 45 Id.
vand^ttr, 486d; cC 494c,

568ba
wmvdndaas, 362ba
vaptMftdya, 570a
v&yas, ( fowls, fowV^d-

8a, 395b, 384d

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Index.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda*

597

vay&s, 'strengthening, '-d'm
(contract A.B.), 562cd.

twyd/A(viL40.5)l 552c,362d.

vayodhae, -4, 565d, 664c,
449c.

vayodhaiy 447d, 462ba

varied, 533b.

vartmoo, -ma«4 616d,632a

vartUrayaa, 372a.

rarcocfta*, -4, 656a.

tartanfa, 377b, 395a

rarpaitKw, 554c. j

valamrtgo-s, 462a /

valagahanaB) 478c#481a.

vatyd&anfcw, 605a Correc-
tions. '

vapa, A.8.m., 349b.

vafdsas, 362bo,d.

vashaikrti, 381a.

rawfi, 405c; s.n., 406d;
p.n., 415c.

vaaudhdUtraa, 420d-

vas<^ p.n.t 415b.

-ftffc 498ab.

what, 466b ; cf. 606a.

vd, cpda., 440a

wtyAo*, &05abt 506a.

vded>, 461b.

rttyatoaf'fna&A**, 1, 628b.

vdnias, 393a

vdtasvan&s-as, 546c, 346c,
667b.

vdyavas, G.8. ?, 4l0d; 414a

v<lr, t;dW, 486a

vdprdaas, 362ba

-wlft, 498b.

vydmdtar, 419<L

vir, 490c; vidbhis, -bhyas,
492a.

tri&ffidafl*, 362ba

viduahas, N.p., 51 Id.

triiu*, 569b.

via^o*, 468b.

vuftartiar, 42ld; -ri, 422c-
3a.

vuf^ir^r, N.8., 424bTd.

twttarfna*, V.B.n.7, 536d.

vidhavdm, 330d, 543b.

vipdt, 490a

vt&foSva, -an, 526ba

vibhdvas, 519d, 536d.

w&to*, 406a, 402ba 414b,
416d.

vibkvan, 622d, 524a.

vitiwand, aa Ab. ?t 534b.

vtokvdfl r-, 629ab.

vtr»r<2A^ 477ab.

vOtpJuto, 369a, 386b.

wptf, 402b.

vifvc&arma, -an, 626a

wJjwOsra***; 371b.

VOL. X.

vip>a[m\ as A.p.n., 348d.
vipfovyacds, neuter, 660a
vipvd'*, 454d.
vipvdytt, 569cd.
vipvdyupoahas^m, 648b,

667b.
vt<*dffM{, 499a.
riptdf, 416a
viahutilik, 456a
vishtapom, -4, 481ccL
vw^nayt, 411c; -www, 410a
vishpat, 490a
vwftvdc, 464d.
vtffi, p.n., 416a
vfefaAard*, neuter, 660a
rid*, p.n., 416b.
trt«, D.B., 383a.
vlrd, dual, 342a
vfrapepd*, neuter, 560a
viravas, 51 9d
ttfritf, -and, -ma, 331d, 336b.
Vft, 466a
vftdyd, 483d.
vrPraghne, 479ab.
vrtraham, 47 8d, 480a.
vr«raA4>, 442c, 478<L
tTtW*,466a
vrddhdyum, 569cd.
vfc&a*, 657d.
vrdJiasnu, 402a.
vrdhdeaa, 362bo.
vr*ta,a8neut.,how avoided,

530d, 531a.
vr«Ao, -an, 527a.
Vf^oo-a«, 624d.
vrsJiatvand, -tvd, 336b.
trraton, vr*Aan, vrdta, 523a

4a,8c, 532a,b, 7c,d, 8c,d\

640ba
vfahand'ma, 531a, 534<L
vfskabhd, 339d.
Vf*^, fern., 528c.
Vf«A<{, D.8., 383a.
vr'Mot, -taiw, 531a.
i>«H, 389a,c.
vedhas, vedhdm, 549ba
vepa«, 657ab.
veshand, I.a.n., 349b.
wsfcaprl*, 372c, 376b.
tuff, N.8., 375a
vefcrf, 466b ; cf. 506a.
vydsghra, 432d; cf. 494d.
vydhfti, 371c.
vfahi, 494d.
vycwioww, 624d.
vro>, 440a,b12b,4a
pafctfto, 376a
eakan, pa*r<i 523b, 530d.
paJfctfva*, 619<L
fokvarayaa, 372a,d; 377b.
pact, stem, 371a

79

padva$, 519d.
ptiakraUi) 405a
patomtitf, 348d.
cataydmnd, 624b, 532a
patord, 431c.

pa&ua*, s.n., 445c, 560cd.
fatdvan, 620b, 609a.
panaAou, 457d.
panaw, 457d, 685 (Correc-
tions),
parol, -f, I.8., 381c; -I, p.n.,

394a
fambhu, 403d.
Cardha, -a«, 553ocL
pavaj, 1.8. n., 662b ; G.s.n.,

663d.
paixwd\ G.8., 563d.
cavasdvan, 62db.
papvaM, 518d, 480bc, 516d.
pd'kin, 642a ; -info, 542a
p4*a<, 505ab.
pd»4, 363b, 495<L
fdsdm (ii.23.12), 353cd,

495d.
pikvtLf -ant -«, 526bc, 545a
ptpu, 405a
^•Aa^ -<m, 526d, 627a;

N.a, 630d.
ptr«A4, N.p., 539ab, 540a.
fukrafoce, 568c, 572d, 390a.
pukrasadmandm, f., 528b.
pacayoj, 384d, 395od.
pttcymmanas, f., 528b.
pucidan, 606a
ptiet^ra>d>>565d)685,Addi-

tions to 345, 362.
Cucishmas, 620b.
pfod, -e, -a«, 527c, 408a
pumaVi, 476d.
pu»/iJ(«Mro^(im, contract A.8.,

553b.
tfkgtondsas, 362bc.
tfUapdginam, 378b.
CTtapdn, 451d,2a.
p«pa0, 557a.
peva«, 567a
pofau, 657a
pocif, 568a 672d-3a.
prat, praih, prod,470a,466d.
traddhd, 436d, 444d, 440b.
pradrdhe, 447cd.
pramaywas, 403ba
(Tvtarvd, 529d.
pnrfi, 371b.
prtttArt, -i*, 380d.
prCTjidan, 606a
preshOiasthd^ a.n., 446c,

660ca
proni, 371a
pvan, 522d.
pwinwiam, 374a, 378a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

598

C. It Lanman,

[Sanskrit

pwnibhyas, 372c, 397b.
fvaeruaij -de, -dm, 404a

409d, 411a, 412a.
pwutvdn, 512b.
fvittcayae, 458d.
pvetavds, 463c.
pvetid, 358c.
shdt, 499b.
**, mii, cpds., see «S.
samvavxtoat, 512c; cf. 511a
•amwfctndMJ, 363bc.
samsxdbhti, 483ba
Mm^; 442c, 502*
•akthan, -t, 523b, 530<L
•aftftt^ trans.-stem, 371a
sakshanX, 390d.
aakhdy, -t, and cpds., 400

be.
sdkhyd, 336ba
sarhgati, 371b.
tacathyatSy 350ft.
sajosfiaa, -ds, contract N.p.,

552d-3a.
tfofyoftifti, 466d.
sotyamugro, 348d.
8atydm. 357b.
wtfrdafofc, 499a.
aatrdsdhe, 500a, 498d.
wrirdftam, 47 8d, 480ft.
*£*van, aifewui, 626ftb.
sddaep&tt, 563b.
*U-4 470d.

*H*r*fc, -drMi -cfr*, 490b.
*u*md (i.173.3), 539d.
•adnt, 401cL
«KftaTOd<Ja, 47 la
sadhamds, 472b, 463a
sadhastuti, 381a.
ladhruu, Ab., 384b.
Au2ftrC, 380a
•and, -4% 337ft,
•qpfctod'm, 397d.
aapraihas, -a, 554ab.
saprathds, neuter, 560od.
eapsardsoB, 546c, 551b.
sabardhwn, 403cd, 407d.
tfamond', 358a.
tamti-samit, 476b,cd.
jamfcaa, 45 5d.
Azmttdrf, 369b; -tya«, 394a,

396a.
tammitdsas, 362b,cL
samyafici, 459ft.
samyat, 456d, 466a.
sayugvd, f., 527<L
sayoni, 371b.
«aroi, -adbhias, 454a,b.
rarait, 389c, 658ba
jarawa*, 519cL
«araA, 454b.
#dm, 542a.

•arvatand, 402d.
sarvatdtd, 466d, 386a,
sarvaralhd, 336d.
MrvoAf^ 473 ft, 477a,

358ft.
tfarvdytu, 569cd.
salahehmd, f., 528b.
aSpcai, 467a.

Wftttt, 467a, 466b; cf.506a.
MUtMrttod, 1, 528a.
•**A, 498a-d.
mAo«, 557d.
sahasracakaho, 569a, 57 2d,

412d; cf. 390a.
sahasraddvndm, f., 528a.
sahatraparnid', 381d,369b.
sdhaarabdhu, 405a
sahasramdti, 348d.
aoAawa*, 519d.
sahd'van, -vant, 516c, 523b,

529d
*4, «ft, *an, cpds., 438c,9ft,

40c, 42b,a
sddharanyd', 368ft.
sddhuyd'} 408d.
adnavi, 387a, 412b.
rttnu, /rot*, 401c, 408c.
4dnfi, p.n., 415c.
ffdno, eta, 387a, 41 2b.
sdnti, 510b; cf. 621b.
adrasa, sdrae, 568b.
-att, 498b-d.
tfimi, 339d.
wrt, 867<L

wdtorwiaMw, 1, 528b.
«uceftmam, -4, 404c, 407c,

408a
my'anmoni, 1, 528b.
Aitorm<2na7n, 1, 528b.
sutavds, 488d.
«drdww%zm, f, 528b.
euddtU, p.n., 415a
sudds, 492d.
5t«dr«am, 403b, 407a
wpaft, 470a.
eupaptami, 380a
svpwrni, 372b, 394b, 396a.
«*pw*i, 403d.
suprqjdstva, -dstva, 556a
suprajds, 556b, 439b, 43b.
flupranfft, 382a.
suprayds, a.n., 445c, 560cd.
tfiSprdcf, 454d.
aqprdvid, 382c.
svmedhas, -dfli, 552ab.
mmna, 441 a, 2b.
wraftta', 394a
Bwdbhishtama, 570a
surddhds, contract N.p.,553

ab.
tuvarcasa-m, 555a.

swdstoda, 403b, 411a.

jwr&tf, 381ft.

awpaml, -C, 381a.

«tffarm4*aai, £., 528b.

sttputi, 381a.

«u«ft6m4 £., 528b.

JtuAfu, 401d.

sushihu, 401a

fvAanfe, 409a, 413b, 415a

witowd, 336d-Ta; -4«,335c,

fflfiairi, 41 la

rt'r-as, -e, J, 408c, 4874

8ab.
flflrml, -tf, 369a.
srni, 371c; -ttf, 38 Id.
ar'efta*, 477d.
sendnibhyas, 372c, 397b.
*o, N.s.f.f 366a.
ao&ftari, 37 Id, 367<L
somapd, -4 436ccL
eomdptohan, 523b, 537cd.
staryam, 394a, 379b.
rtrno*, 421a, 42Sd; ^A«.

419d, 421a
«<riyaff, N.p., 394b.
tf^rC, 355c, 372b; -bhU

396d; -«4'f», 398a.
«04 -ft, cpds., 437d,8c9a.

40ala,3b,6a.
sthdtor, -rdm, -«r, -r, -re,

421d-3a
sthdtdrd, as 1.8. ?, 534ba
sOids, s.n., 446c, 560cd.
snthiti, 372b.
m», 401c, 408bc, 416dL
snehiti, 372b.
«pa/, 490a

smayemdndsas. 362ba
sydmana, 524d.
«rava(, 466b; cf. 606a.
^ridMrf, 477d.
arucde, 461b.
wa«c45, 558ft.
svatavadbhyas, 566d.
«vatovdn, 659bcd.
watow&Ayas, 567a.
svadhd, 440b, 444d,6d,7&
wadMva*, 519d.
8vana8, 557b.
*t'ani, 37 7d.
svapatyai, 359a, 447<L
avajnayd, I.a.m.t334bf358a.
wdm, tud'm, 404a, 412ftb.
war, 487b; as Gks., 488a;

as L.8., 488b.
swore*) 557c.
wori, 369b.
wards, 568<L
««inwr, 420a.
svarthdtayit, 388a,a
tfvavdn\ 669bcd.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Index.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

599

svaeocis, 611a.

avasair and cpd., 420d\a.

*tuu4r, N.8., 424b-6a.

9va8T-oe, 420o, 428b.

*vas*i; 381a, 383a.

avasr&m, 430d, 423b, 373d.

svdhdkrU. 37lb,a

«tw»»4 332<L

Ad, han, cpds., 439a,41a,2a

-Aon, 478-9.

AontiMydm, 403c, 413d;

cf. 371c.
hanvds, 401a.
Aoruii, 392a.
Tiaridru, 401d.

Iwrivas, 519<L
ftaripma#8rtt, 534bc, 529d.
haripriyam, 37 7<L
hwvamdndsa*, 362ba
fawwAArtf, 381a.
fcwwAfnanfctt, A.p., 521c,

616b.
havishmas, 520b.
ho8toyo8, as abL, 474b.
hcurtint, -tnt', 368a.
hastmiOfs, 369a.
hdriy&jand, 339<L
hinsdndm. 363b.
Wmd, 486c, Additions, 585.
kvranyakepiai, 369a,b.

Mwnycuyd', 357a
Atrafw<£y4 381a
hvranyavdfis, 400a
Afd, Kxdaya, 471a
ftr<#, 473d.
Arc^ 363b, 447b.
Wat, 553a
A«tf, 37 lb; -y<&, 370a
ftefl, -tt, 380d.
hcmand, 624d.
AoMr, N.s., 424bcd.
tamo, -an. 526a
hradecakshus, 571a.
Arddtmt, 371a

GENERAL INDEX.

This Index is intended merely to facilitate reference to the phenomena of a
few classes, of which mention has been made here and there. Page-numbers of
the same decade in succession have been abbreviated by omission of the first
two digits.

A, roots in, 434-7.

-drt, for -dns, 346bc ; cf. 395a, 41 5d,
429a, 499c, 506a 512ab, 514bc, 517ab,
669bc.

Accent, differentiates homonyms, 358
a, 368a, 414b, 454d, 465bc, 481c, 501b;
modernized, 455d ; of proper names,
368a, 454d, 455b; of transition-forms,
483d, 434a, 462d, 490a, 493a 494c, 498d;
shifted in forming feminine adjectives,
368-9, 402 ; shifted in case-forms used
as adverbs, 337ab, 339d, 358a, 405d,
408d, 433d, 465bc, 467ocL 458a, 473a,
479d, 482b, 494c, 495c, 500a, 507b, 523a,
655a, 661b,d.

Adverbial shift of accent, see Accent;
case-forms used as adverbs, see Case-
forms.

as and a, relation of equivalent stems
in, 546-68.

Aspiration, transfer of, 47 5d, 499a.

Atharvaveda, material taken from it
for foregoing article, 325d, 327a.

Augment, loss of, 356c.

bbh, occurrence of, 483b, 585, Addi-
tions to 485.

& inconsistent treatment of final, 490
ab.

Case-ending : dropped 535-6, 387a,b,
389a 476d, 480d. 488b, 662abc, 563ab,d,
666c, 572cd; doubled, 469d.

Case-forms used as adverbs. 331b,
333ab. 337ab,d, 358a, 364a, 377c, eta ;
their accent, see Accent

Catalectic pddas, which Grassmann,

perhaps unnecessarily, makes acatalectic
by resolution in the cadence, are men-
tioned, 526ab, 338a, further, 336a, 345
d-6a, 360ab,d, 352c, 357a, S61a,2b,3b,4c,
371d, 381c,3d,4b,8a, 397b,d, 398, 399,
417c, 418, 429d, 430ab,lb, 441d,3c,6a,9d,
450d,2b,d, 469cd, 478a, 483d\4ab, 497c,
504b,9a 515c, 51 7d\ 522a,9d\ 535cd,8ab,
541b,c, 559a, 567a.

Confusion, of strong and weak forms,
see Strong forms for weak, also Weak
forms for strong; of dual case-forms,
see Dual case-forms; of genders, see
Genders interchanged.

Contract forms, 549-53 ; 545d, 555d,
561bc,2a3d,4a,5a,d,6c,7b ; cf. gdm, rdm1
dydm, gos, maghonas, and 432ccL

Oasis after elision, see Elision.

d: for 6ft, 47ld ; for *, 493b.

d: for d\ 476ab; for p, 492a; for ah.
493ab.

Differentiation, of homonyms by ac-
cent, see Accent; of forms by transi-
tion, 436d.

Dual case-forms, confusion of, 343cd.
344b, 361b, 392cMff, 474b.

Ecthlipsis of m, 522c, 533ab; of n,
533c.

Elision and crasis, 329cd, 330ab,la,c,
348bc,9b, 357b, 362a,3c, 376d, (cf. 376a,)
378c,9c, 381a,4b,6b,7cd, 405d,6a, 425a,
444a,6d, 6l7d, 563cd.

Equivalent forms, their abundance,
405c,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

600

C. R. Lanman,

[General Index.

Feminine formation, 367cd, 527cd;
with change of accent, 368-8, 402;
double or triple, 402bc.

Formal parallelism. 654ab,c, 468b,
479c, 486d, 516b, 640d,3b,8abc, 568d.

Genders interchanged, 516a: m. for
f., 427d, 510b, 527d?, 528c?, 562bc; m.
for n., 330c, 377d\ 610b, 631a; f. for
m., 343bc, 391b, 416bc, 515c, 516a; f.
for n., 344c; n. for m., 391b? ; n. for 1,
344c, (cf. 391b,) 515d,6a,8d ; masculine
declined with neuter* ending, 433a; 1
with m., 416b, 429bo ; n. with m,, 343bc.

Genesis of forms discussed, 326a,
331c,3,7b,d, 346c,7bc,9d, 351d,2b,4d,5bc,
7bc, 361od\ 366-7, 376cd, 383a, 386-8,
390c,5a, 400c, 415d, 420, 422, 423d-5a,
426bc, 429a,b, 436cd, 447od, 456, 467cd,
463bc, 483, 533abc, 538d-9b, 669b-60a.

Haplographia, 345b,8a, 353c, 563ab.

¥, compounds of roots in, 367bc, 453d,
502a ; final radical t becomes ty, 369c,
cf. 402-3, 393d.

Lengthening of final Towels, 332-4,
338c, 339d, 406d, 4 lid, 423b,6d, 530b,
63lab, cf. 538-9, 540a; of vowels of final
syllables, 330d, 543b. Cf. Shortening.

Longer forms to be read in place of
grammatically equivalent shorter ones,
346bc, 348ab,c, 367d, 380c, 381c, 393d,
4d,5d, 403d, 413b, 420c, 427a,9b, 431b,
468d, 476d, 506c, 514d, 536a, 539d, (cf.
654a,) 565d; cf. Shorter etc

Metre, determines choice between
grammatically equivalent forms, 535bod,
340c, 345a,7cd,9d, 357od, 548ab.

Middle forms, their extreme rarity,
511c; cf. 512c, 514a.

mtn, stems in, 542-5.

Modernization, of accent, 455d; of
form, 342b,6ab,7d,9d, 376d\ 380a, 388b,
o,d\9a, 39 Id, 408a, 430c, 435a, 444b,
482c, 509b, 513b, 520b, 533b, 7d, 554a,
565a.

Nasalization, of final vowel, 328a,9a,
331d,5o,7a,c,8b,9c, 342a, 355d, 470b; of
stem, see Variation.

r, compounds of roots in, 502a, 453d;
represents a long vowel, 430b.

Shortening of final vowels, 342bcd\8d,
355d, 390d\lc,2a, 413b; cf. 413c, 451c,
538d-40a; cf. Lengthening.

Shorter forms to be read in place
of grammatically equivalent longer,
371d-2a, 383bc, 408a, 420c, 426d, 515a
(sdhyaae) ; cf . 345b ; cf. Longer eta

Strong and weak cases distinguished,
see Variation.

Strong forms for weak (or forms with
apparently irregular strengthening), 420
cd, 498d, 516b, 621cd\ 523d (cf. 532a, 7c,
8d), 640c, 546c,d ; ct 428c.

Supplementary themes, 523ab, 530c-
31a, 328b, 43 lab, 2 be, 460c, 462a, 6c,
471c, 486b,9b,d\ 493bc,4c, 616od, 517b,
534c: cf. 526-7.

Syncopation, 623d-5d; see also Varia-
tion.

t, for Jfc, 466a, 456d, 463c, 623b; for
*, 499b ; for a, 468b ; inserted between
-a and a-, 346cd.

t, for j\ 463ab ; for h, 499b ; for p,
490c; for **, 493ab.

tdt, stems in, 466d.

Transitions, from consonant to con-
sonant-declension, 616cd; from conso-
nant to vowel-declension, 347c, 433d\
457cd8d\ 462od\ 470a, 47l,6a,d,8d,9T 481
od\3od,5c, 486-7,9d\ 490a, 491d\ 493o-4c,
8d,9o, 501b,2b,5d, 510a,d,ld,4b,6c, 523a,
5d-7b, 530a,l ft, 542bc,6d,7c, 548d-565b
(cf. 559ab, 660b,lc,2a,d13d,4b,c,6a,b,6a,
c,d\7b,c), 568b-670c (cf. 67lb-673d),
572d-3a ; from vowel to consonant-
declension, 347bc, 359b, 373-4, 404. 466
d, 471c, 484c,6d\494c, 527b, 640d,la.7c
8d, 555b-658c (cf. 569ab, 560b,lc,2a,d,
3d,4b,c,5a,b,6a,c,7b), 5700-67 la (cf. 571
o-573d); from vowel to vowel-declen-
sion. 369d-373 (cf. 375-400 passim),
403-404 (ct 405-419 passim). 427a,
434a, 436d-6d, 439d-40a.

tf, compounds of roots in, 502a, 40 led,
453d ; final u in locative regularly
uncombined, 364, 364-5; final radical
4 becomes w, 402-3 ; cf. 1

Variation of stem, by added a in
forms of vowel sterna 331c, 367ab, 373
cd-4a, 401 be, 404bc ; by a in G.p.,
351d, 364b, 397c, 417d, 430, 432a, 453b;
by y, 344a, 367o-360b, 361b; by nasali-
zation, 4540,9c, 462a, 489d, 490b, 604-5,
516, 545d, 566ab,8a, 573bc; by synco-
pation, 420c, 4780, 523d-525d, 635ab,
537d; by vowel-change, 367a, 382-9,
419-420, 459d, 462b, 470d,2bc, 481b.4c,
6ed\6b, 493a,8bc. 623bcd\ 546d-6d\ 566
ab.8a, 573bc; further. 498b, 611c, 514a.

vai% feminines in, 527c.

vxn, stems in, 542-5.

Weak forms for strong (or forms with
apparently irregular weakening), 420d,
498c(c£499d), 509d\ 511d.2d,3cd,4b,6ab,
520d,la,b,3bc,d(ot 531d,7c,d,8o,d,9c).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Synopsis.]

Noun-Inflection in the Veda.

601

STVOP8IS OF THB FOMGOIKG ABTIOIiB.

IntroductioD, 325

Stems in derivative a, 329

In derivative 4, 355

In derivative and radical i and (,.. 365
In derivative and radical u and d,. 400

In r or or, 419

In at, o, and an, 431

In radical d and a, 434

In radical i,t, «, 6, and r, 453

In radical?*, 454

In radical ac, 454

In radical c, 459

In radical cA, 461

In radical;, 461

In radical t and rf, 466

In radical*, 466

In radical ft, 470

In radical d; 470

In radical dh, 475

In radical n, 478

In radical p, 481

In radical Wi, 484

In radical m, 485

In radical r, 486

In radical v, 489

Inradicalft 489

In radical sh and *, 492

In radical A, 497

In final root-vowel plus t, 501

In ntyt (participles), 504

In to** (participles), 511

In yaA* (comparatives), 514

In vami and mant, 515

In von, man, and an, 522

In in, 542

In a*, 546

In wand at, 568

Additional Notes : 1. Dual Forms in -d and -an from Stems not ending in a,
574 ; 2. The relative Frequency of ancient and modern equivalent grammatical
Forms as a Criterion of the Age of different Vedic Texts, 676; 3. Numerical
Summary of the Noun-forms in the Riksanhita, 581.

Corrections and Additions, 585 ; Index of Citations, 686 ; Sanskrit Index, 591 ;
General Index, 599.

Digitized by VjOOQI^

CORRECTIONS IN ARTICLE VOL

* Page 196, L 17, for Antonius read Antoninus.

Page 196, 2d par., L 4, for otOtj read orpOq.

Page 196, 2d par., L 6, for ovavpaBti read oravpodif.

Page 196, line 2 from bottom, insert : In a single column of the Vatican MS.
(p. 711, coL 2) we find the contractions avuv, ovvov, irva, lAqp, hjX. 8ee also
mw, pp. 678b, 753b; avov, pp. 753*, 756k, 823b; avov, pp. 756", 762*, 824*; aw,
p. 803»; avow, p. 773*. So irpi, pp. 783", 808*, 899», 931»; jtpa, p. 763*;^
p. 761*.

Page 196, L 1, tna-rt; For SjjjT see also pp. 676*, 689*, 711*, 751*, 764*, 765%
768*, 913*; for d^ pp. 763*, 930*. We And also the contraction fa* pp. 331*
334*, 334«, 414*©w, 760*.

Page 196, 2d. par., L 4, for MSS. read MS., and for auBpUKoo read avdpwm.

Page 196, 2d par., 1. 5, before tavetd insert woo, utfrtip% ovpavoo.

Page 197, L 4 from bottom, insert: A column and a half are also left blank at
the end of the book of Tobit (p. 944), presenting an appearance remarkably
similar to that of the end of the Gospel of Mark. This may be, however, because
it is on the last leaf of the quinion or quire.

Page 198, L 5, for reveals read recalls.

Article EL, on the Cypriote Inscriptions, was printed in 1875, and the author^
extra copies were sent out in July of that year. Extra copies of Article X, oa
Verb-Inflection in Sanskrit, were in like manner distributed in 1876.

Persons owning copies of the separate edition of the Atharva-PrAticAkhya will
be supplied gratis with copies of article IV. of this volume, "Collation of a
Second Manuscript," etc., on applying to the Society's agents or Librarian.

Of article X, on Sanskrit Verb-Inflection, and of article XL, on Vedic Noun-
Inflection, a few extra copies are printed and for sale — the former at $0.75, the
latter at (2.00.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1872. xlv

Proceedings at Boston, Mar 22d9 1872.

The Society assembled at 10 o'clock a. m., at the Library of the
American Academy. The chair was taken by the President, Prof.
Hadley.

The record of the preceding meeting was read and accepted.

The Treasurer's report was summed up as follows :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 17th, 1871, $329.56

Annual assessments paid in, ..... $580.00

Sale of the Journal 300.50

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank, .... 36.19

Total receipts of the year, 916.69

$1,246.25
EXPENDITURES.

Paper and printing of Journal (x.l), Proceedings, etc., - - - $807.26

Binding books, 91.05

Expenses of Library and Correspondence, 68.69

Total expenditures of the year, $967.00

Balance on hand, May 22d, 1872, 279.25

$1,246.25

The Librarian made a verbal report on the condition of the
Library, and on its increase during the past year, mentioning the
principal accessions and their donors.

The Committee of Publication announced that the first half of
the tenth volume was nearly complete, and would be distributed
to the members in the course of the summer.

The Directors gave notice of their appointment of the autumn
meeting to be held in New Haven, on Wednesday, Oct. 9th.

On the recommendation of the Directors, the following persons
were elected to membership : as Corporate Members,

Rev. N. Hoppin, D.D., of Cambridge ;
Rev. J. A. Paine, of New York ;

and, as Corresponding Members,

Rev. C. C. Baldwin, D.D., Missionary in China;
Rev. J. T. Gulick, do.

Rev. R. S. Maclay, D.D., do.
Rev. S. J. Schereschewski, do.
Ahmed Vefik EfFendi, of Constantinople.

On nomination by a Committee, duly appointed for the purpose,
the board of officers for the ensuing year was thus constituted :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xlvi American Oriental Society :

President — Pro£ James Hadley, LL.D., of New Haven.

( Rev. Rufu8 Anderson, D.D., " Boston,

Vice-Presidents \ Hon. Petkr Parker, M.D., " Washington.

( Prof. E. E. Salisbury, LL.D., " New Haven.

Corresp. Secretary — Prof. W. D. Whitney, Ph.D., " New Haven.

Seer, of Class. Sect.—Prot W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., " Cambridge.

Recording Secretary — Prof. Ezra Abbot, LL.D., " Cambridge.

Treasurer— Prof D. C. Gilman, u New Haven.

Librarian — Prof. W. D. Whitney, u New Haven.

f Mr. J. W. Barrow, " New York

Mr. A. L Cotheal, " New York.

Prof. W. H. Green, D.D., " Princeton.

Directors { Prof A. P. Peabody, D.D., " Cambridge.

Dr. Charles Pickering, " Boston.

Prof. Charles Short, LL.D., " New York.

Pres't T. D. Woolsey, LL.D., " New Haven.

The Corresponding Secretary called the attention of the Society
to its losses during the past year, by the death of the following
members :

Mr. John P. Brown, of Constantinople ;

Dr. Joseph G. Cogswell, of Cambridge ;

Mr. Fisher Howe, of Brooklyn, N. Y.

Appropriate remarks on the character and services of the de-
ceased were made by different members. Dr. Anderson paid a
tribute to Mr. Howe, referring particularly to the interesting little
work on " The True Site of Calvary," published by him a short
time before his death. Dr. Peabody spoke of the varied accom-
plishments of Dr. Cogswell, and of his eminent merits as a teacher,
as a librarian of unsurpassed bibliographical knowledge, and as a
man of remarkable purity and disinterestedness of character. Rev.
Mr. Paine of New York, and Dr. Parker, called to mind the public
services of Mr. Brown, and his valuable literary labors, particularly
his work on the Dervishes.

From the correspondence read by the Secretary are made the
extracts given below :

1 . Dr. F. Mason writes, under date of Toungoo, Aug. 12th, 1 87 1 :

" .... I am indebted to you for your approval of my Pali labors. Burmese
Pali manuscripts have a very bad character with European Pali scholars, and with
some reason. Still, there are many reasons why they should be treated with con-
sideration, and I enclose with this a brief article exhibiting those reasons ; if you
think it worth a place in the Journal, I shall be glad to have it inserted.

11 1 have been urging Mr. Oushing, the only white man who has ever acquired
the Shan language, to write you an article on it and its speakers, and I think he
will do it. fiie Shans are a large but little known people, who, so far as locality
is concerned, form a connecting link between the Burmese and Chinese."

2. Rev. A. Bushnell, Gaboon, Equat. Africa, March 15th, 1872:

11 ... . There has been some progress made of late in exploring the interior of
this interesting part of Africa, yet not very much. Our knowledge of the moun-
tainous regions eastward from the sources of the Gaboon has not materially in-
creased since the island of Nengenenge was abandoned by white missionaries; but
commerce is gradually pushing its way inward, and the cannibal inhabitants are

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston^ May, 1872.

xlvii

crowding in great numbers toward the coast The Ogobai, the river south of the
equator, is a much larger one than this, probably issuing from the long sought but
still undiscovered lake. At this season of the year, its current is so rapid that it
can hardly be ascended. Several small steamers are preparing, intended to breast
the fierce current, and to carry trade far into the interior. We are hoping that
this stream will furnish us a highway into that unexplored region which we have-
failed to reach from the Gaboon. The Scotch missionaries resident on the Old!
Calabar river have been making some interesting tours eastward, toward the
Benue, the southern branch of the Niger : and a Scotch gentleman, accompanied
by one of our missionaries, recently went about a hundred miles into the unknown
interior eastward from Benita. The same gentlemen are now trying to establish
a sanitarium on the Cameroons mountains, some 13,000 feet above the sea, where
they find a European climate. Should this enterprise prove a success, a way may
be found to that range of mountains which is probably the western terminus of
the backbone of the continent.

u In the Eflk spoken at Calabar, the whole Bible has been translated and pub-
lished ; and the Dualla of the Cameroons, the Benga of Corisco, and the Gaboon on
the equator and southward, will soon be similarly enriched. There are interesting
facts relative to these and other Ethiopian dialects which I shall hope to lay in due
time before your Society. The substitution of steamers for sailing vessels in the
commerce of this region is becoming almost universal. Steamers will soon be
plying on all these rivers, and at no distant day the iron horse will rush over the
mountains and through the jungles so long shrouded in darkness." '

3. Rev. F. P. Powers, Antioch, Syria, April 6th, 1872 :

" In the ruins of Seleucia Pieria, which I visited a few days since, stands a
marble statue which is worthy of more attention than it now receives, and of a
different kind. It represents in a sitting posture the fignre of a man, which if
standing would be eight or nine feet high. In the left hand, and between this and
the leg, is held an urn in a horizontal position. The top and left side of the head,
the right arm, and the left thumb and foot, are broken off ; but it seems to me that
what is left is richly worth transporting to some gallery or museum. The quality
of the marble is the finest I have seen, and the finish perfect. It has undoubtedly
been a grand work of art, worthy to adorn such a city as Seleucia once was.

" At the upper end of the culvert in Seleucia is a tablet which I copied as
follows :

DIVVSVESPASIANVS

ETDIVUSTITVS

F!C!

€ V/ \ A

"In the same city I found a very handsome piece of tesselated pavement, of
which I made a copy or pattern. ..."

4. Rev. S. H. Kellogg, Plainfield, N*. J., April 1st, 1872 :

" .... I have in hand, about two thirds completed, a comparative grammar of
the Hindi dialects "

5. Prof. G. Seyffarth, Dansville, N. Y., May 1st, 1872:

" . . . . You know, probably, that the Smithsonian Institution is at present in
possession of a cast of the Tanis stone. I went there, some weeks ago, for the
purpose of copying its Demotic text, not yet published, and for examining the
hieroglyphic and Greek inscriptions. The latter two have been published, in 1865,
by Lepsius of Berlin and Reinisch of Vienna, but their facsimiles differ very often
from each other. The former contains 115, the latter 130, other figures than the
original represents, and I do not know whether these alterations originated from

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xlviii American Oriental Society :

inexactness, or from the intention of bringing out a tolerable sense. At any rate,
it is a happy accident that a cast is at hand for establishing a correct hieroglyphic
text, which is needed before all.

11 The bilingual Tanis atone, discovered among the ruins of ancient Tanis, April
15th, 1866, by Reinisch, Weidenbach, Roesler, and Lepsius, whilst the latter was
last absent, measures in height nearly 7 feet 4 inches English, in width 2 feet 10
inches. It contains 37 hieroglyphic, 75 Greek, and 73 Demotic lines. Each of the
hieroglyphic lines is nearly one inch high, the Greek letters measure just the halt
This very important monument of Egyptian literature refers to the year 238 b. c,
being 40 years older than the Rosette stone, and is not a fragment like the latter,
but complete and perfectly well preserved, from the first to the last figure. It
contains more than two thousand words and grammatical forms — that is to say, a
whole little hieroglyphic dictionary. It clearly informs us according to what rules
the Egyptians expressed the words of their spoken language, and what was the
ancient, so-called sacred dialect, usual since Menee' days in 2780 b. c.

" The question will certainly be asked, whether this new bilingual inscription,
discovered thirty-eight years subsequent to Champollion's " Precis du Systems
hieroglyphique," confirms or refutes that system, Champollion's theory, and his
symbolic and alphabetic images. This question will be answered by the following
facts: that two skilled Champollioniste, Lepsius (Das bilingue Decret von Canopns,
Berlin, 1866) and Reinisch (Die zweisprachige Inschrift von Tanis, Wien, 1866).
have been unable to explain several hundred hieroglyphs and entire groups, that
they have spelled or translated nearly all groups and figures differently, that they
have obtained words totally wanting in the Coptic and related languages, and that
their translations do not, in numberless instances, agree with the Greek transla-
tion. A few examples will suffice to demonstrate this.

" Lepsius and Reinisch spell the very same groups stifen and ros, aft and dub,
tetto and tttf, man and pauma, motet and hap, hi and kur, reretu and n$pu, via and
imuo, ton and bau, and so forth, from the beginning to the end. The same trans-
late, moreover, the same words thus: 'clothing' and 'sanctuary,' * extolling f and

* ordered,1 'worshipping' and 'aliment,1 'country' and 'expedition,' 'much' and

• burning,' ' memorial ' and ' to see,' ' kind ' and ' increase,' ' the honor in many
things ' and ' the practice of effective ceremonies,' * with sledges ' and ' upon the
place of offering near the altar,' and so forth. Of their numerous monster- words
may be adduced: choperef and chuparuf, 'done and born;' uib, 'the priest;' rwta-
pat, 'the year;' auu, 'and;' aaaa, 'office;' t, 'island;' and so on. What a sweet
language, this ancient sacred dialect of the ancient Egyptians ! The worst of all,
however, is that, according to Ghampollion's system, numberless groups do not
correspond with their Greek versions. For Lepsius, the most learned Champol-
lionist, translates e. g. Cyprus ("nnw being unknown to him) by ' Phoenicia,' Phoe-
nicia by ' Cyprus,' Chaldrea by ' of it,' Asia by ' valley,' Syria by ' Ruten,' Hathorby
'Bast,' Oxyrynchus by ' Heracleum,' oases by 'altogether,' east by 'west,' west by
'east,' Greek by ' book,' Demotic (enchorial) by * Greek,' cyclus by 'all,' kom (plu-
rality) by expletive sign, hop (' multitude ') by ' oh,1 copper (nana unknown to him)
by 'barbarian,' Aoptf Creator ') by 'Egypt,' eight (shmun) by ' from,' semiprieste
by 'addressed,' 'destined,' 'proclaimed,' 'committed' and 'invested,' and so on.

" Now, what will be concluded from these printed nets ? It is, apart from the
proper names, absolutely impossible to spell and philologically translate our Tarns
stone, much less any other inscription, by the help of Champollion's system It is
one thing to spell Greek and Roman proper names, and quite another to determine
the phonetic value of the hieroglyphs occurring in common literary works. The
Egyptian literature was not the original symbolical writing, mixed, by degrees,
with pure letters ; for the Tanis stone contains not one really symbolic sign. The
Egyptian literature was a syllabic writing, based upon the primitive Alphabet, as
was discovered in 1826; and each of the six hundred hieroglyphic figures regularly
expresses the two or three consonants contained in the ancient name of the figure,
as was more correctly, and for the first time, demostrated in 1845. This finally
triumphing truth is of importance. For so long as the key to the Egyptian litera-
ture remains unknown, so long will it be impracticable to restore that ancient and
immense literature to life. Without this key, the hieroglyphic, hieratic, and demotic
literature will, as our Champollionists abundantly evidence, remain a continual
guess-work, and a Cimmerian darkness."

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, J 872. zlix

Communications were now in order, and were presented as
follows :

1. On some alleged Phenician and Nabathean Inscriptions re-
cently received from Palestine, by Mr. A. Van Name, of New
Haven ; read by Rev. W. H. Ward, of New York.

2. On the same subject, with exhibition of "squeezes" and
other copies, by Rev. Mr. Ward.

Messrs. Van Name and Ward fully concurred in the opinion that the pretended
inscriptions are forgeries. Their general aspect at first sight suggests strong
doubts of their genuineness. The figures represented look modern and artificial.
The presumable Nabathean characters seem rather to be made by random strokes
eo as to produce the general effect of Nabathean, than to be real ; and a study of
some of the recently published monuments in this character suggests with much
plausibility the models imitated. If the Phenician alphabet is judged by such
letters as cfofeft, shin, and ntm, it is of extreme antiquity ; but mem has a form
several hundred years later. Then half a dozen of the commonest letters are not
to be recognized at all. And this difficulty is aggravated by the fact that no sense
whatever can be tortured from the words, even though in one inscription they are
separated from one another by dots. There are also combinations that are impos-
sible, such as numerous cases of yod and van in the middle of a word, and whole
words made out of weak letters. The " squeeze " shows marks of dots or lines
traced for a border, such as never could have been cut in a stone ; and occasional
slips of the stick in soft mortar, so that at the apex of angles lines cross each other
quite appreciably. Finally, specks of a white substance, shown by analysis to be
mortar of carbonate of lime, have been detected in the corners of some of the letters
on one of the " squeezes." It is evident that the excitement raised by the discovery
of the Moabite stone, and the eager competition for its possession, have given to
such monuments a very considerable marketable value, and that, as a consequence,
the production has been stimulated to supply the demand.

Prof. Gardiner of Middletown, Conn., read extracts from letters which he had
received from Jerusalem in relation to these inscriptions.

3. On Evidences of Glacial Action on the Flank of Mt. Lebanon,
by Rev. W. M. Thomson, D.D., Missionary in Syria; presented
by the Corresponding Secretary.

In this brief paper (printed in Vol. x., No. 1, of the Journal), Dr. Thomson de-
scribes a remarkable cleft near the bottom of the great valley of the river Damur,
about five miles from the sea. This cleft is called Fazur. It is about three hun-
dred feet long and a hundred deep, and decreases from twenty-flve feet in width at
the upper ena to five at the lower. Its sides are finely polished and striated, in a
manner which seems only explainable by glacial action. Except in some such pe-
culiar situation, traces of the abrasion of ice could not be expected to be preserved
in the region ; since, wherever exposed to sun, rain, snow, and frost, the surfaces
of rock are everywhere undergoing rapid degradation; and the sales, or cloud-
bursts, would sweep away or cover up and disguise all moraines.

After the reading of this paper, the Society took a recess,
coming together at half-past two and resuming the hearing of
communications.

4. On the Pali Language from a Burmese Point of View, by Rev.
F. Mason, D.D., Missionary in Farther India; presented by the
Corresponding Secretary.

Dr. Mason points out that, notwithstanding the ill-repute of Burmese Pali manu-
scripts among European scholars, and the usual ignoring of Burmah, as compared
with Ceylon, as a field for collecting Pali literature, the Ceylon literature has been,
in fact, confessedly derived from Burmah. Tumour obtained the Dipawanso from

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

1 American Oriental Society :

Burmese sources, and gained from it the identification of Acpkaand Ghandragupto
While Kaccayano's grammar was long mourned as lost, it was to be found in every
Burmese library, and was studied in every monastery. The familiar Buddid<
stanza of Assaji finds its best form in Burmese authorities. These and other like
facts show that the merits of the authorities in question are treated with injustice.
The paper is printed in full in the Society's Journal, Vol. x., No. 1.

5. On the Comparative Antiquity of the Vatican and Sinaitk
Manuscripts of the Greek Bible, by Prof. Ezra Abbot, of Cam-
bridge.

A brief synopsis of the leading points of this essay (also printed in the Journal.
x.l) is as follows. It consists essentially of a review of the arguments of the Ret.
J. W. Burgon, Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford, who in an Appendix to his recent
work on " The Last Twelve Verses of the Gospel of Mark " (London, 1871), main-
tains with great confidence that the Vatican manuscript (Codex B) is 50 or 100
years older than the Sinaitic (Codex ftt). His arguments are founded on the follow-
ing facts and assumptions : —

1. " The (all but unique) sectional division of the Text of Codex B,— confes&ecDr
the oldest scheme of chapters extant." — To this it was replied that the Sinaitic MS.
has no division into chapters, preserving in this respect the primitive form of tie
text

2. The comparative rarity of paragraphs indicated by " breaks " in the text—
As to this, it was shown that Mr. Burgon gives a grossly inaccurate account of the
facte ; and that a correct statement of them lends no support to his conclusion.

3. The excessively rare use of the method of giving distinctness to the particn-
lars of an enumeration by writing a single word in a line ; the only example of it
in the Vatican MS., according to Mr. Burgon, being at the Genealogy of our Lord
(Luke iii. 23-38). — Here, again, it was shown that Mr. Burgon is mistaken in his
premises. For example, on p. 211, col. 3 of the MS., the names of the 22 unclean
birds in Deut. xiv.12-18 appear each in a separate line.

4. " At the commencement of every fresh paragraph, the initial letter in Cod. «
slightly projects into the margin, ... as usual in all later MSS. This characteristic
is only, not undiscoverable in Cod. B." — On this it was remarked that this "ex-
ceedingly rare " characteristic occurs 10 times on the very first page of the Vatican
MS., and that in the first 294 pages there are 1441 examples of it

5. The comparative rarity of contracted words. — Here, again, Mr. Burgon mis-
states the facts. Of the eight words which he enumerates as contracted in the
Sinaitic MS. but never in the Vatican, Avtfpuiroc, 'IcpowraXftfi, and irar?p are con-
tracted repeatedly in that MS., though they are usually written in full; ICA for
'lopafiX occurs hundreds of times ; m>evpa is abbreviated twice on the first page of
the New Testament, also Matt. iii. 11, 1 6, iv.l, and often elsewhere, particularly in
the Old Testament, where it is contracted forty times out of the forty-two in which
it first appears. As to this matter of contraction, the usage is very different in
different parts of the Vatican MS. in respect to certain words ; and this is also true
of the parts of the Sinaitic New Testament written by different scribes. "We find,
morever, in the Vatican MS., contractions for several words, as «i/, poi\ ivOpvsror.
Aaveid, 'lopaij'k, *lepovodkt}fi, which are never contracted in the Cambridge manu-
script (Codex D), written two centuries later.

6. The existence of a blank column in Cod. B at the end of the Gospel of Mark
is supposed by Mr. Burgon to prove " infallibly " (p. 87) that the MS. was copied
from one which contained the last twelve verses ; the Sinaitic is supposed to have
been copied from one in which they were wanting ; ergo, the Sinaitic is more
recent. — Here Mr. Abbot was unable to discover any logical connection between
the premises and the conclusion, but remarked that we have the testimony of Euse-
bius, who flourished in the first quarter of the fourth century, that the verses in
question were wanting in many copies, and in the more accurate copies ; and that
we have no ground for assigning to the Vatican MS. a date earlier than the age of
Eusebius.

7. " That general air of primitiveness in Cod. B which makes itself at once felt "
is the last argument of Mr. Burgon for regarding this MS. as 50 or 100 years older
than Codex k. — In illustration of this he specifies sundry " notes of superior an-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1872. li

tiquity," some of which were shown to exist only in his lively imagination, while
others are common alike to the Vatican manuscript and the Sinaitic.

6. On Merkel'g recent edition of the Laurentian Manuscript of
iEschylus, by Prof. W. W. Goodwin, of Cambridge.

Professor Goodwin exhibited a work just received from the Clarendon Press of
Oxford: JZschyli qua supersunt in Codice Laurentiano veterHmo^ quod effidpotuit et
ad cognitionem necesae est visum typis descripta : edidit R. Merkel. This is a fac-
simile, so far as types can give one, of the original text of the oldest manuscript of
^Eschylus, commonly known as the Medicean. The advantages of this plan of
publishing a manuscript in facsimile, compared with those of the common method
of giving the manuscript readings under ordinary printed text, were discussed.
While this plan gives many details perfectly, such as the exact division into pages
and verses and the copyist's peculiar division of words, it is yet inferior in some
respects to the other, especially in showing the corrections made by various hands,
and the readings which often have been successively superimposed on the original
text. Two instances were selected, to test the accuracy of the present facsimile,
and at the same time to illustrate its success and its defects in distinguishing read-
ings of different dates. Referring to a collation (made by himself in 1868) of the
fragments of the Agamemnon which this MS. contains in its present mutilated
state, Professor Goodwin stated that vss. 110-112 (Dind.) of the Agamemnon were
added to the MS. by a later hand and in blacker ink, being written apparently in a
space left blank by the original copyist. These lines contain the absurd corruption
rav yav for raydv, and do not agree with the quotation of vs. Ill found in the
Frogs of Aristophanes ; so that the credit of the MS. gains greatly by the discovery.
Neither Blomfield, Hermann, Paley, nor Weil notices the circumstance. The new
Oxford facsimile, however, makes the matter plain by printing the three lines in
different type (p. 28, vss. 9-11). In another instance, where an interpolation had
been previously noted, not only is there no attempt to show the addition by pe-
culiar type, but the authority of the MS. is apparently given for the whole inter-
polation. This is in vss. 250, 251, where we find in the Oxford facsimile :

rb fiiMov • rb 6i npoMeiv

em ykvovf av KXhoia-Trpoxaiphu
Now not merely the words rb 6i irpoicXbeiv, but also (what is important) the colon
after p£Kkov% are by a later hand and in blacker ink. The MS., therefore, instead
of being authority for the addition rb 6i irpoMetv, which makes the verse just five
syllables longer than the corresponding verse of the strophe, and for the absurd
construction of rb ui?Jiov with the preceding juaOelv, is the best testimony for the
reading of the Cod. Fames. : rb fdXXov eirel ytvoir* av Kkims • irpoxatp6ro, which,
with the insertion of (f before kirei is unobjectionable in this sense : * the future
you can hear of when it comes : beforehand (i. e. before it comes) bid it farewell
(or let it alone).1 The objection that av i&voiq is impossible, with av directly fol-
lowing a pause, was met by the remark that the sentence is really rb pkKkov av
kkvotc, which can have a clause like eirel yhoiro inserted anywhere : cf. Aristoph.
Pac. 137, aAA', d> ftiX\ av ftot oiriuv 6tir1&v Met. Such errors as the one just men-
tioned are doubtless rare ; and the work itself is one of the most valuable aids ever
placed at the disposal of classical scholars who wish to study the text of iEschylus
from the original sources. If a manuscript like the Medicean could be photo-
graphed, which seems by no means a hopeless wish, it would be a still greater
gain, especially to transatlantic scholars like ourselves.

Mr. Wm. Everett of Cambridge took occasion, in connection with this paper, to
speak of his own examination of the same manuscript, and also of the Laurentian
manuscript of Virgil. He remarked particularly on the slight difference between
the ^and /as written in this manuscript, leading him to propose a conjectural
emendation of a passage in Virgil by the substitution of vectu for victu (-'En. 1. 445).

7. A Chapter of Arabian Anthropology, by Rev. C. If. Brig-
ham, D.IX, of Ann Arbor, Michigan.

This paper was a popularized abstract of a work by Prof. P. Dieterici of Berlin,
Die Anthropologic der Araber im lOfen Jahrhundert n. Chr. (Leipzig, 1871).

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ill

American Oriental Society:

8. Notes on Ancient Ruins in Japan, by Mr. Gilbert Attwood,
of Boston.

A very condensed abstract of Mr. Attwood's remarks is as follows :

The Japanese histories of the beginnings of things speak of caves as having
been inhabited by the first human beings, and Sonken reports that he travelled all
over the empire to examine the relics of these primitive habitations, and found
many localities of them: they were artificial caverns, built of great stones, in
places remote from towns and inaccessible. Their openings were always toward
the south, and they were made up of two or three apartments. Kaiban Tokzin
says that he has met with thousands of such caverns, in groups of six to twenty.
Those situated near inhabited places had all been destroyed, their stones being
employed for divers building purposes. It is in the southern provinces that they
most occur.

From these accounts it would appear that Japan may be a fruitful field for ante-
historical explorations. Reports carefully gathered from among the Japanese
students now or recently in America furnish evidence in the same direction.
Thus, in the State of Ohikugo, there is said to be a curious collection of rocks
standing erect, some of them more than six yards around and ten or twenty high.
They are often visited, with guides. On Kiushiu are many peculiar caves called
Tsukaana, built of massive stones, in two stories, without windows: they are
square or circular, of various sizes, often 30 feet in diameter. Fanciful stories are
told of their origin. In Hiuga is an extensive cave called Amano no Iwato, re-
puted to have been the abode of the oldest inhabitants. In Chikuzen, at a
mountain named Nishiyama, some workmen, excavating for lime, came about
fifteen years ago upon a passage leading to a hall, perhaps ten by fifteen feet
square, where stood a human figure of life size, erect ; on its face were carved three
unknown characters.

It has been lately reported that, in a region little explored, there has been found
an isolated settlement, descending from a remnant of the Heike party, which took
refuge here in the twelfth century. The dialect of the people was hardly under-
stood by their discoverers, having probably preserved the peculiarities of the ancient
language more unchanged than the common speech of modern times has done.

In reply to inquiries, Mr. Attwood also gave some account of the forms of Japa-
nese poetry, and especially of the peculiar habit of composing verses which are
capable of two separate and independent interpretations.

9. Statistics of Sanskrit Verbal Forms in the Sama-Veda, by
Prof. John Avery, of Grinnell, Iowa; presented by the Corres-
ponding Secretary.

Prof. Avery's paper gave a complete statistical view of the Sanskrit verb as it
appears in the Sima-Veda, presenting every verbal form and citing every passage
of its occurrence, classified in voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. The
summary of the results (neglecting the persons) is as follows :

24

primitive verb.

'causative. '

deside

rative.

'intern

act.

mid.

paaa.

act.

mid. |

act.

mid.

: act.

Present:

I

indie.

438

299

51

12

10

18

2

8

subj.

86

30

2

5

1

0

j 1

opt

44

21

3

i

imper.

597

124

3

38

2 ,

7

1

Imperfect,

102

34

7

25

8 j

Aorist :

1

indie.

67

48 29

40

i ;

(

subj.

100

22

8

2

opt.

5

8

4

imper.

7

4

1

Perfect:

indie.

117

112

1

opt.

3

imper.

1

Future in sydmi,

2

i

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1872.

liii

The detail for the different forms of the aorist is farther given below. The
classification is that of Bopp (I. at&utoam, atutri; II. adiksham; III. abodhisham,
abodhidd; IV. aydrisham; V. addm; VI. oftpam, a/tpe). The very rare so-called
precative forms are classified as aorist subjunctives.

Aorist.

indie,
subj.
opt.
imper.

Further, for the participles :

1

n.

m.

IIV. ■

V.

VI.

act.

mid.

act.

act.

mid.

jact.

act.

mid.

act.

m

3

38

1

12

1

7 i

30

14

10

19

1

3

*2

1
1

36
4

1
6

i

1

1

2

1

4

3

1

Present,
Aorist,
Perfect,
Future,

primitive verb,
paw.

act. I mid,
185i 241

1| 4

28 29

1 1

25

causative. I'desiderative.

act.
36

mid.

I
1 I

act.

1

intensive.

act.
14

mid.
6

Also the passive participle in to occurs 189 times ; that in no, 3 ; the causative
passive in to, 3. The infinitive occurs in accusative form 7 times ; in dative, 24.
The gerund in tod occurs 3 times ; that in ya, 5.

Prof. Whitney pointed out the value of suoh numerical statements, in their bear*
ing upon Sanskrit grammar. Mr. W. Everett gave an account of some statistical
researches of his own in reference to the forms of the Greek verb.

No further communications being offered, the Society, on motion,
passed a vote of thanks to the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences for kindly granting the use of its rooms, and adjourned,
to meet again in New Haven on the 9th of October,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

liv American Oriental Society :

Proceedings at New Haven, Oct. 9th and 10th, 1873.

The Society met at 8 o'clock p. m. in the Library-room of the
Divinity School of Yale College, the President in the chair.

The Recording Secretary being absent, Rev. Edgar L. Heer-
mance of New Haven was appointed Secretary pro tempore.

The Committee of Arrangements reported an invitation from
the Treasurer, Prof. D. C. Gilman, to a social gathering at his
house in the evening. The invitation was, on motion, accepted
with thanks.

The Directors gave notice that the next Annual meeting would
be held in Boston on the seventh of May next, unless, for sufficient
reason, the time should be changed by the Committee of Arrange-
ments ; said committee being composed of Dr. R. Anderson, with
the Recording and Corresponding Secretaries.

On recommendation of the Directors, were elected as Corporate
Members

Mr. Elihu Burritt, of New Britain, Conn.,
Mr. Morton W. Easton, of Hartford, Conn.;

and, as Corresponding Members,

Rev. M. M. Carleton, Missionary in India,
Rev. Stephen H. Kellogg, do.

The Corresponding Secretary gave an account, with extracts, of
the correspondence of the past six months.

1. Dr. Andrew T. Pratt writes, under date of Constantinople,
Sept. 16th, 1872:

11 ... . The Cufic stone which I sent you was found in the immediate vicinity of
Antioch. I do not suppose that it has any value except as a specimen of Cufic,
although an Arabic scholar believed it to belong to the first years of Moslem
invasion.

" Dr. Long has recently found and copied a very long and valuable Greek in-
scription at Cyzicus, which he told me he would send you. It relates, if I mistake
not, to a certain queen Tryphsena, hitherto unknown except to numismatics. . . ."

The inscription sent by Dr. Pratt is on a slab of marble, measuring 20} inches
in breadth, and 21 in extreme height, but being irregulaly broken and defective at
the top, containing seven complete lines and two incomplete. The part of the in-
scription that is saved is in a state of perfect preservation. It is translated by
Prof. Salisbury as follows :

1 .... the Sublime, Unbegetting, Unbegotten, Unequalled one (?) of 'All Bin
Sulaiman Bin D&ud — may God be merciful to him, and pardon him, and unite him
to His prophet Muhammad, on whom be the blessing and the peace of God!'

2. Mr. H. A. Homes, Albany, Oct. 2d, 1872:

11 .... I was interested in the Kurdish vocabulary of Mr. Rhea, on account of
the remark of Mr. Shedd that it is derived from the Hakkari dialect, ' and is prob-
ably the one least adulterated with foreign elements.' I was tempted, therefore,
partially to examine the list, in order to determine what number of Arabic and
Turkish words might be found in it. It contains in all 1610 words. Without
pretending to completeness, I have easily counted in it 320 Arabic and 127

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haveny October, 1872. lv

Turkish words, or 447 in all — more than a quarter of the entire vocabulary. I
could doubtless have added more, if I had been sure what Roman letters were
seized upon by the author to express the Arabic sounds, and if I had had a better
apparatus of books.

11 The Arabic words thus used by the Kurds are of the class most frequently
appropriated by Turks and Persians in their written and colloquial language.
When compared as to signification with the remainder of the list, they appear evi-
dently to belong to a higher stage of culture. The staple of the language consists
of the original Kurdish terms of domestic and field life. Many Arabic words
came in with the religion and law of the Koran.

" The Persian elements in the list are numerous, of course, both because the
Persian is a cognate and neighboring language, and on account of the early histori-
cal relations of the Kurds to rulers of Persian origin. I have not attempted there-
fore to discriminate the purely Persian words. The Arabic words have mostly
first found currency by being transmitted through the Persian.

" It is fair to presume that the Arabic words in more or less current use among
the Kurds would hold about the same proportion in any more complete vocabulary
of their language as in Mr. Rhea's list. The Turkish would not increase corres-
pondingly.

a If, then, the Hakkari dialect is especially free from foreign elements, the
Kurdish dialects generally must have received large additions from neighboring
languages. The dialect of Amadia, as exhibited in Garzoni's grammar and vocab-
ulary (Rome, 1787), has a similar profusion of Arabic words,

" You probably discovered at least two western words, martna, ' coffee-pot,' and
mang&na, ' machine/ both going back to machina. Barglr, 'nag,' is reputed to be
Hungarian."

3. Prof. A. Socin, Basel, June 5th, 1872 :

14 .... I am much interested in Kurdish, because I myself possess pretty large
collections in that language, which I think of editing. They are especially epics
from the mouth of the people, and stories. I highly approve of Mr. Rhea's having
given everything in Roman letters. Only a scientific transcription, made as exact
as possible, can enable us to penetrate into the more delicate changes of sound and
the accentual relations more deeply than has hitherto been practicable, especially
in the case of languages written with Arabic and Syrian letters. The Arabic, in
particular, offers from this point of view wholly new results for the comparative
grammar of Semitic speech, and often accords in a remarkable manner with the
Hebrew.

" I hope soon to be able to send you a first specimen of my many transcriptions,
gathered by me in the East from the mouth of the people."

4. F. von Richthofen, Shanghai, July 24th and Sept. 16th, 1872 :

" . . . . The whole time that I have spent in exploration in China and Japan is
about three and three quarter years. The material which I have gathered is so
abundant that I can only think of working it up if I can devote my time exclu-
sively to it for several years. Supposing this to be the case, I intend to write in
German on the purely geological and geographical subjects, and to combine all
practical results into a separate work which shall be in English. . . ."

" .... I am just now devoting my time to an article on the most ancient geo-
graphical work in China, the Yii-Kung, better known as the ; tribute of Yu,' and
forming part of the Shu-King. It dates four thousand years back, and has been
much misunderstood, till finally the imaginative flights of the commentators have
deprived it of any appearance of veracity, and the book is declared a forgery of later
age. Going now over the whole ground of the Yii-Kung, which is mostly known
to me from personal observations, and putting a verbal translation in the place of
the arbitrary paraphrases which in the existing versions veil the true meaning of
the text, I hope to reestablish the claim of the document to credibility. It is a
very wonderful piece of writing, and deeply interesting. I shall give the paper,
when finished, to the Asiatic Society of Shanghai, which will print it after my
departure. Legge's comments on the passage, in his very valuable translation of
the Chinese classics, are quite unsatisfactory, and the results at which he arrives
in his Prolegomena concerning the Chinese antiquity are lamentable. . . ."

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lvi American Oriental Society ;

The Secretary also reported a correspondence which he had had
with certain Japanese gentlemen, with reference to the introduc-
tion of the English language into Japan, and its use by the Japa-
nese people.

Communications were now in order, and the following were
presented, the first on Wednesday, the rest on Thursday forenoon.

1. On the Influence of the Semitic Languages on the Spanish,
by Prof. Frederic Stengel, of New York.

Prof. Stengel introduced his subject by remarking on the influence which con-
quest and culture have on the languages of nations as to vocabulary, etymology,
and syntax ; and showed that the foreign word undergoes great changes according
to the ear and organs of speech of the people that adopts it, and the grade of per-
fection of the idiom it has to harmonize with ; syntax, the most distinctive feature
of nationality, yielding last to foreign influence. He then went on to point out
that the Spanish is the Romanic idiom in which most foreign elements are found;
it is very different in successive centuries, and affords good means of judging, not
only of the spiritual life of the Spanish nation, but also of the standard of culture
of the many intruders who have influenced its historical development, temporarily
or permanently.

Of these, the Phoenicians and the Carthaginians, the Hebrews and the Arabians
left indisputable traces.

The Phoenician and Punic languages were never vernacular in Spain ; yet in the
old annals wore found many Punio names, which were perpetuated among the
natives and Romans ; both calling cities, rivers, and mountains by their former
Punic names.

Of all languages, there is not one in which are copied so faithfully Semitic ex-
pressions as in the Castilian language ; here we see whole phrases which are pore
Hebrew or Arabic ; terms entirely Oriental ; hyperboles, ellipses, and metaplasms,
which surely had their origin neither in Latium nor Greece.

The most commanding influence is to be attributed to the idiom of the Arabians.
Their natural disposition, their intercourse along the coast with highly cultivated
neighboring states through commerce ; their inroads into Spain and Persia, and
later their possession of Egypt, inspired them with a love for science, and gave
them an impulse to investigations into the laws of nature, to such a degree, that
the Arabians became the true founders of physical science, and exercised by their
institutions and writings for centuries a mighty effect on European culture and
European languages.

The first Academy of science, the first High school, the first University, the
middle ages owe to the Arabians. Al FarAbi, who died a. d. 950, spoke 70 lan-
guages, wrote on all the sciences, and collected them into an Encyclopaedia. A
library in the palace Merwan at Cordova, with 600,000 volumes, contained many
priceless works of Oriental wisdom.

The Arabians, proud of their own language and literature, did not learn the
language of Spain, except those who became Christians. The Spaniards, on the
contrary, applied themselves with so much zeal and ardor to the Arabic, that,
according to Alvaro of Cordova, after less than a century and a half of Arabian
dominion, not one Spaniard in a thousand could compose a plain letter of compli-
ment, or transact business, in Spanish, while whole oollegeB excelled in writing
Arabic with all the pride of learning and the pomp of calligraphy.

The Arabians had no influence on the sonorous energy of the Latin and Greek
vowel elements ; but when the Romance was becoming a written language, their
rich and flexible idiom helped to advance and fix the Castilian. Yet it is to be ob-
served, that in the Castilian version of the Lez Visigotkorum, by Alfonso the Wise,
most words are of Latin origin, 20 or 30 of Gothic, and not one from an Arabic
root But if we examine the other literary Castilian documents, from the twelfth
to the sixteenth century, we see how Arabian elements took root

This was verified historically by many illustrations ; and then the most impor-
tant Arabic words that have passed into Spanish were classified and exemplified
under the heads of — 1. proper names : 2. terms belonging to civil life ; 3. to politi-
cal life; 4. to religious life; 5. scientific terms.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven> October, 1872. lvii

Sometimes the Spanish has enriched itself by drawing from one original two or
three derivatives: as veztr, 'counsellor,' also alguaeil, * police-officer,' and esbirro,
' bailiff;' but sometimes also the roots of the same Spanish form must be sought
in different originals : as in azogue, ' quicksilver,' from zuwac, but azogue, ' market-
place,' from $u£.

By a carefully composed table, illustrating the transcription of Arabian conso-
nants, we see that the Arabian sounds Ao, Jim, atn, and ghain were not possible to
the Spanish organ of speech, and that the Spaniard had no ear for the fine grada-
tion of the aspirates to the gutturals : aleph, ht. Ad, 'ha, kaf, and qaf, nor for that
of the dentals dal, fe, ta and zd, tht} za. J, ge, and x are pronounced equally guttu-
ral in paj<i, page, xabon ; consejero, agents ximia. This deep guttural aspirate dis-
tinguishes the Spanish in particular from the Italian and French, and from the
Gallician and Portuguese, where the Celts have left their soft g and,;.

It was then argued that this guttural aspirate is in truth a new element of the
Spanish language, and that the way was prepared by the Goths for its final but
gradual introduction by the Arabians. The original languages and the principal
dialects of Spain had no guttural ; but in the oldest documents of the Castilian may
be traced the pronunciation of the present guttural signs j\ g, and as, by rhyme as
well as by transcriptions from Latin, Greek, and Arabian words. The constant
gradations from t and y to j palatal, to g guttural, and finally to the guttural
aspirate joia, would indicate a natural organic growth, if this guttural did not ap-
pear first and most strongly pronounced where the Arabians lived longest ; while
contemporary authors doclare the gutturals new and difficult to utter.

Finally, Prof. Stengel showed the influence of Arabian poetry on the Castilian,
and concluded with a description of the literary remains of the Arabic in the
Escurial library.

2. Brief Vocabulary of the Aino Dialect spoken in the Knrile
Islands of Shumshu and Simnshir, by M. Alphonse Pinart, of Paris ;
presented by the Corresponding Secretary.

This vocabulary was obtained by M. Pinart from Paul Ouiai, an Aleut by birth,
now living on the island of Afognak (Alaska), and who had spent forty years in
the Kurile islands, having been sent thither by the Russo- American company. It
contains about two hundred words and phrases.

3. Remarks on the Oldest Chinese Religious Belief, by Rev.
R. S. Maclay, Missionary to China.

Dr. Maclay directed attention to the distinctive features of Chinese character,
and to their striking non-accordance with the commonly accepted doctrines of
Chinese religion. He held it to be impossible that such views should have formed
such a character and prepared such a history. He was inclined to solve the diffi-
culty by supposing a derivation from the ancient patriarchs of an earlier and purer
form of religion, which had later disappeared.

The same subject was commented upon by Dr. M. C. White, Pree't Woolsey, and
Rev. J. K. Wight. Pres't Woolsey rehearsed the conflicting views of the early
Jesuit missionaries as to primitive monotheism, which showed the great difficulty
of the question; he was not satisfied with Dr. Maclay's theory.

4. On the Greek Kronos, by Pres't T. D. Woolsey, of New
Haven.

In this paper, after noticing the common identification of the name Kronos with
Chronos, 'time,' and the derivation proposed by Godfrey Hermann, Pres't Wool-
sey brought forward the evidences of the worship of such a divinity, as a god of
the seasons and of agriculture. Preller's view was advocated on this point, and
at the same time the opinion was defended, which Preller also favors, that in Crete
and in Rhodes there was a confusion introduced into the mythology between
Kronos and the Phoenician Baal-Moloch. The analogy of Saturn was considered,
who was also a god of agriculture and the seasons — the name being derived from
the root lying in aero, 'sow,' and not in sat; and to whom, independently of any
Moloch influence most probably, were offered human sacrifices in the early times

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lviii American Oriental Society :

of the Italian religions. Tho Kronia and Saturnalia present a striking point of
resemblance between the Italian and Hellenic (especially Athenian) festivals in
honor of those gods respectively. Kronos never came into very important rela-
tion to the religion of common life and worship.

Pres't Woolsey also exhibited copies of certain very fragmentary Greek inscrip-
tions, found in the remarkable ruins of Husn Suleyman, ' the Stronghold of Solo-
mon,' lying two days' journey to the north-east of Tripoli, on the Syrian coast
11 They occupy a basin surrounded by high ridges. There are two principal ruins,
The southernmost and largest covers a rectangle of 450 by 280 feet, with walls
from ten to forty feet high, according as rubbish has accumulated.

11 The centre of each side is occupied by a portal ten feet wide, twenty feet high,
and eight feet thick. The lintel over the east gate is a single stone twenty-one feet
long, ten wide, and five high. On the lower part of this lintel is one of the in-
scriptions of which copies are sent. Another stone at the northeast corner meas-
ures 30 by 9f by 4£ feet, and is at an elevation of thirty feet from the ground
The other inscriptions are on a tablet on a large stone to the right of the northern
doorway. There are many points of resemblance between the serums and those
of Baalbec and Palmyra."

Pres't Woolsey said he had not been able to make anything out of these in-
scriptions.

5. On the Japanese Use of the Chinese Mode of Writing, by Mr.
A. Van Name, of New Haven.

The Chinese language occupies in Japan a position not unlike that which the
Latin so long held, and still to some extent holds, in Europe. It is the learned
tongue, the language of most books written by and for scholars, especially of his-
torical and religious works. Chinese words constitute also no small portion of the
vocabulary of tho Japanese language both written and spoken, a proportion vary-
ing of course with the degree of culture of the writer or speaker, and also with the
subject matter. From this state of affairs has arisen a curious mixture of the
Chinese and Japanese modes of writing, and a perplexing use of the Chinese char-
acter, which adds immensely to the difficulty of learning the language. The Japa-
nese syllabic alphabet or kana — in which, as the name implies, a certain number of
Chinese characters, more or less abridged in form, are borrowed to represent sounds,
apart from their proper meaning — is seldom exclusively used even in pure Japa-
nese works. The uta or songs, which are almost the only examples of a style
nearly or quite free from Chinese words, are written with a mixture of kana
and Chinese characters, the latter here standing as signs, not of Chinese, but
of Japanese words, of equivalent meaning, which in reading must always he sub-
stituted. In the simplest styles of writing designed for the uneducated, there is
still usually a small percentage of Chinese characters, and in the average literary
style the proportion rises to above one half. Of these characters, an average of
perhaps one third stand, as in the uta above mentioned, for Japanese words, and
are uniformly so read ; another portion are read as Chinese, and the remainder
may be taken in either way, just as in English we so commonly have the choice be-
tween synonymous words of Anglo-Saxon and of Latin origin. The line of division ,
between the Chinese and Japanese characters agrees roughly with the division into
notional and relational words, the former being mostly written in Chinese, and the
latter, with many exceptions, in Japanese. Within the limits of the same word
also, we find the Chinese character, which is unsuited to an inflected language like
the Japanese, frequently supplemented by the kana. The Japanese verb is in
general first written ideographically, in the root form as it were, and the termina-
tion is then added in kana; or, to a character which in Chinese is used indifferently
for the adjective and adverb, the appropriate adjective or adverbial ending is joined.
Where Chinese characters are taken individually as here, without the order and
connection of the Chinese sentence to*fix their meaning, this additional determina-
tion is necessary. Sometimes a final syllable^ not an inflection, is thus written.
The syllable ra written after the Chinese character &z, { self,' suggests the word by
which it is to be read, namely, onodzkara. As a further help, for the benefit of
those who are less familiar with the Chinese character, either the Chinese sound
or the Japanese word by which it is to be translated, according as the one or the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, October, 1872. lix

other is to be employed, is often written at the side in kana, or this is done only in
the case of the less common and familiar characters, or at the first occurrence of
a given character, which when it occurs again in the same book is written without
the kana. Works written in Chinese by Japanese authors, and Japanese editions
of native Chinese works, are frequently provided with helps of a similar nature.
Sometimes merely signs to indicate the order of the words in the Japanese sentence
where this differs from the Chinese are used ; or, beside these, Japanese particles
of relation, prepositions, &c., and terminations are added, more or less fully, and
occasionally a complete translation in kana by the side of the Chinese.

The above is a general statement of what may be called the natural and regular
use of the Chinese characters in Japanese, i. e. the use in which the characters,
whether employed singly or in combinations of two or more, retain their estab-
lished Chinese sense. There remain to be considered some deviations from this
usage of more or less frequent occurrence.

1. The cases in which individual characters have acquired in Japan a different
sense from that which they have in China are few and unimportant. A Japanese
compound is, however, frequently written with two Chinese characters which cor-
respond in meaning to the two parts of the compound, but do not form a combina-
tion of equivalent meaning. For example, iegami, ' letter,' compounded of te 'hand '
and kami ' paper,' is written with the characters sheu chi ; yuki-todoki, ' to be thor-
ough, complete,' compounded of yuki ' go ' and todoki ' arrive,' is written with the
characters king tsie. Neither of these combinations would be understood in Chinese,
and they are to be taken merely as ideographic representations of Japanese words.
But in sho-motsz (mandarin pronunciation shuxouh), 'book,' literally 'written thing,'
we have apparently a new compound of Chinese elements formed after Japanese
analogy. Mono, the Japanese equivalent of motsz, is frequently joined to the root
of a verb, forming a noun which denotes in general the result or product of the
verbal action.

2. Japanese words of two or more syllables are frequently resolved into parts
which have an independent meaning, though not the real elements of the word,
and these are then written ideographically in Chinese. Thus mudzkashiki, ' diffi-
cult,' a word in which the derivative adjective termination kashiki appears, is
analyzed into mudzka ' six days ' (ka being the Chinese numerative ko, which is not
limited to the same classes of objects as in Chinese usage) and shiki ' spread,' and
is written with the Chinese characters liukoju; deki, 'to accomplish,' 'to be able,'
is resolved into de i go out ' and k% ' come,' and is written accordingly with the
characters ctiuh lai.

3. Chinese characters are used with a purely phonetic value to write Japanese
words, which are spelled out syllable by syllable. In this way are written some
words in common use: e.g. slieiua, with shl 'world' and hwa 'speak;' danna,
* master,' with tsie ' also ' and na 'that.' This method, the same as that on which
the kana is constructed, is even older than the introduction of the kana. In the
Man-yo-shu, a collection of ancient poetry made about the middle of the eighth
century, some of the poems are written wholly with Chinese characters taken pho-
netically, others with a mixture of ideographic and phonetic characters. In the
three oldest histories of Japan, of a somewhat earlier date than the Man-yd-shu,
occasional words, especially proper names, are written phonetically. But this
ancient and the modern usage here spoken of differ from the kana not only in
employiag the full form of the Chinese character, but also in representing a given
syllable by a great variety of Chinese characters having the same sound, while the
katakana, which corresponds to the Chinese square character, uses but one form
for each syllable, and the hiragana, which answers to the running hand, seldom
more than three or four. There are three different styles of Chinese pronuncia-
tion in use in Japan, derived probably from different Chinese dialects, though to
connect each with » particular dialect is now, owing to changes which have taken
place in Chinese as well as Japanese pronunciation since the time of separation,
a matter of some difficulty.

4. A Japanese word is not infrequently written by a combination of the two
preceding methods. Thus mokuromi, ' plan,' is resolved into moku-ro-rni, and the
first two parts are written phonetically with muh 'eye' and lun 'discourse,' but
the third, which is also the verb ' see,' is represented ideographically by the char-
acter kien, ' see '; medetaki, ' joyful, is treated as if compounded of me ' eye,' de ' go

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lx American Oriental Society :

out,' and toW, the first two being written ideographicaUy by mvh cA'tri, and the
third phonetically by the character toh, ' guess.'

5. A few new characters haye been formed out of Ghineee elements, ftiyi.
1 cross-roads, * is represented by a combination of the 24th radical, the cross which
stands for the numeral ten, and the 162d radical, which conveys the idea of motion ;
tara, 'cod-fish,1 by the character for 'snow1 and the radical for 'fish.' These
combinations are only ideographic signs of Japanese words, and have no corres-
ponding Chinese sound. This method of forming new characters is similar to that
of which so extensive use is made in the Cochin-Chinese.

Rev. Mr. Ward pointed out that the Japanese usages, as here stated, furnish »
complete parallel to almost every one of the perplexing usages of the Assyrian
cuneiform, which have long been the principal obstacle in the way of crediting and
accepting the results of Assyrian decipherment Prof. Whitney referred to their
analogy with the Huzvaresh character, as understood by its latest investigators.

6. Remarks on the Study of Hindu Religions, by Prof. W. D.
Whitney, of New Haven.

Pro! Whitney said he had been led by the recent appearance of several works
on the subject of the religion of India to put together a few cursory thoughts re-
specting it. He set forth the peculiar difficulties of the investigation, consisting in
the immense spread and intricate and diverse development of this religion, or body
of religions, having its principal root in a primitive popular faith, but extended, as
it grew, to various and heterogeneous races, and everywhere tinged and modified
by their special beliefs ; while its documents, though abundant, are incomplete,
imperfectly accessible, and in part artificial, individual lucubrations, wanting in
representative and depictive character. He sketched the principal periods of
religious history: the Vedic; the post-Vedic, transition period; the period of
Brahmanism, and its later philosophical and sect developments; and Buddhism;
referring to the peculiar difficulties that surround each, and the errors into which
Btudents are liable to fall respecting them. These errors are especially the sketch-
ing in too freely and securely of the defective parts of a fragmentary history;
the overvaluing of documents of doubtful character ; and an exaggerated estimate
of the absolute worth of Hindu metaphysical and religious philosophizings. The
collection and investigation, in a spirit of the most cautious, even distrustful, criti-
cism, of original materials is still the chief need, and will furnish infinite labor for
a long time to come.

7. On the Language of the Zulus, by Rev. S. B. Stone, Mis-
sionary in South Africa.

Mr. Stone gave some account of the structure of the languages of which the
Zulu is an example, and presented comparative vocabularies illustrating their rela-
tionship to one another.

After the presentation of this communication, the Society passed
a vote of thanks to the Faculty of the Divinity School for the use
of their library for its meeting, and adjourned, to come together
again in Boston, on the 7th of May, 1873.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Proceeding* at Boston, May 21st, 1878*

The Society met at 10 o'clock a. m., as usual, at the Library of
the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Dr. R. Anderson,
the only Vice-president present, took the chair, but withdrew on
account of ill health, and the meeting was conducted by Pres't
Woolsey.

The report on the Society's financial condition was presented by
the Corresponding Secretary, to whom, since the removal of Prof.
Oilman from New Haven, the Directors had committed the charge
of the Treasury. Its main substance was as follows :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 22d, 1872! $279.25

Annual assessments paid in, $760.00

Sale of the Journal, 10.09

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank, .... 60.93

Total receipts of the year, .... 1 T 831.02

$1/110.27

EXPENDITURES.

Printing of Journal and Proceedings, $140.23

Binding books, 2.50

Expenses of Library and Correspondence, 61.45

. Total expenditures of the year, $204.18

Balance on hand, May 21st, 1873. 906.09

$1,110.27

The Librarian excused himself for not being prepared with a
detailed report of the accessions to the Library since the last
annual meeting. He mentioned the principal gifts received, and
the donors of them, in anticipation of the full report, which would
appear in due time, with the Proceedings. The most valuable ac-
cessions had been a nearly complete set of the earlier publications
of the Asiatic Society of Paris, given by the Society, and a couple
of boxes of missionary publications, from all parts of the world,
given by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions.

The Committee of Publication reported that the second half of
the tenth volume of the Journal would probably be in the hands
of members before the next annual meeting.

The Directors announced that they had appointed the next
meeting to be held in New Haven, on the 15th of October. Also,
that Mr. A. Van Name had been designated by them to fill the
place on the Committee of Publication made vacant by the death
of Prof. Hadlev.

5

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lxii American Oriental Society :

They further recommended for election, as Corporate Member*,

Mr. James F. Meline, of Brooklyn, N. Y. ;
Rev. Selah Merrill, of Andover, Mass. ;
Mr. William F. Stearns, of Orange, N. J.;
Mr. Richard Sullivan, of Boston.

The gentlemen thus recommended were elected by the Society.

A committee of nomination for officers for the ensuing year was
appointed, consisting of Messrs. J. H. Trumbull, T. S. Ferry, and
C. R. Hale. Dr. R. Anderson of Boston repeated peremptorily
his request, already once or twice made and overruled by the
wishes of members, to be excused, on account of advanced age and
infirmities, from the place long held by him in the government of
the Society. Prof Whitney also begged to be relieved, after .
eighteen years' service, of the duties of Librarian. The following
ticket was, after consultation, presented by the committee, and
elected by the Society :

President — Prof. E. E. Salisbury, LLJX, of New Haven.

( Rev. N. G. Clark, D.D., " Boston.

Vice- Presidents < Hon. Peter Parker, M.D., " Washington.
( Rev. T. D. Woolsey, LL.D., " New Haven.
Corresp. Secretary— -Prof. W. D. Whitney, Ph.D., " New Haven.
Seer, of Class. Sect.— Prof W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., u Cambridge.
Recording Secretary — Prof Ezra Abbot, LL.D., " Cambridge.
Treas. and Librarian — Mr. Addison Van Name, " New Haven.

Mr. J W. Barrow, " New York.

Mr. A. L Cotheal, " New York.

iProl W. H. Green, D.D., " Princeton.

Directors I Prof. A. P. Peabody, D.D., " Cambridge.

) Dr. Chakles Pickering, " Boston.

Prof. Charles Short, LL,D., " New York.

Rev. W. H. Ward, D.D., " New York.

The Corresponding Secretary called the attention of the Society
to the unusual losses which it had sustained during the past year
by the death of its members : namely, of

Sir John Bowring, of London,
Prof. Julius Furst of Leipzig,
M. Stan i8 la* Julien, of Paris,

who were Honorary Members ; of

Rev. J. W\ Johnson, missionary in China,

Rev. A. T. Pratt M.D., missionary at Constantinople,

Corresponding Members ; and of

Mr. Charles Folsom, of Cambridge,
Mr. George Gibbs, of New Haven,
Prof. James Hadley, of New Haven,

Corporate Members.

The Secretary remarked upon the services severally rendered
by these gentlemen to Oriental and philological learning, and was

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceeding* at Boston, May, 1873. lxiii

followed in the same strain by some of the members present.
The three honorary members were so well known to scholars
everywhere that only a brief reference to their lives and works
was called for. Dr. Pratt we had seen at our meetings, and he
had repeatedly sent valuable communications, besides enriching
with gifts of books and other objects the Society's collections.
It had reason, on its own account, to join with those who were
lamenting the death of so able a man and so excellent a scholar,
cut off in the very prime of life. Mr. Folsom was formerly a
leading and active member, and for some years librarian, of the
Society. In the retirement to which his age and infirm health had
lately condemned him, he had been lost from our sight but not
from our memory ; his fine taste, keen critical judgment, and
unequalled readiness to help every literary enterprise, were known
to all friends of learning in America, and would cause his name to
be held in perpetual remembrance among them. Mr. Gibbs had
lived a life in part of adventure and hardship in the wild country
of our farthest West, as a scientific and ethnographic explorer,
and was recognized through the world as one of the prominent
authorities respecting the American Indians, their connections,
customs, and languages. His collections are in process of publica-
tion under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution ; his papers
are left, for the most part, to the Historical Society of New York.

Dr. Clark spoke of the great value of Dr. Pratt's labors as a
translator of the Bible into the Armeno-Turkish ; possessing, as
as he did, an uncommon knowledge both of the Turkish as spoken
by the common people, and of the more refined and mixed literary
dialect.

The Secretary spoke more at length, and with deep feeling, in
which nil present shared, of the loss sustained by the Society in the
death of its late President, Prof. Hadley. He begged, however,
to be allowed to leave to others the task of sketching his life and
analyzing and estimating his character as man and as scholar ; he
himself was struck too nearly by the blow which had taken away
his most trusted companion in study during nearly a quarter of a
century, his admired and revered colleague and counsellor, and his
loved friend. Prof Goodwin paid a warm tribute to the admira-
ble scholarship of Prof Hadley. Pres't Woolsey bore testimony
to the extraordinary accuracy and tenacity of his memory, his
remarkable facility in acquiring and communicating knowledge,
and the very wide range of his learning. He also illustrated by
anecdote his wit and playfulness, and spoke of the moral traits
which stamped his character with a rare beauty, and made him
deeply respected and beloved by all who knew him.

On motion, a Committee, consisting of Prof. Goodwin, Rev. Mr.
Hale, and Prof Abbot, was appointed to prepare resolutions ex-
pressive of the respect of the Society for the memory of Prof
Hadley, and their deep sense of bereavement in view of his death.
The following resolutions were reported by them, and unanimously
adopted :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

brir American Oriental Society:

Resolved, That the American Oriental Society feel that by the death of their lite
President, Professor James Hadley, they have sustained an irreparable loss, in
common with the whole body of American scholars. They feel that the cause of
learning has rarely been called to mourn for one who combined such breadth and
depth and soundness of scholarship aa were possessed by Professor Hadley in
classical, Oriental, and comparative philology, and in general literature. For them-
selves, they appreciate most fully, in this time of bereavement, that the? have
never had a member who has labored more earnestly in their behalf, or one who
has done more, by profound learning and untiring zeal, to promote the interests
and extend the usefulness of the Society.

Resolved, That this expression of respect to the memory of Professor Hadley be
entered in the Records of the Society, and that a copy be sent to the family of
their late President.

It is proper to add here a few particulars respecting Prof.
Hadley'slife:

James Hadley was born in Fairfield. New York. March 30th, 1821. His father
was professor of chemistry in the Medical College then located at that place. His
early education was received in the Fairfield academy. He was a precocious
scholar, as is shown by a memorandum of his studies between the ages of sevea
and fifteen years, drawn up by himself ; reading Virgil, Livy, and Tacitus before
his tenth year, beginning Greek at ten, and acquiring Hebrew by private study at
sixteen. He was also distinguished from boyhood by the force of his character,
and the influence exerted over his fellows. An accident in his ninth year made
him lame for life. After teaching three years in the academy at Fairfield, he
entered Tale College as a Junior in 1840, graduating foremost in his class in 1842.
He staid one year following as resident graduate, devoting himself especially to
mathematical studies, of which he was always exceedingly fond, and in which he
exhibited, in the opinion of men fully qualified to judge, an extraordinary ability.
The next two years were spent in theological studies. In 1845 he entered the
Bervice of Yale College as tutor, becoming assistant professor of Greek in 1 843.
and succeeding Dr. Woolsey as full professor in 185 1j From his first engagement
in the duties of instruction he remained in New Haven, devoted to them and to
his private studies, only with an interval of nearly three years, between 1865 and
1868, during which he was prostrated by a severe attack of disease, that doubtless
undermined his constitution, although he appeared for the time to have shaken it
off completely. His studies, outside of his own department of Greek, included
especially Hebrew and Arabic, Sanskrit, the Celtic languages (particularly Welsh),
and Armenian. In all these, his facility of acquisition, joined with a memoir as
retentive and ready as it was philosophic, and with a judgment exceptionally sound
and penetrating, made him a superior scholar. In comparative philology he was
profoundly versed. The system of Roman law later attracted his interest and
received his attention, and he lectured upon it regularly during the past five years,
to the Senior class in the College and to the Law students : he also gave a course
upon the subject as one of the University series at Harvard College, early in 1871.
Since his death, his lectures are published, under the title of " Introduction to
Roman Law " (New York, 1873). Also a volume of his scattered essays and
papers, under the title "Essays, Philological and Critical" (as above). His
14 Greek Grammar for Schools and Colleges " was put forth in 1860, and an abridg-
ment of it in 1869. To the last edition of Webster's dictionary he contributed a
" Brief History of the English Language," with grammatical sketches and speci-
mens of the successive forms of the language. He was stricken down by a fever
only two days after conducting the autumn meeting of the Society in October, IS 72,
and, after a severe and painful illness of several weeks, died on the fourteenth of
November. Pres't Porter's sermon preached at his funeral, giving a sketch of his
life and labors and an estimate of his character, was printed in the New Englander
(New Haven) for January, 1873, and has been issued as a separate pamphlet, with
the addition of the memorandum referred to above, and of a nearly complete list
of his writings.

Professor Hadley was elected a member of the Society in 1848, and in 1*51
entered its Board of Direction as Secretary of the Classical Section, on the with-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceeding* at Boston, May, 1873. lxv

drawal of the late Dr. Beck from that office. He held the position until May, 1871,
-when he was elected President. He was also for many years one of the Committee
of Publication, and has repeatedly served as Secretary pro tempore. Hardly any
member has ever been more constant in his attendance at the Society's meetings,
or has contributed more regularly and essentially to their interest by communica-
tions and by participation in discussions. The records show that he read twenty
papers before the Society between 1849 and 1872; a part of them have been
printed in the Journal, a part in other places.

Extracts from the correspondence were read by* the Secretary.
From Rev. A. P. Happer, D.D., dated Canton, Jan. 7th, 1873:

. ..." It was only about a year ago that the Society's Proceedings for 1868
reached me, and I was surprised to find in it my letter of June 17th, 1868, which
was written with entire informality, and not with any idea that it would be pub-
lished. If you feel still an interest in the points raised in that letter and in the
discussion that followed it, I will comment on my friend Dr. Martin's remarks as
to the reasons for using the term Tien-chu: 1. Far from escaping the difficulties
in using the two rival terms Shin and Shang-ti, the use of Tum-chu made three
instead of two ; 2. The very last thing which a great majority of Protestants wished
to find was a common ground which would confound them with Roman Catholics ;
3. I am at a loss to say wherein in this matter we could profit by the experience
of the Roman Catholics ; 4. There could not possibly be any advantage to Protes-
tants from the currency which Tien-chu and chu have in China. Christianity as
professed and taught by Protestants wants to stand on its own basis among this
people. And to that end we need to preserve our own terms for the statement of
our doctrines and views. The effort to introduce Tien-chu, at any rate, failed
wholly, and the term has fallen into entire disuse even among those Protestants
who adopted it for the reasons stated by Dr. Martin. The two parties — those
preferring and using Shin and Shang-ti respectively — are gradually drawing nearer
to each other. The bitterness engendered by the controversy is passing away,
and by tacit consent each party uses more or less the term of the other. And in
time, in the nature of things, the usage will come to be to employ Shin as the
common appellation for ' God ' and ' gods/ and SJumg-ti as a title equivalent to
1 Supreme Ruler.'

" A subject of decided interest for exposition would be the Triad Society in this
country. It is a political organization for the overthrow of the Manchu dynasty
and the restoration of the native Ming. The last rebellion, the chief of which held
Nanking so long, and which was by some regarded as quasi-Christian in its origin,
was an outbreak of the Triad Society. As they found in Christian books a trinity,
and as in some of these that trinity was called Shang-ti, they adopted Shang-ti as
a substitute for Triad, in order to conceal their identity. The trick was long suc-
cessful ; and even many missionaries supposed the rebellion to have broken out in
consequence of persecution commenced against worshippers of Shang-ti.

" In this province of Canton are five broadly marked dialects. Or if we go a
little east, into the province of Fuh-Kien, there are along the coast, in the space
of six hundred miles, six dialects so different that their respective speakers are
unintelligible to one another, although they all read and write the same char-
acters." ....

From Pro£ F. P. Brewer, dated Pineas, Greece, April 26th,
1873:

. . . . " Enclosed is a rude outline of the walls recently discovered in Athens.
They are situated to the east of Hagia Triada and north of Hermes Street, but not
quite so far east as the position which E. Curtius calls " eventueRe Mauerlinie " in
the small map on page 38 of his Typography of Athens (1868). The north ex-
tremity of the walls is close to an open drain represented in that map. A space
has been laid bare for a distance of about 50 meters, which seems to' have been a
sort of narrow boulevard : a street 6 meters wide, with walls on each side, and
running nearly north and south. The eastern or inner wall is 2.6 meters thick,
and for much of the way only the outer face remains. This resembles a polygonal
or Cyclopean wall one meter high, resting on a low base, and still surmounted, in

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lxvi American Oriental Society :

a place where the wall is solid, by Bquared stones of another meter in height
The facing stones are of bluish marble, of comparatively little thickness. In the
wall is set edgewise a slab of Pentelic marble, one meter high and resting on a
base. On each side it has the inscription 0P0£ KEPAMEIKOT in a perpendicu-
lar line. The outer wall is 5 meters thick, and in its present state rises but half
a meter higher than the street To the west of it the earth has been removed to
a greater depth, showing that the outer face of the wall is built regularly of
squared stones, in courses of uniform height The lowest course visible seems to
be of long stones. The second is of stones nearly square, about .45 m. high by .6
long. The next is of the same height, of stones twice the length, placed so as to
break joints with the course below. The fourth and fifth courses are like the
second ; the fifth is like the third. The seventh course is interrupted in several
places by openings, on a level with the street inside, penetrating through the wall
apparently for the dischanre of water from the street There is no reason to sup-
pose that there were not many more courses above. Just below the level of the
crosB channels there was a pottery drain running lengthwise in the wall, .4 m.
wide by .8 high. . . . [Details of the discoveries farther south are omitted, as being
hardly intelligible without the chart.] .... In the southeast corner of the tract
represented there have been brought to light a congeries of walls which would he
puzzling to draw, and still more so to explain : they make one impatient for further
excavations.

11 The interesting matters thus far learned are : 1. the limit of the Kerameikos;
2. the place where the street of the tombs entered the city; 3. the existence of a
street along the inside of the thick wall, separated from the city by a second inte-
rior wall. An examination of the existing traces of the walls elsewhere may lead
to the discovery of second lines parallel to them. Several interesting monuments
have been unearthed : among them one long inscription which I had hoped to copy
for you ; but it was inaccessible when I- went to Athens yesterday."

Communications were now called for and presented*

1. On the Work of the American Palestine Exploration Society,
by Rev. W. Hayes Ward, of New York.

Mr. Ward stated that the Society had just sent an exploring party— consisting of
Lieut Steover, U. S. A., commander, and Prof. John A. Paine, a member of the
American Oriental Society, archaeologist and naturalist — to commence the survey
of that part of Palestine which lies east of the Jordan, together with the adjacent
regions of Syria, Moab, etc. During the time that the members of the expedition
were delayed at Beirut, they had made up a competent party of surveyors and
other assistants. Two new Greek inscriptions had been found by Prof. Paine,
commemorating the building of one of the roads from Beirut ; copies of these had
been taken, and would be sent to this country. Excellent squeezes and casts of
the curious Hamath inscriptions had also been obtained. Mr. Ward urged the
claims of the Exploration Society to a more liberal support by the American public

2. A Phenician Grammar, bv Prof. Alexander MeyrowiU, of
New York; presented by Rev. 5Vlr. Ward.

Mr. Ward, in Prof. Meyrowitz's absence, laid the Grammar before the Society*
explaining briefly its character. It includes all the words and forms found in the
texts appended to Schroder's grammar, and those in Gesenius's Manvmenta. It
employs throughout the Phenician characters, differing in this respect from Levy's
somewhat more complete dictionary.

After the presenting of these papers, the Society took an hour's
recess.

On the reassembling of the Society after the recess, the chair
was taken by Prof. Goodwin, of Cambridge, and the reading of
communications was resumed.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1873. Ixvii

3. On the so-called Vowel-Increment, with special reference to
the views of Mr. J. Peile, by Prof. W. D. Whitney, of New Haven.

Prof. Whitney reminded the Society that three years ago he had brought before
it a brief criticism (afterward printed in the North American Review, for July
1870). of Mr. J. Peilo's u Introduction to Greek and Latin Etymology." To this,
criticism Mr. Peile has made courteous reference and reply in the recently pub-
lished second edition of his book. Especially, in a note at the end of a chapter
(pp. 196-8), he has defended his position upon the most important point criticized:
namely, the nature and origin of the increment of vowel in early Indo-European
language— the change of t to i or at, of « to a or au — whether it be organic, or
phonetic only. After fairly stating the objections brought against his view that it
is organic and primarily significant — 1. that the increment seems at the outset
nowhere to have been used alone, without affixes, to convey a change of meaning ;
and 2. that it is not to be brought into even a standing connection with any defin-
able change or changes of meaning — Mr. Peile replies that at the outset suffixes
doubtless had a meaning as independent words, but must be supposed to have no
longer been usable as separate words with independent meaning at the time of
Indo-European division. This, it was retorted, is a counter-argument of no rele-
vancy whatever, since it implies that when a suffix loses the character of indepen-
dent word it loses the power to signify anything; and so that, for example, the -d
and -ing and -ly of loved, loving, lovely, have no force or value. We have no more
reason for regarding the -ika of vdidika from vid as "formal merely1' than the teal
of finical from fine. If in veda the vowel-increment is the essential thing, and the
suffix unimportant, it should be the same in vedrni, ' I know ' ; and what should be
thought then of vidmas, ' we know ' ? Words like bduddha from buddha are the
exceptional cases, and should be interpreted by the analogy of such as mdruta
from marut, mddhva from madhu. Mr. Peile discusses the whole subject with a
levity ill suited to its importance. Collocation, combination, and subsequent inte-
gration, with frequent development of secondary internal changes which have
afterward attained to important significance, have been the characteristic mode of
formation in our family of languages ; we have no right to assume anything dif-
ferent for the earliest period unless on distinct and cogent evidence. The doctrine
Mr. Peile defends is a mere dictum of Schleicher, an assumption, which Schleicher
himself never took the trouble to establish by argument. Nor does it seem to be
supportable by any sufficient evidence. A discussion of the facts of the occurrence
of the vowel-increment, chiefly in the verb and in Sanskrit, was given, in order to
show that there was regularly a sufficient apparatus of affixes to make the forms
without the increment, and that no department of verbal use, whether mode or
tense, depended on the increment or stood connected with it. The case begins
in Greek to be a little different, and in Germanic still more so, with completest
development in the most recent tongues : after the usual fashion of a phonetic
alteration, finally applied to significant uses. Reduplication is an agency of an
entirely different character in word-formation. A sufficient analogy, as regards the
possibility of the phonetic process, is found in our own mine, house, from Anglo-
Saxon min, has. The evidence for the theory which connects the increment with
the accent was next succinctly presented, and declared tolerably satisfactory,
though not absolutely so. It is the most plausible doctrine, according to present
evidence, that the increment was originally a purely phonetic extension of the vowel
of an accented syllable, made at a definite early period in the history of Indo-
European speech. Such special phonetic phenomena are wont to be of limited
duration : compare, for example, the Germanic umlaut, a like case of a phonetic
change running a definite career, soon divorced in appearance from its real cause,
extended irregularly by false analogies, and turned, to a considerable extent, to
the uses of expression. The views of Curtius and Corssen on the subject were
referred to and briefly criticized. Corssen, especially, unwittingly declares the
accentual theory perfectly acceptable : since he pronounces it possible only on the
assumption of a primitive accentuation in Indo-European different from the later,
and then, in the next breath, acknowledges this assumption to be unavoidable.
Finally, Schleicher's theory of an organic vowel-increment, in two grades, was
condemned and deplored as the most conspicuous and pervading error in his admi-
rable hand-book of comparative philology.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lxviii

American Oriental Society:

Other points in Mr. Peile's volume were touched upon much more briefly ; espe-
cially, his proposals and discussions upon matters of phonetic theory. These con-
stitute the chief peculiarity of the second edition as compared with the first : and,
as Prof. Whitney thought, on the whole to the disadvantage of the former, since
the author had not yet so familiarized himself with the subject as to make his
treatment of it profitable. No other writer had been more venturesome in sugges-
tion, and few with less Bucoess. Prof. Whitney defended his own view as to the
essential character of the h, as corresponding surd to the sonant vowels, semivowels,
and nasals ; and also as to the necessity of arranging and presenting the whole
alphabet, vowels and consonants together, in one connected scheme. He objected
to the current estimates of different articulations as harder and softer, as heavier
and lighter, and maintained that the grand movement in Indo-European alphabetic
development was from both extremities of the alphabetic system toward its middle,
from extreme to medial degrees of openness and closeness respectively, depending
not on absolute ease and difficulty of articulation, but on ease of transition from one
articulating position to another in the rapid processes of trained adult utterance.

4. Statistics of Sanskrit Verbal Forms in the Nala and Bhaga-
vad-GM, by Prof. John Avery, of Grinnell, Iowa; presented by
the Corresponding Secretary.

By way of appendix to his former statement as to the verb in the S&ma-Yeda
(presented in May, 1872), and in order to furnish ground for the comparison of
the use of verbal forms in the Vedic dialect and the later classical language, Prof.
Avery has made out a similar detailed view of all the persons, numbers, tenses,
moods, and voices as found to occur in the episode of Nala from the MaMbharata
(Bopp's edition), and in the Bhagavad-GH6 (Schlegel and Lassen's edition). The
two together make a body of text pretty nearly equal to that of the Sama-Veda
(1673 verses, against 1549). The summary of the results (neglecting the persons)

jg as follows :

primi
act.

tive
raed.

verb,
pass.

ca
act.

usath
ined.

re.
P

599
105
206
171

195
If
44
38

140

7!

25

9

19

22

6

2

2

18

6

1

350

20

2
26

132

30

1

I'desiderative.
1.1 I act.

Present:

indie.

opt.

imper.
Imperfect,
Aorist :

indie.

sub].

opt.
Perfect,

Future in tdsmi,
Future in sydmi:

indie.

imper.

The entire absence of the intensive conjugation in this scheme will be remarked.
The detail for the different forms of the aorist (according to Bopp's classification)

Aorist.

indie
subj.
opt
imper.

The occurrence of the participles is as follows :

I.

in.

V.

act.

mod.

act. >nwd.

act.

1

1

9

|

1

1 J 1

i

1

1

VI.

act.
8
4

primitive

verb.

causative.

desiderative.

act. 1 mid.

paw*.

act. 1 pass.

act.

mid.

Present,

213

64

28

24

1

3

2

Aorist,

Perfect,

5

Future,

1

1

1

intensive,
mid.

1

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, October, 1873. lxix

Also the passive participle in to, from the primitive verb, occurs 848 times (as
verbal form, or used predicately without copula, 219 times); that in no, 49 times;
the participle in to from the causative, 37 times ; from the desiderative, 4 times.
The compound perfect participle in iavant is found 26 times ; that in navant, 2
times. The infinitive in torn from the primitive verb. 97 times ; from the causative,
6 times. The gerunds in tvd and ya from the primitive verb, 192 times and 243
times; from the causative, 8 times and 17 times, respectively. The gerundive
(future passive participle) in tavya, 26 times ; that in ya, 65 times.

5. On the Vedic Style, by Dr. M. W. Easton, of Hartford,
Conn. ; presented by the Corresponding Secretary.

The literary character of the Yedas, Dr. Easton said, is less known than thoir
philological value, and of the former too high an opinion is generally entertained.
For the most part, it may be briefly said, these hymns are not less devoid of human
interest than of divine. Some rise to sublimity in the contemplation of the
numen in Nature, but in general nothing can be more barren of interest other than
euch as the student derives from their language, or from their revelations of the
life of their remote age. A striking feature is their monotony, and the resemblance
in content of the different hymns, especially in each particular group— a resem-
blance not in aim and plan (unity being mainly wanting), nor in repetition of words
and phrases, but in material content, the thoughts and similes and metaphors. To
illustrate these characteristics, the group of hymns (21, comprising 174 verses)
addressed to the Dawn (ushas) were taken up and analyzed. They are among
the most beautiful and best-known hymns in the whole collection. They show
the wavering, natural in a developing mythology, between personification and
deification. At the basis of the whole series lie a few simple notions ; which, how-
ever, it is not easy to present and weigh systematically. The amount of absolute
verbal repetition is but small. Recurring epithets are one chief source of uniform-
ity of coloring. Some of these are such as would naturally present themselves to
the mind of any observer ; others are much less obvious : for instance, those which
praise the Dawn as a bestower, of all things to be gained during the day, such as
good fortune, strength, wealth, food, glory, etc. etc. Such ascriptions make up
more than a quarter of the whole matter of the hymns ; while nearly one-third
extol the brilliancy and light-diffusing qualities of the goddess. Frequently ap-
pears the figure of a pair of yoked horses, or ruddy cows, as bringing in the Dawn.
Most poetical of all are the numerous verses in which it is personified as a bright
beautiful woman, as a dancer or young wife displaying her bosom. It is praised
as a protector, as a chaser away of darkness ; or. by a contrary view, Night and
Dawn are represented as sisters, amicably succeeding each other. And this idea
of regular and unfailing succession, under higher direction, is sometimes dwelt
upon, with a momentary flight into the region of more elevated thought, as the
poet contrasts the fleeting life of man with the eternal recurrence of the morning
light. The Dawn is also often invoked as bearer of the sacrifice to the gods or
of the gods to the sacrifice, or as herself receiving the sacrifice.

These various points are illustrated by Dr. Easton with full quotations of pas-
sages, accompanied by a version. He then proceeds to translate parts of hymns
and verses in their connection, as samples of the general style, and he closes with
pointing out certain inferences and conclusions.

Unlike modern verse-makers, the Vedic poet copies boldly and baldly, as if
caring only for the needs of his indifferent verse. The reader feels that he is
dealing with extempore compositions, or with works of which extempore compo-
sition dictated the style. The repetitions, the freedom with which the small stock
of poetic material is handled, the want of connection, the ejaculatory manner, is
remarkably like the mass of extemporaneous prayer as heard with us, or like im-
provisation. As to whether we have in the collection hymns that were the model
of after imitators, it is not easy to say : those to the Dawn in the first book are at
least much superior to the rest. Though probably composed for practical purposes,
they cannot have formed part of a fully elaborated ritual, in a settled and regulated
religion. They were prayers, and pronounced at a defined time, that of the dawn's
appearance. " In regard to the manner of composition, however, we may venture
to frame a hypothesis. If we suppose it to have been the custom of the Vedio

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ixx American Oriental Society :

Hindus that every householder should greet in words the return of the dawn, and
in a natural manner express his wishes for the continuance of the morning light and
for a share in the blessings of life, under such circumstances there would result a
widely spread knowledge of certain apt and expressive epithets, certain simple
more or less poetical ornaments and figures, and certain makeshifts in the construc-
tion of verse. But as the freedom of the national manners disappeared, and laws,
social usages, and beliefs became more and more rigid and fixed, the habit of pour-
ing forth extemporaneous effusions would disappear with the rest, and the latest
forms of these productions, thus made up of material used over and over again,
would become regarded as alone admissible to use, then as sacred, and finally as
inspired. This process, though possibly rapid in its course, would not have been
so suddenly completed as to prevent the contemporaneous formation of several or
many different yet closely resembling forms of prayer, each possibly first used
only within the limits of a single family, school, or tribe."

After the reading of this communication and the remarks of
members upon it, the Society passed a vote of thanks to the
American Academy for the use of its room, and adjourned, to
meet again in New Haven on the 1 5th of October,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceeding* at New Haven, October, 1873. lxxi

Proceedings at New Haven, Oct. 15th and 16tn, 1873,

The Society met at 8 o'clock p. m., in the Library of the Yale
Divinitv School. The chair was taken by the President, Professor
E. E. Salisbury.

The Recording Secretary being absent, Mr. A. Van Name, of
New Haven, was appointed Secretary pro tempore.

The Committee of Arrangements reported that they had ac-
cepted, on behalf of the Society, an invitation from the President
to take tea at his house at 7 o'clock.

It was announced on behalf of the Directors that they had ap-
pointed the Annual meeting for 1874 to be held in Boston, on the
21st of May next. Also, that they recommended to the Society
the election to membership of the following persons :

Prof. Franklin Carter, of New Haven,

Prof. William E Griffia, of Japan,

Miss Annie K. Humphrey, of Washington, D. C,

Mr. Jules Luquiens, of Cincinnati, O.,

Prof. William G. Sumner, of New Haven, and

Mr. Alonzo Williams, of Providence, R. I.,

as Corporate Members ; and

Dr. J. C. Hepburn, of Japan, and
Rev. J. W. Waugh, of India,

as Corresponding Members. The recommendation was accepted
by the Society, and the persons named were elected in the usual
manner.

The Corresponding Secretary exhibited to the meeting, photo-
graphic copies (taken from a plaster cast of the original) of the
inscriptions on the trilingual stone of Tanis, presented to the Soci-
ety by Mr. Richard Sullivan, of Boston ; and he stated that Mr.
Sullivan had also presented the photogranhic negatives from which
the plates were taken, that further copies might be furnished to
other parties, at the discretion of the Society.

The following communications were then presented :
1. On the Orphic Poets and Religionists, and their Influences
in Greece, by Pres't T. D. Woolsey, D.D., of New Haven.

After speaking of the name Orpheus, the derivations given to it from the root
bfxp. epef , and from ribhu of the Vedas ; of the fact that the name first occurs in
a fragment of Ibycus (Gent vi. B. C): and of the Thrace with which Orpheus was
connected, the paper went on to sever the great number of forgeries, or of poems
falsely ascribed to Orpheus, from the proper poems of the school or sect. The
leading points of the paper were : 1. That in Cent. vi. B. 0. a body of men, the
Orphici or Orpheoteleste, appeared at Athens, some of whom were arrant fabrica-
tors of oracles — as Onomaoritus — and whose general influence was to modify the
Greek religions and religious traditions. 2. This sect appeared at a time when
the Greeks felt a deeper sense of personal guilt than we can find in their earlier
religion. They excited or made use of this feeling, and introduced purgative rites
for the living and the dead. 3, Among their religious innovations must be named

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lrxii American Oriental Society :

their initiations, in which the worship of Zagreus played a leading part. Tnis
divinity was a form of Dionysus with a different mythology, native in Crete, or at
least early established there. The myths of the Eleusinian mysteries were also
modified in the course of the movement proceeding from the Orphic sect A. They
had a theogony of their own, differing from the older Hesiodic theogony. This
was remarkable, among other things, for the conception of the world-egg, which
may have come from the east ; and altogether they seem to have felt the direct
influence of Oriental ideas, although the author could not admit such a relation to
Egypt as Herodotus attributes to them. 5. In this theogony a pantheistical cast
of thinking is observable. Hence the favor which the Orphic poems had with
later Greek philosophers ; and the later pantheistic fragments had some true notion
of the Orphic doctrine back of them. 6. In connection with their treatment of the
myths was noticed their syncretism, or confusion of different divinities, to which
their doctrine concerning the one and the many would naturally lead. 7. Their
doctrine of the future life was noticed, in connection with a celebrated fragment
of Pindar preserved by Plato in his Meno, and relating to the return of souls into
new bodies after purgation of crime in the under world. 8. Their asceticism also
was examined, and passages from Plato and Euripides brought forward in illustra-
tion of it. The author owned his obligations to Lobeck's Agloophamus, and
endeavored to go no farther than the opinions of the earliest authors and the frag-
ments, probably genuine, of Orphic poets warranted.

2. Remarks on J. G. Mailer's Semitic Theory, by Pro£ C. H.
Toy, of Greenboro, So. Car.; presented by the Corresponding
Secretary. .

A brief abstract of Prof. Toy's argument is as follows :

In his recent work entitled " The Semites, in their relation to Hamites and Ja-
phetites," Prof. Muller of Basle has attempted a solution of the old difficulty as to
the Canaanites, who speak languages of the group called Semitic, and yet are reck-
oned as Hamites in the ethnographical Table of Genesis (chap. x.). He holds that
the name " Semite " means nothing but ' Hamitized Japhetite,' and that "Semitic"
languages are simply Hamitic tongues spoken by Japhetic or Indo-European peo-
ples. He finds his proofs in the statements of the Hebrew scriptures, in other
ancient writers, and in the linguistic relations themselves. He first locates the
Hamitic peoples, and tries to show that they spoke languages of the class now
called Semitic ; he then endeavors to trace the Semites of the Table to Indo-Kuro-
pean lands. While he brings forward many interesting facts, and makes valuable
comments, he yet fails to establish his main proposition, which requires more con-
clusive evidences than he has given. If the Hebrew national consciousness is
sufficiently trustworthy to prove the ethnological diversity of Hebrew from Canaan-
ite, why has it preserved no trace of the original identity of Hebrew and Japhetite?
By its evidence, the Hebrews were as distinct in race from Japhet as from Ham.
Again, it is unexpiainably strange that diverse Indo-European tribes should have
utterly given up their speech as regards form and flexion, and elaborated instead a
set of dialects which seem to point unmistakably to one parent-tongue. Nothing
like this has occurred in historical times ; Muller's parallels are all essentially dif-
ferent in their circumstances. As to the homes of the Semites of the Table, viz.
Asshur, Arphaxad, Aram, Elam, Lud, the first three are proper Semitic countries,
showing Semitic peoples and languages; the other two are more obscure, but by
no means necessarily Indo-European ; as the names are geographical, they may
indicate regions possessed by both lndo-Europeans and Semites. Then as to the lan-
guages of die Hamites of the Table, viz. Gush, Mizraim, Phut, and Canaan : those of
Canaan and one Cushite region (Ethiopia) are Semitic, the Egyptian is problematical
and at least mixed, and the Phutish (if identified with the Berber) is still more
remote from the Semitic. The relation of these last two to the Semitic is a matter
of much difference of opinion. In order to settle the questions involved, we need
a more thorough and authoritative determination of the relation borne by the Old
Egyptian to the Semitic group, and of the extent and character of the non-Semitic
element of which there are traces from the Persian Gulf across into eastern Africa.
These questions are not settled by Prof. Muller's easy method. Similar objections

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, October, 1873. lxxiii

might be urged to his hypothesis of the Indo-European origin of the Hyksos and
Philistines.

Comments were made on this paper and its subject by Rev. Mr. Ward. Mr. Van
Name, and Prof. Whitney, all of whom agreed with its author in rejecting M filler's
theory as paradoxical and untenable.

3. On the Assyrian Inscription at Andover, Mass., by Rev.
Selah Merrill, of Andover.

Mr. Merrill presented a transcript and a partial translation of the Assyrian in-
scription on a slab now in the library of the Andover Theological Seminary. The
slab is from the palace of Assur-nazir-bal at Nimroud, and its inscription is one of
which several copies exist this country, and of which a translation, made by Rev.
W. Hayes Ward, was printed in the Proceedings of this Society for October, 1871.

At the evening meeting, at Prof. Salisbury's, only one paper was
presented.

4. On the Han-lin Yuan, or Chinese Imperial Academy, by
Pres't W. A. P. Martin, D.D., of Peking; presented by the Cor-
responding Secretary.

After calling attention to the interest belonging to his subject, Dr. Martin goes
on to describe, first, the buildings of the Academy. They are a series of five low
shed-like structures, one story in height, flanked by a double row of yet humbler
erections, the whole forming a yamen entered by an inconspicuous gateway close
by the British Legation. One building is a pavilion sacredly kept for the use of
the emperor, on his visits to the Academy. A noteworthy visit of Kien-lung, on
occasion of the dedication of the renovated buildings, is described ; it was attended
with a gift to the library of the great Kang-hi encyclopedia Tushvrchi-cheng, in six
thousand volumes ; and the emperor produced, as if impromptu, an elaborate ode,
of which the translation is given. All is now in a dilapidated condition, the library
in confusion and unused. There is no regular occupation of the premises : the
officers meet there nine times a month, for laying out work ; and the members only
on feast-days, for the performance of religious rites. Yet the institution proper is
in a state of undiminished vigor; only its work has been transferred elsewhere.
The decay of a building in China is no indication of the decadence of the institution
it represents. And Chinese public buildings are for the most part mean, compared
with those of western nations. The germ of the Academy was the assemblage -by
Tai-tsung, of the Tang dynasty, twelve centuries ago, of a body of eighteen learned
and able men who should give him society and aid. From this time dates a new
era in the literary activity of the empire; also the establishment on nearly its
present footing of the system of examinations ; and the art of printing made its
appearance at about the same time. Tai-tsung made later a new levy of elegant
writers to act as copyists in founding a library ; and a successor, Huen-tsung. added
another body of scholars, and combined the three into one organization, giving it
the name of Han-lin, ' forest of pencils.1 Since then, it has been a regular appendage
to the imperial court. During the past six hundred years, its location has been in
Peking, and its present nominal quarters were assigned to it under the Ming.

The constitutive statutes of the Academy (of which a succinct translation is
given) offer no very intelligible view of its numbers or occupations. It is really a
body of civil functionaries, a government organ ; its main-spring is in the central
throne. Its members do not seek admission from love of learning, but for the dis-
tinction it confers, and especially as a passport to lucrative employment. They
spend from six to ten years in attendance at the Academy, and then go into the
provinces as triennial examiners, as superintendents of education, or in other ca-
pacities : always proudly retaining the title of Academician. There are also several
yamens at the capital chiefly manned from the Academy: one constantly attends
the Emperor, with the duty of preserving a minute record of all his words and
actions ; another is in somewhat similar attendance upon the he r apparent ; others
belong to the imperial boards of censors ; the higher ranks are ex-officio counsellors

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ixxiv American Oriental Society :

of his majesty. Perhaps three or four score members are in regular attendance at
the ceremonious gatherings; on great occasions, more than twice that number
may assemble. Then there are probationers or candidates, to the number of a
hundred or more, who study for three years under the auspices of the Academy,
and then stand an examination for membership. The grand total of actual and
passed members probably does not fall short of five hundred. The qualifications
for membership are : unusual natural talent, and profound acquisitions in all the
departments of Chinese scholarship. And membership is not given by vote, or by
imperial appointment; it is won only by competition in regular examinations.
Provision is farther made for occasional examinations of the regular members in
presence of the emperor, " to prevent their relapse into idleness." The officers
are divided pretty equally between Manchus and native Chinese.

The occupations of the Han-lin are very various, from the selection of titles for
people in high station to the conduct of provincial examinations and the writing
of national histories ; but the advancement of science is not among them, because
they are not aware that, since the achievements of Confucius and the ancient sages,
any new world remains to be conquered. The composition of imperial prayers.
the writing of inscriptions for the temples of various divinities in acknowledgment
of services to the nation, the preparation under imperial orders of scrolls and tab-
lets for schools and charitable institutions throughout the empire — these are some
of the Academy's lighter labors. The great libraries, public and private, show
the activity of its members in editing and commenting the canonical literature.
Their historiographies labors are also immense. For example, there are now in
the capital four historical bureaux, constantly occupied, not with the events of
other countries and distant ages, but with those of the present reign and its imme-
diate predecessor ; and they are ail conducted by the Han-lin. The scale of these
histories may be inferred from the fact that the bureau of military annals recently
reported the completion of the account of the Tai-ping and Nien-fei rebellions, in
three hundred and sixty volumes. Then there are innumerable provincial and
local histories, chiefly managed by the same hands. The literary enterprises of
the emperors, such as the great encyclopedia of Kaug-hi, already referred to, and
the dictionary of the same imperial author, are carried out by the doctors of the
Academy. Under the present minority reign they have produced, as it were t»
usum Delphini, a course of history and the classics made easy by translation into
the Mandarin or court dialect. All the academicians, too, are professional poets.

The member of the Han-lin is not furnished by his education with a feeble su-
perficial polish, that unfits him for the duties of practical life ; he is also prepared
for the discharge of political functions. Its eminent doctors are conspicuous in
the civil and diplomatic history of their country.

•The paper closed with an account, accompanied by extracts, of the Memoirs of
the Academy.

The Society met at 9 o'clock on Thursday morning, at the same
place as on Wednesday, and continued to listen to communica-
tions.

5. Statistics of Sanskrit Verbal Forms in the Aitareya Brahma-
na, by Prof. John Avery, of Grinnell. Iowa ; presented by the
Corresponding Secretary.

In two previous papers (presented in May, 1872, and May, 1873), Prof. Avery
had given a detailed statistical view of the occurrence of the various forms of the
Sanskrit verb in the Sama-Veda and in the Nala and Bhagavad-Git& ; thus illustrat-
ing the verb as it appears in the earliest Vedlc dialect and in the modern classical
Bpeech. In order, now, to render more complete the Comparative view already
furnished, he had undertaken to treat in the same way a leading text of the inter-
mediate Br&hmana literature, namely the Aitareya Brahmana, as published by Hang
(Bombay, 1863). The following tables give the main results, summed up in the
same manner as for the preceding papers :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1873.

lxxv

primitive verb.

causative.

desider.

d. of caus.

inten

act.

mid.

pass.

act.

mid.

act.

mid.

act.

mid.

act.

Present:

indie.

2371

652

214

221

15

6

5

I1

9

subj.

118

36

23

3

2

opt.

727

154

14

43

28

3

1

imper.

381

81

5

16

2

Imperfect,

758

288

13

39

16

3

5

3

4

Aorist :

indie.

99

23

28

subj.

88

9

6

opt

3

imper.

1

Perfect,

893

57

2

1

Future in tdsmij

11

Future in sydmi,

80

13

4

Conditional,

3

The active and middle aorist forms (as passive are reckoned above only the
peculiar third persons singular) are to be divided as follows (according to Bopp's
classification and numbering):

I

n.

ra.

rv.

v.

VI.

VI

act.

mid.

act.

act.

mid.

act.

act.

mid.

act.

mid.

act.

12

13

2

20

2

1

16

2

27

5

21

16

4

12

5

5

1

26
3

1

|

27

2

Aorist.
indie,
subj.
opt.
imper.

The statement for the participles is

Present,
Perfect,
Future,

mid.
1

[ primitive

verb.

causative.

deside

rative.

intensive^

act.

mid. pass.

act.

mid.

pan.

act.

pass.

act. mid.

1 260

112

66

10

1

4

1

1

4

2

| 106

11

21

8

Also, the passive participle in ta is formed, from the primitive verb, 896 times
(including 27 cases of the twin ending na); from the causative, 2 times; from the
desiderative, 3 times. Its compound, the perfect active participle in tavant, occurs
once.

The infinitive is found 21 times in accusative form (once in am, the rest in turn),
and 8 times in dative (4 times in tave, 2 times in tavdi, 1 time in «, and 1 time in
ase). The gerund in tvd, 159 times from the primitive verb, 9 times from the
causative, 1 time from the causal desiderative; that in yo, 159 times from the
primitive verb, and 6 times from the causative.

The gerundive in tavya is met with 52 times (twice causative, once desiderative),
that in tva 2 times, that in ya 74 times (5 times causative), that in antya 8 times.

6. On the Ham at h Inscriptions, by Rev. W. H. Ward, D.D., of
New York.

Dr. Ward gave a brief account of what had been hitherto brought to light re-
specting the Hamath inscriptions, and of the studies and speculations to which
they had given rise. The stones themselves had lately been taken possession of
by the Turkish government for its museum at Constantinople, and as they passed
through Beyrout on their way, they had been carefully examined by the represen-
tatives of the American Palestine Exploration Society, and squeezes taken from
them. These squeezes were exhibited to the meeting by Dr. Ward, as also the

* The f orms of the reduplicated or causative aorist were omitted by an oversight
in the summary for the SAma-Veda in the Proceedings for May, 1872 : of the in-
dicative, that Veda contains 38 active forms and 1 middle; of the subjunctive, 10
active and 2 middle; of the optative, 3 active; of the imperative, 1 active form.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lxxvi American Oriental Society:

lithographed copies which had beta made from them with the greatest care under
his direction, and which would soon be published by the above mentioned Society.
Three of the inscriptions are nearly the same, varying only in certain groups of
signs at definite points. One is in an absolutely perfect state of preservation, as
fresh and sharp as if just cut All are cut in a very peculiar, if not unique, manner,
the surface of the stone being smoothed down, and then the figures graved in,
cameo-fashion, their prominent parts and the line separating the rows of figures
being left at the general level, while the rest of the surface of the stones is cut away
about them, to a uniform depth. The characters are strictly hieroglyphic, many
of the objects represented being clearly recognizable; but they seem to be entirely
different from and unconnected with the Egyptian hieroglyphs. They are arranged
in a manner accordant with that often practised in Egypt; the lines of characters
run on horizontally, but in the line one or more characters are often placed under
an upper one. Knowledge respecting them is chiefly limited thus far to the direc-
tion in which the lines run and read : this is clearly povoTp&prpMv, or opposite in
alternate lines ; and the comparison of the three nearly identical inscriptions shows
that the beginning is at the right hand upper corner.

Br. Ward thought it very questionable whether our knowledge would ever go
farther than this, considering the paucity of the material, the independence and
primitiveness of the character, and our utter ignorance as to the language repre-
sented. Yet he considered the discovery as not only interesting but decidedly im-
portant, in view of the light which it might be made to throw upon the history of
systems of writing in that part of the world. He inclined to regard the inscriptions
as very ancient, probably older than anything before found in the country. What
place was there for such rude and primitive modes of writing after the adoption
and currency of the Phenician ?

7. On some of the relations of Islamism to Christianity, by
Prof. E. K. Salisbury, of New Haven.

The too prevalent want of candor in the Christian world, and strength of preju-
dice inherited from times of deadly conflict between Islamism and Christianity,
were first spoken of ; these, however, the later study of Muhammad and his religious
system had begun to remove ; while, at the same time, a re rival of the spirit and
power of primitive Islamism, in the Turkish empire, in India, and in Africa, had
made the subject one of special interest Islamism was then denned to be, essen-
tially, a new proclamation of primitive Judaism, with the Messianic element left
out — a re-affirmation and vindication of the living and acting sovereignty of God —
and tliis was pointed out as what should mainly direct all apologies for Christianity
addressed to Muslims : that " the teachings of Muhammad, true and noble as they
were in the main, were yet, in their distinctive character, not such as could be a
completing revelation to man ; that, in fact, he made a retrograde movement-
necessary, as it would appear, to give new force to divine messages of earlier times,
and included in the providential scheme of the world's history ; yet only provisional,
to make way for a wider proclamation of the One, greater than all prophets, who
was the true ' seal of prophesy,' the ' express image ' of divine love." The moral
system of Islamism was then characterized, as in accordance with its theology,
11 being based upon reverence for God, and the ideal of character being absolute
submission to His will ;" and it was shown that, on some points, such as polygamy
and slavery, where Muhammad had been charged with immoral laxity, he was in
fact a reformer of the usages of his time ; and the revival of primitive Islamism
was, in this view, noted as rather hopeful than discouraging to the Christian phi-
lanthropist.

The controversy between Christianity and Islamism was then passed in review,
as exhibited in a tract by the celebrated Roman Catholic missionary Xavier, with
the reply made to it, and a rejoinder by the Jesuit Gkiadagnoli ; also, in the tracts
written on either side by the missionary Henry Martyn and his antagonists in
Persia ; and as recently presented in two works from Muslim authors : the " Es-
says" of Syud Ahmed Khan, and Syed Ameer Ali's "Critical Examination of the
Life and Teachings of Mohammed." The intention of this review was to bring out
the chief arguments alleged in favor of Islamism, and to show how they either
had been, or should be, met on the Christian side.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceeding* at New Haven, October, 1873. lxxvii

The paper was ended with some brief hints as to the influence of the two systems
upon one another, and that of Islamism, in particular, on society, as historically
manifested.

Rev. Mr. Labaree, of Persia, called attention to the important contributions of
the missionary Rev. G. G. Pfander to the same controversy, and briefly described
their character and effect.

8. On Johannes Schmidt's new Theory of the Relationship
of Indo-European Languages, by Prof. W. D. Whitney, of New
Haven.

The speaker began with pointing out that the latest and most authoritative opin-
ions in Germany tend very decidedly towards recognizing all the branches of
Indo-European language in Europe as more nearly related to one another than to
the Asiatic branches ; thus implying a first separation of the family into a Euro-
pean and an Aryan or Asiatic division. Prof. Schmidt of Bonn, however, in a
recent pamphlet (Die VerwantschafisverMltniase der Indogermanischen Sprachen,
Weimar, 1872, 8vo, pp. 88), after setting forth the grounds on which the above
view has been held, by himself hitherto among the rest, proceeds to detail the dif-
ficulties which still stand in its way, and which determine him now to reject it.
He finds, namely, special points of argument between the Slavo-Lettic dialects and
the Aryan, and other special points between the former and the Germanic, unshared
by the Aryan ; again, notwithstanding the generally assumed nearer relationship
of Greek and Latin, there are particular coincidences between Greek and Aryan
also, as between Latin and Celtic and Germanic : and so on. This leads Schmidt
to reject altogether the ordinary "family-tree" (Stammbaum) arrangement of
Indo-European languages, which accounts for the position and relations of each
language by a series of divarications of an original common stock ; he sets up instead
a kind of geographical theory, whereby the languages are related according to pro-
pinquity, each being an " organic intermediate " between its neighbors on either
hand, a tie running through the whole like a spreading of waves from a centre of
disturbance. Prof. Whitney said that his object was, not to criticize the difficulties
raised in detail and attempt to remove them, but to point out how wholly unscien-
tific and untenable was the new theory of explanation. It is flatly opposed to
everything that we know as to the manner of tradition of language, and the causes
and signs of relationship between dialects of the same family.
The family-tree arrangement of languages is a necessary result
of the like derivation of communities. If a given community A
divides into two (or more), namely B and 0, and if then later C
divides into two (or more), namely D and E, the languages of
the different divisions will be different, having become so in
consequence of their separation, because the divaricating influ-
ence of individual action in the change of language has not been
counteracted by the unifying influence of communication. There will be as many
languages, D E B, as there are divisions, all of them retaining, by direct traditional
transmission through the lines of descent of each community, and in no other way,
something of the original language A. There can be nothing of A in E which was
not also in 0, and which was not shared also by D when D and E separated ; nor
any exclusive correspondences between E and B which are not results of the exclu-
sive loss by D of something which it as well as E once had, by derivation from A
through 0— excepting, of course, the products of mere accident, and of borrowing
from E into B or the contrary ; and excepting, also, rare cases in which B and E
may agree in carrying out certain tendencies implied in the habits of speech of A,
and which have been in some way counteracted and annulled in D. The geographi-
cal relations of D E and B cannot possibly have an effect on their linguistic relations
except by facilitating borrowing — unless, indeed, they have been in such close com-
munion together as to have directly influenced one another ; and this is, of all things
in linguistic history, the least likely and the hardest to prove. The assumption that
mere diminution of distance in space will exert an approximating influence upon
the idioms of two peoples who come into no contact or only a casual contact with
one another, neither of whom knows or cares how the other speaks, is little short
of absurd. Thus, to take as example the most striking of the difficulties brought

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

lzxyiii American Oriental Society :

up by J. Schmidt : in the Slavo-Lettic languages (B), the original guttural k of a
certain definite list of words is corrupted to a sibilant, as it is also in the Arjan
languages (B) ; while the nearest relative of the former group, the Germanic (D),
as well as the other European tongues (other branches of C), shows in these suae
words the guttural uncorrupted. This, Ascoli points out, can only be either be-
cause the line E is wrongly drawn, and should be connected with B instead of CD,
or else because both CED and B inherited from A a peculiarity in the utterance of
the guttural in these particular words, which in E and B finally ran into a sibilant
corruption, while in D and the other branches of C it was lost and the normal gut-
tural restored. And of the two possible explanations Ascoli prefers the latter,
though fully recognizing its difficulty and antecedent improbability. Fick, in his
more recent Sprachcinhcit der Indogermanen Ewopas, also gives an explanation
according in every essential particular with ABColi's, though cast into a somewhat
different form. Asooli's theory is stigmatized as " unscientific " by Schmidt (and
also, strangely enough, by Pick), because it accounts for results by "chance"-
that is to say, because it regards the Slavo-Lettish people as having happened, for
no assignable reason, to retain and carry out a corruption which its own nearer
relatives had abandoned instead. To Prof. Whitney it seemed that the charge of
being unscientific did not lie against the one who, to explain a perplexing agree-
ment, assumed a cause which was incontrovertibly possible, though of great ante-
cedent improbability ; but against the one who assumed a cause opposed to all the
deductions of a sound linguistic science. It was much as if one should refuse to
ascribe to chance the twice repeated recurrence of a throw of sixes, and should
prefer to attribute it to the influence of the stars.

Many of the difficulties raised by Schmidt have been removed by Fick, in die
volume already referred to, in conformity with accepted linguistic principles, and
others by Jolly, in his Geschichte des InfiniUva. Any yet remaining may be expected
to yield in time to a similar treatment At any rate, it is quite too soon for Indo-
European comparative philology to feel itself driven into so close a corner as to
have to force its way out in the manner proposed by Schmidt. This was one more
instance of the carelessness as to the established truths of the science of language
which the eminent comparative philologists of Germany are too prone to exhibit.

Max Muller, in his introductory lecture at Strassburg, discourages all attempts to
solve the problem of nearer relationship between the Indo-European branches, in-
clining to pronounce it scientifically insoluble, and declaring that a miscellaneous
connection, without definable degrees, answers entirely to the conditions of dialectic
growth to which all languages are subjected in their first development We most
wait for Muller's detailed exposition of the conditions referred to before we can
understand why there should not be varying degrees of relationship between early
as well as later dialects, or why it is not just as scientific to inquire whether
Lithuanian is more nearly allied to Germanic than to Celtic, as whether English
is more nearly allied to Frisian than to Danish or Bavarian.

No more communications being offered, the Society passed a
vote of thanks to the Faculty of the Divinity School for the use
of its room, and adjourned, to meet in Boston on the 21st of May,
1874.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1874. lxxix

Proceedings at Boston, May 20th, 1874.

The Society held its Annual meeting, as usual, in the Library
of the American Academy, Athenajum building, Boston, at 10
o'clock, a. m., the President in the chair.

The Treasurer's report for the year was read, and, having been
referred to an auditing Committee, was examined and accepted.
It shows the income and outgoes of the year to have been as is
stated below :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 21st. 1873, $906.09

Annual assessments paid in, $565.00

Sale of the Journal, 84.84

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank, 62.82

712.66

Total receipts of the year, $1,618.75

EXPENDITURES.

Printing of Proceedings, $53.36

Kxpenses of Library and Correspondence, 35.39

Total expenditures of the year, - - - - 88.75

Balance on hand May 20th. 1874, - - 1,530.00

$1,618.75
A general report as to the increase of the Library during the
year was presented, the details of accessions being left to be given
in the printed Proceedings.

The Directors announced that, in consideration of the non-
appearance during the year of any continuation of the Journal,
they had voted that no annual assessment be levied on the members
for the year 1 874-75. Further, that they had appointed the Semi-
annual meeting to be held in New York, on Wednesday, October
2*th, designating Prof. Short and Dr. Ward of New York, with
the Secretaries, a Committee of Arrangements for it.

The following gentlemen were then nominated by the Directors
as candidates for Corporate membership, and were duly elected
by ballot :

Prof. Felix Adler, of Ithaca, N. Y.;
Mr. Isaac H. Hall, of New York ;
Rev. Henry F. Jenks, of Boston ;
Rev. Howard Osgood, of New York;
Prof. Charles P. Otis, of Boston.

The election of officers for the ensuing vear being now in order,
Messrs. Trumbull of Hartford, Merrill of Andover, and Ward of
New York were appointed a Committee of nomination. They re-
ported the names of the following gentlemen, who were balloted
for and duly elected :

0

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

1 x x x Am erican Orien tal Society :

President — Prof. E. E. Salisbury, LL.D., of New Haven.

i Kev. X. G. Clark, D.D., " Boston.

Vice-Presidents} Hon. Pktkk Parker, M.D., ■' Washington.

( Kev. T. D. Woolsey, LL.D., " New Haven.
Recording Secretary — Prof. Ezra Abbot, LL.D., u Cambridge.
Corresp. Secretary — Prof. W. 1). Whitney, Ph.D., " New Haven.
Seer, of Class. Sect— Prof. W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., u Cambridge.
Treas V and Libfn — Mr. Addison Van Name, " New Haven.
f Mr. J. W. Barrow, " New York.

Mr. A. I. Cothkal, " New York.

Prof. W. II. Green, D.D., u Princeton.

Directors <( Prof. A. P. Peabody, D.D., " Cambridge.

Dr. Charles Pickering, u Boston.

Prof. Charles Short, LL.D., " New York.

Kev. W. H. Ward, D.D., " New York.

The Corresponding Secretary called the attention of the Soci-
ety to its losses by death during the past year. The list included
the names of three Corporate members,

Mr. Charles Astor Bristed, of New York,
Prof. Alpheue Crosby, of Salem, Mass., and
Col. James F. Meline, of Brooklyn, N. Y. ;

and of one Corresponding member,

Dr. Francis Mason, missionary in Burmah.

The Secretary gave a somewhat full sketch of the life and lite-
rary labors of Mr. Bristed, who had for some years been a member
of the Society, though never taking a personal part in its proceed-
ings ; he also spoke, more briefly, of Col. Meline, elected only a
year since to its membership. Dr. Peabody bore testimony to the
high scholarship of Prof. Crosby, and to his eminent services in the
cause of education. Dr. Anderson and Dr. Ward eulogized the
character of Dr. Mason, and described his work, both as mission-
ary and as scholar. He had, in some of his visits to America,
been present aud offered communications at the Society's meetings,
and had repeatedly, and down to a very recent period, furnished
articles to its Journal. His principal scholarly works are a volume
of various information on Burmah, and an edition of Kaccayana's
Pali grammar, which forms a part of the series of the Bibliotheea
lndica, published at Calcutta. He was born in 1799.

The correspondence of the half-year was presented, and some
extracts from it were read. Dr. C. II. Brigham, of Aun Arbor,
Mich., had sent an account of the finding of a little manuscript
roll, in Ethiopie, on the premises of the Michigan Central Railway
at Jackson Junction, apparently dropped there by some traveller.
He added a full description of the MS., which is evidently not very
old, is well preserved aud neatly written, and illustrated with sev-
eral pictures. It is a liturgy.

Rev. T. C. Trowbridge, missionary in Asiatic Turkey, being
present, addressed the Society on the college of Western learning

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at B ottto //, J/</y, 1874. lxxxi

now sought to be established at Aintab; and also spoke of the many
and rich opportunities in that region for antiquarian research.
Communications were now called for and presented.

1. On a Greek Inscription from near Beirut, published in the
Second Statement of the American Palestine Exploration Society,
October, 1873, by Prof. F. P. Brewer, of Columbia, S. C.

The following is proposed as a revision of the last six lines. The .preceding
part of the inscription is very faulty, but seems to give the name of a Phoenician
who obtained the sovereignty of Heliapolis.

3 Atya fidX eKTe'/Juv [lpy'\ haaa vdy fpovrt

6 QotviKy avrfj, boov koi r6Ae £py[pv\y

7 ["Affjrrofc et'Jvof/]*/ [A]a$ ^ya ^avfta r[t?*mrev]

8 [ 'Q]c [«]ard tuv ahoirk'kijv laov tOque jiiaov

9 '(typa dLrfvenkw: 6fia?.^v oSov kiravbovrec
10 Qevyufiev ;r;a/£7r[i7]c injxyg 6fio[t]ir?.av[i~\Tfg.

Translation. ' "While very promptly executing whatever works he devised for
Phoenicia herself, so great a work even as the following did he finish from good
will to the city, a great wonder to the people, when down from the peaks midway
he made an even path, in order that by using a road that was level throughout
we may avoid the height of painful wandering.'

The letters in brackets are the only ones that vary from the published text
which in most of those places was " recognized with difficulty." We have changed
ZO to AS (7), and EI to H (10), and have inserted ET (7). K (8). and the iotas in
lines 7 and 10.

The measure is the elegiac distich. The only irregularity in the last four lines
would be removed if we could read k^avvovreg at the end of line 9.

The road which our inscription commemorates seems to be the one referred to
in a well known Latin inscription in the vicinity, which says: M. Aurdius Anioiiinws
montibvs inminentibus Licoflumini caesis viam dclatuvit.

2. On the use of Si in Hebrew with Negative Particles, by Prof.
C. M. Mead, of Andover, Mass.

The object of this investigation was to ascertain, if possible, by what means
the Hebrew language distinguished a partial from a universal negation. To this
end an attempt was made to make a complete list of all the passages in which
73 is used with negative particles, and to classify them according to the
position of S3 in the sentence, and according to its being definite or indefinite.
Noldius, in his C&ncordaiitiae Particularum, adduces only ninety-three passages,
dividing them into two classes : those in which S3 precedes, and those in which
Sj follows, the negative. He finds three passages, Num. xxiii. 13, Deut. xviii. 1,
and 1 Sam. xiv. 24, in which the negation is designated as partial. But the two
latter are as clear instances of universal negation as any that could be found.
Num. xxiii. 13 is the only passage referred to by Kwald and Gesenius as exhibit-
ing a partial negation, though they make the impression that there is something
like a consistent principle governing the matter — Gesenius affirming (or implying)
that, when S3 is made definite, the negation is partial ; Ewald, that the negation
is partial when 73 is equivalent to totus. as distinguished from omnis.

The result of the investigation is that both of these representations are inaccu-
rate, and that there is no law of construction determining the question. Of the 32G
cases examined, only six present unequivocal instances of partial negation. Of
these six, it is true that five occur in sentences in which S3 is definite ; but the
vast majority of instances in which it is definite exhibit universal negations ; and
in Lev. xvi. 2, where it is indefinite, the negation is clearly partial. The other
five sentences are Num. xxiii. 13, Josh. vii. 3 (bis), I Kings xi. 13, 39. Of these
six cases, three are found with Sk, and three with kS, connected with S3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ixxxii American Oriental Society :

There is, however, a class of sentences in which the negatiou cannot be reganfc-d
as strictly partial or strictly universal, but rather as a negation of a univer^i
:iffirmation. E. g. Gen. viii. 21, "I will not again smite any more every this,:
living." Here it is declared that there will not be another universal deluge;
whether some or none will hereafter be destroyed, is left undetermined. Of such
passages about twenty-tive may be found, though it is manifest that the line of
distinction between such negations and either of the two other clashes must be
somewhat indeterminate. A few of them border upon the partial negation : viz.
Num. xi. 14, Eccl. vii. 21, Is. lxv. 8, I Chron. xxix. 34.

It might have been anticipated that, as in English, a partial negation would be
most unambiguously expressed by prefixing the negative particle immediately to
the word denoting universality, instead of having the verb intervene between
them. But, singularly enough, there are no instances of this position of the words
in all the Hebrew Scriptures. The two apparent exceptions (I Kings xi. 3S> and
Ps. cxv. 17) are only apparent; for, in both, the construction is elliptical, and a
verb is to be supplied. It is true, however, that in the analogous construction of
tfS with ohty (usually oSl^S |, whenever (as happens in four passages) the negative
immediately precedes DITJtS, the combination has the meaning 'not always:
whereas, out of the thirty cases in which these words are separated by a verb, in
twenty-seven the combination unmistakably means 'never;' and in only one of
them (Lam. iii. 31) does it express a partial negation unequivocally. One can
hardly resist the conclusion that in the spoken language the same distinction may
have existed in regard to ^3 ; but, as the matter now stands, we can only say that,
so far as the extant literature is concerned, the general law is that 12 with nega-
tives expresses a universal negation ; the exceptions are ascertained only by th*
sense of the passage or of the context.

3. On the Chinese sieu as Constellations, by Prof. W. D. Whit-
ney, of New Haveu.

Prof. Whitney spoke on this subject somewhat as follows:

By an oversight of the learned editor of the new edition of Colebrooke's Essays
(Prof. Cowell, of Cambridge), I And myself there quoted (vol. iL, pp. 281, 282 1 a?
favoring Biot's opinions respecting the history of the Chinese system of sieu, and
the derivation from it of the corresponding system of Hindu nakshcUras. The
quotation is from the notes to the Surya-Siddhanta, published in the Society's
Journal, voL vi., I860. Four years later than that however, in a special article
on the subject, printed in the eighth volume of the Journal (first part, 1864), 1 ex-
plicitly and entirely rejected Biot's view, and did my best to prove its untenability
from the data which he himself furnished — as it seemed to me, with satisfactory
success. I am led to revert once more to the subject, partly in order to reiterate
my confidence in my later argument and its result; but chiefly in order to call
attention to certain sources )f information, not then accessible to me, which leave
no further doubt or question respecting the matter.

Biot everywhere defines and describes the sieu as single determinative stars,
selected by the ancient Chinese as standards of reference for observations on
other stars, because, being situated near the equator of B. C. 2350, they nearly
coincided in right ascension with the principal cireumpolar stars, which the still
earlier Chinese had been in the habit of observing with particular attention. So
far as I know, he lets slip only at a single point so much as a hint that any one
had ever thought of the xku as constellations. At the foot, namely, of his second
table, in the series of articles in the Journal des Savants of 1840 (and repeated in
that of 1861), he gives the meaning of some of the stew-names, nearly all of
which would fit groups better than single stars, while of one he says : " the Chi-
nese character for Pi means ' the snare ' (le fitet), which is the figurative designa-
tion of the Hyades." I drew attention to this as a pregnant indication in my later
article (Journal, viii. 4H), and remarked that, in view of the Indian and Arabian
aspects of the system, it might be dangerous to assume that, when an early Chinese
authority names a sieu, only the single star can be meant, which the later astron-
omers know by that name ; or even that the division of the heavens, where one is
implied, is to be reckoned from star to star, and not, as in the other two systems.
by simple proximity to the asterism named. And authorities which I am now able

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1874. Ixxxiii

to cite raise this suspicion to a certainty. Thus, in the first place, Gaubil, the
founder of European knowledge of Chinese astronomy, alwa.vs speaks of the sieu
as "constellations," and here and there defines the groups of which one or another
is composed. So, for example, in Soueiet's collection, vol. iii., p. :?2 : •* One sees still
that the constellation Fang [fifteenth sieu, /*, d, tt, p Scorpionis] is so well pointed
out by the number of four stars of which it is composed, and of which the bright
one (la Lucide) is the chief." Again, M. Am.-Sedillot, the eminent Orientalist
and mathematician, in his Mtmoires pour servir d VHistoire Comparee des Sciences
Mathimatiquts chtz les Grtcs tt les Orientoujr (second part, Paris, 1849), gives the
whole series of groups, and repeatedly points out that, " when the determining
stars, which have suggested so many considerations, so many calculations, so
many lofty hypotheses, are restored to the constellations of which they form a
part, and which the Chinese themselves have adopted, we see reappear as if by
enchantment the various parts of the Arab system, and are obliged at once to
acknowledge that we have here really the twenty -eight lunar stations, and by no
means divisions that are independent of the movements of our satellite." And
once more, in a quite recent and independent work, by Mr. John Williams of Lon-
don, entitled Observations of Comets, Extracted from the Chinese Annals (4to,
London. 1871), the author, in the course of his Introductory Remarks on the Chi-
nese astronomy in general, expresses himself as follows (p. xxi.): "the Chinese
divide the visible heaven into thirty-one portions ; twenty-eight of these may be
termed the stellar divisions, and receive their names from, or are determined by,
an asterism, generally forming the central or principal one of the division. The
determination by an asterism having the same name has been preferred by me to
that by any particular star in that asterism, as being, to the best of my judgment,
more in accordance with the Chinese mode of proceeding ; in which, as far as my
experience goes, the asterism alone is mentioned, and not any particular star in
that asterism." And to the same effect later (p. xxvi. ). Mr. Williams's definition
of the asterismal groups accords quite closely with that of M. Sedillot. He
does, indeed, report also the series of determining stars ; but he gives them as
44 according to Biot " — apparently, as finding no more ancient or genuinely Chinese
authority on which to rely for them. And in the appendix to the work he presents
a series of little star-charts, taken from native sources, in which each asterism is
set down, in company with the other groups belonging to that division of the
heavens to which the asterism gives name — the dh ision being, as in the Hindu
system, the circumjacent region, though not an equil twenty-eighth part of the
ecliptic.

In these statements, now, is evidently implied the complete and irretrievable
overthrow of Biot's view as to the sieu and their history ; it has not a single leg
left to stand upon, if the sieu are constellations and not determinants. And I
find it extremely hard to understand how a savant who has shown elsewhere such
simple and entire good faith in his own expositions and reasonings, often himself
putting into our hands the means of refuting his errors, should have allowed him-
self at this point to ignore and omit a very important part of the evidence bearing
upon his case. That he did not believe himself to be acting in good faith here
also, I have not the least disposition to suggest; but great indeed must have been
his prepossession, to warp his judgment to such an extent. The whole subject was
one upon which he had an intense personal feeling, conceiving that his statements
and arguments had been treated with undue disregard and disrespect by the Indi-
anists, and that he had no justice to expect at their hands ; and he was so under
the dominion of preconceived opinion as to be incapable of receiving new light.
His view of the Hindu system of nakshatras was wholly and perversely wrong,
and even in his articles upon the Surya-Siddlianta he passed without the least
notice alike the general (provisional) assent to his theory which it contains, and
its specific objections to certain points in that theory. It must, I think, be con-
ceded that, whatever may be iu other respects his deserts as to the history of Chi-
nese astronomy — of that I am no competent judge— his discussion of this particular
institution has absolutely no value ; so far as it is concerned, he has justified the
worst of the suspicions expressed by Weber, which he resented so highly ; he has
added one more to the long list of those able mathematicians who have shown a
disabling incapacity to discuss questions involving historical and documentary as
well as scientific evidence.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ixxxiv American Oriental Society :

It is greatly to be wished that some competent Chinese scholar would take up
the sieu as Weber took up the nakshatras in his essays published in the Transac-
tions of the Berlin Academy for 1860 and 1861, making a Like thorough exhibition
and discussion of their character and aspect as exhibited in the Chinese literature.
Although we have no right to hope that it would cast valuable light on the ultimate
origin of the institution, it would at least lay a solid foundation, such as is now
painfully wanting, for the study of this important element in the ancient Chinese-
science.

In connection with this subject, it may be well to call attention for a moment
to the untrustworthy manner in which nearly all questions relating to the ancient
Hindu astronomy and its connection with chronology are treated by Lassen, even
in the second edition of his great work, the Indische Alter thwruthunde. He is ap-
parently too unfamiliar with astronomical discussions to be able to use the various
materials which have been published on the subject, distinguishing the false from
the true, the unsound deductions from the sound. But he is also unreasonably
careless; as this example, among others, will show. "It is," he says (i. 9831,
"a remarkable circumstance, that the description of the equator in the Surya-
Siddhanta corresponds to the year 2.'$50 or 2357 B. C. How this phenomenon is* to
be explained, I must leave to the astronomers." And he refers, as authority for
the astonishing statement, to the Society's Journal, vi 467 and viii. 157 (where
doubtless, for 157, we are to read .i7). But as the Siddhanta does not descrilv
any equator, and as there is nothing on the two pages quoted, or anywhere else
in the Journal, in the most distant manner intimating that it does, or connecting
anything in the treatise with the date specified, the astronomers will do well to
decline the task thus put upon them.

Again, I objected, some years ago (Journal, viii. 68, note), to Lassen's assertion
in his first edition that Colebrooke had t4 shown *' (darqethan) the Arabs to have
received their lunar zodiac from the Hindus; now, in the second (i. 979), he de-
clares Colebrooke to have "proved" (naehgcu:iesen) the same thing. The fact i?
simply that Colebrooke, after really "showing" or "proving" the Hindu and Arab
zodiacs to be varying forms of one system (a fact which had been doubted or
denied before), declared that he thought it more probable that the Arab system
came from the Hindu than the contrary; and, though he later repeated the same
opinion in a more confident tone, he never entered into any argument upon the
matter. He was not in a position successfully to discuss and solve the question :
and his mere expression of opinion, in virtue of the great additional light since
cast on it, especially by the bringing in of the Chinese sieu as third term in the
comparison, has no authority whatever.

Once more, Lassen pronounces (i. 607, note) the accuracy of Pratt's determina-
tion of the date of the Jyotisha as 1181 B. C. to be beyond doubt or question.
This is perhaps less to be wondered at. Considering the rarity and preciousness of
a definite date in ancient Hindu history, we must not expect to put down this one,
with however good argument. For two or three generations longer, at least, it
will continue to be claimed, either that the date of the Jyotisha, by scientific dem-
onstration, is precisely 1181 B. C, as determined by Jones and Pratt, or that it is
precisely 1391 B. C, as determined by Davis and Colebrooke. It will not be
possible to make people see that both these dates are just equally valuable—
or worthless. Yet the argument lies in a nutshell. In about the sixth century
after Christ, having learned scientific astronomy from the Greeks, the Hindu?
made observations on the positions of 28 stars, as measured from the vernal equi-
nox of that period. These observations are so coarse and inexact as to show an
extreme discordance of fȣ' from one another, when tested by our modern methods:
and each one of them, used as a starting-point for chronological calculations, will
give a different result, the extreme results being about four centuries apart. Daris
and Colebrooke took one star of the twenty-eight, and it brought them, they
thought, to 1391 B. C. : Pratt took another, and it brought him to 1181 B. C. : still
others might have been taken which would have given as result 940 B. C. : and
the rest would fall in here and there between these extreme dates. And behind
this uncertainty of four centuries there remains still the fact that the attempted
measurements are from the equinox of the 6th century of our era, which we have
no reason for regarding as having determined the asterismal division of fifteen or
twenty centuries earlier — even if there had been any precise system of division

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

_4>

'A^

> -~

y

X;

°^

^^^

1

J

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1874. lxxxv

then, which there was not, and coiild not have been. The Jyotisha is in reality
utterly worthless as determining any date in Hindu history, and the sooner Indian
scholars come to recognize the fact, and cease to lean on such, a broken reed, the
better will it be for their study.

4. On the Phoenician Inscriptions in the Cyprus Collection of
Di Cesnola, by Rev. W. H. Ward, of New York.

Among the objects collected by Consul Di Cesnola in Cyprus, and now deposited
in the Metropolitan Museum in New York, are a number of fragments of marble
engraved with Phoenician letters, and a very few earthenware jars with brief Phoe-
nician inscriptions. One of the latter, and most of the former, have been published
in fac-simile by Dr. Paul Schroder, author of the Grammar 6? the Phoenician Lan-
guage. They had previously been examined by Prof. Rodiger, but his copies do
not seem to be exact, and I have not seen them. My object is simply to add a
few brief inscriptions not already given by Schroder.

As described by him, the two larger inscriptions are on cubes of marble. Others
are on the flat upper rim of marble basins, a foot or two in diameter, which were
placed as votive offerings in a temple at ditium. The inscription contained the
date, being the regnal year of the king Melchiyathon, or Pumiyathon, his son who
reigned in the fourth century B. C, and the latter of whom is identified with the
Pymathos of history. The inscriptions are generally but fragments, of a very few
letters, and add almost nothing to history. The god Resheph is confirmed.

Schroder's "No. 15" should receive the addition of a fragment (Fig. 1) con-
taining the two letters conjectured by Schroder, namely, *p, giving the whole
TO* mp^D] ' May Melkarth bless.'

On a fragment of the polished rim of a gypsum bowl is found the following in-
scription (Pig. 2), not given by Schroder. [V]l*fl TO l^fo] 'King of Citium
and Idalium.' It is remarkable for nothing but for the delicacy of the inscription,
which "is simply scratched with a point on the polished gypsum, and is as perfect
as when first made. It is an extremely fine specimen for giving the exact shape
of the letters in their thinnest outline. We notice here very distinctly the peculiar
shape of % found also on the long inscription (Di 0. 1 ), given wrong by Schroder
in his plate, and differing sharply from any form given by Schroder in his Gram-
mar. It is made with the right hand perpendicular line completely disconnected
from the other two. The fact that the same form is found in Di C. 1 is evidence
that this also belongs to the reign of Pumiyathon. In the inscription of Melchiya-
thon we have the ordinary shape.

On the rim of another bowl we find the following (Fig. 3) :

[mpl^D ]tX?vh "llXlb] 'To my lord Eshmun Melcarth.'
Besides these, there are new inscriptions on three earthen jars or vases. The in-
scription on all of these is written carelessly and baked in the clay. That given in
fig. 4 is */p2, ' my master,' or possibly a mere form of ' Baal.' It is on a jar over
two feet high, ending in a point below. Fig. 5 represents a jar of similar size and
shape, with an inscription in three lines, illegible in the sixth letter of the first
line, and with the fourth letter of the same line doubtful. It reads as follows :

| ytXt j JJV I *Thp2 * Baal- presented by Shimei.'

The name of the god is not determined, and appears to differ from any of the
familiar forms of Baal.

The inscription on the very beautiful vase given in Fig. 6 has its first letter
partly covered by the lower circle of the ornamentation. I am utterly unable to
give a satisfactory or even a plausible reading of it.

5. On the Pseud o-Phcenici an Inscription of Brazil, by Kev. W.
H. Ward.

Dr. Ward added to his preceding paper a few remarks on the so-called Phoeni-
cian inscription of Brazil, speaking nearly as follows :

A year or two ago. the Brazilian papers reported the discovery at a place called
Parahyba of a Phoenician inscription. It has since been published in fac-simile

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

1 x xxvi - 1 mericatt Oriental Society :

in the number for April 23, 1874, of the Portuguese illustrated paper, 0 Nor*
Mundo, published in New York ; the fac-simile is accompanied by a Portuguese
translation. It is so inherently improbable that a Phoenician inscription should
appear in Brazil, that we are justified in receiving this one with great skepticism.
An examination of this inscription does not relieve it of the suspicion of forgery.
The language is not that of other Phoenician inscriptions, but is a mixture of He-
brew and Ghaldee. The appearance of fW/Jfl DJV'Tp is alone enough to condemn
it as a forgery, this form being evidently copied from Gesenius, as a restoration
from Plautus. The true Phoenician would be nJ^Jfl OJT^. Such forms as rm3
and yOU are inadmissible, and the appearance of the word for 'ten ' in two forms.
Ktfy and XJ?, is very suggestive of a careless Jewish forger. The occasion of
this forgery may be conjectured to be the bitter contest going on for some time
between the clergy and the freemasons of Brazil, whom the priests have excom-
municated, and to whom they have denied Christian burial. It is not unlikely
that some unscrupulous person should have concocted this inscription, recording
that King Hiram's subjects entered Brazil, for the purpose of connecting the land
with the reputed founder of freemasonry.

At this point the Society took a recess, reassembling at 2 o'clock
p. m., when the reading of communications was resumed.

6. On Recent Discussions as to the Phonetic Character of the
Sanskrit Anmnmt, by Prof. \Y. X). Whitney.

The nasa) utterance called the anusvdra, Prof. Whitney said, is an element in the
Sanskrit system of articulate sounds as to the value of which there has prevailed
some doubt and difference of opinion. Was it a nasal tone accompanying the
utterance of a vowel, a nasalization of the vowel, as in the ordinary French pro-
nunciation of en. on, un t or was it a distinct nasal utterance following the vowel?
This difference of opinion began with the Hindu grammarians themselves. Of the
four Praticakhyas, one, that to the Atharvan, takes the former view, acknowledg-
ing only nasalized vowels in its alphabet : another, the TaittirJya-Praticakhya, is
uncertain and inconsistent ; it acknowledges an anusvdra as independent alpha-
betic element, but when it should come to prescribe it as occurring in certain sit-
uations, it prescribes the nasalized vowel instead, and merely adds that some
teach a nasal utterance after the vowel instead of in and with it. The other two
acknowledge both nasalized vowel and separate nasal, but teach the latter in
the great majority of cases : the Yajasaneyi-Praticakhya, again, mentioning au-
thorities that hold the other view. The predominance of authority, it is seen, is
on the side of the anusvdra as appendage instead of accompaniment to the vowel.
And this view is adopted by Panini, and so becomes the orthodox doctrine of later
Hindu grammatical science.

Of course, now, this difference of opinion may be the result of an actual dif-
ference of pronunciation of the element in question in various parts of India, or
schools of Vedic study. But. as I hold, it is equally obvious and undeniable that
it might be the result of a different apprehension and theoretical explanation of
the same utterance — such as is not infrequently met with among the Hindu pho-
netists on other points also ; not to speak of the differences even among the best
modern European scholars, as regards, for instance, the distinction between surd
and sonant consonants, or the question whether the nasals n and m are explosives
or not. Nor are wo driven to accept as conclusive on the subject the final unan-
imity of the later Hindu grammarians ; in the ever- increasing artificiality of the
scholastic pronunciation of a dead language, it is by no means impossible that a
false theory should finally prevail, and should come to govern the later utterance :
there are striking illustrations of this, as I think, in other parts of the Hindu
system.

In a note on a passage of the Taittiriya-Pratic&khya (ii. 30: p. 6G ff.), I set forth
the discordance of the authorities, pointed out the alternative ways in which it
could be explained, and, without assuming to decide the case, indicated my provis-
ional inclination to regard the discordance as duo to a difference of apprehension
rather than of utterance, and, as between the two views, to side with that of tie

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May* 1874. Ixxxvii

Atharva-Praticakhya. And this, mainly for the reason that the Hindus give no
intelligible and acceptable explanation of the anuxvdra as a separate element, and
that it appeared to lack analogies in the usage of other languages ; in which, on
the other hand, nasalized vowels as consequences of the deconsonantizing (so to
speak) of a nasal mute are not infrequent. I expressed no absolute opinion, and
left the matter fully open to be reargued by any one else who could show the
probabilites to lie otherwise than as 1 viewed them.

A French scholar, M. Bergaigne, takes up the subject in the Menwires de la
Societe de. Linguvstique (ii. 'M ff.), and looks at it in a very different manner. The
suggestion that the wide disagreement of the oldest Hindu authorities entitles us
to sit in judgment over them, inquiring whether or not they were taking discord-
ant views of the same thing, before proceeding to decide which view was correct,
or whether both were so, he rejects ; or rather, he utterly ignores it ; it does not
enter into his argument at all. He speaks of the Atharva-Praticakhya as " con-
founding " the true anusvdra with the nasal vowel ; he rules the Taittiriya-Prati-
oakhya out l>ecause of its " inconsistency " — as if this inconsistency were not an im-
portant item in the case ; he curtly denounces my implication that those who taught
the separate anusvdra may perhaps have really uttered a nasal vowel, as an unau-
thorized extension of the usage of the Atharva-Praticakhya to the other treatises.
My exposition of the three possible alternatives, and guarded expression of pref-
erence for one of them, he describes as catching a glimpse of the true solution, but
strangely preferring the violent measure of blotting out the anusvdra from the
list of Sanskrit sounds !

When a man is so dogmatically confident as this, and (as I think I may claim)
so unfair to his predecessors, he may properly be expected to make out, for his
justification, a very strong case iu favor of his own view. But I cannot see that
M. Bergaigne does this at all. When he proposes to "demonstrate'' that the
anusvdra is nothing but a nasal resonance following the vowel, he also proposes
to do it by quotations from the Hindu grammarians; and he proceeds to cite a
whole series of passages from the Rik-Praticakhya ; most uselessly, as every one
knew before what theory that treatise takes and (nearly) consistently upholds.
He hints, indeed, at •' a hundred" others; but we see nothing of them in his pages.
He also has his physical explanation to offer ; but it is so blindly and inaccurately
stated as to be unusable. Thus, he speaks of the nasal resonance as accompanying
the pronunciation of a nasal consonant, " in the same manner as the pronunciation
of the other sonant consonants is accompanied by a resonance of the glottis:" as
if a glottal resonance were not necessary also to the utterance of every nasal. He
says the nasal resonance is not necessarily bound to the nasal consonants and
vowels, but may be heard by itself, as in humming, or in the n of English mvtfon ;
while in fact these two are different and distinctly consonantal sounds. Finally,
he refers to the usage of certain provincial districts of France, where the syllables
which in ordinary French have nasalized vowels are claimed to have instead a
nasal addition to the vowel. This is really interesting and important, and the
fact may not be left out of account in any future discussion of the subject. But it
is, to my apprehension, the only valuable item which M. Bergaigne brings to the
discussion, and it is very far from warranting the superior tone in which he makes
his statements and decisions.

In a later note (p. 199 ff.), M. Bergaigne lets us see more clearly what his phys-
ical theory really is. A closure of the mouth-organs in the k or g position, with
nasal resonance, produces the w/7-sound, down to the lowest point where k or g can
be made. But, he holds, a nasal may be made still farther back and down, because
the veil of the palate, when dropped to unclose the nasal passages, can reach and
make contact with the base of the tongue at a point yet lower. And a nasal reso-
nance thus produced, having the opening of the mouth cavity, and the auxiliary buc-
cal resonance, reduced to their very lowest terms, would be the pure nasal resonance
with which we are to identify the anusvdra. The obvious objection here is that
the sound thus produced, as implying a closure of the mouth-organs, would still
be a nasal mute — and so, as M. Bergaigne claims, essentially an explosive sound —
though one to which there was no corresponding ordinary sonant and surd. And
any closure of the organs is, to my mind, inadmissible in an account of the unmvdra.
The essential character of this sound consists in its assimilation to the consonant
that follows it. For example, a final m before a mute of any class becomes the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Ixxzviii American Oriental Society :

nasal of that class ; before a semi-vowel (except r), it becomes, the Hindus say, the
corresponding nasal semi-vowel : that is to say. an emission with nasal resonance
in the same position of the organs in which sonant emission without such resonance
makes the semi-vowel; there is no difference of articulating position between
the anusvdra-like element and its successor. And I, for one. am not jet ready to
believe that, before r and the spirants, there is a definite position of closure taken
up ; I hold it much more likely that in saying ah fa, ansa, etc., for example, the
organs shut only from the open a to the comparatively close sibilant ; and that
the nasal element, thus balked of its full utterance, is converted into a nasal in-
fection of the vowel — one which, perhaps, so increases toward the end of the
vowel or cleaves so especially to its concluding part, as to give the impression of a
following element. 1 do not undertake now, any more than before, to decide the
question dogmatically ; but I am not at all satisfied by M. Bergaigne's theory,
and think that he immensely overrates the value of his contribution to the discus-
sion : he really does little more than record his individual vote in favor of one
of the alternative solutions which I formerly proposed.

To M. Bergaigne's first brief article I sent a brief reply, which was published
in a later number of the same Memoires (ii. 194 ff.); but it was accompanied with
extended comments by him, which seem to me to show the same excessive esti-
mate of the strength of his position, and inability to understand and do justice to
mine, which appeared in the original article. I have therefore thought it worth
while to make this summary restatement of the case.

7. On Names for the Heart, Liver, and Lungs, in Various Lan
guages, by Mr. J. Hammond Trumbull, of Hartford, Conn.

The Algonkin Indians designated their inferiors and servants by the epithet
Pants, 'lung-y,' or 'all lungs.' Several tribes, not nearly connected, and speaking
different languages, became known to Europeans and Anglo-Americans by this
contemptuous appellation — now commonly written Pawnees. The figure of
speech by which the name of the lungs marks depreciation or contempt is not ex-
clusively Algonkin, or even American. We have in the Dakota cha'ghu, 'lungs/
chaghu'ka, 'a fool;' in the Arapoho, ikun'a, 'lungs, lights,' kuwmitfut, 'cowardly;1
in the Kechua of Peru, surca, ''lungs,' surcanak, 'a coward.' In the (African)
Mpongwi, ibobo means both 'lung' and 'coward;' and, in the Lapp, we seem to
find the same figure in keppa, 'pulmo,' and krppes. 'pauper.'

Similar agreement may be observed in the metaphoric uses to which the names
of the heart and the liver have been put, in the speech of widely separated
peoples. The origin of such metaphors must lie far back in language. They
are, some of them, older than any known language. They do not, certainly, help
us find our way to primeval unity of speech, but they are of interest by their
suggestions of undiscovered laws of intellectual progress, under which speech has
risen from objects of sense to conceptions of the supersensuous, from the material
to the immaterial.

The association with the lungs of a notion of inferiority seems to have been
established by observation of the contrast presented by the liver and lungs or
4 lights ' of animals. The former is heavy, compact, and dark colored ; the latter,
light, spongy, and pale. The liver was good for food, the lungs were of small
value. The American Indians, who, at their feasts, distributed the portions with
strict regard to the rank of guests, gave the lungs to the last and lowest. With
the liver came to be associated ideas of strength, constancy, activity, courage ;
the lungs became types of weakness, levity, inactivity, cowardice. The former
was made the seat of the passions and desires by which men come to mastery.
The latter were mere servants of the body. In most European languages the
lungs take their name from their lightness. The English 'lights' and 'lungs' are
etymologically identical, and ' laggard ' probably is nearly related to both.

The liver has very generally been regarded as the type of the passions and
animal nature of man. The Orientals ascribed to it the principal agency in making
the blood. Hence it became (Hebr.) 'the precious,' man's 'honor,' and 'glory/
This belief may be traced in many languages of the Old world. It is also found
in the Polynesian, and in some American languages.

In the speech of almost all nations the heart has been recognized as the life-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1 874. lxxxix

center and source of vital energy. " Out of it are the issues of life." Its name
has everywhere been transferred, 1. to whatever is central, or inmost ; and, 2. to
the moral nature and disposition. To the Semitic and Aryan philosophy, it was
the seat of mental activity, as well as of physical energy : of all that belongs to
the inner life, to that which perceives, thinks, wills, and desires.

Illustrations, from eastern and western languages, were given by the writer,
showing how largely these names have contributed to the vocabulary. In the
Chinese, for instance, of the 44,500 words in Kang-hi's Imperial Dictionary, 1097
begin with (or are formed on) the radical sin, 'heart.'

8. On the Exegesis and Criticism of the Old Testament, by
Prof. Felix Adler^of Ithaca, N. Y.

Prof. Adler began by remarking that, apart from the high interest which it
may claim on its own account, the study of the Hebrew Bible commands the
attention of Orientalists because of its bearings on the history of those ancient
nations with whom the Israelites came into contact. A review was then given of
some of the principal theories which have obtained in Germany during this
century concerning the composition and authenticity of the " Books of Moses."
The names of prominent critics : of Vater, Astruc, De Wette, Ewald, Tuch, Hup-
feld, Boemer, Graf, and others, were mentioned, and their individual services
briefly referred to. It was shown how the methods of studying the Old Testa-
ment, at first somewhat loose and defective, gradually gained in consistency and
accuracy. The different accounts of the creation, certain difficulties in the history
of Joseph, and other conflicting statements, led to the assumption that the Book
of Genesis is a collection of fragments bound together by a single hand. A more
plausible hypothesis represented Moses in the light of a compiler, who had before
him a number of ancient documents, from one or the other of which he selected
for the purpose of his narrative, as the occasion seemed to warrant. Again, it
was explained that the prevalence of different names of the Deity (Elohim and
Jehovah), in many passages of Genesis, is not to be ascribed to a difference in
the authorship of these passages, but is rather due to a distinct meaning attaching
to each of the divine names. The same author might naturally change his termi-
nology to suit the subject in hand. Accepting the fact that several authors had
borne a part in the composition of the Pentateuch, Tuch distinguished a single
principal record, to which later additions had been added as supplements. The
main distinctions arrived at by Hupfeld have come to be widely recognized. He
divides the writers of the " Torah" into a first and a second Elohist and a Jehovist
An editor is required to combine these records. The Book of Deuteronomy has its
separate author, which would make five ; and a sixth is added, to whom is ascribed
the work of joining Deuteronomy and a great part of Joshua to the Tetrateuch.
Boemer endeavored to explain contradictory enactments and narrations, by refer-
ring them for their origin respectively to the hostile kingdoms of Israel and
Judah. He had thus called attention to an instrument of criticism which was
largely and very successfully employed in the writings of Geiger. Graf sought to
disprove that the laws of Leviticus are older than those of Deuteronomy. He
labors to show that the former are inapplicable to any state of things such as had
existed in Israel before the period of the Babylonian captivity, and therefore
fixes their date after the time of the exile. The important results which the vast
learning and critical acumen of Geiger have achieved must be passed by for the
present. His work can be so little appreciated without an intimate knowledge of
the later writings of the Jews, that a detailed discussion of it must be reserved
for some future occasion. Those who take a special interest in the progressive
development of biblical exegesis will find a brief history of the modern schools of
criticism in the prefatory postscript which Merx has added to the new edition of
Tuch's " Genesis."

As far as negative results are concerned, we may safely say that the exegesis of
the Hebrew Bible rests on an assured basis. With respect to positive assertions,
being so far removed from the past that its reconstruction is not wholly possible,
we should learn to be cautious. On comparing the dates fixed by two eminent
scholars for the composition of the second Psalm, we find a difference of not less
than a thousand years. The remarks made by a certain modern critic concerning

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xv American Oriental Society:

the 118th Psalm also furnish a good instance of the absurdities to which as
exaggerated attempt at accuracy may lead. This Psalm, he tells us, refer? to tfe
conquest of Idumea by Alexander Jannseus, who forced his new subject* to c:s-
hrace Judaism, much against their inclination. The I Oth verse he accordtn?h
translates, "in the name of Go 1 I trill circumcise theniT' What we warn now >.
that the study of the Bible be directed less to literary and more to historic
research. Nt ither the people nor their religion sprang full-grown into existence,
but both passed through a long process of growth and development It should l«e
our endeavor to recover the traces of this process as far as we may. The text ol
which we rely is on the whole excellent and we owe thanks to those who copied
the manuscripts, that they were scrupulous enough to preserve even the error-
that had crept in, instead of correcting them with such light as they had. Tl*e
recognition and rectification of these errors requires that careful attention «v.l-
tinue to be given to the text. Prof. Adler threw in here a few suggested emenda-
tions. In the 1 5th chapter of Exodus, the verses 1 1 and 1 2 have changed place*,
it being quite clear that " the earth swallowed them " corresponds to •* the sea
covered them'' in verse 10. Psalm lxxi. 3 should be corrected according u>
Psalm xxxi. 4 (3d verse in Hebrew), and shoidd read btth mezudoth ; the mistake
occurring from improperly dividing the line into words. In Job xxxiiL 21, a state
of groat emaciation is described. "His bones were dry, they were not s**»n." i>
hardly an adequate expression. A better rendering, taking raafi for ravah. in
which sense it is sometimes used, would be, 4this bones were dry because they
had no drink." A similar rendering of the passage has already been given by the
distinguished Orientalist M. Derenbourg.

Prof. Adler concluded with discussing certain points in the history of develop-
ment of the Hebrew race and its institutions, especially the growth of monotbfi>iQ
out of an earlier idolatry ; and he offered a conjectural explanation of the story
of Achan, in Joshua.

This communication elicited remarks from more than one of the other memliers
present, in criticism of and dissent from some of the author's views.

9. On the Identity of the Hebrew Shaddai with the Egyptian
Sati or Set, by Prof. J. W. Jenks, of Newton ville, Mass.

10. On Muhammadan Art — a Translation from Dr. Car1
Schnaase's (resohichte. der biUJenden Kilnste, with Remarks and
Criticisms, by Prof. E. E. Salisbury, of New Haven.

The intention of this paper was, especially, to assist in penetrating into ih*
genius of Islam ; and. although the German author must be charged with an over-
subtilty in some of his generalizations, in explanation of art-forms, and seen*
sometimes not to have duly discriminated, for the purpose of a just estimate of
the bearing and object of Muhammad's own teaching, between primitive Islam
and later developments of the system, yet there is much that is well-founded and
instructive in his portraiture of the spiritual condition of Muhammadan nations, as
such.

For example, he points out, as a fundamental fact, that rigid monotheism, or ab-
solutism of Deity, the system of unconditional subjection of human personality, i*
not educating, but serves only as an exterior covering, " beneath which the wild
power of the passions, and sensuality, runs its course all the more ruinously. *
Our author, however, justly recognizes that the principle of subjective freedom
was asserted and operative in the earlier days of Islam, while fatalism (a reaction
it may be suggested in passing, against that quest of second causes which drew
the philosophers of Islam away from orthodoxy) was a later development.

Hut the feeling for nature could not be wholly suppressed ; aud so, by the ** psy-
chological law that, whore there is a one-sided predominance of abstraction. fanc\
is wilder, more turbulent, more violent," it manifested itself in " inclination for
magical effect, for the wonderful and the unnatural,'' as well as for what is "ele-
gant, light, and graceful "' — qualified by, and contrasted with, a massive simplicity,
in keeping with the doctrine of the divine unity, and of absolute predestination.

A form-creating power is wanting to Muhammadan s ; as appears in their poetry,
in which " either mere abstraction of thought prevails, or an evanescent, self-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1 874. xei

pleasing sensuousness;" and in their music, which lacks the indispensable con-
ditions of musical perfection, in freedom from mortifying constraint, giving play
to the imagination, together with a pleasure in beauty which does not take the
form of spiritually deadening sensuous appetite.

Consequently, as respects architecture — the only properly formative art open to
their efforts — if their edifices, " in their exterior, are at first imposing by their
simplicity and bareness of ornament, we soon feel the emptiness of what is void
of form, and seek for a broader carrying out and realization. And if we have
found these last elements in decoration, and have surrendered ourselves, for some
time, to the charm of an ingenious, story-like play of fancy [in architectural
arabesque, alluring by its play of enigma, enchanting the soul by the vacillation
of its lines, mocking it ever anew by intimation of hidden rules, giving it an unex-
acting occupation, which can always be broken off. and always again renewed],
there steals upon us quite the same feeling, still .... We move between the ex-
tremes of undeveloped groundwork and mere decoration : the important connection,
by means of organized members, is wanting. While architecture should carry out
rigid necessity into freedom, impart the form of what is organic and animated to
that which simply meets a want, and is conformed to purpose— this office of the
art is, from the very first, given up, and rigid necessity is joined to luxury, without
intermediary. We find the sublime (although only in feeble accords) and the
.-igrceable in richest development ; the properly beautiful has no place."

It is to be regretted that so conscientious an attempt as is this work of Schnaase,
not only to detail the historical growth, but to account for the origin, of the par-
ticular art-forms of all nations and times, in architecture, sculpture and painting,
though, as has been said, sometimes over-refined in its analysis, should be so little
known to English readers. A translation of it, with some abridgement, ought to
find favor with the increasing class of art-students in the United States and Eng-
land.

No further communications being offered, the Society, after
passing a vote of thanks to the American Academy for the use of
its rooms, adjourned to meet again in New York on the 28th of
October next ensuing.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xcii American Oriental Society:

Proceeding* at New York, Oct. 28th and 29th, 1874.

The Semi-annual meeting was held in New York City, commenc-
ing at 3 o'clock p. m. of \\ ednesday, October 28th, at the rooms
of the Bible-revision Committee in the Bible House, the President
in the chair.

The Recording Secretary being absent, Mr. A. Van Name, of
New Haven, was appointed Secretary pro tempore.

The Committee of Arrangements communicated an imitation
from Prof. Short to meet socially at his house in the evening. The
invitation was accepted, with thanks.

The Directors announced that the Annual meeting for 1*75
would be held in Boston on Wednesday, May 19th ; and that Rev.
N. G. Clark, D.D., with the Recording and Corresponding Secre-
taries, had been designated to act as a Committee of Arrange-
ments for it.

The following persons, on recommendation of the Directors,
were elected Corporate Members of the Society:

Mr. Thomas Hitchcock, of New York,

Mr. Julius Sachs, of New York,

Mr. A. W. Tyler, of New York,

Miss Susan H. Ward, of New York,

Dr. T. T. Van der Hoeven, of San Antonio, Texas,

Rev. T. O. Paine, of Elmwood, Mass.,

Prof. J. H. Thayer, of Andover, Mass.,

Rev. John Wright, of Boston.

The Corresponding Secretary reviewed the correspondence of
the past year. Among other things, he called attention to com-
munications touching the library of the late Pro£ E. Rodiger, of
Berlin, an Honorary Member of the Society, now offered for sale.*
Communications were then presented as follows:
1. On the Cypriote Inscriptions, by Mr. Isaac II. Hall, of New
York.

The valuable collection of Cypriote antiquities discovered by Gen. Luigi Pxlma
di Cesnola on the sites of ancient Citium, Idalium, and Golgos, and elsewhere, and
now deposited in the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York, contains between
twenty and thirty inscriptions in the Cypriote character. These inscriptions have
never been either completely read, oY well and fully published. Copies were taken
for the British Museum, before the collection came to America, and from them an
incomplete set of photographs were published by Mansell in London, in 1872-3 :
but these, to judge from citations, cannot be entirely reliable. A catalogue of the
collection, by Johannes Doell, entitled Die Sammlung Cesnola, and containing a
few very inaccurately figured inscriptions, was published by the St. Petersburg
Academy in its Me'moire$% in 1873. A few, more or less perfect; copies of some of
the inscriptions have also been given in the various works of those engaged in
deciphering.

* And purchased a little later by the Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1874* xciii

The Cypriote writing is not yet entirely deciphered, though the foundation is
well laid. The known inscriptions are about a hundred, of very various length; the
bronze tablet of Dali containing 31 lines and 270 to 300 words, while others are
fragments, with only one or two characters. The bronze taBlet was obtained in
1850, by the Due de Luynes; and he was the first to collect the various legends
in similar characters from all quarters, and to prove that they represented a hith-
erto unknown system of writing, if not a new language. R. II. Lang, in 1810 or
1871, discovered at Dali a marble tablet, with a bilingual inscription, in Phoenician
and Cypriote, which furnished the first real clue to the decipherment.

The first attempt at reading the character was made by de Luynes, in his Xumis-
matique et Inscriptions Cypriotes i Paris, 1852), but failed entirely, because of his
taking a word to mean * Salamis ' which really means * king/ He saw that the
writing usually reads from right to left, and one of his guesses as to the consonant
power of a character has proved correct. His splendid work, as a collection of
Cypriote monuments (all then known), beautifully and accurately figured, has not
l>een superseded.

The first attempt that gave promise of any success was that by Mr. Lang, in the
Transactions of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, vol. i., p. 1 1 6 ff. But sim-
ultaneously with Mr. Lang, Mr. George Smith, of the British Museum, applied
himself to the bilingual tablet of Dali, with signal success. His article was read
the same day with Mr. Lang's, and published along with it. In a supplementary
paper he gave a list of 54 characters, with values, and the authorities for each ;
of these, about 30 have proved to be approximately correct.

Next in order, and of indispensable importance, is the work of Dr. Samuel
Birch, in a later number of the same publication. It is difficult to give a proper
idea of the profound study and scholarship and of the brilliant genius displayed
in Birch's article, without a long detail. He showed that the date of the bronze
tablet could not be later than 353 B. C, and that the language written was sub-
stantially Greek. A single mistake, apparently — the non-recognition of kas (=nai,
1 and '), taking its k for a * — was all that prevented him from anticipating Brandis,
if not Schmidt.

Then comes J. Brandis's Versuch zwr Etiizifferung der kyprischen Schrift, a post-
humous work, edited by Ernst Curtius, and published in the Monatsbericht of the
Berlin Academy for February, 1873. The main key to his discoveries was the
word fow, which he read, correcting Birch's misapprehension. His work is not
so brilliant as that of either of his predecessors, but the item- referred to was won-
derfully fruitful in new words read, and in leading to the decipherment of additional
characters. He made many mistakes, some of them quite amusing : e. g. interpret-
ing the Phoenician equivalent of the Cypriote \\iro?ifojv to mean 'fiery Mical ' or
4 fiery Typhon.' Brandis's work, like those of Lang, Smith, and Birch, is illustrated
with type cut for the purpose, and Brandis's typo, though not perfect, is rather
better than those of the others. It confounds some characters that are entirely
distinct, and represents others by inferior forms. The types in the body of
de Luynes's work are the most faithful of all.

The most complete and thorough treatise on the subject, thus far, is Moritz
Schmidt's Die Inschrift von Idalion und das kyprische Syllabar (Jena, 1874). It
is in autograph-lithograph, and contains a brief account of the labors of his pred-
ecessors, the author's own attempts at deciphering, and a short dissertation on
the grammatical and dialectic peculiarities of Cypriote Greek. Schmidt has had
access to all the material, except to trustworthy copies of the Cesnola inscriptions :
thus, the inscription referred to by him on p. 8 is clearly not in hexameters, and
it ends, as well as begins, with xa'PeTe; two others are wrongly figured by him
and not perfectly transliterated, and so on ; but his few errors are mainly clerical.
He has made very thorough work, and has hit upon some brilliant discoveries.
He has established the uniformly syllabic character of the writing, and corrected
many mistakes of Brandis, Birch, and Smith, though confirming most of the conso-
nant powers assigned by them to the characters.

The language of the inscriptions is Greek, but not very easy to read. As to
the characters, there is a separate one for each of the vowels a, e, i, o, u ; an addi-
tional one for a, seemingly used only after i ; and another for o, of undefined use.
There is no distinction between short and long vowels. The other characters
seem to represent open syllables, and to begin always with a consonant; and

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xoiv American Oriental Society :

the whole theoretic syllabary appears to be tolerably complete ; the number of
syllables that may be said to be wanting (eight or nine, mostly ending in s) beisg
about equal to that of the diameters yet undetermined. There are two diganuns
syllables, we and wo* but the di gamma must have been disappearing; a*, for ex-
ample, the genitive of ,iaot/tvc is written indifferently ,3nat?j:og or ^aauiror.

No distinction is made between smooth, middle, and rough mutes of the same
organ: e. g. the same character stands for ra in raf, 6a in 'Itia/jov and to in
'Atfava; the same character may stand for «■, ktj, ye% yr/f je, or xVi and so on.
This fact constitutes the greatest difficulty in reading Cypriote. To this there
appears to be only one exception, if indeed it is an exception. The consonaLt
are apparently never doubled : thus, for 'Airo'/.?uvt we have A. po. to. ni. Double
consonants are resolved into their constituent elements: thus, forf/ we have ki. .*■..

Iota subscript (adscript) is regularly written ; but where it can be supplied frcci
one of a number of words in the same case, it is frequently omitted from the re*t :
e. g. to. i. te. o. represents rv- 0*v

In certain cases, a is systemtically omitted : thus, rravruv is written pa. to. ; for
avHfHjxif) is written a.to.ro.po.i. When two syllables having the same vowel*
aud compatible consonants come together, they join and form one syllable, as? is
seen in the last example, and in ko.lo.ki.a. for To/jm, po.to.ti.se. for rro'/r
(no/to, a.po.ro.ti.te. for ' Apfxrfrrt/, etc.1

Final *, and' final n when written, are the syllables for se and ne respectively-
like Hebrew shewn with final consonant, or the silent final e in French and Kfrgti&h

For T}, and frequently for r. the /-vowel is written, making it possible that the
Cypriotes pronounced y like English "long e," as the modern Greeks do. Indeed,
7, ', and e often change places : yV.Aa?jov is the regular Cypriote spelling of Idalium:
tipy is either te. o. i. or ti. o. i. ; the preposition h is commonly written t. ; and so on

Among the peculiarities of the syntax, h or If is regularly followed by the da-
tive, and i. (h) by the accusative.

An example or two of the inscriptions, in Roman equivalents and Greek trans-
literation, will further explain the principles of the writing better than it can be
done by words. In the romanizing, for the sake of uniformity, only the smooth
mutes are used.

The following is inscribed between the feet of a broken-on* statuette in the Ces-
nola collection, not numbered :

(1 .) e. ko. to. se- ka. te. sa. ta. se- to. i. (2.) ti. o. i' to. pi. te. H. si. o. r (3.) t. tu. ka. i.
a. ka. ta. i. — 'Eyurw; Karearaoe r^> duft rcnridegHf) i[r] rvxp ayaBa. Here 0/« is for
Bey. The contraction ram- for r^> em-, though strange, is not unlike other Cypri-
ote examples. The i. is for ev.

Again we have, on a sculptured stone, numbered 249 in the collection :

(I.) ti. a* i. te. mi' to. i. te. o. (2. j to. a. po. to. ni' o.ne. te. ke. (3.) u. to. ka. Or. in
Greek : AiaiOt/ii r<f) deu to ' Attoa.[X]uvi bvcttyice v rvxa. Here Oecj is written with t.
Its iota adscript is omitted on account of that of the preceding word, as that of
TV on account of the following. 'OveOtfice, for aveOqKe, appears to be the regular
Cypriote form. The first character in the third line is a little doubtful.

The following is given by Schmidt as one of the Cesnola inscriptions, but is
not found by me in the collection :

(1.) e. te. r III. a. . . . (2.) ta. we.i.ko.na. ta.te. ne.a. Or, in Greek. 'Err/
III 'A . . . . ra\y\ FEiKOva Ta\y\fie vea[vf\.

The most important of the Cesnola inscriptions, and third in importance of all
the Cypriote inscriptions discovered, is this :

(I.) ka.i.re.te- ka.ra.si.tv a.na.x- ka.po.H' we.po.me.ka- me.po.te.we. i. se.se,

(2.) te. o. i. se' po. ro. (t) . . na. to. i. se. e. re. ra. me. nam pa. ta. ko. ra. i. to. se-

(3.) o. wo. (or ti. t) ka. re. ti' e. pi. si. ta. te. se- a. to. ro.po- te. o. v a. Ie. tu. ka, ke.(t)r«.

(4.) te. o. i' ku. me. re. na. i. pa. ta' ta. a. to. ro. po. i' po. ro. po' o. i. ka. i. re. te.

Or, in Greek characters, in part :

Xaipere aval; piprore ftioifc-

Bfo/f wpo (?) . varoiq tpcpafin'a ira\y]rax^p(UToq.

*Oyo (oti t) xaPeTL eiriararTfc a[ v]0powr« foy

Gey Kvuepevat 7ra[v~\ra ra a\y\t)pu7r(f> .... of ;^<Mpere.

I am not satisfied with any version yet given of the words here omitted, though
many plausible conjectures can be made. Some of those given in Greek may need
a little modification : thus, -gj may be -oi, and so on.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1 874. xcv

After the reading of this communication, Prof Haldeman exhib-
ited to the Society some beads found in Indian mounds during the
digging of the Pennsylvania Canal, and remarked upon them.

2. On a Collection of Readings of the Thebaic New Testament
Version hitherto Uncited, by Mr. Arthur W. Tyler, Astor Library,
New York.

In the winter of 1871-72, Mr. Tyler said, I was engaged in making a thorough
search into all the available sources of evidence for the revision of the Greek text
of the thirteenth chapter of I Corinthians. Having been informed, by Prof.
Abbot of Cambridge, that the Memphitic had been wrongly cited, in the important
reading in the third verse, by Tischendorf, Tregelles, Scrivener, and other recent
editors, I determined to be able to speak from personal knowledge in the article
which I was preparing for the Bibliotheca Sacra. While, for that purpose, looking
over the Coptic grammars and lexicons to be found in the linguistic department
of the Astor Library, I happily came upon the Rudimenta Linguae Goptae sive
Aegyptiacae (4°, Romae, 1778), which was prepared by Rafaelle Tuki, Roman
Catholic Bishop of Arsinoe in Egypt, and published by the College of the Propa-
ganda. Seeing that this work was very largely made up of citations from both
the Old and New Testaments, and in the two Coptic dialects, I pursued my search
through its pages, until it was rewarded by finding the full text, in both the Mem-
phitic and also in the Thebaic, of the only two verses in the chapter in which impor-
tant variations from the common text occur. This discovery was especially valua-
ble for the reason that no portion of this chapter in Thebaic had been previously
known to textual critics. This version of the New Testament is one of the oldest
in existence, being both older and ruder than the Memphitic, and it is now assigned
to the latter part of the second century by Professor J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Hulsean
Professor of Divinity at Cambridge, England, a competent scholar, who has re-
cently paid considerable attention to the matter. My own pleasure was greatly
enhanced upon finding, after a thorough investigation, that this priceless version
concurred with the Memphitic in supporting the Iva /cav^trw/icw, which is read, in
the third verse, by the three most ancient Greek uncials (K, A, B), and the most
valuable cursive (17); and which I had adopted in my Greek text in 1868.

Further examination of Tuki's book has since shown that it contains a large
number of Thebaic citations, in passages where its readings have been wholly
unknown to editors of the Greek text of the New Testament, and that even its
Memphitic portions are well worthy of examination, as they are evidently taken
from manuscripts not consulted by David Wilkins. The Thebaic text, however,
is especially deserving of a thorough and complete investigation and collation,
from the fact that so few fragments of that interesting relic of the early Christian
ages are known to exist ; and therefore, every line, or every syllable, of it which
we can recover is of the highest importance.

This book of Tuki's was employed by Tregelles (and possibly by Tischendorf)
in the Apocalypse, though neither of them seem to have known of its existence
in time to use it in the other books of the New Testament. It is quite likely
that Tischendorf obtained all his citations in the Apocalypse from the concluding
"part" of Tregelles's Greek Testament, which was issued some months in advance
of his own.

I know of the existence of but few copies of Tuki's work in America: one is in
the Astor Library, and another in my own possession. The latter contains a
note showing that it was used by Rev. Henry Tattam, of Bedford, England, in the
preparation of his Compendious Grammar of the Egyptian Language (8C, London,
1830), and his Lexicon Aegyptiaco-Latinum (8°. Oxonii, 1835); but he does not
seem to have made as thorough use of it as he should, for in his lexicon he repeats
the blunder of Wilkins's Ifyvum Testamentum Aegyptium (4\ Oxonii, 1716), and
gives incendere as the rendering of shoushou in the one passage above referred to,
although in both his works he gives the correct translation in numerous other
passages.

It almost seems, indeed, that Wilkins's mistranslation should be styled some-
thing worse than a blunder ; for, judging from p. 34 of his Prolegomena (where he
says ' shoushou emmoi^ iutcomburar\ lege, uti et Graecus Iva KavOfoufjai), it appears

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xovi American Oriental Society :

to have been willful. In any event, it has misled some of the best scholars in
Europe, although Wetstein, in his Greek Testament (vol. ii.. p. 156), protested
against it, as long ago as 1752, in the note upon this verse.

3. On some points of Latin Syntax, with special reference to
Mr. Roby's Grammar, by Prof. Charles Short, of New York.

The first part of Mr. Roby's Latin Grammar was published in 1871. During
the present year the Second Part has appeared, treating of Syntax, in 666 pages.

Admirable as is this Second Part also, containing a treasure of examples far
more numerous than any we had before, and from a third to a fourth part of
which, Mr. Roby tells us, is from his own reading, yet in the development of the
various usages he is less philosophical than we had hoped, and on some points be
is still very meagre. But we ought rather to admire him for what he has done
than blame him for his defects, which ho may be expected largely to remedy in
future editions of this part of his book. I offer a few remarks on two or three
points out of several that I had noted for criticism.

In §1348 Mr. Roby says: *' The infinitive is used as object of the thing" — that
is, as indirect object — "to a verb which has also a direct personal object; at
docebo Rulium tacere ;" that is, ' I will teach Rullus about silence,' which is here
equivalent to 'I will teach Rullus to be silent.' This is so far undoubtedly correct
But he should have added that this objective form, which is thus capable of logical
analysis, might also by extension of usage be employed subjectively, though in-
capable of logical analysis if we start from this latter form. Thus we may say
Rulium tacere me juvat, just as if it had been taciturnitas RuUi me juvat Instead
of this, Mr. Roby simply says that the infinitive may be the subject of a sentence,
with its own subject in the accusative ; and, put in this way, the puzzle of the
construction remains unsolved. In §1351 he says: "A neuter pronoun {id, itiud;
Eng. 'that') is sometimes found in apposition to the infinitive clause and corres-
ponding to the article (originally demonstrative pronoun) in Greek.'' Mr. Roby
seems here to have confounded the " substantivizing " office of the Greek article
with the anticipatory use, as it may be called, of the demonstrative with the infin-
itive clause, which is in Greek tovto, r66ef kxeivo; in Latin, Mud, hoc, id; and in
English, it or ttiis. This anticipatory id, which Mr. Roby has in mind, is really

very rare, as Caesar B. G., i. 7, Caesari cum id nunciatum esaet, eos conari;

instead of the simple verb, as B. G., i. 38, nunciatum est ei Ariovistum . . . conten-
dere. Under the same head Mr. Roby should have introduced a more subtle
usage, the infinitive clause following an anticipatory ita or sic, which his favorite
Madvig might have given him. This use is comparatively uncommon; but
instances besides those adduced by Madvig are : cum asset ita responsum, caede*
.... comparari, Cic. Cat., iii. 21 ; de Off., i. 13 ; Caesar B. G., i. 60 ; cetera sic obser-
ventur .... amicorwn esse communia omnia, Cic. de Off., i. 16; Tac. Germ., 18.
Relative words also perform this anticipatory function, as quod in Cic. de Off., iii.
31 — quod cum audisset JUius, negotium exfiiberi patri, ' when the son had heard
thbi, that the business,' etc. ; and ut in de Off., i. 19 — ut enim apud Platonem &L,
omnem morem Lacedaemoniorum injiammatum esse, etc.

In §1019 Mr. Roby says: "Adverbs are used to qualify substantives attribu-
tively, adjectives, and sometimes adverbs. :} Mr. Papillon, Fellow of New College.
Oxford, and editor of Terence in the Catena Classicorum, now in course of publi-
cation by the Messrs. Rivington, says : *4 A purely adjectival use of the adverb
cannot be shown in Latin, which has not the article necessary for such a construe
tion." Mr. Roby subjoins but one instance of this usage denied by Mr. Papillon.
namely, omnes circa civitates ; and he adds nothing about the position of the adverb
when it is so employed.

But there are many clear cases of the adjectival use of the adverb in Latin-
some in which the adverb is interposed between the substantive and its adjunct,
which is practically equivalent to the adverb adjectival interposed between the
article and its substantive in Greek; some in which the adverb stands outside
such combination ; and others in which the adverb qualifies the noun absolute.

1. The adverb interposed — haec inter nos nuper notitia, Ter. lleaut., 53; erit semper
bnitas, Ter. Andr., 175; his . . .jam nnctibus, Cic. Cat., ii. 23; multarum circa cu-
itatium, Liv., i. 17 ; in qvndmginta deinde annos, Liv., i. 15 ; duo deinceps reges. Liv..

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1874. xcvii

i. 21 ; nullo publice emolument*), Liv., vi. 39; irwentis publice privatimque decotis,
Li v., i. 39 ; sola mei super Astyanactis imago, Virg. Mn., iii. 489.

2. The adverb standing outside — pacatos circa omnes populos, Liv., i. 19; quon-
dam hi cornicirws . . . munera nunc edunt, Juv., iii. 34, where the metre would not
allow the adverb to be interposed.

3. The adverb qualifying the substantive absolute — as ante malorum, Virg. ^En.,
i. 198. Who can doubt that this copies, as well as the Latin can, the Sophoclean
T&v irdpoc KctKtiv, (Ed. Tyr., 1423 ?

The matter of the order of words in Latin is very briefly treated by Mr. Roby,
who gives only six pages to this subject ; while Madvig devotes to it fifteen, Zumpt
twenty-three, and Kriiger forty-four.

I will examine one or two particulars of this portion of the work.

In §1047 the author says: l* Words belonging to one or more coordinate words
or expressions should strictly be put either before them all or after them all. But
it is very usual, partly for rhythm's sake, for the common word to be put after the
first of the coordinated words."

The order referred to in the latter part of this paragraph is very common in
Cicero ; but very rare in Caesar and in Livy, so far as I have observed.

The following are instances of it :

1 . Nouns with coordinate adjectives — as, fortis animus et magnus, Cic. de Off.,
i. 20; de Or., i. 112; Caes. B. G., i. 5. 2. A genitive with coordinate nouns — as,
varietate rerum aUjue copia, Cic. de Or., i. 19. 3. A verb with coordinate objects
— as, non cognomen solum dejwrtasse, sed kumanitatem H prudentiam, Cic. C. M., 1 ;
Ca?s. B. G., i. 49; Hor. Sat., i. 1, 83. 4. A verb with coordinate ablatives — as,
mens discendo alitur et cogitando, Cic. de Off., i. 30. 5. A single object with co-
ordinate infinitives — as, deprecari aliquid et conqueri, Cic. de Or., i. 20. 6. A single
afrent with coordinate verbs — as, dicendum sibi et cognoscendum, Cses. B. G., i. 35.
7. A finite verb with coordinate predicate adjectives — as, nee melior vir Juit nee
clarior, Cic Lael., 2 ; and an infinitive with the same — as, dubia esse et incerta, Cic.
de Or., i. 20. 8. A finite verb with coordinate infinitives — as, augere posset atque
ornare, Cic. de Or., i. 21 : Hor. Sat., i. 1, 89. 9. A verb with coordinate adverbs—
as, callide versari etperite, Cic. de Or., i. 11 ; Hor. Sat., i. 3, 115. This same order
often occurs in Greek, and with all classes of words, and the usage seems to have
been transferred to the Latin chiefly by Cicero. That this particular order should
happen, as a common thing, to be rhythmical, rather than the other arrangements
here mentioned by Mr. Roby, is inconceivable. Some other explanation must be
sought ; and it is submitted whether the order is not employed mainly to give the
hearer or reader, as early as possible, the construction of the clause, by presenting
first one of the coordinate words, and then the single word, which is often the
principal word, and leaving the other coordinate words to follow to any extent, as
the case may be.

In §1050 Mr. Roby says: ''Contrasted words are put next to one another — as,
ego Q. Fabium, senem adulescens, Cic. Sen., 4; ego ejus, Cic. Verr., v. 49; tu te
ipse, Cat., i. 8."

But related words and ideas in general are put side by side : 1. the same word
or parts of the same word — as, suadeam, suadeam, Plaut. Capt., ii. 1, 40 ; alienus,
alienus, ib., i. 2, 45 ; scito scire, ib., ii. 2, 47 ; de te tu, Cic. Phil., ii. 46 ; senem senex.
Cic. Lael., 1; omnes omnium. Cic. de Or., i. 21 ; die dies, Caes. B. G., i. 48; /acinus
facinorisque, Liv., i. 7 ; jungit junctos, Hor. Sat, i. 3, 54 ; deos dis, Juv., iii. 146.
So the familiar case of certain pronominal words — as, alius alium, Plaut. Stich., ii.
2, 46 ; Terent. Andr., iv. 5. 39 ; Cic. de Off., i. 7 : Caes. B. G., i. 39 ; alter altera de
causa, Cic. Somn. Scip., 2; Sail. Jugurtha, 79; Liv., v. 11; uter utri, Cic. Mil., 9,
23 ; Cajs. B. G., v. 44 ; Hor. Ep., ii. 1, 55. 2. Contrasted ideas. This class is given
by Mr. Roby. 3. Similar or closely connected ideas — as, turn ibi, Cic. de Or., i.
118; undique uno tempore, Ca?s. B. G., i. 22; semper omnibus, Cic. de Or., i. 18;
nulla unquam, Liv. Praef. ; multo saepe, Cic. Cat., iii. 23 ; aliquem aliquando, Cic. de
Or., i. 21 ; tot ubique, Juv., i. 17 ; parco paucis, Hor. Sat., i. 3, 16; tristes misero, ib.,
87. 4. Pronouns having the same reference — as, sibi quisque, Plaut. Cure, i. 3, 24;
Cic. de Or., i. 18 ; Caes. B. G., i. 5 ; Liv., i. 9; suam quisque, Plaut. Merc, iv. 5, 51 ;
Cic. de Or., i. 4; Cees. B. G., i. 52. And the order in this latter case is so fixed
that there is hardly any deviation from it in prose — as, Tac. Germ., 13, in sua gente
■ cuique; or in poetry, except where the metre requires it — as, Virg. ./En., vi. 743,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

xcviii American Oriental Society :

quisque suos paHmur Manes; so Juv., iii. 143. 5. Cause and effect — as, deapimt
eatcum, Hor. Sat, L 3, 39 ; ioties rauci, Juv., i. 2 ; tacita Sudani . . . culpa, ib.. 167.
Thug this juxtaposition of words in Latin is not only not restricted to cases of
contrast, which alone Mr. Roby gives, but embraces generally the relations of
associated forms and ideas, and almost strictly follows all the known laws of mem-
ory ; and this juxtaposition, we may add, prevails still more extensively in Greek
than in Latin.

4. On the Modern Japanese Literature, and its Influence in
bringing about the Recent Revolutions in Japan, by Mr. William
E. Griffis, of New York, lately of the Kai Sei Gakko (Imperial
College) of Tokio (Yedo), Japan.

The object of the paper was to explain the recent social and political revolution
in Japan, and to show the true causes which operated effectually to overthrow the
Shogun's (Tycoon's) government, to reinstate the Mikado in full power, to destroy
the feudal system, and then to impel the Japanese nation into the path of modern
civilization. The causes of these four distinct results are to be found in the revival
of the study of the ancient national literature, the study of the classic historical
compositions of Japanese scholars, the movement for the revival of pure Shinto
(the indigenous religion of Japan), and the publication and general reading of book?
written by native authors who had seen or studied western civilization. The
three first causes were efficient in overthrowing the hereditary usurpation of tie
Shogun's government, destroying the feudal system, and establishing the national
government on its ancient foundation, and according to its ancient constitution.
The last, acting upon the national mind at the instant of intensest momentum pro-
duced by the political revolution, impelled the nation into that course of innova-
tion, reform, and systematic attempts at social regeneration which now challenge?!
the attention of the world, and compels the admiration of all who can sympathize
with an Asiatic nation that is bravely struggling into the light and knowledge of
the nineteenth century.

In Japan, the impulse to enter the comity of nations, and to follow the course
of their civilization, came from within, and not from without. It is the general
impression among foreigners that the abolition of the dual form of government
and the sweeping away of the feudal system, were the direct result of the presence
of foreigners on the soil of Japan. This, however, is a great mistake. From
causes already at work before the arrival of Commodore Perry and the foreigner*
in Japan, the Shogun's government would certainly have fallen. The presence of
foreigners in Japan served merely to hasten the slow inevitable. Among the
many classes into which Japanese society was formerly divided, there were two
that comprised the readers and thinkers. One, the Buddhist priesthood, brought
into existence that vast mass of Buddhistic literature, and originated and developed
those phases of Japanese Buddhism, which have made it a distinct product of
thought and life among the manifold phases of this, the most widely-professed
religion on earth. This ecclesiastical literary activity and growth culminated in
the sixteenth century. Since that time Japanese thought has been led by the
Samurai, or military literati, the secularly educated and armed classes. The crea-
tive era of Japanese literature was between the eighth and twelfth centuries. The
scholastic era of Japanese learning and literature embraced the latter half of the
last and the first quarter of the present century. The province of Mito was
especially the resort of learned men and authors, and the effect of their writings
was to point out the historical fact that the Shogun was a usurper, and that the
Mikado was the only true source of authority. It was the study of these works,
and others of similar purport, that led the Samurai from one end of the country to
the other to raise the cry, " Honor the Mikado and expel the barbarian." Another
element that tended to overthrow the usurping Shogun and to restore the Mikado
was the revival of the study of pure Shinto, the ancient religion of Japan, accord-
ing to which the Mikado is the divine representative of the gods on earth, and as
such is to be loved and obeyed by all Japanese. The study of Shinto created a
powerful party, whose constant aim was to overthrow the Shogun's government
and thus end the usurpation of six and a half centuries. All these currents of
thought united to swell the stream of opinion and action which, in 1868, swept

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1 874. xcix

the Shogun from his seat of power into poverty and obscurity, and which raised
the Mikado to his rightful place as de facto sovereign of Japan.

Yet the very men who formed the Mikado's party were the most bitter haters
of foreigners. The primary object that united and impelled them was to restore
the Mikado ; their secondary bond of union and object was to drive out the for-
eigners, close the ports of foreign commerce, and repudiate the treaties. Mr.
Iwakura and his colleagues were the arch-haters of foreigners, their ways and
works. Now, they are the leaders of the new ideas and the forward movement
in Western civilization. How was this marvelous change wrought ? Why did
the foreigner-haters become the leaders of progress, the defenders and executors
of Western civilization ? Why did they preach the faith they once destroyed ?

" It was the lessons taught them by the bombardment of Shimonoseki," say some.
" It was the benefits arising from foreign commerce," say others. " It was because
foreigners in Japan persuaded them," say not a few.

In none of these do we find the true explanation. War, commerce, and contact with
foreigners for a half century, did not move China ; neither would they have moved
Japan. In the latter country the movement was by impulse from within, not by
pressure from without The real cause of the recent " reformation " in Japan was
an intellectual one. It was brought about by the reading and study of the recent
native literature produced by earnest men who had studied the foreign languages,
notably the English and Dutch, years before, or who had visited Europe and
America during the times of the Shogwrs power, and who returned to Japan
shortly before the Mikado was reinstated, and began the composition and publi-
cation of those original works and translations which were eagerly read and
studied by the new rulers and rising men in Japan. In these books the history of
Western nations was faithfully told ; their customs and beliefs were explained and
defended ; their resources, methods of thought, education, morals, laws, systems of
government, etc., were described and elucidated. With Western ideas for texts,
Fukuzawa, Nakamura, Uchida, Uriu, Kato, and a host of scholarly writers, ex-
pounded the true principles which a nation that would become great must follow
out They one and all showed how Japan had retrograded in isolation, and the
adoption of Western civilization was both a virtue and a necessity. Prof. Griffis
said: taIt was his firm belief, after nearly four years of life in Japan, mingling
with the progressive men of the empire, that the reading and study of books
written by Japanese authors, and printed in the Japanese language, did more to
transform the minds of Japanese rulers and thinking people than any other cause.
During the past decade the production of purely native literature has ceased, and
the translation of foreign books, largely scientific, and the composition of works
inspired by the reading of Western literature, have busied scholars and writers in
Japan."

The speaker then entered into many details of Japanese book-making, the subject
matter of the books relating to the United States and other countries, what the
Japanese thought of us, etc. He closed by remarking that " should Western civil-
ization take sure root and flourish in Japan and the people become occidentalized,
it is not too much to hope that the peculiar genius of the Japanese will produce a
literary work that will take its place among the imperishable classics of the world."

After this paper had been read and discussed, the business
meeting of the Society was adjourned until Thursday morning at
9 o'clock, at which time the remaining communications were of-
fered.

5. On the Assyrian and Babylonian Monuments in America, by
Rev. Selah Merrill, of Andover, Mass. : read by the Corresponding
Secretary.

Mr. Merrill's paper begins with referring to the general ignorance among Amer-
ican scholars as to the number and character of the specimens of Mesopotamian
art scattered among the libraries and museums of the country ; it was in view of
this that he has been led to put together as full information respecting them as
he had found attainable. We have sculptured slabs enough (besides bricks and
other smaller relics) to panel or wainscot a wall 270 feet in continuous length, to

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

c American Oriental Society :

a height of about 8 feet. They were brought at intervals between the years 1850
and I860, and are distributed as follows: Yale College, New Haven, Conn., has
two large slab?, two small ones (with four small broken slabs in boxes, never yet
mounted), two bricks, and sundry seals and minor relics. Union College, Schen-
ectady, N. Y., has two large slabs, one small one, and six bricks. Amherst Col-
lege, Amherst, Mass., has five large slabs and one small one, and six bricks, one of
them Babylonian (the only Babylonian brick in America), with a parcel of lesser
articles. Williams College, Williamstown, Mass., has three slabs and two bricks.
The Andover Theological Seminary has one large and one small slab. Dartmouth
College, Hanover, N. H., has six large slabs and one small one, and two bricks.
Middlebury College, Middlebury, Vt., has one large slab. Bowdoin College, Bruns-
wick, Me., has four large slabs and one small one. The Theological Seminary at
Auburn, N. Y., has one large slab. The Connecticut Historical Society at Hart-
ford, Conn., has one large slab, one small one. and two bricks. At Meriden, Conn.,
is one small slab, in private hands. The Theological Seminary of Virginia has
three large slabs. The New York Historical Society has twelve large slabs, but
they are not set up. The Mercantile Library Association of St. Louis, Missouri
has one large slab. Thus, in thirteen museums and private cabinets, there are in
all forty -two large slabs and thirteen small ones, and twenty-two bricks, all but
three of which have inscriptions. Two or three of the bricks came from Koyunjik:
all the rest (except the Babylonian one) from Nimrud. From Nimrud came also
all the slabs. They belong to the reign of Assurnazirpal, B. C. 883-859, and all
bear the same inscription, the standard inscription of this monarch, of which a
tentative version was given by Dr. Ward in the Proceedings of the Society for
October, 1871 (Journal, vol. x., pp. xxxvi.): a new and improved translation form?!
a part of this paper. Except the collection belonging to the New York Historical
Society, the monuments were given by the British explorers Layard and Rawlinson
(all but two by the latter) to American missionaries (Mr. Marsh, Dr. LobdelL, Mr.
W. F. Williams, and others), expressly for transmission to this country. The
bricks are slightly burnt, and their inscriptions seem to have been cut rather than
stamped upon them. They belong either to Assurnazirpal or to his son Shalman-
eser II. (B. C. 858-823), mostly to the latter. The regular inscription on the latter
reads : * Shalmancser, great king, mighty king, king of nations, king of the coun-
try of Assyria, son of Assurnazirpal, great king, mighty king, king of nations, king
of the country of Assyria, son of Tuklat-Adar, king of nations, king of the country
of Assyria also, builder of the tower of the city of Calah.' AssurnazirpaTs in
scription reads: * Palace of Assurnazirpal, king of the country of Assyria, son of
Tuklat-Adar, king of the country of Assyria, son of Bin-nirari, king of the country
of Assyria.' The bricks are of varying size, from 13 to 23 inches square, and 3
to 5£ inches thick. One has the inscription on the edge ; another, partly on the
edge. The single Babylonian brick is so indistinctly inscribed as to be almost
unintelligible ; it belongs to Nebuchadnezzar.

Mr. Merrill indicates the character of the stone used for these monuments, and
enters into considerable detail as to the figures represented upon them, with their
dress, decorations, surroundings, occupations, etc He doubts whether the eagle-
headed figures, of which there are several, are intended to represent divinities.

The paper concluded with a brief account of the recent progress of Assyriologi-
cal study.

6. On the Talmud, considered in its relation to the Early His-
tory of Christianity, by Prof. Felix Adler, of Ithaca, X. Y.

The connection between the primitive Church and the great Jewish sects of the
same period is imperfectly understood. Concerning these sects themselves a false
impression still prevails in many circles. The Sadducees are held to be libertines,
the Pharisees hypocrites. In general it is considered to be the part of wisdom,
and even of common honesty, to study the writings of a party before pronouncing
upon its character. The Pharisees are condemned in the strongest language by
those who cannot read a line of their voluminous works as contained in the
Talmud. Geiger's investigations have opened a new insight into the condition of
parties in Judea at the time of the coming of Jesus. The Sadducees may be
called the High-churchmen, the Pharisees the Independents, of the Jewish State.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October , 1874. ci

The Sadducees were conservative in principle, a kind of priestly aristocracy, as
Geiger holds; the Pharisees were democrats. The distinctions appertaining to
the priesthood rested on scriptural authority, by which the Pharisaic leaders
considered themselves bound. In order to accomplish their purpose, of elevating
the whole people to the dignity of God's priesthood, they mimicked the forms and
ceremonies prescribed for the hierarchy, and enjoined their observance on evory
member of the community. It is impossible to understand the New Testament
without an intimate acquaintance with the contemporary writings of the Talmud.
Jesus in many respects adopted the principles of the Pharisaic school of Hillel ;
his method of arguing, sometimes the very phrases he employs, are to be met
with in the current Hebrew literature of the day. Soon after the appearance of
( Jeiger's Ursckrift, in which the main results oil these researches were laid down,
their importance was lecognized by Hausrath in the Prottstantische Kirchenzeitung
(No. 44, 1863). Other eminent scholars followed with their approval. Geiger
offers an ingenious argument to show that the first Book of Maccabees was
written by a Sadducee, the second by a Pharisee.

Prof. Adler then proceeded to say that the Talmud contains direct information
bearing, on the question of the proper time for celebrating Easter, a question
which c >nvulsed the Church during several centuries. The Biblo commands that
Pentecost be celebrated seven weeks after Passover. A conflict of opinions
is reported as having occurred between Sadducees and Pharisees concerning the
day from which these seven weeks are to be reckoned : the Sadducees beginning
to count on a Sunday, the Pharisees on the second day of the feast What
motive could have induced the conservative Sadducees to lay such stress on the
Sunday, no one has yet satisfactorily answered. On the other hand, the early
Christians had a very high interest at stake in this issue. For them, Pentecost
was the close of the resurrection-period, and it was of great importance that it
should be celebrated on the day of the resurrection — the Sunday. If, therefore,
we read in the Talmud that false witnesses were hired by certain sectaries to
disturb the calculations of the Rabbins and bring it about that Pentecost should
fall on a Sunday ; if, moreover, the Pharisees enacted stringent laws to prevent
any such thing, and pointedly and bitterly opposed those who contended for it,
we see in this a struggle, not between Pharisees and Sadducees, but between the
Pharisaic synagogue and the primitive Church. This view is strengthened by the
fact that no such conflict is mentioned before the Christian era. Prof. Adler also
pointed to a number of other enactments which are mentioned in the " Scroll of
Fasts," forbidding the Jews to fast about the time of passion week, as directed
against the early Christians: contrary to the received opinion, which explains
them as referring to Jewish sectaries. All these passages and a detailed argu-
ment in support of his opinion he promises to bring forward in an article specially
devoted to this subject, which he hopes soon to.havc ready for publication.

Remarks bearing on the study of the Talmud were added, at some length, by
Dr. H. Osgood.

7. Rev. Oliver Crane, recently returned from Asia Minor, spoke
of sites, visited by him in that country, possessing special archaeo-
logical interest. He described the statue of Niobe on Mt. Sipylus ;
the extensive ruins on the plain of Antioch, about twenty miles
north of the lake of Antioch ; the ruins of ancient Hierapolis, about
sixty miles east of Aleppo (a small head of Venus, found there,
was exhibited) ; and of ancient Seleucia.

Pres't Woolsey made additional observations on the identity of
the monument on Mt. Sipylus with that mentioned by Homer, and
on the myth of Niobe.

8. On the Distinction of the Noun and Verb in Japanese, by
Mr. A. Van Name, of New Haven, Conn.

The Japanese in respect to the separation of noun and verb holds a position
intermediate between the Chinese and Indo-European languages. In the Chi-
nese, theoretically and to a great extent actually, any word may be noun, ad-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cii American Oriental Society:

jective, adverb, or verb, becoming definite only as it enters into construction and
its position in the sentence is fixed. The full separation of the parts of speech
which we find in the Indo-European family is reached, according to Schleicher,
only through the agency of case and personal endings, both of which are wholly
wanting in Japanese. The relations of case are here expressed by prepositions,
or rather postpositions, and particles which everywhere preserve their separate
character. Wa, sometimes regarded as a sign of the nominative case, is in its
origin demonstrative, and its primary force is to arrest the attention on the word
or phrase which precedes, and to separate it from what follows. It commonly
follows, but is by no means a necessary adjunct of. the subject, nor is it confined
to this office. It may be added to wo, which marks the object (wo-wa uniting in
the form woba or oba), or to a noun governed by a preposition. Wo, also, though
more uniform in position and use, is apparently of the same demonstrative origin.
The noun as such has no distinct method of formation ; the differentiation so far
as it exists is on the side of the adjective and verb. Two or three derivative
affixes, the most important of which is ea, which forms nouns of quality from
adjective roots, are the only noticeable exceptions. The plural is formed either by
repeating the singular, without other change than that of a surd initial, now
brought between two vowels, to a sonant, a change which is both the result and
the sign of the close union of the parts: thus, kuni, 'country,7 plural, kuni-guni;
or by the addition of independent words of collective signification, such as koto.
'side,' tomo, 'companion,' etc.

Personal pronouns the Japanese is poorly provided with, and uses sparingly.
In many cases where we should employ them, the person is simply left to be
understood ; in others the rules of politeness require the substitution of various
humble or honorific epithets, such as 'servant,' 'master,' and the like, or a general
designation of the place which the person occupies, as anata, 'that side/ for the
second person, kono h&, 'this side,' for the first person. From the pronominal
roots, a, ka, which point to the more remote, so to the less remote, ho to the nearer
object, and wa, reflexive, pointing back to the subject, and not unlikely identical
with the wa which marks the subject, we have, apparently by composition with the
substantive verb art, the forms are, hare, sore, * that person or thing,' fo«re, ' this
person or thing,' and ware, ' I.' The primary meaning of tea appears in the posses-
sive waga, formed by the addition of the genitive suffix ga, which may mean,
according to the person referred to, 'my own,' 'your own,' 'his own.' The second
person is without any simple designation, and, of the forms for the third person,
the weakest, are, is still decidedly demonstrative. The genitive suffix no added to
the above-mentioned roots, except wa, forms the demonstrative adjectives, ano.
Jcano, sono, * that,' kono, ' this,' while for the possesives no must be added to the
full pronominal form, as in are no, ' his/ Where the personal pronouns are so little
developed, a personal inflection of the verb is hardly to be thought of.

The adjective has an attributive form ending in ki, an adverbial or indefinite
form in ka, and a predicative one in shi, which last includes the copula. Thus
from the root naga, 'long,' which appears in the proper name Nagasaki, literally
' long promontory,' we have the following forms : nagaki saki, 'a long promontory.*
8aki wa nagashi, 'the promontory is long,' and nagaku sum, ' to make long.' In
the spoken language the attributive and predicative forms, by the dropping of the
consonant of the ending, are reduced to one, nagai. The strict law of position by
which the limiting and dependent always precedes the limited and governing
word prevents any ambiguity from this source.

If now we pass to the verb we find that while nouns may end in any of the
vowels, the verbal roots, or what we must treat as roots, though seldom mono-
syllabic, are restricted to two finals, t and e. Not only in compounds does this
root appear, but also where a number of verbs in succeeding clauses are in parallel
construction, only the last requiring the termination of tense and mood, while the
others stand in the naked root-form. This unchanged root is also used as a noun,
more often abstract, as omoi, ' think ' and ' thought,' sometimes concrete, as kori,
'freeze 'and 'ice,' and in compounds even denoting the agent; thus, from At,
1 wood,' and kori, ' cut,' ki-kori, * woodcutter.' To this root also, as to any other
noun, are joined prepositions to form certain parts of the verb; thus, mi,
'see;' supine mi-ni, 'in order to see;' gerund or participle mi-it, 'seeing;' te
having a modal or instrumental force. Among the inflected forms of the verb,
the predicative is frequently identical with the substantive and attributive form.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1874. ciii

Of the two classes into which verbs in i are divided, the older and more numerous
class, including what we should call the irregular or strong verbs, forms the present
indicative and infinitive, the hitter used both as noun and adjective, alike. In
verbs in e the two forms are in the older language distinct, but in modern usage
the infinitive has supplanted the indicative form, and is used indifferently for both.
In the negative conjugation the present indicative and infinitive are alike. In the
preterit, again, of both the affirmative and infinitive conjugations, they are dis-
tinct ; but in the spoken language, which forms a new preterit from the gerund
and the substantive verb art (// atari, -u for mite-ari, -w), this advantage is lost, and
a shortened ending ta replaces both turi and ta.ru. The conditional and concessive
forms of the verb are also, by Hoffmann, to whom the analysis of Japanese gram-
matical forms owes most, reduced to substantives governed by prepositions.

Whether the separation of the noun and verb in Japanese is more or less in
idea than it is in form, is a question to be decided only by a wider consideration of
the structure of the sentence. The view held by Steinthal and Schleicher respect-
ing languages of the same general type, that they have no proper verb, but only
verbal nouns, certainly affords the easiest explanation of some of the phenomena
here presented. In the sentence hi ya ferw, 'the sun shines.' it is most natural to
rugard ga as the genitive sign, making the subject the possessor or the attribute
of the verbal action; literally 'the sun's shining [is].' This use of ga, which is
frequent, differs from wa in the same position in that the former adds emphasis to
the subject, the latter to the predicate, though they are frequently interchangeable
without appreciable difference of meaning. In the compound sentence the nom-
inal construction prevails over the verbal. Instead of dependent clauses with
conjunctions, we have more often only verbal nouns governed by prepositions.
Both no and ga, the genitive particles, may be used to connect clauses which stand
in an adversative relation to each other. A consequence of this looseness of
structure is the inordinate length to which the sentence is sometimes drawn out.
The sense is kept suspended through a succession of loosely connected dependent
clauses, interrupted by long quotations, until sometimes the end is reached only
with the end of the volume. The merit of the style, measured by a Japanese
standard, is largely in proportion to the length of the sentence.

9. On the Occurrence of Semitic Consonants on the Western
Continent, by Prof. S. S. Ilaldeman, of Philadelphia.

In the North American examples of my Analytic Orthography (Philad., I860),
the close of the glottis which constitutes the Arabic hamza, and the Hebrew aieph,
is (g§ 629. 701) attributed to Wyandot as heard by myself; and to the language at
Cape Flattery as pronounced by Dr. J. L. LeContc, who also gave me sounds
equivalent to Hebrew p {qoph) and n (hhcjth), or Arabic qaf and hha, in the Yuma
and allied Ipai.

I have now to add several sounds heard casually from an Eskimo brought by
Captain Hall to Washington. Here the numeral 'four,' which was pronounced by
Dr. Hayes as sisanu'U (sittamut of Richardson. Arctic Searching Expedition, 1852),
appeared as ts^s/uuc, where Arabic sad (marked with a semicircle) occurs
twice, with Greek /> of met, and the last vowel in fat, lengthened. 'Six' (akhvinok
in Richardson) is aqbemac (with qoph), and its aspirate (the seventh Arabic
letter qha, or </'«,) occurs in the name of a fish, eq'aluarq'sii&c, written
ekalluarksoak by Dr. Richardson.

In the same dialect, a whispered apirate of ag in sing sometimes occurs final
after cay (k) and qoph, as in m a c 6 c ngh (' four ;).

These facts do not prove an identity of people or of language. The Arabs are
not Eskimos ; nor are the Welsh to be considered Cherokees because they have
the aspirate 11 in common.

10. Kev. W. Hayes Ward exhibited a peculiar Assyrian Seal
recently received in this country, and remarked briefly upon it.

11. On the Sanskrit Accent and Dr. Haug, by fcrof. W. I).
Whitney, of New Haven.

Prof. Whitney recalled to the recollection of the Society that, more than three
yeara ago (in May, 1871), he had presented a communication in defense of the

8

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

civ A mm'ran Oriental Society :

ordinarily accepted views of Sanskrit accentuation against an attempt to overthrow
them made by Dr. Martin Haug, professor in the Munich University ; the oomnjc-
nication was fully reported in the Proceedings of that meeting (Journal, vol. i_
pp. ix.-xi.). Dr. Haug'S attaok was made in a paper read before the Munich
Academy, and reported in Trubner's Record (for Feb. 28, 1871); now, however,
he has hilly elaborated his views, and puts them forth in the Transactions of the
Academy (CI. I., vol. xiii., part 2), in an article of 105 pages quarto; and it seem*
worth while to return briefly to the subject, in order to see whether they are made
more acceptable by this complete presentation.

Dr. Haug's article is by no means limited to a discussion of the points a? to
which he disagrees with the rest of the Sanskritists ; it is, rather, a detailed exhi-
bition of the subject of Sanskrit accentuation, as seen from his peculiar point of
view : the mode of designating the accent in the various known texts ; the present
method of recitation of the Veda by the Brahmans, who are the living links in the
chain of its transmission ; and the teachings of the native grammarians, of various
class and period, as to accent. There is also prefixed a statement and brief criti-
cism of what other western scholars have written on the subject. In this elaborate
exposition, there is necessarily a great deal of repetition of what has been fully
presented before ; and the value of the author's arguments is lees plainly esti-
mated than if he had confined himself to stating and defending his special opinion* :
yet there is some new material in the article ; and many will be glad to have
within reach such a compendium of connected information as to the Sanskrit ac-
cent, even while they refuse their assent to the authors views.

Those views themselves seem to be no more acceptable now than when they
were controverted before the Society three years ago. The grand and fatal objec-
tion to them is that they leave the whole body of phenomena with which they
deal unaccounted for, a problem and a puzzle. If this which other scholars have
taken for accent and which they find no difficulty in explaining as such, is not
accent, what is it ? Dr. Haug makes the suggestion that it is a kind of artificial
metrical modulation, a u poetic accent;" only, what poetic purpose it answers, and
what analogies it finds anywhere else in the world, he does not show ; nor does be
explain why it is applied also to the numerous prose passages in which it appears
in all the Vedic texts save that of the Rig- Veda. As a counterpart, he suggests
that the peculiar accentuation of the Qatapatha-Brahmana marks another accentual
system, which is the real " prose accent;" but here, again, he fails to show what
properties it has that should possibly fit it for any such office. No one who has
examined it before has questioned that it is a special, and a very imperfect and
awkward, way of signifying the same real accentuation which is signified by the
other or " poetic " method. And I do not see how any one can possibly write out
a passage of the Brahraana with its own accent-marking, and then add the mark?
of real accent as inferred from the other method, and entertain any reasonable
doubt that the one thing means the other. If Dr. Haug were only to make the
attempt to give such an account of the laws of his " poetic accent v and " pro?*
accent " as should convert them from loose conjectures into linguistic facts. l.e
would soon find himself involved in difficulties with which the worst that he
charges against the views of other Sanskritists would be of no account whatever.
And till he makes the attempt, and succeeds at least measurably in it he has no
right to claim for his own views any status among scholars.

And what are the difficulties attending the acceptance of the common theory of
Sanskrit accent ? Simply these two : we have to admit that the Hindu gramma-
rians over-refined their accentual theory, introducing finally into it certain features
which we are unable to accept as fairly representing the facte of their language:
and also that, in the perhaps twenty-five centuries of the oral transmission of the
Vedic hymns, their mode of recitation has become altered from the simplicity of
living speech, and has taken on an artificial and scholastic character, as determined
by the phonetic theories of the schools. I do uot see that these admissions are
attended with any appreciable difficulty : they are wholly in accordance with our
experience of Hindu theory and practice in other departments, and with what we
might expect on general grounds. At any rate, if we are to avoid them, it mu?t
not be at too heavy a cost : we must have an alternative view offered us which
has some independent claim to acceptance.

It were useless to try to go through Dr. Haug's exposition in detail ; to refute

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Neic York, October, 1874. cv

him folly would require almost as much space as be has himself given to the
exposition. To sum up the case in a word : he occupies a very peculiar point of
view, which makes him see and estimate everything differently from others, dis-
covering mountains where they find mole-hills, and mole-hills where they find
mountains. He escapes difficulties of detail by setting up an infallible authority ;
he takes whatever the Hindu systematists put before him, questioning nothing,
testing nothing, explaining nothing. It does not appear likely that he will draw
over other scholars to his views, even as it is not known that at present he has any
one to stand by him. If the case should turn out otherwise, there will be reason
for returning to the subject hereafter, and for discussing it more elaborately.

Dr. Haug's examination of the Sama-Veda system of marking accent reaches no
definite results. He offers more or less plausible conjectures as to the proper
meaning of some of its numerous signs; but he does not any more than his prede-
cessors, make it out to signify anything really different from the ordinary accen-
tuation.

To conclude with a word of personal explanation. In a note to page 89, Dr. Haug
charges me with having unjustifiably rejected the exegesis given by the commen-
tary for three rules of the Tdittiriya-Praticakhya (xix. 3-5), without really under-
standing what it meant This is hardly fair to me. How the commentator
explains the first two of these three rules is perfectly intelligible ; but I hold that
he brings the desired moaning out of the first in a wholly unacceptable manner,
by a flagrant distortion of its language ; that he brings no tolerable meaning out
of the second ; and that he knows nothing about the sense of the third, but puts
forward two quite inconsistent conjectures concerning it, neither of which is good
for anything. I wish that, instead of saying of the last two that "the meaning of
the explanation appears clearly from what I have said above," Dr. Haug had
really endeavored to expound them : I should have been very glad to congratulate
him on his success.

12. On Recent Discussions of the Evidence of Phoenician Occu-
pation of America, by Mr. J. Hammond Trumbull, of Hartford,
Conn.

In the last issue (August. 1874) of the Archiv far Anthrojwlogie, Hthe organ of the
Deutsche GeseUschaft fiir Anthropologic, E&inologie, und Urgesctiichte, Dr. H. Hartogh
Keys von Zouteveen discusses the question "Haben die Phonider oder die Carthager
Amerika gekannt?" He maintains the affirmative on evidence derived from 1. the
pre- Aztecan ruins of Chiapas and Central America ; 2. Greek and Roman traditions
of a continent beyond the Atlantic known to the Phoenicians and Carthaginians ;
3. traditions of the natives of America, of the coming in ancient times of strangers
from the east, in ships; and 4. the presence of "Baal in Atlantis," proved by
" unquestionable Phoenician or Old-world antiques, which have been found in
America." Under his first head, Dr. Hartogh points to certain representations of
heads of elephants — or what he believes to be such — found among the sculptured
4 katuns ' on the walls of a temple at Palenque. and figured in Waldeck's Monuments
aneiens du Mtxique. That Waldeck did not himself discover the resemblance. Dr.
Hartogh regards as proof that the drawings were not, designedly or unconsciously,
made "mehr elephantenartig" than the originals. Of the tradition of the coming
of bearded white men from the east, etc., it is needless to speak The utter
worthlessness of Indian traditions extending back for more than three or four
generations has been so thoroughly demonstrated, that arguments based on them
scarcely deserve consideration. Under the fourth head, Dr. Hartogh, after brief
mention of "a Greek inscription on a stone found in Trinidad," devotesjnearly
one-third of his paper to "einviel wichtigeres Stuck" discovered in 1869, at~Lafay-
ette, N. Y., bearing a Phoenician inscription. This monument of Phoenician an-
tiquity is no other than the gypsum -statue, popularly known in America, a few
years ago, as the " Cardiff Giant," or "John Henry Cardiff." To those who know
the history of this sham antique, it seems nearly incredible that European scholars
should accept it as genuine, and that an account of it should be permitted to appear
in the organ of a learned society. Dr. Hartogh copies his description of this
"important monument" from an article in the Galaxy (New York, July, 1872),
and reproduces from that article a facsimile of the " Phoenician inscription " found

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

evi American Oriental Society:

or imagined on the arm of the statue. He states that this inscription hap hy him
been submitted to Professors Ingeholt (of Delft) and Cohen. The former decided
it to t>e Phoenician, and read the words "Thammuz, Lord of the Heaven:" tL*
latter thought it Semitic, but could not translate it, or decide to what language it
belonged. The Phoenician alphabet having been known to scholars hardly twetrv
years yet. if the statue is even no more than forty years old. argues Dr. HartoeL
there *' kann titer an keitwn Humbug gedacht wtrden:" but that, in fact, the nHTi-
ument is of much higher antiquity, he is convinced by Dr. White's miorr*«eo re-
examination of the *• pin-holes" in its surface, reported by the writer in the Galaxy.
The only possible doubt of its genuineness arises from the disposition some peopte
have uto regard everything American as humbug." In a final note. Dr. Hart^-i:
mentions the confirmation of his views by the account just received from Amfn^
of the discovery of a Phoenician inscription found in Bogota. New Grenada, ma<ie
by colonists sent thither by King Hiram of Tyre, the contemporary of Solomon
(See Dr. Ward, in the Proceedings for May, 1874, communication No. 5.)

To this paper, Dr. A. von Frantzius, favorably known to American archaeologist-
by his edition of Palacio. appends some judicious remarks. He admits that tlse
discovery of a Phoenician statue in America is very remarkable — if true ; but not
being fully satisfied of this, he is not inclined to attribute so much importance a? It.
Hartogh does to the monument. And he can scarcely believe the latter to be in
earnest, in accepting as genuine the Bogota inscription dating from the 10th cen-
tury B. C.

A few weeks ago, the " Cardiff giant" was again brought to the notice of Eun>-
pean scholars, at the German Philological Congress, at Innsbruck. ■* Some interest
was excited" (so writes Mr. D. B. Monro to the London Academy, of Oct. lmLi
11 by an account given by Professor Schlottmann of a supposed Phoenician statue
found near the town of Syracuse, in the United States." This statue "is regarded
by Dr. Schlottmann as a representation of Adonis. The circumstances of the dis-
covery seem to exclude the supposition of imposture." Photographs of the figure
were exhibited, but Dr. Schlottmann " had been unable to obtain a copy of an
inscription which is said to be legible on it " (though Dr. Hartogh's copy of it ba«j
appeared two months before, in the Archiv fur Anthropologic). " The speaker*
who offered remarks seemed disposed to suspend their judgment until the inscrip-
tion should be produced." Professor Schlottmann gave his reasons for inclining
to the belief that Phoenician colonies reached America; and among others were
•• the alleged Phoenician inscriptions found in Brazil " and other parts of America,
and " certain traces of Phoenician in Indian geographical names."

It is rumored that the Cardiff giant, which long ago ceased to I>e a profitable
speculation to American showmen, is soon to be taken to Europe for exhibition
It is to be hoped that Dr. Hartogh and Professor Schlottmann have not been ma«ie
unconscious instruments for advertising, in advance, for European markets, a stale
imposture which no longer attracts popular attention in America. That it hes
been matter of discussion in the Versammlung Deutecher Philologtn, and in the organ
of a European learned society, is the writer's only excuse for recalling it to the
notice of the American Oriental Society.

The subject was taken up and remarked on in the same strain by several of the
members present. Hon. S. Salisbury of Worcester, especially (President of the
Am. Antiquarian Society), detailed his acquaintance with the statue: he had seen
it before it was lifted from the ground; he had also visited the Chicago shops?
where the designer of it and the workmen who cut it were employed. Others had
examined the alleged inscription; others knew personally some of the parties
concerned in the fraud, or in the exposure of it, and could attest the truth of the
latter, as given in the newspapers some years ago' and also (for example) in the
American Journal of Science (i4 Silliman's Journal"), for July, 1871. A universal
feeling of surprise was expressed at this credulous and uncritical revival of a
long-since exploded deceit.

At the close of this discussion, the Society passed a vote of
thanks to the Committee of Biblical Revision for the use of their
rooms, and adjourned, to meet again in Boston on the 19th of
May, 1875.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1 875. cvii

Proceedings at Boston, May 19th, 1875.

The meeting of the Society was held, as usual, in the Library
of the American Academy, in the Athenaeum building, at 10
o'clock a. m. The President and all the Vice-Presidents being
absent, the chair was taken by Prof. A. P. Peabody, D.D., of
Cambridge, the senior Director present.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and accepted.

The Treasurer presented his annual report, of which a summary
is as follows :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 20th, 1874, • $1,530.00

Annual Assessments paid in, $75.00

Life-membership, 76.00

Sale of the Journal, 33.72

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank, - - - 92.13

Total receipts of the year, 275.85

$1,805.85
EXPENDITURES.

Printing and engraving for Proceedings, - - $123.92

Expenses of Library and Correspondence, ... 26.93

Total expenditures of the year, SI 50. 85

Balance on hand, May 19th, 1875. 1,655.00

$1,805.85

The report, having been audited by a committee appointed for
the purpose, was accepted.

The Librarian made a brief oral report; the additions to the
Library during the year had come chiefly from exchanges.

The Directors announced that they had appointed the next
meeting to be held in the autumn in New Haven, on such a day
as should be selected by the Committee of Arrangements, viz : the
President and the Recording and Corresponding Secretaries. Also,
that they had reappointed the Committee of Publication of last
year, namely: Messrs. Salisbury, Van Name, and Whitney, of
New Haven, Abbot of Cambridge, and Ward of New York. "

A Nominating Committee, composed of Professors Young of
Cambridge and Thayer of Andover and Dr. Pickering of Boston,
was appointed, to propose a board of officers for the year. They
presented the following ticket, which was thereupon elected by
the Society :

1*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

0V111

American Oriented Society :

President — Prof. E. E. Salisbury, LL.D., of New Haven.

C Rev. N. G. Clark, D.D., « Boston.

Vice-Presidents < Hon. Pbter Parker, M.D., " Washington.

( Rev. T. D. Woolsey, LL.D., " New Haven.

Recording Secretary — Prof. Ezra Abbot, LL.D., " Cambridge.
Corresp. Secretary — Prof. W. D. Whitney, Ph.D., " New Haven.
Seer, of Class. Sect.—Frof. W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., " Cambridge,

TreasW and Libr'n — Mr. Addison Van Name, " New Haven.

f Mr. J. W. Barrow, u New York.

Mr. A. I. Cotheal, u New York.

Prof. W. H. Green, D.D., " Princeton.

Directors { Prof. A. P. Peabody, D.D., " Cambridge.

Dr. Charles Pickering, " Boston.

Prof. Charles Short, LL.D., " New Yonc.

Rev. W. H. Ward, D.D., " New York

The following candidates were proposed by the Directors for
corporate membership, and were duly elected by ballot :

Rev. H. L. Cobb, of Millbrook, N. Y.;
Prof. E. P. Evans (now in* Europe);
Prof. E. P. Gould, of Newton Centre, Mass. ;
Rev. Joseph Jenks, of Newtonville, Mass. ;
Rev. O. D. Miller, of Grantville, Mass.; and
Rev. Thomas H. Rich, of Lewiston, Me.

In the absence of the Corresponding Secretary, Prof, Whitney,
the correspondence of the past six months was laid before the
Society by Mr. Van Name, who read some extracts from it.

Rev. G. T. Washburn writes (Lenox Furnace, June 12th, 1874) :

" I have recently sent you by express a small case containing a few pieces of
pottery from the cists of stone circles and stone box-like tombs of the Madura
district in southern India. These tombs and circles are spoken of in the Proceed-
ings of the Society for October, 1868 [Journal, vol. ix., p. xliv. ft.]. I have opened
and seen opened several in different parts of the district. There is a general uni-
formity in the pottery contained in them, but considerable difference in the number,
elaborateness, and variety of the vessels found in different circles and tombs.
Some small and very neat vessels quite unlike these were pilfered by the natives
from the collection I now send, greatly to my regret.

" I observed at the sides of some of the ciBts not only the pottery articles, but
the remains of bones1 and ashes, and the relic of what appeared to be an iron im-
plement, now almost destroyed by rust.

" These tombs and circles abound in all parts of the Madura district — on the
higher ranges of mountains, the lower ranges, and the plains. They are also met
with in the districts north and south, even- to the northern mountain-ranges of In-
dia— all essentially of one character.

" I observe a description of somewhat similar structures in Palmer's * Desert of
the Exodus.' The cists, the style of burials, etc., seem to resemble what we find
in India, but the ' bee-hive-like huts ' are not like any tombs I have seen there.
The circles also appear to be the same.

" Evidently, there must have been a considerable population of these tomb-builders
in southern India ; for the tombs are found in regions now. with the large population
of the country, almost uninhabited, and in any case likely to be inhabited only
under extreme necessity."

Mr. Van Name also presented the list of members of the Society
deceased during the year: namely, of Honorary members,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1875. cix

Prof. Heinrich von Ewald, of Gottingen;

Prof. Emil Rodiger, of Berlin ; and

Prof. Constantin von Tischendorf, of Leipsic ;

and, of Corporate members,

Mr. I. S. Diehl, of New York ; and
Mr. W. A. Wheeler, of Boston.

Prof. Yoting, of Cambridge, read an appreciative sketch of
Ewald's life and labors; Mr. Van Name also spoke of Ewald, and,
Btill more particularly, of Rddiger ; Pro£ Abbot paid a tribute to
the memory of Tischendorf, and eulogized the solid and modest
worth of Mr. Wheeler, and his many services to the cause of learn-
ing.

Communications were then presented, as follows :

1. Dr. A. O. Treat, of the North China Mission, spoke to the
Society of the language of China, its tones and aspirates, and its
contrast with the Japanese in respect to euphony. He referred to
the political relations of China and Japan, and to the interesting
fact that the difficulties, threatening war, between the two powers
had been settled by arbitration. The progressive ness of Japan,
as contrasted with the conservatism of the Celestial Empire, was
also made the subject of remark.

2. Prof. J. W. Jenks, of Newton ville, Mass., read a paper of
memoranda, taken from the journals and papers of his father, Rev.
William Jenks, D.D., bearing upon the origin and earliest history
of the Society.

It appears from these extracts that the idea of an American Oriental Society
originated with Dr. Jenks, as far back as 1822 or 1823. In 1830 occurs the fol-
lowing entry in his diary: " A call from Dr. J. Pickering; resuscitated with him
the plan of Asiatic Society, etc.". Again, Aug. 1, 1842 : " Attended a meeting of
gentlemen [names elsewhere given as Jenks, Pickering, Greenough, Theo. Parker]
at Dr. Pickering's office on the formation of an Am. Oriental Society. The progress
appears promising." Again, Aug. 20th : u Letter in reply to Hon. J. Pickering,
enclosing a constitution for the A. 0. S., with several remarks on articles and pro-
posed amendments." Again, Sept. 8th: u Yesterday we organized the A. 0. S.,
adopted a constitution, chose officers to obtain an act of incorporation, etc. I
rejoice that now my wishes in this respect are so far gratified, and that I have
lived to witness measures taken to realize an institution that for more than twenty
years I have desired should be founded." Again, Sept. 12th : " Mr. W. W. Green-
ough called on the 1 Oth, and we fixed the seal-device for A. 0. S. Mitchell designed
and is to engrave it." Again, Oct. 14th: " Letter to Dr. Pickering enclosing my
completed list of 86 questions or subjects of research for the A. 0. S., etc. Met
the new Society yesterday afternoon, and heard the above questions, excepting a
few of the last read to them : encouraged." Iu 1846, after the death of Dr. Pick-
ering, Dr. Jenks writes to Judge White respecting the former's interest in eth-
nology and the causes of it ; Dr. Jenks speaks of that subject as frequently occu-
pying their conversations: "More especially," he says, ."in the formation and
progress of our American Oriental Society, an institution happily effected by his
consent to become its President, and giving to it his valuable labors, influence, and
reputation. Seldom in life have I enjoyed a higher gratification than when his
consent was obtained ; for the establishment of such an association had been a
favorite object with me for more than twenty years, and without him it could
hardly have been brought into existence. How it can live and flourish without
him remains still to be seen."

3. On the Method of Hieroglyphic Interpretation, and on the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

ex American Oriental Society :

Way Collection of Egyptian Antiquities in the Museum of Fine
Arts at Bostou, by Prof. T. O. Paine, of Elmwood, Mass.

Prof. Paine described the hieroglyphic system of writing and the established
methods of interpreting it, and gave a translation, with comment, of certain inter-
esting inscriptions of the Way collection. Details are omitted here, as it is ex-
pected that the communication will form an article in the Journal

4. On the Different Systems of Hieroglyphic Interpretation, by
Prof. G. Seyffarth, of Yorkville, N. Y.

Prof. Seyffarth contrasted the hieroglyphic system of Champollion. as laid down
in his Precis etc, Paris, 1824, and his own, as set forth in his Grammatina JBgyp-
tiaca, Leipzig, 1855. He exhibited to the Society the manuscript of a hieroglv-
phical dictionary, which he hopes to publish in a year or two.

After the noon-recess of an hour, the Society resumed the hear-
ing of communications.

5. On the condition of Woman in Assyria, by Rev. Selah
Merrill, of Andover, Mass.

Mr. Merrill treated of the condition of Assyrian Women under these heads :
the general estimation in which they were held, as inferred from the language used
by the Assyrians in relation to their female deities; their personal appearance:
their clothing and ornaments ; their education ; their employments ; their state of
slavery ; their suffering in war ; their married state ; their private rights, married
and unmarried ; their property.

^* 6. On the Abacus of China and Japan, by Mr. A. Van N amo,
of New Haven.

This instrument, called in Chinese swan p'an, in Japanese soroban, according to
the Sampo daizen, a Japanese treatise on mathematics published in 1825, which
is the main authority for the exposition here given, was introduced into China
about the middle of the 1 4th century, and passed thence to Japan. The method
of use in China differs only in unimportant particulars from that here described.

The soroban consists of a rectangular frame holding a variable number of parallel
rods, usually from fifteen to twenty-five, on which slide the beads which serve as
counters. The rods are crossed by a bar which divides them into two unequal
parts, the lower holding five beads, the upper one or two (the second is seldom
used), each of the latter having the value of five of the former. The beads actually
in use at any particular moment are pushed against this cross-bar, the others
against the outer frame. The soroban is adapted to the decimal system, which is
used in Japan not only for abstract numbers but also for most weights and
measures. The number 123,456.789 would be represented on the soroban thus:

The rules are given and for the most part applied in a mechanical way. Tables of
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division facilitate the operations. The
multiplication table is in the usual form, and extends to 9 x 9 ; the others are con-
structed with special reference to the soroban.

Only two quantities can be added by one operation. The first is set down on
the soroban) and the second is added to it as fast as it is read off, the addition for

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1875. cxi

this reason beginning at the highest or left hand place. A table, for use only
where the sum of the two numbers at any place exceeds ten, gives the difference
between the number to be added and ten. This difference is subtracted from the
number on the soroban, and one (ten) added to the next higher place. Thus 4 + 9
(where 4 is the number on the soroban) =4— 1 + 1 0 ; but 9 + 4= 9— 6 + 10. Where
both the number to be added and the number already on the saroban exceed five,
another rule, sometimes more convenient, is given. Instead of subtracting the
complement of ten, add the excess above five, remove five, and carry one. Thus
74-6=7 + 1—5 + 10; but 7 + 9 is most conveniently added by the first rule ; thus
7 + 9=7-1 + 10.

In subtraction, the only case requiring consideration is where the number in
the minuend is smaller than the corresponding place of the subtrahend. Here
our method is to increase both by the same number, first the minuend by ten
units, then the subtrahend by one ten, but the process on the soroban involves
only a transfer from a higher to a lower place in the minuend. The table gives,
as in addition, the difference between the subtrahend and ten. This is added to
the minuend, and one is removed from the next higher place ; thus 1—3=1 + 7 — 10.
The operation begins, as in addition and for the same reason, at the left hand.

In multiplication, the multiplier is set down on the left hand and the multipli-
cand in the middle. The lowest place of the multiplicand is first multiplied into
the whole multiplier, the lowest place in the product being carried as many places
io the right of the multiplicand as there are places in the multiplier. The lowest
place of the multiplicand is then removed and the operation repeated with the next
higher place. Care must be used to avoid error in combining the successive pro-
ducts, and in fixing the unit place in the general product, especially where in our
notation there would be cyphers at the right of either multiplicand or multiplier.
Where decimal fractions are introduced, the same number of decimal places must
be set off \n the product as are contained in the two factors combined.

In division, whether the divisor consists of one or more places, the first quotient,
if the divisor or its highest place is contained in the highest place of the dividend,
is sot down in the first place to the left of the dividend, i. e. the quotient is in
effect multiplied by ten, and this must bo taken into account in estimating the
value of the final quotient. The table "is constructed with reference to this, and
the quotient of 1+-1 is given as 10. The table gives the quotients for the di-
visors from 1 to 9 where the dividend, not greater than 9, is less than the divisor,
equal to it, or a multiple of it ; thus when the divisor is 3, the quotients of 1 , 2,
3, 6, 9, divided by 3. The remainder, if any, is joined in the table to the quotient ;
thus 1+3=31, where the quotient 3 takes the place of the dividend number (1)
and the remainder (1) is added to the next lower, undivided place of the dividend.
Where the dividend is greater than, but not a multiple of the divisor, it is resolved
into two parts, a multiple of the divisor and a remainder, and each divided sep-
arately; thus 7+-3=6+-3+l+-K. Where the divisor occupies more than one
place, the aoroban has a decided advantage over our method of long division. The
multiplication and subtraction of the successive quotients into the highest place
of the divisor are performed by the table, and we have only to subtract the product
of the quotient into the remaining places of the divisor. Where the application
of the rule would give too large a quotient (e. g. 100 +-16, taking into account
only the highest places of the dividend and divisor would give the quotient 10),
diminish the quotient by one, and increase the highest remaining place of the divi-
dend by as many as there are units in the divisor, repeating the process until the
product of the quotient into the remaining places of the divisor is so much dimin-
ished, and the dividend so much increased, that the former can be subtracted from
the latter.

The method of extracting the square and cube root on the soroban is evidently
borrowed from a foreign source. As given in the Sampo daizen^ it corresponds
exactly with our own, even to the accompanying geometrical demonstrations.*

* The method described in a communication made by Mr. A. Westphal on this
same subject to the Deutsche. Gesdlschaft fur Natur unci VoUcerkunde Ostasiens, in
Yokohama, in May, and published in the MiUheilungen for September, 1875, which
is doubtless in more common use, has undergone a slight change, to adapt it the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxii American Oriental Society :

In the appendix to the Sampd daizen the use of the sangi, a method of calculation
which was supplanted by the wroban, is illustrated by examples. The counters
are loose sticks which are arranged as follows:

i ii 111 mi inn TTiiTi mi - = = 1 = 1111

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

These are combined to express large numbers by juxtaposition, like our Arabic
numerals; thus I— I— 111. The decimal places are marked by the units, tens,
hundreds, etc., having alternately a vertical and horizontal direction. In the present
work the numbers are arranged in a diagram composed of small squares, which
answer to decimal places, and it is possible thnt a board similarly divided may
have been used to aid the calculation. Where the numbers are represented with-
out the aid of these squares, a circle is used like our cypher for a decimal place left
vacant.

Negative quantities also are introduced, and are represented in the sangx by
sticks of a different color, the positive being red and the negative black, and in
the present treatise by a line drawn obliquely across the number. They are
treated in the usual way— e. g., the product of two negative quantities being posi-
tive—and simple equations involving them are resolved.

7. Meshech and Kedar, or Nomadism, Northern and Southern,
by Prof. J. W. Jenks, of Newtonviile, Mass.

After describing the immense tract pervaded by Nomadism, from Morocco to
the Ganges, and the partly parallel belt, from the Caspian to the Yellow Sea, with
their respective central deserts, Prof. Jenks spoke of the long-lived characteristics
of this kind of people, especially as described by the latest travelers ; and also of
their importance in history as the " armory " of Providence, as Jeremiah expressly
calls them (Jer. 1. 25, 41 ; li. 20, 28, etc.), whence came the " battle-axes," the
" hammers," the " sword of the wilderness," and other " weapons of war " — the
destroyers of corrupted, effete civilizations and empires, fossilized in sin and
error, which stood in the way of human progress; thus inoculating diseased
humanity with the free-born pulses of the wilderness. This importance and this
use was thought to be not sufficiently acknowledged and dwelt upon by historians.

Pastoral pictures of Mongolian and Kirghis life were given, and curious
details as to the perpetually shifting tramps, for nine months in the year, of the
Kirghis families, in "souls;" reminoing one of the forty years' wanderings of the
Israelites in Rocky Arabia. The Kurds, between Turkey and Persia, were
described, and shown to be affiliated with the Chaldees, who figure so largely in
antcbiblical and biblical history — shifting, for cause, back and forth between
nomadic and settled life, and still retaining that primitive force of character which
gave rise to the terrible description by Habakkuk (i. 6-10), seven centuries before
Christ, and to the remark of Mohammed, seven centuries after Christ, that " the
Kurds would yet revolutionize the world."

The independent, self-reliant, liberty-loving, hardy, and, on the whole, manly
character of the northern nomad was dwelt upon, as constituting excellent, nay
the very best, raw material for the making of history. Prof. Rawlinson was
quoted as remarking that ail Asia, or at least all western Asia, discovers proofs,
both linguistic and monumental of having been originally nomadic (Turanian).
Hence was drawn the inference that at the first, as we see them now and in
historic times, prehistoric nomads crystallized into states and empires, more or less
cohesive, which dissolved again from time to time into their original elements, to
be crystallized anew in different combinations and affinities. And this occurred

better to the soroban. After subtracting the square of the first term of the root

b*
a + b from o* + 2ab + &*, the remainder is divided by 2, giving ab + y . The ne-
cessity of doubling the first term of the root is thus avoided, and the operation on
the 8oroban somewhat shortened. The process of extracting the cube root is
shortened in the same way by dividing by 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Bosto?*, May, 1875. cxiii

again and again along all the borders of the great wildernesses belting Africa and
Asia, from Atlantic to Pacific.

So important an element of history, in all ages, is certainly worthy of the
thorough and thoughtful study of the orientalist.

8. On a Praying-machine in use among the Mongols, by Dr. A.
O. Treat.

The machine was described, and exhibited to the Society. It consisted of slips
of paper, with prayers in the Tibetan character written upon them, enclosed in a
cylindrical case revolving on a handle, so as to be whirled about while held with
the hand. The prayers are thus offered with great facility by a manual operation,
while the devotee is walking, riding, talking, or smoking.

No further communications being offered, the Society, after
passing a vote of thanks to the American Academy for the use of
its rooms, adjourned to meet at New Haven in the autumn.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

oxiv American Oriental Society :

Proceedings at New Haven, November 4th and 6 ill, 1875.

The regular autumn meeting was held at New Haven, beginning
on Wednesday, the 4th of November, in the Library-room of the
Divinity School of Yale College. The chair waR occupied by the
President, Prof. Salisbury.

The Recording Secretary being absent, Mr. A. Van Name, of
New Haven, was elected Secretary pro tempore, and the minutes
of the preceding meeting were read by him.

The Committee of Arrangements reported that they had
accepted, on behalf of the Society, an invitation from the Presi-
dent to a social gathering at his house in the evening, and proposed
an adjournment of the literary session from 6 o'clock Wednesday
afternoon to 9 o'clock Thursday moniing.

The Directors gave notice that they had fixed the Annual
Meeting in Boston to be held on the 1 7th of May next, appointing
Rev. Dr. N. G. Clark, with the Secretaries, the Committee of Ar-
rangements for it. On their recommendation, also, were elected
Corporate Members of the Society :

Prof. J. A. Broadus, of Greenville, S. C. ;
Prof. Andrew Oliver, of New York City ; and
Dr. Charles Rice, of New York City.

Extracts from the correspondence were read by the Correspond-
ing Secretary.

Rev. M. M. Carleton writes from Koolloo Valley, Mid-Hima-
layas (Aug. 23d, 1875) :

" I hope to send you two slabs of stone which I lately dug up near the site of a
somewhat modern temple in this valley, and which are evidently the remains of a
very ancient temple on the same or a neighboring site. They are of interest as
showing the art of carving at a very early period ; yet they give no cine to toe
earliest form of worship here. The whole valley is purely Hindu in its religion.
The temples however show in their architecture changes in the religious thought
of the people. There are four very distinct styles of temple-building in Koolloo.
One of the earliest styles is exhibited in the temples erected to the worship of
Shiva, all of which are made of well-cut stone, and some of them covered with
very fine carved work : my two slabs are good specimens of this period.

" Little or nothing has been done in the archaeological survey of this valley, and
little is known of the primitive races and their religions. Still, there are some
evidences that, before the advent of the Aryans with their religion, the. people
were snake-worshippera. There are eighteen old original temples in Koolloo.
erected to the worship of serpents, each of them being founded by a different *6g
(' serpent divinity '), and bearing a different name. A tradition giving the origio
of these eighteen ndg's, and so of serpent-worship in Koolloo, is known through-
out the valley ; it is as follows :

" In the Manalf Kothee, near the head- waters of the Beeas river, in the village
of Ghushal, there was a woman who had a very beautiful daughter. One day
Baski Nag saw her, and took her to his home for a wife. He had a mani, a very
brilliant jewel, in his head, and he had become Ichhiddhdrt, because, according to
the Shastras, he had lived a thousand years and bitten no one ; whence he could
take any incarnation he liked. So he incarnated himself as man, and took this
beautiful girl to wife. By enchantment he caused her to forget entirely her home,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New ITavett, November, 1875. cxv

and she was happy in living with him. One day, when, being about to become a
mother, she was soothing her husband to sleep by lightly parting his hair as his
head lay in her lap, he told her not to take the jewel from his head. When, how-
ever, he had fallen asleep, she took it into her hand ; and at once her Former home
and her brothers and sisters came to her memory again, and she began to cry
bitterly. Baski Nag awoke, and, learning the cause of her grief, ordered her
back to her home, but told her how to care for the offspring soon to be born from
her. She went back and lived with her friends. When her offspring came, she
put it into a hollow wooden drum and shut it up from the sight of all ; and from
that day she began to offer incense of burning spices to its name. She told her
sisters and maid-servant not to touch it at all, but to offer incense to it when she
was absent. One day, while her sisters were offering incense, they brought the
fire near the drum ; when suddenly out came eighteen ndg's. Each of them, going
his own way in a different direction, began to exhibit divine power and work
wonders ; the people, seeing them, began to worship them ; and on the spots
where they first appeared temples were erected, and the worship of ndg's com-
menced throughout the country.

11 This tradition is intensely Hindu, as the region is ; but it does not prove that
serpent-worship was introduced into Koolloo by the advent of the Aryans.
Fergusson, in his famous work on Tree and Serpent Worship, affirms that
serpent-worship never originated among Aryans, but, whenever and wherever it
appears among them, has been borrowed from other races. This may be quite
true. But when it is claimed to have come into India with the Turanian invasion,
I think the proof deficient We have in these mountains and in the Rivi valley a
low-caste people who are believed to be the primitive race of the land, but who for
long ages have been subjected to Brahmanical Hindu influence, and have adopted
caste prejudices ; and they worship the serpent to propitiate it, and thereby save
themselves and their cattle from its deadly bite. I have spent hours and days in
trying to find out the limits of belief among these serpent-worshippers ; and I
have invariably found that the whole round of religious belief and practice is
intended to propitiate the power to do them harm which they regard as the
inherent principle of the ndg's. The very form of the serpents they worship
indicates the principle or nature of serpent- worship among this people. The only
poisonous snakes in these high mountains are those belonging to the Viperida, all
characterized by short thick bodies and very broad triangular heads. They lie
close and. quiet on the ground, and strike suddenly without warning, and are
exceedingly dangerous to cattle, sheep, and goats, as well as to the people. The
other species of snakes are characterized by long slim or uniform bodies, and
round fish-shaped heads with firm fish -like teeth on their jaws ; all these are
harmless. With these facts in view I have visited scores of nd^-temples, and
examined hundreds of images of snakes, some carved in stone, some in wood, and
some wrought out in iron. These images invariably represent, in the form of the
body and the triangular shape of the head, the deadly vipers of the land. In a
single temple I found seventeen wrought-iron snakes, every one of which was a
facsimile of a full-grown viper of the most dangerous description. This fact,
taken in connection with the religious practices of the people, shows that the
essence of serpent-worship is a propitiation of an evil principle, or of those
powers from whom injury is received. The offering to ndg's is blood ; sheep and
goats are sacrificed to propitiate them ; the gore of the victims is spattered upon
the door-posts above and around the door, that the ndg's} looking upon it, may be
appeased or made happy. In view of such facts, I am surprised at Fergusson's
conclusion that, wherever the serpent is worshipped, it is regarded as an emblem
of wisdom and knowledge, and that its worship is adoration of the good and wise,
not propitiation of the evil or terrible. I venture to think that he comes to this
conclusion simply because he confines his study to that form of serpent-worship
which appears in the religion of the educated and philosophic Aryan Hindu.
May not this form be a result of Hindu theology and philosophy, in its influence
upon a worship borrowed from a more primitive race ?"

Mr. I. H. Hall writes from London and Paris various results of
bis examination of the Cypriote inscriptions he finds there, and
2*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxvi American Oriental Society:

sends a brief article on the subject — containing, however, nothing
which he has not published in other ways, in this country or in
England, or in both, during the summer and autumn.
Of communications, the following were presented :
1. Account of the Versions of the Scriptures in the Chinese
Language, with remarks on a proposed Mongolian Version, by
Rev. S. I. J. Schereschewsky, of Peking, China.

Dr. Schereschewsky spoke nearly as follows:

The Roman Catholic missionaries, though they have been more than two centu-
ries in China, have never attempted to translate the entire Scripture into Chinese.
They have translated what are technically called the " Gospels " for the different
Sundays of the year, in an obscure and archaic style, in designed imitation of the
so-called Chinese classics, with an extensive commentary, in several volumes. The
work was never widely circulated, even among their native converts.

With the arrival of Protestant missionaries began their endeavors to provide a
version of the whole Bible for the Chinese. The first missionary, Dr. Morrison, made
the first translation, along with Dr. Milne. Its extreme literalness and disregard
of Chinese idiom caused it to be soon laid aside for one made by Dr. Marshman,
one of the famous knot of Baptist missionaries at Serampore, who in the early
part of this century produced a number of Bible versions, in various languages of
India and the neighboring countries. Marshman's version differs little from Mor-
rison's in point of stiffness and exaggerated literality, and has scarcely been used
in China, either by missionaries or native Christians. Gutzlaffs, which succeeded,
was hardly an improvement upon its predecessors, differing from them mainly
by following Luther's German Bible more closely. It had moreover blemishes of
its own. Gutzlaff had peculiar theories as to the grammatical force of certain
particles in old classical Chinese, and he carried them into practice with an effect
sometimes grotesque and even ludicrous. The version was also loose and inaccu-
rate, and it has been very little used except by a few German missionaries.

About twenty-five years ago, the missionaries of various denominations then in
China agreed upon preparing a version for general Protestant use, to be executed
in a more satisfactory style. They organized a committee of delegates, represent-
ing different Societies, English and American. But there was a lack of harmony
from the very outset, first as to the terms to be used m translating * God' and * spirit,'
and then as to the principles of translation. They agreed to leave blanks in all
places where these words occurred, allowing each party to fill up as it should pre-
fer ; but even thus they held together only through the New Testament and then
definitively and finally went apart The Committee, after the withdrawal and death
of some of its members, divided into an English and an American company, each pro-
ceeding to produce a version according with its own views. The products differed
considerably in point of style and accuracy. The English company's version is highly
appreciated by the literary class among the Chinese, who regard it as elegant in
diction and excellent in style. But it is complained of as being too free and para-
phrastic ; and a candid judge will perhaps be compelled to admit that too much has
been sacrificed in it to style and to Chinese ideas of elegance. It of course em-
ploys Skangti for * God ' and shin for 4 spirit' It is chiefly used by English
missionaries and the native Christians who are under their influence; also by
some American and German missionaries in the South of China.

The other version, the joint work of Drs. Bridgman and Culbertson. is of quite a
different character. In it everything has been sacrificed to literalness, and its
style is neither lucid nor elegant, nor is its meaning clear. But in point of literal
accuracy it is quite successful. It is used by all missionaries who are opposed to
the rendering of Shangti for * God.' There is an intention to revise this version,
so as to make it more intelligible, and more acceptable in point of style.

All these versions are in the literary language of China, the WSn-li (which
means 'elegant and cultivated,' or nearly the same as the name Sanskrit). The
bulk of Chinese literature, ancient and modern, is in this language. It is well
understood only by those who have received a literary education, and anything
written in it, if read aloud, is not well understood by the hearer unfamiliar with

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, November, 1875. cxvii

the text and subject, owing to the extreme conciseness of the style and to the
numerous homophones. Hence the missionaries have felt it a great desideratum
to have the Scriptures in a dialect which shall be understood by the mass of the
people, and available for use in public worship.

In 1863, several missionaries in Peking formed themselves into a sort of com-
mittee to prepare a version of the Scriptures in the so-called " Mandarin," which,
while it is the court dialect and the language of officials all over the Chinese
empire, is also the vernacular of about two-thirds of the whole population of
China. It is, in fact, the modern spoken language of the Empire. Educated
people try to speak it, even in those regions where different dialects are spoken
by the common people. The New Testament was translated into this dialect
about five years after the work was begun. The Old Testament was assigned to
the speaker, because of his knowledge of Hebrew, and for other reasons, which
prevented the other missionaries on the committee from taking part in the work.
It was finished in 1873, and first printed in Peking, by the press belonging to the
American Board. Another edition has just been brought out in Shanghai by the
Presbyterian Mission press ; and the British and Foreign Bible Society are pro-
posing to produce another still, for the use of the English missionaries. The
missionaries all feel that the work supplies a real want, being the first version of
the entire Scriptures in the living vernacular of the Chinese people. In making
it, the following principles were adhered to as closely as possible : to follow the
sense of the original as strictly as the nature of the Chinese language would in
any way admit; but, on the other hand, to conform to the character and genius of
the Chinese language as fully as the sense of the original would permit. The
endeavor was to produce a real translation, and not a paraphrase; but also an
intelligible and idiomatic book, one which should not be shelved almost as soon as
published. How far this plan has been realized is left for others to judge, and
for the future to determine.

Dr. Schereschewsky also added some particulars as to the enterprise of a Mon-
gol version, in which he was now engaged.

2. Contributions to the History of Verb-Inflection in Sanskrit,
by Pro£ J. Avery, of Grinneil, Iowa ; presented by the Correspond-
ing Secretary.

Prof. Avery's very long and elaborate paper is in part a reworking of three
others, already presented, and reported in brief in the Society's Proceedings for
May, 1872, and May and October, 1873 (Journal, vol. z., pp. 111., lxviii., Ixxiv.).
But instead of the Sanaa- Veda, he has taken as representative of the Vedic period
the whole Rig-Veda, basing his presentation of the material on Delbruck's AUindi-
aches Verbum and Mutter's Index of padas, giving each verb-form in order, with the
number of its occurrences; and doing the same thing for the Aitareya-Br&hmana,
and the Nala and BhagavadgftA. To the lists of forms are prefixed some general
statements as to the history of the verbal inflectional system ; and at the end is
added a numerical summary. The paper will be printed in the next Part of the
{Society's Journal

3. On a recent Sketch of the Corean Language contained in
Dallet's Histoire de VEgliw de Coree, by Mr. A. Van Name, of
New Haven.

In connection with the presentation from Dr. S. Wells Williams of a proclama-
tion issued by the Corean government in 1839, in Chinese and Corean, forbidding
the promulgation of Christianity, Mr. Van Name remarked briefly on the Corean
language, as sketched by M. BaUet.

At this point the Societyadjourned, and the reading of commu-
nications was resumed on Thursday morning, at 0 o'clock.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxviii American Oriental Society:

4. On an Aboriginal Semitic Language, by Rev. G. K. Entler,
of Franklin, N. Y.

5. Report of Progress in the Edition of the Atharva-Veda, by
Prof. \V. D. Whitney, of New Haven.

Prof. Whitney explained that his desire was in part to account to the Society
for his absence last May from its meeting — his second absence only during the past
twenty-one years. He had gone to Europe in April to spend the summer there :
in good part, in the interest of the edition of the Atharva-Veda, planned by him
and Professor Roth of Tubingen in common in 1852, and partly carried out, by
the publication of the entire text of the Veda, in 1855 and 1856. For that
edition he hud copied and collated all the manuscripts then to be found in Europe,
and Professor Roth had revised the text and carried it through the press. At
that time it was intended that a volume of critical and explanatory notes should
soon follow, and he had himself made his contribution of materials toward its
preparation ; but Roth's absorption in the great and still more pressing work of
the St. Petersburg Sanskrit Lexicon, edited jointly by Bohtlingk and himself, had
deferred even down to the present time the execution of the plan. Now, how-
ever, the Lexicon was finished (the speaker had had the pleasure of seeing the
absolutely last proof of its last page at Tubingen in July) ; and it was the joint
intention of the editors to bring out as soon as practicable the long-expected
second volume. Meanwhile, considerable new manuscript material had become ac-
cessible in Europe, and Prof. Whitney desired to add its collation to that of the rest,
in the manuscript copy on which the edition of the text had been founded. A part
of the new material was in the private library of Professor Haug. at Munich ;
and by the kindness of this gentleman he had been allowed to make use of it: it
included a complete sanhitdrtext, and the pada- text of Books i-iv., xviiL, and xx. :
all in good and correct manuscripts, made by and for Hindu scholars (not copies
by professional scribes for the use of Europeans). At Tubingeu he found in
Professor Roth's hands three complete texts: 1. a pada-text, containing even Book
xix. (but not the peculiar parts of Book xx.) in pada-torm, as yet found nowhere
else; this was a MS. belonging to the Deccan College at Puna in India, and had
been most liberally loaned by the Government for the use of the edition ; 2. a
mnhitd-text belonging to Professor Roth (and having a special kindred with Prof.
Haug's MS.); and 3. a copy of a saithiid-UB. at Tanjore, kindly made for the
advantage of the edition under direction of Mr. A. C. Burnell ; and he collated
them all. with such accuracy as the several cases called for. The prefixed verse
park na dpo, etc, is found in four of the dozen MSS. of the first Book, without
any other differences from the text as printed. The material for constructing a
critical text is now so abundant that additions to it must be of only infinitesimal
value— unless, indeed, there should by good fortune come to light material of
another character, codices of an independent " family." The critical condition of
the text itself, as handed down by the tradition, is far inferior to what the Rig-
Veda exhibits, numerous errors, of even gross and obvious incorrectness, being
read alike in all the manuscripts.

Within the past year there has actually come into Professor Roth's hands a
copy of a very different text of the Atharvan, as the fruit of search made in
Kashmir at his own request, in consequence of noticing in Hugel's Kaschmir
that the Brahmans of that region " all belong to the Atterwan— or, as they say.
Atterman-Yeda." Professor Roth renders an account of it in an academical
programme: " The Atharvaveda in Kashmir" (Tubingen, 18*75). It is of about
the same length as the text already published, and, like this, divided into twenty
books, but the arrangement is wholly different, and the material content also to no
small extent: Books xv., xviii., xx. are almost or entirely wanting, with considera-
ble parts of other books ; and there is a corresponding or greater amount of
material not found in the other text The verses present in both texts show
variations from one another of every degree and kind. The manuscript is an
extremely incorrect one, evidently a copy into DevanAgari from the Kashmirian
character, and made by an incompetent or careless scribe. It is clear that such a
parallel text is likely to be of very great value for the critical treatment and
understanding of the one already made public — of how great can only be told

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, November, 1875. oxix

when more and better means for the study of the former shall have been procured;
and energetic efforts are making this summer and fall to procure such.*

The plan for the second volume of the edition includes critical and explanatory
notes, a German translation, and a complete index verborum, together with various
other auxiliary indexes. In the index verborum, Prof. Whitney said, he proposed
to include the pada-text reading of every word, and also to affix signs to each
reference, showing I. whether the occurrence of the given word is merely a repeti-
tion of a Rig- Veda occurrence ; or 2. whether it constituted a various reading to a
Rig- Veda passage (thus making the work, for the study of the Vedic language in
general, an easily used appendix to a Rig- Veda index); and 3. whether the reading
is doubtful in any way, or has an emendation suggested in the notes.

After a vote of thanks to the Faculty of the Divinity School
for the use of its room, the Society now adjourned, to meet again
in Boston on the 17th of May, 1876.

* As these Proceedings are going through the press, it is learned from Professor
Roth that the original of the DevanAgari copy, an old and Romewhat damaged MS.
in the Kashmir alphabet, on highly fragile leaves of birch-bark, has reached him,
being loaned by the Government of India, which had obtained possession of it.
It corrects its copy in a host of places, but also has innumerable errors of its own.
It is accented only here and there, in passages. Last year's search brought
nothing else that is new to knowledge.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxx American Oriental Society :

Proceedings at Boston, May 17th, 1876.

The Society came together at the usual place and time, the
President, Professor Salisbury, in the chair.

After the reading of the minutes of the last meeting, the report
of the Treasurer was read, referred to an auditing Committee,
audited, and accepted. A summary of it is given below :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 19th, 1875, $1,655.00

Annual assessments paid in. $550.00

Sale of the Journal, 17.71

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank, .... 105.39

Total receipts of the year, 673.1©

$2,328.10
EXPENDITURES.

Printing of Journal (x. 2. in part), $251.35

Engraving of Plates for the same, 330.00

Expenses of Library and Correspondence, 29.66

Total expenditures of the year, $610.91

Balance on hand. May 17th, 1876, 1,717.19

$2,328.10

The Treasurer also reported that the whole of the C. W. Brad-
ley fund for the purchase of Chinese and other type was now
transferred from England to America, and that its amount was
nearly $700.

The report of the Librarian stated that, apart from the ex-
changes with other publishing societies, the most valuable addi-
tions to the Library during the past year had been a gift from
the late Dr. Bhao Dajf, of Bombay, of thirteen Sanskrit works
printed by the native presses of that city (including commented
editions of the Mahabharata, the Adhyatma-Ramayana, and the
Linga-Purilna), and a gift from the India Office, London (made
through Prof. Whitney), of twenty-three volumes. The number
of titles of printed books is now 3251 ; of MSS., 135. A complete
list of accessions will be printed at the end of the tenth volume
of the Journal.

The Committee of Publication reported that the printing of the
second half of the tenth volume was not yet completed. Two ar-
ticles were printed off: one by Mr. Isaac H. Hall, of New York,
on the Cypriote Inscriptions of the Di Cesnola collection at New
York, accompanied by lithograph plates, giving facsimile copies
of all the inscriptions ; the other, a very long paper by Pro£ J.
Avery, of Iowa College, containing a classified ana numbered list
of all the verb-forms of the Rig- Veda, the Aitareya-Brahmana, and
the Nala and Bhagavadgita. Mr. Hall had received the extra
copies of his article, and distributed them to the scholars known
to be interested especially in the subject, nearly a year ago ; the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1876. cxxi

half-volume would be pushed to a conclusion, and generally dis-
tributed, as soon as should be found practicable.

The Directors announced that, in view of the reports made by
the treasurer and by the publishing committee, they had con-
cluded to recommend to the Society to pass over the annual assess-
ment for the year 1876-7. Their proposal was accepted and
ratified by vote of the meeting. Also, they recommended for
election to membership,
as Honorary Member,

Prof. Hermann Grassmann, of Stettin ;
as Corresponding Member,

Dr. George Buhler, of Bombay ;
as Corporate Members,

Mr. A. H. Edgren, of New Haven ;

Mr. C. R. Lanman, of Norwich, Conn. ;

Mr. T. C. Murray, of Baltimore, Md.

Ballot being held, these gentlemen were declared elected.

The Directors further gave notice that they had re-appointed
the same Committee of Publication as during several years past.
Yet further, that they had designated New Haven as the place
of the next meeting, and Dr. C. Short, of New York, with the
Recording and Corresponding Secretaries, as * the Committee of
Arrangements for it; appointing Wednesday, Oct. 18th, as the
day, but giving the Committee power to change it, if they should
see reason for doing so.

The election of officers for the ensuing year was next in order,
and a Nominating Committee, composed of Mr. S. Salisbury of
Worcester, Dr. R. Anderson of Boston, and Rev. O. D. Miller of
Grantville, nominated for re-election the whole board of last year
(see above, p. cviii.) ; and they were elected without dissent.

The Corresponding Secretary called the attention of the Society
to the losses which it had suffered during the past fear, by the
death of its Honorary Member, Professor Jules Mohl of Paris, and
of its Corresponding Member, Dr. William H. I. Bleek of South
Africa. He sketched briefly the life and the services to science of
these two eminent scholars, of whom the one has passed away at
a ripe old age, while the other has been cut off in the fulness of
his strength and usefulness, while engaged in pursuing his very
important and novel researches into the Bushman languages.
Mohl, too, has left not quite finished the most conspicuous work
of his life, the luxurious edition of Firdusi's Shah-nameh, published
by the French Government; but another work quite as important
and absorbing, though less widely recognized, was of a class that
is never complete — the guidance, namely, of the affairs of the
Asiatic Society of Paris, of which he has long been the devoted
servant, first as perpetual Secretary, and then, since the death of
M. Reinaud, as President. His valuable library was this very
day being broken up at Paris by public sale ; to its printed cata-
logue is prefixed an appreciative sketch of his life by M. Renan.
Many Americans have enjoyed his hospitalities, and will mingle a

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxii American Oriental Society:

personal feeling with the regret they experience as scholars at the
death of this admirable man and great Orieutalist.

The Corresponding Secretary presented the correspondence of
the last half-year. Among other letters of excuse and regret for
necessary absence from the meeting was read one, received since
the opening of the meeting, from Prof Brugsch-Bey, the celebrated
Egyptologist, who is spending the summer in Philadelphia, as
Chief Commissioner for the Egyptian Government at the Centen-
nial Exhibition. Prof. Brugscti had promised to be present, and
to favor the Society with a communication, but wrote to say that,
just as be was setting out for Boston, he was detained by pressing
and unavoidable business.

Dr. G. Seyffarth writes (New York, Mar. 27th), speaking of u five
photographs, representing the finest hieroglyphic inscriptions in
existence, those on the Leipzig sarcophagus," which he had sent
for the Society's collection. lie also encloses specimens of a font
of hieroglyphic type, reading from right to left, which he is caus-
ing to be prepared.

Rev. E. W. Gil man, one of the Secretaries of the Am. Bible
Society, writes (New York, May 13th), giving an account of the
versions, manuscript and printed, of parts of the New Testament,
in various languages of Alaska, existing in the library of the Bible
Society. He sends enclosed a minute of an interview between
Mr. Prince, the correspondent of that Society in St. Petersburg,
and the Metropolitan of Moscow, near the end of last year, in
which the former made inquiries of the latter (himself formerly a
missionary in Alaska, and author of one of the versions) as to the
authorship, value, etc., of the translations into Alaskan dialects.
As a philological curiosity, the following passage may be quoted :

" From his own experience, the Metropolitan is of the decided opinion that Un-
contemplated edition of the remaining three Gospels [supplementary to the one of
Matthew made by himself] is quite superfluous ; and tie gave his reasons for not
printing in Aleutian, but rather circulating the Scriptures in the English text
The entire population is only 2500, many of whom cannot read. Their own lan-
guage is such a mixture, and so complicated, that the children, if taught at all (and
they will have to learn some language), will give the preference to English, inas-
much as having a grammatical knowledge of their own language is next to impos-
sible, and not worth the time and labor required: for instance, there are 500
terminations to the verbs !"

The Secretary also laid before the meeting the papers issued
thus far by the Committee of Organization for the International
Congress of Orientalists, to be convened in St. Petersburg on the
first day of next September, and explained the regulations adopted,
and read the list of subjects thus far prepared for the discussions
of the Congress. This year's sessions are to be devoted especially
to studies relating to Asiatic Russia ; four days will be given to
this department. The three following days will be occupied with
1. Eastern Turkistan, Tibet, Mongolia with Manchuria and Corea,
China proper, and Japan ; 2. Hither and Further India, Afghani-
stan, Persia, and the Indo-Chinese Archipelago; 3. Turkey, with
Arabia and Egypt. The last two days will be given to 1. Orien-
tal archaeology and numismatics ; 2. the religious and philosophical

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1876. cxxiii

systems of the East. Only purely scientific subjects will be ad-
mitted to discussion; questions relating to the Christian religion,
and to contemporary politics, administration, commerce, and indus-
try, are excluded. Persons desiring to propose matters lying
outside of the prepared list of subjects are required to submit
them in writing, with a statement of the views they intend to
bring forward, to the Committee, for acceptance or refusal. Com-
munications and replies are restricted to fifteen minutes of time.
The bulletin of the meetings will be published in French. An
exposition of objects relating to the antiquities and the present
condition of Eastern peoples will be organized. Any person, of
either sex, interested in the objects of the Congress, will oe admit-
ted a member on payment of 12 francs (10 shillings or marks; $3.
currency). Learned bodies may be inscribed as members, and will
have the right to send a special delegate to represent them. Be-
sides admission to the discussions and the exposition, members
will receive a copy of the Transactions of the Congress — of which
all the current expenses are borne by the Russian Government,
leaving the members' fees clear for purposes of publication. The
Corresponding Secretary said he had himself been appointed Cor-
respondent of the Committee for the United States, and was pro-
vided with cards of membership to be furnished to such as should
desire them; and he expressed the hope that enough would be
taken to testify the interest which American scholars cannot but
feel in such an undertaking.

The " first series " of questions proposed by the Committee for
discussion is as follows :

1. Historical monuments inform us that Siberia during more than 2000 years
sent people after people into Central Asia : what were the circumstances that pro-
duced this surplus of population ? and why did it and its resulting emigrations
cease with the conquest of Siberia by the Russians ? 2. Is the Shamanism, even
now predominant among the heathen nations of Siberia, the same among them
all? or does it exhibit differences according to the ethnographical family to which
its adherents belong? 3. We see that almost all the founders of new nomad
monarchies in Central Asia give their subjects their codes of special laws : what
were the motives and the aim of these successive codifications, considering the
well-known uniformity of customs and mode of life of these nomad peoples ? 4.
"Was there before Jenghis-Khan a people or tribe called "Mongol?" or is this only
a dynastic name adopted by Jenghis for the empire founded by him ? 5. What
are the proofs in favor of the generally accepted opinion that the Turkish manu-
scripts in Ouigour characters found in the various libraries of Europe are really
written in the language of the Ouigours, these characters being employed also by
other Turkish peoples at the time to which the manuscripts in question belong ?
6. How far do the notices found in the official Chinese annals down to the time of
the Than as to the annual festivals of eastern and western Turkestan agree with
those of al-Biruni as to the calendars of the Kharizmians and the Soghdians (and
in part also of the Tokhars)? In what respect do these calendars differ from
those of Achsemenidan and of Sassanian Persia? 7. What do we know of the
Soghdian mode of writing ? What are the monuments in which it is preserved ?
Can its introduction into Transoxiana be determined, even approximately ? 8. How
far can we follow the ethnographical names Sarie and Ttijik in historical docu-
ments? What conclusions are to be derived from the latter as to the primitive
signification and the successive acceptations of these names ? 9. To what causes
may we attribute the stability of the Modern Persian language, which from the
Xth century down to the present time has undergone hardly any noticeablo change

3*

Digitized by CjOOQIC

cxxiv American Oriental Society :

in its grammatical forms? 10. Do the numerous Elamite proper names that have
come down to us allow us to draw decided conclusions as to the nationality of the
Elamites? 11. Is it possible to give an exact ethnographical and geographical
determination of the names Rutenu and Chela, which are mentioned in the Egyp-
tian inscriptions of the XVIIIth and XlXth dynasties as the standing enemies of
those dynasties? 12. In what light does the population of Palestine appear in
the Egyptian inscriptions before the invasion of the Hyksos? 13. How far can
the mutual relations of the Arab tribes before Mohammed be made to cast light
upon the political condition of the tribes of Israel at the time of the Judges?
14. The chronological and topographical data furnished by the coin-legends of the
Musulman dynasties are generally considered more worthy of confidence than
those of the chronicles and other unofficial monuments : is this opinion wholly un-
assailable ? and have we always the right to correct the data of the chronicles by
those of the coins? 15. What were the causes that brought about the sudden
cessation, at the beginning of the Xlth century, of the commercial intercourse be-
tween the Musulman East and northern Europe which had flourished without in-
terruption from the Vllth to the Xth century?

Communications were now called for and presented.
1. On the Classification of the Forms of the Sanskrit Aorist, by
Prof. W. D. Whitney, of New Haven.

The system of aorist forms, Prof. Whitney said, is the most difficult part of
Sanskrit verb-inflection, owing to the great variety of the forms, and their discor-
dant and sometimes puzzling character. The object of this paper was to endeavor
to clear up a few doubtful or disputed points.

The system in question (like the " perfect *' system) gets its name from the close
analogy of its forms with those of the Greek verb, not from any use of them with
an aori^ic (or perfect) meaning. Like the Greek, the Sanskrit aorist is of two
distinct formations (leaving out of view the reduplicated aorists), one with and the
other without an s as tense-sign. The two have often been called (as by Muller),
after Greek example, the " first aorist " and " second aorist;" but comparative phi-
lology has shown clearly the inappropriateness of these names in Greek grammar ;
and, whether they shall prove capable of being gotten rid of there or not, they
certainly ought not to be made a part of Sanskrit grammar. Kielhorn and Del-
bruck have distinguished them as '* simple-aorist " and "*-aorist," and Prof. Avery,
in hie list of Sanskrit verbal forms in the current volume of our Journal (x. 219 ft),
follows their example ; perhaps there is at present no better nomenclature.

I. The " simple,1' or Greek " second " aorist, is also closely analogous with Greek
in its double formation, without and with so-called union-vowel ; we have ogam
like tftnv, and 6gamam like tfuyov. These are now recognized and described (by
Curtius and others) as mere imperfects from another and simpler form of the root
than that which forms the presents and imperfects actually in use ; there is no
formal difference between, for example, dydm and &gdm, fyy* ang rSifv. The
special form of radical vowel which to a considerable extent marks the " 2d aorist "
of the Greek with union- vowel — as in l?amw, fyvyov, iTpairov — has nothing to
correspond with it in Sanskrit, and does not concern us here. The forms without
union-vowel are decidedly the more frequent in the Veda.

II. Of the 4-aorist, an s (convertible to sh) added to the root, either with or
without the " union-vowel " t, is the sign. This * or ish is currently identified
with the root <w, ' bo,1 and the forms are regarded as compound; such an explana-
tion is doubtless more plausible than any other that has yet been suggested ; but
it ought, I think, to be accepted at present only provisionally. While Greek and
Sanskrit agree in their possession of this formation alongside the other, they dif-
fer greatly in their management of it. The Greek has but one model for its " 1st
aorist'' inflection, with a stereotyped a in the endings, of difficult explanation; the
Sanskrit has four different models. In classifying and arranging the four, I should
swerve from Delbruck, agreeing more nearly with Kielhorn. We may best divide
the forms first like those of the other aorist, into such as have not and such as
have the union- vowel a before the endings, or into such as have simple 8 and such
as have sa as tense-sign — being analogous respectively with the imperfects of the
second and of the first general conjugation. Then the former will fall into such
as have not and such as have the union-vowel i before the s} or into *-forms and

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1876. cxxv

tsA-forms; and the MA-forms, finally, into such as add ish directly to the root and
such as add it to the root. increased by #, or into isA-forms and sish- forms: for it
does not seem to me to admit of doubt that, in the rare risA-forms, the initial s be-
longs to the root, is an extension of the root, or a " root-determinative," to which,
then, the ish that is added is precisely the same as makes the great mass of ish-
forms. As, in practice, the due subordination of the *-aorist classes to one another
would be too burdensome, we may arrange all the four on a level in the order : 1.
s; 2. ish; 3. sish; 4. sa. In the order of frequency, they would stand: 2, 1, 4, 3.

But my special object was to discuss the relations of certain individual forms
which I think have been wrongly assigned hitherto to the simple instead of the
s-aorist. They are forms of the 2d and 3d persons singular, seeming to lack either
personal ending or tense-sign, or both.

In the later Sanskrit (save a rare form or two), there is no room for doubt in
any such cases: the endings is and it from the ish class, andife, sU from both the
s and sish classes, are perfectly distinct from anything in the simple aorist But
these are not the normal endings : which are, rather, s and L We may assume
that is and U come by some process of fusion and compensation from ish-s and
ish-t, and sis and sU from sish-s and sish-t (just as once we have im in the 1st per-
son, apparently from isham) ; but sis and sit from a first person sam (A-class) would
be much more anomalous and unexplainable. Outside of the aorist, indeed, we
have dsam, dsis, dsit (imp! of as), where the i must be regarded as an inorganic
insertion; and there are left a few (five) cases of the 3d sing, ds instead of dsit —
standing, doubtless, for ds-t, but with the ending lost under the rule which allows
only one consonant to stand at the end of a Sanskrit word: and the Vedic 3d sing,
precative in yds is long since recognized as being, in like manner, for yds-L

In the Rig- Veda, now, there are no examples whatever of aorist 2d and 3d per-
sons in sis, sit of the j-class, or corresponding to 1 st persons in sam. But we have.
I believe, a number of instances of these persons as made by the normal endings
s and t, with the necessarily resulting phonetic changes. Thus, there occurs a 3d
s. ajdis along with 1st s. ajdisham and 1st pL ajdishma: it is evidently for ajaish-t]
and ydus 3d s., from yu, is of like formation (for aydush-t\ Also aprds as 2d s.
could be a simple- aorist form from the 1st s. aprdni] but as 3d s. (it occurs as such
10 times), it can only be an 0-aorist, for aprds-t, from 1st s. aprdsam (cf. ay dsam,
aydsus, ajfUisam).

In a considerably larger number of cases, both the personal ending and the
tense-sign aro lost in the same manner. Thus we have abhdrsham I s., and abhdr
3 s. (for abhdrsh-t); also asvdr 3 s., and asvdrshtdm 3 d. ; further, from roots with
medial a, akshdr and atsdr ; ay an (supported by ay an sam 1 s.) and atdn ; aprdt and
avdt ; bhdkj asrdk, and adhdk ; with medial t, acdit, apvdit, ardik ; with medial u, only
adydut. From yaj comes irregularly ayds 2 s., as well as the proper ay at (like the
precative -ydt for -yds) ; and the Aitareya-BrAhmana has similarly ajdit instead of
ajdis (for ajdish-t). All these are distinctly marked as #-aorist forms by their
heavy radical vowel ; no simple-aorist has any greater strengthening of the root
than mere guna.

Once more, in a few cases a final consonant of the root itself has also had to be
rejected : chand forms achdn, for achdnts-t (supported by achdntsus) ; and akrdn
and asydn are of the same character.

The matter is one of some importance in the classification and comprehension
of Vedic verbal forms. Delbruck counts nearly all these words as belonging to the
simple-aorist, and Prof. Avery's lists follow his authority , their root-vowel being
regarded as undergoing an anomalous strengthening. The explanation here given
takes away their anomalous character, and at the same time furnishes important
light toward understanding the history of the endings sis and sU.

2. On the Holy Houses, or the Hebrew Tabernacle, the Temple
of Solomon, and the Later Temple, by Rev. T. O. Paine, of Elm-
wood, Mass.

Mr. Paine said that he had spent the labor of many years on the study and
restoration of the Holy Houses of the Hebrews, and had at last been able to attain
to certainty on nearly every important point, finding that the data furnished by the
different writers of the Old Testament, when properly combined and understood,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

v x x v i A w erica n Orien tal Society :

complemented and explained one another in a very striking manner. He had nearly
completed the manuscript of a second edition of his work on the subject, which
would give numerous and important improvements upon the first As a specimen
of his results, he explained to the meeting his restoration of the first temple and
its courts, illustrating his views upon the blackboard — in a way which cannot be
reported intelligibly here without the aid of cuts.

At this point, the Society took a recess of an hour, coming to-
gether again at 2 o'clock to listen to further communications.

3. Z€t>=zdya&s, and other points relating to Sanskrit Grammar,
as presented in M. M tiller's recent volume of "Chips," by Prof.
W. D. Whitney.

In his Strassburg lecture (Chips, iv. 210-11, Am'n ed'n), Muller has the follow-
ing sentence : 4t You know that the nom. sing, of Zft»c has the acute, and so hag
the nom. sing, of dyaus; but the vocative of ZnV has the circumflex, and so hap
likewise the vocative of dyaus in the Veda." To any one who knows the laws of
Sanskrit accent, and is aware that, while in physical character the Skt. svartin i*
precisely accordant with the Grk. circumflex, the mode of occurrence of the two
is wholly different, the coincidence here pointed out must have appeared a mere
accident, and unimportant It has been criticized as such ; and now Muller, in a
long added note, attempts elaborately to defend it, and insists upon it as a point
of special significance.

The circumflex in Sanskrit is never a survival of ancient usage ; it always arises
by a recent and living process, the fusion of an acute and a grave syllable together
into one. And this is its acknowledged origin in dyaus, in Muller's passage; the
word is to be read as two syllables, di-aus, and accented di-aus, by the law that
the vocative takes the high tone on its first syllable; and di-aus, by invariable
euphonic rule, is written dyaus. Muller claims for it an exceptional importance
by asserting that u it is a unique form ; it occurs but once in the Rig- Veda, never
again, as far as we know at present, in the whole of Vedic literature." But this
is an entire mistake. The case is a rare one, but only because the circumstances
that call it forth are of rare concurrence. There are other instances, in the Athar-
van ; I pointed them out in 1 870, in a paper before the Ajn. Philol. Assoc n (see
its Trans, for 1869-70, p. 29) and gave this as one of the regular cases of occur-
rence of the svarita* An exception is not to be found, so far as we know at
present, in the whole of Vedic literature. To be sure, Muller says later : u What
gives to this passage its special value is, that in all other passages when tfyaus
occurs as a vocative and as bi -syllabic, it appears simply with the uddtta [= acute],
thus showing at how early a time even the Hindus forgot the meaning of the
circumflex on dyaus." This is only so far correct that there is no such " other pas-
sage;" for the one which Muller proceeds to quote — prefacing it with a "thus,"
as if it were only a specimen of a clrfss — is not such a one ; in it, dyaus does in-
deed admit of being read as two syllables, but it does not require to be so read,
and the accent given it by the redactors shows that they did not read it so. And
no further parallel case is to be found.

The immediate reason, accordingly, for the circumflex of dyaus is that it consists
in this particular verse of two syllables. As, on the other hand, Ztv from Zrtt
is on a level with f3aai?,ev from /fa<rtAei>r, yovev from yovrifi and so on, it also has
no exceptional character, and admits no other explanation than the rest of its
class. Even Benfey, in his article on the vocative whence is derived all the eru-
dition displayed in Muller's note, does not venture to claim any specially significant
parallelism between the two circum flexed words in question, and Muller has
brought forward no good reason for judging them otherwise. Each is a normal
specimen of a class, and there is no demonstrated analogy between the classes.

I will improve this occasion to call attention to a few other points in Sanskrit
grammar brought up in the same volume, as part of an answer (so claimed) to
some of my criticisms on Muller's work. The spirit and intent of those criticisms

* Vet another example, there unnoticed, is vyd'gkra, A V. iv. 3. 3, where the MSS.
have the impossible reading vydghra. wrongly amended in the edition to vyefghra.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston s May, 1876. cxxvii

I do not need to defend here ; the Society knows that they were made in the
interests of truth alone ; if they were themselves erroneous, they deserve blame,
and in proportion to their error : if they are well-founded, thej" are justifiable and
justified; for the false views of a man occupying M Cillers exceptional position as
an implicitly trusted authority have no claim to be overlooked or treated with
special leniency. I bring forward these points in order to illustrate the character
of his 8oi-disant " defence ;" here appears to be a peculiarly proper place to examine
them, because they can only be intelligibly discussed before such an audience as
this; because the Errors charged against me were committed before the Society
and in part published in its Journal ; and because, if established in the form and
importance charged, they would seem to render me unworthy of any office of
trust in an Oriental Society.

I. The Atharva-Veda-Praticakhya (Journal, voL vii.), after declaring its view
that the vowels are formed with "open" (vivrta) organ, adds in the next rule
(i. 33), as the dissenting opinion of some authorities, eke sprshtam. Here the last
word may be understood either as spr shtam, or as asprshtam. with initial a cut off
after e; the reading is precisely the same in cither case; nothing can decide
except the sense. As sprshtam. the rule would mean that 'some, however,
hold that they are formed with the organs in contact' — a direct denial of the
Praticakhya's own view ; as asprshtam, it would mean ' with tho organs not in
contact' — an antithesis of another kind, hardly more than a difference of expres-
sion for the same thing. This possible alternative, now, I overlooked, and took
the former (sprshtam) as the true reading and rendering. Muller, some time later,
in his Sanskrit grammar (note to § 57 : 1st ed'n, p. 20 ; 2d ed'n, p. 23), pointed
out that the word should rather be understood the other way. I at once saw and
acknowledged my oversight; and I took occasion (Journal, vol. x., p. 158) to
make the correction suggested, giving the credit, as in duty bound, to Muller.
With this I regarded the account as closed — as, I presume, would any one who
did not feel impelled to rake up from every possible nook occasions of reproach
against me. As it is, Muller breaks out thus: u before Professor Whitney under-
takes to criticize my own or any other Sanskrit grammar, he should look at £ 84
of my grammar, and practise that very simple rule, that if visarga is preceded by
a, and followed by a, the visarga is dropt, a changed to o. and the initial vowel
elided. If with this rule clearly impressed on his memory, he will look at his
edition .... he might discover that eke sprshtam could only have been meant in
the MSS. for eke 'sprshtam," etc., etc. Any one who knows the AB Got Sanskrit
will see the blunders here : Muller quotes a rule which has absolutely nothing to
do with the case in hand ; there is no visarga, nor any a before it ; there is no
dropping, and no conversion to o. It is true that, if the first word were ekah
instead of eke (as Muller's reproach implies), sprshtam with it would give ekah
sprshtam, and asprshtam would give the very distinct reading eko sprshtam ; and
if I had really taken one of Jhese for the other, I should have committed a quid
pro quo just about as bad (except for the absence of any possible personal motive)
as that of which Muller, in his blind and headlong haste, has now been guilty.
He also, as if to excuse himself for reopening a settled account, claims that his
correction was made in the second edition of his grammar, and that he deems it
necessary to call my attention to the latter ; but it was in fact made in the first
edition.

Muller's (intended) severe lesson is called out by my having, as he intimates,
"published an advertisement to dissuade students in America from using [his]
grammar." This is his way of describing an article on " Text-books for the Study
of Sanskrit," contributed by me to an educational journal: an article in which his
grammar was spoken of as one of the two best fitted for use by English-reading
students, and as being in some respects, though not in all, the better of the two ;
while, at the same time, its errors and deficiencies were freely criticised.

II. At a meeting of the Society in October, 1869 (Journal, vol. ix., p. lxiv.), I
criticized Muller's volume of Vedic translation (of 12 hymns); the criticism was
afterwards printed in my Oriental and Linguistic Studies (i. 133 ff.). Taking up in
detail especially the first verse translated — " Those who stand around him while he
moves op, harness the bright red steed" — and objecting to sundry things in it. I
said: "Again, who are the bystanders here referred to? and how can they stand
about, and yet harness something that is moving onward? Is this such a satis-

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxviii American Oriental Society :

tying conception that it should justify an extremely violent and improbable gram-
matical process like that of rendering pari tasthushas as if the reading were
paritasthivd' nsast The participial form tasthushas has no right to be anything but
an accusative plural, or a genitive or ablative singular; let us have the authority for
making a nominative plural of it, and treating pari as its prefix," etc. It is pretty
clear that this criticism means as follows : 1. the proposed version involves a gram-
matical anomaly ; 2. it is given without a word of explanation, though M fillers
translation claims to be the " first" made, on the score of fully accounting for
every word and phrase adopted, and though he has added a note of 1 1 pages on
the adjective '' red" in thiB very verse ; 3. nothing is gained by it, the version being
decidedly an unacceptable one. By way of answer and refutation, Muller leaves out
an essential part of my language, and falsely represents me as simply maintaining
that a substitution like the one involved is out-and-out impossible ; then, referring
to Benfey's grammar of 1852 as the desired authority, and quoting a single verse
where the substitution seems unavoidable, he claims to have refuted me trium-
phantly ; and, whereas I had called the process " extremely violent and improb-
able," while, according to him, it is only " anomalous" and *• ungrammatical" he
intimates that, in view of so vast a difference, it would be proper for me either
to " take a vow of silence or go into a monastery."

III. In a review of Miiller's Lectures, Second Series (Or. and Ling. St.. i. 266),
while discussing the terms to be used for 'surd' and 'sonant,' I quoted his "hard
letters (psila, tenues, surd, sharp ; vivdrafvdsdghoshdh)," and " soft letters (mtso, me-
dia, sonant, blunt ; samvdranddaghoshdh)" and spoke of " the long Sanskrit terms,
of his own making (for they are to be found in no Sanskrit grammarian), which he
superfluously and somewhat pedantically appends to each list of synonyms."
That the introduction of these long wordB was superfluous, and wears an aspect of
pedantry, will hardly be questioned : to all but one in ten thousand of Muller's
readers they are wholly unintelligible, and he says not a word in explanation of
them. Only to Sanskritists, and to Sanskritists who have looked carefully into
the Hindu phonetic theories, can they have anything to say ; and even such will
wonder why the author gives us these many-syllabled and imposing compounds
instead of the simple aghoslw, and ghoshavant, which, in every age of Hindu gram-
mar, have been tiie technical designations of the classes of sounds here in question.
So sure was I that no native authority would make the substitution, that— although
I had not, of course, examined every extant grammatical treatise in order to settle
the point — I was not at all afraid to venture the statement that these " terms,"
included by Muller in his " list of synonyms" for * surd' and 4 sonant,' were " to be
found in no Sanskrit grammarian." Muller retorts by an assertion which has a
show of truth, but not its substance : the words, he says, are found in the commen-
tary to P&nini, p. 2 of Bohtlingk's edition, and are explained by the Mahabhashya.
Sure enougli, they are there : but what are they ? They are merely lists of the char-
acteristic qualities of surd and sonant sounds ; each an aggregate of three indepen-
dent nouns, connected in meaning by ' and,' and put together in Hindu fashion into
a copulative compound (dvandva); each appended to an enumeration of its class
of letters, but not connected with it by a te or tnte, * these are' so and so, but by
an eshdm, ' of these [the qualities are]' so and so. To make the sense clearer. I
quote them, along with other examples from the same scheme : " e, d» : of these two
[the organs are] throat f palate ; — v : of this [the organs are] teeth + lip : — kh, /j*,
ch . . . : of these [the qualities are] opening + breath + tonelessness (vivdrafvd-
sdqhoshdh)\ h, y, v . . .: of these [the qualities are] closure + sound + tone {sam-
vdranddaghoshdh); k, c, t . . .: of these [the quality is] little breath"— and so on.
It would have been just as proper for Muller to give ' teeth + lip1 (dantoshtham) as
a Sanskrit term for v, or * little breath' (alpaprdnah) as a term for a smooth mute,
as to give what he actually did as terms for * surd' and ' sonant.' It is a pity I did
not remember where his long words came from; then I might not only have
noticed his error, but also explained the source of it : he had overlooked the con-
necting genitive eshdm, and taken the copulative (dvandva) compounds for posses-
sives (bahuvrihi).

IV. In his " Reply to Mr. Darwin " (Chips, iv. 430), Muller expresses his aston-
ishment at '' meeting with sarvandman, the Sanskrit name for pronoun, translated
by 4 name for everything, universal designation ' " (as is done in Ath. V. Prat , ii.
44, note ; Lang, and Study of Lang., p. 258, note) ; and in his list (Chips, iv. 528)

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1876. cxxix

of what he calls the twenty " principal bones of contention " between us, he gives
as third in order, " Whether sarvandman in Sanskrit means ' name for everything.' "
Now there are very possibly hundreds of Sanskrit words as to the history of whose
meaning we two may be of different opinion, and others as well as we ; there is
no reason for putting any one of them forward as a special " bone of contention,"
unless the case be one too clear for intelligent difference of opinion, unless re-
specting it my view be well nigh or quite absurd, and incapable of defense — and
this is doubtless what Muller intends to imply here. But as to sarvandman, it
happens that Bohtlingk was in doubt, 36 years ago (vocabulary to Pdnini), as to
how it came to its meaning ; and, although he appears in the St. Petersburg Lex-
icon to accept the view which Muller holds, I learn from him by private letter
that the case is not so : he is still in the same doubt. This would of itself be
enough to take off the reproach sought to be cast upon me by Muller ; but I am
ready to go farther, and defend my understanding of the word with reasons
against his.

The Hindu grammar recognizes four classes of words, parts of speech ; the
first, ndman (* name, noun '), including noun, adjective, and pronoun. The use of
ndman, then, with sarva ('all') prefixed, to denote a division of this class, seems
most naturally to define a body of words which have not, like nouns and adjec-
tives in general, a more or less restricted application, depending on particular
characteristics, but which are substitutes for any and every other ' name.' The
special suitableness of the term as thus understood makes strongly in favor of the
explanation (Pott recently calls attention to this in his introduction to Humboldt's
Versckiedenheit des Sprachbaues, p. eexvii., apparently in ignorance that there has
been any recent expression of difference of opinion on the matter). But, on the
other hand, among the g ana's, or lists of words, attached to Panini's grammar, the
pronouns and pronominally declined adjectives are made a gana of, with sarva at
their head; and it is the view of Muller and others, following the understanding of
the recent Hindu grammarians, that sarvandman means only * a word occurring in
the list that begins with sarva.' There are two very strong objections to this.
In the first place, the proper term for such a list is sarvddi, not sarvandman, and
the former is given as its name in the book of gaud's : the burden of proof rests
upon Muller to show, by bringing forward other like cases, that the substitution
is an admissible one. In the second place, sarvandman as name for * pronoun '
occurs in Yaska's Nirukta and in the Ath. V. Praticakhya, both of which are prob-
ably earlier than Panini, the former being so by universal consent: and in the A.
V. Pr. the term is applied in one place to the pronominal root *, which is not found
in the sarva-\\Bt at all. To my mind, there is no plausibility in interpreting sar-
vandman in these treatises as an anticipation of Panini's gana ; to do so is to com-
mit an anachronism. Very possibly, when the list of pronominally declined
words was drawn up, sarva was put at its head under the influence of the older
name, that sarvddi and sarvandman might be used interchangeably. I do not put
forward my explanation of the word as certain, since there is a great deal as yet
imperfectly understood in the history of Sanskrit grammar ; but I hold that, in
the present condition of our knowledge, it is much more acceptable than the
other ; and that Muller, instead of assuming gross ignorance or blundering on the
part of those who accept it, needs to see whether he can make out a good defense
of his own opposing view.

I think myself justified in claiming in conclusion that, if Muller had any real
defense to offer against my criticisms, he would not have resorted to such perver-
sions, and such weak counter-attacks, as those here exposed. If I have seemed
to some persons over-severe in my comments on him, he has himself taken pains
brilliantly to justify me. There is nothing in his whole answer of a different
character from what these specimens illustrate ; and its violations of fairness and
candor are in some cases even far grosser than have here been instanced.

4. On the Sinaitic Inscriptions, by Prof. E. J. Young, of Cam-
bridge.

Prof. Young described the locality and character of these inscriptions, and
reviewed the progress of opinion and discussion with relation to them, noticing
most fully the most recent work on the subject, that of Mr. Samuel Sharpe, which he
joined with other competent critics in condemning as unsound and nearly worthless.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxx American Oriental Society:

5. On Central Asia as a Field of Research, by Prof. J. W.
Jenks, of Newtonville, Mass.

Prof. Jenks began with giving a geographical description of Central Asia, as i
region of about the size of the United States, remarkably corresponding in latitude
and opposite longitude, and named its constituent countries, each full of inter-
esting questions, in geography, history, linguistics, and ethnology ; and then lim-
ited himself to remarks on its north-western region, where our race is supposed
by many to have originated. Here at least a dozen questions in geography were
enumerated as requiring answer; and, omitting linguistic matters, some of the
many points that thorough research, above and under ground, might be expected
to elucidate, were briefly touched upon.

The rivalry, for dominion on the one hand and trade on the other, between
Russia and England, was hailed, in the interest of scholars, as likely soon to open
these storied and strange countries to scientific researches of all kinds — researches
which will confirm or confound certain scientific pretensions now based on discov-
eries confined to too small a part of the face of the earth.

A variety of subjects, connected with the unity of human history, the move-
ments and relations of nations, the emporial border-cities of the nomadic region,
the important ethnological remains, were more or less dwelt upon by Prof. Jenks,
who closed with expressing the wish, which he did not dare to call a hope, that
Russia and England would have the wisdom to establish here a jointly protected
confederacy of states, to serve as an emporium of the trade and intercourse of the
world, thus educating to a higher order of character an energetic and most varied
and interesting collection of peoples, who possess many traits worthy of cultiva-
tion and civilization.

6. On the Influence of the Aboriginal Tribes upon the Aryan
Speech of India, by Prof. John Avery, of Grinnell, Iowa ; read
by the Corresponding Secretary.

Prof. Avery's paper reviewed first the ethnographic character of the population
of India, as composed of different elements, necessarily more or less influencing
one another. Then it glanced at the successive periods of the history of Aryan
Indian language, sketching their chief characteristics, especially with reference to
the accessibility of the language to external influences. A language, Prof. Avery
says, may be modified by another, 1. in its sounds, by the introduction of new
ones or the modification of those already existing : 2. in the structure of its words,
including the formation of bases, and the mode of expressing relation ; 3. in its
vocabulary, by the addition of new materials, either roots or complete words ; and
as a fourth particular (not farther considered here), in the arrangement of its words
in the sentence. The first three points were taken up and examined in their order.
The history of the changes of Aryan vowel-sounds is thought to show some signs
of aboriginal influence ; but such has been claimed to exhibit itself most plainly in
the presence in Sanskrit, etc., of the so-called cerebral or lingual letters. The his-
tory of opinion and discussion of this subject was reviewed, and the opposing
theories of Beames, Buhler, and Caldwell were examined ; the writer inclined de-
cidedly to favor Caldwell's view, which recognizes this class of sounds as coming
from the Dra vidian. In the later derivative and inflectional systems of the Aryan
dialects it is hardly possible to see with confidence any effect of mixture with the
aboriginal tongues. In the vocabulary there have been, of course, considerable and
increasing borrowings, but it is difficult to estimate their amount with accuracy.
The statements of different authorities, with regard to different periods and
localities, were reported by Prof. Avery, who concluded with noticing that the
Aryan languages have fairly maintained their integrity against all outside in-
fluences.

The end of the day having come, and there being not enough
business remaining to warrant the calling of the Society together
again on Thursday morning, one or two further communications
which had been offered were withdrawn ; and, after passing the
usual vote of thanks to the American Academy for the use of its
room, the Society adjourned, to meet again at New Haven in Oc-
tober next.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haveny November , 1876. cxxxi

Proceedings at New Haven, Not. 1st and 2d, 1876.

The Semi-annual Meeting was held at New Haven, in the
Library of the Divinity School, commencing on Wednesday, Nov.
1st, 1876, at 3 v. m. The President was in the chair. In the
absence of the Recording Secretary, Mr. A. Van Name was
appointed Secretary for the meeting.

An invitation was communicated on the part of the President,
to meet socially at his house in the evening; it was accepted
with thanks.

The Annual Meeting was appointed to be held in Boston in the
May ensuing.

On the nomination of the Directors, the following gentlemen
were elected to Corporate Membership :

Rev. T. W. Chambers, D.D., of New York.
Rev. Henry Ferguson, of Exeter, N. H.

Extracts were read by the Corresponding Secretary from the
correspondence of the preceding half-year.

Communications were presented as follows, either on Wednes-
day or at the continuation of the meeting on Thursday :

1. On the Kurmanji Kurdish, by Rev. C. H. Wheeler, of Har-
poot, Turkey in Asia.

Mr. Wheeler made a brief series of statements, which he illustrated with a
manuscript map, with regard to the geographical distribution of the Kurdish
dialects, and especially respecting the Kurmanji dialect, and the missionary
labors in connection with it.

2. On De Rough's derivation of the Phenician alphabet from
the Egyptian characters, by Prof. W. D. Whitney, of New
Haven.

Prof. Whitney called attention to the great antecedent probability that the
ancient Semitic alphabet should have been derived from one of the two between
whose territory its own is situated — the Assyrian cuneiform on the east, or the
Egyptian hieroglyphic on the south-west. It is of recent traceable date as com-
pared with them. It is a purely phonetic system, of simple structure, such as is
apt to be made by a process of selection and adaptation from a more unwieldy
historical system : witness, for example, the Persian cuneiform from the Assyrian,
and the Japanese iroha from the Chinese characters. Hence the attempt has
repeatedly been made to demonstrate its origin from one or the other of the two
systems referred to. One of the most recent and notable is that of De Rouge,
lately (Paris, 1874) made public in full by his son since his death; it had before
been known only by an insufficient and not easily accessible abstract. De Rouge*
worked with greater knowledge and on a better basis than his predecessors, and
his discussion has been accepted by many as settling the question with which it
deals. Not, however, by all : more than one scholar skilled in palaeography has
tried or is trying his hand at a new solution. Without laying any claim to the
authority of an expert in such matters, the speaker said that the interest of the
subject was such as to make well worthy of the attention of the Society a brief
review and criticism of the French scholar's processes and their results, with a

4*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxxii American Oriental Society:

view to testing whether the question is to be regarded as absolutely settled, so
that no reasonable man could cherish doubt about it, like the derivation of the
Greek alphabet, or still open to new attempts, like the derivation of the Indian
alphabets. He had accordingly prepared a chart showing the hieratic characters
from which the Phenician are claimed to have been derived, with their hieroglyphic
originals, and he proceeded to point out the claimed correspondences, and to remark
upon their character. Without illustration, it is in vain to report the criticising
made in detail, and only some of the main points can bo noticed.

The correspondences were found to be in no small part shadowy, and open to
doubt For example, the asserted hieratic original of the n-sign is a long horizon-
tal line, with a brief tag attached at one end. The original of the k is a character
which would have turned much more readily into the d or the r-sign ; while these
are traced from characters which are not nearly so likely to have suggested them.
The p and p-signs would have to be made by leaving out the characteristic parts
of the Egyptian characters, and keeping only their accessories. The ft-sign can
be gotten only by abandoning the whole principle of formation of the correspond-
i- g hieratic. No even distant likeness can be discovered in the cases of the
f-sign, or of the *, or of the samech. The original of h would have answered
much better for the teth (6). For the e-sign, the author hesitates between two
hieratic characters which are as unlike one another as possible ; and if he selects
the one, he might just as well have taken the other. And so on. It is not to be
claimed that any one of these difficulties might not well enough be gotten over by
itself ; or that even, all taken together, they do not leave a fair degree of plausi-
bility to De Rouge's theory ; but they are too many, it seems, to allow us to re-
gard his exposition in the light of a demonstration ; it has not substance enough
to insure it against being swept away and replaced by something better.

What, however, probably has done and will do most to shake the confidence of
cautious scholara in De Rouge's results, is his undertaking to prove so much, and
his finding it so easy to prove all he undertakes. Thus, for example, he has four
different Egyptian t-signs from which to deduce the Phenician teth, tow, and
daleth; the four are, by the common consent of Egyptologists, equivalent and
interchangeable in Egyptian use, and neither the ancient language nor its de-
scendant, the Coptic, has a d-sound. But De Rouge* is not content with tracing
likenesses which shall connect the two sets of signs ; he sets out to discover a
reason why one of the Egyptian quaternion, rather than the others, should have
been made the parent of the daleth; and he selects one, by a most peculiar and
precarious process of reasoning, starting from the fact that the Coptic has a sylla-
bic sign for the combination ti. So far as resemblances are concerned, a different
distribution would have answered the purpose just about equally welL Again,
the four Egyptian fe-signs, not recognizable on Egyptian ground as of different
value, he distributes to four different Semitic gutturals and aspirates, on the
score of their prevailing use by the Egyptians in transliterating Semitic words ;
and, having so allotted them, he makes no difficulty of deriving each from each.
This would imply, of course, that the makers of the Phenician alphabet went to
work like modern phonetists, to note nuances of utterance which had never risen
to conscious difference among the native users of the language ; and that they
were governed by these in their selection of signs for sounds which the Egyp-
tians did not possess, and which perhaps no Egyptian speaker could have pro-
duced. This is so extremely improbable that it goes far towards vitiating the
whole body of argument and conclusion of which it forms a part ; if the corres-
pondences can be fitted to such a theory, they must be of a loose and widely adapt-
able kind — Buch, in short, as our examination of them in detail shows them.

We have good, and sufficient reason, then, for declining to regard the Egyptian
genesis of the Semitic characters as definitively demonstrated, and looking with
interest to see what will be the next essay made in the same direction.

3. On the Influence of the Aryans upon the Aboriginal Speech
of India, by Prof. John Avery, of Gnnnell, Iowa ; read by the
Corresponding Secretary.

Prof. Avery's paper described first at some length the circumstances of the
conquest and settlement of India by the intrusive Aryan tribes, with the resulting

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Haven, November, 1876. cxxxiii

geographical distribution of the various races. It then proceeded to discuss the
varying effects in the different parts of the country of the mixture or contact of
races upon the speech of the aborigines. Its conclusions were summed up as
follows : 1. The primitive people whose land was occupied by the Aryans gradu-
ally gave up their ancestral tongue, and adopted the language of their conquerors,
introducing into it, however, some of the peculiarities of their own speech.

2. The wild tribes of the hills, so far as they have maintained their political and
Bocial independence, have also preserved their linguistic traditions unimpaired,
borrowing neither the Aryan grammar nor much of the Aryan vocabulary.

3. The cultivated languages of the southern peninsula have been greatly enriched
from the Sanskrit, directly or indirectly ; but this has been chiefly in the way of
a contribution from the abundant stores of the latter to their deficient stock of
words, and not by a reconstruction of their grammar. In this respect they have
surprisingly maintained their independence, notwithstanding the tremendous press-
ure of Aryan influence, operating through more than twenty centuries.

4. List of Chinese Names of Minerals, by Prof. Raphael Pum-
pelly, of Owego, N. Y. ; communicated by the Corresponding
Secretary.

Prof. Pumpelly sent a list of names, taken from a much larger list of the min-
eral products of China, which he had compiled from various native geographical
works, and more especially from the Ta-tsmg-i-tung-chi. The compilation was
used in preparing the tables of Chinese mineral productions published in his
" Geological Researches in China, Mongolia, and Japan" (Smithsonian Institution,
1 866). The names are chiefly such as he was able to identify in the lapidaries1
and druggists' shops ; hence many of them relate to ornamental and to precious
stones. He thought that, notwithstanding its fragmentary character, it might, as
representing the result of a good deal of careful labor, be worth publishing as an
aid to future travellers.

5. On the Telugu Language, by Rev. J. Chamberlain, Mission-
ary in Southern India.

Dr. Chamberlain gave a sketch of the Dravidian family of languages, and ex-
plained and illustrated more particularly some of the peculiarities of the Telugu,
briefly describing also the Telugu literature.

6. On Dr. S. Wells Williams's Syllabic Dictionary of the
Chinese Language, by Mr. E. C. Taintor, of the Chinese Customs
Service.

Mr. Taintor's communication was an oral presentation, with abundant black-
board illustration, of the main points of .a review of Dr. Williams's dictionary,
prepared by him in 1874 for a Shanghai daily paper (North China News). It was
prefaced by a brief account of the progress of European Chinese Lexicography
from the beginning, with a view to determine more accurately the place filled by
the new work, and the peculiar merits of the latter — which was also defended
against certain unjust criticisms that had been passed upon it.

The Society, after passing a vote of thanks to the Yale Divinity
School for the use of its library as place of meeting, then aa-
journed till May, 1877.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxxiv American Oriental Society :

Proceedings at Boston, Way SOtn, 1877.

The Society met in Boston on Wednesday, May 30th, 1877, at
the usual place and time, the President in the chair.

The Report of the Treasurer was read, in his absence, by the
Recording Secretary. Its principal items were as follows :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 18th, 1876, $1,717.19

Annual Assessments paid in, $55.00

Sale of the Journal, 27.38

Interest on Deposit in Sayings Bank, 99.39

Total receipts of the year, - 181.77

$1,898.96

EXPENDITURES.

Printing of Journal, vol. x., in part, $124.36

Book-binding, - - 199.70

Expenses of Library and Correspondence, .... 12.60

Total expenditures of the year, $336.66

Balance on hand, May 30th, 1877, 1,562.30

$1,898.96

The C. W. Bradley fund for the purchase of Oriental type
amounts to not far from $700.

It was reported on the part of the Librarian that the additions
of the year had been 52 volumes and 93 parts of volumes, with 15
pamphlets, and 1 manuscript. The titles of printed works number
at present 3294; of manuscripts, 136.

In view of the delay in the completion of volume x. of the
Journal, the Directors announced that they had decided to pass
over the assessment for the coming year.

The autumn meeting was appointed to be held in New York,
on Wednesday, Oct. 24th, and rro£ Short and Dr. Ward of New
York, with the Corresponding Secretary, were appointed a Com-
mittee of Arrangements for it.

The Directors reported the transfer of the following names, of
gentlemen now resident in this country, from the list of Corre-
sponding to that of Corporate Members :

Rev. John T. Gracey, of Syracuse, N. Y. ;
Rev. Samuel H. Kellogg, of Alleghany, Pa. ;
Rev. John H. Shedd, of Charlotte, No. Car.;
Prof.S. Wells Williams, of New Haven.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1877. cxxxv

The following persons, proposed and recommended by them,
were elected Corporate Members :

Prof. Arthur M. Elliott, of Baltimore, Md. ;
Prof. J. E. Latimer, of Boston ;
Mr. Charles G. Loring, of Boston ;
Prof. James F. McCurdy, of Princeton, N. J.;
Prof. W. J. M. Sloane, of Princeton, N. J.;
Pres"t William F. Warren, of Boston;
Mr. John Westall, of Fall River, Mass. ;
Mr. John W. White, of Cambridge, Mass.

The election of officers for the ensuing year then taking place,
the whole board of last year was re-elected without dissent

The Corresponding Secretary reported the losses of the Society
by death since the last annual meeting: namely, the Corporate
Member,

Rev. Selah B. Treat, of Boston ;

the Corresponding Members,

Rev. Simeon H. Calhoun, missionary in Syria ;

Prof. Cotton Mather, of London ; '

and the Honorary Members,

Prof. Hermann Brockhaus, of Leipzig ;
Prof. Christian Lassen, of Bonn.

Dr. Anderson spoke at some length of the character and services
of Mr. Treat, and Mr. Calhoun, and Dr. P. Parker also eulogized
Mr. Treat Prof. Salisbury paid a tribute of high praise to Pro£
Lassen, as a scholar of the first rank, and as one whose kindness
and helpfulness — marked traits of his character — he had himself
personally experienced during his studies in Europe. Prof.
Whitney rehearsed the varied and eminent labors and merits of
Brockhaus and Lassen in the departments of Oriental, especially
of Indian, learning ; referring also to Mr. Mather's great work,
the Bible in Hindustani. He further spoke with feeling of the
loss which Oriental studies have sustained in the early death of
Prof. Haug of Munich, his own classmate at Tubingen in 1851.

Extracts were read from the correspondence of the past six
months. Rev. S. H. Kellogg sends a letter accompanying the
donation of a copy of his " Grammar of the Hindi Language," giv-
ing a comparative treatment of all the principal dialects of that
language — a work of which his article on the same subject pre-
sented to the Society in October, 1871, was a forerunner, and
which, in its elaborate form, is spoken of in very high terms by
scholars well qualified to judge its merits.

Dr. Mayreder of Vienna requests contributions toward a general
collection of the proverbs of all nations.

Prof. Isaac H. Hall, now of Beirut, sends sundry interesting
letters, along with two or three brief articles, which were com-
municated at the close of the correspondence. In a note dated
Oct. 26th, 1876, he mentions that

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxxvi American Oriental Society :

" About Old and New Paphos there are hundreds, if not thousands, of stones
(tombs) with inscriptions in the Cypriote characters, which are now illegible —just
so far defaced that one can make nothing of them. Most of them, too, abound in
the less-known variants. We found a Greek inscription confirming Gen. di
Cesnola's correction of the site of Soli ; and I re-examined and can slightly correct
one of De Vogue's rock bi-linguals, Phenician and Greek." ....

In a later letter he reports (Apr. 13tb, 1877) the recent discovery

of a IXth century Syriac New Testament MS. of great value : the

ospels being the Philoxenian or Harclean version, the rest

esnito (see below p. cxlvi etc.).

Still later, Prof. Hall sends a fuller notice of the bi-lingual

inscription, above referred to.

" This inscription is in Greek and Phenician, cut on the face of a rock which is
enclosed in a conical pile of stones, about twenty feet high, near the little village
of Larnaca-Lapithou, or Tombs of Lapithos. It takes its name from the fact
that the level ground and mountain -side near by were the necropolis of ancient
Lapithus. Rock tombs abound, some of them of immense size. Lapithus itself
was on the sea-coast, separated from its necropolis by a high ridge of precipitous
mountains, distant about five hours by mule-path, though apparently within an
hour's climb, if a pass could be found. The inscription was discovered by Gen.
di Cesnola, but was first copied and published by De Vogue in the Journal
Asiatique for August, 1867, where also it was well discussed and deciphered. I
visited the spot in company with Gen. di Cesnola in May, 1876, and found that
the inscription, both the Greek and the Phenician part, had been tampered with,
being much scratched with a knife in many places. Of course it was more difficult
to read than when De Vogue copied it ; but nevertheless, I detected one mistake,
certainly, and probably a second. In the first line of the Phenician he had omitted
to copy the fifth letter, a mim ; and in the last line he had read the first letter as
lamed (though putting it in brackets), instead of caph, as it appeared to be to me,
with very little doubt. The letter is obscure, but it was not possible to read it as
lamed, but very possible to read it as caph. The difference is that the second
word in the first line is the participial form rjfD instead of the abstract noun rjj;
and the prefix to the first word in the last line is the adverb or conjunction 3,
instead of the preposition S> Happily the sense is not materially changed by
these minute corrections."

1. On two Terra-cotta Lamps found in Cyprus, by Pro£ Isaac
H. Hall, of Beirut

These two lamps are of the same general pattern as those mentioned in my
article on the Cypriote Inscriptions, vol. x. (1875) of the Journal of the American
Oriental Society, p. 212, and Plate IV, No. 19; and p. 217 and Plate VIII, Nos.
35, 36, 37. They were found in Cyprus by Gen. L. P. di Cesnola, by whom one
was presented to the Syrian Protestant College at Beirut, and the other to me.

The first mentioned (A), now in the cabinet of the Syrian Protestant College, is
a trifle smaller than the lamp above referred to, Plate IV, No. 19, being of the
same depth, and about half an inch less in either diameter. The top of the lamp
was evidently formed in the same mould, though the pattern is a little scanted by
the less size of the lamp, and a rider has been added to the horse, apparently by
a later plastic effort The inscription is legible underneath the horse, but the
characters above are nearly effaced.

The characters on the bottom of the lamp, however, are unlike those on any
lamp I have seen, and I annex below an accurate drawing of them. I do not yet
venture to give a reading.

The second lamp (8), now in my possession, is likewise of the same general
pattern as those figured in my former article, and is of precisely the same size as
the one Plate IV, No. 19. The top, however, is entirely different in detail The
central figure is either a rude Bacchus or a hermaphrodite, naked, with arms and legs

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1877. cxxxvii

widely extended, and a belt around the waist. The head is the mere " owl face"
of Schliemann, but the hair, " horrida comce," bristles out like a fan, and seems
to extend in flame-shaped locks till it is gradually changed into a vine that forme
the outer border. The head is towards the wick-hole of the lamp, the feet towards
the handle. One arm and some of the subsidiary figures are cut away by one of
the air-holes : the other arm stretches out in a straight line till it grasps the vine
above-mentioned. The legs, composed of simple straight lines with knobs at the
hip, knee, and ankle joints, are astride the other air-hole.

Underneath the extended arm are some marks that are suggestive of (but are
not) an inscription, of no definite arrangement; and underneath them, again, a
two-handled amphora, sharp-pointed at the bottom. On the other side, underneath
where the other arm should be (which was evidently stretched out to grasp the
vine on the other side, before the hole cut it away), is a figure looking somewhat
liko an altar, and somewhat like an immense vase or crater. Above this are some
uncertain figures, more or less cut away by the air-hole above mentioned. On the
bottom is an inscription, accurately represented in the annexed drawing. I do
not venture to read it yet

A.

B.

The reason why I do not attempt a reading of the inscriptions at present is
not so much because I cannot frame a reading (for many conjectures are possible,
and more or less evident), but because, while at least one eminent scholar considers
the marks on these lamps pretty certainly Cypriote, I believe that Gen. di Cesnola
found them amongst Phenician remains. Yet the characters deserve attention.

2. On certain Greek Inscriptions from Cyprus, by Prof. Isaac
H. Hall.

During a trip around Cyprus with Gen. L. P. di Cesnola in May, 1876, we dis-
covered the first two of the following inscriptions. The third he had found some
time before, but had not copied or published it. These inscriptions are in the later
style of uncial letters, with short dashes across the extremities of the strokes,
straight cross-bars to the letter A, the 2 of the modern shape instead of the C
form, the 6 a circle with a dot in the centre The letters are about an inch high
(except in the first inscription, where they are smaller), neatly but not deeply cut,
and generally very sharp and legible now. In copying I have kept the lines of
the original, but separated the words ; and, for convenience, have used small in
place of the uncial letters.

No. 1. At Larnaca of Lapithus. amongst a pile of cut stones that doubtless once
formed the base of some small structure, either a shrine or some memorial. The
pile had been a little below the surface of the ground, but was unearthed shortly
before we arrived. The inscription is on a piece of blue limestone, the former
pedestal of a statue. It contains ten lines, all distinct except two letters effaced
in line 7, one in line 10, another doubtful in line 10, and the last part of line 10
entirely gone. The doubtful letter in line 10 was probably t, but it might be read
as e. The horizontal marks, however, I consider to be mere scratches. The
inscription is as follows :

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxxxviii American Oriental Society :

(1) "NovfUfvwc "Sovfieviov

(2) breiStj Noviutiko? ^ovfafviov

(3) evepyjrnfc w rqq xokt.oq SureXst 6e

(4) np> iraaav hrifuXeav wotov fievog tov re
(6i apxtepuc km tuv lepeav km toyoi km kpyui

(6) eudif-ev RpMjtdfffjuM run apxiepet K<u ™C Icpevat

(7) frov N«je*<J«i>oc tov "Napv*iuov Sowm

(8) NovfwuM km kyyovotc uv av Ovuoiv

(9) airwAe t^v ruv yf/xw etc tov dnavra XP0V0V
(10) apxyv rrjt aya*ip (or e?)o

The use of e for ti in the second word of the first line, the orthography brtfultav
for -tetav in line 4 are not remarkable, except that I should hardly look for them
in an inscription so carefully cut. The letter represented by the first * in line 7
could hardly have been filled by anything but *, in the narrow space on the stone.
The second defective word in line 10 I suspect to be ayairyi, as the fragmentsry
inscription next to be mentioned favors such a surmise. However, this is nothing
more than a conjecture. The substance of the meaning is as follows :

11 Noumenios the son of Noumenios. When Noumenios the son of Noumenios,
being a benefactor of the city, also accomplished the whole business, according to
the strength such as it was, of both the chief priest and the priests, in both word
and deed, he compelled Praxidemos the high priest and the priests of the year of
Nose[i]don the son of Narn*kios to give to Noumenios and descendants of the
things which they may be sacrificing, he took away the control of the gifts for
all time in his good ."*

No. 2. Found on another stone in the pile above-mentioned, and evidently
having some connection with the preceding inscription. It consisted originally of
two tines certainly, and three lines probably. At present ouly a part of the first
line is legible, as follows :

1 H ay # ** tov Hovftyviov orpaTijyoc

The three stars fill the places of the undecipherable letters.

No. 3. An inscription of fifteen lines, with an additional line at the end giving
the date. Most of the inscription is as plain as if cut yesterday, and only one
character appears to be uncertain. The numeral A A in the third line may have
originally been A A or A A . I think A A.

The inscription is on a block of bluish limestone, three feet square by two and
a half high, with a plain raised cornice-like border about the top and bottom. It
was evidently a monumental stone. Its rather rough top indicates that it had one
or more stones above it when in place. It is kept in die court-yard of a Greek
church at Lapithus, close by the sea. Lying near it are fragments of columns,
and the church, as well as much of the adjoining monastery, is built in part of
ancient ruins. Other stones, with columns and their fragments, are lying near it
The following is the inscription :

(1) TtpepitM Kaurapt Yedacrut Secw Qeov Zefktorov vltM

(2) avTOKparopi dpxtepet peyiortM dqfMpxuaft kf-ovoiox;

(3) to /U( or 7m) 'Eir&evKtov 'Ai-iov 'Saaovog avOvnarov km Mapxov

(4) 'l&rpeiXiovhw TiepKov frpeoftevrov km Tatov QXafttov to/Xov rafuai

(5) 'AcJoaorof 'Adpaarov fihoiawoapos kvyevucoc Upevq tov

(6) ev to yvfjLvaauM KareoKEvaopevov irxo avrov e« tov idiov

(?) Ttfapiov Kaioapoc Ze/?acrrov vaov km ayalfiarog 6 (piTuonarpic

(8) kcu iravaperoc kcu dupeav km avOMperoc yvftvaf 6 apxw km

(9) Upevg tcjv h yvpvcuJUM deuv Kareofcevaoev tov vaov km

(10) to ayakfia idioic ava&wfiaaiv raw avrov 6e<M kfyfiapxowros

(11) Aiowoiov tov Atowotov tov km ' AitoAAoSotov <pi%OKCuaapo$

* iroiov pevoc in line 4 might be an error of the stone-cutter for reotovfuvos; trov
in line 7 seems to be a similar error for rot), perhaps caused by the initial t of line
6, unless it is, as supposed in the translation, for tov trove. — Oomm. Ptjbl.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1877 ; exxxix

(12) 'Adpaoroe 'Adpacrrav ftXoKaioap Kadiepuoev owKoBiepwitroc

(13) not tov vlov airrov 'Adpaorov QiXoKcuoapoc tov koi airrov dupeav

(14) koi avdaiperov yvpvaotapxav tuv naiSuv Ttji yevtotu

(15) Tipeptov __

(16) *r ' AiroyoviKov k6

The omission of iota adscript in the second word of line 6 and the last word of
line 14 creates no difficulty — more than the few other variations from the common
dialect The words yv/jvac 6 apxog, line 8, are doubtless the same as yvfivaoiapx^Kt
however they may be explained, Tajiiai, line 4, is evidently equivalent to rafilov.

The translation is as follows :

" To Tiberius Caesar Augustus Divus, son of Divus Augustus, the Emperor,
Pontifex Maximus, of tribunician authority, the xxxi (or xxxiv?), Epileucius
Axius Naso proconsul and Marcus Etreiliulus Percus ambassador and Gains
Flavius Felus quaestor, Adrastus son of Adrastus, friend of Caesar, priest by
family of the temple and statue of Tiberius Caesar Augustus that had been set up
by him in the gymnasium at his own charge, the patriotic and all- virtuous and of
his own free gift and appointment gymnasiarch and priest of the gods in the gym-
nasium, set up the temple and the statue at his own expenses to his god,
Dionysiua the son of Dionysius the son also of Apollodotus, friend of Caesar,
being Ephebarch. Adrastus son of Adrastus, friend of Caesar, consecrated, his
son, also, Adrastus, friend of Caesar, consecrating with him, the same also of his
own free gift and appointment gymnasiarch of the youth, on the birth-day feast of
Tiberius

xvi of the Apogonikos xxiv."*

Notes on Coptic, Old Egyptian, and the Way Collection of
Dtian Antiquities in the Museum of Fine Arts in Boston, by
Prof T. O. Paine, of Elmwood, Mass.

4. On the Hittite Inscriptions, by Rev. W. Hayes Ward, of
New York.

Dr. Ward spoke nearly as follows : When, four years ago, I presented a paper
before this Society on the Hamath inscriptions, there had been but four accurately
copied : namely, by myself, from the admirable squeezes and casts made by Prof.
John A. Paine, then acting archaeologist of the American Palestine Exploration
Society at Beirut. These inscriptions were published by the Exploration Society ;
and I hoped that some more skillful student might be found to decipher them.
Such has not, however, been the case. Several new inscriptions have since been
discovered, and I cannot believe that the time is far distant when the key will
be found. I have thought it well#to give a brief enumeration of the inscriptions
as now known, with the conclusions at which the latest researches seem to have
arrived respecting them.

Of the inscriptions published, those from Hamath remain the largest and most
valuable. Of these, three are most fortunately copies of the same inscription,
with variations in a few places, apparently of proper names, in some common
formula, while the fourth stone, covered on two sides with a long inscription, or
perhaps two, begins with the same formula. A comparison settles the direction
and order of the characters, and leaves the form of a large number of them in no
sort of doubt In the inscription on the larger stone, there are passages of con-
siderable length which are repeated, while single words are repeated many times,

* Is it possible to explain rafitai in line 4 by the supposition that the stone-
cutter was a Roman who had in mind the Latin form of the genitive case ? etc
tov ISiov (line 6) does not appear to be used in literary Greek, but it occurs in
Nos. 2641 and 2644 of Bock h 'a Corpus Inscriptionvm. No. 2632 of the same col-
lection shows many phrases similar to those of this inscription. yvfiv&Q (line 8)
occurs in Bdckh, C. L, No. 938, in the sense of naXaurrfc. Also, in the sense of
yvpvdoiov, in Jacobs Anth. Pal. Append. Epigramm., Nos. 103, 127, 171, and
apparently in Lycoph. 866.— Comm. Pdbl.
5*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

oxl American Oriental Society:

and offer tempting opportunities for conjecture, that one may be 'city,' another
4 son,' another ' king,' and so on. But my own conjectures thus far hare been
more fruitful of labor than of results.

Next to these, and perhaps before these, should be mentioned half a dozen clay
impressions of seals, in the British Museum, brought from the record room of
Assurbanipal. At the time when I spoke before on this subject, I had access
only to the copies of these seals published by Layard in his ' Monuments of
Nineveh.1 Their character even was doubtful, although they seemed to suggest
the Hamath hieroglyphics. Since then I have seen trustworthy copies made by
my sister, whose eye is educated by long study to these hieroglyphics, and I find
that there is no doubt as to their being of the same class as the inscriptions from
Hamath. These seals were examined by Lenormant, and he published in the
Revue Archeologique for October, 1873, a very suggestive paper on the subject,
which might have given a clue to the reading, but for the fact that his copy of the
Hamath inscriptions was very imperfect. His conjectures were based on certain
supposed repetitions of characters in the inscriptions of Hamath and the seals,
which indicated, he supposed, the names of kings of Hamath. said kings being
known to be Eni-ilu and Ilu-bide : names that have the element itu, ' god,1 in com-
mon. This hypothesis depended on the assumption that the seals were from
Hamath, which is now known to be not at all certain.

The next inscription, very imperfectly given from an Arab copy by Drake, is
that in the side wall of a mosque at Aleppo. I have here for exhibition two copies
of this inscription, one taken by Maj. Gen. S. W. Crawford, and said by George
Smith, who saw it there, to be as good as could be made ; and the other a copy
of George Smith's copy, kindly sent me by Prof. A. H. Sayce. The inscription is
a good deal worn, and the copies differ accordingly. Unfortunately it can be of
almost no use to us until we are better acquainted with the language.

The next inscription, and likely to be a very important one, is that figured in
the "Transactions of the Society of Bibl. Arch.," vol. iv., Part 2, 1876, by Rev.
E. J. Davis. It was found on the side of a high cliff at Ibreez, a little village in
the Lycaonian plain, perhaps 150 miles north-east of Tarsus. On this facade of
rock there is cut in rather high relief the figure of a god having a character like
Bacchus, encircled with grape-vines, and holding in his hand heads of wheat
Between his lifted hand, which holds the wheat, and his head and horned
Phrygian cap, is an inscription in the Hamathite hieroglyphics, containing thirty
or more characters. Apparently worshipping the god is another stout figure, and
behind him another inscription, containing a dozen or more characters, which are
plainly Hamathite. Below is yet another inscription, very much defaced, so that
it cannot be copied ; and there is said to be yet another, covered by the water of
the stream, and visible only when the water is very low. These inscriptions must
contain the names of the god and of the worshipper. But I am sorry to say that it
is likely to remain impossible to make anything out of them until either we can
have photographs of them, or they can be copied by some one who is more familiar
with the hieroglyphics used. It is remarkable that, unlike other inscriptions, that
behind the worshipper seems to be written in simple lines, and not with the sylla-
bles of one word arranged in a vertical row. The god, I would suggest, seems to
be the Lydian Hercules, the Assyrian Adar-Samdan, the Sandan who, according to
Ammianus Marcellinus, founded Tarsus of Cilicia.

But one other place has thus fa* furnished inscriptions in this character, and
that is Jerablus, on the Euphrates river, identified by George Smith with the
classical Circesium, the biblical Carchemish, and the Gargamis of the Assyrian
inscriptions. How many inscriptions in this character were discovered by George
Smith in his last disastrous expedition, T do not know, as they have not yet been
given to the world, and the British Museum does not allow copies to be taken.
There certainly were several, and some of them copies mainly of each other. My
information on the subject is meager, and derived from correspondence with Mr.
Sayce. who has seen them, but has not yet had copies of them. Mr. Smith made
a list of about 75 characters, and hoped that he had some clue to their decipher-
ment ; and as he discovered the clue to the Cypriote inscriptions, the rumor gave
a great deal of hope. But, if so, his note-books do not afford much indication of
it. I believe that one character, like an ox's head, he made an alepk This would

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1877. cxli

imply that he regarded the language as Semitic ; and also, apparently, that he
imagined the Aramean and Phenician alphabet to be derived from this hiero-
glyphic system. But while a maritime people like the Phenicians cannot well
have invented or adapted the so-called Phenician alphabet, which might as well
have come from an Aramean tribe as from any other, its derivation from the
Egyptian is yet so nearly settled, that the inquiry whether it came from these new
hieroglyphics seems a useless one. Besides, the Aramean which we know from
this region appears to be of a later type than the oldest Phenician, as indicated by
its open heads to such letters as beth, dateth, and resk. But, on the other hand, the
inventors of the Phenician alphabet did not take their names from the Egyptian ;
and it is possible that, while the Phenician aleph never had the shape of an ox's
head, it yet may have taken the name of a corresponding letter in a hieroglyphic
system in which the ox's head was used. Mr. Sayce writes me also that the Car-
chemish inscriptions seem to point to an Egyptian origin of the Hamath hiero-
glyphics. This I find it very hard to believe, although of the half-dozen characters
which I have seen copied from the Carchemish inscriptions, one is identical in form
with the Egyptian hieroglyph for the vowel u. I would rather imagine that the
close relation of Carchemish with Egypt had in later times led to the introduction
of some Egyptian characters. Meanwhile we must await the permission of the
British Museum authorities that these inscriptions may be published by Mr.
Boscawen in the Trans, of the Soc. of Bibl. Archeology.

It will be seen that these new hieroglyphics cover a considerable extent of
territory. We have them to the south-east as far as the old Hittite Capital Car-
chemish on the river Euphrates, and to the north-west as far as Cilicia ; and at
the intermediate stations of Hamath and Aleppo or Helben. They cannot longer
be distinguished by the name of "Hamath," and there seems no other name more
appropriate, as indicating their probable origin, than that of " Hittite." We know
that there was a powerful Hittite kingdom or confederation extending over this
very region, which had constant relations either of commerce or of war with both
Egypt and Assyria, and which even headed an invasion of Egypt. What this
Hittite race was is unknown. Mr. Smith imagined that he discovered evidence in
the remains of Hittite art at Carchemish that it was of the same race as the
Etruscans of Italy : and Sir Henry Rawlinson propounded this remarkable theory
as almost a certain discovery, in an address before the Royal Asiatic Society, but
I believe the suggestion has been withdrawn by him with as little display as pos-
sible. In an article published in the last number of the Transactions of the Soc.
of Bibl. Arch., Mr. Sayce has treated of the origin of this Hittite character! He
argues, with much plausibility, that hieroglyphic characters are invented only by
people who speak a language which does not admit of internal inflection. The
Hittites do not seem very clearly to belong to a Semitic race ; and as the Egyptian
records mention among Hittite names those of the princes Kheta-sar, Khirep-sar,
Mara-sar, and Kaui-sar, also Kirab-sar, in which the element sevr (originally not
a Semitic word) means ' king,' and follows instead of preceding the other element,
it seems probable that the Hittites spoke a non-inflecting language, and that their
character may have been adopted by the Syrians, who later took the Phenician
character. If the Hittites spoke a Ural-Altaic language, this would greatly
increase the difficulty of a solution of our problem.

5. On the formation of Present-stems of the Sanskrit Verb, by-
Prof. John Avery, of Grinnell, Iowa.

Setting out from the observation that in the Vedic language one not seldom
meets with verbal roots forming from two to five different present-stems, Prof.
Avery raises the questions whether the different modes of forming the present
stem have maintained about the same frequency through the whole history of the
language, or whether there has been a tendency to the increase and predominance
of a single mode of conjugation, and how the different periods of the language
compare as regards a variety of present-stems made from the same root. In order
to arrive at an approximate answer to these questions, he has taken the verbal
material presented in his article on the Sanskrit Verb-Forms (Journal, vol. x., p.
219 etc.)---namely, A. that of the Rig- Veda ; B. of the Aitareya-Brahmana ; and C.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxlii

American Oriental Society :

of the Nala and Bhagavad-GltA — and has made a new arrangement of the forme
constituting the present-system of the simple verb, with reference to the number
of stems, and the number of occurrences of the forms belonging to each. The
tables here added give the principal results. In them, as in the previous paper
the stems are arranged and designated thus: I. simple root-class (second, ad);
II. reduplicating class (third, hu): III. nasal classes: a, nu and u class (fifth and
eighth, su and ton); b. nd-class (ninth, krt); c. inserted nasal class (seventh,
rudh) ; IV. a-classes : a. unaccented o-class (first, bh&) ; b. accented o-class (sixth,
tad) ; c. yo-class (fourth, div). To these are added, V. more irregular forms : a
having an t or i before the endings ; b. stems ending in cha.

The first table shows the relative frequency of stems of the different classes,
estimated according to the number of different roots from which they are formed.
First is given under each class and opposite each letter the number of roots mak-
ing the whole of their present forms according to that class, and then of those so
making a part of their forms ; these two numbers are distinguished respectively
by w and p; and their sum is reduced to a percentage of the whole number of
roots forming present-systems (which is 432 for A, 207 for B, and 140 for C).*

I. Relative frequency of stems, estimated by roots.

B.<

C.

1 I- '. «■

Ilia. Illb.

Illr.

IVa.

IV6.

IVc. Va. | Vft.

(10. '29 14

10 18

7

156 38

28 5 ,2

No. ip. 69 |39

20 15

12

91

32

26 13 |5

( ! 98 ! 53

30 33

19

247

70

54 18 7

percent. 22.7 12.3

6.9 7.6

4.4

57.2

16.6 12.5 4.2: 1.6

(«7.18 9 16 13

11 !78

15

34 1 4

No. ip. 8 1

2 2

1 ju

5

3 3 0

( i 26 ' 10

18 15

12 89

20

37 4 ! 4

percent; 12.5 4.8

8.7 7.2

5.8 42.9

9.6

17.8 1.91 1*

(w.'ll 14 5 6

4 71

8

16 1 5

No. ip. ,5 |0

1 0

0 8

3

5 3 0

( ' 16 1 4

6 6

4 79

11 ' 21 4 5

percent. | 11.4! 2.8 4.3 4.3

2.81 56.41 7.9: 15 2.8. 3.6

The classes in their order of frequency, then, are as follows :

A.— IVa; I; IV6; IVr; II; III6; Ilia; IIIc; Va; V6.
B.— IVa; IVc; I; IVb; Ilia; III6; IIIc; II; Va; Vb.
C— IVa; IVc; I; IVb; Ilia, 6; Vb; JI, IIIc, Va.

The next table gives the number of occurrences of forms of the different stems,
with the percentage as compared with the whole number of occurrences of present
forms.

II. Relative frequency of stems, estimated by occurences.

(No.
' ) per cent.

(No.
' j per cent.

] No.

\ per cent

T.

ii. i ina.

infe. inc. | iva.|ivo.

IVC.

va.

vb.

4442

1095 877

478

259 5622: 977

663

132

272

30.

7.4; 5.9

3.2

l.6| 38.

6.5

4.5

0.9

1.9

926

346 460

180

66!1975

192

380

88

184

19.3

7.21 9.6

3.7

1.4, 41.2

4.

7.9

0.8

3.8

320

2ll 89

57

ll1 475

56

138

77

98

23.8

1.6l 6.6

4.3

0.8l 35.4

4.2

10.2

5.7

7.3

The order of frequency of occurrence of the different stem-forms is as follows :

A.— IVa; I; II; IV6; Ilia; IVc; IIIo; Vb; IIIc; Va
B.— IVa; I; Ilia; IVc; II; IV6; V6; III6; Va; IIIc
C— IVa; I; IVc; Vb; Ilia; Va; lllb; lVb; II; IIIc.

* Hence there is an excess of the sum of percentages over 100, due to the excess
of the number of present-systems over that of roots; the sum is 146 for A. 113
for B, and 110 for C.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston , May, 1877. oxliii

The high rank in respect to number of occurrences maintained by class I. is due
in considerable measure to the frequency of the forms of as, 'be,' to which root
belong, in A and B and C respectively, 27 and 19 and 48 per cent, of all the
occurrences of the class.

The following statement shows the number of roots making present-stems of
more than one class :

ABC

Roots having two present-stems

90

15

12

" " three " "

27

1

0

a a four ti a

8

0

0

a ii fiye ii ii

3

0

0

128 16 12
The totals are respectively 30, 7£, and 8 per cent, of the whole number of roots
making present-systems.

A considerable number of roots form what may be called double stems, or stems
combining the characteristics of two classes : thus, tishtha from sihd and ptba from
pd are both reduplicated and a-stems (II and IVa) ; the so-called roots jinv and
pinv combine the class-signs of Ilia and IVa; prn and mr$, those of III6 and
TVb. It is difficult to draw the line here with precision between what is radical
and what is stem-forming. The cases exhibit, of course, almost without exception,
a transfer from one of the first three classes to the fourth ((/-classes, IVa or IVb).
If we include such cases as dr'hha (I lie and IVa), and muncd (IIIc and IV6), the
number of roots forming double stems (the great majority in A alone) is 45.

6. On the current explanation of the Middle endings in the
Indo-European verb, byrrof. W. D. Whitney, of New Haven.

The distinction of active and middle voice by difference of personal endings is
an original and a pervading one in Indo-European speech. That it is an original
one is shown by its full retention in Sanskrit, Zend, and Greek, and by remains of
it in Gothic ; and in the languages first named it runs through the whole system
of the verb. There is no active tense or mode form which has not also its corre-
sponding middle ; and even the participles — and. in Greek, the infinitives as well
— are made to represent the same distinction. Moreover, the difference of primary
and secondary endings is given In the middle just as in the active. The reflexive
sense of the middle forms, though much dimmed, especially in the later Sanskrit,
was still so evident to the Hindu grammarians as to lead them to call a middle
person dtmane padam, 'a word for one's self,' as distinguished from the corre-
sponding parasmai padam, 'a word for another' — the two terms being thus
nearly equivalent to our "reflexive" and "transitive:" and the Sanskrit shows on a
considerable scale the same transfer of the middle forms to passive use which is
seen in the Greek.

The first attempts at explanation of the origin of the middle forms started from
the observation of the heavier primary middle endings max, sai, tat, ntai, as com-
pared with the corresponding active mi, si, H, nti. In this was seen by Pott, and
by Curtius in his earlier works, a symbolical strengthening of the ending (confessed
to be a pronoun significant of the subject), for the purpose of intimating the greater
concern of the subject with the action, as not only acting but acted on. The end-
ings vadhai and madhai of the 1st du. and 1st pL might without much difficulty be
also brought into a like relation with the active ; and even the 2d pL dhvai would
not be found unmanageable. There would remain, then, of the primary endings,
only the 2d and 3d du. to be accounted for ; and the difficulty in regard to them
would lie rather in the peculiar and problematic form of the active endings to
which they ought to correspond than in anything belonging to the middle endings
themselvea

But this whole way of explaining the genesis of Indo-European forms has been,
in the progress of comparative philology, abandoned as untenable. • Instead of a
symbolical intimation of intended meaning, sound etymological science seeks now
everywhere to demonstrate a combination and fusion of independent elements.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxliv American Oriental Society :

Hence Curtius and bis school have long since transferred their acceptance and
support to a form of theory originally proposed by Bopp and Kubn, which sees in
the middle ending a duplication of the pronoun or pronouns constituting the active
ending, one occurrence of the pronoun serving as subject and the other as object
in the combination ; this theory is maintained by Schleicher, and may be found
stated in full in his comparative grammar; it is at present the current explanation.
It has also, however, its own difficulties, the importance of which is not apt to be
fully recognized, and which it was the special object of this paper to set forth.

This theory, on its part, starts from the Greek 1st sing, ending fim>, and the
Sanskrit 2d sing, thds (to which Bopp added as a third the imperative active
tdt). The former is explained as for md-mi ; the latter, as for tvd-tvi. The end-
ings in question, however, are a very undesirable starting-point : since, 1 . they are
both secondary endings, where the retention of fuller forms is by no means to be
expected ; 2. they contain long vowels, which the theory nowhere calls for ; and
3. they are isolated forms, neither having any support outside of a single language ;
thds is not even found in the Zend. Although, then, they might perhaps be found
reducible to a theory which had a solid foundation elsewhere, they do not seem
fit to be used as the corner-stone of a theory with which other facts are not easily
made to accord. That ma-ma should on the one side have changed through ma-mi
to mdm (=firn>) and on the other side to ma-i, mai, need not be pronounced impos-
sible ; but impossible is hardly too strong a word to apply to a divarication of
tva-tvaj in the one direction through iva-sva and tvds to thds, and in another
through sva-svi and 8va-i to sai. And when we come to the plural combinations,
the limit of credibility is far past We are taught to believe (itself a hard task)
that man, the active 1st pi. ending, is for ma-tva ; its repetition, then, would be
matva-matva, which has to be reduced to madhai: and if such a fusion is admissi-
ble, there is nothing that we may not admit. Cuitius acknowledges the extreme
difficulty, and accepts gladly a suggestion of Misteli that the full form should have
been only ma-tva-tva, the ending being not repeated in full, but only as it were
posteriorly reduplicated, by repetition of a representative part But, in the first
place, though a certain percentage of the phonetic difficulty is thus removed, too
much is still left: one can no more swallow three-quarters of a cocoanut than the
whole. And, in the second place, the suggestion is on principle totally inadmissi-
ble; it is akin in character with, and no better than, the " symbolical strengthen-
ing" which it is the object of this whole theory to avoid. If the repetition of the
ending is to mean, reflexively, ' we-us,' then it must itself distinctly and unmis-
takably mean ' we,' and all that means ' we' must be repeated. We must not com-
mit a juggle, taking the ending partly as independently intelligible element, partly
as mere suffix : in the former character it may be repeated for further addition of
meaning ; in the latter it cannot. To make a rude but fairly illustrative com-
parison : while we might conceive of it as possible, in the compounds duU-fuL,
god-like, love-did, to repeat for intensification the latter element, because it is a
vocable of separately recognizable value, forming duti-fuJt-fvl, etc., it is a wholly
different and inadmissible thing to repeat for a like purpose the suffix elements of
dvte-ous, god-ly, lov-ed, forming dute-ous-ous, etc. Misteli's assistance, then, must
be declined as of no real service : if masi comes from ma-tva, and if madhai is its
duplication, then behind the latter must lie the full form ma-tva-ma-tva ; nothing
less ; and what must lie behind dhvai, or sdhvai, is too bad even to be written.

It may fairly be asserted that the duplication theory, in any form in which it
has yet been put forward, is unacceptable; it raises more difficulties than it
removes ; we might better say frankly that we do not understand the matter than
profess ourselves satisfied with such an explanation. Bopp has himself suggested
as an alternative explanation the working on of a single element after the endings,
a 8va or avi, with reflexive force ; and such a process would be much more in
accordance with the methods by which in later times middle-passives have been
made — as the Latin, Slavonian, Scandinavian — and in principle more acceptable.
Curtius claims to have weighed this theory carefully, and to have found it lees
manageable than the other ; but we may be permitted to doubt whether he has
shown his usual sound judgment in drawing the comparison: certainly, the
phonetic difficulty involved in a reduction of tvasvi to sai is not greater than in
that of tva-tvi to mi, and falls far short of what he has to admit in the plural

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May^ 1877. cxlv

It is probable enough, indeed, that no thoroughly acceptable theory will ever be
devised. The whole question has a rather hopeless look, something like the
emendation of a too faulty text ; where, if we only had one or two more manu-
scripts, or if those in hand were a little better preserved, there would be reasonable
expectation of a success not now attainable. Its unattainableness in the case we
have been considering need be no cause of want of confidence in our general
method of explanation of the genesis of forms.

7. On the History of Mohammedan Art, with special reference
to the treatment of the subject by Schnaase, by Prof. E. E. Salis-
bury, of New Haven.

On this and on a previous occasion, the History of the Formative Arts by
Schnaase was briefly characterized, as being eminently philosophical, penetrating
deeply into the origin of special developments of art ; and some extracts relative
to the history of Mohammedan art were made to the Society. The whole of this
part of the work has since been translated by Prof. Salisbury, with a view to
publication. No work covering the same ground has yet appeared in English.

No further communications being offered, the Society, after
passing a vote of thanks to the American Academy for the use of
its room, adjourned, to meet again in New York in October.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxlvi American Oriented Society :

Proceedings at New York, October 24th and a 5th, 1877.

The autumn meeting was held at the University of the City of
New York, in the afternoon of Wednesday, Oct. 24th, and con-
tinued at the same place in the forenoon of the next day. In the
evening of Wednesday, the members of the Society met socially
at the house of Mr. A. I. Cotheal, having accepted with thanks
his invitation given through the Committee of Arrangements.
The meeting was conducted by the President, Professor Salisbury.

In the absence of the Recording Secretary, Prof. Lanman, of
the Johns Hopkins University at Baltimore, was chosen to fill his
place for the occasion.

It Mas notified that the next meeting would be held in Boston,
on the last Wednesday of May, 1878.

The following persons, recommended by the Directors, were
elected to Corporate membership :

Mr. Willabe Haskell, of New Haven ;
Rev. A. S. Isaacs, of New York ;
Rev. W. W. Newell, of New York;
Prof. H. P. Smith, of Cincinnati, O. ;
Rev. R. P. Weidner, of Phillipsburg, N. J.

Extracts from letters were read by the Corresponding Secretary.
Rev. H. Blodgctt, of Peking, writes briefly reviewing the history
of the controversy as to the rendering of the word God into Chi-
nese, stating that more than ten years ago he drew off from the
use of shin and fell back upon the Tien-chu of the Roman Catho-
lics, and expressing the opinion that Protestant missionaries will
have eventually to come to this. He concludes :

It seems to me that a historical and critical review of the controversy, as it
took place in the Roman Catholic church, would be very useful to the missionaries
in China at the present time. Such a review would have to be prepared by some
one who has acquaintance with the heathen religions of antiquity, and who also
has access to libraries containing the works that have been written on the sub-
ject. It would, I am sure, operate against the use of Sfiang-ti. I see not how
Protestants can take up that which Roman Catholics have rejected as tending to
Paganism.

Rev. J. W. Jenks, of Newton Centre, Mass., sends his thoughts
on the subject of Mohammedanism and its Progressivenesa He
holds that there is reason to hope for a regeneration of Islam, and
its reconciliation with the onward movement of humanity, by
internal forces.

The following communications were presented :

1. Account of a newly-discovered Syriac Codex of the New
Testament, by Prof. Isaac H. Hall, now of Philadelphia, Pa.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October », 1877. cxlvii

The manuscript in question was laid before the meeting by Prof. Hall, who
spoke of it as follows: This MS. was brought from Mardln, by one 'Abd-ul-
Mes8iah, by whom it was presented to the library of the Syrian Protestant Col-
lege, several years ago ; and there it had remained as an unknown curiosity,
uncared for, and rapidly suffering from damp, exposure to worms, and liability to
careless handling. From the style of writing. I judged it to be of the 8th or 9th
century, and, for corroboration, sent six loose leaves to Dr. Antonio M. Oeriani,
of the Ambrosian Library at Milan, the well known editor and custodian of some
of the most ancient Syriac MSS. He returned them with his opinion that the
codex belonged to " about the 9th century," gave me much valuable information,
and concluded by requesting to know if it contained the Apocalypse, as, if so, it
would be the most ancient Syriac MS. that contained that book. He also noted
that some of the Church-lesson notes in the MS. were only found elsewhere in
the Ambrosian Peshito codex, long known as the most ancient MS. of that ver-
sion ; and that the consecutive numbering of the Epistles of Paul as one book
was the case with the Ambrosian Pentaglott MS.

The codex at present consists of 203 leaves (of which two are mere fragments)
of fine vellum, 11x7^ inches, written, like most Syriac MSS., with two columns
to a page. The sheets are arranged in quinternions (quiniones or quintemionts),
each one being numbered at the beginning and end, like the signatures of a printed
book. The first quinio or quire is gone, with part of the second ; the rest, with
some lacuna, are present as far as quire 23 ; and from the general appearance of
the codex, as well as other considerations, I conclude that the whole was originally
24 quires. The upper outer corner has suffered from mud and water, and nearly
every page presents great difficulties in deciphering. But thus far I have been
able to make out every letter of the text where the parchment is not torn or
decayed away. Except where a leaf is gone, the lacuna are inconsiderable, and
such as leave little or no doubt as to the original reading. The codex at present
commences at Matt. xii. 20, and continues through the gospels, in the usual order,
all of the Philoxenian or Harclean version. Then follows the Peshito portion :
Acts, James, I Peter, I John, the Epistles of Paul in the usual order, ending with
a fragment of I Timothy ; but of the remainder two loose leaves had been thrust
into the body of the MS., thus preserving a portion of II Timothy and Titus, so
that the end of the whole is at Titus i. 9. The writing is neat and beautiful, of
the transition style from Kstrangelo to Jacobite. In the few places where the
writing has been retouched by a latep-hand, the later writing is far less excellent
or permanent, and never interferes with reading the first hand. Errors of a minor
sort are rare, though now and then a serious hornoioteleuton occurs, and that with
a most exceptional frequency in the latter half of the gospel of John. The titles
and subscriptions of the several books, the notes and numbers of the church les-
sons, the more important marks of punctuation, and much of the ornamentation,
are in vermilion. The numbering of the larger sections and of the quires, and
generally the points of the rubricated letters, are in black. Unfortunately the
vermilion is easily washed off, and for that reason a lesson-note is undecipherable,
or only to be read as set off on the opposite page. The whole title of I Timothy,
for the same reason, is entirely gone. Abbreviations are rare. The whole is
written continuously in full lines, with no paragraph break except at the end of a
book, where about four lines are devoted to ornament. The gospels have a double
numbering of chapters, one for each book, the other running consecutively
through the four. From the general appearance of the codex, as well as the
omission of the Syrian antilegomena of the Epistles, in their place, I infer that
the MS. never contained the Apocalypse. The pericope de adidterd, John vii. 53
to viii. 1 1, as well as the text of the three heavenly witnesses. I John v. 7, are
wanting, as might be expected, while the last twelve verses of Mark are present.
In Acts xx. 28, the reading is * church of Christ' (Messiah), instead of ' church, of
God.' Many things concerning the spelling of proper names and words adopted
from the Greek and Latin are of interest, but I have not yet put them into sys-
tematic form.

I have carefully collated the Gospels portion with White's edition ; and I am
strongly inclined to believe this codex much nearer to the Philoxenian version
of A. D. 508 than to the Harclean recension of A. D. 616. A comparison of its
6*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxlviii American Oriental Society:

peculiarities with those of the Codex Angelicus given by Bernstein (Das EeUigt
Evang. des Johannes Syrisch, pp. 26-28) partially bean out this view. Like the
Florence oodex, our MS. has no marginal readings.

The paper presented with the codex at the meeting of the Society showed
about 300 variations from White's edition, which are really or apparently apprecia-
ble in Greek. Of these only a few are given below. The following particulars apply
solely or mainly to the Gospels portion of the codex, as I have not thus for fin-
ished collating the Peshito portion. But throughout the MS., lacuna of one leaf
are caused by the wearing through of the outside folio of a quire at the back.

The first leaf is a mere fragment containing portions or scrape from Matt. xii.
20-48. The lacuna of one leaf or more are the following : Matt xiii. 28-57, one
leaf gone; ivii. 20 — xix. 12, one leaf; xxv. 11 — xxvi. 31, one leaf; Mark iv. 2-35.
one leaf; Luke xix. 38 — xx. 21, one leaf; John viii. 31 (20 of Syriac numbering)
— ix. 31, two leaves gone.

The following are a very few of the more important differences from White's
edition, appreciable (really or apparently) in Greek.

Matt. xiv. 1 . Oodex has common reading ; White, r^v okotjv Xpttrrov *Jifaov.

Matt xxi. 31. Oodex, jiaoikeiav tuv ovpavav.

But readings of about the same grade of difference abound. The real differ-
ences— many more — appear only in the Syriac.

In Mate, xxv., the Peshito and Harclean coincide almost verbally for the first
part of the parable, as well as for several verses before ; but at verse 6 they
diverge widely. But our codex keeps a much nearer coincidence with the Peshito
quite to the end of the parable, and diverges widely from White's edition.

In Luke vii. 44, 45, from ' she hath washed' to * thou gavest me no kiss.' White
states in a note that the clause is wanting in the Ridley MSS., the basis of his
edition, and that he supplied it from a Bodleian MS. But the supplied words
are evidently taken from the Peshito, with its characteristic free rendering. Our
codex gives a different rendering, in the slavish style of the Philoxenian, keeping
not only the Greek idiom, but even the order of words.

In Luke ix. 30, 31, White follows two MSS., and gives a reading which he
translates thus: " Moses et Elids, qui conspecH sunt in gloria. Dicebant autem^
quurn venissent, exitum ejus quern futurus erat implere Hierosolymce." But this
codex shows that he mistook (very naturally) a contraction for a complete word;
and that the true Philoxenian reading is the common one.

Luke xiv. 5: codex, bvoc tj povc; White, vibe for bvoc. Probably our codex
stands alone among Syriac MSS. in this reading.

Luke xxiv. 32 : * Did not our heart burn within us.' Here, whether by mistake
or otherwise, the codex follows the reading of the Jerusalem Syriac : * Was not
our heart heavy within us,' etc. This is supported, as Scrivener says, " only by
those precarious allies, the Thebaic and (apparently) the Armenian versions." It
depends upon a single point} and is probably only a mistake. Still, I remember but
one similar mistake in the whole text of the codex (and one in a subscription), and
White's text reads the same way, though he translates by "ardent." A new in-
spection of all the MSiS. is needed, to ascertain the true Philoxenian reading.

The ornamentation at the beginning of Luke is more extensive than any other
in the codex, but is nearly obliterated. It extended over about one-third of the
whole page. An inscription is spread across it, a letter or two in a little square,
which I have not thus far made out. A similar inscription across the ornament
at the beginning of Mark reads (in Syriac shape, of course) 'John.'

The matter of church-lessons and other divisions of the text contains much of
interest and value, but I have not had time yet to systematize it. The sub-
scriptions to the gospels note the number of Eusebian canons. The following
note, communicated to me by Dr. Ezra Abbot, I take the liberty of inserting:

" It is worthy of note that your MS., and also Adler's, agree pretty closely with
the Greek MSS. in the number of canonized sections for each gospel, thus :

Greek.
355 to 359 (360 Scholz.)
233 to 241 (236 in Suidas.)
342 to 349 348 in Suidas.)
232

Eusebian sections In

Florentine MS.

Beirut MS.

Matthew,

360

360

Mark,

240

240

Luke,

348

348

John,

232

232

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Yorky October, 1877. cxlix

" But four MSS. of the Peshito in the British Museum, according to Dr. Wright,
cited by Burgon on ' The Last Twelve Verses of S. Mark,' p. 309, give the sections
as follows: Matthew, 426; Mark, 290; Luke, 402; John, 271.

"Mr. Burgon speaks of this division into sections as invariable 'in Syriac
MSS. ;' he probably means of the Peshito, though he does not say so."

The following is a translation of the subscriptions and titles. The word rendered
c sections' I do not precisely understand. It appears to have no corresponding
division in Greek MSS.

Subscription to Matthew : ' Ends the gospel of Matthew the apostle, which he
spoke in Hebrew in Palestine. His prayer [be] for us. Amen. There are in it
kephalaia seventy; and the number of canones 360. And miracles 25; and
parables 25; and testimonies 32. And lessons 74; and sections twenty and
three. Pray, for our Lord's sake, for the sinner that wrote.'

Title to Mark : ' Holy Gospel of Mark. Lesson of Vespers of the feast of the
Epiphany.'

The title proper is the first sentence : the second is a church-lesson note. In
translating the titles, I give the immediately following lesson-note in each case.

Subscription to Mark : ' Ends the holy gospel of Messiah our God, proclaimed
by Mark the bringer of good news, which he spoke in Latin m Rome. His prayer
for us, Amen. And there are in it kephalaia forty and nine, and the number of
canones two hundred and forty ; and miracles twenty and three ; and parables
six ; and testimonies seventeen ; and lessons forty ; and sections twelve. Pray,
for our Lord's sake, for the wretch and debtor (reus) that wrote ; and for one that
his prayer may have acceptance.'

Title to Luke : l Holy gospel of Luke. Lesson of the first (or of Sunday — partly
obliterated) and of matins of the annunciation to Zachariah.'

Subscription to Luke : ' Ends the holy gospel of Luke, which he spoke in Greek
in Alexandria. His prayer for us, Amen. There are in it kephalaia 83 ; and the
number of canones 348 ; and miracles twenty and 2 ; and parables 27 ; and testi-
monies 72; and sections 23. Pray, for our Lord's sake, for the sinner that wrote
according to his ability.'

. Title to John : ' Holy Gospel of John the apostle. Lesson of vespers of the
Nativity.'

Subscription to John : ' Ends the gospel of John, the apostle, which he spoke in
Greek, in the city Ephesus. His prayer for us, Amen. And there are in it
kephalaia twenty; and the number of canones two hundred and 32 ; and miracles
nine ; and parables five ; and testimonies fifteen ; and sections twenty ; and lessons
48.'

Subscription at end of gospels as a whole: ' End, in the help of our Lord, of the
holy gospels, that were proclaimed and told as good news. There are four
evangelists : Matthew, Mark, Luke, John. That in their prayers acceptance may
be had for us in truth, Amen.'

On motion of Prof. Short, the President designated a committee
to consider the desirability of publishing the whole or a part of the
MS., or a collation of it. The committee was composed of Dr.
Ezra Abbot, Dr. Ward, Profs. T. C. Murray and J. F. McCurdy.

2. A Conjectural Emendation of Rig- Veda i. 30. 11, by Prof.
C. R. Lanman, of Baltimore, Md.

The verse RV. i. 30. 11 reads in our text:

asmd'kam ciprinindm \ somapdh somapd'vndm | sdkhe vajrinl sdkhtndm.

This is evidently corrupt in the first pAda. Roth (in the Petersburg lexicon) sug-
gests ciprinivan for asmd'kam : which, however, does not satisfy the metre. It
is proposed to substitute, rather, for the first pdda, ciprdvah ciprinivatctrn.

The conjecture is supported by these considerations : The metre is made per-
fectly good by it ; the words proposed are good Vedic formations, both occurring
elsewhere; the formal parallelism between the three members of the verse is
thus rendered complete ; the sense is appropriate, joining well on to the preced-
ing verse (where Indra is spoken of somewhat as Bacchus in the lyric, iroAv&wpe
. . . o) BaKxevy etc.: Ant. 1114, 1120), and consonant with the general tenor of
the hvmn : verses 1 0-1 1 would mean

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cl American Oriental Society :

10. 'Thee we beseech, who every good possessest, who art much invoked, 0
friend good to those that praise thee,

11. 'Thou (best) quaffer of quaffers, thou soma-drinker of jpma-drinkers, thou
friend of friends, thunderbolt-wi elder.'

The origin of the corruption is most plausibly explained as an adaptation of the
ending of the first pada to that of the third, the introduction of a gloss asTTufkam,
and its substitution for the original first word of the line.

3. On the Comparative Frequency of Occurrence of the Alpha-
betic Elements in Sanskrit, by Prof. W. D. Whitney, of New
Haven.

In the first two volumes of Kuhn's Zeitschrift, Prof. Whitney said, Dr.
Forstemann .of Dresden has given an estimate of the comparative frequency of
the different sounds in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Gothic, and has drawn from
the comparison a number of interesting conclusions. He did not, however, ex-
plain the method he had followed in arriving at his statistics, nor did he carry the
determinations to the desirable degree of minuteness. For purposes connected
with the study of the Sanskrit itself, and not directly of its relation to other
languages, I have done the work over again, with the results here to be stated.

The same method was followed as in making a similar determination for the
sounds of the English spoken alphabet; a few years since (Oriental and Linguistic
Studies, ii. 27 2-6). Ten passages were selected, from different periods of the history
of the language, and the first thousand sounds in each were counted off to the dif-
ferent elements. The numbers thus obtained being added together, the occurrences
of each sound in ten thousand sounds, as occurring in continuous text were
ascertained, easily convertible into average percentages of frequency for the vari-
ous sounds. These percentages would undoubtedly be modified a little if a still
greater number of passages were counted ; but, considering the rudely approxi-
mate way in which alone the results of such an investigation can be applied, it
would seem to have been already carried into sufficient detail.

The results are given in the following table. The numbers opposite each letter
are those of its total of occurrences in the 10,000 sounds; and they are converted
into percentages by the decimal point. As it is a matter of interest to note also
the limits of variation of each sound in respect to frequency, the maximum and
minimum numbers in a single passage (also converted into percentages by the
decimal point) are given, with a Roman numeral prefixed designating the passage in
which either was found. The meaning of the numeral will be understood from the
following statement as to the passages counted: I. Rig-Veda, i. 113, to verse 116;
II. Rig- Veda, x. 18, to verse 11a; III. Atharva-Veda, xii. 4, to verse 14ft; Iv\
Aitareya-Br&hmana, iii. 33-4 (the story of Rohini); V. Qatapatha-Br&hmana. L
8. 1-6 (the story of the flood); VI. Bhagavad-Gfta\ i. 1-14; VII. Mann, i. 5-17:
VIII. QakuntaU (BdhtHngk's edition), the passage in Act. I just before the en-
trance of the heroine ; IX. Hitopadeca, at the beginning of Book I ; X. VAsava-
datU (Hall's edition), at the beginning.

The letters are arranged in the order of their frequency, beginning with the
most common ; and they are so divided that they furnish a scale either for the
whole alphabet, or for the vowels and consonants taken as separate systems.

In n (anuavdra) are included both the anusvdra proper (considered as an inde-
pendent element, with waiving of the question whether it is not more properly a
nasalization of the vowel) and the nasal Bemivowels. If the latter are distin-
guished as separate sounds, the nasal y has 4 occurrences, and the nasal v 15, out
of the 63 ; nasal I chances not to be even once met with.

So also, of the 131 occurrences of A, a third (43) are cases of visarga before a
sibilant, which might with equal or greater propriety be regarded as sibilants.

The total percentage of vowels is 43.52 ; of consonants, 56.48. This gives an
average of very nearly 1.3 consonants to a vowel or syllable (in English, it is
nearly 1.7).

Other interesting totals are: a-vowels, about 28 per cent.; t- vowels, 6; *-
vowels, 3£ ; r-vowels, only f per cent. Diphthongs, nearly 5? (0»?o, 4f ; vrddhi, f).
Short vowels to long, as 28 to 10. Open vowels (a) to close (», «, r, J)» also as
28 to 10.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Neto York, October y 1877.

cli

Of the consonants, the mutes are about 32 per cent.; the semivowels, 15; the
sibilants, 6|. The sonant consonants are to the surd as 35 to 2 1 \ ; the sonant
elements of the entire alphabet, consonant and vowel, are more than three times
as numerous as the surd (78T to 21T).

Of the mutes, the unaspirated are nearly 18 per cent, (surd, 12 j; sonant, 5£);
the aspirate, 3£ (surd, 1; sonant, 2£); the nasal, 10$.

Of the mutes, again, by classes, the dental are 20 per cent. ; the labial, 8T ; the
guttural, &}; the palatal, 2f ; the lingual, a little over \\.

Table showing Comparative Frequency of Sanskrit Sounds.

ow.

Cons.

Percentages.

a

19.78

a

8.19

t

6.65

r

5.05

V

4.99

i

4.85

n

4.81

m

4.34

y

4.25

8

3.56

d

2.85J

e

2.84

u

2.61 !

P

2.46

k

1.99

o

1.88

c

1.57

sh

1.45

h

1.31

bh

1.27

c

1.26

t

1.19

h

1.07

9

1.03

Maxima. Minima.

IVow.

Cons.

Perce

VII.

21.1— III.

17.2

;

VIII.

10.1— IV.

6.4

1

dh

IV.

9.3— X.

4.1

g

X.

7.0— III.

3.2

1 r

.74

I.

6.2— III.

3.6

1 *

.73

X

7.1— VI.

3.1

i

IX.

6.2— V.

3.8

h

VII.

6.7— X.

2.9

th

III.

7.0— X.

2.5

di

.51

VII.

5.3— II. etc. 2.9

b

III.

4.5— IX.

2.1

n

IV.

4.2— X.

1.3

t

I.

'3.6— VII.

1.4

h

VIII.

3.3— III.

1.7

d

IX.

3.7— II.

.6

du

.18

X.

3.0— VI.

.9

1

cli

VI.

3.0— V.

.6

1

9*

I.

2.7— IX.

.6

kh

VI. etc.

1.9— V.

.6

th

VI.

1.6— X.

.7

dh

VI.

2.5— IV.

.4

ph

I.

2.6— IV. etc. .5

1

jh

V.

1.6— I.

.4

f

.01

X.

2.7— I. etc. .3

I I

.01

Maxima.

Minima.

.4

II.

1.6—

VIII.

II. etc. 1.3—

III.

.4

X. 1.7—

VI.

.4

11.

1.4—

VI.

.4

VII.

1.3—

V.

.1

IX.

2.1—

I. etc.

.0

IV.

1.2—

X.

.2

V.

1.1—

X.

.0

IV.

1.5—

X.

.0

III.

1.0—

I. etc.

.2

VII.

.9—

IV.

.0

I.

.5—

IV.

.0

VI.

.5—

IV.

.0

IX.

.6—

I. etc.

.0

V.

.6—

I. etc.

.0

I.

.6—

VI.

.0

V.

.5—

VI. eta

.0

VIII.

.4—

II. etc.

.0

III.

.2—

IV. etc.

.0

VI.

.1—

I. etc.

.0

VIII

V.

VII

X.

Among the Unguals, both mutes and sibilant, it is important to draw the lino
between those cases which are the product of regular euphonic processes of the
language and those which have another origin. The sibilant sh comes almost
always from the lingualization of s after the close vowels and Je and r ; of its 1 45
occurrences, 136 are of this character. The / and th usually come by assimilation
of the dental t and th to this sibilant when immediately preceding them ; of their
32 occurrences, 22 (including all the th'a) are of this character. The dh is made
by combination of a final radical h with the initial dental of an ending, and is
extremely rare ; all its 3 occurrences are of this character. The n is oftenest made
by the assimilating influence of a preceding lingual sibilant or semivowel or vowel
in the same word; of its 103 occurrences, 60 are of this character. Deducting
these, there remain for the lingual class, both mutes and sibilant, only 87 inde-
pendent occurrences, or less than one per cent.; and it is well known that a
non-euphonic lingual letter in a root or word is a sign either of great and anoma-
lous corruption or of an origin other than Indo-European.

The palatal class, as well as the lingual, is of derivative character, the c coming
from an original &, the ch from sk, the j from g ; the palatal sibilant c also comes
by a more complete corruption from k ; and the aspiration, A, almost always from
gh. If we restore these lost members to the guttural class, we raise it to about
double its present value in the alphabetic scheme.

The only sounds with regard to the occurrence of which any noteworthy pro-
gress of historical development is seen in the specimen passages selected are the
semivowel I and the independent (not euphonic) Unguals (including the sh). For
both these, a very marked increase of frequency appears in the later documents.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clii American Oriental Society :

The I rises from 17 occurrences in the five earlier records taken together to 52 In
the five later ; the Unguals, from 1 9 in the former to 68 in the latter.

Prof. Whitney also remarked upon the general characteristics of the Sanskrit
alphabet, as compared with others of the family : as, its harmonious development,
the number of its series of mutes, the absence in it of the classes of sounds of
intermediate position, both vowels (true e and o sounds) and consonants (frica-
tives), and the consequent great predominance of the extreme sounds, openest
(a- vowels) and closest (mutes: a and the mutes together make 50 per cent of the
whole utterance). In reply to an inquiry, he said that the numerical relations of
the lingua] mutes and sibilant did not appear to him to cast any decisive light
upon the question whether lingual utterance was a peculiarity learned from the
aborigines of India or of purely interior development; the facts could be made to
square with either view.

4. On the Relationship of the expressions for Space and Time,
by Prof. 0. Short, of New York.

Prof. Short had been prevented from elaborating his paper, and presented some
of its main heads, calling attention to the close connection and frequent inter-
changeableness of the words by which space and time relations are signified, and
giving illustrations from a variety of languages.

5. On the Accent of Vocatives in the Kig-Veda, by Mr. W.
Haskell, of New Haven; communicated by the Corresponding
Secretary.

Mr. Haskell's paper presented the results of an inquiry, intended to be ex-
haustive, into the laws of accentuation of the Sanskrit vocative, as illustrated by
the actual practice of the Rig- Veda.

The well-known general law of vocative accent in Sanskrit is that this case,
when accented at all, has the tone on its first syllable ; but that it is accented
only at the beginning of the sentence— or, in verse, of a pdda or primary verse-
division.

In accordance with this, we find in the Rig- Veda over eleven hundred cases of
a single vocative standing at the head of a pdda and receiving the accent on its
first syllable. In a single instance (there are several in the Atharva-Veda), the
word dydus as initial vocative, having to be pronounced as two syllables, takes
the tone on the former of them : thus, di-dus; and this, when written together,
has by the regular laws of accent-combination the circumflex, dydte.

Only one case of violation of this law is found in the text : namely, at L 2. 86 :
it cannot well be regarded as other than an error of the tradition.

Of a single vocative occurring in the interior of a pdda, and remaining unac-
cented, there are a few short of five thousand cases. Of more than one vocative
occurring in the interior of the same pdda, and all remaining unaccented, there
are 53 cases, containing 109 vocatives.

Exceptions to this rule, where two or more successive interior vocatives are all
accented, are such as d' prd ydta m&ruto vishno dfvind (viii. 27. 8a) : they are only
five in number. In a single very anomalous case (vii. 59. lc), three accented
vocatives follow an interior unaccented.

If a vocative stands at the head of a pdda, and others follow, separated from
it by intervening words, the first is regularly accented, and the others are with-
out accent: the text has 75 such cases, with 81 following unaccented vocatives.

Here, again, there are a very few cases (three) where an interior vocative,
coordinate with an initial accented one from which it is disjoined, has its own
accent: an example is suputra d'd u susnushe (x. 86. 135). In another passage
or two, the reading of the text doubtless requires a slight amendment.

If, however, more vocatives than one stand in immediate succession at the be-
ginning of the pdda, the first being regularly accented, the practice as to the
accentuation of those that follow is somewhat various, and calls for a little detail
of statement.

1. If the vocatives signify different subjects — as in this pdda (ii. 27. 14a):
adite mitra vdruno 'la mr\a — we might fairly expect to find all alike accented,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1877. el Hi

since each is an independent invocation. In the majority of cases, accordingly,
namely 18, they are so ; but there are also 8 cases like br'hcupata indra v&rdhatam
nah (iv. 50. I la), where only the first has the accent.

2. If, on the other hand, a noun is accompanied by a qualifying adjective,
either before or after it. or by an appositional noun performing a similar office,
it seems natural that only the first should receive the accent. And this we find
to be true in the great majority of cases : of passages like vipve devdh (i. 3. lb et
al), sdkhe vishno (iv. 18. lid et a/.), indra marutvah (iii. 51. 7a), there are nearly
a hundred ; while of those like indrajyeshthd mdrudgandh (i. 28. 8a et al.), mdrufa
dhibhdnavak (i. 1*72. lc), there are only about a quarter as many.

3. Where the vocatives are two separate and coordinate epithets of the same
subject, the case is a more doubtful one ; and the precise limits of the class also,
as distinguished from the preceding one, are by no means easy to draw ; there
may be, as between epithets which seem to us sensibly coordinate, a subjective
subordination or independence which would assimilate them to either of the fore-
going classes. In the greater number of the passages estimated as probablv of
this class, the apprehension of independent value prevails : the cases like dravat-

pdni ctibfiaspatt (i. 3. lb) are just about twice as many (40 : 20) as those like
d^vdvaM vibhdvari (i. 92. 146).

A genitive case depending on a vocative forms as it were a single word or
phrase with it, and shares in its accent. Thus, for example, ' 0 son of strength'
is 8&'no sahasah or sdkasah s&no if initial, and stono sahasah or eahasah sdno if in-
terior. Of such cases there are about 1 80 in the text the dependent genitive pre-
ceding the vocative in about three-quarters of them. The cases in which such a
genitive has an independent accent are only two or three.

The very peculiar construction is sometimes made of joining a nominative to a
vocative and adding a verb in the dual : for example, indra? ca somam pibatam
brhaspate, ' along with Indra, do ye two drink the Soma, oh Brihaspatil' There
are 25 such cases, three or four of them of a somewhat irregular character.

A few (half-a-dozen) passages would call for a fuller discussion and explanation
than can be given here ; it is deferred, then, till the article shall be published in
full in the Society's Journal ; previous to which, Mr. Haskell proposes to add the
material from the A.tharva-Veda also.

6. On Chinese Juvenile Literature, by Prof. S. Wells Williams,
of New Haven.

Pro! Williams, before reading his paper, gave a resume of the steps which had
led the Chinese government to yield their long contested point of the kotow. As a
reason for introducing this subject, ho alluded to a paper which he had read at a
meeting of the Society in October, 1 860,* containing a narrative of the interesting
discussions held at Peking in July, 1 859, between Mr. Ward, the U. S. Minister,
and the two Imperial Commissioners, in respect to an audience and the exchange
of ratifications ; the audience was declined by the former, because he was required
even to kneel before the Emperor. Those discussions were fruitless at the time,
but they convinced the high officials around the Throne that foreign ministers
would never make any prostration or kneeling when brought before it. Happily,
the question then left unsettled could be deferred for the next ten years without
any loss of respect ; the Emperor Hienfung died before the foreign legations
settled at the Capital in 1861, and until his young son attained his majority, there
was ample time for the two parties to become better acquainted with each other.

In February, 1873, he assumed the Government, and the foreign ministers, act-
ing under instructions from their respective Governments, brought forward the
point, stating their reasons why it could- no longer be deferred, and why it could
never be acceded to if it involved prostration or kneeling in aiiy form. The dis-
cussions were prolonged through the spring, and formed one of the most curious
chapters in Eastern Asiatic diplomacy. They might have quite failed also at this
time, to be renewed in a more troublesome manner in the future, if it had not
been for the perseverance, tact, and influence of Mr. Low, the American Repre-
sentative ; these were all successfully exerted with his colleagues and the Chinese,

' See the Society's Journal, Vol. VII, p. vii.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cliv American Oriental Society :

and in June the Court of Peking yielded its assumption of supremacy oyer foreign
nations by admitting the five ministers from Russia, Great Britain, Prance, United
States, and Netherlands, to an audience with his majesty Tung-chi, by each of them
making three bows as they came before him.

Prof. Williams then described the place, time, and manner of the presenta-
tion by Mr. Avery of his credentials in November, 1874; at which time the
Japanese Minister Yanagiwara likewise presented his in the same form. The
audience was given in an open hall, elevated about five feet above the ground, on a
solid foundation, paved with marble, and enclosed on three Bides, leaving only the
southern front free for light and entrance ; this hall was situated in the midst of
a wide grove of tine evergreens, which hid it from the other buildings in the same
inclosure. The Emperor, a young man of 18, came over from the palace on horse-
back, escorted by a few cavaliers, and having taken his seat facing the south,
awaited the presentation of the foreign ministers. The furniture of the room
consisted of the throne protected by a large folding screen behind it, and a table
covered with yellow silk standing in front. The four grandees of the Presence
stood beside the Emperor, and his uncle, Prince Kung, at his left, while two
close rowB of courtiers stood like statues, leading from the dais outward to the
entrance. All of them were clad in richly embroidered silk robes, wearing their
strings of court beads, and the grouping altogether was quite effective. The
American Minister and his Secretary entered at the side between two of the pillars,
and each made three low bows as they approached the table in front The Minis-
ter read his address in English, and then laid his credentials on the table ; a
translation in Chinese of the address having been read by the Secretary. His
Majesty's assent and a few words of compliment were transmitted through Prince
Kung, who kneeled to receive £hem. This ended the reception, and the foreigners
retired sideways as they had entered, making three low bows. As the Emperor
Tungchi died in a few weeks after, it is not probable that another audience will
be held in the same hall for about twelve years, when the present Emperor
Kwangsii will attain his majority. The settlement of this ceremony has removed
one source of irritation between China and other countries, and opened the way
for freer intercourse in future. The ritual of the court requires that all envoys
who have been presented to his Majesty should be further honored by an invita-
tion to a banquet ; this was duly given, but was accepted only by the Japanese
Legation.

Prof. Williams then read a paper upon the children's books found among
the Chinese, giving an account of their arrangement, leading topics, pictorial
illustrations, and the position they hold in Chinese literature and education. Many
of them are designed to provide parents with a summary of general knowledge in
history, morals, fortune-telling, arithmetic, and letter-writing ; so that, if they are
unable to support their children through a course of study, a year or two spent
with a teacher in mastering such a digest will enable the boys to read common
books, write a friendly letter, and carry on their business. He gave an analysis
of the contents of a horn-book, called the T\t,ng Yuen Tsah-tss\ or Eastern Garden
Miscellany. The frontispiece represented Confucius sitting in state, with three of
his chief scholars before him — the Pattern of All Ages, as he is called, whom
the youthful scholar is ever to keep in view. Then followed diagrams of the
leading constellations, and an outline of the earth and all within the Four Seas,
wherein China is represented as occupying nine-tenths of its surface. A map
like this, taught where the teacher and his pupils have no means of obtaining or
seeing more correct ones, goes far to account for the ignorance of the people as
to the position and resources of other nations. After these attempts in astronomy
and geography follow a few stories, the texts of the Trimetrical Classic and
Millenarian Classic, two well known summaries of learning, which are to be
memorized by the pupils ; then come lists of the disciples of Confucius, twenty-
four notable examples of filial duty, names of heroes, scholars, and statesmen,
proverbs, rules for divination, and two hundred rude pictures of common objects.
Short directions how to use the abacus follow, and the rest of the book, about
three-fourths of all, is taken up with forms of letters, billets, cards, notices at
times of marriage and funeral, and blanks or examples fitted for the endless
occasions of active life.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New Yorky October ', 1877. civ

Other forms of Chinese toy-books and juvenile books were briefly referred to
by Prof. Williams, after which he gave a classification of the works in Chinese
published by Protestant missionaries, among which were over eighty separate
treatises on geography, history, mathematics, and other kindred topics, most of
them intended for the scholars under their care. His remarks closed by reading
the translation of a primer published in 1 865. This was the work of a scholar
who intended it as an easy summary of good morals. It contains 356 lines, three
words in a line, and could easily be committed to memory in its metrical form.
There are four chapters, giving advice in regard to filial duty at home and fraternal
love abroad ; rules for decorum and sincerity ; teachings in universal love and
humanity; and lastly, directions respecting study and a good use of one's strength.
Some of the precepts are remarkably elevated, and a current of good morality
runs through them very creditable to the writer. In its scope and execution,
it resembles what a metrical version of the book of Proverbs would become in
the hands of one who tried to fit Solomon's advice for easy memorizing.

7. Review of Important Egyptian Antiquities discovered since
the Rosetta Stone, by Dr. G. Seyffarth, of New York.

The monuments remarked upon by Dr. Seyffarth were the following :

I. Hermapion's Obelisk in Rome, identified by the speaker in 1826 with that
now standing before the Porta del Popolo. The complete translation of its in-
scription was published in his Theologische Schriften der alUm ^Egypter (Leipzig,
1855). It concerns two kings, Ramses the Great and his father Osymandias.

II. The Turin papyri, representing the catacombs of the two kings just men-
tioned. These were discovered by Dr. Seyffarth in tjie same year ; and the value
of the ancient Egyptian cubit was deduced by him from a comparison of their
data with the measurements made by the French expedition.

III. The sarcophagi of Ramses and Osymandias at Paris, London, and Cambridge.
The sarcophagus of Ramses the Great is in the Louvre, and its lid is in Cambridge
(England). The sarcophagus, and especially the figures on its lid, is represented
in the Turin papyri spoken of above. The sarcophagus of Osymandias was
identified in 1 828 by the speaker with one in the Soane Museum at London. The
planetary configurations represented on them led him to fix the birth of the two
monarch's in the years 1730 and 1693 B. C. respectively.

IV. The Mummy-case at Leeds, England, belonging to an officer of these
monarchy who was born 1722 B. C.

V. The Tablet of Abydos, now in the British Museum, containing the names
of thirty-eight kings, who reigned, one after the other, from Menes down to
Ramses.

VI. An astronomical inscription discovered by Burton, and represented in his
JSxcerpta Hieroglyphica (vol. i., p. 15), confirming the date of Menes's arrival in
Egypt

VII. Manetho's autograph in Turin. This celebrated historical monument
was discovered by Dr. Seyffarth, in fragments, in a great mass of papyrus frag-
ments, and what was left was put together by him, at the cost of six weeks' labor.
He holds it to have been written by Manetho himself, because its hieratic charac-
ters agree with the letter's age, because its contents exactly correspond with our
Greek Manetho, and because the text contains numberless corrections, obviously
not the work of a copyist, but coming from the collector and transcriber of the
royal names himself.

VIII. A geographical altar in Turin, containing the names of seventy-two
Egyptian cities, divided into southern, northern, eastern, and western. It was
discovered by the speaker in 1827.

IX. The sarcophagus in the academical Museum at Leipzig, a monument of
unparalleled beauty, purchased by the speaker in 1841. It is made of fragrant
cedar, and contains 3,000 relief figures, as fine as Greek gems. A photograph of
its inscriptions has been given by Dr. Seyffarth to the Society's library.

X. The bi-lingual stone of Tanis, discovered in 1866. The Smithsonian Insti-
tution is in possession of two casts of it.

XI. The Shishak tablet, the oldest geography of Palestine. It specifies 125
fortified cities of Palestine, taken by the Egyptians under Shishak, in 945 B. C.

7*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clvi American Oriental Society :

XII. The mummy and funeral papyrus of Shishak's general. Gen. Stone, of
Roxbury, Mass., travelling in Egypt in 1858, bought a papyrus and ornaments
from an extraordinarily ornamented mummy, then just found in a hitherto un-
opened tomb. The papyrus was nearly five feet long, and ten inches wide, written
with hieroglyphic and hieratic characters. Its principal contents were translated
and explained by Dr. Seyffarth in the Transactions of the St Louis (Missouri)
Academy, vol. i. It is at present at Lafayette College, Kaston, Pa.

XIII. The oldest known copy of the sacred Egyptian records, written for the
wife of Pharaoh Horns, 1*780 B.C. This was discovered in another unopened
tomb near Thebes, three years ago ; it measures forty feet in length. There exist
about 300 similar copies of this sacred work — for example, three in the museum
of the New York Historical Society — but none of them are as old as this. It in
now in the Louvre at Paris. A translation of the historical part of the document
was given by the speaker.

XIV. The papyrus Clarke, belonging to Mr. Robert Clarke, of Cincinnati Of
this, also, the historical part was read in translation.

XV. The Egyptian altar found in the ruins of Pompeii This was dug out about
eighty years ago, and has been more than once published. The translation of this
monument given by Rev. Mr. Goodwin, in " Records of the Past" (London, 1875,
vol. i., p. 67), was read by Dr. Seyffarth and compared throughout with his own
version; and he closed with remarks upon the comparative merits of bis own and
the Champollionic methods of interpretation of the hieroglyphs.

Dr. Seyffarth's exposition was illustrated throughout with copies of the monu-
ments discussed, either manuscript or published.

8. A Statistical Account of the Forms of Declension in the
Rig- Veda, by Prof. C. R. Lanraan.

Prof. Lanman presented the results of a complete collection and enumeration of
the declensional forms of the Rig- Veda, intended for publication in the Journal;
and, as the matter itself was not well suited to oral presentation in bulk, he spent
rather, a brief time in setting forth the value of such an investigation, and the
results which it might be expected to aid in establishing. He remarked, 1. on
its uses for the purposes of comparison with the forms in other languages, in-
stancing the d as by far the most usual dual (nom. etc) ending in the Veda, and
precisely corresponding with the Greek w, with which the au of the later Sanskrit
stands in only problematic relation. The forms of the Gr&thAs of the A vesta,
especially, depend for their explanation on minute inquiries into the peculiarities
of Vedic inflection. As regards, 2. its bearings upon the Veda itself, they are of
a critical and exegetical, as well as a grammatical and a metrical character.
There are many minor points of textual criticism, of which a confident decision
can be reached only on the basis of a complete collection of ail instances of devia-
tion from general rule. Such are the cases of an apparently anomalous accentua-
tion here and there met with. Such, again, are instances of the reading of a
briefer case-ending in the established text, where the metre calls for a fuller one ;
and so on. Broader critical questions, also, as of the comparative age of different
parts of the text, receive light from the statistics of forms. Finding, for example,
that the ending dsas of nom.-voc. pi. masc. has become unknown in the later lan-
guage, we conjecture that it may be less frequent in later parts of the Veda
itself : and so in like manner of the instr. pi. masc-neut. ending ebhis. Trying
the frequency of occurrence of these endings, as compared with the ordinary ds
and did, for several of the mandaku or books of tho Rig- Veda, we find their rela-
tive frequency to be as follows :

Mandala IX. VIII. VII. X.

ending dsas 36 40 34 25 per cent

" ebhU 60 50 45 43 do.

There is a general agreement here ; and the tenth book, which we have every rea-
son for believing to be later than the others, shows the smallest percentage of the
more antique forms. In discussing the exegesis of the verse x. 30. 14, the ques-
tion has been raised whether the nom.-voc. pi. in dsas could be interpreted as
feminine ; the careful examination of the text shows fifteen to eighteen instances

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1877. clvii

of its use in a feminine base. So the form ju's (ii. 14. 3) has sufficient support
as an accus. pi., by contraction from the organic form juas. Other similar cases
were quoted or referred to. Of course, the grammatical interest of statistical
comparisons is great. The grammars give us side by side, as if of equal value,
forms which in such texts occur thousands of times (thus, the nom. sing. masc.
of a-stems occurs over 10,000 times ; the accus., over 6,000 times), and others
which are not once met with, or are represented only by an example or two.
Again, a single case has sometimes a great variety of forms : like the instr. sing,
fern, of i-atems, which endB in id, yd\ i, t, or ind. Then, 3. upon the history both of
declensional forms and of stems in their present current shape, these collections
may be expected to cast occasional light

The work of collection has been greatly aided by Grassmann's excellent Index-
vocabulary to the Rig- Veda. By the help of Prof. Whitney's (at present manu-
script) index to the Atharva-Veda, Prof. Lanman expects to add whatever may
be desirable from the declensional material of that text also.

9. On Moriz Schmidt's * Collection of Cypriote Inscriptions,' bv
Prof. Isaac H. Hall.

The Sammlung Kyprischer Inschriften,* by Moriz Schmidt which appeared about
a year ago, and which, by the opening sentence of the Preface, appears to be the
first number of a serial publication, is a work of service to those who have not
access either to the inscriptions themselves or to the scattered works which con-
tain copies of them. Yet there are many matters in the text and plates which the
interests of accurate science demand should be corrected, where certain facts were
either unknown to or overlooked by the author. Ungracious as this task may
appear, yet, having seen and studied all the important Cypriote inscriptions on
the original monuments, and all but about half a dozen of the whole number, I
have felt bound to take some portion of the task upon myself. But in thiB paper
I shall not attempt to criticize the interpretations : I shall only deal with matters
of fact as respects the inscriptions themselves and their true representation and
readings. These, for convenience, I shall take up generally in the order in which
they occur in the Sammlung.

1. Preface, p. 1. Speaking of the Cesnola inscriptions, Schmidt remarks that he
has so arranged most of them as to preserve the same numerical order as that of
the numbers ' with which they are marked in the Cesnola Museum itself.' That
order, however, gives no clue to them in their present arrangement, and is of
no help. It was only the provisional numbering of the collection as exhibited in
London, and never was followed in their arrangement in New York. Several
that bear numbers are not yet placed on exhibition. 1 may add that several
months before the appearance of Schmidt's " Collection,1' the Cesnola collection
had been enriched by more than twenty new inscriptions, none of which appear
in its pages.

2. Preface, p. 2, occurs the remark : * in cases where Isaac Hall's fac-simile
and my copy made after Schroeder's good squeezes are at variance, my squeeze
allowed absolutely nothing to be read which supported Hall's reading.' I can
only say that I had copies, which, if I had followed them, would have given
results similar to Schmidt's, but I preferred to trust the originals. With a few
exceptions, I had the originals under my eye daily, for months. Also, in 1876, I
again compared the originals with my own plates and those in Schmidt's Collec-
tion, and I must still adhere to my own. I know of not one single case in which
Schmidt's representations, or his reading of a single character, differ from mine,
where I can conscientiously prefer his. Further, allowing a paper cast to be
good, it still cannot always represent what is legible on the stone.

3. Plate I, the Bronze Tablet. While in Paris in 1875, I carefully collated and
compared Be Luynes's copy with the original, and was rejoiced to find its accu-
racy. It is faithful even to the false strokes of the engraver, and the rust spots
and holes. It contains, however, one trifling omission : that of a division-mark

* Sammlung Kyprischer Tnschriften in Epichorischer Schrift, herausgegeben von
Moriz Schmidt^ Professor in Jena. Jena, 1876.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

civ Hi American Oriental /Society:

between two groups of characters near the end of the third line on the secoBd
page or side. The characters for to. se. \ i. ta. i are represented as one group, thus:
to. se. i. ta. t. Schmidt's copy leaves the error uncorrected, and is, in general,
less accurate than De Luynes's plate.

4. Plate II and accompanying text. In line 1, Schmidt follows George Smith'i
plate rather than Euting's, but adopts Euting's reading of e in place of Smith's U
(and also of Schmidt's own former te in Die Insch. von Jdolion). He consequent]?
reads kg 'Hdaliuv. But the reading is doubtless te. I would suggest that the
true transliteration is ica r' 'Htiafaav ; kg, r* being the same as the common n uu.
I have already published elsewhere the characters I read on the stone, not found
in former copies, equivalent to First in line 1, and }6 in line 2, about which I think
there is no doubt. If I am right the supplied reading of Ahrens, substantially
followed by Schmidt in hiB ylrei I II I, must be wrong. Dr. Siegismund accepted
my view immediately, on hearing from me on the subject

As between George Smith's and Euting's copy, I much prefer George Smith's,
though both, as far as they go, are generally good. Neither is a fac-simile ; much
less Schmidt's.

5. Plate III. la, 15, and text This inscription, on the stone, is doubtless a
complete one, contrary to Ahrens's view, cited by Schmidt ; and the interpreta-
tion and supplied readings published by Ahrens, and copied (with evident doubt?,
however) by Schmidt, are therefore wrong. But none of Schmidt's copies are
correct, nor was that copy any more so which was previously published by
Schmidt in his Inschr. von Idal. His own copies omit the division-lines between
the groups of characters, which furnish the key to the whole reading. Beside*
that, some of the characters are so represented as to give a different reading from
that on the stone ; and others of the characters are quite imperfectly represented
As I have elsewhere published the true reading, I forbear further remark, except
to append that reading in Roman syllables, keeping the lines and division-marks
as upon the stone.

(1) ku. po. ro. ko. ra. ti. wo. se. \ e. mi. \ o. la. o.

(2) o. te. | o. mo. i. po. si. se. \ o. na. si. H. mo. se.

(3) ti. i. so. ni. ta. se. \ ti. pa. se. \ e. mi.

6. Plate IV. This is the noted " Naked Archer" inscription, not yet deciphered,
because of its unknown characters, different from any elsewhere occurring. I
have my ideas of its reading, but do not wish to state them here. This inscription,
if any one does, deserves to be known by an accurate fac-simile ; but Schmidt?
plate is quite different from the stone, and from paper casts given me by Dr. Birch.
The differences could not be perfectly shown without a new plate; but on
Schmidt's plate nearly all the characters are imperfect ; those on the left side
badly mutilated, as well as some near the right border. Of the forty odd charac-
ters on the stone, at least sixteen are mutilated on Schmidt's plate, which arc
quite plain on the stone — and most of them mutilated beyond certain recognition.
I think that on this stone occur characters bearing resemblances to certain
Hamath characters, not elsewhere found.

7. Plate V, and text. Schmidt's reading is correct, and so, in general, is his
own copy on the plate. It is good as a working copy for a decipherer, but not a
fac-simile, nor sufficient to help in working up the Cypriote palaeography.

8. Plate VI. 2a, 26, and text with Plate IX. 7. Different copies of the inscrip-
tion from Pyla. That on Plate IX. 7, from D. Pierides, is by far the best, and the
reading correct as far as it goes, though not in strict fac-simile. M. Pierides here,
as generally in doubtful cases, wholly omits characters which he could not
decipher, though traces of them exist on the stone. I hope at some future time to
add a little to what is known of this inscription : M. Pierides was good enough to
allow me to study the stone itself and take a paper cast, at his residence in
Larnaca. I may here state that all of M. Pierides's readings given in Schmidt's
collection are correct, with the exception just mentioned: viz. that he gives litUe
or no hint of the existence of mutilated characters — characters illegible, perhaps,
but of which traces are plainly visible.

As to Nos. la, lb, lc, British Museum inscriptions, on the same Plate, Schmidt's
text shows the facts, and it is not necessary to criticize imperfections. The same
remark applies to Plate VII. 3.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at New York, October, 1877. clix

9. Plate VII. 4, 5, 6, 7, represent inscriptions whose originals I have not seen.
I only mention them in order to add that while No. 6 is stated by Schmidt to
have * the greatest resemblance with Hall I. 2,' * without however being identical
-with it,1 the same is true of another Cesnola inscription still unpublished.

10. Plate YII1. 2, 4, 5. These are all taken from De Vogue's copies, and are
represented as having characters composed of cuneiform strokes. While it must be
admitted that in all other respects the copies are admirable, in that one respect
•they are unaccountable. The strokes are deep rectangular cuts, with nothing
cuneiform about them. The style of the characters is what our printers would
call " Gothic type." No. 2, however, has ornamental strokes across the ends, like
those of a Roman I.

No. 3a and 36, /?, y, on the same plate, are four copies made by De Vogue* from
Louvre inscriptions, and are generally legible ; but the originals contain several
details valuable in showing the progressive change in the Cypriote writing, which
are either distorted or not represented in these copies.

11. Plate IX. 1 and 16, Louvre inscriptions. The truth lies between the
two copies, neither being quite correct The chief defect is that on both a
plain ko is represented as a Greek Q ; most likely from some bias of each copyist.
As the copies are, Schmidt admits their illegibility.

No. 3 on the same plate I have not seen.

No. 4 on the same plate is from the so-called Tabula Isiaca in Turin. But after
seeing the TablUa, I am compelled to doubt its genuineness. And, at any rate, the
whole, if genuine, is Kgyptian and not Cypriote. With others, I was formerly
guided by De Luynes's plate and text, but I believe that the English Egyptologists,
as well as the custodian of the Tabula in Turin, utterly disbelieve in its genuine-

12. No. 9 on the same plate, which M. Schmidt leaves without accompanying
text, is the noted bi-lingual of the Louvre. Schmidt follows De Vogue's copy,
made long before the value of a single Cypriote character was known, which copy
misled us all at first. De Vogue mistook an accidental scratch on the stone for a
stroke of the character, and made the first character read Uy instead of ha, which
it really is. Had it been correctly given, it is almost beyond doubt that a fruitful
hint given by Dr. Birch (and afterwards adopted by Brandis) would have been
followed out by Birch himself at the outset, and the deciphering have made much
more rapid progress. As the case was, this bi-lingual proved a hindrance rather
than a help. I have sent a correct copy to England for publication.

IX The Cesnola inscriptions follow next; and as to differences between
Schmidt's representations and my own, I have already stated what is necessary,
and shall not go into a long detail. Where, however, he has trusted to my fac-
similes rather than to "good squeezes," I could wish that the copies he has made
were more accurate. But a few matters require more particular notice.

a. Plate XI. 2 and text. Schmidt remarks, speaking of myself : ' He there
denies my assertion that verses were contained in the inscription, on the ground
that 1. 4 does not close with xaiPey hut with ^a/pere.' What I said was: "The
inscription is clearly not in hexameters (though the first part of the first line
appears to be an elegiac pentameter), and the inscription ends as well as begins
with ;r<M/>*Te, not xaiP*" The " assertion" in question occurs in Die Inschrift von
Idalion, p. 8, where Schmidt says of the inscription, that it ' according to all
appearance is metrical, composed in hexameters. It begins with xa^PeTe and ends
with xatPl<? I do not believe, however, that the misrepresentation is anything
more than the result of haste. Schmidt makes a new error in reading this inscrip-
tion, by the way, in line 2 : reading irv for po. ro. He corrects, however, his
former error of e. me. re. na. i., for ku. me. re. na. i.

b. Plate XV. 1 . I cannot agree that the Greek portion of this bi-lingual is to
be read Sefiiv 'just as well as' depiav, though it might so appear from even a
good copy. It looks differently on the stone, where scratches can be distinguished
from strokes.

c. It is difficult to know, from the lettering on the several plates, whether differ-
ent persons are cited as authorities, or by way of parallel references ; nor is this
difficulty always cleared up by referring to the text. But a confusion like, e. y.,
Plate XVII. la and 16 is rather strange. .No. 16 appears to cite me as authority;

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clx American Oriental Society:

but I am not guilty of either of the two. But these minor matters might he
rectified in a table of errata.

14. As to the remaining plates of the Cesnola inscriptions, and their accompany-
ing text, none can properly be called fac-similes ; but doubtless Schmidt is not
responsible for mistakes, as he was obliged to rest on the best authority at hand.
Most of them represent the syllables truly. Not so however with Plate XX 6,
which is quite faulty; nor with Plate XXI. 16, which is especially bad and
erroneous. His remark in connection with the last mentioned : * The fourth sign
ib probably fit, not v' etc., is not sustained by the character on the stone ; but I
suppose the stone-cutter is responsible, if there is any mistake. I should prefer
to take Schmidt's view if I could

1 5. Plate XXI. 10. The inscription on the gold armlets found at Curium. This
is not at all faithful to the original, except that it gives the syllables. The two
inscriptions on the armlets (Schmidt gives only one inscription), though reading
the same, are quite different in some details, and are especially valuable as pre-
senting some new variants and furnishing a key to others ; besides having a date
within known and narrow limits. It is important that they should be accurately
represented.

The gem, Plate XXI. 11, is represented more than four times the actual size,
with scarcely anything accurate about it. The gem is very old, and several
strokes of the characters are evidently worn away. It belongs to the older style
of Cypriote writing.

On the whole, the chief value of the *' Collection" consists mainly in its being a
Collection, and (when supplemented with a table of errata) in its citation and in-
dication of authorities. A few of its hints in interpretation, also, are valuable ;
but its advance in the general study of Cypriote is small : and if it were relied
upon implicitly as authority, it might turn the shadow on the dial a little back-
ward.

I would not be understood as undervaluing M. Schmidt's labors, for which I
have a profound respect ; and no one knows better than I the difficulty of obtain-
ing correct copies, or the ease with which one may fall into error. But accuracy
in these matters seems worth striving for, and I have no doubt that M. Schmidt
will be as glad to have his errors corrected as I shall always be in case of mine.

I cannot help adding, at the conclusion of this paper, that in any future publica-
tion of a Cypriote Syllabary, especially if it have reference to the origin or develop-
ment of the system of writing, full regard should be had to the local differences
of writing between the west and east ends of the island of Cyprus. The inscrip-
tions reading from right to left, almost if not quite without exception, come from
the west end; whence, also, come most of the archaic forms. The local charac-
ter of this difference, it should be stated, was first detected by Gen. di Cesnola.

The wants still existing at the present stage of Cypriote study are mainly : 1. a
complete collection of all the inscriptions, accurately figured, so that interpretation
may proceed on a sound basis ; 2. a correct Syllabary, as far as one can be made.
arranged with reference to the matters just above stated ; 3. a new compilation of
the best interpretations : after which, perhaps, a grammar and vocabulary may be
constructed.

But of much material once extant it is unfortunately too late to avail ourselves.
Between Alonia ton Episcopou and Palaio Castro, near New Paphos, are hundreds,
if not thousands, of rock tombs, of various sizes and styles, bearing fragments of
Cypriote inscriptions. One can see that the characters were probably of the
archaic form, and can now and then guess at a character ; but all real legibility
is gone forever.

After passing a vote of thanks to the Council of the University
for the use of their rooms, the Society then adjourned, to meet
again in Boston, on the 28th of May, 1878.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1878. cxli

Proceedings at BoMton, May 29th, 1878.

The Society came together at the usual time and place, the chair
being occupied by the President.

After the reading of minutes of the last meeting, reports of the
officers were called for.

The summary of the Treasurer's report is as follows :

RECEIPTS.

Balance on hand, May 30th, 1877,
Annual assessments paid in, -
Sale of the Journal -

Interest on deposit in Savings Bank,

Total receipts of the year,

$40.00
13.50
81.93

$1,562.30

• $ 65.27

104.15

26.12

135.43
$1,697.73

-

195.54
1,502.19

EXPENDITURES.

Printing and engraving for Journal,

Book-binding, -

Current expenses of Library and Correspondence,

Total expenditures,
Balance on hand, May 29th, 1878,

$1,697.73

The Librarian reported the receipt during the year bf a hundred
volumes and parts of volumes, twenty-three pamphlets, and two
manuscripts. The number of titles of printed works is now 3319 ;
of manuscripts, 138.

The Committee of Publication reported that the second half of
the tenth volume of the Journal, long detained in the press, was
now rapidly approaching completion, and would be ready for
distribution in a few weeks. To it would be appended the full
list of additions to the library, and the list of present members.

The Directors gave notice that the next meeting would be held
in New Haven, and on the 23d of October next, unless, for
sufficient reason, the time should be changed by the appointed
Committee of Arrangements (composed of tne President, Kecord-
ing Secretary, and Treasurer).

They further recommend the election as Honorary Members of

Prof. Theodor Benfey, of Gottingen ;
Mr. Arthur C. Burnell, of Madras ;
Prof. Berthold Delbruck, of Jena ;
Prof. Theodor Noldeke, of Strassburg ;
Prof. William Wright, of Cambridge.

Ballot being had, the gentlemen were declared unanimously
elected.

vol. x. 8*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxii American Oriental Society :

On the nomination of a committee appointed for the purpose,
the following persons were elected officers for the ensuing year.

President — Prof. E. E. Salisbury, LL.D., of New Haven.

* i Rev. X. G. Clark, D.D., " Bostou.

Vice-Presidents \ Hon. Peter Parker, M.D., " Washington.
( Rev. T. D. Woolsey, LL.D., * New Haven.
Recording Secretary — Prof. Ezra Aubot, LL.D, " Cambridge.
Cor. Secretary— Prof. W. D. Whitney, Ph.D., " New Haven.
Seer. Class. Sect.— Prof. W. W. Goodwin, Ph.D., " Cambridge.
Treas. and Librarian — Mr. Addison VanName, " New Haven.
Mr. J. W. Barrow, " New York.

Mr. A. I. Cotheal, " New York.

Prof. W. II. Green, D.D., " Princeton.

Directors { Prof. A. P. Peabody, D.D., " Cambridge.

| Prof. Charles Short, LL.D., " New York.

I Prof. J. H. Thayer, D.D., " Andover.

[ Rev. W. H. Ward, D.D., " New York.

The Corresponding Secretary read the names of the members
known to have deceased during the last year : namely, of the
Corporate Members,

Prof. Wm. R. Dimmock, of Quincy, Mass. ;

Prof. J. B. Feuling, of Chicago, 111.;

Dr. Charles Pickering, of Boston;

of the Corresponding Members,

Rev. William Tracv, of South India:
Rev. H. A. Wilder," of South Africa;

and of the Honorary Member,

Prof. Hermann Graasmann, of Stettin.

He added to the announcement some account of the character
and services of each. He sketched especially the remarkable
career of Grassmann, who had first distinguished himself as a
mathematical philosopher among the foremost in Europe in that
department, had begun in middle life his valuable contributions to
philological science, and had finally laid students of India under
deep and lasting obligation by his admirable Vocabulary-Index to
the Rig -Veda and his complete metrical version of the same
Veda — a work of a high order of merit. His devotion to these
labors had doubtless shortened his life ; for though he was full of
years (nearly seventy), a period of useful activity might still have
been expected from him.

Messrs. Tracy and Wilder were missionaries of long standing
under the American Board, Mr. Tracy considerably the older;
both had left an honorable record in their mission- work ; and both
would be remembered by the Society as having contributed to
the interest of its meetings while in this country on vacation
visits.

Dr. Pickering had inherited an interest in the Society from his
uncle, its first President, and had been one of its Directors, and
almost invariably present at its Boston meetings, during nearly

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1878. clxiii

the whole of its history. His special scientific studies in the
distribution of animals and plants had led him over to anthro-
pology and ethnology, his contributions to which branches of
knowledge had won wide recognition.

Prof. Dimmock had greatly distinguished himself as a teacher,
endearing himself to a large circle of pupils and friends by his
accomplishments as a scholar and his character as a man, and his
premature loss in the prime of life was profoundly felt through
the whole community.

Prof. Feuling also had won an honorable name through the
West, and through the country, as a scholar and teacher of more
than usual ability and success.

At the invitation of the Secretary, Dr. Anderson spoke further
briefly of Messrs. Tracy and Wilder; and Prof. Goodwin set forth
more fully the merits of Prof. Dimmock, to whom Mr. H. F. Jenks
also paid the affectionate tribute of a pupil.

The Corresponding Secretary read a letter from Prof. F. P.
Brewer, of Gnnnell, Iowa, suggesting certain emendations in the
readiugs of the Noumenios inscription communicated by Prof. Hall
at the meeting of the Society a year ago, and published in the
Proceedings of that meeting, and notes upon the inscription.

Prof. Brewer proposes iiart'ktaz (for dtareXe t 6e) in line 3 ; Idogev (for eoOtf-ev) in
line 6; rob UocreiScjvo^ rov AapvaKtav in line 7 ; and dve/Mv (?) (for aireife, which
is only Ionic) in line 9; and he would translate: 'Whereas Noumenios, son of
Noumenios, being a benefactor of the city, continued to take the whole care of the
high-priest and of the priests in both word and deed, it seemed good to
Praxidemos the high-priest and to the priests of Poseidon of Larnax to grant to
Noumenios and his descendants that they may take the first choice of the reserved
pieces for all time of whatever they may sacrifice. With good luck !' The phrase
uv av tivuoLv in line 8, he says, " seems to refer to the ytpuv of line 9. The yipa,
I suppose, are the choice bits of the animals sacrificed, which were the perquisites,
according to established rule, of certain persons attached to the temple. The first
choice of these forever was relinquished to the family of Noumenios, in the
sacrifices they might have occasion to offer at that temple

"The name of the high-priest, Praxidemos, occurs in another inscription
formerly found in this village— a bilingual inscription, of which the Greek part
was published as follows by Prof. Sakellarios, Athens, 1 855 :

'Athjvp Tuureipq. 'SlKrf teal fiaat'Aeuq Krofefiaiov. Hpaf;idi}fiOf Zeofjuws T^v ftupdv
dvedyicev. '\yady tvxq.

" It is possible that the Prazidemos mentioned in the two inscriptions is the
same."

Prof. Hall explained that some of the suggested emendations were of obvious
plausibility ; they had been in his own mind, but rejected as unsupported by the
monument itself ; they also appeared in part in the version given by di Cesnola's
assistant scholars in his " Cyprus," emended from an original copy coincident with
his (Prof. Hall's) own. So, for example, the II of the inscription has a very long
horizontal bar, and it and the N cannot possibly be mistaken for one another.
The exchange of A and N is more possible.

The Society now proceeded to listen to communications.
1. On the Cypriote Inscriptions of the new Cesnola Collection,
by Prof. Isaac H. Hall, of Philadelphia, Pa.

This paper was accompanied with squeezes and drawings of the new inscrip-
tions, so far as unpacked, with translations where possible. Most of these in-
scriptions are short, but all are valuable, nearly every one contributing its share
in advancing the knowledge of the Cypriote writing. Several variant characters

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxiv American Oriented Society :

are explained, with some new grammatical forms, such as fu for ipe. Two of the
inscriptions were especially interesting as having helped to identify the temple of
Apollo Hylates at Curium. Several more occur on tall jars of red polished ware,
hitherto thought by the best authorities to be exclusively Egyptian. Of all these
matters the details are necessary for a proper comprehension of the subject, which
cannot be well shown without plates. The squeezes and drawings showed also
the inadequacy of the figures hitherto published in Europe of a few of the new
inscriptions, especially of the gold armlets of king Ethevander, found at Curium.
Those inscriptions of the old collection which could not be found at the time of
the former paper on the subject, presented in 1874, have since been recovered.
They were presented also with this paper, with squeezes and drawings. Here
also appeared the great faultiness of European publications of some of them.
For instance, No. 256 in the old collection reads as follows :

(1) e.te.i.Ula.ne.te.ke.

(2) ta.we.i.ko.na.ta.te? net a.po., the seventh and eighth characters in the
second line being a little doubtful. In Greek, probably,

(1) fret III ave$Tfite

(2) ra(v) retKova ra(v)1 'kiTofyum] The blank I do not yet venture

to fill, on account of the doubtful characters.

By comparing this plain reading with the two different ones in Schmidt's
Sammhing and Inschrift von Idalion, it will be seen how defective material
Schmidt must have had to work with. The stone is broken off at one end, and
with it the name of the person who offered the statuette to Apollo.

No. 270 of the old collection is on a piece of a large vase, found with the stone
bearing a figure of a serpent with an inscription nearly obliterated. In Roman
it reads:

H.mo.to.re.te.se.io.TTta.fd.ri.o.se.
This difficult inscription is interesting on account of its evident connection with
others, more or less difficult I am unable to say whether any attempt has been
made to publish it Schmidt appears to have it in view in hie 3 ft, Plate XII of the
Sammlvng, which he confounds with his 3a on the same plate. The latter is quite
a different inscription, however, and was never known, even by Gen. di Oesnola.
until I found it in the collection.

It is not possible, however, alwayB to tell to what inscriptions Schmidt refers,
so far astray are some of his copies. In his No. 7, Plate XIX (not numbered in
the Cesnola Collection), at least seven characters are wrong.

No. 248 according to the old numbering is another that is difficult to identify
in Schmidt It may be la and 16 of Plate XVIII of his SammluTig. It is frag-
mentary, but the following is legible :

mi.ta.si.ta.mo.se.e.mi. | *e. .

Before the division mark there is doubtless a proper name before e/u.

Squeezes were also exhibited of the " Naked Archer " inscription in the British
Museum, of the bi-lingual and other inscriptions discovered by D. Pierides of
Cyprus, of the Pyla inscription, and others, which showed the great inaccuracy
and deficiency of all the published representations in attempted facsimile.

2. History and Life Illustrated by the Inscriptions from East-
ern Palestine, by Rev. Selah Merrill, of Andover, Mass.

The discovery of the Mbabite stone has within recent years awakened a special
interest in the subject of inscriptions in the country east of the Jordan. Those
already brought to light exist in the Moabitic, Hebrew, Nabathean, Palmyrene,
Cuflc, Greek, and Latin languages, with perhaps two additional ones, if we are
allowed to include in this group the so-called Hamath inscriptions, and those from
the Safa-region, or the district south-east of Damascus and east of the Druse or
Hauran Mountains. These inscriptions cover a wide period, or from 900 B. C. to
about the time of the Moslem conquest in A. D. 635, and are of very great value
for historical and linguistic purposes. The most recent and valuable publications
containing these inscriptions are those of Wetzstein, a small volume published in
1 864 containing about 200 inscriptions with notes — of Waddington, whose work,
published in 1870, is by far the most complete now existing upon the subject—
and of De Vogue, whose first volume, published in 1868, is devoted chiefly to the

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1878. clxv

Palmyrene inscriptions, with a few Nabathean inscriptions from the Hauran, and
whose second volume, published in 1877, contains the so-called " Sabean inscrip-
tions " from Safa.

In this paper attention was directed mainly to the contents of the Greek and
Latin inscriptions from Eastern Palestine, of which something upwards of 2000
have been collected. Mr. Merrill presented to the Society seventy odd inscriptions
which he had collected in the country east of the Jordan, all of which, with one
or two exceptions, were new. They touch upon a great variety of topics, and are
of the utmost importance in illustrating the religion, language, occupations, busi-
ness affairs, and social and private life of the people who once made these East-
Jordan deserts a land of enterprise and prosperity. Such facts ought to stimulate
investigation in this department, which is certainly one of unusual interest in
connection with researches in Bible lands. Among the particular subjects which
were treated at length in this paper were military affairs, the legions, stations of
the troops, officers, recruiting, etc ; the building of castles, forts, temples, tombs,
churches, reservoirs, theatres, and still other public and private buildings of vari-
ous kinds; the denominations and coining of money; the methods of raising
money for public purposes by taxing, general contribution, or private subscription ;
the interest of the people in the water supply for their cities and towns ; hints
with regard to the ancient cave-dwellers in those regions ; details as to the
mythology which prevailed there, and the subsequent wide-spread Christian influ-
ence ; evidence of extensive vine-culture ; interesting facts with regard to archi-
tecture, trades, occupations, and professions, among which were hotel keepers,
engravers, and interpreters ; in the very late periods the worship of saints and
angels ; evidence bearing upon the question of the culture of the inhabitants and
the languages which they spoke ; and a list was also given of the Roman Emper-
ors, together with the Jewish, Arabian, and Palmyrene rulers that are mentioned
in the inscriptions.

The work of copying inscriptions is difficult, and deserves to be called a special
art. Permission has first to be gained, and next, the inscriptions themselves have
to be found. Frequently it is not possible to take a paper impression, although
this is desirable where it can be done. The inscription should be visited more
than once, and the previous work scrutinized at each subsequent visit. Advan-
tage also must be taken of the light. There are besides several devices which
help to insure accurate copies, but the work requires constant and special care.
Owing to various causes, new inscriptions are constantly being brought to light,
and it is a matter of increasing surprise that, after the multiplied formB in which
ruin and desolation have visited that once beautiful region, so many ancient and
valuable monuments should be preserved.

3. On the Verbal Roots of the Sanskrit Language and of the
Sanskrit Grammarians, by Mr. A. H. Edgren, of New Haven.

The object of Dr. Edgren's paper was to distinguish the authenticated roots and
root-forme in Sanskrit from the unauthenticated, to make a general classification
of the former, and to attempt a determination of the character and value of the
latter.

The author referred first to the familiar fact that a majority of the roots given
by the Hindu grammarians had never been met with in use, and to the suggestions
made in explanation of it. The importance of the matter to Indo-European
etymology makes desirable a more systematic inquiry.

Of the more than two thousand roots catalogued by the grammarians, 974 have
been authenticated by being found in use in the literature ; and there are besides
over 30 Vedlc roots which the catalogues do not contain. A considerable
number of the former, however, are only duplicates, of slightly different form : if
these are subtracted, the number is reduced to 879. Taking from this number,
again, evident denominatives, there are left 832 ; and by further deduction of
essentially duplicate and derivative forms, we arrive at the number of 788 rad-
icals, which are either entirely distinct roots, or secondary formations by accretion,
or vowel-change and transposition, outside the ordinary grammatical processes —
and even this number may be further considerably reduced, if we are strict in
detecting and casting out such secondary formations.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxvi American Oriental Society :

Of the 832 which remain after taking away graphical variations and denomi-
natives only, 549 occur in both the Rig-Veda and the later literature : 62 are
found in the Rig- Veda alone til having later derivatives); of the remaining 221.
about 30 have derivatives in that Veda, and a considerable part of the rest occur
in the other Vedas or in the Br&hmanas — net a few, only there. Of coarse, the
absence of any root in a single work is no proof of its absence from the language
of the period. Yet there are sufficient reasons for believing that a considerable
part of the roots here in question are of later origin.

An important characteristic of the authenticated roots is their productiveness,
by combination with prepositional prefixes and by formation of derivatives : verj
few of them remain barren and isolated in the dictionary.

Of the other great class of radical forms, the unauthenticated. there are 1119.
Allowing, as before, for slight variations of form in roots of identical meaning,
the number will be reduced to rather less than 1000. It is to be noted, however,
that meanings wholly diverse and incompatible are freely attributed to these roots,
just as to the authenticated roots similar unauthenticated senses are assigned.
Of these meanings, as virtually increasing the number of roots, no account i?
here made. The character of the class was discussed under the following heads :

1 . The disproportion between the two classes. While Westergaard and other
early scholars might hope that the unauthenticated roots would yet be found in
parts of the literature then unexplored, all hope of such a result is now long past.

2. The different relation which the classes sustain to the material of the vocabu-
lary. Only a small proportion of the unauthenticated (less than 150) even seem
to have any connection with derivative nominal bases. 3. The different relation
between authenticated radicals of kindred form and meaning on the one hand
and unauthenticated ones of the same kind on the other : and the artificial aspect
of the latter. Nearly four-fifths of the second class can be arranged in group?,
numbering from two to twenty and more, of identical meaning and of analogous
but obviously not historically related form. For example : ke\\ hhei\ ger, yfcr, p>r,
plei>, mev, mler, pei' ; meb, peb ; mep, lep, are all denned by wane, * serve, honor ' :
and there are groups of identical final with almost every consonant in the alphabet
as initial. Under tin's head were considered at some length the causes which
may be conjectured to have led to the fabrication of such groups. 4. The dis-
crepancy between the number of the two classes represented in cognate language*
Fick finds evident* for regarding about 450 of the authenticated radicals as belong-
ing to thfl Indo-European period ; of the others, only 80, and many of these on
very unsatisfactory grounds.

While the general conclusion from the facts and arguments presented is that
the vast majority of the unauthenticated roots are pure figments of the gramma-
rians, the probability still remains that a certain percentage of them are real and
either stowed away in some unexplored part of the literature or. for one or
another reason, never recorded there.

The paper closed with an alphabetical list of the authenticated roots, stating
under each whether it occurs in the Rig- Veda alone, in the later literature alone,
or in both, also whether it is combined with prepositions, and whether derivatives
are made from it To this list was added an index of the same roots arranged
alphabetically according to their finals.

4. On some of the Religious Notions of the GathsLs, by Mr. J.
Luquiens, of Boston.

Dr. (Aiquiens began with describing the peculiarities, external and internal
which distinguish the G&th&s from the rest of the A vesta, marking them as far
more ancient and original ; and he sketched the character of the Zoroastrian reli-
gion as represented in them. The tradition is especially untrustworthy in their
interpretation, but they are still full of difficulties also for European scholars. An
illustration of this is furnished by the discordant versions of the Ahuna- Yairya
prayer, the paternoster of the Zoroastrians. It reads :
yathd aM vairyd athd ratus ashdtcit hacd
vanhms dazdd 7nann.hho skyaothnandm aiildus nunddi
kJishathremrd ahurdi d yim dregiibyd dadat vdtfdrem.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston, May, 1878. clxvii

Justi renders : ' As he is the lord by his own (unrestricted) will, so he is the
master out of purity. The gifts of Vohu-mano are for the good works (accom-
plished) in the world for MazcLi and to Ahura belongs the reign, which he gives
to the poor for a protection. ' This has no acceptableness of meaning to recom-
mend it, and its treatment of vairyd, ashdt, and yim are especially to be questioned.

Roth is especially independent of the native interpreters, relying more on ety-
mology, and amending the text freely, from metrical and other considerations. In
treating the passage, he leaves out ashdtcit hacd as a superfluous insertion, and
with a little transposition and other alteration changes the verse from a regular
ahunavaiti stanza to another metre, of four lines, and reads : ' As there is a better
world, there is also a ruler thereof, the lawgiver of righteous ways of life : In
this world also Ahura Mazda* has the sovereignty, and has placed in it a shepherd
for the poor.' Besides other objections of detail, the main thought is too unlike
the usual manner of the G&thas to be adopted on the authority of a reconstructed
text. Dr. Haug, finally, who after his stay in India changed his method of inter-
pretation, and become a favorer of the native tradition, translates as follows :
1 As an invisible ruler is to be selected, so is also a visible spiritual ruler, for the
sake of purity : Namely, the giver of the good spirit, of life's works for Mazd4 ;
The reign belongs to the living ruler, whom he (MazdA) has given to the poor.'
The peculiar point here is the rendering of ahil by * invisible ruler,' and its con-
trast with ralUj founded on the modern Parsi usage ; though the G£th&s know no
patron saints, no Izeds. The word has such a sense only in the later texts, in
combination with ratu — a- combination of a kind not infrequent in that period.
Neither tradition nor etymology suffice to settle such questions, but only a study
of the word in its whole office and use in the religious system, by the method
sketched in its main outlines by Spiegel.

The word vairyd cannot well be rendered otherwise than as Haug renders it,
4 [is] to be selected ' ; and it is the needed predicate of the first sentence. Choice,
selection, is a prominent and interesting idea in the Zoroastrian faith. This was
shown and illustrated at some length : for example, Ahura-MazdA and Ahriman
are represented as having ' selected ' respectively righteousness and evil deeds ;
the division of the righteous and wicked depends on their will.

In asha is represented the embodiment of the moral and religious order of the
Mazdayacnian world, the antithesis to the powers of darkness.

Khshatforem has often a religious import associated with it, as the ' realm ' of
Ahura-Mazda etc. ; it and #t, * nation,' are used with vairya.

The meaning ' life' is not to be approved for anhus; it means rather the estab-
lished order of the world, the sphere of order and religion, the reign of Asha ;
and anhus dregvafitS is its opposite, the hostile reign, the domains of the druj.
In the plural it assumes a more personal value, as the dwellers or participants of
the reign. It is divided into a corporal or human sphere (anhus aptvo, etc.) and a
spiritual or invisible one (anhus manahho). By the latter is hardly to be under-
stood a future world ; this makes but a doubtful and shadowy appearance in the
Gathds, in the form either of a heaven or of a hell.

The phrase ashdt Jiacd, if these conclusions are correct, seems an essential com-
plement to both ah 8, and ratus, its ablative value being nearly equivalent to a
genitive one.

The rest of the formula would make little difficulty, but for co, which is treated
as of small account by most of the renderings, but which, though sometimes
wanting where it might be expected, is perhaps never introduced without reason.
This leads us to conjecture a parallelism between the two phrases with mazddi
aud akurdij which is obtainable by amending anhew* to the nominative anhus — a
change further supported by the kinship of anhus and khshathrem in the religious
ideas of the G&thtts, by the excessive agglomeration otherwise of genitives in the
second line, and by the isolation of mazddi at the end of the line, if ahheus is to
be taken with what precedes. The reading anhus, then, may be suggested for
trial, and the prayer thus rendered : ' As we must side with the reign of righteous-
ness, so let us side with the ruler thereof — namely, the giver (prompter) of the
works of the holy spirit ; for the reign and the power too belong to him, to
Ahura-Mazd&, whom it makes a guardian for the poor.'

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxviii American Oriental Society :

5. On some Phoenician Inscriptions in the new Cesnola Collec-
tion, by Prof. Isaac H. Hall.

Among the articles of the new Cesnola Collection, now unpacked, but not vet
on public exhibition, are several marble fragments and one earthenware jar,
inscribed with Phoenician letters. All the objects are of the same general nature
with those described by Dr. W. Hayes Ward, in the Proceedings of the Am. Or.
Soc. for May, 1874 (Journal, vol. x., and plate accompanying «. The jar is almost
an exact copy of the one represented in part in Fig. 4 of Dr. Ward's plate, except
that the inscription is different. It is evidently the same as the last half of the
first line on Dr. Ward's fig. 5 : and like that, also, the last letter is indistinct ;
but it looks more like Samech than anything else. The first letter, however, if
the word has three letters, is a plain caph ; and the word therefore appears to
be D/3. But I give another conjecture below.

Another is on the flat rim of a marble bowl, and reads as follows: 'hth Mil
[■JJVjj^D — the letters in brackets being undoubtedly to be supplied. The mean-
ing is probably " [in the year] IIII of King Melekpiathon]." The stone there-
fore dates from the same year as the bi-lingual tablet in the British Museum,
which furnished the key to the Cypriote writing.

Another, also on the flat rim of a marble bowl, has nine legible characters, and
traces of four others. The reading is as follows, the letters in brackets being
evidently the right ones to be supplied : fjnfdSo "f D^ * p * * *. All that is
thus legible is ' Of King Melekiiathon.'

The last one (inscription) consists only of the letters K\ This is on the rim of
a polished alabaster vase, much like Dr. Ward's Fig. 3, in both structure and style
of the letters. Whether it is a piece of the same vase I am unable to tell, as I
had no opportunity to compare the two.

Among the inscriptions of the former collection is one which escaped Dr.
Ward's notice. It is on a jar similar to those figured by him in the Proceedings
for May, 1874, above, and consists of two words, or a double word, of which
the first reads Sjft, and the second appears to read *]BT\ This is the name of a
well-known god, the same as Apollo Amyclean ; *JBH being equivalent to exanf
fWXoq or iic&epyoc or KAvr&rogog. And I am not sure that the second word on the
other two jars may not be read as two letters, viz: |T1; which is a well-known
title of the same god. «]BH means lightning, yt) means arrow. If this is true,
then all three are vessels dedicated to Baal Resheph, Baal Hhdts (I represent
Sadi by ts for definiteness, though I do not otherwise approve it), or Resheph
Hhdts. or Resheph Michal, or Apollo Amyclean. This is the same god to whom
the British Museum bi-lingual was dedicated, which furnished the key to the
Cypriote writing.

6. On the Derivative Conjugations of the Sanskrit Verb, by
\V. D. Whitney, of New Haven.

Prof. Whitney began with calling attention to the often noticed contrast between
the Semitic and Indo-European verbs in regard to their structure ; the latter tend-
ing to develop into an affluence of tense and mode forms ; the other narrowly
limited in this respect, but making instead a rich assortment of so-called conjuga-
tions (causative, intensive, conative, reflexive, etc.). But this difference, striking
and important as it may be, is yet less fundamental than it appears. On the one
hand, the latest views of the history of Indo-European verb structure regard it
as built up on a very narrow tense-foundation— a present and a preterit— with a
multiplication of forms of present-base, and the assignment of the forms made
by them to other mode and tense uses ; and, on the other hand, in at least one
Indo-European language, the Sanskrit, a variety of derivative or secondary conju-
gations have been wrought out which, though far inferior to the fullest Semitic
(Arabic, for example), are yet worthy to be compared to it — namely, passive, in-
tensive, desiderative, and causative. The main object of the author in this paper
was (following out an intimation given by him in the Proceedings of the American
Philological Association for 1876, p. 8) to examine the development of the second-
ary conjugations, and to point out that they are originally present-systems only,

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

J^roceedings at Boston, May, 1878. clxix

which have been by recent additions expanded into fuller verb-systems. In the
classical Sanskrit, the base of the present-system is formed in a variety of ways,
all practically equivalent with one another and with the simple root, and each
verb formB in general only one present; in the Veda, the occurrence is very fre-
quent of two or more present-systems of the same verb ; and a careful examina-
tion will perhaps show in Vedic usage signs of that difference of meaning by
which it is generally believed that they must in all cases have been distinguished
from one another. If the secondary conjugations be regarded as properly belong-
ing in the same category by their origin, their retention or acquisition of a sepa-
rate significance of their own beside that of the primary present will have given
them in the apprehension of the language-users a degree of independence which
led to their being filled out in some degree with the other usual parts of the
verbal structure.

The passive conjugation is most clearly and undeniably of this character, and
Delbruck (AUind. Verbum) has not hesitated to treat it as a present-system only,
standing in the same relation to the ya-class (4th), as the d-class (6th) to the a-
class ( 1st). All that belongs to it further is a peculiar 3d. sing, aorist ; for the
special forms of the other tense-systems allowed by the grammarians are wholly
unknown to the earlier language, and hardly if at all, to be found in the later.

The other conjugations have been extended, more or less, by the addition of
perfect, aorist, and future tense-systems, and of verbal nouns and participles.

As for the perfect, the Rig- Veda (alone) has two cases of a real intensive per-
fect, which it is not difficult to regard as purely sporadic analogical formations.
Elsewhere, the secondary perfect is made by prefixing the accusative of a deriva-
tive verbal noun in d to the perfect tense of an auxiliary — usually, the verb fair,
' do.' But this is almost wholly unknown in the Vedic language : the four Vedas
furnish only a single example belonging to a secondary conjugation (viz. gamaydm
cakdra, AV.) ; and. beside it, one from a primary conjugation (viz. vidd'm cakdra,
TS.). For where the formation begins to appear, it is made as often to eke out the
primary conjugation as the secondary; and the derivative in dm is found even
from reduplicated present bases, SiBJuhavdm, bibhaydm.

The causative is the only secondary conjugation to which belongs an aorist of
any account ; and the causative aorist has nothing to do originally with the other
causative forms ; it is not of the same blood with the rest, but only married into
their family. The causative conjugation itBelf is neither from the beginning nor
exclusively causative ; it is, as all the best opinion holds now, a denominative
formation, which wins in part a causative value, in much tht, same way as some
of the Latin and Germanic derivative verbs ; and a certain kinship of meaning
leads to the gradual assignment of the reduplicated aorist as adjunct to the for-
mation ; their union is only in process, not yet accomplished, in the early Vedic
language.

Aorists of the other secondary conjugations are almost wholly wanting both in
the Vedas and in the Brahmanas. The only exceptions noticed have been an
example or two of the uA-formation from denominative bases.

The creation of futures, in ishydmi etc . begins a little earlier, and in the causa-
tive, to which the adjunction of the reduplicated aorist gave soonest something
of the aspect and value of a whole conjugation. The Rig- Veda has two exam-
pies of causative future focms ; the Atharvan, two more ; the two branches of
the Yajus (in personal forms), four more ; and they begin to grow somewhat more
common in the Brahmanas. Futures of intensive and desiderative conjugation
begin to appear in the Brahmana period, and continue always to be excessively
rare.

An examination of the verbal nouns and adjectives — in turn, tvd, tavya, to, etc.
— would not yield a different result : they begin to appear in late Vedic time, and
become gradually more frequent. Of the infinitive in dhyai, to be sure, even the
Rig- Veda contains a number coming from " causative " bases ; but, considering
such cases as pibadhyai and vdvrdhadhyai, this signifies nothing.

Of what may be called tertiary conjugations — passives, desideratives, etc., from
causative and other secondary bases — the Vedas contain nothing; and, except the
causative-passive, they are only sporadic even in the Brahmanas.

Intensive and desiderative forms are so rare throughout the later literature that
it is very difficult to lay down any laws as to their occurrence. There is hardly

VOL. X. 9*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxx American Oriental Society :

any other part of Sanskrit grammar, therefore, which stands in more pressing
need of being put upon the oasis of the actual facts of the language, instead of
the rules, always destitute of perspective, of the Hindu grammarians.

7. An Enumeration of certain Verb-forms from the Qatapatha
Brahmana, by Prof. John Avery, of Brunswick, Me.

Having lately had occasion, Prof. Avery said, to look through the text of the
Qatapatha Brahmana in order to excerpt certain verb-forms, he desired to present
a brief summary of the results, as compared with those from other texts previously
examined.

Of subjunctive forms, there are over 550 in this Brahmana, against 100 in the
Aitareya, and over 1400 in the Rig- Veda. But those of the third class (coincident
with augmentless preterits), which in RV. were nearly half of the whole number,
have become very rare (only 3 per cent against 10 in AB.): and those of the
first class (with mode vowel and primary endings) have risen from lean than a
quarter in RV. to half and more in AB. and (JB. The use of the preterits in
indicative sense without an augment is almost extinct ; there are but two or
three instances of it

The imperative ending tdt is rarer than in AB.

The occurrences of aorist-forms number 416 (against 175 in AB. and 2,609 in
RV.). They are almost equally divided between the simple and sibilant aorists,
while the former predominate in AB. (56 per cent.) and still more in RV. (71 per
cent). The root-aorist (as agdm) has nearly half the whole number, and the
s-aorist (as adrdksham) more than a quarter

The sibilant future and its preterit, the *• conditional," are very common ; the
former has 425 occurrences (AB. 92 ; RV. 16), and the latter 53 (AB. 3; RV. 1).
An anomalous form is apnuviahydmaJie. The future participle is much used along
with as or bhti. in a verbal sense.

Desideratives and denominatives are nearly as numerous as in the Rig- Veda ;
but of intensives only 30 were noted. ,

Infinitives, with the endings am, turn, tave, tavai, and tos, occur 116 times.

In conclusion, Prof. Avery stated it as his impression derived from the compar-
ative statistics of the verb-forms in the Aitareya and Qatapatha Br&hmanaa, that
the current opinion of the greater antiquity of the former is well-founded.

8. On Demonstrative Roots and Case-Formation, by Prof. M.
W. Easton, of Knoxville, Tenn. ; read by the Corresponding
Secretary.

This discussion was suggested by Prof Sayce's work on Comparative Philology,
and was in good part an argument against the views put forth by that author
upon the points in question. After a general characterization of the work, and an
explanation of the peculiar point of view of the author, as a Semitic scholar, it
proceeded to state the latter's hypothesis. He holds that inflection could never
have been reached through such preparatory stages as the isolating and inflective,
and that Indo-European language must have presented flexions from the first.
He regards the pronominal elements as far too colorless to have led to a system of
case-inflections, and would trace these rather to meaningless elements previously
existing in the spoken language, which Were appropriated, when occasion arose,
to designating more clearly the relations of case. lie thinks a certain child's
habit of turning such words as dog and come into dogo and como perhaps a " rever-
sion to that primitive tendency of men to round off their words with merely
euphonic suffixes which appears so plainly in the case-endings of the Semitic
tongues." Br. Easton- maintains, as against these doctrines, that the genesis of
inflective forms from agglutinative has been established by sufficient evidence ;
that the assumption of a native disposition to inflected speech, antedating the
manifestation of inflection in the language, is to the last degree obscure ; and
that to regard random and meaningless sounds as less colorless material for case-
endings than demonstrative roots is wanting in plausibility. He then goes on to
show what is involved in the reduction of the roots to their case-forming use —
while also allowing that some variety of means may have been adopted, and

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Proceedings at Boston^ May, 1878. clxxi

describing the office of reduplication. The primitive demonstratives were not
vague and indeterminate. The assumption of a great number of demonstratives
is not necessary : it is usual in all growth that economy appears in the material
employed — as the hair, nails, horns, and cornea are transformations of the same
epithelial cell. Time, and the long-continued successive addition of slight modifi-
cations, were the sufficient agents. The present function of a part is by no means
necessarily the function of that part at its first appearance. In circumstances
where little is to be said, and relating to a limited circle of interests almost any
description of verbal machinery will suffice. Mutual accord and sympathy is
always an essential element in communication. Gestures lent their aid. The
remotest speech may have been not unlike a series of interjections, coupled with
explanatory signs. In such conditions, no indefiniteness of parts could prevent
the whole from being distinct. Language, to add to its resources, simply adopts
what happens to be the nearest material ; the process is never one that can be
logically accurate, since the use of an older word in a new meaning is of course
always attended by a certain degree of distortion of its proper use, and frequently
by a violent figurative transfer.

The pronominal hypothesis best explains the further advance of Indo-European
language to inflection. That is the best material for such a purpose which can be
most easily transformed, phonetically and in meaning ; and the demonstratives
possess eminently this character. Auxiliary words of more substance would have
been much slower to cast off an agglutinative value.

After the reading of this communication, the Society passed a
vote of thanks to the Academy for the use of its room, and
adjourned, to meet again in New Haven on the 23d of October,

1878.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxxii American Oriental Society:

Additions to the Library and Cabinet.
Junk, 1871— Junk, 1878.

From the American Academy of Arts and Sciences.

Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. New Series. Vol. ix,

pt. 2. Cambridge, 1873. 4 .
Proceedings of do. do. Vol. viii, p. 137 — xiii, pt 1. Boston. 1869-77. 8 .

From the American Antiquarian Society.
American Antiquarian Society. No.

From the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions.

Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society. No. 66-70. Worcester,
1871-78. 8°.

Modern Arabic. — Psalms.

Beirut,

1864.

16"

Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress.

"

18o9.

■»*»

Alexander's Evidences.

t.

1851.

12

Schneider on Superstitions of the East.

.i

1854.

12

On Prayer and Fasting.

it

1856.

12

On Rites and Ceremonies.

it

1854.

12 •

Peep of Day.

u

1862.

12 .

Union Questions.

it

1847.

12 •

Songs for Children.

it

1862.

16 -

Robinson Crusoe.

il

1861.

12 -

First Reader.

it

1862.

12 .

Book-keeping.

tt

1859.

S -

Selections from Arab Poets.

w

1858.

12s-

Nasif el-T&ziji, Rhetoric.

"

1855.

12s.

Bitras el-BistAni, Lecture on Arab Morals.

it

1859.

8\

Meshaka on the Nature and Duties of the Priesthood. "

1852.

12°.

ie falsehoods

of tfie Papacy.

(»

1864.

12\

Sulaim&n on the Nusarian Religion.

it

1863.

12\

Miscellanies.

(i

1855.

8\

Ancient Armenian. — Psalms.

Smyrna,

1843.

16\

The same. *

2 vols. London,

1859.

*6e.

The same.

New York,

1865.

12s.

New Testament

2 vols. Smyrna, 1838.

16\

The same.

London,

1859.

12"'.

Acts and Epistles.

Smyrna.

1843.

16 .

New Testament in Ancient and Modern Armenian. Constantinople,

1856.

8*.

Modern Armenian. — Bible, with references.

New York,

1862.

8".

Bible.

i;

1859.

8'.

Psalms.

it

1865.

8*.

The same.

ti

1864.

I6C.

The same.

Smyrna,

1843.

16".

New Testament

New York,

1865.

8C.

The same.

Smyrna,

1842.

12r.

Doddridge's Rise and Progress.

New York,

1858.

16 \

Sermons by W. Goodell.

u

1870.

I2e.

Gallaudet's Child's Book on Repentance.

Smyrna,

1839.

I6C.

Hopkins's Evidences of Christianity.

Constantinople,

1863.

12 .

Jones's Catechism.

»t

1856.

I28.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet.

clxxiii

Modern Armenian. — James's Anxious Inquirer.

Constantinople, 1859.

16°.

Lucille, by Adolphe Monod.

1854.

12°.

Wayland's Moral Science-

1859.

12°.

Commentary on Matthew and Mark, by K. H. Wheeler. " 1864.

12°.

Christian Theology, by G. W. Wood and K.

Riggs. " 1866.

8°.

Daily Meditations.

1856.

16°.

On the Keeping of the Heart.

1854.

12°.

On Repentance.

44 1860.

12°.

Guide for members of the Armenian Evangelical

Church.

1855.

12°.

Hymn Book.

" 1857.

16°.

Hymns for Children, with music.

44 1860.

8°.

Christian Doctrine.

New York, 1861.

16°.

Scripture Texts.

'4 1860.

12°.

Child's Entertainer.

Smyrna, 1838.

12°.

Christ's Invitation to Children.

41 1852.

16°.

Arithmetic.

Constantinople, 1857.

12°.

Vt-Tr trt

1858.

12°.

Geography.

44 1861.

12°.

Modern Armenian Grammar, by Kirejjian.

1864.

12°.

Modern Armenian Reader.

44 1858.

8°.

Magazine of Useful Knowledge. Vol. 5, 7,

Smyrna and

Constantinople, 1844-54.

4°.

Bulgarian. — Genesis.

Constantinople, 1857.

12°.

Psalms.

London, 1857.

12°.

New Testament

44 1859.

8°.

The same.

Constantinople, 1866.

12°.

The same.

44 1866.

32°.

Commentary on Matthew chap. 10-21 by Morse and Byington.

Constantinople.

12°.

Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress.

44 1866.

12°.

Christian Doctrine.

" 1862.

12°.

Gallaudet's Child's Book on the Soul.

1871.

12°.

On the Reading of the Scriptures.

1864.

12°.

Primer.

44 1861.

12°.

Family Almanac.

14 1870.

8°.

Chinese. — New Testament in the Fuhchau Colloquial. Fuhchau, 1863.

8°.

Gospels and Acts " "

1866.

8°.

Acts to Phillippians " *'

1866.

8°.

Gospel of Luke.

Singapore, c. 1838.

8°.

Acts.

c. 1838.

8°.

GutzlafFs Life of Moses.

" 1836.

8°.

1836.
1836.

8°.
8°.

Milne's Dialogues between two friends.

The same.

n. p., n. d.

12°.

Medhurst's History of Java.

Batavia, c. 1 830.

8°.

On the duty of worshiping the true God.

Singapore, n. d.

16°.

On God and Jesus.

u n. d.

16°.

On Ma Tsu, the Goddess of Sailors.

n. d.

16°.

Hymn Book.

Malacca, 1835.

8°.

Hymns in the Fuhchau Colloquial.

Fuhchau, 1865.

8°.

Catechism '* "

44 1853.

8°.

Christian Trimetrica) Classic.

n. d.

16°.

Cherokee — New Testament.

New York, 1860.

12°.

Singing Book.

Boston, 1846. obi

. 12c.

Choctaw. — Genesis to Deuteronomy.

New York, 1867.

12°.

Gallaudet's Scripture Biography.

44 n. d.

16°.

Come to Jesus. By Rev. C. C. Copeland.

44 1860.

16°.

Triumphant Deaths of Pious Children.

Boston, 1835.

16°.

Religious Tracts.

44 1835.

16°.

Hymn Book.

44 1858.

16°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxxiv

American Oriental Society .

Choctaw. — Spelling Book.

Reader.
Dakota. — New Testament.

Precept upon Precept

Hymns.

English and Dakota Vocabulary.
Ancient Greek. — Xenophon's Memorabilia.
Modern Greek. — Baxter's Saints' Rest

(Jallaudet's Child's Book on Repentance.

Collection of useful and instructive readings.

Colburn's Mental Arithmetic.

Barth'8 Church History.

Payson's Thoughts.

Woodbridge's Elementary Geography.
The same. 2d ed.

Mother's Manual.

Infant School Manual.

Repertory of Useful Knowledge.

Primer. 3d ed.
The same. 7 th ed.

Peter Parley's Geography for Children.

Arithmetic.

Little Anna.

Sacred Music.
GuzeratL — Gospel of Matthew.

Mark.
Hawaiian. — Bible.

Bible with references.

New Testament "

New Testament

New Testament and Psalms.

Bible Dictionary.

Pioneer Boy [Life of Abraham Lincoln.]

Daily Food.

Primer.

Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress.

Bible Lessons.

Bible Question Book.

Children's

Alexander (W. P.) Evidences of Christianity.
Theological Text Book.

Boston, 1830. 16\

Union. 1836. 12

New York, 1866. 12

n.d. 16

n. <L 16

" 1S52. 8 .

Athens, 1832.

1839.

44 1840.

2 v. " 1853-54.

1831.

Smyrna, 1848.

1S42.

1835.

1843.

* " 1842.

" 1841.

44 1S37-39.

*' 1831.

11 1838.

Malta, 1832.

1832.

" 1829.

Constantinople, 1858. obi.

Surat 1837.

" 1837.

Honolulu, 1843.

New York, 1868 roy.

1857.

1869.

" 1869.

44 1872.

44 1869.

44 1860.

Oahu,

Armstrong's Moral Philosophy.

Sermons.

Hawaiian Instructor. Vol. 1-4.

Atlas.

Leonard's Arithmetic.

Geography.

Woodbridge's Geography.

Anatomy.

Colburn's Mental Arithmetic

Bible Questions.

Gallaudet's Youth's Book on Natural Theology.

History of Quadrupeds.

Biblical Geography.

The same. 2d ed.

Hymn Book.

Hymn Book.

Hymn Book.

Children's Lyre, with music.

Hawaiian Lyre. Honolulu, 1835. obi.

Constitution and Laws of the Hawaiian Islands. 44 1841.

The same translated into English. Lahainaluna, 1842.

Honolulu, 1842.

1840.

1866.

44 1865.

44 1863.

44 1861.

1847.

44 1841.

44 1834-39.

1844.

44 1852.

1832.

1845.

1838.

44 1847.

44 1864.

Lahainaluna, 1842.

1834.

44 1835.

44 1838.

Oahu, 1834.

Honolulu, 1864.

New York, 1872.

12

12 .

12

12

16'.

12

12c

16\

12

4
12
12
12
12
16
12

8=.

8

4C.

8 .
12
18
18 .
12s.
12 .
16.
16
16
12C
12
12
12
12
12
12r

4°

4"
12
12\
12 s
12
24=
16=
12c,
12
12
12
16
16
16
16

4 .
12
12".

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxv

Hawaiian. — Child's Teacher, monthly. 1837. 12°.

Bailey's Algebra. Boston, 1858. 12 .

Micronesian. — Matthew, John, and Ephesians. New York, 1866. 12°.
Malay.— Psalter, with the order for Morning and Evening Prayers.

Penang, 1836. 8°.
Marathi. — Genesis, Deuteronomy, Judges, Psalms, Chronicles, Ezra,

Nehemiah, Esther, Romans, and Revelation. 1836-40. 8°.

Pentateuch. Bombay, 1842. 8°.

Poetical Books of the Old Testament " 8°.

Acts. " 1847. 24°.

Commentary on Matthew. " 1858. 8°.

Barth's Church History. •* 1850. 4°.

Gallaudet's Child's Book on the Soul. " 1844. 12°.

Topical Questions on the Scriptures. *' 1846. 12°.

Examination of Religions. Parts 1, 2. " 1856-58. 12J.

Memoir of Mrs. Munger. " 1858. 12°.

Nature's Wonders. " 1853. 12°.

Theological Class Book. " 1857. 12°.

Scripture Manual. " 1857. 12'.

Life of Muhammad. 4i 1853. 12°.

Mother at Home. " 1852. 24°.

Bible Stories. " 1852. 8°.

Questions on Geography. u 1867. 12°.

Hymns for Worship and Songs for Children. " 1866. 8°.

First Book for Children. Lithographed. Bombay, 1838. 12°.

History of Jesus Christ. " " 1841." 12°.

Hymns. n. p., n. d. 24°.

Instructive Stories. " " 16°.

Child at Home. " u 16°.

Volume of tracts. " " 12°.

Gospel of Matthew in English, Marathi, Guzerati, Hindustani,

and Sanskrit 8°.

Sinhasanabattisi. Lithographed. Bombay, 1854. 12°.

Mpongwe.— Genesis, part of Exodus, Proverbs, and Acts. New York, 1869. 16°.

Epistles of Paul. " 1867. 16°.

Epistles of James, Peter, John, and Jude, and the Apocalypse.

New York, 1869. 16°.

Gospel of Luke. 16c.

Ojibwa.— Gospel of John. Boston, 1838. 12°.

Acts. " 1838. 12°.

Epistles of John. " 1840. 12°.

Bible Stories. " 1835. 12°.

Hymns. " 1844. 16°.

Peep of Day. " 1844. 16°.

Siamese.— Gospel of John. Bangkok, 1849. 12°.

Life of Christ. " n. d.

History of Joseph. " 1847. 12°.

Almanac. " 1850. 18 .

Ride on the Calf. " n. d. 16°

Ancient Syriac. — Acts and Romans. Oroomiah, 1841. 8C.

Modern Svriac. — New Testament with marginal references. " 1860. 4°.

New Testament. " 1866. 4°.

Commentary on Genesis. " 1867. 8°.

Exodus. a 1869. 8°.

the Minor Prophets. «• 1861. 8°

Matthew. " 1865. 8'

Biblical Geography and Chronology. " 1 856. f°

Pastoral Theology. " 1863. 12'

Hymns. ' 1860. 12°

Sabbath School Hymn Book. " 1866. 12°.

Twelve Short Sermons. " 1845. 16°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxxvi

American Oriental Soinety :

Modern Syriac. — Doctrinal questions and answers.
The Papacy.
Proof Texts.
On Intemperance.
The ( Jreat Salvation.
Sabbath School Question book.
On the Sins and Follies of Childhood.
The Christian Sabbath.
Stoddard's Outlines of Theology.
Wayland's Moral Science.
Doddridge's Rise and Progress.
Baxter's Call to the Un< on verted.
Reformed Pastor.

Oroomiah. 184K

18:>5.

1865.
1843.
1842.
1856.
1842.
1844.
1837.
1867.
1857.
1854.
1864.
1846.
1870.
1865,
1845.
1865.

Dairyman's Daughter.

Night of Toil.

Faithful Promiser.

Helps to the Reading of the Scriptures.

The Faith of Protestants.

Confession of Faith, Hook of Discipline, and Westminster

Catechism. Oroomiah, 1862.

The Marriage Rite. " 1858.

Little Jane. " 1848.

Geography. *" 1850.

Elements of Algebra. " 1864.

Arithmetic. " 1849.

Spelling Book. " 1864.

Medical Hints. " 1863.

Questions on Mitchell's Outline Maps. '• 1859. sm.

Paradigms of the Modern Syriac Verb.
Outlines of Petsian Grammar.
Tamil.— Bible.

New Testament with references.

New Testament.

— The same.

New Testament and Psalms.

Gospels, with Luke in Hindustani.

Gospel of John in English and Tamil.

Gospel of Mark.

Proverbs of Solomon.

Bible History.

Biblical Geography.

The Bazaar Book, or Vernacular Preacher's Companion.

Pike's Persuasives to Early Piety.

Lamp of Truth. Vol. 3-5.

The Old Path. By the Rev. Ashton Dibb.

Union Prayer Meeting Hymn Book.

Geographical Primer.

Tamil Hymns and Hymns for Children.

Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress.

Daily Monitor.

Page's Introduction to Geography.

Geography.

Arithmetic.

Midwifery, adapted and translated by S. F. Green, M.D.,

Surgery, translated by Dan forth, edited by Green.

Anatomy. Physiology, and Hygiene. Madras, 1857.

Tracts. * 5 vols. v. d

Reading Book. Nellore, 1827.

Williams, Triumph of the Gospel in the South Sea Islands.

Nagercoil, 1859.

1856.

1861. si

Madras, n. d.

'• 1859.

" 1858.

•• 1864.

" i860.

" 1858.

" 1836.

n. p. n. d.

Manepy, 1837.

Jaffna, 1857.

1868.

Madras, 1865.

1853.

" 1863-65.

" 1863.

n. d.

" 1861.

Manepy and Jaffna, 1862.

" 1861.

" n. d.

1862.

" 1866.

1866.

1857.

1867.

12
12 .
16.
12 .
12 .
12 .
161.
12".

4".
12=

4.
12 .
12 .
12 .
12 .
16.
12 .
12".

12 .
12*.

8*.

8 .
12J.

8 .
12 .
12 .

4 .

16 .

I. 4C.

16 .

8'.
16 .

8\
12".
24\
12 .
24e.
24 .
24 '.

8 .

8C.
16 .

8 .
12 .

8e.

8 .
24 .
16.
32 .
24°.
24".
24 .
12:.
12 .
12 .

8 .

12*.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxvii

Tamil. — German Tunes for the Hymn-books of the Evang. Luth. Miss.

in India. Madras, 1 865.

Ceylon Almanac for 1834. Colombo, 1834. 8C.

Four Tamil books. 8° and 16".

Telugu. — Hitavddi, an Illustrated Telugu Magazine. Vol. i-iv. Mad-
ras. 1862-5. 8°.

Panchatantra or Panchopakhyana. Five Collections of Stories, with
an introductory sketch by John Garrett. Bangalore, 1864. 12°.

The Jewel Mine of Salvation, a Telugu poem with its prose

version. Madras, 1849. 16°.

Turkish.— New Testament. Constantinople, 1866. 16

Commentary on Matthew and Mark.

" " the Sermon on the Mount.

The Faith of Protestants.
Armeno-Turkish. — Psalms.

New Testament.

Analytical Concordance of the Bible.

Commentary on Matthew.

Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress.

Lives of the Prophets.

Origin of Forms and Ceremonies in the Church.

Catholicism and Protestantism compared, by C. Hamlin,

Sermons by W. Goodell

Westminster Cathechism.

Hymn Book.

Primer.

Jones's Catechism. Smyrna, 1848.

Dailies Right use of the Fathers in controversy. " 1845. 16°

Catechism. New York, 1861. 16°

Graeco-Turkish.— New Testament. Athens, 1838. 8°

Gallaudet's Child's Book on the Soul. «• 1840. 12°.

Tracts " 1839. 8°.

Zulu— Ezra, I and II Kings, Daniel. Esidumbini, 1868-9. 12°.

Gospel of John. Durban, 1860. 12°

Acts. Emsunduzi, 1859. 8°.

Romans. Port Natal, 1854. 16°.

Primer. New York, n. d. 12°,

Geography. 1862. 12°.

The Morning Star, a monthly newspaper. Vol. 1-3.

Esidumbini. 1861-3. 4°,

Hymn Book. Natal, 1864. 16°.

1860. 8°.

1863. 8°.
1868. 12°.

16°.

1858. 16°.

1857. 12°.

I860. 8°.

1864. 12p.
1854. 12°.
1857. 12°.
1860. 12\
1864. 12\
1864. 12°.
1860. 16°.
1866. 12°.

Treatise on the Principles and Practice of Criminal Law. By John D. Mayne.

2d ed. Madras, 1865. 8°.
God the object of Christian faith, the subject of Hindu speculation. By the Rev.

Ch. Egbert Kennet Madras, 1863. 8°.
Report of the Madras Diocesan Committee of the Society for the Propagation of

the Gospel in Foreign Parts, for 1862-3. Madras, 1863. 8°.
Story of the Morning Star. By Rev. Hiram Bingham, Jr. Boston, 1866. 16°.

From Rev. Rufm Anderson, D.D.

History of the Missions of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions to the Oriental Churches. By Rufus Anderson. Boston, 1872. 2 v. 8°.

From the American Philosophical Society.

Transactions of the American Philosophical Society. Vol. xiv, pt. 3, xv, pt. 1, 2.

Philadelphia, 1871-75. 4r.
Proceedings do. No. 86-100. Philad., 1871-78. 8°.
List of surviving members. 1878. 8".

VOL. X. 10*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

c\x x v iii A mtriean Oriental Society :

From the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Bibliotheca Indica. Old Series, no. 222-232, 234-6; New Series, no. 119-fO.
122, 141, 149, 167, 162-3, 168, 176-7, 179-220, 222, 224-86, 288-91. 293-S.
301-4, 308-13. 315-48, 351-7, 362-3, viz. :
The Taittiriya Sanhiti. Fasc. 25-27, 29.
The Tajttiriya Brahmana. Fasc. 23, 24.
The Taittiriya Aranyaka. Fasc. 9-11.
The Miraansa Dars'ana. Fasc. 9-12.
The Sahitya Darpana translated. Fasc. 4.
The S'rauta Sutra of As'valayana. Fasc. 11.
The Nitisara. Fasc. 4.
The Taudya Mah£brahmana. Fasc. 4-19.

Ibn Ha jar's Biographical Dictionary. Vol. i, fasc. 14, 15 ; iv, 8-10 and suppL
The Am i Akbari. Fasc. 4-16.

The Same. Translated from the original Persian by H. Blochinann. VoL L
fasc. 1-6. 8'.
The Muntakhab al-Lubdb. Fasc. 14-18.
The Badshah N£mah. Index of names of persons and geographical name?

occurring in. By Maulavi Abdur Rahim. 1 fasc.
The Alamgimamah. Index of names in, etc. By Maulawi Abudulhay. 1 Use.
The Agni Purana, a system of Hindu mythology and tradition. Edited by

Harachandra Vidyabhushana. Fasc. 1-4, 6-9.
The S'rauta Siitra of Latyayana, with the Commentary of Agniswami. Edited

by Anandachandra Vedantavagis'a. Fasc. 1-9.
The Sama' Veda Sanhiti, with the Commentary of Say ana A chary a. Edited

by Satyavrata Samas'rami. Vol. i-iv, fasc. 1.
The Chaturvarga Chintamani, by Hemadri. Edited by Pandita Bharatachandn

S'iromani. Vol. i, ii, fasc. 1-6.
The Atharvana Upani shads, with the Commentary of Narayana. Edited by

Ramamaya Tarkaratna. Fasc. 1-4.
The Chhandah Sutra of Pingala Acharya, with the Commentary of Halayudha.

Edited by Pandita Vis'vanatha S'astri. Fasc. 1, 2.
The Gobhiliya Grihya Sutra, with a commentary by the editor, Chandrakanta

Tark&ankara. Fasc. 1-4, 6.
The Nrisinha Tapani of the Atharva Veda, with the Commentary of S'ankan

Acharya. Edited by Ramamaya Tarkaratna. 3 fasc.
The Gopala Tapani of the Atharva Veda, with the Commentary of Vis'ves'vara.

Edited by Harachandra Vidyabhushana and Vis'vanatha S'astri. 1 fasc
The Gopatha Br£hmana of the Atharva Veda. Edited by Harachandra

Vidyabhushana. Fasc. 1, 2.
The Brahma Sutras, with the Commentary of S'ankaracharya, translated into

English by Rev. K. M. Banerjea. Fasc. 1.
The Katantra, with the Commentary of Durgasimha. Edited with notes and

indexes by Julius Eggeling. Fasc. 1-4.
The Prithiraja Rasau of Chand Bardai, in the original Old Hindi. PL i. fasc. 1,

edited by John Beames; pt. ii, fasc. 1, edited by Rev. A. F. Rudolf Hoerate.
The Bhamati, a gloss on S'ankara Acharya's Commentary on the Brahma Sutras

by Vachnspati Mis'ra. Edited by Pandit Bala S'astri. Fasc. 1-3.
The Aitareya Aranyaka of the Rig Veda with the Commentary of Sayana

Achirya. Edited bv Rajendralala Mitra. Fasc. 1-5.
The Taittiriya Pr&tis'akhya with the Commentary entitled the Tribhashyaratna

Edited by Rajendralala Mitra. 3 fasc.
The Maasir i Alamgiri of Muhammad Saqi Musta'idd Khan. Edited by Mau-
lawi AghA Ahmad 'Ali. Fasc. 1-6.
The Farhang i Rush id i, by Mulla* 'Abdur-Rashid, of Tattah. Edited and

annotated by Maulawf Zulfaquar 'Ali. Fasc. 1-14.
The Tabak£t-i-N£airi of Minhaj-i-Saraj. Translated from the Persian bv Major

H.G. Raverty. ' Fasc. 1-8.
The Akbanuimah by Abul Fazl i Mubarak i 'Allarui. Vol. i, fasc. 1, 2, edited by

Agha Ahmad 'Ali. Vol. i, fasc. 3-6, ii fasc. 1 . edited by Maulawi 'Abd-ur- Rahim.
The Haft Xsman or History of the Masnawi of the Persians, by the late

Maulawi Agha Ahmad 'Ali. 1 fasc.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxix

From the Asiatic Society of Japan.

'Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Japan. Vol. i — v, pt. 2. Yokohama,
1874-77. 8°*

From the Asiatic Society of Paris.

Journal Asiatique. 2* ser., t. ii — rvi ; 3e se>., t. i — xiv ; 4e se>., t. i — xvi ; 6e ser.,
t. xv, no. 3 — xx : 1e ser., t. i — xi, no. 1. (Wanting Mai — Decembre 1847, Avril
1873). Paris, 1828-78. 8°.

From the Astor Library.

Annual report of the trustees of the Astor Library. Albany, 1876. 8°.

From Mr. Gilbert Atttoood, of Boston.

I koku sho moku guai shu. [Catalogue of Chinese books]. Yedo, 1819. 6 v.
Kin dai cho jutsu moku roku. [Catalogue of modern Japanese books]. Yedo,
n. d. 5 v.

From Rev. J. G. Auer, D.D., of West Africa.

Elements of the Gedebo language. By the Rev. J. G. Auer. Stuttgart, 1870. 16°.
Barth's Bible History translated into the Gedebo language [by the Rev. J. G.

Auer]. Stuttgart, 1871. 16°.
The Book of Psalms in G'debo, translated from the Hebrew [by the Rev. J. G.

Auer].. Basel, 1872. 16°.
Primer and Reader in the Kru language. Stuttgart, 1873. 8°.
Hymns for the Church and Family in the Kru language. [By the Rev. J. G.

Auer]. Basel, 1873. 16°.

From Rev. H. N. Barnum.

Kurdish Primer. New York, 1868. 16°.

From M. Paul Bataillard.

Lee derniers travaux relatifs aux Bohemiens dans 1' Europe orientate, par Paul
Bataillard. [Extraits de la Revue Critique, 1870-71.] Paris, 1872. roy. 8°.

From the Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences.

Yerhandelingen van het Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen.

Deel xxx-xxvi. Batavia, 1863-72. 4°.
Notulen van de algemeene en Bestuurs-Vergaderingen. Deel i-xi. Batavia,

1862-73.
Catalogue der Bibliotheek, door Mr. J. A. Yan der Chijs, Bibliothecaris. Batavia,

1864. 8".
Eerete verfolg Catalogus der Bibliotheek en Catalogus der Maleische, Javaansche,

en Kawi Handschriften. Batavia, 1872. 8°
Codicum Arabicorum catalogum inchoatum a Doct. A. Friederich absolvit indici-

busque instruxit L. W. C. Van den Berg. Batavia, 1873. 8°.
Alphabetische Lijst van Land-. Zee-, Rivier-, Wind-, Storm-, en andere Kaarten

toebehoorende aan . . . Batavia, 1873. 8".
Tijdschrift voor Indische Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde. Deel xi, xiii-xxi, 2.

Batavia, 1863-74. 8°.

From Rev. W. H. Benade, of Pittsburg.

Ueber den chronologischen Werth der assyrischen K pony men und einige Beriihr-
ungspunkte mit der ae^yptischen Chronologie, von R. Lepsius. [Aus den
Abhand. d. k. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin, 1869]. Berlin, 1869. 4°.

From Robert L. Bensly, M.A.

The missing fragment of the Latin translation of the fourth book of Ezra, dis-
covered and edited with an introduction and noteB by Robert L. Bensly, M.A.
Cambridge, 1875. 4°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cl x x x A meriean Oriental Society :

From the Royal Academy of Sciences at Berlin.

Philologische und historische Abhandlungen der koniglichen Akademie der Wj?-

senbctiaften zu Berlin, 1870-76. Berlin, 1871-77. 4°.
Monatsberichte. 1871— 1877, » Jan., Feb. 1878. 1871-78. 8C.
Inhaltsverzeichniss der Abhandlungen aus den Jahrcn 1822 bis 1872. Naeh den

Klassen geordnet. Berlin, 1 873. 8°.
VerzeichnisB der Bibliothek. Berlin. 1874. 8°.

From Dr. Bhae Daji, of Bombay.

MahAbhArata with the commentary of Nflakantha. 18 books. Bombay, 1863.

obi. f°.
Bhagavata PurAna with the commentary of QridharasvAmin. 12 books. Bombay.

1860. obi. 4°.
Linga PurAna with the commentary (Jivatoshani by Ganeca. 2 books. Lithogr.

Bombay, 1857. obi. f°.
AdhyAtma RAmAyana with the commentary of RAmavarman. Lithogr. Bombay,

1857. obi.
Paficadaci with the commentary of RAmakrshna. Lithogr. Bombay. 1 863. oW.
Pratishthamayukha. Lithogr. Bombay. 1862. obi.
Sansk&rakAustubha. by Anantadeva. Lithogr. Bombay, 1861. obi.
AryAcataka by Mugdala. Lithogr. Bombay, 1860. obi.
l>ac4vatAra-khanda;praca8ti, by Hanumat. Lithogr. Bombay, 1860. obi.
CandakAucjka, by Aryakshemicvara. Lithogr. Bombay, 1860. obi.
KA^inAtha's commentary on (Jridhara's explanation of the Yedastuti. Lithogr

Bombay, 1862. obi.
SAhityasAra with commentary. Lithogr. Bombay, 1860. obi.

From the Society of Biblical Arduxology.

Transactions of the Society of Biblical Archaeology. Vol. i, pt 2 — v, pt 1.
London, 1872-76. 8°.

From Rev. H. Blodgett, D.D., of Peking. %

The New Testament translated into Mandarin by a committee of the Peking mis-
sionaries. Peking, 1872. 8°.

From Prof. Otto BohUingk.

Indische Spruche, Sanskrit und Deutsch, hrsg. von Otto Bohtlingk. 2te verm.

ud verb. Aufl. 3 Theile. St. Petersburg, 1870-73. 8°.
Zur Kritik und Erklarung verschiedener indischer Werke, von O. Bohtlingk.

[Extrait des Melanges Asiat. T. vii.] St. Petersburg, 1876. 8°.

From Professors BohUingk and Roth.

Sanskrit Worterbuch. Bearbeitet von Otto Bohtlingk und Rudolph Roth. Lief.
44-58 (Schluss). St. Petersburg, 1870-76. 4°.

From Br. E. Bretschneider.

On the study and value of Chinese botanical works. By E. Bretschneider. [Re-
printed from the Chinese Recorder and Miss. Journal, vol. iii.] Foochow,
1870-71. 8°.

From William T. Brigham, Esq.% of Boston.

Contributions of a venerable savage to the ancient- history of the Hawaiian
Islands. Translated from the French of Jules Remy by William T. Brigham.
Privately printed. Boston, 1868. 8°.

From Rev. N. Brown, D.D., of Japan.
A Japanese treatise on ancient swords. 3 pts. f°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxxi

From Prof. G. Bitider, of Bombay.

A transcript of an ancient Sanskrit MS. in the library of the Raja of Bikanir, con-
taining the PaficapatalikA, Dantyoshthavidhi, KAlAtftaprAyaccitta, Atharva-Veda
PrAticAkhya, Atharva-Veda PrAticAkhyamula. 23 ff. 6x12 in.

Grants from Valabhf, 2 pts. ; a new grant of Govinda III, R&thor; a grant of
ChhittarAjadeva, MahAmandales'vara of the Konkana. By G. Buhler. [Re-
printed from the Indian Antiquary.] Bombay. 16°.

From James Burgess, Esq., of Bombay.

The Indian Antiquary, a journal of oriental research Pt. 75-80. Bombay,
1818. 4°.

From Sir George Campbell, M.P.

Descriptive Ethnology of Beugal. Illustrated by lithographic portraits, copied
from photographs. By Edward Tuite Dalton. Calcutta, 1872. 4°.

From Rev. M. M. Carle'on, of Ambala, Northern India.

MS. of the AdhyAtma RAmAyAna. Samvat 1868= A. D. 1811. 161 ff. 6x12 in.
MS. of the Paficadaci with RAmakrshna's commentary (imperfect), ff. 88-115

(end). 6x12 in.
MS. of the Sanskrta-mafijari. ff. 1-4. 4x8 in.
Fragment of a Sanskrit MS. 8 ff. 7£x6 in.
MS. in the Bengali character. 50 ff. 12x9 in.
The SArasvati-prakriya. Lithogr. 1863. obi.
First and Second TAnkri Book. Lithogr. Mundi, 1870. 8°.
Thirty-sixth annual report of the Lodiana Mission, for 1870. Lodiana, 1871. 8°.

From Rev. C. ff. Carpenter, of Rangoon.

A revision of Dr. Wade's rules for the transliteration of foreign terms into Karen.
Rangoon, 1875. 8°.

From Mr. W. S. Chaplin, of Ibkio, Japan.

Fu tsu shin gon z5. [Treasury of general truths]. A Buddhist work in Sanskrit
and Chinese, with the Japanese pronunciation of the Sanskrit. 3 vols.

From the Royal University of Norway, at Christiania.

Univereitets Aarsberetning for 1869. Christiania, 1870. 8°.

Bidrag til Kundskab om Christianiafjordens Fauna, af Michael Sara. II, III.

Christ. 1870-73. 4°.
Die Pflanzenwelt Norwegens. Kin Beitrag zur Natur- und Culturgeschichte

Nord-Europas. , 2 Theile. Christ., 1871-75. 4°.
Quellen zur Geschichte des Taufsyrabols und der Glaubensregel, von Dr. C. P.

Caspari. III. Christ, 1875. 8°.
lie neve de Justedal et ses glaciers, par C. de Seue. Christ, 1870. 4°.
Recherches sur la chronologie egyptienne, par J. Lieblein. Christ.. 1873. 8°.
Die aegyptischen Denkmaler in St Petersburg, Helsingfors, Upsala, und Copen-
hagen, von J. Lieblein. Christ, 1873. 8°.
Bidrag til den antike Philosophies Historie, af Dr. G. V. Lyng. Christ, 1869. 8°.
Om den kyrenaiske Skole. By the same Christ , 1868. 8°.
Anaxagoras og Atomistiken, af M. J. Monrad. Christ, 1870. 8°.
Forekomster af Kise i visse Skiffere i Norge, af A. Holland. Christ, 1873. 4°.
Erstfortkomster i Sondhordland og paa Karmoen. By the same. " 1871. 8°.
On the rise of land in Scandinavia, by S. A. Sexe. Christ., 1872. 4°.
Om en i Sommeren 1869 foretagen entomologisk Reise, af H. Siebke. Christ,

1870. 8°.
Magnetiske Undersogelser foretagne i 1868 af E. A. H. Sinding. Christ, 1870. 8°.
De vigtigste Udtryk for Begreberne Herre og Fyrste i de semitiske Sprog, af E.

Blix. Kristiania, 1876. 8°.
Fortegnelser over Mynter fra Middeialderen fundne i 1866, af C. Schive. Christ.,

1869. 8°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxxxii American Oriental Society :

From Hyde Clarke, Esq., of London.

Memoir on the Comparative Grammar of Egyptian, Coptic and Ude. By Hyde

Clarke. London, 1873. 8°.
Serpent and Siva Worship in Central America, Africa, and Asia. By Hyde Clarke.

London, 1876. 8°.

From Rev. Henry N. Cobb, of MiUbrook, IT. T.
New Testament and Psalms in Ancient Syriac. New York, 1874. 18c.

From Sign. Guido Cora, of Turin.

Cosmos; Communicazioni sui progress! della geogxafla, etc. No. 1. Torino,
1873. roy. 8°.

From Henri Cordier, Esq., of Shanghai.

A Narrative of recent events in Tong-King. By Henri Cordier. Shanghai,
1875. 8°.

From the Marquis de Cromer.

La Perse et les Persans. Nasr-Eddin-Schah, le nouvel Iran et l'oquilibre asiatique,
par le Marquis de Croizier. Paris, 1873. 8C.

From Rev. J. N. Gushing.

Grammar of the Shan language. By Rev. J. N. Cushing. Rangoon, 1871. 8C.

From %frs. C. H Doll.

The precepts of Jesus the guide to peace and happiness. Compiled from the four
Gospels by Rammohun Roy, translated into Bengali and annotated by Rakha.1
Das Haldar. Calcutta, 1859. 8°.

From Prof. 0. Donner of Helsingfors.

Yergleichendes Worterbuch der flnnisch-ugrischen Sprachen, von Dr. O. Donner.

II. Helsingfors, 1876. 8°.
Lieder d^er Lappen gesammelt von Dr. 0. Donner. Helsingfors, 1876. 8e.

From the Ethnological Society, Paris.

Actes de la 8ocie*te" d'Ethnographie. No. 24-26, 29, 35. Paris, 1872-4. S\
Annuaire de la Societe d'Ethnographie. 1877. Paris, 1877. 8°.

From F. B. Forbes, Esq., of Shanghai.

China's Place in Philology ; an attempt to show that the languages of Europe
and Asia have a common origin. By Joseph Edkins. Lond. 1871. 8e.

From Prof. P. E. Foucaux, of Paris.

Le religieux chassc de la communaute. Conte bouddhique traduit du tib&ain par
P. E. Foucaux. [Exirait des Memoires de l'Athenee Oriental.] Paris, 1872. 4\

From Mme. Mary Sumner and Prof P. E. Foucaux.

Les religieuse8 bouddhistes depuis Sakya-mouni jusqu'a nos jours, {far Mme.
Mary Sumner avec une introduction par P. E. Foucaux. Paris, 1873. 12°.

From the Minister of Public Instruction of France.

Mission de Phenicie dirigee par M. Ernest Renan. Livr. 4-6. Paris, 1865-71.
4C and f°.

From William Gamble, Esq.

Bible in Chinese. Shanghai, 1864-65. 32°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. c\xxxiii

From the German Oriental Society.

Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft Bd. xxv-xxxi. Leip-
zig, 1871-77. 8°.

Register zu Bd. xi-xx, xxi-xxx. Leipzig, 1872-77. 8°.

Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht uber die morgenlaudischen Studien, 1862-1867,
von Dr. Richard Gosche. Heft I. Leipzig, 1871. 8C.

Indische Studien hrsg. von Albrecht Weber. Bd. xi-xiv. Leipzig, 1871-76. Hv.

Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes :

V, 4. Zur Sprache, Literatur und Dogmatik der Samaritaner, von Dr. Samuel
Kohn. Leipzig, 1876. 8°.

VI, 1. Chronique de Josue* le Stylite. Texte et traduction par M. Pabbe
Paulin Martin. Leipzig, 1876. 8°.

VI, 2. Paraskara's Grhyasutras hrsg. von A. F. Stenzler. Heft I. Text.

Leipzig, 1876. 8°.
VI, 3. Polemische und apologetische Literatur in arabischer Sprache von Moritz

Steinschneider. Leipzig, 1877. 8°.
Chronologie orientalischer Volker von Albtrunt, hreg. von Dr. 0. Edward Saebau.
I. Halfte. Leipzig, 1876. 4°.

From Pratdpachandra Ghosha.

Durga Puja, with notes and illustrations by Pratdpachandra Ghosha, B.A. Cal-
cutta, 1871. 12°.

From Prof. J. Gildemeister, of Bonn.

Catalogus iibrorum manu scriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca academica
Bonnensi servatorum. Adornavit Joannes Gildemeister. Bonnae, 1864-76. 4°.

From Pres. D. C. GUman, of Baltimore.

A dictionary of the Chinook Jargon or Indian trade language of the North
Pacific Coast Victoria, B. C. 8°.

From Rev. J. T. Groxey, of New York.

Arabic MS. containing an acrostic poem on the Koran, Sur. 63, v. 9-11, by Sheikh

Omaru al-Hajj, of Putah Toro. pp. 13. f°.
Catalogue and report of the India Conference Theological Seminary at Bareilly,

North-West Provinces, for 1877-78. Lucknow, 1878. 8°.
Proceedings at the second meeting of the India Sunday School Union held at

Allahabad, Dec, 1877. Lucknow, 1878. 8'.

From Prof. H. Grasemann, of Stettin.
Rig Veda ubersetzt und mit kritischen und erlauternden Anmerkungen versehen
von Hermann Grassmann. Leipzig, 1876-77. 2 v. 8°.

From Rev. 0. U. Gtdick, of Japan.
Gospel of Mark in Japanese, n. p. n. d.

Shing ti ling ch'ien. A Chinese treatise on divination, with forms of prayer,
n. p., n. d.

From Rev. Charles R. Hale, of Baltimore.

Occasional papers of the Russo-Greek Committee. New Series. No. 1. 2 ; viz :
Report of the joint committee on communication with the Russo-Greek Church.
A list of all the sees and bishops of the Holy Orthodox Church of the East,

translated and compiled from Russian official documents by the Rev. Charles

R. Hale. 1872. 8°.

From Rev, Andrew P. JSapper, of Canton.

Shang-ti. Pt 1. Is the Shang-ti of the Chinese classics the same being as Jeho-
vah of the Sacred Scriptures ? Pt 2. What being is designated by Shang-ti in
the Chinese classics and in the ritual of the state religion of China? By
Inquirer. Shanghai, 1877. 8°.

An essay on the proper rendering of the words Ehhim and Theos into the Chinese
language. By Inquirer. Shanghai, 1877. 8°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxxxiv American Oriental Society:

From Rev. J. M. Haswell.
Grammatical notes and vocabulary of the Peguan language. By Rev. J. M. Has-
well. Rangoon, 1874. 8°.

From Ptof. 0. A. Holmboc, of Ckristiania, Norway.
Twelve archaeological essays, extracts from the Christiania Vidensk.-Selsk. For-
handlinger 1869-74, viz: Norske Vaegtlodder fra I4de Aarh. — Ibn Fozlan
om nordiske Begravelsesskikke. — En Guldbracteat-Praeg. — Om Naever i nor-
diske Gravhoie. — En buddhistisk Legende. — Det chinesiske Shakspil. — Et lidet
Fund af Mynter fra lite Aarh. — Om Veegten af nogle Smykker. — Asaland.
II. — Hexe og Dakini. — Guldmynten fra Aak. — En Maade at betegne Tal paa,
som er i Brug blandt Handelsmsend i Arabien og Persien.

From Mr. H. A. Homes, of Albany, K. T.
The Alchemy of Happiness, by Mohammed Ai-Ghazzali. Translated from the
Turkish by Henry A. Homes. Albany, 1873. 8°.

From Mr. Fisher Howe, of Brooklyn, K. T.
The true site of Calvary and suggestions relating to the Resurrection. By Fisher
Howe. New York [1871]. 8.

From Her Majesty's Secretary of State for India.
Rig-Veda-Sanhita, The sacred hymns of the Brahmans, with the Commentary of

Sayanacharya. Edited by F. Max Muller. Vol v, vi. London, 1872-74. 8°.

The same, translated and explained by F. Max Muller. Vol. L Hymns to

the Maruts, or the storm gods. London, 1869. 8°.
Grammar of the Rong (Lepcha) language as it exists in the Darjeling and Sikioi

hills. By Col. G. B. Mainwaring. Calcutta, 1876. 4\
The Adi Granth, or the Holy Scriptures of the Sikhs, translated from the original

Gurmukht, with introductory Essays, by Dr. Ernest Trumpp. London, 1877.

roy. 8°.
Grammar of the Sindhi language, compared with the Sanskrit Pracrit and the

cognate Indian vernaculars, by Dr. Ernest Trumpp. London and Leipzig. 1871

roy. 8°.
Archaeological Survey of India. Reports 1862-73. Vol. i-v. By Alexander

Cunningham. Simla and Calcutta, 1871-75. 8°.
The book of Arda Viraf. The Panlavi text prepared by Destur Hoshangji

Jamaspji Asa, revised and collated with further MSS., with an English transla-
tion and introduction, with an appendix, etc., by Martin Haug, Ph.D., assisted

by E. W. West, Ph.D. Bombay, 1872. 2 v. 8°.
Dictionary of the Bengalee language. By W. Carey. 2d ed. Serampore, 1825.

2v. 4°.
Grammar of the Carnatica language. By John McKerrelL Madras, 1820. 4 .
A Dictionary, Telugu and English, English and Telugu. By Charles Philip Brown.

Madras, J852. 2 v. roy. 8°.
Dictionary of the Puklito, Puslito, or language of the Afghans, with remarks on

the originality of the language and its affinity to other Oriental languages. By

Major H. G. Raverty. 2d ed. London, 1867. 4°.
The Gulshan-i-Roh, being selections, prose and poetical, in the Puslito or Afghan

language. Edited by Major H. G. Raverty. 2d ed. London. 1867.
Hindu law, principally with reference to such portions of it as concern the

administration of justice in the King's Courts in India. By Sir Thomas

Strange. Lond., 1830. 2 v. 8°.
The Laghu Kaumudi, a Sanskrit grammar by Varadaraja, with a version, commen-
tary, and references by James R. Ballantyne, LL.D. Rendered into Hindi by

B6bti Mathuri Pras&la Mis'ra. Benares, 1856. 8°.
A vocabulary Ooriya and English for the use of students. By Mohunpersand

Takoor. Serampore, 1811. 8°.
The Aphorisms of the Nyaya philosophy by Gautama, with illustrative extracts

from the commentary. In Sanskrit and English. [By J. R. Ballantyne].

Books i, ii. Allahabad, 1850-53. 8°.
The Aphorisms of the Vais'eshika philosophy of KanAda. Mirzapore, 1851. 8 .
The Aphorisms of the Vedauta philosophy, by Badarayana. Mirzapore, 1851. a .

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additiom to the Library and Cabinet. cfxxxv

The Aphorisms of the Yoga philosophy of Pantanjali. Allahabad, 1852. 8°.
The BhashA Parichheda and its commentary, with an English version [by J. R.

BaDantyne]. Calcutta, 1851. 8°.
A lecture on the Vedanta, embracing the text of the Vedanta Sara Allahabad,

1860. 8°.
The wars of the Rajas, being the history of Anantapurnam. [In Telugu].

Madras, 1863. 8°.
Comparative vocabulary of the Banna. Malayu, and T'hii languages. Serampore,

1810. 8°.
Dialogues in Telugu and English, with a grammatical analysis. [By Charles

Philip Brown.] 2d ed Madras, 1863. 8°.
Rajneeti ; or Tales exhibiting the moral doctrines and the civil and military policy

of the Hindoos. Translated from the original Sanskrit of Narayun Pundit into

Brij Bhasha by Sree Lulloo Lai Kub. Calcutta, 182*7. 8°.

From the Italian Oriental Society.

Annuario della Societa Italians per gli Studj OrientalL Anno primo, 1872.
Roma, 1873. 8°.

From Karunkalam Krishna Josiar.

The Grahanadarpanan. A treatise on eclipses illustrated with predictions con-
cerning the solar eclipse 18 Aug. 1868. By Karunkulam Krishna Josiar.
Madras, 1868. 8°.

From Rev. S. H. Kellogg, of Pittsburg, Pa.

Grammar of the Hindi language, in which are treated the Standard Hindi, Braj,
and the Eastern Hindi of Ramayan of Tulsi Das, also the colloquial dialects of
Marwar, Kumaon, Avadh, Baghelkhand, Bhojpur, etc. ; with copious philologi-
cal notes. By Rev. S. H. Kellogg. Allahabad, 1876. 8°.

From M. Nicolas de Khanikof of St. Petersbwrgh.

Sur remplacement de la ville d'Artacoana, par M. de Khanikol [Extrait du
Journal Asiatique, 1875.] Paris, 1875. 8°.

From the University of Kiel

Schriften der Universitat zu Kiel. Bd. xvii-xxi, xxiii. Kiel, 1871-77. 4°.
Die Einweihung dee neuen Universitats-Gebaudes zu Kiel, 24-26 Oktober, 1876,
von Dr. Friedrich Volbehr. Kiel, 1876. 8°.

From Rev. M. J. Knowlton, of Ningpo, China.

Two lectures, on ancient Christian missions in China and on the rivers of China,
delivered before the Ningpo Book Club, by Rev. M. J. Knowlton. 1869. 8°.

From Prof. Ludolf Krehl, of Leipsic.

Beitrage zur Charakteristik der Lehre vom Glauben im Islam, von Ludolf Krehl
Leipzig, 1877. 8°.

From Prof. Adalbert Kuhn, of Berlin.

Zeitschrift fur vergleichende Sprachforschung. Bd. xx, 2— xxiv, 2. Berlin, 1871-77.

Gesammtregister zu Bd. xi-xx. Berlin, 1874. 8°.

Beitrage zur vergleichendon Sprachforschung. Bd. vii, viii. Berlin, 1871-76. 8°.

From Mr. B. Labaree, Jr.

The Mizan ul Haqq, or Balance of Truth, by the Rev. C. G. Pfander. Translated
into English by the Rev. R. H. Weakley. Lond., 1 867. 8°.

From Prof. F. Lasinio, of Pisa.

II oommento medio di Averroe alia poetica di Aristotele, per la prima volta pubbli-
cato in Arabo ed in Ebraico e recato in Italiano da Fausto Lasinio. Parte I, II.
Pisa, 1872. 4°.

VOL. X. 11*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

elxxifvi American Oriental Society :

From Prof. C. Lassen, of Bonn.

Indische Alterthumskunde, von Christian Lassen. 2te verm, und verb. Aufiage.
Bd. ii. Leipzig, 1874. 8\

From M. Charles le Mansois du Prey.

Le Congres des orientalistes. Ce qu'est aujourd'hui le rdle important qu'il
peut etre appele a jouer dans l'inttrdt du commerce francais. Par M. C.
le Mansois du Prey. Saint- Etienne, 1875. 8°.

From M. Ernest Leroux, of Paris.

Vindiciee Sinicse novae. No. 1. J.-P. Abel Remusat defendu contre les imputa-
tions mensongeres de M. Stanislas Julien, par G. Pauthier. Paris, 1872. 8°.

Langues, raceB, nationality par A. Hovelacque. Paris, n. d. 8°.

Revue Bibliographique de Philologie et d'Histoire. Recueil mensuel publiee par
la librairie Ernest Leroux. Nos. 6-20. Paris, 1874-5. 8°.

Revue de Philologie et d'Ethnographie, publiee par Ch. E. de Ujfalvy. Tome i,
Oct.-Dec., 1874. Paris. 8°.

From the Philological Society of London.

Transactions of the Philological Society, 1 865—1875-6, pt. 1. London, 1865-75. 8*.
On Early English pronunciation, with especial reference to Shakspere and Chaucer.

By Alexander J. Ellis. Pt. i-iii, London, 1869-72. 8\
Medieval Greek texts, being a collection of the earliest compositions in vulgar

Greek, prior to the year 1500. Edited by W. Wagner. Pt. i. London, 1870. 8\

From Prof B. S. Lyman, of Japan.

Hokkaido chi Bhitsu soku riyo ho bun. (Report of the Geological Survey of
Yezo). Tokio, 1873. 8°.

From D. B. McCartee, M.I)., of China.

Translation of an inscription commemorating the repairs on the Ch'eng Hwang
Miau. 8°.

From Rev. Thomas McClatchic, of Hongkong.

Confucian cosmogony. A translation of section forty-nine of the complete works of
the philosopher Choo-Foo-Tze, with explanatory notes. By the Rev. Thomas
McClatchie. Shanghai, 1874. 8°.

From Rev. R. S. Maclay and Rev. C. C. Baldwin of Fuhchau.

An alphabetic dictionary of the Chinese language in the Foochow dialect By
Rev. R. S. Maclay and Rev. C. C. Baldwin. Foochow, 1870. 8°.

From M. E. Madier de Montjau.

De immigration des Chinois au point de vue des interdts Europeans, par E.
Madier de Montjau. Paris, 1873. 8°.

From the Public Free Libraries of Manchester, Eng.

Twenty-fourth annual report to the council of the city of Manchester on the
working of the Public Free Libraries, 1875-76. Manchester, 1876. 8°.

From Mrs. Eleanor Mason, of Tonngoo.

Dr. Mason's last days. By Mrs. Eleanor Mason. Rangoon, 1874. 8\

Dr. and Mrs. Mason's land leases in Toungoo. By the same. " 1874. 8°.

A song of the famine. By the same. " 1874. 8*.

First difficulties in studying Pali, etc. By Francis Mason, D.D. " 1875. 8\

From Rev. Robert Cotton Mather, LL.D.

The New Testament in Romanized Hindustani, with a commentary by Rev
Robert Cotton Mather. London, 1876. 8°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxxvii

From the Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences.

Bulletin of the Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences, with the reports of com-
mittees, address of the president, list of officers and committees for 1874
Minneapolis, 1874. S\

From Rev. W. J. P. Morrison, of Ambala, India.

Divan i Anwari Persian MS. ft. 432, 10}x5} in.
Almanac in the Tankri dialect. 8°.

From John Muir, Esq., D.C.L., of Edinburgh.

Original Sanskrit Texts. Collected, translated and illustrated by J. Muir.
Vol ii. Inquiry whether the Hindus are of Trans-Himalayan origin, and akin

to the Western branches of the Indo-European race. 2d ed. revised. London,

1871. 8°.
Vol. iv. Comparison of the Vedic with the later representations of the principal

Indian deities. 2d ed. revised. London, 1873. 8°.

From the Royal Bavarian Academy at Munich.

Abhandlungen der historischen Classe der kdniglich bayerischen Akademie der

Wissenschaften. Bd. xi, 2 — xiii, 2. Munchen, 1869-77. 4°.
Abhandlungen der philosophisch-philologischen Classe. Bd. xii, 2 — xiv, i. Mun-
chen, 1870-77. 4°.
Almanach fur 1875. Munchen, [1876]. 8°.
Ueber den religidsen Charakter des griechischen Mythos. Festrede von Dr.

Conrad Bursian. Munchen, 1875. 4°.
Rede zur Vorfeier des Geburtsfestes des Konigs Ludwig II, von J. v. Dollinger.

Munchen, 1873. 4°.
Gedachtniss-Rede auf Konig Johann von Sachsen. By the same. Munchen,

1874. 4°.
Ueber Deutschlands Weltstellung. Rede von Franz v. Loher. Munchen, 1874. 8°.
Philosophic und Theologie des Averroes. Aus dem Arabischen ubersetzt von M.

J. Muller. Munchen, 1875. 4°.
Gedachtnissrede auf Friedrich Adolph Trendelenburg, von Dr. Karl v. Prantl.

Munchen, 1873. 4°.
Verstehen und Beurtheilen. By the same. Munchen, 1877. 4°.
Ueber den Inhalt der allgemeinen Bildung zur Zeit der Scholastik. Festrede von

Dr. Freiherrn R. v. Liliencron. Munchen, 1876, 4°.
Einleitung in das Studium der arabischen Grammatiker. Die AjrOmiyyah des

Muh'ammad bin DaQd. Arabischer Text mit Uebersetzung und Erlauterungen

von Ernst Trumpp. Munchen, 1876. 8°.
Nanak, der Stifter der Sikh-Religion. Festrede von Dr. Ernst Trumpp. Munchen,

1876. 4°.

From F. W. Newman, Esq., of London.

Dictionary of the Modern Arabic. By F. W. Newman. London, 1871. 2 v. 8°.

From the Commissioners of New South Wales at the Philadelphia Exhibition.

An Essay on New South Wales, the mother colony of the Australian By G. H.
Reid. Sydney, 1876. 8°.

From (he North- China Branch of (he Royal Asiatic Society.

Journal of the North-China Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society for 1871 and

1872. New Series, no. vii. Shanghai, 1873. 8".
Catalogue of the library, systematically classed. By Henri Cordier. Shanghai,

1872. 8°.

From the Oregon Pioneer Association.

Constitution and quotations from the register of the Oregon Pioneer Association
together with the annual address, 1874. Salem, Oregon, 1875. 8°.

Transactions of the third and fourth annual reunions, 1875, 1876. Salem,
1876-77. 8°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

clxuviii American Oriental Society :

From the Oriental Athenaeum, Paris.

Bulletin de l'Atheuee Oriental : Revue orientate, 2« se>., t ii. Paris, 1869-70. 8'-

From the Society of Japanese Studies, Paris.

Annuaire de la Societe* des fitudee Japonaises, Chinoisea, Tartares et Indo-Ghinoi-
aes. l^annee, 1873. Paris, 1874. 8\

From M. K. P. Patcanian.

On the names of the ancient Armenian months. [In Russian]. By K. P. Patca-
nian. St Petersburg, 1871. 8°.

Magakia's Mongolian history. [In Armenian]. Edited by KL P. Patcanian.
St. Petersburg. 1870. 8°.

The same, in Russian. Translated and annotated by K. P. Patcanian. St

Petersburg, 1871. 8U.

From M. Alphonse L. Pinart, of Paris.

Bibliotheque de linguistique et d'ethnographie americaines publico par Alph. L.
Pinart:
Vol. II. Dictionnaire de la langue Dene-Dindjie* dialectes Montagnais on
Chippewayan, Peau de Iievre et Loucheux, precede d'une monographic des
Dene-Dindjie^, d'une grammaire et des tableaux synoptiques des conjiigaiaons,
par le P. E. Petitot Paris, 1876. 4r.
Vol. III. Vocabulaire Francais-Esquimau. dialecte des Tchiglit dea boucheg
du Mackenzie et de l' Anderson, precede d'une monographic de oette tribn
et des notes grammaticales, par le R. P. E. Petitot Paris, 1876. 8\
Bible history and catechism in the Kodiak Aleut dialect. St Petersburg, 1847. 8°.
Gospel of Matthew in the Kodiak Aleut dialect St Petersburg, 1848. 8°.

From Mr. James Pincerle.
II Cantico dei Cantici di Salomone per la prima volta tradotto dal teste Italiano in
front© nell' idioma Zingaresco. Studio di James Pincerle. Trieste, 1875. 8\

From Prof. A. F. Pott, of Halle.

Wurzel-Worterbuch der indogermanischen Sprachen, von A. F. Pott. Bd. iii-T.

Detmold, 1871-73. 8°.
Ueber die Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues, von W. v. Humboldt

Mit erlauternden Anmerkungen und Excursen sowie als Einleitung : Wilhelm

von Humboldt und die Sprachwissenschaft, von A. F. Pott. Berlin, 1876. 2 v

8°.

From Rev. A. T. Pratt, M.D., of Constantinople.

Grammar of the Osmanli language in the Armenian character. By Andrew T.

Pratt Constantinople, 1868. 12°.

The same. MS. English translation.

Etudes sur les Tchinghianes ou Bohemiens de Pempire ottoman, par Alexandre

G. Paspati. Constantinople, 1870, roy. 8\
Cutter's School Physiology in Armeno-Turkish. Constantinople, 1868. 12°.

From BdM Rdjenaraldla Mitra, of Calcutta.

Notices of Sansknt MSS., by R&jendralala Mitra. No. iii— xiL Calcutta, 1871-

1877. 8°.
A descriptive catalogue of the Sanskrit MSS. in the library of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal. Edited by RajendraJAla Mitra, LL.D. Calcutta, 1877. 8°.

From Charles Rice, MD., of New York.

The Gulistan and Bostan of Sa'dl Persian MS. ff. 71 + 103. 8 x 4f in.
The Dfvan of Hafiz. Persian MS. ff. 168. 7 x 5 in.

Philonis Judaei sermones tres hactenus inediti ex Armena version© tranalati per
P. J. B. Ancher. [In Armenian and Latin]. Venetiis, 1822. 4C.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. clxxxix

From Prof. Leon de Bosny, of Paris.

Trattato sulT educazione dei bachi da seta al Giappone, di Sira-Kava di Sendai(Osyu),

tradotto dal giapponese in franchese da Leone de Roany. Vereione Italiana di

Felice Franceschini. Milano, 18*70.
A Grammar of the Chinese language, par Leon de Bosny. London, 1 874, pp.

1-48. 8°.
Teztes Chinois anciens et modernes traduita par Leon de Bosny. Parp, 1874. 8°.
Tai-kau ki. Histoire populaire de Taikau Sama, traduite du japonais, par Leon de

Roany. [Extrait du compte-rendu des travaux du Congres provincial des

Orieotalistes]. Paris, 1875. 8°.
Fa-taien. " Les billets doux," poeme cantonnais du viiie des Tsai-taze modernes.

Fragments traduita en Francais par Leon de Bosny. [Extrait de l'Annuaire

de la Socidte* des Etudes Japonaises.] Paris, 1876. 8°.

From Rev. E. Riggs, D.D.y oj Constantinople.

Bible in Bulgarian, translated by Bev. K. Biggs, D.D. Constantinople, 1871. roy. 8°.
Suggested emendations of the authorized English version of the Old Testament
By E. Riggs. Andover, 1873. 12°.

From the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. New Series.
Vol. v, pt 2— ix. London, 1871-77. 8°.

From the Royal Saxon Society of Sciences.

Abhandlungen der philologisch-historischen Classe der kdniglich sftchsischen

Akademie der Wissenschaften. Bd. vi, vii, 1-4. Leipzig.
Berichte fiber die Verhandlungeu. Bd. xxii-xxvii, i. Leipzig, 1870-76. 8°.
Preisschriften gekront und herausgegeben vor der furstlich Jablonowski'schen

Gesell8chaft zu Leipzig :

XVII. Die polnische Geschichtschreibung des Mittelaltera, von H. Zeiasberg.
Leipzig, 1873. 4°.

XVIII. Ueber den Zusammenhang des lettoslavischen und germanischen
Sprachstammes, von Dr. B. Hassencamp. Leipzig, 1876. 4°.

XIX. Die Declination im Slavisch-litauischen und Germanischen, von A.
Leskien. Leipzig, 1876. 4°.

From the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg.

Memoires de l'Academie Imp&iale des Sciences de St. Petarsbourg. Tome xvi —
xxiv, 3. St Peterebourg, 1870-77. 4°.

Bulletin. T. xv, 3— xxiv, 3 (wanting xxii, 3). St Peterebourg, 1870-77. 4°.

Tableau g6ne>al m&hodique et alphab6tique des matieres contenues dans les pub-
lications de FAcademie depuis sa fondation. lre partie. Publications en langues
dtrangeres. St. Peterebourg, 1872. 8°.

From Prof. E E. Salisbury, of New Haven.

Kurmanji Kurdish primer, by the Harpoot missionaries. New York, 1 868. 16°.
Elements de la grammaire turque, par L. Dubeux. Paris, 1856. 12°.

From Rev. W. G. Schauffler, D.D., of New York.

The Pentateuch in Osmanli Turkish. Translated by Bev. W. G. Schauffler. 1877.

8C.
Isaiah, translated by the same. 1876. 8°.

From Bp. S. I. J. Schereschewshy, D.D., of China.

The Old Testament in the Mandarin Colloquial, translated from the Hebrew by
the Bev. 8. I. J. Schereschewsky, D.D. Peking, 1875. 8°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxc American Oriental Society :

From Mr. Victor Schhgd.

Hermann Grassmann, sein Leben und seine Werke, von Victor Sehlegel. Leipzig.
1878. 8".

From Dr. Schmidt, of Gevdsberg.

Unser Sonnenkorper nach seiner physikalischen, sprachlichen und mythologiscbeii
Seite hin betrachtet, von Dr. Schmidt. Lemgo. 1876. 4°.

From Baron Schwarz-Senborn.

Beitrage zur Entwickelung und Reform des Quarantainewesena, von Dr. GobbL
Wien, 1849 8\

From Prof. G. Seyjfarth, of New York.

Uebersicht neuer Entdeckungen in der bibliRchcn Zeitrechnung, allgemeinec

Weltgeschichte und aegyptischen Alterthumskunde, von G. Sejffarth. Xew

York, 1857. 12°.
Chronology of the Roman Emperors from Caesar to Titus, with reference to the

New Testament. By G. Seyffarth. 1872. 8°.
Corrections of the present theory of the moon's motions according to the classic

eclipses. [From Trans, of the St. Louis Acad, of Sci., VoL iiL] 1877. 8 .

From the Smithsonian Institution.
Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge. Vol. xviii-xxi. Washington, 1873-

76. 4°.

Miscellaneous Collections. VoL x-xii. Washington, 1873-74. 8 .

Annual Report, 1858-60, 1863-76. Washington, 1859-77. 8C.

The Empire of Brazil at the Universal Exhibition of 1876 in Philadelphia. Rio

de Janeiro, 1876. 8°.

From Prof. A. Socin of Basel
Die Aechtheit der moabitischen Alterthumer gepruft von Prof. E. Kautzsch und
Prof. A. Socin. Strassburg, 1876. 8°.

From Mr. E. G. Squier, of New York.
Journal of the Anthropological Institute of New York. Vol. I, no. 1. New
York, 1871-2. 8°.

From Prof. A. F. Stenzler, of Brtslau.

Meghaduta ; der Wolkenbote. Gedicht von KaMidasa, mit kritischen Anmerkun-
gen und Worterbuch herausg. von A. R Stenzler. Breslau, 1874. 8".

From Mr. Richard Sullivan, of Boston.

Photographic copy of the Tanis trilingual inscription, together with the negative
plate of the same.

From Sourindro Mahun Tagore, President of the Bengal Musical School Calcutta.

Sangita-sara-sangraha. By Sourindro Mohun Tagore. Calcutta, 1875. 8°.
Yantra Kosha, or a treasury of the musical instruments of Ancient and Modern

India. By the same. Calcutta, 1875. 8°.
Hindu music from various authors. Pt. i. By the same. Calcutta, 1875. 8°.
Victoria-Gitika, or Sanskrit verses celebrating the deeds and the virtues of Queen

Victoria and her renowned predecessors. By the same. Calcutta, 1875. 8.
Fifty stanzas in Sanskrita in honor of H. R. H. the Prince of Wales. By the

same. Calcutta, 1875. 8°.
English verses set to Hindu music in honor of H. R. H. the Prince of Wales.

By the same. Calcutta, 1875. 8°.

From M. Garcin de Tossy, of Paris.
Allegories, recits poetiques et chants populaires, traduits de l'arabe, du persan,
de l'hindoustani et du turc, par M. Garcin de Tassy. 2« 6&. Paris, 1876. 8\
La langue et la litterature hindoustanies en 1870-72, 1 874-77. Paris, 187 1-78. 8\

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. cxci

From Mr. F. Tempsky, of Prague.
"Der Rig Veda, oder die heiligen Hymnen dor Brahmana zum ereten maJe volls-
tandig ins Deutsche iibersetzt mit Com men tar und Einleitung, von Alfred
Ludwig. Prag, 1876. 2 v. 8°.

From Rev. D. W. Thomas, of Bareilly, India.

True and False Miracles. By D. W. Thomas. [In Hindi]. 1871 8°.

From Prof. C. J. Tbrnberg, of Lund.

Ibn-el-Athiri Chronicon. Ed. C. J. Tornberg. Vol. v, vi, xiii, supplementum
ad vol. xi et xii. Lugd. Bat, 1871-14. 8".

From Rev. T. C. Trowbridge, of Aintab, Turkey.

Occasional papers in regard to Turkey. By T. C. Trowbridge. New York,
1874. 8°.

From N. TrvJbner, Esq., of London.

Essays on the languages, literature, and religion of Nepal and Tibet. By B. H.

Hodgson. London, 1874. 8°.
Sutta Nipata ; or Dialogues and discourses of Gotama Buddha, translated from

the Pali, with notes and introduction by Sir M. Coomara Swamy. London,

1874. 8°.

From M. F. TurreUini, of Geneva.
Heike Monogatari. Recite de 1'histoire du Japon au xiie siecle traduits du Jap-
onais par F. Turrettini. 1 re partie. Geneve, 1871. 4°.

From the Imperial Academy of Sciences of Vienna.

Sitzuogsberichte der kais. Akademie der Wissonschaften. Philosophisch-his-

torische Classe. Bd. lxiii-lxxxvii. Wien, 1869-77. 8°.
Register zu Bd. lxi-lxx. Wien, 1872. 8°.
Register zu Bd. i-lxx. Wien, 1874. 8°.

From the Anthropological Society of Vienna.

Mittheilungen der Anthropologischen Gesellschaft in Wien. Bd. I, no. 5-14, VI,
no. 1-5. Wien, 1870-76. 8°.

From the Geographical Society of Vienna.

Mittheilungen der k. k. geographischen Gesellschaft in Wien. Bd. xiii-xix. Wien,

1870-76. 8°.

From M.leC^de Vogue.
Stele de Tehawmelek, roi de Gebal. Communication faite a l'Academie des

Inscriptions et Belles- Lettres par le C** de Vogiie\ Paris, 1875. 4°.

From the Bureau of Education at Washington,

Report of the Commissioner of Education, 1872-76. Washington, 1873-78. 8°.
Circular of Information of the Bureau of Education. Nov., 1872; 1873, no. 2-6 ;

1874, no. 1 ; 1875, no. 1, 2. Washington, 1872-75. 8°.
Public libraries in the United States of America ; their history, condition and

management. Special Report. Washington, 1876. 2 pts. 8°.

From Rev. J. W. Waugh, D.D. of Lucknow, India.

Pilgrim's Progress in Hindui. 2d ed. 1861. 8°.
Book of Psalms in Hindustani, lithogr. 1864. 8°.
Poems of Haflz, in Persian, lithogr. 8°.
Gulistan of Sa'df in Persian, lithogr. roy. 8\
Arabian Nights' Entertainments, lithogr. f °.
Native Persian dictionary, lithogr. Lucknow, 1849.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

cxcii American Oriented Society:

From Prof. AUbrecht Weber, of Berlin.
Ueber ein zum Weissen Yajus gehoriges phonetisches Compendium, das Prati-

Jn&sutra, von A. Weber. [Aus d. Abhand. d. Berl. Akad., 1871. J Berlin,

1812. 4°.
Einige Daten uber das Schachspiel nach indischen Quellen, von A. Weber.

[Aus d. Monatsber. d. Berl. Akad. 1872]. Berlin, 1872. 8*.

From Prof. W. D. Whitney.

A concise dictionary of the Persian language. By K. H. Palmer. London, 1876.

sq. 8°. *

Om de indiske Eejserhuse og nogle seldre Fyrstestegter, af N. L. Westergaard.

Avec un resume francais. Kjobenhavn, 1867. 4°.
The tenses of the Assyrian verb. By A. H. Sayce. [From the Jour, of the Boy.

Asiat. 8oc.t 1877). 8°.

From Prof. W. D. Whitney and Prof R E. Salisbury.

Six MS8. of the Taittiriya-PraticAkhya, being those used by Prof. Whitney in his
edition, and described in Jour, of the Amer. Orient. Soc. voL ix, pp. 1-2, viz:
MS8. T, W, B, 0, G, and M.

From Prof S. Wetis Williams, of New Haven.

The Chinese Commercial Guide, containing treaties, tariffs, regulations, tables, etc.,

useful in the trade to China and Eastern Asia ; with an appendix of sailing

directions for those seas and coasts. By S. Wells Williams, LL.D. 5th ed.

Hongkong, 1863. 8°.
Code of Bugis maritime laws, with a translation and vocabulary. Singapore,

1832. 18 .
Bugis tracts, by C. Thomson. Singapore. 8°.
Edict against the promulgation of Christianity by the Government of Corea in

1839. [In Chinese and Corean.] f°.
The speculations on metaphysics, polity, morality of " the old philosopher " Lau-

Tsze, translated from the Chinese with an introduction by John Chalmers.

London, 1868. 8°.

From the Wisconsin Academy of Arts, Sciences and Letters.

Transactions of the Wisconsin Academy of Arts, Sciences and Letters, 1870-72.
Madison. 8°.

From the Worcester Society of Antiquity.

Proceedings of the Worcester Society of Antiquity, from its institution Jan. 24,
1875 to March 6, 1876, together with the constitution and by-laws and certificate
of incorporation. Worcester, Mass., 1877. 8°.

From unknown donors.

Bible History in Albanian, in the Roman character. Constantinople, 1870. 8*.
Catechism " " " " 1867. 16°.

Primer " Greek, u n. p., n. d. 16".

New Testament in Rumanian. Bucharest, 1868. 8°.
Gospel of Matthew in the Turkish of Azerbeijian. [Leipzig, 1872.] 8°.
Makhzan i Masihi, or Christian Treasury. Hindustani monthly periodical. VoL

i-iv. Allahabad. 1868-71. 8°.
PustakAn&m Suctpatram. n. p. n d. 8°.
Pheharicta Sanskrtaka PustakonkA. n. p. n. d. 8°.
List of Sanskrit works supposed by the Nepaleso Pundits to be rare in the

Nepalese libraries at Khatmandoo. Nepal Residency. 1868. 8°.
Chung wai shin wen ch'i jih lu. [Home and foreign Chinese weekly newspaper.]

Canton, 1865. 54 nos. roy. 8°.
Tyndall on Sound, translated into Chinese by J. Fryer. 2 vols. [Shanghai, n. <L]
The Phenix, a monthly magazine for China, Japan and Eastern Asia. Edited by

Rev. John Summers. No. 1, July, 1870. London. 4°.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Additions to the Library and Cabinet. cxciii

Notes and Queries on China and Japan. Edited by N. B. Dennys. Vol. iii, no.
3, March, 1869. Hongkong. 8\

Kwang-yin Hn ch'ien. [Chinese treatise on divination for the use of the worship-
ers of Kwang-yin]. n. p. 1857. 8.

The Syrian Protestant College. Beirut, n d. 16°.

Catalogue of the Syrian Protestant College for 1875-6. [In Arabic.]. Beirut.
1876. 12°.

The famine in Asia Minor; its history compiled from the pages of the "Levant
Herald," with a preface by the editor. Constantinople, 1875. 8°.

Rapport sur les sepultures gallo-romaines du Havre. Le Havre, 1870. 8r.

Second report of the Garo department of the Amer. Bapt. Miss, to Assam, to
Oct. 1872. Calcutta. 8°.

Correspondenz-Blatt der deutschen Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, Ethnologie
und Urgeschichte. No. 1-5, Mai-Sept. 1870. Braunschweig. 4°.

Catalogue of the collection of General Cesnola. n. p. n. d. 8".

Tyndall on Sound. Translated into Chinese by J. Fryer. 2 vols. [Shanghai, n. d.]

By Exchange.

II libro del Cohelet volgarmente detto Ecclesiaste tradotto dal testo Ebraico con

introduzione e note di David Costelli. Pisa, 1866. 8 \
Leggende Talmudiche. Saggio di traduzione dal testo originate con prefazione

critica di David Costelli. I*isa, 1 869. 8°.

From M. Alphonse L. Pinart, of Paris.

A model of an Alaskan kaynk, or skin boat.

From Rev. Geo. T. Washburn.

Six pieces of pottery, drinking cups and supports, from the cromlechs and c.»irns
of the Madura district, Southern India.

VOL. X. 12*

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

CXCIV

Aiiteri'-an Oriental Society .

List of Members.
Jily, 1878.

1. CORPORATE MEMBERS.

Namra marked with t are those or Life Member*.

Prof. Ezra Abbot,
Prof. Felix Adler.
Prof. Charles A. Aikkn,
Prof. Frink E. Anderson,
Rev. Joseph Anderson,
Rov. Rufus Anderson,
Prof. William P. Atkinson,
Gilbert Attwood,
Prof. John Avery,

fJoHN W. Barrow,
Prof. Elijah P. Barrows,
John R.'Bartlett,
Rev. William II. Benadb,
Erastus B. Bigelow,
Prof. Ferdinand Bother,
J. Carson Brevoort,
Prof. Fisk P. Brewer,
Rev. Charles H. Brigham,
Prof. John A. Broadur,
Elihu Burritt,
Pros. William H. Campbell,
Prof. Franklin Carter,
Rev. Talbot W. Chambers,
Prof. Pliny E. Chase,
Pres. Thomas Chase,
Prof. Fbancis J. Child,
Rev. Edson L. Clark,
Rev. Nathaniel G. Clark,
Rev. Henry N. Cobb,
Prof. Edward B. Coe,
Joshua Coit,
Alexander I. Cotheal,
Brinton Coxe,
Rev. Oliver Crank,
Chanc. Howard Crosby,

{Edward Cunningham,
Prea. Edwin A. Dalrymple,
Prof. George E. Day,
Prof. Henry N. Day,

Cambridge.

New York.

Princeton, N. J.

Cambridge.

Waterbury, Conn.

Boston.

Boston.

Boston.

Brunswick, Me.

New York.

Oterlin, O.

Providence, R. I.

Pittsburg, Pa.

Boston.

Cambridge.

Brooklyn, N. Y.

Grinnell, Iowa.

Ann Arbor. Mich.

Louisville, Ky.

New Britain, Conn.

New Brunswick, N. J.

New Haven.

New York.

Philadelphia.

West Haverford, Pa.

Cambridge.

North Branford, Conn.

Boston.

Millbrook, N. Y.

New Haven.

New Haven.

New York.

Philadelphia.

Morristown, N. J.

New York.

Milton, Mass.

Baltimore.

New Haven.

New Haven.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

List of Members.

cxcv

John W. Deforest,
Rev. James T. Dickinson,
Prof. John L. Diman,
Dr. George L. Ditson,
Epes S. Dixwell,

f George B. Dixwell,
Prof. Henry Drisler,
Samuel F. Dunlap,
Prof. Timothy D wight,
Prof. Morton W. Easton,
A. Hjalmar Edgren,
Prof. Arthur M. Elliott,
Prof. Charles Elliott,
Ralph W. Emerson,

f Willi am Endicott,
Rev. George R. Entler,
Prof. E. P. Evans,
Prof. Charles C. Everett,
Prof. William Everett,
Richard S. Fellowes,
Rev. Henry Ferguson,
Prof. George P. Fisher,

f Frank B. Forbes,

fJoHN M. Forbes,
Prof. William C. Fowler,
Prof. J. N. Fradenburgh,
Prof. Frederic Gardiner,
Pres. Daniel C. Gilman,
Rev. Edward W. Gilman,
Prof. William W. Goodwin,
Prof. Ezra P. Gould,
Rev. John T. Gracey,
Prof. W. Henry Green,
Prof. James B. Greenough,
Rev. William E. Griffis,
Rev. Lewis Grout,
Prof. Ephraim W. Gurnet,
Prof. Arnold Guyot,
Prof. S. Stehman Haldeman,
Rev. Charles R. Hale,

fProf. Fitz- Edward Hall,
Prof. Isaac H. Hall,
Prof. Samuel Hart,
Willabe Haskell,
Samuel F. Haven,

f John Heard,
Rev. Edgar L. Heehmanck,
Michel Heilprin,
Thomas W. Higginson,

New Haven.
Middlefield, Conn.
Providence, R. I.
Albany, N. Y.
Cambridge, Mass.
Boston.
New York.
New York.
New Haven.
Knoxviile, Tenn.
New Haven.
Baltimore, Md.
Chicago. 111.
Concord, Mass.
New York.
Franklin. N. Y.
London.
Cambridge.
Cambridge.
New Haven.
Exeter, N. H.
New Haven.
Shanghai, China.
Boston.

Durham Centre, Conn.
Mansfield, Pa.
Middle town, Conn.
Baltimore.
New York.
Cambridge.
Newton Centre.
New York.
Princeton, N. J.
Cambridge.
Schenectady, N. Y.
West Brattleboro', Vt.
Cambridge.
Princeton, N. J.
Chickies, Pa.
Baltimore, Md.
Marlesford, England.
Philadelphia, Pa.
Hartford, Conn.
New Haven.
Worcester, Mass.
Boston.

White Plains, N. Y.
New York.
Newport, R. I.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

CXCV1

.1 meiican Oriental Society :

Rev. Thomas Hill,
Thomas Hitchcock,
Prof. C. Wistah Hodge,
Henry A. Homes,
Prof. James M. Hoppin,
Rev. Nicholas Hoppin,
Joseph Howland,
Annie K. Humphrey,
Rev. William Hctchison,
Rev. William Irvin,
Rev. A. S. Isaacs,
Rev. Henry F. Jenks,
Rev. Joseph Jenks,

fProf. Joseph W. Jenks,
Rev. Samuel Johnson,
Rev. Samuel H. Kellogg,
Henry 0. Kinosley,
William L. Kinosley,
Prof. Charles R. Lanman,
Prof. J. E. Latimer,

t Henry Leighton,

f James Lenox,
Prof. J. Peter Lesley,
Charles G. Lorino,
Prof. James R. Lowell,
Jules Luquiens,
Prof. Benjamin 3. Lyman,
Prof. James H. McCurdy,
Rev. Dwight W. Marsh,
Prof. Charles M. Mead,
Rev. Selah Merrill,
Prof. Alexander Meyrowitz,
Rev. Orlando D. Miller,
Prof. James C. Moffat,
Prof. Thomas C. Murray,
William W. Newell,
Prof. Charles B. Norton,
Prof. Andrew Oliver,

fROBERT M. OLYPHANT,

Prof. Howard Osgood,
Prof. Charles P. Otis,
Prof. Lewis R. Packard,
Prof. William A. Packard,
Rev. J. A. Paine,
Nathaniel Paine,
Rev. Timothy 0. Paine,
Dr. Peter Parker,
Prof. Theophilus Parsons,

Portland, Me.
New York.
PrincetoD, N. J.
Albany, N. Y.
New Haven.
Cambridge.
Fishkill, N. Y.
Washington, D. C.
Norwich, Conn.
Troy, N. Y.
New York.
Boston.

Newton ville, Mass.
Newtonville, Mass.
Salem, Mass.
Allegany, Pa.
New Haven.
New Haven.
Baltimore, Md.
Boston.

Shanghai, China,
New York.
Philadelphia.
Boston.
Cambridge.
Boston.
Japan.

Princeton, N. J.
North Amherst, Mass.
Andover, Mass.
Andover, Mass.
Columbia, Mo.
Nashua, N. H.
Princeton, N. J.
Baltimore.
New York.
Cambridge.
New York.
New York.
Rochester, N. Y.
Boston.
New Haven.
Princeton, N. J.
Albany, N. Y.
Worcester, Mass.
Elmwood, Mass.
Washington, D. 0.
Cambridge.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

List of Members.

cxcvn

Prof. Andrew P. Pbabody,

fGRBGOBT A. PERDICARIS,

Dr. Charles Rice,
Rev. Thomas H. Rich,
Joseph S. Ropes,
Charles T. Russell,
Julius Sachs,

fProf. Edward B. Salisbury,
Hon. Stephen Salisbury,
Frank B. Sanborn,

Prof. M. SCHELE DE VERB,

Dr. H. Ernest Sghmid,
Rev. Henry M. Scuddbr,
J. Herbert Senter,
Prof. Gustav Seyffarth,
Rev. John H. Shedd,
Prof. Charles Short,
Prof. William J. M. Sloane,

fE. M. Smith,
Prof. Henry P. Smith,

fTHOMAS C. Smith,
Prof. Frederick Stengel,
Prof. Austin Sticknby,
Rev. Lyman Stilson,

fWlLLIAM W. Stone,

f Russell Sturgis,
Richard Sullivan,

fGEOROE W. Talbot,
Rev. Milton S. Terry,
Prof. Thomas A. Thacher,
Prof. J. Henry Thayer,
Rev. Joseph P. Thompson,
Dr. William H. Thomson,
Prof. Crawford H. Toy,
Charles Tracy,
J. Hammond Trumbull,
Rev. Kinsley Twining,

fj. F Twombly.
Arthur W. Tyler,
Addison Van Name,

fDr. T. T. Van der Hobven,

fTHOMAS Walsh,
Rev. Ferdinand DeW. Ward,
Susan H. Ward,
Rev. W. Hayes Ward,
Pros. William F. Warren,
Rev. Edward Webb,
Rev. Richard F. Weidner.

Cambridge.
Trenton, N. J.
New York.
Lewiston, Me.
Boston.
Cambridge.
New York.
New Haven.
Worcester, Mass.
Concord, Mass.
University of Virginia.
White Plains, N. Y.
Brooklyn, N. Y.
Cincinnati, 0.
Yorkville, N. Y.
Charlotte, N. C.
New York.
Princeton, N. J.
Shanghai, China.
Cincinnati, 0.
Shanghai, China.
New York.
New York.
Nunda, N. Y.
New York.
London, England.
Boston.
New York.
New York.
New Haven.
Andover, Mass.
Berlin,
New York.
Louisville, Ky.
New York.
Hartford. Conn.
New Haven.
Shanghai, China.
Baltimore, Md.
New Haven.
San Antonio, Texas.
Yokohama, Japan.
Geneseo. N. Y.
New York.
New York.
Boston.
Glasgow, DeL
> Phillipsburg, Md.

Digitized by

Google

CXCV111

j. 1 merican Oriental Society :

Charles E. West,
John Westall,
Pres. Andrew D. White,
Prof. John W. White,
Dr Moses 0. White,
Prof. Josiau D. Whitney,
Prof. William D. Whitney,
Rev. Joseph K. Wight,
Prof. Alonzo Williams,
Prof. S. Wells Williams,
Lyman R. Williston,
Prof. Samuel J. Wilson,
Pros. Theodore D. Woolsey,
Rev. John Wright,
Prof. Edward J. Young,

Brooklyn, N. Y.

Fall River, Mass.

Ithaca, N. Y.

Cambridge.

New Haven.

Cambridge.

New Haven.

New Hamburgh, N. Y.

Providence, R. I.

New Haven.

Cambridge.

Allegheny City, Pa.

New Haven.

South Boston, Mass.

Cambridge.

t CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Prof. Graziadio I. Asrou,
Rev. C. C. Baldwin,
Prof. Adolf Bastian,
Rev. Cephas Bennett,
Otto Blau,
Rev. Daniel Bliss,
Rev. Henry Blodget,
Rev. Nathan Brown,
Rev. Samuel R. Brown,
Prof. Heinrich Brugsch,
Prof. George Buhler,
Rev. Alonzo Bunker,
Rev. Albert Bushnell,
Rev. M. M. ('arleton,
Rev. William Clark,
Hyde Clarke,
Prof. Edward B. Co well,
Rev. Charles H. A. Dall,
Prof. August Dillmann,
Prof. D. Stuart Dodge,
Rev. Jacob L. Doehnb,
Rev. Joseph Edkins,

Milan.

Missionary at Foochow, China.

Berlin.

Missionary at Rangoon, Burmah.

Odessa, Russia.

Beirut, Syria.

Missionary at Peking, China.

Missionary at Yokohama, Japan.

Missionary at Yokohama, Japan.

Gottingen.

Bombay.

Missionary at Toungoo, Farther India.

Nassau, N. Y.

Missionary at Ambala, India

Newbury, Vt.

London.

Cambridge. England.

Missionary at Calcutta.

Berlin.

Beirut, S}*ria.

Missionary in South Africa.

Missionary at Peking, China.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

JAst of Members.

cxeix

Prof. Philippe Kd. Foucaux,

Dr. S. Fraenkel,

Rev. John T. Gulick,

Rev. Cyrus Hamlin,

Dr. J. C. Hepburn,

Prof. Christ.an A. Holmboe,

Dr. Samuel R. House,

Rev. Henry H. Jessup, D.D.,

Prof. Mirza Kasbm Beg,

Nicholas von Khanikopp,

L. Leon de Rosny,

Rev. Albert L. Long,

Kev. R. S. Maclay,

Dr. Daniel J. McGowan,

Pres. William A. P. Martin,

Dr. D. B. McCartee,

Dr. A. D. Mordtmann,

Dr. A. (J. Paspati,

Alphonse Pin art,

Rajendralala Mitra,

James W. Rbdhouse,

Rev. Elias Riggs,

Dr. (}. Rosen,

Rev. William G. Schauffler,

Rev. S. I. J. SCHERESCHEW8KY,

Rev. William W. Scudder,

Henry Stevens,

Rev. Edward W. Syle,

Rev. William M. Thomson,

Dr. Cornelius V. A. Van Dyck,

Rev. Henry J. Van Lexnep,

Rev. Daniel Vrooman,

Rev. William Walker,

Rev. George T. Washburn,

Rev. James W. Waugh,

Prof. Guotav Weil,

Rev. George W. Wood,

Paris.

Jerusalem.

Missionary at Robe, Japan.

Bangor, Me.

Missionary at Yokohama, Japan.

Christiania, Norway.

Waterfard, N. Y.

Missionary at Beirut Syria.

St. Petersburg.

Paris.

Paris.

Missionary at Constantinople.

Missionary at Yokohama, Japan.

Shanghai, China.

Peking.

Yedo, Japan.

Constantinople.

Constantinople.

Marquise, France.

Calcutta.

London.

Missionary at Constantinople.

Belgrade, Servia.

New York.

Missionary at Shanghai, China.

Missionary in Southern India.

London.

Yokohama, Japan.

Missionary at Beirut, Syria.

Missionary at Beirut, Syria. *

Great Barrington, Mass.

Canton, China.

Milton, Wise.

Missionary at Pasumalai, S. India.

Missionary at Cawnpore, India.

Heidelberg.

Missionary at Constantinople.

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

CO

American Oriental Society.

3. HONORARY MEMBERS.

Raja Apurva Krishna Bahadur,

Calcutta.

Prof. Theodor Benpey,

Gottingen.

Jambs Bird,

London.

Prof. Otto Bobhtlingk,

Jena.

Arthur C. Burnell,

Madras.

Richard Clarke,

London.

Prof. Bbbthold Delbruck,

Jena.

M. Champollion Figbac,

Paris.

Prof. Heikrich Leberscht Fleischer,

Leipzig.

Brian Houghton Hodgson,

Alderley Grange, England

Prof. Adalbert Kuhn,

Berlin.

Rev. John Dun more Lang.

Prof. C. Richard Lepsius,

Berlin.

John Muir,

Edinburgh.

Prof. Max Mueller,

Otford.

Prof. Thbodob Noldekb,

Strassburg.

Prof. Julius H bin rich I>eteriiann,

Berlin.

Prof. August Friedrich Pott,

Halle.

Adolphe Regnier,

Paris.

Prof. Ernest Renan,

Paris.

Prof. Rudolf Roth,

Tubingen.

Safvbt Pasha,

Constantinople.

Prof. Friedrich Spiegel,

ErUngen.

Prof. Garcin db Tassy,

Paris.

Prof. Carl J. Tobnberg,

Lund.

Prof. Albrbcht Weber,

Berlin.

Sir J. Gardner Wilkinson,

Ijondon.

Prof. William Wright,

Cambridge.

- *

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

1

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC

This book should be returned to
the Library on or before the last date
stamped below.

A fine of five cents a day is incurred
by retaining it beyond the specified
time.

Please return promptly.

Digitized by VjOOQIC

Digitized by VjOOQ IC